JP6481116B2 - Game console - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

  In pachinko and other game machines, the game area of the game board is provided with an obstacle that changes in the direction of the falling of the game balls, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. It is common. When the game ball wins a prize, a bonus is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 etc.).

  In addition, in such a game stand, one equipped with rendering means is known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the rendering means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game console characterized by rendering means.

The game console of the present invention which solves the above object is
It is a game stand provided with a presentation means,
When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the first notification effect may be started,
The first notification effect may be executed during the execution of the big hit game,
While the big hit game is being performed, a second notification effect may be executed,
The time when the second notification effect is executed is a time later than the time when the first notification effect started during the execution of the big hit game is completed,
The second informing effect is not an informing effect performed subsequent to the first informing effect, but
The first informing effect is an effect notifying that the player is determined to be given a certain benefit,
The second notification effect is an effect notifying that the player is determined to be granted the certain benefit,
The aspect of the first informing effect and the aspect of the second informing effect are different aspects,
A mini game may be executed while the big hit game is being performed,
A display showing the remaining time limit in the mini game is displayed,
The mini-game is the first of notification effect even in the case where a certain mission until the time limit after it has been initiated has elapsed has been achieved Ru is started,
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by the effect means.

It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) shows the decorative symbol An example is shown and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for 1st drawing and 2nd drawing. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for yes-no decision. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for special figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part main processing, (b) is the 1st sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of 1st secondary control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) is the 2nd sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing, (d) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part image control processing. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st structural example of the rendering apparatus 206, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd structural example of the rendering apparatus 206. FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 in stages. It is a figure which shows sequentially the example of an effect shown in FIG. 17 in steps. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of an effect shown in FIG. It is a figure showing an example of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production which used the chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the aspect of a change of the remaining time display meter in button production. It is a figure showing the other example of button production in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. (A) is a flowchart of processing at power-on of the main control unit, (b) is a flowchart of return activation processing, and (c) is a flowchart of initial activation processing. It is a flowchart of main control part main loop processing. It is a flowchart of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of a special drawing related lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart of a special drawing per lottery process. It is a flowchart of a process during symbol variation. It is a flowchart of special figure display decision weight processing. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start weight process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special electric power officer release process. It is a flow chart of a special electric wire operating process. It is a flowchart of a special electric power person control process. (A) is a figure explaining the content of a special electric power combination operation pattern data table, (b) is a figure explaining the content of a special electric power combination operation data table. It is a flow chart of a special-effects player residual ball detection process. It is a flowchart of a special electric power combination operation end process. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed with the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the option menu screen in the state which is not using member service. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume control window, and a brightness control window from a demonstration screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 66. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of a model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a model customization screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation which used the fluctuation | variation icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change production | presentation of the pending | holding icon by the navigation character YM, and the change production | generation of a fluctuation icon. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 78 and modified examples. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which a pending | holding frame becomes invisible temporarily. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation which several navi characters YM appear in the presentation icon display area DIS. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a modification etc. shown in FIG. 81. An example of an effect in which an effect of a button hold icon is associated with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which has a period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example which has another period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is an example in which a maximum of eight pending icons are displayed. The example of an effect which entangled the decorative symbol of a common figure on the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example in which a change advance notice display is on standby display. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation using the holding frame different from the holding frame demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the example in which icon I1 of the treasure box used as an icon of a change alerting | reporting alert | reporting until now appears as a pending | holding icon. An example of an effect in which a meter effect is involved in the navigation character YM is shown. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a modification of the example described using FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing still another modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 91. An example of an effect in which a telop effect is involved in the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the presentation apparatus 206 shown in FIG.14 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the other production which tangled navi character YM by the production | presentation apparatus 206 shown in FIG.14 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the further another effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the effect apparatus 206 shown in FIG.14 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the presentation apparatus 206 by which the 2nd display apparatus was provided under the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 (1st display apparatus). It is a figure which shows an example in case other presentation is performed during execution of the presentation selected by the player. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 99. It is the table | surface which put together about the music which can be output from the speaker 120. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the music selection demonstrated using FIG. 101 is performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation by the presentation apparatus 206 shown in FIG.14 (b). FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104. It is a figure which shows the example in which the holding frame which the player selected is changed. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 106. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine set to setting in auto button mode. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 108. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the overlap relation of the display of the bulb | ball removal notification alert | reported by generation | occurrence | production of a counter-full tank error, and the other display of each of the brightness adjustment window BW. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of ball removal alerting | reporting. It is a figure which shows the example by which several types of error displays are displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the delivery control part 600 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is a figure showing various notice icons and various notice displays. It is a figure which shows the icon for mini games. It is a figure which shows a pending | holding icon and a fluctuation icon. FIG. 17 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which a notice icon is stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed by using the stock notice icon and the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of an effect shown in FIG. 120 in steps, and a figure which shows the modification of the example of an effect. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing third to sixth modified examples of the effect example of FIG. 120 (a1) to FIG. 121 (a40). FIG. 120 shows seventh to tenth modified examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 120 (1) to 121 (40). FIG. 120 is a diagram showing another modified example of the effect example of FIG. 120 (A1) to FIG. 121 (A40). A plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed by using a plurality of stock notice icons, and the display mode of the change icon changes in stages. FIG. 125 shows a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 125 and an effect example of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition advance notice. FIG. It is a figure showing in a stepwise manner the continuation of the example of a production of the mini game A of the advance notice of Yoshimune treasure acquisition. FIG. 126 is a view showing the middle of the first to third modified examples of the effect example of FIG. 126 (1) to FIG. 127 (38). FIG. 126 (a) is a view showing a continuation of the third modified example of the effect example of FIG. 126 (c) to FIG. 127 (c) and a halfway of the fourth modified example to the fifth modified example. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the continuation of the fifth modification example of the effect example of FIG. 126 (FIG. 126) to FIG. 127 (FIG. 38) and the effect example where the stocked advance notice icon YI is promoted. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a production | presentation which the notice icon YI stocked promotes, and the modification of the example of a production | presentation. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in which notice display YH of a button appears from notice icon YI in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which the frequency | count of execution of a button effect is stocked in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of an effect in which the frequency | count of execution of a button effect is stocked, and the other example of an effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | presentation in which the notice display YH discharge | released from the notice icon YI is known before discharge. It is a figure showing gradually an example of a production which uses one notice icon making stock in multiple times. It is a figure which shows the continuation and the example of other production | presentation of the example in which the same kind of notice display YH is discharge | released multiple times from the same notice icon YI stocked. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI have been posted. It is a figure which shows the example in which the notice icon YI is used in multiple times in the state which the notice display YH discharge | released from the notice icon YI is known before discharge | release. FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects and the like that are continued from FIG. 139. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are placed. It is a figure showing the example of the roulette effect for notice icon stock in steps. It is a figure which shows the other production | presentation using roulette RLT for preliminary | backup icon stock, and the example of a production | presentation with button operation. It is a figure which shows the example which the display mode of prior | preceding icon YI of a "button" changes according to button operation, and the other example. It is a figure which shows the example which displays the example of a presentation which continues from FIG. 144, and the same advance notice icon in a several aspect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect by the structure by which the display means is arrange | positioned under the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect using the 2nd decorative symbol display apparatus 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display apparatus 208N. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the effect example using the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 119 (b) step by step. FIG. 148 is a view showing a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a view showing a modified example of the effect example and the like shown in FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a view showing a modified example of the effect example and the like shown in FIG. 148. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of a reservation icon is performed, and the example of other production. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the icon change advance display itself is promoted while failing to be promoted halfway along a plurality of changes. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which the display itself of an icon change prior | preceding is promoted via meter presentation, and the other presentation example. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119 (b) and another rendering example. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which combined the display of a certain kind of pending icon and the icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the other example of presentation using the icon of a bomber type | system | group as a display of an icon change prior | preceding. It is a figure which shows the example etc. of the various advance regarding the display of an icon change advance. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L and another display means. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect using the 2nd decorative symbol display apparatus 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display apparatus 208N. It is a figure roughly showing seven examples of production in which various icons and displays are used. It is the figure which showed one example of the presentation which used the chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed one example of the presentation which used the chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed gradually an example of the display start aspect of the display MTY during a chance up meter preparation. It is the figure which showed gradually an example of the display start aspect of the display MTY during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the display MTY during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows a mode that chance up meter production is performed during super reach production. It is a figure which shows a mode that another pattern of chance up meter production performed during super reach production is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of the change production of the display mode of the display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure explaining another pattern of change production of a display mode of a display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure explaining another pattern of change production of a display mode of a display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows a mode that a chance up meter ranks up during production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the chance up meter which ranked up. It is a figure explaining another pattern of rank up of a chance up meter. It is a figure which shows a mode that the chance up-meter preparation display MTY in which the rank up was carried out is displayed in the display aspect continued to rank up, even if it switches to the chance up meter CMT. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | presentation which warns that a chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure which shows the other example of presentation which announces that a chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in which a chance up notice is performed in the checkpoint which is not shown in a chance up meter. It is the figure shown gradually about another example of presentation using a chance up meter. It is a figure shown about another pattern of the presentation which used the chance up meter. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing another effect pattern of effects using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183. It is the figure which showed gradually an example of the pre-reading advance notice which used the opportunity up meter preparation indication. It is a figure explaining another display pattern of a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the presentation example of the chance up meter performed in another super reach. It is a figure explaining the modification of the presentation by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining another presentation pattern of presentation by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining an example of production by a chance up meter performed in a definite change state. It is a figure explaining the example which gives notice of the production | presentation by a chance up meter by display apparatuses other than a decorative symbol display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect using the 2nd decorative symbol display apparatus 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display apparatus 208N. It shows the correspondence between the display mode (color) of the effect display in the effect device 206 and the notation used in the present specification and the drawings, and (a) shows the correspondence with the display color in the decorative symbol display device 208. (B) is the correspondence with the light emission color in the light emitting means such as a full color LED. It is the figure which showed one example of the presentation which used the chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed the example of an effect performed in this embodiment in steps. It is the figure which showed one example of timer announcement production in steps. It is the figure which showed the example of an effect performed in this embodiment in steps. It is the figure which showed the example of an effect performed in this embodiment in steps. It is the figure which showed the example of an effect performed in this embodiment in steps. It is the figure which showed the other production pattern of timer announcement production in steps. It is the figure which showed the example of an effect performed in this embodiment in steps. It is the figure which showed one example of the presentation which used the chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed the example of an effect performed in this embodiment in steps. It is the figure which showed one example of timer announcement production in steps. It is the figure which showed one example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 208 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 207. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 237 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 239 is a view showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 239 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually about another display example of timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 246 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 246 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 249 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 249 in stages. FIG. 250 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 250 step by step. FIG. 250 is a diagram showing the example of the effect following FIG. 250 (24) step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 253 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 253; It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 255 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in FIG. 257. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 260 step by step. FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect shown in FIG. FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect shown in FIG. FIG. 263 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 263 in stages. FIG. 253 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect shown in FIG. FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect shown in FIG. It is a figure showing the continuation of an example of an effect shown in Drawing 266 in a step-by-step manner. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 268 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in Drawings 268-269. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 270 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in FIG. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 273 is a view illustrating the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 273 in a step-by-step manner. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in Drawing 273-Drawing 274. As shown in FIG. FIG. 275 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 275 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in Drawings 275-276. FIG. 278 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 277 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 279 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 279 in stages. FIG. 279 is a diagram progressively showing another example of the effect following FIG. 279 (18). FIG. 279 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 279 through FIG. 280. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 285 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 in stages. FIG. 286 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 286 in stages. It is a figure shown about an example of an effect in a big hit game performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure showing gradually about an example of a display when an error display is displayed in timer advance production performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a timer advance notice display. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the notice effect during preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the notice effect during preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows gradually the example of a display in tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of timer notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of button continuous hitting production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production by the explanation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 309 is a diagram stepwise illustrating another example of the effects shown in FIG. 309. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 312 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 312. It is a figure showing gradually another example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the false continuation production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of button notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of expansion production of a reservation display frame. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 325 in stages. It is a figure showing the continuation of an example of an effect shown in Drawing 326 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 328 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 328 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 330 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 330 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing the continuation of an example of an effect shown in Drawing 332 in a step-by-step manner. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 335 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 335 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 337 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 337 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 339 is a view showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 339 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 341 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 345 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 345 step by step. It is a figure showing gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing the continuation of an example of an effect shown in Drawing 347 in steps. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 349 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 352 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 352 in a step-by-step manner. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 355 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 355 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of a reservation notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 358 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 358 step by step. It is a figure showing gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360 step by step. It is a figure showing gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually about another production pattern of button timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about another production pattern of button timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about another production pattern of button timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about another production pattern of button timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about another production pattern of button timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about an effect pattern in which a mini game is performed in button timer notice effect. It is a figure showing gradually about another production pattern of button timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about another production pattern of button timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about another production pattern of button timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about another production pattern of button timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about another production pattern of button timer notice production. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the change display of the decoration symbol performed in this embodiment, and (a) is a timing chart explaining the flow of the change display of the decoration symbol which becomes out of reach without becoming a reach state. (B) is a timing chart explaining the flow of the change display of the decorative symbol which becomes a big hit or a lose after reaching the reach state. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice production. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 52 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 21 is a view showing a game console according to a modification of the present invention, in which (a) shows a supporting machine 2000, and (b) shows a portable telephone 3000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. , (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) comprises a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention A home video game console 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.

<Overall configuration>
First, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIG. 1. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console which allows the player to earn a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the outer frame 102, the main body 104, the front frame door 106, the door 108 with a ball storage tray, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker from which a low frequency sound is output) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it is electrically connected (the main frame 104 and the outer frame 102). A pair of floating connectors are provided, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are in a connected state); Become.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (game arcade) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor (inner frame opening sensor) for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided. ing.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the game shop can open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 109 is also provided to detect that the front frame door 106 is opened. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a high sound speaker outputting high sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. It is done. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, a light source that is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, etc. may be referred to as a lamp if it emits light. It corresponds to

The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pushing an unillustrated opening lever which can be operated in a state where the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, you may provide the door with a ball storage plate which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate was opened. The door with ball storage tray 108 is provided with a door-side ball passage unit capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and guiding the gaming balls to the launcher 110. The upper tray 126, the lower tray 128 for storing gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 126, and the ball extraction button 130 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 126 by the operation of the player to the lower tray 128 The ball discharging lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation of the player, and the game guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player A ball emission handle 134 for launching a ball into the game area 124 of the game board and an effect button 136 (chance button 136) for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player. , A chance button lamp 138 which is incorporated in the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and causes the effect button 136 (chance button 136) to emit light, and a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade A ball lending operation button 140 to be performed, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit; Equipped with In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower bowl full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full by the game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In this operation key unit 137, the up and down keys of the up and down keys and the left and right keys of the left and right keys are arranged as the cross key, and the decision key is arranged at the center of the cross key. There is. In addition, a cancel key is also disposed below and to the right of the cross key. The pachinko machine 100 does not have the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and the upper plate 126, the lower plate 128, the ball extraction button 130, the ball ejection lever 132, the ball emission handle 134, the chance button 136, the chance button on the front frame door 106. All or a part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the bottom plate full detection sensor and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.
The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include the door 108 with a ball storage plate) is in an open state with respect to the main body 104 If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, rendering means (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122 and the chance) provided on the front frame door 106 Button lamp 138. Including the effect movable body when the front frame door 106 is provided with the effect movable body), display of the ball rental display unit, chance button 136, ball rental operation button 140, return operation button 142 and The operation of the operation key unit 137 and the detection of the bottom plate full detection sensor can be performed.
Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply substrate case 184 containing the power supply substrate 182 constituting the power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102 and the front frame door 106 (with ball storage plate The door 108 may be included, and the game board 200 is configured to be supplied with a power supply voltage from the main body 104.

The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launcher. In addition, it may be provided with a right-handed button which can maximize the emission intensity by being depressed in a state where the ball emission handle 134 is operated. The ball release handle 134 is a release stop switch (not shown) for disabling the release (injection) of the game ball by the operation of the ball release handle 134 and the player touching the ball release handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting In addition, it may be provided with a right-handed button which can maximize the emission intensity by being depressed in a state where the ball emission handle 134 is operated. In addition, when the touch sensor detects that the ball shooting handle 134 has been operated from the unoperated state while the demonstration screen is displayed, a dedicated effect may be performed. . For example, effect display by display means, effect sound by sound output means, and light emission effects by various decoration LEDs and light guide plates, effect movable bodies (provided on a game board or a frame) may be mentioned. An effect may be performed by four types of effect means, and may be performed by one or more effect means. Moreover, even if it is a production | presentation means of the same kind, there may be a production | presentation means which performs exclusive production | presentation, and a production | presentation means which is not performed. (For example, the effect movable body of the frame performs exclusive effect, but the effect movable body of the game board does not perform dedicated effect, the effect movable body A of the game board performs dedicated effect, but the effect movable body B of the game board There is no dedicated presentation, etc. This example is also applicable to other presentation means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 positioned on the right side in a rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is provided on the main body 104, is detachable from the main body 104, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub substrate case 162 for storing a first sub substrate 160 constituting a first sub control unit 400 (refer to FIG. 4) which performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 The second sub substrate case 166 for housing the second sub substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls 4) and a release board case 172 for storing a release board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk; A launch substrate case 176 for housing a launch substrate 174 constituting a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric gaming devices A power supply substrate case 184 housing a power supply substrate 182 having a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. And, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided. The main board case 158 containing the main board 156, the first sub board case 162 containing the first sub board 160, and the second sub board case 166 containing the second sub board 164 are the game board 200. A discharge substrate case 172 containing a discharge substrate 170 provided with an error release switch 168, a launch substrate case 176 containing a launch substrate 174, a power supply switch 178, and a RAM clear switch 180 are provided. A power supply substrate case 184 for housing the substrate 182 and a CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In the following, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "common figure", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the mode, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure for a special figure variation game). The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (lottery process etc.) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off. Although this symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a short time state (power support state), and a positive change state, and a state with special view positive change and It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, although the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206 ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 2) is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as the winning balls onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special drawing start opening 232 is disposed below the first special drawing start opening 230. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In addition, in this embodiment, although two 1st special figure starting ports 230 and 2nd special figure starting ports 232 are provided, three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting openings, two first special drawing starting openings may be provided and one second special drawing starting opening may be provided. Conversely, one first special drawing starting opening is provided. It is provided, and two 2nd special figure starting ports may be provided. In addition, when there is only one special view display device, the three starting ports may be configured to correspond to the same special view display device. Moreover, four or more starting openings may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from either one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the face. On the other hand, the open state is the predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. In the closed state, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed, a state in which the game ball is slightly open to a substantially impossible level may be used. In addition, the variable winning opening may be any winning combination of game balls due to passage or entry of game balls, etc., and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, the other variable winning opening is always closed while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open. However, both variable winning openings may be open. Also, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with the strength according to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the shooting rod 146 and the shooting rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach. The game board may be provided with an out sensor. Out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensor of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234), a game that has passed the sensor of the starting opening (first special view starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232) It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a game ball that has entered the ball and the out port. The sensor may be configured to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball riding up by the game nail 238, etc. The passed ball enters the first special view starting opening 230 at the center of the stage 244. There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to hit the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  Decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the rendering means, and among them, the decorative symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec seal 290 representing the specs of the game stand is attached at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control section 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing, and a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit assumes that two counters are built in) Is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 a is received. Although the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and lower dish full tank sensors. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special display device 212 or the first 2) A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special view display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, various status display units 328 (for example, Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the general drawing holding lamp 216, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, the high probability middle lamp 222, etc., and Moving members, for example, drive means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special view starting port 232 as a normal electric part, drive means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric part, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including the above. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value corresponds to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in value storage register. Also, even when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special view start opening 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special view start opening 232 The latched and latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal plate (not shown). The game information (for example, a game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 with which etc. is provided.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured such that the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Furthermore, although the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, it is configured such that signals such as commands can not be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. It is also good.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Further, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 detects depression of various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, etc., various effects buttons 136 (chance button 136), and various buttons that constitute the operation key unit 137. A detection signal from button sensor 426 is output to basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and the CPU 504. The image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 is read based on the signal from the VDP 518, and a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 518 to display the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 performs payout ball information indicating that payout of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been performed and payout of a predetermined number (for example, 25) of balls It outputs to the information input circuit 350 through the external terminal board which does not illustrate the rental ball information etc. which show that. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 which drives the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 which feeds the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, the power control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the ball is inserted into special drawing 2 starting opening 232 A special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor which is a ball | bowl detection sensor detected that it was having a ball. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "the variation display of the special figure 1" (special figure Play the fluctuation game). Also, when the special figure 2 change game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment, "the variation display of the special figure 2" ( Perform special feature variation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 As the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this “variable display of special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special view 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special view. The variable display of this special drawing may be performed several times continuously.

  FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special view 1. In FIG. 5 (a), nine types of special drawings, "special drawing A" to "special drawing I", are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and it is a 15R definite variation big hit symbol that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit symbol There is a real 5R probability variation big hit design that can not be expected to get out balls in the remaining rounds, while "Can be expected to get out balls in 5 of 15 rounds," "Special figure C" is a 15R big hit symbol Yes, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that you can expect to get out balls in all the 15 of the 15 rounds, and the "special figure D" is the 15R big hit symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is real 8R-RUB which can not expect the acquisition of the balls in the remaining rounds while the acquisition of the balls can be expected in the two rounds, and the "special figure E" is the pattern of the 15R big hit, 15 In the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that can not expect to get out balls, while "special figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol. Fig. G "is a 2R big hit symbol, and is a 2R positive variation hit symbol called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation which can not be expected to be obtained in any round in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that makes it difficult for the player to identify to the player how many rounds that can be expected to be won at the start of the jackpot, and the specific round (for example, five rounds). It is a big hit which is directed in a manner of asking the player whether or not the round which can be expected to be won will continue when the eyes and the ninth round are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not the special big hit is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between a normal big hit and a definite change big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (probably big hit) or low (usually a big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the time saving state (power support state). Here, the power support state is a predetermined condition in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit, etc. It means the state. The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. Thus, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/100 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), and increases to 99/100 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. Also, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special view 2 start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-power-supply state, the power-chw open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power-supply state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the blade members 2321 open more easily than in the non-power-on state. For example, the blade member 2321 which opens only once in the non-power support state per one winning to the common drawing start port 228 opens twice in the power support state (open for 2 seconds and close for 1 second, and also for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased due to the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. This is particularly likely to occur to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of balls in a big hit game, and the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. It is because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if any one of the electric cho open period extension and the electric cho open number increase is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased, it may be set as the electric support state (short time state). In the non-power-supporting state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special view 2 start opening 232 than in the power-supporting state. As described above, the special view 2 start port 232 is changed to a winning difficult state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. In the special figure 2 start port 232, the entrance is in the easy-to-winning state in the power-supply state over a longer period than in the non-power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (common figure high probability state until the next big hit game is started) ) Is maintained, and when the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st non-power Transition to the support state (generally low probability state). On the other hand, when the jackpot ("special figure G") without power support is won, it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. In addition, when “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure low probability spread figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure high probability general drawing low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, one kind of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol besides the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) in the first opening, or obtain a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over. "Special figure H" shown in FIG. 5 (a) is a small hit design. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing mode (number of opening and closing times and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, the number of opening times and / or the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost design.

  FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 5 (b), six types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure f" are shown, of which five types of special figures are big hit symbols ("special figure a" to "special Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R big hit design, and it is a 15R probability variation big hit design that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "special figure b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to get out balls in all rounds of the round, "Special figure c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and it is expected to get out balls in 8 of 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB which can not expect to get out balls in the remaining rounds, and "Special figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol and can be expected to get out balls in 4 out of 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB which can not be expected to obtain the balls, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost design.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214. Then, the stop symbol form which is the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying 5R probability variation big hit (“Special figure B”), 5R normal big hit (“Special figure F”), 2R normal big hit (“Special figure e”), “decorate” in symbol display areas 208a to 208c A combination of three or more decorative designs of the same number other than 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "(for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" Stop the display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 etc.). In addition, when notifying 15R definite variation big hit ("special figure A" and "special figure a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of decoration 7 ". Furthermore, when 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB and substantial 4R-RUB are to be notified, the left figure display area 208a and the right figure display area 208c are the decorative figures of the same number, and the middle figure display area 208b is The combination of the decorative designs which are the decorative designs (for example, "decorative 1-majesty-decorative 1", "decorative 4-majesty-decorative 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of notifying a hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or a small hit (“special figure H”) that is a big hit of 2R, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop the display of the combination of decorative symbols such as 3 ". A combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the lost design of “special figure I” and “special figure f”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols explained so far (for example, loose) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the eyes).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the "common figure A", which is a deviation from the "common figure A", which is a hit symbol, is displayed in a stopped state. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation display of the common drawing.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electricity support determination random value, and a special symbol determination random number are stored. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter which generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special drawings, special drawing winning random number values, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, an area for storing the number of reservations of the special view in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a storage area for the number of special drawings suspension. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special drawing divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas for which the start of the success / failure determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for common use is also prepared. In the start information storage unit for special drawing, as described later, a plurality of types of start information are made into one set, and the start information is stored for each area one set at a time in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied by the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in the present embodiment). When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter are updated. For example, when the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals representing that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area, respectively. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there has been a winning on these winning openings 234, 226 and these starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information of the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects entry of the ball into the first special view start port 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special view It is determined that there has been a prize in starting opening 230, that is, it is determined that a game medium which passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in first special drawing starting slot 230 is performed. If the information on the presence or absence does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special drawing start port 230 thereafter. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control symbol random number value and the random number The random number counter for generating each of the special figure random numbers is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the common pattern display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 Special figure display symbol update timer for clocking the time to display the fluctuation / stop, various timers including timer for clocking predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined closing time, predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 234 and 226 and starting openings 230 and 232 have a winning, the value of the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening in RAM 308 is calculated. It is read, 1 is added, and it sets to the original prize ball number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning reception process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, plural types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an open area according to the winning order (order of suspension) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off to be an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the lost symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 5 (c) and the lost symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of 3211, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, as will be described later, the common drawing mistake flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as a common drawing timer random number value, and the common drawing display device 210 is generally selected from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value. One time for fluctuating display of a figure is selected, and this fluctuating display time is stored in a common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing fluctuation display time. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special drawing prefetch process (step S224) is performed. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later. Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 5R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, off flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, and common drawing probability fluctuation flag . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), for example, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the spread map probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure a, the special figure b, the special figure c, or the special figure d shown in FIG. 5 (a), the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the special probability e flag is turned off and the special probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special flag f is turned off when the lost flag is turned on. The 7 segment LED is turned on / off and drive control is performed, and in the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), lost symbol ( The finalized display of any one symbol of the special figure f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is driven to open and close (a part of various solenoids 332) until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls. Is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Set the information indicating the closing period to. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and ends at a predetermined timing Storage area for a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set a standby period for displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended. The information which shows the presentation waiting period to is set to. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 start port 232 is likely to be longer than that in the general drawing low probability state (electric Chu open spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 opens more easily than in the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) having a high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) having a low degree of advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a departure (decision determination) is performed using the qualification table stored in the table. Next, main control unit 300 uses the special drawing determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special drawing 2 random number value in the acquired special drawing 2 start information, the determined success or failure determination result, etc. Determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area 2 The number of reserved numbers in the storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of special figure 2 variation game with high degree of advantage and special figure 1 variation game with low degree of preference, special figure change game pertaining to the suspension of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 start starting prize winning It may be starting opening winning combination order fluctuation which starts in order. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the pending limit.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or one display may be configured to display a lottery result of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure which has stopped the variation first may affect the lottery result of the special figure which stops the variation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information which can specify the type of command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data contains various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special pattern probability change flags, timers selected in the special drawing related lottery process In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it includes information indicating the number etc., and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, values of special view probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a prize effect start command and end In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag or the like is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 Including presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, information such as the type of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Including.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figures stored in the command data in the RAM 308 [2] Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game, etc. being held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. And then go into the HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the main control unit timer interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 51, a special view look-ahead process is performed in the winning opening winning process. In the special view look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and determines in advance the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The figure prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 is increased is stored, for example, in the special view 2 pending count stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and in the special view 2 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is the special view 2 look-ahead count and If equal, it is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Also, the process of step S303 is performed prior to the special drawing related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information is Prior determination processing prior to the success or failure determination processing in FIG. 2 related lottery processing (step S229). In the special drawing related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later, prior determination of the stop symbol of the special view 2 change game according to the start information is performed before the display symbol drawing process S708. Also, this pre-judging process may be performed using a special table for pre-judging instead of the table used at the time of pass / fail judgment.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 is increasing. As in the case of, for example, the special figure 2, the determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support state), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not power is not being supplied, it may be determined whether the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance warning notification are satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Also, the process of step S311 is performed prior to the special drawing related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). In the special drawing related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later, prior determination of the stop symbol of the special view 1 change game according to the start information is performed before the display symbol drawing process S708. Also, this pre-judging process may be performed using a special table for pre-judging instead of the table used at the time of pass / fail judgment.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always performed for the start information of the increased special figure 2, and pre-reading is always performed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 9 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A illustrates an example of a state in which the special view 1 pre-reading result information is stored in the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of the special view 1 fluctuation game . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (a), "special figure I" (disappeared) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure I" as stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special map A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in storage area "hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I as stop symbol information in storage area" hold 4 ". "" Is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special view 2 pre-fetching result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 2 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (b), "special figure f" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and stop symbols in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4" Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG.9 (b), the state which stop symbol information is not memorize | stored in the storage area is described as "none."

  FIG. 9C shows an example of a special-purpose look-ahead result storage unit for special view 1 during power support. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the storage area "pending 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the propriety determination result and the special map fluctuation time are determined in advance, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and as the prefetch result information in the first sub control unit 400 Can be sent.

  Next, FIG. 10 is referred to for the table for determination of acceptance used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for acceptance determination, and FIG. 10 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for acceptance determination. In the case of performing the success or failure judgment of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure high probability state, referring to the high probability table for success or failure judgment shown in FIG. Referring to the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 change game, the big hit, the small hit or the release is selected as the result of the pass / fail determination. The present invention is also applicable to a success / failure determination table used in the lottery process per special drawing in step S801 in FIG. 53 (b) described later.

  Similarly, in the case of the special view high probability state, the special view low probability state shown in FIG. 10A is referred to when the special view high probability state of special view 2 is determined. In the case, the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 10B is referred to. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special view 2 change game, a jackpot or an omission is selected as a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of the small hitting determination table. When the jackpot judgment result of the big hit is lost, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and the referred small hit judgment table indicates the numerical range and the acquired random number value. , Select the success or failure judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the success or failure judgment result, and the loss is lost with the probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, in the case where the determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 2, no small hit is selected. In addition, it is applicable also to the table for small hit determination used by the special figure small hit lottery process of FIG.53 (b) of FIG. 53 mentioned later.

  Next, a stop is performed based on the result of determination of success or failure determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A special drawing determination table used to determine a symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a view showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a view showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When deciding the stop design of the special figure 1, referring to the special figure 1 design determination table which is shown in figure 11 (a), special figure on the basis of the result of the success and failure of the special figure 1 and the numerical value range of the random number Select 1 stop symbol. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 1 is a big hit, any one of the special view A to the special view G is selected, and when the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 is a small hit, When the special view H is selected and the success or failure result of the special view 1 is lost, the special view I is selected.

  In addition, when deciding the stop design of the special figure 2, referring to the table for special figure 2 design decision which is shown in figure 11 (b), on the basis of the result of the success and failure of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of random number, We draw the stop symbol of the special figure 2. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a big hit, any one of the special views a to e is selected, and when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a loss, the special view f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special view display device is set.

  In addition, the table for special figure determination of this example may be used also for determination of the symbol in the special figure state update process of Fig. 53 (a), and the display symbol data of special figure 1 is displayed in the display symbol lottery process of step S708. When it decides, referring to the special figure 1 design determination table which is shown in figure 11 (a), on the basis of the result of the special figure 1 due to the drawing process per special figure of step S707 and the numerical range of random value, The display symbol data of the special view 1 is selected.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is displayed according to the detection result. A process of changing to effect data according to the operation of the key unit 137 is performed.

  In step S413 following step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 following step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450. Do.

  In step S417 following step S415, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S441 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S 443 following step S 441, transmission of control commands to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S 419), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S501, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S509 following step S507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading out effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from a ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. If it is necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 516 in the effect data read out in step S509, this instruction is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 following step S541, other processing for updating the effect random number is performed.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 516 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), the process waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S555, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table, the attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S 551, the CPU 504 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.). The VDP 516 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes). The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the front side of the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and is configured such that a part can not be viewed. . In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right of the lower part of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. In the first UI unit 280, a variation icon display area is provided on the left side, and a pedestal h0s is disposed in the variation icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 can be displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal h0s. When the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, it is informed that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. In addition, in the case of symbol determination display (during symbol suspension), the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and for example, performs advance notice display or pre-reading notice display by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game. In the second UI unit 281, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate the pedestal of the holding icon. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In addition, the navigation character YM may not always be displayed, and a specific advance notice or effect using the navigation character YM (for example, advance notice, advance notice in the symbol change display, N suspension of the symbol change display are stored) It may be displayed at the time of the effect etc. displayed at the time, or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 14A, since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), the display mode according to the progress of the game May change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display. Here, the variation icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display. In addition, the change icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. The variation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game, which is displayed after the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started, in other words, an icon related to a symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area to the change icon display area, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or it is expressed that the change icon moves. Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variation icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variation icon. The variation icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon, but may be the same size. Also, the change icon may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation according to the display mode (the fluctuation prediction), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified. The variation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  At the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol (FIG. 5) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed stopped. Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, "4" and "0") of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It is also good. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, positive change state, hidden positive change state, short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly.

  In addition, a household crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be vertically moved or rotated according to the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (a), the family crest 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, a first large-scale behavior character 224Ga on which the characters of "large" are applied, and a second on which the characters of "panel" are applied A large-scale behavior character item 224 Gb, a third large-scale behavior character item 224 Gc to which the characters “振” are given, and a fourth large-scale behavior character object 224 G d to which the characters “to dance” are given are arranged. Each of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large-scale behavior character item 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character article 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, light emitting means such as a full color LED is internally incorporated in the first large screen behavior character object 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior character article 224 Gd, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Also, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a one-handed box character 224H which is one of the effect movable bodies is disposed, and is configured to be able to move up and down according to the contents of the effect . The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the one-man box product 224H, light emitting means such as a full color LED is built in, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest 224E, the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd, and the one-sided box character 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion to emit light in a predetermined pattern in the transmission region. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern that simulates a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol according to the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special drawing symbol is stopped, but is blinked or turned off while the special drawing symbol is changing. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. In addition, the fourth symbol may be lighted and displayed during symbol fluctuation, and may be extinguished and displayed while symbol stopping.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height of the display area is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also configured to be able to slide in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the rendering operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above does not have to be configured to be able to be all performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (that is, they may be fixed). In addition, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be different from the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or, the rendering operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be able to perform rendering operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs rendering operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily indicate the decorative symbols in the display devices in a variable manner, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered by the decorative member constituting the rendering device 206, and a portion thereof can not be viewed. In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on a pedestal, and notifies that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. In the second UI unit 281, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 14B, since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In FIG. 14B, the variation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), but the game is Depending on the progress, the display mode may change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". And in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" It is displayed stopped by the combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second reserved number display may be divided and displayed in different decorative symbol display devices in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It may be done. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability changing state, a hiding probability changing state, a time saving state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be a frameless form. Also, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate vertically according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 14 (b), the family crest 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 14 (b) is the upper end of the family crest 224E. Although the portion is at a position slightly overlapping the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set at an appropriate position.

  Also, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned one-handed box character 224H is disposed, and can be moved up and down according to the contents of the effect. The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices It is made possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest 224E and the one-piece box character 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The action of each effect movable body is made visible.

  Moreover, in FIG.14 (b), the 4th symbol display apparatus 284 is provided under the 3rd decorative symbol display apparatus 208N.

  Next, an example of effect using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects that can be applied in the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 15 (A1) to (A2) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 15 (A1), when the first to fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H are operated, the embodiment shown in FIG. 15 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large-screen behavior character set 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior graphic object 224 Gd are such that the characters of "large", "panel", "shou", and "mai" are first turned to the front Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the one-man box character item 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the one thousand box box character object 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement character article 224Gd, and the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement box object 224Gd is a one thousand box box product It is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. The one thousand box character article 224H may be configured not to overlap with the front side of the first large board behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character article 224Gd. In addition, the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd may be disposed on the front side of the one thousand box character article 224H and configured to overlap the one thousand box character article 224H.

  In FIG. 15 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 or various lamps may be lowered to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. .

  In (C1) to (C4) of FIG. 15, the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in (a) of FIG. 14 is shown. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (C1) to FIG. 15 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided in place of the family crest 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set at an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 has a lift arm and an LED array rotatably mounted on the tip of the lift arm. The raising and lowering arm can perform raising and lowering operations by, for example, a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row, and the horizontally extending attitude is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the lift arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extension direction. The first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500) controls lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array one by one based on Versa data which is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing this, the light emission aspect of the plurality of LEDs changes while the LED array is rotating, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation locus of each LED, and a picture is displayed. Moreover, although POV display 224I is arrange | positioned more front side than the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd and the one-man box goods thing 224H, the anteroposterior relation of these production movable bodies is suitably It can be set.

  FIG. 15C1 shows a state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude.

  FIG. 15C2 shows that the POV display 224I lifts the LED array by the lift arm, and the LED array is overlapped on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display screen is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not in an overlapping state.

  FIG. 15C3 shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating its rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts to rotate, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. In addition, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and it is considered that they are difficult to visually recognize while the LED array is rotating.

  In FIG. 15 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the character of "Heat" is displayed, and a state where a notice display or a prefetch notice display is performed is shown. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the light emission luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. It is also good. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed in dark.

  In FIG. 15 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlights and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced, The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

  FIGS. 15 (E1) to (E2) show that the family crest 224E is operating in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (E1), the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM. The visual recognition is made more difficult than in the case where at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14 and the navigation character YM do not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15 (E2), the family crest 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Also, the household crest 224E may vibrate with or instead of rotation. Also, it is possible to raise only and not to rotate and vibrate. In addition, it is applicable also to the presentation apparatus 206 shown by Fig.14 (a).

  In FIG. 15 (F1), in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), it is shown that the one-hundred-box character 224H is operating. Specifically, it is shown that the one-handed box character 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state by the overlapping of the two-car box character 224H. In this rendering example, when the one-and-two box character 224H operates, the family crest 224E is not operated so that the two-and-one box character 224H and the family crest 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the one thousand box character article 224H and the family crest article 224E are in operation. In addition, when the one-man box character item 224H operates, a retraction operation may be performed to move the household crest item 224E further downward.

  In FIG. 15 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slide-moved so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The scroll display is done together. That is, in the background image, an area which is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide is configured to be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Thereby, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to display the no. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward, The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, or the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 15 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the third decorative symbol display A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the variation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  In FIG. 15 (I1) to FIG. (I2), the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is shown. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (I1) to FIG. (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided in place of the family crest 224E. In the timing shown in FIG. 15 (I1), a state is shown in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude.

  In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I is moved from the initial position to the position where the LED arrays overlap to the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED arrays rotate, and a fixed rotation occurs. It is shown that the speed is reached and the constant speed rotation is performed, and the word "heat" is displayed.

  In FIG. 15 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the holding icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown to be displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIGS. 15 (K1) to 15 (K4) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the example shown in FIGS. 15 (K1) to 15 (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 15 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at initial positions.

  FIG. 15 (K2) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide to a position where they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. At this time, the displays of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are scrolled along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are the images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are matched to the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, it is possible to perform display with a sense of unity by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As shown in FIG. 15 (K2), the family crest 224E is moved downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2 ′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. In addition, the family crest 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are being operated. You may vibrate while rotating.

  In (K3) to (K4) of FIG. 15, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in proximity to each other, along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that it is integrally rotating in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 15 (K4) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged such that the images respectively displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display is performed in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N rotate in the direction opposite to the rotation direction about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the displayed image is not rotating although the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating.

  FIG. 15 (L1) shows a modification of the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, in the sub display device 208S, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the right side below the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right to the left, but a part is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the sub It is considered to be more difficult to view than in the case where the display device 208S is not overlapped. As shown in FIG. 15 (L1 '), a display image (a background image or a character SBH of a safari) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In FIG. 15 (M1), operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd are shown. That is, the sub display device 208S is moved from the initial position to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to overlap at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. 1 large behavior character objects 224 Ga ~ 4 nd large behavior character objects 224 Gd, after rotating each of the characters of "large", "panel", "振", "mai" to the front, decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows that a predetermined advance notice effect or a prefetch advance notice effect is performed. ing.

  Next, a specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Here, FIG. 16 is a view showing in stages an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 17 shows a stage following the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 in a step-by-step manner, and FIG. 19 is a drawing showing the steps of another example of the effect shown in FIG. .

  In FIG. 16, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special view 1 hold lamp 218, the special view 2 hold lamp 220, the general view hold A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display 284 are shown. In addition, although it demonstrates by applying the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG. 14 (a) below, it is also possible to apply the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG.14 (b). Moreover, below, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the family crest item 224E, the 1st large board behavior character article 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character article 224Gd, the one-man box character article 224H, and the light-guide plate IL.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (background image of the coast) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. Also, a second number-on-hold display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 4-decorative 1-decorative 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the second UI unit 281 displays the reserve icon of the special view 1. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  The second UI unit 281 displays a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon whose winning is older.

  In FIG. 16A, two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are displayed in the second UI unit 281, and both of the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 have default display modes. It is displayed in (Round-shaped non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 16 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that four reserved icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the reserved icons which are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 16A, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by a broken line to facilitate the description, but the broken line is not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 16 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult for the power chute to open and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 16A, the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is the start of variation on the special view display device → the start of blinking of the fourth symbol or the extinguishment → the start of variation of the second decorative symbol → the movement animation start or deletion of the holding icon → decoration Although it is carried out in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbols, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 16 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and the turn off of the fourth symbol is further performed. There has been no change in the design yet. In addition, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 starts, the variation display of the fourth symbol The symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol starts.

  In FIG. 16 (3), it is shown that the second number-of-retentions display is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. In addition, the update display of the second number-of-holds display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be simultaneously performed, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second number-of-holds display is performed The display may be started, or the update display of the second number-of-holds display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 16 (4), the moving animation of the hold icon h11, h12 of the special view 1 is started. In the movement (reduction) animation here, the holding icon (the target holding icon for the current symbol variation) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal of the variation icon in the first UI unit 280 At the same time, the holding icon located at the display position of the second holding icon h12 starts moving toward the display position (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 14) of the first holding icon h11 of the special view 1. At this stage, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not started.

  In FIG. 16 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 16 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. And the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and then the change of the first decorative symbol Display starts. In addition, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h11 may be regarded as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon so far The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is ended, or The moving animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 16 (7), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (8), it is shown that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice starts, a balloon in which the character of “good opportunity” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the expectation to the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9), it is shown that conversation announcement is started while navigation character announcement is being performed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Further, in the navigation character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "good opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation to the big hit is further increased. In addition, the timing when the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing when the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed May be updated to "No", or the display of the balloon may be updated to "No", and the conversation image CI1 of the lady may be displayed. In addition, the effect (for example, "no") to be promoted to the notice (for example, "super heat") displayed after the notice (for example, "good opportunity") displayed first may be performed in some cases. . In addition, navigation character notices are not only notices in the symbol variation display, but also pre-reading notices, notices that give notice that a given notice is to be made, and explanation displays (characters that appear in various notices, game states, and pachinko machine 100 effects An explanation of the stage of the effect or the like, also referred to as a tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation effective period It is comprised by the remaining time display meter MT showing the remaining time. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (10), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display according to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the wolf, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. Further, in the advance notice of the navigation character, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "no" to the character display of "superheat", and reports that the expectation to the big hit is considerably high. In addition, the display of the balloon overlaps a part of the conversation image CI2 of the user. Note that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "superheating", or after the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed, The display may be updated to "superheat", or the dialog image CI2 of a whistle may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "superheat". As described above, in this example of the effect, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Also, the conversational image CI1 of the Tonosama may not be displayed in a reduced size when the speech advance notice is updated (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 16 (9) is displayed). It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A.

  After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16 (12) is shown in the display mode when the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (13), It is shown that the person presses the presentation button 136 (chance button 136). At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the advance notice of the navigation character is ended, and the display of the balloon is deleted. When the presentation button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the above operation effective period, as shown in FIG. The letter of may be displayed. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "It is intense heat" may be displayed on condition that the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the production button 136 (chance button 136) It may be displayed also when the operation effective period has elapsed without the operation of.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (15), the state of the first decorative symbol being made easy to recognize is that the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the spear have been erased and the conversation announcement has ended. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (16), after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 16 (17), “right The 7 "stop display is made and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an indication that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (17) to FIG. 19 (19), when the reach state is formed, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs an animation at the time of reach start. In the reach start animation in this presentation example, when the reach state is formed, animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged or reduced. In addition, an appropriate thing can be adopted as a display mode of the animation at the time of reach start. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by viewing this reach start animation.

  When reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 16 (20) to FIG. (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved and displayed upward and downward, and the first UI unit 280 changes. The frame is out under the display area leaving the icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 (in the example shown in FIG. 16 (20), the hold icon h11) displayed on the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. . In addition, the start of the movement display of the left pattern and the right pattern of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281, or the first The frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started after the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 After frame-out display of each image in is started, movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (22), the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be a case where the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character objects 224Gd do not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (23), light is emitted from the light guide plate IL, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In addition, light emission of light-guide plate IL may not be performed. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed, or the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior Only the operation of the character 224Gd may be performed, and light emission of the light guide plate IL may not be performed, or only light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. The movement of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed either. Good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 17 (25), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are in the initial state, respectively. Return to position. The light emission of the light guide plate IL may be ended after the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd return to their initial positions, or the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to fourth The movement start to the initial position of the four large-screen behavior part 224Gd and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be simultaneously performed. Here, in FIG. 16 (22) to FIG. (24), a series of effects performed by the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light guide plate IL is a series of It may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the effect is not performed.

  In FIG. 17 (26), it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (26), the image of the sword sword master of the enemy character is displayed large, and in the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (27), the battle between the hero of the main character and the sword sword of the enemy character The animation of is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (30), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, the player at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the big hit reliability is high. A preview effect is performed. The Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on condition that the rendering button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the rendering button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed also when the operation effective period has passed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (33), it is shown that the cut-in image CI3 of the lord has been erased and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect is started after developing into the super reach. ing. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (36), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, the player at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed is shown. In addition, the operation effective period in the second button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button rendering after the development into the super reach, and in this case, the development into the super reach The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button rendering after the development into the super reach, or after developing into the super reach The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to the super reach may be the same length.

  When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 17 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At the same time, the first large-screen behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left graphic and the right graphic of the effect image and the first decorative design are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article It is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed also when the operation effective period has passed without being displayed. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is performed. Also, in the case where both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large-size behavior character article 224Ga to fourth is performed. The operation of the large-screen behavior character item 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are started, or the effect image And the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd may be simultaneously started. In addition, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect display that causes a loss without performing the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be performed, and further, the loss After the effect display having the above-mentioned effect is performed, the resurrection effect may be displayed to perform the effect display having the big hit. When the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed variation icon h0 is not displayed, but may be displayed continuously.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 17 (39), the one-handed box character 224H operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 17 (40) shows that light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. The display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224 Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224 H, and the order of starting light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. It can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where no parting takes place.

  FIG. 17 (41) shows that the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the one-hundred box character article 224H starts rising toward the initial position. Thereafter, in FIG. 17 (43), the effect image is faded out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (44), the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-pattern behavior character 224 Gd move toward the initial position. Have started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17 (46), the protagonist's lord wins over the swordsman of the enemy role, and in FIG. 17 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene is faded out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shake fluctuation is started by the combination of the decoration pattern of. In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. . Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, at a timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view A. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special view display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol is determined to be determined stop, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 18 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" decoration The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  After that, when the big hit game starts and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 18 (52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start production Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7", "special bonus" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game It is informed to the person that it is 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), a mini-right-handed display instructing a right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit the right is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 18 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a round effect display is performed, and the display of "decorative 7" showing the combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen is It has been done. In the upper left corner of the display screen, mini-right-handed display is performed, and in the upper right corner, display of “1R”, which is the current round, is performed. The number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game or the total number of prize balls acquired during the series may be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a round effect display is performed and in the upper right corner of the display area, Display of "15R" which is the current round is performed.

  FIG. 18 (56) shows that the big hit game is over and the big hit end effect display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Since this big hit game is a big hit game that has been started as a 15R certainty big hit, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability regular drawing high probability state (with power support). Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is performed, and it is informed that the power supply support is shifted to the definite change state.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display (alert display) is displayed to call attention to the forgetting of the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4). In addition, this alerting display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the gaming state which is not in power support is finished, regardless of the situation where the big hit has become a big hit It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 18 (58) shows a state before the first variation display of symbols is started after the big hit game is over and the power support is changed to the definite change state. In the support variable probability state, the background image is a background image for the power support probability state, and the decoration pattern is also a display mode different from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability general view low probability state) . Further, a reserved icon display area 282 of Special Figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of reserved special views 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 is a rectangular non-patterned and white display mode, and the reserve mode (shape in this case) is different from the reserve icon of the special view 1. It is possible to make a decision at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 may be the same. In order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 in FIGS. 18 (58) to (63), the hold is not actually displayed. The icon is shown in dashed lines. Further, in FIG. 18 (58) to FIG. (63), the reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is divided and shown by a broken line for easy explanation, but in actuality this broken line is displayed I will not. Also, in the case of the power supply-added definite variation state, although the reserve icon of the special view 1 is not displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini-right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character of “bonus x ○” indicating the number of consecutive units is displayed below it. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first-time big hit game is over, “bonus × 1” indicating that is displayed.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (59), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the player is instructed to hit the right. A right-hand notice is displayed. The right-handed notification is displayed in a mode in which the characters "Please hit right" are displayed on the semi-transparent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the power support state where the first big hit game ended and shifted, but may also be displayed in the power support state where big hit games other than the first big hit game ended and shifted For example, it may be displayed each time the jackpot game is over and it shifts to the power support state. Moreover, after shifting to the power support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed also when it is detected that the player is hitting the left, for example, it is detected that the first special view starting port 230 has won a prize. In this case, it may be determined that a left hit has been made and a right hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61), it is shown that variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, as shown in FIG. 18 (62), the right-handed notification is not displayed. In addition, the mini-right-handed display is performed continuously.

  In FIG. 18 (63), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has been suspended by four. That is, in the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, all the four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 2 has four reserves, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserve icon h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 Four are displayed. Moreover, also in the second number-of-holds display, a display of “4” is performed, which indicates that the number of holdings in the special view 2 is four.

  FIG. 19 (49a) shows another example of effect following FIG. 17 (48). 16 to 17 show the case where the "decorative 7" is in the reach state and the "decorative 7" is displayed in the middle pattern, but here, the "decorative 6" is in the reach state and the middle The case in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is fluctuating with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  After that, the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view B at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a). In the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is not determined to be the symbol determination stop. The first decorative symbol continues to shake and fluctuation is still displayed on the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that it has become a big hit of either a substantial 5R probability big hit, a 5R normal big hit, or a 2R normal big hit.

  After that, when the big hit game starts and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 19 (52a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start production Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", "bonus" is displayed in the decoration symbol display device 208, and the player In fact, it is reported that it is either 5R certainty big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), mini-right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 19 (38b) shows another example of effect following FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation effective period, but the result of losing is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out, and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character of the hero loses to the enemy character swordsman, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (40b), the fluctuation icon h0, the second reserved number display and the second decorative symbol are displayed. It will be left hidden.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 19 (41 b) to FIG. 42 (42 b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (hold frame) scroll in from below the display area and the hold icon And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol starts with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view I. In the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), since the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, it is not determined to be the symbol determination stop, so The first decorative symbol is continuously subjected to the swing fluctuation, and the second decorative symbol or the fourth symbol display device 284 is still in a variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b), the display of the variation icon erasing animation is performed. In the fluctuation icon erasing animation display, the fluctuation icon h0 becomes gradually smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 19 (46b), the animation display in which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears is performed. Note that the variation icon deletion animation may be started before the special drawing is stopped.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  In FIG. 20, a first special view display 212, a second special view display 214, a common view display 210, a first special view hold lamp 218, a second special view hold lamp 220, a common view hold lamp 216 and a fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice effect is started. “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the countdown is started when frame in of the timer notice display TM1 is started, but after frame in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. After that, the countdown may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 20 (3) to FIG. 20 (7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM 1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 20 (8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol in which the character of Tonosama is represented in the middle symbol moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 20 (11), after the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, it is shown in FIG. Thus, a cut-in display is performed, which consists of the character of the lord and the "continuation" character display. In this embodiment, in this way, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. Here, the pseudo-link is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol which executes the variation start and temporary stop display of the decoration symbol a plurality of times in the variation display of one special figure. In this embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo run is performed, the easier it is to be a big hit. In addition, there may be a frame out in the lower part without displaying the pseudo run symbol, and the pseudo run will not be started when the pseudo run symbol is in the lower frame, the decoration symbol of the loss is just as it is The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach effect may be started in the reach state. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is notified that the pseudo link will be started after the countdown is completed by the timer advance notice.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is largely displayed so as to overlap the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (14), the display of “× 2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

  In the timer advance notice effect, when the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is counted down and becomes "00:00", a certain advance notice effect such as a pseudo continuous effect may be carried out without fail. There may be cases where it is done and cases where it is not done.

  FIG. 20 (3 a) shows another example of effect following FIG. 20 (2). Note that, in this effect example, “20:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 20 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 20 (10 a) to FIG. 20 (11 a), the first pseudo run is performed in the above-described manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (14a), the second variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. FIG. 20 (10a), FIG. (11a) and FIG. (14a) are effects corresponding to FIG. 20 (10), FIG. (11) and FIG. (14) respectively.

  Then, after “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol respectively, as shown in FIG. When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 20 (16a), in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the word "attention" for urging attention to the notice is displayed. Is displayed. Also, at this time, the right pattern changes from "deco 6" to "deco 7". Note that the right pattern may be left unchanged as "decoration 6". Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (16 a) to FIG. 20 (17 a), the second pseudo run is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo run. As described above, the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 20 (3 a) to FIG. 20 (17 a) gives notice that the second pseudo run is started. In addition, it can be said that the start of the second pseudo-run is also foreshadowed that the start of the first pseudo-run, that is, in this example of the effect, by the timer notice effect, It can be said that the first and second pseudo-announcements have been announced. In the timer advance notice in this production example, the start of the second pseudo run is notified, but the occurrence of notices and other kinds of advance notices may be made.

  FIG. 20 (7 b) shows another example of effect following FIG. 20 (6). Note that FIG. 20 (7 b) to FIG. (11 b) correspond to FIG. 20 (7) to FIG. (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (7b), the display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (8 b-1), a face image of a character of the toemen character with a balloon serif “Rake” in place of the character display of “attention” in the timer notice display TM 1 YMF is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (8b-2), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, attention may be drawn to the notice by the display other than the timer notice display TM1. In addition, as a means to which the countdown in timer advance production is completed and to draw attention to a notice, it may carry out not only by a display but by a sound or a lamp, and performs combining two or more of a display, a sound, and a lamp You may do so.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (9b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol in which the character of Tonosama is represented in the middle symbol moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10 b), while the movement display of the pseudo run symbol is continuously performed, the face image YMF of the character is removed, and as shown in FIG. 20 (11 b). After the pseudo-connected symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 20 (12), cut-in display is performed, which includes the character of "tendon" and the "continuation" character display.

  In this example of rendering, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the corresponding rendering (pseudo chain) is started, but the timer display becomes "00:00" However, there may be a case where the effect corresponding to this is not performed.

  In addition, while the timer display countdown is being performed in the timer advance display TM1, another advance notice may be performed. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice not related to the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  FIG. 21 (a1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 20 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 21 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 changes to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a2), display is performed in which the navigation character YM faces the variation icon h0 and turns the sword. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigation character YM toward the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, and thereafter shown in FIG. 21 (a5) Thus, the notice display in which the character of "Heat" is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. The preview notice may be displayed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the change icon h0. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, as shown in FIG. 21 (a7), a reach state by “decoration 7” occurs. Thus, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this effect example is an effect for giving notice that advance notice will be made.

  FIG. 21 (b1) shows a state after the timer advance notice effect has started. In the timer advance notice effect in this production example, the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started to be "30:00", that is, an advance notice effect that occurs 30 seconds after the countdown is started. It is suggested to be started. At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (b1), the display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "29:69". As described above, a plurality of types of countdown time may be prepared for the timer announcement effect. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be, or the countdown time may be configured. The shorter the time, the higher the jackpot reliability may be, or the higher the jackpot reliability may be, regardless of the countdown time.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b2), about 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts, and in the first decorative symbol, the appearance of reach effect by “decoration 7” is started. It is shown.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21 (b3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and leftward, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 displays leaving the fluctuation icon h0. While the frame is out at the bottom of the screen, the hold icon displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

  After that, FIG. 21 (b4) shows a state of being developed into a super reach (a sword reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4), the image of the swordsman of the enemy character is displayed large, and then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character Animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman begins. Also during this time, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6), on the timer notice display TM1, the notice is changed to the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice display in which the character of “heat” is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the change display of the decorative symbol, and the timer advance effect is continuously performed even after the transition to the reach state.

  FIG. 21 (b4′-2) shows another example of effect following FIG. 21 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4'-2), after the animation display of the duel scene is started, it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "02: 37". There is. In other words, it shows that about 27 seconds have elapsed since the countdown by the timer advance presentation is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4'-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. The button effect is an effect different from the effect notified by the timer advance effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5 '), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 21 (b6'), the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the advance notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7 ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice display in which the character of “heat” is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. Thus, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a notice display (or presentation) made as a result of counting down in the timer announcement production is being performed during execution of the button presentation.

  Although the above-mentioned example of presentation explained the example in which change display of the display mode of fluctuation icon h0 is performed as the effect which is done as a result which is counted down in timer announcement production, but it is not limited to this, other production may be done For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7 ′ ′), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may change to give notice.

  FIG. 21 (b 6 ′ ′ ′) shows another example of effect following FIG. 21 (b 5). When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ′ ′ ′), instead of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the attention display on the notice to promote attention to the notice is made. The character display of "is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ′ ′ ′-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to perform advance notice, and the animation display of the duel scene is trusted by the big hit It is shown that the display is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the character of the princess is displayed large on the right side of the display screen, and a character of "jump" is displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high. Note that this cut-in display may be a notice display that a big hit is determined. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that two or more notice displays are being performed as a result of counting down in the timer notice effect. The display mode of the variation icon h0 may not be changed, and only cut-in display may be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 21 (c1) to FIG. 21 (c2) show that the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer advance effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and it is changed to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. It is shown that the "attention" character of is displayed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, in addition to the presentation button 136 (chance button 136) as the operation means for presentation, a presentation lever 136V is provided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (c2), a lever image 136Va imitating the effect lever 136V and a remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the lever effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (c3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in the example of the effect, as a result of counting down in the timer advance effect, the state in which the lever effect starts is shown, but instead of the lever effect, the above-described button effect may be performed.

  In addition, there may be a plurality of types of button effects according to the degree of expectation to the big hit (for example, a button image 136a of a default mode, a button image 136a different in color from the default mode (for example, red, gold, etc.) , A default mode, such as a letter display (for example, "super heat" or "expected size") or a button image 136a to which a character is added, or a button image 136a different in size from the default mode (for example, deca button effect or mini button Effect), when there are more button images 136a displayed (for example, three button images 136a are displayed than the default mode), the same number of operations (for example, three times) as the number of button images 136a are performed You may make it do the operation (for example, 1 time, 2 times, 4 times ...) different from the number of button images 136a. In addition, as for the response display according to the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136), a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a may be displayed, and a number different from the number of button images 136a is displayed. May)) etc.).

  The effect example shown in FIG. 21 (d1) to FIG. 21 (d4) shows that the effect movable body operates as a result of counting down in the timer announcement effect. As shown in FIG. 21 (d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is reached with "decoration 7", and it is shown that a reach effect is being performed. The first UI unit 280 leaves the variation icon h0 and is framed out downward, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. In addition, a timer announcement effect is also performed, and it is shown that the timer display on the timer announcement display TM1 is "00:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (d1). After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (d2), in the timer advance notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, characters of “attention” are displayed to urge attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (d 3), the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (d4), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this example of rendering, as a result of counting down in the timer advance rendering, the situation is shown that the first large-screen behavior character Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character Gd as the effect movable body operate. The object 224E or the one thousand box character 224H may operate, and at least two of the first large movement character Ga to the fourth large movement behavior Gd, the family crest 224E, and the one thousand box character 224H may be operated. May be

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Moreover, in FIG. 22 (1), the timer announcement effect mentioned above is started, and the timer announcement display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2), it is shown that the time-based effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon in which the character of "overlay" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time addition is performed on the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer advance presentation effect is extended. Note that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-series effect, an advance notice of a chance increase, an advance notice such as a advance notice, etc. may be performed between the start of the timer advance effect and the start of the timer addition effect. .

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 22 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is performed, and the time to be added is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4), an effect is produced in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. In addition, it is not necessary to perform count-up animation display. Further, instead of the display of the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 22 (4a), the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer advance display TM is difficult to visually recognize. After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 22 (4a), the display of the count-up animation shown in FIG. 22 (4) may be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. . That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the completion of the timer addition effect is elapsed), the first pseudo link effect is performed. Is started, and the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (7), and it is informed that the pseudo run is to be performed.

  In this production example, when the timer display effect is performed and the time display is performed on the timer display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than in the case where the time addition is not performed. There may not be a change, and it may be hard to be a big hit.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 22 (1 b) to FIG. 6 (6 b) show a situation where a timer addition effect by conversation announcement is performed instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1 b), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1 b), the above-described timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TM 1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 22 (1b), the conversational announcement has been started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed along with the character of the token. Note that the timing at which the timer announcement effect is started may be the same as the timing at which the conversation announcement is started, or the conversation announcement may be started after the timer announcement effect is started, or the conversation announcement is After being started, the timer announcement effect may be started. In addition, a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and it is considered that the display of the conversation image CI1 of the husband is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the speaker's conversation image CI1.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2b), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 is displayed with a text display of "10 seconds added" indicating the time to be added. Thus, it is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer advance display TM. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in timer advance production is performed continuously. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI2 of the whistle is considered to be more difficult to visually recognize than in the non-overlapping state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the insulting conversation image CI2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4b), an effect is produced in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above.

  Thereafter, after the conversation announcement is finished by deleting the conversation image CI1 of the lady and the conversation image CI2, the count-up animation display is ended as shown in FIG. 22 (6b), and the timer display in the timer announcement display TM It is updated to "15:00" and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. In this effect example, the count-up animation display is ended after the conversation advance notice is ended, but for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (4b'-1) to FIG. (4b'-2), The conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display ends. Also, the timing at which the conversation advance notice ends and the timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 22 (1 c) to FIG. 22 (6 c) show another example of the timer addition effect by the conversation advance notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1c), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Moreover, in FIG. 22 (1c), the above-mentioned timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 22 (1c), the conversational announcement is started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed along with the character of the token. A part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and it is considered that the display of the conversation image CI1 of the husband is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the speaker's conversation image CI1.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lady is reduced and displayed, and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. The conversation image CI2 of the eyelid on which the operation promotion notification image described above is displayed is displayed together with the character of. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the operation effective period is not started, and even when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display according to this is not performed. In addition, even during the execution of the conversation announcement, the countdown by the timer announcement effect is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2). FIG. 22 (2c-3) shows that about 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation effective period, and the length according to the time when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT has elapsed It is decreasing. Thereafter, when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears, as shown in FIG. That is notified. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (3c), the display of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows is changed to the character display of "10 seconds added" which shows the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image, and the timer notice display TM is displayed. It is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated in the operation valid period, the time addition in the timer display may not be performed. In addition, if the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation effective period, the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT disappears temporarily, and then it is changed to the character display of "10 seconds added". Alternatively, the display may be changed to the text display of “10 seconds added” without displaying the disappearance of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT. In addition, on the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated in the operation valid period, after the operation valid period has elapsed, the character display of “I will add 10 seconds” may be performed. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated in the operation effective period, 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. May be That is, display may be performed in which 10 seconds are added to the remaining time when the presentation button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4c), an effect that time is added is performed by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the end of the conversation notice, or the conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice The end timing of the may be the same as the end timing of the count-up animation display.

  Thereafter, after the conversation announcement is finished by deleting the conversation image CI1 of the lady and the conversation image CI2, the count-up animation display is ended as shown in FIG. 22 (6c), and the timer display in the timer announcement display TM It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. The timing shown in FIG. 22 (6c) shows that the timer display counts down to "09: 85" after 10 seconds have been added to the time in the timer display.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 22 (2 c-2) to FIG. (2 c-4), the display of the countdown in the timer advance presentation effect is continuously performed even in the operation valid period, for example After the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3 '), the update display of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is not performed in the operation effective period. (The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept "06:00"), and internally clocked, and at the timing when the operation effective period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4 '), The counting result is reflected on the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the remaining 2.00 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4 ′)), and the countdown update table The may be resumed.

  Also, for example, after the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3 ′ ′), the countdown update in the timer announcement effect is performed in the operation effective period. Without performing the display (with the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 being "06:00"), the clock is internally measured, and as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4 ′ ′), the operation valid period has elapsed. However, as shown in FIG. 22 (3c ′ ′), “10 seconds is added” which indicates the time for which the display of the conversation image CI2 of the bag is added from the operation promotion notification image without reflecting the internal clocking result. At the timing changed to the character display, reflect the internal clocking result (for example, the remaining 1.23 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (3c ′ ′)) on the timer display of the timer advance display TM1. The countdown update display may be resumed.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  FIG. 23 (1 d) to FIG. (2 d) show another effect example of FIG. 22 (1 b) to FIG. (2 b). In FIG. 23 (1 d), the character display displayed in the speaker's conversation image CI 1 is “focus on timer notice”. As a result, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becoming "00:00". That is, it can be said that the notice of the notice is given by the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lady in FIG. 23 (1d).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (2 d), the conversation notice is updated, the miniature image of the conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size, and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the above-mentioned conversational image CI2 is displayed. As described above, it may be notified that the timer display changes after attention is paid to the timer advance presentation effect.

  FIG. 23 (1e) shows another example of effect in FIG. 23 (1d). In FIG. 23 (1 e), the timer display is “00” by performing scroll display SC 1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above timer announcement display TM 1 It may be made to pay attention to the effect performed as a result of becoming “00:00”. That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 23 (1e), the characters “focus on timer advance notice” are scrolled in a loop from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 23 (1 f) to the same figure (6 f) is another example of the timer addition effect, and the appearance that the countdown of the added time is performed by the display different from the timer notice display TM 1 It shows. FIG. 23 (1f) is an example of effect following FIG. 22 (3), and after notification of the additional time by the balloon of the navigation character YM is performed, the additional timer display TM2 is displayed on the display screen below the timer notice display TM1. The frame in from the right is shown. In the additional timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the time to be added is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed while the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. The superimposition timer display TM2 overlaps the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlap state. Further, the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  FIG. 23 (2f) shows that the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Here, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be deleted after the animation of the frame-in of the addition timer display TM2 is completed, or after the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted, the frame-in of the addition timer display TM2 The animation of may be completed, or the timing at which the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. In FIG. 23 (2f), the additional timer display TM2 is disposed below the timer advance notice display TM1. However, the timer advance notice display TM1 and the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped and disposed, for example, As shown in FIG. 23 (2f '), the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and as shown in FIG. 23 (2f ′ ′), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (2 f) to FIG. 23 (4 f), the countdown on the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM 1 is continuously performed until “00:00” is reached. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, and a state in which the timer notice display TM1 is framed out to the right end of the display screen is shown. . Here, after the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, the animation of the frame out of the timer notice display TM1 may start, or the timing when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 starts. The timing at which the animation of the frame-out of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (5f '), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with the word "attention" to urge attention to the notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (6f), in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, a pseudo-connected symbol may appear in the middle symbol and a pseudo-connected may be performed. This suggests that the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. The pseudo run symbol may not appear when the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo run symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed by displaying on the additional timer display TM2 different from the timer notice display TM1. ing. Note that the notification of the added time may be notification of a total value of a plurality of timer notices, for example, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining time You may display the value which added 7 seconds. Here, the additional timer display TM2 may be a timer notice that is newly displayed along with the addition of the timer, or may be a timer notice that is originally displayed before the addition of the timer.

  FIGS. 23 (3fa) to (8 fa) show still another example of the timer addition effect, wherein the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown of the timer display in the addition timer display TM2 are performed simultaneously. It shows the situation. FIG. 23 (3fa) is an example of effect following FIG. 23 (2f), and after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 counts down with the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. It is shown how to start the That is, in this presentation example, the time to be added is notified as 10 seconds, but the addition of 5 seconds is substantially performed. Note that the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 may be a time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 to the additional time of 10 seconds, in which the additional timer display TM2 is performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 23 (3fa), “15:00” may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

  After that, the countdown is continued in the manner shown in FIG. 23 (3 f) to FIG. 6 (6 f), and in FIG. 23 (7 fa), the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, notifying that pseudo run is performed. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again and the first pseudo run is being performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8 fa), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and the word "focus" is displayed in place of the timer display to prompt attention to the notice. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the second pseudo run is started. . Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa '), the symbol CC of the pine as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a notice may be made. In addition, the pseudo connected effect may be performed after the pine symbol CC is stopped and displayed. As described above, as the effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer advance effect, it may be suggested to be an advance effect or a big hit other than the pseudo ream. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC are overlapped with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, this effect example indicates that the timer display is increased as one mode of the change of the display mode of the timer display. Note that the timer display may be split.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation gradually.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, and the first icon h11 and the second icon h12 are displayed, and in the second number of displays , “2” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (2), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the notice symbol MI1 of the clock is displayed overlapping the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a pre-reading notice, and gives a notice that the addition of time is performed in the timer notice effect. In addition, it may be notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be displayed after the left pattern is stopped, The left symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 on the clock is displayed. In addition, the display timing of the notice icon stocked is not limited to the case where the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed accompanying the decorative pattern, and temporary stop of the notice icon symbol, various kinds of navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be carried out at any timing such as advance notice or hold on the symbol variation display by the effect or advance notice of the effect by various effects such as the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (3), the first UI unit 280 shows that the table on which the navigation character YM stands up rises and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas in which the notice icon is displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. The number of areas configured in the advance notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (4), it is shown that the notice icon MI1 of the clock moves to the notice icon display area 285 and is stocked. In addition, in the first decorative symbol, a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol is shown. Here, the timing when the right symbol stops and the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol is stopped. The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in a reduced size and stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, showing that the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (5), the middle symbol is stopped and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that the display is finalized by. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stored in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (6), a state is shown in which the symbol change display is performed by digesting one reserve of the special view 1. Further, the timer announcement effect is also started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer announcement display TM1 is “09:69”, and the countdown is performed. It should be noted that there may be an effect display (eg, navigation character YM, etc.) overlapping with the timer advance notice only only during execution of a certain effect (eg, stock effect of the advance notice icon, etc.). Also, conversely, there may be an effect display that causes the timer notice to overlap only while a certain effect is being performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (7), an effect is displayed around the notice icon MI1 of the clock stored in the notice icon display area 285, and it is notified that the notice icon MI1 of the clock is used. . Note that "07: 31" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed substantially at the center of the display screen. Although the effect remains displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted at the timing when it pops out from the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased may be the same as the timing at which the display of the count-up animation is started, or the display of the count-up animation may be performed after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased. It may be started or, after the display of the count-up animation is started, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (10), the advance notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the timer advance presentation effect.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 25 (A1) to FIG. 25 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first suspension icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. In addition, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display is “00:00”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A3), a balloon in which the characters “superimposed” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed, and time display is performed for timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. In addition, even if the character display of "superimposition" is performed, the addition of the time of the timer display may not be performed in some cases, and another effect may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-1), after changing to the timer display and displaying the letter “attention” to urge attention to the notice, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-2) Alternatively, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and “+10 seconds” may be displayed on the balloon to indicate the time to be added, and the time to be added may be notified. In this effect example, the effect to be displayed for the "attention" is not the advance notice but for 10 seconds. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), after displaying the characters "still" indicating that the timer advance presentation is continued instead of the timer display, the display of the timer advance display TM1 is added. The display may be switched to a display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to notify the time to be added. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), after displaying the character "still" in the timer notice display TM1, the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10 indicating the time to be superimposed on the balloon is displayed. "Seconds" may be displayed. Further, after the display shown in FIG. 25 (A3) is performed, the display as shown in FIG. 25 (A3 b-2) may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to "10:00", and the countdown on timer notice display TM1 is resumed. . On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A4), in response to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 being performed and becoming "00:00", the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol Is shown. In addition, the timing when the timer display is updated may be the same as the timing when the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the timer display is updated, the pseudo run symbol may be stopped and displayed, The timer display may be updated after the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 25 (B1) to FIG. 25 (B5) show an example of effect in which the timer is shortened in the timer advance effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a balloon in which the character of “subtract” is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM, and time subtraction is performed on the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 Is notified. That is, it is informed that the time for which the timer advance presentation effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B2), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continued, and the timer display indicates “05: 89”. Moreover, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed to the character display of "subtraction", and is "-3 seconds" which indicates the time to be shortened. That is, it may be recognized that the timer advance notice effect is shortened by 3 seconds, and the period until the countdown is completed becomes shorter than the time originally displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (B3), an effect (timer shortening effect) is performed in which the time is shortened by the display of the shortening animation in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. Note that the shortened animation display may not be performed. In addition, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "02:00", and the time in the timer display is reduced by 3 seconds (subtracted) ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed due to the effect of shortening the timer. The display of the countdown may be stopped while the timer shortening effect is being performed, or the display of the countdown may be in progress.

  After that, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5), in place of the timer display, the word "notice" to call attention to the notice is displayed. The notice display is performed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5 ′), the replay symbol RP as a pseudo run symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it may be notified that the pseudo run is started. Note that the timing at which the character of "attention" in the timer advance notice display TM1 starts being displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the character of "attention" After the display starts, the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed, or after the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped, the word "notice" May start displaying. It should be noted that the appearance rate of the contents of the effect to be performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or when the timer display effect changes, for example, while the timer notification effect is being executed If there is no change in the display, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and it is easy to be notified of the pseudo run, but if the timer display changes during execution of the timer advance notice effect, the above-mentioned pine symbol CC etc. It may be easy to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-series notification may be performed earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 25 (C1) to FIG. 25 (C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed and the countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a balloon in which the characters “Timer notice level UP” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed. It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes, for example, from white to red, and it is informed that the big hit reliability of the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the timer display being counted down, it is informed that a notice with a very high reliability may be given as a notice to be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 25 (D1) to FIG. 25 (D5) show an example of effects in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted and resumed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and "06: 99" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), a balloon in which the character of "stop" is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted. Note that the timing at which the display of the balloon with the text “stop” starts may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, or the display of the balloon with the text “stop” started. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, the balloon may be started to be displayed with the word “stop”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D2), a state is shown in which the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo run is to be performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is suspended, and the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 remains "06: 99".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again, and it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is performed. It is done. In addition, "x 2" which shows that the fluctuation display of the 2nd decoration symbol by pseudo | simulation run is performed is displayed under the 2nd decoration symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), a balloon in which the characters “resume” are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D4), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is resumed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (D5), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is indicated that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while the predetermined effect such as pseudo ream is being performed, and the countdown can be resumed after the effect is completed. It is done.

  Note that, as an example of the change of the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1, the number of the timer notices TM1 may be changed (increased or decreased) more than before the change. For example, when one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased to two or more when it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, and conversely, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased. If three advance notice displays TM1 are displayed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced to 2 or less when it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes. Here, when the number of timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by timer notice display TM1 may be divided and displayed by timer notice display TM1 originally displayed, or originally The timer notice display TM1 displayed may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer notice notice TM1 notifying 10 seconds, if two timer notice displays TM1 are increased, 10) The timer notice display TM1 for notifying the second becomes two). In addition, when the number of timer notice display TM1 is decreased, the total value of the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 is decreased as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer announcements TM1 notifying 10 seconds, if it is reduced to one, the timer announcements TM1 notifying 10 seconds become one). Further, when there are a plurality of timer notice displays TM1 changed due to increase, decrease, etc., the countdown of the timer notice display TM1 may be started at the same timing or may be started at different timings.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation gradually. In the effect example shown in FIG. 26, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the sub display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the illustration of the first large-screen behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character objects 224Gd and the one-hundred box character article 224H is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 26 (A1) to FIG. 26 (A6) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), a state is shown in which variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “05: 89” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), a balloon in which the character of “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S. The time to be added is reported.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and the upper right corner thereof overlaps the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), in the timer advance notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (A4), the sub display device 208S is lowered and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (A5), in the timer advance notice display TM1, the count up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased in the sub display device 208S. In the example of the effect, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 26 (B1) to FIG. 26 (B7) shows another example of the timer-added effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 54” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icon is switched to the display of the character of "+10 seconds", and the timer is added to the timer display in the notice display TM1. The time to be done is informed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count up animation display is started in the timer notice display TM1. The effect is that the time is added. At least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the timing at which the sub display device 208S is positioned on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display starts. The sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol display After being positioned on the substantially central front side of the device 208, the count-up animation display may be started, or it may be counted up before the sub display device 208S is positioned on the substantially central front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation display may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (B4) to FIG. 26 (B5), the sub display device 208S performs countdown display of the additional time. More specifically, the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is decreased by one second, while the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is increased by one second. . In this example of presentation, while the countdown display of the additional time is being performed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted, but the countdown may be continued without interruption.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is "0 seconds", the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 It is updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to specify, but is displayed in a distinguishable manner It is also good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (B6), in the sub display device 208S, the display of the additional time is switched to the display of “Restart” indicating that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed. The sub display 208S starts to descend toward the initial position.

  FIG. 26 (B7) shows a state in which the sub display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is resumed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B7), the timer display is "14:23". After that, the display of “Restart” displayed on the sub display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, display of the fluctuation icon h0 and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 26 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown restarts may be the same as the timing at which the sub display device 208S starts to descend, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub display device 208S starts to descend. Alternatively, after the sub display device 208S starts to descend, the countdown of the timer display may resume. Also, the timing at which “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display restarts, or after “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be resumed, or after the countdown of the timer display is resumed, the display of “Restart” may be started on the sub display device 208S. Also, the timing at which the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown restarts, or after the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position, the timer display countdown resumes. Alternatively, the sub display 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown resumes.

  The effect examples shown in (C1) to (C6) of FIG. 26 show another example of the timer-added effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the timer announcement effect is started, and in the timer announcement display TM1, “05: 89” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (C1), a balloon in which the character of “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is reported. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the display of the suction animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S by the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the suction is displayed from the timer notice display TM1. An effect image showing how you are doing is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (C2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, causing a part of the display area of the sub display device 208S to overlap with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the character of "+10 seconds" displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM is extended toward the timer advance notice display TM1 and displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The navigation character YM has a look that is surprised by the appearance.

  FIG. 26 (C3) shows that the display of the suction animation is continued. Specifically, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 by the suction animation further moves toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of “+10 seconds” continues to be the sub-display 208S. And the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the display of the count-up animation described above is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that it is going to the timer notice display TM1 while shrinking. While the navigation character YM sees the suction animation and performs an astonishing animation (animation accompanying the suction animation) when the suction animation is being displayed, it is not necessary to particularly perform the animation. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (C5), when the display of “+10 seconds” is completely absorbed by timer notice display TM1, the absorption animation display is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 26 (C6), the timer In the advance notice display TM1, it is shown that the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed. When a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer advance notice may be performed only by one of the decorative symbol display devices.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the timer advance presentation effect.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 27 (A1) to FIG. 27 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the example of effects shown in FIG. 27 (A1) to FIG. 27 (A4), although it is described using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), in order to facilitate the explanation A part of the 1-large-scale behavior character 224GA to the 4th-large-size behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H will be described by omitting illustration.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (A2), the second large-screen behavior character 224 Gb and the fourth large-pattern behavior object 224 Gd operate to overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the time display is performed on the timer display in the timer advance display TM1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (A3), in the timer advance notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this example, the second large-area behavior part 224Gb and the fourth large-area behavior article 224Gd out of the first large-area behavior part 224Gd to the fourth large-area behavior part 224Gd operate on the timer display 10. It is reported that the second addition is performed, but the time to be added may be different depending on the number of acting items among the first large behavior character objects 224 Ga to the fourth large behavior character objects 224 Gd, for example, When all of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd are activated, an additional 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Further, in this example, the second large-screen behavior character 224 Gb and the fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd operate only once to notify that the timer display is performed for 10 seconds, but the operation is The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times, for example, when the second large-scale behavior character 224 Gb and the fourth large-size behavior character 224 Gd are operated three times, the timer display may be performed for 30 seconds. May be

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 27 (B1) to FIG. 27 (B4) show examples of timer-added effects using the family crest item 224E. In addition, although it is demonstrated using the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG. 14 (a) by the example of a production | presentation shown to FIG. 27 (B1)-the figure (B4), in order to demonstrate easily Description will be made with the illustration of 224 Ga to the fourth large board behavior character article 224 Gd and the one thousand box character article 224 H omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (B2), the family crest 224E operates and ascends to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper and lower portions at that position Operate in the direction. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of pieces and displayed around the overlapped family crest item 224E. Specifically, one “+5 seconds” display, two “+2 seconds” displays, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround household crest 224E, whereby timer notice display TM1 is performed. It is informed that an additional 10 seconds will be performed on the timer display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (B3), in the timer advance notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this example of rendering, the family crest item 224E is operated only once to notify that the timer display is to be performed for 10 seconds, but even if the time to be added differs depending on the number of operations. For example, if the family crest 224E is operated three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 27 (C1) to FIG. 27 (C6) show another example of the timer-added effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 27C1 to FIG. 27C, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first held icon h11 is held in the held display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and “1” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the second number-of-retentions display disposed in the upper right corner of the display area. A first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first UI unit 280 displays a variation icon h0 and a navigation character YM.

  Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, timer advance notice effect is performed, and countdown of timer display is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), "05:00" is displayed as the timer display, and in this example, when the timer display is "05:00", the countdown is interrupted and "05:00" is displayed. The display is maintained. Note that the countdown may be performed continuously without interrupting the countdown.

  In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the characters of "10 seconds on top" are displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the direction in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, As shown in FIG. 27 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is less visible than in the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped. It has become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (C4), the display of “15:00” indicating the time in which 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second It is displayed straddling the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (C5), the display of “15:00” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The two decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display start timing of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the movement start timing of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, After the display of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decoration After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to the initial position, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. Ru. In addition, the countdown of a timer display in the state (For example, the state shown, for example, FIG. 27 (C4)) in which the display of "15:00" was displayed straddling the 2nd decorative symbol display apparatus 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display apparatus 208N. May be resumed. It may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit when the timer display is displayed across multiple decorative symbol display devices than when the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device, The likelihood of a jackpot may be the same, and may be configured to be less likely to be a jackpot.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation gradually.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 28 (A1) to FIG. 28 (A4) show another example of timer-added effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the example of effects shown in FIG. 28 (A1) to FIG. (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, timer advance notice effects are respectively started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this example of effect, two timer announcement effects are performed. In this effect example, the timer notice effect performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M is regarded as a first timer notice effect, and the timer notification effect performed by the third decoration symbol display device 208N is regarded as a second timer notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (A1), "05: 89" is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15: 89" is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is done.

  Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the direction in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this effect example, even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, but may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position, as shown in FIG. 28 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device The time indicated by the timer display displayed on each of 208N is added up, and the display of "20:00" indicating the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Ru. At this time, the timer display countdown is interrupted but may not be interrupted. In addition, a timer display of "20:00" at a position corresponding to the display of "20:00" also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N However, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap each other, making it difficult to view. Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 28 (A3) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to their initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device According to the movement of 208N, the scroll display is performed while maintaining the displayed coordinates. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in accordance with the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N corresponds to the movement to the initial position. Scroll the display "20:00" to the left. In the process of movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a first decorative symbol display device 208L and a third decoration When “20:00” displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, it is shown in FIG. 28 (A3). As shown, the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (A4), the timer display of “20:00” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. Note that the countdown may be started while the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 28 (A3)). Here, the probability of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this example, the first display of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first 2) It is more likely to be a big hit than being divided and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the likelihood of becoming a big hit may be the same or it may be difficult to be a big hit).

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 28 (B1) to FIG. 28 (B3) show an example of a timer-added effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, although the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) is applied in the rendering example shown in FIG. 28 (B1) to FIG. 28 (B3), in this rendering example, it is changed to the family crest 224E, and FIG. The POV display 224I described above with reference to FIG. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 28 (B1) to FIG. 28 (B3), in order to facilitate the explanation, for the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd and a part of one thousand box character article 224H Description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer notice display TM1, “05:71” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotation speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character “+10” in the simple display is displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 28 (B1), all of the first decorative symbol and the variation icon h0 and part of the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11 and the timer notice display TM1 are turned by the rotation of the LED array of the POV display 224I. It overlaps with the rotation area and is considered to be difficult to view.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (B2), the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display of "+10" displayed only on the POV display 224I so far Is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the characters "+10" are displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may be a decorated display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the character "+10" is performed so as to match the display of the character "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, in some cases, it is possible to perform display in which a sense of unity is given by the display of “+10” on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters “+10” displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example of effect, the font of the number displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the font of the number displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be the same.

  Thereafter, after the rotational speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I is decreased, as shown in FIG. 28 (B3), it stops in the initial posture. At this time, the display of the character “+10” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to view than the state in which the LED array is rotating. In this effect example, 10 seconds are subsequently added to the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 28 (C1) to FIG. 28 (C5) show other examples of timer-added effects using a plurality of display devices (the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (C1) to FIG. 28 (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 28 (B1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 87” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28 (C1), the POV display 224I is raised from the initial position to a position on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotating. Note that all of the variation icon h0 and a part of the first decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped on the POV display 224I, and it is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches a constant rotation speed and is made constant rotation, as shown in FIG. 28 (C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer advance display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown continues. Also, at this time, it is shown that the time displayed on the timer display is divided into a plurality of pieces and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one “+5 seconds” display, two “+2 seconds” displays, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround household crest 224E, which causes the timer display to be displayed for 10 seconds. It is informed that the addition of

  Thereafter, the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 28 (C3) displays an effect that the timer display bursts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (C4), the timer display after being added is “15:00”. Is displayed. In the example of the effect, when “15:00” is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but may be performed continuously.

  Thereafter, the rotational speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to decrease, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (C5), the vehicle stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is "15:00", and thereafter, the countdown is resumed. The countdown may be resumed while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, if the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is easier to be a big hit May be the same or may not be a big hit.

  In addition, in the timer advance presentation described so far, when the timer display is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, internally from the start of the countdown before the change to the end of the countdown after the change. The total time may be counted down. Also, internally, the time before change may change, and after change, the time of change may be counted down (for example, if it changes 10 seconds after the countdown starts, If you count down 10 seconds and display "attention" 5 seconds after the change, count down another 5 seconds, etc.). In addition, the indication of the countdown may coincide with the time for internally counting down.

  FIG. 29 is a view showing in stages an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

  In FIG. 29, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in the example of the effect, the effect lever 136V described above is further provided.

  FIG. 29 (1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 17 (25). FIG. 29 (1) shows a state of development into super reach (swords reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed large, and in the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (2), animation of a duel scene between the hero of the protagonist and the sword character of the enemy character. Is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach production, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the progress of the current reach production is summarized according to its position. Informing Here, the progressing speed of the character SAH of the sabothani is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached while the character SBH of Sabohani moves, a specific advance notice may occur. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. In this production example, when the animation display of the duel scene is started, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started, but the display of the state of development to the super reach shown in FIG. 29 (1) is started. The display may be started at the specified timing, may be started when the reach state is reached, may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may change The display may be started when the display is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (3), it is shown that the character SAH of the sabo hani starts moving from the start point SP.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (4), the character BOY of the bowie appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side at the timing when the sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. It can be said that this boy character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (5), a balloon with the word “chance up BOY passing” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a notice by chance up character display is given. It is reported that Note that the timing at which the display of the BOY character BOY starts may be the same as the timing at which the display of the balloon of the SABOHANI character SBH is started, or after the display of the BOY character BOY starts, the balloon of the SBOH character SBH is displayed. The character BOY may be displayed, or the character BOY of the boui may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of the sabothani is started. It should be noted that while the advance notice based on the display of the character BOY of the Boy is given, the Sabohan character SBH may stop at the first check point CP1, but may not stop.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the advance notice indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the contents of the generated notice may be displayed. Further, in this presentation example, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed when the SABOHANI character SBH approaches a check point. In this case, the entire chance up meter CMT may be enlarged, or only the portion of the relevant check point may be enlarged. This is also applicable in the following description.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (7), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (8), when the sabo-hani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is displayed, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (10), when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) by the player. Here, the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the second check point CP2 until the button operation by the player is performed or the operation valid period has elapsed, but may not be stopped.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (11), the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, the player at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (12) A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the big hit reliability is high. A preview effect is performed. In this production example, the cut-in image CI3 of the tombstone is a cut-in image of a special display mode in which it is shown surrounded by a golden frame and wearing a sunglasses and running a large bike while turning a cigar. It reports that the credibility of the big hit is dramatically high. Note that instead of the cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13), a cut-in image CI3 (see FIG. 17 (32)) having a reliability lower than that of the cut-in image CI3 is displayed. May be The cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed under the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation effective period, or the effect may be displayed. It may be displayed whenever the button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated. It may be displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the production button 136 (chance button 136), or may be displayed without operating the production button 136 (chance button 136). It is possible not to display when time has passed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (14), a balloon with the word “chance up gold cut-in” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. It is informed that a notice has been made by the display of an image. In addition, the timing when the display start of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord will be the same as the timing of the display start of the balloon of the character SBH of the sabothani, or the character of the sabothani after the display of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord A balloon of SBH may be displayed, or a cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that while the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second check point CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, it may not be stopped. Further, in this presentation example, the timing at which the sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 may be the same as the timing at which the button presentation is started, and the sabohani character SBH may be used as the second check point CP2. After reaching the button effect may be started, or after the button effect is started, the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2. In the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed when the effective period of operation elapses without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) Even when the is not operated, it may be notified that the notice of the chance up has occurred in the same manner as when the effect button 136 (the chance button 136) is operated, or the notice of the chance up has occurred. It is not necessary to notify that, or a part of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance up may be notified (for example, the balloon may not be displayed, and only the character display of "UP", etc.) may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (15), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the jackpot reliability has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (16), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible.

  Thereafter, when the sabo-hani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (17), the lever image 136 Va is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In the vicinity of the character SBH, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed, and it is informed that the advance notice by the lever effect is started. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (19), in addition to the lever image 136Va, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it to indicate that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. It should be noted that the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started during display of the balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached. The remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (placard) of the chance up meter CMT, but may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT, and vice versa. The up meter CMT may overlap a part or all of the m part of the remaining time display meter MT, and while the chance up meter CMT is displaying, a part or all of the remaining time display meter MT is overlapped. It is also good.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (20), when the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect lever 136V by the player. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. Alternatively, the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the lever operation by the player is performed or the operation effective period has elapsed.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (21), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, Sabohani character SBH is positioned in front of the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (22) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. The large-scale behavior character object 224Gd and the one-handed box character object 224H are activated to emit light from the light guide plate IL, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image. That is, it is informed that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed but may be displayed. In addition, the effect (the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd and the one hundred and two box goods thing 224H operating when the production lever 126V shown in FIG. 29 (23) operates) is emitted. And the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208) and the effect performed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) shown in FIG. It may be After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the first and second box character 224H are returned to their initial positions, respectively, The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. Although the chance up meter CMT is also faded in with the fade in of the animation display of the duel scene, the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the fade in of the animation display of the due battle scene is completed. . The operations of FIG. 29 (23) to FIG. 24 (24) are performed, for example, in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 17 (38) to FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (25) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the hostile swordsman has an appearance of dying out, and appears to be defeated even now. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SAH of the sabothani reaches the final point GP, and the placard indicates the letter “V” indicating that the jackpot will be made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (26), the main character of the main character wins over the sword player of the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 28 (28), the first decorative symbol is "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7". Shake fluctuation is started by the combination of the decoration pattern of. Although the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is finished. In addition, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, Sabohani characters SBH and placards) may be displayed.

  In addition, in the production | presentation using the chance up meter CMT mentioned above, there may be a case where the chance up meter CMT is displayed, and a case where it is not displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. In addition, the reliability of the big hit may not be different between when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and when it is not displayed.

  In addition, there may be a notice of the chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  In addition, there may be a notice of the chance increase appearing regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  In addition, the position of the check point may move or the check point may be erased while the presentation in the chance up meter CMT is being performed.

  In addition, during execution of the rendering in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani indicating the current position returns to a position before the current position (position indicating the past) or indicates the position ahead (pointing to the future) Position).

  In addition, the effect itself in the chance up meter CMT may be a mini game, and for example, when an effect is performed at a position indicated by a check point, an effect such as increasing the chance may be performed. Also, for example, an enemy character may be arranged at a check point, and an effect may be performed such that the chance is raised when fighting against the ally character and winning.

  Further, as an effect of chance increase (for example, rank increase bonus, probability change promotion, promotion to a big hit game with more balls, etc.) during the execution of the big hit game, an effect using the chance up meter CMT may be performed.

  Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by power interruption. Further, although the chance up meter CMT itself may return the display, the history of the timing of the check point and the occurrence of the effect of the chance up before the power failure may be hidden.

  In addition, the effect displayed after the count display of the count display in the timer advance effect becomes 0 may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT, or may be performed.

  In addition, when the sabothan character SBH reaches the check point, a chance-up effect may be performed at all times, and may or may not be performed. This is equally applicable to the presentation of the chance up meter described later.

  FIG. 30: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the presentation which used the chance up meter.

  FIG. 30 (3a) is another example of effect following FIG. 29 (2), and the same effect as FIG. 29 (3) is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (4a), the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first check point CP1, but no advance notice is given. That is, it is shown that the advance of the chance increase is not performed even if the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (5a), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 30 (5a) to FIG. 30 (7a), the character SBH of Sabohani is the first check point It passes CP1 as it is, and the marking at the first checkpoint CP1 and the display of the letters "UP" are not performed. As a result, in the first check point CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the advance notice has ended without failure. In addition, when the advance notice of the chance up is not performed at the first check point CP1, for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a ′), the display of the first check point CP1 may be erased. Also, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a ′ ′), in place of the letter “UP” displayed at the first check point CP1, the display of “x” indicating that the advance of the chance up was not performed. May be performed. In addition, even if the advance notice of the chance up is not actually performed, it is assumed that the advance notice of the chance up is performed after the SABOHANI character SBH passes the check point, marking at the check point or “UP”. The character of may be displayed. For example, once marking at the check point or non-display of the character of "UP", the character of marking or "UP" may be displayed, Sabohan's character SBH may return to the check point to give a notice of chance improvement, and may display the marking and the character of "UP". Further, for example, an effect of rewinding the reach effect to the beginning or to the middle is performed, and then, when the SABOHANI character SBH passes the check point, an effect of chance increase is performed, and the character of marking or "UP" May be displayed.

  FIG. 30 (17b) is another example of effect following FIG. 29 (16), and the same effect as FIG. 29 (17) is performed. In addition, at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a display of a question mark, and when the SBOH character SBH reaches the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va, and the appearance of the lever effect as the advance notice of chance up is not started It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (19b), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 30 (17b) to FIG. 30 (20b), the character SBH of Sabohani is the third check point. It passes CP3 as it is, and the marking at the third checkpoint CP3 and the display of the letters "UP" are not performed. Note that FIG. 30 (19b) shows that the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has started, and the player is now ready to accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). ing.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 30 (20b), it is shown that the operation effective period is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, Sabohani character SBH is positioned in front of the final point GP.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (21 b) within the operation effective period, the ornamental symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (22 b) A message is displayed as to whether the defeat and defeat will not be decided, along with the message that the character and the enemy swordsman of the enemy have "removed ...". In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the placard at the final point GP is displayed with the word "progress", and it is informed that the reach effect is developed.

  Thereafter, after the display of the cut-in image CI4 by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 30 (23 b) is performed, as shown in FIG. 30 (24 b), an effect that the panda character appears as a helper in swordsman reach. Is started. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani rides on a flying carpet and travels toward the start point SP.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30 (25 b) to FIG. 30 (29 b), a display for changing the chance up meter CMT while overlapping with the sabo hani character SBH on the way to the start point SP of the sabo hani character SBH Do. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (26b) to FIG. 30 (27b), for example, a part of the chance up meter CMT after the change appears and the fifth check point CP5 appears due to the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. As shown in FIG. 30 (28b) to FIG. 30 (29b), the fourth check point CP4 appears.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (29b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is again located at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 are in the display state before the change (the state in which the red marking is not attached and the letter "UP" is not displayed) It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b) shows a state where it has developed into an SP Ken-Age reach. The SP Ken-Age Reach is a reach where the Ken-Achi reach develops and shifts, and it is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when it does not develop from a Ken-A-Kai reach to an SP-Ken-Age reach. In SP Ken-Age Reach, as shown in Figure 30 (30b), it is the same as the pre-developed Ken-Awa reach in that the hero of the main character and the enemy Kana of the enemy are facing each other, but following the panda as a helper of the hero. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30 b), the copanda cheering party KPD composed of three copanda characters is cheering at the timing when the sabothan character SBH reaches the fourth check point CP4. An announcement is made to show that the situation is being reported, and it reports that the credibility of the SP Ken-Atsu reach for the big hit has been dramatically increased. It can be said that this copanda cheering party KPD functions as a chance-up character. The copanda cheering party KPD may always appear in the SP swordsman reach, or may not appear.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (31b), a balloon with the word "chance up copanda cheering party" appended is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and the notice by chance up character display is a line It is reported that it was. In addition, the timing when the display start of the copanda cheering party KPD may be the same as the timing of the display start of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani, or after the display of the copanda cheering party KPD is started, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is It may be displayed, or the copanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that, while the advance notice by the display of the copanda cheering party KPD is being performed, the Sabohan character SBH may stop at the first check point CP1, but may not stop.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (32b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has reached the fifth check point CP5. Then, the display of "Collaboration Killing" to the effect that chance-up effect is performed is performed, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lever image 136Va is displayed together with the display of "One shot" as shown in FIG. Be done. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and it is notified that the advance notice by the lever effect is started. Here, the lever effect which is a chance up effect may not be performed, and a button effect which is an effect of operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) may be performed. Also, the lever effect may be performed without fail.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (34b), in addition to the lever image 136Va, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth check point CP5 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it, indicating that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, effects are performed as described above and shown in FIG. 29 (24) to FIG. 28 (28), and it is notified that a big hit will be made.

  FIG. 30 (23c) is another example of effect following FIG. 29 (22), and in the lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18) to FIG. (22), the effect lever 136V is operated by the player. It is shown that he failed in the production. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the combination of the "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the character of "x" indicating that the placard is a loss is indicated, and the character SBH of Sabohani becomes a disappointed expression ing.

  FIG. 30 (5d) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 29 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (5d), it is shown that a large number of booy characters BOY (booui group) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. . That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the Bowie group. If the character of the boy appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the boy's character BOY appears alone. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters of “chance up BOY group” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and it is informed that the advance notice based on the chance up character display has been performed. As described above, different chance-up effects may be performed even with the same chance-up point, or the same effect may be performed with the same chance-up point.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter in stages.

  FIG. 31 (7e) is another example of effect following FIG. 29 (6), and the same effect as FIG. 29 (7) is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 31 (8e) to (9e), in the chance-up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches a position before the third check point CP3. It waits at that place until the notice of the chance up corresponding to the checkpoint CP3 is made. In addition, while the effect that the character SBH of Sabohani jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches the third check point CP3 is performed, an effect corresponding to the second check point CP2 (for example, FIG. 29 (9) to The above-described button effect or the like shown in (15) may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second check point CP2 may be marked in red and the character display of “UP” may be performed as being performed.

  FIG. 31 (2 f) is another example of effect following FIG. 29 (1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 31 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is configured in a green rod shape, and instead of the character SBH of Sabohani, the status of the current reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRK. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the advancing speed of the marker MRK is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. Further, the display mode of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is represented by a question mark, and it is made to have an expectation for the advance of the chance up being performed. Also, the start and end points are indicated by the beginning and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT.

  31 (3f) following FIG. 31 (2f) shows that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (4f), the character BOY of the boy appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (5f), a balloon with the word "CHANCH UP BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and a notice of chance up by the character display is performed. Is notified. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, as shown in FIG. 31 (5f) to FIG. 31 (6f).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (7 f-1) to FIG. 31 (7 f-2), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move. At this time, in place of the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1, the letters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has been increased due to the appearance of the advance notice are displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. In addition, the character BOY of the boy is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (7f-2).

  FIG. 31 (4g ') shows an example of an effect when the character MOY of Boy does not appear even if the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 after the effect shown in FIG. 31 (3f) is performed. It is done. Specifically, when the character BOY of Boye does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (4f), as shown in FIG. 31 (4g ′), the chance up meter CMT causes the first check point CP1 to be displayed. In place of the display of the question mark, the display of “x” indicating that the notice has not appeared is performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4g ′ ′), the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1 may be erased, and no display may be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4g ′ ′ ′), the display mode may not be changed with the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1.

  FIG. 31 (2h) shows still another example of effect following FIG. 29 (1). The effect example shown in FIG. 31 (2 h) is the same as the display mode of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 31 (2 f), but the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are not displayed. It differs in the point. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the advance notice of the chance up, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to when the advance notice of the chance up is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (5h), a balloon with the word “CHANNEL UP BOY PASS” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that the advance notice based on the character display of chance up has been performed. At this time, a part of the letters “UP” has appeared, which indicates that the reliability of the big hit has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31 (6 h) to FIG. 7 (7 h), as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” hidden becomes Appear.

  FIG. 32: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the presentation which used the chance up meter.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 32 (A1) to (A11) show that the chance up meter CMT reports the timing at which the pseudo run is generated and the number of occurrences of the pseudo run while the pseudo run is being executed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A1), a state is shown in which variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A2), the characters “Secure Echigoya” are displayed, and it is shown that chase effect as an example of the pseudo continuous effect is started.

  Thereafter, FIG. 32 (A3) shows that the chase effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect display in which the main character of the main character chases the evil merchant is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 31 (2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (A3), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a pseudo link may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached while the marker MRK is moving, a pseudo link may occur. In addition, it is suggested that reaching the final point makes it possible for a devil merchant to be captured and to shift to a highly reliable reach production. In this example of effect, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit as the pseudo ream occurs. In addition, if a pseudo ream occurs four times (that is, when a pseudo ream occurs when the final point is reached), a big hit is determined. It should be noted that the number of times of pseudo run may be determined to be a big hit by a number other than 4 times, for example, it may be determined to be a big hit when the number of times of pseudo run is 1 time and 4 times. The number of pseudo runs that will be determined as a big hit is less likely to occur than the other pseudo runs.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A4), it is shown that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A5), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (A6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “continuation” are displayed along with the display that the heroes of the main character are chasing the vice merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo run will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode. In addition, even if the timing when the character of “continuation” is displayed and the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character of “continuation” are the same as the display of driving the vice merchant by the main character The display of the first check point CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the character of "continuation" after the character of "continuation" is displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant. After the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character of "continuation", the character of "continuation" may be displayed together with the display in which the main character of the main character chases the evil merchant.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7), it is shown that the distance between the main character of the main character and the evil merchant is shortened.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A8), the characters “continuation” are displayed together with the display of the main character of the lord chasing the evil merchant, and it is reported that the second pseudo-link will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second check point CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A9), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. In addition, the angle showing how the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant has been changed, and the expression of the evil merchant who had been spared up to now has become an impatient expression.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A10), the characters “continuation” are displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant, and it is reported that the third pseudo-link is performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third check point CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (A11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the main character of the main character has captured the vice merchant is displayed together with the display of the characters "secure". At this time, the chance up meter CMT indicates that the marker MRK has reached the final point, and in the symbol variation display of this time, the pseudo run has been performed three times in total. In addition, at this time, in the first decorative symbol, the "decorative 7" is in the reach state, and the reach effect is started.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 32 (B1) to FIG. 32 (B14), the chance up meter CMT is displayed during the fluctuation display of the normal decorative symbol, and a state of notifying the timing when the advance of the chance up occurs is shown. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and described above is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B2), the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are arranged. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 indicate that a notice of chance increase may occur, and the player is made to have a sense of expectation.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B3) shows that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point. In addition, a balloon in which the character of “good opportunity” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. In this example of presentation, the announcement by the balloon of the character of "Nov. character" of the navigation character YM is the announcement not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance directly related to the chance up meter CMT It may be a notice of up.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B4), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1. Then, the character displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "appropriate" to "not". In response to this, a balloon with the word "chance up no" added is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that the advance of the chance up by the navigation character YM has been performed. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may advance without waiting. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that a conversation notice is also started. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. This conversational image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. Further, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and it is considered that the Tonosama conversation image CI1 is more difficult to see than in the case where it is not overlapped. Note that this conversational image CI1 is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice directly related to the chance up meter CMT.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B5), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” is hidden The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance up. In addition, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "No" to "Heating fever". In this example of presentation, the announcement by the balloon character of "super heat" of the navigation character YM is the announcement not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up related directly to the chance up meter CMT It may be a notice of In addition, the conversational image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the second decorative symbol. In this case, too, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Then, a conversation image CI2 of a whistle on which the above-described operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 16 (10) is displayed together with the whistle character as a continuation of the conversational announcement. In addition, although this talk image CI2 is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, it may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display according to this is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rattan. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In addition, the balloon conversation image CI2 is partially overlapped by the balloon character YM balloon and the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to recognize than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the marker MRK that has reached the second check point CP2 is in a standby state.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7). The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 32 (B8) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B8), the advance announcement of the navigation character is ended, and the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B9), as shown in FIG. 32 (B10), in the introductory conversation image CI2, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. It may change, and the character of "It is intense heat" may be displayed. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. Furthermore, in this presentation example, the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows is a display mode in which it is highlighted with a bold gold line, and is more likely to be a big hit than in the normal outer frame display mode. Is notified. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up gold frame” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK in response to the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the whistle changing to gold. , It has been notified that the advance notice of the chance up in the conversation advance notice has been performed. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may advance without waiting. Note that if there is no operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation valid period, the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows may or may not be displayed. When the conversation image CI2 of a spear is not displayed, it may not be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, or may be notified or only a part may be notified. (For example, only the characters "UP" are displayed).

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B11), it is shown that the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the speech balloon overlaps the speech image CI2 of the eyebrow, and the speech image CI2 of the eyebrow is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Note that the position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 32 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 32 (B11) from the beginning.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B12), with the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” is hidden The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed in the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also ended. Note that the display of the balloon may be deleted at the timing when the conversation announcement ends, or may be deleted after the conversation announcement ends. In addition, the conversation announcement may end after the display of the balloon is deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B13), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is in the reach state with "decoration 7". At this time, it is indicated that the marker MRK of the chance up meter CMT has reached the final point, and the rendering by the chance up meter CMT is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, reach effect is started, and the chance up meter CMT is erased. In addition, the timing when the reach effect is started may be the same as the timing when the chance up meter CMT is erased, or the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started, or the chance Reach production may be started after the up meter CMT is erased.

  In addition, production with the chance up meter CMT in this production example is ended when it reaches the reach state, but production may be continued even if it reaches the reach state, and it will continue even if it shifts to super reach You may do so. Moreover, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display is ended. At this time, for example, when the super reach starts, the presentation by the chance up meter CMT may be started, which is different from the presentation by the currently running chance up meter CMT. Moreover, the presentation by the chance up meter CMT may always start during normal symbol variation display, or may not start. Furthermore, in the normal symbol variation display, there is a case where the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started and a case where it is not started, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be always started. In addition, when it is possible to produce effects by the chance up meter CMT, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the effects by the chance up meter CMT may be started. In this case, for example, a message to that effect may be displayed to make the player recognize.

  FIG. 33: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the presentation which used the chance up meter.

  In FIG. 33, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. 33 (A5), the effect is started by the chance up meter CMT, but it is shown that it is erased halfway.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the main character of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current is The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the character SBH of Sabohani is Although 1 check point CP1 and 2nd check point CP2 were reached, respectively, since notice of the chance up corresponding to these did not occur, the display of 1st check point CP1 and 2nd check point CP2 is erased. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), it is shown that the character SAH of the SaboHani starts moving from the second check point CP2.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2), the display of cut-in is performed, which shows that the character of the beard having the nutritional drink is saying "Fight". The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and when it is displayed, the big hit may be determined. Also, when this cut-in indication is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this example of presentation, it is indicated that the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is finished by the advance notice which is likely to be a big hit than the advance of the chance up related to the chance up meter CMT is performed. There is. Note that the display of this cut-in is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance improvement directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is shown that rendering by the chance up meter CMT ends before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It can also be shown that the appearance of the chance up meter CMT is finished before the Sabohan character SBH reaches the check point. In this presentation example, the chance up meter CMT may always be ended halfway, or the chance up meter CMT may or may not be ended halfway. At this time, for example, the content of the effect to be performed thereafter may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends halfway or not, or the effect of the same content may be performed. . In addition, when the chance up meter CMT ends halfway, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when the chance up meter CMT does not end halfway. In addition, the reliability of the big hit when the chance up meter CMT ends halfway is the same as the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end halfway when the notice of the chance up occurs at all the check points. It may be Alternatively, if the chance up meter CMT is not ended halfway, it may be more likely to be a big hit than if the chance up meter CMT is ended halfway.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of "one blow", and it is shown that the button effect is started. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of the chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started, and when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated by the player or the operation valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. Is displayed, and it is informed that it will be the combination of the big hit of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In the case of loss, as shown in FIG. 33 (A4 ′), “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is informed that the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” will be lost. Be done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene is faded in, and a state is shown in which the main character of the main character has defeated the enemy player, and it is reported that .

  FIG. 33 (A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33 (A1). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a), a cut-in display is performed showing that the princess character is saying "Rewrite reach". The display of the cut-in is, for example, a notice that the reliability of the big hit is improved by assuming that effects of other contents are performed for the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display. When this cut-in indication is made, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of this cut-in is also a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance improvement directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, also in this example of presentation, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be shown that the situation is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohan character SBH reaches the check point. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a), the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased, but may not be erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a), a state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 33 (A3a), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but in this chance up meter CMT, the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 appear, and red respectively And marked with “UP”. That is, in fact, the notice of the chance up corresponding to the first check point CP1 and the notice of the chance up corresponding to the second check point CP2 were not performed, but both are represented as being performed and the big hit It is shown that the reliability of is improved.

  FIG. 33 (A3a′-1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 33 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1), a state is shown in which the display is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 30 (30b), not the swordsman reach. The SP Kenshou reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than the Kensou reach. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1), there is a chance for showing up the situation in which the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3. An advance notice is displayed, and it reports that the credibility against the big hit of the SP Ken-Atsu reach is dramatically high. The child panda cheering party KPD may always appear or may not appear. Further, in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is erased.

  FIG. 33 (A3a′-2) is an example of effect following FIG. 33 (A2a), and shows an example of effect different from FIG. 33 (A3a′-1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that of FIG. 33 (A3a′-1). That is, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2) is a chance up meter different from the chance up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed, specifically, As described above with reference to 30 (30b), it is the chance up meter CMT that is displayed when shifting from the sword strike to the SP sword strike. That is, according to the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2), it is indicated that the copanda cheering party KPD has appeared at the fourth check point CP4 which has passed and shifted to SP Kengo reach. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, and it is shown that a notice of chance improvement is made. In addition, when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the SABOHANI character SBH may be located at the start point SP, and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, and the SABOHANI character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located at the end of the SP Kenshou reach.

  FIG. 33 (A3a ′ ′) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33 (A2a). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a ′ ′) shows that the full rotation reach starts. The full turn reach is a reach where the big hit is decided, and it is not necessary to give the player more sense of expectation, so the display of the chance up meter CMT is not performed again, but FIG. 33 (A3a ′ ′ ′ ′ As shown in), the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it is notified that the big hit will be decided when all the rotation reach starts, so the position of the SABOHANI character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing the fifth check point CP5. , The placard may be displayed with "V" indicating that it is a big hit. Note that the timing at which the full rotation reach starts may be the same as the timing at which the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP, or after the full rotation reach starts, the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the sabothan character SBH reaches the final point GP. Also, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts may be the same as the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, or the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the full rotation reach starts. Then, the full turn reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

  FIG. 33 (A2 b) to FIG. 33 (A3 b) show another example of effect following FIG. 33 (A1).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the first large-screen behavior character item 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the effects of overlapping the first on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd are operated. And the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 33 (B1) to (B4), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, but since the result of losing is displayed on the way, the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is ended It is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the character SBH of Sabohani is Although 1 check point CP1 has been reached, no notice of chance up corresponding to this has occurred, so the red mark and “UP” are not displayed on the first check point CP1. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1), it is shown that the character SAH of the SaboHani starts moving from the first check point CP1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B2), it is shown that the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed to notify that the possibility of losing is high. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B3), the main character of the main character loses to the host of the swordsman, and the "symbol 6" is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it will be lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, it is displayed that the character SBH of Sabohani is a lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (B3 '), although "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol and it is informed that there will be a loss, in the chance up meter CMT, the sabotary character SBH is the final It may be displayed that it progresses toward the point GP as it is. After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (B4), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after swing fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”.

  FIG. 34: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the presentation which used the chance up meter.

  In FIG. 34, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 34 (A1) to FIG. 34 (A5), it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is once erased in the middle of the effect by the chance up meter CMT and then displayed again.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. It is shown that Sabohani's character SBH is starting to move from the start point SP.

  Thereafter, FIG. 34 (A2) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of the chance increase corresponding to the first check point CP1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is darkened to make the pattern on the light guide plate IL more visible. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A3), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted by darkening display is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also resumed. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up illumi irradiance” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH to notify that the advance of the chance up has been performed. The light emission of the light guide plate IL continues to be performed.

  FIG. 34 (A4) shows that light emission of the light guide plate IL is ended and fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In addition, the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it, indicating that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown.

  FIG. 34 (A5) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move.

  In this production example, the presentation by the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed as a notice of the chance up in the reach production, but it is not limited to the one described above, for example, the character SBH of Sabohani at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT. It may be applied in an effect that reaches and tells whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, in addition to the presentation on whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is applied to the production about whether it will be a big hit, or something else (for example, the development develops, a loss is displayed, etc.) You may Also in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the effect by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 34 (B1) to FIG. 34 (B6) show that the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first check point CP1, and the character BOY of Boi appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and it is shown that the advance notice of the chance up is performed. Furthermore, in this effect example, guidance display is performed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, the icons indicating the upper key and the lower key of the operation key unit 137 and the characters “not displayed by the arrow key operation” are displayed. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the sword strike is started, but it may be displayed by a display operation by the player after the sword strike is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B2), a balloon with the word “chance up BOY pass” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a notice of chance up by the character display is given. Is notified.

  Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 34 (B4) . Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B5), when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, as shown in FIG. 34 (B6), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again. At this time, the SABOHANI character SBH is at the position where it should be positioned when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 34 (B2) may not be displayed, and the rendition in the chance up meter CMT may be resumed from a place where the touch is good. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (B6 '), when the display between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is omitted and the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the character SBH of Sabohani The second check point CP2 may be located before the second check point CP2, and may stand by at that position until the advance notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 is reached. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (B6) and FIG. 34 (B6 '), the first check point CP1 is marked in red and the “UP” is marked due to the appearance of the Boy's character BOY. The letter is displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B6), the characters "UP" are overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani and are considered to be difficult to view.

  In the example of effect shown in FIG. 34 (B1) to (B6), the display / non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched any number of times in accordance with the operation of the player, but the chance up meter CMT After being displayed, after being made non-displayed by the operation of the player, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed until presentation by the next chance up meter CMT is performed.

  In addition, in this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed first, but for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (B4), the chance up meter CMT is initially not displayed. It may be configured to be in the closed state.

  FIG. 35: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the presentation which used the chance up meter. In FIG. 35, an effect example in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed is shown.

  In FIG. 35, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 35 (A1) to FIG. 35 (A2) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb respectively display the same content.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A1), two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0 interposed therebetween. In this rendering example, the chance up meter disposed on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter disposed on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. In addition, these chance up meters CMTa and CMTb have a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and described above. In the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1), first check points CP1a and CP1b, second check points CP2a and CP2b, and third check points CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. The first check point CP1a (CP1b) to the third check point CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks, and are designed to give a sense of expectation that the advance of the chance up will be made. Here, the check point indicated by the first chance up meter CMTa and the check point indicated by the second chance up meter CMTb are for the same advance notice of the chance up. In this example, although two chance up meters are displayed, only one may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters are displayed rather than when only one chance up meter is displayed. The display may be more likely to be a big hit, or the likelihood (reliability) of the big hit may be the same. Further, when the effect is displayed by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed. Also, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Moreover, in this example of presentation, although the advancing speed of 1st chance up meter CMTa and 2nd chance up meter CMTb is made the same, you may differ, for example, the advancing speed of 2nd chance up meter CMTb However, it may be faster than the advancing speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first check points CP1a and CP1b, and the character BOY of Boi appears, so that “near the markers MRKa and MRKb A balloon with the word “BOY passing BOY passing” is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and it is informed that the advance of the chance up by the character display has been performed.

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2 '), in the first chance up meter CMTa, the word "CHANNEL UP BOY passing" is displayed on the balloon, and the reliability of the second chance up meter CMTb is displayed. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the Boy's character BOY.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2 ′ ′), when the display of a state in which the character BOY of the Boy is singing a nasal song as a rare advance notice is performed with the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. Display the word “chance up BOY passing” on the balloon of the up-meter CMTa, and display the word “chance-up nasal song” on the balloon of the second chance-up meter CMTb to the effect that rare notice has occurred. It is also good.

  In this example of presentation, the advancing speeds of the markers MRKa and MRKb are the same between the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may advance at different speeds. Moreover, although the balloon is displayed on both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb in this example of presentation, it may be displayed on only one of them.

  FIG. 35 (A2a-1) to FIG. 35 (A2a-2) show another example of effect following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-1) subsequent to FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the character BOY of Boye appears. A balloon with the word “chance up BOY passing” attached to the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by the character display is displayed. It has been informed that it has been done.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter Only CMTb is displayed. Thus, after displaying two chance up meters, either one may be erased, for example, when one of the two chance up meters is erased, it is not erased. It may be easier to be a big hit than it is, or it may be a big hit if it is not erased. Also, the reliability may be different depending on the erased chance up meter. Also, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

  FIG. 35 (A2 b-1) to FIG. 35 (A2 b-2) show still another example of effect following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2 b-1) subsequent to FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMT b and the appearance of the boy character BOY appears. A balloon with the word “chance up BOY passing” attached to the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by the character display is displayed. It has been informed that it has been done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a thick red line, and it is reported that the reliability of the big hit is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is the display of the notice with higher reliability of the big hit. It can be called an aspect. Note that only one of the two chance up meters may be changed, or both may be changed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa in which a balloon with low reliability is displayed out of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. The second chance-up meter CMTb is displayed and only the second confidence-up balloon is displayed. As described above, after displaying the two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. In addition, after displaying two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which a balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 35 (B1) to FIG. 35 (B2) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display notices of different chance ups.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (B1), three check points (first check point CP1a, second check point CP2a, third check point CP3a) are present in the first chance up meter CMTa. It is arranged. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two check points (the fourth check point CP4b and the fifth check point CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth check point CP4b and the fifth check point CP5b are the first check points. The timings of the notice and the start of the corresponding chance increase are different from any of CP1a to third check point CP3a. In this example of rendering, when the timings at which the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first check point CP1a, the second check point CP2a, the third check point CP3a, the fourth check point CP4b, and the fifth check point CP5b arrive are arranged in chronological order , The first check point CP1a, the fourth check point CP4b, the second check point CP2a, the fifth check point CP5b, and the third check point CP3a.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first check point CP1 a and the boy character BOY appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb It is shown that the MRKb has reached the fourth check point CP4b, and the character of the Boy BOY is starting to sing. In response to this, in the second chance up meter CMTb, a balloon with the word "chance up" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKb, and it is informed that a notice of chance up has been made.

  In this example of presentation, although both the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb were displayed, only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, the notice of the chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter not displayed is not displayed. It may not be performed, or may be notified of a chance improvement corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter not displayed. In addition, there may be a check point not to be notified when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even the check point being notified Good.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 35 (C1) to FIG. 35 (C4) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different advance chance notices.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), an animation of a duel scene of the main character of the main character and the enemy player of the sword is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the second chance up meter CMTa is a meter indicating the progress of the entire reach production, and one check point (evolution point CPA) is arranged It is done. This development point CPA indicates points at which reach production may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the start point to the check point, the period from the check point to the check point, or the period from the check point to the final point in the second chance up meter CMTb, When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this rendering example, a period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as a first period, and a period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as a second period. Further, in this demonstration example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and described above. The second chance up meter CMTb is a display mode, and is the same as the display mode shown in FIG. 29 (2) and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa is set as a display mode corresponding to the first period, and three check points (first check point CP1, second check point CP2, A third check point CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that a notice of chance increase may occur when the marker MRK reaches each check point. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the character SBH of the Sabohani in the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C2) shows that button effect is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and it is shown that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. In addition, in the first chance up meter CMTa, the letters “UP” indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred is displayed at the first check point CP1, and the appearance that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2 is It is shown. The second check point CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up appearing as a result of the button effect. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the character SAH of SABOHANI is advancing toward the development point CPA.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first check point CP1, and the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. It is shown that a cut-in display is performed showing that the princess character says "Rewrite reach". At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. In addition, when the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased and only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be extinguished.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C4), a state is shown in which a cut-in image of a panda is displayed and transition is made to SP swords reach. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second period, and two check points (fourth check point CP4 and fifth check point CP5) are arranged, and each check is It has been shown that when the marker MRK reaches the point, a notice of chance increase may occur. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani advances from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 36A1 to FIG. 36A7 show that the chance up meter CMT reports the timing at which the pseudo run is generated and the number of occurrences of the pseudo run while the pseudo run is being executed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1), a state is shown in which variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1), characters such as "Please secure Echigoya" are displayed, and it is shown that a chase effect as an example of the pseudo continuous effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A2), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, below the second decorative symbol, a chance up meter CMT is displayed, and in this chance up meter CMT, a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2 and a third check point CP3 are arranged. It is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo link will occur at each checkpoint. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuation" is displayed together with the display that the main character of the hero is chasing the vice merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo run will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A4), it is shown that the first variable symbol display of the first decorative symbol (that is, the second variable symbol display of the decorative symbol) is performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A5), although the vice merchant has been missed, it is shown that it has developed into a reach by having revived one thousand boxes. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2, and the indication of the second check point CP2 has moved from the question mark to the reach state to the letter “R”. It has been switched to the display. As a result, the pseudo-series effect ends on the way, and as shown in FIG. 36 (A6), the display of the pseudo-series effect fades out with the chance up meter CMT.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and downward respectively, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the fluctuation icon h0. While being framed out below the display area, the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased with the completion of the fade-out of the display of the pseudo-series effect. As described above, the chance up meter CMT may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit when it reaches the end than when it ends at a checkpoint on the way. Also, the likelihood of a big hit may be made different depending on the check point reached.

  Moreover, you may be performed in the point shown to FIG. 36 (A6 a-1)-the figure (A6 a-2) as an presentation example which makes the chance up meter CMT non-display. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36 (A6) and FIG. 36 (A6 a-2), when the pseudo connected effect is ended halfway in FIG. 36 (A5), the chance up meter CMT The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out to the outside of the display screen.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 36 (B1) to FIG. 36 (B7) shows that the chance up meter CMT performs during the period from the start of the reach effect to the development of the super reach. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B1), a state is shown in which the reach effect shifted to reach by "decoration 7" is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. And in this example of presentation, when reach production starts, chance up meter CMT is displayed under the 2nd decoration design, production which uses chance up meter CMT is done. The presentation using the chance up meter CMT is performed until transition to the super reach or until a loss is displayed without transition to the super reach. Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B1), in reach presentation, when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2, the notice of the chance up corresponding to each check point is made Is performed and the character "UP" to that effect is displayed. Also, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative pattern.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and downward, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the fluctuation icon h0 below the display area. A state is also shown in which the pending icon h11 displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out as well as being framed out. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. The chance up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (B3), the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Furthermore, in this example, the chance up meter CMT is also at least partially overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. ing. In this example, while the marker MRK continues to move while the first large-screen behavior character 224G to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are operating, the first large-pattern behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large screen The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavior object 224Gd is in operation. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be made non-displayed while the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd are in operation. Further, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 36 (B3), a balloon with the word “chance up large board behavior” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and the first large board behavioral character 224 Ga to the fourth large board behavioral character It is notified that the notice of the chance up by object 224Gd was performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 36 (B6), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are in the initial state, respectively. Return to position. Although the marker MRK has reached the final point in the chance up meter CMT at the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated after the marker MRK has reached the final point Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished. Further, in this example, the first decorative symbol is disposed on the front side of the chance-up meter CMT after the first large-area behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd are operated, and the left of the first decorative pattern The first overlapping design is placed on the front side of the chance increase meter CMT before the first large movement character 224GA to the fourth large movement character 224Gd are operated although the design overlaps with the chance increase meter CMT. After the 1 large movement character item 224Ga to the 4th large movement character object 224Gd is operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative symbol is overlapped to the chance up meter CMT. You may In addition, it is not necessary to change the anteroposterior relationship between the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT before and after the operation of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd return to the initial position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (B7), it develops into super reach.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (A1) to FIG. 37 (A5), other effects unrelated to the chance up meter CMT overlap with the chance up meter CMT during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT. It is shown how it is done. Here, other effects may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, and other effects may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses according to the position. The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1), it is shown that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 to the second check point CP2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A2), the treasure chest BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the chance up meter CMT is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the treasure box BX does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT. The treasure box BX is an advance notice effect that is not related to the notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, the marker MRK does not stop even during display of the treasure box BX, and continues to progress.

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second check point CP2, an advance notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and in the second check point CP2, the notification is made The display of the character "is performed. The treasure box BX still overlaps with the chance up meter CMT.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A4), it is shown that the treasure box BX is opened, and the letters of “superheat” appear from inside. This "superheat" character display is also a notice effect unrelated to the notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, it may be a notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (A5), the treasure box BX displayed overlapping the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT is in an easily visible state.

  FIG. 37 (B1) shows that, during the execution of the presentation using the chance up meter CMT, another presentation unrelated to the chance up meter CMT is performed overlapping the chance up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (B1), wipe is performed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT during execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and it is shown that simultaneous effects are being performed on the wipe screen WP. Here, simultaneous rendering means, for example, a pachinko machine 100 of the same model attached to the same gaming island using an RTC (Real Time Clock) as a clocking means or a built-in timer, and the same rendering content is the same. It is an effect performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when simultaneous rendering starts, and is erased when ending. In addition, the wipe screen WP may be displayed also when effects other than the simultaneous effect are performed.

  FIGS. 37 (C1) to (C2) show that an error display is displayed during the execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 37 (C1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsman is being developed into a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses according to the position. The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1), it is shown that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

  After that, for example, the radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that the radio wave such as transceiver or the like is outputting a strong radio wave causing fluctuation in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100. When it is detected by means, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2), an error display is performed by the character display of "radio wave detected" indicating that. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 37 (C2), this error display is not overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors, for example, a ball removal error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 1) is full, or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. It is applicable also to a door opening error etc. which occur when it is detected that a door member such as 1) is opened. Further, depending on the type of error, the error display may not be performed, and the error notification may be performed by voice or lamp.

  FIG. 37 (C2a), FIG. 37 (C2b) and FIG. 37C (C2c) show other display examples of the error display, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2b), a plurality of error displays can be simultaneously performed, and when an error occurs, the ones displayed in the vertical direction from the upper left side of the display screen are shown. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error display is displayed to overlap the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), it is shown that an error display is performed on the entire display screen. Specifically, for example, it is detected by the magnetic force detection means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that strong magnetism is emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 100 In this case, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), an error display by the character display of “Magnet detected” indicating that is performed over the entire display screen. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, for example, the game may not be progressed by not performing a part of processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is shut off, such as not performing a big hit determination. . In addition, when the power is shut off while the error display is being performed, and the supply of power is restored after that, the symbol fluctuation stop command that is being executed when the power is shut off has elapsed and the symbol fluctuation stop command is displayed. For example, “in preparation” may be displayed over the entire display screen until it is output to the first sub control unit 400.

  FIGS. 37D1 and D2 show that the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display device. In the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (D1) to FIG. 37 (D2), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E. Is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (D1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the main character of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that effects are being performed by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses according to the position The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (D1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1), it is shown that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2. In addition, in the sub display device 208S, the characters “vs Kengo” indicating that it has developed into a Ken-Age reach is displayed, and a fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 37 (D2) shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is done. At this time, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is considered that the chance up meter CMT is less visible than in the case where it is not overlapped. In addition, on the sub display device 208S, a cut-in image of the main character of the main character with a speech balloon in which the characters "Match game" are displayed is displayed.

  In this example, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub display device 208S as an example of the display means, but it may be overlapped with the chance up meter CMT by other display means. For example, a display unit configured of a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, 7 segments, a dot matrix, a lamp or the like is applicable.

  Further, in this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. You may Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In this example of presentation, although the example in which the chance up meter CMT is overlapped to another display has been described, it is also applied to the case where the timer advance indication TM1 is overlapped to another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the mode of change of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

  In FIG. 38, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 38A1 to 38A9 is the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation announcement. Is shown to be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38A1, a button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including a button image 136a1 and a remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A2), the player can enter the state where the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) can be received. In addition, the operation effective period in the button effect by this navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A3), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A3), it is shown that conversation announcement is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image includes a button image 136a2 imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) a and a remaining time display meter MT2 representing the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the operation valid period in the speech advance notice is not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display according to this is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation effective period is started, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, an effect corresponding to this may be performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the other's conversation image CI2, and the Tonosama's conversation is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the bag is partially overlapped with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5), the operation valid period in the speech advance notice is started. The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5). In addition, the operation effective period of the button effect by the conversation advance notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation effective period in the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A5) to (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the notice of conversation is more than the decrease speed of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM. The speed at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the notice of conversation is reduced earlier than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), as shown in (A9) in FIG. There are times when the letter "It is intense heat" is displayed. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. Also, on the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed changes to the character display of "superheat", notifying that the big hit reliability is considerably high. ing. That is, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the rendering according to the button operation result is performed for both the button rendering in the conversation announcement and the button rendering by the navigation character YM by one operation of the rendering button. ing. In addition, the character display of "It is super fever" displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the wolf and the character display of "Extreme heat" displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM are also displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed. But may not be displayed.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1), the button started earlier. An effect corresponding to the operation result corresponding to the effect may be performed. That is, in this example, since the button effect by the navigation character YM is started earlier than the button effect in the preannouncement of conversation, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1), the effect button 136 in the button effect by the navigation character YM Only the effect corresponding to the operation of the (chance button 136) (the letter display of "superheat" in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, and the operation corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in the button effect by the notice of conversation There is no effect (display of the letter "It's intense heat" displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the wolf).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-2), when the player performs an operation of the second presentation button 136 (chance button 136), as shown in FIG. 28 (A9a-3), it is started later. An effect corresponding to the operation result corresponding to the button effect is performed. That is, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in the button effect by the advance notice of conversation (character display of “It's intense heat” in the conversation image CI2 of a whistle) is performed.

  In this production example, when the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated when the operation effective period is started in each of the two button productions, the button production with a large reduction in gauge in the remaining time display meter The priority may be given to the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) with priority given to the priority, and the effect button 136 (chance may be given priority) with priority given to the button effect with a small gauge reduction speed in the remaining time display meter. An effect corresponding to the operation of the button 136) may be performed.

  In addition, in this demonstration example, the change speed of the display mode of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 is different, but, for example, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the notice image CI2 of the eyelid until a certain time The speed may be the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may change when a certain time is reached. .

  Moreover, although the operation effective period which concerns on notice image CI2 of eyebrows was made into 5 seconds in this example of production, for example, it prepares in the case of 5 seconds and the case of 10 seconds, and the remaining time display meter at the speed corresponding to each. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation effective period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM becomes the same. In this case, when the operation effective period relating to the preliminary preview image CI2 of the eyebrows is selected to be 5 seconds, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is selected to be 10 seconds.

  Further, in this example of the effect, "It is intense heat in the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit whose extension has been started later than when" Extreme heat "is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect has been displayed earlier. If the "" is displayed, the jackpot is more reliable, which makes it easier to be displayed when the notice displayed later is a big hit, and the notice displayed later is displayed more easily. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying while the attention level is lowered relatively. In addition, "It is intense heat" is displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit whose extension has been started later than when "Extreme heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect has been displayed earlier In the case, the jackpot reliability may be lower or the jackpot reliability may be the same.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 38 (B1) to FIG. 38 (B11) show that both the timer advance notice effect and the effect using the chance up meter are being performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current position The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. It is shown that when the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur, and the player has a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B2), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving from the start point SP.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the sabothan character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, and the timer notice effect is started. It is shown. That is, in this example of presentation, it can be said that the start of the timer advance presentation is functioning as a notice of the chance up. In addition, “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B4), a balloon with the word "chance up timer advance notice" is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, indicating that a chance up advance notice has been made. It is informing. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is performed, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B4).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (B5), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the advance notice indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B5), "08: 81" is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B6), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “08:31” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B7), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move from the second check point CP2. In this example of presentation, the advance of the chance increase (for example, the occurrence of a cut-in) is performed when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2, and the second check point CP2 is marked in red. The letter "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been raised due to the appearance of the preliminary announcement is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the preliminary announcement is shown. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "04:14" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B8), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third check point CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, which shows that the countdown is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (B9), in the timer advance notice display TM1, instead of the timer indication, the characters “attention” are displayed to urge attention to the notice. According to this presentation example, the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is faster than the rate (speed) of the change to the whole display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time taken from the start to the end of the countdown in timer notice display TM1 started later than the time taken from the start point SP of character SBH of Sabohani to the final point GP by chance up meter CMT started earlier Can be said earlier.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the character SAH of Sabohani. It notifies that the advance notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is not only a notice of the chance up displayed corresponding to reaching the third check point CP3, but also a notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. . That is, it can be said that the target of the notice of the chance up indicated in the effect by the chance up meter CMT and the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer advance effect are the same. Alternatively, it can be said that the notice of the chance up performed when the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 is the same as the notice indicated by the word "attention" shown on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, the target of the notice of the chance up indicated in the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be different from the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer advance effect, for example, the third check in the effect by the chance up meter CMT The notice of the chance up performed when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the point CP3 is the lever image 136Va, and the notice performed as a result of the timer notice effect shows the display mode of the appeared lever image 136Va with a higher reliability. (For example, it changes from red to gold).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it to indicate that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  FIG. 39 is a view showing step by step another example of the button effect.

  In FIG. 39, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (2), the appearance of the button effect is shown. In this effect example, six sets of operation promotion informing images, each of which is a combination of a button image and a remaining time display meter, are displayed. Specifically, a first operation promotion notification image including a first button image 136a1 and a first remaining time display meter MT1 is disposed at the upper left of the display screen, and a second button image 136a2 and a second remaining time are arranged. The second operation promotion notification image including the display meter MT2 is disposed at the upper center of the display screen, and the third operation promotion notification image including the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. A fourth operation prompting notification image, which is disposed on the upper right and which includes the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is disposed on the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth residual image are displayed. The fifth operation prompting notification image consisting of the time display meter MT5 is disposed at the lower center of the display screen, and the sixth operation prompting consists of the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 Notification image is arranged in the lower right corner of the display screen. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (3), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (4), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced for all of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6. It is done. In this effect example, among the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation effective period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation effective period for the other operation promotion notification image. The operation validity period is set to pass earlier than earlier. In addition, in this example of production, the length of the operation effective period is the same in all of the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

  After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (5), as shown in FIG. 39 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification It is shown that the image changes to the copanda character KP and a notice is given. In addition, the second operation promotion informing image to the sixth operation promotion informing image are not changed. That is, in this production example, only one operation promotion notification image of the plurality of operation promotion notification images is changed by one operation of the presentation button 136 (chance button 136). Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, The display mode is changed one by one preferentially in the order of the fifth operation promotion notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. In addition, the order of the operation promotion notification image which changes a display mode is not limited to what was mentioned above, It can set suitably. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

  In this production example, the remaining operation corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image of which the display mode changes with the highest priority when the first remaining time display meter MT1 (production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. The reduction of the gauge of the time display meter is faster than the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4a), the third remaining time display meter MT3 (effect button 136) When the (chance button 136) is operated, the reduction of the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the third operation prompting notification image of which the display mode changes with priority given to the third is the first remaining time display meter MT1. Or other remaining time display meters including MT1, MT2, MT4, MT5, and MT6 may be faster or slower. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4b), when the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the priority to change the display mode is lowest. The reduction of the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the operation prompting notification image of No. 6 may be faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Moreover, as a remaining time display meter which accelerates | decreases a gauge reduction, it is not limited to what was mentioned above, It can set to an appropriate thing.

  Further, in this example of rendering, although any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image has the button images 136a1 to 136a6 as its configuration, the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth For any one or two or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4c), the sixth button image 136a6 is used as an image constituting the sixth operation promotion notification image, and the sixth operation is to promote the operation of the effect lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 of may be displayed. In this case, any remaining time display meter of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same reduction rate of the gauge, as shown in FIG. 39 (4c), the sixth The speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 is reduced faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to the other operation promotion notification images You may make it slow or you may make it slow. By configuring in this manner, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 39 (4c) is performed, after the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated five times, the effect lever 136V is operated once. It may be possible to facilitate manipulation.

  Further, in this effect example, the rate of decrease of the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image is displayed for the remaining time display in another operation promotion notification image. Although different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4 d), there may be two or more cases in which the rate of decrease of the gauge of the remaining time display meter is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (4 d), the speed at which the gauges of the display meters MT 3 and MT 5 reduce the remaining time of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image is the other operation promotion notification. The remaining time meter MT1, MT2, MT4 and MT6 of the image is different from the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image, and the fifth corresponding to the fifth operation promotion notification image The rate of decrease of the gauge may be larger in the remaining time display meter MT5.

  FIG. 40 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 40, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 40 (A1) to FIG. 40 (A6) show that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are being performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 40 (A1) shows that two timer announcement effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 are framed in from the right side of the display area, the timer notice effect is started. “10:00” is displayed in each of the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this demonstration example, as described later, since the speed of the countdown of the timer display in one timer notice display is faster than the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the other timer notice display, the time until the countdown is completed is completed. It is different. In this example of the effect, among the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed at the upper side is called the first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed at the lower side is called the second timer notice display TM2. is there.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A2), it is shown that the frame-in of two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. Each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 then starts to count down the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A3), it is shown that the timer display is being counted down in each of the two timer announcements TM1 and TM2. In this effect example, the second timer notice display TM2 has a faster countdown speed than the first timer notice display TM1. Although the first timer notice display TM1 counts down as the actual time elapses, the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “09:73”, and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is “06:73”. It has become. The countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notification display TM2 is set to the speed according to the passage of the actual time, The countdown speed of the timer notice display TM2 of 1 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM2 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, a state where 4 seconds have elapsed since the timer notice display countdown starts is shown. Can.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (A5), in the second timer advance notice display TM2, in place of the timer display, characters of “attention” are displayed to urge attention to the notice. On the other hand, the first timer notice display TM1 continues the countdown, and the timer display is "05: 87" at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A5). After that, there may be a case where a notice corresponding to the completion of the timer countdown of the second timer notice display TM2 is completed. The second timer advance notice display TM2 is erased by, for example, a frame out after the countdown is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A6), it is shown that the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed. After that, there may be a case where a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is performed. After that, after the countdown is completed, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, a frame out.

  In this example of presentation, although the case where two timer announcement effects were started simultaneously was explained, two timer announcement effects may be started at different timings, in this case, for example, the timer announcement effect started earlier. The speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 40 (B1) to 40 (B4), a plurality of timer notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed for any one timer notice effect is added It shows.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 40 (B1) shows that two timer announcement effects are simultaneously started. Specifically, the timer announcement effect is started when the timer announcement display (first timer announcement display TM1, second timer announcement display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area. “10:00” is displayed in each of the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this example of effect, the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is the same.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B2), it is shown that the frame-in of two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. Each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 then starts to count down the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), it is shown that the timer display is being counted down in each of the two timer announcements TM1 and TM2. The first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 both count down as the actual time has elapsed. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B3), both the timer display of the first timer announcement display TM1 and the second timer announcement display TM2 are “09: 73”. The countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be slower or faster than the actual time lapse. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), it is shown that the time-based effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (B4), the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to "19:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The situation is shown. At this time, since addition is not performed on the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2, a difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 Is occurring. Therefore, although two timer announcement effects are started, since time is added to one timer display on the way, the timing at which the countdown ends is different.

  In this example, although time addition is performed on one of the two timer notice displays, the time may be shortened (subtracted), or the timer notice effect may be performed. The countdown of any one timer display may be paused to make the time until the countdown is completed different.

  Also, in this example of rendering, the case has been described where two timer preview effects are started at the same time, but two timer preview effects may be started at different timings, in this case, for example, the timer preview started earlier. After adding the time to the timer display in the timer notice display relating to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display relating to the timer notice effect started later being completed, the timer notice effect started earlier The countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display may be completed. In addition, the time is reduced for the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. Alternatively, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

  Further, in this example, when two timer notice effects are being performed, and the timer overdraft effect is performed, time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display according to any one of the timer notice effects. However, the time display (or shortening of time, temporary stop of countdown, etc.) is performed for the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect, and any display mode of the timer notice display is also used. It may be changed.

  Also, after the two timer announcement effects are started, two timer addition effects etc. (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to the respective timer announcement effects are performed, whereby timer announcements pertaining to the timer announcement effects The time addition to the timer display in the display may be performed for each.

  In addition, after the two timer announcement effects are started, three timer addition effects etc. (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed, for example, for one timer announcement effect of the two timer announcement effects A change in timer display may be performed by the two timer addition effects or the like, and a change in timer display by the remaining one timer addition effect may be performed with respect to the other timer announcement effect. In addition, three timer addition effects and the like may be performed, for example, a change in timer display may be performed by only two of the three timer addition effects and the like, or only one of the three timer addition effects and the like. A change of the timer display may be performed, or a change of the timer display may not be performed by any of three timer-based effects or the like.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 40 (C1) to 40 (C4), there is a remaining time display timer indicating an operation effective period for each of the plurality of operation means in the effect to urge operation of any of the plurality of operation means. It is shown that it is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), the button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. In correspondence to the left door image DRL, a left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL , Remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Further, a right key image 137aR imitating a right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed corresponding to the right door image DRR, overlapping the right door image DRR, and also below the right key image 137aR. , The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed. Thereafter, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be received.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C2), the operation effective period of each of the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 respectively corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR is started and the gauge is reduced. The situation is shown. In this rendering example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL so that the operation valid period elapses earlier. It has become. Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR is reduced faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

  FIG. 40 (C3) shows that the left key is operated by the player and the left door image DRL is selected. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen to be enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. The right door image DRR is erased together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. Thereby, notification that the left door image DRL has been selected is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the door of the left door image DRL is opened, and the appearance of the replay symbol RP is shown. Thereby, for example, it is predicted that a pseudo link will be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 40 (C2), when the right key is operated and the right door image DRR is selected, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the right door image The door of DRR opens, and a pine pattern CC may appear. The character "Gekitsu" is added to this pine figure CC, which suggests that the jackpot's reliability has been dramatically increased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when one of the two remaining time display meters is selected to have a faster decrease in gauge, a notice display with higher reliability is performed, but in any case Or the same display may be displayed. Further, when one of the two remaining time display meters is selected to have a slower decrease in gauge, a warning display with higher reliability may be performed.

  Further, in this example of rendering, the operation effective period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation effective period of the right door image DRR, but the lengths of the operation effective periods may be the same. For example, even when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, the operation of the right key is performed while waiting until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0. It may be enabled, or while waiting, the operation of the right key may be disabled.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 41, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 41 (A1) to FIG. 41 (A12) shows that the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09: 69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and is displayed in a small size when the timer notice display is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. . Here, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of timer notice display TM1 is started, it may be at least a small size. In this case, timer notice display TM1 is large before the display of the countdown is started. The size may be displayed, the size may be displayed, or the display mode itself may be different.

  In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A2), “03:01” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (A3), when "03:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining 3 seconds is reached, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated It is changed to the approximate center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. Note that the timer notice display TM1 in which the first decorative symbol is enlarged may be overlapped. Further, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the enlarged display is performed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. Further, in this example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is always enlarged and displayed when the timer display becomes "03:00", but there may be cases where the enlargement is not made, for example, timer notice When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not enlarged. Moreover, in this example of an effect, when timer advance notice display TM1 is expanded and displayed, a display position was changed, but a display position may not change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (A4) to FIG. 41 (A7), the countdown in the enlarged timer notification display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is considered to be difficult to view by the enlarged timer notification display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed. The word "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notification display TM1. In addition, after timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" does not need to be performed, and it is not necessary to perform any presentation.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is shrunk and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (approximately right center of the display screen). The timer advance notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (A10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo run symbol, in which the character of Tonosama is represented in the middle symbol, moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A11), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 41 (A12), the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is informed that the pseudo link will be executed.

  In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged when the timer display shows "03:00" indicating 3 seconds remaining in the timer notice effect, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. The color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numeric part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice may be displayed. The orientation of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from horizontal orientation to vertical orientation), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer Another element such as a character or a symbol may be added to the advance notice display TM 1, addition of time to the timer display may be performed, or time reduction to the timer display may be performed. The countdown of the timer may stop, or the speed of the countdown of the timer display may increase, or the timer display may count up (rewind), or the timer notice display TM1 is split and a new one is displayed. If the plurality of timer notices are displayed, the timer notices may be integrated into one timer notice.

  Also, in this example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes of small size and large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes, for example, timer display or When displaying the "attention" character display in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in medium size, and when the timer display or the "attention" character display is displayed in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is large. The size may be displayed. By this, for example, the display mode may be able to be changed according to the reliability of the big hit.

  Further, in the example of the effect, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the large size, but for example, the size may be changed from the small size to the large size through the middle size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from small size to medium size, and when it becomes "03:00", medium size to large size It may be changed in size. Moreover, although it changes from small size to medium size, there may be a case where it does not change to large size.

  Further, in this example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). When the remaining time in the timer display becomes "00:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size, or when displaying the text of "attention", the timer notice display TM1 The size may be changed to a large size.

  Further, in this effect example, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the color of the frame or the background of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc.). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made to differ depending on the size of the timer advance notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

  Also, for example, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the color of the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc. ). Also, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the size of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention" (for example, high reliability in the order of large size> medium size> small size, etc. ). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the shape of the character display of "attention".

  In addition, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, a certain effect may easily appear. For example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the pseudo run symbol is likely to stop. You may do so.

  Further, in this example of the effect, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed. However, even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. May be Here, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily made.

  Further, in this example, at the time when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 starts to count down, the timer notice display TM1 is in the small size display mode, but at the start of the countdown or at the start of the display of the timer notice display TM1. The display mode may be large.

  Further, in this example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the timer display also changes to a large size, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, and the timer display The size of may not be changed. Also, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer advance display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. In addition, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion or the background of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, although the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may not change. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  Also, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer advance display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. In addition, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  The form of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed in form by animation, the timer display may also be changed in form by animation. In addition, although the form of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the animation, the timer display may not be changed. Further, although the timer display changes in form due to animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 41 (B1) to FIG. 41 (B4) show another example in which the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (B1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, “00:31” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Moreover, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being changed and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (B2) to FIG. 41 (B3), the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B2), although “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, it is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 changes to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.
The word "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notification display TM1. In addition, after timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" does not need to be performed, and it is not necessary to perform any presentation. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. As described above, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed not only during the countdown of the timer display but also when the character display of "attention" is performed. In addition, when the timer display becomes “00:00”, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 42A1 to 42A3, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, an example in which the timer advance notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode is displayed on another display means It shows. In the effect example shown in FIG. 42 (A1) to FIG. 42 (A3), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E. Is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 42 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is disposed at the upper center of the sub display device 208. In the timer advance notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed as the timer indication, and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S in a small size. When the effect of the countdown by the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A2), variation display of decorative symbols is still performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the timer display countdown continues in the timer advance notice display TM1, and "03: 01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (A2).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A3), when the timer display is remaining for 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S is moved to the decorative symbol display device 208, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement and enlargement display by animation may be performed. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged, or the timer notice display TM1 is a decoration symbol from the sub display device 208S. The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208, or may be displayed before the timer advance notice display TM1 straddles the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the movement and the enlarged display is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 42B1 to 42B, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, another display means is used to display the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode. An example is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed as a timer display, and a countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B2), variation display of the decorative symbol is still performed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B2). Further, at this time, the sub display device 208S is in operation, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is positioned on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The displayed decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, while the sub display device 208S is moving up, the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S are erased. The variation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be deleted before the sub display device 208S starts moving, and the sub display device 208S completes the movement. May be erased after the sub display device 208S starts moving, or may be erased when the sub display device 208S completes moving. Also, only one of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. In addition, the display position of the change icon h0, the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (B3), when the timer display is remaining for 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is moved to the sub display device 208S, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement and enlargement display by animation may be performed. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the decoration symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged, or the timer notice display TM1 is displayed from the decoration symbol display device 208 as a sub The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208S, or may be displayed before the timer advance notice display TM1 straddles the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Although the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the movement and the enlarged display is performed. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decoration symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 is displayed. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be continuously displayed. In this case, for example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. Furthermore, when displaying the timer notice display TM1 on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer displays on these timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. .

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 42 (C1) to FIG. 42 (C9) show another example of the display mode after the change of the timer notice display TM1. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09: 69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 42 (C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C2), “03:01” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (C3), when the timer display shows "03:00" indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is disposed inside the circular meter. As shown in (C3) to (C6) of FIG. 42, the display state of the circular meter section changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases in the clockwise direction from the 12 o'clock position as time passes. Although the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode is partially overlapped with the change icon h0, the change icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. Also, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but for example, the size may be changed depending on the remaining time, for example, the circular meter part is enlarged when the remaining one second is reached It may be displayed. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode may be configured only by a circular meter unit, and the timer display may not be performed. In addition, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to be recognized than in the non-overlapping state. The first decorative symbol may overlap with the timer notice display TM1a in which the display mode has changed. In addition, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, the change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown continues while the animation of the change display is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the change display is being performed. When the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed without changing the timer display portion.

  Thereafter, as shown in (C4) to (C6) of FIG. 42, the countdown and the decrease display of the gauge in the timer advance notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". In this effect example, the effect of the countdown is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter section. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is considered to be difficult to view by the timer notice display TM1a. When stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 42 (C7), the timer notice display TM1a is changed to the timer display and the pseudo continuous effect is performed. The character "is displayed. As a result, it is informed that the pseudo connected effect is to be performed. In addition, character display other than "continuation" may be performed, for example, when it shifts to SP reach as a result of the countdown of a timer display completing, it displays as "SP reach" etc. It may be informed that it will shift. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, “notice” may be displayed in order to focus attention on the occurrence of a notice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character in the middle pattern is displayed on the middle symbol. A display is started in which the pseudo linked symbol moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. After that, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo run is executed.

  In this effect example, the character "continuation" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo continuous effect is performed, but for example, a question mark is added to the character "continuation", etc. A display may be performed in which the effect may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when the pseudo-series effect is performed, the big hit may be determined.

  Further, in the example of the effect, when the timer indications for the same effect are respectively displayed by a plurality of timer advance notice displays, one timer advance notice may be displayed in a large size, or both may be displayed. The timer advance notice may be displayed in a large size. Also, one of the timer notices is displayed as "03:00", and the other timer notice is displayed in a different manner, for example, roughly displayed as "3 seconds later". Display of countdown may be performed.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 43, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 43 (A1) to FIG. 43 (A8), a state is shown in which the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A2), it is shown that the timer-adding effect by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon in which the character of "above" is displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed, and the time display is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. It is informed that it will be performed. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer advance presentation effect is extended.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is performed, and the time to be added is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "05:00" indicating that the timer display is 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decorative symbol display It is changed to the approximate center of the device 208. In the example of the effect, the countdown is interrupted once at “05:00”, but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this effect example, the timer announcement display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the timer announcement display TM1 is performed by adding the time to the timer display. Is an enlarged display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner is overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the timer notice display in which the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged. It may be made to overlap with TM1. In addition, the conditions under which the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed are not limited to the addition of the time in the timer display, for example, when the timer display changes such as shortening of the time in the timer display or stopping the countdown. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (A5), in the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, the display of count-up animation is performed, and the effect that the time in the timer display is added is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A6), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. . The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 is shrunk and displayed in the original size And the display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 43 (B1) to FIG. 43 (B7) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the time of the timer display is added in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped at the left symbol and "decoration 7" is stopped at the right symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown display of the timer display is completed, and "00:00" is displayed. There is.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and changes to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. Is displayed. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (B3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and “00:00” is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed in which the pseudo-connected symbol represented by the middle symbol in the middle pattern is moved at low speed from the upper side to the lower side. The pseudo run effect by this pseudo run symbol is continuously performed from FIG. 43 (B3) to FIG. (B7).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (B4), in the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, the display of count-up animation is performed, and the effect that the time in the timer display is added is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (approximately right center of the display screen). Thereafter, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer indication is resumed. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in the same size without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the pseudo symbol is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B7), cut-in display is performed, which includes the character of the character of “Toll-like” and the “continuation” character display, and thereafter, the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is performed, and the timer display is "14: 92" at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B7).

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 44, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 44 (A1) to (A8), when the display mode of the timer advance notice is changed and the rank of the notice is increased, the timer advance notice is enlarged and displayed. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “20:35” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A2), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A2).

  FIG. 44 (A3) shows that the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (A4), the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display is 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 is performed. The color of the frame is changed from white to red, and "LvUP" is added to indicate that the jackpot reliability has increased. Then, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is also changed to the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 has been ranked up. Although the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, the countdown may be suspended while the enlarged display is performed. Here, in this effect example, the timer announcement display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, and the display mode of the timer announcement display TM1 is a display with high reliability of the big hit. The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by being changed to the mode.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is shrunk and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in the same size without being reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (A6), when the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display as shown in FIG. 44 (A7). The word "attention" is displayed to prompt attention to the advance notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. In this cut-in display, a character of "jump" is displayed along with the princess character, which suggests that the jackpot is highly reliable. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), in response to the rank increase of the timer advance notice display TM1, the letter display of “expected large” is additionally noted. This makes it more likely to be a big hit than the case where a cut-in display in which the character display of "expected large" is not added is displayed. Note that the character display of “expected large” may or may not be displayed when the timer advance notice display TM1 is ranked up. In addition, the character display of "expected large" may be displayed on condition that the timer advance notice display TM1 is ramped up, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed without being ranked up. May be In this effect example, the character display of "expected large" is easier to be displayed when the timer advance notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also changed to perform advance notice display. The change of the display of the fluctuation icon h0 may be performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer advance effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer advance effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice performed by the timer notice effect may be performed.

  As described above, in this effect example, rank-up of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be a notification for indicating that the notice performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice is promoted, or the timer notice The rank increase of the display TM 1 may function as a notice of the chance increase. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be ranked up to notify that the expectation for displaying a high notice of a big hit in advance is high in advance.

  Also, in this effect example, the rank up of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted, for example, the first decorative symbol It may be suggested that the reach design in may be promoted. Specifically, for example, when reach effect is performed with "decoration 2" in which the probability variation big hit is not determined and reach production is being performed, if the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, the probability variation big hit if it becomes a big hit May be determined, and may change to the reach of "decorative 7" which is likely to be a big hit.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 44 (B1) to FIG. 44 (B7) show that the effect using the chance up meter is started when the timer advance effect is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, “20: 35” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the display of the animation of the duel scene between the main character of the main character and the enemy player, the swordsman, has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B3), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move from the start point SP. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B3).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B4), the character BOY of the bowie appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side at the timing when the safari character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice of chance improvement is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (B4), when the boy character BOY appears, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size to make the boy character BOY stand out. That is, by displaying the timer notice display TM1 in a reduced size, it may be possible not to disturb the display of the character BOY of the boy, and it is also possible that the notice of the chance improvement is performed by the character BOY of the boy. It may be easily recognizable. The timer advance display TM1 continues the countdown of the timer display even if it is displayed in a reduced size, and "15:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B4). Note that, while the reduction display is performed, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (B4) to FIG. 44 (B6), the reduction display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is maintained until the advance notice of the chance up by the character BOY of Boi ends.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (B7), when the advance notice of the chance up by the character BOY of Boi ends, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

  In this example of presentation, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size while the advance notice of the chance up is performed, thereby notifying that the advance notice of the chance up is performed. By changing the display mode, it may be possible to achieve the purpose. For example, in addition to the reduction display of the timer notice display TM1, the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1, the frame of the timer notice display TM1 or the color change of the timer display itself, the change of the display position of the timer notice display TM1, the timer notice The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by the change of the shape of the display TM1 or the like.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect example of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 45, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 45 (A1) to FIG. 45 (A3) show how to change the display position of the timer advance notice displayed when shifting to the super reach. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” is displayed to indicate that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown to FIG. 45 (A1), a mode transitioning to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “21: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A2), a super reach title in which an enemy character sword player is displayed in a large size is displayed, and a state of being developed into a super reach (word player reach) is shown. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "20: 35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A3), an animation of a duel scene of the main character of the main character and the enemy player of the sword is displayed. When the animation display of the duel scene is started, the timer preview display TM1 changes its display position. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Also, when the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A3 '), the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size to make the effect of super reach noticeable.

  In this production example, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the transition to super reach shown in FIG. 45 (A1) is performed The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the display of the Super Reach title shown in FIG. 45 (A2) is performed. It is also good. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be configured to move again to the original position at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or 0, timing increase of the timer notice advance TM1, etc.), It may be displayed as it is. In addition, even when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, the enlarged view (for example, first displayed at a specific timing (for example, the timing when 3 seconds or 0), the chance advance of the timer notice display TM1, etc.) Display (or display larger than the size initially displayed).

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 45 (B1) to FIG. 45 (B7) show how to change the display position of the timer advance notice displayed when the effect movable body operates. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown to FIG. 45 (B1), a mode transitioning to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, “27: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In FIG. 45 (B2), it is shown that the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "25: 34" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 is at least partially overlapped by the second large-screen behavior character item 224Gb and the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd, and the timer notification display is more than in the non-overlapped state. TM1 is considered to be difficult to view.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position so as not to be overlapped with the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper end of the center of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size. In addition, when the 1st large board behavior role thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior role thing 224Gd do not operate, it is not necessary to change a display position, but a display position may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easy-to-see manner. At this time, although the effect image appearing due to the light emission of the light guide plate IL is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed by this. When the light guide plate IL emits light, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 45 (B6), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are in the initial state, respectively. Return to position.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B7), the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (the right end center portion of the display screen). In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "21: 37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B7). The timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd starts to return to the initial position. The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd has started to return to the initial position, or the timer notice display TM1 may be performed. After the start of the movement to the original position, the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd may start an operation to return to the initial position.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 45 (C1) to FIG. 45 (C5) show that the positional relationship between the timer advance notice display and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “29: 69” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C2), it is shown that “decoration 7” is stopped at the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and it is in the reach state. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “22:04” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C2). Also at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C3), reach effect is started, and the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved to the upper left and right, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. , The navigation character YM and the hold icon h11 are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "21: 37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the right symbol of the first decoration symbol. The timer advance notice display TM1 may overlap with the first decorative symbol.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4) shows a state of being developed into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4), the title of Super Reach is displayed, in which the image of the hostess swordsman is displayed in a large size. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the host of the sword is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol. In the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-described chance up meter CMT is displayed, and effects are performed using the chance up meter.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer advance presentation.

  In FIG. 46, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 46 (A1) to FIG. 46 (A10) show that the display position of the timer advance notice display is changed by the operation of the player. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” is displayed, which indicates that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown to FIG. 46 (A1), a mode transition to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and “21: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A2), a super reach title in which the enemy player sword player is displayed in a large size is displayed, and a state of being developed into a super reach (venger reach) is shown. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "20: 35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A3), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A3). In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is performed with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137 and the word "Reduce timer" is displayed. It is notified that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be displayed in a reduced size by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer advance presentation is started, or when the reach state is reached May be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the lower key of operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A4), timer preview display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size as shown in FIG. 46 (A5). change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to above the guide display. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size. When the display position is changed, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being contracted, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may be changed after displayed in a reduced size. In addition, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be made non-display. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46 (A5), the characters “enlarge timer” are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the upper key to enlarge the timer notice display TM1. Then, the display is displayed in the original size, and the display position is also notified to return to the original position.

  Thereafter, when the upper key of operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A6), timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size as shown in FIG. 46 (A7). , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "17: 81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46 (A7), the guide display in which the characters “Shrink timer” are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is performed, and the player operates the lower key. Thus, it is notified that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be displayed in a reduced size. In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 46 (A3), when the upper key of operation key unit 137 is operated when timer advance notice display TM1 is at the default display size and at the default display position, The timer advance notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A8) shows that the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A8).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (A9), when "03:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining for 3 seconds is reached, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is erased. It is shown that the display position (display size) of the timer advance notice display TM1 can not be changed. The display position and the display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. Also, when the timer display changes to "03:00", the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, and if it is displayed in a reduced size, at this timing, the default display size is returned to the default display position. It may be displayed as it is or may be reduced and displayed at the changed display position.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A10), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, and it is shown that the countdown is completed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 46 (B1) to FIG. 46 (B9) show that the timer advance notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the title of Super Reach is displayed, in which the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into Super Reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and “20: 35” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B2), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "18: 19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B2).

  FIG. 46 (B3) shows that the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display is remaining 15 seconds, and thereafter, FIG. As shown in (B5), the timer advance notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as a left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right may be referred to as a right timer notice display TM2R. The timer displays in these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R respectively indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B5), “13:56” is shown. In this example of presentation, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit has become high by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number divided by the timer advance notice may be three or more instead of two, and the larger the number divided, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. In these timer notices TM1L and TM1R, although the color of the frame changes to red, the color of the frame does not have to change, and the direction of the frame changes to red when the color of the frame changes to red. It may be more likely to be a big hit than when the color does not change. Also, the color of one of these timer notices TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (B6), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 46 (B7), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R The word "Attention" will be displayed in order to call attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (B8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a cut-in display showing that the princess character is saying "Rewrite reach" is being performed. There is. This cut-in display is an effect that is performed when the timer display countdown on one timer notification display (for example, the left timer notification display TM1L) of the two timer notification displays TM1L and TM1R is completed, and the big hit is trusted. It is reported that promotion to a higher reach effect of sex. Note that the effect may be an effect performed by the completion of the countdown of the timer display in both of the timer notices of the two timer notices TM1L and TM1R.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9), a state in which it has been developed into the SP Ken-Age reach is shown. The SP Ken-Age Reach is a reach where the Ken-Achi reach develops and shifts, and it is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when it does not develop from a Ken-A-Kai reach to an SP-Ken-Age reach. In SP Ken-Age Reach, as shown in Fig. 46 (B9), it is the same as the pre-developed Ken-A-Ok reach in that the hero of the main character and the enemy of the sword is facing the same position. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9), a notice display showing that a copanda cheering party KPD composed of three copanda characters is cheering is performed, and the SP Kengo Reach's It reports that the reliability for the big hit is dramatically high. The copanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display in the other timer notice display (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

  In this production example, the advance notice of the chance up and the development of the reach production are performed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (the development of reach production) corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can also be said that, among the developed reach productions, chances-up are being performed.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 47, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the general view display 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 47 (A1) to FIG. 47 (A5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the example of effects shown in FIG. 47 (A1) to FIG. (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsman is being developed into a super reach (Kenai reach). . Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 "1" shown is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer announcement effect is performed, “15: 47” is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (A2), animation of a duel scene is continuously performed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "15:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A2).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (A3), a predetermined effect is applied to the display area near the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display area near the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "14:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (A4), it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer advance display is divided into two. The timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A4), “13: 56 ”. The timer display continues to count down while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation, but the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. In this case, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted. In this example of presentation, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit has become high by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number divided by the timer advance notice may be three or more instead of two, and the larger the number divided, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. For example, timer display may be performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "12:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A5).

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 47 (B1) to FIG. 47 (B5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the example of effects shown in FIG. 47 (B1) to FIG. (B5), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini display device 208P is provided. The mini display device 208P is provided, for example, at an appropriate position such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). In this effect example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as LCD, EL, 7 segments, a lamp, a drum and the like may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and can drive the mini display device 208P into the easy-to-see state and the hard-to-see state by driving the shutter member.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and “18:19” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. The timer display effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6: 19" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this production example, it is shown that two timer notice effects are being performed in parallel, and the timer display becomes "0" in the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. In such a case, a presentation such as a notice of chance up may be performed, and a presentation such as a notice of chance up is also performed when the timer display becomes “0” in the timer advance presentation on the mini display device 208P. There is a case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (B2), the timer notice is displayed at "15:00" indicating that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is 15 seconds remaining. The effect image is displayed around TM1, and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, even in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing of "3:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining 3 seconds.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time shown on the mini display device 208P is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The word "UP" is displayed to indicate that the timer display of TM1 is to be added.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B4), the time of 3 seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and updated to "18:00".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (B5), with the timer notice display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is resumed. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, the shutter member makes it difficult to visually recognize the display screen. In this effect example, when time addition is performed on the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is ended, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even when time addition is performed to the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM in the device 208, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P may not end, and thereafter, the timer display may be counted down.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 48, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 48A1 to 48A10, a state in which the notification that the timer preview effect is being prepared is displayed by being displayed before the timer preview effect starts is notified. It shows. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 3, and the first icon h11 to the third icon h13 are displayed, and the second number of reservations is displayed. , “3” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is three is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A2) shows that the timer advance notice preparation effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice preparation effect is started by the frame of the timer notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen. The timer announcement preparation effect is to display an indication that the preparation is in progress until the timer announcement effect starts, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. Note that, for example, display of "STANDBY" described later may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A3), it is shown that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, “STANDBY” indicating that the preparation for the timer advance notice effect is in progress is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and this is notified. That is, this effect example is an effect to be performed as one aspect of the advance notice for announcing that the timer advance effect will be performed in the hold state. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed functions as a preparation display. In addition, it may be the said fluctuation notice which announces that timer notice effect is performed in the symbol display under fluctuation.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (A4), the timer advance notice display TM1 on which the character "STANDBY" is displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display unit. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size and becomes a mini-size display size. When the display position is changed, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being contracted, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may be changed after displayed in a reduced size. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may not be displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may not be changed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A5), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 3—decoration 9—decoration 1”. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the first hold of the special view 1. The timer preview display TM1 still maintains the display below the second hold display unit. Thus, it can be said that the timer advance preparation effect is an effect that may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A7), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 on which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the first hold of the special view 1. The timer preview display TM1 still maintains the display below the second hold display unit. In addition, the symbol variation display of this time is a thing corresponding to the pending which was the target of the pre-reading.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size, and the display position is also returned to the original position, and the timer display is started from the "STANDBY" display. It is shown that it switches to the display of "10:00" as. Thereby, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect has been started. When the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, an animation moving while expanding the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then enlarged, or the display position may be changed after the enlarged display. Also, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing at which the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A10), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started.

  After that, for example, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes a display of a specific time (for example, "03:00") or the display mode changes, the display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 You may change from small size to large size.

  In this demonstration example, the timer display countdown is started after changing the display position of the timer notice display TM1, but the display of the timer notice changes from "STANDBY" to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display After the countdown of is started, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 48 (B1) to (B8), a plurality of notice icons MI1 of the clock functioning as the advance notice are stocked, and the timer notice effect is performed for the number of the notice icons MI1 of the stocked clocks. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 3, and the first icon h11 to the third icon h13 are displayed, and the second number of reservations is displayed. , “3” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is three is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B2), a state in which “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. The notice icon MI1 of the clock is added to the “decoration 3”, which indicates that the notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked. Note that two or more watch notice icons MI1 may be stocked at one time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B3), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 3—decoration 9—decoration 1”. Further, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the stocked number of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, display of “timer notice stock × 1” indicating that a notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked is performed. Thereby, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that time may be added to the timer display in the timer advance presentation effect by the number of stocks of the notice icon MI1 of the clock. Further, the remaining time displayed on the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is started may be determined according to the stock number of the notice icon MI1 on the clock. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the stock number is added each time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears. In this effect example, it can be said that the display in which the number of stock of timer notices is displayed in the timer advance stock display area TMst functions as a display in preparation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B4), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, it is shown that a navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is also performed. The navigation character preview is performed by displaying a balloon in which the characters "get" are displayed together with the clock icon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The navigation character notice in this effect example functions as a prefetch notice that the timer notice effect is performed within the hold state. As described above, the number of notice icons MI1 of the clock stocked in one symbol change display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Also, there may be a plurality of types of effects performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. In addition, in the effect performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked, the number of notice icons MI1 of the clock to be stocked is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B5), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Further, in the timer notice stock display area TMst, display of “timer notice stock × 3” is performed, which indicates that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B6), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B7), it is shown that one of the notice icons MI1 of the three stocked clocks is digested and the timer notice effect is started. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer advance notice display TM1, “10:00” is displayed as the timer indication, and it is suggested that a notice of chance up may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Also, in this example, one notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and one timer notice effect is started, but two watch notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. May be performed. Further, in this example of rendering, one preview icon MI1 of the clock is digested and one timer preview effect is started, but for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B7 ′), the preview icon MI1 of the clock is The timer announcement effect may be started without being digested.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B8), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position substantially at the center of the right end of the display screen, and the timer display countdown is started. At this time, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by moving animation. In addition, when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may not be displayed at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed at the approximate right end center of the display screen from the beginning. .

In the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a timer notification effect in the timer notification display TM1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a certain effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 20 (11) to FIG. 20 (12) or a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h 0 shown in FIG. 21 (c2), the symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208S, the first decorative symbol display device, etc., with a lever effect shown in FIG. 21 (c2), a notice by stopping display of the symbol CC of pine as a chance symbol 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a display for notifying the timing when the effect display using the mini display device 208P is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a timer overlay effect shown in FIG. 22 (2) to FIG. (5)],
The second display is a display for previewing that the timing at which the certain effect starts is changed [e.g., navigation in the timer-over effect shown in FIG. 22 (2) to FIG. 5 (5) "Overlay" or "+10 seconds" displayed on the balloon of character YM, etc.]
The second display may be displayed while the first display is being displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (2) to FIG. When the game is being played, timers are added, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, even if the time until the start of a certain effect is notified by the first display, it is notified that the time notified by the second display changes. In addition to waiting for the time until a certain effect to start, it has the expectation that the time may change, and the first display also enjoys There are times when you can.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the first display and the second display. . Moreover, the display means may display the first display and the second display without fail, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing when a certain effect is performed. In addition, the first display may always notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed.

  In addition, the second display may give notice that only the timing at which a certain effect is started to change, or may give notice that other than the timing at which a certain effect is started to change. It may be one. In addition, the second display may always give notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started to change, and may not give notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started to change. It may be one.

  In addition, only the second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Also, the second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed, or the second display may not be displayed while the first display is displayed.

  Note that the start of the timer advance notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed) It may be that the countdown display of the countdown display has been started. In addition, the end of the timer advance notice display may be that the first display has become non-display, or that the countdown display has become non-display (for example, the numbers are erased, and "the attention" is Displayed state may also be included), countdown by countdown display may have ended (for example, 0 is displayed), display displayed on the first display after countdown has ended It may be that (for example, the character display of "attention") is hidden.

Also, the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 22 (2) to FIG. (5), After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated, and the time display on the timer display is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to notice a change in the display mode of the first display.

  Here, only the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display after the second display is displayed. The display mode of displays other than the above may also be changed. In addition, the display mode of the first display may be changed without fail after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display is displayed after the second display is displayed. It may be configured such that it may not change.

  In addition, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display is only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

"The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the sub display device 208S, etc.],
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means,
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the line of sight of the player may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but the second display means is also displayed on the second display means. In some cases, it is possible to focus on both of the two display means without concentrating the line of sight on only the first display means.

  Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may be composed of display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . In addition, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It is also good.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display means or may not be displayed on the first display means.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be displayed on the second display means or may not be displayed on the second display means.

[The second display means is disposed on the front side of the first display means [e.g., as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the sub display device 208S is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Placed on the side etc],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display [eg, as shown in FIG. 26 (A2) to FIG. (A3) , And the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S in which the timer addition effect is performed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the second display may cause the second display to be focused and a certain effect may be started by the fact that the second display may overlap the first display while the second display is being displayed. In some cases, it may be easier to recognize that the time to change may change.

  Here, there may be a case where only the first display means is overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display, or the second display means displays the second display Display means other than the first display means may be overlapped depending on the display means. In addition, the first display means may always be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display, and the second display means displays the second display. One display means may not be overlapped.

  In addition, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means in which the second display is displayed, or the second display in which the second display is displayed The first display means may be overlapped also by display means other than the means.

Also, “first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B1), etc.]” and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. The second display means is configured to be movable between a position at which the front side substantially at the center of 208 overlaps, and the like.
The second display means is a display means overlapping the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device In the overlapping position on the substantially central front side of 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means of may also be configured to be movable. Also, the second display means may be configured to move necessarily between the first position and the second position, or the second display means may be arranged between the first position and the second position. It may be configured such that it may not move.

  Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, or may be configured other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

  Also, the second display means may be capable of overlapping with the first display means only at the second position, or may be capable of overlapping with the first display means at positions other than the second position. It may be Also, the second display means may always overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. It is also good.

In addition, “the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a display of a countdown in the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. 20 (7), etc.]”
The countdown display is a display for performing the timing until the certain effect is performed by counting down [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. (7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1 The countdown in the display notifies the timing when the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may include only the countdown display or may include displays other than the countdown display. In addition, the first display may include the countdown display without fail or may not include the countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be performed by counting down only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or the timing other than the timing until a certain effect may be performed by a countdown. . In addition, the countdown display may always be performed by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or even if the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be performed by counting down. Good.

Also, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is continued.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, even in the state in which the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, and even in the state in which the second display is displayed, it is continued other than the countdown by countdown display There may be one. In addition, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued, or even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. It is also good.

  Moreover, the countdown by countdown display may be continued only in the state where the second display is displayed, and the countdown by countdown display is continued even in the state other than the state where the second display is displayed. It is also good.

Also, while the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, during the display of the second display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or during the display of the second display, other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. In addition, while the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted at all times, or while the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only during the display of the second display, and the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even during the display of the second display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, display of a character of“ focus ”” in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG.
The third display is a display different from the first display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (7) to FIG. When the display becomes 0, the "notice" character is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the third display can be further enhanced by the countdown by the first display.

  Here, when the first display is a display showing 0, only the third display may be displayed, and when the first display becomes a display showing 0, a third display Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be necessarily displayed, and when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the first display is a display indicating 0, and the first display may be a display other than a case where the display indicates 0. Three displays may be displayed.

Also, in the case where the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the second display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation by the display of the second display.

  In addition, when the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed finally in the case where the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed. It may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a pseudo connected effect shown in FIG.
The certain effect is a effect including the fourth display,
The fourth display is effect display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include displays other than the fourth display. In addition, a certain effect may include the fourth display or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, “a movable effect device capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest 224E, a one-piece box character 224H, a first large-area behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd, a second decorative symbol display device 208M , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation [e.g., the operation of the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-surface behavior character article 224Gd shown in FIG. 21 (d3), etc.]
The certain effect is a effect including the first operation,
The first operation is a rendering operation.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, dynamic effects using the effect moving means become possible, and there are cases where it is possible to further improve the effect.

  Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be executable other than the plurality of types of operations. Further, the effect enabling means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  Further, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing operations other than the first operation. In addition, the effect movable means may always execute the first operation or may not execute the first operation.

  In addition, a certain effect may include only the first action, or may include actions other than the first action. Also, a certain effect may include the first action or may not include the first action.

Also, in the case where the certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol is finally more likely to be determined and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [eg, FIG. 20 (11) to FIG. 12) When the pseudo run shown in is started, it is easier to be a big hit than when the pseudo run is not started, etc.)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that a certain effect is performed.

  In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed in the end, or even if a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed. It is also good.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays may be a fifth display [for example, a conversation notice shown in FIG. 16 (9) to FIG. (14), and FIG. 20 (9) to FIG. The pseudo-sequence effect shown in Figure 29 and the notice display etc. of the chance up shown in Figure 29 (4) and Figure 13 (13),
In the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display, the fifth display may be started to be displayed.
The fifth display is a notice display,
In the case where the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the fifth display is not displayed [eg, FIG. 16 (9) to FIG. 16 (14) It is more likely to be a big hit if the conversation notice shown in is given than if the conversation notice is not given, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for the fifth display to be displayed in the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display. is there.

  Here, in the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display, only the fifth display may start to be displayed, or the first display In the period from the display start to the display start of the second display, the display other than the fifth display may be started. In addition, during the period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, the fifth display may be always started, or after the first display is started The display of the fifth display may not be started in the period until the display of the second display is started.

  In addition, the fifth display may start to be displayed only during a period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, or the first display may be displayed. The display of the fifth display may be started also in a period other than the period from the start to the display start of the second display.

  In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or even when the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol is not finally displayed. There may be.

Also, “The game console is a pachinko machine [eg pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), etc.]
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. May be displayed during the period
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, a notice by a lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18), etc.]
The period display is a display for notifying of a first timing [for example, timing shown by check point CP3 where advance notice by lever effect is started shown in FIG. 29 (18)],
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start.
The display of the period may be erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2), If the cut-in display shown in FIG. 33 (A2) is performed before the timing indicated by the point CP3, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the first timing of the period display is known while the period display is being displayed, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing approaches. Here, the display means can be made to look at the display means in order to see the period display even before the first timing when the period display may be hidden before the first timing comes. There is a case.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to be drawn into the game from the display of the period display to the first timing.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Also, a plurality of types of display may be displayed without fail, or there may be cases where a plurality of types of display are not displayed.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed also in a period other than the specified period. Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, there may be a case where only the period display is erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started, or it becomes the first timing after the display of the period display is started Before the display other than the period display may be erased. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased before the first timing after the period display starts being displayed, or the period before the first timing starts after the period display is started. The display may not be erased.

  In addition, the period display may be erased only before the first timing comes after the period display start being started, or it becomes the first timing after the period display start is started. The period display may be erased other than before.

  The displayed period may be displayed during the symbol variation display, during the big hit game, during the demonstration display, during the symbol stop display, or the like, regardless of reach.

  Also, the period display may be displayed during the execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during the execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during the execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed in the case of long reach but may be displayed in the case of SP reach. Also, it may not be displayed in the first half of the SP reach but may be displayed in the second half of the SP reach. Also, it may be displayed in the first half of SP reach and not displayed in the second half of SP reach.

  Furthermore, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the chance up meter starts to be displayed, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended. Good. Moreover, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the effect such as the reach effect where the period display is performed is started, and the end of the period display is the timing when the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed. Also, the start of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or marker in the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or marker in the chance up meter is ended. It may be. In addition, when display / non-display of the chance up meter is configured to be possible by the operation means, the start of the period display means the timing at which the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operation means. The end may be timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operation means.

  In addition, from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display indicating that the chance up meter can be displayed is displayed) to the start of the period display until the period display effect is ended (for example, the chance up meter May be displayed until the display that suggests that it can be displayed is hidden, or until the chance up meter is hidden).

  Further, the term period display includes not only those displayed until the first timing is reached, but also those erased before the first timing is reached.

  Moreover, there may be two or more in a period in which the reach effect display is performed for a certain period. At this time, the period display may start and end at each certain period, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period starts, a new period is started. The second period display as display may start and end.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display may be a second effect display [for example, a cut-in display of eyebrows shown in FIG. 33 (A2), a display of an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b), etc.] And
The second effect display is a display different from the first effect display.
The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. 33 (A2 b), a chance up meter In the effect by CMT, there is a case where the display of the eyebrow cut-in shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b) are performed before Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3. Etc.],
The period display is a display that does not notify the timing when the display of the second effect display starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. (A2 b) In the effect by the up meter CMT, the display timing of the eyelid cut-in shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b), etc. are not notified],
During the display of the second effect display, the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. (A2 b), it is shown in FIG. When the display of the eyelid cut-in or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b) is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing by displaying the display not notified by the period display, so before the first timing comes There are also cases where you can have hope.

  Here, there may be a case where only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing comes, or before the first timing comes, effect displays other than the second effect display are also displayed There may be cases. In addition, the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing comes, or the second effect display is displayed other than before the first timing comes There may be.

  In addition, the period display may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or there may be cases where the notification of the second effect display is not notified other than the start of the display May be In addition, the period display may not necessarily notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

  Moreover, only the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display, and the display other than the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be erased during the second effect display.

  In addition, the period display may be erased only while the second effect display is displayed, or the period display may be erased other than during the second effect display.

  In addition, instead of the effect display, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a discharge position, or a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing withdrawal of the prepaid card may be used. Further, as an aspect of the effect display, a display that appears by light emission by an LED, an operation by an effect movable means, or light emission by a light guide plate may be used.

  Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may be notified by a period display. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

In addition, “the second effect display is a second advance display [for example, a display of a cut-in of eyebrows shown in FIG. 33 (A2) or an advance display by the display of an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b), etc.] is there,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the fact that the second effect display is displayed before the first timing can indicate that there may be a big hit without waiting for the first timing. In some cases, it is possible to give the player expectations even in the period until the first timing comes.

In addition, in the case where the second effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally likely to be finalized and displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, when the second effect display is displayed, finally the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed, or even if the second effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, “a movable effect device capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest 224E, a one-piece box character 224H, a first large-area behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd, a second decorative symbol display device 208M , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation [for example, the operation of the first large-screen behavior player 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd shown in FIG. 33 (A3 b),
The second operation is a rendering operation,
While the second effect display [for example, the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) and the like] is displayed, the second operation may be performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, dynamic effects using the effect moving means become possible, and there are cases where it is possible to further improve the effect.

  Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be capable of being executed other than the plurality of types of operations. Further, the effect movable means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  In addition, while the second effect display is being displayed, there may be a case where only the second operation is performed, and while the second effect display is being displayed, an operation other than the second operation is also performed. May be In addition, the second operation may be performed while the second effect display is displayed, or the second operation may not be performed while the second effect display is displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of operations may be performed as the first operation [for example, the operation of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 15 (E1) to FIG. 15 (E2), or FIG. The movement of one thousand box box work item 224 H, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, after the period display is erased, the period display is displayed again [eg, as shown in FIG. 33 (A2a) to FIG. (A3a), the princess character After the chance-up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in indication, when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance-up meter CMT is again displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have expectation for redisplay of the period display.

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be displayed again, or after the period display is erased, the displays other than the period display may be displayed again. It may be configured. Also, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased, or may be configured so that the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is erased. May be

  Also, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display has been erased, or the period display may be configured to be displayed again even after the period display has been erased. It is also good.

Also, after the period display is erased, the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses [eg, as shown in FIG. 33 (A2) to FIG. (A5) After the chance-up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in character of the wolf character, the chance-up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, until a certain period elapses. The display other than the period display may be configured not to be displayed. In addition, after the period display is erased, the period display may not necessarily be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, the period until the certain period elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed.

  Also, only after the period display is erased, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or other than after the period display is erased, a certain period elapses. Until the period display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is performed, the period display is performed in the first certain period after the period display is erased in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be displayable when the second certain period after the first certain period starts. In addition, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

Also, “the certain period is a period during which Super Reach is in operation,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display may be a third effect display [for example, a notice of a Champ-up by the display of the character BOY of Boi shown in FIG. It is a notice of the chance improvement by the display of the cut-in image CI3 of
The third effect display is a display different from the first effect display,
The period display indicates a second timing [for example, the timing indicated by the check point CP1 at which the advance notice of the Champ-up by the display of the character BOY of Boyy shown in FIG. 29 (4) is started; It is a display which may also notify [the timing etc. which are shown by check point CP2 by which the advance notice of the chance up by the display of the cut-in image CI3 is started],
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may start.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the period display may notify only the second timing, or may notify other timings than the second timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

  In addition, the second timing may have a possibility that only the display of the third effect display may be started, and the other than the display of the third effect display may also be started. It may be one. Further, the second timing may be such that the display of the third effect display is always started, or the display of the third effect display may not be started in some cases.

  The timing displayed by the period display may be three or more.

  In addition, if a certain reach occurs, effect display is always performed three times, and if another reach occurs, effect display is always performed twice, so it is possible to fix places where effect display is performed according to reach. When there is the same reach, the effect display may be performed three times, and when there is the same reach, the effect display may be performed such that the effect display is performed only once. In that case, the case of "informing a lot of timing" may be more likely to be a big hit than in the case of "not giving much notification", or may be more likely to deviate. Also, the probability of a big hit may not change depending on the number of notified timings. Also, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to be a big hit.

  Also, the second timing may be timing after the first timing, and the second timing may be timing before the first timing, or the first timing and the first timing. The two timings may be the same timing.

In addition, “the first effect display is a first notice display [for example, a notice by a lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one type of display among the multiple types of display is the third display,
"When at least part of the first display is difficult to see" is "when at least part of the first display is overlapped by the third display".
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"Display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
The display means is a first display means.
The first display means is a means which may display the period display,
The second display unit is a unit that may perform a rendering operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be configured by only a plurality of display means, or may be configured by other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be always composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

  Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display other display than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display or may not display the period display.

  Further, the second display means may perform only the rendering operation, or may perform an operation other than the rendering operation. In addition, the second display means may always perform the rendering operation, or may not perform the rendering operation.

  In addition, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means, or in the case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means There may be. In addition, at least a part of the period display may always be overlapped by the second display means, or at least a part of the period display may not be overlapped by the second display means. It is also good.

Also, in the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, effects by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A1) to FIG. (A9), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of a conversation image CI2 of a whistle in a conversation notice shown in FIG. 38 (A4) to FIG. 38 (A9),
The first display and the second display are different displays,
The display mode of at least a portion of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A1)] has a first speed [eg 10 It may change by the speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds, etc.
The display mode of at least a part of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 38 (A4)] has a second speed [for example, a gauge at 5 seconds It may change by the speed etc.
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In recent years, many displays are displayed on the display means, and there is a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with the game or a player who starts the game with his / her model does not know where to look. In this gaming table, by making the first speed and the second speed different, the player is naturally induced to gaze at the display with a fast (slow) display at which the display mode changes, and the player who has the above problem There are also cases where you can be entertained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed also in a period other than the specified period. Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, there may be a case where only the period display is erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started, or it becomes the first timing after the display of the period display is started Before the display other than the period display may be erased. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased before the first timing after the period display starts being displayed, or the first timing after the period display starts. Before the period display may not be erased.

  In addition, the period display may be erased only before the first timing comes after the period display start being started, or it becomes the first timing after the period display start is started. The period display may be erased other than before.

Further, “the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A1), etc.],
The second display is a display including the time display [for example, display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 38 (A4), etc.]
The time display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, the operation valid period etc.] [for example, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. As for the remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4), the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the speed of change of the display mode may be easily recognized.

  Here, the first display may include only the time display, or may include other than the time display. Moreover, the first display may include time display or may not include the time display.

  Further, the second display may include only the time display, or may include other than the time display. In addition, the second display may include time display or may not include the time display.

  In addition, the time display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode changes in accordance with other than the passage of time in a certain period. May be Also, the time display may be such that the display mode necessarily changes with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time in a certain period. It may be.

Also, there may be a case where both the first display and the second display are displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4) to FIG. (A7), a button for the balloon of the navigation character YM Both the effect display on which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed, and the operation promotion notification image displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the whistle in the conversation announcement, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the presentation may be made lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

  Here, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, or the display may be displayed other than both the first display and the second display. It is also good. In addition, both the first display and the second display may be necessarily displayed, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, the character display of“ superheat ”in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A9), etc.]”
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display of "It is intense heat, etc. in the conversation image CI2 of an eyebrow shown in FIG. 38 (A9),"
The third display and the fourth display are different displays,
The first display is a display capable of changing at least a part of display modes until a first time [for example, 10 seconds etc.] elapses,
The second display is a display in which at least a part of display modes can be changed until a second time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.] elapses,
The third display may be displayed when the first time elapses after the display of the first display starts.
The fourth display may be displayed when the second time has elapsed since the start of the display of the second display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may change only at least a part of the display mode until the first time passes, or at least a part of the display modes until the first time passes Other display modes may be changeable. In addition, the first display may change at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least the display mode changes until the first time passes. It may not be possible.

  In addition, the second display may be such that at least a portion of the display mode can be changed until the second time elapses, or at least a portion of the display mode other than the second time elapses The display mode of may be changeable. In addition, the second display may change at least a part of the display mode until the second time passes, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time passes. It may not be possible.

  In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the display start of the first display, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may be displayed after the display start. As time passes, displays other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started to display, the third display may be displayed without fail, or when the first time has elapsed after the first display has started. The third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to be displayed, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may start after the second display is started. As time passes, displays other than the fourth display may be displayed. In addition, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to display, the fourth display may be displayed without fail, or when the second time has elapsed since the second display has started. , The fourth display may not be displayed.

  Note that the third display and the fourth display may be the same display mode or may be different display modes.

  In the third display and the fourth display, the fourth display may have a higher or lower reliability of the jackpot. Also, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

Further, “the first display is a countdown display [for example, a display of a countdown in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40 (A1), etc.]”
The second display is the countdown display [for example, the display of the countdown in the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 40 (A1), etc.]
The countdown display is a display for notifying of a timing until a certain effect [for example, a display of pseudo connected effect and the like] is performed [for example, a first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40 (A1). And, the second timer notice display TM2 reports the time until the occurrence of the pseudo run by a countdown display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. In addition, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be always notified, or the timing before a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 (chance button 136) etc.]" is provided,
The first display is an operation effective period display,
The second display is the operation effective period display,
The said operation effective period display is a display which shows the period which makes operation of the said operation means effective,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be operated by the player without fail, or may have a habit of not being operated by the player.

  In addition, the operation effective period display may indicate only the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, or may indicate other than the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective. The operation effective period display may always indicate a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, or may not indicate a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective.

Also, “the first display is a period display [for example, a first chance up meter CMTa etc. shown in FIG. 35 (A1)],
The second display is the period display [for example, a second chance up meter CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1) and the like],
The period display is a display for notifying of a first timing [for example, a timing when advance notice of a chance increase by a character BOY of Boi shown in FIG. 35 (A2) is started],
The first timing refers to an effect [eg, FIG. 35, for example, a period during which an animation of a duel scene in the sword reach shown in FIG. 35A1 to FIG. 35A2 is performed]. This is the timing when there is a possibility that the display of the advance notice of the chance up by the character BOY of Boi shown in (A2) may be performed,
The first timing is reported from the start to the end of the first period,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may start to be displayed in the first period, or the display other than the sixth display may also start to be displayed in the first period. It may be possible. In addition, the first timing may be one in which the sixth display is always started in the first period, or the sixth display may not be started in the first period. May be

  In addition, only the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period, and the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period. A thing other than timing may also be alert | reported. In addition, the first timing may be notified before the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified after the start of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

  Also, the first timing may be notified only between the start and the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified before and after the start of the first period. One timing may be notified.

In addition, according to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, according to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change only at the first speed, and according to the passage of time, the second display At least a part of the display modes may change at a speed other than the first speed. In addition, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may always change at the first speed according to the passage of time, or according to the passage of time, at least a part of the second display The display mode may not change at the first speed.

  In addition, depending on the passage of time, only the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed, or according to the passage of time, at least the second display may be changed. Things other than some display modes may change at the first speed.

"When at least a part of display aspects of the second display changes at the second speed than when the display aspect of at least parts of the second display changes at the first speed In the end, the big hit symbol is easier to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, when the display mode of at least one part of the second display changes at the second speed, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or at least a part of the display of the second display Even when the aspect changes at the second speed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not finally displayed.

In addition, “the first display is effect display [for example, effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the second display is effect display [for example, display of a conversation image CI2 of a whistle in a conversation notice shown in FIG. 38 (A4) to FIG. 38 (A9)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1)],
The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a display of a countdown of a timer display in the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), etc.]
The countdown display is a display for giving a notification by performing a countdown on the timing until a certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A1) to FIG. The countdown in the timer display of TM1 notifies the timing when the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
While the countdown display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is a second display from the first display mode [for example, the display mode of the small size of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), etc.] It may change to an aspect [for example, a display mode of the large size of timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A3), etc.],
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the variation of the effect is increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to draw attention to the countdown display itself by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Also, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include displays other than the countdown display. Also, the first display may include the countdown display or may not include the countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, or the first display may not be a countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be notified only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be notified by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed. It may be In addition, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down, or when the timing until a certain effect is performed is not notified by performing a countdown. There may be

  In addition, while the countdown display is displayed, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only, and the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to the display modes other than the second display mode. In addition, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, and the display of the first display may be performed while the countdown display is displayed. The aspect may not change from the first display aspect to the second display aspect.

  In addition, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only while the countdown display is displayed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  The countdown display may be a timer display.

  The start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. May be Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is ended. Good.

In addition, the countdown display is started during execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is ended before the symbol variation display is completed [eg, as shown in FIG. 20 (1) to FIG. (7) The display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 is started during execution of the symbol variation display, and is ended during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the countdown display for informing the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, the effect may not be redundant.

  Here, the countdown display may be started during execution of the symbol change display, and only the countdown display may be ended before the symbol change display is ended, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol change display, The display other than the countdown display may be ended before the symbol variation display is ended. In addition, the countdown display may be started while the symbol variation display is being performed, and the countdown display may always be ended before the symbol variation display is ended, or the countdown display is started while the symbol variation display is being performed, and the symbol The countdown display may not end before the end of the variable display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be started during execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be ended only by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol The countdown display may end other than the end of the variable display.

Also, “the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size [for example, small size etc.],
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [eg, large size etc.],
The second display size is larger between the first display size and the second display size.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the display size of the countdown display becomes large, it may be possible to change the degree of expectation for the countdown display (make the user pay attention to the countdown display whose display size becomes large).

  Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. It may be a display mode being displayed. In addition, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size There may be a display mode.

  In addition, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display may be displayed in a display size other than the second display size. The display mode may be selected. In addition, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the second display size There may be a display mode.

  In addition, the size of the display size may be the same, for example, the display size may be the same, but the color or the shape of the frame or the character may be different.

  Also, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

[When the display of the countdown display is started [eg when the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 20 (3), etc.]] The display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. Display modes other than the one display mode may be displayed. Also, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first There may be cases where the display mode is not displayed.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, when the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), when the frame-in of the timer advance display TM1 is started, etc.], the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. May be displayed in display modes other than the first display mode. In addition, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may always be displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the first display is started. One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

Also, while the countdown display is displayed, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [eg, as shown in FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. (A3) Thus, while displaying the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is "03:00" indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 Is changing from small size to large size etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation that the display mode changes during countdown display.

  Here, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode, or during the display of the countdown display, the first display is the first The display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, while the countdown display is displayed, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only while the countdown display is displayed, and the first display may be changed to the second display mode other than the display of the countdown display. You may change from one display mode to a second display mode.

Also, “the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, it is easy to finally display the big hit design,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for the first display to change to the second display mode.

  In addition, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed in the final display, and the first display is the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

In addition, the first display is a display in which the display position may change [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. 41 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device The display position changes from the approximate right center to the approximate center of the display screen of 208, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the display position of the first display changes, a visual change may be given to improve the rendering effect.

  Here, the first display may change only the display position, or may change other than the display position. In addition, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or may be one in which the display position does not change.

Also, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. As shown in), when the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the display position changes from the approximate right center to the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, it may be possible to make the first display pay attention.

  Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display from the first display mode If it changes to a 2nd display mode, things other than the display position of a 1st display may also change. In addition, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, or the first display may change from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may change also in the case other than the case of changing from the second display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, “the first display is a display in which movement display [for example, display of animation of enlarged display of timer notice display TM1 etc.] may be performed,
By the movement display being performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. 41 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is an animation of the enlarged display. Zoom in and change the display position etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since visual change can be given by the movement display of the first display, the rendering effect may be improved.

  Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display may be performed, or may be one in which display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  Further, only the display position of the first display may be changed by performing the movement display, and the display positions of other than the display position of the first display may also be changed by performing the movement display. It is also good. Further, the display position of the first display may be changed by moving display, or the display position of the first display may not be changed by moving display. .

  Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only by performing the movement display, or even if the display position of the first display is changed due to other than the movement display being performed. Good.

Also, while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display proceeds,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, even during the display of the movement display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or even during the display of the movement display, other than the countdown display by the countdown display may be continued. In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued even while the movement display is displayed.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only while the movement display is displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may be continued other than the display of the movement display.

Also, while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the countdown due to the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the movement display, or something other than the countdown due to the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the movement display. In addition, while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted at all times, or while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the movement display is displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted except when the movement display is displayed.

“The countdown display is a display for counting down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. (A7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1 The countdown in the display notifies the timing when the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the countdown display may perform only the countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed, or may perform other than the countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed. In addition, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

Also, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it is notified that it is time to perform the certain effect [eg, shown in FIG. 41 (A7) to FIG. (A8) As such, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and it is informed that the pseudo-link will be performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified that only a timing for performing a certain effect has come, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. The thing other than the timing to which a certain effect is performed may also be notified. In addition, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be always notified that the timing for performing a certain effect has come, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, In some cases, it may not be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

  Moreover, it may be notified that the timing for performing a certain effect has come only by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, or other than displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. Also, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

Also, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is configured to be erased [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A7) to FIG. (A11), After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the effect may not be redundant by erasing the countdown display after the countdown is completed.

  Here, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the display other than the countdown display may be performed. May also be configured to be erased. In addition, after the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication may be necessarily erased, or after the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is erased. It may be configured such that it may not.

  In addition, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, and the countdown display may be performed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of a character of“ focus ”in timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A8), etc.]
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, after the second display is displayed, the countdown display is configured to be erased [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. (A11), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the word "attention" is displayed and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the second display is displayed when the countdown display is erased, there are cases where it is possible to improve the effect on the erasure of the countdown display.

  Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than a certain effect. Further, the second display may not necessarily be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Also, the second display may be included in an effect.

  In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the second display is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be erased when the second display is displayed. In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be necessarily erased after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. May be configured such that the countdown display may not be erased after the second display is displayed.

  In addition, the countdown display may be configured to be erased after the second display is displayed only when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, and a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to be erased after the second display is displayed. In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be erased only after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the second display is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to be erased when the second display is displayed.

"The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the sub display device 208S, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [e.g., a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [eg, as shown in FIG. 42 (A1), Timer preview display TM1 of the size is displayed on the sub display unit 208S, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode. When is displayed, the first display may also be displayed on display means other than the first display means. In addition, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means without fail, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

  Also, only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display means also in cases other than the above case.

Also, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display It may be displayed on the means [For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A2) to FIG. 42 (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol Displayed on display device 208, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display means displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be possible to visually improve the rendering effect in an entertaining manner.

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means The first display may be the second display when the first display of the first display displayed on the first display changes to the second display. It may be displayed on other display means. Moreover, when the first display is always displayed on the second display means when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode If the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display may be displayed on the second display means. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode If the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display may be It may be displayed on the display means of.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, the countdown display demonstrated so far may be a display performed only during execution of the said symbol fluctuation display, and may be performed as a prefetch notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display functions as a notice of the symbol variation display and may function as a prefetch notice. Here, it may be performed only as a pre-reading advance notice.

  In addition, when the countdown display is performed as a preview advance notice, the countdown display may be displayed in a period between the symbol change display and the symbol change display to be performed next. In that case, while the symbol stop is displayed, the notification of the time by the countdown display may be stopped / suspended / canceled (for example, the time of the timing of the decision stop of the symbol is also displayed during the symbol stop displayed (however, the countdown If the symbol stop is displayed, the notification of the time by countdown may be continued, or the symbol countdown may be internally performed. You may stop the countdown internally during symbol stop display.

  In addition, when the countdown display is displayed as the pre-reading notice, the countdown display is not performed when there is a hold (for example, a hold with a fluctuation time indefinite) in which the fluctuation time changes depending on the number of holds. It is also good. This is because there is a possibility that it will not be clear at which timing the countdown will be 0 if the symbol variation display time is indeterminate, so for example, it is necessary to match the occurrence timing (simulation, reach, In the case of development etc.), it is preferable to carry out only in the symbol variation display.

  On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed also when there is a pending with the fluctuation time being indefinite. In this case, for example, a presentation that causes no problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the reserved icon, a presentation such as round promotion during a big hit, etc. The present invention can be applied to the case where it is sufficient if the timer countdown is completed before the end of the object's detention. In addition, when there is an effect that needs to be synchronized (such as the start of the symbol variation display on hold that has been pre-read target) n, such as effect to force the time to match the time is performed It is also good.

  Also, the countdown display may be displayed during a big hit. In this case, the display may be continued across the inter-round interval. Here, since the period of one round is indeterminate during the big hit game, it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately, for example, whether or not the countdown display is not generated in the final round, or during the big hit end interval (final If the big hit end display period ends after the round ends, and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms), or if it becomes a certain round, the book edge is forced The combined time (for example, "00:00" is forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display, etc. may be displayed).

  Further, the time until the simultaneous effect or the effect by the RTC starts may be notified by a countdown display.

  In addition, the display device may be configured of transmissive liquid crystal, and further, rendering means such as effect moving means and a decorative member, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are disposed on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal. These may be configured to be visible through the. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured to be switchable between a state in which the rear side can be viewed and a state in which the transmissive liquid crystal can not be viewed by the liquid crystal shutter.

  In addition, the operation mode of the effect movable means such as a bonus may be changed or the light emission mode of the lamp may be changed according to the notification of the time by countdown display.

  In addition, it is a display that announces that it may give an effect that affects the countdown display itself (for example, addition / subtraction of timer, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of countdown display, change of color or shape, etc.) (For example, an effect such as saying that something may occur due to a mini character) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may occur in the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character comes out, an effect such as always performed something May be performed, and effects may be performed such that something is always performed when another character comes out. At this time, for example, the larger the number of appearances of the character, the easier it will be for the jackpot.

  In addition, when there are a large number of display of the countdown display, it may be easy to become a big hit in the end, or it may be easy to become a big hit if a notice of chance increase is given.

  In addition, with regard to the chance up meter, even if a part or all of the meter is enlarged / reduced or a promotion effect (for example, a color or shape changes or a character or marker indicating the current position is changed) is performed. Good.

Also, in the above description,
A game console provided with “image display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.”,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, a notice etc. due to the appearance of the character BOY in Boi shown in FIG. 29 (4)],
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.]
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. May be displayed during the period
The period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, a character SBH of Sabohan shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.]
The cursor display is from the start position [for example, the position indicated by the start point SP shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.] to the first position [eg with the first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (2) By moving to the end position [for example, the position shown by the final point GP shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.] via the shown position etc., from the start to the end of the certain period is notified Is configured to
When the cursor display reaches the first position, a first timing [for example, indicated by a first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (4) is notified that the advance notice by the appearance of the Boy's character BOY is started. It is informed that it is timing etc],
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started in the reach effect display,
The period display is a display in which a first chance-up display [for example, a display of “UP” above the first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (6), etc. ”may be displayed,
When the first effect display is started to be displayed at the first timing, a display position corresponding to the first position (hereinafter referred to as “first display position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (6), The first chance-up display is displayed on the display position of “UP” and the like above the first check point CP1].
When the first chance-up display is displayed, the first chance-up display is continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [e.g., As shown in FIG. 29 (25), the display of “UP” above the first check point CP1 is continuously displayed, etc., until the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP, etc.,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display [for example, a display of a cut-in of an eyebrow shown in FIG. 33 (A2), a display of an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b), etc.]
The third effect display is an effect display different from the first effect display,
The display of the third effect display may be started before the first timing after the display of the period display is started [eg, FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and As shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b), in the effect by the chance up meter CMT, the display of the eyelid cut-in shown in FIG. 33 (A2) or FIG. 33 (A2 b) before the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3. The effect image shown in A2b) may be displayed, etc.],
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. (A2 b), to FIG. When the display of the eyelid cut-in shown or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b) is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

In addition, “the period display is a display including a first check point display [for example, a display of the first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (4), etc.],
The first check point display is a display indicating the first position,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the first check point display is a display that is displayed until the cursor display reaches the end position [eg, as shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (25), Check point CP1 is displayed until Sabohani character SBH reaches final point GP, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, in the case where the third effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the third effect display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Further, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29 (18)],
The cursor display is configured to move to the end position through both the first position and the second position [eg, the position indicated by the third check point CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (2)]. Has been
When the cursor display reaches the second position, a second timing [for example, the timing indicated by a third check point CP3 at which the display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29 (18) is started] Being informed that
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the second effect display may be started in the reach effect display,
The period display is a display in which a second chance-up display [for example, a display of “UP” above the third check point CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (19), etc. ”may be displayed,
When the display of the second effect display is started at the second timing, a display position corresponding to the second position (hereinafter referred to as “second display position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (19), The second chance-up display is displayed on the display position of “UP” and the like above the third check point CP3].
When the second chance-up display is displayed, the second chance-up display is continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [e.g. As shown in FIG. 29 (25), the display of “UP” above the third check point CP3 is continuously displayed, etc., until the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the first chance-up display is displayed only when the display of the first effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (4) to FIG. When the advance notice due to the appearance of the BOY is started, "UP" is displayed above the first check point CP1, but as shown in FIG. 30 (4a) to FIG. 30 (7a), the first check point Even if the SABOHANI character SBH reaches CP1 and the advance notice of the chance up is not started, "UP" is not displayed above the first check point CP1, etc.],
The second chance-up display is displayed only when the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (18) to FIG. (19), the display of the lever image 136Va When "" is started, "UP" is displayed above the third checkpoint CP3, but as shown in FIG. 30 (17b) to the same figure (20b), the character of Sabohani at the third checkpoint CP3 If the display of the lever image 136Va is not started even though the SBH has arrived, the display of "UP" is not performed above the third check point CP3, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the “period display is a display in which a first non-chance up display [for example, a display of“ x ”indicating that no advance of a chance up is not given”, etc.] may be displayed,
The period display is a display in which a second non-chance up display [for example, a display of “x” indicating that no advance of a chance up has not been made, etc.] may be displayed,
When the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first non-chance up display is displayed at the first display position [eg, in FIG. 30 (7a ′ ′) As shown, when the advance notice of the chance up is not performed at the first check point CP1, the display of the “UP” is replaced with the display of “x” indicating that the advance notice of the chance up is not performed. [Etc]
When the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the second non-chance up display is displayed at the second display position [e.g., at the third check point CP3, the chance In the case where the advance notice is not made, the display is changed to the “UP”, and the display of “x” is performed to indicate that the advance of the chance up is not made, etc.] . "
I also explained about

Further, “the period display is a display including a second check point display [for example, a display of the third check point CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (4), etc.],
The second check point display is a display indicating the second position,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the period display is a display including a display that suggests that the result of determination of acceptance is derived when the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, as shown in FIG. 3 Check point CP3 display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, after the third effect display is displayed and the period display is not displayed, when the display of the third effect display is ended in the certain period, the period display is displayed again. For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A2a) to FIG. 33 (A3a), after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of the princess character, the cut-in of the princess character is performed. When the display ends and the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, after the period display is not displayed, the period display is not displayed in the certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A2) to FIG. (A5), After the chance-up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of a certain character, the chance-up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the certain period is a period during which Super Reach is in operation,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Subsequently, an example of effects that can be applied to a game console such as the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 49 to 116. Here, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIG. 49 to FIG. 116 to the technical idea shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 48, FIG. 117 to FIG. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and FIGS. 117 to 193 to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  The main control unit power-on process performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 (a) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on process, FIG. 49 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 49 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, stack pointer initialization is performed. In this stack pointer initial setting, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S102, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value In the example, it is determined whether or not it is 9 V or more. If the voltage value of the power supply is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), wait until the voltage value of the power supply is equal to or more than the predetermined value, and if it is equal to or more than the predetermined value (step S102: Yes) The process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, internal register initialization is performed. In this internal register initialization, processing of setting values for starting of WDT 314, access permission of RAM 308, and a numerical value for determining an execution cycle of main control unit timer interrupt processing described later to each register of timer circuit 312, main control unit 300 After performing processing such as initial setting of serial communication between the and the payout control unit 600 and setting of the maximum value of hardware random numbers, the processing proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, it is determined whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is on (indicating that an operation has been made). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the process proceeds to step S108 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. Proceed to execute an initial startup process described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, the power supply status information stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether the power supply status information is information indicating suspension. Then, if the information on the power supply status is not the information indicating the suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to initialize the basic circuit 302, and an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the information of the power supply status is the information indicating the suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, the checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated check sum It is determined whether the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before power interruption and return Execute startup processing. On the other hand, if the result of the checksum is other than the specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal) (step S106: No), the process proceeds to step S108 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Proceed to execute an initial startup process described later.

  Here, the return activation processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the return activation process is started, in step S201, initialization at return activation is performed. Specifically, a process of setting information indicating "restoration start" to the information of the power supply status, a process of setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and a device error (flag of an error due to magnetic detection or prize abnormality) It performs a process of clearing, a process of clearing the previous device error status, and a process of clearing the device error status for security signal.

  Subsequently, in step S202, after setting the addresses after the storage area for which the initial setting has been performed in step S201 as an address to start the RAM clear, the return activation process is ended.

  In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command representing that the power has been restored, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in a sub-command transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49 (c), the initial activation process will be described. When the initial activation process is started, in step S301, initialization of soft random numbers is performed. Specifically, initial setting of soft random numbers used in a drawing of a special drawing or a drawing is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S302, the address after the storage area for which initialization has been performed in step S301 is set as an address to start RAM clearing, and then the initial activation process is ended.

  In addition, in the initial activation process, for example, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initial startup process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the command setting transmission process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , And sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (a), after the return activation process or the initial activation process is executed, the RAM clear process is performed in step S109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

  Subsequently, in step S110, the sub control related activation setting is performed. In this sub control related activation setting, the setting for the activation waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 is performed, and in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 transmits a sub command to the first sub control unit 400 three times. Therefore, processing for setting the initial value of the sub control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

  In step S111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, symbol data, firing position designation signal, error status signal, winning ball signal, blowout signal, common motorized part (second special view starting port 232, electric chow) in operation signal, blowout operation Medium signal, easy-to-win status signal, special signal per signal, special figure small hit signal (but limited to small hit models only), special figure fluctuating signal, special figure fluctuation time shortening status signal, special electric character (variable prize) Port 234, attacker) operating signal, condition device operating signal, character continuous operating device operating signal, big winning port solenoid signal, ordinary electric character solenoid signal, symbol LED data, external terminal board signal etc. are set Set the output port etc. Further, after the process of step S111 is finished, the process proceeds to the main control unit main loop process. Here, the easy-to-win state may indicate a power support state.

  Next, main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. It is a flowchart of main control part main loop processing.

  When the main control unit 300 completes the execution of the main control power-on process described above, next, in step S401 of the main control unit main loop processing that starts the execution of the main control unit main loop processing, After setting, in step S402, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value update processing, processing is performed to update the initial value of the special drawing determination random number counter and the initial value generation random number counter for generating the initial value of the common drawing determination random number counter. For updating the initial value generation random number counter, for example, assuming that a numerical value range that can be taken as a basic random number value is 0 to 20, acquire a value from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 and add 1 to the acquired value. Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In step S404, after setting of the interruption permission is performed, in step S405, a subcommand transmission process is performed). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, processing such as transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, the other determination random number update process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the random number for special map fluctuation time determination and the random number for common drawing fluctuation time determination is performed.

  In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9 V). Yes: return to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and if less than the predetermined value (step S407: No), proceed to step S408. In step S408, power-off processing is performed. In this power-off process, the power supply status information is set to "suspend" after being set to interrupt prohibition. Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the predetermined storage of the RAM 308 Store in the area. Thereafter, after setting for prohibiting access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is established.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In steps S502 and S503, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S403 is updated, and then the special control number random number counter used by the main control unit 300 , And the random number counter for determining the special drawing fluctuation time and the random number counter for determining the common fluctuation period. For example, assuming that a numerical value range that can be taken as a random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. In the random number counter storage area of At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a previously obtained initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a result of acquiring a value from a random number counter which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the acquired value If the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter, and the random number counter next turns In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 may be separately provided.

  In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limitation is in progress (whether or not the first sub control unit 400 is activated), and in the interrupt function limitation (first sub control unit 400 is not activated). (Step S504: YES), the process proceeds to step S519, and if the interrupt function is not limited (if the first sub control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, interrupt function limitation means that the start waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on process is not 0, that is, in step S504, If it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. If the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be capable of bi-directional communication, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command for confirming whether it is activated or not, and the first sub-control unit 400 If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (in the present embodiment, a magnetic detection error) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If the specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the first special drawing display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined open period And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S507, processing such as input port status update is performed. In this input port status update process, the special view start port (first special view start port 230, second special view start port 232), the common view start port 228, the out port 240 via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence or absence of signal input related to switches such as the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 and the winning opening (general winning opening 226) is monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area. Further, when it is determined that the winning to the starting opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is erased as the winning is invalid.

  In step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning a prize winning process, the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous second detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-mentioned step S507, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a winning when detection is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input. In the case where the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, it may be determined that there is a winning.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal). In this step S507, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal present) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228.

  For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  Further, in the winning opening winning processing of step S508, the winning opening counter updating processing is also performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning on the winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special view 1 starting opening 230, and the special view 2 starting opening 232, the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening The value of the award ball number storage area provided for each is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original award ball number storage area.

  Further, in the winning opening winning process of step S508, a winning reception process is also performed. In this winning reception process, whether or not there is a winning to the first special view starting port 230, the second special view starting port 232, the common drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234 matches the winning determination pattern information It makes a decision using the decision result of When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  Also, when there is a winning on the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 2 winning value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. While obtaining as a random number value, a value is obtained as a special figure 2 random number value from a random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in a corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening. In addition, when the random number of the special drawing is acquired, the special drawing pre-reading process (the pass / fail judgment, the symbol, the pre-reading lottery of the fluctuation time) is also performed. The details of the special view prefetching process will be described later.

  In step S509, a prize related error check process is performed. In this prize-related error check process, a prize-related abnormality is confirmed and monitored, and a process of setting an anomaly according to the processing result is performed. Note that some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, out switch input update processing is performed. In this out switch input updating process, the number of gaming balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for presentation.

  In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In this serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. Note that, as a command that the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600, a communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control unit 600) transmitted after the start waiting time of the first sub-control unit 400 after power on has elapsed. , And a winning ball number command instructing payout of gaming balls for a designated winning ball.

  In addition, as a command received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600, a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300), a test shot test signal Commands (including award ball signal output request) and commands including information on the occurrence status of a payout error (including no error), and prize ball payout operation status commands (prize ball payout operation in progress / non-operation There is a command to indicate, or an indication (indicating lighting or non-lighting such as an LED) to the first sub control unit 400 to indicate that dispensing is in progress.

  Next, in step S512, a special figure status update process is performed on the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the process state of the special figure. The special view state update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S513, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs finalized display of either one of the hit symbol and the off symbol. After that, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update process in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S514 without doing anything.

  Also, in step S513, a common drawing related lottery process is also performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, and when a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S515, external output signal management processing is performed. In this external output signal management process, a process of preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, a subcommand management process is performed. In this subcommand management process, preparation for transmitting various commands to the first secondary control unit 400 is performed. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, big hit start command, big hit round number specification command, power recovery command, Information which can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special drawing related lottery process, etc. In the case of the change stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special view probability change flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special view probability change flag etc. In the case of the jackpot round number specification command, the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, the jackpot round number, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a winning on the variable winning opening 234, a special winning opening winning command is set.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the command data in the RAM 308 are selected. The information which shows the number of the made timer number, the 1st special figure fluctuation game or 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are kept is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described prize effect setting transmission process, the symbol data stored in the RAM 308 as command data is outputted to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game stand frame lamp 452, the speaker 120 during the prize effect period. Information indicating the control information, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set.

  Further, in the above-mentioned termination effect setting transmission processing, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 and outputted to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game stand frame lamp 452 and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period Information indicating the effect control information to be played, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. At step S516, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S517, display display setting processing is performed. In this indicator display setting process, for displays such as “number of holding balls, symbol combination”, status (during power support or non power support), right-handed status, etc. (lighting pattern of LED) Perform processing such as setting data to be output. In step S518, an output management process is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting a control signal set in each process to a solenoid or an LED, and a process of transmitting a prepared command to the first sub control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600 are performed.

  In step S519, a sub control start wait process is performed. In this sub control start wait wait process, the start wait counter of the sub control is decremented by 1 and this start wait counter becomes 0 in order to wait for the first sub control unit 400 to be started and to be in the communicable state. If it does, prepare to send a predetermined command. Note that as the predetermined command, any one or more commands of a power on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors have been cleared, a bottom error has occurred) There is a command that indicates that there is an error that indicates that the payout ball number error is in an occurrence state, a main control communication error command (a command that indicates that the communication with the payout control unit 600 is abnormal), a CR unit disconnection error Is a generation state, and a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state).

  In step S520, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S501 are set to the original registers, and the interrupt permission setting is performed, and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop process. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

  In step S601, acquisition and storage of the special view processing state address are performed, and in the next step S602, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special view processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value that the special view processing state indicates, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 (a), which will be described later, the process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 54, the special figure shown in FIG. Display finalization weight processing, contact start weight processing shown in FIG. 56 (a), special electric power combination operation processing shown in FIG. 57, special electric power combination residual ball detection processing shown in FIG. 60, special electric power combination operation end processing shown in FIG. One of the processes shown is executed.

  In step S603, the winning a prize status is set to ON. In step S604, the state change of the special drawing processing state is determined, and in the next step S605, the presence or absence of the state change of the special drawing processing state (change of the value indicated by the special drawing processing state) is determined. If there is no state change of the state (if the value indicated by the special view processing state does not change) (step S605: No), the special view state update processing is ended, and there is a state change of the special view processing state. If it is determined that the value indicated by the special view processing state is changing (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, it is determined whether the special processing state is set to "variation waiting state". If it is applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if it is not applicable (step S606) : No), it progresses to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether the special view processing state is set to "hit start display wait state", and if applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and does not correspond (No Step S607: No), the special figure state update process is ended.

  In step S608, the transmission request for the sub-command is set (in the present embodiment, after setting the transmission request for the gaming state command including the gaming state for the special drawing and the drawing), the firing position including information on whether or not the right hitting state After setting the transmission request of the command), the special figure state update processing is ended. Note that the order of transmission requests for sub-commands is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or transmission requests for a plurality of commands may be performed at once in one process.

  Subsequently, the special figure state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53 (a) is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process.

  The special figure related lottery process is a process which is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S602 of the special figure state update processing.

  In step S701 of the special drawing related lottery process, the special figure 2 holding ball number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S702, it is determined whether the acquired special figure 2 holding ball number is 0 or not (If there is no suspension of the special figure 2 change game) (step S702: Yes), proceed to step S703, and if other than 0 (if there is a suspension of the special figure 2 change game) (step S702: No) In order to execute the process relating to the special figure 2, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S703, the special figure 1 holding ball number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S704, it is determined whether the acquired special figure 1 holding ball number is 0 or not, and in the case of 0 (special figure 1 When there is no suspension of the change game (step S704: Yes), the special drawing related lottery process is ended, and when it is other than 0 (when there is a suspension of the special view 1 change game) (step S704: No) In order to execute the process relating to Special Figure 1, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S 705, when the process relating to the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by 1 and when the process relating to the special figure 1 is executed, The value of the special figure 1 reservation ball number memorized is subtracted one. In step S706, special figure random number migration processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process relating to the special figure 2 is executed, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the holds 2 to 4 of the special figure 2 When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 of the special figure 2 and executing the processing related to the special figure 1, it corresponds to the hold 2 to 4 of the special figure 1 The random number value stored in the random number storage area is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the retentions 1 to 3 of the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the retention 4 of the special figure 1 is cleared. Thus, the game console (pachinko machine) in the present embodiment is a special view 2 priority variable machine. In addition, each of Toku 2 and Toku 1 can store up to four reservations.

  In step S 707, a lottery process is performed per special image. Although the details will be described later, in the lottery process per special drawing, the success or failure judgment of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game (or special drawing 1 fluctuation game) is performed. In step S708, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table (or the special figure 1 symbol determination table), based on the result of the special figure lottery process in step S 707 and the random number value, the second special figure The lottery of the special view display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special view display device 212) is performed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, various customizations can be performed.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not started even if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation display is stopped, the decorative symbol display device 208 transitions to the demonstration mode. It becomes a demonstration screen. Note that the combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbol continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the transition to the demonstration mode after the symbol variation display of the special drawing is stopped and the operation means such as the chance button 136 etc. When operated, a dedicated animation may be displayed. In the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or in the case of the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (if the decorative symbol is composed of an image such as a character and a character image (including numbers), the image such as a character Only the character image may be displayed, or the character image may be hidden, or both an image such as a character and a character image may be displayed, or a movie including a model title In addition to displaying a presentation introduction movie in which a high-level notice or a high expected reach is introduced, a menu icon, a volume adjustment icon, and a brightness adjustment icon may be displayed. . In addition, the state in which the combination of the stop display of a decorative symbol was displayed may be included in demonstration mode.

  When the chance button 136 is operated in a state in which the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon are displayed, an option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, a volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the volume of the speaker 120 can be increased or decreased. Furthermore, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, a brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the light amount of LEDs such as the game board lamp 442 and / or the game stand frame lamp 452 is increased or decreased. It can be done. Here, the game board lamp 442 does not have to include the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 14 and the like. When the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 are operated in the state where the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed, and conversely, while the brightness adjustment window is displayed, the operation key unit 137 By operating the left and right keys, the volume control window is displayed.

  Although the details will be described later, in the option menu, an icon for “return to demo screen” is prepared, and when the cursor is placed on this icon, the chance button 136 is operated to return to the demo screen. be able to. Further, when the symbol variation display of the special view is started, the option menu is automatically ended, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208. Furthermore, if the operation is not performed for a certain period (for example, one minute) with the option menu displayed, the screen automatically returns to the demo screen.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, and the demo screen is returned from the volume adjustment window, and the chance button 136 is operated after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When the button is pressed, the light amount is determined, and the brightness adjustment window returns to the demonstration screen. Furthermore, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the screen automatically returns to the demo screen after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after operation of the left and right keys or the up and down keys. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the volume adjustment window and the brightness adjustment window disappear automatically, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 here.

  FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the option menu.

  In the option menu, it is possible to roughly divide and perform "effect customization", "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection".

  In the “auto button mode” of “representation customization”, even if the operation means such as the chance button 136 is not operated, the same response effect as when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated may be performed. It is a mode. In addition, ON / OFF described in the "option" of FIG. 63 (b) means setting / non-setting or valid / invalid. "Long press auto repeat" means that the press of the operation button such as the chance button 136 etc. is repeated at high speed only while long press is being performed (the press is repeated). ) A function that performs the same response effects as at time, and can select the speed of continuous hitting. The "group notice" is a type of normal notice (prediction of the change), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expected degree) of the big hit of the group notice. For example, there is a possibility that the fluctuation in which the group notice is displayed becomes a big hit is 100% reliability! ? If you want to increase the frequency with which group notices appear as a notice of the change, set the reliability to 50%, and if the frequency with which group notices appear as a notice of the change is set to a confidence of 50% Even if it is low, you want 100% confidence if you want it to be displayed as a warning of a big hit (big hit confirmed)! ? Set to "Push sound notice" is a type of pre-reading notice when a prize is increased at the special drawing start opening and the hold increases. Note that the winning sound advance notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the like is started and / or that it is not during the operation valid period of the operation means but “the back button When "Navi" is turned ON (setting), for example, the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation effective period of the operation means, or a character display such as "you may operate the operation means" is displayed. Will be "No advance notice" is not performed for all advance notices other than the advance notice by the display mode of the hold icon (for example, advance notice by the moving means (production movable body or read advance notice other than the hold icon by the display means) Setting corresponding to “ON”. "Premier up" is a setting to increase the appearance frequency of the jackpot rich or jackpot finalization effect (corresponding to "ON"). “No hold change” is a setting for not giving advance notice (by “ON”) according to the display mode of the hold icon. "One-shot notification" is a specific notice about big hit richness or big hit determination (for example, production operation by the production movable body, big hit thick (big hit confirmation) sound by sound output means, frame or game board The announcement by the lighting production by some or all decoration LED is mentioned.).

  In the present specification, “big hit confirmation” refers to a symbol change in which a notice of big hit confirmation is displayed or a symbol change of a prefetch target hold when the notice of the big hit confirmation and / or the advance notice is displayed. It is indicated that when the advance notice of the big hit decision is displayed, the change or the pending for pre-reading object is always a big hit (the same applies to the following description).

  Moreover, "big hit rich" in this specification refers to a state in which the expectation to the big hit is high, and the notice of the big hit is displayed even if the notice of the big hit and / or the advance notice is displayed. It indicates that even if a big pre-read advance notice of big hit is displayed for the symbol change of the selected symbol or the symbol change of the pre-reading object hold, it may become a loss (the same also in the following explanation). Also, the jackpot rich may indicate that the jackpot is finalized (the same applies to the following description).

  Furthermore, the description "hot" in the present specification also refers to a state of high expectation to the big hit, but even if such a notice of hot and / or a prefetch notice is displayed, a pattern on which a hot notice is displayed It indicates that even if a hot pre-reading notice is displayed for a change or a symbol change of pre-reading target suspension, it may be a loss (the same applies in the following description). In addition, "hot" may indicate that the expectation of the big hit is lower than that of the big hit, and "superheat" may indicate that the big hit or the big hit is determined (the explanation below) The same is true for

  In addition, “Daitomo” described in FIG. 63 (b) is a member service that performs member registration and accesses to a web server through the Internet line, and the level (lv) is obtained by accumulating experience values. Is a service where you can gain various benefits according to your level. When executing the member service of “Daitomo”, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some of the pachinko machines 100 have specifications that do not correspond to the member service of "Daitomo". For models of specifications that support the member service of "Daitomo", if the user mode is set and the level of the Daitomo reaches 15 levels, the back button navigation setting is released as a type of effect customization. Further, in FIG. 63 (b), the item described as "Deat Tomo setting" is released only by performing member registration and setting to the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 when joining Daitomo, it is possible to use the holding frame B, for example, in the case of holding frame selection only by setting the user mode. Here, the holding frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. Note that "initial setting" means that the user mode is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, “Daitomo” can experience joining as a member before formal membership registration, and for the joining experiencer, a decoy character can be used in the character selection as a trial play.

  Moreover, there is an item which can not be selected unless the level of the Daitomo is raised as one of the above-mentioned privileges of the Daitomo. That is, among the items "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection", the item for which the level of the Dytomo is displayed in the "opening condition" is the displayed level. It is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

  FIG. 64 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen in the state where the member service is not used.

  By operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the items "customize effect", "character selection", "hold frame selection", "hold display selection", "background display selection", "initialization" and "return to demo screen" The cursor is moved by operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item of “production customization” and the chance button 136 is pressed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the option menu screen is switched to the presentation customization screen. In addition, when the cursor is placed on the item of “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "effect customization screen", "character selection screen", "pending frame selection screen", "pending display selection screen", "background display selection screen", and "initialization confirmation screen". Is displayed, and if the user places the cursor on the "Return" icon and presses the chance button 136, the user can return to the option menu screen. In addition, even if the cursor is not placed on the "RETURN" icon, even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed, the screen may return to the option menu screen.

  In addition, although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize in special drawing starting port 212, 214 and symbol variation display of special drawing is started, even if it is an option menu screen, “effect customization screen” Even in the case of the "character selection screen", the "pending frame selection screen", the "pending display selection screen", the "background display selection screen", and the "initialization confirmation screen", the display shifts to the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  Subsequently, the items described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 will be specifically described using a display example in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of calling an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from the demonstration screen. The example described here is an example for the pachinko machine 100 of the specification that does not correspond to the member service of "Daitomo", the open condition in FIG. 63 (b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning It is possible. In the following embodiments, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an icon indicating the appearance of the cross key (for up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit and an icon indicating the appearance of the chance button. In this case, the colorless and non-patterned icon indicates the operation means which can not be operated, and the icon displayed in the other mode (colored or / and with the pattern) indicates the operable operation means.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (1), a holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Moreover, the combination ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the loss of the decoration design is displayed also to the 1st decoration design (the 3rd design) and the 2nd decoration design (the 5th design) The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the number of special views of the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no suspension, and symbol variation display is not started after the finalized display of the stop symbol of the special drawing is performed. In this state, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 65 (1) is started. In addition, even before a certain time has passed, the finalized display period of the stop symbol of the special figure ends, and the next symbol fluctuation display is not started (for example, the decision of the special symbol stop figure in the state without suspension) If it is immediately after the display period has elapsed, these icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the cross key of the operation unit). In addition to the condition that a certain fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the finalized display period of the stop figure of the special drawing is over, these icons MI, VI, BI may be displayed Good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, and BI is started, the option menu screen or the volume adjustment is made even if the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137 are operated for a fixed period (for example, 3 seconds) The window or the brightness adjustment window may not be displayed.

  Further, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include a display (text display or image display) of the content being customized. For example, if it is the menu icon MI, character display or icon display for effect customization, if it is the volume control icon VI, display of a gauge showing the level of volume, if it is the brightness adjustment icon BI, display of the gauge showing the level of light amount It may be included. Furthermore, the menu icon MI may include the display of major items shown in FIG. 63 (b) (for example, “character selection” etc.), but it is not included as shown in FIG. 65 (1). It is also good.

  In FIG. 65 (2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. The same applies to the operation of the upper key 137u. Although the cross key lights in white when no operation is performed, the pressed key changes to red light, but the cross lamp may not have the decoration lamp.

  As the lower key 137d is operated, the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (3). The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed larger than the brightness adjustment icon BI, and the menu icon MI disappears and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (3). Thus, a brightness adjustment window BW about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, it is possible to adjust the light quantity of the LED such as the game board lamp 442 and / or the game stand frame lamp 45 in five stages, and the initial value is the brightest 5 levels.

  In FIG. 65 (4), the lower key 137d is operated again, and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 65 (6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. Even if the upper key 137u is operated in the state of five levels, the light amount does not increase any more. Further, even if the down key 137d is operated in the state of one level, the light amount does not decrease any further. Also, if no operation is performed for a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demonstration screen on which the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, but if the up key 137d or the down key 137u is operated, The count start can be updated. That is, the period until returning to the demo screen can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this zero level, the LED will remain off.

  In FIG. 65 (8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. The same is true even if the left key 137l is operated.

  As the right key is operated, the volume adjustment window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The volume adjustment window VW is a display larger than the volume adjustment icon VI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the side of the menu icon MI and about four times the volume adjustment icon VI. The menu icon MI is removed and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in five steps, and the initial value is three levels of middle volume.

  In FIG. 65 (10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, and the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. Note that even if the right key is operated in the state of the five loudest sounds, the volume does not rise any further. Also, in the state of one level, even if the left key is operated, the volume does not decrease further. Also, if you do not operate for a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds), you will return to the demo screen with the three icons MI, VI, and BI displayed, but if you operate the left key or the right key, The period can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this zero level, the speaker 120 will remain muted.

  Since a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the last operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (13) displays three icons MI, VI, and BI on the demonstration screen. I'm back.

  In FIG. 65 (14), when the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, an option menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (15). Although the chance button 136 emits light in red when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, the chance button 136 may be lighted in red before being pressed. In this option menu screen, the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "menu" In order from top to bottom in a row, there are seven types of icons such as presentation customization icon, character selection icon, holding frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization icon, and return icon for returning to the demo screen It is displayed. A cursor icon cs that can be moved up and down with the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 65 (14), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, whereas the effect customization icon is red. Further, in the option menu screen, a picture of operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, among the chance button 136 and the cross key, the cursor icon cs and the patterns of the up and down keys 137 u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. Note that for the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  Here, although the option menu screen is not displayed even if the chance button 136 is operated during brightness adjustment or volume adjustment in FIGS. 65 (2) to (12), it may be displayed. . In addition, the initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of displaying the option menu screen may be the top effect customization icon, may be a back icon, or may be another icon. Alternatively, it may be an icon of an item currently being customized.

  In FIG. 65 (16), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the effect customization icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 65 (17), the decoration design display device 208 displays the effect customization screen Is displayed. A five-line list is displayed on the effect customization screen, and in the list, five items from the top of the display of the small items in the effect customization shown in FIG. 63 (b) ("01 auto button mode" to "05 back "Button navigation" and each option (for example, "OFF ON" etc.) are displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. Furthermore, below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting change, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for collectively returning the settings to the initial value are arranged in a row from the left side sequentially ing. Also, in the effect customization screen, cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the start of the effect customization screen display is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The back icon in which the cursor display is displayed is highlighted in a frame and further displayed in red. Further, among the displayed options, options currently set are also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Furthermore, the pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right of the effect customization screen. In the effect customization screen, the patterns of all the keys 137u, d, l, r of the cross key are displayed in red.

  In FIG. 65 (18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (19), the frame of the item of the auto button mode is highlighted, and further, the balloon display is added, and the explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 65 (20), the right key 137r is operated while the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (21), the currently set option in the auto button mode changes to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. When the left key 1371 is operated in a state where the currently set option is OFF, the key operation is invalidated, but the same result may be obtained as when the right key 137r is operated.

  In FIG. 65 (22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to an item below the auto button mode (long press auto continuous hit). That is, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (23), the frame of the item of the long press auto consecutive hit is highlighted, and further, the balloon display is added, and the explanation regarding this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the back icon when the setting is not changed. However, even if there is no setting change, it may move to the confirmation icon, or may move to the back icon.

  Thereafter, the lower key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the item of the bottom back button navigation. That is, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, and further, the balloon display is added, and the explanation regarding this item is displayed.

  In FIG. 65 (26), the lower key 137d is operated one more time, and as shown in FIG. 65 (27), the 5-line list is updated, and in FIG. 63 (b), the auto is 01. The item of the button mode disappears, and instead, the cursor display moves to the newly added item without the pre-reading notice which was 06 in FIG. 63 (b).

  In FIG. 65 (28), the lower key 137d continues to be operated.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  The list is updated according to the operation of the down key 137d, and on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 66 (29) following FIG. 65 (28), the last small item of the effect customization in FIG. 63 (b) 09 The cursor is moved to the item of one-shot notification.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (30), when the down key 137d is operated one more time, as shown in FIG. 66 (31), the cursor display moves to the confirm icon, and the confirm icon is highlighted. Furthermore, it is displayed in red.

  In FIG. 66 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as the determination operation, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (33a), the notification screen notifying that setting of effect customization is superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side Is displayed. Note that a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting for effect customization is updated may be displayed. In the notification screen shown in FIG. 66 (33a), a back icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed, and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

  In FIG. 66 (34), the chance button 136 is operated to return to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 66 (35).

  The return icon in the notification screen shown in FIG. 66 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the effect customization screen, and by operating the return icon disposed on the effect customization screen, the option menu screen is displayed. It may be possible to return.

  After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again in the state where the option menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 66 (36) (see FIG. 37 (37)), FIG. As shown in), the cursor icon cs displayed so far in the effect customization icon moves down by one, and this time the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

  In FIG. 66 (39), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the character selection icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 66 (40), the character selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the character selection screen, and in the list, five items ("01 Yoshimune" to "05 Hani") from the top of the display of the options in the character selection shown in FIG. It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 66 (40), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and on the left side of the character selection screen, the pattern of the character of the item for which the cursor display is displayed (here, the pattern of Yoshimune) is previewed. It is done. As shown in 73 (b), although the initial setting of character selection is Yoshimune, this initial setting itself may be eliminated. In the lower right corner of the character selection screen, there is a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key (red for up and down keys 137u and d only) used for the selection operation, and a red chance for the determination operation. The pattern of the button 136 is also displayed.

  The character set by the character selection here is to be displayed at all times, to always appear at the time of presentation, or to appear more frequently than other characters.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (41), when the lower key 137d is operated once, the cursor display moves to the side of the item below the one of Yoshimune, as shown in FIG. 66 (42). The picture is previewed.

  In FIG. 66 (43), the lower key 137d is operated five more times, the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the lower key 137d, and in the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (44), FIG. The cursor is moved to the 07 copanda item of the final choice of the character selection.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (45), when the down key 137d is operated one more time, as shown in FIG. 66 (46), the cursor display moves to the back icon, and the back icon has a frame highlighted. Furthermore, it is displayed in red.

  Here, when the down key 137d is operated only once instead of the chance button 136 (FIG. 66 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. Returning to the first list at the top, the cursor display is moved to that Yoshimune item. Then, in FIG. 66 (49), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (50), animation display showing determination of a character is performed in an area where preview display has been performed. Although a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the character is updated may be displayed, in this example, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. When finished, the setting of the selected character is automatically updated, and as shown in FIG. 66 (51), the screen returns to the option menu screen.

  Even if the animation display showing that the character is determined is ended, the character selection screen remains as it is, and it is possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the character selection screen. Good.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again (see FIG. 66 (52)) while the option menu screen is displayed, the character is displayed as shown in FIG. 66 (53). The cursor icon cs displayed in the selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the holding frame selection icon, and the holding frame selection icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 66 (54), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the holding frame selection icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 66 (55), the decoration symbol display device 208 holds the holding frame. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the holding frame selection screen, and the list displays five options from the top of the options in the holding frame selection shown in FIG. 63 (b) (“01 holding frame A” to “05 The holding space E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 66 (55), the cursor display is displayed for the item of the holding frame A, and the holding frame of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is the holding icon and the change icon in the window on the left side of the holding frame selection screen. It is displayed with a preview. In addition, as shown in 73 (b), the initial setting of the holding frame selection is the holding frame A, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated holding that can not be selected here You may prepare a frame. In the lower right of the holding frame selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key used for selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red used for determination operation The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The holding frame set by the holding frame selection here is displayed as a first UI unit 280 and a second UI unit 281 in the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 66 (56), the lower key 137d is operated once.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (57) in response to one operation of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 66 (55) continued from FIG. 66 (55), the cursor display is one of the holding frame A The item is moved to the holding frame B of the next lower item, and the holding frame B is previewed in the left window.

  In FIG. 67 (58), the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed. In the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (59), when the effect display Ed1 occurs such that the window on the left side where the preview display is performed is generated and the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected holding frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (60). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the holding frame is to be updated may be displayed. In addition, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the holding frame selection screen remains, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the holding frame selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again (see FIG. 67 (61)) while the option menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 67 (62), it is held until then. The cursor icon cs displayed in the frame selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon lights in red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (63), a hold display selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A five-line list is also displayed on the hold display selection screen, and the list displays five options from the top of the display of options in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 63 (b) (“01 Icon A” to “05 Icon E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 67 (63), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the icon A, and in the window on the left side of the hold display selection screen, the icon of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is previewed with the holding frame There is. In addition, as shown in 73 (b), although the initial setting of the hold display selection is the icon A, this initial setting itself may be eliminated or a dedicated icon which can not be selected here may be used. You may prepare. In the lower right of the hold display selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key used for selection operation (only up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red used for determination operation The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The icons set in the hold display selection here are displayed as the hold icons h1 to h4 or the fluctuation icon h0 in the hold frame UI.

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is previewed in the left window. In this state, the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (65), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and as shown in FIG. 67 (66), the screen returns to the option menu screen. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the icon is updated may be displayed. In addition, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the on-hold display selection screen remains, and it is possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the on-hold display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again (see FIG. 67 (67)) while the option menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 67 (68), it is held until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 67 (69), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the background display selection icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (70), the background display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 63 (b) are displayed in the list. It is done. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 67 (70), the cursor display is displayed on the item of background A, and the background of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is previewed on the window on the left side of the background display selection screen. In addition, as shown in 73 (b), although the initial setting of background display selection is background A, this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background which can not be selected here may be selected. You may prepare. In the lower right of the background display selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key (red for up and down keys 137u and d only) used for selection operation, and a red for determination operation The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The background set in the background display selection here is displayed as the background display in the normal state in the decorative symbol display device 208. The background display in the normal state referred to here does not include the background display in the prefetch mode, the background display as a notice of the big hit of the variation, and the background display in the power support state. However, only the background display in the power support state may be included.

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (sky background) is previewed in the left window. In this state, the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (72), an effect display Ed1 is generated again which surrounds the left window in which the preview display is performed. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected background is automatically updated, and as shown in FIG. 67 (73), the screen returns to the option menu screen. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the background is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen remains, and the operation may return to the option menu screen by operating the back icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated twice (see FIG. 67 (74a)) while the option menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 67 (75), The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the back icon for returning to the demo screen, and the back icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 67 (76), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the back icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (77), a demonstration screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 Be done. The demo screen here reflects the customized result. That is, the background is changed to an empty background, the holding frame UI is different from the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 65 (1), and in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen, it is set to ON in effect customization. The mode name (in this case, the auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, they are alternately displayed in ascending order of the customization number. For example, if the auto button mode of 01 and back button navigation of 05 are turned on, the auto button mode and back button navigation are alternately displayed in a frame RW at the upper right of the screen. When the setting is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but may be displayed even if it is the same. In addition, when no setting is made, OFF may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. In addition, group prediction of setting of reliability and long press auto continuous hitting of setting of speed of continuous hitting may be set so as not to be displayed in the frame RW. Furthermore, the set mode may not be displayed in detail, for example, it may be displayed only as "during effect customization".

  In FIG. 67 (79), the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and 4th symbol display 284 are also shown. All of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are in the stop display mode. In addition, both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are under stop display, and the fourth symbol shown in FIG. 67 (79) The symbol display device 284 also represents a stop display. Furthermore, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special view holding lamp 218, and the second special view holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are all turned off, and the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Even in the displayed second number-of-holds display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 are both zero. Therefore, there is no suspension, and it is in the state where symbol fluctuation display is not started after finalized display of a stop symbol is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (80), there is one ball ball in the first special view starting opening 230, and the first special view display device 212 shown in FIG. 67 (80) starts the symbol variation display. However, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub control unit 400, 500 shown in FIG. 67 (80) are also decorative symbols. The variation display is not started, and the fourth symbol display device 284 similarly controlled by the sub control unit 400, 500 also shows the stop display. In the fourth symbol display device 284 shown in FIG. 67 (80), black squares represent the stop indication of the first decorative symbol (the third symbol), and gray circles represent the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). A white square indicates that the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) is in the variation display, and a white circle indicates that the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) is in the variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts variable display, and the second number of reservations displayed in the upper right corner In the display, the number of reservations of the special view 1 is displayed as “1” for a moment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (82), the number of reservations of the special view 1 first displayed as "1" momentarily in the second number of reservations display is "0". It should be noted that since the first special figure starting port 230 wins after being won, the second holding number display may not be displayed as "1" even if it is for a moment, and may remain "0".

  In FIG. 67 (83), the increase animation of the first hold icon h11 is started.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 68 (84) continuing from FIG. 67 (83), the increase animation is finished, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 68 (84) is an icon newly set in the hold display selection of the effect customization, and is displayed in a default display mode (a diamond non-pattern and white display mode) There is.

  In FIG. 68 (85), the variation display of the first decorative symbol is not yet started, but the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the delay of the start of the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 Erasing of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI is started, and it is displayed in transparent form. Although the deletion here may be animation-made, it does not have to be always the deletion animation, and in FIG. 68 (86), the deletion of these three icons MI, VI and BI is completed.

  In FIG. 68 (87), the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area, and in FIG. 68 (88), the movement of the first hold icon h11 is completed. On the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area, a variation icon h0 of a default display mode (a diamond non-pattern and white display mode) is displayed. Then, in FIG. 68 (89), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is in low speed fluctuation. In addition, in the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the left symbol starts the variable display first, then the middle symbol starts the variable display, and the right symbol starts the variable display. However, the order of the variable display start of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and these three left symbols, the middle symbol and the right symbol may simultaneously start the variable display. In addition, before the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, an animation by the decorative symbol (for example, an animation that the decorative symbol is once displayed large and then return to the original size, an image and characters of the character etc) is displayed. When it is configured from an image (including numbers), an image such as a character may be animated before the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 68 (91), the first decorative symbol is in high speed fluctuation. Even after symbol variation display on special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, if left key 137l or right key 137r of operation key unit 137 is operated (see FIG. 68 (92)), FIG. 68 (93) As shown in, the bar display VB for volume control is displayed above the holding frame UI. The bar display VB for volume control is displayed so as to overlap with at least a portion of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), at least a portion of the variation icon h0, and at least a portion of the navigation character YM from the front side. . When the volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed, operating the left key 137l reduces the bar display by one level to make the sound smaller, and operating the right key 137r increases the bar display by one level to make the sound larger. , Volume adjustable.

  In the present embodiment, even after symbol variation display on special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, only volume adjustment can always be performed. In addition, even if the volume adjustment can always be performed, the bar display VB for volume adjustment may not be displayed. Also, even during a big hit game, only volume adjustment is always possible. However, it may be regulated only for a certain period. For example, during the start effect of the big hit game, during the interval between rounds, during the end effect of the big hit game, during the execution of the super reach effect, during the final display of the symbols on the special view display devices 212 and 214, of the decorative symbol During the final display, during the final display of the lost symbol, during the final display of the big hit symbol, or at the end of the power support (short time) state (for example, at the end of ST) (for example, the number of balls or / and During display of a screen displaying the number of consecutive houses, etc., and a period of time in which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used for effect may be restricted. In addition, when super reach production is a game production, it is controlled until a result of victory or defeat is informed, and after that it is good also as adjustment possible, and adjustment is performed after three decoration symbols gather and start shaking display. It may be possible, or all the period from the super reach presentation to the stop display may be regulated.

  In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special view display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special view low probability diagram low probability state. In addition, although the light amount adjustment can not be performed even if the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated after the symbol variation display on the special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, the bar for light amount adjustment The display may be performed similarly to the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and the light amount may be adjustable, or the light amount may be adjustable without performing the bar display. Furthermore, even after symbol variation display on special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, effect customization, character selection, etc. may be set.

  Further, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated while the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is off, that is, while the symbol is changing, the bar display VB for volume adjustment is not displayed as in the present embodiment. Volume adjustment may be possible. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses May be configured to be able to update the count start of that fixed period (ie, to extend the period until returning to the demo screen). If there is an operation on the left key 137l or the right key 137r during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is erased by the start of the variation of the symbol, the erasure animation is canceled halfway and immediately The volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be displayed again without canceling the deletion animation, or the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed after the deletion animation has been performed to the end.

  Furthermore, even after the symbol variation display on the special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, the presence or absence of the display of the three icons MI, VI, and BI is until the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started. Regardless of the light amount, the light amount may be adjusted, and the effect customization, the character selection and the like may be set.

  In addition, even when the volume adjustment and / or the brightness adjustment can be performed while the symbol is changing, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

  FIG. 69 is a view showing a modification of the example described with reference to FIG.

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69 (32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 66 (32a), the cursor display returns as shown in FIG. 69 (33b1) The back icon is highlighted with a frame and is displayed in red. In this state, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 69 (33b2)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to return to the option menu screen is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front (FIG. 69 (33b3) ). On this confirmation screen, a return icon for accepting return to the option menu screen and a cancel icon for canceling return to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 69 (33b2), the cursor display is a cancel icon. It is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the icon to be returned (FIG. 69 (33b5-1), or the state where the cursor display is displayed on the cancel icon Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customization screen (FIG. 69 (33b5-2)).

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69 (32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 66 (32a), the cursor display returns as shown in FIG. 69 (33c1) When the right key 137r is operated one more time (FIG. 69 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 69 (33c3). In this state, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 69 (33c4)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to customize the effect customization is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front (FIG. 69 (33c5) )). In this confirmation screen, a "Yes icon" for accepting initialization and a "No icon" for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 69 (33c5), the cursor display is "No icon". It is displayed in ". Then, when the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to the “Yes icon” (FIG. 69 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 69 (33c8-1) As shown in, when the chance button 136 is operated, the initialization of the effect customization is executed.The initialization here is returned to the initial value for everything the player has set in the effect customization. Even if it is not set, it is possible to perform initialization, but it may not be possible.When initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 69 (33c9-1)) Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 69 (33c6-2)), the effect customization screen on which the initialization is reflected is displayed. That. In this example, but did not specifically set anything, all the items are turned OFF of the initial value.

  FIG. 70 is a view showing another modification.

  When the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 70 (74b1) instead of twice operating the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 67 (74a), as shown in FIG. 70 (74b2), The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 70 (74b3), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the initialization icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 70 (74b4), all settings are made in the decorative symbol display device 208. The confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is displayed superimposed on the option menu screen from the front side. On this confirmation screen, a "Yes icon" for accepting initialization and a "No icon" for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 70 (74b4), the cursor display is "No icon" It is displayed in ".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (74b5-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the “Yes icon” (FIG. 70 (74b6-1), or the cursor display is displayed on the “No icon”) In the state where it is being operated, as shown in FIG. 70 (74b5-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 70 (74b6-2)).

  When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed on the "Yes icon" as shown in FIG. 70 (74b6-1) (FIG. 70 (74b7-1)), initialization of all settings is executed. Ru. In this initialization, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. Although initialization is possible even when nothing is set in particular, it may be possible to disable initialization. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed superimposed on the option menu screen from the front side (FIG. 70 (74b8-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 70 (74b9-1)), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 70 (74b10-1).

  When the player performs various customizations and then does not return to the option menu screen, and does not operate the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the ball emission handle 134 for a certain period of time (for example, 5 minutes). May initialize various settings. Also, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 70 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 69 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the “Yes icon” may be removed from the confirmation screen, and may be initialized after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. In addition, even if there is a “Yes icon”, in the case of no operation, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period has passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, it may be initialized only when “initialize” is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed as “Yes icon”) .

  In addition, with regard to volume adjustment and luminance adjustment, initialization may be the same, and furthermore, initialization of various settings and initialization of volume and / or luminance may be performed at the same timing. One may be initialized earlier than the other. In addition, when initializing the volume and initializing the brightness at the same timing as the initialization settings of various settings, the initialization confirmation screen is not displayed for initializing the volume and initializing the luminance. Alternatively, a confirmation screen may be displayed to initialize all settings, volume, and brightness settings.

  Furthermore, a display for confirming whether the settings for effect customization are to be initialized may be automatically displayed during symbol variation. For example, it is always displayed when 100 variations are displayed once, or a fixed number of variations have been made since the last display, or when a fixed number of variations have been made since the first started variation. It may be displayed randomly (for example, when winning by display lottery).

  FIG. 70I to FIG. 70V ′ illustrate an example where customization can be performed during a big hit round.

  In this example, for example, the player can make a music selection in the first round or the second round, reach a certain round after the second round, and can perform customization from the next round. A certain round here is a round which can be won by a V-attacker, specifically, five rounds. In FIG. 70I, the decorative symbol display device 208 for the fifth round is shown, and the letter V for winning a prize for the V-attacker is displayed. Also, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

  FIG. 70 (II) shows a period corresponding to the inter-round interval with the V-attacker closed. Even in the interval between rounds of 5 rounds and 6 rounds, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 5 rounds. Also, although the attacker is closed, right-handed notification is continued.

  In FIG. 70 (III), the attacker starts opening, and the sixth round is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (III), a character display notifying that the effect customization can be performed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed. That is, in this example, the effect customization can be performed in the sixth round, which is the next round of the five rounds that can be won by the V attacker. In addition, it may be executable only in the sixth round, or may be executable over a plurality of rounds after the sixth round.

  In FIG. 70 (IV), the chance button 136 is pressed, and the decoration customization screen shown in FIG. 65 etc. is reduced and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. There is.

  Further, in FIG. 70 (V) shown as a modification of FIG. 70 (V), a display (here, a display related to the auto button mode) regarding only one line (only one item) of the five line list is displayed There is. In this modification, it is possible to change all effect customizations by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF of the items displayed by the left and right keys 137l and 137r. .

  Note that, either of the example of FIG. 70 (V) and the example of FIG. 70 (V '), only part of the effect customization may be changeable.

  In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V winning game is performed with a so-called V machine). In addition, you may customize not only from a V machine but from a certain round.

  Further, the period during which the music selection can be made during the big hit game can not be customized, and the customization may be performed from the round in which the selected music is output. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the music selected in the middle of the round may be output. In this case, even if it is the round for which the music selection is performed, the selected music is output , Can be customized within the round.

  Also, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the specific round is ended. In detail, customization may be performed from the same time as the end of a specific round, or may be performed from the start of the next round to a specific round, and may be performed between a specific round and its next round Customization may be possible from the inter-round interval.

  Furthermore, customization may be feasible anytime during the big hit round. Also, customization may be performed anytime during the jackpot game. The term "during a big hit" as used herein refers to a period between the start of the big hit and the end of the big hit including the middle of the round.

  In addition, the period from when the big hit symbol is displayed and started until the first round is started is, from the viewpoint of the main control unit 300, the special electric character (from the turn-on of the character continuous actuation device to the turn-on) It is a period of time from the off state to the on state of the attacker, but includes a period in which a big hit game start effect is being executed. In addition, although the display (for example, display of a special bonus) displayed by the big hit game start effect may continue to be displayed even if one round is started, it is one round until the attacker starts the first opening. It is a period until the eyes are started. Further, the determination display of the jackpot symbol is not based on the determination display of the decoration symbol but on the basis of the determination display of the symbol on the special view display device 212, 214. In addition, right-handed notification is given before the attacker is opened (for example, in the case of the first hit of special figure 1 and every big hit) If it is a game console, the timing when this right-handed notification is started is a big hit symbol Is included in the period from the final display to the start of the first round.

  During the period from the final display of the jackpot symbol to the start of the first round, customization may not be performed, or vice versa.

  In addition, customization may not be performed in a period from the end of the last round to the start of symbol variation at the shortest. For example, during the jackpot end effect, customization may not be performed.

  Furthermore, during the prepaid card removal warning display, customization may not be performed, or vice versa.

  In addition, during a specific effect (for example, V winning effect, music selection, probability change suggestive effect, and the like), customization may not be performed. Furthermore, customization may not be performed in a period in which effect selection (for example, music selection, effect mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Furthermore, during the execution period of the effect using the operation means used for customization, customization may not be performed, or the customization may be restricted before the effect is started. In this way, the regulation of customization functions as a notice of the effect.

  Furthermore, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 70I to FIG. 70V ′, customization may not be performed when a certain round is reached. For example, although 1 R to 14 R can be customized, it may not be possible when it becomes 15 R. Alternatively, although customization can be performed from 5R to 12R, 13R or later may not be possible.

  In addition, while the two-dimensional code is displayed, customization may not be performed. For example, when a two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period in a big hit game, or when a two-dimensional code is displayed by a player's operation (for example, "press a button to display a two-dimensional code" is displayed In the case where a two-dimensional code is output by a button operation when the button is pressed, customization may not be performed. Alternatively, customization may be performed even while displaying a two-dimensional code. The two-dimensional code and the display related to customization may be displayed at overlapping positions or may be displayed at overlapping positions. That is, part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap from the front side to part or all of the display related to customization, and conversely, part or all of the display related to customization corresponds to two-dimensional It may be displayed on part or all of the code so as to overlap from the front side.

  In FIG. 70 (I) to FIG. 70 (V '), the jackpot effect of a pachinko machine provided with a variable winning opening having a definite variation area is described, but the big hit of a pachinko machine provided with a variable winning opening without a definite variation area. It is applicable also to the big hit of so-called 1 type and 2 types of models in which a big hit starts by winning V.

  70 (VI) to FIG. 70 (VIII) are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (VI), both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and the three decorative symbols are in high speed variation. is there. Further, in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (VI), it is displayed that the eater button mode is currently set to customize, and the effect customization is performed below that. A character display notifying that it is possible and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 70 (VII), the chance button 136 is depressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. The display related to only (one item only) (here, the display related to the auto button mode) is displayed. Also in this example, all the effect customization can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF the items displayed by the left and right keys 137l and 137r.

  FIGS. 70 (IX) to (XI) are diagrams showing other examples in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

  Also in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and three decorative symbols are in high speed variation. is there. Further, in FIG. 70 (IX), the second display device 208P is disposed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The second display device 208P has a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208. The second display device 208P is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 70 (IX) is at an initial position and can be moved up and down. Even in the initial position, a part of the second display device 208P overlaps a part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and when the second display device 208P descends from the initial position, the degree of overlapping with the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes large.

  A model title is displayed on the second display device 208P, and a display RW 'indicating that the eater button mode is currently set to customize is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. . Further, below the display RW ', a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be performed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 70 (X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 70 (XI), the entire screen is switched to the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. In addition, the content (for example, customization display in process of execution) of a part of the production customization screen shown in FIG. 65 etc. may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining content may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Further, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 and the like may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Furthermore, the display using the second display device 208P is also applicable to the display related to customization during the big hit game.

  Note that customization may be performed anytime during symbol variation display. For example, even during display of the super reach effect, customization may be performed. Or, conversely, during display of the super reach effect, customization may not be performed. The super reach production referred to here includes the production and the prognostic production of the insulting part until the judgment production such as the duel production starts after reaching the reach state. For example, an effect of changing the display position of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol assumed to be reached by entering the reach state, and an effect before the character display indicating the development to the super reach is performed are included. In addition, when switching from the judgment effect such as duel effect to the display screen of the decorative symbol, it is included in the super reach effect until it is switched to the display screen of the decorative symbol.

  It should be noted that customization may be performed even for the rendering of the roving part or the prognostic rendering, or may not be performed. Further, after switching from the judgment effect display screen or the judgment effect to the display screen of the decorative symbol, customization may be performed or may not be performed.

  In addition, customization may be performed even during simultaneous rendering performed on a plurality of game machines, or may not be performed during simultaneous rendering. Furthermore, customization may be performed during temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or may not be performed in the opposite direction. Furthermore, during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, it may be possible to customize only when it is a big hit in the end, or it may not be possible to do the opposite, and it is finally lost Customization may or may not be possible only in certain cases. Furthermore, customization may be performed or may not be performed between the end of the symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display in a state where there is a hold. Further, during the execution of a specific effect during symbol variation display (for example, in the pre-reading mode), customization may be performed or may not be performed.

  Furthermore, when customization is performed during symbol fluctuation display, setting change may be applied from the symbol fluctuation display, or setting change may be applied from the next symbol fluctuation display. Good.

  In addition, while setting the user mode (Daitomo) player list (for example, display with the chance button, switching with the arrow key, etc.), the list of missions achieved and game history (number of revolutions, number of balls, number of mission clears) , It is configured to be able to display the number of big wins of the current play, the maximum number of consecutive runs of the current play, etc.), or to be able to change the character or background set by the user, the holding frame, the holding display, etc. It may be done. Furthermore, while setting the user mode (Daitomo), while setting the user mode (Daitomo), a list of missions and game histories achieved by the player operation (for example, display with a chance button, switching with an arrow key, etc.) It is configured to be able to display (number of rotations, number of balls, number of mission clears, number of big wins for current play, maximum number of consecutive runs for current play, etc.), or a character or background set by the user, holding frame , And may be configured to be able to change the pending display and the like.

  In addition, during the setting of the user mode, when the mission is achieved, an icon may be displayed to notify that the mission is achieved.

  Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 of the specification corresponding to the member service of "Daitomo" will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the open condition of FIG. 63 (b) is adopted. Moreover, the top menu is prepared for the pachinko machine 100 of this specification. This top menu can be called up by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. The top menu may be able to be called by merely operating the chance button 136 without passing through the demo screen. Alternatively, even if the chance button 136 is not operated, the screen may be automatically switched and displayed from the demonstration screen. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

  On the top menu, there is a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a back icon.

  FIG. 71 (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

  Even on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Daitomo", "Customize model", "Initialize", and "Return to demo screen", the arrows connected with the arrows are operated by operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137. The cursor moves, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item of "DAITOMO" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the DAITOMO screen. In addition, when the cursor is placed on the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, the "Return" icon is displayed on each of the "Daitomo screen", "Model customize screen", and "Initialization confirmation screen", and the cursor is placed on the "Return" icon and the chance button 136 is pressed. If you do, you can return to the top menu screen. In addition, even if the cursor is not placed on the "RETURN" icon, the screen may return to the top menu screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed.

  In addition, although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize in special figure starting port 212, 214 and symbol variation display of special figure is started, even if it is the top menu screen, “Daitomo screen”, “ Even in the case of "model customization screen" and "initialization confirmation screen", the screen is shifted to the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 71 (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

  The transition diagram of the model customization screen shown in FIG. 71 (2) is the same as the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 64 except that “Return to top menu” at the bottom and “top menu screen” on the right side Therefore, duplicate explanations are omitted. When the cursor is placed on the item “return to top menu” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 72 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

  Even on the Daitomo screen, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137 u or the lower key 137 d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of "trial play", "enter password", "save data", "clear data", "quick start" and "return to top menu screen", the operation key unit is connected to each other by arrows The cursor moves by operating the up key or the down key of 137, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item of “trial play” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the test screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, move to the new registration screen by moving the cursor by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the decision operation of the chance button 136, or the top menu screen to start trial play You can go back to Furthermore, from the new registration screen, it is possible to shift to the password input screen or return to the Daitomo screen by moving the cursor by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and determining operation of the chance button 136. .

  If the cursor is placed on the item of “password input” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the password screen to the password input screen. In the password entry screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is entered, and if the entered password is correct, the screen switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

  If the cursor is placed on the item of "data storage" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the display screen to the data storage confirmation screen. On the data storage confirmation screen, when “Yes” is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross key 137 u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136, the screen shifts to a two-dimensional code issuance screen. However, if "Yes" is determined in the same manner, a two-dimensional code is issued, and it is possible to shift to a demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, in both the data storage confirmation screen and the two-dimensional code issuance screen, "No" is determined by the movement of the cursor by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136 If so, each display is repeated.

  If the cursor is placed on the item of "data clear" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

  If the cursor is placed on the item of “quick start” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. In the quick start start screen, after a certain period of time elapses, the display switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode.

  On the other hand, an icon of "Return" is displayed on each of the "trial play screen", "password input screen", "data save confirmation screen", "data clear confirmation screen", and "quick start start screen", If the cursor is placed on the “return” icon and the chance button 136 is pressed, the screen can be returned to the screen. Also, even if the cursor is not placed on the "RETURN" icon, the screen may be returned to the display screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed.

  In addition, although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize in special drawing starting port 212, 214 and symbol variation display of the special drawing is started, even if it is the Daitomo screen, "trial trial screen" Even if it is, it shifts to the screen of the fluctuation display of the decoration design.

  Further, reference numerals in parentheses shown in FIG. 72 correspond to reference numerals in parentheses in FIG.

  FIG. 73 shows a top menu screen and a display screen.

  A top menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (a). In this top menu screen, background display, holding frame UI, navigation character YM, first decorative symbol (third symbol) and second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "menu", Four types of icons are displayed in order from top to bottom in a row, such as a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen. Further, in FIG. 72A, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the bottom back icon, and the back icon is red while the other icons are displayed in white. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started is a back icon. Further, also in the top menu screen, a pattern of a cross key (red only for the up and down keys 137u, d) used for the selection operation and a pattern of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right.

  The screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (b1) is the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) with the chance button 136 displayed in a state where the cursor icon cs is displayed on the Daitomo icon. It is a Daitomo screen displayed by being pressed. In order to return to the trial play icon, password input icon, data storage icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen, in the vertical row below the character display of "Daitomo" on the screen of this Daitomo. Six kinds of icons such as the back icon of are displayed. Further, in FIG. 72 (b1), the cursor display is displayed on the trial play icon at the top, and the frame of the trial play icon is highlighted and further displayed in red. In addition, a character of Yoshimune appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical row, and an explanation about trial play is displayed. Further, below the display of the description, a pattern of a cross key (red only for the up and down keys 137u and d) used for the selection operation and a pattern of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, a trial play screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the trial play screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-1), options that can be selected in various customizations are displayed as benefits of Daitomo's membership experience. Below the display, there is a confirmation icon for saving the setting change, a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, a "starting icon" to start trial play, and a new registration for newly registering a member. The icons are arranged in a horizontal row sequentially from the left side. The cursor display is displayed on the "start icon", and this position is the initial position. In this state, when the right key 137r is operated once, the cursor display moves to the "newly registered icon", and when the decision button 136 is pressed to perform the decision operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 A new registration screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-2) is displayed.

  In the new registration screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-2), the two-dimensional code QR1 is largely displayed on the left, and the two-dimensional code is read by the communication terminal with the photographing function on the right. A sentence is displayed that recommends accessing the website of the embedded URL (Daitomo site) and obtaining a password from it. Further, below the display of the text, a password input icon and a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but may be displayed without passing through the trial play screen. For example, when a newly registered icon is provided on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1) separately from the trial play icon etc. and this newly registered icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, FIG. The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

  In the screen of FIG. 73 (b2), the cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and the explanation on the password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, a password input screen shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the password input screen shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw and a dial kw of alphabets, symbols and numbers are displayed below the password input area pw. The person who inputs the password moves the cursor (displayed in gray, while T is being specified in FIG. 73 (b2-1-1)) using the cross key 137u, d, l, r, and the character specified by the cursor An operation of inputting in the password input area pw by the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed one character by one character in accordance with the password acquired from the Daitomo site (see FIG. 73 (b2-1-1)). Under the dial kw, a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erase icon for erasing the input characters of the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating completion of password input are arranged in a line from the left side sequentially It is done.

  When the input operation of the password is completed, the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed on the completion icon. If the input of the password is incorrect, the window of the input error shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1-2) is displayed. If this window disappears, the input operation of the password becomes possible again. The previously input password may be cleared from the password input area pw or may remain as it is. Also, if the password input is correct, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an input completed window shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1-3) for a certain period, and then switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode. .

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 73 (b3), the cursor display is displayed on the data storage icon, and on the right side, the description of data storage is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, a data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b3-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when trial play or quick start is being performed, or when password input is not performed, the data storage icon can not be selected, or the data storage confirmation screen is not displayed. However, conversely, it may be selectable or displayable.

  In the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b3-1), a “Yes” icon for accepting storage of data and a “No” icon for not storing data are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, a two-dimensional code QR2 is generated by the pachinko machine 100 and issued (Fig. 73 (b3-2)). In this two-dimensional code QR2, in addition to the URL of the Daitomo site, the player's ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, the number of balls, the number of big hits, the number of consecutive homes, the Daitomo mode level, experience Value, including mission achievement information etc.), etc. is read, this two-dimensional code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function, and the website of the URL embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 (Daitomo site Data is stored on the server of Daitomo site when accessing. An end icon is displayed at the lower right of the data storage confirmation screen, and when reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, the end confirmation screen is selected when the end icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated. Is displayed.

  The end confirmation screen is displayed in FIG. 73 (b3-2-1), and a “Yes” icon for accepting the end and a “No” icon for not ending are displayed. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to a demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set.

  The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 may be deleted from the pachinko machine when the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 ends, such as data of the game history information of this time, as shown in FIG. 73 (b3-2-1) The “Yes” icon may be selected and the chance button 136 may be operated to erase the pachinko machine 100 from the pachinko machine 100 or may not be erased until data clear described later is performed.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 73 (b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and on the right side, the explanation about data clear is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b4-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If the trial play or quick start is being performed, or if the password is not input, the data clear icon can not be selected, or the data clear confirmation screen is not displayed. However, conversely, it may be selectable or displayable.

  In the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b4-1), a “Yes” icon for accepting deletion of data such as game history information at this time and a “No” icon for not deleting data are displayed. There is. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine, and an erasure complete screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 73 (b4-1-1), the erasing completion screen is displayed, and the erasing completion screen disappears when it is displayed for a certain period, and the screen is returned to the Dytomo screen.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 73 (b5), the cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and the explanation on the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a quick start start screen shown in FIG. 73 (b5-1). This quick start start screen disappears when it is displayed for a certain period, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 73 (b6), the cursor display is displayed on the return icon, and on the right side, the return to the top menu screen is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

  When the second model customization icon is selected from the top of the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) and the chance button 136 is operated, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c). Is displayed. On this model customization screen, under the character display of "model customization", in order from top to bottom in a row, the effect customization icon, the character selection icon, the holding frame selection icon, the holding display selection icon, the background display selection icon, and initialization Seven types of icons are displayed, such as an icon and a back icon for returning to the top menu screen. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 74C, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, whereas the effect customization icon is lit in red. Further, in the model customization screen, the pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right. Furthermore, among the chance button 136 and the cross key, the cursor icon cs and the patterns of the up and down keys 137 u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. Note that for the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 74 (c1), the effect customization screen is displayed, but with the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (17), there is a point that the choice of the input sound advance notice and the choice of the back button navigation are not released. It is different. If the password of Daitomo is not input or the level satisfying the release condition is not reached, a screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c1) is displayed.

  Although the character selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c2), with the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (40), all other options are unreleased except for the option of Yoshimune, and the other is not The difference is that the option does not even indicate what character it is. In addition, even if it is an unreleased option, a part or all of a character image may be displayed, or a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which selectable characters can be recognized ( For example, a display may be displayed that includes “Dai tomo Lv. 20 with princess open” and the like. Here, with regard to the display regarding the unreleased option, the present invention is also applicable to other customized displays (in this example, a holding frame, a hold display, and a background display). If the password of Daitomo is not input, the screen shown in FIG. 74 (c2) is displayed. Only Yoshimune can be selected on this screen.

  On the other hand, in the character selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c2 '), since the password is input or the trial play is selected, the 爺 character can also be selected. However, after 03, it can not be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  Although the holding frame selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c3), with the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (55), all the other options are unreleased except for the holding frame A option. There is a difference that the other options are not even displayed what sort of holding box is. If the password of Daitomo is not input, a screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c3) is displayed. In this screen, only the holding frame A can be selected.

  On the other hand, in the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c3 '), since the password is being input, the holding frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, it can not be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  While the hold display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c4), with the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (63), all other options are unreleased except for the option of the icon A. The other option is different in that it is not displayed even what is the name of the pending display. If the password of Daitomo is not input, the screen shown in FIG. 74 (c4) is displayed. Only the icon A can be selected on this screen.

  On the other hand, on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c4 '), since the password is being input, the icon B can also be selected. However, here as well, 03 and later can not be selected because they have not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  Although a background display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c5), with the background display selection screen shown in FIG. The other option is different in that it is not displayed even what background name it is. If the password of Daitomo is not input, a screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c5) is displayed. Only background A can be selected on this screen.

  On the other hand, in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c5 '), since the password is input, the background B can also be selected. However, here as well, 03 and later can not be selected because they have not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  Although a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all the settings is displayed in FIG. 74 (d1), since it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 70 (74b6-1), the description will be omitted. Also, although the initialization completion screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (d2), the description is omitted because it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 70 (74b8-1).

  FIG. 74 (e1) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen set in the Daitomo mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (e1), a holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Moreover, the combination ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the loss of the decoration design is displayed also to the 1st decoration design (the 3rd design) and the 2nd decoration design (the 5th design) The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the number of special views of the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no suspension, and symbol variation display is not started after the finalized display of the stop symbol of the special drawing is performed. Furthermore, below the second number-of-retentions display, the current level of the tone mode (here, level 1) and the experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demonstration screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 74 (e1) corresponds to, for example, a screen immediately after newly registering and transitioning to the demonstration screen.

  Further, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 74 (e1), the corresponding sound effect is output. For example, when the Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice of “Start of Daitomo” is output, and when the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, “Trial When the voice of "play start" is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice of "DAITOMO start. Let's keep trying today" is output. It should be noted that different sound effects are output depending on whether the corresponding sound effects are started by Daitomo by trial play, when Daitomo is started by quick start, and when Daitomo is started by password input. The same effect sound may be output, or the same effect sound may be output in two cases. Further, the sound effects may be changed depending on the level of Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. In addition, when returning to the demonstration screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 74 (e1) after model customization, the sound effects may not be output, and dedicated sound effects may be output. Also, an animation may be displayed together with or instead of the corresponding sound effect. When the start of symbol variation is started while a sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) on the way, but may be output as it is until the end.

  Also, when the Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed. In the case of at least one of them, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) may not be called for a certain period, or the certain period may be A top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) or a model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) may be called without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) may not be called up for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 74 (e1-1) shows that the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed when a certain period has elapsed since the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 74 (e1) is displayed. FIG.

  Note that after the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) is displayed, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are regulated so as not to be additionally displayed for a predetermined period (for example, one minute). It is also good. When the operation of the chance button 136 or the operation of the cross keys 137u, d, l, r is performed during this fixed period, the operation is invalidated. However, it may be effective.

  In addition, even while the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed (for example, immediately after or immediately after the symbol variation display stops with no hold), The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown at 65 can be called. When the volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW is called and there is no operation for a certain period, the screen may return to the screen shown in FIG. 74 (e1-1).

  Also, when the stop symbol is displayed in a state where there is no hold, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period, and a certain period is shown in FIG. The model customization screen shown in) may not be called.

  Also, even when the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) can not be called, the volume control window VW and the brightness control window BW shown in FIG. May be possible.

  Furthermore, at the time of switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 and the screen shown in FIG. 74 (e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also shown in FIG. 74 (e1-1) There is a state in which neither is displayed, and even in this state, the adjustment operation of the volume and the brightness may be executable or may be restricted so as not to be executable.

  FIG. 74 (e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen displayed via FIG. 73 (b3-2-1) after the two-dimensional code is issued in FIG. 73 (b3-2). As an output sound from the speaker 120 here, a voice saying "Thank you for your patience" is output. Also, depending on the state before the demonstration screen is displayed, the outputted sound effects may change.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the effect using the fluctuation icon.

  Here, the fluctuation icon h0 is summarized again. The variation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the suspension of the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon related to a symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon changes to the change icon h0 simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly speaking, when the first hold icon h11 with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the change icon display area CIS, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or expressed as the change icon moves. You may Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variation icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a variation icon. The variation icon h0 is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon h11 (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). Although this may facilitate identification of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11, it may have the same size. In addition, the variation icon h0 may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon h11. The fluctuation icon h0 can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation (the fluctuation notification) according to the display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon h0 can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that the notification of the success or failure result of the special drawing fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified. In addition to the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), a plurality of types of display modes of the variation icon h0 are prepared as a display mode of normal notice, depending on the display mode. The big hit reliability (expected degree) is different. The higher the jackpot reliability, the more likely the jackpot symbol will be displayed finally. In the following description, the color represents the level of expectation of the big hit. The default white is a case where “no change” is selected in the effect drawing for the display mode of the variation icon h0. The default white fluctuation icon does not predict the jackpot expectation, but may predict the jackpot expectation (in that case, the color of the icon with the lowest jackpot expectation). The white blink is the lowest in the jackpot expectation (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). The color of the display mode of the normal notice is so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes to white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in descending order of the expectation of the big hit. Gold is rich in big hit, and rainbow color has higher expectation of big hit than that, for example, it may be possible to say up to big hit determination. In addition, the relationship of this color is the same also in the color of the display mode of the advance notice by the hold icon. Below, when it is said that it is red or more, it becomes red, gold, and rainbow colors.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) performs variable display. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and on the right base icon bIr, in FIG. 75 (A1), the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is displayed. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. For example, the display may be started simultaneously with the start of a certain symbol variation display, and may be continuously displayed during the symbol variation display, may disappear temporarily, or disappear from view. Further, the symbol variation display may be ended, and the symbol display may be continuously displayed while the stop display is displayed, or may be temporarily erased or invisible. And during the display of the next symbol variation display started continuously, it may be displayed continuously, may disappear temporarily, or may become invisible. Alternatively, the display may end while the next symbol variation display is displayed. Moreover, it may be displayed only in a part or all of the whole period during display of one symbol variation display, and may not be displayed while the next symbol variation display is displayed. This navigation character YM may be a so-called always-displayed character, but may not be continuously displayed in any case. Furthermore, the display mode may change while the navigation character YM continues to be displayed. Details of this point will be described later.

  Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode). In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of this variation icon h0 is also the default display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode).

  In FIG. 75 (a.sub.2-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that when the display is made, another icon or the like may change. As another icon etc., it is a navigation character YM, it is a reserved icon h11, it is a fluctuation icon h0, it is a decoration pattern, etc. That is, the icon or the like displayed before the start of the display of the change preview display is the target to be changed. However, it may be an object to be changed even if the display is started at the same time as the start of the display of the change advance display or the display is started later. The player may or may not know what is to be changed when the display of the change preview display is started. Also, there may be suggestions on what to change. Furthermore, even if the change advance notice display is displayed, there may be a case where it is a false notice that nothing changes depending on the change advance notice display. In addition, the target change display may be determined to be one, or it may be determined to be changed.

  The treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 75 (A2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The carpet icon I2 is displayed only at the time of appearance, and when the icon I1 of the treasure box reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, it disappears on the spot or flies off the screen. As the appearance timing of the icon of this change notice display, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, when the winning to the special figure starting opening (when the hold increases) At the start of advance notice of winning prize, at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in pseudo-sequence effect (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, super reach At the start, you can list the super reach and so on. That is, as the appearance timing of the icon of the change preview display, all of the above listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. In addition, there may be a plurality of display modes of the icon I1 of the treasure box, for example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like changes depending on the display mode (difference in size, color, animation) of the treasure box or carpet. It is also good. In addition, with regard to the effect display that is displayed only at the time of appearance or exit, such as the carpet icon I2, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, the probability of changing is high, or a state advantageous to the player The probability of changing to the display mode may be high. For example, the probability of changing the display mode to a high expectation of the big hit may be high. In addition, the change notice may be a display for changing only the navigation character, but there may be a case where the effect display (the hold icon, the change icon, the notice of the change, the advance notice, etc.) other than the navigation character is changed. It may be. In addition, among effects other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice display of the change (timer notice, talk notice, chance up meter, etc.), prefetch notice display (timer notice, background display for look-ahead mode etc.), etc. The navigation character may be configured not to be changed by the advance notice display in which one effect display, a plurality of effect displays, or all the effect displays) is changed, but the navigation character may be changed. Good. In addition, the change advance notice display may be configured to change the navigation character more frequently than to change the effect display other than the navigation character, but conversely, the frequency to change the navigation character is the effect other than the navigation character It may be less than the frequency of changing the display, and two frequencies may be performed with the same frequency. Here, the effect display (navigation character, effect display other than navigation character) is displayed by "notice to change the effect display (change notice display, notice display to change the effect display other than the navigation character; hereinafter referred to as notice A)." In the case of being changed, when the less frequent effect display changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A, than when the effect display changed frequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A Also, it may or may not be configured to be easily hit.

  In FIG. 75 (A 3-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. The icon I1 of this treasure box is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 75 (A4-1), the display mode of the icon I1 of the treasure box changes. That is, a change animation is displayed, a treasure box is opened, a smoke image of an effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides a part or all of the navigation character YM and is more obvious than before the smoke image appears. It becomes difficult to see In the case where icons other than the navigation character YM are displayed, the smoke image may cover part or all of the display of the icons other than the navigation character YM from the front side. Also, the treasure box may not be opened. Furthermore, even if the treasure box is opened, another advance notice may be given. In FIG. 75 (A 5-1), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed. That is, the indigo (default color) kimono which the character of the navy character YM has been wearing is changed to a red kimono. The state in which it is suggested that the fluctuation icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change is that the change of the character of the character of the navy character YM has changed to a red kimono. It should be noted that when the icon I1 of the treasure box is displayed, it may be determined that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a golden kimono or a rainbow kimono. In addition, it may be blinking white, blue or green. Also, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed corresponding to the color of the holding icon and / or the variation icon (for example, when green holding is displayed on the holding 2, the navigation character YM is green) Change into kimono, etc.). Here, if the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variation icon and / or the hold icon, and if the display mode of the hold icon and / or the variation icon changes more than one, it is digested first. The color of the holding icon or the variation icon may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigation character, or the color of the holding icon to be digested later may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigation character. The color with high expectation for big hit may be displayed preferentially, and conversely, the color with low expectation for big hit may be displayed preferentially, and the degree of expectation for big hit regardless of the color of the reserved icon or the variation icon itself The high hold icon or the color of the change icon may be displayed, regardless of the color of the hold icon or the change icon itself, the hold icon or the low expectation of the big hit is low The color of the moving icon may be displayed, the color of the changing holding icon and / or the changing icon may all be reflected in the color of the navigation character, and the color of the navigation character is changing the holding icon It may be displayed at random among the colors of the variation icons and / or. In addition, the icon I1 of the treasure box whose lid is still open is still displayed next to the navigation character YM whose display mode has been changed. The icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear simultaneously with the appearance of the smoke image, or may disappear together with the smoke image. At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (A6-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box disappears, and in the effect icon display area DIS, only the navi character YM of the lady wearing a red kimono is displayed. Up to this point, the first decorative symbol continues to display at high speed.

  In FIG. 75 (A7), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and "decoration 7" is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In addition, in the 2nd decoration symbol, temporary stop is not performed but three decoration symbols continue the change display. In FIG. 75 (A8), it is developed into super reach production (Kenou reach production), the background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to the background screen of the wilderness, and the left symbol temporarily stopped is the decorative symbol display device It moves to the upper left of 208, and the right symbol which is also temporarily stopped moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the background screen h of the wilderness, a duel scene in which the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing is displayed. Further, in the holding frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the holding icon display area HIS disappear and the first holding icon h11 also disappears. Further, although the height of the pedestal of the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navi character YM of the lord like wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. During the super reach effect, the entire holding frame UI may be hidden. That is, the base hs0 'of the variation icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden. Furthermore, during the super reach effect, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be hidden. In addition, during the super reach effect, any one or two of the navi character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be hidden. Furthermore, during super reach production, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and all the variation icons h0 are hidden, and the hold frame UI (left base icon bIl, four stages hs1 to hs4, pedestal hs0 (hs0 ')) The right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or conversely, all of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be displayed to hide the hold frame UI.

  In FIG. 75 (A9), the lord-like navi character YM, which has been facing the front, turns to the variation icon h0 and changes to a pose in which the sword is held. In FIG. 75 (A 10), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navy character YM, and in FIG. 75 (A 11), the fluctuation icon h0 which has been white is changed to red. As described above, the fluctuation icon of the red display mode has a considerably high expectation of the jackpot in the symbol fluctuation display which is currently performed. In FIG. 75 (A12), the main character of the navigation character YM has returned to the standing posture facing the front. The Toho-sama navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A12) remains the display mode of the red kimono, but may return to the default display mode (display mode of the blue-colored kimono).

  Although not shown in FIG. 75 (13), the button effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the chance button 136 by the player. In the remaining time display meter, the operation effective period starts and the gauge decreases. After that, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, a cut-in image of Tonosama is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the big hit reliability is high. The cut-in image of Tonosama overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the cut-in image of Tonosama is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in image of the lady may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or is displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the cut-in image of the lord is deleted, the animation display of the duel scene continues, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the button effect is produced for the second time after developing into super reach. Is started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can receive the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter, the operation effective period starts and the gauge decreases. In addition, the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after developing into the super reach, and in this case, it develops into the super reach The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button rendering after the development into the super reach, or after developing into the super reach The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to the super reach may be the same length.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the first large-screen behavior character shown in FIG. 224 Ga to a fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left graphic and the right graphic of the effect image and the first decorative design are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article It is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. The effects of the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed also when the operation effective period has passed without any error. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is performed. Also, in the case where both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large-size behavior character article 224Ga to fourth is performed. The operation of the large-screen behavior character item 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are started, or the effect image And the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd may be simultaneously started. In addition, even when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, the effect display where the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is not performed is performed but the loss display is performed. It is also possible to display a resurrection effect after a rendition effect display is performed, and to perform a big hit effect display. In addition, when the effect that the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavioral goods thing GDd are started, although the fluctuation icon h0 currently displayed becomes non-display, you may continue to display.

  Thereafter, the one-sided box character 224H shown in FIG. 14 (a) operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd. . Further, thereafter, light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. The display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224 Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224 H, and the order of starting light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. It can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where no parting takes place.

  After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, the one-hundred box character article 224H starts rising toward the initial position. After that, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first to fourth large-screen behavior characters 224 Ga to 24 Gd start moving toward the initial position. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 75 (A 14-1). In FIG. 75 (A 14-1), a scene after the lord and the swordsman have cut each other is displayed.

  The animation of the navigation character YM in FIG. 75 (A 9) to FIG. Although this change presentation can be viewed as part of the super reach presentation, it can also be viewed as another presentation different from the super reach presentation started with the start of the super reach presentation. As for the start timing of the change effect, other than during super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when symbol fluctuation starts, when movement of the fluctuation icon h0 is completed, when winning to the special figure starting opening (hold At the start of advance notice of winning at winning), success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at temporary stop or continuation in pseudo-series effect (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state , Can be listed at the start of the super reach. That is, as the start timing of the change effect, all of the above listed items may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

  In addition, also when the variation icon h0 changes, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed other than during the super reach effect, when the symbol variation starts, when the movement of the variation icon h0 is completed, the winnings to the special figure starting opening At the time (hold increase), at the start of advance notice at the time of winning, at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo sequence effect (at the start of revariation), reach At the start of the state, the start of the super reach etc. can be listed. That is, as the timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 changes, all of the above listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. Furthermore, the timing at which the change icon h0 changes may overlap with the button valid period in the button effect described above. Note that the display mode of the fluctuation icon may not be changed after a certain period during the super reach effect. The super reach effect described here is also a game effect, and includes a button effect, and is a type of so-called final judge effect in which either the main character or the enemy wins. After the final judgment effect result is displayed, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may not change. In addition, when an animation for changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is performed by the navigation character YM, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be always changed or a failure may be made. May be That is, the change effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 must be changed or when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed (if it succeeds) and when it is not changed (if it fails) There may be.

  In addition, the change animation of the change icon by the navigation character YM may not be performed. In that case, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative symbol is displayed are switched by the wipe at the end of the super reach effect. In addition, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be switched back to the default display mode (display mode of an amber kimono) after being switched by the wipe, and the navigation character YM is used as a preview notice of the next symbol variation display The display mode as it is (display mode of red kimono) may be maintained.

  In FIG. 75 (A 15-1), a scene in which the enemy character swordsman has fallen and the main character, the lord, has won is displayed, and the lord, the navigation character YM, is also posing for victory. However, although the middle design is not displayed yet, the middle design of "decoration 7" is displayed in the same drawing (A 16-1), but the red variation icon h0 is still displayed, and the second decoration is displayed. The symbol is also being displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, at the stage of FIG. 16A, each symbol (left middle right symbol) of the first decorative symbol is in temporary stop (swing fluctuation). In FIG. 75 (15-1), a big hit animation by the main character may be executed.

  Here, it can also be seen that up to FIG. 75 (A 15-1) before the middle symbol is displayed, but the middle symbol is displayed and it seems that the victory has been decided at once (A 16-1 ) Can be viewed as super reach effect, or can be further advanced and viewed as super reach effect until just before stop display is performed. Further, as described above, the super reach effect here corresponds to an example of the final judge effect, and it is assumed that the super reach effect is being performed until the result of the final judge effect is determined (for example, immediately before the stop display is performed). It is also good. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the first decorative symbol starts fluctuation fluctuation with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, the first special view display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display mode of the special view A. In addition, although the first special view display device 212 is stopped and displayed, the first sub control unit 400 is in a state of not receiving the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is determined to be the symbol determination stop Since it is not present, the fluctuation fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the fluctuation display is still in progress in the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284.

  After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", and In the 4 symbol display device, display is performed in a mode that the symbol has stopped.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the big hit start effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  During the super reach, both the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect that is the final judge effect is started, a part or all of the holding frame UI may be configured to be hidden or disappear. For example, although the right base icon bIr has been displayed until then, the right base icon bIr may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judgment effect is started. In addition, when the final judge effect is started, the variable icon h0 may be configured to be hidden or disappear, or the navigation character YM may be configured to be hidden or not displayed. Both of the characters YM may be configured to be hidden or disappear. In addition, when the hold icon is displayed so far, the hold icon may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Furthermore, the other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started, when the icons are displayed until then.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (A 2-2) and as shown in FIG. 75 (A 2-2), there may be a case where a balloon display such as “Change !?” As shown in (2-3), a balloon display such as "in preparation for change" may be added. Thereafter, the processing returns to FIG. 75 (A3-1), and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is displayed. The balloon display of the navigation character YM corresponds to the notice effect (precursor effect) of the start of the change notice display. That is, it is a notice that suggests that the navigation character itself may change, such as "Change !?" Within the fluctuation or “following the next fluctuation of the fluctuation indicated by“ in preparation for change ”).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 75 (A 3-1) and as shown in FIG. 75 (A 3-2-1), while the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is temporarily displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, In some cases, a carpet icon I2 appears and a treasure chest icon I1 flies away on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 75 (A 4-2) instead of FIG. 75 (A 4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change advance notice display, it may give notice of the changing mode or change ease of the navigation character YM. In the case of FIG. 75 (2-4), it is predicted that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode in which a kimono of the same color as smoke is worn. In addition, depending on the type of change animation in the change advance notice display, the expectation of the jackpot in the change or the hold may be announced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (A 5-2) instead of FIG. 75 (A 5-1), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM does not change, and the navigation character Y M itself may become large. . As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be, in addition to the change in color, a change in size or a change in shape (e.g., pose). The color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (5-2) may be indigo blue (default color) or may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (5-2) overlaps a part of the icon I1 of the treasure box from the front side. Note that a part of the navigation character YM may overlap with the entire icon I1 of the treasure box from the front side. Alternatively, at least a part of the icon I1 of the treasure chest may overlap at least a part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

  In addition, as the probability of changing the variation icon h0, that is, the degree of expectation of the big hit, the default display mode is larger than the default display mode, the larger display mode with the default color is higher than the small display mode with red. The red and large display mode may be higher. In addition, as far as the size and the color are concerned, the color may be prioritized. For example, the display mode in red and small may be higher than the display mode in large by the default color. Or, conversely, the size may be prioritized, for example, the large display mode with the default color may be higher than the small display mode with red. Furthermore, as for the size (display size) of the navigation character YM, in addition to the large size and the small size, there may be a plurality of sizes such as intermediate sizes.

  When the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variation icon h0 changes to red, and when it is a display mode wearing a golden kimono, the variation icon h0 changes to gold, and a rainbow When the display mode is a color kimono, the variation icon h0 may change to a rainbow color. In addition, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, the fluctuation icon h0 may be easily changed to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose expectation of the jackpot is red or more. That is, if the change of the change icon h0 is successful, it may be determined that the color changes to red or more, or the color may be determined to be red or more. However, even if the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, the expectation of the big hit may change to a color lower than red (green, blue, white blinking, white). Furthermore, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a rainbow-colored kimono, which is a premier color, is displayed, the color of the variation icon h0 may also be changed to the rainbow. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the display mode of the navigation character YM directly notifies that a big hit is made, and the navigation character YM is in another color. In the case of the display mode wearing a kimono (for example, red), if the display mode of the variation icon changes, it will be easy to make a big hit as a result, and the ease of big hit will be It can be notified indirectly.

  In addition, even when the display mode is not changed, the navigation character YM may change the fluctuation icon h0. Alternatively, the change icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode changes. Furthermore, although the character of the protagonist is a so-called always-displayed character, the navigation character YM for changing the fluctuation icon h0 may be a character displayed only when changing the fluctuation icon h0. Also, the character may be displayed only when giving a notice. Furthermore, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as a character for changing the fluctuation icon h0, or only the character set by the player in the character selection in customization is the fluctuation icon It may be possible to use it as a character to change h0.

  FIG. 76 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Following FIG. 75 (A 6-1), a change notice display is made so as to return to FIG. 75 (A 7) through FIG. 76 (A 6-2-1) and the same figure (A 6-2-3). The navigation character YM may change a plurality of times until the icon I1 of the treasure box is hidden. The navi character YM shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, but the navi character YM shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-2-2) is a golden kimono. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and be displayed anew. Further, the change advance notice may be displayed over a plurality of changes. In this case, the icon I1 of the treasure chest repeats opening and closing.

  Also, following to FIG. 75 (A 6-1), change animations as shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-1) to the same figure (A 6-3-2) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice (here, a UFO icon UFI) different from the change notice display. In the same figure (A 6-3-3a) continuing from FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2), a gold beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is emitted toward the navi-character YM dressed in a red kimono As shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-4a), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a golden kimono is worn. Alternatively, in the same figure (A 6-3-3b) continuing from FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2), the gray beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is directed to the navigation character YM in a red kimono It is irradiated, and as shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-4b), the navigation character YM is enlarged while wearing a red kimono.

  Although the promotion has been described here, the navigation character YM may have no change even when the beam is irradiated (a so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode or There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn or a case where it becomes smaller (when it is demoted).

Further, FIG. 76 (A 14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 75 (A 14-1), which is a scene after the majesty and the swordsman have cut each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle design, the "decoration 6" different from the left and right design ("decoration 7") is displayed (shaved) largely, and in the same figure (A 14-2-2), the left design, the middle design, the right All decorative symbols of the symbol are once displayed thinner than usual. Also, in the same figure, a scene in which the majesty falls is displayed. In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-3), all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed again in normal density, and in the same figure (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. This is performed, and switching between a super reach presentation scene (display presentation) and a normal background (a background before the start of the super reach presentation shown in FIG. 75 (A1) or the like) is performed. In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (A 14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily becomes a wipe display of non-pattern same color. In this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. Also, the model title is displayed at the left corner. The variation icon h0 or the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-6), the user wipes out, and the background returns to the background normally, and the display mode of the navigation character YM also returns to the default display mode. The display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (the timing of FIG. 76 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-7), the wipe effect is finished, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of losing. There is. Further, the holding frame UI is also displayed, and the variation icon h0 and the first holding icon h11 are also displayed. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 76 (14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may return to the default display mode, or even if the variation icon h0 itself is erased. Good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the display mode in which a red kimono is worn. In this example, although the display to return to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed is not visible because the navigation character is not displayed, the display to return to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character is changed May be visible. (For example, the display may switch from a state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed to a default state, or an animation display in which the state of the display mode of the navigation character may change to a default state.
In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and / or the navigation character YM are displayed at the time of wipe out (FIG. 76 (A 14-2-6) to FIG. (A 14-2-7)), they are not displayed. There may be a case, and when it is displayed, the resurrection effect may be more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when displayed, the arrangement may be such that the resurrection effect is always performed, and when it is not displayed, the resurrection effect may or may not be performed.

  Further, in FIG. 76 (A 14-2-1) to FIG. (A 14-2-3), a part of the holding frame UI (the pedestal hs0 ′ and the right base icon bIr) is displayed, but the holding frame The entire UI may be hidden, or only part of it may be hidden. The variation icon h0 may be hidden or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Also, if the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may also be hidden. Furthermore, the other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden if they have been displayed so far.

  FIG. 77 shows another modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Following FIG. 75 (A 16-1), displays as shown in FIG. 77 (A 16-2-1) to the same figure (A 16-2-2) may be performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (A 16-2-2), the entire screen starts to be thinned. After this, the re-lottery effect disappears once, and the screen shown in FIG. 77 (A 16-2-1) may be displayed again (the screen of the medal of victory), or FIG. 75 (A 14-2-3). The screen shown in) may be displayed (the screen of a martial arts defeat), or a combination of decorative symbols (in the case of a combination of big hit or lost) with a normal background as shown in the same figure (A 16-2-3) A screen may be displayed in which a combination is displayed).

  In addition, even on the redisplayed screen, the navigation character YM and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed, and if the display mode of the navigation character YM and / or the fluctuation icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous big hit confirmation (for example, a definite variation) A big hit or a large number of rounds may be determined. Alternatively, if the display mode is not changed, an advantageous jackpot is not determined, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be determined, and the display mode is a gold or rainbow premium If so, an advantageous jackpot may be finalized.

  FIGS. 77 (1) to (12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of changes and also functions as a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 77 (i), the navigation character YM in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  In FIG. 77 (2), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 77 (3), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed.

  In FIG. 77 (4-1), change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. That is, the navy character YM of the lord who had been in a posture (initial posture) standing up to that time turns to the variation icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is held. In FIG. 77 (15), the wave oscillates from the sword of the domino navigation character YM, but in FIG. 77 (i), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 remains the default, and the change effect ends in failure. There is. In FIG. 77 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono is again displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 77 (i), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the third symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 77 (i), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started again. In FIG. 77 (i), the fluctuation icon h0 which has been white until now has changed to red, and the normal notice has been started. In FIG. 12 (i), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture in the display mode in which the red kimono is worn. After that, although not shown, the jackpot symbol is finalized and displayed in the symbol variation display currently performed.

  Further, in FIG. 77 (FIG. 4-2-1) instead of FIG. 77 (FIG. 4-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS while symbol variation display is performed. In the same figure (4-2-2), the change animation for the hold icon is started. The movement of the navigation character YM may be animation, or the display position may be switched instantaneously. Also, when the navigation character YM goes out of the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, a business trip to the signboard at the position (initial position) where the navigation character YM was displayed in the effect icon display area DIS The icon display described as "inside" may be displayed.

  Note that the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it is always successful (the display mode of the hold icon changes) Good. In addition, the change effect may be performed only on the pre-read target hold icon. For example, the first holding icon h11 may be performed only when the number of holdings is one, or a plurality of holding icons (which may include a variation icon) may be performed. Furthermore, the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times until the display mode changes for the pre-read target hold (until it succeeds), and may not be performed again if it fails once. .

  Further, the change presentation may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has once changed by the change presentation. This applies not only to the hold icon but also to the change icon h0.

  Furthermore, the navigation character YM may move from the effect icon display area DIS even in the change effect with respect to the change icon h0. Further, the navigation character YM may not move out of the effect icon display area DIS, or may move within the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the holding frame UI, or may be movable out of the holding frame UI.

  In this example, the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every change from the next change of the change of the navigation character YM to red to the change of suspension of the prefetch target, There may be a change that does not perform change animation between the next change of the change in which the color of the navigation character YM turns red and the change of the prefetch target. Moreover, the change animation may be performed also for the change in which the navigation character YM turns red.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the change effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM and the change effect of the change icon.

  In FIG. 78 (1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  In FIG. 78 (2), the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) appears outside the holding frame UI and approaches the holding frame UI. The effect icon may appear in the holding frame UI. As shown in FIG. 78 (3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI to the second reserve icon h12, and as shown in FIG. 78 (4), the display mode of the second reserve icon h12 is The display mode changes from the default display mode to the white display mode. In other words, he has succeeded in promoting. Note that there are multiple types of effect icons, and the success probability of the promotion effect may change depending on the effect icon that appears. For example, when the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be always succeeded, and when the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more. If the third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 78 (4), the UFO icon UFI has disappeared. In FIG. 78 (5), the three decorative symbols are in the temporary stop state. In FIG. 78 (6), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 78 (7), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, and symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 78 (8), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture.

  In (U9) of FIG. 78, the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a bow-draw pose, and a promotion effect of the holding icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In Fig. 78 (Fig. 10), the arrow is fired, the arrow flies over the fluctuating icon h0, and in Fig. 78 (Fig. 11), the first holding icon h11 which is a display mode of white flickering is hit. In FIG. 12 (U), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from white blinking to blue display mode, and the promotion effect succeeds. The promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change) or, conversely, may succeed (the display mode of the hold icon changes). In addition, the first hold icon h11 may be performed only when the number of holds is 1, or a plurality of hold icons (which may include a variation icon) may be performed. Furthermore, the promotion effect may be performed any number of times until the display mode changes with respect to the prefetch target hold (until success), and may not be performed again if it fails once. Further, the promotion effect may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has been changed once by the promotion effect. In addition, even if a plurality of suspension icons are displayed, the promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect performed only for one of the suspension icons (that is, the position of suspension icon A moves with reduction of suspension) Even in this case, the promotion effect by the navigation character is performed only for the holding icon A.), and the effects may be performed on a plurality of holding icons and / or variation icons displayed in the holding icon display area. . In FIG. 78 (戻 り 13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture, and in FIG. 78 (う 14), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of lost decorative symbols stopped. It is done. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 78 (15), the hold of the first reserve icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 78 (15), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. The fluctuation icon h0 is an icon changed from the first holding icon h11 that has been changed to the blue display mode in the previous promotion effect, and is similarly displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the blue display mode.

  In FIG. 78 (U17), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display appears on the icon I2 of the carpet in the effect icon display area DIS, and the icon I2 of the carpet disappears in FIG. Icon I1 remains. In FIG. 78 (Fig. 19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, the navigation character YM Is clearly less visible than before the appearance of the smoke image. In FIG. 78 (20-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. At the timing shown in FIG. 78 (で 21), the icon I1 of the treasure box disappears, and only the navi character YM of the lady wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates the reliability (expected degree) of the big hit of the symbol variation display currently performed. Alternatively, it may represent the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the variation icon. Furthermore, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, it may indicate the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the hold icon.

  In FIG. 78 (U23), the state reaches the reach state, and in FIG. In the super reach presentation, of the holding frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the holding icon display area HIS disappear, and when the holding icon remains, the holding icon also disappears. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 78 (24 24), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the navy character YM wearing the red kimono disappears. Also, although the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is sunk, the variation icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 78 (during 25) during super reach, the navigation character YM completely disappears, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed on the lowered pedestal hs0 '. Here, although the navigation character YM has disappeared, it may be displayed as shown in FIG. Also, both the pedestal hs0 'and the variation icon h0 may disappear, or only one may disappear.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (U 27-1), as a continuation of the super reach effect, a duel scene in which the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing is displayed on the background screen h of the wilderness. . Here too, both the pedestal hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed.

  FIG. 79 is a view showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 78, a modification and the like.

  In FIG. 79 (U29), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed thinner than the normal density, and a scene in which the crown is fallen is displayed. Here too, both the pedestal hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (No. 30), the super reach effect is finished, the background is returned to normal, and the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display, the pedestal hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed. There is. In FIG. 79 (う 31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol is restored, and the pedestal which has been sunk so far is starting to rise while carrying the fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (32), the combination of decorative symbols is swayed and the holding frame UI is also displayed again. Also, the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

  Also, in FIG. 79 (FIG. 20-2), instead of FIG. 78 (c. 20-1), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a premier rainbow kimono is worn. In this case, regardless of the display mode (color) of the variation icon h0, since the display mode of the navigation character YM is rainbow color, it is a big hit decision. Note that the display mode of the variation icon may be changed to a display mode of red or more, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color. In addition, when the navigation character YM functions as a pre-reading advance notice, the display mode of the pre-reading target reserved icon may also be changed to a red or higher display mode, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

  Also, instead of FIG. 78 (う 27-1), in FIG. 79 (う 27-2), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the navigation of the display mode in which a red kimono is worn Character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here does not have to do anything, just being displayed. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may promote its own display mode or change the display mode of the variation icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

  Here, the notice by the presentation icon (here UFO icon UFI) and / or the change notice (here the treasure box icon I1) is a row before one decorative symbol (for example, left symbol) becomes a temporary stop indication Although it is configured such that no advance notice is given by the effect icon and / or change notice display after one decorative symbol has become temporary stop display, one decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped. The presentation icon and / or the change notice may be displayed afterward. In addition, although it described as one decorative symbol, it may be a plurality of decorative symbols, and may be all the decorative symbols. Further, in the state where the symbol (the variation display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the notice by the effect icon and / or the change notice display is not performed, but may be performed.

  79 (E1) to (E4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes the display mode of itself.

  In FIG. 79 (F1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial attitude. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 79 (E2), the pose of the navigation character YM changes, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 79 (e.g. 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is encased in a gray smoke image and becomes difficult to visually recognize, and in FIG. ing.

  Further, in FIG. 79 (E 3-2) instead of FIG. 79 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is encased in a red smoke image, and thereafter, the navigation character Y M is a red kimono It changes to the display mode which wore. Thus, the change animation itself may give notice of the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for giving notice that the display mode is changed to red or more if the change of the navigation character is successful, and it is determined that the display mode is changed to red or more It may be a notice display.

  Also, in FIG. 79 (e.g. 3-3) instead of FIG. 79 (e.g. 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in the rainbow smoke image, and the symbol variation display currently being performed, or It becomes big hit decision (may be big hit rich) with the symbol fluctuation indication which is started after this. As described above, the change animation itself may be used to give a normal notice or a prefetch notice. The rainbow smoke image may be a display for giving notice that the display mode is changed to the rainbow color if the change of the navigation character is successful. In this case, the rainbow smoke image may be displayed even if the rainbow smoke image is displayed. It is not necessary for the color variation image and / or the inside of the displayed symbol variation and / or retention to be a big hit (which may be big hit).

  Further, in FIG. 79 (E 4-2) instead of FIG. 79 (E 4-1), the navigation character is changed to another navigation character. Here, it has been changed to the princess's navigation character. The type of the changing character may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above, or may be only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

  Further, in FIG. 79 (E4-3) instead of FIG. 79 (E 4-2), the navi character is changed to a navy character (for example, a bancho character) which can not be selected by the player. In addition, the navigation character of the Bancho may be configured so that the promotion effect of the holding icon and / or the variation icon may be more easily performed than the navigation character YM, or the symbol variation and / or the holding in which the navigation character is changed It may be configured to have a high expectation of the inner jackpot.

  In addition, the navigation character of the princess (bancho) may be configured to be more likely to perform the promotion effect of the holding icon and / or the fluctuation icon than the navigation character YM, or the symbol fluctuation and the navigation character changed. And / or may be configured to have a high expectation of a jackpot in the hold, or is configured to be prone (or necessarily generated) to be a notice and / or a super reach effect in which a princess (bancho) appears It may be

  In addition, when the navigation character YM changes to another navigation character, it may be configured to change only to the navigation character selectable by the player, so that the player is changed to the navigation character which can not be selected. It may be configured, and there may be both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and cases where the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character. When the player is changed to a selectable navy character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navy character, the player can select more than the selectable navy character. The impossible navigation character may be configured to be more easily effective in promoting the holding icon and / or the fluctuation icon, or the symbol fluctuation in which the navigation character is changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot within the holding is high. It may be configured as follows. Conversely, when the player is changed to a selectable navy character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navi character, there are cases in which the player can play a game rather than the non-selectable navy character. The navigation character selectable by the person may be configured to facilitate promotion of the holding icon and / or the variation icon, or the symbol variation in which the navigation character is changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot within the holding It may be configured to have a high degree.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 79 (E4-4) instead of FIG. 79 (E4-1), the character does not change, and its own change presentation has failed.

  In this example, the navigation character YM itself is an example of changing the display mode of itself alone, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice is not involved, but the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice is displayed. The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be notified in advance. For example, when the icon I1 of the red treasure box appears, the navigation character YM may be determined to change to a red, or a display mode of red or more.

  Furthermore, the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box may give notice of the expectation of the jackpot in the currently displayed symbol variation display or the symbol variation display to be started thereafter. That is, depending on the color of the icon I1 of the treasure chest, a normal notice or a advance notice may be given.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of effect in which the holding frame is temporarily not visible.

  The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (1). Also, the navigation character YM in the initial posture shown in FIG. 80 (O) is a default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  In FIG. 80 (2), the hold of the special view 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 80 (O), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. In addition, the background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (O).

  In FIG. 80 (5), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the sea background is still displayed.

  In FIG. 80 (6), a background change notice, which is a type of advance notice, is started. The target of the background change notice here (prefetch target hold) is the hold (second hold at this timing) increased at the timing of (2) in FIG. In the background change notice, an image of the eyebrow appears from the left and right, and the eyelid is closed, so that the entire display screen becomes an eyebrow image (see FIG. 80 (7)). Therefore, both the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navi character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the eyelid and become invisible. It should be noted that, instead of the image of the eyebrow, an image overlapping from the front may appear on a part of the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Alternatively, the image may not be overlapped with the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM.

  It should be noted that the background change notice may be started at the time of pre-reading target hold winning (FIG. 80 (2) timing). In this example, although it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started before the fluctuation of the prefetch target hold. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target hold.

  In addition, in the background change notice, the big hit expectation of the pre-reading target hold may be expressed by the appearance image (here, the image of 襖), or if the navigation character YM of the same color as the 襖 color is appearing The navigation character YM functions as a notice of change and corresponds to a change notice display. In addition, it may also function as a notice of the background itself that the color of a rose changes to the background of a mountain if it is green. Furthermore, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  In FIG. 80 (8), the eyelids are open, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM start to be seen, and in FIG. It is gone. By the background change notice, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the night background. Further, the navigation character YM after the background change is changed to a character dependent on the changed background. Here, the character of the robot is changed from the character of the lord. In this example, one kind of character corresponds to one kind of background, but plural kinds of characters may correspond to one kind of background.

  In FIG. 80 (11), it is in the reach state. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode from FIG. 80 (9-1) to FIG. 80 (11). The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change from the default display mode to the red display mode in response to the reach state rush. Although the holding frame UI is displayed, all the holding icons h11 and h12 have disappeared. Then, it develops into super reach production and changes to the background of super reach production (here the background of the wilderness). On the background of the wilderness, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (13) displays a scene where the lord has been defeated. The fallen character of the robot, the navigation character YM of the robot, overlaps and is difficult to view.

  In FIG. 80 (14), the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the wipe display by the wipe-in. As shown in FIG. 80 (15), in the wipe display here, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM also disappear, and also the second decorative symbol and the second number-on-hold display disappear, and the model title is displayed at the left corner Is only displayed. In FIG. 80 (16), the user wipes out, the background returns to the background of the night, and the navigation character YM also begins to be visible.

  In FIG. 80 (17), the wipe effect is finished, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of losing. In addition, the holding frame UI is also displayed, and the display of the variation icon h0 in the red display mode and the holding icons h11 and h12 are resumed.

  In FIG. 80 (18), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” which is a combination of losing.

  Thereafter, the first suspension is digested and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 80 (20-1), the next symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the symbol change of the pre-reading target hold is ended, but the background remains the background of the night.

  In FIG. 80 (21), the background change notice is started again, the image of the eyebrow appears from the left and right, and the eyelid is closed, so that the entire display screen becomes an eyebrow image here (FIG. 80 (22)) reference). In FIG. 80 (23), the eyelids open, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear, and in FIG. It is gone. As shown in FIG. 80 (24), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is returned to the background of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also returned to the character of the lord.

  Further, in FIG. 80 (9-2) instead of FIG. 80 (9-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM of the robot is changed to a display mode different from the default. The display mode (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) of the background dependent character may also change according to the reliability of the big hit. Or, it may be originally changed.

  The navigation character YM may change depending on the presentation background regardless of the background of the advance notice. For example, when a beach background, a castle town background, and a castle background appear in order, the navigation character may be changed to the navigation character YM depending on each background. The appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. When the player changes the effect mode, the navigation character YM may change depending on the background change. In addition, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the effect background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed on the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed on the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed on the effect background A. Here, when a navigation character that does not match the effect background is displayed, it is configured that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the fluctuation icon is more easily performed than when the navigation character that matches the effect background is displayed. It may be configured such that the expectation of jackpot in symbol variation and / or retention with which the navigation character has changed is high (or jackpot confirmation (may be jackpot rich)), The notification and / or the super reach presentation may be configured to occur frequently (or occur necessarily) when a navigation character that does not match the background appears.

  Alternatively, the type of the navigation character YM may not change even if the background change is performed, or may not change absolutely.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of effects in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 81 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 81 (or 2-1), a balloon of a line calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of the balloon corresponds to the notification that the other character (爺 or princess) is displayed, which is performed by the currently-displayed Tonosama's navigation character YM. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), the display of the navi character YM1 of the princess in addition to the domino character YM is added, and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be animation display, or may be an appearance appearing instantaneously. In the case of the animation display, it may be an animation in which the character is not visible initially by the smoke image, or may be an animation appearing by walking from the right end of the screen. This princess's navigation character YM1 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 81 (or 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. Both of the default display modes, the Tonosama's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1 are displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 81 (or 5), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 remain displayed. Thus, the display of a plurality of navigation characters may span multiple variations. However, in the symbol variation display in which the navigation character YM1 appears, the appearing navigation character YM1 may disappear. Even in this case, the navi character (here, the navi character YM here) previously displayed is displayed across a plurality of changes.

  In FIG. 81 (or 5), a balloon of a line calling a whistle is additionally displayed to the two navigation characters YM and YM1 in this case, and the effect icon display area DIS shown in the same figure (or 6-1) is displayed. In addition to the two navigation characters YM and YM1, a display of a navy navigation character YM2 is added, and it succeeds in calling a whistle. In other words, this means that all three people are all ready. In this effect, the more the navi characters gather, the higher the probability that the fluctuation icon h0 changes, the higher the probability of changing to a premiere or a color close to the premiere, and the higher the expectation for a big hit with the fluctuation. Or, the expectation to hit the jackpot may increase after the next change. In addition, if all three of them are gathered, the rainbow color of the premiere may be determined or the big hit may be determined. In FIG. 81 (or 7-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state in a state where all three persons are aligned, and "decoration 7" is displayed as being shaken (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

  Further, in FIG. 81 (or 2-2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM is given in place of FIG. 81 (or 2-1). That is, in FIG. 81 (or 2-1), the line of the navigation character YM is a notice, but in this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette notice is started. . The roulette advance notice here may be dedicated to the advance notice of the appearance of another navi character, or may be another advance notice (such as a hold change advance notice). In FIG. 81 (or 2-2), the character of a princess is displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After this, the princess's navigation character YM1 may appear, but there may be cases where no navigation character appears (in the case of a so-called failure), or different navigation characters (for example, the navy navigation character YM2) May appear. Although the roulette display icon RI is configured not to display the characters of the characters that have already appeared, the characters of the characters that have already appeared may appear. In that case, the same character may be displayed more than once depending on the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, when the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, the princess's Three characters may be displayed, etc., or a promotion effect may be performed on a character that has already appeared according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, 3 characters of a princess on the roulette display icon RI) If the display is stopped once, the princess appears at the first time, the kimono of the princess turns red at the second time, the kimono of the princess turns gold at the third time, etc.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-2), there may be a case where no navigation character appears and fails.

  Also, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), in the figure (or 3-3), the navy character YM2 instead of the princess's navigation character YM1 appears. As described above, the order of appearance is not determined, and different animation may be performed depending on the navi character displayed next. For example, in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), even though it was thought that the princess navigation character YM would come with the princess navigation character YM1, the animation where the navy navigation character YM2 came and was surprised is displayed The princess may come in the premiere stage before the princess. In addition, depending on the appearance order of the character, the probability of changing the fluctuation icon h0 changes, the probability of changing to the premiere or color close to the color changes, the expectation of hitting the big with the change changes, or the big hit occurs after the next change. The degree of expectation may change or not affect them at all.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-1), the display position may be determined in advance by the character. That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-1), the domino-like navi character YM is displayed at the left end, and the princess navi character YM1 is displayed with a gap of one. Then, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-3), the navy navigation character YM2 is displayed at a position which has been opened by one person. As described above, even when the order of display positions (don't, mochi, princess) is fixed, there may be cases (might, princess, mochi) when the order is broken. It may be (big hit finalization effect) or big hit.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-5-1) instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), when the number of navi characters increases, a notification of the increase is displayed by a character display (here, “Hime Stock” Or may be notified by sound from a speaker, or may be notified by blinking of a lamp or the like. Further, in FIG. 81 (or 3-5-3), the fact that all the members have been gathered is notified by character display. In addition, when all members set successfully, the character display of "all members set" is always displayed, but different character display (for example, "super hot" or "all members set reach", etc.) is displayed. In the case, it may be a premiere effect (big hit finalized effect) or a big hit, or a specific reach mode may always be started. Also here, in addition to the notification of the character display, or in place of the notification of the character display, the notification may be made by voice from the speaker, or may be performed by blinking the lamp or the like.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 81 (or 6-2) instead of FIG. 81 (or 6-1), characters other than the lord, princess, and nephew (here, the character YM3 of the mince flower imitating a cactus) increase When it is, it may be premier production (big hit finalized production) or big hit.

  In addition, even though "hime" is specified and called, if "爺" is displayed, it may be the premier effect (big hit finalized presentation) or it may be a big hit, and "hime" is called If “爺” is displayed more often, if the character (“Hime”) as it is called appears, it may be jackpot rich (or jackpot determined). In addition, depending on the display mode of the navigation character (in this example, the lord) calling another navigation character, the other navigation character may be easy to appear (stock) or hard to appear (stock). Also, depending on the type of navigation character calling another navigation character, it may be easy for another navigation character to appear (stock) or hard to appear (stock). For example, it may be easier for another navigation character to appear (stock) if the princess's navigation character calls than the lord's navigation character. Also, the appearing (stock) characters are not limited to different types of characters, and may be the same type of navigation characters. For example, there may be a case where a plurality of the Toho-sama's navigation character YM may be displayed, or there may be a case where it is expressed as Tonosama × 3. Moreover, even if it is the same kind of navigation character, the display modes (color, shape, pose, size) may be different. Furthermore, depending on the character, the effect to be performed after being displayed may be different. For example, when an effect is performed in which the character is released from the effect icon display area DIS, the pseudo-series effect start may be released when releasing the lord, the suspension may be promoted when the princess is released, and the timer advance may be started when the bag is released. . Also, a plurality of characters may be released. Furthermore, when a plurality of characters are discharged at the same time, effects different from single discharge may be performed. For example, simultaneous release of the princess and the princess may start a pseudo-series effect that is hotter than the single princess.

  FIG. 82 shows a modification etc. shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 82 (1), the default display form of the lord-like navi character YM is displayed in the initial posture, and to the right of it, the default display form of the princess navigation character YM1 is displayed in the initial posture. ing. Further, on the right side of the princess's navigation character YM1, a treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 82 ((2-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and only the navigation character YM1 of the princess among the navigation character YM of the lord and the navigation character YM1 of the princess It is wrapped in an image. In other words, the smoke image does not reach the navi character YM of the lord. In FIG. 82 (4), the smoke image disappears, and the princess's navigation character YM1 changes to the display mode in which a red kimono is worn. In FIG. 82 (5), the icon I1 of the treasure box has disappeared.

  In FIG. 82 ((2-1)) instead of FIG. 82 () 2-1, the pose of the domino-like navigation character YM changes, and the hand holding a fan is raised. In FIG. 82 (2 2-2-2), the Tomonado navigation character YM causes a smoke image to appear, and only the princess navigation character YM1 is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 82 (2-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the princess's navigation character YM1 changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. In addition, you, the navigation character YM of the lord has returned to the initial posture.

  In Fig. 82 (3-1) instead of Fig. 82 (3-1), the smoke image appearing from the icon I1 of the treasure box is both the domino character YM and the princess character YM1. It wraps the navi character. Then, in FIG. 82 (3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and the domino character navigation character YM and the princess navigation character YM1 both change to the display mode in which the red kimono is worn. That is, the display mode is changing for both of them. Here, both of them change to the same color, but may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both may be enveloped in the smoke image, but only one may change, the other may remain default.

  When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, princess) may be promoted, and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Also, both navigation characters may be promoted. In that case, changing one of the characters (for example, princess) may be hotter than when changing the other character (for example, Yoshimune), and the jackpot expectation may be the same. Also, the change of both characters may be hotter than the change of one character. Also, it may be hotter to change one character depending on the change mode than to change both characters. For example, a combination of the default display form of the lord-like navi character YM and the combination of the princess navi-character YM1 of the display aspect in the iridescent kimono and the display modi The combination of the former and the combination of the princess's navigation character YM1 of the display mode in which the kimono is worn may be more likely to make a big hit than the combination of the latter. Also, both characters may be required to change. In that case, it may be configured to change to the same color, or may be configured to change to a different color. Also, depending on the changing character, the meaning of the changed character may change. For example, in the case of the display manner of the display manner in the red kimono, the variation is hot, and in the case of the princess of the display manner of the red kimono of the display manner, the navigation character of YM1 is likely to develop into super reach. It is also good. In addition, if it is a big hit determined if it is a display character like a kimono with rainbow color, it is a big hit, and if it is a princess navigation character YM with a rainbow colored clothes, it will be a big hit with definite variation ( May be an advantageous jackpot).

  In this example, the navigation character YM is displayed when one navigation character is always displayed and another navigation character is newly called by the navigation character or when a plurality of navigation characters are always displayed. The present embodiment is also applicable to the case where one or more navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing because there is a period of time that is not set.

  FIGS. 82 (1-1) to (く 7) show examples of effects in which button effects are intertwined with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 82 (G-1), the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 82 ((2-1). The button display icon 136D is a display mode of a balloon and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In FIG. 82 (3), the operation effective period is started, and in FIG. 82 (4), the remaining period meter is slightly reduced. In Fig. 82 (チ ャ ン ス 5), the chance button 136 is operated, and in Fig. 82 (く 6), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and the character of the lord is visually recognized by the effect image. It is difficult. In FIG. 82 (7), the character changes to a lord-like navi character in a display manner in which a red kimono is worn.

  In FIG. 82 ((1-2-1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, but the button display icon 136D is not displayed here. That is, when the back button effect is performed and the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 82 (1-2-2), the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in FIG. 82 (1-2-3). In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM is started. Thus, the display mode of the navigation character may be changed by the back button effect.

  Note that when both the back button effect and another button effect (with a button display) overlap, both may change, the back button effect may be prioritized, and another button effect may be prioritized. The same may be applied to back button duplication.

  In addition, when the prefetch button advance notice and the button advance notice of the change (normal advance notice) overlap, the prefetch button advance notice may be prioritized, or the button advance notice of the change may be prioritized.

  Further, instead of FIG. 82 ((2-1), in FIG. ((2-2)), the button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM, but at a position away from the navigation character YM The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at positions outside the effect icon display area DIS and also outside the holding frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed also by this different notice. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be always displayed, or may be displayed before the effective period is started.

  FIG. 83 shows an example of effect in which the effect of the button hold icon is associated with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 83 (G-3-1), the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. A first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 83 (G-3-1) is a button hold icon, and a button image 136a is displayed on a white circle. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 here is within the period of the change. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 ((1-3-2a), as shown in ((1-3-3a)), a smoke image of the effect appears, and the smoke image causes navigation Part or all of the character YM is hidden, and is clearly less visible than before the appearance of the smoke image. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 is deleted, and no change (for example, change in display mode) occurs in the first hold icon h11. That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. is there. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation effective period, the navigation character and / or the button hold icon itself are configured not to change. However, it may be possible to shift to FIG. ((1-3-4) described later via the state shown in FIG. 83 ((1-3-3a)).

  When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (1-3-3a), the button image 136a disappears with respect to the button hold icon as shown in FIG. An effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11, and change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (1-3-3b2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the white circle display to the blue circle display mode. In addition, there may be a case where the display form of the white circle display remains (after all, a failed pattern). When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (1-3-3a), the processing shown in FIG. 83 (3-3-3b2) is not performed via the same diagram (1-3-3b1). As shown, the icon that was the button hold icon may change to a display mode of blue circle display without changing animation.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 83 (く 1-3-3b1) and as shown in FIG. 83 (く 1-3-4), although the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change with the white circle display, the navigation character is not changed. YM may change to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. Here, the change of the display mode of the navigation character YM is not a change animation when it passes through FIG. 83 (く 1-3-3b1), but the display mode is instantaneously switched, and the same figure ((1-3 In the case of passing 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, in the case of FIG. 83 (1-3-3b1), change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. The change may occur immediately after the chance button 136 is operated, or may change with a slight delay. Also, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 ((1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 83 ((1-3-4)) without passing through the same figure ((1-3-3b1). Thus, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

  In addition, even if the button hold icon is displayed, when the next change is started without operating the chance button (Fig. 83 (1−31-3-2b1)) (the change of the first decorative symbol still starts) In the case where the variation of the second decorative symbol is started (but not shown), the variation icon h0 may be a button holding icon, as shown in FIG. In this case, the button effect is carried over to the next change, and when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the button image 136a disappears as shown in FIG. 83 ((1-3-2b3 '). The white circle display in which the button image 136a is displayed may change to the display mode of the blue circle display (success pattern). At the time of change, change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. In addition, although the display mode of the navigation character YM is not changed, it may be changed. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the button image 136a disappears with respect to the fluctuation icon h0, and any change (for example, change in display mode) also occurs in the white circle display where the button image 136a was displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change presentation from the button holding icon has failed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, the button hold icon may not be changed if the next change is started without operating the chance button, the button hold icon may be a chance. It may be configured to be automatically changed after the next change is started without operating the button.

  Also, even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the next change is started without operating the chance button (Fig. 83 ((1-3-2b1)), the same figure (く 1-3 As shown in −2 b 2 ′), the change icon h 0 may be affected by the effect image, and the change animation may be started. In this case, there may be a case in which the process proceeds to FIG. 83 (a 1-3-2b3 ') or a case in which the process proceeds to FIG. 83 (a 1-3-2b3).

  Although the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 83 (G-3-1) is the default display mode, the same is true for the navigation character YM in the promoted display mode. That is, the second promotion is performed in FIG. 83 (1-3). If there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Also, the hold icon, which has already changed, may be changed by the operation of the button due to the button hold icon being displayed.

  In addition, when eight pending icons are displayed, for example, when N are saved, the pending icon changes to a partial or all button pending icon, and the pending icon, the variation icon, and the navigation character YM are changed according to the button operation. It may be configured to change. This is also applicable when only four pending icons are displayed.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (one), the first decorative symbol is in high speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 84 (case 2), the hold of the special view 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 84 (3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 84 (4), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 is changed to the blue display mode according to the start of the symbol variation display. In addition, even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 84 (step 5-1), and the smoke image disappears in FIG. 84 (step 6-1), and a domino character is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. The navigation character YM of Tonosama shown in FIG. 84 (6-1) is a default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice corresponding to the prefetch target hold (prefetch notice and / or notice of the change).

  It should be noted that the appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of pre-reading target hold winning (FIG. 84 (timing 2)). In this example, although it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started before the fluctuation of the prefetch target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be always displayed when there is a prefetch target hold, or may be displayed only when an effect lottery is won.

  In FIG. 84 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM in the default display mode whose display is started during the symbol variation display stopped and displayed here is still displayed in the initial posture.

  Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 84 (9-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is displayed next to the navigation character YM of the default display mode. It is displayed. In the navi character YM, the display mode is changed to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn by the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 75 (4-1) (FIG. 84 (step 11)). In addition, even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be the default display mode. In addition, the icon I1 of the treasure box may not appear, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. That is, there may be a case where no change advance display is performed.

  In FIG. 84 (13), the change of the prefetch target hold is started, and the change icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is also displayed during this change. Therefore, although the navigation character YM was not initially displayed, after being displayed, it is always displayed across multiple variations.

  It should be noted that the navigation character YM may disappear when the currently held change of the pre-reading target hold is finished. In this case, the navigation character YM may disappear between the three symbols or the temporary stop (swing display) and the symbol stop in the variation of the decoration symbols of the pre-read target hold, and one or two decoration symbols May disappear after temporary stop (first stop or second stop).

  Further, the navigation character YM may disappear at the timing of the stop display of FIG. 84 (7) and may not be displayed across the variation.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 84 (No. 5-1), as shown in FIG. 84 (No. 5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to only the effect icon display area DIS, but a pending icon It may be displayed in the display area HIS. Further, there may be a plurality of places where the navigation character YM is displayed, and the navigation character YM may be displayed also in the variable icon display area CIS. Furthermore, the navigation character YM may perform different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, when displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, the hold icon may be changed, and when displayed in the change icon display area CIS, the change icon may be changed. Further, the probability of changing the fluctuation icon may be different depending on the display position, and the reliability of the big hit may be different. The navigation character YM may be displayed only in one display area (for example, the effect icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 84 (No. 5-1), as shown in FIG. 84 (No. 5-3), the navigation character YM can be moved within the reserved icon display area HIS (within the left base icon bIl). If the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed on the hold icon so as to overlap from the front side.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 84 (step 5-1), as shown in FIG. 84 (step 5-4), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon. That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

  The navigation character may perform an animation of moving a plurality of display areas (for example, the effect icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example in which there is another period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (6-2-1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  After that, the reserve digesting continues, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (6-2-3a), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost version is swayed and displayed with no reserve. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (6-2-4), the combination of the decorative symbols in the lost state is stopped and displayed in the state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

  In FIG. 85 (6-2-6), there is a prize in the first special view starting opening 230 in a state where there is no suspension, and symbol variation display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not yet begun variation. , The second decorative pattern has begun to change. At this time, the default display mode navigation character YM is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (6-2-7), an increase animation of a hold icon indicating a hold that has already been digested (hold of the started symbol variation display) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (6-2-7) is lightly displayed, and the deletion animation of the navigation character YM is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (6-2-8), the first decorative symbol does not yet start to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. There is. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. In fact, although FIG. 85 (6-2-6) to FIG. 85 ((6-2-8)) are events for a moment, the deletion animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears at the start of the symbol variation display from the state where there is no hold. The disappearing timing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or may be simultaneous with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol It may be after the start of the In addition, when the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, simultaneously with the start of the hold increase animation, or even after the start of the hold increase animation. Good.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 85 (6-2-3b1) instead of FIG. 85 (# 6-2-3a), the reach state may be entered, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. Some may be configured to not change, or conversely, they may change during reach conditions. Also, the display mode of the variation icon may be configured not to change during the reach state by the navigation character YM, or conversely, may change during the reach state.

  In FIG. 85 (6-2-3b2), the game is developed to produce a super reach, and in FIG. 85 (6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which the lord and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. Also in FIG. 85 (6-2-3b3), the navigation character YM is displayed with the default display mode.

  In addition, when the navigation character YM develops into super reach, the display mode may be promoted, and conversely, the display mode is configured not to promote into the super reach and in the case of normal reach, the display mode is not promoted. May be Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be promoted in the display mode even in the normal reach. For example, it may be promoted as a prefetch notice after the next change. In addition, when the "Navi-character promotion" symbol stops in the middle symbol at the time of normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Furthermore, the display mode may be promoted as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 85 (6-2-3 b 4), the wipe effect etc. described using FIG. 76 (14-2-4) to FIG. 76 (14-2-6) are executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 6-2-3b5), "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of losing, is displayed shaking. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (6-2-3b6), “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” which is a combination of losing is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM is also default. It is displayed as it is.

  85 (Fig. 6-2-1) to (Ex. 6-2-8) and (Ex. 6-2-3b1) to (Ex. 6-2-3b6) are combined, the symbol variation of the pre-reading target suspension is finished. Even when the hold becomes 0, the navigation character displayed as a notice corresponding to the pre-read target hold (pre-read notice and / or notice of the change) is not hidden and the next change is started It is erased when. In addition, the navigation character is before the symbol variation of the pre-reading target suspension ends (for example, before the decoration symbol becomes one or a plurality of temporary stop display, at the same time as temporary stop or temporary stop, or the decorative symbol All of them (three in this example, left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol) become temporary stop display and at the same time as temporary stop becomes temporary stop, symbol (special figure) becomes stop display The symbol may be erased before (e.g.) or may be erased after the symbol variation of the pre-reading target suspension is finished (simultaneously with the symbol (special figure) becoming the stop display or after the stop display).

  FIG. 86 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

  In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86, the variation icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and the pedestal hs0 is disposed. Further, at the right end, a presentation icon display area DIS is provided. The reserved icon display area HIS is located between the variation icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (a1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, it is displayed that the number of reservations for Special Figure 1 is "3" and the number of reservations for Special Figure 2 is "2" in the second number of reservations display, and a total of five suspension icons are displayed. There is. These five hold icons are all default display modes.

  In the holding frame UI illustrated in FIG. 86, when the number of holdings is five, the stage corresponding to the sixth holding is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh The eighth stages hs7 and hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). In addition, until the 3rd reserve is stored, it is white until the 4th stage, the 5th and subsequent stages are gray, and when the 4th reserve is stored, it is white until the 5th stage and the 6th and later Stage turns gray. Thus, although the display mode of the stage changes according to the number of reservations, the stage may always be the same display mode regardless of the number of reservations.

  Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (a1).

  In FIG. 86 (this a2), the suspension of the special figure 2 is increased by one, and in the same diagram (this a3), the suspension increase animation is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same diagram (this a4), the suspension icon Six are displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also the default display mode. Also, the seventh stage hs7 turns white, and the gray stage is the eighth stage hs8 only.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (a5), the navi character YM in the default display mode appears, and a balloon of “full with two more” is added. The navigation character YM appears when the number of reservations is N or more (6 or more in this example).

  In FIG. 86 (this a6), the suspension of the special drawing 1 is increased by one, and seven decoration icons are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in this diagram (this a7), and the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed. There is a balloon that says "One more to fill". The seventh hold icon h7 added is also the default display mode. In addition, the final eighth stage hs8 also turns white, and the gray stage has disappeared.

  In FIG. 86 (this a8), the suspension of the special view 2 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same diagram (this a9), eight suspension icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed. The balloon "full tank" is added to. Note that the added eighth hold icon h8 is also the default display mode. Note that, in this example, the navigation character YM uses a balloon to notify the number of reservations, but this may not be performed.

  In this example, when eight reservations are stored (when full), the navigation character YM may change. In FIG. 86 (here a10), the navigation character YM is encased in a smoke image. The smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is encased in a smoke image, it does not necessarily change, and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may always change. In addition, the navigation character YM may be configured to be changed whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image.

  In FIG. 86 (here a11), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, and a balloon of “Hold inside the reservation is hot” is added to the navigation character YM, and the advance notice is executed. . The notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. In addition, by the notice displayed on the balloon, the degree of expectation to the big hit in the hold may be announced. Further, in this example, the navigation character changes due to the symbol variation in which the suspension is full, but the navigation character may change in the next variation of the symbol variation in which the suspension is full. Also, the navigation character may change for each symbol variation, and the symbol variation may be notified by changing the navigation character.

  The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, but may be a display size, a pose, or a shape. Also, there may be multiple types of appearing characters, and the heat may be different depending on the character. For example, even if the princess navigation character in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navigation character in the red kimono mannering in the display mode, or even if the navy character in the head length is hotter than the lord animation character Good.

  FIG. 87 shows an example of effect in which a decorative symbol of a common drawing is entangled with a navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 87 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, a special figure 1 first reserve icon h11 of a circle representing the reserve of the special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 1st hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, in FIG. 87 (b1), the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here is for displaying the variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, and as the outcome, "○", "×", and "super" as a big hit notice of the special figure of the variation. "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 87 (here b2), “o” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is informed that the popular drawing lottery has been won.

  In FIG. 87 (b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM is a default display mode, and appears at the moment of winning the common drawing lottery. In the subsequent FIG. 87 (this b4), since the winning drawing lottery is won, the electric chew is released, and the navigation character YM reports that the electric chow is being released. In FIG. 87 (this b5-1), there is a winning after the special figure 2 start port 232 because the electric chew is open, and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 increases to four full. In FIG. 87 (this b6-1), it is displayed that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is “1” and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is “4” in the second number of reservations display. Four rhombic suspension icons are displayed, each of which represents 2 suspension (special figure 2 first suspension icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth suspension icon h24). Note that the four special figure 2 suspension icons h21 to h24 are all default display modes. The pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and the reserve icon of the reserve icon is displayed with priority over the reserve icon of the special figure 1 with the reserve icon, and the reserve icon of the special figure 2 is the special figure 1 It is displayed so that it may overlap from a front on a part of pending icon of.

  In FIG. 87 (this b7), the notification during the opening of the electric chew by the navigation character YM is ended, and in the same figure (this b8) that follows, the opening time of the electric chew has ended, so the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward. It is being In addition, the roulette display icon RI may be displayed until the symbol variation display of suspension of special drawing 2 is all finished. In FIG. 87 (b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

  After that, in FIG. 87 (here b11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial attitude. In FIG. 87 (this b12), the suspension of the special figure 2 first suspension icon h21 is digested, and symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (this b13), the variation icon of the special figure 2 As rhombus fluctuation icon is displayed on pedestal hs0.

  In FIG. 87 (here b14), the navigation character YM is encased in a smoke image. The smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is encased in a smoke image, it does not necessarily change, and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may always change. Also, the navigation character YM may be configured to be changed whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image, or may be wrapped in a smoke image or may not change.

  In FIG. 87 (here b15-1), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, and a balloon "This variation is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal advance notice is executed. There is. Further, the advance notice is also executed depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

  Also, in FIG. 87 (here b15-2-1), instead of FIG. 87 (here b15-1), the navigation character YM is still in the default display mode, and the change effect has failed. In addition, a balloon "this variation is" is added to the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, the reserve digestion of the special view 2 proceeds, and the symbol variation display of the final special view 2 is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (here b15-2-3). Here too, the balloon character “this variation is” is added to the navigation character YM, and effects by the navigation character YM are performed continuously from the previous FIG. 87 (this b15-2-1). In FIG. 87 (here b15-2-4), the balloon character “farewell” is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the effect by the navigation character YM is ended. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (b15-2-5). When the navigation character YM is hot, the navigation character YM may not disappear, and the effect by the navigation character YM may further continue, but the navigation character YM may always disappear. Further, even when the super reach effect is started between FIG. 87 (this b15-2-1) and the same figure (this b15-2-4), the effect by the navigation character YM continues and the navigation character YM is displayed. Alternatively, the effect by the navigation character YM may end, and the navigation character YM may disappear.

  The navigation character YM described in FIG. 87 (b1) to FIG. (B15-1) and in FIG. 87 (b15-2-1) to FIG. The pre-reading advance notice is not made, but the pre-reading advance notice may be made.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example in which a change advance notice display is displayed on standby.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (1), the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In FIG. 88 (2), the hold of the special view 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also default display modes. Here, in the present example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is a prefetch target hold.

  In FIG. 88 (3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 88 (4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. In addition, even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (5), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display appears on the carpet icon I2. Although the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is a preview display for changing the display mode of the navigation character YM, in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, by the appearance of the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display, it is notified (predicted) that the navigation character YM may also appear in the future. The icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The standby display of the treasure chest icon I1 is displayed as it is on the carpet icon I2.

  In FIG. 88 (Sa), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. The navigation character YM has not appeared yet, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is kept on standby.

  In FIG. 88 (S8), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is kept on standby.

  In FIG. 88 (Sa 9-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. The navigation character YM has not appeared yet, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is kept on standby.

  In FIG. 88 (10-1), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is kept on standby. In this manner, the icon I1 of the treasure box may be displayed in a standby manner across a plurality of changes.

  In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (11-1), a smoke image is displayed, and in FIG. 88 (12), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM of the maroon is in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. The navigation character YM of Tonosama shown in FIG. 88 (12) is a default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to the advance notice that the navigation character YM appears. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not necessarily appear, and may not appear. In addition, the smoke image itself may not be displayed, or the smoke image may be displayed without fail. In addition, when the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM may be configured to appear without fail.

  It should be noted that the appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of pre-reading target hold winning (FIG. 88 (timing 2)). In this example, although it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started before the fluctuation of the prefetch target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed as long as it is reserved for the pre-reading object, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won. In this example, the icon of the treasure box of the change advance notice display and the navigation character YM are pre-read advance notices performed on the same pre-reading target hold (in the present example, hold 4 indicated by the fourth hold icon h14 shown in FIG. 88 (T2)). Although the icon of the treasure box of the change notice display may differ from the pre-read target hold of the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 88 (12), when the domino-like navigation character YM appears, then only the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure chest icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the icon I1 of the treasure chest icon of the change notice display is ended in the standby display.

  In FIG. 88 (S14), the change of the prefetch target hold is started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed during the change of the prefetch target hold. In FIG. 88 (15-1), the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image comes out from the inside, and it wraps around the domino character YM. In FIG. 88 (Sa 16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the nama character navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono functions as a notice of the change (normal notice).

  Note that the change effect of the navigation character YM using the icon I1 of the treasure box may be started at the time of the pre-reading target hold winning (FIG. 88 (timing 2)). Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed as long as it is reserved for the pre-reading object, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won.

  Also, in place of FIG. 88 (10-1), in the same figure (10-2-1), the Toho-sama navigation character YM does not appear, but the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure box of the change notice is displayed. The icon I1 has not been displayed on standby. A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (10-2-2), and the smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the fluctuation icon h0, and the navigation character The display position of YM and the fluctuation icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 88 (10-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM does not appear, but the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may also appear and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may also change. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may not appear and the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not change.

  Also, instead of FIG. 88 (11-1), although the smoke image is displayed in FIG. (11-2), the icon I2 of the carpet disappears without the navigation character YM being visible again. The icon I1 of the treasure chest of the change notice display is on standby display. Thus, the timing at which the standby display ends may be before the navigation character YM appears. Further, the timing at which the standby display ends may be simultaneous with the appearance of the navigation character YM. Furthermore, it may be timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, timing of stop display of the decorative symbol, or timing of start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. Although the navigation character is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold after the standby display of the change preview display is finished, the navigation character is displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change preview display is finished. (For example, the fluctuation after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation at which the standby display is ended, and the fluctuation at the end of the standby display may be mentioned). In addition, although the change preview display is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change preview display ends, the change preview display may be displayed again for the same prefetch target hold (for example, the standby display The change after the next change of the change of which the was finished, and the change in which the standby display is finished are included).

  Furthermore, in place of FIG. 88 (13), the icon I2 of the carpet disappears and the icon I1 of the treasure box and the navigation character YM are displayed in FIG. 13-2-2), neither the treasure box is opened nor the navigation character YM is changed nor the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, and both the icon I1 of the treasure box and the navigation character YM Is gone. As such, although the navigation character YM appears, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a false notice. Among the icon I1 of the treasure box and the icon of the navigation character YM, only the icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. Also, when both icons disappear, both may disappear simultaneously, the icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear first, and the navigation character YM may disappear first.

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of effect using a holding frame different from the holding frame described above.

  The holding frame UI shown in FIG. 89 (1) is of a closed type which is expanded over the effect display area 208d. That is, although the holding frame UI described so far is the same as the component (the pedestal hs0 etc.), in the state of FIG. 89 (No. 1), the area of the holding frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 The other area is firmly distinguished by the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2 and the right frame UIf3, the sea background is displayed in the other area, and the sea background is displayed in the holding frame UI. Is not shown. In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 89 (1), the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, and further, the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white, and the holding frame UI is displayed. Is promoted by changing these colors.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed on the front side of the first decorative symbol, and the lowermost end of the decorative symbol changing at high speed is overlapped from the front by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative symbol may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Furthermore, the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Also, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In Fig. 89 (2-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display appears on the icon I2 of the carpet, and in Fig. 8 (3), only the icon I2 of the carpet disappears and the icon I1 of the treasure box , Remains in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 89 ((4)), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and an icon displaying the character display of "frame promotion" appears from the inside, and notification (promotion) of promotion of the holding frame UI is made. In FIG. 89 (5), the holding frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. In addition, even if the icon of "frame promotion" appears, the holding frame UI may not be promoted. In addition, when the "frame promotion" icon appears, the holding frame UI may always be promoted.

  Further, in place of FIG. 89 (or 2-1), the lower body of the giant panda is displayed in the area where the background of the sea is displayed in FIG. (Or 2-2-1). The lower body of this huge panda causes the variable display of the first decorative pattern to be overlapped from the front side. However, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number indication are displayed in front of the lower body of the panda. This giant panda is passing from top to bottom, and eventually enters the area of the holding frame UI, and part or all of the holding frame UI is overlapped from the front by the giant panda, FIG. In the state shown in (S-2-2), a small part of each of the upper left and upper right of the holding frame UI is not yet overlapped with the image of the panda, but the state shown in the same figure (S B-2-3) Now, the entire pending pool UI is overlapped with the image of the panda. The appearance of a giant panda covering almost the entire screen is a kind of change notice. Although the holding frame UI is entirely overlapped by a huge panda, the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire holding box UI.

  One aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the giant panda passes through is shown in FIG. 89 (and 2-2-4), and the first holding icon h11 changes to a blue display mode ( The navigation character YM is also changed (promoted) to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and the holding frame UI is also promoted to red display. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon may be changed (promoted). Further, all of the left frame UIf1 etc., the hold icon, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may change, or only a part may change. For example, only the left frame UIf1 or the like may change to red and only the holding frame UI may be promoted. Alternatively, as described later, a change may occur outside the holding frame UI.

  FIG. 89 (see 2-2-4 ′) shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the giant panda passes through, and in addition to the change in the holding frame UI, A change has occurred even outside the reserve window UI. That is, the level of the level indication Lv attached to each of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is rising. When this level rises, reach effect is likely to be started, pseudo-sequence effect is likely to be started, or the symbol aspect is switched to a symbol of an aspect appearing at the time of big change with a definite change. In addition, when reach production is started with this level high, the expectation of the big hit becomes high. Note that the background may change.

  In the case of a big hit notice, the appearance of a giant panda may be displayed in front of the image of the panda, and the first decorative symbol may overlap the image of the passing panda from the front, or the big hit Even if it is a notice, the first decorative pattern may be overlapped with the passing panda image.

  Further, instead of FIG. 89 (2-1), in FIG. 2 (2-3-1), an overhead image for wipe effect is added to the holding frame UI, and FIG. The state shown in 1) is a state in which the bird's-eye image is completely closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 6 (2-3-2) is a state where the overhead image is fully open (wipe-out state).

  FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example in which the icon I1 of the treasure box, which has been used as the icon of the change notice, has appeared as a hold icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (S1-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Also, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the icon of the treasure box is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 90 (S2-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the lost decoration symbols stopped. In FIG. 90 (S3), the icon of the treasure box is displayed. The suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The first reserve icon h11 of the icon of the treasure chest is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the fluctuation icon h0, but the icon of the treasure chest is also displayed as the fluctuation icon h0 here.

  In FIG. 90 (S4), the treasure box of the icon of the treasure box which is the variation icon h0 is opened, a smoke image appears from inside, and the smoke image is displayed from the front side of the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Cover and change animation is being performed. In (S5) of FIG. 90, the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to the display mode in which the red kimono is worn. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the change icon h0. Although the smoke image corresponds to the change notice, the smoke image may not overlap with the change icon h0 which is the change candidate, or the smoke image may not appear.

  Further, instead of FIG. 90 (S1-1), a second hold icon h12 of the default display mode is also displayed in FIG. 90 (S 1-2-1). The second hold icon h12 is overlapped by the first hold icon h11 of the icon of the treasure box. That is, at least a portion of the hold icon having a relatively high jackpot expectation degree overlaps at least a portion of the relatively low hold icon. Note that at least a part of the pending icon in the prefetching notice mode may overlap at least a part of the default icon in the display mode from the front side. Alternatively, regardless of the jackpot expectation, at least a portion of the previously stored retention icon may overlap from at least a portion of the later stored retention icon. In FIG. 90 (S1-2-2), the treasure chest of the icon of the treasure chest, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened, and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears, and the smoke image overlaps the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 90 (S1-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the second holding icon h12 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 90 (S2-1), in FIG. 90 (S 2-2-1), the treasure box of the icon of the treasure box which is the first reserved icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and the smoke image disappears in the figure (S 2-2-2), and both the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Aspects are changing. Here, both change to the same red, but may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both may be enveloped in the smoke image, but only one may change, the other may remain default.

  Further, instead of FIG. 90 (S2-1), in FIG. 90 (S 2-3-1), the treasure box of the icon of the treasure box which is the first reserved icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the change icon h0 among the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In (90) of FIG. 90, the smoke image disappears, and only the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

  Furthermore, icons that are not overlapped by the smoke image (hold icon, change icon) and / or navi characters are also icons that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears (hold icon, change icon) and / or The display mode may change with the change of the display mode of the character (which may be simultaneous with the change of the display mode or after the change of the display mode).

  FIG. 91 shows an example of effects in which meter effects are involved in the navigation character YM.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (set 1-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and a first suspension icon h11 and a second suspension icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. Furthermore, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW in which the meter frame mf is white is displayed next to the navigation character YM. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (see 1-1) is empty. This meter display promotes the navigation character YM when it is full. In addition, when the display mode (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, and the like) of the meter frame mf changes, the ease of storage of the meter may be notified, or the advance notice and / or the change may be notified.

  In FIG. 91 (set 2), temporary stop (first stop) of the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is performed, and "decoration 4" is displayed with shaking. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the symbol of this "decor 4", and in Fig. 91 (set 3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW It is displayed overlapping. As shown in FIG. 91 (set 4), the meter ascending item UpI moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by one level. In addition, the meter rising item changes the degree of rising of the meter depending on the color. The white meter rising item UpI is raised by one level with respect to the white meter display MW.

  In FIG. 91 (set 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the decoration symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost design is stopped and displayed, and in the set (set 5-1), the first hold icon h11 Is suspended and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 91 (set 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears above the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. The roulette effect here is either when something happens (if there is no loss) or when something does not occur (if it is lost). As an example of this, there may be a pending icon change, a regular notice (a notice of the change), and the like. Also, for example, when there is a character-based super reach including a super low reach, a princess super reach, and a super low reach as one type of super reach, as an example of the above, the type of the super reach to be developed (for example, For example, a notice of a character-based super reach), a notice of a specific super reach (for example, a super reach), etc. may be mentioned.

  In FIG. 91 (step 8), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and in FIG. 91 (step 9), the blue meter rising item UpIb moves to the white meter display MW and white It is displayed overlapping with the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 91 (see 10), the blue meter ascending item UpIb moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by two levels. The blue meter ascending item UpIb is raised by two levels with respect to the white meter display MW. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (step 10) is at three levels.

  In FIG. 91 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and the combination of the decoration symbols is displayed. In FIG. 91 (set 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Is digested and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 91 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and the combination of the decoration symbols is displayed. In FIG. 91 (set 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Is digested and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 91 (case 13). The button display icon 136D is a display mode of a balloon and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap with the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position not overlapping with the meter display.

  In FIG. 91 (set 14), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 91 (set 15), the remaining period meter is decreased. In FIG. 91 (set 16), the chance button 136 is operated, and in the figure (set 17), the meter raise icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigation character YM in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The meter rising icon MUI is a display mode of a balloon, and a green meter rising item UpIm is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. 91 (case 17). The meter rising icon MUI also overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf) as in the case of the button display icon 136D. Note that the meter rising icon MUI may overlap with the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position not overlapping with the meter display.

  Note that, even when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes displays other than the meter rising icon MUI, and when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, display of the meter rising icon MUI) ) May be displayed as a response display. In addition, even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, or the meter may increase only when the response display is displayed, and the meter may not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured in the same manner.

  In FIG. 91 (No. 18), the green meter up item UpIm in the meter up icon MUI is moved to the white meter display MW, and is displayed overlapping with the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 91 (set 19), the green meter ascending item UpIm moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by three levels, and FIG. The white meter indication MW shown in (Set 19) is full. In FIG. 91 (set 20-1), the white meter display MW changes to the character display of “promotion”, and a change animation not shown is started, and in the same set (set 21), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. It has been changed (promoted) to the appearance of wearing a kimono. The color of the kimono of the navi character YM changed here matches the background color of the character display "promotion" shown in FIG. 91 (set 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 91 (set 20-1). The display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is notified. Note that the change animation may be omitted. Further, the white meter display shown in FIG. 21 ((21)) is returned to the empty state, but may be full. In addition, when the meter display is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may always change (promotion) or may not change (promotion) (in the case of failure).

  The meter display may not always be displayed as shown in (1-2-1) of FIG. 91 instead of (91) of FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 91 (see 1-2-2), the meter ascending item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter ascending item UpI moves to a fixed position in the effect icon display area DIS, as shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-2-4), the meter display (here, white meter display MW) appears after the movement of the meter ascending item UpI is completed. In this case, the appearance of the meter rising item UpI is a notice that the meter display is displayed. Also, the meter display may be displayed in response to the appearance of the meter rising item UpI. For example, it may be simultaneous with the appearance of the meter ascending item UpI, or may be displayed at the timing between FIG. 91 (Tse 1-2-2) and the same as (Tace 1-2-3).

  In FIG. 91 (set 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is raised by one level by the meter ascending item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 91, if the meter display is displayed, then the meter always rises, but even if the meter display is displayed, the meter may not rise (even if false). It may be good or the meter rising item may not appear. Furthermore, even if the meter rising item appears, the meter may not rise.

  Also, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears, and in this case, the meter display is a prefetch notice that the meter may be accumulated. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display when the meter rising item appears, or during the symbol variation, in which case the meter display may accumulate the meter within the variation. It is a notice that there is.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a modification of the example described using FIG.

  In FIG. 92 (No. 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation and the white meter display MW in the empty state is in the state of no change, instead of FIG. 91 (No. 1-1). It is displayed. While the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (set 1-1) was full at six levels, the white meter display shown in FIG. 92 (set 1-3-1) MW is full at 5 levels.

  In FIG. 92 (No. 1-3-3a), a meter rising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. A gold meter rising item UpIg is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. 92 (No. 1-3-3a). The white meter indication MW shown in FIG. 92 (せ 1-3-4a) is filled at once due to the gold meter rising item UpIg. After this, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At this time, the meter may be empty or may be stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue, but if it is in the stored state, even if it is full with the blue gauge It is good, and it may be full with a golden gauge by having been filled up at once by the gold meter rising item UpIg.

  On the other hand, also in FIG. 92 (No. 1-3-3b), the meter rising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and here, the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 92 (Set 1-3-4b) is also filled at once due to the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn. After this, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At this time, the meter may be empty or may be stored. In addition, when it is in the accumulated state, it may be full with a blue gauge, or it may be full with a rainbow gauge because it was full with a rainbow meter rising item UpIn at once. It may be tongue-shaped.

  As meter rising items, white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow items are prepared. Among these items, only the rainbow meter rising item UpIn and the gold meter rising item UpIg are items that raise the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter rising item UpI is increased by one level, the blue meter rising item UpIb is increased by 2 levels, the green meter rising item UpIm is increased by 3 levels, and the red meter rising item UpIr is increased by 4 levels.

  In addition, the iridescent meter up item UpIn also functions as a big hit finalization notice. On the other hand, the gold meter rising item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is filled with one rainbow meter rising item UpIn, when the meter is filled with one gold meter rising item UpIn, or in other colors (white, blue, green, red) The meaning is different when the meter is filled with a combination of meter rising items.

  In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge) that increases in the meter frame mf is a white, blue, green, red meter rising item, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

  The color of the meter rising item may have a function as a normal notice or a advance notice. Also, the color may indicate the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  Moreover, the color of the meter rising item and the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM may be linked, or they may be linked. For example, when a gold meter rising item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM is also easily changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono, or always changes, or conversely, a display where the navigation character YM wears a golden kimono In the aspect, the gold meter ascending item UpIg may easily appear or may appear.

  Furthermore, the order of appearance of meter rising items and the combination of colors may function as a pre-reading advance notice, and may function as a normal advance notice. Also, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of the big hit. Or, conversely, the order of appearance of metered items and the combination of colors may be completely unrelated to the jackpot expectation.

  Also, in this example, the meter stores 15 (the meter is full 3 times). In addition, in the meter display which is full by 6 levels of FIG. 91, it accumulate | stores until a meter becomes 18 (this meter is full three times also). Here, when the meter overflows by displaying the meter rising item (for example, when the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are stored), the meter is set to 0 while promoting the navigation character. You may make it save the amount which is not stored. For example, when a red meter up item UpIt is displayed when three meters are stored, the meter is full once, and two more levels of meters are stored.

  If the meter overflows after the meter is full twice, the meter may be full and the meter may indicate the amount that has not been stored. For example, the meter may be returned to 0 when the pre-reading subject change or the change ends, or may be displayed regardless of the pre-reading subject change or the change. In addition, it may be cut off because it did not accumulate. For example, a meter may be stored, and the meter at that time may be in the state of 0, may be full, may be a special display, or may not be displayed. Good. Furthermore, it may be configured not to overflow. For example, when three are already stored, only two white meter up items UpI or only one blue meter up items UpIb are displayed.

  In the example starting from FIG. 92 (Sei 1-4-1) instead of FIG. 91 (Sei 1-1), in FIG. 91 (Se 1-4-2), the red beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is The navi character YM is illuminated toward the default display mode navigation character YM, and changes to the display mode wearing a red kimono as shown in FIG. The balloon is attached. It is reported by this "Up high certainty" that the meter rising item is easily stored.

  It should be noted that, depending on the display mode of the advance notice for changing the navigation character YM, a notification of "Up High Probability" may occur or may be generated. In addition, when the navigation character YM changes, notification of "Up High Probability" may be performed by all means, and multiple types of effect display (notice display) including notification of "Up High Probability" may be performed. The effect display including the notification of “Up High certainty” may not be performed.

  Further, the effect to be performed by the navigation character YM may be different depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM. For example, in the case of a red navigation character YM, notification of “Up High Probability” is performed, in the case of a gold navigation character YM, a superheat display is displayed, and in a rainbow navigation character YM, an iron plate display is displayed. It may be done. The navigation characters YM having different display modes may give the same notice (the same kind of notice).

  In FIG. 92 (set 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is white-flickered and is one level instead of FIG. 91 (set 5-1), and the kimono of the navigation character YM similarly flashes white There is. After that, once the meter is full and returns to the empty state, the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a green kimono is worn in FIG. 92 (5-2-3), The gauge of the white meter display MW also turns green and rises to 3 levels. Thereafter, after the meter becomes full again and returns to the empty state, in FIG. 92 (set 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which the rainbow-colored kimono is worn. The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to rainbow color and is full. As described above, the storage condition of the meter and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to coincide with each other. Also, the color of the gauge may correspond to the color of the navigation character YM.

  In addition, when all the meters are stored, a pattern in which the jackpot confirmation or the expectation of the jackpot is high, and a pattern in which the meters are stored and discharged may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, if it is released when the meter is stored up to 2 levels, effects equivalent to blue will be performed, and if released when the meter is saved up to 4 levels, effects equivalent to red Is done.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing still another modified example of the example described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 93 (set 6-2), instead of FIG. 91 (set 6-1), the roulette display icon RI and the meter increase icon MUI are displayed on the white blinking meter display MW ′ in which the meter frame mf blinks in white. Is displayed, but a part of the meter rising icon MUI overlaps with a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. 93 (set 6-2) is shown in FIG. It is more difficult to view than the roulette display icon RI shown in Section 7-1). On the other hand, a green meter rising item UpIm is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. 91 (Set 7-1). Note that the meter rising icon MUI may overlap from the front on all of the roulette display icons RI, or at least a part of the roulette display icons RI at least partially on the front of the meter rising icons MUI. You may wrap it. In addition, as a priority displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, when a notice that a meter rising icon may be displayed, such as the display of a roulette display icon, is made, the meter rising icon is displayed by displaying a white blink meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although it has been informed that there is a possibility that it will be displayed, it may not be notified by the meter frame even if there is a notice that there is a possibility that the meter rising icon will be displayed. You may be comprised so that it may not be alert | reported that a meter raise icon may be displayed. In addition, the advance notice for notifying that the meter rising icon may be displayed may be performed not only by the meter frame but also by other display or rendering means.

  In place of FIG. 91 (set 7-1), in FIG. 93 (set 7-2), the blue meter ascending item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, it is difficult to view because the meter rising icons MUI still overlap. Thus, the meter rising icons may overlap with each other. When the meter rising icons overlap, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rising icons, or the higher meter rising degree may be prioritized, or the meter rising degree Lower may be prioritized. Also, in the navigation character YM, the meter rising icons may not overlap from the front side, but may overlap.

  Also, instead of FIG. 91 (set 7-1), in FIG. 93 (set 7-3-1), an image up for notifying (noticing) that a meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear what color meter rising icon is displayed, and thereafter, several colors of meter rising icons are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this manner, when it is notified that the meter rising icon is displayed by the roulette effect although some colors are unknown, as shown in FIG. 93 (set 7-3-2), the roulette display icon RI is displayed. The effect display Ed1 to which the aura is applied is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 93 (set 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 is changed, and the blue meter rising icon is displayed as if it is enlarged. At this stage, it is not known in which color meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter rising icon may be displayed also in the roulette display icon RI.

  In Fig. 93 (set 7-3-4), the blue meter rising icon UpIb that resembles the enlarged blue meter rising icon, which was overlapping the roulette display icon RI, becomes the white blinking meter display MW Move to 'White Flashing Meter Display MW' is displayed overlapping. Also, the roulette display icon RI fades out and the display becomes dim and gradually disappears. In addition, the meter rising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown as to what color. Thereafter, the blue meter ascending item UpIb is taken in (stocked) in the white blinking meter indication MW ', and the white blinking meter indication MW' is leveled up.

  A blue meter ascending item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI and be taken into the white blinking meter display MW '. In this case, in the roulette display icon RI, the blue meter ascending item UpIb may be displayed before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, or may be displayed at the same time as it is displayed. It may be displayed after being done. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, the blue meter rising item UpIb may be displayed before or at the same time as the blue meter rising icon is enlarged. It may be displayed or may be displayed after being displayed.

  In FIG. 93 (set -20-2-1) instead of FIG. 91 (set 20-1), the white meter display MW in the full state is temporarily changed to the letter display "stock", and is empty. When returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the change of the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. In addition, when the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, only the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed, and icons other than the navigation character (pending icon, fluctuation icon) or other effect display may be changed.

  FIG. 94 shows an example of rendering in which the navigation character YM is intertwined with subtitle rendering.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (part 1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and a first suspension icon h11 and a second suspension icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 94 (about 2-1), a telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed that the navigation character YM may change, which corresponds to an example of the change advance display. For example, a display such as "Navi character change high certainty" and a character display such as "Navi character change high certain preparation" are flowed from right to left on the screen. In addition to this, in the telop display trp, no character is displayed in plain color, and by the telop display, “○○ high confidence”, “×× & ○ high confidence”, “○○ high accuracy” In preparation, it may be notified in advance that there is a possibility that "In preparation for xx or xxx high preparation", "Under preparation for high accuracy", etc. may be displayed. Even if a plain telop display trp is displayed here, "○○ high resolution middle", "×× & ○○ high resolution middle", "○○ high resolution right now", "XX or high resolution ready" "" And "High preparation in progress" may not be displayed. In addition, "○○ high sure preparation in progress", "XX or ○ high precision prepare in progress", "high precision preparation in progress", etc. may be displayed, and a high probability state may occur from this onwards of the effect displayed in telop It may be notified in advance. The “XX” and “○○” described here are various effects (eg, hold (hold icon and / or change icon) change, pseudo-link, notice with high expectation color, high expectation for big hit) It shows the name of the notice (so-called "super heat" notice).

  The high-probability state of the effects described here means that the notice notified that the high-probability state was indicated by the telop display, and the notice notified by the telop than when the high-probability state was not notified by the telop display. It shows a state where the frequency of occurrence is high. That is, in FIG. 94 (1) to (14), (4-2), (2-3), (2-3), and (2-8-2) in FIG. “” Indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than in the case where it is not notified that “Navi character change high probability is in progress” in telop display. In addition, “Highly under preparation in progress” included in “○ × Highly under preparation”, “XX or 高 High with preparation”, “Highly under preparation”, etc. is notified by ticker display. It is from now on that the effect being displayed is in high probability state (The fluctuation after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation when the display of the telop including “Highly prepared is started” or the fluctuation after the display of the telop including “Highly prepared” is started Informing) (or being likely to be in a high probability state)

  In FIG. 94 (part 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed a combination of the lost decoration symbols. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front by the telop display trp. However, on the contrary, the second decorative symbol may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

  In FIG. 94 (4), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and also in FIG. 94 (part 6), the symbol variation display is started. The telop display trp is continuing.

  In FIG. 94 (7), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 94 (# 8-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation display is started also in FIG. 94 (part 10), and the telop display trp is still continuing in the same figure (part 11).

  In addition, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display may appear, the change animation may be started, the treasure box of the icon I1 of the treasure box may be opened, and the navigation character YM may change. In this case, it can be said that the display such as "Navi character change high probability" in the telop display trp indicates the appearance of the icon I1 of the treasure box or the start of the change animation.

  In FIG. 94 (12), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started again, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 94 (part 13), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a golden kimono is worn. Even if the second change presentation of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing.

  While displaying the telop display trp, it is possible to perform the change effect of the navigation character YM any number of times, but if the navigation character YM changes once during the display of the telop display trp, then the navigation character YM changes. It may be configured not to.

  In FIG. 94 (step 14), the reach state is entered, but the telop display trp is still continuing. As the timing at which the display of the telop display trp disappears, at the start of super reach (for example, FIG. 78 (78 24)), at the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, at the first stop, at the second stop, at the third stop) , Symbol stop letters, start of the next change, etc.

  In this example, although the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, the navigation character may be changed by the change preview display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change preview display. It may be configured such that only the change effect by the navigation character itself is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 94 (FIG. 2-2), the telop display trp may be performed in two stages, upper and lower, instead of FIG. Then, different contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

  In addition, in the telop display, the high-prediction middle display may be displayed for other notices. As to the same prefetch target hold, the timing to be displayed may be the same or one may be later than the other. In addition, when one telop display of “○○ high sure middle” is shown, the telop display may not be displayed for another prefetch target hold, or may be displayed. In that case, the telop display (for example, "Navichara high accuracy middle") about the same notice may be displayed separately, and it may be constituted so that the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the order of display start, or the display position for each telop may be fixed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 94 (part 2-1), the same contents may be displayed by the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp as shown in FIG. 94 (part 2-3). That is, a plurality of the same telop display may be displayed. In some cases, it may be possible to show that the expectation of the big hit is higher than when only one is displayed. However, even if a plurality of displays are made, the expectation of the big hit may be the same as in the case where only one display is made. Also, displaying the same telop display plural times may be repeated. That is, each time display of telop display is started, plural telop displays of the same content may be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 94 (FIG. 8-2) instead of FIG. 94 (FIG. 8-1), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times), no further change is made. May be notified by the telop display trp. In this example, a character display of "Done" is displayed. However, even if this notification is performed, the navigation character YM may be further changed.

  FIG. 95 is a view showing an example of an effect produced by entanglement of the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b).

  A first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown in FIG. 95 (or 1a-1). In addition, the 2nd decoration symbol and the 2nd reservation number display are performed by the 3rd decoration symbol display device 208N of the right side.

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 95 (at 1a-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 95 (at 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left and right symbols, and in FIG. It shifts to reach production, and all displays have disappeared from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the first decorative symbol, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 to h14, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM are off.

  In FIG. 95 (T4a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the pattern of the swordsman of the enemy character on the entire screen. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays the first decorative symbol, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM which are displayed in a reduced size. The variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decoration symbol display devices.

  In (d) 5a of FIG. 95, the background of the wilderness that is the background display of the super reach effect is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing each other.

  Here, instead of FIG. 95 (To 1a-1), in FIG. (To 1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the reserved icon display area HIS is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display region CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third hold icon h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Furthermore, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, the frame disturbs and the image displayed straddling is divided.

  In addition, although the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the right base icon bIr may be displayed in an enlarged manner together with the navigation character YM.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 95 (To 1a-2), even if the display is not enlarged, a plurality of display devices may be straddled. For example, a pattern which is spanned from the beginning of display, a pattern which is moved from the original position and displayed across, a pattern which is changed and displayed over an image, an image is expanded and displayed over And a pattern in which the image is reduced and displayed across the screen. In addition, as shown in FIG. 95 (to 1a-2), when it is enlarged and displayed, the degree of expectation of the big hit becomes high, the reserve icon becomes easy to change, the change icon becomes easy to change, or the navigation character YM May change easily. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, when the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices, and a part of the display area of the display device B is overlapped by the display device A in the front, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display device B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display device A in FIG.

  The items described above with reference to FIG. 95 (to 1a-2) are also applicable to the example of effect described above, and are also applicable to the example of effect to be described later.

  Moreover, it replaces with FIG. 95 (to 1a-1), and a part of reservation frame UI is movedly displayed by the figure (to 1a-3). That is, the effect icon display area DIS is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The navigation character YM is also displayed on the right base icon bIr.

  As described above, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may be easily changed, or the expectation of the big hit may be increased, or the change of other effects (for example, suspension) It may be easy to perform icon and change icon changes etc.). In addition, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the degree of expectation of the big hit, and the ease of change of other effects (for example, change of pending icon or change icon) It may be different or it may be the same without any impact. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM changes may be higher when moving to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than when moving to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. Although the movement of the navigation character YM has been described above, the same applies to the case where the hold icon moves to another display device or the change icon moves to another display device.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 95 (1a-3), it can also be seen that the holding frame Ui is divided (broken). That is, although the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be moved to another place of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The items described above with reference to FIG. 95 (to 1a-3) are also applicable to the example of effect described above, and are also applicable to the example of effect to be described later.

  Further, instead of FIG. 95 (To 1a-1), in FIG. (To 1a-4), the navigation character YM is divided when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is split into two, and is displayed on both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can also be viewed as an increase in the navigation character YM.

  As described above, when the navigation character YM is split (increased), the navigation character YM may be easily changed, or the expectation of the big hit may be increased, or another change in presentation (for example, a reserved icon or The change of the change icon, etc.) may be facilitated.

  Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the location where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increased).

  The items described above with reference to FIG. 95 (to 1a-4) are also applicable to the example of effect described above, and are also applicable to the example of effect to be described later. That is, even in the other presentation examples, the navigation character YM may be split (increased), and may always be split (increased).

  FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of another effect in which the navigation character YM is entangled by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b).

  In FIG. 96 (1b), the background of the sea is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. Further, in the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 95 (at 1a-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In (b) of FIG. 96, the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. In the second and third decorative symbol display devices 208M and 208N shown in FIG. 96 (or 2b), the background display of the sea disappears.

  In (b) of FIG. 96, the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and instead, an icon of a signboard “searching in progress” is displayed. In addition, on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea has disappeared, the same character (a lady) YM 'as the navigation character YM is displayed and running. In addition, a text display of "searching" is displayed on it. Similarly, a silhouette display slt is displayed together with the image of the question mark on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea has disappeared.

  The icon of the signboard “in search” may be a notification indicating that there is a high possibility of success in the change presentation (promotion presentation) of the navigation character YM. In addition, the probability of success is higher when the color of the sign is blue than white, and the probability of success is higher when the sign is red than blue. In addition, if it is red, promotion confirmation may be sufficient. In addition, the signboard may be changed in color, display character or the like but may not be changed. In addition, the display mode of the signboard may suggest a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn.

  In FIG. 96 (at 4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state) so far, are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so that they approach each other. Will move. Note that this period corresponds to a period of roaring effect.

  In FIG. 96 (at 5b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, it moves to the fully closed position (maximum movement position) in contact with each other and stops, but it may be a position before contact.

  FIG. 96 (t6b-1) shows an example of the promotion success pattern. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the running character (dominant) YM 'takes a pose with the thumb raised The character display showing the level up is displayed on. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to a real display, and a two-car box is displayed. In addition, the display mode in which the navigation character YM may be changed may be suggested depending on the display mode of the one and two box. For example, if the one thousand box is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono. In addition, although the color, the open / close state, and the like may change in this thousand box, it may not change. In FIG. 96 (or 7b), the character (ten-like) YM 'displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn.

  Then, in FIG. 96 (8 b), the second decorative symbol display device 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N move in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L so as to be separated from each other, and return to the initial state . When each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restored to the initial state, the wipe effect is performed by the respective decorative symbol display devices 208M and N. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 96 (at 9b) and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is in the middle of wipe-in, and in FIG. 96 (t 10b), wipe-in is completed and the second decorative symbol display device 208M Also in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a wipe display in which only the model title is displayed is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 96 (at 10b), a smoke image is displayed at the position where the icon of the signboard was displayed until then.

  In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 96 (at 11b), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, wipe out is started in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this example, the animation of wipe-in (animation that closes from the left and right) and the animation of wipe-out (animation that opens from the inside to the outside) are different but may be the same animation. In FIG. 96 (12 b), the wipe out is completed, and the sea background is displayed across the three decoration symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to N. In one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this embodiment may be performed. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced by one or more effect movable bodies not including the liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs the effect operation) And the navi character is promoted.

  Note that the change effect (promotional effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 96 is also applicable to the effect examples described so far, and is also applicable to the effect example described later.

  FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect in which the navigation character YM is entangled by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b).

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 97 (at 1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 97 (1a-3-2), a moving animation in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed. In FIG. 97 (1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is exactly located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Also in this case, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame disturbs the navigation character YM displayed across the frame. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-3), the navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 97 (1a-3-2 '), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the third decorative symbol display device An example of enlarged display is shown at 208N. Although only the right hand and the right toe of the navigation character YM are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-2 ′), the right toe of the right hand and the right foot is enlarged and displayed. The navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the part which has entered the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-3 ′), the navigation character YM having a display size larger than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. . As described above, when the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, or the expectation of the jackpot may be higher than in the case where the navigation character YM is not displayed in an enlarged manner. A change in the effect of (for example, a change in the hold icon or the change icon) may be facilitated, or may be the same without any influence at all. In addition, when the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be always displayed enlarged or may not be displayed enlarged.

  The moving animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 97 is applicable to the example of the effects described above, and is also applicable to the example of effects described later.

  Also, in place of FIG. 96 (t8b), FIG. 97 (t5b-2) shows a pattern in which the change effect (promotional effect) of the navigation character YM has failed. In FIG. 96 (at 4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving closer to each other, and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. Is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are stopped halfway, also return to the initial state, but notification of a change effect (promotional effect) failure is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (or 5b-2), the character (tendon) YM 'takes a pose in which the character is directed backward and depressed. Note that notification of failure may be started while returning to the initial state. Alternatively, notification of failure may be started when the vehicle has stopped before reaching a certain position.

  When both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, it may fail without fail, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Further, even if this change effect (promotional effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This is also true for the effects divided into success and failure described so far.

  In addition, when the change effect (promotional effect) fails here, the navigation character YM is for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or until N times of variations end from promotion failure, The change may be regulated until the change of the prefetch target hold related to the promotion failure ends).

  Also, instead of FIG. 96 (6b-1), FIG. 97 (6b-2) shows the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol up to a certain position (for example, the fully closed position). A pattern in which the change rendering (promotional rendering) has failed despite the display device 208N moving is shown. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (at 6b-2), the character YM 'with a pose facing downward and falling is displayed as in the above. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the real display, and the orange box is displayed there.

  Thus, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. Alternatively, on the contrary, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted without fail. Also, even in the state shown in FIG. 97 (t6b-2), the navigation character YM may be promoted, or conversely, in this state, the failure determination may be made.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of effects in which the navigation character YM is entangled by the effect device 206 in which the second display device is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first display device).

  The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (or 1c). On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device), and the holding frame UI is displayed on the second display device 208S. ing. That is, the reserved icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided, and the pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. In the reserved icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the base icon bIn. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. The second display device 208S may be fixed or capable of moving up and down.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (or 1c), the first decorative symbol is in high speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

  In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (or 2c), a bird's-eye view image for wipe effect is displayed, and in the state shown in FIG. 98 (or 3c), the bird's-eye view image is completely closed (wipe-in state) It is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (T4), wipe out starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (T5), the bird's-eye view image is fully open (wipe out state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (5c) after the wipe effect is finished, neither the holding frame UI nor the holding icon h11 nor the fluctuation icon h0 nor the navigation character YM is displayed, but instead, The animation of the mini game by is displayed. That is, by the wipe effect, the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, the changing icon h0, and the navi character YM also become non-displayed, and a bet of change (promotion) of the display mode of the navi character YM The game has been started. Even in the same mini game, there may be a mini game in which a successful super reach effect is started. In the stage of FIG. 98 (T4c), it is understood that the mini game is started on the second display device 208S, but it is not clear what the bet (dividing) is the mini game, and it is shown in FIG. I do not understand until it becomes a stage. For this reason, at least the second display device 208S may be able to be focused on until the explanation about the mini game (here, "If you enter the cup, you are promoted to Yoshimune") is performed.

  In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (or 6c-1), the cup-in succeeds. When the cup-in succeeds, the wipe effect is started again, and the bird's-eye view image begins to close again in FIG. 98 (to 7 c), and the state shown in FIG. is there. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (T9c), wipe-out starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (T), the bird's-eye view image is fully open (wipe-out state). In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (or 10c) wiped out again, the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. Thus, after the wipe-out is completed, a change animation of the navi character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (Fig. 98 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, the smoke image disappears in FIG. 98 (12c), and the navigation character YM changes to the display mode of the red kimono.

  Further, in FIG. 98 (6c-2) instead of FIG. 98 (To 6c-1), the cup-in fails. Thus, when the mini game fails to bet the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM, the navigation character YM may not be absolutely promoted, but may be promoted. . Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (6c-1), when the mini game succeeds, the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

  It should be noted that the wipe effect may indicate to the player the possibility that the navigation character YM will be promoted when wiped out from FIG. 98 (or 8c), or a display mode in which the navigation character YM changes It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

  Further, when wiped out in FIG. 98 (or 10c), the navigation character YM may already be changed (promoted).

  In addition, the second display device 208S may perform the rendering operation while the mini game is being executed. In addition, success (in the case of this example (Fig. 98 (To 6c-1)) and failure (in the case of Fig. 98 (To 6c-2) in the case of this example) or circling effect (in the case of FIG. 98 (To 5c)) Different rendering operations may be performed. In addition, the rendering operation by the rendering movable body may be performed instead of the second display device 208S.

  The mini game described with reference to FIG. 98 is also applicable to the effect examples described above, and is also applicable to the effect examples described later.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example when another effect is executed while the effect selected by the player is being executed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 63 (b), the "copanda" of 07 is set, in the "holding frame selection", the "holding frame B" of 02 is set, and in the "holding display selection" The "icon C" of 03 is set, and the "background E" of 05 is set in the background display selection.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame B is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, one suspension of the special view 1 is stored, and a first suspension icon h11, which is a default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (A1), the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed.

  In FIG. 99 (a2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 which is the default display mode of the icon C is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM of the copanda is also displayed.

  In FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the same figure (Aa4-1), the icon I2 of the carpet Disappear, and the icon I1 of the treasure chest is left. In FIG. 99 (Aa5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM Is clearly less visible than before the appearance of the smoke image. Note that the change animation may be started by the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, a back button may be used, or an operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 99 (Aa6), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has changed from the copanda to the bancho. As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the game leader character in the navigation character YM is a character that can not be selected by the player. Note that the character may be changed to a character (for example, a princess or a princess) selectable by the player, or may be changed to a character which can not be selected by the player.

  In FIG. 99 (Aa7), the icon I1 of the treasure box disappears, and in FIG. 99A (A8), the reach state is entered. A balloon icon of "NEXT" indicating a pseudo-series effect is added to the navigation character YM of the group leader shown in FIG. 99 (Aa8).

  In FIG. 99 (a a9), the pseudo continuous symbol (the symbol of the character of the lord) is temporarily stopped at the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol, and in the figure (a 10), the character of the lord and the character display of “continuation” Cut-in display is performed. In this embodiment, in this way, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. Here, the pseudo-link is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol which executes the variation start and temporary stop display of the decoration symbol a plurality of times in the variation display of one special figure. In this embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo run is performed, the easier it is to be a big hit.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (Aa11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is largely displayed so as to overlap the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a12), the display of “× 2” is shrunk and moved below the second decorative symbol.

  A balloon icon "NEXT" indicating a pseudo-series effect is again added to the navigation character YM of the group leader shown in FIG. 99 (Aa13), and the continuation of the pseudo-series still has a high expectation. Thereafter, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times or once or a plurality of times, the reach state is entered, and further, it is developed into the super reach production (Kenou reach production). The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (Aa15) changes to the background of the wilderness which is the background display of the sword master reach effect, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hero of the protagonist and the swordsman of the enemy role. The confrontation duel scene is displayed. Further, in the holding frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the holding icon display area HIS disappear. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navy character YM of the group leader is displayed above the right base icon bIr.

  A balloon icon of “chance” for hitting a big hit is added to the navigation character YM of the bank leader shown in FIG. 99 (Aa 16), and the navigation character YM of the bank leader is executing a honing effect.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (Aa18), a scene after the majesty and the swordsman have cut each other in the super reach production is displayed. "Decoration 6" different from the design ("decoration 7") is displayed (swinged) largely. Although the height of the pedestal of the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the bank leader is also displayed. Thereafter, the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a a19) is in the middle of the wipe in, and in FIG. 99 (a a20), the wipe in is completed and then the wipe out is started. In the diagram (a 21), as the background (the background of the sky) of the background E is returned, the navy character YM of the copanda is beginning to be visible. In (a) 22 of FIG. 99, the wipe effect is finished, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays shaking of “decoration 7” − “decoration 6” − “decoration 7” which is a combination of losing. Further, the holding frame UI of the holding frame B is also displayed, and the display of the variation icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is also resumed. In addition, a blue hold icon (pre-reading hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (E2) to FIG. (E4-1), the navigation character YM itself may change the display mode of itself alone. In this example, although the change animation using the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is executed, it is missed, but the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed by the effect using the icon I1 of the treasure box It may be easier for the player to eventually shift to a state advantageous to the player than when changing (for example, changing by oneself) without using the icon I1 of the treasure chest. Here, the advantageous state includes the transition to the jackpot gaming state, the transition to the jackpot gaming state with a large number of balls, and the transition to the probability change state or the electric support state.

  In this example, even if the hold increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is not displayed when the hold icon is changed from the hide to the display. Pre-reading notice may be given. In addition, if the hold increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold is digested until the hold is digested (it may be displayed in the variable icon display area, or until it is deleted from the variable icon display area). May be configured to restrict the advance notice and / or the notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the increase of the hold while the hold icon is not displayed, the target of the change in the increase of the hold It may be configured such that the preview notice by the hold icon is regulated, and the preview notice and / or the notice of the change may be issued from the next change of the change of the increase of the hold.

  In this example, while the prefetch notice by the one hold icon is being executed, the prefetch notice by the other hold icon may be performed, but the prefetch notice by the other hold icon is performed while the prefetch notice by the one hold icon is performed. The restriction is imposed until the holding corresponding to the one holding icon is digested (may be displayed in the variation icon display area or may be deleted from the variation icon display area) It is also good.

  In this example, the advance notice and / or the advance notice of the change may be given by the navi character selected by the player, but the advance notice and / or the advance notice of the change may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may not want to In addition, the tutorial display may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by the balloon icon), but the tutorial display is displayed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may not want to Further, in this example, a notice of advance and / or advance notice of the change may be given by a navi character which can not be selected by the player, but advance notice and / or advance notice of the change may not be given. In addition, the navigation character that can not be selected by the player may be configured to be more likely to perform the promotion effect of the holding icon and / or the fluctuation icon than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, and the navigation character changes It may be configured to have high expectation (or big hit confirmation (or big hit may be heavy)) of the jackpot variation within the selected symbol and / or the hold, and the notice and / or the announcement that the navigation character appears The super-reach effect may be configured to be generated frequently (or generated).

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 100 (a a3-2) instead of FIG. 99 (a a-3-1), change notice display is performed by light emission of the light guide plate IL instead of the icon I 1 of the treasure box. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be notified by a different presentation means than the presentation means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) on which the navigation character YM is displayed.

  Also, instead of FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa3-3), in place of the icon I1 of the treasure box, a change notice display due to the rendering operation of the movable means (here, family crest 224E) It is carried out. That is, the family crest 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Here, although there is no hold icon, if there is a hold icon, the hold icon is also overlapped. Thereafter, the family crest 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Also, the household crest 224E may vibrate with or instead of rotation. Also, it is possible to raise only and not to rotate and vibrate. In addition, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the rendering operation of the family crest 224E, that is, after the family crest 224E returns to the initial position. Further, the easiness of change to the navigation character YM or the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by the light emission effect by the LED provided on the household crest item 224E.

  Further, in FIG. 100 (a a3-4) instead of FIG. 99 (a a3-1), a change preview display is performed by sound output from the speaker 120 instead of the icon I 1 of the treasure box. Note that the change notice may be displayed by the game board lamp 442 or the game stand frame lamp 452.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (a a 4-2), instead of FIG. 99 (a a 4-1), while the icon I 1 of the treasure box of the change notice is temporarily displayed in the effect icon display area DIS In some cases, the icon I1 may fly away on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  Further, in place of FIG. 99 (Aa6-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa6-2), the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change although the treasure box of the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened. Also corresponds to so-called failure patterns.

  Further, in place of FIG. 99 (Aa 6-1), in FIG. 100 (A a6-3), a copanda navy character YM is the same copanda but a copanda with different clothes colors (here, red clothes Copanda), and has succeeded in the change production (promotional production) of the navigation character YM.

  Further, in place of FIG. 99 (a a3-1), in FIG. 100 (a b1), as in the example shown in FIG. 98, the second display device 208S below the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first display device). Are arranged, the second display device 208S is provided with the reserved icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, the effect icon display area DIS, and the pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. . In the reserve icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the base icon bIn. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navy character YM of the copanda is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (Ab1), a conversation notice is made by the notice of the character display of the character of "爺" and "Navichara has changed". It is That is, the fact that the navigation character YM changes is notified by means of another presentation means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) different from the presentation means (here, the second display device 208S) where the navigation character YM is displayed. There is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 100 (b2), the navigation character YM is changed from the copanda to a bancho that is a character that can not be selected by the player.

  Moreover, it replaces with FIG. 99 (a a2), and the speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 100 (a c1). Also, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 65 (9) and the brightness (light quantity) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 (3) are "user set values". It is noted at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example both are three levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and brightness set by the player are forcibly changed at the time of execution to be output from the speaker 120, or for the game board lamp 442 and / or game frame Since an LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is described in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the “actual setting value”. This is the same in the following examples. In FIG. 100 (A c2), it is notified that the "superheat" advance notice may be given by the speaker 120 which is a production means different from the production means which may be given the "superheat" advance notice. ing. The volume (actual setting value) of the speaker 120 at this time matches the user setting value. After that, in FIG. 100 (c3), the notice of "superheat" is executed, and the character "superheat" is displayed large on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sound is outputted from the speaker 120. The lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light. The volume (actual setting value) at the time of the "superheating" advance execution exceeds the user setting value and is level 5, and the luminance (actual setting value) is also level 5 exceeding the user setting value. That is, the sound is output at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and the light is emitted at a brightness higher than the brightness level set by the player. In addition, at the time of effect execution, there are cases where the volume and brightness exceed the user setting value and are forcibly below the user setting value (the same applies hereinafter). Further, the timing at which the volume and the luminance forcibly change is not limited to this example, for example, the luminance may also change at the timing at which the sound in the heat close approach is output, or the sound in the heat close approach The volume and brightness may change while the signal is output. In addition, when a certain effect is performed, only the volume among the volume and the luminance may be output exceeding the user setting value, or only the luminance may emit light exceeding the user setting value. There are also cases where both go beyond.

  It should be noted that the user setting of the volume and brightness may be possible even in a game console where the convenient volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW are not prepared as described with reference to FIG. It may be any game console that can set the volume and brightness. In addition, the technical idea can be applied to the case where the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the color tone of the image, and the like referred to here (the same applies hereinafter).

  The various technical ideas described above with reference to FIG. 100 can be applied to the example of effect described above, and can also be applied to the example of effect described later.

  FIG. 101 is a table summarizing music that can be output from the speaker 120.

  In the gaming stand in this example, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 101 are music pieces that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive jackpots. For example, if you do not have 15 jackpots, you can not select the song "Dumping behavior". Also, multiple songs may be selectable. For example, when 15 jackpots are hit, all songs of serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

  In addition, the 12 songs with serial numbers are songs that can be selected when the chance button 136 is operated 5 times during the big hit start interval (during big hit start effect execution), and when the back button navigation mode is set During the start interval, guidance on operating the chance button 136 is notified, but not notified in the case of back button navigation mode non-setting. Note that the guidance may not be notified even when the back button navigation mode is set, or the guidance may be notified also when the back button navigation mode is not set.

  Also, the songs of serial numbers 13 and 14 are songs that can be selected on the condition of a big hit with a specific reach. The "collaboration SP" mentioned here refers to super reach production in which a plurality of characters perform in parallel (for example, super reach production in which Yoshimune and a panda perform in parallel with Kagoshima reach). A "big hit" is a cut-in image during super reach, in which the "楓" of the premier character appeared and hit a big hit.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example in which the music selection described using FIG. 101 is performed.

  In FIG. 102 (i), it is a definite change state (special drawing high probability common drawing high probability state), and is in the process of high speed fluctuation of the first decorative symbol. The second number-of-holds display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B1), the number of reservations of the special view 1 is 3, and the number of reservations of the special view 2 is also It is three. Moreover, this pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and only the reserved icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are illustrated in FIG. These three hold icons h21 to h23 are all default display modes. In addition, it is the jackpot third consecutive class. Furthermore, in the music title display area MN at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B1), the music title of the currently output music (here, the default "may be there") Is displayed, and the music of the music title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music being output here is the music being output in the definite variation state. Furthermore, the icons of the up and down keys 137u and d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the music title display unit MN, and it is informed that music selection is possible by operating the up and down keys 137u and d. In addition, a background screen of the space is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background screen of the space is a background screen for a probability variation state.

  In FIG. 102 (b), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in FIG. 102 (b), the song title of the song title display portion MN is changed to "Mega giga summer". Note that since the music is output from the speaker 120 slightly after the music selection operation (for example, 500 ms), there is a period in which the music title of the music name display unit MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. Note that the music title of the music title display unit MN may be configured to match the music actually output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 102 (b), the music of “Mega giga summer” is output from the speaker 120 as well. When the music change is performed, the music is output from the beginning, but for example, the timing or time when the music flows is determined by power on or RTC (Real Time Clock) effect, or the output from the continuation of the previous output. If it is, it may be output halfway.

  In FIG. 102 (B5), the reservation of the special figure 2 increases, and the special 2 becomes full (the number-on-hold display displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). The start of the display of the fourth hold icon is slightly later than the hold number display is updated to 4, and the fourth hold icon 24 of the display mode (blinking white) of the prefetch notice is displayed in FIG. It is done. After that, the suspension of Special Figure 2 is digested three, and the symbol stop of Special Figure 2 is performed in Fig. 102 (B8), and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. There is. In addition, the number of remaining reservations of the special figure 2 is 1, and the 1st reservation icon h21 is changing into the display mode of red.

  In FIG. 102 (b), the last hold of the special figure 2 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts variable display of the decorative symbol. Even in the state of FIG. 102 (B10), the selected music is still "Mega Giga Summer", and in FIG. 102B (B), the character C11 of the Bancho appears and a music change notice is given. The music change notice is a jackpot notice including an effect of forcibly changing the music selected by the player to another music, and may be a normal notice or may be applied to a prefetch notice. . In this example, by displaying the music change notice, the big change confirmation (or big hit rich) is notified about the symbol change for which the music change notice is displayed, but the symbol change displayed with the music change notice is removed There may be cases. For example, if "Make DREAM", which is the theme song of the character who has appeared, is output (it is a high hit expectation, or a big hit decision (it may be a big hit)), it is successful. "" Is not output, it may be a failure, and the symbol change on which the music change notice is displayed may be removed. In addition, even if "make DREAM" is not output and the music change advance notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been determined by another effect (for example, resurrection effect). In addition, since the music change notice is displayed, the jackpot confirmation (or the big hit rich) / or the expectation of the big hit than when the notice other than the music change notice is performed for the next change of the symbol change displayed the music change notice It is possible to give a pre-reading notice to give notice that the degree is high. In addition, even when the music change advance notice fails, it may be configured to be notified that the big hit is definitely determined by another effect (for example, resurrection effect). However, since the music change notice may cause an annoying effect for the player in some cases that the music selected by the player is forced to be replaced, if the music change notice is started as a compensation, the jackpot It may be decided.

  The song change effect sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 102 (12). Moreover, although the output of the music of "mega giga summer" output by the speaker 120 is not performed, the music of "mega giga summer" may be output. In addition, the character C11 of the bank leader who appeared in the music change notice raises one hand, and the hand overlaps a part of the music title display portion MN.

  In FIG. 102 (b), the song title of the song title display section MN is changed to "Distance", but no song is output from the speaker 120. In addition, even if the output of the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is continuously output as it is in Fig. 102 (B12) to Fig. 102B (B15-1). The output may be started from the speaker 120 as "Distance" changed by the music change notice. Here, as shown in FIG. 101, "Distance" is not a music released next to "Mega Giga Summer", but is a music different from "Burn DREAM". However, "Distance" is the music that precedes "Bake DREAM" in the open order. In the music change notice here, such a music of "Distance" is sandwiched, and finally, "make DREAM" is output. Note that “speaking DREAM” may be displayed on the music title display portion MN at the stage of FIG. 102 (b).

  In FIG. 102 (b), again, the song change effect sound is output from the speaker 120, and the character C11 of the master has raised one hand. Even if a certain period of time has passed since the song title of the song title display section MN has been changed to "Distance", the song "Distance" may not be output from the speaker 120, but may be output.

  In FIG. 102 (i), the song title of the song title display portion MN is changed to "speaking DREAM", and the speaker 120 outputs a song change effect sound again. The music change notice may be a success at the stage when "speaking DREAM" is displayed on the song title display section MN, and in FIG. 102 (i16), the music of "songing DREAM" is output from the speaker 120. That is, when "speaking DREAM" is displayed on the song title display unit MN, the music of "songing DREAM" is always output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that even when “Denage DREAM” is displayed, there may be provided a case where the music of “Denage DREAM” is not output from the speaker 120 and a failure occurs.

  Also, in the present example, when the music change notice is displayed, "Daake DREAM" is always output, but the original "Mega giga summer" is displayed in the music title display portion MN in FIG. 102 (B15). In this case, it is a failure (deterioration), and then “mega giga summer” may be output from the speaker 120 as well. Alternatively, if “Distance” is still displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (i), it is also a failure (deterioration), and then “Distance” may be output from the speaker 120 as well. The original "mega giga summer" may be displayed on the song name display section MN which the player has selected, and output of the "mega giga summer" song may be started.

  Note that depending on whether "Distance" is displayed on the song title display section MN at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (B13) or "Your tears" to be released next to "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed. The jackpot expectation may be expressed for symbol variation within the variation and / or hold. That is, when "Distance" is displayed, the degree of expectation of the jackpot may be higher than when "your mind" is displayed.

  In addition, you may express the big hit expectation about the said fluctuation | variation and / or the symbol fluctuation in suspension by the change frequency of the music by music change advance notice. For example, when the music is changed twice due to the music change notice, it may be configured to be more likely to make a big hit with respect to the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation within the hold when the music is changed twice. . In addition, when the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, seven times) due to the music change notice, the change and / or the symbol change in the hold may be a big hit decision (or a big hit rich). Conversely, if the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, once) due to a music change advance notice, it may be a lost decision.

  In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (A16), an animation of "Bright DREAM" is also displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (i 19), “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” which is a combination of big hit with definite variation is displayed with shaking (FIG. In 20), the combination is confirmed and displayed. In this example, when the music change notice is displayed, the music is always changed to "Make DREAM", and then the music of "Make DREAM" is outputted from the speaker 120, and the decoration symbol display device 208 outputs "Make DREAM". An animation (including the lyrics display) is displayed and becomes a big hit. In addition, even if the music change notice is displayed and the music becomes "Bake DREAM", the music of "Bake DREAM" is outputted from the speaker 120, and / or the decoration symbol display device 208 has "Bake DREAM" It may be configured such that the animation may not be displayed. That is, even if the music change notice is displayed and changed to a specific music, there may be a case where the next time there is no effect display corresponding to the music, there may be a loss.

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  The start screen of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (b 21), and the big hit start BGM is outputted from the speaker 120, during the big hit start interval (during big hit start effect execution) It is.

  The timing in FIG. 103 (b) is a timing immediately after the first round is started. In the jackpot game effect in this example, the first round and the second round become the music selection period. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 automatically displays a music selection screen. Note that the music selection may be started by the player's intention, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. In addition, even if it is a music selection period, if selection of a music is complete | finished, a music selection screen will disappear and round production will be started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display ("1R") indicating that it is the first round and a display (0 pt) of the number of balls (the number of winning balls) are also performed.

  The music selection list GR is displayed on the music selection screen. As we have achieved 4 consecutive homes in this big hit, "Kiseki's Universe" is newly added to the music release list GR and is selectable. The display of "the universe of Kiseki" is marked with "New". Note that in this example, the newly added music is configured to be displayed on the second row of the music release list GR, so "may be there" and "Mega Giga Summer" are already open. "Is hidden. Here, the newly opened “Kiseki universe” is selected, and the speaker 120 outputs the rust part of the “Kiseki universe”. In the music release list GR, the previous "Daake DREAM" is not displayed, and "Daake DREAM" can not be selected. However, in the case where the effect of "Bakee DREAM" is executed, "Bakee DREAM" may be released. In this case, the display position in the music release list GR of "Makeru DREAM" may be a position immediately below the song ("Your Scarecrow") released by the previous time, or "Kishikino's released this time" It may be located directly below the universe. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 103, since the opening order is the sixth music, it may be the position of the sixth music counting from the leading music, but in this case, three question marks are displayed in a row. It will be caught. In addition, when the production of "Makeru DREAM" is executed, "Makeru DREAM" among the music released in response to the number of consecutive houses ("Kiseki's Universe") and the music of "Makeru DREAM" Only the song may be released, or both songs may be released.

  In FIG. 103 (i), the cursor csd is aligned with the display in which three question marks under the display of "Kiseki's Universe" in the music release list GR are operated by operating the down key 137d. The display in which three question marks are arranged is an unreleased display, and the song title is also unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unclear what music is scheduled to be released in the future. At the timing shown in FIG. 103 (b), the gaming ball has begun to win the attacker.

  When the cursor csd is placed on the display where three question marks are arranged, the downward scroll is automatically started (Fig. 103 (a 25)), and the cursor csd goes to the end and It may be back to ". It should be noted that the scrolling may be performed by the player's own operation instead of the scrolling directed downward automatically. Also, instead of displaying three question marks in a row, the name of the song scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed dimmed. Or conversely, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that is not open. That is, the display itself in which three question marks are arranged may not be displayed in the music open list GR, and only the open music titles may be displayed.

  Also in FIG. 103 (i), the automatic scrolling is not finished, and the rust part of "the space of Kiseki" is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. Note that during music selection, a part (in this example, the chorus part) of each music is output so as to loop, but it does not have to be looped. For example, when output for a certain period is completed, the next music Automatically, or the music may not be output until the next is selected. In addition, all may be output from the beginning of each music, or all may be output from the middle of the music (for example, a portion of rust).

  Even in FIG. 103 (b 28), the automatic scrolling has not ended, and the cursor csd has not returned to the beginning "may be there", but from the speaker 120, "the universe of Kiseki" is substituted for " The output of the part of the chorus of "may be there" has been started. Note that it may be configured such that the music of "may be there" may not be output until the cursor csd is set to "may be there". FIG. 103 (B) shows a state in which the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling, and in FIG. 103 (B), the cursor csd may be at the head “ "I'm back", and automatic scrolling has ended. Basically, the cursor csd corresponds to the display of music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is placed on the display of the target music (it may be at the same time as or before the cursor is set). Since the output of the music is started, “it may be there” is output in the middle of the automatic scrolling, so the music which was output at the time of FIG. The continuation of is output as it is. Furthermore, after the cursor csd is adjusted to "may be there" (may be simultaneous with or before being adjusted), it may be "newly there" The music of "" may be newly started from the beginning of the portion of the chorus of "may be there" (that is, the beginning of the music outputted by the music selection).

  Thereafter, the lower key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is brought to the display of "Mega giga summer" as shown in FIG. 103 (b). In this state, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the chance button 136 is operated to be determined as "Mega Giga Summer". In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 103 (b), the display of the determined "mega giga summer" is displayed in red, and the music determination sound is output from the speaker 120.

  When the music is determined in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round effect screen. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (b), a round effect screen for the second round is displayed, and the title "Mega Giga Summer" of the selected music is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is done. Also, the music of “Mega giga summer” is outputted from the speaker 120. The selected music is output from the beginning at the start of the round effect. In addition, when all is output from the beginning of not only the chorus part but the music at the time of music selection, you may make it be output from the continuation at the time of a round production start.

  Also, instead of FIG. 102 (i), in FIG. 103 (i), a song title "CREA" is displayed on the song title display section MN of the decorative symbol display device 208. The songs of this song name are songs not included in the table shown in FIG. That is, the music can not be selected by the player. The music of "CREA" is outputted from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 102 (i. 15-2-2), and the animation of the character of "CREA" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, The lyrics for the song "CREA" are also displayed. As described above, when music that can not be selected by the player is output, the degree of expectation of the big hit may be high or the big hit may be confirmed. However, the case of losing may be included. Also, in the subsequent music selection by the player, since the music of "CREA" is output once, it may be added as one of the selectable musics in the music open list GR, or vice versa. , May be prohibited to add. Also, it is possible to select in the song selection during the big hit game and not selectable in the song selection during the symbol variation, and conversely, in the song selection during the big hit game, it is not selectable and select in the song variation during the symbol variation It may be possible.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of effects by the effect device 206 shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A1), the first decorative symbol is in high speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, one reserve of special figure 1 is stored, and the first reserve icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 104, similarly to FIG. 100 (c1), the "user setting value" of "volume" and "brightness" is described at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 of each figure, and "volume" at the lower right. And the "actual setting value" of the "brightness". In addition, the types of "BGM", "SE (sound effect)", and "light emission" among the effects actually executed are also described.

  In FIG. 104 (Wa1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 are in accordance with the symbol variation lamp pattern. It emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user setting value.

  In addition, in order to forcibly set the volume and the luminance to the actual setting value, the effect control data may ignore the user setting value and instruct to execute with the value defined by the effect data, or the user setting The sub control units 400 and 500 may self-manage according to a table in which effects ignoring the value are summarized, or may be managed based on a command from the main control unit 300.

  In FIG. 104 (Wa3), it is developed into super reach production (Kenou reach production), and the left symbol temporarily stopped by the decoration symbol display device 208 moves to the upper left of the decoration symbol display device 208 and is temporarily stopped similarly. The right symbol is moved to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 104 (Wa3), the BGM for super reach development is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set values, and the lamp 442 for game board and the lamp 452 for game frame according to the lamp pattern for super reach development. However, light is emitted at the same three levels of luminance as the user set value.

  In FIG. 104 (Wa4), the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd operate and advance from the initial position toward the front of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively, to the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, light is emitted from the light guide plate IL, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 104 (Wa4), the BGM disappears, and the super reach development feature character movement effect sound is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the super reach development feature film turning lamp According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set values. As described above, although the first large-screen behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd and characters such as the light guide plate IL perform the rendering operation, the volume and the luminance remain at the user setting values.

  In addition, the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd return once to an initial position at an appropriate timing.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (Wa6) displays a scene after the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character perform a duel on the background screen of the wilderness and the lord and the swordsman cut each other. In FIG. 104 (Wa6), the BGM for super reach is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for game board and the lamp 452 for game frame according to the lamp pattern for super reach It emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user setting value.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 104 (W a8), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 104 (W a9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases, and thereafter, as shown in (W a10). , Chance button 136 is operated at the timing within the operation effective period. During this time (Fig. 104 ((a 7-1) to Fig. 104 (ウ a 11-1), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the super reach result turning sound effect Are also output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value according to the symbol variation lamp pattern. In addition, the button effect may correspond to the suggestion that the effect of changing the setting of the volume and the brightness may start.

  In the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (Wa11-1) in response to the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 104 (Wa10), the effect image is displayed from the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman have cut each other It is switched to the display of Ed2. In FIG. 104 (A11-1) in response to the chance button 136 being operated, the BGM disappears, and the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user setting value, and it is for jackpot confirmation According to the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 also emit light with five levels of luminance exceeding the user setting value. That is, both the volume and the luminance are forcibly raised.

  Note that, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the effect described in FIG. 104 (Wa11-1) is executed. However, if there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped to perform the resurrection effect.

  In FIG. 104 (Wa12), again, the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character article 224Gd operate, and each advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device It is overlapped from the front side at 208. Then, in FIG. 104 (Wa13), the one-man box character 224H operates and moves downward from the initial position, and the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-screen behavior and objects 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior and objects 224Gd. The light guide plate IL emits light again, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. During this time (Fig. 104 (ウ a12) to Fig. 104 (ウ a14)), as with Fig. 104 (ウ a11-1), from the speaker 120, the big hit finalized sound output is output at five levels beyond the user setting value. The game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light with five levels of luminance exceeding the user set value according to the big hit determination lamp pattern.

  In addition, even when the special effects fail and the rendering operation is not performed, the volume and brightness may be changed from the user setting value, or in this case, the user setting value may be left unchanged.

  Also, when the button image 136 is displayed as in FIG. 104 (a 7-1), the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed. That is, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed before the effect that the special effects operate is performed. The change here becomes a notice (withdrawal a big hit notice) as a result of the button effect, and such a pre-change may be treated as one of the big hit finalization effects.

  In addition, here, the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect, but the operation start of an object such as a one-man box character 224H or the like, or the movement of the character to the effect position is completed In accordance with the above, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed at timings other than the operation timing of the accessory. In addition, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed a plurality of times by one pattern change, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed only once at the maximum by one pattern change. Furthermore, here, the volume and the luminance are aligned and changed, but only the volume may change, and only the luminance may change (the same applies to the following).

  Soon, in FIG. 104 (a15), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the sub-control unit 400, 500 side receives the command to return the one-handed box character 224H to the initial position. Start moving toward and return to the initial position. Here, the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emitting light according to the big hit confirmation lamp pattern is lowered to the user set value and the brightness of the big hit confirmation sound from the speaker 120 is also up to the user set value. It has been pulled down. This is because the sub control unit 400, 500 side returns to the user setting value by receiving the command to return the one-to-two box character 224H to the initial position.

  Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (c16), the effect image Ed2 fades out and becomes thinner and gradually disappears, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The display of the scene after the swordsman defeated fades in. Further, at this timing, the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character objects 224Gd are beginning to return to their initial positions. During this time (Fig. 104 (ウ a16) to Fig. 104 (ウ a17)), as in Fig. 104 (ウ a15), the speaker 120 outputs a big hit finalized sound effect at the volume of the user setting value. The game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emitting light in accordance with the determination lamp pattern also emit light with the brightness of the user setting value.

  In the period of the same sound data and / or light emission data as in FIG. 104 ((a11-1) to the same figure (ウ a17), the volume and / or the brightness change from the user setting value, and another sound data The volume and / or brightness may be configured to return to user settings when switching to light emission data and / or. Conversely, the volume and / or luminance may change from the user setting value across the period in which the sound data and / or the light emission data changes one or more times.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (Wa18), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman have cut each other is completely restored. Further, at this timing, the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character objects 224Gd stop at the initial position. In FIG. 105 (Wa18), BGM for super reach victory is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the lamp 442 for game board or the lamp 452 for a game stand frame according to the lamp pattern for super reach victory. However, light is emitted at the same three levels of luminance as the user set value. Note that the timing at which the volume and brightness return to their original state is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 104 (Wa15) (the timing at which the character (San-Chu character 77H) starts to return from the rendering position to the initial position). It may be the display switching timing), or it may be the timing when the victory of the duel scene is determined (the timing shown in FIG. 105 (Wa19-1)), or the timing when the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is stopped and displayed It may be

  In FIG. 105 (Wa19-1), a scene in which the enemy character swordmaster has fallen and the main character of the lord has won is displayed, and the lord, the navigation character YM, is also posing for victory. In FIG. 105 (Wa19-1), the BGM for super reach victory is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the voice of the main character "I'm done" is also the same as the user setting value3. A level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of luminance as the user set values in accordance with the super reach victory lamp pattern.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the finalized display is performed.

  Also, in place of FIG. 104 (Wa11-1), in FIG. 105 (Wa11-2), in response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. The display of the scene of is switched to a display in which a symbol ("decoration 6") different from the left / right symbol ("decoration 7") is largely displayed (swing display) as a middle symbol. This is a display that suggests button production failure. At this time, BGM for super reach defeat is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for game board according to the lamp pattern for super reach defeat The game stand frame lamp 452 emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. In this manner, when the rendering fails, or when there is a loss of concentration or a determination of loss, the volume and / or brightness may not be changed from the user setting value, but the volume and / or brightness may be changed from the user setting value. It is also good.

  Further, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (Wa11-2 ') instead of FIG. 104 (Wa11-1) is the same as the display screen of the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Although the display screen is the same as the display screen in this example, in this example, the volume is lower than the user setting value, and the luminance is also lower than the user setting value. Thus, when the rendering fails, or when there is a loss of concentration or a determination of loss, the volume and / or luminance may be reduced. Also, the volume and / or brightness may be reduced when the rendering is successful, or when the jackpot is rich or jackpot determined.

  In FIG. 105 (Wa7-2-1), instead of FIG. 104 (Wa7-1), the button effect is not started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. (Wa7-2-2), The character of the main character, Tonosama, is displayed in an enlarged size, and reports that it has won. As described above, even when the effect using the operation means such as the chance button 136 and the like (moving means) such as the one and two box character product 224H is not involved, when the specific effect display is displayed, The volume and / or brightness may be forced to change. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (Wa7-2-3), the display returns to the display of the scene after the majesty and the swordsman break, and the volume and brightness also return to the same level as the user setting value. ing.

  Note that the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed according to the effect by other effect means, not limited to the feature or display. Examples of other effects referred to here include a light guide plate IL, a Versa Lighter (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), etc. The volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed depending on the winning on the winning opening (for example, the general winning opening, the starting opening, the attacker) or the passage of a specific gate. Furthermore, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed also in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

  In addition, in the example continued from FIG. (Wa19-2-1) instead of FIG. 105 (Wa19-1), it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. The display of the scene won by the hero of the main character fades out as shown in the figure (Wa19-2-3), and then, as shown in the figure (Wa19-2-4), the first decorative symbol is displayed. The display is swayed by the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". In this example, after the sound volume and the luminance are forcibly changed in FIG. 104 (Wa11-1), the state is continued until FIG. 105 (Wa19-2-3), and thereafter, the user setting value is returned. That is, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed continues until the super reach effect is finished or until the same display of three same decorative symbols is started. Also, the display may be continued until the display of the shake ends. Also, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed may be continued until the final judgment effect is finished.

  In addition, although the volume or / and the luminance are forcibly increased at the time of the bonus item operation or the like, the volume or / and the luminance may be reduced. Also, when the user setting value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume or / and the brightness may not change. Alternatively, the player prepares a volume and brightness which can not be set, and in this case, it is changed to a value larger than the maximum value which is the user set value or smaller than the minimum value which is the user set value. Good.

  Also, the luminance may be high and the volume may be low, and conversely, the volume may be high and the luminance may be low. In addition, the luminance may change and the volume may not change. Conversely, the volume may change and the luminance may not change. In addition, when the volume or luminance adjustment (setting) screen is displayed at the time of volume or luminance change, the value set by the player may be left as it is, or the value being forcibly changed is displayed. May be In addition, the player may be able to adjust the volume or the brightness when the volume or the brightness changes, or may not be adjustable when the volume or the brightness changes.

  FIG. 104 (b) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be changed. Note that there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon, in which the volume or / and the luminance is not forcibly changed. For example, in the case of changing to a display mode in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is not so high, the volume or / and the brightness may not be forcedly changed. For example, if the expectation of the big hit is going up in the order of white flashing, blue, green, red, gold and iridescent, the volume or / and the luminance will not be forcedly changed unless it changes more than red. It is also good. Or, conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes, the volume or / and the brightness may be forcedly changed.

  FIG. 104 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed at the appearance of the effect (hot effect) having a high expectation of the big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (c), a conversation notice surrounded by a red frame appears. The hot effects are red, gold and iridescent effects. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed. Also, the amount of change may differ between red (for example, one level up), gold (for example, two level up), and rainbow color (for example, up to the maximum level), or the same. It may be.

  FIG. 104 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed once the resurrection effect is started after the lost design symbol is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (c d-2), a resurrection effect accompanied by a wipe effect is executed. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be changed prior to the result display. That is, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed simultaneously with the start of the resurrection effect.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in FIG. 106 and FIG. 107, the above-mentioned customization setting is performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 63 (b), the "copanda" of 07 is set, and in the "holding frame selection", the 04 "holding frame D" to which the overhead image for the wipe effect is added is The "icon C" of 03 is set in the "hold display selection", and the "background E" of 05 is set in the background display selection.

  In the description herein, the color used in the effect represents the level of the expectation of the big hit, and the expectation of the big hit increases in the order of white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors. For example, a color as a display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may be mentioned. Hereinafter, the change in color in the direction in which the expectation of the big hit becomes higher may be referred to as promotion. This is the same in the following description. This is also applicable to the above explanation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (D1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame D is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, one suspension of the special view 1 is stored, and a first suspension icon h11, which is a default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (D1), the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed.

  After that, the suspension of Special Figure 1 increases by two, and three suspension icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during stop display shown in FIG. 106 (D3). Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

  In FIG. 106 (D4), one hold is digested and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (D4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. In addition, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not been started yet.

  In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 106 (f5), the moving animation of the first holding icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift moving animation of the holding icons h12 and h13 are started, but Images appear from the left and right. Note that the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 may not be performed during the appearance of the overhead image for the wipe effect. In FIG. 106 (D6), the bird's-eye view image is fully closed (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is not visible. In FIG. 106 (f7), the first decorative symbol also starts variable display, and in the same diagram (d), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation. Also in FIG. 106 (d), the holding frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

  In FIG. 106 (D9-1), the wipe out is started, and the overhead image for the wipe effect starts to open, and in FIG. 106 (D), the overhead image is fully open (wipe out state). In the wipe effect here, the holding frame is changing. That is, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 106 (D10) is a “holding frame R” different from the “holding frame D” selected by the player in the customization setting, and the holding is surrounded by a red frame around It becomes a frame. Although “holding frame R” is a holding frame that can not be selected in the customization setting, it may be selectable. Note that the leg of the navigation character YM is not visible due to this red frame. The "holding frame R" is a holding frame having a function to notify that the display mode of the holding icon is in a state of change easily, and it is called "hold change !? time" next to the copanda of the navigation character YM. Text display is displayed. Note that with the suspension of the prefetching advance notification target, the first suspension icon h11 is suspended because one suspension is digested in FIG. 106 (D4). Here, "hold change !? time" corresponds to the above-mentioned "high probability state of effect".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (D12), the bomber icon I3 appears from the right end and passes over the holding frame UI. The bomber icon I3 shoots a missile toward the hold icon, and the missile hits the first hold icon h11 for hold of the previewed preview target. The display mode changes for the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 106 (D13) changes to the blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. Even if the bomber icon I3 appears, no missile is fired, or any pending icon or fluctuation icon does not hit the missile, or the display does not change even if the missile hits. There may be. These all correspond to the failure of the promotion effect.

  In FIG. 106 (D15), it is in the reach state, and in FIG. 106D (D16), the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped at the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The pending change symbol has a red symbol and a blue symbol. When the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the pending icon is promoted to two levels, and when the blue pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the pending icon is The display mode is promoted to one level. In FIG. 106 (D16), the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, and in the same figure (D17), the pending change animation is started. That is, the first reserve icon h11 shown in FIG. 106 (D17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in the figure (D), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the first reserve icon h11 is It has changed to the red display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (D19), the middle symbol, which has been a red hold change symbol, changes to "decoration 2", and "decoration 1"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 1" Is displayed in a variable manner (temporary stop). In FIG. 106 (d), the display is stopped with the combination of the decorative symbols, and the losing is determined.

  In FIG. 106 (D22), the red reserve icon, which has been the first reserve icon 11 so far, is moved to the pedestal hs0 and is displayed as the variation icon h0 of the red display mode. Even if the pending notice target pending is digested, the pending mark UI continues to display the text "pending change !? time". In FIG. 106 (D23), a golden light beam is emitted from the navigation character YM toward the fluctuation icon h0, and in the figure (D24), the fluctuation icon which has been red is changed to gold.

  In FIG. 106 (D26), it is in the reach state, and in the figure (D28), it is developed into the super reach effect. In Super Reach production, the background of the sky changes to the background of the wilderness, and a duel scene is displayed. In the super reach state, the holding frame UI has all remaining rests of the pedestal hs0, and the holding icon also disappears. However, the fluctuation icon h0 has not disappeared, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. A pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 106 (D28) is a pedestal of the “holding frame D” before changing in the wipe effect. That is, it is the original pedestal. However, it may be a pedestal of "holding frame R" after changing in the wipe effect. Also, the pedestal hs0 or the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed during super reach or in the normal reach state (FIG. 106 (D26)). In addition, all the holding frame UI and the holding icon may not be displayed. Furthermore, when the super reach effect ends, items such as the holding frame UI and the holding icon that have been hidden may be displayed, or after the end of the super reach effect, the holding frame R is displayed, and the next symbol change is performed. The holding frame D may be displayed from the start of the display.

  In this example, even if the reach state is reached, the color of the frame of the holding frame UI remains red, but if the color of the frame of the holding frame UI also changes, the expectation of the big hit is increased It is also good.

  It should be noted that the holding frame not selected by the player (for example, “holding frame R”) is more than the case where the prefetch holding icon is displayed on the holding frame (for example, “holding frame D”) selected by the player. If the pre-reading suspension icon is displayed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol form may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation corresponding to the pre-reading suspension icon, or the holding frame selected by the player (For example, in the case where the prefetching icon is displayed in the holding frame (for example, "pending frame R") not selected by the player than in the case where the prefetching icon is displayed in (for example, "pending frame D") However, even if it is the display mode of the same pre-reading reservation icon, it is constituted in the symbol fluctuation which corresponds to that pre-reading reservation icon so that it is easy to be displayed the big hit design feature finally It may be.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Instead of FIG. 106 (D 9-1), in FIG. 107 (D 9-2-1), both the holding icon and the change icon are temporarily changed to the special mode (character). Also, the navigation character YM is also changed to a panda. In this example, after that, the display mode of each color is changed to reflect the degree of expectation of the big hit. Here, the ease of change to the color with high expectation of the jackpot is determined by the mode of the character once displayed.

  In FIG. 107 (D9-2-2), the mini game with the panda of the navigation character YM is performed. The character that has won the mini game changes to a big hit expected color icon (hold icon or change icon). The wolf character wins with a probability of 50%, the princess character wins with a probability of 75%, and the princess character wins with a probability of 100%. In addition to the character of the lord, a premier character may be provided. The premier character changes to a big hit finalized color icon (here, rainbow color).

  In FIG. 107 (D9-2-3), the Janken game was played as a mini game, and everyone played Janken all at once. As a result, both of the characters of the nephew lost and the character of the lord won. In addition, a plurality of characters may win.

  In FIG. 107 (D9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and the bird's-eye view image in FIG. 107D (D9-2-5) is completely closed (wipe-in state) and wiped out (FIG. (D9-2-6) In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. (D9-2-7), the second holding icon h12 is changed to a blue holding icon. Note that the holding amount UI remains as “holding amount D”.

  FIGS. 107 (1) to 12 (12) show an example in which the navigation character YM and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display are displayed across a plurality of changes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame D is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, two reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and a first suspension icon h11 and a second suspension icon h12, which are the default display mode of the icon C, are displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (A1), the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed.

  In FIG. 107 (2), the hold of the special view 1 is increased by one, and the third hold icon h13 is increased. Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 107 (O3), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed, and in the figure (O4), one suspension is digested, and in the ornamental symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (O4) , The fluctuation display of the decoration pattern is started. In FIG. 107 (5), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In this example, the icon I1 of the treasure chest of the change notice is displayed on standby. After that, one hold is consumed, and the hold of the pre-reading notice object is put on hold of the first hold icon h11. In (107) of FIG. 107, the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, the icon I1 of the treasure box continues to be displayed while riding on the icon I2 of the carpet.

  In FIG. 107 (e9), the suspension of the first hold icon h11, which is the suspension of the pre-reading advance notice object, is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the icon I1 of the treasure box is still displayed while riding on the icon I2 of the carpet, and the icon I1 of this treasure box is displayed across a plurality of changes. In (107) of FIG. 107, the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 ends, and the change animation is started. That is, in FIG. 107 (E11), the treasure box of the icon I1 of the treasure box is wide, and a smoke image appears from inside, and the navigation character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 107 (12), the smoke image disappears, and the navy character YM of the copanda selected by the player in the above-described customization setting is changed to the navy character YM of the main character. Although the navi-cap character YM is a character that can not be selected in the customization setting, it may be selectable.

  In addition, in this example, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice is displayed in addition to the navigation character YM over the true symbol change display such as the special drawing symbol change display. The navigation character YM or the change notice may be displayed across the re-variation. For example, the change notice display (the icon I1 of the treasure box, the icon I2 of the carpet) is displayed due to the change, and the navigation character YM constantly displayed changes due to the change notice display in the third pseudo ream. The change notice is displayed due to change (treasure box icon I1 and carpet icon I2), and the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo run, and the navigation letter YM constantly displayed by the change notice display at the third pseudo run. It may change.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of effects in a pachinko machine set to the auto button mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the auto button mode, and on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed that the auto button mode is set.

  In FIG. 108 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed on the background of the sea. In addition, one suspension of the special view 1 is stored, and a first suspension icon h11 which is a default display mode is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI. Further, at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, a chance button 136 is shown. The chance button shown in FIG. 108 (A1) performs normal white lighting. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is always on even when the chance button operation is out of operation, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the chance button's operation valid period. It may be

  In FIG. 108 (A2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, the symbol variation display is started, and then the conversation announcement is started. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), the speech notice is updated, and the speech image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol. And a conversation image CI2 of a whistle on which a button effect image is displayed. The button effect image is an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is configured. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. Also, as shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit, and is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the conversation image CI1 is difficult to view. In this example, it is more likely that the conversation announcement will be a big hit if the conversation announcement is not given. In addition, when the speech advance notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the conversation image CI1 of the fond may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A6). By operating the chance button 136 after the timing of FIG. 108 (A6), the player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 (A6) starts blinking in white.

  With the timing of FIG. 108 (A7), the suspension of the special figure 1 increases. However, the hold icon has not started to appear at this time. Moreover, since time has passed since the operation effective period started, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced. In FIG. 108 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1) is a button hold icon, and a red button image 136a is displayed above the white circle. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1) changes to blue and starts vibrating in response to the appearance of the button holding icon.

  In FIG. 108 (A10), a fixed period of time elapses after the operation effective period of the button effect in conversation announcement is started. Then, the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the preannouncement of conversation, and as shown in FIG. 108 (A11), the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows is updated, and “Summer vacation still ~” as a response display for the auto button. Text display is displayed. As for the button holding icon, the automatic button mode is not functioning, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIG. 108 (A12) to FIG. 108 (A13), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being lit in blue as an operation promoting mode with respect to the button holding icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A15), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost is stopped and displayed. The vibration of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 (A15) is ended, and the blue light is returned to the normal white light. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 108 (A14), the chance button 136 has ended its vibration and returned to white lighting. This is because the operation period of the button hold icon has ended. The operation valid period of the button holding icon may end, for example, when a predetermined valid period has elapsed, or the decorative symbol may end when the first stop is performed, or the decorative symbol of The process may end upon confirmation display. However, the first hold icon h11 is still the display mode of the button hold icon. Then, in FIG. 108 (A16), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 which is the button suspension icon is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A16), the second decorative symbol starts variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started variable display, and the button hold icon display mode The first hold icon h11 is also still displayed.

  In FIG. 108 (A17), the hold reduction animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the button hold icon starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and in FIG. Reaches the top of the pedestal hs0 with the display mode of the button holding icon, and the change animation is started on the pedestal hs0 in the figure (A19), and in the figure (A20), it changes to the variation icon h0 of the blue display mode It is changing.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 109 (A22), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 109 (A23), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation.

  In this example, although the auto button mode has been set all the time, the chance button 136 is not operated until the symbol variation display changed to the button holding icon is confirmed regardless of the setting of the auto button mode. In the case of the hold reduction animation, the display mode automatically changes. That is, while it is the hold icon of the display mode of the button hold icon, it changes to the hold icon of the blue display mode according to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold decrease animation is started (the fluctuation icon h0 It can also be seen that the display mode does not change in response to the operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, the automatic button mode may be ended by operating the chance button 136 during the automatic button mode. In that case, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode may not be ended while the remaining period meter MT is displayed, or the chance button is displayed even while the remaining period meter MT is displayed. Operating the button 136 may end the auto button mode.

  Also, when the chance button 136 is not operated, the variation icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button holding icon, or may not be changed to the variation icon h0 of the blue display mode, or default. It may change to the change icon h0 of the display mode of. In addition, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not be finished. Furthermore, that the change icon h0 of the blue display mode is not changed when the chance button 136 is not operated is the same whether in the auto button mode or in the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and furthermore, it may change during the auto button mode but not during the non-auto button mode or vice versa.

  Furthermore, in the state where the auto button mode is not set, when there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 108 (A11), the characters "Summer vacation still ~" are displayed. It is not updated to the conversation image CI2 of the wolf. However, it may be updated.

  Also, in place of FIG. 108 (A5-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-1). The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-1), a meter display MW 'is also displayed. The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2), a button display icon 136D is displayed together with a dialog image CI2 of a whistle on which a button effect image is displayed. As described above, since the auto button mode functions with respect to the button effect in the conversational announcement, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the announcement changing even without the button operation. There is.

  Also, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed in FIG. 109 (Aa5-3). In this case, there is a need to operate the chance button 136 multiple times, and the auto button function does not have to work even when the effect requires the chance button 136 to be operated multiple times. It should be noted that, when operated a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may be activated for the remaining button effect images.

  Also, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-4), the button effect image (button is displayed on the second display device 208S disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). An image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In the example of FIG. 109 (Aa5-4), although there is one button effect image displayed on the second display device 208S, one or more button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S can The button function may not function.

  Also, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-1), a notification that prompts the decorative symbol display device 208 to continuously hit the chance button 136 is performed. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2), the button continuous hit effect is started, and the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and the continuous hit meter RHM are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 . The automatic button function does not work for the button continuous hitting effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2) changes to blue lighting while it starts to vibrate, and urges the operation. Eventually, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-5), the continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, and the continuous hitting meter RHM shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-6) rises, and the response display is performed. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-5), the continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, and the response display such as the rising of the continuous hitting meter RHM is also performed, but the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-6) is The vibration continues and the blue light continues. In the previous examples, it was sufficient to operate the chance button 136 once, but in this example, since the batting is required, the vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 are continued. Also in the case of long press, the operation of the chance button 136 is long as in the case of the continuous hit, so the technical idea here can be applied. The timing shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation effective period has passed and the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. The vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. After this, the chance button 136 immediately stops the vibration and returns to white light. Note that the auto button function may be configured to operate when operated one or more times. Also, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press auto continuous hit function is configured to work, and by performing the long press for a certain period, the same response display as performing continuous press operation is performed. However, if the auto button function does not work, it may be configured such that the long press auto continuous hitting function does not work either.

  FIG. 110 is a view showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  In the example continued from FIG. 110 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), it is after the start of the operation effective period of the button hold icon and for the button effect in the conversation notice. This is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated once before the auto button function of. In this case, both the response presentation of the button hold icon and the response presentation of the button presentation in the conversation announcement are displayed. That is, the button hold icon changes as the response effect of the button hold icon, and the dialog image CI2 of the bag is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation advance notice. The change of the button holding icon corresponds to the pre-reading notice, and the update of the speech image CI2 of the whistle in the pre-reading speech also corresponds to the pre-reading notice. Note that the conversation announcement may be a normal announcement. Also, the change of the button fluctuation icon in FIG. 108 (A20) corresponds to the normal notice.

  It should be noted that only the response effect of the one in which the auto button function does not work may be displayed. That is, only the change animation of the button holding icon may be displayed, and the dialog image CI2 may not be updated. Alternatively, on the other hand, only the response effect of the auto button function may be displayed.

  In addition, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the one in which the auto button function does not work may be displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the one in which the auto button function works may be displayed. And, conversely, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person with the auto button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person without the auto button function is displayed You may

  Furthermore, although the above description using FIGS. 110 (A 8-2-1) to (A 8-2-4) has been described during the setting of the auto button mode, the auto button mode is not set yet. The same is true for

  Also, in FIG. 110 (Aa8-3), the chance button 136 vibrates and emits light with a special color (here, blue) instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1) even when the auto button mode is not set. Indicates Note that different notifications may be performed when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

  Also, instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), in FIG. 110 (Aa8-3 ′), when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits light in the normal color (here, it blinks white) An example is shown.

  Further, as another example, in FIG. 110 (Ab1), a notification that prompts the decorative symbol display device 208 to continuously hit the chance button 136 is made during the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (Ab2), the button effect image (the button image 136a, the remaining time display meter MT) is displayed together with the display of the third round. May be disabled or, conversely, the auto button function may be enabled.

  FIG. 110 (Ba1-1) to FIG. 110 (Ba5) are diagrams showing an example of effects on the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (Ba1-1), effects by the navigation character YM are started. However, the chance button 136 is a normal white light, is not vibrated, and the back button is not notified. In (Ba2) in FIG. 110, when the button hold icon (first hold icon h11) in which the auto button function does not work appears, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. In FIG. 110 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11, which is the button hold icon, changes (see FIG. 110 (Ba1-5)).

  FIG. 110 (Ba1-2) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 110 (Ba1-1), but the only difference is that in FIG. 110 (Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. The light turns blue and the back button is notified.

  The remaining period meter MT, which represents the remaining period of the operation effective period described above, will be described in more detail. The description here is applicable to any of the examples of effects in which the remaining period meter MT described above is displayed. In the remaining period meter MT, the display mode changes in accordance with the passage of time (in the present example, the decrease display is performed) and in the back of the remaining time display region, the display mode is displayed according to the passage of time Is composed of two of the elapsed time display area MT2 (in this example, the increase display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color, shape, etc.) of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (in this example, blue) or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is not in the default color (white in this example) When displayed in, etc. In the case where the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode, and the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed to decrease as time passes, it is displayed in a special display mode as time passes. May be displayed on the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208). Conversely, if the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode, and if the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased and displayed with the passage of time, Since the area displayed in the special display mode increases accordingly, the player who wants to see the special display mode by the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (chance button 136 etc. in this example), etc. There are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the way of enjoyment and improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. The display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed when the remaining period meter is first displayed (in the case of the remaining time display area MT1, the remaining time meter is displayed first). In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the remaining time display area MT1 decreases and the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible for the first time) special The display mode may be displayed, or the display mode may be changed from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time has elapsed after the operation effective period has elapsed.

  Further, the navigation character YM described above is further supplemented. The description herein can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the navigation character YM described above is displayed. First, various advance notices may not be given by the navigation character. In addition, while the navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character A”) is displayed, another navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character B”) may be displayed. In such a case, the navigation character B displayed earlier may be configured to overlap the navigation character B displayed first, and conversely, the navigation character B displayed later is first. The displayed navigation character A may be overlapped, or the navigation character A and the navigation character B may be displayed at positions not overlapping each other. For example, the navigation character YM that is always displayed may be overlapped by a navigation character that gives a notice of the change and / or a preview of the change during one or a plurality of changes. Furthermore, the change preview may be displayed by the effect display indicating that the change preview may be displayed by the navigation character.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the overlapping relationship between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the counter-full error and the other displays of the luminance adjustment windows BW.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α1), a holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Moreover, the combination ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the loss of the decoration design is displayed also to the 1st decoration design (the 3rd design) and the 2nd decoration design (the 5th design) The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the number of special views of the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no suspension, and the symbol variation display is not started after the final display of the stop symbol of the special figure is performed, and the menu icon MI is overlapped with the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. The volume adjustment icon VI and the brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. In addition, a ball removal notification such as “Please pull off the ball” is displayed at the lower part of the first decorative pattern so as to overlap from the front side. The display of the ball removal notification is a slightly transparent display, and when the display of the ball removal notification is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the display on the rear side is in a state of being slightly visible. Hereinafter, displaying being displayed so as to overlap from the front side or being displayed in the front layer may be simply expressed as “overlap”. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification may be a display such that the display on the rear side can not be seen at all. Furthermore, a sound such as "Please pull the ball" is also output from the speaker 120.

  The display of the ball removal notification is shifted from the display position of the second decorative pattern on the upper left and the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, and these displays are not overlapped. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol and / or the second number-of-retentions display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification also has a shifted display position with respect to the frame RW at the upper right of the screen for notifying the current setting state, and the frame RW does not overlap either. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to be absolutely overlapped with the frame RW, or may be overlapped. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in the display position with the holding frame UI, and is not overlapped with the holding UI. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the holding frame UI absolutely, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 111 (α 2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated, and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed later than the display of the ball removal notification, but the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and the brightness adjustment window BW is a layer behind the display of the ball removal notification. It is displayed. That is, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps the brightness adjustment window BW.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, and the brightness adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI also become non-displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. (1) Fluctuation indication of the decoration pattern is done. However, the ball removal operation has not been performed yet, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. It is to be noted that although the ball removal operation is performed, once the plate filling error is eliminated, the plate filling error occurs again, and the same is true when the display of the ball removal notification is newly displayed. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 111 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed above the holding frame UI. The bar display VB for volume control is displayed from the front side so as to overlap at least a portion of the first decorative symbol, at least a portion of the variation icon h0, and at least a portion of the navigation character YM. In the following description, when the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated and displayed each time. In addition, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit, it is possible to display a bar display for brightness adjustment, and this bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment The following description of the bar display VB for volume adjustment can be applied to the bar display for luminance adjustment. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be simultaneously displayed. Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment or the bar display for luminance adjustment may be always displayable or may be displayable for a predetermined period. Also, display may be possible only while operating the left and right keys or the up and down keys.

  Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment and the display of the ball removal notification are displayed at positions not overlapping. The indication of the removal of the ball may be displayed so as not to overlap with the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or may overlap.

  Furthermore, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in the display position for both the hold icon and the change icon, and these icons do not overlap. The indication of the ball out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the hold icon and / or the change icon, or may overlap. Further, the display of the notice of removal of the ball is deviated also in the display position of the display of the navigation character YM, and does not overlap the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the navigation character YM, or may overlap.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α 4), super reach effect is performed, and a duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. Here too, the display of the ball removal notification is displayed, and the left symbol of the "decorative 7" moved to the upper left and the right symbol of the "decoration 7" moved to the upper right and the display of the ball removal notification overlap ing. In addition, the indication of the ball out notification is displayed overlapping with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness. Note that the volume adjustment is possible even during the super reach, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α 4). The bar display VB for volume control also overlaps the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness.

  A big hit game start screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α5), but the display of the ball pulling out notification also overlaps with the big hit start effect display here. Further, even in the big hit game, the volume adjustment is possible, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α5). The bar display VB for volume control also overlaps the jackpot start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted from the right-handed suggestion display on the upper left of the screen (display different from the right-handed warning. Equivalent to the mini-right-handed display in FIG. 18 (52) above). It does not overlap to the right strike indication indication. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the right-handed suggestion display, or may overlap. The right strike indication may not be displayed on the big hit game start screen.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α6), a right strike instruction screen for instructing the player to hit the right is displayed. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is from the jackpot state in the first jackpot (normal state (special figure low probability map low definite state) to the first hit (first train) jackpot, but the latent probability change state The first (first series) jackpot from (Toku figure high probability drawing low certainty) and the first (first series) jackpot from sudden definite change state (special figure high certainty drawing high probability) In addition, the latent positive change state and / or the sudden positive change state described above indicate only the state shifted from the normal state, excluding those that occur in the positive change state or the short time state). However, a right-handed instruction screen may be displayed for each big hit. In the right-handed instruction screen here, the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped, but on the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display is not overlapped by the display of the ball removal notification. In this example, a right-handed warning display (corresponding to a right-handed notification in FIG. 17 (60) described above and a liquid crystal display at the time of right-handed hitting in FIG. 116 described later) Although not performed, a right strike warning may be displayed while the right strike instruction screen is displayed. Further, while the left-handed warning display (corresponding to the liquid crystal display at the time of the left-handed hitting warning in FIG. 116 described later) is not displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, although the right strike suggestion display is performed while the right strike designation screen is displayed, the right strike suggestion display may not be performed while the right strike designation screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 111 (α7), the first round is started, and the round effect is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of the round effect. Note that the display of the ball removal notification is not in the same display as the display of the number of rounds at the upper right of the screen, and the display of the number of rounds is not overlapped. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the number of rounds display, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification is also deviated in the display position of the number-of-balls display (0 pt) at the lower right of the screen, and the display of the number-of-balls display does not overlap. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the number-of-balls display absolutely, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 111 (α 8) of the fourth round, a promotion effect is performed which suggests whether or not the second variable winning opening will be open for a long time in the fifth round and a large chance of becoming a V passing state will arrive. As a result, a success effect representing that the promotion effect is successful is executed. That is, it is notified that it is a big hit game in which the probability change transition condition is easily established. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of this success effect. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α8), the display of “V chance GET” of the star mark is also started. The display of the ball out notification is not in the same display position as the display of “V chance GET” of this star mark, and this display is not overlapped. The indication of the ball out notification may be displayed so as not to completely overlap with the indication of “V chance GET” of the star mark, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 111 (α 9), the fifth round is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display indicating that it is the fifth round of the big hit game is performed, and it is promoted to promote V passage in this round. The message "Aim for V" is displayed. As a result, there are cases where it is possible to make the player reliably perform the V-pass. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of "Aim for V".

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (α10), there is a passage (V passage) of the gaming ball to the probability variation operation area in the second variable winning prize opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the probability variation gain is decided. The display of "V" which is is displayed large. That is, the display of "V" which is a notification that the definite variation acquisition has been determined is displayed based on the V passage. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of “V”. At the timing shown in FIG. 111 (α10), the display of “V chance GET” of the star may be hidden.

  When the fifth round is over, the end effect of the big hit game is performed in a mode as shown in FIG. 111 (α11). In the big hit game mentioned above, the probability change transition condition is established by passing V in the 5th round, so while the symbol change display of the fixed number of times is performed after the end of the big hit game, the positive change state (special figure high probability popular figure Transition to the high probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the big hit game, a display of "Yoshimune RUSH plunging" indicating that it shifts to a probability change state (provisional change effect) is performed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of this "Yoshimune RUSH plunging". In addition, even in the end effect of the big hit game, although the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, it may not be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α12), a prepaid card removal warning display (corresponding to the alert display in FIG. 18 (57) described above) is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the prepaid card removal warning display. Even in the end effect of the prepaid card removal warning display, although the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, it may not be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α13), a display (BONUS × 3) of the number of big hit consecutive villas is displayed immediately below the right hitting suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. Further, at the upper right of the screen, a music title display portion MN is displayed, and on the left side, icons of upper and lower keys of the operation key unit are displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

  The display of the ball out notification is not in the same display position as the display of the number of big hit consecutive houses, and does not overlap this display. The indication of the ball out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the indication of the number of big hit consecutive houses, or may be overlapped. Further, the display of the notification of removal of the ball is deviated in the display position of the music title display section MN, and is not overlapped with the music title display section MN. The indication of the removal of the ball may be displayed so as not to be absolutely overlapped on the music title display unit MN, or may be overlapped. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in the display position with the icons of the up and down keys, and does not overlap with the icons of the up and down keys. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the icons of the up and down keys, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is also deviated in the display position with the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and is not overlapped with the second hold number display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second number-of-retentions display, or may overlap.

  Further, although the bar display VB for volume adjustment shown in FIG. 111 (α13) overlaps with a part of the hold icon, it may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap.

  Further, in FIG. 111 (α14), the start screen of the big hit game is displayed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α15), the music select screen shown in FIG. 103 is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the music release list GR.

  Further, in FIG. 111 (α16), the music selection is finished, and the round effect is started. At the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α16), the song title of the currently selected song is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification does not overlap with the display of the music title because the display position is not the same as the display of the music title. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the song title indication, or may overlap.

  In addition, in the fourth round of FIG. 111 (α17), the display “Aim for V with next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and in the fifth round of FIG. 111 (α18) The indication "Aim for V" is displayed, and the indication of the ball removal notification overlaps with the indications displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 111 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the fourth round. Further, FIG. 111 (α 18) is at the start of the fifth round, and may correspond to the time when the special control in-progress signal of the main control unit 300 is switched from off to on. In this case, the period between FIG. 111 (α 17) and FIG. 111 (α 18) corresponds to the interval period between rounds from the end of the fourth round to the start of the fifth round, and the special control combination signal of the main control unit 300 is It is a period that is on from off.

  Also, in FIG. 111 (α 19), the display of “V” based on the presence of V passage is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps the display of “V”. ing. However, the bar display VB for volume adjustment does not overlap the display of this "V".

  Note that FIG. 111 (α 20) may be in a state in which a certain period of time has elapsed since 5 R is being executed and V has passed, or at the end of five rounds (for example, the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit It may be in the state corresponding to the end).

  After that, the big hit game proceeds to 15 rounds (Figure 111 (α21)-Figure (23)), and in Figure 111 (α 24), as in Figure (α 11), the display of "Yoshimune RUS H plunge" ) Is displayed, and a bar display VB for displaying a ball out notification and adjusting the volume is overlapped with the display of “Yoshimune RUSH plunging”. In FIG. 111 (α24), the big hit end display period is started and displayed after the end of the inter-round interval.

  In addition, since the command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 and received by the first sub-control unit 400 and various controls are performed, a time lag occurs between the timing in the main control unit 300 and the actual timing.

  Further, in FIG. 111, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the inter-round interval. For example, "5R" may be displayed during the inter-round interval between the 5th and 6th rounds, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only the R may be displayed to hide the numeric part.

  The same applies to the end of the fifteenth round, and the interval between rounds may or may not be displayed in a round display.

  In this example, the right-handed warning display may be displayed during a big hit, but the left-handed warning display may not be displayed, but the left-handed warning display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that the alerting | reporting regarding a warning may not be performed.

  In the above, the display of the ball removal notification has been described as an example, but the explanation here is not limited to the display of the ball removal notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in the list of FIG. 114 and FIG. 115) It is applicable to the display of the notice regarding.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a display example of the ball removal notification.

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (β) is a display such that the display on the rear side of the display of the ball removal notification disappears at all.

  The display of the sphere removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) overlaps with the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the sphere removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) overlaps a part of the luminance adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. Note that the display of the sphere removal notification may overlap with the entire brightness adjustment window BW, or may overlap with the entire volume adjustment icon VI. Further, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 111, and the display on the rear side is in a state where a little is visible. However, it may be a display such that the display on the rear side can not be seen at all, as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (β).

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ2) overlaps with the bar display VB for volume adjustment displayed during the symbol variation display. Although the display of the notice of removal of the sphere does not overlap the navigation character YM, the navigation character YM overlaps the bar display VB for adjusting the volume. Also, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) may be a display such that the display on the rear side can not be seen at all, as the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. ,the same.). In addition, not only the bar for volume control but also the display relating to the function that can be set by the player during symbol fluctuation and the above-mentioned Daitomo etc. (the effect customization screen shown in the above-mentioned FIG. A list of missions achieved by the player's operation regardless of the fluctuation state of the symbol while setting the music title display area MN, the bar for adjusting the brightness, and the user mode (Daitomo) shown in FIG. Display the game history (number of rotations, number of balls, number of mission clears, number of big wins for this play, maximum number of consecutive runs for this play, etc.), characters or background set by the user, holding frame, etc. It is applicable also to the display etc. which can be set and changed.

  The display of the balloon removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ3-1) overlaps with each of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM. Then, when the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 112 (γ3-1), the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, but as shown in FIG. 112 (γ3-2), In the display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment, the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and is displayed on the front side. Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed on the front side with priority. Also, in any case, the bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and may overlap the hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 112 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 112 (γ3-2), the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped with the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

  In FIG. 112 (δ3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed on the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (δ3-2), the navigation character YM jumps by animation to inform that the ball is removed. Overlapping the display of. Here, although the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the navigation character YM, the navigation character YM may overlap with a part of the display of the ball removal notification. In addition, the navigation character YM may not perform animation so as to overlap with all or part of the display of the ball removal notification. This technical idea is also applicable to the display regarding other errors described later.

  In FIG. 112 (ε), the display of the ball removal notification has no frame display, and is displayed only with characters.

  FIG. 112 (ζ 1) shows an example in which the display of the ball removal notification is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball discharge lever 132. By the peripheral image display 132G, the first decorative symbol and a part of each of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are overlapped.

  In FIG. 112 (ζ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the same character display as the character display of “Aim for V” shown in FIG. 111 (α9) and hides the character display.

  In FIG. 112 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim for V with next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 111 (α17).

  In FIG. 112 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the display of the characters “Aim for V” and the display of “V chance GET” of the star.

  In FIG. 112 (η 2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the display of “Aim for V with next R” displayed on the right.

  In FIG. 112 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and hides a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap all of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. In this example, the peripheral image display 132 G does not overlap with the display of the characters “Aim for V” and the display of “V chance GET” of the star mark.

  In FIG. 112 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the bar display VB for volume adjustment and a part of “Aim for V with next R” on the right.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

  An example of the errors A to E shown in FIG. 113 will be described later. These error A to error E may or may not include the ball out notification.

  In FIG. 113 (ι 1), the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the error A notification.

  In FIG. 113 ('1'), the opaque display of the error A notification is displayed.

  In FIG. 113 (ι 2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps each of the fluctuation icon h 0, the hold icon h 11, and the navigation character YM, as in FIG. 112 (γ 3-1). Is the same as the description in FIG. 112 (γ3-1).

  In FIG. 113 (ι3-1), a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, the newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the first error generated is error A. The speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the newest error E. The warning sound may be output in the order of occurrence of all the displayed errors.

  In FIG. 113 (ι3-2), since the error E is eliminated, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the last occurring error is canceled, the warning sound of the previous error is output.

  In FIG. 113 ('3-2'), the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (error display of error A notification to error E notification). Here, the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the transparent display of the lowermost error E notification, and the character display of the error E is hidden. A plurality of types of error displays may overlap the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

  In FIG. 113 (ι4-1), when errors occur in the order of the errors ABCDE, an error with high priority to be notified is displayed on the upper side, and the speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the error with the highest priority. Be done. Errors with high priority are errors with high importance (for example, serious errors for game arcades), and more specifically, are the order of the list shown in FIG. In FIG. 113 (ι4-1), the error B has the highest priority.

  In FIG. 113 (ι4-2), since the error B is eliminated, the transparency display of the error B notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error E, which has been the second one so far, is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 113 (ι 5-1), the error A occurs, and the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the error A notification. In this state, an error Z occurs. The error Z is an error for stopping the game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (ι5-2) has a blue screen, and all the displays are not displayed except for the display relating to the error Z ing. The error for stopping the game referred to here is an error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error) in which the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery. That is, it is an error that the main control unit 300 can not or can not perform various types of lottery. The error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 like the error Z is not limited to the error for stopping the game, but is, for example, an error of the effect movable means described later, an error for stopping the payout operation, etc. It is also good. Also, some or all of various errors described in the list of FIG. 116 described later may be error Z, but conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 116 May not be displayed in the display mode of the error Z. In addition, when the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery, the command is not transmitted to the side of the secondary control unit 400, 500, so that the secondary control unit 400, 500 side eventually does not perform the various lottery.

  In FIG. 113 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification non-transparency display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. Note that the error display in FIG. 113 (κ1) is a display such that the display on the rear side of the error display disappears completely, but is a slightly transparent display so that the display of the ball pull notification overlaps from the front When displayed on the back, the display on the back may be in a state of being slightly visible.

  In FIG. 113 (κ2), the display of the ball removal notification is added in the state shown in FIG. 113 (κ1). Here, the error of ball removal notification (sink full error) is not included in multiple types of errors (error A to error E), but is included in multiple types of errors (error A to error E) It is also good. It should be noted that, instead of the error of the ball removal notification, an error with a high frequency of occurrence may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (error A to error E).

  A part of the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 113 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. In addition, all the errors of the ball removal notification may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  On the other hand, the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 113 (κ2) overlaps with a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  Note that the error notification display regarding the control on the side of the sub control unit 400, 500 may be overlapped by the error notification display regarding the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the batting warning display may be overlapped by the display of the ball pulling out notification, and conversely, the display of the ball pulling out notification may be overlapped by the batting warning display. In addition, both error notification displays are displayed at a position where the error notification display related to the control of the sub control unit 400 and 500 and the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap each other. May be

  In FIG. 113 (λ 1-1), symbol variation display is being performed, and in the middle of the symbol variation display, simultaneous effects to be executed on a plurality of game machines are started. FIG. 113 (λ 1-2) shows an example of a display screen of simultaneous effect at normal time (error not generated and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 113 (λ1-2), the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is replaced with the background display of the simultaneous effect at the normal time. Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed overlapping the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the opposite may be applied. Moreover, about an error display, although there is an example shown in FIG. 113 ((lambda) 2 ') mentioned later, it may overlap and be displayed on the background display of simultaneous rendering. However, the opposite may be applied.

  FIG. 113 (λ 2) shows an example when simultaneous rendering occurs during super reach rendering. During the super reach effect, the simultaneous effect display is displayed on the separate frame display section OFD in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can enjoy the super reach effect and also see the simultaneous effect be able to. In the case of a game console provided with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, displays of simultaneous effects are displayed on the display devices 208S, 208M, and 208N. May be

  FIG. 113 (λ 2 ′) shows an example of the case where simultaneous effects occur during the error notification display. Here, the situation of super reach effect is also overlapped, but it may be before the first stop of the decorative symbol, or in the normal reach state, or may be the same. The simultaneous effect display is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD, and a plurality of types of error displays (error notification of error A to error E notification) are displayed without any change before the simultaneous effect occurrence, and the separate frame display unit The display of simultaneous effects in the OFD is overlapped with a plurality of types of error displays.

  Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may overlap the display of simultaneous rendering on the separate frame display unit OFD. Alternatively, on the contrary, the bar display VB for volume adjustment may have overlapping display of simultaneous effects in the separate frame display unit OFD.

  In addition, in the gaming table provided with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter referred to as "second display means" ) Overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter referred to as “first display means”), the first display according to the movement of the second display means A part of the display on the means may be displayed on the second display means. In this case, an error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

  As mentioned above, although the word "error" and the word "warning" are used in the description using FIGS. 111 to 113, it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and it is notified that an error has occurred. It may be a notification that there is an instruction to cancel an error that has occurred or has occurred. Moreover, what is described as an error may be set to have a higher priority than that described as a warning.

<Error notification / error detectable by main control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

  Errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) non-connection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level error, and winning Rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric chew), special winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, large winning opening exhaust excess error, large winning opening winning excess error, impact abnormal error, solenoid abnormal error and the like.

  A magnetism (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetism detection signal changes from off to on in the power on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), and the power is turned on again. It is an error to return if it happens. Switch (sensor) not connected error is the power on state (PW_WATCH signal is ON). Special figure 1 · 2 start port, general drawing start port (gate), or attacker is not connected (harness disconnected or connector missing) Occurs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 ms), and a power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and an unconnected device (special figure 1 · 2 start port, common view start port, attacker) are connected It is an error to return when it is detected that A magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error generated when a magnetic field (radio wave) is detected by a magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor.

  The switch (sensor) level abnormal error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning percentage abnormal errors, the error of the general winning opening is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226) is an abnormal value, and the error of the starting opening 2 is ordinary This is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of gaming balls are detected when the motorized combination (for example, the second special view starting opening 232) is not activated, and the error of the special winning opening is a large winning opening (for example, This is an error that occurs when the number of winnings on the variable winning opening 234) is an abnormal value.

  The large winning opening overrun error occurs when the number of balls discharged exceeds the number of ball entry during the definite variation area validity period and out of the definite variation area valid period, and the next main control timer that the large winning opening excess passing error occurs This error is returned when interrupt processing occurs.

  The big winning opening winning excess error occurs when the number of ball entry> the number of discharge after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special battery operation interval timer is 0), the number of ball entry = the number of discharge Is an error that returns when the power is turned on again. In return processing of the large winning a prize winning excess error, the probability variable area related number of passes is set to zero.

  In the impact abnormality error, the level of the impact sensor changes from OFF to ON and the state is ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and during the definite variation area (specific area) effective period. This error occurs when the time (for example, 12 ms) continues, and returns when the shock sensor level changes from ON to OFF or when it changes from during the definite change area validity period to outside the definite change area validity period.

  A solenoid error error occurs when the photosensor does not perform an operation that changes from OFF to ON or an operation that changes from ON to OFF at least during the probability change region effective period, and the next solenoid error error occurs. This error is returned when timer interrupt processing occurs.

  In this example, the top row (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 114 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is not allowed to operate (no game), and the errors are sequentially prioritized toward the bottom row below. Although the degree is lower, other errors may be the top priority errors, and the priority levels may not be in the order of the list shown in FIG. The details of the conditions under which each error occurs, the recovery conditions, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the recovery operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. It should be noted that "when the hit end display period ends" of the return condition of the winning rate abnormal error of the special winning opening (attacker) is when the big hit or small hit end display period is finished.

<Error that can be detected by the error notification / delivery control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIG. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

  The errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example include lower tray full error (lower full tray error, full tray error), number-of-dispenses error, number-of-dispenses switch error, fraudulent delivery error, excess payout Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when the communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 can not be received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame open error In addition to the inner frame opening error and the door opening error, the magnetic error error, the external clock error, the magnetic field error, the switch level error, the switch disconnection error, the impact sensor error, etc., are not shown.

  Further, the occurrence condition of each error, the return condition, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the launch operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 115 (a). Note that "stop" described in the item "stop emission" shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the release permission signal.

  FIG. 115 (b) is a view showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error which is a condition for generating a door opening error. The door open error is generated when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error is generated, and is released when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are released. It is an error.

<Error notification / Other examples>
Note that the above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection error may be another error (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch non-connection error (error related to connector disconnection or disconnection of the device controlled by the main control unit), impact abnormality error, The error may be a higher priority than the payout control communication error, the switch level abnormal error, the winning rate abnormal error, the door open error, the upper limit error, or the same priority.

  Also, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and an error with a low priority (for example, a magnetic field detection error) occur simultaneously, the magnetic field (radio wave) is detected if the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error meets the output condition first. After the operation for the detection error is performed, the operation of the magnetic (magnet) detection error may be performed. In that case, all devices in which notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 performs notification from magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to magnetic (magnet) detection error (decorative symbol display device 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120) may be switched (data is overwritten), and only one or more partial devices (eg, the speaker 120) may be overwritten, One or more devices may continue to notify for magnetic field (radio wave) detection errors.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode>
Next, a specific example of the notification mode of the error notification will be described using FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG.

  The liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 116 indicates an error display by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and displays the character display described in “”. Here, the error display by the display means is displayed until the error is released, and is configured to be non-displayed when the error is released, but after the error is released for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) The display may be configured to be displayed, or may be configured to disappear when a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the error occurrence even if the error is not canceled. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be an error display by lighting of a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a display by a POV display.

  The sound effect described in FIG. 116 may be a notification by a sound output means (in this example, the speaker 120), and the portion in “” is repeatedly output as sound. Here, the notification by voice is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is canceled, but even if the error is not canceled, a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the error occurs. Then, it may be configured not to output voice, or may be configured to output voice for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is canceled.

  The error illumination LED described in FIG. 116 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position where the player can see), and is configured to light up only when an error related to payout occurs. However, it may be configured to light up with some or all of various errors related to the power supply, main control, sub control (sub control), or even if it is configured not to light up with some or all of them. Good. Further, in the warning regarding the sub control (in this example, the shock warning and the strike warning), the error illumination LED is configured not to be lit, but may be lit. The error illumination LED may be always on, and may be turned off when an error occurs to notify that an error has occurred. The payout illumination LED described in FIG. 116 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position where the player can visually recognize), and lights up during a period in which payout by the payout device 152 is being performed. The light is turned off during a period in which the payout device 152 has not paid out. Moreover, although the payout lighting LED is turned on also when a partial error related to the payout (in this example, the number-of-payouts error occurs), it may be lit only during a period in which the payout device 152 is making a payout. It may be configured to light up when an error regarding dispensing occurs. In the decoration LED described in FIG. 116, the game board 200 or the frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The decoration LED is provided on the main body 104 (inner frame) and / or the outer frame 102 It is the lamp provided in (it may be comprised so that it may not be provided) and performs light-emitting production according to various production. In addition, even if the decoration LED illustrated in FIG. 116 is performing the light-emitting effect at the time of occurrence of an error, the light-emitting effect may be stopped and the light emission pattern for error may be lit. (As an example at the time of return, the light emission effect may be progressed in another layer even during an error, and the light emission effect at the time of error return may be restored when the error is recovered, but Also, it may be configured not to perform the light emission effect until the timing when it is easy to return (for example, at the start of a new light emission effect), even if it is configured to return from the effect data at the time the error occurred. Good) Here, the error notification by turning on the various LEDs lights up or flashes until the error is released, and is turned off when the error is released, but even after the error is released It may be configured to light up or blink for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the error occurrence even if the error is not canceled. Then it may be configured to turn off.

  The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 of this example are (1) an error related to the payout (the payout control unit 600), (2) an error related to the power supply (the power control unit 660), and (3) the main control (main control unit 300). Etc., and (4) Warning about sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each of these will be described below.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error regarding payment>
First, we will explain the errors related to the payout. As the “error related to the payout (delivery control unit 600)” in this example, a lower receiving plate full error (hereinafter, also referred to as a full tray error), a glass frame opening error, a payout number shortage error, a payout excess error, a fraud payout error, There may be a delivery switch error, a main control communication error, a CR unit non-connection error, a CR unit communication error, and a door open error. Here, the 7-segment LED for dispensing error display is provided on the dispensing control substrate (dispensing substrate 170), and can be viewed only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 (transparent or high transmittance) It is visible through the delivery board case 172 made of resin.

  In this example, when the lower pan error occurs, the number “2” is added to the light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for dispensing error display provided on the dispensing control board (dispensing board 170)). The notification by the light emitting means is performed by displaying, the notification by the display means (in the present example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in the present example, the display of characters indicating that the lower receiving tray full error has occurred), and the sound output means (In this example, notification by the speaker 120) (In this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the lower receiving tray full error has occurred is output). In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper tray 126 and the lower tray 128, the case where the lower receiving tray full tank error occurs when the lower tray 128 is full is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper tray 126 (one storage tray), this error (full tray error) may occur when the upper tray 126 is full. .

  Also, when a glass frame opening error occurs, the number “1” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, 7-segment LED for dispensing error display provided on the dispensing control substrate (dispensing substrate 170)). And the second light emitting means (in this example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) notifies the second light emitting means (in this example, the decorative LED (in this example)). A frame lamp or a board lamp), notification by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and a sound output means (this example) Then, the notification (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that the glass frame opening error has occurred) by the speaker 120) is performed.

  When a door opening error occurs, the first light emitting means (in this example, 7-segment LED for dispensing error display provided on the dispensing control substrate (dispensing substrate 170)) has a number "1". The notification by the first light emitting means is performed by displaying, and the notification (in this example, the decorative LED (frame in the present example) by the second light emitting means (in the present example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) ) And notification by a display means (in the present example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a door opening error has occurred), and a sound output means (in the present example) The notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound output of the effect sound indicating that the door opening error has occurred) is performed.

  In addition, notification of a door opening error may be notification of a glass frame opening error, and different notification modes (for example, notification by a display means) of a glass frame opening error and a part of an inner frame opening error are made different. The other notification may be the same, or all the notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the payout of the game balls may be interrupted, and the payout of the game balls may be continued when the inner frame is opened.

  In addition, when the number-of-payouts error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for displaying the dispensing error provided on the dispensing control board (dispensing board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and a notification (lighting of the LED for payout lighting in the present example) by the third light emitting means (in this example, the LED for payout lighting) is performed. Note that other notification modes of error notification regarding payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

<Example of error notification / information notification mode / error related to power supply>
Next, errors related to the power supply will be described. As the “error related to the power supply (power control unit 660)” in this example, there are a fuse blow 1, a fuse blow 2, and a fuse blow 3. In this example, when an error related to the power supply occurs, the error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, no notification is given as to an error related to the power supply, but notification using a display means, a sound output means, or various LEDs may be performed. In addition, a power supply status confirmation LED may be provided on the power supply substrate. Here, the power status confirmation LED is always on from the power on, and may be configured to be turned off when an error occurs. Conversely, the power status confirmation LED is from the power on to off and an error occurs. It may be configured to be turned on.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error concerning main control etc.>
Next, errors relating to the main control and the like will be described. The “error related to main control (main control unit 300) etc.” in this example includes a magnetic (magnet) detection error, an external clock abnormality error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch level abnormality error, a switch non-connection error, a shock abnormality Errors, winning rate abnormal error, large winning opening excess winning error, large winning opening excess ejection error, solenoid abnormal error (large winning opening abnormal error) may be mentioned.

  In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, a notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp) by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) And a panel lamp), notification by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred), and a sound output means (in In this example, notification (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred) by the speaker 120) is performed.

  Also, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board) Flashing), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) In this case, notification (in this example, sound output of a sound effect that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred) by the speaker 120) is performed. Also, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Also, when an impact abnormality error occurs, a notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (Flashing), notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that an impact abnormal error has occurred), and by sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) Informing (in this example, sounding of a sound effect that an impact abnormal error has occurred) is performed. Also, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Also, when a big winning opening winning excess error occurs, a notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board) by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) Flashing), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a large winning opening overrun error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) Then, notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, sounding of a sound effect indicating that a special winning opening winning excess error has occurred) is performed.

  In addition, when a special winning opening exhaust excess error occurs, the error notification is not performed. In addition, notification by error notification (light emitting means (in this example, LED for decoration (frame lamp and panel lamp)) (in this example, blinking of LED for decoration (frame lamp and panel lamp)) and display means ( In this example, notification by the decorative symbol display device 208 (in the present example, display of characters to the effect that a large winning opening overrun error has occurred) and notification by the sound output means (the speaker 120 in the present example) Then, a sound of the effect sound indicating that a special winning opening overrun error has occurred may be output).

  Also, when a solenoid abnormality error (large winning opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( A frame lamp or a board lamp), notification by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a solenoid abnormal error has occurred), and a sound output means (this In the example, notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred) is performed. Also, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  In addition, the prize rate abnormal error, general winning a prize opening (in this example, general winning a prize opening 226), starting opening 2 (this example 2nd special figure starting opening 232) and large winning a prize opening (this example, variable winning a prize opening Although the same error notification is performed for 234), different error notifications may be performed depending on the winning opening in which an error has occurred. Further, as another error corresponding to the winning rate error, there is an abnormal winning error. An abnormal winning error means that the target winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226, the second special view starting opening 232, the variable winning opening 234, etc.) under a specific condition (for example, at N-ball launch, during a big hit) Other than this, it is an error that occurs when a specific number or more of winnings is detected on a computer support (except during normal condition). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the state, notification, or measure of the gaming machine may be the same as the winning rate abnormal error.

  The error regarding the main control or the like may include a door open error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) Blinks, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a door opening error has occurred), and notification by the sound output means (in the present example, the speaker 120) (In this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the door opening error has occurred is output). Note that other notification modes of error notification regarding the main control etc., the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / Warning / error concerning sub control>
Next, warnings and errors related to sub control will be described. Examples of “warning / error regarding sub control (first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500)” in the present example include impact warning, strike warning, and effect movable means error. In this example, when an impact warning is generated, notification (in this example, display of a character indicating that an impact warning has been generated) is performed by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208). There is no notification by.

  In addition, when a warning is generated, a notification (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a warning has been generated) is displayed by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and a sound output means (in In this example, although notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that the strike warning has been generated) is performed, notification by the light emitting means is not performed.

  The effect movable means error means various effect movable means (in the present example, the effect movable body 224, the shielding means 246, the house crest role item 224E, the first large-area behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd and one-seven box Effect movable means provided on the game board such as the character 224 H. (In this example, the front frame door 106. It may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102) Note that the effect movable means is provided on the frame In the case where there is a frame, the effect moving means is included, but it does not have to be included. It is determined that there was an abnormality when the initial operation of the frame) does not have to be provided. It is an error that occurs in the case. The abnormality referred to here indicates the case where the initial operation is not normally performed, but for example, the sensor at the initial position of each effect moving means (ON when in the initial position) is in the OFF state The case where it does not become ON even if the retry operation is performed one or more times, or the case where it is determined that the sensor is in the ON state may be shown. Further, the initial operation may be composed of all or any one or two operations of a home position return operation, a sensor check operation, and a full stroke operation. Here, the origin return operation is an operation of confirming the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the effect movable means whose sensor at the initial position is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. Further, the sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a failure of the sensor, and is an operation for performing a minimum operation in which the sensor is switched from ON to OFF. The full stroke operation is an operation in which the effect moving means moves to the maximum position where it can operate and returns to the initial position. The home position return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect movable means which is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position, and the full stroke operation is performed as it is) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. In addition, after the origin return operation is performed for all of the effect movable means, the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C and the effect movable body B is not at the initial position, the origin of the effect movable bodies A to C After the return operation is performed (appearingly, the operation is performed for the effect movable body B), the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation are performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C Furthermore, the initial operation may be performed for the other effect movable means after being performed in the initial operation for the effect movable means that is not at the origin position. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C and the sensor of the initial position of the effect movable body B is OFF, the initial effect of the effect movable body B is The operation is performed, and then the initial operation of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body C is performed.) If it is determined that the plurality of effect movable means are not at the initial position, the effect movable means having higher priority is used. The operation (initial position return operation or initial operation including the origin return operation) may be configured to be performed.

  Also, for the effect movable means error, when the connector of the effect movable means is not properly connected, the disconnection of the harness of the effect movable means or the damage of the connector, etc., the effect movable means has various circuits (for example, drive circuit 422 etc.) It is an error that occurs even when not connected properly. In addition, “error related to connection failure (wiring failure) of the production moving means” and “error generated when it is determined that there is abnormality when performing the initial operation of the various production moving means at the time of power on” are different errors. It may be divided and reported.

  Further, the effect movable means error is an error that may be displayed during display of the return-in-progress display described later, but may be configured not to be displayed during display of the return-in-progress display.

  The error related to the sub control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, shape of image, display position, etc.) as the error related to the main control or payout, and a different display mode An error display may be displayed at. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the sub control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Also, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the main control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a different display mode from the error display regarding the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

  In addition to the error display by the display means, the frame and the decoration LED provided on the game board 200 are configured to light or blink in an error related to the sub control (in this example, the effect movable means error). The sound output means may be configured to notify an error, or both may be performed.

In addition, even if the error notification regarding the sub liquid crystal is configured such that a part or all of the error notification is ended by the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) (chance button)) by the player. Good. (When a part of the error notification ends, for example, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during occurrence of the effect movable means error, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means Is finished, the blinking display by the decoration LED of the game board is finished, a part of the decoration LED of the frame is also turned off, the blinking by the other part continues as it is, etc. By operating the operation means in this way, It is conceivable that the error notification of the rendering means A continues, the error notification of the rendering means B ends, a part of the rendering means C ends, and the other part continues as it is. Means, display means, decoration LED etc.)
When the liquid crystal loading display is displayed when the power is turned on, the error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display showing a state in which data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub control unit 500 is being read. When reading of the data stored in the RON 506 of the second sub control unit 500 is completed, the symbol stop display (symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or the symbol variation display) or the return display (in preparation display) is displayed. Ru. The display during return is a display that is displayed when game control returns during a symbol change or a big hit, and if a symbol change is in progress, until the symbol stops (until the special display display determination timer reaches 0), If the jackpot is in progress, it is displayed until the jackpot ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). In addition, you may be comprised so that it may return to a symbol change display from the display in return during specific timing (for example, the start of a super reach effect, temporary stop display of three decoration symbols, etc.) during symbol change. In addition, various big hit displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing during the big hit (for example, start or end of a specific round, start or end of a big hit start effect, start or end of a big hit end display). Here, while the display of the indication during recovery may be displayed also for all or part of the above-mentioned error display, it is configured not to be displayed for all or part of other error displays. May be In addition, while all the above error displays are not displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display. .

  The change effect display may be a change advance display.

  In the case where the display mode of the hold icon is selected by the player to the icon A, the icon A is forcibly changed to the icon B to the icon G which can be selected by the player when the hold pre-reading notice is started. There may be a case where the icon A may change to the form of an icon that the player can not select when the pre-hold notice is started.

  In addition, multiple operation means regarding an effect may be provided. Here, when the operation means A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation means B (lever) are provided, an image (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means A or an “operation means A character display such as “press A”, etc. Hereinafter, an image (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B or “image showing the appearance of the operation means B” is more prompting the user to operate the operation means B) Character display such as “press operation means B.” Hereinafter, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol form may be more easily displayed finally than when “operation means image B” is displayed. The image relating to the operation means in which the big hit symbol aspect is likely to be determined and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the big hit symbol aspect is definitely displayed may not be changed. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function may not work for the operation means B, and the operation means for the auto button function may be reversed. The function may work, and the auto button function may not work for both operation means. In addition, the display of the operation means image B may be configured so that the change of the display mode of the navigation character is easier to succeed than the case where the operation means image A is displayed, but may be reversed. The degree of success of the change of the display mode of the navigation character may not be different depending on the displayed operation means image. (In other words, it may be the same.) Also, when the operation means image B is displayed, the display mode of the navigation character changes to a display mode having a high hit probability as compared to the case where the operation means image A is displayed. Although it may be configured to be easy, it may be reversed, and it may be configured such that the display mode in which the navigation character is likely to change does not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (In other words, it may be the same.) Also, the frequency at which the operation means image A is displayed is higher than the frequency at which the operation means image B is displayed, but may be reversed or the same. . In addition, there may be a case where an effect (a promotion effect or a demotion effect) in which the operation means image A changes to the operation means image B is performed. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the effective period of the operation effective period of the operation means A and before the operation effective period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the period of the operation effective period of A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B, during the period of the operation effective period of the operation means A, and outside the effective period of the operation effective period of the operation means B Alternatively, it may be during the operation effective period of the operation means A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B. The same applies to the case where the operation means image B is changed to the operation means image A. As described above, in the description herein, the two operation means of the operation means A and the operation means B have been described as an example, but the same applies to three or more operation means.

  In addition, effects that can be selected by the player, special drawing starting port, common drawing starting port, general winning a prize opening and / or gate for effect (enter into the gate, even if the sensor is detected no winning balls are performed, only the effect It may increase depending on the points obtained by passing through the gate). Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect to be acquired may have a one-to-one relationship, and when the points obtained by passing become a specific point, for example, on the decorative symbol display device 208 A “display for performing an effect to draw an effect to be acquired from now on (Gacha effect)” may be performed, and an effect selected by the effect lottery by the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be acquired.

  The player may be configured to be able to switch between displaying and non-displaying the navigation character by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). Switching between displaying and non-displaying the navi character may always be possible, or may be possible only while the navi character is being displayed, until one period or more elapses from the start of the symbol variation (for example, one or more, or All decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, etc.), and it may be configured so that switching of display / non-display of the navigation character can not be performed during execution of the super reach effect, while the super reach effect is being executed. The navigation character may be configured to be switched between display and non-display, or may be configured to be switched between display and non-display only while the symbol is stopped (during stop of the special view).

  As mentioned above, although the example which made the present invention apply to a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine) was explained in detail, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention is also applicable to a used gaming machine (slot machine). That is, although the pachinko machine 100 described so far is pachinko (one kind + one kind), other pachinko (eg one kind, two kinds, three kinds, one kind + two kinds etc.) may be used, a slot etc ( Parrots and balls can be used. More specifically, while inserting a medal (gaming medium) and operating the start lever to rotate the reel, internally determining the combination by internal lottery, and operating the stop button to stop the reel If a combination of symbols determined in advance is displayed on the symbol display window according to the internal determination, the combination is established, and if the combination with the payout of medals is established, the prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. The present invention may be a coin-operated game machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a benefit. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are sealed as a sealed ball, the sealed ball is fired to a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the sealed ball is won in a predetermined entry area. , And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area, and the enclosed ball game console may be used cyclically.

  As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and will be described more specifically below with reference to the drawings.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208 S, etc.], and
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first icon [for example, a change icon h0],
The first icon is an icon (hereinafter referred to as a "variation icon") related to a symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display in progress].
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [eg, a default (white) display mode],
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a white flash, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.],
In the case where the variation icon of the second display mode is displayed, the big hit symbol mode is finally determined and displayed more easily than when the variation icon of the first display mode is displayed [e.g. , The high expectation of the jackpot]],
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a second icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [eg, FIG. 77 (i)-FIG.
The second icon is an effect of changing the variation icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [eg, effects shown in FIG. 77 (i-9) to FIG. 11 (i)]. Icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a crown-like lady wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a crown-like fashion, a display mode of a copanda],
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a princess wearing white kimono, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a Icon that may be displayed in
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the variation icon may be an icon that may be displayed in an icon display area in the display unit, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. . Further, the variation icon and the second icon may be icons that may be simultaneously displayed in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon simultaneously displayed with the change icon in the icon display area during a first period. Furthermore, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions.

  Moreover, "crossing" is to put a period of stop display of symbols (a change stop period) in between. Further, the second icon may be an icon continuously displayed during display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon which disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon may be displayed continuously while the stop display of the symbol is displayed, or it may be an icon which disappears in the middle, or the icon which continues to disappear while the stop display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, "an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation display" is an "an icon that is always displayed, and an icon that may be once erased and re-displayed". .

  In addition, the second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

  The display means may be means for displaying plural types of display without fail.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of certain conditions referred to here, there are at least n pendings, that there is a pending with pre-reading advance notice, that customization by a player is being performed, a certain advance notice (eg timer notice, That a conversation notice etc. is displayed, that the second icon is a notice display of a prefetch notice, that the second icon is stocked, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed is It is possible to enumerate that the game is high and that the advance lottery has been won. That is, as the certain condition, all the items listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the change icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The display of one of the above-mentioned plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, icon I1 of a treasure box, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, icon of meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, eagle character Conversational notice including the character display “Navi character has changed”, an image of an eyebrow, an eyebrow image for a wipe effect, etc.],
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [eg, FIG. 75 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 76 (Fig. 6-3-2) to Fig. 83 (Fig. 6-3-4a), Fig. 83 (図 1-3-1) to Fig. ((1-3-4), and meter effect shown in Fig. 91, Fig. 89 (2-2-1) to Fig. ((2-2-3), Fig. 100 (A b1) to (A b 2), Fig. 80 (6) to Fig. (O 8), Fig. 107 ( 9-2-1) Etc.] is a display that may be used
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the change effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon It is a notice display about a mode changing from the said 3rd display mode to the said 4th display mode.

  Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect of changing the display mode of the change icon. Alternatively, the change effect display may be an icon not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the change icon, and in this case, the change effect display is a display of the second icon The icon may be used only for the effect of changing the mode.

  The second icon may be an icon that changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

  The change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is not displayed.

Also,
“The second icon does not change even if the change effect display is displayed, but the display mode does not change [for example, FIG. 75 (3-2-1) to FIG. (3-2-2), FIG. (1-3-2), FIG. 100 (A 4-2), FIG. 100 (A 6-2)] are also icons,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, finally the big hit symbol pattern mode when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed Is likely to be displayed finalized [for example, the expectation of the big hit is high],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means that the second icon of the third display mode is displayed and the second icon is displayed. In the case of not changing to the fourth display mode, it may be ".

  Moreover, in the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol form is finally obtained as compared to the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be difficult to confirm display.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display for a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, FIG. 78 (う 20-1), FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the second icon may be a notice display about the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed," means that "the notice of the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed is the second icon It may be done by

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode of a notice about a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a preview advance notice [eg, FIG. 83 (step 5-1) to FIG. (Step 13), FIG. 86 (here a11)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the second icon may be a notice display of a prefetch notice" may be "a prefetch notice is given by a second icon".

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode of pre-reading advance notice.

  The second icon may be an icon that also functions as the change icon. That is, in this case, two types of variation icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

  In addition, in the case where both icons of the variation icon in the second display mode and the second icon in the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both the icons are not displayed is more effective. Finally, the jackpot design may be easily displayed.

  Further, in the case where both the change icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, either one of the both icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol form than when only the icon is displayed.

  Further, when any one of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, no icon is displayed either. It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form finally than in the case.

  In addition, in the case where both icons of the variation icon in the second display mode and the second icon in the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both the icons are not displayed is more effective. Finally, the jackpot design may be easily displayed.

  In addition, the variable icon of a display mode (for example, the second display mode) different from the default display mode and the second icon of the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The second state of the display mode (e.g., the fourth display mode) is different from the default display mode (e.g., the first display mode) and the second display mode (e.g., the fourth display mode). It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form finalized than the state in which both icons are displayed.

  Alternatively, conversely, the variable icon of a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon of the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) In the display mode (for example, the fourth display mode), the variation icon of the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) are different from the default display mode. It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form finalized than the state in which both the second icons are displayed.

  In addition, the fluctuation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode, and when the fluctuation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the big hit symbol mode is finally definitely displayed. May be In addition, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the big hit symbol form is finally displayed. It may be definitely displayed. Although the variation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. Good. In addition, although the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variable icon may be displayed in the one display mode or the second display mode. Good.

  Furthermore, the variation icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, an advantageous big hit is decided (for example, definite variation with big hit decision, long round big hit decision), a rare reach (for example, full turn reach etc.) tends to appear, or other premiere effects appear It may be easy to do, or it may be easy to hit a revival. Or, conversely, it may be difficult to revive the jackpot. In addition, the mode of the operation means may be changed (for example, the button may pop out, rotate, or be recessed, or the built-in lamp may emit light in a rare light emission mode (for example, rainbow light emission mode changing to seven colors)) . In addition, special effects can be obtained, special super reach is started, special super reach is started, and the number of special super reach is available (for example, the second attacker is open). Round) may be started.

  In addition, the combination of the display mode of the variation icon and the display mode of the second icon may suggest the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach, etc.). For example, in the case where the display mode of the variation icon is a lord and the display mode of the second icon is a sword auspicious, it may be suggested to develop into a sword alive reach where the lord and the sword alive make a battle. Alternatively, when the display mode of the variation icon is 兜 and the display mode of the second icon is a hallmark, the two icons are displayed for the first time to function as a notice (normal notice) of the change. May be configured.

  Moreover, the reliability (expected degree) of the big hit may differ depending on the combination of the display mode of the variation icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the combination of the change icon of the first display mode, the combination of the second icon of the fourth display mode, the change icon of the second display mode, and the change of the third display mode In the second combination of icons, the jackpot reliability (expected degree) may be different.

Also,
“When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variation icon is larger than when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. It is easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the probability that the change icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is determined by the second icon of the fourth display mode. The case of changing to the second display mode is more than the case of changing the fluctuating icon of the first display mode to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be high.

  Here, "more than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means that "the variation icon is changed from the first display mode by the second icon of the third display mode". It may be "" rather than the case where the production | presentation which changes to two display modes was performed.

  In addition, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the change icon may change from the first display mode to the second display mode. Further, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change icon may not necessarily change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may change.

  In addition, the variation icon is the fifth one when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed than when the second icon is the fourth display mode. It may be easy to change to the display mode of.

  As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variable icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variable icon is always changed. It is also good.

  Furthermore, the change icons of the display modes that are easy to change may be different depending on the display mode of the second icon. Further, the notices that are likely to appear (a pseudo continuous notice, a timer notice, a prefetch notice) may change depending on the display mode of the second icon.

Also,
[When a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, there are an example shown in FIG. 81, an example shown in FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. (5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may be easily changed.

  In addition, depending on the combination of the plurality of second icons (combination of the second icons in the same display mode or combination of the second icons in different display modes), it is easy to make a big hit, the hold icon or the fluctuation icon The display mode may be changed easily, or the notices that are easy to appear (pseudo linked notices, timer notices, advance notices) may be changed.

Also,
[An operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, for example, a chance button 136 etc.]
The second icon is an icon whose display mode changes when the operation means is operated [for example, the example shown in FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. 82 (2)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, for example, the third display mode may be changed to the fourth display mode in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the second icon is a display mode regarding the operation means, and the display mode may be changed according to the operation of the operation means. The display mode relating to the operation means may be a display mode imitating the operation means, or may be a display mode (operation promotion display mode) for prompting the user to operate the operation means. The display mode related to the operation valid period of the operation means (more specifically, the display mode of the remaining period of the operation valid period (remaining period display mode)) may be displayed, or the display mode reminding of the operation means It may be present, may be a combination of these display aspects, or may be a display aspect including at least one of these display aspects.

  Further, the display means is means capable of displaying a meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display and the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon The display mode of may be changed.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the second icon is displayed when the operation means is operated in a so-called back button state in which a notification to operate the operation means is not issued even during the operation valid period of the operation means. May change.

  In addition, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change of the effect mode.

  The second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customization operation by the player.

Also,
“The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [eg, character selection of 73 (b)],
The fourth display mode is a display mode that is not selected by the player [for example, a display mode of the key length shown in FIG. 79 (E4-3)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the third display mode may be a display mode that can be selected by the player, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that can not be selected by the player, or the game It may be a display mode that can be selected by the person.

Also,
“When the display mode changes without the effect by the other display, the second icon [eg, FIG. 79 (E1) to FIG. (E 3-1), FIG. 82 (E 2-1) ) To the same figure (7)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the display mode may change without the effect by the other display and the second icon" may be "the display mode of the second icon according to the effect by the second icon" May change ".

Also,
“The variation icon is an icon that has a case where the display mode changes [eg, FIG. 90 (s3) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the display mode may change without the effect by the other display, and the display mode of the change icon may change depending on the effect by the change icon". It may be ".

Also,
“The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a third icon [eg, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.],
The third icon is an icon according to the number of holding balls (hereinafter referred to as a "holding icon"),
The hold icon has a plurality of types of display modes [eg, icons A to G in the hold display selection of FIG. 63 (b), FIG. 78 ((2), FIG. (う 3), FIG. An icon that may be displayed in the default display mode, blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. May be

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208 S, etc.], and
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a first icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the hold display [for example, the hold icons h11 to h14 and h21 to h24 and the fluctuation icon h0 and the like],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [eg, default (white) display mode],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a white flash, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.],
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a second icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [eg, FIG. 77 (i)-FIG.
The second icon is an effect that changes the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [eg, effects shown in FIG. 77 (i-9) to FIG. Etc.] is an icon that may be used
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a statue wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a statue, a display mode of a copanda],
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a princess wearing white kimono, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a Icon that may be displayed in
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“When the display mode changes without the effect by the other display, the second icon [eg, FIG. 79 (E1) to FIG. (E 3-1), FIG. 82 (E 2-1) ) To the same figure (7)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The display of one of the above-mentioned plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, icon I1 of a treasure box, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, icon of meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, eagle character Conversational notice including the character display “Navi character has changed”, an image of an eyebrow, an eyebrow image for a wipe effect, etc.],
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [eg, FIG. 75 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 76 (Fig. 6-3-2) to Fig. 83 (Fig. 6-3-4a), Fig. 83 (図 1-3-1) to Fig. ((1-3-4), and meter effect shown in Fig. 91, Fig. 89 (2-2-1) to Fig. ((2-2-3), Fig. 100 (A b1) to (A b 2), Fig. 80 (6) to Fig. (O 8), Fig. 107 ( 9-2-1) Etc.] is a display that may be used
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The second icon does not change even if the change effect display is displayed, but the display mode does not change [for example, FIG. 75 (3-2-1) to FIG. (3-2-2), FIG. 1-3-1) to the same figure ((1-3-3b2, FIG. 100 (A 4-2), FIG. 100 (A 6-2))] is also an icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display for a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, FIG. 78 (う 20-1), FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The second icon is an icon which may be as shown in FIG. 83 (step 5-1) to FIG. (Step 13), and prior notice display of pre-reading advance notice [eg, FIG. 86 (here a11)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[When a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, there are an example shown in FIG. 81, an example shown in FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. (5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[An operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, for example, a chance button 136 etc.]
The second icon is an icon whose display mode changes when the operation means is operated [for example, the example shown in FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. 82 (2)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first icon is an icon having a case where the display mode changes [eg, FIG. 90 (s3) to FIG. (S4)] without accompanying effects by other displays.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the first icon may change the display mode without effect by the other display," means "the display mode of the first icon according to the notice by the first icon. May change ".

Also,
"The icon regarding the hold display described above is the" concept icon that includes both the hold icon and the change icon ".
The hold icon is an icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24] representing an unheld hold.
The fluctuation icon is an icon [for example, fluctuation icon h0] representing a digested hold.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The" on hold display icon "mentioned above refers to the" on hold icon "
The hold icon is an icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24] representing an unheld hold.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that "the icon relating to the suspension display" described above is a "variation icon", and the variation icon is an icon [for example, a variation icon h0] representing a digested suspension. Good.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
"Presentation means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game stand frame lamp 452, one thousand two box character article 224H, etc.],
Operation means [eg, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.];
Equipped with
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of effects.
The effect of one of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
When the operation means is operated during the first period [for example, the effective period of operation] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, “Summer vacation is still in FIG. 108 (A11) There may be a response display of "~"
In the auto button mode, when the first time [for example, the auto button function activation time (FIG. 108 (A6) to the time immediately before (A11)) elapses since the start of the first period] The first effect may be performed,
When the operation means is operated during a second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, a period from the operation valid period (FIG. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. (A14))] [For example, a response icon in which the suspension icon changes to a blue display mode, a response display in which the continuous hitting meter RHM in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-6) to FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-7) rises] is executed. There is a case,
In the auto button mode, the second effect is not executed even if a second time [for example, auto button function activation time] elapses after the second period is started [for example, FIG. Example, the state of the continuous hitting meter RHM in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-4)],
In the auto button mode, when the operation means is operated before the second time elapses after the second period is started, the second effect is executed. Yes,
The state of the operation means is configured to be changeable from one of the first state and the second state (for example, white lighting) to the other state (for example, special color (blue) lighting),
In the case where the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the auto button mode [eg, FIG. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. In the case of A14), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the invention of this description, it is possible to realize the game stand which features the operation means. More specifically, since the state of the operation means may change during the second period in the auto button mode, a line of sight is induced in the operation means to urge the operation of the operation means. There are times when you can.

  Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed even without the operation of the operation means. The non-auto button mode is a state in which the auto button mode is not set.

  Even in the auto button mode, the operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated), or may be accepted or not accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of acceptance and the case of non-acceptance may be accepted in the effect of A and not accepted in the effect of B, or may not be accepted in the period of A and accepted in the period of B. Furthermore, the operation of the A operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is accepted, and the operation of the B operation means (for example, the operation key unit 137, the second chance button, the lever type operation means, etc.) is not accepted. It is also good.

  In addition, during the second period, rendering means (for example, display by display means, movable means, light emitting means, etc.) other than the operation means may be configured to change.

Also,
In the case where the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [eg, in the case of FIG. 110 (Aa8-3) There is]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  By doing this, the state of the operation means may change during the second period in the non-auto button mode, so that the operation means can be induced to look at the line of sight to urge the operation of the operation means. There is a possibility. In addition, regardless of the setting of the auto button mode, to notice that the second effect will not be executed unless the operation means is operated during the second period, and improve the operation desire of the operation means There are times when you can.

Also,
At least a part of the first period may overlap with at least a part of the second period [eg, immediately before FIG. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
Period in which at least a portion of the first period and at least a portion of the second period overlap in the auto button mode [eg, FIG. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. (A11) In the period until immediately before, when there is an operation of the operation means in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2) and FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-1)], the first effect and the second effect At least one of the effects is executed [for example, FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-4)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, or only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect is executed. It is also good.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated before the first time elapses after the first period starts, effects of both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. Or only the first effect may be performed, or only the second effect may be performed.

  For example, when two button displays are displayed in the auto button mode, the function of the auto button mode works for one button display, the response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The function of the button mode does not work, and the user may feel uncomfortable to operate the button by himself, which may improve the interest of the game.

Also,
In the period in which at least a portion of the first period and the at least a portion of the second period overlap in the non-auto button mode, the first operation is performed when the operation means is operated; And at least one of the second effect is executed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, or only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect is executed. It is also good.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the first period [for example, the operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, even if there is no operation until the said 1st period complete | finish, the said 1st presentation may be performed.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, the operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Note that the second effect may be performed even if there is no operation before the second period ends.
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (all The second display device 208S etc.],
The plural types of effects are plural types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a response display,
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated,
The first effect is a first response display of the response effects [for example, a response display of “Summer vacation is still ~ of FIG. 108 (A11)”.
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect that the holding icon changes to a blue display mode].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is an operation display,
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means,
When the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1) or the like) is displayed as the operation display] When the operation means is operated, the first response display may be displayed,
When the second operation display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, when the operation means is operated, the second operation display is performed. 2 response display may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The operation display may be an image representing the appearance of the operation means [for example, a button image 136a] or a display prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, the remaining time display meter MT, PUSH The display may include a character display of, a character display of "press", a display of an arrow indicating an operation direction, and the like.

Also,
[At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect [for example, a notice effect for a big hit in the symbol change display (normal advance notice)] for a symbol change display being executed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, both of the first effect and the second effect may be so, or only the first effect may be so, or only the second effect is so. May be

Also,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is the end of the symbol variation display in progress, and an effect on the symbol variation display to be started thereafter [for example, the symbol variation to be started next] It is a display, a symbol variation display to be started next to the next, or a notice effect about a big hit in a symbol variation display to be started next to the next (prereading notice)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, both of the first effect and the second effect may be so, or only the first effect may be so, or only the second effect is so. May be

Also,
"The first period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective (hereinafter referred to as" first operation effective period ").
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation effective period”).
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  A meter display showing at least one of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period, for example, a display of the remaining period meter MT shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1) ] May also be displayed during the auto button mode. Note that the display of the remaining period meter MT may be added to the button holding icon shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1).

  Further, as the meter display, a display by a gauge (a bar display that increases or decreases) may be used, or the display color may change with the passage of time, for example, a display that grays out when the remaining period disappears Good.

  Or, conversely, the meter indicating the operation valid period may be displayed only in the non-auto button mode and may not be displayed in the auto button mode. For example, in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1) in the auto button mode, the remaining period meter MT is omitted, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 110 (Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not the auto button mode, if the meter indicating the operation valid period is displayed [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. 110] is not made [for example, FIG. 108 to FIG. There may be a button fluctuation icon or a button hold icon shown at 110.

Also,
"The operation means is a means that may perform a rendering operation [for example, light emission, vibration, etc.],"
I also explained about

  Further, the first state is a state in which the rendering operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the rendering operation is being performed [for example Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

  The first state may be a state in which the operation means is stopped.

  Further, the effect means is an effect movable means [for example, a vibrator] provided inside, and the effect operation is an operation for which the effect movable means operates [for example, vibration]. Good.

  Further, the second state is a state in which deformation (for example, protrusion or depression) or the effect moving means is in operation (for example, advanced state, retracted state, vibrating state, rotating state, hardened state) Etc.].

  The operation means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is a means capable of executing a drive operation such as lighting, blinking or extinguishing,
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means performs the driving operation in a first mode,
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means performs the driving operation in a second mode,
The first aspect and the second aspect may be different aspects.

  The first aspect may be an extinguished aspect, and the second aspect may be an luminant aspect.

  The first aspect may be an aspect lit in a first color, and the second aspect may be an aspect lit in a second color.

  The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
[Presentation means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, lamp for game board 442, lamp for game stand frame 452, one thousand and two box characters 224H, etc.], and
The effect means is a means capable of at least performing a plurality of effects.
The effect of one of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
The first effect is the effect selected by the player [e.g., the effect of each option of character selection in (b) of FIG. 63 (b), the effect of each option of (c) reservation frame selection, e) Effects by each option of pending display selection, (f) Effects by each option of background display selection, music output effect of the song title shown in FIG. 101],
The one type of effect among the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM, a music output effect, a hold frame UI effect, a hold effect, a background effect, etc.]
If a third effect [for example, a notice of a change by a treasure box icon I1, a notice of changing a music, a wipe effect, a notice of a background change, etc.] is executed during execution of the first effect, the first effect is When it is changed to the second effect [For example, it is shown in FIG. 99 (a a 3-1) to FIG. (A a 6-1), FIG. 102 (b 11) to FIG. For example, when background A is selected by the player in FIG. 80 (1), the background change notice of (6) to (7) in the figure (wipe-in and wipe-out of the overhead image for wipe effect) ), And changes to the background of the prefetch notice shown in (8) to (21).
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the third effect may be an effect of one type among the plurality of types of effects, and may be an effect executed by the effect means. Alternatively, the third effect may not be executed by the effect means (for example, the display means), but may be effect performed by another effect means (for example, the sound output means) different from the effect means .

  Further, the first effect may be an effect of a customization system that can be selected in a demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display does not start for a predetermined time, or an effect that can be selected even during execution of the symbol variation display It is also good. Furthermore, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect in a big hit game that can be selected by the player.

  Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until simultaneous effects such as island simultaneous effects are started.

  Display means (for example, liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, 7-segment display device, organic EL display device, reel (drum) display device, leaf display device, plasma display, projector, etc.) as an example of the effect means , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means etc. can be listed. A light guide plate that emits light from the side and emits light forward, and a POV display capable of displaying a pattern by an afterimage effect can also be listed as an example. As the effect means, all of the items listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

  Further, the effect means may be a device that performs light emission effect, and in this case, the light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed by light emission color, etc.) may be different depending on the mode. .

Also,
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (including all , Second display device 208S, etc.],
The first effect is a first effect display [for example, effect display by each option of character selection in (b) of FIG. 63 (b) or effect display by each option of (c) holding frame selection, (e) Effect display according to each option of hold display selection, (f) effect display according to each option of background display selection, song title shown in FIG. 101 displayed in song title display portion MN in FIG.
The second effect is the second effect display [for example, the effect display by the navigation character YM, the effect display by the holding frame UI, the song title display portion MN “Distance in FIG. 102 (B13) to FIG. ", The song title display section MN" 轟 DREAM "shown in FIG. 102 (i).
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the effect means may be a plurality of image display means.

Also,
[The third effect is a third effect display [eg icon of treasure box I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, icon of meter display MW, MG, icon of giant panda, giant panda character This is a notice of conversation including a character display of “change”, an image of a whistle, a bird's-eye view image for wipe effect, a character C11 of a leader of FIG. 102 (a 11) to the same figure (a 15-1), etc.]
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display. That is, there may be a case where only a part of the third effect display overlaps with a part of the first effect display, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display May overlap, or all of the third effect display may overlap with only a portion of the first effect display. With all of the third effect display. The entire first effect display may overlap. In addition, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), or conversely, the first effect display At least a part of may overlap from the front side (player's side) to at least a part of the third effect display.

  In addition, the image display device displays a variation display of a decorative symbol, a stop display of a decorative symbol, an icon (hold icon) according to the number of holding balls, and an icon (variation icon) relating to a symbol variation display under execution May be The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variation display of the decorative symbol, or is closer to the first effect display than the stop display of the decorative symbol. May be displayed, or may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the hold icon, or displayed closer to the first effect display than the variation icon It may be done.

Also,
“Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [eg, FIG. 79 (E1) to FIG. (E 3-1), Fig. 82 (く 2-1) to Fig. (く 7)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the player may be provided with operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation means is operated. .

  The change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change in the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, and the change in the effect mode is: Even if there is a change in response to the operation of the operation means, or even if there is a change in response to the start of the pre-reading notice (for example, a rush to a pre-read mode (corresponding to a second effect display)). Good.

Also,
[When the third effect is executed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [eg, in the case of FIG. 99 (A a4-1) to FIG. (A a6-1) ] When the third effect is not performed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [eg, FIG. 79 (E2) to FIG. (E4-1) In the case where it is easier for the player to finally shift to a state advantageous to the player [eg, a big hit game state, a big hit game state with a large number of ball appearances, a definite change state, a power support state] rather than
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Here, when the third effect is executed, it may be configured to shift to an advantageous state for the player without fail. Or, conversely, even if the third effect is executed, the player may not shift to the advantageous state.
Further, if the symbol variation display is being displayed as the advantageous state, a big hit gaming state is raised. In addition, it may be in the super reach state or may be in the pseudo connected state. On the other hand, as the above-mentioned advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, there is a probability change state or a power support state after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the number of rounds may be in the state of round promotion in which the appearance is increased.

Also,
[An operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, for example, a chance button 136 etc.]
When the first effect is selected when the operation means is operated [eg, the cases of FIG. 66 (37) to FIG. 50 (50)].
The third effect may be executed when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“During execution of the first effect, even if the third effect is executed, the first effect is not changed to the second effect [eg, FIG. 75 (3-2-1) The figure (3-2-2), Figure 83 ((1-3-1) to Figure ((1-3-3 b 2), Figure 100 (A 4-2), Figure 100 (A a 6-2). If there is]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, when the effect means is a display means, even if the third effect is executed, the first effect display may not be changed to the second effect display. When the means is a light emitting means, even if the third effect is executed, the first light effect may not be changed to the second light effect, and the effect means may output a sound. In the case of means, even if the third effect is executed, the first sound output effect may not be changed to the second sound output effect, and the effect means may be movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is performed, the first operation effect may not be changed to the second operation effect.

  Alternatively, conversely, when the third effect is performed during execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect.

Also,
"The second effect is one of the effects selectable by the player.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Alternatively, the second effect may be an effect that can not be selected by the player.

Also,
[The sound output means [for example, speaker 120] which can output a music,
The effect means may be a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, The second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a music display [for example, the music title display unit MN in FIG. 102 (a 15-1) and the same figure (a 16) to the same (a 18), etc.]
The music display is a display related to music output by the sound output means [for example, display of music name and lyrics],
The first effect is the first music display [eg, "mega giga summer"],
A game console characterized in that the second effect is a second music display [eg, "Daake DREAM"]. "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first effect is an effect in which a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in a third display mode [for example, a default display mode],
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of blinking with white, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow kimono]. And that
The second icon is an icon having a case where it is displayed across continuous symbol variation display [for example, in the case of FIG. 99 (a a1) to the same figure (a a2)],
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "to straddle" is to put a period of stop display of symbols (a change stop period) in between. Further, the second icon may be an icon continuously displayed during display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon which disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon may be displayed continuously while the stop display of the symbol is displayed, or it may be an icon which disappears in the middle, or the icon which continues to disappear while the stop display is displayed. It may be

Also,
"The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all of them) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N , The second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
The icon of one of the plurality of icons is a first icon,
One of the plurality of icons is a second icon,
One of the icons of the plurality of icons is a third icon,
The first icon is an icon [hereinafter, referred to as "variation icon"] relating to a symbol variation display being executed [for example, variation icon h0],
The second icon is an icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation display,
The third icon is an icon according to the number of holding balls (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”) [for example, holding icon h11].
The second icon is an icon different from the fluctuation icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The fluctuation icon is displayed in an icon display area [for example, the fluctuation icon display area CIS of the holding frame UI having the hold icon display area HIS, the fluctuation icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. If it is an icon,
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI],
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [eg, the hold icon display area HIS of the hold frame UI],
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a first mode [for example, "pending frame D"],
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a second mode [for example, "pending frame R"],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the icon display area may be an area where an area icon is displayed, an area where a holding frame is displayed, or an area where a user interface (UI) is displayed. It may be The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, or a frame icon. Also, the area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. Further, the icon display area may be an area including a reserved icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, a navigation character icon) display area.

  Further, the third effect may be an effect of switching an aspect of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping the icon display area from the front side is displayed.

Also,
"One of the effects of the plurality of effects is the fourth effect,
The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, a telop display trp shown in FIG. 94] about the fact that the third effect is to be executed before the third effect is executed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The third effect is a notice effect for a big hit in the symbol variation display in progress [eg, a normal notice effect by the color of a treasure box icon, a big hit confirmation (or a big hit heavy notice by a character C11 of a game leader]) ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The third effect is an effect of pre-reading notice [eg, pre-reading notice by color of treasure box icon].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  It should be noted that what is described as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the above may be the variation display of the symbol (more specifically, the special figure), and the description that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is described is the symbol (more Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

  Subsequently, an example of effects that can be applied to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described so far will be described using FIGS. As the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 117 to 193 to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 49 to 116, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 to 116 to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  In the example of the effect to be described below, the display icon (for example, any one or two or all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M decorative symbol display devices) A notice display, an icon for mini game A, an icon for mini game B, a hold icon, a change icon, and an icon change notice are displayed. First, these will be described in order.

  FIG. 117 shows various notice icons and various notice displays.

  In FIG. 117 (a), five types of notice icons are shown. Of these five types of notice icons, four are box-shaped icons, and the other is an icon of an operation means type (button type).

  There are four types of box-shaped icons: box icons, red box icons, gold box icons, and rainbow box icons, which have different colors, and two types of modes (mode a and mode d) are prepared. The mode a is a display mode in which the box is closed, and the mode d is a display mode in which the box is open.

  In the above description and the following description, the type and the display mode may differ depending on the color difference and the display method. For example, the color of the first type or the first display mode is white, and the color of the second type or the second display mode is also white, but the second type or the second display mode has a blinking display method (white Alternate display with other colors (for example, background color or black). The first type and the first display mode correspond to the default type and the display mode. The color of the third type or the third display mode is blue, the color of the fourth type or the fourth display mode is green, the color of the fifth type or the fifth display mode is red, and the sixth type or the fifth display mode The color of the six display modes is gold, and the color of the seventh and seventh display modes is rainbow. The first to seventh types and display modes may be prepared for various icons and various displays, and light emitting means such as various LEDs can emit light in the first to seventh display modes. There is. Among the first to seventh types and display modes, the larger the number and the display mode (the seventh is the largest), the more advantageous the display mode for the player may be or must be. For example, the larger the number or the display mode, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot may be or the more likely that a certain effect will be started. In the following description, changing from the n-th display mode to the n + 1-th display mode may be said to be one step up or one step promotion. In addition, changing from the nth display mode to the n + m display mode may be referred to as raising the display mode by m levels or promoting it. Furthermore, a display mode in which the number of n is relatively large may be referred to as the upper display mode, and a display mode in which the number of n is relatively small may be referred to as the lower display mode. Note that n or m is a natural number greater than or equal to 1 (the same applies to the following description).

  Although there are only one type of button type icon (button icon), four types of modes (mode a, mode b, mode c, and mode d) are prepared. The mode a is a display mode consisting of only button images imitating the chance button 136. Aspects b and c are display aspects in which a remaining time display meter indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is added below the button image. The mode a is a mode representing that even if the chance button 136 is operated, the modes b and c do not have a remaining time display meter. In mode b, the remaining time display meter is full (display that the operation effective period remains for the entire period), and in mode c, the remaining time display meter is 0 display (in which no operation effective period remains) ). That is, the mode b is the mode immediately before the start of counting (counting down) of the operation effective period or immediately after the start of the time counting. In addition, the mode c is a mode after or after the operation effective period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. When the clocking of the operation effective period starts, the meter of the third display mode starts to decrease with the passage of time. Mode d is a display mode of a button image or an effect image (here, a smoke image) that hides the display of the operation valid period. The button icon may have a plurality of types of icons which differ in type as in the case of the box-shaped icon. For example, there may be default button icons, red button icons, gold button icons, and rainbow button icons that differ in color.

  Further, the type of notice icon or button icon is not limited to color, and there may be icons having different sizes and shapes of icons, and any two or more of plural elements such as icon size, shape, and color May be combined. For example, no. In addition to the box icon 1, there may be other types of icons, such as a treasure box icon and a 1000 box icon that imitates the two-or-two-box character 224 H shown in FIG. 14. Also, the higher the reliability, the larger the size of the icon (for example, the gold box icon is larger than the red box icon). Also, the shape of the box may be different between the red box icon and the gold box icon box.

  The advance notice icon may be displayed by changing the display position from the display position at which the display is first started. That is, there is a case where it moves from the first position to the second position and is continuously displayed (stocked) at the second position. The second position is the stock display position. In addition, the display (stock) may be continued without changing the display position. The mode a is a mode at the start of stock, but is also a mode at the start of display. The aspect d is an aspect when the notice icon is used. That is, when the notice icon shown in FIG. 117 (a) is used in the effect, the display mode changes to mode d. The box-shaped icon is used at a predetermined timing and changes to aspect d. The button icon is used when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, and changes to mode d. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon always changes from the mode c to the mode d after the operation valid period has elapsed, but may or may not change. It is also good. In addition, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon may not change to the mode d. In that case, the button icon may be erased or may remain displayed as aspect a, and the display in which only the remaining time display meter of aspect b or aspect c is hidden (a part of the peripheral edge is aspect a) May be displayed, and may be configured to change to the mode d but not to display a notice display described later. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the mode c may be displayed and then the mode d may be displayed.

  The appearance rate and the reliability are different for each type of notice icon. The appearance rates are easily displayed in the order of A, B, C, and D. That is, it indicates that A is most likely to be displayed (the frequency of display is high). Although not shown in FIG. 117 (a), it indicates that E is the least likely to be displayed (the frequency of display is low). The reliability represents the reliability of the big hit, the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display in which the icon is used (the reliability of the prior notice), or the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display of the pre-reading object Reliability). This reliability is likely to be hit in the order of description of A, B, C, D, E, F. That is, it indicates that the probability is the most likely to hit (must be hit = reliability 100%), and that F is the most difficult to hit. The reliability represented by the first type and the first display mode described above is F, the reliability represented by the second type and the second display mode is E, and the reliability represented by the third type and the third display mode is D The reliability expressed by the fourth type and the fourth display mode is C, the reliability expressed by the fifth type and the fifth display mode is B, and the reliability expressed by the sixth type and the sixth display mode is It becomes A, and the reliability which a 7th type and a 7th display mode represent becomes exact. The reliability F may be 0% or higher than 0%. If the reliability F is 0%, it can not be said that a big hit is predicted, but in this specification, the one including the reliability 0% may be referred to as a preview.

  FIG. 117 (b) shows 31 types of notice icons. The explanation about these 31 types of notice icons is as described in the outline of the contents of the effect in the figure, but in this description, the phrase “must be performed” means that “not done” in the modification. It may be read as "may be." In addition, the description such as “may be” or “may be” can be read as “always” in a modified example.

  In addition, "VS Kengo reach" described in "Summary of presentation contents" is Kengo reach shown in Fig. 17 and Fig. 75, etc., and "all group reach" is Fig. 81 (or 3-5-3). It is a super reach not shown that develops from. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the super reach has been performed may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit when the "all group reach" is performed than when the "VS swordswoman reach" is performed. "Senryo Box (features)" is a one-hundred box character article 224H shown in FIG.

  Further, the 31 types of notice icons shown in FIG. 117 (b) may also function as a notice display. The notice display is a display that is started when the notice icon is used. For example, the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117 (a) may change to mode d, and a notice may appear from the inside. In this case, it is not known what notice display appears until the box-shaped icon changes to mode d. That is, the relationship between the advance notice icon and the advance notice display is not determined in advance as a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship, and is a one-to-many or many-to-many relationship. However, the relationship between the advance notice icon and the advance notice display may be determined in advance as a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship. For example, if the red box notice icon and the red change notice display (No. 7) are previously defined in a one-to-one relationship, and the red box notice icon is displayed, then the red box notice The icon may be changed to mode d, and it may be determined that the notice display of red change appears from the inside, or the case where the notice icon of the red box is changed to mode d, without changing it. It may disappear as it is, and when it changes to aspect d, a notice of red change may appear without fail. In addition, as a box-shaped icon which is a notice icon, a transparent box-shaped icon in which the contents can be seen is prepared, and it can be seen that this transparent box-shaped icon contains one or more types of notices. May be If only one type of notice display is included, the player can know in advance the type of notice display that appears when changing to mode d, but if there is more than one type of notice display, it knows I can not In addition, when multiple types of advance notices are included, roulette may be displayed in a transparent box. In addition, "a notice icon of an embodiment in which the notice display does not know what kind of notice display appears" such as a box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117 (a) may be displayed when "the notice icon is used. The notice of the notice may be made. For example, when "super heat" is displayed (noticeable) by a balloon or the like by a warning icon of a box, a warning display of "hot heat" may be displayed whenever the warning icon of a box is used, It may or may not be displayed. In addition, if "super heat" and "?" Are displayed (noticeable) by a balloon notice or a roulette display by a notice icon of a box, when a notice icon of a box is used, "super heat" and "?" Either one of the notice displays may be displayed, or both may not be displayed, and a different notice display different from the displayed one may be displayed. In this manner, a plurality of options may be notified in advance by a notice icon (and / or a notice different from the notice icon), and one or more notice displays may be displayed among them.

  If the icon shown in FIG. 117 (b) is a notice icon, the relation between the notice icon and the notice display is determined in advance as a one-to-one relation, and if the notice icon changes to mode d, The notice icon functions as a notice display. The difference between the notice icon and the notice display is that the notice icon corresponds to a notice of a certain notice, and the notice display corresponds to a certain notice. That is, the notice icon corresponds to the notice of the notice display.

  In the description of the outline of the effect contents in FIG. 117 (b), the phrase “at displayed variation” is a description when the icon functions as a notice display, and the icon functions as a notice icon If it is, it is read as "in the variation where the notice icon is used". That is, while the notice display is used in the displayed symbol variation display, the notice icon may be carried over until the symbol change display started later than the displayed symbol change display.

  In FIG. 117 (b), the embodiment A and the embodiment B are shown, but the embodiment A is only when functioning as a notice display, and the embodiment A is stocked when functioning as a notice icon. The mode B is a mode in which the advance notice icon is used, and is a mode in which a circle is added to the mode A. The notice icon may be used again without disappearing even if it is used once. In this case, after changing from mode A to mode B, the process returns to mode A again, but during the period displayed in mode B, the use of the notice icon is not possible, and after returning to mode A, it can be used Become. There are also notice icons (Nos. 1, 27 to 31) for which the mode B is not prepared, but these notice icons are icons that disappear when used.

  The 31 types of notice icons or notice displays shown in FIG. 117 (b) have different color icons and different color displays, and the reliability of the big hit differs as described in the above-mentioned display mode depending on the displayed color. That is, the "red change" (No. 8) of red (the fifth display mode) is higher in the jackpot reliability than the "change" (No. 7) of the default color represented by "de". .

  The appearance rate is also shown in FIG. 117 (b), but the appearance rate is the same as the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a). No. The appearance rate of the 16 "○○ high certain advance notice" differs depending on the contents of ○○. For example, the occurrence rate is “B” for “pending icon change high certainty notice” and “notice icon stock high certainty notice”. Note that "notice icon stock high confirmation notice" may be displayed only during execution of the notice icon stock effect, or may be displayed before the notice icon stock effect is started. In addition, the appearance rate is “C” for “super-attsu production high certainty advance notice”, “timer advance notice for high certainty notice”, and “presence for feature work high degree certainty notice”. However, the appearance rate may be the same as or different from the contents of ○. This "○○ High certainty advance notice" is more likely to be executed if 表示 is displayed if it is displayed than is not displayed, but if it is displayed, ○ may be always executed.

  No. 2 “chance” icon and No. When the "red chance" icon in 3 is functioning as a notice, even if the other chances are used to warn you as a "chance", reach effects may not occur, but the "chance" icon or the "red chance" The normal reach effect may be configured to be generated whenever the "chance" is announced by the icon. In addition, other notice effects (for example, notice effects with a high frequency of appearance such as conversation notices), notice effects with a higher appearance frequency than notices by notice displays, and notice effects displayed when the symbol variation display is shortened. "Chance" icon or "Red Opportunity" icon indicates "Chance chance" rather than "Chance" or "Chance?" "" May be configured to be more likely to generate reach effects (which may be normal reach effects or super reach effects) if or when both are notified. There is no difference and the occurrence probability may be the same.

  The notice icon described with reference to FIG. 117 is an icon that may be displayed as a result of the mini game effect. The mini game is a kind of effect display, and two types of mini games are prepared. As two types of mini games, there are a mini game (mini game A) of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice and a mini game (mini game B) of rock-paper-speaking confrontation notice. Each mini-game uses a dedicated icon. The mini game is automatically started when the start condition is established, and the result of the mini game is determined according to the result of the pass / fail judgment and the result of the pre-reading.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a mini game icon.

  In FIG. 118 (a), four types of mini game A icons are shown. Each of these four types of mini game A icons includes an image (box image) of a box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117 (a). The "box" icon includes the white box image of the first display mode, that is, the notice icon of the white box. The “red box” icon includes the red box image of the fifth display mode, that is, the notice icon of the red box. The "gold box" icon includes the golden box image of the sixth display mode, that is, the notice icon of the gold box. The "rainbow box" icon includes the rainbow box image of the seventh display mode, that is, the notice icon of the rainbow box. Of the four types of icons, four aspects (embodiments a to d) are prepared for each of the remaining three types of icons except for the "rainbow box" icon. Only two of the two aspects (Aspect c, Aspect d) are provided. Aspects a to c are aspects in which each notice icon is placed on a carpet and a meter display of hit points (HP) is shown thereon. In the mini game A, a character of Yoshimune attacks a carpet, and if the attack is effective, this hit point (HP) decreases, and if HP becomes 0, a treasure (notice icon) can be acquired. In the meter display of aspect a, the gauge of the third display aspect (blue) is full, and the HP is 100 points. In the meter display of aspect b, the gauge of the fourth display aspect (green color) is in a half state, and HP is 50 points. In the meter display of aspect c, the gauge of the fifth display aspect (red) is in a state of being displayed only a little, and HP is 10 points. And aspect d is an aspect displayed after HP becomes 0, and while a carpet disappears and a meter display also disappears, each advance notice icon is displayed and it represents having acquired a notice icon under it. The character "Get !!" is displayed.

  In the mini game A, the display for the four types of mini game A icons is started in any manner. That is, when the display is started in mode a, the remaining HP at the time of display start (when appearing) is 100/100, and when the display is started in mode b, the remaining HP at the start of display is 50. When the display is started in the mode c, the remaining HP at the start of the display is 10/100. Although the appearance rate for each aspect is shown in FIG. 118 (a), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a). The icon for the mini-game A for the rainbow box has a small amount of HP left from the start of display, and you can always obtain a treasure (notice icon), but other icons can be obtained as a treasure (notice icon) Sometimes you can or can not. It should be noted that the icon for the mini game A for the rainbow box may be able to obtain a notice icon during the symbol variation display in which the display has been started, if it is in the symbol variation display started next to the symbol variation display. In some cases, it is possible to obtain a notice icon. However, the advance notice icon may be acquired during the symbol variation display whose display has been started, or may be acquired only when the symbol variation display is started next.

  FIG. 118 (b) shows the relationship between the number of remaining HP points at the start of symbol variation display and the probability of acquiring a notice icon. The mini game A icon may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. That is, it may be carried over and displayed to the symbol change display started after the symbol change display by which the display was started. The meter display in the mode when the display of the mini game A icon starts is decreased by 10 points each time a valid attack on the carpet is determined. Therefore, the icon for the mini game A for the rainbow box can acquire a notice icon once a valid attack is determined.

  When disclosing the symbol variation display started later than the symbol variation display when the display of the mini game A icon is started, if the number of remaining HP points is 60 points or more, the meter display indicates the third display mode (blue The probability that the notice icon can be acquired while the symbol variation display displayed and started is 10%. If the number of remaining HP points is 30 or more and 50 or less at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fourth display mode (green), and the notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display The probability of being able to do is 50%. If the number of remaining HP points is 10 points or 20 points at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fifth display mode (red), and a notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display The probability of being able to do is 100%.

  In FIG. 118 (c), opponent icons for two types of mini games B are shown. One type of icon among the opponent icons for the two types of mini games B is a swordsman character icon, and the other type is a panda character icon. The appearance rate of the character icon of the swordsman is A, and the appearance rate of the character icon of the panda is B. The alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. Therefore, the swordsman character icon is more likely to appear than the panda character icon. In the mini game B of the jangken confrontation notice, the icon of a certain character and the icons of these opponents make a jann confrontation, and when a certain character wins (when the opponent loses), the animating icon is displayed. It is possible to obtain, and conversely, when a certain character is defeated (when the opponent wins), the advance notice icon can not be obtained.

  In addition, an aspect a to an aspect f are prepared for each of the character icons of the opponents. The mode a is a mode before the start of the mini game, or is a mode of standby after the mini game is started. The aspect b is an aspect when a gou is put out in a jaunting confrontation, the aspect c is an aspect when a chow is put out, and the aspect d is an aspect when a par is put out. In addition, the mode e is a mode when the opponent character loses in the Janken confrontation (when a certain character wins), and the aspect f is opposite when the opponent character wins in the Janken confrontation ( When a character loses).

  In FIG. 118 (d), the degree of expectation for acquiring the notice icon in the mini game B is shown. In the above description, a certain character is used, but in the mini game B, the character of the opponent, the character of the villager, the character of forgiveness as the character corresponding to the certain character (the character corresponding to the certain character described above), A character is prepared. Therefore, there are six match cards as shown in FIG. 118 (d), and the expected acquisition rates are determined. A represents 100% of expectation for acquisition, B represents 80%, C represents 60%, D represents 40%, and E is 20% , F represents 10% and G represents more than 0% and less than 1%. The panda character icon is less likely to appear as the opponent character than the sword character character icon, but the expectation for acquiring the advance notice icon is higher than the sword character character icon. In addition, in the case of a confrontation between Yoshimune and panda, regardless of the type of the notice icon, the notice icon can be acquired with 100% probability. The notice icon of the rainbow box is selected only at the time of the big hit. The “-” display in FIG. 118 (d) indicates that the advance notice icon of the rainbow box does not appear (acquisition expectation 0%).

  FIG. 119 shows the hold icon and the change icon.

  The hold icon is an icon related to an undigested symbol fluctuation display, the fluctuation icon is an icon related to the digested symbol fluctuation display, and each icon is an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display. Here, "variation of xxx reserve" means "a symbol variation display corresponding to xxx reserve".

  FIG. 119 (a) shows each aspect of each type for the hold icon and the change icon. The explanation of each type of icon is as described in the remarks in the figure. No. 1 is a default mode, and No. 1 is. 2-No. 7 is a notice mode. That is, if it is a hold icon, it becomes a mode of pre-reading notice, and if it is a change icon, it will become a mode of notice. The reserved icon of the pre-reading notice mode may be displayed from the display start time (when starting start winning), or may be displayed by changing at the start of symbol fluctuation, or by changing by the effect during symbol fluctuation display. It may be displayed. The fluctuation icon of the normal advance notice mode may be displayed from the display start time (timing according to the symbol fluctuation start) or may be displayed by changing according to the effect in the symbol fluctuation display.

  The hold icon and the change icon are configured to be able to change (rank up) one step at a time in the order of default mode> white blink> blue> green> red> gold> rainbow. For example, if you want to rank up with blue hold, it changes to green hold. The hold icon and the change icon may not necessarily change one step at a time. For example, in the icon change notice display to be described later, when the change of the aspect of the icon is successful, there is one in which the changing aspect is predetermined regardless of the aspect of the icon to be changed (for example, FIG. No. 2 to No. 3, No. 5 to No. 6, No. 8 to No. 10). When a change notice is given by the icon of the default mode itself, it usually ranks up to white blinking, but when the icon of the default mode is changed due to icon change notice, it does not change to white blink, and blue pending Rank up. Also, the icon of the default mode is No. 2-No. 7, No. 14-No. Although there are cases where it changes to the 19 icons, the VS display mode of FIG. 129 described later, and the icon display mode to which the letter “SP” of FIG. 2-No. The icon of 7 is NO. 14-No. Although there is no case of changing to the 19 icons, the VS display mode shown in FIG. 129, or the icon display mode with the letter “SP” shown in FIG. 180 described later, they may change. Also, no. 8-No. The 13 display modes are assumed to be displayed in that mode from the time of winning, but icons of other display modes (for example, No. 1 to No. 7 and / or No. 14 to No. 19) It may change from the icon). Also, only the default mode may be changeable.

  The display mode of the variation icon is determined according to the result of the determination of the success or failure. However, even if the result of the determination of the success or failure is a loss, the display mode is other than the default display mode. A presentation may be performed. Further, among display icons of a plurality of displayed icons, it is determined according to the result of the pre-reading about which display icon the type of display of the icon is to be made. However, when the result of the pre-reading is lost Even if there is an effect, the display mode may be changed to a mode other than the default display mode. In addition, the display mode may change for a plurality of hold icons.

  No. 8 and No. An icon 9 may be displayed when or before a button effect (for example, a button advance effect) is started, or during a button effect. Here, no. It supplements about the function of (1) and the function of (2) described in the remarks of “Button A” in No.8. When the button A icon has the function (1), the display mode of the button A icon is performed even when the chance button 136 is operated until the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started. Is configured not to change from blue to rainbow, and after the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started (or immediately after or simultaneously), the operation valid period is started and the operation valid period is ended. The display mode of the button A icon is configured to change from blue to rainbow when there is an operation of the chance button 136 or until the operation effective period ends. If there is no operation of the chance button 136 during the operation valid period, the display mode of the button A icon may not be changed. When the button A icon has the function (2), the button A icon is displayed and then before the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started (that is, before the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon When the operation of the chance button 136 is performed until the symbol variation display), the display mode of the button A icon is changed to any of blue to rainbow. Here, when the button A icon has the function (2), the display mode of the button A icon does not change even if the chance button 136 is operated while the symbol is stopped. It may not change, and may be configured to always change. Further, when the button A icon has the function (2), the operation valid period may be set also during the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon. That is, the same function as that of (1) may be included. , No. Also for the functions (1) and (2) described in the remarks of “Button B” in No. It is the same as the function of (1) and the function of (2) described in the remarks of “Button A” in No. 8.

  No. An icon 10 may be displayed at or before the start of a timer effect (for example, a timer advance effect) or during the timer advance effect.

  No. At the start or before start of the promotion effect of the temporary holding in FIGS. 156 (Ec1) to (Ec8) and FIGS. 156 (Ec5-2-1) to (Ec5-2-5), which will be described later, or It is an icon that may be displayed during the promotion effect.

  No. When 12 is displayed at the start or before the start of the effect of roulette suspension (N option suspension) in FIG. 151 (A1-2-1) to the same figure (A1-2-12) described later, or during that effect There is an icon. The roulette icon in this example may be configured such that the roulette icon itself changes to a mode stopped at the roulette, but an icon different from the roulette icon always changes to a mode stopped at the roulette, the roulette icon itself May change and another icon different from the roulette icon may change.

  No. 13 is an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the meter effect, or during the meter effect, and if it is a hold icon, the meter decreases until it is consumed, if it is a change icon, until it disappears If the presentation is done and the meter display becomes 0, it is a success and something changes or something happens. That is, the meter display is of a decreasing type. If the meter display does not finally become 0, both the Echigoya image and the HP meter image are displayed as they are, and the HP meter image shows the final remaining HP. ing. In addition, in the case of the hold icon, an effect of reducing the meter display may be performed even in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, and the meter display may be zero. Further, in the case of the reserved icon, an effect of reducing the meter may be performed in one or a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays, and there may be a fluctuation in which the effect of reducing the meter is performed and a fluctuation not being performed. Further, even when the icon is displayed as a hold icon, it may be only the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that the effect of reducing the meter is actually performed. Also, in the above description, the meter display is of a type that decreases, but may be of a type that increases. If it is of an increasing type, it is successful if the meter display is full within the valid period.

  No. 14-No. Reference numeral 16 denotes an icon displayed in the pre-game for acquiring the Yoshimune treasure of the mini game A described with reference to FIGS. 118 (a) and (b). That is, the icon may be displayed at the start or before the start of the mini game A, or during the mini game A. Use this icon to attack the carpet with the notice icon on it. Aspect a is a pause pose, aspect b is a pose pose, and aspect c is a pose in which an arrow is fired. No. 17 to No. A character 19 confronts the character icon of the opponent shown in FIG. 118 (c), which is displayed in the “Janken confrontation notice of the mini game B described with reference to FIG. 118 (c) and FIG. 118 (d). Icon). That is, the icon may be displayed at the start or before the start of the mini game B, or during the mini game B. The mode a is a mode before the start of the mini game, or is a mode of standby after the mini game is started. The aspect b is an aspect when a gou is put out in a jaunting confrontation, the aspect c is an aspect when a chow is put out, and the aspect d is an aspect when a par is put out. In addition, the mode e is a mode when the player loses in the Janken confrontation (when the opponent character wins), and the aspect f is when the player wins in the Janken confrontation (when the opponent character loses). It is an aspect of No. 14-No. The 19 icons correspond to white blinking icons.

  The numbers shown in FIG. 119 (a). No. 14 to No. 16 are icons dedicated to mini game A. Since 17 to No 19 are dedicated to mini game B, if these dedicated icons appear, the player knows that mini games will be started, and these dedicated icons It also works as

  Further, although the appearance rate and the reliability are also shown in FIG. 119 (a), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a), The symbol representing the degree of reliability here is also the same as the symbol representing the degree of reliability described in FIG.

  In addition to the types shown in FIG. 119 (a), there are types of pending icons and change icons.

  An icon change notice display is shown in FIG. 119 (b). The icon change advance display is a display used for an effect of changing the mode of the hold icon or the change icon. That is, it is a display that appears in the change animation that changes the aspect of the icon. In addition, the display is also used for an effect that fails in an attempt to change the mode of the hold icon or the change icon. That is, this is a display that appears in non-change animation in which the form change of the icon fails and the form of the icon does not change. The explanation of each type of icon change notice display is as described in the remarks in the figure.

  No. 1 to No. The mode a in each of the sixteen displays is the mode at the start of the change animation (the mode at the start of display of the icon change notice display and the default mode), and the mode b is the mode when changing the icon. Also, no. 11 to No. Aspect c in each of the 15 displays is an aspect when the aspect change of the icon succeeds, and is an aspect that may be displayed as a change animation. On the other hand, no. 11 to No. Aspect d in each of the 15 displays is an aspect when the aspect change of the icon fails, and is an aspect that may be displayed as a static animation. No. The display of 17 is a display of the huge panda displayed in FIG. 89 (this 2-2-1)-the same figure (this 2-2-3), and there is no change of an aspect from an appearance time to a change time.

  Although the appearance rate of each type of display is shown in FIG. 119 (b), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a). Further, FIG. 119 (b) also describes the type of icon whose mode is to be changed. That is, no. 1 to No. Each display of 10 may change the aspect of the variation icon or may change the aspect of the hold icon. On the other hand, no. 11 to No. Each of the sixteen displays changes only the aspect of the variation icon. The display of 17 pandas changes only the aspect of the hold icon. No. 11 to No. Each of the 16 displays may be changed to change only the aspect of the hold icon, or the aspect of the change icon may be changed, or the aspect of the hold icon may be changed. It is also good. Also, no. The display of the 17 pandas may be changed so as to change only the aspect of the fluctuation icon, or the aspect of the holding icon may be changed or the appearance of the fluctuation icon may be changed. May be

  Also, no. 1 to No. No. 3 display of each balloon system and No. 4-No. No. 6 bomber system displays and No. 7-No. Each indication of 10 airships, No. 12 to No. Each of the 15 Yoshimune displays is displayed in different colors. The color difference here is the same as the success rate of the aspect change of the icon, that is, the probability when there is no aspect change of the icon (probability of changing the icon) may differ depending on the displayed color. In some cases. Further, even when the aspect change of the icon is performed, the number of the icons to which the aspect change is performed may be different depending on the displayed color. In FIG. 119 (b), "icon change rate" is shown as the success probability of the aspect change of the icons, and "probability of the number of changing icons" is also shown as the probability of the number of icons subjected to the form change. For example, no. 4-No. In each display of the bomber system of No. 6, the display of the default color (No. 4) represented by "D" is the success probability of the change of the aspect of the icon than the display of the other colors (No. 5, 6) Is high. However, the default color bomber display (No. 4) can raise the display mode of the icon by only one level. That is, the display mode is changed from the nth display mode to the n + 1th display mode. For example, when changing the mode of the holding icon in the white blinking mode (second display mode), it is changed to the blue mode (third display mode), and the blue icon (third display mode) When changing an aspect, it changes to the green aspect (4th display aspect). However, only when changing the mode of the hold icon in the default mode (first display mode), the mode is changed to the blue mode (third display mode). On the other hand, the red (the fifth display mode) bomber display ("red bomber" of No. 5) changes the mode regardless of the mode of the holding icon when the bomber display is started. , Be sure to change to the same display mode (fifth display mode) as self. That is, the display mode is always changed from the n-th display mode to the fifth display mode. For example, even if it is the hold icon of the default mode (first display mode) or the hold icon of the blue mode (third display mode), the red mode (fifth display Make sure to change to In addition, the bomber display (No. 6 "gold bomber") of gold color (sixth display mode) is also changed in the mode regardless of the mode of the holding icon when the bomber display is started. Make sure to change to the same display mode as the oneself (sixth display mode). That is, the display mode is always changed from the n-th display mode to the sixth display mode. For example, even if it is the hold icon of the default mode (the first display mode) or the hold icon of the green mode (the fourth display mode), the gold mode (the sixth display) when changing the mode Make sure to change to Further, the “red bomber” display (No. 5) has a higher probability of success in changing the form of the icon than the “gold bomber” display (No. 6). That is, no. 4-No. In the bomber type 6 display, although the success probability of the change in the form of the icon becomes lower as the display mode goes up, it becomes easier to make a big hit with the symbol variation display corresponding to the changed icon. No. 1 to No. The same is true for the balloon system display of 3. However, in the bomber type display, in the default color display (No. 4), the success rate of the aspect change of the icon is 100%, and when the default color bomber is displayed, the aspect of the icon always changes Do. Moreover, the default color bomber changes the mode of the two icons with a probability of 5% if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the default color bomber is displayed. For example, each of the aspect of the variation icon and the aspect of one holding icon may change, or the aspect of two holding icons may change. The default color bomber is displayed, and when two icons are displayed after the symbol variation display is started, the default color bomber does not change two icons, but the default color bomber If the second icon is displayed between the start of the symbol variation display in which the symbol is displayed and the bomber of the default color is displayed, the two displayed icons may change. It may be. For this note, no. 7-No. 10 airship display and / or no. It is also applicable to the display of 17 "pandas". On the other hand, in the balloon type display, in the default color display (No. 1), the success rate of the form change of the icon is 30%, and when the form of the icon changes, the form is limited to one icon. Change.

  Also, no. 7-No. In each display of 10 airships, regardless of the display mode (display color), the success rate of the mode change of the icon is 100%, and if the airship is displayed regardless of the color, the icon mode is It always changes. Moreover, for the default color flight aircraft (No. 7), if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the default color flight aircraft is displayed, there are two 50% probabilities. Change the aspect of the icon. However, here too, the default color of the flying boat can raise the display mode of the icon by only one level. On the other hand, the flying boats (No. 8 to No. 10) other than the default color always change the display mode of one certain icon to the same display mode as the icon itself. Therefore, no. 7-No. In the display of the 10 airships, as the display mode goes up, it becomes easier to make a big hit with the symbol variation display corresponding to the changed icon. Note that the timing at which two or more icons are displayed is not limited to the start time of the symbol variation display in which the default flight is displayed, and may be the time at which the default flight is displayed. (The same applies to the following).

  Furthermore, no. 12 to No. In the display of 15 Yoshimune, in the display of the default color (No. 12) represented by "de" and the display of red (No. 13 "Akyoshimune"), the success probability of the variation of the variation icon is 50 %. In addition, since the change target of the display of Yoshimune is limited to the fluctuation icon and only one fluctuation icon is displayed, there is no case where the aspect of two or more icons is changed. Further, in the gold display (No. 14 “Kinyoshi sec”), the success probability of the aspect change of the fluctuation icon is 25%, and the success probability is lower than the display of “Akyoshi sec”. However, in the rainbow-colored display (No. 15 “Nijikyoshi-shu”), the success probability of the aspect change of the fluctuation icon is 100%, and the success probability is higher than that of “Kinkyoshi-shu”. In addition, even in the display of Yoshimune, Yoshimune (No. 13 to No. 15) other than the default color changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon to the same display mode as that of the user.

  In the display of the leader (No. 16), the success probability of the change in the form of the change icon is 100%, and when the display of the set is displayed, the change icon always goes up by one step.

  In the panda display (No. 17), the success probability of the mode change of the hold icon is 100%, and when the panda display is displayed, the mode of the hold icon always goes up by one step. Moreover, if two or more suspension icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the display of the panda is performed, the modes of the two suspension icons are changed with a probability of 50%. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (b), only up to two icons are changed, but three or more icons may be changed, and all displayed items may be changed regardless of the number. It may be possible to change the hold icon of or all the displayed icons.

  Subsequently, effects that use various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119 will be described using specific examples.

  FIG. 120 shows, in stages, an example in which the notice icon is stocked by winning in the mini game B, and the notice display is displayed by using the stock notice icon and the display mode of the variation icon changes. It is.

  FIG. 120 shows a normal state (non-probable variation state and non-electric support state (non-short time state)), and in the subsequent example of the effect, it is an example of effect in the normal state unless otherwise specified. Further, FIG. 120 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, but the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208 (The same applies to the figures that follow.)

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) performs variable display. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1), the holding icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of these reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1. Although the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1) is white only, this white only means that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of only white, as in the case of FIG. 120 (A1), the background screen is not shown.

  In FIG. 120 (A), there is a ball entry at the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the retention of the special figure 1 increases by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A2), the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

  In FIG. 120 (3-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. Although the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, the third hold indicated by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold of the prefetch notice. In FIG. 120 (3-1), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes so far, are both No. 119 (a) in FIG. It changes to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. Here, the icon of the default display mode has changed to the icon of the mode a of the villager's type, but the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice (for example, the display mode of blue shown in No. 3 of FIG. The green display icon described in No. 4 may be changed to a villager's type icon. In this case, the upper display mode (for example, the green display mode of the fourth display mode) is better than the icon of the villager type than the lower display mode (for example, the blue display mode of the third display mode). It is easy to become an icon of a certain type, and the display mode above (for example, the red display mode of the fifth display mode) tends to become an icon of a Yoshimune type. In addition, although the third hold icon h13 representing the target hold of the prefetch notice is the default display mode, the third hold icon h13 may also be changed to a villager's type icon. Furthermore, only the first hold icon h11 may change to a villager's type icon, or only the second hold icon h12 may change to a villager's type icon. That is, the number of icons changing to a villager's type of icon may be one or plural. In addition, when the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 change to a villager's type icon, the mini game (specific mini game is performed in the symbol variation display respectively corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. It may be notified that a game (in this example, mini game B) or an unspecified mini game (in this example, mini game A, mini game B, or other mini games, etc.) will be played. In addition, the mini game is started simultaneously with (or immediately after) the start of the symbol variation display (in the case of the present example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) to start the mini game B. The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

  In FIG. 120 (A4), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"- "Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left also halts and displays the combination of the decoration patterns of the loser ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7").

  In FIG. 120 (A5), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A5), the first decorative symbol in the central region remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started, and the first upper right symbol 2 In the number-of-retentions display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2". In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started, and the effect image EF1 is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 120 (5), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first suspension icon h11 of the villager character, which has been displayed in the first stage hs1 so far, has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS and has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far The second holding icon h12 of the villager's character starts moving toward the first stage hs1, and it is the default display mode that has been displayed on the third stage hs3 so far, but it is the third for previewing notice target pending The hold icon h13 starts moving toward the second stage hs2. Note that the appearance animation of the opponent icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started simultaneously, or the appearance animation of the opponent icon may be started first, or conversely, the movement of the hold icon The animation may be started earlier.

  In FIG. 120 (A6), although the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, the moving animation of the holding icon ends, and the variation icon h0 indicates the type a of the villager's type a (waiting mode) Icon is displayed. The villager character of this variation icon h0 is executing a standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon also ends, and the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and an aspect of the type of panta shown in FIG. 118C as the opponent icon TI (a A standby mode icon is displayed, and the panda character of the opponent icon TI also executes a standby animation (default animation). Further, on the right side of the opponent icon TI, an appearance area AS which is a first area is displayed surrounded by a frame. In this appearance area AS, a character display of "Premium" is displayed, and a notice icon YI that can be acquired when the mini game B wins the rock-paper-scissors match is displayed. That is, the display start position of the notice icon YI is a position in the appearance area AS. Also, from the perspective, the first area can be said to be a notice area for giving notice of the icons that can be acquired in the mini game B. In the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 120 (A6), the No. 1 area shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. Further, a stock area SS which is a second area is provided above the emergence area AS, and is an area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 120 (A6). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS overlap. The appearance area AS and the stock area SS may be configured not to overlap. Also, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI and the movement animation of the hold icon may end simultaneously, or the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI may end earlier, or conversely, the hold icon The moving animation of may end earlier. Also, the appearance of the opponent icon TI and the appearance of the notice icon YI may be simultaneous, or the opponent icon TI may appear first, or the notice icon YI is opposite. It may appear first.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A7), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, then the mini game B's rock-solid confrontation is started. In the mini game B, the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI make a jaunting confrontation, and if the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins, the notice icon displayed in the appearance area AS You can earn YI. In addition, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B may be started simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation display of a 1st decoration symbol, and may be started when the fluctuation display of a 2nd decoration symbol is started. Since the Janken confrontation here is a villager vs. panda and the giveaway is the notice icon YI of "box", according to the acquisition expectation shown in FIG. 118 (d), the probability of C (60%) Can be earned. That is, the villagers win with a probability of 60%.

  In FIG. 120 (A-8-1), a janiken confrontation animation is performed by the character of the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the fluctuation icon h0 corresponds to the type b of the villager It has changed to the icon of the mode when it was put out. On the other hand, the opponent icon TI is changed to the icon of the type c of the panda type (the type when the choki is released). As a result, the character of the villager of the variation icon h0 wins. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of the type a of the villager (a mode of standby), and the standby animation is executed.

  In FIG. 120 (A 9-1), the change icon h0 changes to an icon of the villager's type aspect f (an aspect when winning), and the opponent icon TI is a panda type aspect e (when defeated) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A 9-1), an animation is executed to celebrate that the character of the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 has won. Although the standby animation is continued at the first hold icon h11, when the result of the mini game is obtained, the animation according to the result may be executed. That is, even with the hold icon changed to the same character icon as the fluctuation icon h0, it is executed only for an animation that celebrates winning the mini game, an animation that regrets losing it, or an animation that celebrates winning the mini game May be Also, even with the hold icon changed to an icon of a different character instead of the same character as the fluctuation icon h0, an animation according to the result of the mini game may be executed similarly.

  In FIG. 120 (A10), when the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins, stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of "box 1" goes out of the appearance area AS, is once displayed large, moves to a certain position (stock position) in the stock area SS, and is displayed at the certain position (stock display) ) (See FIG. 120 (A. 11)). In FIG. 120 (A12), an animation is continued to celebrate that the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 has won, but the defeated opponent icon TI is an icon of the aspect a (type of standby) of the panda type. And the panda character is performing a wait animation (the default animation).

  In FIG. 120 (A13), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of lost decorative symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 4"- The "decorative 1" is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decorative patterns of the lost.

  In FIG. 120 (A14), the stop display is in progress (the final display is in progress), and in the fluctuation icon h0, the deletion animation is started while the animation for celebrating that the villager character has won is continued. The villager's character gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. FIG. 120 (A15) is also in the stop display mode (during the fixed display mode), and the fluctuation icon h0 has disappeared completely.

  The mini game B may end simultaneously with the end of the symbol variation display, or may end simultaneously with the end of the variation display of the first decorative symbol, or may end simultaneously with the end of the finalized display of the first decorative symbol. May be

  In FIG. 120 (A16), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A16), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started, and the first upper right symbol In the 2 pendings display, the number of pendings in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to “1”. Further, in FIG. 120 (A16), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first suspension icon h11 of the villager character, which has been displayed in the first stage hs1 so far, has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS and has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far Also, in the default display mode, the second hold icon h12 for holding for previewing advance notice is starting to move toward the first stage hs1.

  In FIG. 120 (A17), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the holding icon ends, and the variation icon h0 indicates the type a of the villager (a waiting mode). Icon is displayed. Further, in this example, the opponent who has played first is displayed as it is, and the opponent icon TI becomes an icon of a panda character. Therefore, it becomes villager vs. panda. However, the character of the opponent may change at each confrontation (at each symbol variation display). Furthermore, in this example, the match is played with the character (village character) whose reserve icon first changed, but the character may change each time the reserve is finished (shift movement). For example, it may change from a villager to a wolf, from a wolf to a Yoshimune, from a villager to a Yoshimune, or from a wolf to a villager. As described with reference to FIG. 118 (d), when the confrontation between Yoshimune and the panda is reached, the notice icon can be acquired with a probability of 100% regardless of the type of the notice icon. Further, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 120 (A17), the No. 1 area shown in FIG. Notice icon YI of 2 "red box" has appeared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A18), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region, and the rock-paper-scissors match of the mini game B to be the second time is also started. Since the second jangken confrontation is a villager vs. panda and the giveaway is the notice icon YI of "red box", according to the acquisition expectation shown in FIG. 118 (d), the probability of D (40%) Can be acquired by That is, the probability is lower than the first time, and the villager wins with a probability of 40%.

  In FIG. 120 (A 19-1), a janiken confrontation animation is performed by the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the fluctuation icon h0 corresponds to the type b of the villager type It has changed to the icon of the mode when it was put out. On the other hand, the opponent icon TI is changed to an icon of a type d of a panda type (a type when a par is put out). As a result, the panda character of the opponent icon TI wins.

  In FIG. 120 (A 20), the variation icon h0 changes to an icon of the villager type aspect e (a mode when defeated), and the opponent icon TI has a panda type aspect f (a type when winning In the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A21), the display animation of the villager's character and the exchange animation of the default display are started. . That is, at the same time as the character of the villager who has been the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 gradually disappears, the icon of the default display mode gradually appears. In other words, the replacement animation is a change animation of the display mode of the change icon h0. Also, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, since the player lost the rock-solid confrontation, the notice icon YI of the "red box" displayed in the appearance area AS can not be obtained, and the appearance appears with a frame surrounding the appearance area AS in FIG. The area AS itself gradually fades out to the right end of the screen, and the notice icon YI of "red box" also gradually disappears from the screen. In FIG. 120 (A22), the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

  In FIG. 120 (23), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"- The "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost.

  In FIG. 120 (A24), the pre-reading notice object holding which has been the first hold until now is digested, and the symbol variation display as the pre-reading object change is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A24), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start variable display, and a default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. In addition, there is no hold icon, and "0" is displayed for the 2nd number-of-holds display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 for both.

  In FIG. 120 (A25), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a conversation notice as a normal notice is started. It should be noted that while no other effects were performed during the period in which mini game B is being performed, even if it is a period in which mini game B is being performed, other effects such as conversational announcement etc. may also be performed. Good. The speech advance notice here is the same as the speech advance notice shown in FIG. 16 (10) to FIG. 16 (12). That is, when the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the statue of the lady on which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lady is displayed in the central region. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. On the other hand, the speaker's conversation image CI1 is not overlapped with the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in front. That is, although the notice icon YI continuously displayed in the stock area is displayed from before the conversation image CI1 of the lord, it overlaps with a part of the conversation image CI1 from the front side.

  It should be noted that the notice icon YI is a stock without being overlapped with the notice display even in the notice display (for example, the indication display of the super reach, etc.) performed using the full screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. You may continue to be displayed. Alternatively, on the contrary, the display of the notice effect performed using the entire screen may have a period in which it is overlapped and temporarily hidden. For example, if the notice icon YI is a display of notice effect using, the notice icon YI continues to be displayed in stock without being overlapped. Also on the user customization screen during symbol variation shown in FIG. 68 (93) etc., the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the bar display VB for volume adjustment or, conversely, the volume adjustment The bar display VB may be overlapped. Further, the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the display regarding the various errors described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116 or the warning, or conversely, the warning icon YI may be overlapped to the display regarding the error or the warning. You may wrap it. For example, if the importance of an error or warning is low or the relationship with fraud is low, the display of the notice icon YI has priority, and the notice icon YI continues to be displayed in stock without being overlapped. Good.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the conversation notice is updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation valid period It is composed of At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (A), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative pattern is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the wolf, but the notice icon YI displayed in stock is displayed in front of the conversation image CI2 of the wolf, and is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the wolf It has not been.

  Eventually, the operation effective period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 120 (A 27) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the operation effective period started.

  The timing in FIG. 120 (A 28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example shown in FIG. 120 step by step and a diagram showing a modification of the effect example.

  In FIG. 121 (A 29) continued from FIG. 120 (A 28), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period, the talk image CI2 of the bag is reach effect from the operation promotion notification image. It has changed to the word display of "reach it!" In addition, the character display of the notice such as "reach it!" May be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed also in the case of

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 121 (A30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the grandfather and the conversation image CI2 of the whistle are erased and the conversation announcement is finished, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to see There is.

  In FIG. 121 (A 31-1), reach effect is started, and the "decoration 6" shakes and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, in the reach state, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 121 (A 32), when used, the notice icon YI of the embodiment a which is the display mode in which the box is closed changes to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation in which the notice display YH pops out from inside is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "red change" of 7 red, and the notice display of "red change" is a display for giving notice that the display mode such as the hold icon or the change icon is changed in two steps. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates and the like, etc.) may be performed to give advance notice that the box is opened. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 121 (A33), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of the red "change in red" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 121 (A34), the variation icon change animation using the advance notice YH is started. In FIG. 121 (A34), the notice display YH of "change in red" is changed to the ball YHb of light in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 121 (35), the light ball YHb flies with a fluctuating icon h0 and strikes the fluctuating icon h0. In FIG. 121 (A36), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, which is the default display mode before the start of the animation after the fluctuation icon change animation ends, is No. 119 (a) of FIG. It has changed to the blue display mode described in 3. That is, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the normal notice.

  On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 121 (A 37), a display of normal reach effect is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 changed to the display mode of blue is continuously displayed. In FIG. 121 (A 38), the normal reach effect is finished, and the "decoration 5" which is not the "decoration 6" shakes and fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols is fluctuating.

  In FIG. 121 (A39), the display is stopped with the combination of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”, and in FIG. The fluctuation icon h0 changed to the blue display mode is continuously displayed until the definite display is started, and disappears when the definite display is started. The timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears may be before the finalized display.

  Then, the modification of the example of an effect of FIG. 120 (A 1) -FIG. 121 (A 40) demonstrated until now is demonstrated. In the following, differences from the examples of effects described above will be mainly described, and overlapping points may be omitted.

  The first modified example is the same up to FIG. 120 (A7), and as shown in FIG. 121 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 120 (A8-1), in this first modified example The character of the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 is the mode b when the gou is put out, while the character of the panda of the opponent icon TI is the manner d when the par is put out, the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 Lose the character of. In FIG. 121 (A 8-2-2), the variation icon h0 changes to an icon of the villager type aspect e (a mode when defeated), and the opponent icon TI is a panda type aspect f (winning It changes to the icon of the mode when it did, and the loss production (animation that sads about losing) is performed.

  In FIG. 121 (A-8-2-3) in which the first decorative symbol is being variably displayed, the notice icon YI displayed in the emergence area AS appears as the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 loses. Both the villager character of the variation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI disappear from the AS, and the standby animation (default animation) is executed. As a result, the notice icon YI is not displayed in the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 121 (A 8-2-4), the symbol variation display is finished, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped, and in FIG. 120 (A 8-2-5), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped. Being displayed (fixed display), the character of the villager with the fluctuation icon h0 gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0 by the deletion animation. Also in FIG. 121 (A8-2-6), the stop display is in progress (the final display is in progress), and the fluctuation icon h0 completely disappears.

  Thereafter, as in the case of FIG. 119 (A 16) to FIG. 120 (A 19-1), a second jaunt battle is performed, and the villager character of the variation icon h0 loses even in the second jaunt competition. In FIG. 121 (A8-2-7), as in the case of FIG. 121 (A8-2-2), a losing effect of the character of the villager with the variation icon h0 is performed. In FIG. 121 (A8-2-8), as in FIG. 120 (A21), the exchange animation of the display mode of the character of the villager and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Go. In addition to the appearance area AS, the notice icon YI of "red box" gradually disappears from the screen. After a while, as shown in FIG. 121 (A 8-2-9), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the lost design is stopped and displayed, in FIG. 121 (A 8-2-10), the pre-reading is performed. The symbol variation display as the target variation is started.

  The first modification described above is an example in which the mini game B is a so-called gusset.

  Subsequently, a second modification will be described. In FIG. 121 (A 22), when the notice icon YI which has been stocked is used, the notice icon YI is changed to the mode d (the box is opened), but in this second modification, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. Is concerned.

  The second modification is the same up to FIG. 121 (A 31-1), and in FIG. 121 (A 31-2-1), the state in which reach effect is started as in FIG. 121 (A 31-1). It is. When the reach effect is started, in the second modified example, as shown in FIG. 121 (31-2-2), an operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked advance notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image prompting to operate the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is comprised by meter MT. In addition, the timing of FIG. 121 (A 31-2-2) is before the start of the operation effective period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation effective period. It may be displayed at the same time as the start of.

  The operation effective period is started at the timing of FIG. 121 (A 31-2-3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 121 (A 31-2-4) has a certain amount of the above-mentioned operation effective period. It is shown by the display mode when time passes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 121 (31-2-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 121 (A 31-2-6), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the above-mentioned effective period of operation, the notice icon YI which is the aspect a which is the display aspect in which the box is closed is a box It changes to the aspect d which is an open display aspect, and the animation (box open animation) which notice display YH pops out of a box is displayed. The subsequent examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 121 (A 33).

  Here, the operation prompting notification image configured by the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed after the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0, or may not be displayed when the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed. In addition, the deletion animation of the operation promotion notification image may be started or executed simultaneously with the box opening animation, the deletion animation may be started or performed first, or the box opening animation is started first It may be performed.

  The change of the notice icon YI to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation is performed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be performed if the validity period has expired. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated, the box opening animation may be different depending on whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the box-opening animation may be the same animation regardless of the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the change of the advance notice icon YI to the mode d may be performed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

  FIG. 122 is a view showing third to sixth modified examples of the effect example of FIG. 120 (A1) to FIG. 121 (A40).

  In the third modified example, the advance notice icon YI is not the icon of the “box”, but the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. 5 “button” icon. The icon of this "button" may be displayed from the beginning in the appearance area AS, or may be an icon changed from other icons in the appearance area AS, or from other icons in the stock area It may be a changed icon.

  The notice icon YI of “button” shown in FIG. 122 (A 31-3-1) is an icon of a mode representing that it is invalid even if the chance button 136 is operated since there is no remaining time display meter. . That is, this is an aspect of only the button 136a.

  In FIG. 122 (A 31-3-2), the form of the notice icon YI of “button” is changed to the form b in which the remaining time display meter MT is added. However, the remaining time display meter MT is full display and is before the start of the operation effective period. The remaining time display meter MT may be in a non-display mode.

  In FIG. 122 (A 31-3-3), the operation effective period is started, and in FIG. 122 (A 31-3-4), the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced.

  The timing in FIG. 122 (31-3-5) is within the above-mentioned operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 122 (A 31-3-6), the mode of the notice icon YI of the “button” corresponds to the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period. In the same figure (A 31-3-7), the effect image (smoke image) disappears, and a notice display of red "red change" appears. The change in the form of the notice icon YI after the chance button 136 is operated is the display of animation (post-operation animation). The subsequent examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 121 (A 33).

  The change to the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) of the notice icon YI of the “button” may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may also be executed when the operation effective period has elapsed. Furthermore, in the configuration that is also executed when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated, the post-operation animation may be different depending on whether the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the post-operation animation may be the same animation regardless of the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the change of the advance notice icon YI to the mode d may be performed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

  In the fourth modification, the advance notice changes the display mode of the hold icon instead of the change icon in parallel with the progress of the mini game.

  The fourth modification is the same up to FIG. 120 (A 18), and FIG. 122 (A 19-2-1) is the same as FIG. The panda character of the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-2), in the state where the mini game B is still continuing, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used. That is, the notice icon YI of the mode a, which is a display mode in which the box is closed, changes to the mode d, which is a display mode in which the box is opened. The notice display YH appearing here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. This is a notice display of the "change" of the default color of 6, which is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a pending icon change animation using the notice display YH is started.

  In FIG. 122 (A19-2-3), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A20), a losing effect of the character of the villager with the variation icon h0 is performed. Further, in FIG. 122 (A 19-2-3), the notice icon YI used in the middle of the mini game B has disappeared in the middle of the mini game B, and “change” of the default color is caused by the suspension icon change animation. The preliminary announcement display YH changes to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c, as shown in FIG. 121 (A34), and the first hold icon h11 representing that the light ball YHb represents a hold for the prefetch target. It flies with the aim, and it collides with the first hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-4), while the effect of the villager's character in the mini game B continues to lose, the pending icon change animation ends, and the first pending icon was the default display mode before the start of the animation. The display mode of h11 is No. 1 in FIG. It has changed to the display mode of the white blink described in 2. That is, the display mode of the hold icon h11 indicating the hold of the pre-reading advance notice object is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. Thereafter, as in the case of FIG. 120 (A), the exchange animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. In addition to the appearance area AS, the notice icon YI of "red box" gradually disappears from the screen. After the symbol variation display is ended and the combination of the lost design symbols is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display as the pre-reading target variation is started.

  In the fifth modification, the advance notice changes the combination pattern of the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol.

  The fifth modification is the same up to FIG. 120 (A 18), and FIG. 122 (A 19-3-1) is the same as FIG. The panda character of the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-2), while the mini game B is still continuing, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used. That is, the notice icon YI of the mode a, which is a display mode in which the box is closed, changes to the mode d, which is a display mode in which the box is opened. The notice display YH appearing here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. It is an advance notice of 12 "chance eyes" and is displayed once in the right symbol display area 208c. Here, the pre-reading notice display of "the chance eye" is a display for giving notice of occurrence of the pre-reading notice in which the combination of the chance eye is fixedly displayed at the time of the final display of the first decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of the “chance of eye” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. As shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-4), the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is a right symbol display area 208c for a while after the box of the notice icon YI is opened (appeared). Is displayed on. On the other hand, since the player loses the Janken confrontation, the exchange animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. In addition to the appearance area AS, the notice icon YI of "red box" gradually disappears from the screen. In FIG. 122 (19-3-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In this example, after the variable display of the first decorative symbol changes to a low speed, chance eye endorsement production is started, but chance eye eye end production starts immediately after the notice display YH of "chance eye" appears. It may be done. As shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-6), after the variable display of the first decorative symbol changes to a low speed, the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is a ball of light YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. Has changed. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-7), the ball YHb of the light flies with the first decoration pattern changing at a low speed and flies, and collides with the decoration pattern of the middle pattern display area 208b. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-8), the effect image EF2 is displayed on all of the three decorative symbols moving at a low speed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-9). The first decorative pattern is swinging fluctuation "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" which is a chance eye. In addition, chance eyes of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are "decoration 2"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 6" or "decoration 3"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7" Similar to the chance eyes, it is a weak chance eye that is relatively hard to hit big in the target change in the look-ahead (following symbol fluctuation display), and the strong chance eye that is relatively easy to hit big is "decoration 7"-"decoration 1" -"Decoration 1", "decoration 3"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 8", "decoration 4"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 8". In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-10), an effect image EF3 notifying that the chance eye of “decoration 1”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 5” is stopped and displayed is displayed. In 3-11), the chance eyes of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are stopped and displayed.

  In the sixth modified example, No. 1 in FIG. In the notice display YH of “chance” of 2, the preview notice in which the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped is combined with the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 122 (A 19-4-1) shows a state in which the panda character of the opponent icon TI has won in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B. In FIG. 122 (A 19-4-2), reach effect is started with the first decorative symbol, and “decoration 6” is fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. It should be noted that the display mode of the villager's character has been changed to the default display mode and the opponent icon TI has disappeared since the player lost the battle. In addition to the appearance area AS, the notice icon YI of "red box" is also disappearing. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-3), in the reach state, the notice icon YI is used, and the notice display YH of “chance” appears. That is, the notice display YH of the "chance" has appeared after the start of the reach, and the notice display YH of the "chance" here increases the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display currently performed. It corresponds to a kind of The symbol variation display currently performed is the symbol variation display of one time before the symbol variation display of the previewed preview target variation, and the notice display YH of the "chance" is different from the symbol variation display of the previewed preview target variation It corresponds to a regular notice of symbol variation display. After the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 122 (19-4-4). The notice icon YI may disappear in the deletion animation, or may disappear in a moment without using the deletion animation. Further, in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-5), with the reach state, the notice display YH of the "chance" has disappeared.

  Then, in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-6), the pending change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped at the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The pending change symbol HHZ has a red symbol and a blue symbol, and when the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of one of the displayed pending icons (here, the first pending icon h11) is displayed. When the blue hold change symbol is temporarily stopped by promoting two stages, the display mode of the hold icon is promoted by one stage. In FIG. 122 (A 19-4-6), the blue holding change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped, and thereafter, the holding change animation as shown in FIG. 106 (D 17) is started, and in the default display mode A certain first hold icon h11 changes to the second display mode (display mode of white blinking). Note that the pending change symbol HHZ is a prefetch notice for the first pending icon h11.

  FIG. 123 is a view showing seventh to tenth modified examples of the effect example of FIG. 120 (A1) to FIG. 121 (A40).

  The seventh modification is the same as in FIG. 121 (A 30-1), and FIG. 123 (A 31-4-1) is the same as in FIG. Reach effect has been started in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 123 (A 31-4-2), the advance notice icon YI is used after the start of the reach, and the No. in FIG. The notice display YH of 2 "chance" appears. The notice display YH of the "chance" that appears here is a normal notice that raises the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol change display, which is the pre-read notice target change. In addition, after the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 123 (A 31-4-3).

  The eighth modified example is an example in which one of the hold icons changes to the opponent icon TI. That is, as shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-1), when winning of the hold (the third hold) targeted for the advance notice, the hold icon representing the hold before the advance notice target hold is the opponent Change to icon TI. In addition, a holding icon representing a hold prior to the pre-read advance notice target hold also changes to the character fighting with the character of the opponent icon TI (here, the character of the villager). In the eighth modified example, the first hold icon h11 is changed to the opponent icon TI. That is, it is changed to the icon of the panda character type. In addition, the second hold icon h12 is changed to an icon of the villager character type. In FIG. 123 (A3-2-2), symbol variation display ends, and in FIG. 123 (A3-2-3), movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the right base of the effect icon display area DIS In the icon bIr, the effect image EF1 is displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (A3-2-4), the variation icon h0 becomes the opponent icon TI, and the first hold icon h11 is the character fighting the character of the opponent icon TI (here, the villager Character icon). Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, an appearance area AS surrounded by a frame appears, and a notice icon YI which can be acquired when the mini game B wins a win is displayed It is done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (A3-5-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the game of the mini game B is also started. In FIG. 123 (A3-2-6), a janiken confrontation animation is performed by the panda character of the opponent icon TI which is the change icon h0 and the villager character of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 Villager's character wins. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (A3-2-7), an animation celebrating that the villager character of the first hold icon h11 has won is started, and the same FIG. In 2-8), stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started. In FIG. 123 (3-3-9), the notice icon YI is displayed at the stock position.

  In FIG. 123 (A3-2-10), the mini game B ends, and in the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area HIS, the display animation of the character of the villager and the exchange animation of the display mode of the default are started. There is. In addition, on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS, the exchange animation of the icon of the panda character and the fluctuation icon of the default display mode is started. Here, each of the replacement animations may be an animation returning to the display mode before changing to the villager character or the panda character, or another display mode different from the display mode before the change. It may be a replacement animation. For example, even if the display mode before the change is the default display mode, the display mode may be replaced with the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice or the normal advance notice. In FIG. 123 (3-2-11), both the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode. Also, the notice icon YI remains displayed in stock. This notice icon YI is a notice icon in FIG. 123 (A3-2-11) in which the second hold is the previous notice, and is used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold. . However, it may be used in the symbol variation display currently performed, and may be used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the 1st suspension which was an icon of a villager's character.

  The ninth modification is the same as the eighth modification up to the middle. That is, the same is true for FIG. 123 (3-2-7), and FIG. 123 (3-2-8b1) is also the same as FIG. 123 (3-2-8). In the ninth modification, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS is once displayed large, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving into the stock area SS, and the display mode until then is default. It is replaced with the second hold icon h12 representing the target hold of the pre-reading advance notice and is stock-displayed in the hold icon display area HIS (FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8 b2) to FIG. -2-8b3)). It can also be seen that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed to the display mode of the advance notice icon YI. Also, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS may move to the stock icon display area HIS after moving to the stock area SS. In addition, the reserved icon display area HIS may double as the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 123 (3-2-8b4), the reserve is digested, and the notice icon YI replaced with the second reserve icon h12 becomes the variation icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. ing. In FIG. 123 (3-3-8b5), the notice icon YI which is the fluctuation icon h0 is used in the pedestal hs0 and changes to the aspect d in which the box is opened, and from among The notice display YH of 2 "chance" appears. Since FIG. 123 (A3-2-8b5) is before the start of the reach, the notice display YH of the "chance" here indicates that the reach effect more than the normal reach is performed in the symbol variation display currently performed. It will be displayed to give notice.

  The notice icon YI is moved to the pedestal hs0 while being displayed in the appearance area AS or once displayed in the stock area SS, and is replaced with the change icon h0 during symbol variation display of the preview notice target pending. Alternatively, the symbol may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS while the symbol is being displayed or stopped before the symbol change display of the prefetch notice target hold, and may be replaced with the hold icon of the prefetch notice target hold.

  Further, the notice icon YI may be used in the state of the hold icon, and the notice display YH of the advance notice may appear. Also in this case, the notice icon YI is displayed in the appearance area AS or once displayed in the stock area SS, and then the symbol change display prior to the symbol change display of the pre-reading notice object pending is displayed or the stop display During the process, the user may move to the hold icon display area HIS and replace it with the hold icon for the pre-read notice target hold.

  The tenth modification is also the same as the eighth modification up to the middle. That is, FIG. 123 (3-2-7) is the same, and FIG. 123 (3-2-8c1) is also the same as FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8). Also in this tenth modification, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS is temporarily displayed in a large size, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving to the stock area SS. Then, in the tenth modified example, the notice icon YI is replaced with the first suspension icon h11 of the villager's icon who has played the mini game B. In other words, it replaces the hold icon different from the hold icon representing the pre-read notice object hold. In some cases, a plurality of preview icons may be acquired, and in this case, the number of acquisition icons may be replaced with the number of reserved icons. That is, one notice icon YI may be replaced with one hold icon. Alternatively, a plurality of notice icons Yi may be collectively replaced with one hold icon, and a plurality of notice icons replaced with the hold icon may have a number indicating the number of pieces, or the hold icon A plurality of advance notice icons replaced by may be displayed in a color representing the plurality of pieces. Furthermore, the notice icon YI may be replaced with the change icon h0.

  In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c3), although the character "I did not say" of the animation celebrating the mini game victory remains, the first suspension icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. ing. Note that the panda character of the opponent icon TI, which is the variation icon h0, remains in the mode e, and the character “I did it” disappears at the timing when it changes to the mode a. In addition, the character of "I did it" may disappear at the same time as the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI, and before the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced by the notice icon YI It may be gone. For example, it may disappear at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (3-2-8c2).

  In FIG. 123 (3-3-8c4), the notice icon YI replaced with the first hold icon h11 becomes the fluctuation icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The symbol change display performed in FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c4) is the symbol change display prior to the target change of the advance notice. During the execution of this symbol variation display, an animation for stocking a notice icon is started. Although the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 123 (3-3-8c4) is the notice icon YI, it is not a notice icon used in the target change of the advance notice. In the animation started here, it becomes an animation for stocking the notice icon used in the target change of the advance notice. The fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 123 (3-3-8c4) functions as an icon for confirming the stock of the notice icon used in the target change of the advance notice.

  In FIG. 123 (3-3-8c5), the display mode of the change icon h0 changes, and an effect image EF4 notifying that the notice icon used in the change of the object of the advance notice is stocked is displayed. It should be noted that some icon is beginning to be faintly visible behind this effect image EF4. In FIG. 123 (3-2-8c6), the effect image EF4 pops out of the fluctuation icon h0 and moves to the stock area SS. On the other hand, the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the default display mode. The default display mode is a display mode when the change icon h0 is started to be displayed as the hold icon (third hold icon h13). That is, although the display mode changed in various ways after the start of display, the display mode before the change is returned. In addition, it may be displayed in display modes other than the display mode before changing.

  In FIG. 123 (3-3-8c5), the effect image EF4 is displayed as the notice icon YI used in the target change of the advance notice in the stock area SS.

  The notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c3) may be used before it becomes a change icon. In addition, the animation for moving the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 to the second hold icon h12 representing the pre-read notice target hold is performed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the symbol variation in which the notice icon YI is used The display may be notified in advance. After FIG. 123 (3-2-8c7), the process continues to FIG. 120 (22).

  FIG. 124 is a view showing another modified example of the effect example of FIG. 120 (A1) to FIG. 121 (A40).

  In the eleventh modification, the variation icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are areas dedicated to the mini game. This eleventh modification is the same as in FIG. 120 (A2), and in FIG. 124 (A 3-3-1), the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS disappears, and the fluctuation icon display area CIS and the effect icon The display area DIS is connected. Hereinafter, the area in which the variation icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are connected is collectively referred to as a mini game area MGS. In the mini game area MGS shown in FIG. 124 (3-3-1), an appearance area AS which is a first area is displayed surrounded by a frame. Further, in the variation icon display area CIS of the mini game exclusive area MGS, the panda character of the opponent icon TI is displayed in the form a. Here, the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the currently displayed symbol fluctuation display is changed to the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In the back of the appearance area AS, an entrance through which the character enters and exits is provided.

  In FIG. 124 (3-3-2), the symbol variation display is ended, but the panda character of the opponent icon TI continues to be displayed by the standby animation. That is, in this example, when the change icon h0 is changed to the opponent icon TI, it is continuously displayed as the opponent icon TI even if the corresponding symbol change display is finished. In other words, the icon of the panda character plays both roles of the variation icon h0 and the opponent icon TI during the symbol variation display, but plays only the role of the opponent icon TI when the symbol variation display is finished. It will be. Note that the icon of the panda character only plays the role of the opponent icon TI, and the variation icon h0 may be erased.

  In FIG. 124 (3-3-3), the first change icon h11, which is the character icon of the villager who was displayed in the change icon display area HIS and symbol variation display has been started, is directed to the mini game area MGS. Start moving. In FIG. 124 (3-3-4), the character icon of the villager, who has been the first hold icon h11 so far, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area CIS in the mini game area MGS. . On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which was the fluctuation icon in the previous symbol fluctuation display, continues to be displayed as the opponent icon TI, and the villager vs. panda janken confrontation is started (see FIG. 124 (3-3-5. )). When the rock fight is started, the notice icon YI appears in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI may appear at the same time as the start of the confrontation, or the notice icon YI may appear before the start of the confrontation.

  In FIG. 124 (A3-3-6), the character of the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 wins, and in FIG. 124 (A3-3-7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is displayed. It has been started. Also, an animation has been started to celebrate winning the Janken confrontation. In FIG. 124 (3-3-8), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and in FIG. 124 (3-3-9), the animation for celebrating winning the rock-paper-scissors match ends. When this animation ends, as shown in FIG. 124 (3-3-10), the icon of the villager character, which is the variation icon h0, exits from the entrance provided at the back of the appearance area AS, and then the symbol The variable display ends (FIG. 124 (3-3-11)). The icon of the villager character, which is the variation icon h0, may exit from the entrance provided at the back of the appearance area AS after the symbol variation display is finished. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which is the opponent icon TI, continues to be displayed until the end of all the fights. However, it may be replaced with the character of the swordsman character on the way. The exit timing of the villager's character icon may be simultaneous with the symbol variation display. Also, if the rock-paper-scissors match continues after this, the icon of the villager's character may be displayed in stock in the mini game area MGS until all the rock-scissors show-off is completed without leaving. Note that the opponent icon TI and / or the icon of the character that is the variation icon h0 that has exited from the entrance may enter the entrance. In addition, an animation may be performed in which the opponent icon TI exits when the mini game ends.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 124 (A 9-2-1) and FIG. 124 (A 9-2-2), the fluctuation icon h0 corresponds to No. 1 in FIG. The icon of the Yoshimune character shown in 19 is used, and the opponent icon TI is an icon of a panda character. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), the player wins the fight with a probability of 100%, and further, in this example, the notice icon of the "rainbow box" of the big hit decision is displayed in the appearance area AS. In FIG. 124 (9-2-2), the symbol variation display is ended while the notice icon of the "rainbow box" is displayed in stock. The notice icon of the "rainbow box" has a high degree of confidence in the big hit and functions as a prefetch notice. In addition, the notice icon of "a rainbow box" may function as a notice of the change concerned.

  Moreover, in the box-shaped notice icon, the notice display (item) contained in the box is more advantageous for the player in the case of the “red box” than the “box” (for example, a notice that tends to develop into a super reach) In this case, the "gold box" is more advantageous to the player than the "red box". Therefore, only when a box-shaped notice icon is displayed, and depending on the color of the box-shaped notice icon, whether the notice display actually appears or not, if the notice display appears, how advantageous the notice is It can be estimated in advance whether it is a display. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 117 (a), since the reliability of the big hit is also determined by the color of the box-shaped notice icon, the color of the box-shaped notice icon indicates the ease of the big hit and the game It shows both the ease of acquisition of the advance notice which is advantageous to the person. It should be noted that the display mode of the advance notice icon may indicate only the ease of obtaining an advantageous advance notice, or only the ease of winning a big hit.

  The modified example shown in FIG. 124 (A3-4) is an example in which there is also a case where the hold icon for the pre-reading advance notice object hold is also used for the mini game. That is, in FIG. 124 (3-4), the third hold icon h13 representing the pre-read advance notice target hold is also changed to the icon of the villager's character, and participates in the Janken confrontation. As a result, if the player wins the battle, there may be a case where a notice display used during execution of the symbol change display of the previewing notice target hold is obtained. In addition, the hold icon representing a hold behind the pre-read advance notice target hold may also be changed to an icon that can participate in the mini game. In this case, when the mini game is played by changing the pause icon for the preview advance notice object hold to a variation animation, the mini game is ended until the end of the mini game or until the symbol variation display of the prefetch notice object hold is ended. It may be an aspect of an icon capable of participating in the game, and thereafter, may return to the original display aspect. Also, after the mini game (for example, mini game B) is finished, the icon does not change to a dedicated icon that can participate in the mini game (for example, mini game B), but a new mini game (of the same type Even if it may change to a dedicated icon that can participate in a mini game (for example, mini game B) or a different type of mini game (for example, mini game A) Good.

  The modified example shown in FIG. 124 (3-5) is an example in which the hold icon displayed as an icon capable of participating in the mini game is not limited to one type of icon. That is, in FIG. 124 (3-4), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as an icon of the kind of the rose character, and the second hold icon h12 is a No. 1 icon shown in FIG. It is displayed as an icon of 18 villager character types.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 124 (A3-6), the previously digested holding icon displayed as an icon capable of participating in the mini game is displayed as an icon also capable of participating in the mini game. This is an example in which at least a part may overlap with the retention icon to be digested later. That is, in FIG. 124 (3-6), the first hold icon h11 is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. The 19th icon of the Yoshimune character type is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is also displayed with the same icon of the Yoshimune character type, and the back foot of the icon of the Yoshimune character which is the first hold icon h11 is 21 is overlapped with the forefoot of the icon of the Yoshimune character that is 21 reserved icon h12.

  In addition, the relationship of the overlap may be reversed, or a reserve icon with high reliability of the big hit may be displayed in the foreground. Furthermore, the displayed pending icon may suggest the expectation of the pre-reading target change. For example, in the case where two icons are displayed, it may be easier for the player to hit the jackpot due to the pre-reading target fluctuation than when only one icon of the icon of the Yoshimune character is displayed.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 124 (31-5-1) to FIG. 124- (31-5-3), the cursor CS is used as the notice icon YI displayed in stock. FIG. 124 (A 31-5-1) is the same state as FIG. 121 (A 31-1), and FIG. 124 (A 31-5-2) is a notice of the embodiment a which is a display mode in which the box is closed. The display of the cursor CS points to the icon YI. The display of the cursor CS is a display for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now on. After FIG. 124 (A 31-5-3), the process continues to FIG. 121 (A 33). When the display of the cursor CS points, the notice icon YI may be always used or may not be used. In addition, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates and vibrates, etc.) for giving a notice in advance that the box will open may be used in combination with the display of the cursor CS, and further, a second modification will be shown. As shown in FIG. 121 (A 31-2-2), the display of the operation promotion notification image may be used in combination.

  In FIG. 124 (A 31-5-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, and instead, an open box animation is displayed, and the box changes to the mode d, which is the open display mode, and the notice display YH from the box It is jumping out.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 124 (A 30-2-1) to the same figure (A 30-2-4), an effect of giving a prior notice that the box is opened is executed. FIG. 124 (A 30-2-1) is in the same state as FIG. 121 (A 30-1), and in FIG. 124 (A 30-2-2), the box icon displayed as the notice icon YI is An animation effect that vibrates with a rattle is being performed. By this animation presentation, it is told that the notice icon YI may be used. Note that this animation effect is started before the first temporary stop is performed in the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be started simultaneously with the first temporary stop, or may be started after the first temporary stop. Moreover, this animation production may be started before reach production is started, may be started simultaneously with reach production, and may be started after reach production is started. Furthermore, when the box-shaped notice icon is used, this animation presentation may be an animation that is always executed or an animation that may not be executed. In addition, this animation presentation may be performed across continuous symbol variation displays. That is, it may be executed even during symbol fluctuation stop, or may be temporarily stopped during symbol fluctuation stop, and this animation effect may be started when symbol fluctuation display is started again. Alternatively, the animation effect may be started and ended within a period of one symbol variation display, and may not be executed across continuous symbol variation displays.

  In FIG. 124 (A 30-2-3), the reach state is reached, but the animation effect in which the icon of the box vibrates is continued, and during the reach state, this animation effect is switched to the box open animation effect The notice icon YI shown in FIG. 124 (A30-2-4) changes to a mode d which is a display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH pops out of the box. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 121 (A33).

  In addition, the effect which announces beforehand that a box opens may be performed over a reach effect like this example, and it is not necessary to straddle a reach effect. In addition, if the effect of giving notice in advance that the box will open is executed, the box of the notice icon YI may be always opened or may not be opened.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 124 (A 30-3-1) to FIG. 124 (A 30-3-4), there is shown an example in which a modification of the effect of giving advance notice that the box will open is executed. In this example, the animation effect in which the icon of the box vibrates as squeezing indicates whether the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is near or far depending on the size of the vibration. In other words, if the vibration is weak as shown in FIG. 124 (A 30-3-2), the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is far, and the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is closer. It changes to strong vibration as shown in -3-3). In other words, the vibration becomes larger as the use timing approaches. In FIG. 124 (A30-3-4), when the vibration is maximized, the box of the notice icon YI is opened, and the notice display YH pops out from the inside. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 121 (A33).

  The strength of the vibration may indicate the reliability with which the notice icon YI is used, and the advantage of the notice display contained therein. That is, the higher the reliability or the advantage, the larger the vibration may be.

  FIG. 124 (A 30-3-4 ′) shows an example in which the box of the advance notice icon YI is not opened even though the vibration is maximized. As described above, in the case of the animation effect in which the icon of the box vibrates in a rattling direction, there may be a case in which a caster effect is performed. The notice icon YI disappears when the display of the lost design is stopped.

  Subsequently, an example in which a plurality of advance notice icons are stocked will be described.

  FIG. 125 shows an example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed by using the plurality of stock notice icons stored, and the display mode of the variation icon changes. FIG.

  The description here will be focused on the differences from the effect example of FIG. 120 (A1) to FIG. 121 (A40) in which only one notice icon is stocked.

  In FIG. 125 (1 1-1), as in FIG. 120 (A 4), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the lost design symbols. ("Decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of decorative symbols of lost. The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 125 (1-1) are both No. 119 (a) in FIG. It changes to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. In addition, the third hold icon h13 indicating the target hold of the prefetch notice is a default display mode.

  In FIG. 125 (2) after the start of the symbol variation display, as in FIG. 120 (A 7), the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is a mode a of the type of pant as the opponent icon TI. The icon of “box” is displayed, and the notice icon YI of “box” is displayed in the appearance area AS which is the first area. Furthermore, a stock area SS which is a second area is provided above the emergence area AS, and is an area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 125 (1-2). In the stock area SS in this example, a first stock position SS1, a second stock position SS2, and a third stock position SS3 are provided, and a part of the third stock position SS3 overlaps with a part of the emergence area AS. ing.

  In FIG. 125 (i), a janiken confrontation animation of the mini game B is performed in the same manner as FIG. 120 (i), and the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 is victorious. In FIG. 125 (i), an animation is performed to celebrate that the villager character of the variation icon h0 has won, and in FIG. 125 (i), it is displayed in the appearance area AS, FIG. 117 (a) No. shown in The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 125 (b)) in the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 125 (6), as in FIG. 120 (15), the symbol variation display is finished, the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost is in the stop display (during the definite display), and the variation icon h0 is also off.

  In FIG. 125 (7) after symbol variation display has been started, the second game, mini game B, is started. Further, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 125 (7), No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. In FIG. 125 (i), a janiken confrontation animation of the mini game B is performed, and the character of the villager with the fluctuation icon h0 is giving a second victory. In FIG. 125 (i), an animation is executed to celebrate that the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 has won, and in FIG. 125 (i), it is displayed in the emergence area AS, FIG. 117 (a) No. shown in The notice icon YI of “1” “box” comes out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. In the following FIG. 125 (11), the second notice icon YI of the "box" is displayed at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 125 (2)) in the stock area SS. That is, the notice icon YI newly stocked is displayed under the notice icon YI stocked one before. The distance between the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 is a distance less than the height of one advance notice icon. In addition, the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 may not be provided, and the free space may be randomly stocked. When the first notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is used (the stock area SS is released) before the third notice icon YI is stocked. Case), the third notice icon YI may be stocked at the first stock position SS1.

  In FIG. 125 (12), as in FIG. 120 (23), the symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 125 (13), as in FIG. 120 (A 24), symbol variation display to be a target change is started, and in FIG. 125 (I 14-1), as in FIG. Anticipation of conversation as is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (14-1), a hallmark conversation image CI1 is displayed in the central region. The two notice icons YI in the stock area SS overlap from a front side to a part of the image picture CI1 of the lady. As shown in FIG. 125 (15), the first preview icon YI (the preview icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) previously stocked is displayed after the display of the conversation image CI1 of the main character. The first notice icon YI used is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “reach” is popping out of the box. The notice display YH of this "reach" also overlaps from a front side to a part of the Tonosama's conversation image CI1. The notice display YH of "reach" at this timing is a display for giving notice that the reach effect more than the normal reach is performed by the symbol variation display currently performed.

  In FIG. 125 (16), the conversation announcement is updated as in FIG. 120 (36). In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (A), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. The first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, has not yet been deleted in FIG. 125 (16), but has been deleted in FIG. 125 (17). The notice display “H” of “reach” is still displayed. Even in the same figure (17), the operation effective period has not started. Thus, the first notice icon YI may be deleted before the start of the operation effective period, or may be deleted simultaneously with the start of the operation effective period, and is deleted after the operation effective period is started. May be

  Eventually, the operation effective period starts, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 125 (18) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the operation effective period started.

  The timing in FIG. 125 (i) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

  In FIG. 125 (i), in the same manner as FIG. 120 (i), in response to the chance button 136 being pressed within the operation effective period, the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow is the current line from the operation promotion notification image. It is changing to the character display of "reach it!" Which predicts that the reach production is started in the symbol variation display being done. Therefore, the same thing (that the reach effect is started with the symbol variation display currently performed) is also notified by the notice (here, the conversation image CI2 of a whistle) different from the notice display YH of “reach”. It will be. In addition, when two types of notices are given as described above, one notice may be a notice having a higher reliability than the other notice. Alternatively, occurrence of normal reach may be notified by the notice display “H” of “reach” displayed first, and occurrence of super reach may be notified in the conversation notice displayed later. By giving notice in such a time series, it may appear that the effect (reach type) is promoted. Alternatively, on the contrary, the occurrence of super reach may be notified by the notice display “H” of “reach” displayed first, and the occurrence of normal reach may be notified in the notice of the conversation displayed later. ) May appear to be demoted. However, since it is a notice about reach production within the same change, there are also cases where either is better. Also, for example, when the notice display YH gives notice of "reach" and the conversation notice displays "continuing" giving notice of the pseudo-series effect, the pseudo-series notice (for example, the pseudo-series symbol stops after the reach occurs) ) Can occur, and it is possible to give notice that the pseudo-series effect is started.

  In addition, even if the pseudo-continuous notice is performed twice by the notice display YH and the other notice within one division (the period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the temporary stop for the pseudo continuous) during the symbol change display, the pseudo-run 1 It may be configured to perform only once (i.e., only one temporary stop), or may be configured to generate pseudo-trains (temporary stop occurs) the number of times the advance has been made.

  As described above, by combining the notice display YH and the notice by the other effects, it is possible to perform the promotion effect and the demotion effect within one symbol variation display. For example, in the pseudo-series effect, the promotion effect can be performed as the number of pseudo-sequences increases. For example, it is possible to give notice of the third display mode in the first change of the pseudo repeat number, and give notice of the fifth display mode in the second change of the pseudo repeat number. It should be noted that the third display mode may be notified in the second change of the pseudo run number, and further, the second display mode may be announced in the second change of the pseudo run number as a demotion effect. Good. In addition, in the case of not being a pseudo-series effect, in a single symbol variation display, it is possible to first give a notice of the third display mode and then give a notice of the fifth display mode, or conversely, first Alternatively, the fifth display mode may be notified, and then the third display mode may be notified.

  Note that the character display of the notice such as “reach it!” In the introductory conversation image CI2 is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. However, it may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated.

  In FIG. 125 (i 22), the same as in FIG. 121 (i 30-1), the talk image CI1 of the lady and the talk image CI2 of the whistle are deleted and the notice of the conversation is finished, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to see There is. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the whistle may simultaneously disappear, or the conversation image CI1 of the honor displayed on the far side may disappear first, or the whistle displayed on the near side The conversation image CI2 of may disappear first.

  In FIG. 125 (i), the reach effect is started as predicted, and the "decor 6" is fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Before long, in the reach state, the second stocked notice icon YI is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 125 (24), the box of the notice icon YI is opened, and the notice display YH of “change” pops out of the box. In this example, the notice icons YI are used in the order in which the notice icons YI are stocked, but the notice icons YI may be used regardless of the stock order. For example, the notice icon YI in which the notice display YH having a high degree of advantage appears may be used earlier or later. Also, the higher the degree of reliability according to the type of the notice icon YI may be used earlier or may be used later. In addition, here, the notice display YH of the “change” that has appeared is a temporary stop right symbol (here, it overlaps with “decoration 6”, and it is difficult to view compared to the case where it does not overlap. The notice display YH of the “change” is overlapped from the front to the right symbol. This is not the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1, but the second stock position SS2. It is related that it is the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon Y2 being stocked.

  In FIG. 125 (i), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of "Change" is still displayed. In the following FIG. 125 (26), the fluctuating icon change animation using the preview display YH is started. In FIG. 125 (i), the notice display “H” of “change” changes to a ball YHb of light while overlapping with the temporarily stopped right symbol. In FIG. 125 (i), the ball YHb of the light is flying with the fluctuating icon h0, and is striking the fluctuating icon h0. Also here, the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH has been released affects the light ball YHb at a position different from the example shown in FIG. 121 (A 34) to FIG. The trajectory is flying with a fluctuating icon h0 aiming at it. However, even if the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH is released is different, the notice display YH is released to the same position (for example, the position of the notice display YH of “change” shown in FIG. It may be changed to a light ball YHb at the position, and may fly with the same trajectory with the fluctuating icon h0.

  In FIG. 125 (i), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, which is the default display mode before the start of the animation after the fluctuation icon change animation ends, is No. 119 (a) in FIG. It has changed to the display mode of the white blink described in 2. That is, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the normal notice. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 125 (16).

  In the example shown in FIG. 125, the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed to give notice that the reach effect is performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but from the symbol variation display where the reach effect is not started Even in the case of the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started, the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be finally determined and displayed, and as a result, the notice display Y of "reach" is not displayed as a result than the symbol variation display In the case of the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 125 and an example of the effect of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition advance notice.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 126 (14-2 1) to FIG. 12 (14-2 3), the state shown in FIG. 126 (14-2-1) corresponds to FIG. 125 (14-1). In the state shown in FIG. 126 (14-2-2), the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI to be used. Here, the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 125 (2)). The display of the cursor CS is also overlapped from the front on the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

  In FIG. 126 (No. 14-2-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, and the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 which the display of the cursor CS pointed to until then opens and the box The notice display YH of "reach" is jumping out from inside.

  The box of the notice icon YI may be opened by the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, the operation promotion notification image for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 may be displayed or may not be displayed and may be the back button. Further, the player can select the notice icon YI by operating the display position of the cursor CS with the up and down keys of the cross key 181a, and the notice icon YI selected by the cursor CS is opened by the operation of the chance button 136. You may Alternatively, the display of the cursor CS may point to the notice icon YI that is not used. In addition, the cursor CS may or may not be displayed. In this case, if the cursor CS is displayed rather than displayed, then the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally displayed, or conversely, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed. It does not matter if there is a difference between the two. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 125 (16).

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 126 (14-3 1) to FIG. 12 (14-3 3), the state shown in FIG. 126 (14-3 1) corresponds to FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 126 (i.e. 14-3-2), two displays of the cursor CS are displayed and point to both of the notice icons YI. As a result, it is not clear which notice icon YI will be used first.

  In FIG. 126 (No. 14-3-3), the display of the two cursors CS both disappear, and the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 is opened, and the notice of "reach" is made from the box. Display YH is jumping out.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 126 (14-4-1) to FIG. 126 (14-4-3), the state shown in FIG. 126 (14-4-1) is the same as FIG. 125 (14-1). In the state shown in FIG. 126 (or 14-4-2), two displays of the cursor CS are displayed and point to both of the notice icons YI. In this example, as shown in FIG. 126 (i.e. 14-4-3), after both displays of the two cursors CS disappear, the display of the two cursors CS up to that point is indicated by the notice icon YI. The box opens, and a notice indicator YH of "reach" pops out from the box of the notice icon YI stocked in the first stock position SS1, and is stocked in the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 125 (2)). From the box of the notice icon YI, the notice display "H" of "Change" has popped out. The boxes of both notice icons YI may be opened at the same time, may be opened in the order of stock, and may be opened earlier or later when the notice display YH having a high degree of advantage appears. Also, the higher the reliability according to the type of the notice icon YI, the earlier it may be opened or it may be opened later. After that, the notice display YH of “reach” is erased as shown in FIG. 125 (20), while the notice display YH of “change” is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 125 (26). It changes to ball YHb of the light while it is in the overlapping state. Thereafter, the variation icon change animation ends, and the display manner of the variation icon h0, which was the default display manner before the start of the animation, is No. 119 (a) in FIG. It has changed to the display mode of the white blink described in 2. Note that the end of the variation icon change animation may be earlier than the deletion of the "reach" notice display YH, may be simultaneously deleted, or may be later deleted.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 126 (1-2-1) to FIG. 126 (1-2-4), the maximum stock number of the advance notice icon YI is described.

  In FIG. 126 (1-2-1), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is the upper limit of four, and four suspension icons h 11 to h 14 are displayed. Among these holding icons, for example, the third holding is the pre-reading notice target holding, and the first holding icon h11 to the third holding icon h13 are all icons that can participate in the mini game (icon of villager character) Has changed. The maximum stock number of the advance notice icon YI is “3” (maximum hold number−1), which is less than 4 which is the maximum hold number of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. However, it may be the same number as the maximum number of pending in special figure 1 or 2 or even the same number as the total number of the maximum number of pending in special figure 1 and the maximum number of pending in special figure 2 The number may be good (e.g., 8) or one less than the total number. Also, it may be more than the maximum number of holdings or more than the total number.

  In FIG. 126 (1-2-2), the mini game B is won in a state where two advance notice icons YI have been acquired. As a result, as shown in FIG. 126 (1-2-3), the third notice icon YI comes out of the appearance area AS and is temporarily displayed large. In this state, the third enlarged notice icon YI is overlapped from the front with the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2. As a result, the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 is difficult to visually recognize for a moment. However, by setting the position of the notice icon YI coming out of the appearance area AS to a position separated from the second stock position SS2, it is made not to overlap the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2. It can also be done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (1-2-4), the first stock position SS1, the second stock position SS2, and the third stock position SS3 provided in the stock area SS (FIG. 125 (FIG. 125). A notice icon YI is displayed on each of them. A part of the notice icon YI displayed in the third stock position SS3 shown in FIG. 126 (1-2-4) overlaps with a part of the appearance area AS from the front side.

  On the other hand, a part of the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 126 (1-2-4 ') overlaps with a part of the notice icon YI displayed in the third stock position SS3 from the front side, and the third stock The lower half of the notice icon YI displayed at the position SS3 is difficult to view.

  It should be noted that the stock area SS may be provided at a position not overlapping the appearance area AS so as not to overlap the appearance area AS or to overlap the appearance area AS. For example, the stock area SS may be provided in the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 126 (U1) and subsequent figures is a view showing the effect example of the mini-game A of the advance notice of Yoshimune treasure acquisition in stages.

  In FIG. 126 (1), as in FIG. 120 (1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed. Also, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of these reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  In FIG. 126 (b), as in FIG. 120 (c), there is a ball entry in the special view 1 start opening 230, and the suspension of the special view 1 increases by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (2), the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

  In FIG. 126 (3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. Although the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, the third hold indicated by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold of the prefetch notice. In FIG. 121 (3), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes up to now, are both No. 119 (a) in FIG. It changes to the icon of aspect a of the kind of Yoshimune (bow) described in 14. The change of the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may be performed before the third hold icon h13 of the target hold of the pre-notice notice is increased and displayed, or simultaneously with the increase display. It may be performed after the increase display. More specifically, before the increase animation of the third hold icon h13 is started, the change of the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 (the change of the hold icon) may be completed. The change of the hold icon may be completed simultaneously with the start of the increase animation, or the change of the hold icon may be completed after the increase animation is started. In addition, when the change of the hold icon is performed by the change animation, the change animation may be started before the increase animation is started, or the change animation may be started simultaneously with the increase animation. Then, the change animation may be started after the increase animation is started. When the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 change to an icon of the type a of Yoshimune (bow), in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. A mini game (a specific mini game (in this example, mini game A) or an unspecified mini game (in this example, mini game A, mini game B, or other mini games, etc.) is to be played You may give notice. In addition, the mini game is started simultaneously with (or immediately after) the start of the symbol variation display (in the case of this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) to start the mini game A. The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

  In FIG. 126 (4), the symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 126 (5), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (5), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started, and the first upper right symbol 2 In the number-of-retentions display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2". In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A shown in FIG. 118 (a) is started, 'Is beginning to be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 126 (5), the moving icon animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first holding icon h11 of the Yoshimune (bow) character, which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and on the second stage hs2 so far The second reserved icon h12 of the displayed Yoshimune (bow) character starts moving toward the first stage hs1 and is the default display mode that has been displayed so far in the third stage hs3 but it is read ahead The third hold icon h13 for holding the preview target is moving toward the second stage hs2. Here, when the first holding icon h11 of the Yoshimune (bow) character starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the pedestal hs0 is slightly lowered. Note that the appearance animation of the mini game A icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started simultaneously, or the appearance animation of the mini game A icon may be started earlier, or vice versa. The moving animation of the hold icon may be started earlier.

  In FIG. 126 (v6), although the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, the moving animation of the holding icon is ended, and the variation icon h0 is an aspect a of a type of Yoshimune (bow) (standby Icon is displayed. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of this variation icon h0 is executing standby animation (default animation). On the other hand, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon continues, and a white box image of the first display mode (FIG. 117 (a)) is displayed on the carpet on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. The icon AI 'on which the notice icon YI) of the aspect a of the "box" of No. 1 shown is displayed. This icon AI 'is different from the icon AI for mini game A shown in FIG. 118 (a).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (7), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Further, in FIG. 126 (Au 7), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed on the icon AI '. Ru. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is empty (state of 0).

  Also in FIG. 126 (E8), the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continued, and here, in the empty meter display MTh added earlier, hit point (HP) is displayed as a part of the appearance animation. The animation to be displayed is executed. In FIG. 126 (A8), although slight, blue gauge gag begins to be visible. As described with reference to FIG. 118 (b), the color of the gauge changes according to the number of points of HP. Since the animation here is a blue gauge from the beginning, it can be seen at the stage of seeing the color of the gauge that the HP has 60 points or more. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the icon AI for the mini game A includes the aspect a in which the gauge is full, the aspect b in which the gauge is half, and the aspect c in which the gauge is only a little. And since there is only aspect d, it can be expected that the gauge will increase to full when the blue gauge gag is seen. Here, after the display of the HP is completed (after the increase of the gauge stops), the color of the gauge may be changed to a color according to the number of points of the HP, in accordance with the increase of the gauge, The color of the gauge may then be represented in a color according to the number of points at that time. In FIG. 126 (blue 9), the blue gauge gag is increased by half, and in FIG. 126 (alpha 10), the blue gauge gag is increased to full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, which completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, in this example, the “box” icon of aspect a has appeared as the icon AI for mini game A.

  In FIG. 126 (う 11), the character mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variation icon h0 is changed to a mode b holding a bow, and the character mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character of the first holding icon h11 is also It is changed to a mode b with a bow slightly different from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0. In FIG. 126 (12), both the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variation icon h0 and the Yoshimune (bow) character of the first suspension icon h11 fire arrows and are changed to the aspect c.

  In FIG. 126 (U13), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of variation icon h0, which was close to icon AI for mini game A, is stabbing a carpet, and Yoshimune (bow) of first reserved icon h11 The arrow fired by the character of is flying towards the carpet. In FIG. 126 (う 14-1), the arrow fired by the Yoshimune (bow) character of the 1-hold icon h11 is also stuck in the carpet, and both arrows hit the carpet wonderfully.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of the example of the presentation of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition advance notice, in stages.

  In FIG. 127 (FIG. 127-1) continued from FIG. 126 (FIG. 14-1), damage calculation is performed, and the damage is 60 points due to the two arrows being stuck. In FIG. 127 (Fig. 15-1), damage point notification (number "60") is displayed, and in the same figure (Fig. 16), the blue gauge gag which is full (100 points) is reduced. I'm starting. In addition, when the gauge gag starts to decrease, the display of the damage point notification starts to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 127 (う 17), the gauge gag is reduced to the remaining 40 points. The color of the gauge gag changes from blue to green until it reaches 50 points or less. In addition, you may start the damage calculation when the arrow bites into the carpet. That is, the damage gag may be reduced by starting the damage calculation at the timing of FIG. 126 (13) when the first arrow hit the carpet.

  Both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 that has fired the arrow and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 continue to be displayed as aspect c, but change to the aspect of standby a May be

  In FIG. 127 (No. 18), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6” — “decoration 4” — The "decorative 1" is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decorative patterns of the lost.

  FIG. 127 (u 19) is in stop display (during fixed display), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 is started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 gradually enters the pedestal hs0. It will disappear. Also in FIG. 127 (FIG. 20), the stop display is in progress (the final display is in progress), and the fluctuation icon h0 has completely disappeared.

  In FIG. 127 (う 21), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (う 21), the first decorative symbol remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started. When the symbol variation display is started, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the mode a (default). Then, in FIG. 127 (う 22), the moving animation of the holding icon is started, and the first holding icon h11 of the Yoshimune (bow) character, which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 until now, is a variation icon display area Starting to move to the pedestal CIS pedestal hs0, the second display icon h12 in the default display mode, which has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far, is the default reserved display pending notice target h12 toward the first stage hs1 It has started moving. Further, in the second number-of-holds display at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (Au 22), the number of holdings in the special view 1 is reduced by one to “1”.

  In FIG. 127 (U23), although the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, the moving animation of the holding icon is ended, and the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow) is displayed as the change icon h0. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (う 24), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the figure (う 25), the form of the character of the Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 Is changing to the aspect b which held the bow. In (127) of FIG. 127, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 fires an arrow and changes to a mode c. In Fig. 127 (う 27), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 is stuck in the carpet, and the damage calculation is performed. In Fig. 127 (ダ メ ー ジ 28), the damage point notification ("40 The green gauge gag, which was the remaining 40 points, began to decrease, and it changes from green to red from that point when it became 20 points or less. ing. In addition, when the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification starts to thin and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 127 (う 30), it decreases to 0 point, and the gauge gag disappears. Thus, the hit points (HP), which were initially 100 points in the mini game A start, have been successfully reduced to 0 points, and a treasure (preliminary icon) can be acquired. Note that the number of damage dealt may exceed the number of remaining HP points.

  In FIG. 127 (FIG. 31), the icon AI for mini game A in which the meter display MTh has become 0 is covered by the effect image EF5, and in the diagram (c) 32 the effect image EF5 disappears. Icon AI is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (33), when the icon AI for mini game A of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see FIG. 32 (FIG. 32)), for mini game A of the mode d. The icon AI has the No. shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the aspect a of “box” 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the aspect a in which the box is closed as shown in FIG. 127 (34).

  Eventually, in FIG. 127 (35), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decor 4” — “decor 4”) "-" "Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decorative patterns of the lost.

  Figures 127 (36) through (36) are in stop display (during fixed display), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 is started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 is It gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. Also here, the pedestal hs0, which had been slightly lowered, has been rising towards its original height. FIG. 127 (FIG. 38) is also in the stop display mode (during the fixed display mode), the fluctuation icon h0 completely disappears, and the pedestal hs0 is returned to its original height. The notice icon YI stocked in the stock area SS is displayed without being used. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 120 (24). In this example, the hit points are not recovered (for example, the remaining hit points are 40 in FIG. 127 (17) and the remaining hit points are 40 in FIGS. (21) to (24)). , Hit points may be recovered. For example, the hit point may be recovered when the next symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 128 is a view showing up to the middle of the first to third modified examples of the effect example of FIG. 126 (1) to FIG. 127 (38).

  The first modified example is an example of acquiring a notice icon once, and is the same up to FIG. 126 (14-1). In FIG. 128 (で あ れ ば 15-2-1), although the damage point notification is displayed originally, it is not displayed here, and in the same figure (う 15--2-2), the meter display MTh is full. The icon AI for mini game A of the state aspect a is covered by the effect image EF5, the effect image EF5 disappears, and the icon AI for mini game A of the state d is displayed in FIG. There is. That is, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases are omitted, and the icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d is displayed at once. Of the damage point notification display and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases, only the damage point notification display may be omitted, or only the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases may be omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 128 (No. 15-2-4), when the icon AI for mini game A of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see FIG. 15 (C. 15-2-3)), the mode The icon AI for mini game A of d is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the aspect a of the “box” 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the aspect a in which the box is closed as shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-5).

  Eventually, in FIG. 128 (う 15-2-6), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6” -The "decoration 4"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost.

  In FIG. 128 (う 15-2-7), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 128 (No. 15-2-7), the first decorative symbol remains stopped but the variable display is started in the upper left second decorative symbol. When the symbol variation display is started, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the mode a (default). Then, in FIG. 128 (う 15-2-8), the moving animation of the holding icon is started, and the first holding icon h11 of the Yoshimune (bow) character, which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, is The second display icon h12 in the default display mode, which has been displayed on the second stage hs2 until now, has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, but the first hold It has started moving toward hs1. In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is started again, and the icon AI 'is slightly displayed at the right end of the screen.

  Even in FIG. 128 (15-15), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the holding icon ends, and a variation icon h0 of the type of Yoshimune (bow) The icon of mode a (the mode of standby) is displayed. Further, in the second number-of-holds display at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 128 (No. 15-2-9), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to “1”. Furthermore, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon continues, and a white box image of the first display mode (FIG. 117 (a)) is displayed on the carpet on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS The icon AI 'on which the notice icon YI) of the aspect a of the "box" of No. 1 shown is displayed. In FIG. 128 (う 15-2-10), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed on the icon AI ' Be done. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is empty (state of 0). Even in FIG. 128 (15-2-11), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and here, in the empty meter display MTh added earlier, hit points as a part of the appearance animation. The animation for displaying (HP) is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, which completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, here too, the “box” icon of aspect a has appeared as the icon AI for the mini game A.

  In FIG. 128 (No. 15-2-12), the character mode of the Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a mode b in which the bow is held, and then Yoshimune (the first hold icon h11). The bow is fired from the bow character. In FIG. 128 (う 15-2-13), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is stuck in the carpet, and here too, the display of the damage point notification and the gauge gag decrease. In FIG. 128 (see 15-2-14), the icon AI for mini game A of the embodiment a in which the meter display MTh is full is covered with the effect image EF5 in FIG. In 15-2-15), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the icon AI for mini game A of the mode d is displayed at once.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-16), when the icon AI for mini game A of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see FIG. 15-2 (3)), the mode The icon AI for mini game A of d is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. The warning icon YI of the embodiment a with the box closed is changed to the warning icon YI of the embodiment a of the “box” 1 of 1 as shown in FIG. 128 (15 15-2-17). It is displayed under the notice icon YI stocked earlier in 5). Thus, continuously, one shot of the notice icon is successfully obtained, and two notice icons YI are stocked.

  In the second modified example shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-2b1) to FIG. 12 (15-2-2b5), the process is the same from FIG. 126 (14-1). The modification example here is also an example of acquiring one shot of the advance notice icon, but in this example, display of damage point notification and animation display of decreasing gauge gag are also executed without omission. In FIG. 128 (う 15-2-b 1), damage point notification (red number “100”) is displayed. Also, in FIG. 128 ((15-2-2b2), the blue gauge gag that was full (100 points) starts to decrease, the gauge gag is reduced to the remaining 50 points, and the color of the gauge gag is The green gauge gag continues to decrease, changing from blue to green. In addition, when the gauge gag starts to decrease, the display of the damage point notification starts to fade and gradually disappears.

  A notice may be given by the display of damage point notification or the color of the carpet. For example, if the display color of the damage point notification is rainbow color, even if the notice icon on the carpet is not the notice icon of the "rainbow box", the notice icon of the "rainbow box" can be acquired, From the characteristics of the notice icon of "rainbow box", the big hit of the prefetch target change is determined. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the display color of the damage point notification is rainbow color may be a big hit decision. Alternatively, when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red), the probability of acquiring the notice icon may be higher than when the display color is the default color. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red) may be more likely to be a big hit than the symbol variation display when it is the default color. Moreover, the same may be said of the case of the color of a carpet.

  In FIG. 128 (う 15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to 20 points, and the color of the gauge gag changes from the previous green to red, and the red gauge gag continues to decrease further. Also, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing.

  In FIG. 128 (う 15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to 20 points, and the color of the gauge gag changes from the previous green to red, and the red gauge gag continues to decrease further. Also, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 128 (う 15-2-b 4), it decreases to 0 point, and the gauge gag disappears.

  When the meter display MTh becomes 0, as shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-2b5), the icon AI for mini game A is covered with the effect image EF5, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-3), etc. And the advance notice icon YI can be acquired.

  128 (図 15-3-1) to the same figure (う 15-3-3) in the third modification are the same as FIG. 128 (1 15-2-1) to the same figure (う 15) in the first modification. Same as -2-3). In the third modified example, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is started again earlier than the first modified example, without waiting for the start of the next change. That is, as shown in FIG. 128 (15-3-4), when the icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS, the icon for the mini game A to be played in the next change is The appearance animation is started again, and the icon AI 'is slightly displayed at the right end of the screen. Then, in FIG. 128 (15-3-5), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is white in the first display mode on the carpet. An icon AI 'on which a box image (the notice icon YI of the mode a of the "box" of No. 1 shown in FIG. 117A) is displayed is displayed. The stock display of the advance notice icon YI and the entire display of the icon AI 'may be the same, or the stock display may be faster, or conversely, the entire display may be faster. The meter display MTh is added to the icon AI 'after the start of the next change.

  Eventually, in FIG. 128 (う 15-3-6), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6” -The "decoration 4"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a continuation of the third modification example of the effect example of FIG. 126 (c1) to FIG. 127 (c) and a halfway of the fourth modification example to the fifth modification example.

  In FIG. 129 (15-3-7), which is a continuation of the third modification, the change icon h0 which is in the stop display (during the final display) and is the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow) completely disappears There is.

  In the next pattern variation display is started in Fig. 129 ((15-3-8), the meter display MTh of the empty HP is additionally displayed in the icon AI ', and the following Fig. 129 (う 15-3-9) In the), the animation that HP is displayed is executed on the empty meter display MTh, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. The subsequent flow is the same as that in FIG. 128 (12815-2-12) and the like.

  129 (う 15-4-1) to the same figure (う 15-4-5) in the fourth modification, FIG. 128 (う 15-3-1) to the same figure (う 15) in the third modification. Same as -3-5). In the fourth modified example, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is executed a plurality of times within one pattern variation display, and a plurality of mini game A icons AI appear. The number of appearances of the mini game A icon AI may be limited to the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number. However, if the above-mentioned maximum stock number is exceeded, before obtaining a new notice icon YI, the stock notice icon YI which has been stocked is used or a mini game A of cassette is performed, and a new notice icon YI is performed. Can not earn.

  In FIG. 128 (う 15-4-6), the meter display MTh in the empty state is additionally displayed in the new icon AI ′ in the symbol variation display in which one notice icon YI has already been acquired, and so on. In FIG. 128 (see 15-4-7), an animation in which HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. The symbol variation display still continues, and in FIG. 128 ((15-4-8), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0, which was the aspect c up to now, is also Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. The character of) also changes to the mode b holding a bow together, and is aiming at the carpet of the icon AI for a new mini game A. In the fourth variation, a plurality of attacks can be performed in one symbol variation display. For example, the same mini game A icon AI can be attacked multiple times. However, even if multiple attacks can be made, the same icon AI for mini game A may be attacked only once.

  Eventually, an arrow is fired from each of the two characters, and in FIG. 128 ((15-4-9), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (the bow) of the variation icon h0 is also Yoshimune (the first hold icon h11). Arrows fired from the bow character were also stuck in the carpet, damage was calculated, damage point notification (number "40") was displayed, and it was full (100 points). The blue gauge gag is beginning to decrease in the figure (Fig. 15-4-10). In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 128 (う 15-4-1), the color of the gauge gag remains blue and decreases to 60 points. Here, before the meter display MTh decreases to 0 point, as shown in FIG. 128 (う 15-4-12), the symbol variation display ends, but the meter display MTh becomes 0 point, It is also possible to obtain the second notice icon YI. Further, in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 following FIG. 128 (15-4-12), the mini game A is continuing, and it is possible to obtain the second notice icon . In the same manner as described for the appearance number of the mini game A icon AI, the acquisition number of the notice icon YI can be variously set based on the maximum stock number. That is, the number of acquisitions of the notice icon YI may be limited to the maximum stock number, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number.

  The fifth modified example is an example in which a dedicated area of the mini game A is prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (う 1-2-1), the background screen, which has been omitted from illustration so far, is displayed. This background screen is a background screen of the sea. In this Fig. 129 (1−2 1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) performs high-speed fluctuation as in Fig. 126 (う 1). Also, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of these reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  In Fig. 129 (う 1-2-1), as in Fig. 126 (う 2), there is a ball entry in the special view 1 starting opening 230, and the suspension of the special view 1 increases by one, resulting in a total of three. . In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (う 1-2-1), the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is displayed as “3”.

  In FIG. 129 (う 1-2-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is a hold icon of a display mode not shown in FIG. 119 (a). That is, it is a display mode (VS display mode) in which characters are displayed as VS, and is a display mode for giving notice that mini game A is to be played in symbol variation display corresponding to suspension before suspension of the suspension icon of this display mode. It is. That is, when the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the VS display mode, the mini game A is executed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold and / or the second hold. In addition, when the holding icon of VS display mode is displayed, the mini game A may be always performed or may not be performed. In addition, the hold of the hold icon of the VS display mode becomes the target hold of the prefetch notice, and the VS display mode is also a kind of the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 129 (FIG. 1-2-4), the symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 129 (う 1-2-5), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (う 1-2-5), the first decorative symbol in the central region remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, variable display is started , In the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2".

  In Fig. 129 (う 1-2-6), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in this Fig. 129 (う 1-2-6), the animation for exclusive area appearance of the mini game A is shown. Has been started. That is, when the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is started, the effect image EF6 of the flame is displayed in the effect display area 208d in which the holding frame UI was displayed, and the holding icon is also obscured by the effect image EF6. It is done. In FIG. 129 (う 1-2-7), the flame effect image EF6 becomes thin, and icons and the like in the back of the effect image EF6 begin to be faintly visible.

  In FIG. 129 (う 1-2-8), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 completely disappears, and the effect display area 208 d is a mini game in place of the holding frame UI. A dedicated area MSS has appeared. In the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A shown in FIG. 129 (う 1-2-8), icons YMI1 and YMI2 of two Yoshimune (bows) are displayed. Both of these two icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed in the mode a (the mode of standby). Further, at the right end of the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A, an icon AI 'with a notice icon on the carpet is displayed, and further, a dedicated area of meter display MTh of hit points (HP) is provided. The meter display MTh is displayed in the area. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 129 (1 1-2-8), the blue gauge gag is full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (う 1-2-9), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini game A is started in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. The mini game A may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the mini game A may be started after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, or the first decoration The mini game A may be started before the variable display of symbols is started. When the mini game A is started, the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with the mini game opening image. The mini game opening image is a translucent image, and the mini game match card is character-displayed (here, “Yoshimune VS vs. carpet”).

  In FIG. 129 (消 え 1-2-10), the mini game opening image disappears, and in the same figure (う 1-2-11), the two icons YMI1 and YMI2 that have been aspect a so far are of Yoshimune (bow) The characters both change to the mode b holding a bow and aim at the carpet of the icon AI for mini game A. Here, the more the number of icons of Yoshimune (bow), the more likely the mini game A will be played in the next change. In this example, since two icons of Yoshimune (bow) are displayed, there is a high possibility that the mini game A will be played even at the next change than when only one icon of Yoshimune (bow) is displayed. . In addition, the number of icons of Yoshimune (bow) may represent the degree of expectation that the advance notice icon Yi can be obtained. That is, the more the number of icons of Yoshimune (bow), the higher the degree of expectation for acquiring the notice icon Yi.

  Alternatively, the number of icons of Yoshimune (bow) may correspond to the number of pending icons prior to the pending icon of the VS display mode. That is, if the number of pending icons prior to the pending icon of the VS display mode is 3, the number of icons of Yoshimune (bows) is also three, and as in this example, it is prior to the pending icon of the VS display mode If there are two pending icons, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons will also be two. Also, for one icon of Yoshimune (bow), the number of possible confrontations is determined according to the number of pending icons prior to the pending icon in the VS display mode, like one carpet or one attack. The number may be displayed on the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A.

  Soon, an arrow is fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 129 (う 1-2-12), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, the damage calculation is performed, and the damage point notification (“ The numeral 40) is displayed, and the blue gauge gag which is full (100 points) is beginning to decrease in the same figure ((1-2-13).

  FIG. 130 is a view showing the continuation of the fifth modified example of the effects shown in FIG. 126 (FIG. 126) through FIG. 127 (FIG. 38) and the effect example where the stocked advance notice icon YI is promoted.

  In FIG. 130 (う 1-2- 14), which is a continuation of the fifth modification, a semi-transparent advance notice image such as “follows the next change” because one attack during one pattern change display is finished. Is displayed. The dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with this notice image. Note that this preview image may not be displayed.

  In Fig. 130 (う 1-2-15), the notice image disappears, and in Fig. 130 (う 1-2-16), the symbol variation display is finished, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost ("decoration 6"-"decoration" 4 "-" decorative 1 ") is displayed stopped.

  Fig. 130 (う 1-2-17) is in the stop display (during the final display), and the pierced arrow disappears from the carpet, and even in the same drawing (う 1-2-18), the first decoration of the central region is displayed. The symbol still remains stopped, but the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (う 1-2-18), the variable display is started on the second decorative symbol on the upper left.

  After that, an arrow is fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 130 (う 1-2-19), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, and in the following FIG. 130 (う 1-2-20) In the meter display MTh shown, it decreases to 0 point, and the gauge gag disappears. When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the icon AI for mini game A is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. 130 (1-2-2). In (130-2-22) in FIG. 130, the effect image EF5 disappears, and the icon AI for mini game A of the mode d is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (う 1-2-23), when the icon AI for mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (1-2-2)). , The icon AI for mini game A of the aspect d, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). It changes to notice icon YI of mode a of 1 "box", and as shown in Drawing 130 (a 1-2-24), notice icon YI of mode a which the box closed is displayed on stock field SS. In addition, when stocking of the notice icon YI is completed, the dedicated game disappearing animation of the mini game A is started. That is, when the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 gradually appears in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. In FIG. 130 (う 1-2-24), the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is covered by the translucent flame effect image EF6, and in the same figure (う 1-2-25), the effect of the flame is It is obscured by the image EF6. It should be noted that the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started before the stocking of the advance notice icon YI is completed. For example, immediately after the mini game A icon AI of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started. In addition, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started simultaneously with the completion of stocking of the notice icon YI.

  In FIG. 130 (FIG. 1-2-26), the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 completely disappears, and in the effect display area 208 d, the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A appears. It is back to the previous configuration. That is, the holding frame UI is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The fluctuation icon h0 in the default display mode corresponds to the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 129 (う 1-2-3) to FIG. (う 1-2-5). Further, in the first stage hs1 of the variation icon display area CIS, the first holding icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode shown in FIG. 129 ((1-2-3) to FIG. 129 (う 1-2-5). It corresponds to The first hold icon h11 corresponding to the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode may be displayed as it is in the VS display mode, or any icon among blue to rainbow colors. It may be displayed in an aspect.

  Note that the hold (fourth hold) after the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode is the target hold of the prefetch notice, and is stored as shown in FIG. 130 (う 1-2-26). The notice icon YI may be used during symbol variation display of the fourth hold. In addition, the second hold icon h12 may be displayed in the VS display mode, and the mini game may be played until the second hold symbol change display is being performed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 130 (1 1-2-27), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decor 4”) -The "decoration 4"-"decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left also is halted and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost.

  Next, an example of effect that the stocked advance notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

  In FIG. 130 (E1-1), the icon AI for mini game A of mode d is displayed. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 is an icon of a character of Yoshimune (bow), but the first holding icon h11 is an icon of a default display mode. In this modification as well, the hold of the first hold icon h11 is a prefetch notice hold. In addition, the icon AI for mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 130 (E2), the notice icon YI changed from the icon AI for mini game A of the aspect d is stocked in the stock area SS. The notice icon YI stocked here is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. It is a notice icon of mode a of 1 "box". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the symbol variation display is finished, and the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7"). The stop display is also displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also displayed with stop showing the same combination of the decorative patterns of the lost. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 has disappeared.

  In FIG. 130 (e3), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (e3), the first decorative symbol remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started. Then, the movement animation of the holding icon is started, and in FIG. 130 (F4), the first holding icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) which has been displayed so far on the first stage hs1 is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. ing. The character of Yoshimune (bow) that has become the variation icon h0 is changed from the mode c to the mode a (default).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (e5), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is started. The mini game here is slightly different from the mini game A described so far, and a notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI in which a target icon is hanging on a parachut appears. In FIG. 130 (E6), the icon YSI dedicated to promoting the advance notice icon in which the target icon is hanging on the umbrella has fallen from the upper right of the screen, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. , Changing to a mode b holding a bow, aiming at a target icon, and eventually, an arrow is fired from a character of Yoshimune (bow). In FIG. 130 (E8), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is finalized. In FIG. 130 (e9), the letter “Lv. UP” notifying of the confirmation of the promotion is displayed next to the icon YSI dedicated to promoting the advance notice. In addition, the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 may or may not always hit the target icon of the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI. .

  In FIG. 130 (f), when the notice icon YI displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI is displayed as No. 11 shown in FIG. 117 (a). No. 1 shown in FIG. It is promoted to the notice icon of 2 "red box" (Fig. 130 (e. 11)).

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 130 (F12), the icon YSI for exclusive use of the notice icon promotion disappears, and in the same figure (F. 13) that follows, the promoted notice icon YI is used. That is, when used, the notice icon YI of the "red box" of the mode a which is a closed display mode changes to the mode d which is a display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH An animation that pops up is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 7 is a notice display of the red "red change" of 7, and is a display for giving notice that the display mode such as the hold icon or the change icon is changed in two steps.

  In FIG. 130 (F), the used notice icon YI disappears, and a variation icon change animation using the notice display YH of red “change in red” is started. In FIG. 130 (F), the notice display YH of red “change in red” is changed to the ball YHb of light.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of effects in which the stocked advance notice icon YI is promoted and a modification of the example of effects.

  In FIG. 130 (e 15) continuing from FIG. 130 (e 14), the ball YHb of light in which the notice display YH of red “red change” has changed is changed icon h0 which is the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow) The flying icon h0 strikes the fluctuation icon h0, the fluctuation icon h0 is covered with the effect image EF8, and when the effect image EF8 disappears, the fluctuation icon h0 changes to No. 1 shown in FIG. It has changed to the "green" fluctuation icon of 4 (Fig. 130 (F16)).

  In this example, the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is performed, but a mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may be performed together. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

  Also, in this example, a dedicated icon such as the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI appears, but the hold icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon, or the change icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon. It may be. Furthermore, an icon for acquiring a notice icon such as the mini game icon AI may be changed to an icon for promoting a notice icon. In addition, the appearance of the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI becomes a notice for giving notice that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini game itself for promoting the notice icon YI also gives notice that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the effect to do. Then, here, the effect of giving notice that the notice icon may be promoted is executed using the change icon h0, but even if there is a case where a notice is given using something other than the change icon h0 and the hold icon You may or may not give notice.

  Next, a modified example of the effect example in which the stocked advance notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

  In FIG. 131 (E1-2-1), the icon AI for mini game A of mode d is displayed. Both the variation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are icons of characters of Yoshimune (bow). The hold of the first hold icon h11 is a prefetch notice hold. In addition, the icon AI for mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-2), the symbol variation display continues, and the notice icon YI of the aspect a of “box” changed from the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d is stocked in the stock area SS. It is done.

  In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-3), there is a ball entry at the special view 1 start opening 230, and the suspension of the special view 1 increases by one, resulting in a total of two. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-3), the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is displayed as "2".

  In FIG. 131 (E1-2-4), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 representing the increased second hold is a display mode of a character of Yoshimune (bow). In addition, when the mini game which acquires a notice icon is performed to the symbol variation display currently performed, the character of the Yoshimune (bow) of this 2nd holding icon h12 may be made unusable, and it may be contrary. It may be used for That is, during the symbol variation display where there is a pending increase, the use of the increased pending icon may or may not be prohibited from being used in the mini game for acquiring the advance notice icon.

  In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-5), the symbol variation display is ended without using the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is lost in the central region. The combination of the decorative designs ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also halts and displays the same combination of the lost decorative designs. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 has disappeared.

  In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-6), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-6), the first decorative symbol remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started. Then, the movement animation of the holding icon is started, and in FIG. 131 (E1-2-7), the first holding icon h11 of the default display manner which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far is the default display manner It is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-8), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is also started in this modification. In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-9), the icon YSI dedicated to promoting the advance of the notice icon in which the target icon hangs on the falling umbrella has fallen from the upper right of the screen, and this modification is shown in FIG. In the example, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 changes to the mode b in which the bow is held, and targets the target icon. In Fig. 131 (E 1-2-11), an arrow is fired from the character of the reserved icon Yoshimune (bow), and in the same E (E 1-2-12), the fired arrow faces the target icon. I'm flying. In FIG. 131 (E1-2-13), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is finalized. In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-14), the letter “Lv. UP” notifying of the confirmation of the promotion is displayed next to the icon YSI dedicated to promoting the advance notice, and FIG. 131 (E 1-2-15) Then, when the notice icon YI displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI is promoted from the previous “box” to the notice icon of “red box” (FIG. 131 (E 1-2-16)).

  In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-17), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” is fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Before long, the notice icon YI promoted to “red box” is used in the reach state. That is, as shown in FIG. 131 (E 1-2-18), the box of the notice icon YI is opened, and the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice display YH of 19 "VS Kenshi reach" comes out. The notice display YH of “VS Ken-Oh reach” is a face icon of a character of the Ken-Au, and it is a display for anticipating that the super reach production of VS-Ken-Oh reach will be performed by the displayed variation. In FIG. 131 (E1-2-19), although the used notice icon YI disappears, the notice display YH of “VS Ken-Age Reach” is still displayed.

  In Fig. 131 (E 1-2-20), the notice display YH for "VS Kengo reach" has disappeared, but at the same time as the notice display YH disappears, super reach production of VS Kengo reach is started as the notice . In addition, when notice display YH of "VS swordsman reach" is displayed, super reach production of VS swordsman reach may always be started or may not be started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E 1-2-21), the image of the swordsman of the enemy character is displayed large, and the first decoration shown in the same figure (E 1-2-2) follows. On the symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy character swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the holding frame UI is all hidden (disappears) except the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is also hidden (disappears). However, the fluctuation icon h0 does not disappear but continues to be displayed on the top board that has remained. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol and the second number-on-hold display continue to be displayed. Note that the entire holding frame UI may be erased or, conversely, the entire holding frame UI may be continuously displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E 1-2-23), “decoration 5” as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene where Yoshimune has been defeated. In the following FIG. 131 (E 1-2-24), the same effect as the wipe effect described using FIG. 76 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. 76 (A 14-2-5) is performed. As shown in (E1-2-24), the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L temporarily becomes a wipe display of a non-pattern same color. By this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. Also, the model title is displayed at the left corner. The variation icon h0 may be displayed.

  At 143 (E 1-2-25), the wipe-out, the background is usually returned to the background, and the first holding icon h11, which is the display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow), is also returned to the default display mode . However, until the first holding icon h11 is digested, the display mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character may be displayed, or the display mode may change at another timing.

  At 143 (E1-2-26), the stop display is performed with the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6".

  Also in this modification, a mini game may be additionally performed to further obtain the advance notice icon. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

  Also in this modification, the hold icon may change to an icon for promoting a notice icon or the change icon may change to an icon for promoting a notice icon. Furthermore, an icon for acquiring a notice icon such as the mini game icon AI may be changed to an icon for promoting a notice icon. In addition, the appearance of the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI becomes a notice for giving notice that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini game itself for promoting the notice icon YI also gives notice that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the effect to do. Then, in this modification, although the effect of giving notice that the notice icon may be promoted is executed using the hold icon, there is a case where a notice is given using other than the change icon h0 and the hold icon. You may also give notice.

  FIG. 132 is a view gradually showing an example of an effect in which the notice display YH of the button appears from the notice icon YI.

  In FIG. 132 (a1), the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a1), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start variable display, and a default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. In addition, there is no hold icon, and "0" is displayed for the 2nd number-of-holds display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 for both. Also, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock.

  In FIG. 132 (a2), the first notice icon YI stocked earlier (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the box for the first notice icon YI is opened. The display mode is changed to mode d which is the display mode shown in FIG. 117 (b) from the box. Notice display YH of 21 "buttons" has popped out. The notice display YH of this "button" is a button image imitating the chance button 136, and is a displayed symbol variation display, which is a display for giving notice that the button effect will be performed, but it may be a case, and a display Even if this is done, the button effect may not actually be performed.

  In FIG. 132 (a3), although the first notice icon YI which is the display mode in which the box is opened is deleted, the notice display YH of the “button” is still displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 132 (a4), the notice display YH of the “button” changes to the light ball YHb, and as shown in the same figure (a5), the light ball YHb is in the effect icon display area DIS. Flying to the right end of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 132 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion. In addition, on the button image icon 136aI, the characters "in preparation" indicating that the button operation has not been received yet are displayed. Therefore, the display of the button image icon 136aI and the character "in preparation" is also a display showing that the button effect is stocked, and the button effect is performed in the symbol variation display currently being performed. It is also a display to give notice.

  In FIG. 132 (a7), the reach effect is started, and the "decoration 6" is fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 132 (a8), “decoration 6” that was swingingly fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moves to the bottom of the second decorative symbol and shifts in the right symbol display area 208c before shifting to the super reach effect. The "decoration 6" that has been fluctuating moves below the second hold number display. Next, the button image icon 136aI and the characters "in preparation", which have been displayed in the lower right corner so far, are moved to the lower left corner before shifting to the super reach effect. In FIG. 132 (a9), the button image icon 136aI and the fluctuation icon h0 overlap in the middle of the movement. That is, the button image icon 136aI passes through the back side of the fluctuation icon h0. As a result, the variation icon h0 overlaps the part of the button image icon 136aI from the front side. The button image icon 136aI may pass through the time and effort side of the fluctuation icon h0 so that a part of the button image icon 136aI overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 from the front side. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the characters "under preparation" may be moved so as not to overlap the variation icon h0. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the character “in preparation” may not be animated, and may be moved to the movement position instantaneously. That is, momentary switching of the display position may be performed. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 132 (a9) disappears. In FIG. 132 (a10), the movement of the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode and the characters "under preparation" to the lower left corner is completed.

  Soon, Super Reach production is started, and VS Kenshi reach is started here. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a11) displays a large image of an enemy swordsman, and the main character appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the subsequent figure (a12). The animation of the duel scene between Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In the middle of the animation of the duel scene, as shown in FIG. 132 (a13), the second notice icon YI (predicted icon YI stocked at the second stock position) which has been stocked and remained until now is displayed. Among them, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) is used. Notice display YH of 20 "UP" has jumped out. The notice display YH of “UP” is a displayed symbol variation display, and is a display for giving a notice that the effect is to be promoted. When the notice display YH of “UP” is displayed, the effect is necessarily promoted You may or may not promote. When the notice display YH of “UP” is displayed, the notice display YH is immediately used, and as shown in FIG. 132 (a14), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started. That is, when the promotion animation is started, the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) displayed in the lower left corner has the effect image EF6 'of the flame together with the characters "under preparation". Covered by and difficult to see. In FIG. 132 (a15), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, and the flame effect image EF6 'disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the button image icon 136aI in the fifth display mode (red). There is.

  The animation of the duel scene continues while the cut-in image CI3 or the like is displayed (FIG. 132 (a16)). In FIG. 132 (a17), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started again. In the second promotion of the button image icon 136aI, the button image icon 136aI is promoted without any notice being given. However, due to other notices, promotion may be given notice, may be given notices by all means, or may not be given notices by any means. In FIG. 132 (a17), the button image icon 136aI of the fifth display mode (red) is again covered by the flame effect image EF6 'together with the characters "under preparation" and is difficult to view. In FIG. 132 (a18), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6 'disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the lever image icon 139aI. Although the operating lever is not shown, the operating lever is provided at a position where the player can operate. Moreover, it may replace with a control lever and may be the permeation | transmission part 191 which can be rotated to the front-back direction, and the 2nd chance button 137. FIG.

  In FIG. 132 (a19), the cut-in image CI3 disappears, and the animation of the duel scene is nearing its final stage, and the time of the button presentation start is approaching. In FIG. 132 (a20), an animation in which the lever image icon 139aI is gradually enlarged is started. The lever image icon 139aI becomes a lever image 139a by this animation. When this animation is started, the characters "under preparation" disappear, and through the same figure (a21), the lever image 139a is once enlarged to the maximum in the same figure (a22). Thereafter, in FIG. 132 (a23), the lever image 139a becomes slightly smaller, and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. Incidentally, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a23), the operation effective period is not started, and the display corresponding to the operation is not performed even when the lever is operated. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation effective period is started (FIG. 132 (a24)). The button effect here is a kind of final judge effect. The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 132 (a25) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 132 (a26) is within the operation effective period, and the player operates the operation lever 139 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 17, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and The 1st large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the 4th large-top behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-pattern behavior character It is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the object is not overlapped by the object 224Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, the one-handed box character 224H shown in FIG. 14 operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd. In addition, light emission of the light guide plate IL is also performed. The feature presentation by the one and two box character article 224H shown in FIG. 14 is a big hit finalization presentation.

  In addition, the effects using various kinds of roles and the like in FIG. 132 (a27) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period is not operated. It may also be executed if it has elapsed.

  Thereafter, the various prizes return to their initial positions, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL also ends, and the display of the effect image is switched to the display of the final judgment result in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a28), the "decoration 6" as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene won by Yoshimune. After this, the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the effect example in which the number of times of execution of the button effect is stocked in stages.

  In FIG. 133 (b1), the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is started, and a large image of the swordsman of the enemy character is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (b1). Also, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (o b2), an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy character swordsman is displayed. In addition, a mode in which the first notice icon YI stocked in advance (the notice icon YI stocked in the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI is a display mode in which a box is opened. It changes to d, and the notice display YH of "Button" has popped out of the box. The notice display YH of the “button” in this example of presentation is a display for giving notice that the notice display YH of the “button” is itself stocked.

  In FIG. 133 (b3), although the first notice icon YI which is the display mode in which the box is opened is deleted, the notice display YH of the “button” is still displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 133 (“b4”), the notice display “H” of the “button” changes to the light ball YHb, and as shown in FIG. 133 (a5), the light ball YHb is in the effect icon display area DIS. Flying to the right end of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 132 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion. In addition, on the button image icon 136aI, a character “× 1” representing the number of stocks is displayed. One button effect is performed for one stock. Here, although the button image icon 136aI is stocked, in short, the number of times of execution of the button effect is stocked.

  In FIG. 133 (o b7), the second notice icon YI stocked later (the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position) is used, and the notice display of the “button” is again displayed from the box. YH is jumping out. In FIG. 133 (b8), the second notice icon YI which is the display mode in which the box is opened is erased, and further, the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to a light ball YHb, and the light ball YHb flies aiming at the button image icon 136aI displayed in the lower right corner and collides with the button image icon 136aI. In FIG. 133 (b9), the stock number above the button image icon 136aI is “× 3”. This means that two button image icons 136aI are stocked when the light ball YHb hits the button image icon 136aI in FIG. 133 (b8). As described above, the notice display YH of the "button" is a display for giving a notice that the notice display YH of the "button" is stocked, and by displaying the notice display YH of the "button", Whether the button image icon 136aI is to be stocked is not notified, and in this way, a plurality of button image icons 136aI may be stocked with respect to the notice display YH of one “button”. For example, a maximum of ten button image icons 136aI may be stocked for the notice display YH of one “button”. However, it may be configured such that only one button image icon 136aI is stocked with respect to the notice display YH of one "button". Further, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI may be determined according to the display mode of the notice display YH of the “button”. For example, in the notice display YH of the "display" in the first display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI is 1, but in the notice display YH of the "display" in the fifth display form, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI May be five. The maximum stock number of the button image icons 136aI is, for example, ten. In other words, the maximum number of stocking of the button rendering execution count is 10 times.

  In FIG. 133 (b10), it is notified that the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI and the button effect is started. In FIG. 133 (b11), the large button image 136a is displayed. The stock number on the button image icon 136aI is reduced from "x 3" to "x 2" at this stage. Thereafter, in FIG. 133 (b12), the button image 136a is slightly reduced, and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (b12), the operation valid period is not started, and the display according to the button operation is not performed even when the button is operated. Eventually, the button effect starts and the operation effective period starts (FIG. 133 (b13)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 133 (b14) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

  The timing in FIG. 133 (b15) is within the above-mentioned operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 16, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (b16), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the non-display screen, and The 1st large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the 4th large-top behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, light emission of the light guide plate IL is also performed.

  In addition, the effects using various kinds of roles and the like in FIG. 133 (Ob 16) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed if it has elapsed.

  In FIG. 133 (b17), each of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-pattern behavior character 224Gd returns to the initial position, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL is ended, and the super reach is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Promotion of production is being done. That is, it is predicted that the panda will participate in the battle to help the main character, Yoshimune, in VS Kenshi reach. Thus, in FIG. 133 (b18), with the panda participating, the animation of the battle scene continues, and in FIG. 133 (b19), the effect image EF9 is again added to the button image icon 136aI, and the second button It is predicted that production will begin. In FIG. 133 (b20), the second button effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed, and the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed, and a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. ing. Further, the stock number on the button image icon 136aI is reduced from "x 2" to "x 1".

  The timing shown in FIG. 133 (b21) is within the above-mentioned operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (b22), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a gold cut-in image GCT inscribed as "Go !! Go !!" in the sixth display mode (gold). It is predicted that the jackpot's expectation is quite high.

  In addition, the display of the gold cut-in image GCT in FIG. 133 (b22) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be performed if

  In FIG. 133 (o b23), the gold cut-in image GCT disappears, and the animation of the duel scene is returned to, and in FIG. 133 (o b24), the animation of the duel scene is approaching the final stage. In FIG. 133 (b25), the final judgment effect is started, and as a part of the final judgment effect, the large-sized default button image 136a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, in FIG. 133 (b26), it is predicted that the effect image EF9 is added three times to the button image icon 136aI and the third button effect is started. In FIG. 133 (b27), the promotion effect of the button image 136a is performed, the effect image EF10 is added to the large default button image 136a, and in the same figure (b28), the button of the fifth display mode (red) It is promoted to image 136. By promoting the button image 136 in the fifth display mode (red), the expectation of the big hit is further enhanced. Incidentally, at the stage of FIG. 133 (b27), the display of the button image icon 136aI and the stock number are off.

  FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of effects in which the number of times of execution of button effects is stocked, and another example of effects.

  In FIG. 134 (b29) continued from FIG. 133 (b28), the button image 136a in the fifth display mode (red) is slightly smaller, and a remaining time display meter MT is additionally displayed to indicate the remaining time of the operation valid period. There is. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (b29), the operation valid period is not started, and the display according to the button operation is not performed even if the button is operated. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation effective period starts (FIG. 134 (b30)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 134 (b31) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 134 (b32) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 17, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and The 1st large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the 4th large-top behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-pattern behavior character It is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the object is not overlapped by the object 224Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, the one-handed box character 224H shown in FIG. 14 operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd. In addition, light emission of the light guide plate IL is also performed. The feature presentation by the one and two box character article 224H shown in FIG. 14 is a big hit finalization presentation.

  In addition, the effects using various kinds of roles and the like in FIG. 134 (b33) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed if it has elapsed.

  Thereafter, the various prizes return to their initial positions, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL also ends, and the display of the effect image is switched to the display of the final judgment result in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (o b34), “decoration 6” as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene won by Yoshimune. After this, the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  In this example, when one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is consumed (used), as shown in FIG. 133 (b12) etc., the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed. An operation promotion notification image including the is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 134 (b30), the button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image may be promoted, but one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is digested When (used) is selected, the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen may be displayed. The button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image may be configured to be always promoted when it is digested (used). Also, in this example, one operation promotion notification image is displayed when one button image icon 136aI is consumed (used), but operation promotion notification is performed when one button image icon 136aI is consumed (used). Two or more images may be displayed or one image may be displayed, or two or more images may be displayed. Here, the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 may be promoted in accordance with the promotion of the button image 136a of the operation promotion notification image. Alternatively, the button image 136 of the operation promotion notification image may not be promoted, and only the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may be promoted. The emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may change from the default color to red when one of the stock button image icons 136aI is digested, and may change from red to gold when two are digested. In the case of the chance button 136, although it becomes the chance button lamp 138, in the case of the operation means (for example, the operation lever 139 etc.) different from the chance button 136, the luminescent color of the light emission means for emitting those operation means Will be promoted.

  In this example, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed as the operation promotion notification image, but only the button image 136a may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the remaining time as the operation promotion notification image Only the display meter MT may be displayed, and a character indication such as “press a button”, “PUSH”, “continuous hit”, “long press” or the like (even if it is a character indication instructing the operation method) as the operation promotion notification image And the button image 136a may be displayed, only the character notation may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the character notation and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. The character notation, the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. In addition, an image (for example, button display 136a) imitating the shape of the operation means, an image showing the elapse of the operation effective period of the operation means and / or the remaining time of the operation effective period (for example, remaining) Time display meter MT), character display related to operation (for example, "press a button", "PUSH", "continuous hit", "long press") and other image display (for example, the shape of one or more "operation means" Character image display different from the image imitating (by displaying the character image as the operation prompting notification display, the displayed symbol variation display may eventually become a big hit than when it is not displayed) and the like. Image display may be displayed.

  FIG. 134 (c1) to FIG. 134 (c7) are diagrams showing in stages the first example in which the mini game is started in response to the button operation.

  In FIG. 134 (c1), although the first decorative symbol in the central area is stopped and displayed, the moving animation of the holding icon ends, and the icon of the aspect a of the villager type (the aspect of the standby) as the fluctuation icon h0. Is displayed. Also, as the first hold icon h11, an icon of a type a of the villager (a mode of standby) is displayed. Furthermore, although the second hold icon h12 is also displayed, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, an icon of the type a of panta shown in FIG. 118 (c) (the mode of standby) is displayed as an opponent icon for the mini game B. The panda character of the opponent icon TI also executes a standby animation (default animation). Also, in the appearance area AS, No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (c2), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, then the mini game B's rock-solid confrontation is started. In this example, the mini game B is played by operating the chance button 136. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (c3), between the icon of the villager character that is the fluctuating icon h0 and the icon of the panta character that is the opponent icon, which is scheduled to make a rock-collar confrontation, An operation promotion notification image including a button image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (c3), the operation valid period is not started, and the display according to the button operation is not performed even if the button is operated. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation valid period starts (FIG. 134 (c4)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 134 (c5) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 134 (c6) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, a rock-solid confrontation starts, and a rock-solid confrontation animation is performed. In FIG. 134 (c7), the character of the villager with the fluctuation icon h0 has won. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 120 (A 9-1).

  It should be noted that the start of the jaunting confrontation may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. That is, the mini game may be started only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the mini game is started even when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, but the chance button 136 In the operation valid period, it may be configured that it is easier to win the mini game, that is, it is easier to win the mini game, that is, it is easier to win the notice icon YI, when not operating.

  FIG. 134 (d1) to (d7) are diagrams showing the second example in which the mini game is started according to the button operation.

  FIGS. 134 (d1) to (d2) are the same as FIGS. 134 (c1) to (c2) except that the notice icon YI is stocked.

  In FIG. 134 (d3), the stock notice icon YI is used, and the notice display YH of “button” appears from the inside. In FIG. 134 (o d4), the used notice icon YI disappears, but the notice display YH of the “button” is still displayed, and in FIG. 134 (o d5), the notice display YH of the “button” is It moves toward between the icon of the villager's character, which is a variation icon h0, and the icon of the Panta character, who is the opponent's icon, who are scheduled to make a rock-and-eye match. In FIG. 134 (d6), the notice display YH of the "button" is located between the icon of the villager character whose variation icon h0 is and the icon of the panta character who is the opponent icon.

  In FIG. 134 (d7), the remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed on the notice display YH of the “button”. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (or d7), the operation effective period is not started, and the display corresponding to the operation is not performed even if the button is operated. Eventually, the operation effective period starts, and thereafter, is the same as FIG. 134 (c6) and the like.

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of effect that the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI can be seen before the release.

  In FIG. 135 (or a1), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"- The "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 135 (or a1) is the No. 1 icon in FIG. It changes to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 representing the target hold of the advance notice is a default display mode.

  In FIG. 135 (or a2), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a2), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started, and the first upper right symbol In the 2 pendings display, the number of pendings in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to “1”. In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started, and the effect image EF1 is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 135 (or a2), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first suspension icon h11 of the villager character, which has been displayed in the first stage hs1 so far, has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS and has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far The second display icon h12 in the default display mode starts moving toward the first stage hs1.

  In FIG. 135 (or a3-1), although the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, the moving animation of the holding icon ends, and the variation icon h0 indicates the type a of the villager (wait The icon of the aspect is displayed. The villager character of this variation icon h0 is executing a standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon also ends, and the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and an aspect of the type of panta shown in FIG. 118C as the opponent icon TI (a A standby mode icon is displayed, and the panda character of the opponent icon TI also executes a standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance area AS, No. 1 shown in FIG. A notice icon YI of "change" of 6 is displayed. In addition, No. 1 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 121 and the like, the “change” of 6 is the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI, but here is treated as the notice icon YI. Strictly speaking, in the case of the notice display YH, there is no frame display surrounding the character of change, but in the case of the notice icon YI, there is the frame display. Since the notice icon YI of "change" is displayed with the character display of "change" in the default color, the player can obtain the notice icon from the notice icon which is won by winning the fight against the rock when the appearance area AS is displayed. The notice display YH to be released is known.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a4), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, then the mini game B's rock-solid confrontation is started. In FIG. 135 (or a5), a janiken confrontation animation is performed by the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 is victorious.

  In FIG. 135 (or a7), when the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins, stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started. That is, the notice icon YI of "change" displayed in the appearance area AS comes out of the appearance area AS, is once displayed large, and moves to the stock area SS as shown in FIG. 135 (or a8). , Stock displayed. In this way, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is also displayed with the character of "change" in the default color.

  On the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a9), the exchange animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started. Also, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the empty appearance area AS gradually fades out to the right end of the screen. In FIG. 135 (or a10), the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display region CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display region DIS. Absent.

  In FIG. 135 (or a11), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"- The "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost.

  In FIG. 135 (or a12), the pre-reading notice object holding which has been the first hold until now is digested, and the symbol variation display which is the pre-reading object change is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a12), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start variable display, and a default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. Also, so far, the "change" notice icon YI is displayed in stock.

  In FIG. 135 (or a14), the variation icon change animation using the "change" notice icon YI which has been displayed stock up to that point is started. In this fluctuating icon change animation, as shown in FIG. 135 (or a14), an effect image EF11 notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now is added to the "change" notice icon YI. The notice icon YI of "change" corresponds to the notice display YH of "change" when the effect image EF11 is added. In FIG. 135 (or a15), the notice icon YI for "change" to which the effect image EF11 is added (the notice display YH for "change") is flying with a fluctuating icon h0, and it collides with the fluctuating icon h0. . In FIG. 135 (or a16), the display mode of the change icon h0, which is the default display mode before the start of the animation after the change icon change animation ends, is No. 119 (a) of FIG. It has changed to the display mode of the white blink described in 2.

  Note that, in this example, it may be viewed that the notice icon YI of "change" itself collides with the change icon h0.

  The example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-2) is an example in which the same type of notice icon YI is displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, three notice icons YI of "change" are displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-3) is an example in which different types of notice icons YI are displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, a notice icon YI of “red change”, a notice icon YI of “super heat”, and a notice icon YI of “SP” are displayed. The type is not limited to all different types, but may be partially different types. For example, the notice icon YI of "change", the notice icon YI of "change", and the notice icon YI of "SP" may be displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 135 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI of the same type (here, notice icons YI of “change”) are stocked in the stock area SS.

  The example shown in FIG. 135 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of different types of notice icons YI are stocked in the stock area SS. Here, the notice icon YI of “change in red” and “super heat” The notice icon YI and the notice icon YI of “SP” are displayed, and not limited to all different types but may be partially different types, for example, the notice icon YI of “change” The notice icon YI for "change" and the notice icon YI for "SP" may be displayed, Note that the notice icon YI for "box" and the notice icon YI for "red box" shown in FIG. And, the notice icon YI of "button" may be stocked, the notice icon YI of "box", the notice icon YI of "box" and the notice icon YI of "gold box" are also similar. ,stock There may be a case to be.

  The examples shown in FIG. 135 (or d), the same (or e), and the same (or f) are box-shaped notice icons YI whose contents shown in FIG. 117 (a) are not known in the appearance area AS. Is an example in which a plurality is displayed. The example shown in FIG. 135 (or d) is an example in which three notice icons YI of “box” shown in FIG. 117 (a) are displayed in the appearance area AS. That is, box-shaped icons of the same type are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (or e), an example in which the notice icon YI of "box", the notice icon YI of "box", and the notice icon YI of "red box" are displayed in the appearance area AS. It is. That is, boxed icons of the same type and boxed icons of different types are displayed in combination. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (or f), an example in which the notice icon YI of “box”, the notice icon YI of “red box”, and the notice icon YI of “gold box” are displayed in the appearance area AS It is. That is, all different types of box-shaped icons are displayed.

  Here, the example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-2), (or a3-3), (or d), the same figure (or e), or the same figure (or f) appears if the mini game is successful. In this example, all the notice icons YI displayed in the area AS can be acquired. If the mini game is successful, any one or two of the notice icons YI displayed in the appearance area AS may be configured to be obtainable. In addition, a roulette advance notice in which the advance notice icon YI which can be acquired in the appearance area AS is displayed in order is given, and before the mini game is started / when the mini game is being executed / after the mini game is successful, the roulette It may be configured to stop and acquire an obtainable (or acquired) notice icon.

  Subsequently, an effect example in which one stock notice icon is used a plurality of times will be described.

  FIG. 136 shows, in stages, an example of the effect of using one stocking advance notice icon a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 136 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. The first hold indicated by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold of the prefetch notice. In addition, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

  In (b) of FIG. 136, the appearance animation of the icon change notice display shown in (b) of FIG. 119 is started in the right base icon bIr, and the smoke-like effect image EF12 is displayed. In (a) of FIG. 136, the appearance animation of the icon change advance notice display is finished, and the No. 1 shown in (b) of FIG. 119 is displayed in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. An icon change notice display IYH of 16 "bancho" is displayed. The icon change notice display gives notice that the notice icon YI is to be obtained, and gives a notice that the display mode of the icon changes. The "bancho" icon change notice display IYH here is a display for giving a notice that the notice icon YI is to be obtained. In FIG. 136 (4), the icon change notice of the icon change notice display IYH is "box". The notice icon YI of “box” is displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. That is, in this example, the notice icon YI is acquired without playing the mini game. After a while, as shown in FIG. 136 (A6), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, in the same diagram (A7), the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation is It has been started.

  When the symbol variation display as the pre-reading object variation is started, as shown in FIG. 136 (A8-1), the notice icon YI stocked in the previous symbol variation display is used, and the box is closed in the display mode The notice icon YI of a certain aspect a changes to the aspect d, which is a display aspect in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH pops out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "change" of the default color of 6, and is a display for giving notice that the display mode such as the hold icon or the change icon is changed by one step.

  In the example of the effect so far, when the notice icon YI is used once and the mode changes to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, it is erased as it is, but in this example of effect, FIG. As shown, the notice icon YI changes from the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, to the mode a, which is the display mode in which the box is closed, and is not deleted. When the box of the notice icon YI is returned to the closed mode, the box may be reopened in the symbol variation display in which the box is opened, that is, in the symbol variation display serving as the currently performed prefetch target variation. It will be foretelling that. Even when the box of the notice icon YI returns to the closed mode, the box may not be reopened, or it may be reopened without fail. Moreover, even if it does not open continuously (even if it does not open immediately), it may open in the continuation of the symbol variation display which becomes a pre-reading object variation. Or it may reopen during a specific period (for example, a specific period which straddles a continuous symbol variation display) irrespective of the symbol variation display used as pre-reading object variation. Furthermore, although it has been described here that it is reopened, it may be closed again and opened more than twice if it is reopened.

  In FIG. 136 (A 10), the notice display YH of “change” released from the notice icon YI is used, and the display form of the fluctuation icon which has been the default display form (first display form) blinks in white. The display mode (second display mode) is changed.

  Also, in FIG. 136 (A 11), the notice icon YI that has returned to the mode a, which is the closed display mode, once again changes to the mode d, which is the open display mode, and the second icon from the box The warning display YH has been released. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "reach" of 17, and the notice display of this "reach" is a display which displays that it is a displayed symbol variation display, and more than normal reach or reach turning effect is performed. As described above, there may be a case where a notice display of a type different from the type of the first (previous) notice display YH appears. However, the same type of notice display YH may appear in succession. In addition, it may be configured such that only a notice display of a type different from the type that appeared last or once appears, or it is configured such that a notice display of the same type as the type of the first notice display YH appears. May be In addition, you may notice that normal reach will be performed by the notice display of "reach", and when the notice display of "reach" is performed in that case, the normal reach occurs in the symbol variation display in which the notice display is displayed. It will be decided to do.

  In FIG. 136 (12), the notice icon YI changes again to the mode a, which is a display mode in which the box is closed, and is not deleted. In addition, although the preliminary announcement display YH disappears after a certain display period after appearance (FIG. 136 (A 13)), if the preliminary presentation YH of "reach" is to be performed when the reach effect is performed, It may continue to be displayed until the reach effect is started.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 136 (a 14), reach effect is started, and "decoration 6" shakes and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, when the advance notice display "H" of "reach" appears, reach production is always performed, but just because the notice display YH of "reach" appears, reach presentation is always performed. Alternatively, even if the "reach" advance notice display YH appears, the symbol variation display may end without the reach effect being performed. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 136 (a15), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During the normal reach effect, the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode as the mode d again, and the third notice display YH from the box is released (FIG. 136 (A 16)). The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "chance" of 2 default colors. If the notice display of the default color "chance" is displayed during the reach, it will be a display notifying the increase in the reliability of the jackpot due to the change. Here also, a notice display of a type different from the type of the second (previous) notice display YH appears. This is because the reach effect has already been started, and the notice display YH of "reach" can not be made to appear again, and if there is no such circumstances, even if the notice display YH of the same type appears Good. In addition, during the execution of the reach effect, the notice display YH of "reach" may be displayed again. For example, when the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed again during normal reach, the display of the notice display YH of "reach" may be notified of development into super reach, in which case It may be developed to reach, and may or may not be developed to super reach. In addition, it is foreshadowed that it will develop from Super Reach A to Super Reach B when the notice indicator "Leach" is displayed during the execution of Super Reach A, which is less credible to the big hit than Super Reach B. Also, in that case, it may evolve into Super Reach B, and it may or may not evolve into Super Reach B. In addition, in the reach effect, the appearing notice may be limited. In this example, an upper limit is provided for the number of notice displays YH coming out from the same notice icon YI (for example, up to five), and the notice displays YH appear in the range up to the upper limit number. . As described above, although the upper limit is set, the more the number of notice displays YH coming out from the same notice icon YI, or the type of notice display YH coming out from the same notice icon YI The more the jackpot, the higher or lesser the jackpot reliability may be, or the jackpot reliability may be any number or type. In this example, the upper limit number of the notice displays YH appearing from the same notice icon YI is configured to be larger than the maximum stock number of the notice icons YI, but the same number may be used, Conversely, the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI may be configured to be larger than the upper limit number of the notice display YH coming out of the same notice icon YI.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (a 17), in this example, the notice icon YI that has released the third notice display YH disappears without returning to the mode a, which is a closed display mode. The notice icon YI may be configured to disappear whenever it is opened once during reach. Alternatively, it may be configured to disappear when the notice display YH is discharged up to the upper limit number. Furthermore, even if the notice display YH is released up to the upper limit number, the display may be continued without disappearing. This is the same even if the preliminary display YH is not released up to the upper limit number. In addition, the display may return to the closed display mode "a", and may continue to be displayed without reopening, or may continue to be displayed as the open display mode "b".

  In FIG. 136 (A18), the normal reach effect is finished, and the "decoration 5" which is not the "decoration 6" shakes and fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols is fluctuating.

  In FIG. 136 (a 19), the display is stopped with the combination of “decoration 6” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 6” displayed, and in FIG. 136 (a 20), it is finalized. The fluctuation icon h0 changed to the blue display mode is continuously displayed until the definite display is started, and disappears when the definite display is started. The timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears may be before the finalized display.

  In the example described here, the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed to give notice that the reach effect is performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but the symbol effect display in which the reach effect is not started, In the case of the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed, and as a result, "reach" is not displayed as the notice display YH of "reach". In the case of the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "" is displayed, it is likely that the big hit symbol form is finally determined and displayed. Also, first, the notice display of “change” is released in FIG. 136 (A8-1), and the notice display of “reach” is released in the same drawing (a 11) at the second time. The notice display of “change” may be released, and the notice display of “red change” of the same type as the notice display of “change” (notice display of No. 7 shown in FIG. 117 (b)) is released May be

  Subsequently, an example in which a plurality of notice displays YH of the same type are released from the same notice icon YI stocked will be described.

  It is the same as in FIG. 136 (A7), and when the symbol variation display as the prefetching object fluctuation starts, as shown in FIG. 136 (A 8-2-1), the notice icon YI stocked is used. And the box changes to the mode d, which is an open display mode, and the notice display YH is released from the inside of the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of 27 "small-size", and the notice display of this "small-size", if it can be collected a predetermined number of sheets (here three sheets) Although there is a display for giving notice that the effect will be performed, there are cases where it is not possible to collect a predetermined number. In addition, even if the predetermined number is collected, there may be a case in which the super reach effect and the effect of the one-man box are not performed. However, if one sheet appears, a predetermined number of sheets may be collected without fail, and if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, at least one of the super reach effect and the effect of the one-man box character may be performed. When the notice display YH of "small size" appears, it is stock-displayed in the area (small size stock area KS) next to the second decorative symbol display (Fig. 136 (A8-2-2)). This small-format stock area KS is an area different from the stock area SS (see FIG. 136 (5)) for stocking the advance notice icon YI, and these two areas do not partially overlap. However, these two regions may at least partially overlap or may be completely the same region. Further, although the stocked notice icon YI and the stocked "small-size" notice display YH do not overlap, at least a portion may overlap, or all may overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-2), the notice icon YI that released the notice display YH of “Ob” returns to the mode b which is the closed display mode, and the same figure (A 8-2-3). The symbol variation display is continued in). In addition, the notice display YH of "small size" may be configured such that only one piece of stock can be stocked in one symbol change display.

  In FIG. 136 (A8-2-4), the notice icon YI once returned to the closed display mode a changes to the open display mode d again, and two out of the boxes Noticeable notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is not the notice display YH of “Ob”, but the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice display of the “red change” of 7 is a notice that indicates that the display mode of the hold icon, the change icon, etc. is changed in two steps. In FIG. 136 (A8-2-5), the notice icon YI changes again to the mode a, which is a display mode in which the box is closed, and is not deleted. Moreover, the notice display YH of “red change” is used, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon, which has been the default display mode (first display mode) so far, is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode) There is.

  In FIG. 136 (A8-2-6), the notice icon YI is also changed to the mode d which is the open display mode, and the notice display YH, which is the third in the box, is released. Here, the notice display "HH" of "Obari" has been released at once. As described above, a plurality of preliminary announcements YH may be released in one release. However, only one release may be performed in one release. In FIG. 136 (a 8-2-7), the notice display of these two “small” is displayed in stock in the small-sized stock area KS, and the small-sized stock area shown in FIG. 136 (a 8-2-7) In the KS, there are stocked three "small-size" advance notices YH as a predetermined number. In this example, the notice display YH of "small size" is released several times (two times in this example) from one notice icon YI, but the notice display YH of "small size" is only once from one notice icon YI. It may be configured not to be released. In addition, only one notice display YH of "small size" may be configured not to be released from one notice icon YI.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of notice displays YH of the same type are emitted from the same notice icon YI being stocked, and another example of effects.

  In FIG. 137 (A 8-2-8) continued from FIG. 136 (A 8-2-7), the notice display YH of three “small-sized sheets” as a predetermined number of sheets is stocked in the small-sized stock area KS. The notice display YH of these three "small" is used. That is, it is used immediately when three "small-sized" advance notice displays YH, which are a predetermined number of sheets, are stored. Here, the No. 1 shown in FIG. In the form of the notice display YH of 28 "three 3 ovals", it is redisplayed relatively large at the center of the screen. No. The notice display YH of 28 “3 ovals” is a display for giving notice that super reach is performed over super reach A, super reach B, VS swordsman reach, or all group reach. However, even if the "three ovals" notice display YH is displayed, the super reach effect may not be performed, or if the "three ovals" notice display YH is displayed, the super reach effect is always displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, it is not used immediately when the notice display YH of 3 sheets of "small size" which becomes a predetermined number is accumulated, but after the state where the notice display YH of 3 "sizes" is kept stocked continues May be used. Moreover, the notice display YH of “Ob” can be stocked over the symbol variation indication, and stocking can be made up to the symbol variation indication of the pre-reading object, but three pieces are stored until the symbol variation indication of the pre-reading object If it is not, the notice display YH of the small size stocked until then is deleted from the small size stock area KS when the symbol variation display of the pre-read object is finished. Alternatively, even if three sheets are not stored, they may be used separately. In addition, stock of notice display YH of "small size" may be configured so as not to straddle symbol variation display, in that case, when symbol change display in which notice display YH of "small size" is stocked is finished, " The notice display YH of the "small size" is configured to be erased.

  In addition, No. 1 shown in FIG. The display of each of the 30 “character stock” notices (“To”, “爺”, “hime”) is the same as the notice display of the “obsolete” described here. The area for stocking the advance notice of the character may be provided as an area different from the small stock area KS, or may be provided in common with the small stock area KS.

  The numbers shown in FIG. 117 (b). 27 "Obari" and No. Each of the 30 "character stock" icons ("To", "爺", "Hime") is displayed as a notice YH and then stocked in each stock area (small stock area KS or character stock area not shown). Functions as a notice icon. The notice icon YI may be released from the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI may be stocked. That is, the notice icon YI may be stocked without the notice display YH.

  In FIG. 137 (a 8-2-9), the notice display YH of “three ovals” disappears, and the reach effect is started. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, the "decor 7" shakes. Then, in Fig. 137 (A8-2-10a), super reach production of VS swordsman reach is started as notified, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a battle scene between the main character Yoshimune and the hostess swordsman An animation is displayed. Even if the super reach effect is started, in the stock area SS, the stock display of the notice icon YI continues, but it may disappear when the super reach effect is started.

  Also in FIG. 137 (A8-2-11) during the super reach effect, the notice icon YI is also changed to the mode d which is the open display mode, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "super heat" of 4. The notice display of "super heat" displayed after the reach effect is started corresponds to a kind of normal notice that considerably increases the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display currently performed.

  In FIG. 137 (A8-2-12), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the mode a which is a closed display mode, but the notice display YH of “super heat” is displayed. However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. "Decoration 6" as is displayed in a large size, and then, a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is finalized and displayed.

  Fig. 137 (A8-2-10b1) to Fig. (A8-2-10b11) are diagrams showing an example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

  The same is true for FIG. 137 (A8-2-9), and FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b1) is also in the same state as FIG. 137 (A8-2-10a). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b2), along with the scene where Yoshimune has been defeated, “Decoration 6” as a middle symbol is displayed large, but in the stock area SS , The closed form notice icon YI is still displayed in stock.

  In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b3), the wipe effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. (A8-2-10b4), the display screen temporarily wipes the non-pattern same color It will be displayed. In this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 disappears, and the notice icon YI displayed in stock also disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. Also, the model title is displayed at the left corner. In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b5), wipe-out starts, and the display on the back gradually begins to appear. Here, the first decorative design ("decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7") that is fluctuating is beginning to be visible. In the following FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b6), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be visible. Here, the player starts to see the notice icon YI, so after the wipe out is completed (after the wipe effect is finished), the notice icon YI is further released from the notice icon YI, as shown in FIG. 130 (F10). Such as forecast icon YI expect itself to be promoted. At the wipe-out stage, the notice icon YI may disappear and may not be displayed again. The notice icon YI displayed in stock may also be displayed during execution of the wipe effect. Also, the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be used during the execution of the wipe effect, and the notice display YH may be released, but the presence or absence of the stock indication of the notice icon YI is in progress during the execution of the wipe effect. Regardless, the notice icon may be configured not to be used. Furthermore, although the notice icon YI described here is the notice icon YI used once or more, the same applies to an unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 120 (11) etc.) Yes (same below).

  In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b7), wipe-out is performed, and the background is normally returned to the background, but the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Moreover, in the 1st decoration pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" shakes and fluctuates. Furthermore, in the stock area SS, the closed notice icon YI is displayed. In addition, although promotion of notice icon YI itself has not arisen, it may be promoted from a kind of "box" to a kind of "red box", for example.

  In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b8), the notice icon YI is also changed to the mode d which is the open display mode, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of 5 "iron plate". The notice display of the “iron sheet” is a display for giving notice that the big hit has been decided in the symbol change display of the pre-reading object, that is, the symbol change display currently performed. Here, the notice display of “change” may be released, and the fluctuation icon YI may be promoted to one level, which may lead to a resurrection effect described later. Alternatively, even in the case of the change icon of the default display mode, there may be a case where the notice display of “change in red” is released, which may lead to the resurrection effect described later. Furthermore, the release of the advance notice at the same time of the swing change may be a big hit decision.

  In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b9), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the mode a which is the closed display mode, but the notice display YH of “iron sheet” is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b10), a resurrection effect is started, and in the same figure (A8-2-10b11), “Decoration 7”-“Decoration 7”-“ The combination of the decoration pattern of the jackpot of the decoration 7 "is displayed shaking. After that, this combination is confirmed and displayed.

  The notice icon YI may be carried over to the next change. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed across the wipe effect as in this example, the notice icon may not be used and may be hidden at the end of the symbol variation display. Furthermore, there may be cases where the notice icon YI may be carried over to the jackpot effect or the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and such carryover may be prohibited. As described above, the same is true for the unused advance notice icon YI (eg, the advance notice icon YI in FIG. 120 (11) etc.).

  FIG. 137 (A 1-2-1) to FIG. 137 A (A 1-2-6) are diagrams showing another example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

  In FIG. 137 (A 1-2-1), as in FIG. 136 (A 1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is in high-speed variation, and the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is It is displayed. The first hold indicated by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold of the prefetch notice. In addition, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

  Thereafter, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 136 (A 2) to (A 7) and FIGS. The state (a 1-2-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 137 (a 8-2-10 b1). Thereafter, the wipe effect is started through the same state as that shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b2) (FIG. 137 (A1-2-3)). The wipe effect here is the same as the wipe effect shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b3) to FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b6).

  In FIG. 137 (a 1-2-4), the wipe effect is finished, and the background is normally returned to the background, but the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Moreover, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is fluctuating. Furthermore, in the stock area SS, the closed notice icon YI is displayed. The notice icon YI may disappear at the wipe-out stage, and may be re-displayed when the next fluctuation starts or may be re-displayed during a big hit game. The notice icon YI displayed during the big hit game may be prohibited from use or may be used in the same manner as during the symbol variation display. Furthermore, in the first place, during the big hit game, the display of the advance notice icon YI may be restricted (prohibited) and not displayed.

  In FIG. 137 (a 1-2-5), the notice icon YI is changed to the mode d which is the open display mode, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is a notice display of "change in red". The preliminary display of “red change” here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. Unlike the notice display of “red change” of 7, it is a display for giving a notice of changing to the same display mode as the display mode of its own.

  In FIG. 137 (1-2-6), there is no change in the display mode of the variation icon h0, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 is the same as the display mode of the advance notice display of “change in red” (in the fifth display mode It changes to a certain red display mode). That is, it is promoted four stages here. In this example, the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is displayed as it is without the resurrection effect being performed.

  According to this example, the notice icon YI is used as a further advance notice, not the current symbol change display which is the symbol change display of the pre-read object. If the symbol fluctuation display behind the current symbol fluctuation display is high in expectation of the big hit as a result of pre-reading (for example, it may be long fluctuation of fluctuation time, even if it is big hit fluctuation it is lost fluctuation) May be like this example. In this example, the display mode (here, the fifth display mode) above the fluctuation icon (see FIG. 137 (1-2-6)) of the third display mode (display mode of “blue”) that has become lost. The display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed. However, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed in the display mode (third display mode) equivalent to the display mode of the fluctuation icon which is lost, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon which is lost is better than the display mode of the fluctuation icon. In the lower display mode (for example, the second display mode), the display mode of the hold icon may be changed. In addition, when the fluctuation icon of the lost fluctuation is the third display mode or more, it may be as in this example, or when it is the third display mode or less, it may be as in this example. Furthermore, regardless of the display mode of the change icon of the lost change, it may be as in this example. Further, the pre-reading notice is not limited to the display mode change of the hold icon, and another pre-reading notice may be made notice (for example, chance eye, pre-reading background change (red stage change), etc.).

  In addition, although the notice display of "the red change" is discharge | released here, the notice display of the "change" may be discharge | released. In addition, a notice display for giving notice of changing to a display mode above the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 (for example, one or more stages) (for example, green one level higher than blue in this example) is released It is also good.

  FIG. 138 shows an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

  In FIG. 138 (a 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 are displayed. These pending icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. In addition, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is also displayed. Nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

  After that, the reserve is digested, and in the state of symbol variation display in the state where the special figure is not reserved, in FIG. 138 (A 1-3-2), two notice icons YI are stocked in the stock area SS. There is. In FIG. 138 (a 1-3-3), the first notice icon YI stocked earlier is used, and the first notice icon YI is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. The notice display YH of "Red change" has been released from the inside of the box. In FIG. 138 (a 1-3-4), the notice icon YI is returned to the mode a in which the box is closed, and the notice display YH of “change in red” is used, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is It is changing to the 3rd display mode (display mode of "blue").

  Subsequently, in FIG. 138 (a 1-3-5), the second notice icon YI stocked later is used, and the second notice icon YI is a display mode in which the box is opened. It changes, and the notice display YH of "reach" is released from the inside of the box. In FIG. 138 (a 1-3-6), the second notice icon YI disappears, and a notice display YH of “reach” is displayed, and in FIG. 138 (a 1-3-7), “reach” The notice display YH disappears, the reach effect is started, and the "decoration 6" shakes and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (a 1-3-8), the display of normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the remaining notice icon YI changes to the open display mode again, and the notice display YH, which becomes the second from the box, is released (FIG. 138 (a 1-3-9). ). The notice display YH emitted here is a notice display of "chance" of the default color. In FIG. 138 (a 1-3-10), the first notice icon YI also disappears, and the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed.

  In FIG. 138 (Ar 1-3-11), the normal reach effect is finished, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, the "decoration 5" which is not the "decoration 6" is fluctuating. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols is swayed and then displayed.

  In the example described above, the notice icon YI is used in the stock order, but the notice icon YI may be used regardless of the stock order. In addition, the number of times of use of the notice icon YI was two, while the notice icon YI stocked first was two times, and the notice icon YI stocked later was only one. Thus, although the number of times of use may differ depending on the notice icon YI, it may be the same. When the number of times of use of the notice icon YI is the same, the number of times of use may be the same from the time when one notice icon is stocked to the time when all the plurality of notice icons are used. For example, if the previously stocked notice icon is used twice, then the previously stocked notice icon is also used twice, and if the previously stocked notice icon is used three times, the stock is posted later The pre-announced icon is also used three times. Thus, the number of times of use of other icons may be adjusted. Moreover, the number of times of use may be predetermined. In this case, regardless of how many pieces are stocked, any notice icon is always used a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, the notice icon YI stocked earlier may be configured to use the notice icon YI more frequently than the notice icon YI stocked later, or vice versa. .

  Also, the maximum number of times of use may be predetermined or may change. When the maximum number of times of use changes, it may change according to the gaming state (normal state, power support state (time reduction state), definite change state)), and the maximum number of times of use increases in the state of certain prefetch zone It is also good. In addition, in a certain gaming state (for example, a normal state, but may be a power support state (a short time state) or a definite change state), the advance notice icon may not be stocked.

  FIG. 138 (a 1-4-1) to FIG. 138 (a 1-4-11) are diagrams showing gradually another example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

  Fig. 138 (a 1-4-1) to the same diagram (a 1-4-4) are in the same state as the same diagram (a 1-3-1) to the same diagram (a 1-3-4), In FIG. 138 (a 1-4-5), the first notice icon YI previously stored is continuously used. As a result, the notice display YH of "reach" is released. In FIG. 138 (A 1-4-6), the first notice icon YI used in succession disappears, and the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed, and the same figure (A 1-4-7). In), the notice display YH of "reach" disappears, and reach production is started. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (a 1-4-8), the display of the normal reach effect is started, and during this normal reach effect, it has not been used so far, The second notice icon YI stocked from is used, and a notice display YH of the default color "chance" is released (Fig. 138 (a 1-4-9)). In FIG. 138 (a 1-4-10), the notice icon YI that has been left disappears, and the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed.

  In FIG. 138 (a 1-4-11), the normal reach effect is ended, and the combination of lost symbols of the decorative symbols is swayed and then displayed.

  As in this example, the notice icon YI may disappear in the stock order. That is, it may be configured to start using the stocked notice icon YI when the stocked notice icon YI is used up.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example in which the notice icon YI is used multiple times while the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI is known before the release.

  FIGS. 139 (a al) to 139 (a a3) are in the same state as FIG. 136 (a 1-1) to FIG. 136 (a 3), and in FIG. 139 (a a4), in the effect icon display area DIS. In the right base icon bIr, an icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" is displayed. Although the icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” here is also a display for giving a notice of obtaining the notice icon YI, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) is the same as the effect example described using FIG. A notice icon YI of "change" of 6 is displayed. That is, the icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. It is displayed that the notice icon YI of "change" has been acquired, and the player simply sees the display (only by reading the characters), and the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon is "change". Recognize that it is a notice of.

  In FIG. 139 (a5), the notice icon YI of "change" moves to the stock area SS, and in the figure (a6), it is displayed in the stock area SS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 139 (a7), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, in the same diagram (a8), the symbol variation display which is the target change for prefetching is It has been started.

  When the symbol change display as the preread target change is started, the conversation notice as the normal notice as described using FIG. 120 is started. A detailed description will be given above, and briefly described here, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a9), a conversational image CI1 of the maroon is displayed in the central region. The display of the conversation image CI1 of this courtesy person does not overlap the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in front. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a10), the conversation announcement is updated, and the conversation image CI2 of the habit in which the operation promotion notification image constituted by the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed Is displayed. Incidentally, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (a10), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the user is displayed at a position deviated from the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the both do not overlap.

  Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 139 (A11) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has passed since the operation valid period has started.

  The timing shown in FIG. 139 (a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 139 (a13), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period, the conversation image CI2 of a whistle announces that reach effect will be started from the operation promotion notification image. The word display has changed to "Leach!" In addition, the character display of the notice such as "reach it!" May be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed also in the case of

  Also, in the state where the conversation image CI2 of the rose that has been changed to the character display of "reach it!" Is displayed, the variation icon change animation is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 139 (a14), an effect image EF11 notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now is added to the notice icon YI of "change". In FIG. 139 (a15), the ball of light is flying from the stock area SS with a fluctuating icon h0, and it strikes the fluctuating icon h0. The fluctuation icon h0, in which the ball of light collides, is changed to the second display mode (display mode of white blinking).

  The display of “change” displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 139 (a15) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in FIG. 139 (a16), the notice display YH of “change” is FIG. 117 (b) It changes to the aspect b shown to these. That is, it is changed to the aspect showing what was used. In addition, during the mode b, since it is the notice display YH, it can not be used as the notice icon YI.

  In FIG. 139 (i), the notice display YH of the mode b is changed to the notice icon YI, and it is possible to use again. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a18), the conversational image CI1 of the lady-in-law and the conversation image CI2 of the whistle are erased, the conversation announcement is finished, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible.

  In FIG. 139 (a 19), reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” swings and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a 20), display of normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variation icon change animation is started, and the notice image YI is added with the effect image EF11 again (FIG. 139 (a 21)), and in FIG. 139 (a 22), light from the stock area SS The ball flies with a flutter icon h0 and strikes the flutter icon h0. The fluctuation icon h0 which the light ball has collided with is now changed to the third display mode (blue display mode).

  The display of “change” displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 139 (a22) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in FIG. 139 (i a23), the notice display YH of “change” is FIG. 117 (b) Although the mode is changed again to the mode b shown in, in the same figure (a 24), it is returned to the notice icon YI, and can be used again. In addition, super reach development effect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (Ia 24), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the following FIG. Super reach production is started, and the image of the enemy player swordsman is displayed large. Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a 26), an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy character swordsman is displayed. Even if the super reach effect is started, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, and the notice icon YI is displayed in stock in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 139 (I a27), during the animation of the duel scene, the variation icon change animation is started, the effect image EF11 is also added to the notice icon YI, and in FIG. A ball of light from SS is flying with a fluctuating icon h0 and strikes the fluctuating icon h0.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects and the like continued from FIG.

  In FIG. 140 (I a29) continued from FIG. 139 (I a28), in the fluctuating icon change animation, the fluctuation icon h0 hit by the light ball is changed to the fourth display mode (green display mode) . In addition, although the notice display YH of “change” is changed to the mode b again, in FIG. 140 (a 30), the notice icon YI is returned to be usable.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a 31), along with the scene where Yoshimune has been defeated, “decoration 5” as a middle symbol is largely displayed, but in the stock area SS, the notice icon YI Is still listed.

  Then, the wipe effect is started again (FIG. 140 (a 32)), and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L shown in FIG. 140 (a 33) temporarily becomes a wipe display of a non-pattern same color. In this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 disappears, and the notice display YH displayed in stock also disappears. In FIG. 140 (a34), the wipe out starts and gradually the display of the back begins to be seen. Here, the first decorative design ("decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6") that is fluctuating is beginning to be visible. In the following FIG. 140 (a35), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be visible.

  In FIG. 140 (a36), the user wipes out, and the background is normally returned to the background, but the variation icon h0 remains in the fourth display mode (green). Moreover, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is fluctuating. Furthermore, the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 140 (a37), the notice icon YI has disappeared. Note that the notice icon YI may disappear before the wipe effect, or may disappear without being displayed again at the wipe out stage, or disappear simultaneously with the end of the wipe effect. There may be a case where there is a case, a case where the character does not disappear until the super reach effect ends, or a case where the character does not disappear until it is displayed. The notice icon YI displayed in stock may also be displayed during execution of the wipe effect. Also, the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be used during the execution of the wipe effect, and the notice display YH may be released, but the presence or absence of the stock indication of the notice icon YI is in progress during the execution of the wipe effect. Regardless, the notice icon may be configured not to be used.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a38), the first decorative symbol is displayed in a final combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6".

  Subsequently, an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked will be described.

  It is the same as in FIG. 139 (a6), and thereafter, before the end of the symbol variation display, the No. 1 shown in FIG. Notice icon YI of 21 "buttons" and No. After the seventeen "reach" notice icons YI are continuously stocked, as shown in FIG. 139 (b1), the symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (i b 2), the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation is started. In this example, a plurality of notice icons that can recognize what the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon is by simply looking at the display or reading a character, the next change (the symbol that becomes the target change for look-ahead Variable display).

  In the symbol variation display as the pre-reading target variation, the same conversation announcement as the conversation announcement that has been described many times such as FIG. 139 (A9) to FIG. (A17) is started (FIG. 140 (Ab3) ). Here, the explanation of the conversation announcement is minimized, and the explanation of the announcement icon YI stocked will be made. In FIG. 140 (b4), of the three notice icons YI of "change", the notice icon YI of "button", and the notice icon YI of "reach", the notice icon YI of "button" and The effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI is to be used from now is added to each of the notice icons YI of “reach”. In FIG. 140 (b5), the effect image EF11 disappears from each, and becomes a notice display YH of the “button” of the mode b, and also becomes a notice display YH of the “reach” of the mode b. Here, in the stock region SS, the circles of the aspect b of each other partially overlap, but may be displayed so as not to overlap. Also, the earlier the stocked order may be overlapped in the later one, and conversely, the slower one may be overlapped in the earlier one. In FIG. 140 (b5), since the notice display of the "button" is used, the button effect is executed in the notice of the conversation. That is, the operation promotion notification image configured by the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. In FIG. 140 (b6), the notice display YH of the “button” and the notice display YH of the “reach” are both returned to the notice icon YI, and can be used again.

  Then, the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period (Fig. 140 (b7)), and since the notice display of "reach" is used from the operation promotion notification image, reach effect is started It has been changed to the word display of "reach it!"

  When the speech advance notice is over, in FIG. 140 (b10), the first stop of the left symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol. When the first stop is performed, the effect image EF11 is added to the "reach" notice icon YI. Note that the effect image EF11 may be added to the notice icon YI of "reach" before the first stop is performed, or may be added at the same time as the first stop is performed, or the first stop May be added before the second stop is performed (i.e., before the reach state occurs). In FIG. 140 (b11), the effect image EF11 disappears, and the notice display YH of the "reach" of the mode b is made. In FIG. 140 (b12), the second stop of the right symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the reach state is reached. ing.

  In the reach state, the variation icon change animation is started this time, and as shown in FIG. 140 (b13), the effect image EF11 is added to the "change" notice icon YI. Then, in FIG. 140 (b14), the ball of light is flying with a fluctuating icon h0, and it collides with the fluctuating icon h0, and in FIG. 140 (b15), the fluctuating icon h0 where the ball of light is bumped is the second one. The display mode (display mode of white blinking) is changed. In addition, although the notice display YH of “change” is changed again to the mode b, in FIG. 140 (a 16), the notice icon YI is returned to be usable.

  On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a b17), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variation icon change animation is also started, and the effect image EF11 is added again to the "change" notice icon YI (Fig. 139 (b18)).

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

  In FIG. 141 (b19) continued from FIG. 140 (b18), the ball of light flew with a fluctuating icon h0 and hit the fluctuating icon h0, and in the same figure (b20), the ball of light bumped The icon h0 is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). In addition, although the notice display YH of “change” is changed again to the mode b, in FIG. 141 (b21), the notice icon YI is returned to be usable. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (I b21), super reach development effect is displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208 L shown in the following FIG. Super reach production is started, and the image of the enemy player swordsman is displayed large. Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (b23), an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy character swordsman is displayed. Even when the super reach effect is started, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, and the stock area SS still displays three notice icons YI in stock. As shown in FIG. 141 (b24), in the middle of the animation of the duel scene, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in the following FIG. 141 (b25), the first decorative symbol is displayed On the device 208L, an operation promotion notification image configured by a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. Incidentally, at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (b25), the operation effective period is not started, and the display according to the button operation is not performed even if the button is operated. In addition, although the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to the mode b again, it returns to the notice icon YI and becomes usable. Eventually, the button effect starts and the operation effective period starts (FIG. 141 (b26)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 141 (b27) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 141 (b28) is within the operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button operation in this case is an operation to determine whether or not the cut-in image CI3 of the crown shown in FIG. 17 (32) appears. In this example, the cut-in image CI3 of the crown does not appear, and The animation stays in progress (FIG. 141 (b29) to (b31). Note that, in response to the button operation, the variation icon change animation is started, and the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI. And the display mode of the fluctuation icon may change.

  In FIG. 141 (b32), the effect image EF11 is again added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in the subsequent FIG. 141 (b33), the chance button 136 is simulated on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An operation promotion notification image is displayed, which includes the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation valid period. Eventually, the button effect is started, the operation effective period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 141 (b34) is a display mode when the above-mentioned operation effective period starts and a little time passes. It is shown. Further, although the notice display YH of the “button” is changed again to the mode b (FIG. 141 (b33)), it returns to the notice icon YI and becomes usable thereafter.

  The timing shown in FIG. 141 (b35) is within the operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button effect here is the final judge effect, and on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (b36), “decoration 5” as a middle symbol is displayed large together with the scene where Yoshimune defeated ing. After that, the first decorative symbol display device 208L is subjected to the wipe effect to be performed from FIG. 140 (a 32) onwards, and after the notice icon Y I is erased as shown in FIG. "--Decoration 5"-the combination of the decorative patterns of the "decor 6" is confirmed and displayed.

  Note that the display of the final judge screen shown in FIG. 141 (b36) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be performed.

  FIG. 142 shows, in stages, an example of the roulette effect for the advance notice icon stock.

  The state shown in FIG. 142 (c1) is a state in which no special drawing is held, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not perform the change display of the decorative symbol. Further, a roulette RLT for notice icon stock is provided on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c1). The roulette RLT is divided into left and right areas, and the name (icon name) of one of the notice icons YI among various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b) stops in the left area. . On the other hand, one of the cross mark, question mark and surprise mark stops in the right area. Also, in the left area and the right area, the colors (for example, white, blue, green, red, gold) of a plurality of areas are prepared, and the icon name and the mark (symbol) are used in combination Be done. In the roulette display RLT shown in Fig. 142 (c1), the icon name of "Change" is displayed on the green background in the left area, and a cross mark is displayed on the white background in the right area. It is not possible to obtain the icon YI. That is, when the cross mark is displayed, the advance notice icon can not be acquired.

  After that, there is a ball in the special figure 1 start opening 230, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped but the first left 2 In the decoration pattern, the variable display is started. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuating icon display area CIS, the animation of increasing the fluctuating icon is started, and on the pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 142 (c), the fluctuating icon h0 of the display mode of the defiling is displayed.

  When the symbol variation display is started, the roulette display (variation display) is also started in the roulette RLT for the advance notice icon stock (FIG. 142 (c4)). Here, the roulette display is started before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, but the start of the roulette display may be simultaneous with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the first decoration It may be after the start of the variable display of the symbol.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. After the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the left region of the roulette RLT is stopped, and the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the green background (Fig. 142 (c5)). On the other hand, the fluctuation display of the right area is continued. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 142 (C7-1), the variable display of the right area is also stopped, and the question mark is displayed on the green background. This combination can obtain a notice icon "reach?", And the notice area Y of "reach?" Is stocked in the stock area SS shown in FIG. 142 (c). The notice icon YI of "reach?" Is a weak notice icon of a degree to which reach production may be performed, and in many cases, the reach production is not performed than when the notice icon YI of "reach" is used .

  When the notice icon YI of “reach?” Is acquired, the display of the roulette RLT may be turned off, but in this example, the display continues. In this example, although the display of the roulette RLT crosses the symbol fluctuation display in a state where the fluctuation display of the left area and the right area is stopped, the display of the roulette RLT displays the fluctuation display of the left area and / or the right area. In the state where it is done, it is possible to straddle the symbol fluctuation indication. In addition, during stop display of the symbol, display of RLT (the state in which the fluctuation display of the left area and / or the right area is performed or the fluctuation display of the left area and / or the right area is not displayed) is not displayed It may be configured as follows.

  In FIG. 142 (c), the first stop of the first decorative symbol is performed, and "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped on the left symbol. In this symbol variation display, the notice icon YI of "reach?" Is not used, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in Fig. 142 (c10) without reaching a reach effect, "decoration 6"-" The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decor 4"-"decor 1" is fluctuating, and in Fig. 11 (c), the combination is fixedly displayed. Here, since there is no subsequent hold, when the finalized display is performed, the "reach?" Notice icon YI disappears. However, when there is a subsequent hold, it may carry over to the next fluctuation, or may always carry over. Alternatively, even if there is a subsequent hold, it may not be carried over.

  In addition, although the number of times of fluctuation of the roulette is one time per symbol fluctuation display here, it may be changed a plurality of times. In addition, in the symbol fluctuation display of the prefetch target fluctuation and the symbol fluctuation display before that, a difference may be provided to the number of times of fluctuation of the roulette in one symbol fluctuation display. For example, the symbol fluctuation display of the prefetch target fluctuation However, the number of times of fluctuation of the roulette may be larger or smaller than that of the symbol fluctuation display before that. For example, in symbol fluctuation display prior to symbol fluctuation display of prefetch target object fluctuation, roulette display may be performed once as prefetch notice, and in symbol fluctuation display of prefetch target object fluctuation, roulette display may be performed three times as advance notice. However, the number of times may not be fixed, and may be zero.

  In addition, the notice icon YI may be stocked by another effect (for example, a mini game such as a rock-and-collar confrontation) other than the roulette display described here, and while the roulette display is being performed, the notice icon YI A presentation such as a mini game capable of acquiring a game may not be performed. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the roulette display is performed or performed, effects such as a mini game capable of acquiring the advance notice icon YI may not be performed.

  Next, the reach tilt effect will be described.

  FIG. 142 (c) is the same, and in FIG. 142 (c 9-2-1), an effect image EF11 notifying that the notice icon YI is to be used from now is displayed as the notice icon YI of “reach?”. It is attached. In the following FIG. 142 (c 9-2-2), the reach turning effect is started, and the turning fluctuation is performed in the first decorative symbol. That is, here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol switch to low-speed fluctuation, the left symbol rotates upward, the right symbol rotates downward, and the effect of temporary stop at the vertical center position is executed However, as shown in FIG. 142 (C9-2-4), the temporary stop is not performed, and the reach-rolling effect ends in failure. Although it has disappeared when the reach directing effect is started, it may be continuously displayed on the notice icon YI of “reach?” During the reach directing effect, as shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of “reach?” Is indicated by a circle indicating that it has been used, but the circle disappears immediately, and the notice icon YI becomes reusable. 1st decoration in 9-2-5a) In the pattern, all three decorative patterns change at a low speed, and in the same figure (c 9-2-6a), the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 8" shakes and fluctuates The notice icon YI of “reach?” Is not displayed before the decoration symbol is displayed in a final state (FIG. 142 (9-2-6a)).

  In this example, the effect image EF11 notifying that the notice icon YI is to be used is added to the notice icon YI, but the mode of the notice icon YI itself changes before the start of use or at the time of use disclosure. You may For example, the notice icon YI itself may be enlarged, or the color of the notice icon YI itself may be changed. Also, during use, the mode may be returned to the original mode, or the mode may be changed.

  Next, another example of the reach tilt effect will be described.

  FIG. 142 (c 9-2-4b) is in the same state as FIG. 142 (c 9-2-4a), and is a state after the reach-turn effect has failed. In this example, all three decorative symbols are not changed to the low speed fluctuation as it is, but are switched to the high speed fluctuation in reverse (FIG. 142 (W 9-2-5b), shown in the notice icon YI of "reach?" In FIG. 142 (c 9-2-6b) in which the circle mark has disappeared, the effect image EF11 is added again to the notice icon YI of “reach?” In the subsequent FIG. 142 (c 9-2-7b), In the first decorative symbol, the swing fluctuation is started again, and here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol each start to move toward the middle symbol continuing the high speed fluctuation, without passing the middle symbols to each other Before the middle symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed enlarged (Fig. 142 (W 9-2-9b)), and then temporary stop is performed, and the reach state is established (Fig. 142 (W 9- 2-10b)), final In addition, the reach tilt effect is successful from Figure 142 (c 9-2-2) to the same figure (c 9-2-4a) or the same reach (c 9-2-4b). From the same drawing (c 9-2-5b) to the same drawing (c 9-2-5b) or the same drawing (c 9-2-9b ') described later (c 9-2-9b'), a series of reach-caching effects It may be.

  Next, an example will be described in which in the reach-turn production, a turn fluctuation is started although it is started again.

  As shown in the previous FIG. 142 (c 9-2-8b), each of the left symbol and the right symbol starts moving toward the middle symbol continuing high-speed fluctuation, and FIG. 142 (c 9-2-9b ' In 1), the left symbol and the right symbol pass through the middle symbol each other, and as shown in (Fig. 143 (W 9-2-9b)), the enlarged display in front of the middle symbol is not performed, and eventually, The temporary stop is not performed, and all three decoration symbols have low-speed fluctuation (Fig. 142 (c 9-2-9b'2)), and in the same figure (c 9-2-9b '3), "decoration 7 "-Decoration 7"-The combination of the decoration design of the loss of "decor 8" is swayed, and it is determined and displayed by the combination.

  Although the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" Every time a new change in swing is started, the reach change effect is a matter of a series of effects, and the effect image EF11 is firstly Only once may be added to the notice icon YI of "reach?".

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing another effect using the roulette RLT for the advance notice icon stock and an example of the effect accompanied by a button operation.

  FIG. 143 (c 9-2-4c) is an example continued from FIG. 142 (c 9-2-3), and shows a successful example of the reach tilt effect. Here, the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned at the center in the vertical direction, and before the temporary stop, each of the left symbol and the right symbol is displayed enlarged (Fig. 143 (W 9-2-4c)), and then the temporary stop is performed. The reach state is established (FIG. 143 (c9-2-5c)).

  Further, FIG. 143 (c 7-2-1) is an example continued from FIG. 142 (c 6), and in FIG. 143 (c 7-2-1), the right region of the roulette RLT has a red background. An exclamation mark is displayed. As a result, it is a combination of the icon name of "reach" on the green background and the surprise mark on the red background. In this combination, it is possible to obtain the "reach" notice icon YI that is more reliable than the "reach?" Notice icon YI. Also, with the combination of the icon name of "reach" on the red background and the question mark on the green background, it may be possible to obtain only the notice icon YI of "reach?", Or the notice icon YI of "reach" You may be able to earn In addition, when the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the red background, and the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired, the icon name of the "reach" on the green background and the red background are surprised The symbol variation display using the “reach” notice icon may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. In addition, when the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the red background and the question mark is displayed on the green background, and the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired, the question on the icon background of "reach" and the red background is asked The symbol variation display using the “reach” notice icon may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. That is, the background color in which the icon name is displayed relates to the reliability of the big hit than the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed. Therefore, when the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the green background, and the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired, the icon name of the "reach" on the green background and the green background are surprised The symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon tends to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired. Furthermore, when the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the green background, and the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired, the icon name of the "reach" on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the green background When it is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired, the probability that the symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon will be a big hit is the same. However, the background color in which the icon name is displayed and the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may have the same relationship to the jackpot reliability. Alternatively, the background color on which the mark (symbol) is displayed may be related to the reliability of the big hit than the background color on which the icon name is displayed.

  In addition, the name of the color in the above description can be represented by a display mode. That is, "red" is the fifth display mode, and "green" is the fourth display mode (the same applies to the following description).

  Also, FIG. 143 (C7-3-1) is an example continued from FIG. 142 (C5), and in this FIG. 143 (C7-3-1), the left region of the roulette RLT has a red background. The icon name "reach" is displayed, and in the right area, a surprise mark is displayed on a red background. With this combination, it may be possible to obtain the "reach" notice icon YI for the first time. That is, if neither the left area nor the right area has a red background, the "reach" notice icon YI can not be obtained, and if one is a green background, the "reach?" It becomes notice icon YI. Also, in this case, if the red background is stopped earlier, the red background may be configured to be more easily stopped at the other than when the green background is stopped first, or the same in probability It may be

  Also, FIG. 143 (C7-4-1) is another example continuing from FIG. 142 (C5), and in this FIG. 143 (C7-4-1), the left region of the roulette RLT is the An icon of a box shown in 117 (a) is displayed, and the number of stocks is displayed in the right area. In this example, one icon of "box" shown in FIG. 117 (a) can be acquired. In addition, as a stock number, it is 0-3. In the left area, either “box” or cross mark may be displayed, and in the right area, colors (white, red, gold, rainbow) may be displayed. In this case, for example, in the case of the cross mark and the rainbow, the box-shaped notice icon YI can not be obtained, and in the case of the "box" and the red, the notice icon YI of "red box" can be obtained. it can.

  Also, FIG. 143 (C7-5-1) is another example continuing from FIG. 142 (C5), and in this FIG. 143 (C7-5-1), gold is applied to the left region of the roulette RLT. (Sixth Display Mode) The icon name of "reach" is displayed on the background, and a surprise mark is displayed on the gold background in the right area. In this combination, as shown in FIG. 143 (c7-5-2), it is possible to obtain the golden “reach” notice icon YI. The golden "reach" notice icon is more reliable than the regular "reach" notice icon. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may be high.

  Note that even if the left area and the right area are both gold background in this way, only the same notice icon as the advance notice icon that can be acquired when both the left area and the right area are red background While making it impossible to do so, the gold background may be more likely to hit the red background than the red background for the preread target change.

  Further, the display of the roulette RLT and the stocked notice icon YI may be contradictory. For example, although the display of roulette RLT is "reach" and "?", The notice icon YI is a notice icon of "reach", or the display of roulette RLT is "reach" and "!" The notice icon YI may be a notice icon of "SP" indicating super reach, or the notice icon YI may be a green icon although the background is a gold background in the display of the roulette RLT. Such contradiction may cause the big hit symbol to be more likely to be finally determined and displayed, or the lost symbol may eventually be more likely to be determined, rather than having no contradiction. In addition, even if the background is a gold background in the display of the roulette RLT, the jackpot confirmation may be made if the notice icon YI is a green display icon.

  Also, re-variation of the roulette may be performed. For example, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at “reach” and “x”, the right area may be changed again to finally become a combination of “reach” and “!”. In addition, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at "reach" and "?", By changing the left region again, the combination may finally be a combination of "SP" and "?". Furthermore, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at the icon of “box” and “× 1” shown in FIG. 117 (a), the icon of “red box” and It may be a combination of x 2 ". Furthermore, even if only one of the left area and the right area is fluctuating and the other is stopped, the other stopped may be revaried.

  As described above, although the roulette effect has been described, in the example here, all icon names are “reach”, but the same applies to the names of various notice icons YI shown in FIG. However, depending on the icon name, only the question mark or only the question mark or cross mark is displayed on the green background color, or only the surprise mark or only the surprised mark or cross mark is displayed on the red and golden background colors. It is also good. Furthermore, in the case of No. 1 shown in FIG. 5 and No. 23 and No. The icon name of the notice icon leading to the big hit determination such as 24 may not be combined with the question mark. That is, only the combination of "cardboard" and "cross mark", or the combination of "cardboard" and "surprise mark" may be displayed. In addition, the icon name of the notice icon (for example, "red chance" of No. 3 or "super hot" of No. 4 or "iron plate" of No. 5) leading to the relative reliability of the big hit becoming relatively high In the case of the name), it may be combined with only "the surprise mark". Further, the icon name of the notice icon leading to the big hit determination may be rainbow color (the seventh display mode) for both the background color of the icon name and the background color of the mark (symbol).

  In addition, the mark (symbol) may be notified by the background color of the icon name of the advance notice icon (for example, the icon name of the “iron plate” of No. 5) leading to the big hit determination. For example, if the background color of the "iron plate" which stopped earlier is green, it is a notice that the stop of the cross mark may also be possible, and if it is rainbow, the stop of the surprise mark is determined It is also good.

  Furthermore, the icon name (the left area in this example) may always stop first, or the mark (the right area in this example) may always stop first. In addition, the cross mark may not be stopped if the mark stops first when it is not known which stop first.

  In addition, when the notice icon is stocked in the roulette effect, the notice icon may be used by all means.

  Subsequently, an example of effect accompanied by a button operation will be described.

  In FIG. 143 (a1), the symbol variation display of the pre-reading object is performed without the special figure being reserved, and only one notice icon “I” of “box” is stocked in the stock area SS. . In FIG. 143 (a2), the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked advance notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image prompting to operate the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is comprised by meter MT. In addition, the timing of FIG. 121 (A 31-2-2) is before the start of the operation effective period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation effective period. It may be displayed at the same time as the start of.

  The operation valid period is started at the timing of FIG. 143 (Aa3), and the display time when a little time has elapsed after the operation valid period has started, with the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 143 (Aa4). It is indicated by.

  The timing shown in FIG. 143 (a5) is within the above-mentioned operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period, in FIG. 143 (Aa6), as shown in FIG. 143A (Aa7) after the notice icon YI is covered with the effect image EF13, The effect image EF 13 disappears, and the notice icon YI which is the mode a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation (box open animation) is displayed.

  The change of the notice icon YI to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation is performed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be performed if the validity period has expired.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), the notice icon YI changes from the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, to the mode a, which is the display mode in which the box is closed. In FIG. 143 (a9), the notice display YH of “change in red” emitted from the notice icon YI is used, and the display form of the fluctuation icon which has been the default display form (first display form) is blue The display mode (third display mode) is changed.

  In FIG. 143 (d) a10, the operation promotion notification image is displayed again on the left side of the stock notice icon YI, and then the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter shown in FIG. The MT is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the start of the operation effective period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 143 (a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period, in FIG. 143 (Aa13), the notice icon YI changes to a mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "reach" from the inside It has been released. Then, in FIG. 143 (air 14), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed mode a.

  In this example, although the operation promotion notification image is displayed each time, the operation promotion notification image is not displayed, and so-called back button effect may be performed.

  FIG. 144 shows an example in which the display mode of the notice icon YI of “button” changes in accordance with the button operation, and another example.

  In FIG. 144 (b1), a super reach presentation of VS Kenshi reach is executed, and an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy Ken Osa is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in FIG. 144 (b1), the numbers shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of 21 "buttons" is stocked. In FIG. 144 (b2), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in FIG. 144 (b3), in the central region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, After the button image 136a is displayed, the button image 136a becomes slightly smaller and a remaining time display meter MT is added (FIG. 144 (b4)). Further, in this example, a character of “double hit” requiring continuous operation of the chance button 136 and a confrontation meter MTV indicating superiority or inferiority of Yoshimune and Ken-Asu are also displayed. The confrontation meter MTV is a blue meter on the Yoshimune side (left side) and a red meter on the sword side (right side). At the start of the display of the confrontation meter MTV, the blue meter is half and the red meter is half. At the timing shown in FIG. 144 (b4), the operation valid period is not started, and the display according to the button operation is not performed even if the button is operated. Eventually, the button effect starts and the operation effective period starts (FIG. 144 (b 5)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 144 (b6) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. Although the confrontation meter MTV is overlapped by part of the fluctuation icon h0, the confrontation meter MTV may be displayed so as to overlap the fluctuation icon h0, and the confrontation is made at a position where the fluctuation icon h0 does not overlap. A meter MTV may be displayed.

  The timing in FIG. 144 (b7) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (b8), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button", and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. However, here, the effect image EF11 does not notify that the notice icon YI will be used from now.

  Since a continuous hit operation is required, the player operates the chance button 136 also at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (b9). Then, in FIG. 144 (b10), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button", and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. This effect image EF11 disappears immediately (FIG. 144 (b11)), and the player operates the chance button 136 also at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (b12). Then, in FIG. 144 (b13), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. If the interval between the player's button operations becomes short, addition and disappearance of the effect image EF11 to the notice icon YI are performed at high speed, and the effect image EF11 appears to be always on.

  The blue meter of the confrontation meter MTV increases in accordance with the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. However, in this confrontation meter MTV, when the operation effective period is started, the red meter of the swordsman automatically increases according to the passage of time. If the chance button 136 is hit continuously so as not to lose the speed of increase of the red meter, the increase of the red meter is overwhelmed by the increase of the blue meter, and the blue meter is increased. As shown in FIG. 144 (b13), when everything is blue, a cut-in image CI3 of Yoshimune appears as shown in FIG. 144 (b13). On the other hand, when everything is a red meter, a cut-in image of swordsman not shown here appears.

  The timing at which the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button" may not be every time the chance button 136 is operated once, but may be every time the blue meter is increased by one division in the confrontation meter MTV.

  Subsequently, an example in which the stock number of the advance notice icon YI is displayed will be described.

  FIG. 144 (o a1) is the same state as shown in FIG. 120 (a 9-1), and the icon of the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins over the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 144 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 having won. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of "box" 1 is outputted from its appearance area AS and temporarily displayed in a large size. At this stage, the display of the stock number (here, “stock × 1”) is started between the second decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second reserved number display. That is, before the notice icon YI reaches the stock area SS, the display of the stock number is started, and it is unclear if how many notice icons can be obtained by merely looking at the appearance area AS. Before the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, it is possible to know the number acquired by displaying this stock number. In FIG. 144 (a3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. In FIG. 144 (a3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

  After this, the reserve is digested, and in the state of symbol variation display in the state where the special figure is not reserved, in FIG. 144 (o a4), one notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS, and the stock number is displayed. Is also "stock x 1".

  In FIG. 144 (a5), the reach effect is started, and the "decoration 6" shakes and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, in the reach state, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 144 (a6), the notice icon YI changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “change” is released from the box. As described above, since the notice icon YI is used, the display of the stock number is once "stock x 0" (Fig. 144 (o a6)), and the stock number display itself disappears (Fig. 144). (O a7)). Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 121 (A33). When the same notice icon YI is repeatedly used, the display of the stock number does not change, and in this case, "stock x 1" continues to be displayed. In addition, even if the same notice icon YI is used repeatedly, if it is used once, the display of the stock number may be temporarily changed to "stock x 0" and then returned to "stock x 1" immediately. . In addition, when the stock number of the advance notice icon becomes 0, “stock × 0” may not be displayed and the display itself of the stock number may be erased as shown in FIG. 144 (a7).

  Also, a plurality of stock areas SS may be provided. In the example shown below, two stock areas SS are provided: a first stock area SSR on the right side and a second stock area SSL on the left side.

  FIG. 144 (O b1) is also the same state as shown in FIG. 120 (A 9-1), and the icon of the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins over the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 144 (e. A2), stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the notice icon YI of "box" comes out of the appearance area AS and is temporarily displayed large. After that, the notice icon YI of "box" is stocked one by one in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side (Fig. 144 (a a3)). An animation in which the notice icon YI of “box” is split may be displayed, or may be displayed instantaneously in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side. The number of obtained notice icons YI is one.

  After this, the reserve is digested, and the figure in the symbol variation display in the state where the reserve of the special figure disappears is also shown in FIG. 144 (Ob4), also in the first stock area SSL on the left side, the second stock area SSR on the right side. Also, the notice icon YI of "box" is stocked one by one.

  In FIG. 144 (o b5), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” shakes and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, in the reach state, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used. At this time, only one of the two notice icons YI may be used. In addition, an effect of telling which notice icon YI is used (which box is open) or an effect of giving notice may be performed. Here, both notice icons YI are used simultaneously. That is, as shown in FIG. 144 (b6), both notice icons YI simultaneously change to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “change” is released from the respective boxes. Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (a7), the two notice icons YI disappear at the same time.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect continued from FIG. 144 and an example in which the same advance notice icon is displayed in a plurality of modes.

  In FIG. 145 (o b8) continued from FIG. 144 (o b7), the notice displays YH of “change” emitted to the left and right respectively change to the light ball YHb. Therefore, one light ball YHb is displayed on the left and one on the right. In FIG. 145 (b9), both the left light ball YHb and the right light ball YHb fly toward the fluctuation icon h0, become one at the fluctuation icon h0, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 An animation that changes is displayed. The fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 145 (b10) changes from the first display mode to the third display mode. This is changed by two steps, since it is based on the notice icon YI for two minutes. Note that only one step may be changed. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 121 (37).

  In addition, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the method of stocking the advance notice icon YI. That is, normally, stocking is performed in order from a fixed position of the stock area SS. For example, stocking is performed in the order of the first stock position, the second stock position, and the third stock position. However, contrary to this order, it may be possible to stock in the order of the third stock position, the second stock position, and the first stock position, and in such anomalous case, in the normal case In comparison, the jackpot reliability may be higher or lower. Also, while normally stocked in both the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side, anomalously, only one stock area (for example, the second stock area SSL on the left side) May be stocked only). In such anomalous cases, the jackpot reliability may be higher or lower than in the normal case. Furthermore, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on which of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side is stocked. For example, if the first stock area SSR on the right side is normal and is prioritized, the jackpot may be more reliable if it is stocked in the second stock area SSL on the left side Or vice versa.

  Moreover, even when the obtained notice icon YI is a notice icon of “white”, when displaying the white notice icon YI in the respective areas SSL and SSR, both of the notice icons YI of white are displayed and The white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI may be displayed. In the latter case, expectations may be given to the notice display YH emitted from the obtained notice icon YI. For example, in the case where both the white notice icons YI are displayed, the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. When the notice display of the “change” of the default color of 6 is released, but the white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI are displayed, the No. 6 shown in FIG. There may be a case where the notice display of the red "red change" of 7 is released.

  FIGS. 145 (c) and (d) are diagrams showing an example in which the same notice icon is displayed in a plurality of modes.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 145 (Oc1), a background screen which has been omitted so far is displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (A 1-2-1). The background screen of the sea is displayed as well. In FIG. 145 (Oc1), the icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" is shown in FIG. Similarly to the “bancho” icon change notice display IYH shown in a4), the No. 1 shown in FIG. It is displayed that the notice icon YI of "change" of 6 has been acquired.

  In FIG. 145 (Oc2), the notice icon YI of "Change" is moved to the stock area SS, and in the figure (Oc3), it is displayed in the stock area SS. Further, in this example, a band icon OBI is displayed on the left side of the background screen, and the name of the obtained notice icon YI (here, “change”) is also displayed on the band icon OBI. Therefore, in this example, the display regarding the acquired advance notice icon YI is performed at two places. In addition, since the band icon OBI is an icon displayed on the background screen, any display (for example, the display of the first decorative symbol, the display of the second decorative symbol, or the second hold icon h12 to 4 Displayed on the back side of the display of the hold icon h14 and the like).

  After a while, as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc 4), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, in the same diagram (O c 5), the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation is It has been started. When the symbol change display as the preread target change is started, the notice icon YI is used. In FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), the variation icon change animation using the notice icon YI is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "Change", and in the figure (Oc7), the notice icon YI of "Change" that has been stocked is It disappears. Subsequently, in FIG. 145 (Oc8), a ball of light flies from the stock region SS with a fluctuating icon h0 and strikes the fluctuating icon h0. As shown in FIG. 145 (c9), the fluctuation icon h0 in which the light ball collides is changed to the second display mode (display mode of white blinking). On the other hand, no effect is performed in the band icon OBI, and no change occurs in the display of the name of the acquired advance notice icon YI displayed in the band icon OBI. However, even with the band icon OBI, some animation such as a variation icon change animation may be executed, and some change (for example, blinking display, display color change, etc.) may occur in the display of the name of the obtained advance notice icon YI.

  The notice icon YI in the stock area SS disappears early with use, but the band icon OBI is displayed at least until the change icon h0 actually changes, as shown in FIG. 145 (O c10). , After the change of the fluctuation icon h0 has disappeared.

  The example shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-1) is an example in which the notice icon YI of "change" is reused. In the figure (O c 6-2-1) continued from FIG. 145 (O c 6-1), the one having been the notice icon Y I until now displays the notice of “change” in the mode b shown in FIG. Although it has changed to YH, in the same figure (O c6-2-2), it returns to the notice icon YI and becomes usable. In FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-3), reach effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-3), display of normal reach effect is displayed. When the normal reach effect is started, the background screen of the sea is switched to the background screen of the normal reach effect, and along with this, the band icon OBI in which the name of the obtained notice icon YI is displayed disappears. On the other hand, even during the normal reach effect, the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS continues to be displayed.

  In FIG. 145 (O c6-2-5), the normal reach effect is over, and a background screen of the sea is displayed again on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a band icon in which the name of the notice icon YI is displayed. The display of OBI has also been revived. Thus, the display of the band icon OBI in which the name of the notice icon YI is displayed is displayed across the reach effect. After that, the display of the band icon OBI disappears before the finalized display shown in FIG. 145 (O c6-2-7) to the same figure (O c6-2-8) is performed during swing fluctuation of the decorative symbol. . In addition, the display of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS also disappears. In this example, there is no subsequent hold, and it can be seen that the display related to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI in the stock area SS) has disappeared, but there is a subsequent hold. Also, before the finalized display, the display related to the notice icon YI (the display of the band icon OBI, the display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) may disappear or, conversely, if there is a subsequent hold, the notice The display regarding the icon YI may be continuously displayed until the finalized display.

  FIG. 145 (od) shows a case where a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked. In this example, in addition to the display of the notice icon YI in the stock area SS, the display using the band icon OBI is also performed. That is, display by one band icon OBI is performed for one notice icon YI.

  Although the band icon OBI has been displayed as a background display in the examples so far, in the example shown in FIG. 146 (e), the display area of the first decorative symbol is narrowed by the band icon OBI. The display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the band icon OBI.

  In the example shown in FIG. 146 (Of), the display area of the first decorative symbol is 1 because the three notice icons YI which are the maximum stock number are stocked and the three band icons OBI are displayed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the notice icon YI which is narrowed to about 4/4 and displayed in stock. However, the first decorative symbol may be prioritized, and the first decorative symbol may overlap with the notice icon YI. Note that the second pending number display is not overlapped with the band icon OBI. In addition, the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are also visible. In this example, although the first decorative symbol, the background display, the display of the holding frame UI, the variation icon h0, and the holding icon are narrowed, the display of the second decorative symbol, the second holding number display, and the stock are displayed. The display of the notice icon YI is not narrowed. In addition, as an example of the display narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, the first decorative symbol, the background display, the display of the holding frame UI, the fluctuation icon h0, the holding icon, various notice displays (for example, the above-mentioned conversation notice It is possible to enumerate image CI1, conversational image CI2 of mini, mini game, icon change notice, timer notice effect, meter display (white meter MW mentioned above, meter display MD mentioned later etc), etc. That is, band icon OBI The display narrowed by the display of may be all of the above listed, while some of those listed above may not be applied, and a display not narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI As an example, the display of the second decorative symbol, the second number of reservations display, the notice icon YI stocked, the bar for volume control Indication VB, display of mode name set to ON in effect customization (for example, mode name displayed in the frame RW and frame RW at the upper right of the screen described above), various error displays (described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116) Display related to various errors (display about the warning), the menu icon MI, the volume control icon VI, and the brightness control icon BI, “the current level of the tomo mode (here level 1) and the experience shown in FIG. 74 (e1) It is possible to enumerate the display of the value (EXP) (here 0), the display of simultaneous effects, etc. That is, as the display that can not be narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, all of the above listed items can be listed. On the other hand, some of the above listed ones may not be applicable.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of effects and the like by the configuration in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Up to this point, the description has been made centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the contents displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to the following description). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to the horizontal arrangement, and the arrangement is the same even in the vertical arrangement. That is, it is not the case that the technology described in this specification can not be applied merely by the difference in hardware configuration, and viewed from a technical idea, even if the arrangement of the display means is horizontally arranged, vertically arranged Even if there is, it is applicable. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical alignment of the display means, a description will be made using an example in which the display means is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the display means disposed below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M '.

  In FIG. 146 (car a1), a fourth display means 208M 'disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. The fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 146 (car a1) is in the state at the initial position. The fourth display means 208M 'is surrounded by a frame fm around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M' in the initial position is the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlap from the front side. The fourth display means 208M 'is disposed on the front side (player's side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is an operation position where the display screen central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps from the front side It can be moved from the initial position toward the position of the fourth display means 208M 'in FIG. 146 (car a2'). That is, the fourth display means 208M 'is also a movable means capable of moving up and down. Further, in addition to the raising and lowering operation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be movable in the left-right direction. In addition, as a modification of the fourth display means 208M ', it may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

  In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 146 (f1 a1), a holding frame UI' having a configuration similar to the holding frame UI previously displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed It is done. The holding frame UI 'also has a holding icon display area HIS', a variation icon display area CIS ', and an effect icon display area DIS'. A pedestal hs0 'is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS'. The reserved icon display area HIS 'is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS', and four stages (first stage hs1 'to fourth stage hs4') are arranged above the left base icon bIl '. The effect icon display area DIS 'is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS', and the right base icon bIr 'is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS'.

  Further, in the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 146 (car a1), the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1' and the second stage hs2 '. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of these reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS ', the variation icon h0 is displayed. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1.

Further, a background screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (car a1). This background screen is a background screen of the sea. On the other hand, the background screen of the fourth display means 208M 'is white only, but this white only color indicates that the background screen is not shown. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (f1) Then, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is in high-speed fluctuation. The state of FIG. 146 (car a1) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (A1).

  In FIG. 146 (car a2), there is a ball entry at the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the retention of the special figure 1 increases by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (car a2), the number-of-holds of the special view 1 is displayed as "3". According to the increase in the reserve of this special view, or regardless of the increase in the reserve of this special view, the first display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. The icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are both No. 119 (a) in FIG. It changes to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. In addition, the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3 '. Although the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, the third hold indicated by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold of the prefetch notice. The state of FIG. 146 (car a2) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (ch 3-1).

  In the right base icon bIr ′ of the effect icon display area DIS ′ in the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 146 (f3), an aspect a of the type of pant shown in FIG. 118 (c) as the opponent icon TI The icon of the mode of waiting is displayed. Also, in the upper left corner, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and in the inside, the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. The state of FIG. 146 (car a3) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (Ar 6).

  In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 146 (kaa4), the mini game B is played with a jack-on-bell match, and the villager character of the variation icon h0 wins over the panda character of the opponent icon TI and appears The stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the area AS has been started. That is, the notice icon YI of the "box" displayed in the appearance area AS comes out of the appearance area AS and is temporarily displayed in a large size. The state of FIG. 146 (car a4) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (ch 10).

  A stock area SS is also prepared for stocking the notice icon YI in the fourth display means 208M ', and in the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 146 (key a5), notice is made in the stock area SS. The icon YI is displayed. The state of FIG. 146 (car a5) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (am 11).

  In FIG. 146 (f6), the state of symbol variation display in a state in which the reservation of the reservation progresses and the reservation of the special view is lost is shown. The symbol change display performed here is a symbol change display that is a pre-reading target change. Note that the panda character of the opponent icon TI and the appearance area AS also disappear. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 is a default display mode. The state of FIG. 146 (car a6) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (A 24).

  In FIG. 146 (key a7), the notice icon YI of the embodiment a in which the box is closed is used, the mode changes to the embodiment d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “reach” is released from the box, In the diagram (f8), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. After the appearance, the notice display YH disappears when a predetermined display period elapses, and in FIG. 146 (key a9), the notice display YH of “reach” disappears. After this, reach effect may be performed or may not be performed. In addition, when reach production is performed, notice display YH of "reach" may continue to be displayed until reach production is started.

  Subsequently, modified examples will be described. Up to FIG. 146 (car a4) is the same, and in FIG. 146 (car a5 '), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the stock animation of the notice icon YI here, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS of the fourth display means 208M ′ moves from the fourth display means 208M ′ to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The animation is played back. At this time, there is a period in which the advance notice icon YI is displayed across the fourth display means 208M 'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, without crossing over the fourth display means 208M 'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation jumps (instantly moves) from the fourth display means 208M' to the first decorative symbol display device 208L at a stretch. It is also good.

  The fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 146 (car a2') moves from the initial position shown by the dotted line to the operating position, covering the central region of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side There is. The fourth display means 208M 'may move from the initial position before the start of the mini game, may move simultaneously with the start of the mini game, may move during the mini game, You may move after the end of the mini game only if you win the game. In addition, before the result of the mini game comes out, it may move as a notice of the result of the mini game. In this case, moving may be easier to win the mini game or may be more difficult to win than the non-moving. The fourth display means M 'may be configured to be stationary at the operation position across one or a plurality of symbol variation displays during the mini game. Here, when a mini game is played across a plurality of symbol variation displays, an initial position (or an operating position from an operation position until a result of a mini game in the symbol variation display comes out and each symbol variation display ends) The fourth display means M ′ may be configured to move to a position different from the operation position and the initial position). Further, the fourth display means M 'is configured not to move from the operating position during symbol stop display (that is, to be stationary at the operating position). However, the fourth display means M 'may move from the operating position during symbol stop display. In addition, the fourth display means M 'is at least a part of or all of the periods during which the symbol variation display is determined and displayed even while moving between the initial position and the maximum movement position. , Is configured to remain stationary. The movement may be continued or stopped in the state of temporary stop in the pseudo-series effect or in the state of swing fluctuation before the finalized display. In addition, the stop operation may be performed as described above only when the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the fourth display means M '. Furthermore, the fourth display means M 'may be configured to stop at the initial position, the maximum movement position, or the predetermined stop position in synchronization with the timing when the symbol variation display is determined and displayed.

  FIG. 146 (f1) shows an example where the initial position of the fourth display means 208M 'is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the holding frame UI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the mini game is also played on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (ka b1), an icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” is displayed. Also, a background image is displayed on the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 146 (f1) without being shown. On the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 146 (car b2), the name of the stock notice icon YM (here, "change") is displayed as a band icon OBI'. That is, when the notice icon YM is stocked, its name is also displayed on the fourth display means 208M '. In addition, the display method is not limited to the band icon OBI ', and may be the entire screen.

  In the example shown in FIG. 146 (ka b3 '), a band icon OBI' 'is displayed from the fourth display means 208M' to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon OBI '' displays the stocked notice The name of the icon YM (here, "change") is shown. The name of the notice icon YM in the band icon OBI '' is displayed across the fourth display means 208M 'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, the band icon OBI is displayed while narrowing the display area of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG. 145 (Oe) and FIG. The way is applicable. That is, the part displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L of the band icon OBI ′ ′ narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. In addition, also when the 4th display means 208M 'moves and the area | region which overlaps with the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L is expanded, it is a 1st decorative symbol displayed on the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L. The display area may be narrowed similarly to the movement of the fourth display means 208M '.

  The fourth display means 208M 'described above can be replaced by the second decorative symbol display device 208M or can be replaced by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or another display means (for example, the light guide plate IL, It can be replaced with a POV display 224I or the like described later.

  Subsequently, a rendering example using other rendering means will be described.

  The state shown in FIG. 146 (ka c1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (A7), and in the following FIG. 139 (ka c2), the mini game exclusive features are on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L 225 have appeared. The mini game B is played not only by the character of the villager of the variation icon h 0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, but also by the mini game special feature 225. In the mini game special feature 225, the left side is the villager character of the variation icon h0, and the right side is the panda character of the opponent icon TI. The directing operation of the mini game special feature 225 may be started after the start of the jangken confrontation animation, may be started simultaneously with the start of the jangken confrontation animation, or is started before the jangken confrontation animation is started. It may be In addition, when the mini game is won, an effect for boosting the victory may be performed by the mini game special feature 225, or other movable effect means (for example, the fourth display means 208M 'or FIG. 14). It may be performed by the movable effect by the one thousand box character product 224H etc.) or may be performed by the light emission effect by the light emitting means.

  Further, other display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I described later, etc.) are also related to the mini game. An effect may be performed.

  FIG. 146 (f1) to (f5) is a diagram showing an example of effect using the POV display 224I.

  In this example, a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body described with reference to FIG. 15 is provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be capable of overlapping on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The state shown in FIG. 146 (d1) to FIG. 146 (d3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (7) to FIG. 120 (9-1), and in FIG. The state is the same as the state shown in 120 (9-1), that is, the mini-game B is played in a jian-jing match, and the villager character of the variation icon h0 wins over the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 146 (ka d4), the POV display 224I appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and on the POV display 224I, the design of the notice icon YI acquired by winning the mini game and "GET" Is displayed. Here, even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area thereof The effect display may be performed. Further, in the state during acceleration from when the POV display 224I reaches the stationary state to the constant speed state, and the state during deceleration before the constant speed state returns to the stationary state, the display area is more visible than in the constant speed state. The effect display may be performed in the above display area even in a state during acceleration or a state during deceleration. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in a state during acceleration or a state during deceleration. In addition, in the state of accelerating or decelerating, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I more noticeable. It is also good. Alternatively, in the acceleration state, effect display may be performed on the display area, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached.

  In FIG. 146 (d d), the POV display 224I returns from the position on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the initial position, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is easily visible .

  FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  The state shown in FIG. 147 (cal e1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (A1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 147 (cal e1) are in the initial position of each other and are in the opened state (a separated state), and the first decorative symbol display device The 208L display screen is visible.

  The state shown in FIG. 147 (f-e2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (f-3-1), and the state shown in FIG. 147 (f-e3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. is there.

  The state shown in FIG. 147 (key e4) is a state in which the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the second decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (key e4) remains stopped. In the second number-of-holds display, which is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the variable number display is started, and the number of holdings of the special view 1 is reduced by one to “2”.

  In FIG. 147 (key e5), the appearance animation of the opponent icon for mini game B is started, and the effect image EF1 'is divided and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 147 (cal e6), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which were at the initial position so far, are beginning to approach each other and are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L A second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap at both ends of the first decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 147 (cal 7), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact and completely closed, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not visible. . When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other, the effect image EF1 'divided so far is displayed as one.

  In FIG. 147 (key e8), the effect image EF1 ′ disappears, the villager character of the variation icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the panda of the opponent icon TI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The character of is displayed. In the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and among them, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) is displayed. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the number of times the mini-game B is confronted (here, “first time”) is shown on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. Although the number indication here indicates the current number of confrontation, it may be an indication (for example, “three more times”) of giving a notice of how many times the fight will be performed after this. According to this example, the hold icon is hidden.

  The state shown in FIG. 147 (key e9) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (3-7), and the mini game B is started with a jack-on game.

  The state shown in FIG. 147 (car e10) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (A 9-1), and the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 has won the panda character of the opponent icon TI. .

  The state shown in FIG. 147 (e11) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 120 (A10), and stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The notice icon YI is temporarily displayed large so as to straddle the device 208N. A part of the villager character of the variation icon h0 and a part of the panda character of the opponent icon TI are also overlapped by a part of the notice icon YI displayed largely.

  The state shown in FIG. 147 (car e12) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 120 (A11), and the notice icon YI is the first stock in the stock area SS provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed on the position (stock display). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS are displayed on different symbol display devices, but may be displayed on the same symbol display means.

  In the state shown in FIG. 147 (key e13), the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 disappears due to the end of the battle of the mini game B in the symbol fluctuation display which is currently being performed, and the panda character of the opponent icon TI disappears. Is waiting for a jaunting confrontation in the next change, and is performing a waiting animation. Although the variation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not visible here, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are opened, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is When the display screen becomes visible, the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS '.

  In the state shown in FIG. 147 (key e14), the symbol variation display is ended, and the panda character of the opponent icon TI still continues the standby animation. Eventually, when the next change is started, the character of the villager of the change icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, as a character of the fluctuation icon h0, No. 1 shown in FIG. No. 18 characters of the nephew. It is also a 19 Yoshimune character. Then, a second jaunt fight is held.

  Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured not to move from the operating position during symbol stop display (that is, to be stationary at the operating position). However, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may move from the operating position during symbol stop display. In addition, even in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, even during movement between the initial position and the maximum movement position, at least one of the periods during which the symbol variation display is finalized and displayed. It is configured to remain stationary for some or all of the periods. The movement may be continued or stopped in the state of temporary stop in the pseudo-series effect or in the state of swing fluctuation before the finalized display. In addition, only when the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed by the second decoration symbol display device 208M, or only when the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed by the third decoration symbol display device 208N, You may make it stop operation like this. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are stopped at the initial position, the maximum movement position, or the predetermined stop position in synchronization with the timing when the symbol variation display is determined and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

  The state shown in FIG. 147 (key e15) corresponds to the No. 1 state shown in FIG. 117 (a) in the appearance area AS. Although the notice icon YI of “red box” 2 is displayed, the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 is lost to the panda character of the opponent icon TI in the second jangken confrontation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 147 (e15), the “second time” is shown as the number-of-jumps-of-jumps-of-mini-game B display on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. .

  In FIG. 147 (key e16), it is reported that the rock-solid match has ended, as straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 147 (key e17), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which have been closed so far begin to open, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be seen. In FIG. 147 (key e18), both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to their initial positions, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (key e18) The combination of the decorative design of the loss of 4 "-" decoration 4 "-" decoration 7 "is displayed.

  The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above can be replaced by the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 146, and other display means (for example, the light guide plate IL, described later) Can be replaced with the POV display 224I).

  Also, in the above description, the notice display of "change" of the default color shown in FIG. 117 (b) is the display of the notice that raises the level of the display mode by one step, and the first display mode (default display mode) If it is displayed, it warns that it will change to the second display mode (display mode of white blinking), and in fact it has also changed to the second display mode (display mode of white blinking), but the first display Only when the display mode is selected in the mode (default display mode), the display may be changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) by displaying a two-step advance notice. When the display mode is the second display mode (display mode of white blinking) or more, it is a display of an advance notice to be raised by one stage, and only one step is actually changed.

  In addition, during the execution of a certain mini game, the notice icon may be stocked by another notice different from the mini game, but during the execution of the mini game it is possible by the notice different from the mini game. The notice icon may be configured not to be stocked.

  In addition, it may be notified in advance that there is a possibility that a mini game will occur (for example, by a mini game preparation display or a telop display described as “mini game high probability”).

  In addition, before the mini game is started or while the mini game is being executed, another notice (for example, “Tip notice icon obtained with high certainty” or the like) is displayed that the notice icon is likely to be obtained. ) May be notified. Here, the situation in which the advance notice icon is likely to be acquired indicates that the advance notice icon is easier to be acquired than in the case where the other advance notice is not notified that the advance notice icon is likely to be acquired.

  In addition, when a notice icon is stocked in a certain combination (for example, when a maximum of three notice icons can be stocked, a combination in which "box", "red box", "gold box" are stocked, or "gold box") The combination may be configured such that a big hit is determined in the symbol variation display in which all the advance notice icons are digested. In this case, the notice icon may be used as an icon related to the advance notice, or may be used as an icon related to the normal notice.

  Note that, in a mini game for acquiring a notice icon, a notice of the change may be given. For example, when the carpet shown in FIG. 126 (e.g. 13) is stationary, but an animation is displayed such that the carpet escapes from the arrow, the graphic of the animation is displayed at that time. It corresponds to a notice (usually a notice) about a big hit in the variable display. Moreover, if the display of this animation is a display with a low appearance rate, it may be a notice of a big hit decision.

  Also, in the state shown in FIG. 126 (う 13), an animation in which the carpet escapes from the arrow is displayed, and although the super reach effect is performed due to the change, if the move is lost due to the change The mini game A may end. In this case, the icon of Yoshimune (bow), which was the first hold icon h11, may be changed to the hold icon of the default display mode, or the icon of Yoshimune (bow) may remain. When the icon of Yoshimune (bow) remains, it becomes a hold icon corresponding to white blink (second display mode level). Further, the change timing to the default display mode may be during the super reach (for example, during the wipe effect). Also, at the start of the next change, it may be displayed as a default change icon h0. Furthermore, when an animation is displayed such as a carpet fleeing from an arrow, the icon of Yoshimune (bow) that was the fluctuating icon h0 may disappear during the above-mentioned super reach (for example, during the wipe effect) or the above-mentioned super During reach (for example, during wipe effect), it may disappear once and be redisplayed in the default display mode.

  In addition, it is a big hit in the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons are digested when b (a <b) stock of notice icons is stocked than when a pieces (a is an integer of 0 or more) are stocked. It may be configured to be easy.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect using the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 119 (b).

  In FIG. 148 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special view 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special view 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 148 (A2-1), the numbers shown in FIG. An icon IHI of “red bomber” 5 appears at the right end of the screen, and an icon change animation is started. That is, the icon IHI of "red bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. In the icon change animation, while the icon IHI of "red bomber" flies from right to left, a bullet is fired with a hold icon. In addition, the icon IHI of "red bomber" may be paused in front of the target holding icon. In addition, this pause may be pause of the cassette that disguises the target icon. In addition, the icon IHI of "red bomber" performs animation passing through the stock area SS described above. Here, when the notice icon is stocked, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be overlapped by the stocked notice icon, and conversely, the notice stocked by the icon IHI of the "red bomber" The icons may be overlapped.

  In FIG. 148 (A3-1), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. That is, the icon "IHI" of "red bomber" is composed of a red bomber icon RBI and a red bullet icon BTI. The goal here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 148 (A4-1), the bullet icon BTI overlaps with the first reserved icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 148 (A5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 148 (A6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode (fifth display mode) which is the same display mode as the “red bomber”. It is in the process of changing, and in the same figure (A7), the change is completed. In this example, the icon change animation is an animation from FIG. 148 (A2-1) to the same figure (A7). In this example, after the icon IHI of "red bomber" disappears from the screen, the display mode change of the icon is completed, but before the icon IHI of "red bomber" disappears from the screen, The display mode change may be completed, or the icon display mode change may be completed at the same time as the “red bomber” icon IHI disappears from the screen.

  The red bomber icon RBI may be configured to be necessarily fired a red bullet icon BTI, or may be configured to be fired a bullet icon BTI of another color. In this case, the changing mode of the icon may be determined by the color of the bomber, and the changing mode of the icon may be determined by the color of the bullet. Alternatively, when the gold bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, the color of the upper one (here, gold) may determine the change mode of the icon, or the lower one (here The color of the icon may be determined by the color of red).

  In FIG. 148 (A1 '), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. Of the two hold icons h11 and h12, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the green display mode (the fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode (the first display mode). It is displayed. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 148 (A2 '), the numbers shown in FIG. The “bomber” icon IHI of 4 appears at the right end of the screen (displayed), and an icon change animation is started. Also in the icon change animation here, the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14 (FIG. 148 (A5 ')), as in the previous example. In this example, since the icon IHI of "bomber" is used as the display of the icon change notice, the display mode is raised by one step for the green display mode (the fourth display mode). In FIG. 148 (A7), the first hold icon h11 that is the green display mode (the fourth display mode) is changed to the red display mode (the fifth display mode). In addition, in the icon change animation by the icon IHI of the "bomber", if it is a reserved icon of the default display mode (the first display mode), white blink is skipped only for the first attack to promote to blue Can be raised by one step in the second and subsequent attacks, so to promote up to the hold icon in the red display mode (fifth display mode), a total of 3 attacks (default color → blue → Green → red) is required. The first attack may be configured to raise only one level (that is, default color → blink on white).

  FIG. 148 (A3-2-1) is a modification continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), and icon change animation using the icon IHI of “red bomber” is started. In this icon change animation, the target is the change icon h0 displayed in the default display mode. In FIG. 148 (A3-2-3), the bullet icon BTI hits the fluctuation icon h0, the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image EF14, and in the same drawing (A3-2-4), the fluctuation icon h0 is red. To the display mode (fifth display mode).

  Although the example here is an example using the icon IHI of "red bomber", the icon change animation using the icon IHI of "bomber" shown in FIG. 148 (A2 ') also changes the icon h0 May be targeted. In this case, if the target is the change icon h0 displayed in the default display mode, the change icon h0 changes to the blue display mode, but the change icon h0 is displayed in the green display mode. If there is, the change icon h0 changes to a red display mode.

  FIG. 148 (A4-2-1) is a modification continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), and icon change animation using the icon IHI of “red bomber” is started. In this icon change animation, as shown in FIG. 148 (A4-2-1) to the same figure (A4-2-3), the red bomber icon RBI fires a red bullet icon BTI and then the icon It pauses in front of the target holding icon until the change of the display mode of the first holding icon h11 is finished. Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (A4-2-4) to FIG. (A4-2-6), the icon RBI of the red bomber faces the left end of the screen when the change in the display mode of the icon is completed. I will fly away.

  FIG. 148 (A2-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A1-1). However, in this modification, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a display mode (second display mode) of blinking in white. The display mode of white blinking may be a display mode that suggests that the display mode may change after the start of display. That is, in the second display mode (display mode of blinking white), the display mode is more likely to change after the start of display than in the first display mode, and the display mode is likely to change after the start of display than the third display mode. It may be In the state where the icon of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking) is displayed, when the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 119 (b) is displayed (for example, the icon IHI of “red bomber” is When it appears, attention is focused on the icon of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking).

  In FIG. 148 (A2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11, and the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in FIG. 148 (A2-2-4), The first hold icon h11 is changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

  In addition, the icon of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking) does not change, but the other icon (in this case, the second hold icon h12 which is the icon next to the first hold icon h11, or The variation icon h0) may change, or the other icons may change along with the icon of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking). In addition, even when the icon of the second display mode is displayed, there may be a case where a change in the display mode of the icon does not occur (case of effect). Or, conversely, when the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the display mode of the icon may be changed without fail. When the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the icon next to the icon of the second display mode (for example, if the icon of the second display mode is the first hold icon, the second hold icon). It may be notified that it may be an icon). Here, based on the first hold icon h11 of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking), only the icon next thereto (the second hold icon h12 or the change icon h0) may be changed, or the first Although it has been described that the icon next to the holding icon h11 may change along with the holding icon h11, the display mode may not be a versatile display mode such as the second display mode, but may be another mode (for example, a tank mode). In the case of a tank, it may be foreseen that the icon to which the main gun of that tank points may change. Also, instead of the aspect of the tank, No. 1 shown in FIG. No. 10 may have a display mode of “timer” type. Display mode of No. 8 “Button A” type and No. It may be a display mode of the type of "button B" of 9.

  FIG. 149 is a view showing a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 149 (A3-3-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), and is an example in which the icon change animation is not started even when the icon “IHI of“ red bomber ”appears. That is, in this example, the icon non-changing animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI is started. In the icon invariable animation here, the bullet icon BTI is not fired, and the red bomber icon RBI only flies over the holding frame UI (FIG. 149 (A3-3-1) to FIG. (A3-3-3)). Therefore, the aspect of all the displayed pending icons has not changed. Also, the form of the fluctuation icon h0 has not changed. In the icon non-changing animation, the icon IHI of “red bomber” may be hidden on the way.

  Even if the red bomber icon RBI is bypassed as in this example, all the pending icons (the default display mode is suspended, as compared to the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear) The icon may also be a preview notice with a big hit and a high degree of confidence. Also, similarly, the fluctuation icon h0 may be a normal advance notice having a high jackpot reliability. Alternatively, if there is a hold icon for the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice such as the display mode of white blinking among the displayed icons, those hold icons are compared with when the red bomber icon RBI does not appear If the display mode of the fluctuation icon is the display mode of the normal notice, the fluctuation icon may be compared to the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. , It may be a regular notice with high reliability of the jackpot.

  FIG. 149 (A3-4-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), and here, the icon non-changing animation is executed. In this icon-invariant animation, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, but the bullet icon BTI does not hit any of the icons h0, h11, h12. That is, the red bullet icon BTI fired from the red bomber icon RBI flies above the hold icon as shown in FIG. 149 (A3-4-2) to FIG. (A3-4-4). Even if it disappears out of the screen or overlaps with the hold icon or the change icon, it may be left obliquely downward. Although the fired bullet icon BTI overlaps with an icon different from the target icon, it may fly off the screen without generating the effect image EF14. Furthermore, although the fired bullet icon BTI is a locus that overlaps the hold icon if the hold icon is displayed, the hold icon is not displayed (the dotted line in FIG. 149 (A3-4-3). Reference), it may be possible to fly off the screen through a track that does not overlap (does not hit) the hold icon. . In FIG. 149 (A3-4-4), the modes of all displayed reserve icons have not changed.

  In FIG. 149 (A3-4-3), the red bomber icon RBI flies first out of the screen rather than the bullet icon BTI, but the opposite may be applied, or the same. It may be

  In the example shown in FIG. 149 (A3-3-1) to the same figure (A3-3-3), and in the example shown in FIG. 149 (A3-4-1) to the same figure (A3-4-4), Although the icon IHI of “red bomber” is used as an example, an icon non-changing animation using the icon IHI of “bomber” shown in FIG. 148 (A2 ′) may be executed. Furthermore, in the case of No. 1 shown in FIG. In some cases, an icon change animation or an icon non-change animation may be executed using the “gold bomber” icon of 6.

  In addition, although the bullet icon BTI is fired with the variation icon h0 as a target, there is also a case where icon non-change animation is executed which does not hit the variation icon h0 and does not hit any of the reserved icons h11 and h12.

  In addition, even if the display of the icon change notice such as the icon IHI of the "bomber" is displayed, the animation using the display of the icon change notice is not performed, and the displayed icon change notice displays the still. You may disappear after Furthermore, even if the icon change animation is not performed by the icon IHI of the "red bomber", or even when the icon change animation is not performed by the icon IHI of the "red bomber", the "red bomber "Red Bomber" icon IHI is displayed than when the icon IHI is not displayed, so that the icon displayed at the start of the symbol variation display can be easily changed to the "Red" display mode finally It may be configured, and the ease of change of the "red" display mode may be the same as when the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed.

  In addition, even if the pending change due to the display of the icon change notice fails, the pending of the target for which the pending change is attempted (in this example, the pending for the first pending icon h11) is not a pending change target. In the example, it may be a jackpot more likely to hit than the second hold icon h12). In addition, even if the hold icon of the same display mode (for example, the hold icon of the display mode of the white blink (the second display mode)), the change from white blink to blue fails and remains white blink The icon may be a read ahead notice with a higher hit probability than the white blinking hold icon which was not targeted for hold change. Also, similarly, the fluctuation icon h0 may be a normal advance notice having a high jackpot reliability.

  FIG. 149 (A3-5-1) is also a modification continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, an icon change that looks like an icon unchanging animation and finally a bullet icon BTI hits It is an example of animation. That is, although the same scene (FIG. 149 (A3-5-2) as the scene of the previous icon invariable animation (FIG. 149 (A3-4-2)) is displayed, the bullet icon BTI returns and the first Hitting the hold icon h11 (in FIG. 149 (A3-5-3), the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF 14. After this, it is the same as FIG. 148 (A7). In the change animation, the same scene as the icon non-change animation is reproduced halfway, and the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI also coincides with the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI in the icon non-change animation, but it is completely different trajectory. You may come back through and hit the target icon, or the bullet icon BTI will disappear once from the screen After the, after the may come back to hit the target icon. Fig. 149 (A3-5-4), subsequent to FIG. 148 (A7).

  FIG. 149 (A3-6-1) is also a modification continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, a button image is added to the display of the icon change advance notice, resulting in a combined effect with a button effect.

  First, a red bomber icon RBI appears, and an icon change animation or an icon non-change animation is started. After that, the red bomber icon RBI pauses before the target holding icon (FIG. 149 (A3-6-1)). Then, the button image 136a is added to the red bomber icon RBI (FIG. 149 (A3-6-2)). Here, although the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added, it may be added. In addition, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

  The timing shown in FIG. 149 (A3-6-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 149 (A3-6-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period. The firing of the bullet icon BTI may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. . Also, the firing of the bullet icon BTI may be fired only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the firing of the bullet icon BTI is performed whether or not the chance button 136 is operated, but when the chance button 136 is not operated, compared to the case where the chance button 136 is operated, It may be difficult to hit the target icon, or if the chance button 136 is not operated, the target icon may never be hit. In addition, when the bullet icon BTI does not hit the target icon, another icon change animation or an icon non-change animation may be performed.

  FIG. 149 (A3-7-1) is also a modification continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the first hold icon h11 is a mode of the button image. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. It is an icon of "button A" of 8. The icon of “button A” is an icon for giving notice that an icon change notice by button operation is to be performed. Subsequently, in FIG. 149 (A3-7-2), as in FIG. 149 (A3-6-2), the button image 136a is added to the icon RBI of the red bomber. Here, although the remaining time display meter MT is not added here, it may be added.

  The timing shown in FIG. 149 (A3-7-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period. The bullet icon BTI flies aiming at the first holding icon h11, which is an icon of "button A" (FIG. 149 (A3-7-5)). Subsequently, in FIG. 149 (A3-7-6), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11 that has been the “button A” icon has changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

  FIG. 149 (A3'-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A2 '). That is, the first hold icon h11 is a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is a default display mode (first display mode). In this modification, as shown in FIG. 149 (A3'-2-1), the white bomber icon WBI fires a plurality of white bullet icons BTI. The firing of the plurality of bullet icons BTI may be simultaneous or may be fired one by one. Here, two white bullet icons BTI are fired at the same time. The two bullet icons BTI partially overlap each other. The target icon here may be a single icon or a plurality of icons. That is, one holding icon may be attacked by one bullet icon BTI, and one holding icon may be attacked by multiple bullet icons BTI. In this example, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 become target icons. A bullet icon BTI aiming at the second holding icon h12 is displayed on the front side, and a bullet icon BTI aiming at the first holding icon h11 is displayed on the back side. Note that this relationship may be reversed. Also, multiple bullet icons BTI may not overlap.

  In FIG. 149 (A3'-2-3), the bullet icons BTI and BTI hit one shot at a time both for the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12, and the first holding icon h11 is also the second holding icon h12. Each is also covered by the effect image EF14. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11, which is the green display mode (the fourth display mode), changes to the red display mode (the fifth display mode), and the default display mode (the The second hold icon h12, which is the first display mode), is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode).

  FIG. 150 is a view showing a modification of the effect example and the like shown in FIG.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 150 (A3-2-1) to FIG. (A3-2-4) are the effect examples shown in FIG. 149 (A3'-2-1) to FIG. 149 (A3'-2-4). It is a modified example of Here, the icon "IHI" of "red bomber" has appeared. In addition, the first hold icon is a display mode (second display mode) of white blinking. In FIG. 150 (A3-2-1), the red bomber icon RBI fires two red bullet icons BTI. One of the two bullet icons BTI that has been fired hits the first holding icon h11, and the other does not hit any of the icons (FIG. 150 (A3-2-3)). That is, the hold icon for which the advance notice is made is hit, and the hold icon (second hold icon h12) for which the advance notice is not made is not hit. In FIG. 150 (A3-2-3), only the first reserved icon h11 of the hit one is covered by the effect image EF14, and in the following FIG. 150 (A3-2-4), the effect image EF14 disappears, and Only the 1-hold icon h11 changes to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

  In addition, the bullet icon BTI may be hit even with the hold icon for which the advance notice is not made. In addition, the bullet icon BTI may be hit only on the hold icon for which no advance notice is given. Alternatively, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which no advance notice is given. Or, conversely, the bullet icon BTI may always be hit on the hold icon for which the advance notice is given.

  Here, the red bullet icon BTI hits the hold icon (the hold icon in the first display mode) for which the advance notice is not performed, and the read-ahead notice in the white blink display mode (the second display mode) is performed. If the bullet icon BTI does not hit the hold icon, the hold icon for which no advance notice was given has a higher jackpot expectation than the previously held hold icon. It will be changed to the hold icon. Thus, for icons having different display modes, which icon changes to the red display mode, all the icons change to the red display mode, or a plurality of red bullet icons BTI There are various patterns, such as whether one icon does not change while being fired, and it may function effectively as a scribble effect.

  It should be noted that the pre-read advance notice may be configured such that the bullet icon BTI is more likely to hit, ie, it is easier to change the hold, than the pre-read advance notice. In addition, the change icon may be configured to be easier to hit the bullet icon BTI, that is, to change the hold more easily than the hold icon.

  Furthermore, the launch of the plurality of bullet icons BTI is also applicable to the icon of "gold bomber" shown in FIG. 119 (b).

  FIG. 150 (A3-8-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the red bomber icon RBI pauses just above the fluctuation icon h0. Then, with the pause, the red bomber icon RBI does not fire the bullet icon BTI, and the symbol variation display ends (FIG. 150 (A3-8-2)). When started, the red bomber icon RBI remains paused just above the fluctuating icon h0, ie the red bomber icon RBI here is displayed across successive symbol fluctuating displays When the next change is started, the red bomber icon RBI fires a red bullet icon BTI toward the first reserved icon h0 as shown in FIG. 150 (A3-8-4). As described above, when the symbol variation display is crossed, the icon change may be always succeeded, or even when the symbol variation display is crossed, there may be a case where it fails. , Figure When straddling the variable display, the hold icon changes icon and the change icon does not change icon, or conversely, the change icon changes icon and the hold icon does not change icon Good.

  FIGS. 150 (A3-9-1) to (A3-9-5) are modifications of FIGS. 149 (A3-8-1) to 149 (A3-8-4). This example is an example in which the icon IHI of the "red bomber" flies away without directing the firing of the bullet icon BTI, even if the symbol fluctuation display after straddling successive symbol fluctuation displays.

  In the symbol variation display after straddling consecutive symbol variation displays, the effect of firing the bullet icon BTI is always performed, regardless of whether it is hit or not (except whether the icon changes or not). May be

  FIG. 150 (A3-10-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1). In this example, the suspension of the prefetch target change is the second suspension represented by the second suspension icon h12 illustrated in FIG. 150 (A3-10-1). The red bomber icon RBI paused just above the fluctuation icon h0, which is in front of the hold icon, fires a red bullet icon BTI targeting the second hold icon h12, but does not hit (Figure At 150 (A3-10-2)), the symbol variation display ends (FIG. 150 (A3-10-3)). And, even if the next symbol variation display is started, the red bomber icon RBI is paused right above the variation icon h0 (Fig. 150 (A3-10-4), A red bullet icon BTI is fired aiming at the first reserved icon h11 which is to be suspended, but it is not hit here either (FIG. 150 (A3-10-5)), and the symbol variation display is ended (FIG. 150 (FIG. 150 A3-10-6)). This time, the hold that was the pre-reading target change is digested, and the symbol change display is started. That is, the symbol variation display started here is the pre-reading variation, and the red bomber icon RBI flips around to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, and the variation icon h0 The red bullet icon BTI is fired at the target of the fluctuation icon h0 (FIG. 150 (A3-10-8)) and flies away toward the left end of the screen. The bullet icon BTI fired here hits the fluctuation icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 (FIG. 150 (A3-10-10)). Although not shown, the variation icon h0 changes to a red display mode (fifth display mode) when the effect image EF14 disappears.

  Although FIG. 150 (A3-10-9 ') is a modification example continuing from FIG. This results in all three failures. In this example, the icon non-changing animation with the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for the same icon, but the icon non-changing animation with the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for the different icons. May be In addition, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times on the same icon, or may be performed multiple times on different icons.

  FIG. 150 (A2-3-1) is an example continuing from the symbol variation display 160 (A1-1), but a plurality of displays of icon change notice may appear. That is, in FIG. 150 (A2-3-1), icons IHI of three types of bombers, which are all kinds of “bomber”, “red bomber” and “gold bomber”, have appeared. The types of displayed icon change notices may be all different as in this example, or all may be the same. In addition, systems such as bombers may or may not be aligned (for example, "red balloon", "gold bomber", "red flying boat").

  As described above, when the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers appear, it is possible to perform icon change effects with all the aircraft, but as shown in FIG. 150 (A2-3-2), one bomber The icon (here, the icon of “red bomber”) IHI may perform the icon change effect, or even if the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers that are a part perform the icon change effect Good.

  In FIG. 150 (A2-3-3), the change icon, which is the default display mode, is changed to the red display mode, and the icon change presentation has succeeded. However, it may fail. Moreover, when performing icon change presentation by the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers, a plurality of icons may change, or only one icon may change.

  Moreover, it is an icon of "bomber", No. shown in FIG. 119 (b). In the case of the icon of "7" "airplane", one icon can change two icons.

  FIG. 151 shows a modification of the effect example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 151 (A1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first reserve icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon h11 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 151 (A1-2-2), there is a ball entry at the special view 1 start opening 230, and the suspension of the special view 1 increases by one, resulting in a total of two. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-2), the number-of-holds of the special view 1 is displayed as "2".

  In FIG. 151 (A1-2-3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The second hold icon h12 is a No. 1 icon shown in FIG. It is an icon of the display mode of 12 "roulettes". The icon of this "roulette" display mode is displayed by switching the display mode of N choice selected among 2 options to 5 options (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow) in order and stopped at the roulette The display icon itself changes to the display mode. In this example, there are three choices of blue, green and red, and the display is switched in the order of “blue → green → red → blue →”. That is, the icon of the display mode of "blue" is displayed in the second hold icon h12 of the display mode of "roulette" shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-3), and the same icon (A1-2-4) is displayed. In the second hold icon h12 of the display mode of "roulette" shown, the icon of the display mode of "green" is displayed, and the second hold of the display mode of "roulette" shown in the figure (A1-2-5) In the icon h12, the icon of the display mode of "red" is displayed. In subsequent figures, it represents with the mark of the arrow showing in-transit. In FIG. 151 (A1-2-7), the symbol variation display is finished, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration" 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”) is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also halted and displayed a combination of“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-8), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of a display mode of “roulette”. In addition, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is started. That is, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI with the first hold icon h11 as a target.

  In FIG. 151 (A1-2-10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 148 (A1-2-11), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the icon of the display mode of “red” is seen in the first hold icon h11. In the same figure (A1-2-12) following FIG. 148 (A1-2-11), the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of “red”. In addition, the icon "IHI" of "red bomber" is about to disappear in the left corner of the screen. In addition, when the icon change animation is not performed by the icon IHI of the "red bomber", or when the icon invariable animation is not performed by the icon IHI of the "red bomber", that is, "red bomber" Even if the animation used is not performed, the first hold icon h11 is configured to be more easily changed to the “red” display mode than when the “red bomber” icon IHI is not displayed. It is also possible that the "red bomber" icon IHI may not be displayed and the ease of change of the "red" display mode may be the same.

  The example shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-1) to FIG. 151 (A1-3-7) is an example in which the telop effect described using FIG. 94 is executed.

  In FIG. 151 (A1-3-1), symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-2), the first decorative symbol is displayed in the central region. Variable display has been started. In the following FIG. 151 (A1-3-3), the telop effect is started. That is, the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed that the display mode of the hold icon is highly likely to change, which corresponds to an example of the display of the icon change notice. In the telop display trp here, text display such as "Hold on hold change" continues to flow from the right to the left of the screen.

  After telop production is started, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-4), the icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is displayed. It has been started. That is, while the telop effect continues, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI with the first hold icon h11 as a target. If the icon as the icon change advance notice is displayed (here, the icon “IHI of“ red bomber ””) is displayed while the telop display trp such as “hold change high sure” is displayed, “hold change high sure The display mode of the hold icon may be changed more easily than in the state where the telop display trp such as “middle” is not displayed.

  In FIG. 151 (A1-3-7), the bullet icon BTI hits the first suspension icon h11, and the first suspension icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Eventually, when the effect image EF 14 disappears, the first hold icon h 11 changes to the “red” display mode.

  Subsequently, an example in which a silhouette preview of the hold icon is executed will be described.

  In FIG. 151 (A1-4-1), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration") 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”) is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also halted and displayed a combination of“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”).

  In FIG. 151 (A1-4-2), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, variable display is started, In the second pending number display on the upper right, the pending number in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to “2”. Further, the effect image EF15 is generated so as to cover the pending icon display area HIS and the variation icon display area CIS, and both the pending icon and the variation icon can not be seen.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, the effect image EF15 disappears, and silhouette notice is started in the hold icon display area HIS and the variation icon display area CIS. That is, the cabin sil appears over the holding icon display area HIS and the variation icon display area CIS. The interior of this cabin sil is displayed by a silhouette display. In FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the fluctuation icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are displayed by silhouette display. In the silhouette display, colors such as icons are displayed not in the usual colors but in colors representing shadows. The silhouette notice started here is a notice that indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is in a state of change easily, or there is a hold icon that may change to a display mode with a high expectation of the big hit. It is a notice that suggests that you

  After the silhouette preview is started, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-4), the icon IHI of “red bomber” appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is started. Ru. That is, in the state where the silhouette advance is performed, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-4), the red bomber icon RBI approaches the cabin sil. Soon, the red bomber icon RBI passes passing through the hut sil and fires a red bullet icon BTI during the pass. The fired bullet icon BTI enters the cabin and is displayed by the silhouette display.

  In FIG. 151 (A1-4-7), a state in which the bullet icon BTI is likely to be hit is displayed in a silhouette display on the first hold icon h11. Further, in FIG. 151 (A1-4-8), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the state in which the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 is displayed by the silhouette display. Then, in FIG. 151 (A1-4-9), the first suspension icon h11 is displayed by silhouette display so that it can be understood that the display mode has changed to "red". In addition, it may be displayed in a silhouette display so that it does not know which display mode has been changed until the silhouette advance notice ends.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example in which the silhouette preview of the hold icon is performed and another example of presentation.

  In FIG. 152 (A1-4-10), symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration") 4 "-" decoration 1 ") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern at the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decorative patterns of the lost.

  In FIG. 152 (A1-4-11), the stop display is in progress (fixed display), the fluctuation icon h0 disappears, and the same figure (A1-4-12) is also in the stop display (fixed display), In the figure (A1-4-13), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now, that is, the suspension of the first suspension icon changed to the display mode of "red" is digested, and the symbol variation display is started . In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-13), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started, In the second pending number display on the upper right, the pending number in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to “1”. In addition, in the cabin sil, it can be seen that the moving animation of the holding icon is displayed in a silhouette display, and the first holding icon that has changed to the “red” display mode is displayed at the position of the change icon h0.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-14), after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, The silhouette advance notice is ended, and the fluctuation icon h0 changed to the red display mode is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-15).

  In addition, the effect itself of silhouette notice may be promoted by the effect by the icon change animation using the icon IHI of "red bomber". For example, the cabin sil may be promoted to become a home, the hold icon may change easily, or the color of the cabin sil may change to red, and the display mode of the hold icon may also be likely to be a red display mode . Then, the display mode of the hold icon may change after the silhouette advance notice is finished (after the cabin sil is hidden) or at the same time the finish is finished.

  FIG. 152 (B1-1) to FIG. 152 (B8) are diagrams showing an example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted after the display of the icon change notice is displayed.

  In FIG. 152 (B1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 152 (B2), the icon IHI of “bomber” of the default color, which is the display of the icon change notice, appears (is displayed) at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In the icon change animation here, the icon IHI of "bomber" pauses on the fluctuation icon h0 as shown in FIG. 152 (B3-1), and as shown in FIG. 152 (B4), The bomber's icon IHI displays a flashing light that changes, and is promoted to the "red bomber" icon IHI. In addition to this, when promoting within the same bomber system (“I Bomber icon IHI is promoted to“ Gold Bomber ”icon IHI,“ Red Bomber ”icon IHI is“ Gold Bomber ” In the case of promoting to the icon IHI of the bomber, or when changing to a different system (the icon IHI of the "bomber" is promoted to the icon IHI of the "flying boat", or the icon of the "bomber" IHI may be promoted to the icon "IHI" of "red flying boat".

  In FIG. 152 (B6), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In FIG. 152 (B7), the fired bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 152 (B8), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of “red”.

  FIG. 152 (B3-2-1) to FIG. 152 (B3-2-5) are diagrams showing examples in which the icon change advance display itself is promoted by the button effect.

  152 (B3-2-1) is an example continued from FIG. 152 (B2), and the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-2-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-1). is there. In FIG. 152 (B3-2-2), the button image 136a is added above the icon IHI of “bomber” that is the display of the icon change notice. Here, although the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added, it may be added. In addition, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing shown in FIG. 152 (B3-2-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 149 (B3-2-4), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the above-mentioned effective period of operation, the icon IHI of the “bomber” is displayed with a flashing light indicating a change, and then “red It is promoted to the icon IHI of "bomber" (Figure 149 (B3-2-5)). . Then, although it continues to FIG. 152 (B6), the display mode of a pending icon may not change. In addition, the promotion of the icon IHI of a "bomber" is performed on the condition that the chance button 136 was operated. It may be executed, or may be executed when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. In addition, although the button image 136a is added above the icon IHI of "bomber", the button image 136a may not be added and may be executed as a so-called back button effect.

  FIG. 152 (B3-3-1) to FIG. 152 (B3-3-5) are diagrams showing an example where the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted by the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (B3-3-1), the notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS. In FIG. 152 (B3-3-2), the notice icon YI is used, and the box is changed to the opened mode d. From the box, No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice display YH of 20 "UP" is released, and in the figure (B3-3-3), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display YH of "UP" is displayed. The notice display YH of “UP” changes to the light ball YHb, and as shown in FIG. 152 (B3-3-4), the light ball YHb is paused on the fluctuation icon h0 “ I'm flying for the icon IHI of the bomber, and I hit the icon IHI for the "bomber". Then, in FIG. 152 (B3-3-5), the icon IHI of "bomber" is promoted to the icon IHI of "red bomber". Although the process after FIG. 149 (B3-3-6) is continued from FIG. 152 (B6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example in which the display itself of the icon change advance notice is promoted while failing to be promoted halfway through a plurality of changes.

  FIG. 153 (B3-4-1) is an example continued from FIG. 152 (B2). In this example, the suspension of the prefetch target change is indicated by the second suspension icon h12 shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-1). It becomes a second hold.

  The state shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-1), and the icon IHI of the “bomber” of the default color that is the display of the icon change notice is a change icon It is suspended just above h0. Further, the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-4-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152 (B4), and the icon IHI of “bomber” has a flash display displaying a change. In this example, the promotion fails in this case, and in FIG. 153 (B3-4-3) in which the flash display disappears, the icon IHI of "bomber" remains. Eventually, in FIG. 151 (B3-4-3), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decor 4” — Stop display of "decoration 1"-"decoration 7"), and stop display of the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the second decoration pattern on the top left too There is.

  And, even if the next symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of "bomber" remains suspended just above the variation icon h0 (Fig. 153 (B3-4-5)). In Fig. 153 (B3-4-6), the icon IHI of "bomber" again shows a flashing light that changes, and this time it is successfully promoted and the flashing display disappears (B3-4-7). ) In the "red bomber" icon IHI has been promoted. The red bomber icon RBI, which has been successfully promoted, fires a red bullet icon BTI toward the first hold icon h0, but as shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-8), it does not hit here, In FIG. 153 (B3-4-9), the symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost ("decoration 6"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1") is stopped and displayed.

  This time, the suspension which was the pre-reading target change is digested, and the symbol change display is started (FIG. 153 (B3-4-10)). That is, the symbol variation display started here is the pre-reading variation, and the red bomber icon RBI flips around to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, and the variation icon h0 The red bullet icon BTI is fired at the target of the fluctuation icon h0 (FIG. 153 (B3-4-11)). Then, although it continues to FIG. 148 (A3-2-2), the display mode of a fluctuation icon may not change.

  In this example, although promotion is successful for the second time, the presentation may end without success. Also, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be further changed to the icon IHI of the "gold bomber". Also, in this example, the bullet icon BTI is fired after being promoted, but the bullet icon BTI may be fired even before the promotion. For example, the bullet icon BTI may be fired at the timing of FIG. 153 (B3-4-3).

  FIG. 153 (B1-2-1) to FIG. 153 (B1-2-10) are diagrams showing examples in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 153 (B1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. There is. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 153 (B1-2-2), the timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TYH is displayed on the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-2), the remaining time (5 seconds in this case) up to the time serving as the reference of the promotion effect start is displayed. In 3) the countdown has been started. The timer notice effect started here corresponds to a notice of the promotion effect. After the timer preview effect is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-4), the icon IHI of "bomber" of the default color, which is the display of the icon change alert, is displayed, and directly above the fluctuation icon h0. It flies until it stops and pauses (FIG. 153 (B1-2-5)), and it will be in a standby state. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-6) has no remaining time (it becomes 0 seconds), and in the same figure (B1-2-7) that follows, the timer notice display TYH is a character of "attention" Has been switched to At the same time as the remaining time of the timer advance notice display TYH disappears (it becomes 0 seconds), the promotion effect is started. The promotion effect may be started (when there is a time lag) after the remaining time of the timer advance notice display TYH is exhausted.

  In FIG. 153 (B1-2-8), with the letter “attention” displayed on the timer notice display TYH, the flash display displays a change to the icon IHI of the “bomber” which has been in the standby state. Is displayed. After that, the flash display disappears and the flash display disappears, and in FIG. 153 (B1-2-9), the icon is promoted to the icon “IHI” of “red bomber”. It is easier to promote the display of the icon change notice itself than when the timer notice effect is not performed. When the timer advance notice effect is passed, the display itself of the icon change advance notice may be promoted without fail. In FIG. 153 (B1-2-10), the timer announcement effect is ended, and the timer announcement display TYH is not displayed. The timer notice display TYH may be used to give notice of the type of display of the icon change notice to be promoted. For example, instead of the character display of "attention", the character display of "red" may be performed.

  In addition, when the remaining time of the timer advance notice display TYH disappears (it becomes 0 seconds), the display of an icon change notice (for example, the icon IHI of "bomber") may appear. That is, the timer notice display TYH corresponds to the notice that the display of the icon change notice may be performed. Furthermore, the background color of the timer notice display TYH may be used to give notice of the color of the appearing icon change notice. For example, in the case of a white background, the appearance of the icon IHI of "bomber" is notified, and in the case of a red background, the appearance of icon IHI of "red bomber" is notified, and in the case of a gold background, "gold You may also notice the appearance of the icon IHI of "bomber". However, such a notice may not be made.

  Moreover, although this example was an example in which the timer advance announcement effect and the promotion effect were combined, both are independent, and after the timer advance announcement effect start, the icon IHI of "bomber" appears, and the timer announcement display TYH Even if there is no remaining time in, the promotion effect is not started, and another notice or effect corresponding to the timer notice display TYH may be started. In this case, the promotion effect of the icon IHI of "bomber" is irrelevant to the timer advance effect. Also, there may be a coincidence that the timing when the remaining time of the timer advance notice display TYH disappears and the timing when the icon IHI of the "bomber" is changed on hold may coincide.

  Next, an example will be described in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the meter effect.

  In FIG. 153 (B1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. There is. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed. Further, on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, a meter display MD similar to the meter display shown in FIG. 91 and the like is displayed. The meter display MD shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-1) is a state in which up to 5 divisions have already been stored when the 6 divisions are full. When the meter display MD is full, the icon IHI of "bomber", which is the display of the icon change notice, is promoted. Note that this meter display MD may be a display that is always displayed except for a specific state such as super reach production being performed, or a display that is started when the display start condition is satisfied. It may be

  Eventually, in FIG. 153 (B1-3-2), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decor 4”- Stop display of "decoration 1"-"decoration 7"), and stop display of the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the second decoration pattern on the top left too There is.

  Then, even if the next symbol variation display is started, the meter display MD accumulated up to 5 divisions is displayed on the right base icon bIr (FIG. 153 (B1-3-3)). When the next symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-4), an icon IHI of “red bomber” appears at the right end of the screen. That is, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" displayed here is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. The notice display YH of 20 "up" is loaded, and in the figure (B1-3-5), when passing over the meter display MD, the notice display YH of "up" is dropped, The notice display YH of “up” is taken into the meter display MD. As a result, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-6), the meter display MD becomes full, and in the subsequent FIG. (B1-3-7), the meter display MD is displayed as the text “promotion”. It is changing.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which the display itself of the icon change advance notice is promoted via a meter effect, and another example of the effect.

  In FIG. 154 (B1-3-8) continued from FIG. 153 (B1-3-7), the icon IHI of the default color "bomber" changes in response to the meter display MD becoming full. In FIG. 154 (B1-3-9) in which the flashing display is performed and the flashing display disappears, the icon is promoted to the icon “IHI” of “red bomber”. The color of the display of the icon change notice that has changed here matches the background color of the character display of “promotion” in the meter display MD, and the display of the icon change notice is in the stage of FIG. 153 (B1-3-7). The changing display mode is predicted. Subsequently, the meter display MD shown in FIG. 154 (B1-3-10) returns to the empty state. In addition, when the meter display MD is full, the display mode of the display of the icon change notice may always change (promotion) or may not change (promotion) (in the case of failure).

  FIG. 153 (B1-4-1) to (B1-4-4) will be described with respect to an example in which the display of the icon change notice appears when the meter display in the meter effect is full.

  A meter display MD is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 153 (B1-4-1). This meter display MD is in a state where it is already stored up to 5 divisions when it is full on 6 divisions. Further, in FIG. 153 (B1-4-1) in the symbol variation display, the preliminary display YH of "UP" is displayed. In the following FIG. 153 (B1-4-2), the notice display “H” of “up” is taken into the meter display MD, the meter display MD becomes full, and in the same FIG. (B 1-4-3), the meter The display MD is changed to a display of "bombarding" on a red background. Here, it is predicted that an icon of a background-colored bomber will appear as a display of the icon change notice. In addition, if it changes to the display of "bombing" on a gold background, the icon of "gold bomber" may be displayed, and if it changes to the display of "bombing" on a white background, the icon of "bomber" will change. It may be displayed. In addition, it is not necessary to give notice of the display of the icon change notice that appears. Even in this case, when the meter display MD is full, the "bomber" icon, the "red bomber" icon, Or the icon of "gold bomber" may be displayed.

  Then, in FIG. 154 (B1-4-4), the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears at the right end of the screen.

  In addition, when the appearance notice of the display of the notice of the icon change notice is performed by the meter display MD, the display of the notice of the icon change notice may appear or may not appear.

  FIGS. 154 (C1) to (C13) are diagrams showing an example in which the display of the icon change advance notice is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In FIG. 154 (C1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. During this stop display, nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 154 (C2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS even when the symbol variation display is started, but when the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, it is shown in FIG. 154 (C3) As shown, the smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the smoke image disappears in the figure (C4), and the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b) is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The icon IHI of 13 red "Akyoshimune" is displayed. The icon of "Akyoshimune" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the icon of "red bomber" and the like. The icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is an icon that changes the display mode of the icon to the same display mode as itself, that is, the red display mode (fifth display mode), when the change of the icon is successful. Therefore, if the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it corresponds to the advance notice of the pre-reading advance notice, and if the display mode of the change icon is changed, it corresponds to the advance notice of the normal advance notice.

  In FIG. 154 (C5), the change effect of the fluctuation icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akyoshi sec” is started. That is, until then, the icon IHI of "Akyoshi sect" which has been the mode (a) which is the default mode shown in FIG. 119 (b) is changed to the mode (b). That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune", which was a posture standing up facing the front, faces the fluctuating icon h0, holds a sword, is holding it, and a wave is oscillated from the sword. In Fig. 154 (C6), although the wave oscillates from the sword of "Akyoshimune", the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 remains the default, and in the figure (C7), the icon IHI of "Akyoshimune" is Returning to the mode a, the change animation has ended. That is, the change presentation here is a failure. In FIG. 154 (C8), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed on the first decoration symbol display device 208L. The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed as the aspect a on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 154 (C9), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of “Akyoshi sect” is displayed as the aspect a on the right base icon bIr, and is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. In FIG. 154 (C10), the change animation is started as the change effect of the change icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akyoshi sec”. In FIG. 154 (C11), the change icon h0 which has been the default display mode up to that point is changed to the red display mode, and a normal advance notice is started. In FIG. 154 (C12-1), the icon IHI of "Akyoshi sect" is changed from the mode b to the mode c, and it is appealed that the change presentation has succeeded. When the change presentation is successful, the icon IHI of "Akyoshi sect", which was the display of the icon change notice, disappears from the right base icon bIr.

  The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" described above is the same as the navigation character YM of the display mode with a red kimono shown in Figs. 77 and 84, etc., and the effect example shown in Figs. 77, 84 etc. And mutually applicable.

  In addition, when the icon IHI of "Akyoshimune" is displayed, the display mode of the icon may always change to a red display mode without failure, but it may fail as in this example but the final The display mode may be changed to a red display mode or may eventually fail.

  FIG. 154 (C12-2) shows a state after the display mode of the variation icon h0 can not be changed to the red display mode and eventually the change effect has failed, and the icon IHI of "Akyoshimune" However, it changes to the aspect d from the aspect b, and has alerted | reported that the change production failed.

  Subsequently, an example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119 (b) will be described.

  In FIG. 154 (D1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 154 (D2), the icon of “red thunder cloud” starts to be displayed small above the hold icons h11 and h12. This "red thunder cloud" icon corresponds to the display of the icon change notice, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the "red bomber" icon and the like. The icon of "red thunder cloud", like the icon of "red bomber" or the icon of "Akyoshimune", when the icon changes successfully, the display mode of the icon is the same as the display mode of itself, ie, the red display mode The fifth display mode is an icon to be changed.

  The icon of "red thunder cloud" grows into a large thunder cloud by the growth animation after the display starts. In addition, it may not grow into a large thundercloud, and in this case, it may be a display of “Gasse”, or it may be grown into a big thundercloud.

  The icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" shown in FIG. 154 (D3) has grown to cover the area from the top from the variation icon display area CIS to the reserved icon display area HIS from above, and the icon IHI of this "red thunder cloud" The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are also displayed below.

  In FIG. 154 (D4), lightning is falling from the icon IHI of “red thunder cloud” toward the first holding icon h11, and in the same figure (D5) that follows, the first holding icon h11 where the lightning is falling is an effect image In the figure (D6) in which the effect image EF16 is covered by the EF 16 and disappears (D6), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, remains the default display mode, and the change effect fails. The icon “IHI” of “red thunder cloud” strikes the pending icon or one or more icons of the fluctuating icon simultaneously or sequentially, and if the change effect is successful, the display mode of the fallen icon is , Changes to red display mode. In FIG. 154 (D6), the symbol variation display is stopped and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped displaying the combination of the lost decorative symbols, but the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" is displayed. It is done.

  In FIG. 154 (D7), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" is displayed, and the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" is also displayed across continuous symbol variation displays.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119 (b) and the other presentation examples.

  In FIG. 155 (D8) continued from FIG. 154 (D7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the suspension of the special drawing disappears, and the next change is in a state of waiting for winning. However, the icon "IHI" of "red thunder cloud" is still displayed.

  A symbol demo is started when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in a state where symbol variation display is not started after confirmation display of the stop symbol of the special figure is performed in the state of holding 0 (FIG. 155 (D9)). In this symbol demo, the combination of the stopped decorative symbols continues to be displayed. Further, although the background screen is not shown, it is continuously displayed without being changed from the symbol variation display of FIG. 154 (D7). However, you may switch to the background screen of the symbol demo. Furthermore, when the symbol demo is started, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started. The display start timing of these icons MI, VI, and BI may be before the start of the symbol demonstration, simultaneously with the start of the symbol demonstration, or after the start of the symbol demonstration. Detailed descriptions of these icons MI, VI, and BI will be omitted here because they are performed using FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (D9), the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" is still displayed even during the symbol demonstration.

  The display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started in a state in which the symbol display of the special figure is not started after the final display of the stop figure of the special drawing is performed in the state of holding 0. Further, when the second time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses in that state, the design demonstration is switched to the animation demonstration. When the animation demo is started, the background screen changes and switches to the animation demo screen (FIG. 155 (D10)). When switched to the demonstration screen of this animation, the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" is hidden. On the other hand, in this example, even when switching to the animation demo screen, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are still displayed at the same positions as before switching. However, when the animation demo screen is switched, these icons MI, VI, and BI may be changed in display position or may be hidden.

  When the first time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the animation demonstration screen may be switched. In this case, at the same time as switching to the animation demo screen, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” may be hidden, or the second time may be displayed after switching.

  Eventually, the special figure 1 starting opening 230 enters the ball, and the suspension of the special figure 1 increases by one, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation demonstration screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 155 (D11). As a result, the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" which has grown greatly is re-displayed. However, when the symbol demonstration or the animation demonstration is held, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" may not be displayed.

  In FIG. 155 (D8), the symbol variation display started in the same figure (D11) is stopped and displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. During execution of the symbol variation display started in (D11), there is one more ball ball in special figure 1 starting opening 230, the number of reservations in special figure 1 becomes 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed ing. For this reason, the next change is immediately started, and after the symbol change display here, the reserve of the special figure 1 starts to be accumulated, and the symbol change display is executed continuously. During this time, as shown in FIG. 155 (D13), the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" continues to be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 155 (D14), the first stop is performed on the first decorative symbol, and the left symbol fluctuates. When the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times, the deletion animation is started for the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud". The count of the number here does not change even if the above-mentioned symbol demo or the above-mentioned animation demo is held. However, the number of times may be reset by inserting the symbol demo or the animation demo. The start timing of the deletion animation may be simultaneous with the start of the next symbol variation display in which the symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times, or may be after the start, or the first stop is performed. It may be the other timing. In the erase animation, the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" gradually decreases and eventually disappears (FIG. 155 (D16)). In this example, after all, the change presentation by the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" has ended without any success.

  In this example, although not shown, lightning is dropped to any of the icons for each change. However, the lightning may be dropped only when the icon change is performed. There are also default thundercloud icons and golden thundercloud icons available as thundercloud icon types. However, the colors of the clouds may be the same, and the types may be divided by the color of the lightning. That is, the icon from which the red lightning has fallen may change to red when the change effect is successful. In this case, the type of display of the icon change notice may not be known until the thunder falls, and it may be possible to draw attention to the thundercloud icon. In addition, it may be configured so as not to know which display mode to change only when lightning of the default color falls. For example, even if lightning of a default color falls on the icon of the default color, it may change to red. On the other hand, in the other colors (display mode), since it changes to the same color (display mode) as the color of the lightning (display mode), it also functions as a notice of the changing display mode.

  FIG. 155 (Ea1) to FIG. 155 (Ea9) are diagrams showing examples of effects combining the icon of the display mode of “timer” and the display of the icon change notice.

  In FIG. 155 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. It is an icon of the display mode of ten "timers." The icon of the display mode of the "timer" is an icon whose icon changes to the display mode of the fourth display mode or more when the timer reaches zero. However, it may not change even when the timer reaches 0, or may always change when the timer reaches 0. The mode of the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the “timer” shown at 167 (Ea1) is the mode a before the start of the countdown. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 155 (Ea2-1), the numbers shown in FIG. In the icon of "bomber" of the default color of 4, an icon of a dedicated mode in which the word "Timer" is attached appears at the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon is referred to as an icon IHI of the "timer activation dedicated bomber". The icon IHI of the "timer activation dedicated bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The icon IHI of the "timer activation dedicated bomber" may appear when the hold icon or the change icon is displayed by the "timer" display mode icon, and is displayed by the "timer" display mode icon Even if it has been, it may not appear. However, when the icon of the display mode of "timer" is displayed, it may be displayed without fail. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-1), the icon change animation using the icon IHI of the appearing “timer operation dedicated bomber” is started. Note that, even if the icon change animation is started, the timer of the first hold icon h11 does not start to count down, and is displayed as the mode a.

  In FIG. 155 (Ea3), the bullet icon BTI of the default color is launched from the icon TBI of the bomber with the word "Timer". The goal here is the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the "timer". In addition, although the icon TBI of the bomber attached with the character of Timer does not aim at anything other than the icon of the display mode of a "timer", it may be made a target. In this case, when the bullet icon BTI is hit, the display mode of the "timer" may be changed.

  In FIG. 155 (Ea5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first suspension icon h11 of the "timer", and the first suspension icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 155 (Ea6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the mode a before the start of the countdown to the mode b in the countdown. That is, the bullet icon BTI is hit and the countdown is started. In this example, the icon change animation is an animation from immediately before FIG. 155 (Ea2-1) to FIG. 155 (Ea6). The bullet icon BTI can be viewed as equivalent to the display of the icon change notice, in which case the display is started by being fired from the bomber icon TBI with the word "Timer". Thereafter, the animation up to immediately before the completion of the change to the aspect b corresponds to the icon change animation.

  In FIG. 155 (Ea7), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of the “timer” becomes a mode in which the timer has become 0, and at the same time the timer becomes 0, as shown in FIG. 155 (Ea8), the first hold. The icon h11 is covered by the smoke image. In FIG. 155 (Ea8), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the "timer", changes to the green display mode (the fourth display mode). In addition, even if the icon IHI of the "timer activation dedicated bomber" is not attacked, the timer may start operating even when the "timer" holding icon is not attacked. In this case, it may be a prefetching notice with a higher jackpot reliability than when the operation is started by the icon IHI of the “timer activation dedicated bomber”, or conversely, it is a prefetch notice with a jackpot reliability lower. There may be, and the jackpot reliability may be the same. In addition, the "Timer" hold icon may be activated by the timer even if it is not attacked by the "Timer Operated Bomber" icon IHI, and conversely, the "Timer Activated Bomber" icon The timer may not start as long as it is not attacked by IHI.

  In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-1), when the icon of the display mode of "timer" is displayed, the icon of "red bomber" that is general-purpose, not the icon IHI of "timer-operated dedicated bomber" IHI has appeared. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI is fired from the icon IHI of "red bomber", and the fired bullet icon BTI becomes the first holding icon h11 of the display mode of "timer". Hit. Then, the countdown is started at the first hold icon h11 of "timer". In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-3), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of the “timer” is a mode in which the timer has become 0 and the timer becomes 0 at the same time (Ea2-2-4). As shown in FIG. 5, the first hold icon h11 is covered by the smoke image. In this example, it is determined that the display mode of the first reserved icon changes to the same red display mode (fifth display mode) as the display mode of the icon IHI of "red bomber" when the timer becomes 0. . In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the “timer”, changes to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

  FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a certain type of reserved icon and the display of the icon change notice are combined.

  FIG. 156 (Eb1) to FIG. 156 (Eb8) are diagrams showing an example in which the pending icon of the type of “bomb” of the type not shown in FIG. 119 (a) and the display of the icon change notice are combined.

  In FIG. 156 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is an icon of the “bomb” type not shown in FIG. 119 (a). The icon of the "bomb" type is an icon that changes the display mode of the icon when the bomb explodes, which is similar to the "timer" icon in this respect, but the "timer" icon counts down When it becomes 0, the display mode of the icon changes, so it is easy to understand the timing of the change of the display mode, but with "bombs" it is difficult to know when to explode, and as a result, the timing of the change of the display mode The two are different because they are confusing. In the "bomb" type icon, there is a squib, and it is necessary to ignite this squib to get the "bomb" out of the box.

  In FIG. 156 (Eb2), the icon IHI of “red bomber”, which is the display of the icon change notice, appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In FIG. 156 (Eb3), the red bomber icon RBI mounted with the ignition icon CYI is gradually approaching the first suspension icon h11 of “bomb”, and in the diagram (Eb4), the first suspension is The ignition line CYI for the ignition line of the bomb icon which is the icon h11 is dropped. The "red bomber" icon IHI may be a fixedly deployed flamethrower, in which case the bullet icon BTI and the ignition icon CYI, etc., are separated from the aircraft It disappears. Even if the ignition icon CYI is dropped, the first pending icon h11 of “bomb” may or may not be successfully ignited by the squib. The squib of the icon of the bomb, which is the first reserved icon h11 shown in FIG. 156 (Eb5), is ignited, and in the figure (Eb6), the squib is burning and becoming shorter. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 156 (Eb7-1), the first holding icon h11 of “bomb” explodes, and as shown in FIG. 156 (Eb8), the first holding icon h11 is “red bomber”. The display mode is changed to the same red as the display mode of the icon IHI.

  FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-1) is a modification continuing from FIG. (Eb6), and in FIG. 156 (Eb6), although the squib is burning and becoming shorter, FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-1) Then, the fire of the squib has been extinguished on the way. For this reason, the first holding icon h11 of "bomb" does not explode, and no change in display mode occurs. The icon of "bomb" whose squib has been extinguished on the way continues to be displayed as it is. The aspect of the "bomb" in which the fire of the squib has disappeared halfway corresponds to the second display aspect (the display aspect of "flashing white"). In FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-2), the symbol variation display ends, and in the same diagram (Eb7-2-3), the “bomb” icon in a mode in which the squib has disappeared halfway is displayed as the variation icon h0 It is done. Even if the squib has been extinguished halfway, the squib which has been extinguished may be ignited again due to the fluctuation after the next fluctuation. In the same figure (Eb7-2-4) following FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-3), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even if the "bomb" icon (hold icon or change icon) is not attacked by the display of the icon change notice such as the icon IHI of the "red bomber", the squib may be naturally ignited. Good. In this case, it may be a prefetching notice with a higher jackpot reliability than when it is ignited by the display of the icon change notice, or conversely, it may be a prefetch notice with a jackpot reliability lower than that of the jackpot. The reliability may be the same. In addition, the icon of "bomb" may be naturally ignited naturally even if it is not attacked by the display of the icon change notice, and conversely, the squib is ignited unless attacked by the display of the icon change notice. You do not have to.

  It should be noted that due to the icon change notice, the icon (pending icon and / or fluctuating icon) shown in FIG. 2-No. It may be notified that it changes to the 19 icons, the “bomb” icon described above, the hold icon of the VS display mode, and the “patramp” icon described later.

  Fig. 156 (Ec1) to Fig. 156 (Ec8) are the same as the numbers shown in Fig. 119 (a). FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example in which 11 “target” icons are combined with display of an icon change notice of a type not shown in FIG. 119 (b).

  In FIG. 156 (Ec1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. It is an icon of the display mode of 11 "targets." In the case of the icon of the display aspect of this "might", when the arrow does not stick to the target icon, the aspect a shown in FIG. 119 (a) remains as it is, and the big hit confidence in the symbol variation display corresponding to the target The degree is about the level of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking), but when the arrow is pierced on the target icon, it changes to the mode b shown in FIG. 119 (a), and the symbol variation display corresponding to the target icon The reliability of the jackpot in the case of the second display mode rises to the level of the sixth display mode (golden display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 156 (Ec2), the icon YMP of Yoshimune, who carries the umbrella, appears in the upper right of the display screen. The icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying the parachute is a kind of display of the icon change notice, but becomes a display of an icon change notice of a type not shown in FIG. 119 (b). In FIG. 119 (b), the icon change animation has been started, and Yoshimune in the icon YMP of Yoshimune who carried the fall umbrella is aiming at the target icon, which is the first hold icon h11, holding the bow and arrow (FIG. In Ec3), the arrow icon YII is fired. The icon YII of the fired arrow hits the target icon which is the first storage icon h11, and in FIG. 156 (Ec5-1), the first storage icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In the following FIG. 156 (Ec6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to the mode b shown in FIG. 119 (a). In this example, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first reserved icon h11 is increased to the level of the sixth display mode (golden display mode). In FIG. 156 (Ec7-1), the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying the parachute passes over the first holding icon h11, and eventually the icon TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 156 (Ec8)) .

  FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-1) is a modification continuing from FIG. (Ec4), and in FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-1), the icon YII of the fired arrow is the first hold icon h11. In the same figure (Ec5-2-2) which has not hit the target icon, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as it is. Then, as in the case of the hit, the icon YMP of Yoshimune, carrying the parachute, passes over the first holding icon h11 (Fig. 156 (Ec5-2-3)), and that icon eventually The TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-4)). As described above, if it fails in one time in the symbol variation display, it is not possible to try again and it ends as it is. However, the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying the parachutar may appear again at the next change, and the change presentation aiming at the target icon may be executed, or the change presentation may be executed by another presentation. In addition, even if it fails once in the symbol variation table temple once, it may be possible to re-challenge up to a predetermined number of times (for example, twice, three times including re-challenge) even if it fails once It may be configured to always be able to try again a predetermined number of times.

  FIG. 157 is a view showing another example of effect using a bomber-based icon as a display of the icon change notice.

  FIGS. 157 (Ed1) to (Ed5) show examples in which icons of types not shown in FIG. 119 (a) and display of icon change notice of types not shown in FIG. 119 (b) are combined. FIG.

  In FIG. 157 (Ed1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The first holding icon h11 of the special view 1 is an icon of the type of "patram" of a type not shown in FIG. 119 (a). When the icon of the "Patrump" icon is activated, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the icon of the "Patrump" is the level of the seventh display mode (the display mode of rainbow color), that is, the jackpot determination Rise to the level of On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 157 (Ed1), the numbers shown in FIG. In the icon of "bomber" of the default color of 4, an icon of a dedicated mode in which the character card is attached and the character of pat is attached appears at the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon is referred to as an icon IHI of "card for playing with a padlock". The icon IHI of "Patrump operating dedicated bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The icon IHI of "card for playing with a playing card" may appear when the hold icon or the fluctuation icon is displayed by the icon of the playing mode of "playing card", and is displayed by an icon of a playing mode of "patram" Even if it has been, it may not appear. However, when the icon of the display mode of "Pat Ramp" is displayed, it may appear without fail. In FIG. 157 (Ed1), an icon change animation is started using the icon IHI of the appeared “Patrump operating only bomber”.

  In FIG. 157 (Ed2), from the icon PBI of the bomber to which the card is attached and the character of pat is attached, the bullet icon BTI of the default color is targeted for the first holding icon h11 of the display mode of "padlock", It has been launched. In FIG. 157 (Ed3), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11 of "Pat Ramp", and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 157 (Ea4), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the icon of the card holder of the first hold icon h11 is activated, and it is notified that the first hold is the hold of the big hit decision. Note that the icon IHI of the "card for tramp card operation only" is flying away on the left side of the screen, and is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (Ea5).

  FIG. 157 (Fa1) to FIG. 157 (Fa5) are diagrams showing an example in which the notice of the appearance of the icon change notice is given notice using the movable character and the like.

  In FIG. 157 (Fa1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 157 (Fa2-1), among the large board behavior objects arranged at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 14 etc., the fourth large board behavior arranged at the lower right From the initial position, the character 224Gd starts to advance to the first decorative symbol display device 208L toward the overlapping position from the front side, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is made to coincide with the advance of the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd. A red effect image EF17 is displayed around the portion overlapped with the fourth large-area behavior part 224Gd in. The operation of the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd becomes an operation to predict that the display of the icon change notice appears from the vicinity of the fourth large-pattern behavior character 224Gd, and the effect image EF17 of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. The display becomes a notice as to what color icon change notice display will appear. That is, the appearance itself of the display of the icon change notice is notified with the character and the effect image EF17, and the appearance of the display is notified with the character with the effect image EF17.

  In addition, although it may be comprised so that the change of the display mode of an icon may occur more easily when the accessory works, it is not necessary to change the ease of occurrence. In addition, depending on the number of operated items, the change in the display mode of the icon may easily occur, but the ease of occurrence may not be changed.

  In FIG. 157 (Fa3), the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd moves to the maximum advance position, and in the same figure (Fa4), the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd moved to the maximum advance position returns to the initial position. I'm starting. As shown in FIG. 157 (Fa2) to FIG. 157 (Fa4), the display position of the effect image EF17 also changes in accordance with the movement operation of the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd. When the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd having moved to the maximum advance position starts retreating toward the initial position, the display of the icon IHI of “red bomber” as a display of the icon change notice starts to be seen in the back. Thus, when the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears and effects similar to those after Fig. 148 (A3-1) are executed after Fig. 157 (Fa5), but the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change There may be.

  FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-1) to FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the notice of the appearance of the icon change notice is given notice using the POV display 224I.

  In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-1) during symbol variation display, the POV display 224I, which has been hidden at the initial position so far, appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, It is in the state of

  In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-2), when the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches constant speed rotation on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I displays an icon of “red bomber” IHI is displayed, and the appearance of the icon "IHI" of "red bomber" is notified.

  In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the icon IHI of “red bomber” is still displayed, but “red bomber” is displayed behind it. The emergence of the icon IHI. When the icon IHI of “red bomber” appears, the POV display 224I stops rotating (FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-4)) and returns to the initial position (FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-5)). Thus, the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears, and effects similar to those after Fig. 148 (A3-1) are executed after Fig. 157 (Fa2-2-5), but the display mode of the fluctuation icon May not change.

  Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area is An effect display may be performed. Further, in the state during acceleration from when the POV display 224I reaches the stationary state to the constant speed state, and the state during deceleration before the constant speed state returns to the stationary state, the display area is more visible than in the constant speed state. The effect display may be performed in the above display area even in a state during acceleration or a state during deceleration. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in a state during acceleration or a state during deceleration. In addition, in the state of accelerating or decelerating, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I more noticeable. It is also good. Alternatively, in the acceleration state, effect display may be performed on the display area, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached. The remarks described here are also applicable to the following example of the POV display 224I.

  In addition, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon IHI of “red bomber” may be earlier in the end timing of the constant speed rotation, or the appearance timing of the icon is earlier. Or both may be at the same timing.

  In addition, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display shown in FIG. 146) The above occurrence notice may be performed by means 208 M ′ or the like, or another notice may be performed.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of various notices and the like regarding the display of the icon change notice.

  FIG. 158 (Fb1) to FIG. 158 (Fb9) are diagrams showing an example in which the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icons is previewed using a feature effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 158 (Fb1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-1), and the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. The state shown in FIG. 158 (Fb2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-2), and the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears, and the change effect of the display mode of the icon is started.

  In FIG. 158 (Fb3), feature presentation is started before the red bomber icon RBI fires the bullet icon BTI. The feature presentation here is, among the large board behavior objects arranged at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 14 etc., the third large board behavior character article arranged at the lower left. 224Gc and the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd arrange | positioned in the lower right start advancing to the position which overlaps with the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L from the front side from each initial position. Although this feature presentation can be continued until just before the display mode of the icon changes, the function as the advance notice is before firing the bullet icon BTI. In this feature presentation, the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is foretold depending on how many of the four large-scale behavior characters 224GA to 224Gd operate. In other words, if all four work, it succeeds with 100% probability, if three works, it succeeds with 75% probability, if only two works, it succeeds with 50% probability and only one works. It predicts that it will succeed only with a 25% probability.

  Of the four large-screen behavior characters 224Ga to 224Gd, the highest probability of success is obtained if the first large-pattern behavior member 224Ga is operated, and the second highest probability of success is obtained if the second large-pattern behavior member 224Gb is operated. If the third large-screen behavior part 224Gd is operated, the success probability may be the third highest, and if the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Ge is operated, the lowest success probability may be set. Alternatively, the success probability can be forecasted depending on the position from which the initial position is advanced. For example, the probability of success may be increased as the position of maximum exit is approached.

  In addition, the change in the display mode of the icon may be more likely to occur when the accessory works, than when it is not performed, but the likelihood of occurrence does not have to be changed. In addition, depending on the number of operated items, the change in the display mode of the icon may easily occur, but the ease of occurrence may not be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (Fb8), the feature effect is ended when the change of the display mode of the icon is completed.

  FIG. 158 (Fc1) to FIG. 158 (Fc6) are diagrams showing an example of giving notice of promotion of the display itself of the icon change notice.

  In FIG. 158 (Fc1), the icon IHI of “bomber” of the default color appears, and the change effect of the display mode of the icon is started. Here, before the icon IHI of the "bomber" pauses, the notice effect is started. Here, as with the effects shown in FIG. 157 (Fa2-1) to FIG. (Fa4), the fourth large-screen behavior player 224Gd arranged at the lower right from the initial position is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Beginning to move forward from the front to the overlapping position, and in accordance with the advance of the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd, the portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlapped with the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd An effect image EF17 is displayed around the periphery. Here, the display mode of the effect image EF17 is to notice the display mode to be promoted by the icon IHI of the default color "bomber". Here, the red effect image EF17 is displayed, and in FIG. 158 (Fc5), it is promoted to the icon “IHI” of “red bomber”. Although FIG. 158 (Fc6) is followed by FIG. 152 (B6), there may be cases where the display mode of the hold icon does not change.

  In this example, the behavior of the fourth large-scale behavior character item 224Gd is a kind of scolding effect regardless of the notice, but it is configured such that promotion is more likely to occur when the item works. It may be done. However, the likelihood does not have to change. In addition, promotion may easily occur depending on the number of operated features. In other words, the promotion may easily occur as the number of operated features increases. However, here also the likelihood does not have to change.

  FIG. 158 (Fd1) to (Fd6) are diagrams showing an example of the effect of changing the display mode of icons using the POV display 224I.

  In FIG. 158 (Fa1) during symbol variation display, the POV display 224I, which has been hidden at the initial position so far, appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is in a state before rotating operation. . Note that the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special view 1 are displayed, and these two holding icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

  In FIG. 158 (Fd2), when the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches constant speed rotation on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I displays the “red bomber icon RBI and default The rotation range of the POV display 224I completely overlaps the display position of the first holding icon h11, and the rotation position of the POV display 224I is displayed at the display position of the second holding icon h12. Partially overlap.

  The POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd3) displays a state in which a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, targeting the first hold icon h11. On the POV display 224I shown in Fd4), it is displayed that the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11 and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14.

  Then, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd5-1), the first holding icon h11 changed to the red display mode is displayed together with the red bomber icon RBI.

  In this example, while the POV display 224I is performing constant-speed rotation, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is on the back side, may or may not be visible. It may be While the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the icon IHI of “red bomber” and / or the effect image EF14 is displayed on the portion of the display screen behind the POV display 2241 that rotates at a constant speed May or may not be displayed.

  In FIG. 158 (Fd6), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode and the second display mode in the default mode. The hold icon h12 is displayed, and the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed. However, the icon IHI of “red bomber” may be displayed.

  The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change while the POV display 224I is performing constant-speed rotation, or may change at the same time as the POV display 224I stops constant-speed rotation. Alternatively, it may change after the POV display 224I has stopped rotating at a constant speed.

  Moreover, although the example using POV display 224I was demonstrated here, light guide plate IL or another display means (The 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 208M, the 3rd decoration symbol display apparatus 208N, the 4th display means 208M shown in FIG. 146) The above display may be performed by 'etc.' That is, a part of the scene displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be enlarged and displayed on the POV display 224I. For example, the display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd2) is shown in FIG. -1) corresponds to the enlarged display of a scene between the same figure (A3-1) and the display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd3) corresponds to the enlarged display of the scene shown in FIG. 148 (A3-1) It may be In this case, the enlarged display is performed not only on the POV display 224I, but also on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. Or may be used in combination with the POV display 224I. In addition, such enlarged display can also be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Also, in the examples shown in FIG. 157 and FIG. 158, although the notice is related to the display of the icon change notice, the present invention can also be applied to the notice of the appearance of the notice icon. For example, the probability of appearance of the notice icon may be represented depending on how many large-scale behavior characters operate out of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Ga to 224Gd (the more the number of operating features, the appearance probability is Get higher).

  FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and another display means.

  The example shown in FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-1) to FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-2) is a modification of the previous FIG. 158 (Fd5-1) to FIG. 158 (Fd6). The display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 159 (Fd 5-2-1) is a display of an icon change notice (an icon IHI of “red bomber”) and a display mode showing the display mode of the changed icon. It does not indicate whether the icon has changed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-1), it is slightly visible that the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image EF14.

  In FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-2), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode and the red display. The second hold icon h12 of the aspect is displayed. In this example, the POV display 224I displays the display as to whether or not the effect of changing the display mode of the icon has succeeded although the target icon is unknown. Then, when the change effect of the display mode of the icon is displayed by the POV display 224I, the display mode of the target icon actually changes in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, the display of the change of the display mode of the hold icon on the POV display 224I and the display of the change of the display mode of the hold icon on the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be performed simultaneously, conversely, the first decorative pattern The POV display 224I may be performed after the display device 208L is performed first.

  Also, in this example, the POV display 224I can be used as a notice as to whether or not the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is successful although it is unknown until the target icon.

  Hereinafter, in FIG. 159, an example of effects in the device configuration in which the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 146 are combined will be described, but as described also in FIG. However, the technology described in this specification can not be applied simply by the difference in the configuration of the present invention, and it can be applied whether the arrangement of the display means is horizontal or vertical as viewed from a technical idea. It is.

  In FIG. 159 (Fe1) to FIG. (Fe6), the display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is completed only in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display in the fourth display device 208M 'is the fourth display device It is a figure which shows the example completed only in 208M '.

  The state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe1) is different from the state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (key a1) from whether the background screen is displayed or not. Is the same. Further, the state of the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe1) is the same as the state of the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 146 (f1).

  In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-1), the tip portion of the icon IHI of “red bomber” as a display of the notice of icon change appears at the right end of the screen, and in FIG. In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown, an icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI is started. In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, and in the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 159 (Fe5), the bullet The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe6), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe1) to FIG. 159 (Fe6), variable display of decorative symbols is continuously performed.

  FIGS. 159 (Fe2-2-1) to (Fe2-2-6) are diagrams showing an example in which a part of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L enters the fourth display means 208M '.

  FIG. 159 (Fe 2-2-1) is a continuation from FIG. 159 (Fe 2-1), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe 2-2-1), as a display of an icon change notice The icon IHI of "Red Bomber" appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon IHI of "Red Bomber" is used in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (Fe 2-2-2). A change animation has been started, and a red bullet icon BTI has been fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-3), the lower end area in which the bullet icon BTI is overlapped with the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M ′ in the initial position. It is hard to see for a moment because it is displayed on. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-4), the bullet icon BTI has moved into the display screen of the fourth display means 208M ′ at the initial position, and the fourth display means 208M. 'The tip of the bullet icon BTI is displayed. In addition, although it does not appear to be overlapped with the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M 'at the initial position, the rear end portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . However, it does not have to be displayed. In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-5), the default display mode in which the tip portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the pedestal hs0' of the variation icon display area CIS '(first display (A part of the variation icon h0 of the embodiment). In this situation, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the fourth display means 208M '. In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6).

  The variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed is enlarged beyond the size of the display screen of the fourth display means 208M 'and displayed across both the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be done. In addition, the icon IHI of "red bomber" may be displayed across both the fourth display means 208M 'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  The state shown in FIG. 160 (Ff1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 160 (Ff1) are in the initial position of each other and are in an open state (a separated state), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L The display screen of is visible.

  The state shown in FIG. 160 (Ff2) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 148 (A2-1). Here, the icon of "red bomber" as the display of the icon change notice is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. IHI is beginning to appear, and the entire icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 160 (Ff4), the red bomber icon RBI is moving in the left direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in the same figure (Ff4) is red The third decorative symbol display device 208N itself starts moving in the left direction (the same figure (Ff5) to Ff6)) instead of moving the icon RBI of the bomber in the left direction. That is, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved in accordance with the original movement display of the red bomber icon RBI. Eventually, the third decorative symbol display device 208N reaches the maximum movement position and can not move further in the left direction. Then, next, as shown in FIG. 160 (Ff7), the icon RBI of the red bomber has moved into the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L The tip part of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed, and the rear part of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the far side, the entire icon RBI of the red bomber may be displayed.

  In FIG. 160 (Ff8), the third decorative symbol display device 208N that has reached the maximum movement position starts moving toward the initial position, and about 2/3 of the red bomber icon RBI is the first decoration The red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI since it is displayed on the symbol display device 208L and has reached the position in front of the target first reserved icon h11. In FIG. 160 (Ff9), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. Further, the entire icon RBI of the red bomber is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 160 (Ff10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In addition, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 160 (Ff11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. Also, the red bomber icon RBI is about to fly away further to the left from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 160 (Ff12), the red bomber icon RBI is the second decorative symbol display device 208M It has disappeared from

  In the example described above, one image may be displayed across a plurality of display units, but the same image is not displayed on a plurality of display units. For example, although the same image may not be displayed in part on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be displayed.

  In addition, even when the icon non-change animation is performed, the icon RBI of the red bomber is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M through the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The animation may be performed, but when the icon invariable animation is performed, the red bomber icon RBI may be configured to be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Only the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be displayed.

  In FIG. 160 (Fg), the icon IHI of "bomber", the icon IHI of "red bomber", and the icon IHI of "gold bomber" are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N as the display of a plurality of icon change notices. Is displayed. Although these bombers may start moving animation simultaneously as in the example shown in FIG. 150 (A2-3-1), they are only displayed in stock, and moving animation is one by one. It may be performed.

  Note that the hold icon or the change icon itself may also be used to display an icon change notice. In this case, it is notified that the user is changing itself, or another icon different from itself (hold icon or change It will be predicted that the icon changes.

  In addition, a notice display for notifying that the display of the icon change notice is performed in any of the symbol change displays among the held symbol change displays or that it is performed in the currently performed symbol change display (icon A change notice may be displayed). For example, only the tip of the icon IHI of "bomber" is visible at the right end of the screen, or the icon IHI of "bomber" appears as a display during the icon change notice preparation, and stands by in a dedicated stock area (standby area) The indication which is done is raised. Also, a notice may be made by using a telop display trp shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-3). In addition, a plurality of icon change notice preparation display may be displayed. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of display of the icon change notice, the icon change notice preparation display may be displayed for each display mode of the display of the icon change notice. In addition, there may be a dedicated area for performing stock display of the icon change notice preparation display. In addition, at least a part (including the whole) of the area in which the icon change notice preparation display is displayed may be displayed in the area overlapping the display of the icon change notice, or may be displayed in the non-overlap area. .

  In addition, before the display of the icon change notice (the icon change notice by the other notice display such as the "bomber" icon or the icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, as the notice and / or the advance notice of the change. , “The icon (display icon and / or change icon) whose display mode changes after the icon change notice” changes to a display mode (for example, the enlarged display mode etc.) different from the display mode which changes due to the icon change notice Therefore, it may be notified that it is an icon that changes due to the icon change notice, or the display mode of the icon changes due to other display such as cursor display on the "icon whose display manner changes after the icon change notice." By displaying an indication suggesting that the icon The may be foretold.

  In addition, after the display of the icon change notice (the icon change notice by the other notice display such as the "bomber" icon or the icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, it is informed that the change is a big hit. Execution of notices (notice display by various display devices such as liquid crystal display device, light emission by various lamps (frame lamp 122, panel lamp) (color and light emission pattern, notice sound by speakers, notice operation of operation means and various devices, etc.) Among them, various notices described in the present specification may be made. For example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change in a state where the big hit decision sound of the fluctuation is outputted from the speaker 120. Alternatively, the icon change animation may be displayed in a state where the jackpot decision sound is output. However, the various types of advance notice may not be performed during the execution of the advance notice for notifying that the change is a big hit. In addition, there may be various notices that are performed only during the execution of a notice notifying that the change is a big hit.

  Although various advance notices may not be performed during execution of the island simultaneous rendering, they may be performed. In addition, there may be various notices that are performed only during the execution of the island simultaneous rendering.

  In addition, depending on the effect background or the effect mode, there may be various notices to be performed and various notices not to be performed. Conversely, there may be various effects to be performed regardless of the effect background. For example, on the background screen of the sea, the display of the icon change notice (the icon change notice by the other notice display such as the "bomber" icon or the icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed. In this case, the display of the icon change notice may not be displayed. Further, the effect background may be selectable by the player, and in this case, it is also possible to select whether or not to display the icon change advance notice.

  In the above, although various icons and displays described using FIGS. 117 to 119, or examples of effects using icons and displays other than those icons and displays have been described, finally, seven effects are collectively described Do.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram schematically illustrating seven example effects for which various icons and displays are used. In FIG. 161, the progress of the effect is shown stepwise from the left to the right of the figure. Also, FIG. 161 also shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208.

  An example of effects of the mini game B described with reference to FIG. 118 is roughly shown in FIG. 161 (1) and FIG. 161 (2).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (1), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of these reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (1), a mini game dedicated to the mini game is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game A mini game B (Janken Showdown) is being played in Windu MGW. On the left side of the mini game Windu MGW, an icon of a Yoshimune character is displayed. The icon of this Yoshimune character is a type of a pending icon or a variation icon shown in FIG. 119 (a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune of aspect a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the left side of FIG. 161 (1), which is the same as the icon of “19 Yoshin (Janken)”. On the other hand, on the right side in the mini game Windu MGW, an icon of a character of swordsman as an opponent shown in FIG. 118C is displayed. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (1), the icon of the sword aura character of aspect a is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown at the center of FIG. 161 (1), the No. 1 shown in FIG. The icon of the character of Yoshimune which is the same as the icon of the aspect c of 19 and the icon of the character of the swordsman of aspect d shown in FIG. 118 (c) are displayed. That is, in this Janken confrontation, Yoshimune has issued a choki and a swordsman has issued a par, and the character of "Yoshimou victory" is also displayed in the mini game Windu MGW. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (1), the No. 1 symbol shown in FIG. The icon of the character of Yoshimune which is the same as the icon of the aspect f of 19 is displayed together with the character of "Yoshimoku victory", and the icon of the character of Yoshimune is also displayed a balloon marked as "hold change" The display mode of the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the No. 1 display icon, is No. 1 in FIG. The display mode is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (2), the mini game window MGW is not displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game B (jang ken confrontation) Is performed on the left base icon bIl arranged in the hold icon display area HIS. That is, the mini game B is played using the hold icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side and center of FIG. 161 (2), the first holding icon h11 is an icon of a character of swordsman as an opponent shown in FIG. 118 (c), The No. 1 icon shown in FIG. 119 (c) is the hold icon h12. It is an icon of 19 "Jisune (Janken)".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (2), the first holding icon h11 is displayed by the icon of the sword character of aspect a, and the second holding icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect a It is displayed by the icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown at the center of FIG. 161 (2), the first holding icon h11 is displayed as the icon of the sword character of mode d, and the second holding icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of mode c. It is displayed by the icon. That is, in this jangken confrontation, the swordsman gave a par and Yoshimune gave a choki, and Yoshimune won. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (2), the second hold icon h12 is displayed as the icon of the character of Yoshimune of the aspect f, and the icon of the character of Yoshimune is "hold change" The written balloon is also displayed. And although the 1st holding icon h11 next to it was an icon of the character of a swordsman until now, No. 119 (a) of FIG. The display mode is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3. In the example shown in FIG. 161 (2), the mini game B using the hold icon is performed, and the display mode of the hold icon used for the mini game B is changed. That is, the hold icon displayed by the opponent's icon becomes the pre-read target hold icon.

  As described above, the mini game may be played with the hold icon as shown in FIG. 161 (2) or the mini game may be played in another area as shown in FIG. 161 (1). In addition, although the example here is an example of a mini game of whether or not the display mode of the hold icon changes, it is a mini game of whether or not various advance notice icons shown in FIG. 117 can be acquired. Good.

  In FIG. 161 (3) and FIG. An example of an effect for giving a notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes by the “bancho” change notice display BCH of 16 is roughly shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 161 (3) and (4), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the change icon h0 is a change icon The display area CIS is displayed on the pedestal hs0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (3) and FIG. 161 (4), both the first reserved icon h11 and the variation icon h0 correspond to No. 1 of FIG. It is displayed in the default display mode described in 1. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (3) and FIG. 161 (4), the No. 16 of FIG. 119 (b) is placed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. The change warning display BCH of "bancho" of the aspect a described in is displayed. A balloon inscribed as “pending change” is added to the “bancho” change notice display BCH here, and it is notified that the display mode of the pending icon changes.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown at the center of FIG. 161 (3), the change notice of "bancho" on the right base icon bIr disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the third display mode. It has changed to (blue display mode). Note that the timing at which the “bancho” change notice display BCH disappears may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, or the “bancho” change notice display BCH disappears Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown at the center of FIG. 161 (4), the change notice display BCH of "bancho" does not disappear from the top of the right base icon bIr, and the balloon attached to the change notice display BCH of "bancho" However, it has been changed to a balloon marked "one more time", and it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon changes once again. Further, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the third display mode (display mode of blue). Note that the timing at which the balloon attached to the “bancho” change notice BCH changes (the re-notice start timing) may be the same as the time at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The start timing of the advance notice may be earlier or, conversely, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (4), the change notice display BCH of “bancho” disappears from above the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the fourth display mode It has changed to (the display mode of green). In this example, the display mode of the hold icon changes twice in one pattern change display, but the next symbol change display of the symbol change display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes once The display mode of the hold icon may change again. Further, in one symbol variation display, the display mode of the hold icon may change three or more times. Furthermore, although the “bancho” icon used as the change notice display BCH in FIG. 161 (4) is used again without disappearing for re-noticing, the icon or display that becomes the notice target disappears (non- Until it is displayed, the change notice may be used many times. For example, if the icon to be notified is the hold icon, until the hold icon becomes a change icon, or until the change icon disappears, in other words, the symbol change display of the pre-read change object is started or the symbol The change preview may be used until the change display ends, and the display mode may change repeatedly. Further, the icon or display to be notified may be a notice icon or a notice display, and the display mode of the notice icon or notice may be repeatedly changed until the notice icon or notice display disappears. In addition, even if the change notice display BCH is displayed, there may be a case where no display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. In addition, even if the “bancho” change notice display BCH shown at the center of the symbol change display 173 (4) is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may not change again. That is, the "bancho" change notice BCH may not be used again to change the icon to be notified.

  In FIG. 161 (5) and FIG. The effect example of notifying that the display mode of the holding icon changes by the change notice display of the bomber system of 4 and 5 is roughly shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (5) and FIG. (6), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the variation of the default display mode The icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (5), the first hold icon h11 corresponds to the No. in FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed in the 4th display mode (display mode of green) described in 4. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. The icon IHI of the default color "bomber" described in 4 has appeared, and an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "bomber" has been started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (5), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first holding icon h11 in the fourth display mode (the green display mode), and the bullets fired The icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode) in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (5). There is. Since the change in display mode of the icon by the default color "bomber" icon IHI only raises one step, it can not be changed to the icon of the fifth display mode unless it is the icon of the fourth display mode.

  On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (6), the first hold icon h11 corresponds to the No. in FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed in the first display mode (default display mode) described in 1. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, No. 1 in FIG. The icon "IHI" of red "red bomber" described in 5 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the icon IHI of "red bomber" has been started. Furthermore, a tutorial display is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. This tutorial display is a tutorial display on the change presentation of the display mode of the icon using the change notice display, and may be displayed until the change presentation starts and may be hidden thereafter, or the bullet icon BTI It may be displayed until it is fired and may be hidden thereafter, or may be displayed until the change of the display mode of the icon is completed or the change failure is determined. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown at the center of FIG. 161 (6), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first holding icon h11 of the first display mode (default display mode), and the bullets fired The icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode) in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (6). There is. In changing the display mode of the icon by the red bomber “red bomber” icon IHI in red (the fifth display mode), change the display mode of the icon before the change to the icon of the fifth display mode regardless of the level Can.

  In Fig. 161 (7), in the state shown in Fig. 120 (A12), an error message occurs, and an error message such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed on the first decoration symbol display device 208L (warning message) Display (hereinafter referred to as "error display EWM") is displayed. The error display EWM overlaps at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side, and hides at least a part of the notice icon YI. In addition, the error display EWM may overlap from the front side to all the notice icons YI. In addition, the error display EWM may overlap at least partially from the front side only after the notice icon YI is used (for example, the display of the mode d shown in FIG. 117 (a)), or the notice icon Only before YI is used (for example, the display of mode a shown in FIG. 117 (a)), at least a portion may overlap from the front side. In addition, the error display EWM may overlap over the entire display period of the error display EWM from the front to at least a part of the notice icon YI, and a part of the period (for example, the error display EWM) It may overlap only for a fixed period of time) after the start.

  Or, conversely, the notice icon YI has a case where the error display EWM overlaps from at least a part of the front (for example, when the importance of the error display EWM is low or the relation with cheating is low, etc.) This may be done only after the notice icon YI is used, or before the notice icon YI is used. Further, although the example shown in FIG. 161 (7) is a relation with the notice icon, the relation with the notice display is also the same as that described above.

  In Fig. 161 (8), in the state shown in Fig. 148 (A2-1), a tray full error occurs and an error display EWM such as "Please pull off the ball" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. The error display EWM does not overlap the change effect of the display mode of the icon. That is, the error display EWM is displayed at a position deviated from the display position of the icon (red bomber icon RBI, bullet icon BTI, etc.) used for the change effect of the display mode of the icon. More specifically, the error display EWM is displayed at a position not overlapping the change notice display. Also, the error display EWM does not overlap with the mini game (for example, the icon or display of a character appearing in the mini game).

  However, the error display EWM is at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the icon (for example, at least a part of the change notice display) or at least a part of the mini game (for example, the icon or display of a character appearing in the mini game Of the error indication EWM may overlap over the entire period of the display period of the error display EWM (for example, the start of the error display EWM) It may overlap only for a predetermined period of time, etc.).

  Moreover, although FIG. 161 (7) and the same figure (8) were the examples of the error display EWM such as “Please remove the ball”, the display and the warning regarding various errors described using FIGS. 114 to 116. The same applies to the display regarding.

  In the game table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 161, only one notice icon is displayed in the case of a loss (in the case of a gusset), and in the case of a big hit, the game is boosted. It is configured to display a plurality of notice icons.

  As described above, the description using FIGS. 117 to 161 can be combined with the simultaneous rendering or volume adjustment display (for example, the above-described bar display VB for volume adjustment) described with reference to FIG. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 155, it can be combined with a scene of customization by the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI.

  In the description using FIGS. 117 to 161, it is an example applied to a pachinko machine (ball ball gaming machine), but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, medals and gaming machines The present invention is also applicable to a game machine (slot machine) that uses balls (pachinko balls). That is, although the pachinko machine 100 described so far is pachinko (one kind + one kind), other pachinko (eg one kind, two kinds, three kinds, one kind + two kinds etc.) may be used, a slot etc ( Parrots and balls can be used. More specifically, while inserting a medal (gaming medium) and operating the start lever to rotate the reel, internally determining the combination by internal lottery, and operating the stop button to stop the reel If a combination of symbols determined in advance is displayed on the symbol display window according to the internal determination, the combination is established, and if the combination with the payout of medals is established, the prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. The present invention may be a coin-operated game machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a benefit. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are sealed as a sealed ball, the sealed ball is fired to a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the sealed ball is won in a predetermined entry area. , And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area, and the enclosed ball game console may be used cyclically.

  As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and is also applicable to, for example, an enclosed type pachinko machine described using FIG. Z101. The present invention is also applicable to the slot machine described with reference to FIG.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Game console provided with one or two, fourth display means 208M ', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I etc.],
The display means is a means by which a first icon may be displayed;
The first icon is an icon related to symbol variation display [for example, hold icon h11 to h14, variation icon h0],
The display means is a means by which a second icon may be displayed;
The display means is a means that may display a notice icon [eg, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)],
The second icon is an icon of a type different from the notice icon [eg, an icon for mini game A shown in FIG. 118 (a), an icon for mini game B shown in FIG. 118 (c)] The icon is not an icon that represents the number of holds by the number displayed
The display means is a means by which an effect display may be displayed,
The effect display is display of an effect using any one of the displayed first icons [for example, one or more (all or a part of) icons] and the second icon. [For example, display of mini game A or B]
When the notice icon is displayed after the effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 120 (A 11), FIG. 123 (A 3-2-9), FIG. (A 3-2-8c1), Fig. (3-2-8c7), Fig. 125 (11), Fig. 127 (34), Fig. 128 (う 15-2-17), Fig. 130 (う 1-2-24), Fig. 135 (( a8) etc]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to entertain the player by making the process of presence / absence of the advance notice icon pay attention to the display of the effect display using two icons.

  The first icon may be an icon that may be displayed corresponding to the number of holds. For example, the variable icon may be displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 0, or the first hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 1, displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 2 The second second hold icon to be displayed, the third third hold icon to be displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 3, and the fourth fourth hold icon to be displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 4 It may be. The notice icon may be another type of icon than the change icon or the hold icon.

  Here, the number of pending is the number of pending start of symbol variation display, and the first icon may include a variation icon as an example in addition to the pending icon. The variation icon is an icon relating to a symbol variation display being executed, and is an icon indicating a digested hold. That is, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the suspension represented by the suspension icon representing the undivided suspension is started, the suspension icon is displayed as a variation icon corresponding to the started symbol fluctuation display.

  Note that the number of reservations may be displayed depending on the number of first icons displayed, and the number of reservations may not be displayed depending on the number of notice icons displayed.

  The effect display may be display of an effect using one of the displayed first icons and the second icon.

  When the effect display is performed, the notice icon may be displayed.

  The any one of the icons may be one first icon or may be a plurality of first icons (for example, all or part of the displayed first icons).

  The second icon may be an icon for presentation (for example, an icon of a character), may be a hold icon, or may be a change icon. More specifically, the icon for the above-mentioned effect may be an icon for giving notice of the start of the notice effect, may be an icon dedicated to the mini game, or may be an icon serving as a hold icon. And may be an icon that doubles as a fluctuation icon.

  Examples of the effect display include effects of a mini game using any of the displayed first icons and the second icon. That is, as a result of performing a mini game effect using any one of the icons and the second icon, the notice icon may be displayed.

  "The notice icon may be displayed" means that the notice icon may not be displayed. Furthermore, "the notice icon may not be displayed" may include that the notice icon may not be displayed and another display other than the notice icon may be displayed. It does not have to be included. This concept also applies in the following description.

  The notice icon may be displayed (stocked) after changing the display position after the display is started, or may be displayed continuously (stocked) without changing the display position. It may be. For example, the display means is provided with an appearance area where the display of the advance notice icon starts and a stock area where the notice icon is stocked, and the appearance area and the stock area are different areas (partially overlapping Good, but not all overlap). The stock area is a display area where the notice icon continues to be displayed. The advance notice icon moves from the appearance area to the stock area, is used in the stock area, may disappear in the stock area, or may change in the display mode. Alternatively, there may be a case where the material leaves the stock area and disappears, or the display mode may change.

  The effect display may be an effect (for example, a mini game) that simultaneously uses any one of the icons and the second icon, or any one of the any icon and the second icon. One of the icons may be used first, and the other of the one may be used later (for example, a mini game).

  Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed by the display of the effect using only one of the displayed first icons. . Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed by the display of the effect in which only the second icon is used.

Also, “a plurality of types of notice icons are prepared as the notice icons [eg, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)],
The display means is a means by which a notice display may be displayed;
A plurality of types of notice displays are prepared as the notice displays [eg, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 117 (b)],
The preview display of one type among the plurality of types of preview displays is a first preview display [e.g. Notice of "change"],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a second preview display [e.g. Notice of 17 "reach"],
Of a plurality of types of notice icons, a notice icon [e.g. (1) When the notice icon YI for the "box" is used, the first notice may be displayed [eg, Fig. 121 (A 33), Fig. 126 (I 14-4-3)]. ,
The second notice display may be displayed when the given notice icon is used [eg, FIG. 125 (15), FIG. 126 (14-2-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, which notice display is displayed until the given notice icon is used (whether the first notice display is displayed or the second notice display is displayed) May be noticed until the certain advance notice icon is used. That is, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not determined in advance in a one-to-one relationship, and the player can not recognize which notice display is displayed only by looking at the type of the notice icon. You may be interested in watching the notice icon until the display appears.

  Here, it may be unclear itself that the notice display is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed. That is, there may be a case where the notice display is displayed or a case where the notice display is not displayed, and it may be unclear in which case. The fact that the display of the advance notice is unknown is, as a result, it is also unclear which type of the advance notice is displayed among a plurality of types of advance notices.

  Also, only one type of notice icon may be prepared as the notice icon. In this case, when the notice icon is used, a notice display of a plurality of kinds of notice displays may be displayed, and the notice display is displayed until the notice display is displayed. The thing itself may be unknown.

  The display means may be means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon used when the notice icon is used. That is, at the time when the notice icon is displayed, it may be possible to know which notice display among the plurality of kinds of notice displays is the notice display displayed after the notice icon is used. In short, the relationship between the advance notice icon and the advance notice display may be determined in one-to-one correspondence in advance.

  Also, "when a certain notice icon is used" means, for example, when the certain notice icon is used in the effect, and more specifically, the display mode of the certain notice icon is It may be the case where it has changed, or the case where the certain advance notice icon disappears (when it is hidden) (the same applies to the following).

  In addition, after the start of display, the notice display may be displayed (stocked) by changing the display position, or may be continuously displayed (stocked) without changing the display position. May be

  In addition, when a certain notice icon of a plurality of kinds of notice icons is used, one kind of notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “some notice display”) of a plurality of kinds of notice displays is displayed. In some cases, it may be unclear which type of notice display among the plurality of kinds of notice displays is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed.

  In addition, there may be a case where it is not notified that the first notice display is displayed only by the display of the given notice icon, and that the second notice display is displayed. There may be cases where no notice is given. Or, conversely, there may be a case where it is notified that the first notice display is displayed only by the display of the certain notice icon, and the second notice display is displayed. There may be cases where it is foreseen.

Also, when the first preliminary display is displayed, the display mode of any of the displayed first icons may change [for example, in the case of FIG. 121 (A 36) ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the first preliminary display may be a display for changing the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons. For example, the display mode of any one of the first icons changes to the display mode of the notice. In this case, the first notice display functions as a notice of the notice by the first icon.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to cause the first icon to be focused even after the effect display is finished.

  Here, "any of the displayed first icons" may be the first icon used for the effect display, or may be used for the effect display. It may be the first icon that is not displayed. Further, any one of the icons may be a plurality of icons or one icon (for example, all or part of the first icons displayed).

  Further, the first icon used for the effect display may be a display mode as it is when the effect display is performed, or may be a display mode which is changed from the display mode where the effect display is performed. . For example, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is different between the display mode before being used for the effect display and the display mode for which the effect display is performed, the effect display is performed. May be returned to the previous display mode, or may be the display mode as it is without returning to the previous display mode, or from the display mode in which the effect display is performed. It may change to the display mode of. Further, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is the same as the display mode before being used for the effect display and the display mode in which the effect display is performed, the effect display is performed. Later, the display mode may change, or may remain the same without changing. In any of the cases described above, when the first preliminary display is displayed, the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display may change.

  In addition, when the first advance notice display is displayed, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may be changed, or the displayed first notice may be displayed. The display mode of any one of the icons may not change. Further, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons is more effective when the first notice display is displayed than when the first notice display is not displayed. It may be variable.

  Further, the effect display includes a plurality of types of effect display, and any one of the first icons displayed is any of the first type of icon than the effect display of changing the display mode of the icon. In the case of the effect display of the type which does not change either, the application frequency may be higher or lower, or the appearance frequency of both may be the same. Furthermore, one type of effect display among a plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display, and the first effect display is displayed rather than the case where the first effect display is not displayed. The display mode of one of the displayed first icons may change more easily.

In addition, “the second advance notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, a notice that the reach will be performed] regarding the symbol change display on which the second notice display is displayed,
The big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the second preview display is displayed, than the second preview display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, even if the second preliminary display is displayed, the big hit symbol form is not necessarily finalized in the final display, and even the symbol variation display in which the second preliminary display is displayed is final There may be a case where the symbol form of the loss is displayed in a definite manner. Or, conversely, if the second advance notice (for example, premier notice etc.) is displayed, the symbol variation display in which the second notice is displayed, the symbol mode of the big hit is finally definitely displayed May be

  Note that the display means is a means that may display a third notice, and the third notice is a display for giving a preliminary notice (for example, a chance to look ahead). In the case where the third advance notice is displayed, the big hit symbol form may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the third advance notice is not displayed. That is, even if the third advance notice display is displayed, the big hit symbol aspect is not necessarily finally displayed in the final display, and even if the third notice display is displayed, it is final There may be a case where the symbol form of the loss is displayed in a definite manner. Or, conversely, if the third advance notice display is displayed, finally the symbol pattern of the big hit may be definitely displayed in the symbol change display in which the third advance notice display is displayed.

In addition, “the first icon has a plurality of types of display modes [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 1 to No. Icon in any one of 19 display modes], and
The display mode of one of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode [eg, "display mode of" default "],
The display mode of one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode of "villagers" (Janken), a display mode of Yoshimune (bows),
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first display mode may be a default display mode. The second display mode may be a display mode used for the effect display. For example, a display mode that may be used for the effect display may be used, or a dedicated display mode used for the effect display may be used.

In addition, the effect display may be a display icon of the first icon of the second display mode being displayed [for example, a display icon of a display mode of a "village" (Janken) or a variation icon, a display mode of Display of effects using the hold icon or the change icon] and the second icon [for example, the panda's opponent icon TI, the icon AI for mini game A] [for example, starting from FIG. 125 (A 8-1) It is a display of acquisition of Yoshimune treasure shown in Figure 126-Figure 127, which is a rock-paper-scissors match animation being done.
The effect display is a display of an effect in which the first icon of the first display mode is not used.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, it is notified that the effect display is displayed by displaying the first icon of the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, justifying that the effect display is displayed does not mean that the notification icon is displayed during and / or after the end of the effect display. That is, just displaying the first icon of the second display mode does not mean that the notice icon is displayed during and / or after the effect display is displayed.

  Also, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display is displayed, and when the first icon is displayed in the first display mode, the effect display is displayed Alternatively, the notification icon may not be displayed based on only the display of the first icon in the first display mode.

  Here, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display may be always displayed, or conversely, the effect display may not be displayed.

  Only after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, it may be unclear whether the notice icon is displayed thereafter.

  The second icon may also be displayed only when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

  Here, the first icon and the second icon displayed in the second display mode may be simultaneously started to be displayed, or the first icon displayed in the second display mode The display of the second icon may be started earlier, or the display of the second icon may be started earlier.

  In addition, even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may be displayed. In addition, if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may not be displayed. Alternatively, the second icon may be displayed even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed.

  The second icon may also be displayed only when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed. Furthermore, when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed, the second icon may also be displayed.

  Furthermore, the second icon may not be displayed when the first icon is not displayed, or may be displayed in the opposite manner. That is, the second icon may not appear alone, or may appear alone.

Also, the display of the second icon may be started after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode [e.g., the opponent started from FIG. 120 (A5) Animation of appearance of icon, animation of appearance of icon for mini game A being started from FIG. 126 (126 5)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The “second icon” referred to here is neither the hold icon nor an icon serving as the hold icon, nor is the change icon nor an icon serving as the change icon. That is, the “second icon” may be a display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “display mode for effect display”) used for the effect display.

  After the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the second icon may not be started. Even when the display of the second icon is not started here, the display of the second icon is started before the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Or when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

  When the display mode of the first icon changes (for example, when the display mode changes to the second display mode), the second icon may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, after the second icon is displayed, the first icon of the second display mode may be displayed.

  When the second icon is the change icon or the hold icon (including the change icon or the hold icon), the second icon may be displayed after the first icon of the second display mode is displayed. The second icon may change from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, the display mode for effect display), or even if it is always changed Good. In addition, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is displayed from a third display mode (e.g., a default display mode) to a fourth display mode (e.g., effect display) May change, or may change. Alternatively, when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is displayed from the third display mode (for example, default display mode) to the fourth display mode (eg, effect display) May change, or may change.

  When the second icon is displayed, one pattern (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed only after the first icon of the second display mode is displayed) There may be only one before or only when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, or a plurality of patterns (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed) After that, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, and when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, a certain combination of 2 or 3 at the same time) It may be.

  Here, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon may be displayed, or the first icon of the second display mode is displayed. After that, the second icon may be displayed, and the second icon may also be displayed at the same time as the first icon of the second display mode is displayed.

“A plurality of the first icons of the second display mode may be displayed [eg, FIG. 120 (3-1), FIG. 126 (iii)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, only one said 1st icon of a said 2nd display mode may be displayed. In addition, there may be a case where a plurality of the first icons of the first display mode may be displayed, or only one may be displayed. Furthermore, only one second icon may be displayed, or a plurality of second icons may be displayed.

Also, a first effect display may be displayed as the effect display.
A second effect display may be displayed as the effect display,
After the first effect display is displayed, the notice icon is displayed [eg, FIG. 120 (A11)],
After the second effect display is displayed, the notice icon is not displayed [eg, FIG. 121 (A 8-2-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the second effect display is a so-called false effect display.

Also, “a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [eg, FIG. 125 (11), FIG. 128 (15-2 17)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, after the effect display is displayed one or more times, a plurality of advance notice icons may be displayed. That is, a plurality of notice icons may be stocked. For example, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed only once the effect display is performed, or 0 or one notice icon is displayed each time the effect display is performed once. A plurality of notice icons may be displayed by performing the effect display a plurality of times. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed (stocked) by other effects other than the effect display.

In addition, it may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form when the second number of notice icons are displayed than when the first number of notice icons are displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Even when the second number of advance notice icons are displayed, there may be a case where the lost symbol pattern is finally displayed. Alternatively, when the second number of notice icons are displayed, finally the jackpot symbol aspect may be definitely displayed.

  Even if the preview icon is displayed in the second preview mode, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol mode than the display of the preview icon in the first preview mode. Good.

In addition, “operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.] are provided,
If the operation means is operated while the effect display is displayed, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow from FIG. 120 (A 9-1) onward from FIG. 134 (c 7)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Even if the operation means is not operated, a notice icon may be displayed, and conversely, the notice icon may be displayed only when the operation means is operated.

  While the effect display may be displayed, the operation icon may or may not be operated, and the notification icon may be more easily displayed if the operation can not be operated, or vice versa , It may be difficult to display the notice icon. Further, the probability that the advance notice icon is displayed may be the same as in the case where it can be done or not.

  During the display of the effect display, a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) may or may not be displayed. The operation display referred to here may be a display including an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display of only the image, or a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display) The display may include only the operation prompting display, or the display including the display (operation valid period display) representing the operation valid period of the operation means, or the operation Only the term of validity may be displayed. Furthermore, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the mode change of the operation means itself (for example, change of color, change of projection amount, , Display shape corresponding to change of shape, change of position, change of posture, etc. may be included.

In addition, “effect movable means [for example, FIG. 146 (ca c1)]” is provided,
There is a configuration in which the effect movable means may perform the effect operation after the display of the effect display is started [for example, the mini game special feature 225 shown in FIG. 146 (ca c2)].
When the rendering operation is performed, a notice icon may be displayed [eg, FIG. 146 (f2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The effect movable means may be configured to perform the effect operation after the effect display is displayed. That is, after the display of the effect display is completed, the effect movable means may be configured to perform the effect operation. Alternatively, the effect movable means may be configured to perform the effect operation while the effect display is displayed.

  When the rendering operation is performed, the preview icon may be more easily displayed than when the rendering operation is not performed, but the preview icon may not be displayed even if the rendering operation is performed. It is also good. Alternatively, the notice icon may be displayed whenever the rendering operation is performed.

  When the rendering operation is performed, there may be a case where a pre-reading advance notice may be started, or a normal advance notice (a notice on a symbol variation display being performed when the production operation is performed) may be started. It may be. Moreover, when the rendering operation is performed, there may be a case where the advance notice is more likely to be started than when the effect operation is not performed, but the advance reading is not started even if the effect operation is performed. There may be. Alternatively, when the rendering operation is performed, the prefetch notice may be displayed. Furthermore, when the rendering operation is performed, the normal advance notice may be more likely to be started than when the effect operation is not performed, but the normal advance notice is not started even if the effect operation is performed. There may be. Alternatively, when the rendering operation is performed, the normal advance notice may be displayed without fail.

  However, during the display of the effect display, the effect movable means may be configured not to perform the effect operation absolutely, or the effect movable means does not perform the effect operation regardless of the display of the effect display. It may be done.

In addition, the above-mentioned notice icon is a notice mode of one type among a plurality of notice modes [for example, “box”, “red box”, “gold box”, “rainbow box” shown in FIG. 117 (a)] It is an icon that starts being displayed with
If the notice icon is displayed in a second notice mode [for example, "red box"] rather than the notice icon is displayed in a first notice mode [for example, "box"] In the symbol variation display being executed when the advance notice icon is used, the big hit symbol form may be likely to be finally displayed in a final manner [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 117 (a)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  When the notice icon is used before the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the notice change") to be subject to notice by the notice icon is started, the notice by the notice icon is a prefetch notice. There are cases, and there are cases where it is a normal notice, but it may be unclear whether the notice was a pre-reading notice or a normal notice only by seeing the notice by the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be used in an effect before the change of the notice object ends. Also in this case, the notice by the notice icon may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a normal notice.

  When the notice icon is displayed in the first notice mode, the notice display may be more easily displayed than when the notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode. There may be a case where a certain display (a display different from the advance notice display) may be easily displayed.

"The display means may be a means for displaying a change icon [eg, change icon h0]
The variation icon is an icon related to symbol variation display being executed,
The second icon is an icon different from the fluctuation icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The first icon is the fluctuation icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first icon may be an icon dedicated to the variation icon, or may be an icon also serving as the variation icon.

"The display means may be a means for displaying a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 of the special view 1].
The hold icon is an icon representing the hold number according to the number displayed.
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The first icon is the hold icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Game console provided with one or two, fourth display means 208M ', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I etc.],
The display means is a means by which a hold icon may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of hold [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 of the special view 1],
The display means is a means by which a notice icon may be displayed;
The notice icon is an icon of a type different from the hold icon [eg, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)], and the display means is , A notice display [eg, notice display YH] may be displayed,
A plurality of types of notice displays are prepared as the notice displays [eg, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 117 (b)],
When the notice icon is used, a notice display of one of the plurality of notice displays may be displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A 32), FIG. 130 (F 13), FIG. 131 (e 1-2-18), FIG. 136 (a 8-1), FIG. 136 (a 8-2-1), FIG. 138 (a 1-3-3), FIG. 139 (a 15), the same figure (A 28), etc.],
When the notice icon is used, the notice icon may be hidden [eg, FIG. 121 (35), FIG. 131 (15), FIG. 131 (eg 1-2-20, etc.],
Even if the notice icon is used, the notice icon may not be displayed but the notice icon may be used again as an effect, and a notice of a plurality of kinds of notices may be displayed [eg, for example, Figure 136 (A11), Figure (A16), Figure 136 (A8-2-4), Figure (A8-2-6), Figure 138 (A1-3-9), Figure 139 (A 28), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, even after the notice icon is used, the display condition of the notice icon can be noticed and the player may be entertained in some cases.

  "When a notice icon is used" means, for example, the case where the notice icon is used in the effect, more specifically, when the display mode of the notice icon changes The warning icon may disappear (when it is hidden) (the same applies to the following).

  When the notice icon is used once, the notice icon may be hidden, and even if the notice icon is used once, the notice icon is not hidden but the notice icon is displayed again. It may be used and some advance notice may be displayed.

Also, “a plurality of types of notice icons are prepared as the notice icons [eg, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)],
The preview display of one type among the plurality of types of preview displays is a first preview display [e.g. Notice of "change"],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a second preview display [e.g. Notice of 17 "reach"],
Of a plurality of types of notice icons, a notice icon [e.g. When the notice icon YI of 1 “box” is used, the first notice display may be displayed [eg, FIG. 136 (A 8-1), FIG. 138 (A 1-3-3) Fig. 139 (Ia 15), Fig. 139 (I a 28), etc.],
When the given notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [eg, FIG. 136 (a 11), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, it may not be notified that the notice display is displayed before the notice icon is used.

  In addition, before the notice icon is used, it may be configured not to give notice of which kind of notice display among the plurality of kinds of notice displays is displayed.

  In addition, there may be a case where it is not notified that the first notice display is displayed only by the display of the given notice icon, and that the second notice display is displayed. There may be cases where no notice is given. Or, conversely, there may be a case where it is notified that the first notice display is displayed only by the display of the certain notice icon, and the second notice display is displayed. There may be cases where it is foreseen.

Also, when a certain type of notice icon among the plurality of kinds of notice icons is used, a notice display of a type corresponding to the certain type of notice icon is displayed [ For example, the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b) are associated with the various notice displays shown in FIG. 117 (b) in a one-to-one relationship],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The plurality of types of preview displays and the plurality of types of preview icons may be associated with each other for each type.

  The plurality of types of preview displays and the plurality of types of preview icons may be associated with each other in one-to-one correspondence, in many-to-one correspondence, or in one-to-many correspondence. It may be associated with many to many.

Also, “the notice icon of a certain type is not hidden even if it is used once, and the notice icon of a certain kind is used more than once until the notice icon of a certain kind is hidden. Of the type corresponding to the type of notice icon are displayed a plurality of times [eg, FIG. 139 (a 15), (a 28), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the second advance notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, a notice that the reach will be performed] regarding the symbol change display on which the second notice display is displayed,
The big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the second preview display is displayed, than the second preview display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “type of notice display displayed when the notice icon is first used” [eg, No. 7 shown in FIG. The type of notice display that is displayed when the notice icon is used for the Nth (N is a natural number of 2 or more) [for example, the third time] may be the same [Eg, FIG. 136 (A. 8-2-2) and FIG. 136 (A. 8-2-6)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  However, they may be different, and different types of notices may be displayed. Or conversely, it may be always the same.

In addition, “operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.) are provided,
The display means is a means by which an operation display may be displayed;
The operation display is a display including at least an image simulating the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image configured by the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT],
If the notice icon is used [for example, FIG. 140 (b4)], the operation display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 140 (b5)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.) are provided,
The display means is a means by which an operation display may be displayed;
The operation display is a display [for example, display of an operation promotion notification image] including at least an image [for example, a button image 136a] imitating the operation means,
After the operation display is displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A 31-2-2), FIG. 143 (A2)], the notice icon may be used [for example, FIG. -6), Fig. 143 (a7)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The operation display may be a display of only an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "operation prompting display"). The display may also include a display representing the operation effective period of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation effective period display”), or the image and the operation promotion display may be only, or the image And the operation effective period may be displayed only. Furthermore, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the mode change of the operation means itself (for example, change of color, change of projection amount, , Display shape corresponding to change of shape, change of position, change of posture, etc. may be included.

In addition, “operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.) are provided,
When the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 121 (A 31-2-5), FIG. 143 (Aa 5)], the notice icon may be used [for example, FIG. Figure 143 (d) (a7)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.) are provided,
When the operation means is operated, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow from FIG. 120 (A 9-1) onward from FIG. 134 (c 7)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, it is equipped with “production movable means [for example, a family crest 224E, a one-and-two-box character 224H shown in FIG.
When the advance notice icon is used, a display for giving an advance notice that the effect movable means performs an effect operation as the advance notice display [for example, No. 7 shown in FIG. No. 24 "Senryo Box Character Works", no. There are cases where 25 “Crest Movements” are displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display for giving notice that the effect moving means performs the effect operation is referred to as an effect operation notification display.

Also, “a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [eg, FIG. 125 (11), FIG. 128 (15-2 17)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, it may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form when the second number of notice icons are displayed than when the first number of notice icons are displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the above-mentioned notice icon is a notice mode of one type among a plurality of notice modes [for example, “box”, “red box”, “gold box”, “rainbow box” shown in FIG. 117 (a)] It is an icon that starts being displayed with
If the notice icon is displayed in a second notice mode [for example, "red box"] rather than the notice icon is displayed in a first notice mode [for example, "box"] In the symbol variation display being executed when the advance notice icon is used, the big hit symbol form may be likely to be finally displayed in a final manner [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 117 (a)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Game console provided with one or two, fourth display means 208M ', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I etc.],
The display means is a means by which a hold icon may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of hold [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 of the special view 1],
The hold icon has a first icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. Display mode of icon of “default” of 1, or No. The display mode of the icon of “flashing white” of 2 or the display mode of “roulette” shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-3) or the like, or No. 1 shown in FIG. This is an icon that may be displayed in the 10 "Timer" display modes,
The hold icon has a second icon display mode [e.g. This is an icon that may be displayed in the 5 "Red" icon display mode,
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode Big hit symbol form is easy to be displayed clearly [for example, reliability shown in Figure 119 (a)],
The display means is a means that may display a change notice display [eg, display of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 119 (b)],
In some cases, a first change animation using the change advance display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation [eg, an icon change animation] that changes the aspect of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons,
The change advance notice display is a first change notice mode [e.g. This is a display that may be displayed in the form of the icon of "bomber" in 4,
The change advance notice display is a second change notice mode [e.g. This is a display that may be displayed in the form of the "red bomber" icon icon of 5,
The change preview display of the first change preview mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first change preview display”) [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. The first change animation may be performed after the "bomber" icon IHI] of 4 is displayed,
When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode In some cases, for example, the first display icon h11 shown in FIG. 149 (A3′-2-4) may be changed to a blue display mode other than the red display mode. It may be changed to the red display mode as shown in)],
The change preview display of the second change preview mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second change preview display”) [e.g. The first change animation may be performed after the “I Bomber” icon IHI] of 5 is displayed.
When the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of the hold icon of any one of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode [For example, FIG. 148 (A6), FIG. 148 (A4-2-3), FIG. 148 (A2-2-4), FIG. 149 (A3-5-4), FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), FIG. (A3-2-4), FIG. 152 (B8), FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 158 (Fd6), FIG. 159 (Fe6), and FIG. 160 (Ff11). Always changed],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  A fourth change animation may be performed in which the change preview display is used, and the fourth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and / or the mode of the notice icon. In addition, a fifth change animation may be performed using the change notice display, and the fifth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and / or the mode of the notice display.

  When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons is an icon other than the second icon display mode It may be changed to a display mode (for example, an icon display mode of one of third to fifth icon display modes described later, or a sixth icon display mode).

  The m-th change animation using the n-th change notice display means the m-th change animation by the n-th change notice display, and the n-th change notice display appears The change animation of m (n and m are both natural numbers of 1 or more, and the same applies to the following).

  A plurality of types of change notice displays are prepared as the change notice displays, and one of the plurality of types of change notice displays is a first change notice, and the plurality of types of change notices are displayed. One type of the change notice of the change notice is the second change notice. The first change notification display may be displayed in the first change notification mode, or may be displayed in the second change notification mode. Alternatively, the second change notification display may be displayed in the first change notification mode, or may be displayed in the second change notification mode. Furthermore, the first change animation may be more easily performed when the first change notification display is displayed than when the second change notification display is displayed.

  Here, although the first change animation changes the mode of the hold icon of any one of the displayed hold icons, the change notice display is the mode of any one of the hold icons. It can sometimes be interpreted as changing.

  The hold icon of any one of the hold icons may be a plurality of hold icons or one hold icon, for example, all or part of the displayed hold icons. Also good (the same applies below).

  The mode before the change of any one of the hold icons may be the first icon display mode, the third icon display mode, or the like. That is, the mode when the display of the change notice is started in any one of the pending icons is not limited to the default mode.

Also,
"A game console equipped with display means,
The display means is a means by which a hold icon may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds.
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first icon display mode,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second icon display mode,
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode Big hit symbol form is easy to be displayed,
The display means is a means by which a change notice may be displayed;
In some cases, a first change animation using the change advance display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation that changes the aspect of the hold icon of any one of the displayed hold icons,
The said change notice display is a display which may be displayed in the first change notice mode,
The said change notice display is a display which may be displayed in the second change notice mode,
The change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used rather than the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode. It is easier for the first change animation to change the mode of any one of the displayed pending icons to the second icon display mode,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  According to this game console, it is possible to infer what mode (here, the second icon display mode) there is a possibility of changing the mode of the hold icon according to the mode of the change notice display. It may be possible to entertain the player. For example, the aspect of the change advance indication is related to the aspect after the change of the hold icon, and if the aspect of the change advance indication is a red aspect (here, the second change advance aspect), the hold It can be inferred that the aspect after the change of the icon is also the red aspect (here, the second icon display aspect).

  In the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode, the state of any one of the hold icons among the displayed hold icons is There may be cases where it is changed to a mode other than the first icon display mode and the second icon display mode (for example, the sixth icon display mode etc.), or from the case where it is changed to the sixth icon display mode Also, the second icon display mode may be easily changed.

  In the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used, the state of any one of the hold icons among the displayed hold icons is the first change animation It may be changed to modes (for example, the seventh icon display mode etc.) other than the icon display mode and the second icon display mode. The seventh icon display mode may be a jackpot determination mode (premium mode). That is, in the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode is used, the mode of any one of the hold icons is a pre-reading notice mode, but a big hit confirmation In the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used, although it is easy to change to a mode (for example, the second icon display mode) which does not go up to May be changed to the aspect of (premium aspect). In addition, you may make it change into the aspect (premium aspect) of big hit decision. Also, although the seventh icon display mode is not originally a jackpot determination mode, it may be treated as a jackpot determination mode. In this case, the pre-reading notice contradicts the usual time, and this contradiction becomes a premier and will be a big hit.

  The second icon display mode may be different from the first icon display mode. The first icon display mode may be a default mode. The default mode is the mode that is displayed most frequently. The second icon display mode may be a preview advance notice mode. In addition, the first change animation is more easily performed when the second change notification mode is displayed in the second change notification mode than when the first change notification mode is displayed. It is also good.

“The hold icon has a third icon display mode [for example, No. 4 shown in FIG. This is an icon that may be displayed in 3 “Display modes of the“ blue ”icon”,
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode Big hit symbol form is easy to be displayed clearly [for example, reliability shown in Figure 119 (a)],
If the first change animation using the first change notice is performed by displaying the first change notice, the mode of any one of the hold icons among the hold icons is displayed. It may be changed to the third icon display mode [for example, it is changed to a blue display mode (third display mode) like the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149 (A3'-2-4). May)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The third icon display mode may also be a preview advance notice mode.

  The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode The jackpot symbol form may be easily determined and displayed.

  The first change animation in which the first change notice display is used is the third icon of any one of the displayed hold icons, rather than the second icon display mode. It may be easy to change to the display mode. The probability of changing to the second icon display mode may be 0%.

Also, even if the first change animation using the second change notification display is performed, the modes of all the displayed pending icons are not changed to the third icon display mode [for example, FIG. 148 (A6), FIG. 148 (A4-2-3), FIG. 148 (A2-2-4), FIG. 149 (A3-5-4), FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), FIG. 150 (A3-2) −4), FIG. 152 (B8), FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 156 (Eb8), FIG. 158 (Fd6), FIG. 159 (Fe6), and FIG. 160 (Ff11) as shown in green. There are no pending icons changed to the form],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in some cases, a first non-change animation [for example, an icon non-change animation] using the change preview display may be performed,
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, the modes of all the displayed pending icons do not change if the first unchanged animation using the first change notice display is performed. [Eg,],
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, the modes of all the displayed pending icons do not change if the first invariable animation using the second change notice display is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 149 (A3-3-3) and FIG. 149 (A3-4-4), the display mode of all the hold icons does not change],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the first non-change animation is a scene in which the state of any one of the displayed pending icons has failed to be changed by the second change notification display [eg, FIG. An animation including the scene from A3-3-2) to the figure (A3-3-3) and the scene from FIG. 149 (A3-4-2) to the figure (A3-4-4),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, there may be a case in which a third change animation using the change advance display is performed,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation [eg, FIG. 149 (A3-4-1) to FIG. (A3-4-2)] until halfway [eg, FIG. 149 (A3-5-1) to the same figure (A3-5-2)],
The third change animation is a scene that finally succeeded in changing the aspect of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons according to the second change notice display [eg, FIG. The scene from (A3-5-3) to the same figure (A3-5-4)] is included,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The first change animation is a scene in which the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed by the second change notice display [eg, FIG. 148 (A4 -1) to an animation including the scene of FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

here,
"The first non-change animation where the said change advance notice display was used may be performed.
The change notice display is a display composed of a plurality of change notice icons,
One of the plurality of change notice icons is a first change notice icon,
One of the plurality of change notice icons is a second change notice icon,
The first unchanging animation includes a scene (hereinafter referred to as a "first scene") in which it has failed to change the aspect of any one of the displayed pending icons. Is an animation that
The first scene is a scene that fails using the second change notice icon,
The first change animation includes a scene (hereinafter referred to as a “second scene”) that succeeded in changing the aspect of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons. It is animation,
The second scene is a successful scene using the second change notice icon.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  The first change animation is one of a first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used. The animation that may be displayed, and the first unaltered animation may also be an animation in which one of the first scene and the second scene may be displayed, The successful scene may be more easily displayed when the second scene is displayed than when the first scene is displayed. Alternatively, there may be no difference in the displayability of the successful scene between the two cases.

  The first change animation is an animation in which a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used may be displayed, and the first change animation is the first change notice The first scene in which the icon is used is an animation that is not displayed, and the first unchanged animation is an animation in which the first scene may be displayed; The change animation is an animation in which the second scene is not displayed, and when the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed and the first scene is displayed. The failed scene may always be displayed.

  Furthermore, the first change animation is either one of a first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used. The first unchanged animation is an animation that the first scene may be displayed, and the first unchanged animation is the second animation. If the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and even if the first scene is displayed, the failed scene is always displayed. It may be an aspect that is not limited to being displayed.

  There may be only one scene using the first change notification icon for the hold icon displayed at a certain position.

Also,
"A third change animation may be performed in which the above change announcement is used.
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation halfway through,
The third change animation is a scene (hereinafter, referred to as a “third scene”) that finally succeeded in changing the aspect of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons. The included animation,
The third scene is a scene that is ultimately successful using the second change notice icon.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  The third change animation is an animation that succeeds by making the form change of the hold icon fail. The third change animation appears less frequently than the first change animation. However, it may be higher or the same.

  The symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the third change animation corresponds to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the first change animation In the case of the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol form may be finally determined and displayed in the end (the big hit reliability (expected degree) is high), or conversely, the big hit symbol form is finally determined There may be a case where it is difficult to be displayed (the big hit reliability (expected degree) is low), or the big hit reliability (expected degree) may be the same in both cases.

[The first change preview display is used rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has been changed by the first change animation using the first change preview display. In the case of the symbol variation display corresponding to the suspension icon whose mode has been changed by the variation animation, the big hit symbol mode may be more likely to be finally displayed finally [For example, if the suspension icon is the same as the default display mode before the change] In the first change animation in which the first change notice display is used, the display mode is changed to the third display mode (the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 149 (A3'2-4)), but the second change notice display As shown in FIG. 119 (a), the display mode is changed to the fifth display mode in the first change animation in which the second change animation is used (the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149 (A7)). Confidence,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The first change notice may change to the second change notice [for example, FIG. 152 (B4) to FIG. (B5), FIG. 152 (B3-2-1) to FIG. FIG. (B3-2-5), FIG. 152 (B3-3-3) to FIG. (B3-3-5), FIG. 153 (B1-2-5) to FIG. (B1-2-9), FIG. 153 (B1-3-6) to FIG. 154 (B1-3-9)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The aspect of the change notice display started to be displayed in the first change notice mode may be changed to the second change notice mode, or the change changed to the first change notice mode The mode of the advance notice may be further changed to the second change notice mode. Further, in the first change animation, the second change notice mode may be changed, or the second change notice mode is started before the first change animation is started. It may change to the second change notification mode after the first change animation ends.

  Note that the mode of the change preview display displayed in the first change preview mode does not change as it is displayed in the first change preview mode than the frequency when the second change preview mode changes to the second change preview mode. The frequency of cases may be configured to be higher, but the relationship of the frequency may be reversed, or the frequency of both may be the same.

  The aspect of the change annunciation display displayed in the first change annunciation aspect may be configured not to change to another aspect.

  The aspect of the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode may be configured not to change to the first change notice mode, or may even change in the opposite case. Good.

  Even if the aspect of the change annunciation display displayed in the second change annunciation aspect (for example, the red aspect) may change to a third change annunciation aspect (for example, the golden aspect or the rainbow aspect) Good. In addition, the mode of the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode does not change as it is displayed in the second change notice mode than the frequency when changing to the third change notice mode. The frequency of cases may be configured to be higher, but the relationship of the frequency may be reversed, or the frequency of both may be the same.

  When the change notice is changed from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode than when the change notice is displayed from the beginning in the second change notice mode The first change animation may be easily performed to change any one of the displayed pending icons to the second icon display mode. Alternatively, conversely, the change notice is displayed from the beginning in the second change notice mode than when the change notice is changed from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode. The first change animation in which one of the displayed pending icons is changed to the second icon display mode may be easier to be executed if the second change icon is displayed. Furthermore, in both cases, there is no difference in the execution probability of the first change animation for changing any one of the hold icons to the second icon display mode, and the execution probability may be the same.

  The first change notice rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has been changed by the first change animation using the change notice display displayed from the beginning in the second change notice mode The symbol variation display corresponding to the pending icon whose aspect has been changed by the first change animation using the change annunciation display changed from the aspect to the second change annunciation aspect is finally the jackpot symbol aspect There may be a case where it is easy to be displayed definite (reliability (expected degree of big hit) is high) or conversely, the big hit design pattern is hard to be displayed finally finally (reliability (expected degree of big hit is low) There may be cases, and the two may have the same jackpot reliability (expected degree).

"The display means is a means by which a change icon may be displayed,
The variation icon is an icon [for example, variation icon h0] related to symbol variation display being executed,
There may be a case where a second change animation using the change preview display is performed,
The second change animation is an animation that changes the aspect of the change icon [eg, an icon change animation],
If the second change animation using the first change notice display is performed by the first change notice display being displayed, the mode of the displayed change icon is the second icon It may be changed to the display mode,
If the second change animation using the second change notice is performed by the second change notice being displayed, the mode of the displayed change icon is the second icon The display mode is changed [eg, FIG. 148 (A3-2-4)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the variation icon may be an icon representing a digested hold.

  The change icon can also be viewed as an icon displayed corresponding to the number of reservations of 0, and in a broad sense it can be said that it is a kind of reservation icon, but here, it is distinguished from the reservation icon and limited. However, the aspect of the variation icon is common to the aspect of the hold icon and is referred to as the n-th icon display aspect.

  Also, the "pending icon" described so far can be replaced with the "variation icon", and the "first change animation" can be replaced with the "second change animation", and the "pending" will be described later. The icon "can also be replaced by the" variation icon ", and the" first change animation "can also be replaced by the" second change animation ". These are the same in the following.

  In addition, the configuration in which the second change animation is more easily performed when the change notification display is displayed in the second change notification mode than when the change notification display is displayed in the first change notification mode. It may be According to this configuration, if the second change animation is executed, it is possible to have a jackpot expectation in the symbol change display currently being performed, and if the first change animation is executed, it will be performed later. A big hit can be expected in the symbol variation display to be started, and the player is interested in which one of the first change animation and the second change animation is to be executed, The interest of gaming may improve.

Also, there may be a case where a second non-changing animation [for example, an icon non-changing animation] in which the change preview display is used is performed,
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the second unchanging animation using the first change notice display is performed, the form of the displayed change icon does not change.
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, the mode of the displayed change icon does not change if the second unchanging animation using the second change notice display is performed [e.g. Figure 149 (A3-3-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The second non-change animation referred to here is an animation in which the aspect of the change icon does not change, and if the change of the aspect of the change icon is regarded as a success, the second change animation is displayed It corresponds to success and corresponds to failure when the second unchanging animation is displayed.

In addition, “operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.) are provided,
The first change notification mode is an embodiment including the display related to the operation means [for example, the display of the button image 136a] [for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 152 (B3-2-2),
When the mode of the change notice is changed from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode when the operation means is operated while the first change notice display is displayed. For example, FIG. 152 (B3-2-5)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Either of the hold icons may or may not change to the eighth icon display mode according to the first change animation. In addition, the change icon may or may not change to the eighth icon display mode by the second change animation. The eighth icon display mode referred to here is an aspect including a display related to the operation means.

  The operation means is a means for setting an operation valid period, and a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) is displayed at least during the operation valid period, and within the operation valid period. When the operation means is operated, the mode of the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode according to the operation, and within the operation effective period. If the operation has not been performed, the first change notification mode may be changed to the second change notification mode after the operation effective period has elapsed. In addition, when the mode of the reserved icon or the variation icon changes from the eighth icon display mode to the second icon display mode in response to the operation, the operation is not performed within the operation valid period. Alternatively, the eighth icon display mode may be changed to the second icon display mode after the operation effective period has elapsed.

  However, when the operation is not performed within the operation effective period, the mode of the change notice, the hold icon, or the change icon changes to the second change notice mode or the second icon display mode. You do not have to. Alternatively, the second change notification mode or the second icon display mode may be changed at a timing different from the timing when the operation effective period has elapsed, and the first change notification display is the first change notification display mode. The display may be started again in the change notification mode, or the display of the hold icon or the change icon may be started again in the eighth icon display mode. Further, the change notice display may continue to be displayed in the first change notice mode until the operation is performed, or the hold icon or the change icon may be displayed as the eighth icon until the operation is performed. It may continue to be displayed in the display mode.

  The operation display may be a display including an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display of only the image, or a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). It may be a display including, or may be only the operation promotion display, or may be a display including a display (operation effective period display) representing the operation effective period of the operation means, or the operation effective The period display may be only. Furthermore, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the mode change of the operation means itself (for example, change of color, change of projection amount, , Display shape corresponding to change of shape, change of position, change of posture, etc. may be included.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated during the display of the change preview display displayed in the first change preview mode, the mode of the change preview display is from the first change preview mode. It may be changed to the second change notice mode. Alternatively, the first change notification mode may be changed or may not be changed (for example, the first change notification mode remains) from the first change notification mode.

[The above-mentioned change notice display is a display which may be displayed straddling continuous symbol fluctuation display [for example, FIG. 150 (A3-8-1) to FIG. (A3-8-3), FIG. 150 (A3-9-1) to FIG. (A3-9-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "to straddle" is to put a period of stop display of symbols (a change stop period) in between. Further, the change advance notice may be a display which is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be a display which disappears in the middle. In addition, while the stop display of the symbol is being displayed, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears once in the middle, or a display that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display. It may be

  "Displays that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays" means "displays that are always displayed", but also "displays that may be erased once and re-displayed" included. For example, the super reach effect may be once erased, and may be redisplayed when the super reach effect is over.

“The change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of“ red thunder cloud ”]” is a display that is displayed at least in a state where the number of reservations is 0 and the decorative symbol stopped and displayed is displayed [eg, Figure 155 (D9)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The said change advance notice display may be a display displayed only in the state where the number of reservations is 0 and the decorative symbol stopped and displayed is displayed, and it is a display displayed also in other states. May be

[The above-mentioned change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud"] is a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of times of symbol change display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The said change advance notice display may be a display which disappears (display which becomes non-display), when the symbol change display of the predetermined number of times is completed.

In addition, in the case where “the change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of“ red thunder cloud ”]” disappears temporarily even during the symbol change display of the predetermined number of times [for example, FIG. If a demonstration screen of the animation to be shown is displayed
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, the change advance notice may temporarily disappear or may disappear temporarily during a part or all of the super reach presentation.

  The change advance notice may be, for example, a display of a navigation character (a character performing an explanatory display or the like).

  Further, the change advance notice may be a display that is constantly displayed for a certain period of time. The certain period may be a period until the reserve subject to the advance notice is digested, or a time period until the symbol variation display corresponding to the reserve subject to the advance notice ends, or a prescribed number of times. The period until the end of the symbol variation display of may be the same (hereinafter the same).

  The said change advance notice display may be non-displayed while the symbol is stopped in a state where there is no hold or during a demonstration display. That is, for a certain period, a period during symbol suspension without holding or a demonstration display period is not included. However, the change notice may be displayed even while the symbol is stopped in the absence of a hold.

  The change notification display may be a display that may disappear once within a certain period.

Also, if the first change animation is not displayed even if the change preview display is displayed [eg, if the first non-change animation, the second change animation, or the second non-change animation is displayed, , If the change notice display is hidden while remaining stationary],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Even if the change preview display is displayed, the second change animation may not be displayed.

  The change preview may be displayed, and the first non-change animation may be performed, and the first non-change animation may be the same animation as the first change animation. In addition, the change preview may be displayed, and the second non-change animation may be performed, and the second non-change animation may be the same animation as the second change animation. As described above, when the first non-change animation is displayed, it corresponds to a failure, but a part of the scene (for example, at least the first part, or the first half part, or a scene whether or not the mode of the holding icon changes) The same animation, the player may first distinguish whether the display of the first change animation is started or the display of the first unchanged animation is started In some cases, the interest of the game may be improved.

  Moreover, even if the change advance notice display is displayed, there may be a case where neither the first change animation nor the first non-change animation is displayed.

Also, before the display of the first change animation is started, it may be notified that the state of any one of the displayed hold icons is in a state of being easily changed [eg, Notification by telop display trp shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The notification that the status of any one of the pending icons is in a state of change (hereinafter referred to as “change prior notification”) is displayed when the change notification display is displayed in the second change notification mode. It may be informed. For example, the second change notification mode may include a display of the change advance notification. That is, the change advance notice display may be a display also serving as the change advance notice. Alternatively, the change advance notification may be performed separately from the change advance display. The first change animation may be more easily performed when the change advance display is performed than when the change advance notification is not performed. That is, the aspect of any one of the displayed pending icons may be changed easily. Or, conversely, it may be difficult to execute, and the ease of execution may be the same.

  In addition, the change prior notification may be started or may be notified before the display of the first change animation is started after the change preview display is displayed. Alternatively, the change prior notification may be started or may be notified before the change preview display is displayed.

“The first change animation is an animation that may change the aspect of any one or more of the displayed pending icons [eg, FIG. 149 (A3′-2-1) to Figure (A3'-2-4)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first change animation is an animation including a scene that succeeded in changing the aspect of any one or more of the displayed pending icons, and the first unchanged animation The may be an animation including a scene in which it has failed to change the aspect of any one or more of the displayed pending icons.

  The first change animation and the first non-change animation may be simultaneously executed, and the aspect of any one or more of the hold icons displayed may be changed. In this case, a scene that changes the aspect of one or more suspension icons and a scene that fails to change the aspect of one or more suspension icons may be displayed.

  Further, the first change animation may be an animation that always changes the aspect of any one or more of the hold icons displayed. The first invariant animation may be an animation that does not necessarily change the aspect of any one or more of the displayed pending icons.

Also, when the second change notification display is displayed, the first change animation is always executed [For example, No. 1 with an icon change ratio of 100% shown in FIG. 8 "red flying boat"],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  There may be a case where a first non-change animation using the change preview display is performed. The first non-change animation referred to here is an animation that does not change the mode of any one of the displayed pending icons, and the change of the mode of the pending icon is regarded as a success. When the first change animation is displayed, it corresponds to success, and when the first unchanged animation is displayed, it corresponds to failure.

  In addition, the first change animation is an animation including a scene in which it is successful to change the aspect of the hold icon of any one of the displayed hold icons, and the first invariant The animation may be an animation including a scene that failed to change the aspect of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons.

“The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth icon display mode,
A mode that suggests that the fourth icon display mode may change the mode of the reserved icon of the fourth icon display mode [eg, a display mode of "bomb" shown in FIG. 156 (Eb1) or the like ],
In the case where the mode of the pending icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the second icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change preview display is used [E.g., FIG. 156 (Eb8)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth icon display mode,
The fifth icon display mode is a display mode indicating that the mode change in the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode has failed [eg, the arc of the squib shown in FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-1) is halfway] It is display mode of "bomb" which has disappeared,
In the case where the mode of the holding icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the fifth icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change preview display is used [For example, the same figure (Eb 7-2-1) continued from FIG. 156 (Eb 6)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used in the first change animation in which the state of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display view is displayed in the second change notice mode. It may be changed to the first icon display mode.

Further, the fourth icon display mode is a display showing the length of the remaining time until the mode of the reserved icon changes (for example, the shape according to the time lapse of digital clock display, analog clock display, bar display, etc. And / or a display in which the size, the length, the color, and the like change. ← Dynamite is a display in which the length of the squib changes. Furthermore, in the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode, the change preview display displayed in the second change preview mode is used. A display showing how the remaining time elapses when the first change animation is started (for example, a countdown display, a change in shape, size, length, color, etc. according to the elapsed time) Display) may be performed.

"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  It should be noted that what is described as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the above may be the variation display of the symbol (more specifically, the special figure), and the description that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is described is the symbol (more Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

  In addition, "may be" may be replaced with "always", "always be", or "always become", etc., and "○ possible" in the above is It may be replaced by "must be xxx".

  Next, an example of effects that can be applied to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above will be described.

  In the example of the effect to be described below, the display icon (for example, any one or two or all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M decorative symbol display devices) A notice display, an icon for mini game A, an icon for mini game B, a hold icon, a change icon, an icon change notice display, a chance up meter, a timer notice, etc. are displayed. First, these will be described in order.

  First, effects using various icons and displays described with reference to FIG. 162 will be described using a specific example.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a chance up meter in stages.

  In FIG. 162, the game is in the normal state (non-probable variation state and non-electric support state (non-short time state)), and this is an example of an effect in the normal state as well in the following effect examples unless otherwise stated. Also, FIG. 162 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, but this first decorative symbol display device 208L is the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It may be present (the same applies to the following figures).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A1) to FIG. 162 (A15), the chance-up meter preparation display is displayed before the chance-up meter is displayed, and the effect is to notify that the chance-up meter is displayed. It is shown that it is being done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the reserve icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1. Although the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162A1 is all white, this all white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of white only, the background screen is not shown, as in FIG. 162 (A1).

  In FIG. 162 (A2), the flame effect EF 101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. As a result, it is predicted that a chance up meter (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "CUM") may be displayed during preparation. The CUM preparation display may be displayed without displaying the flame effect EF101. In addition, the CPU preparation display may be displayed whenever the flame effect EF 101 is displayed. Further, in the example of the effect, the flame effect EF 101 covers the entire reserved icon display area HIS, but only a part of the reserved icon display area HIS may be covered, or the entire variable icon display area CIS Alternatively, part of the effect icon display area DIS may be covered, or all or part of the effect icon display area DIS may be covered. In addition, although the flame effect EF101 is displayed as opaque with the invisible on the back side, it may be displayed as semi-transparent so that the image displayed on the back side can be made visible.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A3), it is shown that the flame effect EF 101 is erased and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. In the CUM preparation display MTY, the start point SP is displayed at one end of the meter, and the final point GP is displayed at the other end of the meter. In addition, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is waiting at the start point SP, and a balloon with the letters "STANDBY" is also displayed. That is, it is predicted that the chance up meter will be displayed. This CUM preparation display MTY is displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter. In this presentation example, it is shown that a chance up point displayed in the chance up meter presentation using the chance up meter is not notified. Further, at this time, while the pending icon display area HIS is covered and hidden by the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY, the display mode does not change and the variation icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are visually recognized. It is made possible. Note that the display mode of at least one of the variation icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS may be changed. Moreover, in this production example, the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed during the symbol variation display before reaching the reach, but the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed while the reach presentation display after the reach is displayed. It may be done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A4), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed, and a state in which fluctuation variation display is performed is shown. ing. Here, the decorative symbol on which the fluctuation variation display is performed may overlap with a part of the display during CUM preparation, or the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position not overlapping the display during CUM preparation.

  In FIG. 162 (A5), before moving to super reach effect, “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moves under the second decorative symbol, and is swinging and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. Moved "Decoration 7" below the second hold number display. Further, in this example of rendering, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is also displayed while transitioning to super reach rendering. When the effect to shift to the super reach effect is started, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be hidden. In addition, when the effect to shift to the super reach effect is started, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed or may not be displayed. Also, in FIG. 162 (A5), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and the frame hocking out of the display screen is shown leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. . FIG. 162 (A6) shows that the holding frame UI is completely out of the frame with the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS remaining.

  FIG. 162 (A7) shows that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is started. Also at this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. Here, when the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, the chance up meter effect is not performed. Even when the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, the chance up meter effect may be performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A7), the image of the sword avenger is displayed large, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A8), the main character The animation of the battle scene with the hostile swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the holding frame UI is all hidden (disappears) except the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is also hidden (disappears). However, the fluctuation icon h0 does not disappear but continues to be displayed on the top board that has remained. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol and the second number-on-hold display continue to be displayed. Note that the entire holding frame UI may be erased or, conversely, the entire holding frame UI may be continuously displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

  FIG. 162 (A9) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, the chance up meter CMT is a display displayed at the beginning (at the time of introduction) of the super reach. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach production, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the progress of the current reach production is summarized according to its position. Informing The chance up meter CMT may be referred to as a super reach timeline. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be referred to as a description effect using the chance up meter CMT. Here, the progressing speed of the character SAH of the sabothani is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached while the character SBH of Sabohani moves, a specific advance notice may occur. In other words, the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 can be said to be an indication of a chance up point indicating a chance up occurrence, and the chance up meter CMT is a chance up during the reach (during super reach) It can also be said that it is a display of a meter that suggests the place of occurrence. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. In this production example, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but the display of the state of development to the super reach shown in FIG. 162 (A7) is started. The display may be started at the specified timing, may be started when the reach state is reached, may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may change The display may be started when the display is started. Further, the timing at which each check point CP1 to CP3 is displayed may be before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, or may be simultaneous with the display of the chance up meter CMT, or the chance It may be after the up meter CMT is displayed. In addition, the display start time of placard may be before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, or may be simultaneous with the display of the chance up meter CMT, or the chance up meter CMT May be displayed.

  FIG. 162 (A10) shows that the character SBH of Sabohan who functions as a cursor has started to move. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. In addition, the balloon of "START !!" may be displayed only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed after the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, and whether the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed or not Regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be displayed or may not be displayed. In addition, by displaying a balloon of “START !!”, it may be notified that a chance-up advance notice is likely to occur at the check points CP1 to CP3.

  FIG. 162 (A11) is the same effect example as the effect example shown in FIG. 29 (2). After that, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to FIG. 29 (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A12) are performed.

  In FIG. 162 (A12) to FIG. (A13), the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 29 (26) to FIG. (27) are performed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A14), it is shown that the swing fluctuation is performed in a state in which three "decorations 7" are aligned. At this time, a big hit exclusive background displayed when the background is a big hit is displayed. In addition, the background of the default (normal), the background in the pre-reading mode, the background which suggests the development of the super reach, etc. may be displayed, and the background displayed when reaching the reach is displayed. It is also good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (A15), the final display is performed with the combination (big hit symbol pattern form) of the decorative symbols of the “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Here, after the end of the super reach, the chance up meter CMT is always hidden but may be displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed when stopped by the combination of the big hit decorative symbols (big hit symbol form), it may be decided to be promoted to a definite variation big hit .

  In this effect example, the display during CUM preparation is switched to the chance up meter CMT at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (A9), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, FIG. It may be switched at the timing of FIG. (A4), or it may be switched at the timing of FIG. 162 (A5) to FIG. (A6), which is a period of transition from normal reach to super reach. It may be switched in FIG. 162 (A7) to FIG. (A13) in which the super reach is being executed, or may be switched after the end of the super reach. In this case, the occurrence of the chance-up notice that has occurred during super reach is notified afterward.

  In this presentation example, since the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is performed during the super reach presentation, the CUM in-progress display is displayed to notify that the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is started, thereby displaying the reach presentation It can be said that it will be announced that it will be displayed.

  In this production example, when the chance-up notice occurs at all the check points and becomes a big hit, when the chance-up notice does not occur at any one or more check points (the chances at all the check points It may be a big hit if there is no advance notice or if there is a chance up notice at some check points. For example, in FIG. 30 (18 b), even when the lever image 136 Va is not displayed and a chance-up advance notice does not occur, an example of a big hit is shown. In addition, even if there is a lot of chance-up notices at the check points, it is likely that the big hit symbol form will be finally clearly displayed than if no chance-up notices occur at all and / or some of the check points. Good. In addition, the number of occurrences of chance-up notices and the likelihood of a big hit need not be related.

In the present embodiment, when CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed and chance up meter CMT is displayed, the final result is more than when CUM preparation indication MTY is not displayed and chance up meter CMT is displayed. The jackpot symbol form is easily determined and displayed on FIG. 162 (B1) to the same figure (B8). The example of the effect shown in FIG. 29 (22) is another example of the effect following FIG. 29 (22). In the lever effect shown in FIG. 22 (22), the player operates the effect lever 136V, but a state where the effect has failed is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the combination of the "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the character of "x" indicating that the placard is a loss is indicated, and the character SBH of Sabohani becomes a disappointed expression ing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (B2), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily displayed thinner than the normal density. Also, in the same figure, a scene in which the majesty falls is displayed. In FIG. 162 (B3), all the decoration symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols are again displayed in normal density, and in FIG. 162 (B4), the wipe effect is performed, and the effect scene of the super reach (effect The display is switched to the normal background (the background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1) or the like). In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 162 (B5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily becomes a wipe display of non-pattern same color. In this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT disappear, and the second decoration pattern and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the lower left corner. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT may be displayed. FIG. 162 (B6) shows that the background is wiped out and the background is normally returned to the background. In FIG. 162 (B7), the wipe effect is finished, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays “decoration 7” − “decoration 6” − “decoration 7” which is a combination of losing, and then, FIG. As shown in B8), the symbol is displayed in the form of a lost symbol. Further, the holding frame UI is also displayed, and the variation icon h0 and the first holding icon h11 are also displayed. Also, the chance up meter CMT has been eliminated. In the wipe out (Fig. 162 (B6) to (B7)), the chance up meter CMT and / or CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed in some cases, and when it is displayed, The configuration may be such that the resurrection effect is more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when displayed, the arrangement may be such that the resurrection effect is always performed, and when it is not displayed, the resurrection effect may or may not be performed. In addition, when the CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed, it may be suggested that there is a possibility of shifting to the super reach after the next change.

  In this production example, chances-up notice occurs at all check points and it is lost, but chance-up notice does not occur at any one or more check points (chances at all check points Even if there is no up-noticing or if there is a chance-up in some checkpoints, there may be a loss. In addition, even if there is a lot of chance up notice at the check point, it will be difficult to finally display the big hit design as compared with the case where no chance up notice occurs at all and / or some check points. Good.

  In this demonstration example, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is always displayed, but the chance up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. Good.

  Further, for example, when a power failure recovery occurs while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed as the prefetch notice, it may be erased at the next fluctuation or may be displayed again at the next fluctuation start. In addition, the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY at the start of the next change may be displayed at the time of return of the display screen after power interruption or is displayed again after the display screen is restored (for example, Redisplay by animation / no animation)).

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a chance up meter in stages.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 163 (A1) to FIG. 163 (A8) shows that a background change notice is given. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163 (A1), the background of the sea is displayed. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (A1), the situation immediately after the start of the symbol variation display while the stop display is performed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Lots 4-1-1-7" is displayed. At this time, the second decorative symbol has started to change.

  FIG. 163 (A2) shows that variable display of the decorative symbol has been started.

  In FIG. 163 (A3), a background change notice, which is a type of notice (the change notice), is started. The subject of the background change notice here is the symbol change display under execution. In the background change notice, an image of an eyebrow appears from the left and right, and an animation in which the eyelid is closed causes the entire display screen to become an eyebrow image (see FIG. 163 (A4)). Therefore, both the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, and the change icon h0 are overlapped from the front side by the image of the eyelid and become invisible. Note that, instead of the image of the eyebrow, an image overlapping from the front may appear on a part of the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, and the variation icon h0. Alternatively, an image may not be superimposed on the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, and the change icon h0. A background change notice may be executed when a change to a stage change indication, a pre-reading notice, a super reach suggestion background, etc. is performed in addition to the change notice.

  It should be noted that in the background change notice, the big hit expectation may be represented by the display mode (for example, color, shape, pattern, etc.) of the appearing image (here, an image of a rose). In addition, it may also function as a notice of the background itself that the color of a rose changes to the background of a mountain if it is green. Further, it may be notified that the prefetching zone will occur depending on the display mode of the bookmark. Here, the pre-reading zone means an effect mode in which a dedicated pre-reading background is displayed when there is a pre-reading target being held within the holding state. Furthermore, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  In FIG. 163 (A5), although the box is open and the holding frame UI and the change icon h0 are beginning to be seen, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY appears in place of the holding icon display area HIS. Also, at this time, the background has been changed from the background of the sea to the background of the super reach. That is, by changing to the background of super reach, it is predicted to shift to super reach in the change. In addition, it may notice that it shifts to super reach by pre-reading object change as pre-reading advance notice. When multiple types of super reach are prepared, it may be suggested that they will necessarily develop into the super reach corresponding to the displayed background. Note that there may be a case in which a super reach does not develop, or it may indicate that a super reach corresponding to the background displayed on the condition that a reach has been made will necessarily develop. Also, there may be a case of transition to another type of super reach.

  In FIG. 163 (A6), the eyelids are completely open, and the eyelid image has disappeared. The background of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is changed to the background of the super reach by the background change notice. Note that the CUM preparation display MTY is completely displayed, and the display of the chance up meter CMT is notified. Note that the CUM in-provision display MTY may start to be displayed after the overhead image is completely opened. In addition, even if the background of the super reach is displayed, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed, or may be displayed.

  In FIG. 163 (A7), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is shown.

  In FIG. 163 (A8), the "decoration 7" that has been swingingly moved in the left symbol display area 208a moves below the second decorative symbol, and the "decoration 7" that is swingingly fluctuated in the right symbol display area 208c is It is shown moving to the bottom of the 2 pending number display. In addition, while transitioning to super reach production, CUM preparation indication MTY continues to be displayed. Further, FIG. 163 (A8) shows that the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS remaining. This effect example shows an example in which the reach transition effect is special. In addition, it may be made to shift to super reach through the same process as when a normal background is displayed. At this time, an animation in which the display area CIS of the variation icon moves is performed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A8) to FIG. 162 (A15) are performed.

  Figures 163 (B1) to (B3) show the effects of Figures 162 (A8) to (A8) through (163) to (A8), and as a result, the lord loses to the swordsman, In the middle pattern, “decoration 6” is displayed to indicate an example of a presentation that is lost.

  In FIG. 163 (B1), it is shown that the lord is defeated by the swordsman, and "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the character of "x" indicating that the placard is a loss is indicated, and the character SBH of Sabohani becomes a disappointed expression ing. Thereafter, after the effects shown in FIG. 162 (B2) to FIG. (B5) are performed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163 (B2) wipes out, and the background is the background at the start of symbol variation. It is shown that it returns to the background of a certain sea. In FIG. 163 (B3), the wipe effect is finished, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of losing, and then the losing design The display is confirmed in the form. Also, after wipe out, the chance up meter CMT is erased. In addition, when the background is a special background (for example, the background of a super reach etc.) at the time of wipe out, it may be considered as a big hit decision.

  FIGS. 163 (C1) to (C7) show that the CUM in-provision display MTY is performed as a prefetch notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 163 (C1) to FIG. 163 (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A1) to FIG.

  In Figure 163 (C4), the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, so that they are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Losing 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that it is being done. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is erased but may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 163 (C5), a state is shown in which the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon is erased. Also at this time, the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed, but the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed while the decorative symbol is displayed.

  Thereafter, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 163 (C6), the flame effect EF101 is redisplayed and displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. . Here, when the flame effect EF101 is displayed again, the flame effect EF101 may be displayed in the same manner as the mode displayed in the previous symbol variation display, or in a different display manner (animation) It may be re-displayed, or the flame effect EF 101 may be displayed without any animation. Thereafter, when the flame effect EF 101 is erased, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 163 (C7).

  That is, in this effect example, the display of the effect EF101 of the flame and the display of the CUM preparation display MTY in FIGS. 163 (C1) to (C3) function as a preview of the effect of the chance up meter in the next change. It can be said that the display of the effect EF101 of the flame and the display of the display during CUM preparation MTY in 163 (C6) to (C7) in the figure function as a notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display being executed.

  In this production example, CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed each time symbol variation display starts to give advance notice (continuous advance notice) of the rendering by the chance up meter, but for example, the rendering by the chance up meter is Count down the number of times of symbol variation display until it is performed (for example, display “2 more variations”, “1 more variation”, etc.), and when it becomes the symbol variation display targeted for pre-reading notice, chance up meter It may be displayed. That is, by the display of such a countdown, it may be possible to have the same function as the CUM in-provision display MTY. Also, the advance notice may be made by setting the display mode of the hold icon as a display mode that indicates that the effect is to be performed by the chance up meter. Also by this, it may be possible to provide the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY. And when it becomes a symbol variation display which became a target of advance notice, and the variation icon is displayed in a display mode which suggests that the effect by the chance up meter is performed, when the effect by the chance up meter is started The fluctuation icon may be deleted. In addition, when it becomes a symbol fluctuation display which became a target of advance notice, and the fluctuation icon is displayed in a display mode which suggests that the effect by the chance up meter will be performed, when the effect by the chance up meter is started It is not necessary to erase the fluctuation icon. In addition, after the chance up meter is displayed or at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed, the display mode of a part or all of the fluctuation icon is changed (for example, a display mode that suggests that presentation by the chance up meter is performed) May be changed to the default display mode).

  In addition, when the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed each time the symbol variation display starts and the advance notice (continuous advance notice) of the effect by the chance up meter is performed, it is more than the symbol change display that is the target of the advance notice. If presentation by the chance up meter is started in the previous symbol variation display, the CUM in-provision display MTY may not be displayed while the chance up meter is displayed, or the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. The CUM preparation display MTY may or may not be displayed. In addition, when the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed while the chance up meter is displayed, the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY may be hidden before the chance up meter is displayed, The CUM in-provision display MTY may be hidden at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed. In addition, when the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed even while the chance up meter is displayed, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed at a position overlapping the chance up meter or may be displayed at a position not overlapping . In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the chance up meter is displayed, which is the symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display which is the target of the preview notice, and the type of super reach performed in the symbol variation display which is the object of the prefetch notice. The type of super reach to be performed may be the same, different, or the same or different.

  FIGS. 163 (D1) to (D7) show that the CUM in-provision display MTY is performed as a prefetch notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 163 (C1) to FIG. 163 (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A1) to FIG.

  In FIG. 163 (D4) to the same figure (D5), different from FIG. 163 (C4) to the same figure (C5), the CUM in-provision display MTY is continuously displayed even during the swing fluctuation of the decorative symbol and the definite display. Is shown. In addition, animation display may be performed in CUM preparation display MTY, and in this case, animation may be continuously performed even while the symbol is stopped, or different animation may be performed while the symbol is stopped. . Also, the animation may not be performed and may be displayed still.

  Thereafter, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 163 (D6) to the same figure (D7), the CUM in-provision display MTY is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram gradually showing an example of a display start mode of the display MTY during preparation for the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 164 (A1) to (A7) show another example in which the CUM-in-provision display MTY is performed as the advance notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, since the effect shown in FIG. 164 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 164 (A2), it is shown that the gaming ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the start of the symbol variation display has been suspended by one, and the number of suspension has become two. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164 (A3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, the advance notice is given by the hold display. Is shown. In this example of presentation, the display of the hold icon by blue hold is performed, but the display of the hold icon by another display mode (for example, the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 119A) is performed. Alternatively, a default display mode holding icon may be displayed.

  After that, when the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 164 (A4), there is a state in which the finalized display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Loss 4-1-1-7". It is shown.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (A5), the variation display of the decorative symbol is started based on the first hold of the special view 1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164 (A6), the flame effect EF 101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. As a result, it is predicted that the CUM preparation indication MTY may be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 164 (A7), the flame effect EF101 is erased, and a CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed in the symbol variation display being executed when the hold that is the target of the advance notice is generated, and the CUM is displayed in the symbol variation display started next It is shown that a preparation display MTY is displayed. In this effect example, the CUM in-provision display MTY functions as a pre-reading notice, but when the hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice is the first hold, the CUM in-provision display is displayed in the symbol variation display to be started next MTY functions as a notice of the chance up meter CMT in the said fluctuation. Note that the CUM preparation indication MTY functions as a prefetching advance notice, and may not function as the notice. In addition, the CUM preparation indication MTY may function as the notice and may not function as the prefetch notice. In addition, the CUM in-provision display MTY may function as a pre-reading advance notice or may function as the advance notice.
There is a case.

  FIGS. 164 (B1) to (B11) show another example in which the CUM-in-provision display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (B1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (B1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (B1), since the hold is 0, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “0” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  In FIG. 164 (B2), it is shown that the gaming ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the start of the symbol variation display has been suspended by one, and the number of suspension has become one. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164 (B3), the first hold icon h11 is displayed, but the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the blue display mode, that is, the prefetching notice by the hold display is performed. Is shown. Note that the flame effect EF 101 shown in FIG. 164 (B4) may be displayed without displaying the hold icon. Also, the flame effect EF 101 shown in FIG. 164 (B4) may be displayed during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon. Also, when the flame effect EF 101 shown in FIG. 164 (B4) is displayed without the hold icon being displayed, and after the hold icon is displayed and / or while the increase icon of the hold icon is being executed, FIG. 164 (B4) The flame effect EF 101 shown in may be displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (B4), the flame effect EF 101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. As a result, it is predicted that the CUM preparation indication MTY may be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 164 (B5), the flame effect EF101 is erased, and a CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed.

  In FIG. 164 (B6), the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, so that they are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Losing 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that it is being done. At this time, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is maintained.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 164 (B7), a state is shown in which the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the missing “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon is erased but the CUM preparation display MTY remains displayed.

  After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 164 (B8) to FIG. (B11), the hold digest animation is started and hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the moving icon movement animation in which the first reserved icon h11 which has been moved toward the center of the upper surface of the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is performed. In this example, the same moving icon movement animation is performed regardless of whether the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed or not, but when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, Alternatively, different variation icon movement animation may be performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (B9 '), even if an animation in which the variation icon h0 comes out from the center of the pedestal hs0 is performed. Good. Note that one animation of the moving icon moving animations may be selected and executed regardless of whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

  As described above, when the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, the CUM preparation display may be displayed as the preview notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display being executed.

  FIG. 164 (C1) to FIG. 164 (C4) are diagrams showing how a display start animation of the CUM-in-provision display MTY is performed. Here, since the effect shown in FIG. 164 (C1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 164 (C2), the display start animation of the CUM preparation display MTY is started, and the CUM preparation display MTY is shown rising from the lower side of the display screen. At this time, the pending icon display area HIS rises in a manner to be lifted to the CUM preparation display MTY. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164 (C3), the reserved icon display area HIS is arranged at the top of the CUM in-provision display MTY so as not to affect the visibility of the CUM in-provision display MTY. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (C3), there is one suspension of the special view 1 and only the first suspension icon h11 is displayed, but to facilitate the explanation, the second suspension icon h12 to the second 4 The hold icon h14 is indicated by a broken line.

  Thereafter, when the display start animation of the CUM preparation display MTY is completed, as shown in FIG. 164 (C4), a balloon with the word "STANDBY" is displayed near the sabothani character SBH, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. The display of the has been announced. At this time, the balloon is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon (the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 in the example shown in FIG. 164 (C4)). Note that the entire hold icon of at least one of the four hold icons may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the balloon, or the entire four hold icons may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the balloon. Good. Further, in this example of the effect, the balloon is made to overlap also with a part of the hold icon display area HIS, but it may be made to overlap with the whole hold icon display area HIS.

  The CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed in a mode as shown in FIG. 164 (C3 ′) instead of the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 164 (C3). Specifically, the frame of the CUM in-provision display MTY may be extended upward, and the upper surface of the frame may be displayed to indicate the reserved icon display area HIS. The CUM preparation display MTY may be a display mode different from the CUM preparation display MTY displayed during super reach.

  FIGS. 164 (D1) to (D2) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A1), showing another display example of the effect of the flame for noticing the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. There is.

  In FIG. 164 (D1), a state in which a large flame effect EF 102 different from the flame effect EF 101 shown in FIG. 162 (A2) is displayed. The great flame effect EF 102 is an effect display that is displayed so as to cover the entire holding frame UI in a difficult-to-see manner. It is predicted that the CUM preparation display is also displayed by this great flame effect EF102. In addition, when the large-fired effect EF102 is displayed, the big-hit symbol form may be more easily displayed as in the case where the flamed effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162 (A2) is displayed. You may make it easy to generate a chance up notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164 (D2), when the great flame effect EF 102 is erased, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. At this time, the holding frame UI is framed out downward leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. Further, at this time, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not changed, and is the default display mode, but the display mode of the variation icon h0 may be changed before and after the display of the large flame effect EF102. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be always changed before and after the display of the large-flame effect EF102. After that, for example, after the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A4) to the same figure (A11) are performed, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to the same figure (25) are performed, and thereafter, FIG. The effects shown in FIG. (A15) or FIG. 162 (b1) to FIG. 162 (B8) are performed.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram gradually showing an example of a display start mode of the display MTY during preparation for the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A3) show an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A1), for example, showing an example of the effect of silhouette display during CUM preparation while displaying the flame effect EF101. .

  The effect example shown in FIG. 165 (A1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A2). After that, in FIG. 165 (A2), while displaying the effect EF101 of flame, a silhouette display MTYa in preparation of CUM simulating the display MTY being prepared CUM is displayed in a mode displayed on the back side of the effect EF101 of flame. . At this time, the silhouette display MTYa in preparation for CUM is displayed in black as a whole, and it is shown that a display by silhouette is performed. The display of the silhouette display MTYa in preparation for CUM also functions as a notice that the chance up meter CMT will perform the rendering. In addition, a plurality of types of display modes of the silhouette display MTYa being prepared during CUM preparation are prepared, and by changing (promotion) the display mode, it is suggested that the occurrence rate of the chance up notice is increased in the rendering by the chance up meter CMT. It may be done, or it may be suggested that the big hit reliability is increased.

  After that, the reach state is established, and FIG. 165 (A3) shows transition to the super reach. During this time, the silhouette display MTYa is continuously displayed during preparation of CUM. The silhouette display MTYa may be deleted during preparation of the CUM while the flame effect EF101 is displayed. In this case, for example, the deletion animation is performed when the silhouette display MTYa during the preparation of CUM is not displayed. Alternatively, it may be hidden without the erase animation being performed. After this, for example, after the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A11) are performed, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. 29 (25) are performed, and thereafter, FIG. 162 (A12) to FIG. Or effects shown in FIG. 162 (B1) to FIG. 162 (B8) are performed.

  FIGS. 165 (B1) to 165 (B6) are an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A1), for example, and show another example of the effect of the display start mode of the display MTY during CUM preparation.

  FIG. 165 (B1) shows that the wipe effect is started. This wipe effect is a display in which the display screen is gradually switched from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the display screen as if the calendar looks like it is being swung. In FIG. 165 (B1), the wipe effect is started in a state where the background of the sea is displayed, but the background is not changed even before and after the wipe effect. However, in FIG. 165 (B1), the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed at the position at which the reserved icon display area HIS is displayed, and it is predicted that the chance up meter will start rendering. At the timing shown in FIG. 165 (B1), a part of the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a viewable manner. The background may be changed before and after the wipe effect.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (B2), the display area after switching (the back side turned up) is enlarged, and most of the CUM preparation display MTY is visible. In the display area after switching, a notice regarding the chance up meter CMT may be given, or a pre-reading notice or the change notice may be given that is not related to the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 165 (B3) shows that the display area after switching is further enlarged. Note that if the background is wiped out, a notice regarding the chance up meter CMT other than the CUM in-progress display MTY may be visible and a notice that is not related to the chance up meter CMT may be visible. An indication of preparation MTY and other notices may be visible. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 165 (B4) to FIG. (B6), the display area after switching is expanded so that the background is blurred, and the display area after switching is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (B6) Are all visible. After that, for example, after the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A4) to the same figure (A11) are performed, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to the same figure (25) are performed, and thereafter, FIG. The effects shown in (A15) to (A15) or (B1) to (B8) in FIG. 162 are performed. In the state of FIG. 165 (B1), the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed before the start of the wipe effect, in which case the CUM in-provision display MTY is continuously displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect. May be In addition, a CUM in-provision display MTY, which is upgraded after the wipe effect, may be displayed. In addition, the CUM in-provision display MTY may continue to be displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect, or the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed after being ranked up.

  FIGS. 165 (C1) to 165 (C4) are an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A1), showing another example of the effect of the display start mode of the display MTY during CUM preparation.

  FIG. 165 (C1) shows that the switching effect of the background screen is started. As shown in FIG. 165 (C1), this background image switching effect is displayed in a reduced size after the background image before switching is reduced, and then, as shown in FIG. 165 (C2), the right side of the background image before switching is in the depth direction While moving and displaying in a mode in which the right side is directed in the depth direction, a background image after switching appears on the right side of the display screen. The background image after this switching is displayed in a mode in which the left side is in the depth direction. The background image after switching shows that the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed at the display position of the reserved icon display area HIS in the background image before switching. In the state where the background image before switching and the background image after switching are displayed side by side, the background image after switching may not be displayed, and the background image before switching may be displayed again. That is, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may not be displayed. In this effect example, the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed in this background screen switching effect, but a display other than the CUM in-provision display MTY (for example, the display mode of the hold icon changes) is switched It may be displayed in the background image of. In addition, the background image after switching may be a background image of a notice, and for example, a background image on which a severe heat notice is displayed may be displayed.

  Thereafter, FIG. 165 (C3) shows that the background image before switching is erased and the background image after switching including the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed in the front-facing manner. At this time, the background image after switching is displayed in a reduced size. After that, the background image after switching is enlarged and displayed on the entire display screen as shown in FIG. 165 (C4), and after that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A4) to FIG. Then, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to FIG. 25 (25) are performed, and thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A12) to FIG. (A15) or FIG. 162 (B1) to FIG. Is done.

  FIG. 165 (D1) is an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A2), in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed, but the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed, and a notice display of a cassette is performed. The situation is shown. When the flame effect EF 101 is displayed, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be displayed. It should be noted that the symbol variation display on which the advance notice display of “Gasse” has been made may be a lost decision. Moreover, in the symbol change display in which the advance notice display of Gasses was performed, it may become a big hit. In addition, even if the effect EF101 of fire is displayed after the next change that the advance notice display of gasse was carried out, when there is one or more suspension when the symbol change display where the advance notice display of gasse was carried out is started Good. In this case, a pattern (a pattern in which the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed until the end is displayed) and a symbol variation display as a target of the advance notice are performed until the start of the symbol change display that is the target of the advance notice. In the above, there may be a pattern in which the CUM preparation indication MTY is finally displayed.

  FIGS. 165 (E1) to 165 (E9) are an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A1), for example, and show a state in which the timer advance effect is performed.

  In FIG. 165 (E1) to (E2), the timer notice display TMY rises from the lower side from the lower side of the hold icon display area HIS, and the timer notice display TMY shows that the hold icon display area HIS is lifted. At this time, the character "STANDBY" is displayed on the timer notice display TMY, and it is shown that the start of the timer notice is suspended. When the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TMY in this effect example is performed, it is announced that the hold icon or the change icon changes. As compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 164 (C2), it may be possible to grasp whether or not the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed depending on whether or not the sabothani character SBH appears. Note that it may be difficult to specify whether the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed or the timer notice display TMY is displayed. For example, when the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the flame effect EF101 is erased before the CUM preparing display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed, the CUM preparing display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed. Either one may be displayed. Note that although the timer notice in this example of presentation is to notice the change of the hold icon (the fluctuation icon), the timer notice as shown in FIG. 20 to FIG. 27, FIG. 38 and FIG. It goes without saying that it is possible to carry out any preview effects to be executed as a result. In addition, the display mode of the timer advance notice display is not limited to that shown in FIG. 165, and can be applied to any display manner of any timer notice display described above. Further, in this effect example, both of the timer notice display TMY and the CUM preparation display MTY may be performed below the hold icon display area HIS. In this case, the area in which the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed And the area where the timer notice display TMY is displayed may be displayed overlappingly or may be displayed so as not to overlap.

  In FIG. 165 (E3), the display on the timer advance notice display TMY is changed to "10:00", and then the countdown is started. That is, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon (variation icon) may change when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown in the timer advance notice display is started. The timing of the start of the countdown in the timer advance notice display is not limited to that described above. For example, after the display of “STANDBY” is changed to the notation of seconds, the start of the countdown may be waited for a while. In addition, the number of seconds may be written from the stage when the display of the timer notice display TMY is started. In this case, the countdown may be started after the display animation of the timer notice display TMY is completed, or the timer notice display The countdown may be started from the stage when the display of TMY is started.

  FIG. 165 (E4) shows that 0.01 second has elapsed since the start of the countdown. Thereafter, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts, as shown in FIG. 165 (E5), the timer display becomes “00:00”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (E6), in the timer notice display TMY, the display of “00:00” is switched to the character display of “change !!”, and at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is overlapped. As the effect EF 103 is displayed, the change animation of the hold icon is started. This suggests that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Here, the change icon of the hold icon may be started after switching to the character display of “change !!”, or the change icon of the hold icon is started, and “change !!” is displayed. The change animation of the hold icon may be started at the timing of switching to the character display of "change !!".

  Thereafter, when the change icon of the hold icon ends and the effect EF 103 is erased, as shown in FIG. 165 (E7), the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is changed to the display mode of blue hold . That is, it is shown that the rank of the hold icon has been increased by two levels. Note that the rank of the hold icon may be increased by one stage before or after the change animation of the hold icon, or may be increased by three or more stages. Also, there may be a rank down.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 165 (E8) to FIG. (E9), the timer announcement display TMY is frame-out animation in which the frame is displayed below the display screen. Due to this frame out animation, the hold icon display area HIS also descends and returns to the default display position.

  It should be noted that in this effect example, both of the timer advance notice display TMY and the CUM in-provision display may be displayed. For example, the timer notice display TMY is moved further upward, and the timer advance notice display TMY is below. The CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed on the screen. In addition, the pending icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed again within the same symbol variation after the end of the timer advance presentation effect, and the CUM in-progress display MTY may be displayed. In addition, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed and the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed after the symbol variation started next after the end of the timer advance presentation effect.

  FIGS. 165 (F1) to (F2) show an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A2), for example, and show another display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 165 (F1) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). That is, in this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT displays the position of the check point (in this demonstration example, the second check point CP2) where a chance up notice may occur in the meter portion of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the notification is made before it is done. In this case, at the check point notified in advance by the CUM in-provision display MTY, the chance-up advance notice may be performed without fail. In addition, when the check point is notified in advance by the CUM in-provision display MTY, the chance-up notice may be generated more easily than in the case where the check point is not notified. Further, in the CUM preparation indication MTY, a part or all of the check points displayed in the chance up meter CMT may be always displayed. In this case, the check point may be displayed based on the probability of occurrence of the chance-up notice, or may be displayed regardless of the occurrence probability. After that, after the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A4) to the same figure (A7) are performed, the effects shown in FIG. 165 (F2) are performed. The effect shown in FIG. 165 (F2) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A8) except that a check point is being displayed on the CUM in-provision display MTY, so the description will be omitted. Check points are displayed at the start of the CUM preparation display MTY display, and after a CUM preparation display MTY display starts, display is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, when reaching reach or transition to super reach). The checkpoint may be increased.

  FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the display MTY during preparation for the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 166 (A1) to (A3) show an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A3), for example, and at least a part of the check points are displayed while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. It is shown that a chance up notice is always executed at points.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A1) is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 165 (F1). In FIG. 166 (A1), the second check point CP2 displayed on the CUM in-provision display MTY is marked in red, and a letter of "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit is increased by the appearance of the advance notice. Is displayed in the information, and as described above with reference to FIG. 29 (6), this is a display mode for notifying that the chance-up advance notice has occurred. That is, in this example of presentation, by performing this display, it is notified that a chance up advance notice will be performed. Note that the chance-up advance notice may not actually be performed, and in this case, the game may proceed as if the chance-up advance notice was made.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A2) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 165 (F2). As shown in FIG. 22 (A2), the second check point CP2 remains marked in red and displayed even after transition to the super reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166 (A3), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, other checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1 and third checkpoint CP3) not displayed are displayed. The production by chance up meter is started. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (A3 ′), the display of the second check point CP2 may be cleared to the default display mode. After FIG. 166 (A3) or FIG. (A3 '), for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to FIG. (25) are performed, and then, FIG. 162 (A12) to FIG. (A15) or FIG. The effects shown in FIGS. (B1) to (B8) are performed. In the case where a part or all of the check points are displayed by the CUM preparation indication MTY, the displayed check points may not give a chance-up notice, and in this case, the displayed check points show a chance An advance notice may be made, or a chance up notice may or may not be made. In addition, when a part or all of the check points are displayed by the CUM in-provision display MTY, the game may proceed as if the chance-up advance notice has been made but the chance-up advance notice has not actually been made, In this case, the check point considered to have been chanced up may notify that a chance up notice has occurred, may not have to notify, and may or may not notify. It is also good.

  FIG. 166 (B1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A1). In FIG. 166 (B1), the second check point CP2 is displayed in red in the CUM in-provision display MTY, but an example in which “UP” is not displayed to indicate that a notice has appeared is shown. It is shown. In this case, for example, the display of “UP” may be performed after the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 and a chance-up notice occurs.

  FIG. 166 (C1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A1). In FIG. 166 (C1), the second check point CP2 is displayed in the CUM in-provision display MTY, but it is not marked in red, nor is the character “UP” displayed, and “UP” is It is shown that "question mark" is displayed in place of characters. This suggests that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur at some check points in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. For example, the appearance rate of the chance-up notice may be changed in the order of “question mark” <“!” <“UP”.

  FIG. 166 (D1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A1). In FIG. 166 (D1), in the CUM preparation display MTY, all the check points displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed, and characters such as "question mark", "!" And "UP" are displayed for each check point. In addition, it may be made to indicate the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the chance-up notice for each check point.

  FIG. 166 (E1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). FIG. 166 (E1) shows that the balloon in the CUM-in-provision display MTY is changing from "STANDBY" to "CHANNEL UP high certainty". When this display is performed, it is suggested that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at each check point in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In the balloon, “STANDBY” may be displayed once and then changed to “chance up high probability”, or the display of “STANDBY” and the display of “chance up high probability” may be alternately switched and displayed. You may In addition, the display of “chance up high probability” may be displayed without displaying “STANDBY”.

  FIG. 166 (F1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). FIG. 166 (F1) shows that the balloon in the CUM-in-provision display MTY is changed from "STANDBY" to "one chance up". When this display is performed, it is suggested that a chance-up notice always occurs once in the presentation by the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is considered that it is difficult to identify at which check point the chance up notice occurs, but the chance up notice must occur n times (once in this example of rendering). I have a notice. In addition, the number of the chance up notices to be generated may be one or two or more. Also, in the balloon, "STANDBY" may be displayed once and then changed to "1 chance confirmed", or the display of "STANDBY" and the display of "1 chance confirmed" may be alternately switched and displayed. You may In addition, the display of “chance up once confirmed” may be displayed without displaying “STANDBY”.

  FIG. 166 (G1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (G1), the placard on which "V" is displayed is arranged at the final point GP in the CUM in-provision display MTY, and it is informed that the big hit is decided. In addition to "V", for example, a placard on which "progress" is displayed may be arranged, and in this case, it may be notified that it is decided that super reach will be developed. . In addition, by placing a placard with a "question mark" displayed, when a Sabohani character reaches the final point, some direction (for example, the development of the super reach, the development of the super reach / does not develop while developing It may be suggested that a pattern presentation etc. be performed. In addition, even when it is notified that a certain effect is performed by the placard, there may be a case where no effect is performed or a case where it is not performed.

  FIG. 166 (H1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (H1), the placard on which "superheat" is displayed is arranged at the final point GP in the CUM in-provision display MTY, and (a) the advance notice on the symbol variation display in which the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed is displayed. If it is performed, or (b) there may be a case where advance notice and / or advance notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be performed. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (a), and may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (b).

  FIG. 166 (I1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (I1), a placard in which "V" is displayed is arranged at the final point GP in the CUM in-provision display MTY, and a display in which the sabothani character SBH has reached the final point GP is performed. And, it is informed that it is a big hit confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed at the start point SP to be moved and displayed at the final point GP. It may be left as it is. In addition, even when "V" is displayed on the placard, there may be a big hit and a big hit. In addition, (a) when a notice is notified of a symbol change display in which a CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed, or (b) a prefetch notice and / or a notice notification regarding a symbol change display where a chance up meter CMT is displayed. It may be done. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (a), and may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (b).

  FIG. 166 (J1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (I1), and it is shown that the character SBH of the sabo hani is also displayed at the start point SP. That is, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is arranged at both the start point SP and the final point GP, and thereby, it is informed that the big hit has been decided. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabothani of the start point SP may be moved and displayed, or may not be moved and displayed. Alternatively, the character SBH of Sabohani at the start point SP may be deleted, and only the character SBH of Sabohani displayed at the final point GP may be displayed.

  FIGS. 166 (K1) to (K2) are an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A2), for example, and it is shown that another notice display is performed even while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. ing. FIG. 166 (K1) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166 (K2), it is shown that the conversation annunciation starts while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. It is needless to say that a notice other than the talk notice may be given while the CUM preparation indication TMY is displayed. In this example, although the CUM in-provisioning display TMY is started before the other notices, other informings that are always started before the CUM in-provision display TMY (for example, the hold icon or the change icon) There may be a notice that the display mode of the icon changes, a notice that starts at the start of fluctuation, etc., and there may be another notice display that is always started simultaneously with the CUM preparation display TMY. In addition, even if other notices of the same type are displayed, the display may be started at the same timing as the case where the display is started earlier than the CUM in-provision display TMY and may be started later. It should be noted that while the CUM preparation indication TMY is being displayed, other notices may not be given, and only specific notices of a plurality of kinds of notices can be executed, and for notices other than the specific notices. It may not be executed. For example, while the CUM in-provision display TMY is being displayed, a change effect of the display mode of the non-displayed reserved icon may not be performed, or may be performed. Specifically, while the CUM in-provision display TMY is displayed, a notice display of "change" appears from the notice icon YI of "box" shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, and then the display of the hold icon or change icon An advance notice effect that changes the mode may be performed or may not be performed. Also, while the CUM in-progress display TMY is displayed, icon change notification by the icon IHI of “bomber” shown in FIGS. 148 to 161 may be executed. In this case, for example, the icon IHI of “bomber” or The effect displayed on the bullet icon BTI, the bombarded hold icon or the change icon may be displayed so as to be overlapped on the CUM preparation display TMY, or may be displayed so as to be overlapped.

  FIGS. 166 (L1) to (L2) are an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A3), for example, and an example of displaying only a part of the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed as the CUM in-provision display. It shows. In FIG. 166 (L1), only the balloon of the character SBH of the Sabohani and the "STANDBY" in the CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed, and the other configuration is in a non-display mode. By this, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be notified. The configuration to be displayed is not limited to the above-described one, and any component may be displayed as long as it is a part of the elements constituting the CUM in-provision display MTY. FIG. 166 (L2) shows how to shift to super reach thereafter. As shown in FIG. 166 (L2), after a part of the display is performed as the CUM preparation display, the display mode may be maintained until the chance up meter CMT is displayed, for example, time The display mode may be changed in such a manner that the component of the CUM preparation display is added according to the passage of.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 166 (M1) to (M7) correspond to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (8). That is, FIG. 29 (3) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani advances on the meter after the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is started, but in FIG. 166 (M1), the chance is raised inside Although the effect by the meter CMT is being performed, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, and the CUM in-provision display MTY remains displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 166 (M2) corresponding to FIG. 29 (4), it is shown that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. However, since the chance up meter CMT is not displayed and the CUM in-provision display MTY remains displayed, it is considered difficult to recognize the progress of presentation in the chance up meta CMT. Further, while a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY passing” is displayed in FIG. 29 (5) to notify occurrence of a chance up notice, in FIG. 166 (M3), a CUM is being prepared. Since the display MTY remains displayed, such notification is not performed. Thereafter, also in FIG. 166 (M4) corresponding to FIG. 29 (6), the CUM-in-provision display MTY remains displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29 (6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter “UP” indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved by the appearance of the advance notice. It is displayed at the top and shows the history of the occurrence of a notice. Thereafter, in FIG. 166 (M5), the CUM in-provision display MTY is still displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29 (7) corresponding to FIG. 166 (M5), the character Sabohani character SBH has started to move. After that, as shown in FIG. 166 (M6), it is suggested that the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased, and the CUM in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. FIG. 166 (M7) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. In this rendering example, as described above, rendering is performed internally by the chance up meter CMT, and the first check point CP1 is marked in red as a history of occurrence of the chance up notice at the first check point CP1. In addition, the letters "UP" are also displayed. Note that the position of the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the vicinity of the second check point CP2, and it is informed that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 may occur.

  Thus, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 166 (M1) to the same figure (M7), although the effect by the chance up meter CMT is progressing with the start of the super reach inside, the super reach is performed as a display It is shown that the CUM in-progress display MTY is being switched to the chance up meter CMT during the process. At this time, for the chance-up notice corresponding to the first check point CP1 generated while the CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the assumption that the chance-up notice has occurred. It is made to display as a history. Note that it may not be displayed as a history. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super reach starts, or it may be the timing at the middle of the super reach. In the case of the timing of the start of the super reach, the jackpot symbol aspect may be easily displayed in a definite manner than in the case of the timing of the middle of the super reach, or vice versa. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super reach starts or the timing at the middle of the super reach.

  FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

  FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A9) show modified examples of the display mode of the display during CUM preparation. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 167 (A1) to the same figure (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A1) to the same figure (A2), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 167 (A3) shows that the flame effect EF 101 is erased and the CUM in-provision display MTYb in a mode different from the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3) is displayed. The CUM in-provision display MTYb shown in FIG. 167 (A3) is displayed at a position where the display position thereof overlaps the display position of the chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter CMT. The CUM in-provision display MTYb is displayed in a rectangular frame with the words “meter in preparation” attached. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 167 (A4) to FIG. 167 (A8) are performed. Incidentally, the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A4) to (A8) are different from the display modes of the CUM in-provision display MTYb shown in FIG. 162 from the display modes of the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. Since the effect shown in FIG. 8 (A 8) is the same, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 167 (A9) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTYb to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, for example, by the chance up meter switching animation, the CUM in-provision display MTYb may be erased and the chance up meter CMT may be displayed. The chance up meter switching animation may be, for example, a mode in which the chance up meter CMT appears when the effect is erased after the effect is displayed and the CUM in-provision display MTYb is hidden. In addition, the chance up meter switching animation may not be performed, and the switching display may be performed from the CUM in-provision display MTYb to the chance up meter CMT. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A10) to FIG. (A15) or the effects shown in FIG. 162 (B1) to FIG. (B8) are performed. In the example of the effect, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, a balloon with the word “START !!” may be displayed, or the balloon may not be displayed.

  FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B5) show another mode in which the CUM in-provision display MTYb shown in FIG. 167 (A3) appears. FIG. 167 (B1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 168 (A1).

  In FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B2), the CUM preparing display MTYb rises from the lower side from the lower side of the reserved icon display area HIS, and the CUM preparing in progress display MTYb shows lifting of the reserved icon display area HIS. There is.

  In FIG. 167 (B3), a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol is shown.

  In FIG. 167 (B4), before moving to super reach effect, “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moves under the second decorative symbol, and is swinging and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. Moved "Decoration 7" below the second hold number display. Further, in this example of rendering, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTYb is also displayed while transitioning to super reach rendering. Also, in FIG. 167 (B4), the deletion animation is started, and the holding frame UI moves downward. At this time, the reserved icon display area HIS moves downward so as to be hidden behind the CUM in-provision display MTYb, and then becomes difficult to visually recognize as shown in FIG. 167 (B5). Also, the variation icon display area CIS is framed out below the display screen leaving the pedestal hs0. That is, FIG. 167 (B5) shows that the holding frame UI is completely out of the frame with the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS remaining. In this example of effect, the delete animation is performed at the timing of hiding the hold icon, but the hold icon may be displayed without performing the delete animation.

  FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

  FIGS. 168 (A1) to 168 (A11) show modifications of the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 168 (A1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 168 (A2), the effect EF 104 of explosion is displayed in the center on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the CUM in-progress display appearance animation is started. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the display during CUM preparation display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS but is started to be displayed at the upper left of the display screen. Note that the explosion effect EF 104 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decoration pattern. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY may appear without the CUM preparation display appearance animation being performed. That is, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be displayed without the explosion effect EF 104 being displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (A3), when the explosion effect EF 104 is erased, a CUM preparation display MTY appears. The display position of the CUM-in-provision display MTY is substantially at the center of the left end portion of the display screen, unlike FIG. 162 (A3). In this presentation example, it is shown that the display position of the CUM in-provision display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT.

  In FIG. 168 (A4), a state is shown in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, and it is in the reach state. At this time, the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is less visible than in the state in which the decorative symbol is not overlapped by the CUM in-provision display MTY. ing. It should be noted that the CUM in-provision display MTY may be disposed on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. In addition, the display may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 168 (A5), before moving to super reach effect, “decoration 7” that was swinging and changing in the left symbol display area 208a moves under the second decoration pattern, and is swinging and changing in the right symbol display area 208c. Moved "Decoration 7" below the second hold number display. Further, in this example of rendering, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is also displayed while transitioning to super reach rendering. At this time, the CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol. Even if CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (A4), CUM in-provision display MTY at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (A5) May be overlapped and displayed behind the decorative pattern. In addition, the display may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. Also, in FIG. 168 (A5), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and a state of scrolling out below the display screen is shown leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. . Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 168 (A6) to FIG. 168 (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 168 (A6) to FIG. 168 (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A6) to FIG. 162 (A8) except that the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different. So I will omit the explanation.

  FIG. 168 (A9) shows that a moving animation in which the CUM in-progress display MTY moves downward is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 168 (A10), when the CUM-in-provision display MTY moves to the lower left corner of the display screen, the moving animation is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (A11), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example, after the moving animation is completed, the CUM in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, and then the sabothani character SBH starts to move (the former), but the CUM in-provision display MTY At the same time as switching to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani may start moving (the latter). Further, the timing at which the sabothan character SBH starts moving may be either the former case or the latter case, only the former may be performed, or only the latter may be performed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A10) to FIG. (A15) or FIG. 162 (B1) to FIG. (B8) are performed.

  In this example, the CUM in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT after the completion of the moving animation (in some cases referred to as a falling animation) in which the CUM-in-provision display MTY moves downward. The movement of Sabo Hani character SBH is started, but the display switches from MUM in-progress display MTY to chance up meter CMT, and after Sabo Hani character SBH starts to move, the moving animation of chance up meter CMT is a line It may be made to be known.

  FIGS. 168 (B1) to 168 (B5) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 168 (A2).

  In FIG. 168 (B1), unlike in FIG. 168 (A3), the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed in a size smaller than the size of the chance up meter CMT. In addition, you may be displayed by the size expanded rather than the chance up meter CMT. Also, the display size of the CUM in-provision display MTY may or may not be the same as the display size of the chance up meter CMT. Further, the display size of the CUM in-provision display MTY and the display size of the chance up meter CMT may be the same or may be different.

  FIG. 168 (B2) shows the state of transition to super reach in a state where the CUM in-provision display MTY of the reduced size is displayed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (B3), the moving animation in which the CUM-in-provision display MTY moves is started. At this time, the balloon with "STANDBY" is deleted. The balloon may be deleted before the moving animation starts, may be deleted after the moving animation starts, or may be deleted at the timing when the moving animation starts. Further, as described later, the balloon may be deleted after the CUM in-provision display MTY is enlarged and displayed, or the balloon may be deleted before the enlarged display.

  FIG. 168 (B4) shows that the moving animation is completed, and the CUM-in-provision display MTY is moved to the display position of the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is enlarged and the display size becomes the same as the display size of the chance up meter CMT. In addition, the display position may be switched without moving animation, and in this case, the display size of the CUM in-provision display MTY is reduced before and after the display position is switched to the same display size as the chance up meter CMT. You may do so. In addition, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be enlarged after the moving animation is completed, or the moving animation may be started after the enlarged display, or the CUM in-progress display MTY is moved by the movement animation. During this process, the display may be enlarged gradually. When the moving animation is completed and the CUM in-provision display MTY moves to the display position of the chance up meter CMT, the CUM in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT as shown in FIG. 168 (B5). The presentation by the meter CMT is started.

  FIGS. 168 (C1) to (C4) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 168 (A2).

  FIG. 168 (C1) shows an example in which only a partial display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed as the CUM in-provision display, unlike in FIG. 168 (A3). In (C1) of FIG. 168, only the balloon of the sabotary characters SBH and “STANDBY” in the CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed, and the other configuration is in a non-display mode. By this, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be notified. The configuration to be displayed is not limited to the above-described one, and any component may be displayed as long as it is a part of the elements constituting the CUM in-provision display MTY.

  FIG. 168 (C2) shows how to shift to super reach thereafter. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (C3), a switching animation which is an animation to be switched from the CUM preparation display to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF 105 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the CUM preparation display, and a state in which the CUM preparation display disappears is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the explosion effect EF 105 is erased, the CUM preparation display is also erased, and as shown in FIG. 168 (C4), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. It should be noted that the CUM preparation display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without switching animation being performed, or the switching animation is performed and the CUM preparation display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In some cases, switching display may be performed from the CUM preparation display to the chance up meter CMT without the switching animation being performed.

  FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

  FIGS. 169 (A1) to (A11) show modified examples of the display mode and the display position of the CUM preparation display. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 169 (A1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 169 (A2), the effect EF 106 of explosion is displayed in the central portion on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the CUM in-progress display appearance animation is started. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the display during CUM preparation display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS but is started to be displayed at the upper left of the display screen. Furthermore, in this effect example, as described later, the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTYc is different. Note that the explosion effect EF 106 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decoration pattern. Further, the CUM in-provision display MTYc may appear without the CUM in-provision display animation being performed. That is, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTYc may be displayed without the explosion effect EF 106 being displayed.

  FIG. 169 (A3) shows that the CUM preparation in-progress display MTYc is displayed. The display mode of the CUM-in-provision display MTYc is a display mode different from that in FIG. 168 (A3), and is a mode in which characters in meter preparation are displayed in a rectangular frame.

  In FIG. 169 (A4), a state is shown in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, and it is in the reach state. At this time, the CUM in-provision display MTYc is displayed overlapping on the front side with respect to the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than the state in which the decorative symbol is not overlapped by the CUM in-provision display MTYc. ing. The CUM in-provision display MTYc may be disposed on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. In addition, the display may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 169 (A5) to FIG. 169 (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A5) to (A8) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 168 (A5) to (A8) and the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTYc. The description is omitted because it is the same.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A9), a switching animation which is an animation to be switched from the CUM preparation in-progress display MTYc to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF 106 is displayed so as to overlap the CUM in-provision display MTYc, and a state in which the CUM in-provision display MTYc disappears is displayed. Although the display mode of this switching animation is the same as that of the CUM in-progress display appearing animation shown in FIG. 169 (A2) and described above, it may be a different display mode. In addition, the display mode of the switch animation and the CUM in-progress display appearance animation may have the same display mode or may have different display modes. Also, the switching animation may not be performed.

  Subsequently, when the switching animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 169 (A10), the flame effect EF 101 is displayed, and the appearing animation in which the chance up meter CMT appears is started. Note that the chance up meter CMT may be displayed without performing the appearing animation. Also, appearance animation may or may not be performed.

  Thereafter, when the appearance animation is completed and the flame effect EF 101 is erased, as shown in FIG. 169 (A11), the chance up meter CMT is displayed, and then the effect up with the chance up meter CMT is started.

  FIGS. 169 (B1) to (B8) show an example in which the timer advance notice display functions as a CUM preparation display.

  In FIG. 169 (B1), it is shown that the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first suspension icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” indicating 1 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed in the fluctuation icon display area CIS. Also, in FIG. 169 (B1), the timer announcement effect is started, and for example, the timer announcement display TM1 is framed in from the left end of the display screen and is displayed on the center left side of the display screen. The timer display on this timer advance display TM1 is "60:00". Thereafter, the timer display countdown is started in the timer advance display TM1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 169 (B2), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed, and a state in which fluctuation variation display is performed is shown. ing. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed overlapping on the front side of the decoration pattern, and the decoration notice is considered more difficult to recognize than the state in which the decoration pattern is not overlapped by the timer notice display TM1. . The timer notice display TM1 may be disposed on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to be overlapped with the decorative symbol. In addition, the display may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. In addition, while this timer notice display TM1 is being displayed, there may be cases where other types of timer notice displays disclosed herein are displayed. In this case, the display mode of the timer advance notice may be the same as or different from that of the timer advance notice TM1 shown in FIG. 169 (B2). Further, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be always displayed at the same position, or the display position may be different. Further, the type of notice performed as a result of the timer display countdown becoming "00:00" may be different depending on the display position of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the left side of the display screen) If this timer notice display TM1 functions as a CUM in-progress display and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the right of the display screen, the timer display countdown is performed, and as a result, even if the pseudo link is executed. Good). At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B2), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "15:00".

  In FIG. 169 (B3), before moving to super reach effect, “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moves under the second decorative symbol, and is swinging and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. Moved "Decoration 7" below the second hold number display. Further, in this example of effect, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is also continuously displayed while shifting to the super reach effect. When the effect to shift to the super reach effect is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be non-displayed, and may be displayed or non-displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B3), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “10:57”. Also, in FIG. 169 (B3), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and the frame hocking out of the display screen is shown leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. . FIG. 169 (B4) shows that the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS remaining. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B4), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:21”.

  FIG. 169 (B5) shows that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is started. Also at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B5), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “05:53”. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 6B (B5) displays a large image of an enemy swordsman, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The animation of the battle scene with the hostile swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the holding frame UI is all hidden (disappears) except the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is also hidden (disappears). However, the fluctuation icon h0 does not disappear but continues to be displayed on the top board that has remained. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol and the second number-on-hold display continue to be displayed. Note that the entire holding frame UI may be erased or, conversely, the entire holding frame UI may be continuously displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

  FIG. 169 (B7) shows that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” while the super reach effect is being performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (B8), a switching animation which is an animation to switch from the timer advance notice display TM1 to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF 106 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the timer notice display TM1, and a state in which the CUM preparation display disappears is displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 169 (A10) to FIG. (A11) are performed. In this example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, and when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the chance up meter CMT is always displayed, but the chance up meter CMT is There may be a case where it is displayed and a case where it is not displayed (presence display of cassette by timer advance display). Also, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer notice display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the chance up meter CMT may be displayed or another notice may be given. It is also good.

  FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the chance up meter effect being performed during the super reach effect. Here, the effects performed in the period shown in FIG. 170 (A1) to FIG. 170 (A5) are the same as the effects performed in FIG. 162 (A1) to FIG. 170 (A8), and FIG. The effects performed in the period shown in FIG. (A14) are the same as the effects performed in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (11), so the description will be omitted.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A15), as shown in FIG. 170 (A16), the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI3b) Is displayed. Here, the cut-in image CI3b in this production example is a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image (not shown) (a cut-in image having a display mode different from the weak cut-in image and the gold cut-in image), a gold cut-in image CI3. There are three types, and the reliability of the big hit increases in the order of the weak cut-in image, the red cut-in image, and the gold cut-in image. In addition, the cut-in image which suggests big hit confirmation may be displayed. This weakly cut-in image CI3b is a cut-in image having a display mode different from that of the cut-in image (gold cut-in image CI3) of the crown pattern shown in FIG. 29 (13), and is longer than the gold cut-in image CI3. The image is a weak cut-in image that is short and surrounded by a green frame, and also shows how to shake the sword with a hail of "Go!". Although this weak cut-in image CI 3 b suggests that the reliability is lower than the gold cut-in image CI 3 but the jackpot is higher, it may also indicate that the reliability is not changed. . That is, in the example of the effect, the gold cut-in image CI3 which may be generated at the second check point CP2 is not displayed, and it is shown that the chance-up notice is not generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170 (A17), the red marking is not attached at the second check point CP2, and it is shown that a chance-up notice has not occurred above the second check point CP2. The display of “×” is displayed, and the history of no chance for raising a chance is indicated. In addition, it is not necessary to leave a history that no chance up notice occurred when no chance up notice occurred (for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a), the character SBH of Sabohani is the first check point) It is not necessary to pass CP1 as it is, and marking at the first check point CP1 and displaying of the character of "UP" may not be performed, and as shown in FIG. 30 (7a '), the display of the first check point CP1 is erased. Also, if a chance-up notice has not occurred, the history may or may not be left, which is the case in any of the embodiments described herein. Note that this weak cut-in image CI3b shown in FIG. 170 (A16) is an effect button 136 (chance button 136). It may be displayed on condition that it was operated within the operation effective period, or may be displayed whenever the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation effective period. The weak cut-in image CI3b shown in FIG. 170 (A16) may be displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated. When the operation effective period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), it may be displayed without fail, or the operation effective period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) If the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation effective period, it may not be displayed. When the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed when it is created, the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed when the operation effective period has elapsed.

  Thereafter, when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A18), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 170 (A19) has the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice. Instead, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A20), it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) by the player. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170 (A21), in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move and is located in front of the final point GP. Further, in the remaining time display meter MT, it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. Alternatively, the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or until the operation valid period elapses. In this example of presentation, the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice is not displayed, so no red marking is attached at the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT, and above the third check point CP3. The display of “×” indicating that the chance-up notice has not occurred is displayed, and the history that the chance-up notice has not occurred is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A22), the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136), but the operation of the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) is not performed. As shown in 170 (A23), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it becomes a lost as a combination of "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7" Is notified. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the character of "x" indicating that the placard is a loss is indicated, and the character SBH of Sabohani becomes a disappointed expression ing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (A24), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily displayed thinner than the normal density. Also, in the same figure, a scene in which the majesty falls is displayed. In FIG. 170 (A25), all the decoration symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed again in the normal density. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (B4) to FIG. (B8) are performed. In this production example, no chance up notice occurs at the third check point CP3, and the button image 136a is displayed, and although the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the result of loss is derived In this example of presentation, the presentation button 136 (chance button 136) is operated to operate various presentation movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23), and the result of the big hit is derived There may be cases. In addition, when no advance notice of chance up occurs at the third check point CP3, it may indicate that a loss has been decided. In addition, when the effect in this example of presentation is performed, there may be a case where it will be a loss or a big hit in the end, and in that case, a case where a loss display mode is finally displayed, The effect of this effect example may be configured to be more easily generated than when the big hit display mode is finally displayed.

  In this presentation example, only one of the three check points CP1 to CP3 is notified of a chance-up, and then it is shown that a loss has been derived, but any of the three check points CP1 to CP3 is shown. A chance-up notice may be made, and then a loss may be derived, or a lose-up may be derived without any chance-up notice being made at any check point. In addition, when the CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed, at least one chance up notice may be made to be always performed once or more, and even if the CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed, the chance improvement notice is also made once. May not occur, there may be one or more chance-up notices, or a chance-up notice may always occur at every check point. It goes without saying that this is applicable to any of the chance-up announcement effects embodiments disclosed herein.

  FIG. 171 is a diagram showing another pattern of chance up meter effects performed during the super reach effect. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 171 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects performed in FIG. 170 (A1) to (A2), so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (A3), it is shown that the flame effect EF 101 is erased and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. In this example of rendering, unlike the example of rendering shown in FIG. 170 (A3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohan character SBH is red, and the background color of the balloon is displayed in white. The chance-up notice is more likely to occur than that, and the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed. In the case where the background color of the balloon is red, chances-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example). There may be occasions when a chance-up notice occurs only at one or two of the checkpoints. Moreover, even if the background color of the balloon turns red, the chance-up notice may not occur once. In addition, when the background color of the balloon is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the background color of the balloon may be displayed in a color other than red or white, and for example, when displayed in a rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. Moreover, although the example which changes the background color of the balloon is shown in this presentation example, the shape of the balloon may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 171 (A4) to the same figure (A14) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A4) to (A14) are the same as FIGS. 170 (A4) to 170 (A14) except that the background color of the balloon is different, and thus the description thereof is omitted. .

  Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A15), as shown in FIG. 171 (A16), the gold shown in FIG. The cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Note that at this timing, the weak cut-in image CI3b, the red cut-in image (not shown), or the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed only when the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, and gold is displayed Only when the cut-in image CI3 is displayed, it is determined that the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed or the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even if the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed A notice indicating that a chance-up notice has occurred is displayed (for example, a balloon with the word “CHANCH-UP Golden Cut-in” in FIG. 171 appended thereto), and a weak cut-in image CI3b and a red cut-in image are displayed If it is determined or displayed, a notification indicating that a chance up has occurred is not displayed The red cut-in image may also be notified in the same manner as the gold cut-in image CI3. In that case, a notification indicating that the red cut-in image is displayed and a notification that the gold cut-in image is displayed May differ only in character notation, and may differ in other display modes (for example, a balloon). Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 171 (A16) to FIG. 171 (A26) are performed. In addition, since the rendition performed in the period of FIG. 171 (A16)-the same figure (A26) is the same as the rendition shown in FIG. 29 (13)-the same figure (26), description is abbreviate | omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A13) to FIG. (A15) are performed. In this effect example, even if the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A23), the various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 171 (A24) may not be operated and a loss may be derived. In that case, even if the big hit display mode is finally displayed in this case, the effect of this production example is more easily generated than in the case where the lost display mode is finally displayed. Good.

  FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

  FIGS. 172A1 to 172A3 are modifications of FIG. 171A3, and the CUM in-provision display MTYb shown in FIGS. 167A1 to A9 is displayed in another display mode. It shows how it is.

  FIG. 172 (A1) shows an effect following FIG. 167 (A2). FIG. 172 (A1) shows that the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTYb is displayed. CUM in preparation display MTYb shown in FIG. 172 (A1) is the same as CUM in preparation display MTYb shown in FIG. 167 (A3), but the background color is red and the background color of CUM in preparation display MTYb is The chance-up notice is more likely to occur than in the white case, and the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed. In the case where the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, chance-up notice may occur at all the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of presentation). There may be occasions when a chance up notice occurs only in one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb becomes red, there may be a case where the chance up notice does not occur even once. Further, when the background color of the CUM in-provision display MTYb is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the background color of the CUM-in-provision display MTYb may be displayed in a color other than red or white, and for example, when displayed in rainbow color, a big hit may be determined. Further, although the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is changed in this example, the shape of the CUM preparation display MTYb may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 172 (A2) to FIG. 172 (A3) are performed. Incidentally, the effects performed in the period of FIG. 172 (A1) to FIG. 172 (A3) are the effects shown in FIG. 167 (A3) to FIG. 167 (A9) except that the background color of the display MTYb during CUM preparation is different. Since it is the same as the above, the description is omitted.

  FIGS. 172 (B1) to 172 (B4) are modifications of FIG. 171 (A3), and show how the background color of the balloon changes while the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 172 (B1) is the same as FIG. 162 (A3), so the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 172 (B2), after the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed, the effect EF 107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in a red flame is displayed, and it is informed that the CUM in-provision display MTY is ranked up. It is done. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani, which is a component of the CUM-in-provision display MTY, effects that rank-up of the CUM-in-provision display MTY is being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (B3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the SABO-HANI character SBH changes from white to red, and it is informed that the CUM-in-provision display MTY has been ranked up. In this example of rendering, the color of the flame effect EF 107 is displayed in red in accordance with the background color of the balloon after rank increase, but may be displayed in colors other than red. In addition, the rank of the CUM in-provision display MTY after rank up may be notified by the display color of the flame effect EF107. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow color, the rank The background color of the balloon of the display MTY in preparation for CUM after up may also be changed to rainbow color, and it may be notified that the big hit is determined. That is, when the flame effect EF 107 is displayed in a rainbow color, it may be informed that the big hit is determined at that time. In addition, even if a notice of rank-up of the CUM in-provision display MTY by the effect EF 107 is notified, the CUM-in-provision display MTY may not be ranked up.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (B4), it is a modification of FIG. 171 (A4), and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. It is shown that the fluctuation display is performed. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed in red.

  FIGS. 172 (C1) to (C6) show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed.

  FIG. 172 (C1) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 162 (A3), and shows that the advance notice icon YI is stocked. The notice icon YI is displayed by any of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 120 to 147, for example.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 172 (C2), the notice icon YI of the embodiment a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is used, and the box changes to the embodiment d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation that pops up a preview of "UP" to announce the is displayed. The display of “UP” appearing here is a display for giving a notice of the rank increase of the display MTY in preparation for CUM. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates and the like, etc.) may be performed to give advance notice that the box is opened. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 172 (C3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display of "UP" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 172 (C4), the promotion animation using the preview display of "UP" is started. In FIG. 172 (C4), after the advance display of “UP” changes to the light ball EF 108 in the right symbol display area 208c, the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the saharan character SBH of the CUM preparation display MTY is disappointing It is shown that it is flying and flying into a balloon. In this example, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, or the promotion animation is in progress when the promotion animation is performed and the CUM in-provision display MTY ranks up. The CUM preparing display MTY may be ranked up without being notified. As described above, in this presentation example, the preliminary display is performed by an element other than the components of the CUM in-provision display MTY, and it is shown that the CUM in-provision display MTY is being ranked up.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (C5), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the SABO-HANI character SBH changes from white to red, and it is informed that the CUM-in-provision display MTY has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the display MTY during CUM preparation, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may change to another color. Also, in spite of the promotion animation being performed, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed, and a state in which the fluctuation variation display is performed is It is shown. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed in red.

  FIGS. 172 (D1) to (D3) show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 172 (D1) is the same as FIG. 162 (A3), so the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 172 (D2), after the CUM preparing display MTY is started to be displayed, the whole of the CUM preparing display MTY is covered with a large flame and the effect EF 109 is displayed, and the CUM preparing display MTY ranks up. Is reported. That is, in this presentation example, a preliminary display is performed by an element other than the components of the CUM in-provision display MTY, and it is shown that the CUM in-provision display MTY is being ranked up.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (D3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the sabotary character SBH changes from white to red, and it is informed that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the display MTY during CUM preparation, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may change to another color. In addition, even if a notice of rank-up of the CUM in-provision display MTY by the effect EF 109 is notified, the CUM-in-provision display MTY may not be ranked up. Also, as shown in FIG. 172 (D2 '), the color of the effect EF 109 of the flame may be the same color as the background color of the balloon of the display MTY in preparation for CUM after change (in this example, red). According to the above, the rank of the display MTY in preparation for CUM after rank increase may be notified. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 172 (D3 '), the color of the balloon of the CUM in-provision display MTY after rank-up may change to rainbow, and in this case, it is informed that the big hit is confirmed. Ru. Note that, as shown in FIG. 171 (A3), the color of the balloon of the CUM-in-provision display MTY may be displayed in a rainbow color from the beginning.

  FIGS. 172 (E1) to (E6) show effect patterns in which the background color of the balloon changes as a result of the timer advance notice being made while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 172 (E1) is the same as FIG. 162 (A3), so the description is omitted.

  In FIG. 172 (E2), the timer announcement effect is started. For example, the timer announcement display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. The timer display on this timer notice display TM1 is "03:00", and a notice is given 3 seconds after the timer display countdown is started (in this example, CUM in-progress display MTY ranks up) It is suggested that be done. Thereafter, the timer display countdown is started in the timer advance display TM1. That is, in this presentation example, a preliminary display is performed by an element other than the components of the CUM in-provision display MTY, and it is shown that the CUM in-provision display MTY is being ranked up.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 172 (E3) to (E4), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 172 (E5), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (E6), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the sabotarian character SBH changes from white to red, and it is informed that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the display MTY during CUM preparation, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may change to another color.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode during the preparation of the chance up meter.

  Figures 173 (A1) to (A7) show that the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is the pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed across multiple symbol variations. The effect pattern which ranks up in the case is shown. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 173 (A1) to FIG. 173 (A6) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 163 (C1) to FIG. 163 (C6), the description will be omitted.

  After that, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, as shown in FIG. 173 (A7), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed again, but in this presentation example, as a result of being displayed again, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. The background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH changes from white to red, and it is shown that the CUM-in-provision display MTY is ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the display MTY during CUM preparation, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may change to another color. For example, three background colors of white (default color), red (high hopeful degree), and rainbow color (big hit confirmed) are prepared as the background color of the balloon in this presentation example, and both before redisplay and after redisplay are provided. Patterns that do not change in white, patterns that do not change in red either before and after redisplay, patterns that do not change in rainbow colors before and after redisplay, and redisplay in white before redisplay After that, the pattern changes to red, the pattern changes to white after re-displaying and iridescent after re-display, the pattern changes to red after re-displaying and iridescent, and white at the first stage , And changes to red after the first redisplay, and is configured to be displayed in one of the display patterns that changes to the rainbow after the second redisplay. In addition, a display mode speech balloon that is an expectation degree between a white background speech bubble and a red background speech bubble, and a display that is an expectation degree between a red background speech bubble and an iridescent background speech bubble A balloon of the aspect may be prepared. In addition, there may be a display mode of the balloon that suggests that the background color of the balloon may change (for example, a balloon with a display mode of white blinking). This is applicable in any of the embodiments described herein.

  Figures 173 (B1) to (B8) show that the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is the pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed across a plurality of symbol variations. The other production | presentation pattern which ranks up in case is shown. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 173 (B1) to FIG. (B6) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 163 (D1) to FIG.

  In FIG. 173 (B7), after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the display of the effect EF 107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in a red flame is performed, and the CUM preparation display MTY ranks up. Is being reported. Note that the timing at which the display of the effect EF 107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in a flame is started and the rank-up effect of the display MTY in preparation for CUM is started is not limited to that described above, and may be started at an appropriate timing. For example, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol may be displayed, the final display of the decorative symbol may be displayed, or another reach effect may be performed. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY ranks up may be any timing described above.

  As described above, when the CUM in-preparation indication MTY rank-up effect is completed, the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH changes from white to red as shown in FIG. 173 (B8). , It is informed that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. In this example of rendering, the color of the flame effect EF 107 is displayed in red in accordance with the background color of the balloon after rank increase, but may be displayed in colors other than red. In addition, the rank of the CUM in-provision display MTY after rank up may be notified by the display color of the flame effect EF107. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow color, the rank The background color of the balloon of the display MTY in preparation for CUM after up may also be changed to rainbow color, and it may be notified that the big hit is determined. That is, when the flame effect EF 107 is displayed in a rainbow color, it may be informed that the big hit is determined at that time. In addition, even if the CUM in-provision display MTY in the CUM preparation process is produced by the effect EF 107, the CUM in-provision display MTY may not be ranked up.

  FIG. 173 (C1) to FIG. 173 (C4) show another display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY which has been ranked up.

  FIG. 173 (C1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 162 (A2), showing that the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 171 (A3), and the color of the meter portion constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is red. In the case where the color of the meter portion is white, chance-up notice is more likely to occur, and the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed. If the color of the meter portion is red, chances-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example). There may be occasions when a chance-up notice occurs only at one or two of the checkpoints. Moreover, even if the color of the meter part turns red, there may be a case where the chance-up notice does not occur even once. In addition, when the color of the meter portion is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the effect by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the color of the meter portion may be displayed in a color other than red and white, and for example, when displayed in a rainbow, a big hit may be determined. Moreover, although the example which changes the color of a meter part was shown in this presentation example, you may make it change the shape of a meter part. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 173 (C2) to FIG. 173 (C4) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 173 (C2) to FIG. 173 (C4) are the same as those in FIG. 171 (A4) to FIG. 171 (A6) except that the display mode of the display MTY during CUM preparation is different. Therefore, the explanation is omitted. In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 173 (C4), when the CUM-in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the meter portion turns white and the default display mode is obtained. Note that the color of the meter portion may be red even after being switched and displayed on the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 173 (D1) to FIG. 173 (D4) show another display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY which has been ranked up.

  FIG. 173 (D1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 162 (A2), showing that the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 171 (A3), and the color of the sabohani character SBH itself that constitutes the CUM in-provision display MTY. Has become red, and chance-up notice is more likely to occur than in the case where the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is the default color, and the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed. If the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of presentation), A chance-up notice may occur only in one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani turns red, there may be a case where no chance up notice occurs. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the color of the character SBH of the sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color, and for example, when displayed in a rainbow color, a big hit may be determined. Further, although this example shows an example of changing the color of the character SBH of Sabohani, the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. In addition, a character different from Sabohan's character SBH may be displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 173 (D2) to FIG. 173 (D4) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 173 (D2) to FIG. (D4) are the same as those in FIG. 171 (A4) to FIG. (A6) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the above. Therefore, the explanation is omitted. In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 173 (D4), when the CUM-in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the color of the sabo-hani character SBH becomes the default color, and the display mode is the default. The color of the character SBH of Sabohan may be red even after being switched and displayed on the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode during the chance up meter preparation display.

  FIG. 174 (A1) to FIG. 174 (A4) illustrate another display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY.

  FIG. 174 (A1) is an effect following, for example, FIG. 162 (A2), and shows that the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3), and the character SBH of the sabothani constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is a princess. The character HME is changed to the character HME of the princess in the case where the big hit symbol display mode is definitely displayed rather than the case where the big hit symbol display mode is displayed than in the case where the lost symbol display mode is definitely displayed. It is easy to be displayed. When the princess character HME is displayed, a chance-up notice may occur at all the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example). A chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the princess character HME is displayed, there may be a case where the chance-up notice does not occur even once. In addition, when the princess character HME is displayed, a chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the effect by the chance-up meter CMT. When the princess character HME is displayed, the big hit may be determined. Further, although the princess character HME is displayed instead of the Sabohan character SBH in this presentation example, a character different from the princess character HME may be displayed. In addition, the character displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY may be selected in advance by the player. For example, when the player sets in advance that the princess character HME appears, the CUM preparation is in progress. The princess character HME may be displayed on the display MTY, or when the appearing character is not selected, the sabothan character SBH may be displayed as the default character. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 174 (A2) to FIG. 174 (A4) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 174 (A2) to FIG. (A4) are the same as those in FIG. 171 (A4) to FIG. (A6) except that the display mode of the display MTY during CUM preparation is different. Therefore, the explanation is omitted. Note that, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 174 (A4), when the CUM in-progress display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the princess character HME is switched to the Sabohan character SBH. Note that the princess character HME may continue to be displayed even after being switched and displayed on the chance up meter CMT.

  FIGS. 174 (B1) to (B7) show another pattern of rank-up effect of the display MTY in preparation for CUM.

  FIG. 174 (B1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 162 (A2), and shows that the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 174 (B2), the button image 136 as of small size and the remaining time display meter MTs of small size start to be displayed in the vicinity of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the operation of the presentation button 136 (chance button 136) is urged. At the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B2), the operation effective period has not yet started.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B3), and in FIG. 174 (B4), the remaining time according to the elapsed time since the operation valid period is started. It is shown that the gauge of the display meter MTs is reduced. A plurality of button images may be displayed including the small-size button image 136as. In this case, the button displayed by one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) An operation corresponding to all of the images may be accepted, or only an operation corresponding to any one button image may be accepted. In addition, when the button effect relating to the execution of the advance notice and the button effect relating to the execution of the notice of the symbol variation display under execution (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “the change notice”) may be simultaneously performed, The operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect according to the change notice may be prioritized by the operation of the button 136 (chance button 136), or the effect corresponding to the button effect according to the advance notice. The operation of the button 136 (chance button 136) may be prioritized, or the effect button 136 (chance button) corresponding to the button effect relating to the change notice by the one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) 136) operation of the production button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect according to the operation and the pre-reading notice May be both are valid. Further, in the case where multiple button effects relating to the advance notice are performed simultaneously, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the effect button 136 (chance corresponding to the button effect relating to any one advance notice) Only the operation of the button 136) may be effective, or all the operations of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effects according to the plurality of pre-reading notices being executed may be effective. In addition, when a plurality of button effects relating to the change notification are being performed simultaneously, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effect relating to any one change notification. Only the operation of the (chance button 136) may be enabled, or all the operations of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effects relating to the plurality of the changing notices being executed may be enabled.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B5), as shown in FIG. 174 (B6), the effect EF 110 in which the balloon explodes is displayed. The animation is performed, and it is reported that the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect of rank increase of the CUM in-progress display MTY is performed by a button effect different from the component of the CUM in-provision display MTY. Note that the switching animation may not be performed.

  After that, when the explosion effect EF 110 is erased, the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH of the display MTY in preparation for CUM changes from white to red, as shown in FIG. 174 (B7) It is shown that the display MTY during CUM preparation is ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the display MTY during CUM preparation, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may change to another color. In this production example, the CUM in-provision display MTY is ranked up by operating the production button 136 (chance button 136) in the operation effective period, but the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Even if the operation effective period has elapsed, the CUM in-provision display MTY may rank up, or CUM preparation if the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated. The middle display MTY may not be ranked up. In addition, when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated, the CUM in-provision display MTY may or may not be ranked up. In addition, when the display of the button effect is performed as shown in FIG. 174 (B2), the CUM in-provision display MTY may be always ranked up.

  FIGS. 174 (C1) to (C6) show another pattern of the effect by the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 174 (C1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 171 (A5), showing that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of presentation, it differs from the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 171 (A5) in that four check points are arranged in the chance up meter CMT, and the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 The fourth check point CP4 is disposed between the That is, it is informed that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur when the SABOHANI character SBH as the cursor reaches the fourth check point CP4. In addition, when the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed in a ranked-up display mode, the chance increase in the number of checkpoints is greater than the default display mode of the chance display meter CMT shown in FIG. 171 (A5) The meter CMT may be easily displayed. In addition, when the CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed in a ranked-up display mode, the chance increase in the number of checkpoints is reduced as compared with the chance display meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171 (A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. In addition, the number of checkpoints in the chance up meter CMT is the same between when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the ranked up display mode and when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the default display mode. May be. In addition, when the CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed in a ranked-up display mode, the chance increase in the number of checkpoints is greater than the default display mode of the chance display meter CMT shown in FIG. 171 (A5). The meter CMT may be displayed without fail. In addition, when the CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed in a ranked-up display mode, the chance increase in the number of checkpoints is reduced as compared with the chance display meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171 (A5). The meter CMT may be displayed without fail.

  FIG. 174 (C2) shows that a chance-up advance notice occurs at the first check point CP1, and the character SBH of Sabohani advances on the meter.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (C3), when the character SAH of the SaboHani reaches the fourth check point CP4, an animation in which the cutting edge of the sword held by the lord is shining is started. That is, this chance is a chance up notice at the fourth check point CP4, and this chance up notice is more likely to occur in the case where the big hit design is displayed rather than the case where the lost design is displayed. It has become.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (C4), a balloon with the word "Chance up, good sword" is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a chance up notice is given. It is reported that. Note that the timing at which the animation of the shining tip of the sword starts may be the same as the display start timing of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani, or the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed after the animation of the shining tip of the sword starts. Alternatively, after the display of the balloon of the SABOHANI character SBH is started, the animation in which the tip of the sword shines may be started. Note that while the character SBH of SaboHani is stopped at the fourth check point CP4 during the execution of the animation in which the sword tip is shining, it may not be stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (C5), the fourth check point CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the jackpot reliability has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the contents of the generated notice may be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (C6), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible.

  In this example of presentation, the display mode of the character SBH of Sabohani and the chance up meter CMT is set as the default display mode in which the rank is not up. However, the meter portion of the character SBH of Sabohan and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. At least one of them may be displayed in a ranked-up display mode. In this case, the character SBH or meter part of Sabohani may be ranked up at the stage when the chance up meter CMT starts to display, and only the character SBH of Sabohani is ranked up at the stage when the chance up meter CMT starts to display There may be a case where the meter part ranks up while the chance up meter CMT is performing. In addition, at the stage when the chance up meter CMT starts to display, only the meter part may be ranked up, and the character SBH of Sabohani may be ranked up while the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is being performed. Moreover, it may be displayed in the display mode of rank up only when the chance up meter CMT starts to be displayed, so that rank up is not performed while presentation is being performed by the chance up meter CMT. It is also good.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram showing how the chance up meter ranks up during presentation by the chance up meter. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 175 (A1) to (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 170 (A1) to (A5), so the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 175 (A6) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this rendering example, the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT is displayed in red, which is a color that is ranked up from the default color white, at the timing when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. As a result, it is suggested that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at each check point, and finally, it will be likely to be clearly displayed in the jackpot symbol form. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 175 (A7) to FIG. 175 (A26) are performed. In addition, the display of the meter part of the chance up meter CMT in FIG. 175 (A6) and FIG. 175 (A7) becomes the same display mode. Also, the effects shown in FIG. 175 (A7) to FIG. (A26) are the same as FIG. 171 (A7) to FIG. (A26) except that the color of the meter part in the chance up meter CMT is different. , I omit the explanation. In addition, the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode (for example, default color, sabohani) when the big hit symbol mode is determined and displayed rather than the case where the lost symbol mode is determined and displayed. May be configured to be more easily displayed in a display mode (for example, red, princess character HME etc.) ranked up than the character

  FIG. 176 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the ranked up chance increase meter.

  FIG. 176 (A1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 175 (A5), showing that the display during CUM preparation MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this rendering example, at the stage when the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed, the color of the SABOHANI character SBH itself is red, and a chance up notice occurs than when the SABOHANI character SBH is the default color. It is easy to do, and the jackpot symbol form is easily displayed. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. If the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of presentation), A chance-up notice may occur only in one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani turns red, there may be a case where no chance up notice occurs. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the color of the character SBH of the sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color, and for example, when displayed in a rainbow color, a big hit may be determined. Further, although this example shows an example of changing the color of the character SBH of Sabohani, the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. In addition, a character different from Sabohan's character SBH may be displayed.

  FIG. 176 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 175 (A5), and shows another display mode of the ranked up chance increase meter CMT. In FIG. 176 (B1), the background color of the placard placed at the final point GP changes from the default color (for example, white) to red, which also causes the chance up meter CMT to be ranked up. Can be notified. At this time, for example, only the background color of a specific surface of the placard (for example, the surface on which “V” or “progress” is displayed) is changed to red, and the surface on which “x” is displayed is the default color The background color may be changed to red also on the surface on which "x" is displayed. Although the display mode of the final point GP is changed in this effect example, the display mode of the start point SP may be changed to notify that the chance up meter CMT has been ranked up.

  FIG. 176 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 175 (A5), and shows another display mode of the ranked up chance increase meter CMT. FIG. 176 (C1) shows that the second check point CP2 is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (square and white display mode). That is, it is shown that a display indicating that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is performed by changing the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, the display mode of the second check point CP2 is a round and red display mode, and, for example, it is notified that a chance-up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 necessarily occurs. Note that the display mode of the other check points may be changed to a mode in which the rank is increased. Further, in this example of presentation, the shape and color of the check point are changed, but only the shape may be changed or only the color may be changed.

  FIGS. 176 (D1) to (D2) show the effects corresponding to the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A10) to (A11), and the effects by the chance up meter CMT are started, and in this effect example , It is shown that the background color of the balloon of "START !!", which informs that the movement of the character SBH of Sabohan, is started is red, and thereby, the chance up meter CMT is ranked up The situation is suggested. The balloon of "START !!" is then erased as shown in FIG. 176 (D2). In this effect example, since the time when the balloon of "START !!" is displayed is short, it may be easy to make the player pay attention to the display of "START !!". In this effect example, after the balloon of "START !!" is displayed, it is erased when a predetermined time elapses, but when the balloon is a display mode in which the rank is upgraded, it is not erased, The display may be maintained as it is. Moreover, although the background color of the balloon is changed in this example of effect, the color of the character of the balloon may be changed. Also, the contents of the characters displayed in the balloon may change or may be written as they are.

  FIGS. 176 (E1) to (E6) show another example of effect following, for example, FIG. 175 (A5), corresponding to the effects shown in FIGS. 170 (A6) to (A11) .

  FIG. 176 (E1) shows that the CUM in-progress display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this rendering example, the sabotary character SBH that constitutes the chance up meter CMT is changed to the princess character HME, and thereby, it is informed that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. In the vicinity of the princess character HME, a balloon in which the characters “START !!” are displayed is displayed in a default display mode. Here, the character displayed in the CUM in-provision display MTY displayed before the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (E1) may be a sabothani character SBH or a princess character It may be HME or any other character. In this rendering example, the sabotary character SBH is displayed in the CUM-in-provision display MTY, and it is shown that the character is changed to the princess character HME when switched to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 176 (E2) to the same figure (E6) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 176 (E2) to (E6) are the same as those in FIG. 170 (A7) to (A11) except that the characters displayed in the chance up meter CMT are different. So I will omit the explanation.

  FIGS. 176 (F1) to (F7) show, for example, another example of presentation following FIG. 175 (A5), where the chance up meter CMT ranks up while the chance up meter CMT is performing an execution Is shown.

  FIG. 176 (F1) shows that the CUM in-progress display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this presentation example, it is shown that the notice icon YI is stocked. The notice icon YI is displayed by any of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 120 to 147, for example.

  FIG. 176 (F2) shows an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period from FIG. 176 (F1) to FIG. (F2), for example, the effects described above and shown in FIG. 175 (A6) to FIG. It has been done. Thereafter, in FIG. 176 (F3), after a chance-up notice occurs at the first check point CP1, the presentation proceeds, and it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is heading for the second check point CP2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (F4), the notice icon YI of the embodiment a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is used, and the box changes to the embodiment d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation that pops up a preview of "UP" to announce the is displayed. The display of “UP” that appears here is a display for giving a notice of the rank increase of the chance up meter CMT. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates and the like, etc.) may be performed to give advance notice that the box is opened. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 176 (F5), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 176 (F5), the promotion animation using the preview display of “UP” is started. In Figure 176 (F6), after the notice display of "UP" changes to a ball of light in the right symbol display area 208c, the chance up meter CMT flies away aiming at the chance up meter CMT, and it appears that the chance up meter CMT is bumped It is shown. At this time, the explosion effect EF 111 is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. In this example, the chance up meter CMT may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, or the promotion animation is conducted and the chance up meter is ranked up, and the promotion animation is not performed. The chance up meter CMT may be ranked up. Thus, in this example of presentation, it is indicated that the advance display is performed by an element other than the components of the chance up meter CMT, and the rank up of the chance up meter CMT is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (F7), the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT changes from white to red, and it is informed that the chance up meter CMT has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the chance up meter CMT, not only when the meter part changes from red to red, it may change to another color. In addition, although the promotion animation is performed, the chance up meter CMT may not be ranked up.

  FIGS. 176 (G1) to (G7) show, for example, another example of effect following FIG. 175 (A5), and show the situation where the chance up meter CMT is ranked up by the timer advance notice.

  FIG. 176 (G1) shows that the CUM in-progress display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT is set as the default display mode.

  FIG. 176 (G2) shows an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period from FIG. 176 (G1) to FIG. (G2), for example, the effects shown in FIG. 175 (A6) to FIG. (A10) and described above are performed. Thereafter, in FIG. 176 (G3), after a chance-up notice occurs at the first check point CP1, the presentation proceeds, and it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is heading for the second check point CP2. Further, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started. For example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. The timer display on this timer notice display TM1 is "03:00", and 3 seconds after the timer display countdown is started, there is a notice (in this example, the rank increase of the chance up meter CMT) It is suggested to be done. Thereafter, the timer display countdown is started in the timer advance display TM1. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the advance display is performed by an element other than the components of the chance up meter CMT, and the rank up of the chance up meter CMT is performed. The timer display countdown may be started after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, or may be started during the execution of the animation in which the timer notice display TM1 appears.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 176 (G4) to (G5), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 176 (G6), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed. In this effect, after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the character of "attention" is displayed and then rank increase of the chance up meter CMT is performed. When the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” without displaying the characters, the rank increase of the chance up meter CMT may be performed. In addition, when the character of "attention" is displayed and rank increase of chance up meter CMT is performed, the character of "attention" may not be displayed and rank increase of chance up meter CMT may be performed. Good.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (G7), the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT changes from white, which is the default color, to red, and it is informed that the chance up meter CMT has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the chance up meter CMT, not only when the color of the meter part changes from white to red, it may change to another color.

  FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of rank increase of the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 177 (A1) to (A7) show another example of effect following, for example, FIG. 175 (A5), where the chance up meter CMT ranks up during the execution of the effect up by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

  FIG. 177 (A1) shows that the CUM in-progress display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is set as the default display mode.

  FIG. 177 (A2) shows an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period of FIG. 177 (A1) to FIG. (A2), for example, the effects described above with reference to FIG. 175 (A6) to FIG. (A10) are performed. Thereafter, in FIG. 177 (A3), after a chance-up notice occurs at the first check point CP1, the presentation proceeds, and it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is heading for the second check point CP2.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 177 (A4), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani stops on the meter and the rank-up animation is started. When the rank-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 177 (A5), a smoke effect EF 112 is displayed so as to cover the entire character SBH of Sabohani.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (A6), the color of the character SBH itself of the sabo hani constituting the chance up meter CMT changes from the default color to red, and chances of advance notice are likely to occur, and the jackpot symbol It is suggested that the aspect is easily displayed. If the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of presentation), A chance-up notice may occur only in one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani turns red, there may be a case where no chance up notice occurs. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the color of the character SBH of the sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color, and for example, when displayed in a rainbow color, a big hit may be determined. Further, although this example shows an example of changing the color of the character SBH of Sabohani, the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. In addition, a character different from Sabohan's character SBH may be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (A7), the character SAH of Sabohani resumes the progress on the meter, and proceeds to the second check point CP2. In this presentation example, there may be a case where the display mode of the character SBH of Sabohani does not change despite the rank-up animation being performed.

  FIGS. 177 (B1) to (B8) show another example of presentation following FIG. 171 (A5), for example, a situation where the chance up meter CMT ranks up while the chance up meter CMT is performing an execution Is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 177 (B1) to FIG. (B2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 177 (A1) to FIG.

  FIG. 177 (B3) shows that a balloon with the character of “next point chance up effect high probability” is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohani character SBH traveling on the chance up meter CMT meter. There is. By the display of this balloon, it is informed that the chance-up advance is likely to occur at the second check point CP2 where the Sabo-Hani character SBH next arrives. In addition, for example, it changes to the balloon shown in FIG. 177 (B3), and as shown in FIG. 177 (B3 '), when the balloon with the character of "next point chance up production generation !!" is displayed In this case, it may be notified that a chance up advance notice necessarily occurs at the second check point CP2. In addition, as shown in FIG. 177 (B3 ′ ′), a balloon with the characters “Next point, chance up effect occurring?” May be displayed. In this case, the second check point In CP2, it can be suggested that a chance up notice may occur but may not occur. When the balloon shown in FIG. 177 (B3 ′ ′) is displayed, for example, the second check point CP2 is less likely to generate a chance-up notice than in the case where the balloon shown in FIG. 177 (B3) is displayed. It is also good. Further, by displaying only "during high probability" in the balloon, it may be suggested that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at any check point regardless of a specific check point. In addition, only the balloon with the character of "next point chance up effect high probability" in Fig. 177 (B3) may be displayed, and "next point chance up effect occurring" in Fig. 177 (B3 '). Only the balloon with the letter "" may be displayed. In addition, a balloon with the text “Next point chance up effect high probability” in FIG. 177 (B3) and / or a text “Next point chance up effect occurring!” In FIG. 177 (B3 ′) is attached. The displayed balloon may be displayed or may be displayed with the character of FIG. 177 (B3 ′ ′).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (B4), the display mode of the second check point CP2 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the chance-up (round and red display mode). That is, it is shown that a display indicating that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is performed by changing the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT. Note that a chance-up notice may always occur at a check point where the display mode changes and the rank is increased. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 177 (B5) to FIG. 177 (B8) are performed. Incidentally, the effects performed in the period of FIG. 177 (B5) to FIG. (B8) are the same as FIG. 171 (A12) to FIG. 171 except that the display mode of the second check point CP2 of the chance up meter CMT is different. Since it is the same as the effect shown in (A17) and described above, the description is omitted.

  FIGS. 177 (C1) to (C6) show another example of effect following, for example, FIG. 170 (A24), and show that a resurrection effect is being performed.

  Fig. 177 (C1) shows that as a result of the super reach being performed, the lord is defeated by the swordsman, and all the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed again in the normal density. There is.

  Thereafter, FIG. 177 (C2) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani at the final position GP notices something. That is, it is predicted that a resurrection effect will be generated by Sabohani character SBH.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C3), a resurrection cut-in PCI with the characters “Good luck !!” is displayed together with the princess character, and then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C4), it is displayed large. The character of the fallen lord YMN appears with a sword. At this time, the character of the lord YMN is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of a part of the chance up meter CMT, and it is considered that a part of the character is difficult to view. Note that a portion of the character of the lord YMN may be overlapped by the chance up meter CMT, and a portion of the character of the lord YMN may be made difficult to visually recognize. Also, the character YMN of the lord may be displayed at a position not overlapping the chance up meter CMT, and the character YMN of the lord and the chance up meter CMT may or may not overlap. In addition, when the character YMN of the lord appears, the character YMN of the lord and the chance up meter CMN may be sure to overlap. In this example, the resurrection cut-in PCI is displayed after being notified that the resurrection effect is generated by the Sabohani character SBH, but it is not notified that the resurrection effect is generated by the Sabohani character SBH. A resurrection cut-in PCI may be displayed, or a case where a resurrection effect occurs after anticipating that a resurrection effect is generated by the Sabohani character SBH, and a notice that a resurrection effect by the Sabohani character SBH occurs There may be a case where a resurrection effect occurs.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (C5), the character of the lord YMN cuts a sword from the upper left corner to the lower right corner of the display screen, and cuts the "decoration 6" as a middle pattern being stopped and displayed. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C6), the middle pattern is changed from "deco 6" to "deco 7", and the combination of the big hit decorative designs of "dec 7-decor 7-decor 7" is derived. It is informed that it became. At this time, the placard at the final point GP of the chance up meter CMT is changed from the display of “x” to the display of “V”, and also in this display, it is notified that it is a big hit.

  In this presentation example, for example, when the display is maintained without erasing the chance up meter CMT when the combination of the lost design symbols is derived, it is shown that the resurrection presentation is performed. In this case, there may be a case where the resurrection effect is not performed.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram showing that the ranked-up chance-up meter preparing display MTY is still displayed in the ranked-up display mode even after the chance-up meter CMT is switched.

  FIGS. 178 (A1) to (A5) show the effect following FIG. 175 (A3), and are switched to the chance up meter CMT in a state in which the color of the meter portion constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is red. In this case, it appears that the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 178A1 to 178A3 are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 173C1 to C3.

  FIG. 178 (A4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this rendering example, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation indication MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, it is shown that, when the CUM preparation display MTY is up, the chance up state is taken over even if the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 178 (A5) is performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 178 (A5) are the same as FIG. 175 (A7), the description is omitted.

  FIGS. 178 (B1) to (B5) show an effect following FIG. 175 (A3), where the chance-up meter CMT is displayed in a state where the color of the character SBH of the sabothani constituting the display MTY in preparation for CUM is red. When switched to, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 178 (B1) to (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 173 (D1) to (D3), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 178 (B4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of rendering, even if the display is switched from the MUM-in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabothani of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red. After that, as shown in FIG. 178 (B5), the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving from the start point SP in the state of the red display mode.

  FIGS. 178 (C1) to (C5) show an effect following FIG. 175 (A3), in which the princess character HME is displayed instead of the character SBH of the Sabohani character constituting the display MTY in preparation for CUM. When the chance up meter CMT is switched, it is shown that the character constituting the chance up meter CMT is also a princess character HME. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 178 (C1) to FIG. (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 174 (A1) to FIG.

  FIG. 178 (C4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the displayed character continues to be the princess character HME. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (C5), the character making up the chance up meter CMT starts to move from the start point SP while maintaining the princess character HME.

  It goes without saying that the effect example shown in FIG. 178 is applicable to any of the effect example of the CUM in-provision display MTY and the chance up meter CMT shown in the present specification.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the CUM in-provision display MTY is upgraded, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be more easily upgraded than when not upgraded. In addition, when the CUM preparation indication MTY does not rank up, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be more easily displayed in the default display mode than when the rank is increased. In addition, it is easier for CUM in-provision display MTY and / or chance-up meter CMT to rank up more easily in the case where the big hit symbol aspect is finally displayed in a final display than in the case where the lost symbol aspect is finally displayed. May be configured. For example, a pattern in which (1) CUM preparation display MTY is the default display mode and the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode, and (2) CUM preparation display MTY is the default display mode, the chance up meter A pattern that is a display mode in which CMT is ranked up, (3) A display mode in which a display MTY in preparation for CUM is ranked up, and a pattern in which a chance up meter CMT is a default display mode, (4) A display MTY in progress for CUM It is a display mode which is ranked up, and when a pattern which is a display mode which ranks up the chance up meter CMT is prepared, it is displayed with a pattern of (2) than when it is displayed with a pattern of (1). In the case of a big hit design is easier to be displayed in the form, putter of (3) In person when it is displayed in the pattern of even (4) than when displayed it may easily be determined displayed in big hit symbol manner. Also, the display in the case of the pattern of (3) may be easier to be determined and displayed in the big hit symbol mode than the case of the display in the pattern of (2), and the case of display in the pattern of (3) In the case of being displayed in the pattern of (2), it may be easier to be determined and displayed in the big hit symbol mode than in the case of (2). In addition, the display in the case of the pattern of (1) is easier to be determined and displayed in the lost symbol mode than the case of the display of the pattern of (2), and (3) In the case of being displayed in the pattern of), it may be easier to be determined and displayed in the lost symbol form. In addition, the display in the case of the pattern of (3) may be easier to be determined and displayed in the lost symbol mode than the case of the display of the pattern of (2), and the case of display in the pattern of (3) The display in the case of the pattern of (2) may be easier to be determined and displayed in the lost symbol mode than in the case of (2).

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of an effect for informing that the chance up meter preparation display is to be displayed.

  FIGS. 179 (A1) to (A8) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is notified in advance by means of a speech advance notice. In addition, since FIG. 179 (A1) is the same as the effect shown to FIG. 162 (A1), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 179 (A2), it is shown that the speech advance has been started. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped.

  After that, in FIG. 179 (A3), the conversation announcement is updated. Specifically, the tous-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size and is displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and a short conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the short characters. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation effective period It is comprised by the remaining time display meter MT showing the remaining time. At the timing shown in FIG. 179 (A3), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 179 (A3), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In this effect example, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is more likely to be displayed when the conversation announcement is given than when the conversation announcement is not given. In addition, the conversational image CI1 of the Tonosama may not be displayed in a reduced size when the speech advance notice is updated (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 179 (A2) is displayed). It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A. The effective period of operation of the presentation button 136 (chance button 136) is then started.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 179 (A4) is shown in the display mode when the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (A5) When the person presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136), as shown in FIG. 179 (A6), the message “standby !!” is displayed in place of the operation promotion notification image in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows May be As a result, it is notified that the CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed. In addition, the character display of the notice such as “standby !!” may be displayed on condition that the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the production button 136 (chance button 136) When the operation effective period has elapsed without being operated, the word “standby !!” may not be displayed by the conversation image CI2 of the user. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed either. A CUM preparation display MTY may also be displayed. Furthermore, even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated and the operation effective period elapses, the characters “standby !!” are displayed, and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is also displayed. Good. In addition, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, there may be a case where a character display other than “standby !!” or a notice is given. It should be noted that the “standby !!” is displayed even if the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated, only when the character “standby !!” is displayed by the conversation image CI2 of “K”. When characters are displayed and characters other than “standby !!” are displayed or notified by the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows, they are displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. It is also good. In addition, the character display and notice of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows are displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated regardless of the character indication and the notice in the speech image CI2 of the eyebrows Even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated, the character display or notice of the conversation image CI2 of the bag is displayed even if the operation effective period has elapsed. Good. This is applicable to any of the speech announcements described herein.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (A7), the tounama's conversation image CI1 and the conversation image CI2 of the whistle are erased, the conversation announcement is finished, the first decorative symbol is easily recognized, and the flame effect EF101 is It is displayed so as to cover the entire pending icon display area HIS. After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (A8), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 179 (A7) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A2) to (A3), and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 179 (B1) to (B5) show a state in which the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is notified by the effect display by the advance notice icon YI.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (B1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (B1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (B1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the reserve icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, for example, the notice icon YI appears in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 120 to 147 and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (B2), the notice icon YI of the embodiment a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is used, and the box is changed to the embodiment d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation in which the advance notice display SH pops up is displayed. The notice display SH of the Sabo Hani that has appeared here is a display for giving a notice that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates and the like, etc.) may be performed to give advance notice that the box is opened. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 179 (B3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and a notice display SH of Sabohani is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (B4), Sabohani's notice display SH is used, and while Sabohani's notice display SH is erased, the flame effect EF101 is displayed to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. Ru. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (B5), a CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 179 (B4) to (B5) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A2) to (A3), so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 179 (C1) to (C4) show a state in which the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is notified by the advance notice effect by the navigation character.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (C1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L illustrated in FIG. 179 (C1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (C1), the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the reserve icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, the navigation character YM by the character of the lord is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM performs various effects and notices in accordance with the progress of the game.

  In FIG. 179 (C2), it is shown that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. Specifically, when the navigation character preview is started, a balloon with the characters "standby !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (C3), the navigation character YM is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. The navigation character YM may not be deleted. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (C4), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 179 (C3) to (C4) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A2) to (A3), so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 179 (D1) to (D7) show a state in which the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is notified by displaying the result of the success of the mini game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the reserve icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is started in the effect icon display area DIS. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179 (D1), a rectangular mini game display area MGD is formed in the effect icon display area DIS, and in this mini game display area MGD, the title of the mini game is “Janken It is displayed that the character "confrontation" and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are facing each other. That is, it is shown that the mini game of the rock fight match is started in the mini game display area MGD.

  After that, in FIG. 179 (D2), the characters “〜” are displayed to notify that the result of the mini game is derived.

  FIG. 179 (D3) shows that the character "Pon" is displayed, and that the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are respectively taking a pose of rock-paper-scissors. Specifically, the character of the lord has put out "Choki", and the character of the swordsman has put out "par". Accordingly, the result is derived that the character of the lord has won the character of the swordsman. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (D4), in the mini game display area MGD, the characters “Yoshimou victory” indicating that the character of the lord has won are displayed, and then as shown in FIG. 179 (D5), While the swordsman character is erased, a balloon with the word "STANDBY!" Is displayed near the character of the lord, and it is predicted that the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (D6), the flame effect EF 101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. At this time, the mini game display area MGD is displayed, but may be deleted before the flame effect EF101 is started to be displayed, or at a timing when the flame effect EF101 is started to be displayed It may be erased, or may be erased after the flame effect EF 101 is started to be displayed. In addition, the mini game display area MGD may be displayed until the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (D7), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 179 (D7) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A3), the detailed description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 179 (E1) to (E3) show how the result of failure of the mini game is displayed. Here, FIG. 179 (E1) is an effect following FIG. 179 (D2).

  FIG. 179 (E1) shows that the character "Pon" is displayed, and that the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are respectively taking a pose of rock-paper-scissors. In this rendering example, the character of the lord has issued "Choki", and the character of the swordsman has issued "Go". Accordingly, the result is derived that the character of Tonosama defeats the character of swordsman. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (E2), in the mini game display area MGD, the characters “Yoshimune defeat” are displayed to indicate that the character of Tonosama was defeated, and then, as shown in FIG. 179 (E3), The mini game display area MGD is erased, and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not displayed. Here, although the flame effect EF 101 is displayed, an animation may be performed in which the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed. Also, although the character of the lord has been defeated, the flame effect EF 101 may be displayed, and then a CUM-in-provision display MTY may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, these preview effects for giving notice of the appearance of the CUM in-provision display MTY are performed, and finally the big hit symbol aspect is finalized and displayed in comparison with the case where the appearance of the CUM in-provision display MTY is not notified. It is suggested that it is easy to be done.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing another example of the effect of giving notice that the chance up meter preparation display is displayed.

  FIGS. 180 (A1) to (A6) show that an example of the on-hold change animation is being performed. Here, since FIG. 180 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description is omitted.

  In FIG. 180 (A2), the No. 1 shown in FIG. The "bomber" icon IHI of 4 appears at the right end of the screen, and the on-hold change animation is started. That is, the icon IHI of "bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the pending change animation, while the icon IHI of "bomber" flies from right to left, a bullet is fired (bombarded) with a pending icon. In addition, the icon IHI of "bomber" may be paused before the target holding icon. In addition, this pause may be pause of the cassette that disguises the target icon. Further, in the example of the effect, the letter "SP" is attached to the icon IHI of "bomber", and when the display mode of the hold icon changes, the display mode of the hold icon after the change is a preview notice of super reach preview It is suggested that it becomes a display mode which shows. In addition, when the holding change animation by the icon IHI of "bomber" is performed, the bombing on the holding icon may succeed and the display mode of the holding icon may always change, or the bombing on the holding icon fails. The display mode of the hold icon may not change.

  In FIG. 180 (A3), the white bullet icon is fired from the white bomber icon. That is, the icon "IHI" of "bomber" is composed of a white bomber icon and a white bullet icon. The goal here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 180 (A4), the bullet icon overlaps from the front side to the first reserved icon h11. In FIG. 180 (A5), the bullet icon hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF112. Then, in FIG. 180 (A6), the effect image EF 112 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the “SP” display mode for previewing that super reach is to be performed. As a result, by previewing and notifying that super reach will be performed, it is also indirectly previewed and notified that the chance up meter CMT and / or CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. In addition, even when super reach is performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the 1st pending icon h11 displayed on the display mode of "SP", the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed. In this rendering example, the occurrence of super reach is predicted by changing the display mode of the hold icon, and as a result, the prediction of the chance up meter CMT and the CUM in-provision display MTY is also indirectly performed. However, it is also possible to give an advance read advance notice of the super reach by holding icons or other types of read advance notices, and give an indirect read advance notice of the display of the chance increase meter CMT or the CUM preparation indication MTY By giving notice of the super reach in the symbol change display being executed by the change icon or other types of the change notices, it is possible to give an indirect notice of the display of the chance up meter CMT or the CUM preparation display MTY. It is also good.

  FIG. 180 (B1) shows a state of giving notice that the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed in the speech advance notice. FIG. 180 (B1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 179 (A2).

  FIG. 180 (B1) shows that the speech advance notice is updated. Specifically, the message image CI1 of the majesty is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and in this example, the character "STANDBY" together with the character of Sabohani, not the message image CI2 of the eyebrow Is displayed, the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani is displayed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by Sabo Hani's conversation image CIsh, the player can recognize that the special drawing is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the Sabohan conversation image CIsh or the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Also, as shown in FIG. 180 (B1), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the SaboHani's conversation image CIsh, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In this example of presentation, it is notified that the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed by displaying the Sabo Hani conversation image CI1 including the SaboHani characters that constitute the CUM in-provision display MTY. In addition, the conversational image CI1 of the Tonosama may not be displayed in a reduced size when the speech advance notice is updated (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 179 (A2) is displayed). It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A. Further, in the example of the effect, when the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani is displayed, the CUM in-provision display MTY may always be displayed, or the CUM in-provision display MTY may not be displayed. It is also good.

  FIGS. 180 (C1) to 180 (C3) show that the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is foretold in the conversation announcement, but the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed. Note that FIG. 180 (C1) is an effect following, for example, FIG. 179 (A2).

  FIG. 180 (C1) shows that the speech advance notice is updated. More specifically, the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and a short conversation image CI2 is displayed. In this demonstration example, instead of the display of the presentation button 136 (chance button 136) a and the remaining time meter, a character display with a question mark attached to the character of “standby” is performed on the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows It indicates that CUM preparation indication MTY may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (C2), the tounama's conversation image CI1 and the conversation image CI2 of the spear are erased, the conversation announcement is finished, the first decorative symbol is easily recognized, and the flame effect EF101 is It is displayed so as to cover the entire pending icon display area HIS. However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 180 (C3), the flame effect EF 101 is thereafter erased but the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not displayed. That is, it is shown that the CUM preparation indication MTY is not displayed, and that a conversation announcement of a cassette is given. The CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be displayed. In addition, this effect example is also applicable to pre-reading notices, and the pre-reading notice target pending for Gase (as a result, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed or the chance up meter CMT is not displayed either) or CUM preparation is in progress. It may be executed for each change until the change of the pre-read advance notice target hold displaying the display MTY.

  FIGS. 180 (D1) to (D2) show, for example, the state in which the display is in progress of the timer notice for giving notice that the timer notice is given by the timer notice display TM1 following FIG. 179 (A6). It shows.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the reserve icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this example of presentation, it is shown that an animation (frame in animation) in which the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen is performed.

  After that, when the frame in animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 180 (D2), the timer display is not displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the word "STANDBY" is displayed, and a notice that the timer notice is started. The display is being done. In addition, there may be a notice display that the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed instead of the notice display of the start of the timer notice. After that, on the timer notice display TM1, the display of "STANDBY" is switched to the display of time, and the timer notice is started. In addition, when a notice that “standby” is displayed is given by another notice display such as a conversation advance notice display, a CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be always displayed, and a CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. An in-provision display may be displayed to the effect that the display is in preparation for other effects such as an in-provision display for the timer announcement effect. The same applies to the effect examples shown in FIG. 180 (E1) to FIG. (E3) and in FIG. 180 (F1) to FIG. (F3).

  FIGS. 180 (E1) to 180 (E3) show that the timer preview is started without displaying the CUM in-provision display MTY after the flame effect EF 101 is displayed.

  FIG. 180 (E1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A2), and shows that the flame effect EF 101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS.

  Thereafter, when the flame effect 101 is erased, as shown in FIG. 180 (E2) to FIG. (E3), the timer notice display TMY rises from the lower side from the lower side of the hold icon display area HIS, and the timer notice display TMY. Shows that the hold icon display area HIS is lifted. At this time, the character "STANDBY" is displayed on the timer notice display TMY, and it is shown that the start of the timer notice is suspended. In addition, since the effect example shown to FIG. 180 (E2)-the figure (E3) is the same as that of FIG. 165 (E1)-the figure (E2), description is abbreviate | omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 165 (E3) and later are performed. In this rendering example, it is shown that a flame effect EF101 for previewing the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is used to foretell the start of the timer preview.

  FIG. 180 (F1) to FIG. 180 (F3) show that the chance button preparation display for notifying that the chance button effect is performed is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the reserve icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this example of effect, it is shown that the light effect EF 113 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS and the button image display animation is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 180 (F2), the button image 136a appears on the back side of the light effect EF 113, and then, as shown in FIG. 180 (F3), the light effect EF 113 is erased and The word "in preparation" is displayed above the button 136 (chance button 136) a, and it is notified that the chance button effect is started (chance button effect notification). In addition, since the operation effective period has not started, nothing happens even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. In addition, after the chance button effect announcement is displayed, the chance button effect is started, and as a result of operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in this chance button effect, the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. It is also good. In addition, after the light effect EF 113 is displayed, there may be a case where a display may be performed to notify that the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a chance-up notice is given at a check point not shown in the chance-up meter.

  Figs. 181 (A1) to (A7), for example, continue from Fig. 162 (A11), and in the presentation by the chance-up meter CMT, the chance-up notice (the sharp sword is displayed at a check point not shown on the meter). It shows that the notice is made). Note that the effects performed in the period of FIG. 181 (A1) to FIG. (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 170 (A6) to (A10), so the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 181 (A3) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is from the first check point CP1 to the second check point CP2, and is approximately at the midpoint between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2. There is. At this time, the cutting edge of the sword held by the character of the lord is sparkling and shows a sharp sharpness. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice (a sharp-up sword chance-up notice) is being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 181 (A4), the effect EF 114 is displayed at the position where the character SAH of the sabo hani in the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT is located, and the animation generating the fourth check point CP4 starts. Is shown. The fourth check point CP4 may be displayed without displaying the effect EF 114. For example, the fourth check point CP4 may be displayed by fade-in animation in which the fourth check point CP4 is faded in. You may Alternatively, the entire checkup signal CMT may be switched to be displayed without displaying a part of the check points increasing, and the fourth check point CP4 may be displayed on the switch after the changeover switch CMT. In addition, prior notification (preliminary notice) may be performed by displaying the fourth check point CP4 or the like before the chance up advance notice of the sharp sword starts.

  In FIG. 181 (A5), a balloon with the words “Chance up, good sword” attached is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohani character SBH to notify that a chance up notice has been made. The timing when the display of the blade edge of the sword starts to shine may be the same as the timing of the start of display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani, or after the display of the blade of the sword starts to shine, A balloon may be displayed, or a display may be displayed in which the cutting edge of the sword is bright after the display of the balloon of the sabohani character SBH is started. In addition, while the advance notice by the display in which the blade edge of the sword shines is performed, the character SBH of Sabohani may stop at the fourth check point CP4, but may not stop.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 181 (A6), the fourth check point CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the advance notice indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 181 (A7), the character SAH of the SaboHani starts to move and moves toward the second check point CP2. In this production example, the chance-up notice is given at the check points not shown on the chance-up meter CMT, but the chance-up notice is given only at the check points shown on the chance-up meter CMT. It may be done.

Figures 181 (B1) to (B7) show different presentation patterns in which a chance-up notice (a notice display of a sharp sword) is made at a check point not shown on the meter in the production by the chance-up meter CMT Is shown. Figure 181 (B1
Since the effects shown in Fig. 181 (B3) are the same as the effects shown in Figs. 181 (A1) through (A3), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 181 (B4) shows a state in which a balloon with the word "CHANNEL UP" is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, indicating that a chance up notice has been made. ing. In this example of presentation, although notification of the chance advance notice being performed is performed, the display of the check point corresponding to the chance up notice is not performed. In the chance up meter CMT, when a chance up advance notice is given at a point other than the point at which the check point is indicated in advance, the balloon for notifying the occurrence of the chance up may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 181 (B5), after the balloon has been eliminated, as shown in FIG. 181 (B6), the character SAH of the safohani starts to advance toward the second check point CP2. In this presentation example, the display of the check point is not performed, but the letter "UP" is displayed at the position of the meter corresponding to the timing when the chance-up notice is performed, and the reliability of the big hit is improved. Suggests that. Here, the display of “UP” is overlapped by the safari character SBH and is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state. In addition, the letter "UP" may not be displayed, for example, it corresponds only when the chance up notice occurs at the timing corresponding to the check point displayed in advance in the meter portion in the chance up meter CMT. The characters "UP" may be displayed at the position.

  FIG. 181 (B7) shows that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the second check point CP2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (9) and thereafter are performed.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram stepwisely showing another rendering example using the chance up meter.

  FIG. 182 (A1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 162 (A8). In the effect example shown in FIG. 182 (A1), the display mode of the chance up meter is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A9). Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa is configured in a green rod shape, and instead of the character SBH of Sabohani, the progress of the current reach effect is schematically notified by the position of the marker MRKa. At this time, the color of the advanced part of the marker MRKa in the gauge part changes from green to white. Further, the advancing speed of the marker MRKa is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. Further, in this presentation example, unlike the chance up meter shown in FIG. 31 (2 f), in the first check point CP <b> 1 a to the third check point CP <b> 3 a, marks of plain white circle display modes are displayed. As shown in FIG. 31 (2f), characters such as a question mark may be added to the mark and displayed. In this case, for example, the occurrence of the chance up notice is displayed by displaying characters such as “question mark”, “!”, “UP” letters / symbols, or notices related to chance up notice or high probability state, etc. It may be suggested that it is easy to do. In addition, in addition to the indication which indicates the possibility of the occurrence of a chance up notice or giving a notice such as “!”, “Question mark”, “heat” etc. in the mark, it is likely to occur a chance up notice. It is also possible to give notice of the ease of the big hit with the suggestion of The start and end points are also indicated by the beginning and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa.

  FIG. 182 (A2) shows that the marker MRKa starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, FIG. 182 (A3) shows that the marker MRKa has reached the first check point CP1a. At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the first check point CP1a. Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (A4), it is shown that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. In addition, the mark of the first checkpoint CP1a is erased. The mark of the first check point CP1a may be deleted at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the first check point CP1a, or the mark may be deleted before the marker MRKa reaches the first check point CP1a. The mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a. Also, the mark may be deleted before the appearance of the Boy's character BOY, or the mark may be deleted at the timing when the character BOY of the Boyy appears, or the mark may be deleted after the appearance of the Boy's character BOY. It may be done.

  When the character BOY of Boi appears, as shown in FIG. 182 (A5), a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY PASS !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKa, and a chance up notice is given. Is notified. It is to be noted that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A5) to FIG. 182 (A6), the character MR of the character appears in the marker MRKa, and at least while the balloon is displayed, the marker MRKa stands by at the first check point CP1a.

  Thereafter, FIGS. 182 (A7) to (A8) show that the marker MRKa has started to move. At this time, in place of the display of the mark at the first check point CP1a, the letters "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has been increased due to the appearance of the advance notice are displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. Note that the character BOY of the boy is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A8).

  Thereafter, when the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A9), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in FIG. 182 (A10), and the button effect is started. . At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the second check point CP2a. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A10), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, any effect is displayed. I can not do it. Thereafter, the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started, and the state where the player can operate the effect button 136 (chance button 136) can be received.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 182 (A11) shows that the gauge is decreasing with the start of the operation effective period, and then the player at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A12) A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (A13), the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. That is, in the example of the effect, the gold cut-in image CI3 which may occur at the second check point CP2a is not displayed, and it is shown that the chance-up notice has not occurred.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (A13), the mark of the second check point CP2a is erased, but the character "UP" is not displayed in the gauge portion. Here, a display may be made to notify that a chance-up advance has not occurred, or may not be displayed. The mark of the second check point CP2a may be deleted at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a, or the mark may be deleted before the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a The mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the second checkpoint CP2a. Further, the mark may be deleted before the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark may be deleted at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark is deleted after the button image 136a is displayed. May be Further, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the mark may be deleted after the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Also, the mark may be deleted before the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, or the mark may be deleted at the timing when the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. After that, the mark may be deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 182 (A14), the marker MRKa starts moving from the second check point CP2a, and as shown in FIG. 182 (A15), when the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3 a At 182 (A16), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va as the chance-up notice, and it is notified that the notice by the button effect is started. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A17), in the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has started to move and is located in front of the final point. Further, in the remaining time display meter MT, it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. Note that the marker MRKa may be stopped at the third check point CP3a until the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation valid period elapses. In this example of presentation, since the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice is not displayed, at the third check point CP3a in the chance up meter CMTa, the mark is erased and the character of "UP" is not displayed in the gauge portion .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A18), the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136), but the operation of the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) is not performed. As shown in 182 (A19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle pattern, and it becomes a lost as a combination of “decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7” Is notified. The chance up meter CMTa also shows that the marker MRKa has reached the final point GP. The mark of the third checkpoint CP3a may be deleted at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a, or the mark may be deleted before the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a. The mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a. Further, the mark may be deleted before the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark may be deleted at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark is deleted after the button image 136a is displayed. May be Further, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the mark may be deleted after the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Also, the mark may be deleted before the middle symbol is displayed, or the mark may be deleted at the timing when the middle symbol is displayed, or even if the mark is deleted after the middle symbol is displayed. Good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A20), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily displayed thinner than the normal density. Also, in the same figure, a scene in which the majesty falls is displayed. In FIG. 182 (A21), all the decoration symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed again in the normal density. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (B4) to FIG. (B8) are performed. In this production example, no chance up notice occurs at the third check point CP3a, the button image 136a is displayed, and the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, but the result of the loss is derived In this example of presentation, the presentation button 136 (chance button 136) is operated to operate various presentation movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23), and the result of the big hit is derived There may be cases. In addition, when no advance notice of chance increase occurs at the third check point CP3a, it may indicate that a loss has been determined.

  182 (B1) to (B6) show another effect pattern that continues from FIG. 182 (A1). The effect shown in FIG. 182 (B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 182 (A2), and after the effect shown in FIG. 182 (B1) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 182 (B2) is a line The effects to be performed before being played are the effects shown in FIG. 182 (A2) to FIG. (A9).

  FIG. 182 (B2) shows that the marker MRKa has reached the second check point CP2a and the button effect is started. Moreover, in this demonstration example, the "super" part of the display of the characters of "super hot !!!" is displayed on the part corresponding to the second check point CP2a of the gauge part in the chance up meter CMTa It is shown. That is, in this demonstration example, in the gauge part of the chance up meter CMTa, in addition to the indication of "UP" indicating that the chance up notice is performed, the indication of the change notice ("super !!!" is displayed It is shown that) may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 182 (A9) to FIG. (A13) are performed. During this time, the word "severely !!!!" is continuously displayed in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa, and as the gauge changes from green to white in accordance with the progress of the marker MRKa, "severely! The letters "!" Will gradually appear. After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (B3), the characters "super heat !!!" will be completely displayed. By looking at this, the player may be able to further improve the expectation for becoming a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 171 (A19) to FIG. (A23) are performed. It goes without saying that at this time, the chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 182 (B3) is displayed in place of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 171 (A19). In the case where a chance-up notice occurs in FIG. 171 (B2), a part or all of the characters of "super heat !!!" overlap due to the display of "UP" indicating that the chance-up notice is performed. It may be done.

  Then, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player in the lever effect, as shown in FIG. 182 (B4), the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd and the one-and-two box effect article 224H are activated. Light is emitted from the light guide plate IL, and an effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is informed that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTa is not displayed but may be displayed.

  After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first to fourth large-screen behavior characters 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-man box character 224H are returned to their initial positions, and the effect image is faded out in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. Although the chance up meter CMT is also faded in with the fade in of the animation display of the duel scene, the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the fade in of the animation display of the due battle scene is completed. . Note that this operation is performed, for example, in the manner described above with reference to (38) to (44) of FIG.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (B5) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the hostile swordsman has an appearance of dying out, and appears to be defeated even now. Further, in the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has reached the final point. Further, in the example of the effect, since the chance-up notice that the lever image 136Va is displayed at the third check point CP3a has occurred, the characters “UP” are displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. In this effect example, it is shown that the entire volume displayed on the gauge portion of the marker MRKa is made visible for the first time at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (B5). As shown in FIG. 182 (B5), the display at the gauge portion of the marker MRKa may be erased at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene is resumed, or the chance up meter CMTa itself may be erased. The same applies to the case where the result of loss is derived.

  After that, in FIG. 182 (B6), the main character of the main character wins over the sword player of the enemy role, and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that it becomes a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A13) to FIG. (A15) are performed.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram showing another pattern of presentation using the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 183 (A1) to (A6) show other effect patterns of the effects shown in FIGS. 182 (B1) to (B6).

  FIG. 183 (A1) shows that the marker MRKa starts moving from the start point. In this presentation example, unlike the presentation example shown in FIG. 182 (B1), it is shown that the progressed part of the marker MRKa in the gauge part changes from green to white, not to rainbow. This rainbow display is a notice display of the big hit decision, and it is informed that the big hit decision is made by changing the gauge part to rainbow color. In this example of rendering, the advanced part of the marker MRKa in the gauge shows an example changing from green to iridescent, but may change to another color, and the changing color changes the reliability of the big hit You may do it. For example, the advanced portion of the marker MRKa may be prevented from changing from green to green so that the big hit design may be more easily displayed than when changing to white, or from green to red or gold. May be Also, a pattern may appear on the advanced part of the marker MRKa. Moreover, in this example of presentation, a big hit is made in the display mode of the progressed part of the marker MRKa, but, for example, a notice regarding the chance up is given, such as suggesting the ease of occurrence May be performed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 183 (A2) to FIG. 183 (A6) are performed. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 183 (A2) to FIG. (A6), the color of the advanced part of the marker MRKa is different, and the character of "super heat !!!" Since this example is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 182 (B2) to FIG. 182 (B6) except for the point that it is not included, the description will be omitted.

  Fig. 183 (B1) to Fig. (B16) show another example of the effects shown in Fig. 162 (A1) to Fig. (A15), and in the chance up meter CMTc, the timing at which the chance up notice occurs It does not indicate clearly, but it shows a state that the number of occurrence is reported.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 183 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYa is different from the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3), and the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 183 (B1) is FIG. 162 (A3) It extends above the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 1 and is also disposed above the gauge, and an information display area capable of displaying character information is formed below. In this information display area, the number of times a chance-up notice occurs or a big hit notice may be given. After that, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A3) to FIG.

  FIG. 183 (B2) shows an effect corresponding to FIG. 162 (A8). The effects shown in FIG. 183 (B2) are the same as those in FIG. 162 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTYa is different, so the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 183 (B3) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this example of presentation, the check point is not displayed on the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTc, and it is difficult to recognize the timing at which the chance up advance notice occurs and the number of times it may occur. Further, the chance up meter CMTc also extends upward as in the case of the display MTMa in preparation for CUM, and the gauge is also disposed upward, and an information display area is formed below the gauge.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (B4), the letters “3 more places” are displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, and the occurrence timing of the chance up notice is not clear, but 3 chance ups It is informed that there is a possibility that a notice may be made. Also, FIG. 183 (B4) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani, which functions as a cursor, has started moving. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. This balloon is then erased as shown in FIG. 183 (B5).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (B6), it is shown that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy.

  Then, in FIG. 183 (B7), a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY PASS !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and it is informed that a chance up advance notice has been made. That is, the player may be able to understand that this timing is the first check point. In addition, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the display is changed to the characters “two more places”, and it is informed that there is a possibility that the chance up notice may occur twice more. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the appearance of the Boy's character BOY, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area at the timing of the appearance of the Boy's character BOY. The display of may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the appearance of the character BOY of Boye. In addition, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the balloon display of the sabothan character SBH is displayed, or the information display is performed at the timing when the balloon display of the sabothan character SBH is displayed. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the area may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the balloon display of the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed.

  After that, in FIG. 183 (B8), the first check point CP1 marked in red is displayed at the position corresponding to the timing when the chance-up notice occurs, and the reliability of the big hit is raised by the appearance of the notice. The word "UP" is displayed above it to indicate that a chance-up notice has occurred. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is partially overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the contents of the generated notice may be displayed.

  FIG. 183 (B9) shows an effect corresponding to FIG. 171 (A19). In addition, in this production example, although not particularly illustrated, a gold cut-in image CI3 which is a second chance-up notice is displayed in the above-described manner, and a position corresponding to the timing at which the gold cut-in image CI3 The second checkpoint CP2 and the letters “UP” marked in red are displayed, and the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc is also changed to “one more place” ing.

  After that, in FIG. 183 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed near the sabo hani character SBH, and chance up notice by the lever effect is started. It is reported that At this time, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is changed to “0 more places”, and it is informed that there is no possibility of occurrence of further chance up notice. There is. In addition, there may be a case where a chance-up notice may occur after “0 more places” is displayed. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the lever image 136Va is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area at the timing when the lever image 136Va is displayed. May be changed, or after the lever image 136Va is displayed, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 183 (B11), in addition to the lever image 136Va, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and the lever effect is started. At this time, the third check point CP3 marked in red is displayed at the position corresponding to the timing when the chance-up notice occurs, and "UP" indicates that the jackpot's reliability has been raised by the appearance of the notice. The letter “” is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance up notice. At this time, the display of the number of times of occurrence of the chance-up notice "other 0 places" displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is erased. Note that the display may be continued without erasing the display of “0 more places”. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 183 (B11), the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V has not yet started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the player can receive the operation of the effect lever 136V.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 183 (B12) shows that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, the player at the timing shown in FIG. 183 (B13) When the production lever 136V is operated, as shown in FIG. 183 (B14), the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-area behavior article 224Gd and the one-sided box article 224H are activated to emit light from the light guide plate IL, An effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is informed that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTc is not displayed but may be displayed.

  After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first to fourth large-screen behavior characters 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-man box character 224H are returned to their initial positions, and the effect image is faded out in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. This operation is performed, for example, in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 17 (38) to FIG. (44).

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (B15) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the hostile swordsman has an appearance of dying out, and appears to be defeated even now. Further, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character SAH of the SaboHani reaches the final point GP, and the placard indicates the letter “V” indicating that the jackpot will be made. Also, in the information display area, "Congratulations!" Is displayed, and it is congratulated that the big hit will be derived. In addition, it is not necessary to display "Congratulations!". In addition, when the result of the loss is derived, for example, a character such as "sorry" may be displayed to display a display for comforting the player, and no display may be performed on the information display area. May be Further, for example, when performing a resurrection effect as shown in FIG. 177 (C1) to FIG. You may suggest something.

  After that, in FIG. 183 (B16), the main character of the hero wins over the swordsman of the enemy role, and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A13) to FIG. (A15) are performed.

  FIG. 184 is a view showing a modified example of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183.

  Fig. 184 (A1) to (A3) show the display for giving a notice of the number of occurrences of the chance advance notice in the information display area in the CUM in-provision display MTYa shown in (B1) to (B2) in Figs. An example is shown. Specifically, in the CUM in-provision display MTYa shown in FIG. 184 (A1), the letters “three more places” are displayed in the information display area provided below the gauge portion, and the chance up meter CMTc is used. It has been reported that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur three times in the stage effect. Note that the number of times of notification in the information display area and the number of occurrences of the chance-up advance notice may always coincide or may not coincide with each other. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 184 (A2) to FIG. 184 (A3) are performed. Incidentally, the effects performed in the period shown in FIG. 184 (A1) to FIG. (A3) are the same as those in FIG. 162 (A3) to FIG. (A8) except that the display mode of chance increase meter CMTc is different. Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  According to this presentation example, for example, when the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs is fixed for each super reach, it may be possible to estimate the type of super reach to be developed. Also, for example, in the case where the number of times the chance-up notice occurs is displayed as a different number depending on the reliability of the big hit, it is possible to estimate the reliability of the big hit against symbol variation that causes super reach. There is a possibility.

  The effect shown in FIG. 184 (B1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 183 (B4). In FIG. 184 (B1), in addition to the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the check points CP1 to CP3 are displayed to notify the occurrence timing of the chance up notice. There is. As described above, part or all of the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs may be notified by the chance-up meter CMTc, and the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be notified. Instead of the display shown in FIG. 183 (B4), a display as shown in FIG. 184 (B1) may be performed.

  Figures 184 (C1) to (C4) do not indicate the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, and foretell that the chance-up notice may occur It shows the situation. In this case, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be displayed.

  FIG. 184 (C1) shows that the character SBH of Sabohan who functions as a cursor has started to move. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. This balloon is then erased as shown in FIG. 184 (C2). In this presentation example, the presentation is different from the presentation shown in FIG. 183 (B4) to (B5), and the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up advance notice is not performed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc.

  In FIG. 184 (C3), in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, a display with a question mark attached along with “appears BOY is coming” is performed, and the character COY of Boye is at the timing corresponding to the first check point CP1. It is informed that there is a possibility that a chance up notice may occur due to the appearance of. That is, in this example of presentation, although the timing is not clear, it is indicated that it is notified that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur. In addition, it may be made to notify only that there is a possibility that the chance up notice may occur, without notifying the contents of the chance up notice that occurs particularly.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 184 (C4), it is shown that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. In addition, even when the display of "Boo will appear soon" is displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the character BOY of Booui is not displayed, and there may be a case where a notice of a case where a chance up notice is not generated is performed. It is also good. In addition, it may be notified that there is a possibility that a different kind of chance-up notice may occur from the chance-up notice due to the appearance of the boy's character BOY at the timing when the boy's character BOY is displayed. In the case, for example, the jackpot may be finalized, or there may be a case where it is not for the chance to be notified, but it may be a forerunner of the cassette.

  In FIG. 184 (C5), a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY !!” appended is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH to notify that a chance up advance notice has been made. At this time, the characters “Boothing BOY has appeared” in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc are erased. The display in the information display area may be deleted before the Boy's character BOY is displayed, or may be deleted at the timing when the Boy's character BOY is displayed, or the Boy's character BOY is displayed. It may be erased later. In addition, the display in the information display area may be deleted before the balloon of the safari character SBH is displayed, may be deleted at the timing when the balloon is displayed, or is deleted after the balloon is displayed. It may be done. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 183 (B8), the display of the first check point CP1 or the display of “UP” may be performed to display the history of the occurrence of the chance-up advance notice. In addition, while a part or all of the timing which a chance up notice generate | occur | produces is alert | reported by the chance up meter CMTc, before the chance up advance notice corresponding to the timing alert | reported by the chance up meter CMTc is performed, As such, a display may be made to notify that a chance-up notice such as “Boy will appear soon” will occur in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc. That is, when the check point is displayed, "Boy will appear soon" may be displayed before the timing at which the character BOY of the boy is displayed.

  FIGS. 184 (D1) to (D5) show another effect pattern of effects following FIG. 183 (B8), informing that the number of occurrences of the chance-up advance notice increases in the effect by the chance-up meter CMTc It shows how the production is being performed. In addition, since the effect shown to FIG. 184 (D1) is the same as the effect shown to FIG. 183 (B8), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Subsequently, FIG. 184 (D2) shows that the effect (smoke effect EF115) causing smoke is displayed in front of the character SAH of Sabohan who travels toward the final point GP.

  After that, when the smoke effect EF 115 is erased, as shown in FIG. 184 (D3), the character CHM of Princess Chibi appears, and as shown in FIG. A balloon with the text “1 UP!” Is displayed, and it is informed that the number of times the chance-up notice occurs may increase by one. In addition, while the production which increases the occurrence frequency of the chance up notice by Chibi princess character CHM is performed, the character SBH of Sabohani is stopped and displayed, but the occurrence frequency of the chance up notice by Chibi princess character CHM It may be progressing while the effect of increasing the is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 184 (D5), when Chibi princess character CHM is erased, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice displayed in the information display area of chance-up meter CMTc indicates “two more places. It changes to "three more places" from "", and it is alert | reported that a chance up notice may occur three more times. Note that the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated before the balloon of the character CHM "1 UP!" Of the character CHM is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice at the timing when the balloon is displayed. The display may be updated, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated after the balloon is displayed. In addition, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated before the character CHM of Chibi princess is deleted, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated at the timing when the character CHM of Chibi Princess is erased. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated after the character CHM of Chibi princess is deleted. In addition, since the character SBH of Sabohani is stopped and displayed while the effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice by the character CHM of Princess Chibi is being displayed, the character SBH of the Sabohani is compared with the progress of the actual super reach. Since the position of is behind and is delayed, then the character SBH of Sabohani accelerates and effects showing that it is in a hurry or warping the character SBH of Sabohani to cope with the progress of the actual super reach For example, the display position may be changed to the desired position, or the display end of the display position of the Sabohani character SBH may be aligned, or the display end of the display position of the Sabohani character SBH may not be adjusted.

  In this example of rendering, the character CHM of Princess Chibi, who performs only renderings related to the chance up meter CMTc, is made to appear to increase the number of occurrences of the chance up notice, but the other components of the chance up meter CMTc By using an element (e.g. Sabohani character SBH), for example, an effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be performed in the same manner as the rank-up effect described above. In addition, other elements that do not constitute the chance up meter CMTc may be configured to increase the number of occurrences of the chance up notice, for example, to increase the number of occurrences of the chance up notice by the timer notice described above. Alternatively, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased by the effect of the notice icon YI, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased by the result of the mini game, as shown in FIG. The number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased by the effect using the navigation character YM shown in C1). In addition, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice to be increased is not limited to one, but may be two or more, and for example, "0UP!" It may be done. This is applicable also when the chance point is displayed.

  FIG. 185 is a diagram showing another effect pattern of effects using the chance up meter shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. In FIG. 185 (A1), the CUM in-provision display MTYa shown in FIG. 183 (B1) is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the reserved icon display area HIS, which is considered to be difficult to view. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A1), the suspension of the special view 1 is one, and “1” and “0” are displayed in the second suspension number display. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is No. 1 in FIG. It is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, for example, the notice icon YI appears in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 120 to 147 and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. Further, in the example of the effect, the characters “meter × 1” are displayed in the information display area of the CUM in-provision display MTYa, and it is predicted that the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is performed once. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the display in which the stock number of the meter is displayed in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa functions as the preparation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185 (A2), the notice icon YI of the embodiment a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is used, and the box is changed to the embodiment d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation that pops up a preview of "UP" to announce the is displayed. The notice display of "UP" that has appeared here is a display for giving notice of an increase in the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates and the like, etc.) may be performed to give advance notice that the box is opened. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 185 (A3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display of "UP" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 185 (A4), the promotion animation using the preview display of “UP” is started. In FIG. 185 (A4), after the notice display of “UP” is changed to the ball EF 116 of light in the right symbol display area 208c, the information display area of the display during MUM preparation CUM is flew away and the information display area It is shown that a portion of “1” indicating the number of times in “meter × 1” is in collision. At this time, the entire CUM preparation display MTYa may be in a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the portion of “1” in “meter × 1” is an aspect that is difficult to visually recognize. In this production example, the number of developments of the rendering using the chance up meter CMTc may increase without the promotion animation being performed, or the number of developments of the rendering using the chance up meter CMTc is performed with the promotion animation There may be a case where there is an increase, and there may be a case where the number of developments of presentation using the chance up meter CMTc increases without the promotion animation being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 185 (A5), the display of “meter × 1” in the information display area becomes “meter × 2”, and the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is developed once and can be performed twice It is informed that there is sex. After that, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A3) to FIG.

  The effect shown in FIG. 185 (A6) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 183 (B2), and the contents of the effect are the same except that the display in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is different, so I omit it.

  FIG. 185 (A7) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this presentation example, even if the CUM in-provision display MTYa is switched to the chance up meter CMTc, the number of developments of the presentation using the chance up meter CMTc is still displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc. Also, in FIG. 185 (A7), when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, the display of “meter × 2” in the information display area becomes “meter × 1” and the chance up meter CMTc It is shown that the first presentation used was started. It should be noted that the display of "meter x 2" in the information display area may be switched to "meter x 1" before the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, or the CUM in-provision display MTYa is up After the display is switched to the meter CMTc, the display of “meter × 2” in the information display area may be switched to “meter × 1”. Further, in this presentation example, similarly to the presentation shown in FIG. 162 (A9), the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are displayed, and the displayed number of times and the timing of display of the chance-up notice are shown. ing.

  FIG. 185 (A8) shows that the character SBH of Sabohan which functions as a cursor has started to move. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. Note that the balloon of "START !!" may not be displayed. In addition, "START !!" may or may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 185 (A9), the display of the placard at the final point GP is displayed as a "question mark", and when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP, the presentation using the chance up meter CMTc can be developed It suggests that there is sex. After that, for example, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to FIG. (16) are performed.

  After that, in FIG. 185 (A10), the same effect as that in FIG. 29 (17) is performed. The display of placards at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMTc is still the display of the "question mark".

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A11), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect as a notice of chance increase is not started The situation is shown. Therefore, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 185 (A10) to FIG. 18 (A12), the character SBH of Sabohani passes the third check point CP3 as it is, and the third check point Neither the marking in CP3 nor the display of the character of "UP" is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A11), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has not yet started. The effective period of operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is then started, and the player can receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

  Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 185 (A12) shows that the operation effective period is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMTc, Sabohani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A13) within the operation valid period, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A14), A message is displayed that the victory and defeat will not be decided, along with the message that the character of the lord and the swordsman of the enemy character have "removed ...". In addition, in the chance up meter CMTc, the placard at the final point GP is displayed with the character "develop", and it is informed that the reach effect is developed. Along with this, it is suggested that the presentation by the chance up meter CMTc develops and the second presentation is started.

  After that, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the Tonosama character shown in FIG. 185 (A15), as shown in FIG. 185 (A16), there is an effect that the panda character appears as a helper in Kagoshima reach. Is started. Further, in the chance up meter CMTc, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani rides on a flying carpet and travels toward the start point SP. At this time, it is assumed that the effect by the chance up meter CMTc is developed and the second effect is performed, and the display of “meter × 1” in the information display area is changed to “meter × 0”. The display in the information display area may change before the cut-in image CI4 is displayed, or the display in the information display area may change at the timing when the cut-in image CI4 is displayed. The display in the information display area may change after the image CI4 is displayed. In addition, the display in the information display area may change before the effect of the panda character appears as a helper, or the information display area may occur at the timing when the effect of the panda character appears as a helper starts The display in may change, or the display in the information display area may change after the effect that the panda character appears as a helper is started. Further, the display of “meter × 1” may be deleted without changing the display to “meter × 0”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185 (A16) to FIG. (A18), the display is changed in which the chance up meter CMTc is changed while being overlapped by the SABOHANI character SBH on the way to the start point SP. Do. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 185 (A17), for example, a part of the chance increase meter CMT after the change appears and the sixth check point CP6 appears due to the movement of the character SAH of Sabohani, and the sixth check point CP6 appears, as shown in FIG. 185 (A18). As shown in, the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears.

  In FIG. 185 (A18), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is again located at the start point SP. At this time, the fifth check point CP5 and the sixth check point CP6 are displayed before the change in the chance up meter CMTc (the state in which the red marking is not attached and the letter “UP” is not displayed either) It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMTc, the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is started.

  After that, FIG. 185 (A19) shows that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP Ken-Age Reach is a reach where the Ken-Achi reach develops and shifts, and it is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when it does not develop from a Ken-A-Kai reach to an SP-Ken-Age reach. In SP Ken-Age Reach, as shown in Figure 185 (A19), it is the same as the pre-developed Ken-A-Ok reach in that the main character of the main character and the enemy of the main character fight against each other, but follows the panda as a helper of the main character. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in FIG. 185 (A19), a chance-up notice showing that the copanda cheering party KPD 48, which is composed of three copanda characters, is cheering at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fifth check point CP5. It is reported that the credibility against the big hit of the SP Kensetsu reach has been dramatically increased. The copanda cheering party KPD 48 may always appear in the SP swordswoman reach, or may not appear. After that, for example, the effects are performed in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 30 (31 b) to FIG. (34 b), and thereafter, for example, when the effect lever 136 V is operated, FIG. An effect is performed in the above-described manner as shown in FIG. 28 and it is informed that a big hit will be made. In addition, it may be notified that it becomes a loss.

  In this example, CUM is being prepared to perform an increase in the number of times of development using the chance up meter CMTc by an element different from the components of the CUM in-provision display MTYa and the chance up meter CMTc. An effect of increasing the number of times of development of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc may be performed using the display MTYa or a component of the chance up meter CMTc (for example, the character SBH of Sabohani). Alternatively, the number of times the chance up meter is displayed may be stocked and displayed. Also, in this example, the number of displayed chance up meters CMTc corresponds to the number of times the super reach is developed, but the chance up meters CMTc are displayed during the variation display of the decorative symbol, or the super reach It can be applied to the case where there are a plurality of scenes in which the chance up meter CMTc is started to be displayed, such as being displayed when transitioning to. In addition, when execution of the performance by the chance up meter is stocked, there may be a case where it is used all or only a case where it is used partially, or when execution of the performance by chance up meter is stocked by multiple In addition, it may be configured to be completely used.

  FIG. 186 is a diagram gradually showing an example of the advance notice using the chance-up meter in-progress display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (A1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (A1), the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display mode of the reserve icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 186 (A2) to FIG. 186 (A5) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 186 (A2) to the same figure (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 163 (C2) to the same figure (C5) except that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is different, I omit explanation. In addition, as shown in FIG. 163 (D4) to the same figure (D5), the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed also during temporary stop display and stop display of a symbol, or during temporary stop display of a symbol and stop There may be both the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and the case where it is not displayed during the display. The same applies to the cases shown in FIG. 186 (A10) to FIG. 186 (A11). This is also applicable in any of the embodiments described herein.

  In FIG. 186 (A6), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started. In addition, the move animation of the reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the first reserve icon h11 (the reserve icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) arranged in the first stage hs1 The second holding icon h12 disposed on the second stage hs2 is moved to the first stage hs1 and displayed as a first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 186 (A7) to FIG. 186 (A8) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 186 (A7) to FIG. (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 163 (C6) to FIG. I omit explanation.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 186 (A9), the light effect EF 117 is displayed at the position corresponding to the second check point CP2, and it is shown that the check point appearing animation is being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 186 (A10), the light effect EF 117 disappears, and a second check point CP2 appears. As described above, in this presentation example, it is shown that a check point for notifying of a timing at which a chance-up notice occurs is displayed while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. In this production example, only some of the check points (second check point CP2) among the check points displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, but the chance up meter All the check points (the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3) of the check points displayed on the CMT may be displayed on the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY. Further, in this example of rendering, the component (gauge portion) of the CUM in-provision display MTY is used to effect that a check point appears, but an element other than the CUM in-provision display MTY (for example, the above The check point may be made to appear by the effect using the notice item YI, the mini game, the timer notice, etc.).

  After that, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 186 (A11), it is determined by combining the decorative symbols of "Holiday 6-Honda 4-Haunt 1" Is displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon is erased. In addition, in this demonstration example, the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed during the final display of the decorative symbol, but the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed while the decorative symbol is in the final display. May be

  Thereafter, the suspension (first suspension) of Special Figure 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first Special Figure Display Device 212 is started, the procedure shown in FIG. 186 (A2) After the flame effect EF101 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 186 (A12), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed again. At this time, the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed in the display mode in the previous symbol variation display, that is, the mode in which the second check point CP2 is displayed. After that, for example, after effects similar to the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A4) to FIG. (A7) are performed, the effects shown in FIG. 186 (A13) are performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 186 (A13) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY is different, the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 186 (A14) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the first check point CP1 and the third check point CP3 which have been hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY appear. It is to be noted that an effect that appears newly at this timing may also be performed at a check point (second check point CP2) that has already appeared in the CUM-in-provision display MTY. In addition, before the display switches from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, a check point hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY may appear, or the chance is raised from the CUM preparation display MTY. A check point which has been made non-display in the CUM preparing display MTY may appear at the timing when the display switches to the meter CMT, or CUM after the display is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. A checkpoint that has been hidden in the preparation display MTY may appear. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 186 (A15) to FIG. 186 (A16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 186 (A15) to FIG. (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A10) to FIG.

  As described above, in this effect example, continuous announcements in which the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed are performed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display, and CUM in-progress display MTY is in progress during execution of the continuous announcement by the CUM in-provision display MTY. The effect of making the check point appear is performed, but the continuous announcement by CUM in-provision display MTY is not performed, and the effect that CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed is performed only in the symbol variation display under execution. It is also good. In this case, during the execution of the pseudo-series effect, as described above, an effect may be performed in which a check point appears on the CUM in-provision display MTY. Further, in addition to the effect of appearing check points in the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY, there may be a case where an effect of deleting the appearing check points may be performed. In addition, in the effect where the check point appears, the chance-up notice corresponding to the appeared check point may be always performed, or the case where the chance-up notice corresponding to the appeared check point is not performed is performed There may be. Also, all checkpoints may appear. This is the effect example shown in FIG. 165 (F1), and the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A1) to FIG. (A3), FIG. (B1), FIG. (C1), and FIG. (D1). Is also applicable.

  FIG. 187 is a diagram for explaining another display pattern of the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 187 (A1) to (A15) show another example of presentation following FIG. 162 (A7), in which the marker MRKb is displayed as a cursor in addition to the character SBH of the sabo hani on the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

  FIG. 187 (A1) is an effect following, for example, FIG. 162 (A7), and shows a state of transition to super reach effect. In the lower left portion of the display screen, a CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed.

  Thereafter, FIG. 187 (A2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this rendering example, a marker MRKb formed of an inverted triangle is also displayed at the foot of the character SAH of the character SAH in addition to the character SBH of the character SaboHani as a cursor. That is, it is shown that the progress of the super reach is displayed by two cursors. Although the character SBH of Sabohani is partially overlapped with the marker MRKb, it may be displayed at a position where the marker MRKb does not overlap with the character SBH of Sabohani (for example, below the gauge). In this rendering example, the marker MRKb moves in synchronization with Sabohan's character SBH. After that, in the period shown in FIG. 187 (A2) to FIG. (A15), for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (26) is performed. The effects performed in the period shown in FIG. 187 (A2) to FIG. 187 (A15) are the same as FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. 26 (26) except that the marker MRKb is displayed on the chance up meter CMT. The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the above.

  In this example of rendering, the marker MRKb and the character SBH of Sabohani move in synchronization, for example, an animation in which the character SBH of Sabohani stands by at a checkpoint during execution of a button effect or a lever effect (for example, While an animation indicating a non-progressing state is being performed by stepping or the like, the marker MRKb may be made to advance, and there may be a period in which the marker MRKb and the sabothani character SBH do not move synchronously. Alternatively, one of the marker MRKb and the SABOHANI character SBH may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the other may be displayed at a position not corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect. In addition, the marker MRKb may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach production, and the character SBH of Sabohani may be warped to a check point to give notice of the occurrence of a chance up notice corresponding to the warped check point. . Also, if a chance up advance notice does not occur at a certain check point, then the Sabohani character SBH warps to a checkpoint at a position corresponding to the chance up advance notice that did not occur, and corresponds to the check point It may be made to indicate that the jackpot's reliability has been raised by assuming that the chance-up notice has occurred. Further, in this example of presentation, an example of the case of a big hit has been described, but also in the case of a loss, the marker MRKb can be displayed in the same manner. In this case, for example, there may be a case where the resurrection effect starts without reaching the marker MRKb and / or Sabohani character SBH final point GP. In this example, the sabotary character SBH is displayed as the CUM in-provision display MTY and the marker MRK is not displayed, but the marker MRK is displayed while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed, and the sabothani character is displayed. The SBH may not be displayed, and the Sabohan character SBH and the marker MRK may be displayed while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. Further, (1) a pattern in which only the sabotary character SBH is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, (2) a pattern in which only the marker MRK is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, and (3) a sabothani in the CUM preparation display MTY. In the case where there is a pattern in which both the character SBH and the marker MRK are displayed, the case of (1) may be present, the case of (2) may be present, or the case of (3). It is also good. Also, there may be a case of (1) or a case of (3). Also, there may be the case of (1) or the case of (2).

  FIGS. 187 (B1) to (B11) show another effect pattern following FIG. 167 (A7).

  FIGS. 187 (B1) to 187 (B2) are, for example, effects following FIG. 162 (A7), and show a state of transition to super reach effect. In the lower left portion of the display screen, a CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed.

  Thereafter, FIG. 187 (B3) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this presentation example, the configuration of the gauge in the chance up meter CMT is different from that shown in FIG. 162 (A9). Specifically, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 187 (B3), only one check point (second check point CP2) is displayed, and the display mode of the final point GPa is also different. That is, in this presentation example, the final point GPa does not correspond to the timing at which the result of the symbol variation display is derived, and the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is started and ended during the super reach presentation. There is. In other words, in this presentation example, it can be said that there is shown an example in which the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is performed informing the timing at which the chance up advance notice is given only for a certain period during the super reach presentation.

  FIG. 187 (B4) shows that the Sabohan character SBH functioning as a cursor has started to move. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that presentation by the chance up meter CMT is performed in a period from the start to the end of the button presentation. In the example of the effect, the period from the start point SP to the second check point CP2 corresponds to the operation effective period in which the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is received. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (B4), the operation valid period has not yet started, and the operation valid period is then started.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 187 (B5), it is shown that the operation effective period is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is moved to the position corresponding to the time after the start of the operation effective period.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (B6), as shown in FIG. 187 (B7), the gold shown in FIG. The cut-in image CI3 is displayed. At this time, the Sabohan character SBH accelerates to the second check point CP2 regardless of the display position. The second check point CP2 may be warped. Although the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed, it may not be displayed. Further, in the example of the effect, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation effective period, but, for example, the character SBH of Sabohani advances on the gauge When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated at the timing of reaching the check point (for example, the second check point CP2), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and it deviates from the timing of reaching the check point When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated at the specified timing, the gold cut-in image CI3 may not be displayed, and instead of the gold cut-in image CI3, the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed It may be done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (B8), a balloon with the word “chance up gold cut-in” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. It is informed that a notice has been made by the display of an image. Note that while the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second check point CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, it may not be stopped. Further, in this presentation example, the timing at which the sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 may be the same as the timing at which the button presentation is started, and the sabohani character SBH may be used as the second check point CP2. After reaching the button effect may be started, or after the button effect is started, the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2. Further, in this example of presentation, the second check point CP2 indicates the point at which the chance-up notice occurs, but the final point GPa may indicate the point at which the chance-up notice occurs. In that case, the final point GPa may not be reached, and when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GPa, a chance up notice occurs, and the SABOHANI character SBH does not reach the final point GPa. , You may not notice the chance up. Alternatively, the final point GPa may be reached without fail. In this case, a chance-up notice may occur whenever the Sabohan character SBH reaches the final point GPa, or even when the final point GPa is reached. There may be cases where no chance up notice occurs.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 187 (B9), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit is increased by the appearance of the advance notice. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  After that, the character SAH of the SaboHani starts moving, and FIG. 187 (B10) shows that the final point GPa has been reached. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (B11), the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the super reach effect is continuously performed.

  In this presentation example, the presentation with the chance up meter CMT is performed in a part of the super reach period, but it is not in a period other than the super reach (for example, a part period in the normal reach or a reach state You may make it carry out in the one part period in a symbol change display.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram for explaining an example of presentation of a chance up meter performed in another super reach.

  FIGS. 188 (A1) to (A16) are, for example, another presentation example following FIG. 16 (24), and a princess reach presentation different from the sword strike as an example of the above-mentioned super reach is performed. It shows how it is.

  FIG. 188 (A1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 16 (24), which shows transition to super reach.

  FIG. 188 (A2) shows a state in which the princess reach which is an example of the super reach is started. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the title display of "May be there ...", which is a song sung by the princess character, is performed, and the first decorative symbol is in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is shown moving to the department.

  After that, FIG. 188 (A3) shows that the princess character appears and dances, and a band-like lyric display area slightly below the center of the display screen so as to overlap with the front side of the princess character. LYC is disposed extending to the left and right. Then, in the lyric display area LYC, the lyrics of the song sung by the princess character are displayed horizontally and a triangular marker MRKc is displayed below the lyrics, and the marker MRKc is displayed according to the progression of the song. It is configured to move in the right direction, and notifies the timing of singing out and the like. In the lyric display area LYC shown in FIG. 188 (A3), “but true kindness” is displayed, and the “excellent” character of those is displayed in bold and large size compared to the other characters. There is. That is, in this example of presentation, it is suggested that a chance-up notice may occur at the timing when the princess character sings the "excellent" part. In other words, it can be said that the word "excellent" has the function of the check point in the above-mentioned chance up meter CMT. In this example, the lyrics indicate the timing of occurrence of a chance-up notice, but, for example, in the speech in the speech advance, the display mode of a specific character is made different from the other characters, and the voice according to the speech is output Alternatively, it may be suggested that a chance-up notice may occur at the timing when the voice corresponding to the specific character in the speech is output.

  FIG. 188 (A4) shows that the marker MRKc moves in accordance with the song of the princess character. After that, in FIG. 188 (A5), the upper and lower frames of the lyric display area LYC change from white, which is the default display mode, to red at the timing when the princess character sings the "excellent" part. Is shown.

  Then, in FIG. 188 (A6), a balloon in which a letter of “chance up lyric frame is red” is added in the vicinity of the “excellent” letter is displayed to notify that the chance up notice has been performed. Note that a balloon may be displayed at a timing when the display mode of the lyric display area LYC changes, or a balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the lyric display area LYC changes, or the display of the lyric display area LYC A balloon may be displayed before the aspect changes. Note that the lyric frame may be ranked up in the order of white> red> golden> rainbow color, or it may be ranked up by skipping one or more ranks such as white to golden. In this case, the expectation of the big hit is high in the order of rainbow color> gold color> red color> white, and in the case of the rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. In addition, the changing aspect may be notified (for example, to make "excellent" red, etc.) by characters notifying the timing such as "excellent". Further, in this example of presentation, although the case where the chance-up notice occurs is one point has been described, there may be a plurality of points where the chance-up notice occurs. Further, depending on the color of the lyric frame, the point at which the chance-up notice occurs may change even with the same reach. Further, regardless of the color of the lyric frame, the points at which the chance-up notice occurs may be the same.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 188 (A7), the marker MRKc continues to move in accordance with the song of the princess character, and shows the timing at which the phrase “but the real kindness” is finished singing. In this production example, the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice is displayed only while displaying the phrase displayed when the chance-up notice occurs, but when the chance-up notice occurs. The history of chance advance notice may be displayed even after switching from the phrase displayed in to another phrase, for example, the phrase for which chance up notice occurred is the lyc display area LYC It may be displayed in another display area to indicate the type of chance-up notice that has occurred, the number of times the chance-up notice has occurred may be displayed, and the type of the chance-up notice that has occurred. It may be displayed explicitly or implicitly.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 188 (A8), the display of the lyrics in the lyrics display area LYC is switched, and the phrase “may be there” is displayed, and these characters are all in the same display mode.

  FIG. 188 (A9) shows the timing at which the marker MRKc moves in accordance with the song of the princess character and has finished singing the phrase “May be there”.

  Then, in FIG. 188 (A10), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the final judgment effect by the button effect is started. Also, when the button effect is started, the lyrics display area LYC is once erased. At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A10), the operation valid period has not yet started, and the operation valid period is started thereafter. The lyrics display area LYC may be displayed as it is.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 188 (A11), it is shown that the operation effective period is reduced.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A12), the lyrics display area LYC is displayed again in FIG. 188 (A13), and the lyrics are displayed. In the area LYC, the phrase “I do not know” is displayed, showing that the final judge presentation has succeeded. Thereafter, when the marker MRKc moves along with the song of the princess character and the phrase "Known" finishes singing at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A14), the marker MRKc is also located on the right of the phrase "Known". It will be. If the player loses the game, for example, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed, the screen is darkened, and the song can not be sung to the end, and the effect display in which the final judgment effect is failed is performed It will be.

  FIG. 188 (A15) shows that the lyric display area LYC is erased and the song is completely singed. After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (A16), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that it will be a big hit.

  Fig. 188 (B1) to Fig. (B11) show another example of presentation following Fig. 162 (A8), for example, and advance notice that a chance up notice occurs during execution of the presentation by the chance up meter CMT. It shows how to inform.

  FIG. 188 (B1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 162 (A8), showing that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 188 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached while the character SBH of Sabohani moves, a specific advance notice may occur. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. Further, in this example of effect, the treasure box TRG is displayed above the second check point CP2 in the gauge portion. The treasure box TRG indicates that the Sabohani character SBH is released when it is close, and there is a possibility of giving notice of the occurrence of a chance-up notice. In the period shown in FIG. 188 (B1) to FIG. (B2), for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (7) is performed.

  FIG. 188 (B3) shows that the Sabohani character SBH starts moving and then approaches the treasure chest TRG. Then, as shown in FIG. 188 (B4), the treasure chest TRG is opened, and the character “UP” appears from the treasure chest TRG. As a result, at the second check point CP2, it is predicted that a chance-up notice will be generated by the display of the gold cut-in image CI3. In this example, the treasure box is opened before the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 to give notice of the occurrence of the chance-up notice, but it reaches the second check point CP2. The treasure chest TRG may be configured to open. That is, the appearance of the treasure box TRG at the second check point CP2 may inform that the chance-up notice is likely to occur.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 188 (B5), it is shown that the treasure box TRG is erased together with the characters "UP", and the character SBH of the sabothani continues to go to the second check point CP2. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 188 (B6) to the same figure (B11) are performed. In addition, since the effects performed in the period of FIG. 188 (B6)-the same figure (B11) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 29 (9)-the same figure (16), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this example, the treasure box TRG is opened and the letter "UP" appears so that it is notified in advance that a chance-up notice will occur at the timing when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the corresponding check point. For example, with the occurrence of a chance-up notice, it may be notified that it becomes a more reliable aspect. In addition, an icon may be made to appear from the treasure box TRG indicating the content of the chance-up notice that may occur at the timing when the Sabohan character SBH reaches the check point where the treasure box TRG is arranged, for example, A treasure box TRG is placed at one check point CP1, and when the treasure box TRG is opened, an icon of the face of the character BOY of the boy appears and a chance for the boy to appear the boy of the boy will be notified. It may be possible to give notice.

  FIG. 189 is a view for explaining a modified example of the effect by the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 189 (A1) to (A6) show how a plurality of chance-up notices occur at one check point.

  FIG. 189 (A1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 29 (1). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 189 (A1) to the same figure (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 29 (2) to the same figure (3), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 189 (A3), it is shown that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side at the timing when the sabo-hani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. Further, in this effect example, the copanda character KPD appears from the right end of the display screen, and a chance-up notice is also given due to the appearance of the copanda character KPD. Here, the copanda character KPD overlaps the sword-master character in the super reach presentation. The copanda character KPD may be overlapped with the sword character. Here, the character KPD of the copanda may appear after the appearance of the character BOY of the boy, or the character BOY of the boy may appear after the appearance of the character KPD of the copanda, or with the character of the boy BOY. The copanda character KPD may appear simultaneously.

  Then, in FIG. 189 (A4), a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY PASS !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and above it, the characters “CANCER UP copanda appeared !!” are displayed. The added balloon is also displayed, and it is notified that two chance-up notices have occurred at the first check point CP1. In addition, the balloon of "chance up BOY passing !!" and the balloon of "chance up copanda appearance !!" may be displayed at the same time, or after the balloon of "chance up BOY passing !!" is displayed. A balloon may be displayed for "chance up copanda appearance !!", or a balloon for "chance up BOY passing !!" may be displayed after the "chance up copanda appearance !!" balloon is displayed. The balloon of the Sabohan character SBH may be displayed after the appearance of the Bowie character BOY and the copanda character KPD, or during the appearance of the Bowie character BOY and the copanda character KPD (for example, while displaying the appearance animation). It may be displayed, or may be displayed before the appearance of the boy character BOY and the copanda character KPD. In addition, while the advance notice based on the display of the character BOY of the Boy and the character KPD of the copanda is being performed, the Sabohan character SBH may stop at the first check point CP1, but may not stop. Also, for example, it may be notified that a plurality of chance-up notices have occurred by one balloon, such as "chance-up BOY passing! And copanda appearance !!".

  FIG. 189 (A5) shows that the character BOY of the boy and the character KPD of the copanda are erased by the animation of the frame out, and the balloon of the character SBH of the sabothani is also erased. Note that the balloon may be deleted after the character BOY of the boy and the character KPD of the copanda are deleted, or the character BOY of the boy and the character KPD of the copanda may be deleted after the balloon is deleted. The balloon may be deleted while the character BOY of the boy and the character KPD of the copanda are deleted (during displaying of the animation of the frame out). Also, the character of Sabohani has started moving on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 189 (A6) is performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 189 (A6) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (8), the description will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. In this example, even if multiple chance-up notices occur, only one letter “UP” is displayed, which indicates that the chance-up notice has occurred, but the number corresponds to the number of the chance-up notices that occurred. "UP" (in this rendering example, two "UP" displays) may be displayed.

  Fig. 189 (B1) to (B7) show that when there is a check point for which no chance up notice has occurred in the production by the chance up meter during super reach, then the chance up notice is performed at the check point. It shows an example of an effect to be considered. In the period from FIG. 189 (B1) to FIG. (B2), for example, effects similar to the effects shown in FIG. 170 (A6) to FIG. (A17) are performed.

  After that, when the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (B3), as shown in FIG. 189 (B4), the pause icon PSE overlaps a part of the chance up meter CMT at the front Is displayed on. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is paused by the icon PSE of the pause being superimposed on the chance up meter CMT. Note that the temporary stop may be displayed by part or all of the components of the chance up meter CMT.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (B5), the effect of super reach is interrupted, and a cut-in indicating that the princess character says "Rewrite reach" is displayed. The display of the cut-in is, for example, a notice that the reliability of the big hit is improved by assuming that effects of other contents are performed for the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display. Note that the display of this cut-in is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance improvement directly related to the chance up meter CMT. In addition, in this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed along with the pause icon PSE even during the period when the display of the princess's cut-in is displayed, but the pause icon PSE and chance up meter CMT are displayed. It may be hidden. Further, the pause icon PSE may be displayed to display the cut-in of the princess before the effect by the chance up meter CMT is paused. In this case, for example, the cut-in of the princess is displayed The chance up meter CMT is hidden during a certain period, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed with the pause icon PSE displayed when the princess's cut-in display ends and the super reach effect is resumed. An effect in which the effect by CMT is temporarily stopped may be performed. In addition, during the period when the pause icon PSE is displayed, the effect of super reach is suspended while the effect is not stopped by the chance up meter CMT, and the character SBH of Sabohani may be advanced. The presentation of the super reach may not be paused, and the presentation on the chance up meter CMT may be paused. Moreover, when the display of the cut-in by the princess character is performed, the pause icon PSE may be displayed and the effect may be paused or may not be paused, for example, paused In the case where it does not stop temporarily, it is possible to make the big hit design feature easy to stop fixedly. In addition, the progress of the super reach production is advancing than the position of the character SBH of Sabohani shown in the chance up meter CMT, and by displaying the pause icon PSE and temporarily stopping the super reach production, An effect may be performed such that the progress and the position of the Sabohan character SBH are aligned with each other.

  In FIG. 189 (B6), it is shown that the display of the cut-in by the princess character is ended, and the interrupted super reach effect is resumed. However, the pause icon PSE is displayed, and the presentation by the chance up meter CMT remains paused.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 189 (B7), the pause icon PSE is erased, and the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is resumed. At this time, the reach effect is rewritten, and the indication of the second check point CP2 where the indication that the chance-up notice has not occurred is displayed in a red-marked manner, and the chance-up notice is displayed. The letter "UP" is also displayed to indicate that a That is, in fact, although the chance-up advance notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 has not been made, it is shown as having been made, and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit is improved. In this example, the pause icon PSE is shown to overlap with the chance up meter CMT. For example, the chance up meter is provided with the above-mentioned information display area. The character of "pause" may be displayed in the said information display area, and only the character of "pause" is displayed on the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up meter such as the display of a bar or the character SBH of the sabothani Images constituting the CMT may be hidden.

  FIG. 189 (C1) to FIG. 189 (C6) show another display mode of the chance up meter.

  FIG. 189 (C1) shows, for example, another effect pattern that follows FIG. 29 (1). Specifically, when transitioning to the super reach (Kenou reach), the chance up meter CMTx formed in a band shape is extended and displayed on the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display of the chance up meter CMTx changes in such a manner that the gauge displayed in blue from the start point SPx to the final point GPx decreases from left to right according to the progress of the super reach presentation. In the area on the left side of the start point SPx, the character "start" is displayed, and in the area on the right side of the end point GPx, the character "end" is displayed. The start point SPx of the chance up meter CMTx and the end Point GPx is specified. Further, a check point CPx is arranged at a predetermined position of the chance up meter CMTx, which indicates that a chance up notice may be given at a timing when a marker MRKx described later reaches the check point CPx. The check point CPx is a display mode in which a question mark is given in a white circle, suggesting that there is a possibility that some chance up notice may be given, and giving the player a sense of expectation There is a possibility. In addition, the question mark may not be attached to the white circle, and may or may not be attached to the question mark. In addition, in the white circle, a mark, a letter or a symbol different from the question mark may be attached.

  In FIG. 189 (C2), presentation by the chance up meter CMTx is started, and the marker MRKx moves from the start point SPx toward the final point GPx according to the progress of the super reach presentation, and the gauge is correspondingly reduced It shows how you are doing.

  After that, when the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (C3), as shown in FIG. 189 (C4), the balloon marked “super heat” is in the oval frame as shown in FIG. It is displayed together with the face display YSMN, and a highly reliable chance-up notice (superheat notice) is performed. In addition, even if the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx, the chance-up advance notice may not be performed, or another type of chance-up advance notice may be performed. In addition, while the chance-up notice is being performed, the marker MRKx may stand by at the position of the check point CPx, or may advance toward the final point GPx without waiting.

  FIG. 189 (C5) shows that the display YSMN of the face of the doll has been erased and the chance-up notice has ended, and the chance-up meter CMTx is advancing according to the progress of the super reach presentation.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 189 (C6), when the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, the main character of the hero wins against the hostile swordsman, "Decoration 7" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is informed that it will be a big hit Be done. When the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, there may be a case where a display may be performed in which the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, the sword sword.

  FIGS. 189 (D1) to (D6) show other effect patterns of the effects shown in FIGS. 189 (C1) to (C6). In this rendering example, as shown in FIG. 189 (D1), the display at the check point CPx is a display mode in which the character of "heat" is attached in a white circle, and the timing when the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx Thus, it is predicted that the extreme heat advance notice shown in FIG. 189 (D4) will be performed. It should be noted that the occurrence of another type of chance-up notice may be notified. Moreover, in the case of the display mode in which the character of "Heat" is attached in the white circle, the chance-up notice may be generated or may not be generated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 189 (D1 ′), a balloon may be displayed in which the characters “presence of“ superheat ”is generated at this timing” are displayed in the vicinity of the check point CPx. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 189 (D1) to the same figure (D6) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 189 (C1) to the same figure (C6) except that the display mode of the check point CPx is different, I omit explanation. In addition, before the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx, the "question mark" may change to the word "heat".

  FIG. 190 is a diagram for explaining another effect pattern of the effect by the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 190 (A1) to (A4) show that in the effect by the chance up meter CMT, a notice other than the chance up notice is given using the components of the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 190 (A1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 29 (2). In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 190 (A1)-the same figure (A2) is the same as the rendition shown to FIG. 29 (3)-FIG. (4), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 190 (A3), since the boy character BOY appears at the first check point CP1, a balloon with the word “chance up BOY pass” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a chance up notice is displayed. It reports that it has been done. At this time, the background color of the balloon is red, which suggests that the big hit design is more likely to be displayed in the symbol variation display being executed than when the background color of the balloon is the default color (white). ing. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the background color of the balloon becoming red. Thereafter, the effect shown in FIG. 190 (A4) is performed. In addition, the background color of the balloon is configured to be displayed in red more easily than the default color (white) when the big hit symbol display mode is determined and displayed than when the lost symbol display mode is determined and displayed. It is also good.

  Thereafter, when the chance-up notice ends, as shown in FIG. 190 (A4), the first check point CP1 is marked in red, and it is indicated that the jackpot reliability has been raised by the occurrence of the chance-up notice. The characters "UP" are displayed, and the SABOHANI character SBH starts moving.

  FIG. 190 (B1) to FIG. (B18) show an example of presentation in which the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is performed while the symbols other than super reach change. FIG. 190 (B1) is an example of effects following, for example, FIG. 162 (A2), and the effects shown in FIG. 190 (B1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 162 (3), so the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 190 (B2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT in this rendering example indicates, for example, the progress of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the present decoration is made according to its position. The status of progress of the variable display of the symbol is roughly notified. At the final point GP in this production example, the placard is rotated including the display of “x” and the display of the question mark, giving the player a sense of expectation as to whether it will be a loss or the development develops. ing. Here, the progressing speed of the character SAH of the sabothani is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 190 (B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached while the character SBH of Sabohani moves, a specific advance notice may occur.

  FIGS. 190 (B3) to (B4) show that the character SBH of Sabohan, which functions as a cursor, starts moving. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH.

  FIG. 190 (B5) shows that the speech advance notice has been started. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 190 (B6), the conversation announcement is updated. Specifically, the tous-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size and is displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and a short conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the short characters. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation effective period It is comprised by the remaining time display meter MT showing the remaining time. At the timing shown in FIG. 190 (B6), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display according to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 190 (B6), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the other's conversation image CI2, and the Tonosama's conversation is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In addition, when the speech advance notice is updated, the speech image CI1 of the hallmark may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the speech image CI1 of the hallmark may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A. The effective period of operation of the presentation button 136 (chance button 136) is then started.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 190 (B7) is shown in the display mode when the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period, and then the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is displayed by the player. When the key is pressed, as shown in FIG. 190 (B8), in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow, instead of the operation promotion notification image, the frame in which the operation promotion notification image was displayed is bordered in gold, The notice is displayed that the word "It's hot!" Is displayed. Then, a balloon with the word "chance up gold frame advance notice!" Is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, and it is informed that the chance up advance notice has been performed by the conversation image CI2 of the user. Note that the balloon may be displayed at a timing when the display mode of the conversation image CI2 of a whistle changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the conversation image CI2 of the whistle changes. Also, in FIG. 190 (B8), No. 1 shown in FIG. An icon IHI of “gold bomber” 6 appears at the right end of the screen, and the on-hold change animation is started. That is, the icon IHI of "gold bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the on-hold change animation in this presentation example, while flying from the right to the left, the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" fires (bombards) a bullet with a fluctuating icon h0. In addition, the icon IHI of "gold bomber" may be paused in front of the target fluctuation icon h0. In addition, this pause may be pause of the cassette that disguises the target icon. Further, in this example of presentation, when the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed by performing the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "gold bomber", the display mode of the change of the reserved icon is golden. It is suggested that In addition, when the holding change animation by the icon IHI of "gold bomber" is performed, the bombing on the fluctuation icon h0 may succeed and the display mode of the holding icon may always change, or the bombing on the fluctuation icon h0 In some cases, the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not change. In this staging example, after the display mode of the conversation image CI2 of the wolf is changed, the icon IHI of "gold bomber" may appear and the pending change animation may be started, or after the pending change animation is started The display mode of the speech image CI2 of the user may change. That is, the period in which the chance-up notice relating to the first check point CP1 is made may overlap with the period in which the chance-up notice relating to the second check point CP2 is made. In addition, the suspension change animation may be started after the balloon of the sabothan character SBH is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the suspension change animation is started.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 190 (B9), while the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move, the first check point CP1 is marked in red, and “UP” indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased by the appearance of the notice. The letter “” is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance up notice. Further, FIG. 190 (B9) shows that a gold bullet icon is fired from a gold bomber icon. That is, the icon "IHI" of "gold bomber" is composed of a gold bomber icon and a gold bullet icon. The goal here is the fluctuation icon h0. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 190 (B10), the bullet icon hits the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the gold display mode. Further, at this time, the character SBH of Sabohani travels on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT, and the second check point CP2 arrives at the timing when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes. In addition, the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2 before the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes, or the character SBH of the Sabohani second check point after the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. May reach CP2. It is to be noted that Sabohan's character SBH is stopped at the second check point CP2 and stands by.

  Then, in FIG. 190 (B11), a balloon with the word “chance up gold reserve” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and there is a chance up notice that the variation icon h0 becomes a gold display mode. Is reported. Note that the balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 190 (B12), while the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move, the second check point CP2 is marked in red, and “UP” indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased by the appearance of the advance notice. The letter “” is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance up notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (B13), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and a state in which swing fluctuation display is performed is shown. ing. Here, the decorative symbol on which the fluctuation display is performed may overlap a part of the chance up meter CMT, or may be displayed at a position where the decorative symbol does not overlap on the chance up meter CMT.

  In FIG. 190 (B14), “decorative 7” that was swingingly changed in the left symbol display area 208a moves to the lower side of the second decorative symbol before shifting to the super reach effect, and is shaken and changed in the right symbol display area 208c It is shown that the "decorative 7" which had been moved to the bottom of the second number-of-holds display. At this time, the Sabohan character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, and at this timing, a background image including the genie character CLA is displayed. It should be noted that a background image including the genie character CLA may be displayed at the timing when the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, or after the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3. A background image including the character CLA may be displayed, or the sabothan character SBH may reach the third check point CP3 after the background image including the genie character CLA is displayed.

  Then, in FIG. 190 (B15), a balloon with the character of “Chance up Claire background” attached is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohani character SBH, and a chance up notice is generated that a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed. It has been reported that it did. Note that the balloon may be displayed at the timing when the background image including the character CLA of the spirit is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the background image including the character CLA of the spirit is displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 190 (B16), while the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move, the third check point CP3 is marked in red, and “UP” indicates that the reliability of the big hit is improved by the appearance of the notice. The letter “” is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance up notice. Also, in FIG. 190 (B16), the background image including the genie character CLA is switched to the default background image. Note that the background image including the genie character CLA may be continuously displayed until the background image of the super reach is displayed. Also, in FIG. 190 (B16), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and the frame hocking out of the display screen is shown leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. .

  FIG. 190 (B17) shows that the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS remaining. Further, FIG. 190 (B17) shows that the character SAH of the SaboHani has reached the final point GP. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in a mode displayed as "SP", and it is notified that transition to super reach is made.

  FIG. 190 (B18) shows that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is started. Then, the chance up meter CMT is erased as having achieved the purpose. In addition, the presentation by a new chance up meter may be started even after shifting to the super reach. Also, the chance up meter CMT may be deleted before the super reach effect is started, or may be deleted after the super reach effect is started, or is deleted at the timing when the super reach effect is started May be After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (2) and thereafter are performed. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY does not necessarily have to be displayed.

  FIG. 191 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect produced by the chance up meter performed in the positive variation state.

  FIGS. 191 (A1) to (A19) show that effects are produced using the chance up meter as the advance notice in the probability change state.

  FIG. 191 (A1) shows that the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 is performed after the big hit game is over. The control states shown in FIG. 191 (A1) to FIG. 191 (A19) are special drawing high probability general drawing high probability states (probability change states with power assistance). Therefore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the power-added positive variation state, the reserve icon of the special view 2 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. In FIG. 191 (A1), since the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is four, the reservation icons (first reserved icon h21 to fourth reserved icon h24) of the four special figures 2 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The more left the pending icon, the older the winning icon will be. In addition, you may make it the holding icon of the special figure 1 be displayed. Further, in this rendering example, a background image of the universe in which the rocket is directed to the planet is displayed as the background image in the power-assisted definite variation state. In addition, in this production example, it applies to the so-called ST machine to which a power change with probability of 50 rotations is given after the end of all the big hit games, but the next big hit occurs, for example, when a big hit with a probability change symbol The specification may be a definite change state with power support until it is done. In addition, it may be a so-called V-ST machine in which a certain change (e.g., 50 rotations) of electric power is provided when passing through a specific area provided in the variable winning opening in a big hit game. In addition, the gaming state in this production example may not be a power-assisted definite variation state, but may be a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state (power support state), or a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state It is also good. In addition, the second number-of-holds display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3, and the number of special views 2 is 4 . Then, a second decorative symbol is displayed in the lower left corner, and the second decorative symbol is also variably displayed in accordance with the first decorative symbol. In the upper left corner of the display screen, a right-handed display instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 124 is performed, and a general drawing low probability special drawing low probability is displayed below it. The number of consecutive hits, which is the number of big hits that occurred between the occurrence of a big hit in the state and the occurrence of a low probability special figure low again, is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A1) “BONUS × 3” is displayed, which indicates a grandeur. In the lower part of the display of the number of consecutive times, the number of remaining symbol variations in which the probability variation state with electric assistance is maintained is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A1) "Is displayed.

  Further, in the example of the effect, the song title display unit MN is provided in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the song title of the currently output song (here, the default "may be there" "" Is displayed, and the music of the music title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music being output here is the music being output in the definite variation state. Furthermore, the icons of the up and down keys 137u and d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the music title display unit MN, and it is informed that music selection is possible by operating the up and down keys 137u and d.

  In FIG. 191 (A2), the symbol stop of the special view 2 is performed, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . In addition, the number of remaining reservations of the special figure 2 is 4, and all are made into the default display mode.

  FIG. 191 (A3) shows that the suspension of the special view 2 is digested, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Even in the state of FIG. 191 (A3), the selected music is still "may be there". It should be noted that a prefetch notice or change notice may be given by a music change notice, or an effect of forcibly changing a music selected by the player to another music may be performed by the music change notice.

  In FIG. 191 (A4), a background change notice, which is a type of advance notice, is started. The background change notice in this effect example is a notice that the continuous notice is started. The target of the background change notice (preread target hold) here is a hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon hs24 shown in FIG. 191 (A2). In the background change notice, the eyelid images (FSML, FSMR) appear from the left and right, and the eyelids are closed, resulting in the eyelid image on the entire display screen (see FIG. 191 (A5)). For this reason, the reserved icons h21, h22, h23, the first decorative symbol, and the music title display portion MN are overlapped from the front side by the image of the eyebrows and become invisible. At this time, the music output from the speaker 120 fades out and then becomes mute. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped, and the sound effects may be output.

  It should be noted that the background change notice may be started at the timing when the pre-read target is suspended. In this example, although it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started before the fluctuation of the prefetch target hold. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target hold.

  In the background change notice, the big hit expectation of the pre-reading target hold may be expressed by the appearance image (here, the image of the eyebrows), and for example, if the eyebrow color is green, the background itself changes to a mountain background. It may also function as a notice. Furthermore, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  FIG. 191 (A6) shows that an animation in which the eyelids open is performed. Thereafter, in FIG. 191 (A7), the eyelids are completely opened, and the eyelid images (FSML, FSMR) have disappeared. In this presentation example, a continuous advance notice is started by the background change advance notice. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a title “Kana Can Be Found” indicating the contents of the effect of continuous notice is displayed, and a chance up meter CMTy is displayed above this title. The chance up meter CMTy in this example of presentation has the start point SPy and the final point GPy, and the first check point CP1y and the second check point CP2y disposed between them, and each has a white circle display mode, and a band between each point It is tied with a gauge. Further, at the final point GPy, a symbol consisting of "!" And a question mark is attached in a white circle, and an advance notice of symbol change corresponding to the final point GPy is performed. That is, it is predicted that a final judge effect which is a final effect to notify whether or not a big hit is performed after four times of symbol fluctuation display, including symbol fluctuation display being executed. The start point SPy corresponds to the symbol variation display being executed, the first check point CP1y corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, and the second check point CP2y is The final point GPy corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the second suspension, and the final point GPy corresponds to the symbol suspension display corresponding to the third suspension, which is the object of the pre-reading advance notice. In addition, another pre-reading advance notice may be performed about a point where no display is performed among each point. In addition, although the display mode of each point does not change until the end of the effect of the continuous notice, the display mode may change, for example, every symbol variation display. In addition, in the first check point CP1y and the second check point CP2y, when the check point is reached, it may be notified that a chance-up notice will be made. Moreover, the display in the white circle of the final point GPy is not limited to the above-mentioned one, for example, the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the big hit, for example, when "heat" is displayed. Is more likely to be a big hit than a symbol consisting of "!" And a question mark is displayed, and when "当" is displayed, the jackpot symbol aspect is displayed finalized in the symbol variation display of the object of pre-reading advance notice You may Further, depending on the display mode in the white circle at each point, the ease of development to super reach or the change thereof may be notified, or the type of super reach may be notified. In addition to the final point GPy, a notice may be displayed in the white circle at other points, for example, even if some advance notice is displayed at the final point GPy, the check point before that (white circle or white circle or It may be a big hit by the symbol variation corresponding to the check point which is performing some advance notice display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (A8), a character YMy of the character that functions as a cursor is displayed at the start point SPy.

  After that, in FIG. 191 (A9), the character of Tonosama bears a box of thousands, and the effect display is performed by giving alms to the begging peasant. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A10), stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”.

  In FIG. 191 (A11), it is shown that the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Special Figure 1 indicates 3 and the hold of Special Figure 2 indicates 2. In addition, the display of the number of remaining symbol variations has been updated to "after 48 times". At this time, the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy is moved from the start point SPy to the first check point CP1y. In addition, it is shown that the character of the lord carrying the two-handed box has a red face and steps on to throw the two-handed box against the surname, showing a sense of expectation for the big hit. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A12), stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 6—decoration 4—decoration 1”.

  FIG. 191 (A13) shows that the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Special Figure 1 indicates 3 and the hold of Special Figure 2 indicates 1. Moreover, the display of the number of remaining symbol variations is updated to "47 times more". At this time, the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy has moved from the first check point CP1y to the second check point CP2y. Also, it is shown that the character of the lord who carried the 1000-inch box threw the 1000-inch box towards the peasant family, and has a greater sense of expectation for the big hit. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A14), stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 7”.

  FIG. 191 (A15) shows that the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Special Figure 1 indicates 3 and the hold of Special Figure 2 indicates 0. In addition, the display of the number of remaining symbol variations is updated to "after 46 times". At this time, it is informed that the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy has moved from the second check point CP2y to the final point GPy, and that it is a change in which the final judge effect is performed.

  FIG. 191 (A16) shows that as a result of the final judge presentation, the 1000 boxes sent by the lady have reached the peasant and the small sheet is scattered from the 1000 boxes. That is, it is informed that the result of the big hit is derived as success in giving to the peasant. In addition, it may be made to be superimposed on the chance up meter CMTy and to be displayed as the presentation of the state where the 1000-square box thrown by the lord reached the peasant and the small sheet is scattered from the 1000-square box. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A17), the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is derived and it is shown that the swing fluctuation is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (A18), a final display is made with a combination (big hit symbol pattern) of the decorative symbols of the “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (A19), a jackpot start effect is performed. In this jackpot start effect, "Super Yoshimune bonus" is displayed, which indicates that a jackpot game by the jackpot will be started, as the symbols of the jackpot (special jackpot) are aligned.

  In this presentation example, for example, this presentation may be performed by the fluctuation pattern table from the 50th rotation to the 53rd rotation in ST.

  In this example of presentation, the continuous advance notice is performed by the presentation by the chance up meter, but such presentation by the chance up meter can be applied to a slot machine. For example, it is a slot machine capable of obtaining a high payout by stopping the reels in the correct order (pushing order). AT (assist time) which is an advantageous gaming state informing the correct pushing order. In the state, the character is advanced in the chance up meter according to the AT remaining game number on display, the last point is made to correspond to the AT remaining game number being 0, and the AT state continues by the display at the last point Alternatively, it may be informed that there may be a final judgment effect on whether the number of remaining AT state games will be added. In this case, depending on the display mode at the final point, it is suggested that it is easy to continue the AT state, or easy to add the remaining number of games in the AT state, the number of games to be added, etc. May be Also, at each of the start point, the final point, and one or more check points arranged between them, the winning combination is displayed in the corresponding white circle at the timing of lever ON, the first stop or the second stop, or the winning combination. It may be displayed in a white circle as a history.

  Thus, in this example of presentation, since the display of the chance up meter CMTy is started, the display mode changes every symbol variation, and changes according to the time after the chance up meter CMTy is displayed. It can be said that

  FIGS. 191 (B1) to (B8) show an effect following to FIG. 191 (A15), and show how a result of losing is derived as a result of continuous advance notice.

  FIG. 191 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 191 (A15). In this effect example, the game ball is won in the second special view starting opening 232 between the effect shown in FIG. 191 (A15) and the effect shown in FIG. 191 (B1). , The suspension of special figure 2 is increased by one. In Fig. 191 (B1), as a result of the judge, the tombs don't throw the two-storied box and fail to reach the peasant, the two-storied box flips over at the tossus's feet, the tombs are depressed and the peasant shows a drowning figure It has been done. That is, it is informed that the result of loss is derived as having failed to give to the family. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (B2), it is shown that the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is derived and that swing fluctuation is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (B3), the finalized display is performed with the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". In addition, after the combination of the decorative symbol of a loss is derived | led-out, resurrection production may be performed and the combination of the decorative symbol of big hit may be derived | led-out.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (B4), the reserve of Special Figure 2 is digested, and after the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, in FIG. 191 (B5), the background changes to the background in the power-added definite variation state. Background change production is started. When the background change effect is started, the eyelid images (FSML, FSMR) appear from the left and right, and the entire eyelid image becomes an eyelid image by the animation in which the eyelids are closed (see FIG. 191 (B6)). For this reason, the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMTy are overlapped from the front side by the image of the eyelid and become invisible. At this time, the music for continuous announcement effect output from the speaker 120 fades out and then becomes mute. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped, and the sound effects may be output.

  In FIG. 191 (B7), the eyelids open and the variable display of the first decorative symbol starts to appear, and in FIG. 191 (B8), the eyelids completely open and the eyelid image disappears. At this time, the hold icon is not displayed because the hold of Special Figure 2 is “0”, but if there is a hold of Special Figure 2, the hold icon is visible during the execution of the animation that the eyelids open. start. Note that the hold icon may be displayed after the eyelids are completely opened. Also, as shown in FIG. 191 (B8), the background image after the release of the rose is the background image of the castle town. It may be a background image of the universe.

  FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example in which a notice of the effect by the chance up meter is given by a display device other than the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 192 (A1) to FIG. 192 (A5) are diagrams showing an example in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed and notified using the POV display 224I.

  In FIG. 192 (A1) during the symbol variation display, the POV display 224I which has been hidden at the initial position so far appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the state before rotating Taking the state).

  In FIG. 192 (A2), when the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches constant speed rotation on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the icon SH of "Sabohani" is displayed on the POV display 224I, and CUM preparation is made. The appearance of the middle display MTY has been predicted. In addition, since any light emitting element of the POV display 224I does not emit light during acceleration of the POV display 224I, the variable display of the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the holding frame UI are visually recognized It is made possible.

  In FIG. 192 (A3), the POV display 224I keeps rotating at a constant speed, and the icon "SH" is still displayed, but at the back of the icon, the flame effect EF101 is in the reserved icon display area HIS. It is displayed to cover the whole.

  When the flame icon EF101 is displayed, the POV display 224I starts rotational decelerating operation, and then, as shown in FIG. 192 (A4), the POV display 224I becomes stationary, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 192 (A5) Return to the initial position, as shown. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. In this way, although the appearance of the CUM preparation indication MTY is predicted, the CUM preparation indication MTY may not appear. The display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM in-provision display MTY after the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started, or after the display is switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM in-provision display MTY The deceleration operation of the POV display 224I may be started, or the display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparation display MTY at the timing when the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started.

  Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area is An effect display may be performed. In addition, in the acceleration state in which the POV display 224I reaches the stationary state to the constant speed state, or in the deceleration state in which the POV display returns to the stationary state from the constant speed state, the display area is more easily visible than the constant speed state and the acceleration state Even in the deceleration state, effects may be displayed in the display area. Alternatively, effects may be displayed in the display area only in the acceleration state or the deceleration state. Further, in the acceleration state or the deceleration state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) may be darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I noticeable. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed on the display area in the acceleration state, and at least the display area may be darkened in the constant speed state. The remarks described here are also applicable to a rendering example using the POV display 224I disclosed herein.

  In addition, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon SH of "Sabo hani" may be earlier in the end timing of the constant speed rotation, or even if the appearance timing of the icon is earlier. It is good, and both may be the same timing.

  Moreover, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the fourth display means shown in FIG. The above notification of occurrence may be performed by 208 M ′ or the like, or another notification may be performed.

  FIG. 192 (B1) to FIG. (B2) show an example of effect in which a chance up meter effect is performed by the configuration in which the display means is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Up to this point, the description has been made centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the contents displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to the description in the other embodiments herein). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to horizontal alignment, and may be vertical alignment. That is, it is not the case that the technology described in this specification can not be applied merely by the difference in hardware configuration, and viewed from a technical idea, even if the arrangement of the display means is horizontally arranged, vertically arranged It goes without saying that the present invention is applicable even if the number of display means is different. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical alignment of the display means, a description will be made using an example in which the display means is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the display means disposed below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M '.

  FIG. 192 (B1) shows a fourth display means 208M 'disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 192 (B1) is in the initial position. The fourth display means 208M 'is surrounded by a frame around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame in the fourth display means 208M' in the initial position is the front edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the front side. Overlap from. The fourth display means 208M 'is disposed on the front side (player's side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is an operation position where the display screen central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps from the front side For example, it can be moved from the initial position toward the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 146 (car a2'). That is, the fourth display means 208M 'is also a movable means capable of moving up and down. Further, in addition to the raising and lowering operation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be movable in the left-right direction. In addition, as a modification of the fourth display means 208M ', it may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

  On the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 192 (B1), a holding frame having a configuration similar to the holding frame UI which has been displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. This holding frame also has a holding icon display area, a variation icon display area, and an effect icon display area. A pedestal on which the fluctuation icon is placed is disposed in the fluctuation icon display area. The reserved icon display area is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area, and four stages (first to fourth stages) are arranged on the left base icon. The effect icon display area is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area, and the right base icon is arranged in the effect icon display area. In the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. This basic configuration is the same in FIG. 192 (C1) to FIG. (C2) described later.

  Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (B1), it is shown that the display has been shifted to super reach production (Kenou reach) after being a reach with “decoration 7”. On the other hand, in the fourth display means 208M ', the above-mentioned CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed, and the start of presentation by the chance up meter CMT is notified. At this time, although the change frame is included and the holding frame is not displayed, the change icon may be displayed. In addition, the holding frame may be displayed. Further, during the period when the CUM in-provision display MTY or the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the fourth display device 208M ', the variation icon may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Alternatively, the holding frame may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 192 (B2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. Thereafter, an effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed on the fourth display means 208M '.

  FIGS. 192 (C1) to (C2) show an example in which the effects shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A11) are realized using the fourth display means 208M '.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (C1), a CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed substantially at the center of the left end portion of the display screen. In this presentation example, it is shown that the display position of the CUM in-provision display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after reaching a reach with "decoration 7", it is shown that it has shifted to super reach production (swords reach). On the other hand, in the fourth display means 208M ', "VS Swordsman Reach" is displayed to notify the type of super reach effect.

  Thereafter, a moving animation in which the CUM in-provision display MTY moves downward toward the fourth display means 208M 'is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. Move animation is completed when it is displayed. In this case, the CUM-in-provision display MTY may be moved between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M '. Specifically, the CUM in-provision display MTY may display so as to straddle these display means, or may display so as to warp between the display means without straddling these display means. It may be configured such that there are cases in which these display means are straddled and cases in which there is no straddling.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 192 (C2), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example, after the moving animation is completed, the CUM in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, and then the sabothani character SBH starts to move (the former), but the CUM in-provision display MTY At the same time as switching to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani may start moving (the latter). Further, the timing at which the sabothan character SBH starts moving may be either the former case or the latter case, only the former may be performed, or only the latter may be performed.

  FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIGS. 193A1 to A7 show that a chance-up notice is given due to the appearance of the character BOY of the Boyy generated at the first check point CP1.

  In FIG. 193 (A1), it is shown that an animation of a duel scene of a hero who has developed into a super reach (a sword reach) and a sword battle between a hero and a hostess is displayed. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is displayed, and a chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT, the rendering is started, and the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. Further, at the lower center of the display screen, a pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS constituting the holding frame UI is displayed, and a variation icon of a default display mode is placed on the pedestal hs0. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, while the second decorative symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at the upper part, the second number of reservations is displayed below (here, the special figure 1 is “1” and the special figure 2 is “0” is displayed).

  In FIG. 193 (A2), the character BOY of Booie as the character of the advance notice of the chance appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and proceeds toward the right end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The situation is shown.

  Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 193 (A3) shows that the character BOY of Boi starts moving rightward on the display screen as it moves rightward. There is. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved in accordance with the original movement display of the character BOY of the boy. At this time, in the display of the first decorative symbol display device 280L, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, in the portion of the character of the first character displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the chance up meter CMT, the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 193 (A4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved to a position where the right end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is approximately at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When reaching the maximum movement position of the decorative symbol display device 208M, "chance up BOY passing !!" is added in the vicinity of the sabohani character SBH constituting the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The balloon is displayed. Note that a balloon may be displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position, or a balloon may be displayed after the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position. Alternatively, a balloon may be displayed at the timing when the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 193 (A5), the character of Booi moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the right direction so as to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device 208 M starts moving toward the initial position. Of the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M with the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the portion of the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M that is not overlapped with the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first one from the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The display position is shifted to the decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position after the character BOY of Boi has completely moved from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position before the Boy's character BOY completely moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position at a timing when the character BOY of the boy completely moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 193 (A6) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M has returned to its initial position. At this time, the character of the lord and the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are completely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The Boy's character BOY continues to move to the right of the display screen, and is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N from the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, the frame is out from the right end of the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In FIG. 193 (A7), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter “UP” indicates that the jackpot reliability has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice. It is displayed, showing the history of the occurrence of a notice.

  Fig. 193 (B1) to Fig. (B4) are examples of effects corresponding to Fig. 193 (A3) to Fig. (A6), and an example in which the display of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is shown. Note that FIG. 193 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 193 (A2).

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 193 (B1), it is shown that movement of the character BOY of the boy is started to move to the right in accordance with the movement to the right on the display screen. At this time, of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but the chance up meter CMT Is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M is overlapped on the front side, therefore, the chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the second It will be hidden by the decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 193 (B2) to the same figure (B4) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 193 (B2) to FIG. (B4) are the same as those in FIG. 193 (A4) to FIG. (A6) except that the chance up meter CMT is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown.

  In the above description, for example, when errors and simultaneous effects shown in FIG. 111 to FIG. 116 occur or volume and luminance adjustments are performed during effect display, they are shown in FIG. It is displayed as described above.

In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M ' Etc.], and
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [eg, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, a gold cut-in CI 3 etc. shown in FIG. 29 (13)],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a first notice display [for example, a CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (3), etc.],
The period display is a display that may be started during display of reach effect display [eg, as shown in FIG. 162 (A9), the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed during super reach effect etc],
The period display is a display for informing the first timing [for example, the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2, etc.] during the display of the reach effect display,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started during the display of the reach effect display,
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 162 (3) to FIG. Etc. displayed before the meter CMT is displayed],
The first advance notice display is a notice for giving notice that the time display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this game stand, since the period display is displayed by displaying the advance notice before the period display is notified that the certain period is started, a certain period is started in advance. In some cases, it may be possible not to miss the display start of the period display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The period display may be started only during the display of the reach effect display, or may be started even during the display of the reach effect display. In addition, the period display may be always started while the reach effect display is displayed, or may not be started while the reach effect display is displayed.

  Further, the period display may notify only the first timing during display of the reach effect display, or notify other than the first timing during display of the reach effect display. It is also good. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the first notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed before the time display is displayed, or the first notice may not be displayed before the time display is displayed.

  In addition, the first notice may be displayed only before the period display is displayed, or the first notice may be displayed other than before the period display is displayed. May be

  In addition, the first advance notice may notify only that the term display is displayed, or may notify other than the term display. In addition, the first advance notice may be to always notice that the term display is displayed, or may not notice that the term display is displayed.

  In addition, it is also possible to give notice by the operation of the effect movable body, the sound output by the speaker, or the light emission by the light emitting means instead of the advance notice display.

  Also, the advance notice display may be started during the big hit game.

  Further, the advance notice may be displayed during the display of the period display, and for example, it may function as a notice to notify that the first effect display is displayed.

  In addition, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is displayed. For example, the period display is performed after the notice display is performed, and then the notice display is displayed. May be

  Further, the advance notice may be displayed after the period display is not displayed, and may be displayed as a function to notify that the period display has been displayed, for example.

It should be noted that “the game console has display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first preview display,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the 1st timing in a certain period,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start.
The first advance notice may be displayed before the period display is displayed,
The first advance notice display is a notice for giving notice that the time display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by ".

  Moreover, "the said period display is a display which alert | reports the 1st timing in display of the said reach production display", and "the said period display is the timing by which a chance up notice (or chance up production) is performed. "Display of a meter (chance-up timing meter) for informing

In addition, it is possible to specify that the timing at which a certain chance up effect is performed is notified by the chance up meter preparation indication (that is, the chance up meter preparation indication is displayed regardless of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display). If a chance up meter informs you of a chance up point just by being displayed (for example, if a chance up meter is always displayed when a chance up preparation display is performed, or if it is always indicated once or more by the chance up meter) As a case of notifying a chance up point, etc.)),
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first preliminary display may be a preliminary display in which the first timing is notified.
(3) The first preliminary announcement display may be a preliminary announcement display that can specify that one or more of the timings at which a plurality of certain effects including the first timing are performed are notified by the period display. . In addition, there may be timings that can not be identified among the timings notified in the period display.
(4) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that “the timing when all certain effects are performed” is notified in the period display.
(5) The first notice display may be a notice display in which one or more timings among the timings at which a plurality of certain effects including the first timing are performed are notified. Among the notified timings, there may be a timing that is not notified.
(6) The first preliminary display may be a preliminary display in which "the timing when all certain effects are performed" reported in the period display is reported.

In addition, when it is not possible to specify that the timing when a certain chance up effect is performed is notified by the chance up meter preparation indication (for example, even when there is a gap in the chance up preparation display or the chance up meter is displayed) Even when not reporting a chance up point)
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that can not specify that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first preliminary display may be a preliminary display in which the first timing is not notified.
(3) The first preliminary display may be a preliminary display which can not be specified in the period display that "the timing when all certain effects are performed" is to be notified.
(4) The first preliminary display may be a preliminary display in which "the timing when all certain effects are performed" reported in the period display is not reported.

  In addition, the timing at which one or more certain effects are necessarily performed may be notified by the period display.

  In addition, there may be a case where the timing at which one or more certain effects are performed is notified or a timing at which one certain effect is performed is not notified by the period display.

  In addition, when the display of the period display is displayed, the cursor display may already be moved.

  The cursor indication may move after the period indication is displayed.

In addition, “the period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, a character SBH or the like of Sabohani constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)],
The period display is a certain period during the display of the reach effect display [for example, a period from the first timing in super reach to the middle symbol derived as shown in FIG. 162 (A9) to FIG. (A12). Etc.], and
The cursor display is from the second position [eg, the starting point SP of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9), etc.] to the first position [eg, the second time in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. By moving to the third position [for example, the final point GP etc. in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)] via 2 check points CP2 etc., from the start to the end of the certain period is notified Are configured to
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the timing of the first position may be easily understood.

  Here, the period display may include only the cursor display or may include displays other than the cursor display. Moreover, the period display may include cursor display or may not include cursor display.

  Further, the period display may notify only a certain period during display of the reach effect display, or may notify also a period other than a certain period during the display of the reach effect display . In addition, the period display may always notify a certain period during display of the reach effect display, or may not notify a certain period during display of the reach effect display. .

  In addition, the cursor display may be configured to be notified only from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position from the first position to the third position. The display may be configured to move from the second position to the third position from the first position to be notified of other than the start and end of a certain period. In addition, the cursor display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position from the first position to the third position. The display may be configured to move from the second position to the third position from the first position to be not notified of the start to the end of a certain period.

  In addition, the cursor display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a certain period only by moving from the second position to the third position from the first position to the third position. The display may be configured to be notified of the start to the end of a certain period other than moving from the second position to the third position from the first position.

  In addition, when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be notified that only the first timing is reached, or when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is the first timing. Other things may also be notified. In addition, when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be always notified that the first timing is reached, and when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is the first timing. There may be cases where this is not notified.

  In addition, it may be notified that the first timing is reached only by the cursor display reaching the first position, or the first other than the cursor display reaching the first position. It may be informed that it is timing.

  The positional relationship between the first position, the second position, and the third position may be the first position> the second position> the third position, or any other positional relationship. The cursor display may be configured to move in the order of second position> first position> third position. More precisely, "the position where the cursor indication reaches first when moving" is before the "position where the cursor indication reaches after" is behind.

In addition, the above-mentioned period display is a chance-up display [for example, the display of the second check point CP2 marked in red shown in FIG. 29 (15) and the occurrence of a chance-up notice have raised the reliability of the big hit This is a display that may be displayed, such as the display of the letters "UP" indicating that
The chance-up display is a display notifying that the display of the first effect display has been started at the first timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (15), the second check The point CP2 is marked in red or the display of the character "UP" is displayed, and a chance-up notice by the display of the gold cut-in CI3 is displayed at the timing when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2. Informing that it has been started, etc.],
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position [eg, as shown in FIG. 29 (15) As such, when a chance-up notice by the display of the gold cut-in CI3 is started to be displayed, the second check point CP2 is marked in red, and the character "UP" is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to understand that the first effect display is displayed.

  Here, as the period display, only the chance up display may be displayed, or a display other than the chance up display may be displayed. In the period display, the chance up display may be displayed without fail or the chance up display may not be displayed.

  Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, only the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first timing may be displayed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, displays other than the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position. In addition, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may be always displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first timing may be displayed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, the chance-up display may not be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.

  In addition, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may be displayed only at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first timing may be displayed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, the chance-up display may be displayed also at a display position other than the display position corresponding to the first position.

  Further, only when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first timing may be displayed at the first timing. The chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position also except when the display of the effect display is started.

  When the chance-up display is displayed, the chance-up display may be continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the third position, and the chance-up display is displayed. In this case, the chance-up indication may be configured to be displayed before the cursor indication reaches the third position.

In addition, the first preliminary display is a display that may be displayed for movement [for example, as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the first notice display may perform the movement display, the gaze may be guided to the first notice display and the first notice display may be noticed.

  Here, the first advance notice may be only for moving display, or may be other than moving display. In addition, the first advance notice may be a movement display, or may not be a movement display.

Also, the display of the period display is started after the first preliminary display starts the movement display [eg, CUM preparation display as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. (A11) CUM in-progress display MTY switched to chance-up meter CMT, etc. after MTY is moved and displayed],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to grasp the timing at which the display of the period display is started.

  Here, only the display of the period display may be started after the first notice display starts the movement display, and the display other than the display of the period display after the first notice display starts the movement display It may be started. Also, the display of the period display may always start after the first preview display starts the movement display, or the display of the period display may not start after the first notice display starts the movement display. It may be.

  The period display may be moved and displayed.

  In addition, after the movement display of the first advance notice display is ended, it may be notified that a certain period has started.

  Further, the timing at which the movement display of the first notice display is started can be set as appropriate.

Also, the display position of the first advance notice display is changed by the move display [eg, as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. The display position of the display MTY being prepared has been changed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to change the display of the first notice display by changing the display position of the first notice display.

  Here, only the display position of the first notice display may be changed by the movement display, or some may be changed other than the display position of the first notice display by the movement display. Further, the display position of the first notice display may always be changed by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may not be changed by the movement display.

  Further, the display position of the first notice display may be changed only by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may be changed by the display other than the movement display.

In addition, “the first advance notice display is a display that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG.
In the first preview display, a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the background color of the balloon forming the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 171 (A3) is red or CUM shown in FIG. 178 (A1) The display mode in which the meter portion constituting the display MTY under preparation is red, the display mode in which the character SBH of the sabothani constituting the CUM in-progress display MTY shown in FIG. 178 (B1) is red, and FIG. This is a display that may be displayed in a display mode etc. in which the cursor constituting the CUM in-provision display MTY shown is the princess character HME.
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol form is finally greater than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Easy to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give expectation to the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed by looking at the display mode of the first notice display.

  Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the first display mode. May be In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the first display mode or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the second display mode. It is also good. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the second display mode or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  In addition, the first display mode and the second display mode may be display modes different from each other in part or may be different from each other.

  Moreover, only the big hit symbol mode is finally determined in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to be displayed, and in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the final display is more than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Design modes other than the jackpot design mode may also be easily displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the big hit symbol form is finally finally determined as compared to the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to be displayed, and in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the final display is more than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be difficult for the jackpot symbol form to be difficult to be displayed.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the big hit symbol form may be finally confirmed and displayed in the end, or the big hit symbol form may not be finally displayed. It is also good. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the big hit symbol form may not necessarily be finally displayed in the final display, and the big hit symbol form is finally displayed. There may be.

  Further, the first advance notice may be displayed only in one display mode.

  In the order of the third display mode <the second display mode <the first display mode, the big hit symbol mode may be finally determined and displayed easily.

  In addition, the first preview display may be configured to be displayable in three or more display modes.

  Moreover, the easiness of the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol form may not be changed by the display form of the first advance notice display.

Also, “the first preview display is displayed in the second display mode than in the case where the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. It is easy to start the display of the first effect display at the timing,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the first effect display is displayed by the display mode of the first advance notice display.

  Here, in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first display is performed at the first timing than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Only the display of the effect display may be easily started, or the first preview display may be displayed in the first display mode if the first preview display is displayed in the second display mode. Instead of the display of the first effect display at the first timing, the display may be more easily started. In addition, the first effect is displayed at the first timing in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. The display of the display may always start easily, and in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Also, the display of the first effect display may be difficult to start at the first timing.

  When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the first effect display may always be started at the first timing, or the first effect at the first timing. The display of the display may not start.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the display of the first effect display may not necessarily start at the first timing, or the first timing display at the first timing. The display of the effect display may be started.

Also, the first preliminary display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode [eg, as shown in FIG. 172 (B1) to FIG. (B3) In CUM in-progress display MTY displayed in the default display mode, the background color of the balloon changes to red and ranks up etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even when the first advance notice display is displayed in the first display mode, it may be possible to have an expectation of changing to the second display mode.

  Here, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change only to the second display mode, or the first notice display displayed in the first display mode However, the display mode other than the second display mode may be changed. In addition, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may always change to the second display mode, and the first notice display displayed in the first display mode is the second It may not change to the display mode of.

  In addition, only the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode, or the first displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode The notice display of may also change to the second display mode.

  Note that the display mode of the first advance notice may be changed by the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, the display mode is displayed by operating and displaying the operation promotion display including the button image. The display mode may be changed by operating in the back button operation acceptance state where the operation prompting display is not displayed.

  In addition, as a result of other advance notice display being done, the display mode of the first advance notice display may be changed, and the display mode of the first advance notice display may be performed without any effect such as notice notice being performed. May change.

  Further, it may be notified that the display mode of the first advance notice display is changed by the period display.

  In addition, the display mode of the first notice display after change may be notified.

In addition, the “period display is a display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 162 (A11), etc.]”.
In the period display, a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which a meter portion constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 175 (A6) is red, and a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (A1) The display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani to be displayed is red, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (B1) is red, The display mode in which the second check point CP2 constituting the chance up meter CMT shown is round and red, and the display mode in which the background color of the balloon of “START !!” shown in FIG. 176 (D1) is red, Display in which the princess character HME as a cursor constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in 176 (E1) is displayed Is a display that may be displayed in the like, etc.],
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,
The fourth display of the period is the fourth display when the first preview display is displayed in the second display mode than when the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, as shown in FIG. 178 (A1) to FIG. 178 (A4), it is easier for the CUM in-progress display MTY to rank up, the chance up meter CMT is also likely to rank up, etc.)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the display mode of the first notice display can have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the third display mode. . Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  Further, the third display mode and the fourth display mode may be display modes different in part, or may be all different.

  In addition, in the second display mode, the first preview display is displayed, but in the fourth display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode compared to when the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. Only when it is easy to be displayed or when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is better than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. However, display modes other than the fourth display mode may be easily displayed. In addition, in the second display mode, the first preview display is displayed, but in the fourth display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode compared to when the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be displayed by all means, and the period display is more effective when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be difficult to be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be.

  Moreover, when the advance notice display of the second place is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may not necessarily be displayed in the fourth display mode, and the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode. There may be.

In addition, the period display is more effective when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. Easy to be displayed in the third display mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display indicates the third display mode in comparison with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. May be displayed only in the first display mode, and the first preview display may be displayed in the first display mode as compared to when the first preview display is displayed in the second display mode. The display may be easily displayed even in display modes other than the third display mode. Further, the period display in the third display mode is more in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be always displayed, and the period display is more effective when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be difficult to be displayed in the third display mode.

  In addition, when the first advance notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the third display mode. It may be.

  Moreover, when the first advance notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may not necessarily be displayed in the third display mode, and the period display is displayed in the third display mode. There may be cases.

  Further, depending on the display mode of the first advance notice display, the display mode of the period display may not be displayed in the third display mode or in the fourth display mode. When the display mode of the advance notice is one, it is not known whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or in the fourth display mode.

In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in a final manner than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Cheap,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display variety of the period display may be different, the period display may be noticed as a notice even to a player who does not see the period display.

  Here, even in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally confirm the big hit symbol mode finally as compared with the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Better, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, finally the symbol aspect other than the big hit symbol aspect is also determined and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display aspect It may be easy. In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol mode may eventually be definitely determined and displayed more finally than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. In the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally display the jackpot symbol form finally than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. It is also good.

  In addition, when a period display is displayed by a 4th display mode, a big hit symbol may be finally determined and displayed finally, and a big hit symbol may not be finally determined and displayed.

  Moreover, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not necessarily be finally displayed in a final manner, or the big hit symbol may be finally displayed.

In addition, the “period display is a display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 162 (A11), etc.]”.
In the period display, a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which a meter portion constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 175 (A6) is red, and a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (A1) The display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani to be displayed is red, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (B1) is red, The display mode in which the second check point CP2 constituting the chance up meter CMT shown is round and red, and the display mode in which the background color of the balloon of “START !!” shown in FIG. 176 (D1) is red, Display in which the princess character HME as a cursor constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in 176 (E1) is displayed Is a display that may be displayed in the like, etc.],
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,
In the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the period display may be different, the period display may be noticed as a notice even to a player who does not see the period display.

  Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the third display mode. . Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  Further, the third display mode and the fourth display mode may be display modes different in part, or may be all different.

  In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, only the big hit symbol mode may be finally determined and displayed more easily than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. In the fourth display mode, if the period display is displayed, finally the symbol aspect other than the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be determined and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display aspect May be In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol mode may eventually be definitely determined and displayed more finally than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. In the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally display the jackpot symbol form finally than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. It is also good.

  In addition, when a period display is displayed by a 4th display mode, a big hit symbol may be finally determined and displayed finally, and a big hit symbol may not be finally determined and displayed.

  Moreover, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not necessarily be finally displayed in a final manner, or the big hit symbol may be finally displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display may be a second preliminary display [for example, the display of the effect EF101 of the flame shown in FIG. 162 (A2), and FIG. 163 (A3) to FIG. The display of the effect EF 104 of the explosion shown in FIG. 168 (A2) shown in FIG. 168 (A2), the conversation notice shown in FIG. 179 (A2) to the same figure (A6), shown in FIG. 179 (B1) to the same figure (B3) The notice by the notice icon YI, the notice by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 179 (C1) to the same figure (C2), the notice by the mini game shown in FIG. 179 (D1) to the figure (D5), etc.
The second notice may be displayed before the first notice is displayed,
The second notice display is a notice for giving a notice that the first notice display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to focus attention on period display in stages, and in some cases, it may be possible to gradually increase the sense of expectation.

  Here, only the second notice may be displayed before the first notice is displayed, or the second notice may be displayed before the first notice is displayed. The display may also be displayed. In addition, the second notice may be displayed before the first notice is displayed, or the second notice may not be displayed before the first notice is displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, the second notice display may give notice only that the first notice display is displayed, or may give notice of other than the fact that the first notice display is displayed. May be Further, the second notice display may always give notice that the first notice display is displayed, or may not give notice that the first notice display is displayed. .

  In addition, when the second advance notice display is displayed, the first notice display may be displayed, or even when the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display may not be displayed. .

In the case where the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display is not displayed and the first notice display is displayed. Rather, the jackpot symbol form is likely to be finally displayed finalized,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation for the display of the second advance notice.

  Here, when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the final notice is displayed rather than when the first notice display is displayed without the second notice display being displayed. Only the big hit symbol form may be easily determined and displayed, or if the first notice is displayed after the second notice is displayed, the second notice is not displayed. Finally, a symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect may be more easily determined and displayed than when the first advance notice is displayed. In addition, when the first notice is displayed after the second notice is displayed, the final notice is displayed rather than when the second notice is not displayed and the first notice is displayed. The big hit symbol form may be easily confirmed by all means, or if the first notice is displayed after the second notice is displayed, the second notice is not displayed. Finally, the big hit symbol form may be more difficult to be determined and displayed than when the advance notice is displayed.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the big hit symbol aspect may finally be definitely displayed, or the big hit symbol aspect is not finally displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed without the second notice display being displayed, the big hit symbol aspect may not necessarily be finally displayed in the final display, and the big hit symbol aspect is finally displayed. May be

  Moreover, the easiness of the finalized display of the jackpot symbol aspect may or may not be changed with or without the second preliminary display.

In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed after the first advance display is displayed, the first notification display is not displayed and the period display is finally displayed. Big hit design aspect is easy to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation for the display of the first notice display.

  Here, in the case where the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, finally only the jackpot symbol aspect is displayed than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display being displayed. It may be easy to confirm the display, or when the period display is displayed after the first preliminary display is displayed, the first preliminary display is not displayed and the period display is displayed, Finally, symbol modes other than the big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed. In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the big hit symbol form is always final as compared to the case where the first notice display is not displayed and the period display is displayed. The finalized display may be easier, or the final display is better if the first display is displayed and then the period display is displayed than if the first display is not displayed and the period display is displayed. There may be a case where the big hit symbol form is not displayed in a definite manner.

  In addition, when the period display is displayed after the first preliminary display is displayed, the big hit symbol form may be finally definitely displayed in the end, or the big hit symbol form may not be finally displayed. May be

  Moreover, when the period display is displayed without displaying the first notice display, the big hit symbol aspect may not necessarily be finally displayed in the final display, and the big hit symbol aspect may be finally displayed. It may be.

In addition, at least a part of the display mode of the first preliminary display and the display mode of the period display are the same display mode [for example, the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3) and FIG. In the chance up meter CMT shown in), at least the display mode is the same in that the character SBH of Sabohani is arranged, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the player may be able to recall the relevance between the first advance notice display and the period display.

  Here, the display mode of the first advance notice display and the display mode of the period display may be partially the same display mode, or all may be the same display mode.

Also, the display mode of the first advance notice display and the display mode of the period display are different display modes [eg, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9) The display mode is different from the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3) at least in that the check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are displayed],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to distinguish and recognize the first advance notice display and the period display.

  Here, the display mode of the first advance notice display and the display mode of the period display may be display modes different in part, or may be display modes different in all.

In addition, it is notified that the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that the period display is displayed by the display of the first advance display [for example, FIG. 162 (A3 ) ~ As shown in the figure (A9), it is notified that the reach effect indication will be displayed by giving notice that the chance up meter CMT will perform effects by displaying the CUM in-provision display MTY. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for a big hit by displaying the first notice display.

  Here, it may be notified that only the reach effect display is displayed by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the first advance display, or the first notification display By notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the, the notification other than the reach effect display may be notified. In addition, it may be notified that the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that the period display is displayed by the display of the first advance display, and the first advance display may be displayed. By being notified that the period display is displayed by being displayed, it may not be notified that the reach effect display is displayed.

  Moreover, it may be notified that only the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that the period display is displayed by the display of the first notification display, and the first notification display By being notified that the period display is displayed by being displayed, it may be notified that a display other than the reach effect display may also be displayed.

  Moreover, it may be notified that the reach effect display is displayed only by being notified that the period display is displayed by the display of the first notification display, or the first notification display It may be notified that it will be displayed reach reach indication other than being notified that it is displayed that the period display will be displayed.

  In addition, it may be notified that the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that only the period display is displayed by the first notification display being displayed, or the first notification display may be displayed. It may be notified that the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that the display other than the period display is also displayed by being displayed.

  In addition, it may be notified that the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that the period display is displayed by displaying only the first notice display, and other than the first notice display. It may be notified that the period display is displayed by the display of the advance display of, or that the reach effect display is displayed.

  In addition, "when a notice that a period display is displayed" may be "a case where it is notified that it will be displayed purely from now on", or "a period display "It is an effect accompanying the reach effect display, and it may be the case where the reach effect display is directly foretold and that the period display is indirectly displayed", or " In the case where it is predicted that the display of the period is to be displayed directly and the display of the reach effect display will be performed indirectly.

In addition, the first preview display and the period display may start being displayed in the same symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 162 (A3) to FIG. MTY and chance up meter CMT are being started during execution of the same symbol variation display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to recognize the time when the period display is displayed.

  Here, the first notice display and the period display may be started only in the same symbol change display, or the first notice display and the period display are started to be displayed in different symbol change displays. There may be cases. In addition, the first notice display and the period display may be always started in the same symbol change display, or the first notice display and the period display may not be started in the same symbol change display. It may be.

  In addition, the first notice display may be displayed before the temporary stop of one or more decorative symbols, may be displayed before the decorative symbol is in the knowledge state, and reach effect display is started. May be displayed before the time period display is displayed.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the same symbol variation display as the period display.

  Also, the first notice display may be displayed in a symbol change display different from the symbol change display in which the period display is displayed, for example, displayed in the symbol change display before the symbol change display in which the period display is displayed It may be displayed in the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

In addition, the first preliminary display is a display that may start being displayed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the display of the period display is started [eg, FIG. 186 (eg A3) As shown in the figure (A14), the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed prior to the symbol variation display in which the effect is displayed by the chance up meter CMT, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the first notice display may function as a pre-reading notice, and it may be possible to have an expectation for the symbol change display to be executed later.

  Here, the first notice display may be started only in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the display of the period display is started, or the period display may be performed. The display may be started also in the symbol change display other than the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the display of is started. In addition, the first notice display may be always started in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the display of the period display is started, or the display of the period display is started. In the symbol variation display performed prior to the symbol variation display to be performed, the display may not be started in some cases.

  In addition, the first advance notice display may be always displayed in the symbol change display prior to the symbol change display in which the period display is displayed.

  In addition, the first notice display may be displayed with the same symbol fluctuation display as the symbol fluctuation display in which the period display is displayed.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed during symbol stop display, or may be always displayed during symbol stop display.

[The above-mentioned first notice display is a display which is also displayed during the period of symbol stop display [For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (D3) to FIG. It is also displayed during stop display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation even during the symbol stop display period.

  Here, the first advance notice may be displayed only during the symbol stop display period, or may be displayed during a period other than the symbol stop display period. Further, the first advance notice may be displayed during the symbol stop display period or may not be displayed during the symbol stop display period.

[The above-mentioned first notice display is a display which becomes non-display during the period of symbol stop display [For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (C3) to FIG. (D7), CUM in preparation display MTY is It is not displayed during symbol stop display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the first notice display is not displayed during the symbol stop display period, the game may be able to be sharpened.

  Here, the first advance notice may be undisplayed only during the symbol stop display period, or may be undisplayed during the period other than the symbol stop display period. . In addition, the first advance notice may be always hidden during the symbol stop display period, or may not be hidden during the symbol stop display period.

  In addition, when the symbol variation display is started, the first preliminary announcement may be displayed again.

In addition, the first notice display is a continuous notice [eg, before the symbol change display in which the effect is displayed by the chance up meter CMT as shown in FIG. 186 (A1) to FIG. (A16). CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed etc. in each of the multiple times of symbol fluctuation display to be performed],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the expectation may be enhanced in some cases by continuously performing the first notice display.

In addition, “the first advance notice display is a display that may be started while the reach effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the reach effect display can be improved.

  Here, the first preliminary display may be started only while the reach effect display is displayed, or may be started while the display other than the reach effect display is displayed. It may be a certain one. In addition, the first preliminary display may be always started while the reach effect display is displayed, or may not be started while the reach effect display is displayed.

  In addition, the first notice display may be displayed while the reach effect display is being displayed and before a certain period is started, and is displayed before the reach effect display is started. It may be done.

Also, “the first advance notice display may be displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 162 (A3) to FIG. (A4) In addition, CUM preparation display MTY is started before reaching the reach, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, by displaying the first notice display before the display of the reach effect display is started, an expectation for the reach effect display in which the period display is displayed is given. Can.

  Here, the first preliminary display may be started only before the display of the reach effect display is started, or may be started before the display of the reach effect display is started. The display may be started. In addition, the first notice display may be necessarily started before the display of the reach effect display is started, or may not be started before the display of the reach effect display is started. It may be one.

  Note that the first preliminary announcement may be started while the reach presentation is displayed, or the display is started before the reach presentation is started, and is also displayed while the reach presentation is displayed. You may

  In addition, the reach effect indication is a combination of normal reach and super reach, and the first preview may be started during execution of normal reach performed before super reach is started, or the reach can be reached Display may be started during symbol variation display before effect display is started, and may be displayed until a period in which normal reach in reach effect display is being performed.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, "Whether the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed or the lost symbol form is finally displayed is the jackpot determination performed at the start of symbol fluctuation [eg, as shown in FIG. 53 (b) It is configured to be determined by the lottery process per special view, the result of the big hit determination does not change according to the display mode of the variation icon, and the big hit determination is provided on the game board Acquired when the game ball enters the start opening [for example, the first special view start opening 230, the second special view start opening 232] [for example, in the winning reception process in the winning opening winning process (step S508) shown in FIG. It is configured to be determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using the acquired random number [for example, special figure 1 winning random number value, special figure 1 random number value, special figure 2 winning random number value, special figure 2 random number value] It has been, said the big hit lottery The probability of being judged as a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the "big hit probability") is determined in advance [for example, the high probability table for success determination shown in FIG. 10 (a) and the success or failure shown in FIG. It is defined in the low probability table for determination], and the said big hit probability does not change with the display mode of the said fluctuation icon, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. "
I also explained about

  Subsequently, an example of effects that can be applied to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above will be described using FIGS. Here, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 194 to 206 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 193 and described above, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIG. 193 and described above to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  FIG. 194 shows the correspondence between the display mode (color) of the effect display in the effect device 206 and the notation used in the present specification and the drawings, and FIG. 194 (a) shows the display color in the decorative symbol display device 208. (B) is the correspondence with the light emission color in the light emitting means such as a full color LED.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the display color in the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed as “flickering white” in the decorative symbol display device 208, which is described as “minor mark” in this specification, In the drawing, it is indicated by hatching of small (coarse) dots. Similarly, a case where "blue" is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 is described as a "hatched" pattern in the present specification, indicated by hatching in the drawing, and "green" in the decorative symbol display device 208. The displayed case is described as a “diamond” pattern in the present specification, indicated by hatching in the drawing, and a “red” displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as “lattice” in the present specification. Described as a pattern, indicated by hatching of a grid in the drawing, and a case where it is displayed in "golden" in the decorative symbol display device 208 is described as a "vertical line" pattern in the present specification, and hatched in the drawing. In the present specification, the case of being displayed in “rainbow color” in the decorative symbol display device 208 is described as “multi-point” pattern, and is indicated by hatching of many (fine) dots in the drawing. Or described as pattern "horizontal", on the drawing are indicated by hatching horizontal line.

  Moreover, the case where it displays by "default (color)" in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 is shown by the description (for example, no pattern and white) other than these.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), in the present specification, the light emitting color of the light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated in the household object 224E or the like is displayed as "white light" in the light emitting means. It is described as a pattern of "small points" and indicated by hatching of small (coarse) dots (points) on the drawing. Similarly, a case where "blue light" is displayed in the light emitting means is described as a "hatched line" pattern in the present specification, a hatching is shown in the drawing, and a "green light" is displayed in the light emitting means Is described as a “diamond” pattern in the present specification, indicated by hatching in the figure, and “red light” in the light emitting means is described as a “grid” pattern in the present specification, The upper part is indicated by hatching of a grid, and the case where it is indicated by “gold on” in the light emitting means is described as a “vertical line” pattern in the present specification, and is indicated by hatching of vertical lines in the drawing. In the present specification, the case where it is displayed by lighting (rainbow flash) is described as a "multi-point" pattern, and is indicated by hatching of many (fine) dots in the drawing, or described as a "horizontal line" pattern, Horizontal hatches on the drawing It is shown in grayed. Further, in the specification, the case of being "turned off" in the light emitting means is described as a "white-painted" pattern, and in the drawings, it is shown by a notation other than these (for example, no pattern and white).

  In the example of the effects to be described below, the display means is configured by, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. Notice icon, notice display, icon for mini game A, icon for mini game B, hold icon, change icon, icon change notice display, chance up meter, timer notice etc. by one or two or all decorative symbol display devices An example displayed is shown. First, these will be described in order.

  FIG. 195 is a diagram gradually showing an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 195 (A1) to FIG. 195 (A7) is an effect example following FIG. 29 (9).

  FIG. 195 (A1) shows that the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and after the button effect is started, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started. Here, the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the second check point CP2, and stops at the second check point CP2 until the button operation by the player is performed or the operation valid period elapses, but does not stop it. You may

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 195 (A2) shows that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (A3) When the effect button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 195 (A4), the cut-in image (gold cut-in image) CI3 of the donkey is displayed, and a notice effect notifying that the big hit reliability is high is performed. . In this presentation example, the outer frame of the gold cut-in image CI3 is represented by a pattern of “vertical lines”. The cut-in image CI3 displayed in this example of presentation differs from the display mode of the cut-in image CI3 of the crown pattern shown in FIG. 29, and is displayed on the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L It is done. Therefore, the display of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy Kage and the chance-up meter CMT in the Kenraito reach are hidden because they are overlapped by the cut-in image CI3. That is, since the cut-in image CI3 is displayed on top of the animation of the duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of the main character in the sword reach and the front side of the chance increase meter CMT, the character of the main character and the enemy role in the sword reach It can be said that the display of animation of the duel scene with the swordsman and the chance-up meter CMT are considered to be difficult to see. As described above, in this example of rendering, the chance up meter CMT is shown to be overlapped by the display of the chance up notice that appears due to the effect of the chance up meter CMT, but the display of the chance up notice is the chance up meter CMT. May be overlapped. This is applicable in the description so far and in the following description. In addition, instead of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195 (A4), a weak cut-in image CI3 b (see FIG. 182 (A13)) having lower reliability than the gold cut-in image CI3 may be displayed. . This gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195 (A4) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 has been operated within the operation effective period, and the effect button 136 may have the operation effective period. It may be displayed whenever it is operated inside. Further, this gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195 (A4) may be displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, and the effect button 136 may be displayed. It may be displayed whenever the operation effective period has elapsed without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated. When the operation effective period has elapsed without the button 136 being operated, the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3. Further, in this example of presentation, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed, the chance up meter CMT is not hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3 and is displayed visibly. In this example, while the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the layer on the back side of the gold cut-in image CI3, and in that state, Sabohani's cursor as the cursor for the chance up meter CMT. The display control is performed in which the progress of the character SBH is performed, but the progress may not be made on the character SBH of the Sabo Hani, or the display control in which the chance up meter CMT is not arranged in the layer on the back side of the gold cut-in image CI3. You may do so.

  The effect shown in FIG. 195 (A5) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29 (14), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is originally "chance up gold cut-in" in the vicinity of Sabohani character SBH. A balloon with the letter “” is displayed, but in this example, since the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the entire display screen, it is not displayed. In the case where the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed when the effect button 136 is not operated and the operation effective period has elapsed, the effect button 136 is also operated when the effect button 136 is not operated. In the same manner as when the button is operated, it may be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred. In this case, since the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped due to the gold cut-in image CI3, the display as shown in FIG. 29 (14) is performed for the chance up meter CMT. In addition, it is not necessary to notify that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, or only notify that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred (for example, the balloon is not displayed, and only the letters of "UP" are displayed, etc. May).

  The effect shown in FIG. 195 (A6) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29 (15), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is originally marked in red In addition to this, the letter “UP” is displayed above that indicates that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the advance notice, and the history of the occurrence of the advance notice is shown, but in this example of the effect Since the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the entire display screen, this is also hidden.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (A7), the gold cut-in image CI3 is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene between the hero of the main character and the sword sword of the enemy character in swords reach is displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. It is shown that it was done. Also, Sabohan's character SBH has started to move. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (17) and thereafter are performed.

  195 (B1) to (B3) show another effect pattern of the effects shown in (A4) to (A6), and the gold cut-in image CI3 is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that the whole display screen is displayed with the upper and lower edge portions left.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (B1), a gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect of notifying that the reliability of the big hit is high is performed. In this staging example, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed with the upper and lower edge portions of the display screen remaining, and in the area where the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed, The animation of the duel scene and a part of the chance up meter CMT are made visible. In other words, it can be said that the chance up meter CMT is partially hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to grasp the situation of the check point (such as whether the check point is filled or not) which is the point where the chance-up notice occurs. In this example of rendering, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed in a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the state of the Sabohan character SBH as a cursor, but some or all of the Sabohan character SBH is made visible It may be possible to grasp the progress of the effect of the up meter CMT. Further, part or all of the characters "UP" displayed on the check point may be visible, and in this case, it may be possible to grasp whether or not a chance-up notice has occurred. Also, part or all of the final point GP may be visible. In addition, when the effect of grasping the progress status of the chance up notice is performed according to the decrease degree of the gauge, a part or all of the meter for displaying the gauge is visible and the progress status is grasped It may be possible. In addition, a part or all of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani may be visible and may be able to recognize the type of the chance-up notice that has occurred, or it may or may not. You may Note that while the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the chance up meter CMT may be erased and not displayed.

  The effect shown in FIG. 195 (B2) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 195 (A5), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is originally "chance up gold cut-in" near the character SBH of Sabohani. A balloon with the letter “” is displayed, but in this example, since it is overlapped by the gold cut-in image CI 3, it is not displayed.

  The effect shown in FIG. 195 (B3) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 195 (A6), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the lower part of the chance up meter CMT is partially displayed, and the chance up meter It is displayed that the second check point CP2 in the CMT is marked in red. However, in this example, since the upper part of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3, the letter "UP" indicating that the jackpot's reliability has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice is not displayed. It is assumed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

  FIG. 195 (C1) to FIG. 195 (C6) are an example of effect following FIG. 29 (16).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (C1), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has reached the third check point CP3.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (C2), in this presentation example, unlike the presentation shown in FIG. 29 (18), not the lever image 136Va but the decabutton image 136aL is displayed, and the vicinity of the sabothani character SBH is displayed. A balloon with the word “chance up big button” is displayed on the screen to notify that the advance notice by the highly reliable button effect has been started. However, in this effect example, the deca-button image 136aL is displayed so as to occupy the majority of the display screen, and a part of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the deca-button image 136aL. Therefore, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is made non-display, and it is not possible to visually recognize that the character "chance up decal button" is displayed. In addition, a part of the sabo-hani character SBH is also hidden by the deca-button image 136aL. Note that, in this case, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed overlapping (overlapping) on the front side of the decal button image 136aL, and in this case, the balloon of the character SBH of the sabo hani may become visible. . In addition, only a part of the displays constituting the chance up meter CMT may be displayed overlapping the chance up meter CMT. For example, the character SBH of Sabohani constituting the chance up meter CMT Alternatively, only the balloon of the sabo-hani character SBH may be displayed so as to overlap with the deca-button image 136aL.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (C3), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the deca-button image 136aL, and the button effect is started. At this time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed superimposed on the lower end portion of the large button image 136aL, but the display position is not limited to this, and can be appropriately arranged. Moreover, although the remaining time display meter MT in this example of presentation is made into the same size as the figure (A1), you may display it by a large size corresponding to the magnitude | size of the deca-button image 136aL. Note that when displaying the deca-button image 136aL, the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed, or a plurality of remaining time display meters MT can be displayed, and the plurality of remaining time display meters MT are displayed simultaneously. May be present. For example, in the case where the presentation button 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed integrally, when the deca button 136aL is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed large as it is in proportion to the size thereof. When the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed separately, the remaining time display meter MT may be adjusted according to the size when displaying the Deca button 136aL. You may also enlarge it.

  In FIG. 195 (C4), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the state where the player can operate the effect button 136 can be received. At this time, the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter “UP” is displayed above it, indicating that the jackpot's reliability has been raised by the appearance of the notice. A part of the characters of “UP” is hidden in the deca-button image 136aL and is considered to be difficult to view. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SAH of Sabohani starts moving. Alternatively, the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the player operates the effect button 136 or until the operation valid period elapses.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 195 (C5), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, although the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP, it is overlapped by the deca-button image 136aL and is considered to be difficult to view. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (C6) within the operation valid period, the effects after FIG. 29 (23), for example, are performed.

  FIG. 195 (D1) to FIG. 195 (D5) show another effect pattern continued from FIG. 195 (C1).

  When the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, as shown in FIG. 195 (D1), in this example of rendering, the united animation of the lever image 136Va is started, and translucent from the lower left and upper right of the display screen, respectively. The lever image 136Vq appears. At the timing shown in FIG. 195 (D1), the semitransparent lever image 136Vq displayed at the lower left overlaps the chance up meter CMT, and the lever image is semitransparent, so the chance up meter CMT looks thin It is possible to Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of a lever effect or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semitransparent lever image 136Vq informs that the lever image 136Va is materialized and the lever effect is started by uniting. The pair of translucent lever images 136Vq move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example of rendering, an example in which two translucent lever images 136Vq are merged has been described, for example, a rendering in which four translucent lever images 136Vq are merged may be performed. In this case, two semi-transparent lever images 136Vq may be combined. The lever image 136Va is materialized and the lever effect is more easily started when the effect of combining the four translucent lever images 136Vq is performed than when the effect of combining the transparent lever image 136Vq is performed. It may be Note that while the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect lever 136V is not yet received. Here, the lever image displayed in the IN animation may not have transparency.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (D2), it is shown that the pair of translucent lever images 136Vq are further in proximity.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (D3), when the pair of translucent lever images 136Vq overlap, as shown in FIG. 195 (D4), the effect EF 301 is displayed so as to cover most of the display screen. The effect EF 301 covers at least a part of the chance up meter CMT in a manner to cover the entire pair of translucent lever images 136Vq. Note that the chance up meter CMT may be displayed so as to overlap the effect EF 301.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (D5), the effect EF 301 is erased and the lever image 136Va appears, and a balloon with the character of “chance up lever” attached in the vicinity of the sabothani character SBH It is displayed and notifies that the advance notice by the lever effect is started. In this example of presentation, unlike the presentation shown in FIG. 29 (18), the lever image 136Va is displayed so as to overlap on the front side of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani, and the overlap is caused by the lever image 136Va. Although it is considered that the balloon is more difficult to see than in the state where the lever image 136Va is overlapped with the balloon of the sabothani character SBH and displayed in the same manner as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (18). Good. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (19) and thereafter are performed.

  In this presentation example, when the display related to the chance-up notice is displayed, this display hides part or all of the chance-up meter CMT, or shows an example in which the chance-up meter CMT is not displayed. The display according to the chance-up notice may be configured such that the chance-up meter CMT is not hidden (or not hidden). Note that the same can be applied to a timer notice described above or later.

  FIG. 196 is a diagram showing an example of effects performed in the present embodiment in stages.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 196A1 to FIG. 196A, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the sub display device 208S is located below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E. It is supposed to be arranged in the The sub display device 208S is disposed such that the upper end thereof is below the lower end of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S. It is not supposed to. Further, the illustration of the first large-screen behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character objects 224Gd and the one-hundred box character article 224H is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (A1), it develops into a super reach (swords reach), and in the chance up meter CMT, the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 and the button effect is started, and thereafter , It is shown that the operation effective period has started. That is, the effect shown in FIG. 196 (A1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29 (10). In addition, in the sub display device 208S, the characters "vs swordsman" are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap the sub display device 208S, the chance up meter CMT, the button image 136a constituting the button effect, and the remaining time display meter MT are easily visible.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 196 (A2), the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced, and then the effect is displayed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A3). When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 196 (A4), in the sub display device 208S, a gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the entire display screen. Also, in FIG. 196 (A4), the sub display device 208S moves upward with the gold cut-in image CI3 displayed, and the upper half overlaps the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. Therefore, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub display device 208S, and it is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state. A weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196 (A4). In this case, the sub display device 208S may or may not rise. Further, this gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196 (A4) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 has been operated within the operation valid period, and the effect button 136 may be operated. It may be displayed whenever it is operated within the effective period. Further, the sub display device 208S may be always moved up when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, or the sub display may be performed even if the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. The device 208S may always be lifted. In addition, the sub display device 208S may be raised only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Further, this gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196 (A4) may be displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, and the effect button 136 may be displayed. When the operation effective period has elapsed without being operated, it may be displayed without fail, and when the operation effective period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, it may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, the sub-display device 208S continues the ascending operation, and as shown in FIG. 196 (A5), the sub-display device 208S stops in an overlapping manner substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the support member supporting the sub display 208S overlaps a part of the chance up meter CMT, but the main body of the sub display 208S does not overlap the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT is easier to view than during the raising operation of the sub display device 208S. That is, it can be said that the chance up meter CMT has more regions hidden by the sub display device 208S during the rising operation of the sub display device 208S than after the completion of the rising operation, and it is difficult to view. Note that at least a part of the chance up meter CMT may be configured to be overlapped by the sub display device 208S which has completed the rising operation and moved to the maximum operation position. Further, the display area of the sub display device 208S may be configured to be overlapped by the decorative symbol display device 208, another effect movable body or the like. Further, after completion of the raising operation of the sub-display device 208S, the area of the chance up meter CMT hidden by the sub-display device 208S may be larger than that during the raising operation. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a balloon with the letter of “chance up gold cut-in” attached is displayed near the sabohani character SBH, and it is informed that a notice has been given by the display of the gold cut-in image CI3. However, at least a part of the display position of the balloon is superimposed on the sub display device 208S, which is considered to be difficult to view. Note that the display position of the balloon may be a position not overlapping the sub display device 208S. In addition, the balloon may be hidden.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 196 (A6), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and “UP” indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased by the appearance of the chance up notice. The letter "" is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, at this time, the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the sabothani character SBH has been deleted, but the area in which the balloon has been displayed has been overlapped by the sub display device 208S, so that mode is difficult to recognize. May be

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (A7), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move. At this time, after the display is switched from the gold cut-in image CI3 to the character display of "vs Kengo" in the sub display device 208S, the descent operation is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. The main body is positioned so as to overlap with the front side of at least a part of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up meter CMT is considered to be difficult to view. In addition, after the descent operation of the sub display device 208S is started, the gold cut-in image CI3 may be switched to the character display of "vs Kengo", or after the descent operation of the sub display device 208S is completed, the gold cut in You may switch to the character display of "vs swordsman" from image CI3.

  FIG. 196 (A8) shows that the lowering operation of the sub display device 208S is continuously performed. At this time, the movement display of the character SBH of Sabohani in the chance up meter CMT is also performed.

  FIG. 196 (A9) shows that the lowering operation of the sub display device 208S is completed and the initial position is obtained. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 is not overlapped with the sub display device 208S, it may be easy to view. After that, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (17) and thereafter are performed.

  As described above, although the example of displaying the gold cut-in image CI3 as a chance-up notice on the sub display device 208S is shown in this presentation example, the display device for displaying the gold cut-in image CI3 is the above-described decorative symbol display Instead of the device 208 (the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N) or the sub display device 208S, the display may be performed on another type of display device, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be the POV display 224I shown in the above, or may be performed by light emission of the light guide plate IL. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the display device is constituted by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and The display may be moved to a position where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is in close proximity, and the display of a chance-up notice such as a gold cut-in image CI3 may be performed over these display devices. Here, the proximity position may be a position where two display devices come in contact with each other, or the two display devices may come close to each other but may have a gap.

  FIG. 196 (B1) to FIG. 196 (B4) show an example of effect following FIG. 20 (8).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (B1), after the character of “attention” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, the display in which the pseudo-connected symbol moves at low speed from the top to the bottom in the middle symbol It is shown that is being done. The low speed movement of the pseudo run symbol is continuously performed until the figure (B3), but in this production example, as shown in FIG. 196 (B2), unlike the production example shown in FIG. 20 (19), the timer notice The display TM1 is not erased, and the timer advance display TM1 displays the pseudo-run symbol as shown in FIG. 196 (B3) after stopping displaying the pseudo run symbol, as shown in FIG. 194 (B4). It is displayed until it changes to the cut-in display which consists of character display. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped by a pseudo run symbol as a notice effect indication which is executed as a result of the timer notice being made. The pseudo run symbol may be overlapped by the timer notice display TM1. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. In addition, there may be a frame out in the lower part without displaying the pseudo run symbol, and the pseudo run will not be started when the pseudo run symbol is in the lower frame, the decoration symbol of the loss is just as it is The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach effect may be started in the reach state. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is notified that the pseudo link will be started after the countdown is completed by the timer advance notice.

  FIG. 196 (C1) to FIG. 196 (C4) show an example of effect following FIG. 20 (6).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (C1), the display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, which shows that the countdown is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 196 (C2), in this presentation example, unlike the presentation example shown in FIG. The balloon is displayed. At this time, although "00:00" is continuously displayed on the timer notice display TM1, at least a part is hidden by the balloon and it is considered as difficult to view. The timer advance notice display TM1 may overlap the balloon to make the timer notice display TM1 visible. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be erased at the timing when the display YMF of the face of the lord and the balloon are displayed, or the display YMF of the face up of the lord after the timer notice display TM1 is erased and the balloon. May be displayed. Further, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 196 (C2), a part of the timer notice display TM1 is covered by the balloon, but the whole timer notice display TM1 may be covered by the balloon. Also, the timer announcement display TM1 may be hidden by the display YMF of the face-up of the lord.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (C3), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is erased.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (C4), display is started in which the pseudo run symbol, in which the character of Tonosama is represented in the middle symbol, moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. When the pseudo run pattern overlaps the balloon, the pseudo run symbol is at least partially hidden by the balloon. That is, the display YMF of the face-up of the lord and the balloon are displayed on the front side rather than the pseudo run pattern. The pseudo run symbol may be displayed on the front side more than the display YMF of the face-up of the lord and the balloon. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. In this example of rendering, the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased while the balloon with the character "Guze !!" displayed along with the display YMF of the face of the lord is displayed. The fact that the timer notice display is erased in the display displayed after the countdown by the notice display has become 0 means that the embodiment of the timer notice effect described above and the embodiment of the timer notice effect described hereinafter It is needless to say that it is applicable also to

  FIG. 196 (D1) to FIG. (D3) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 196 (C2) to FIG. (C4).

  FIG. 196 (D1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (C2), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, in place of the display YMF of the face-up of the crown and the display of the balloon, the cut-in image CI7 It is shown that is displayed. This cut-in image CI7 is surrounded by the outer frame of the lattice pattern and has a square shape, and a close-up of the domed face is displayed in the lower left corner, and the character "I'm going!" Is displayed in the vicinity And it is informed that there is a possibility that the pseudo connected effect is started. Here, the cut-in image CI7 hides all of the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is not displayed by the cut-in image CI7. Note that there may be a plurality of display modes of the cut-in image CI7, and depending on the display mode, a part or all of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be visible. Further, the cut-in image CI7 is displayed so as to be overlapped on the UI unit UI, and the cut-in image CI7 suppresses the reduction in the visibility of the UI unit UI. In addition, the UI unit UI may be overlapped by the cut-in image CI7, and at least a part may be hidden.

  FIG. 196 (D2) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (C3), and although the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, it is difficult to recognize since it is hidden by the cut-in image CI7.

  FIG. 196 (D3) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (C4), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the pseudo run symbol is moving at low speed from the upper side to the lower side in the middle symbol It is shown. At this time, the cut-in image CI7 overlaps the pseudo run symbol, that is, hides at least a part of the pseudo run symbol. After that, for example, the cut-in image CI7 is deleted, and the effects shown in FIG. Note that at least a part of the UI unit UI may overlap at a timing when the cut-in image CI7 is present.

  FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 197 (A1) to FIG. 197 (A12) is an effect example following FIG. 20 (3).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A1), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (A1), the display in the timer notice display TM1 is “05 : 00 ", which indicates that 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A2), a state is shown in which the cut-in image CI8 in which the character of "button STOCK !!" is displayed is displayed. That is, it is informed that stocking of the notice item which becomes a trigger of start of the button effect. This cut-in image CI8 is displayed so as to occupy a large part of the display area, leaving a part of the upper and lower end edges of the display area. Therefore, the first decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are hidden by the cut-in image CI8. At this time, although the timer advance notice display TM1 is not displayed, the countdown continues. Further, the UI unit UI is displayed on the front side of the cut-in image CI8, and suppresses the decrease in the visibility due to the cut-in image CI8. In addition to the display of the cut-in image CI8 or along with the display of the cut-in image CI, effects may be produced by the effect display by the effect movable body 224 such as the household crest 224E or the light guide plate IL. Thus, in this effect example, it is indicated that the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped by another effect display not related to the timer advance notice effect. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be arranged on the front side of the cut-in image CI8.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A3), a state is shown in which the cut-in image CI8 is erased and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed. At this time, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "03:91". In addition, the stock button image 136aST as a notice item is displayed below the timer notice display TM1, and the letter "x 1" is displayed above the notice, and a notice is made that the button effect is performed at least once. It has been informed. That is, it is shown that one execution of the button effect is stocked.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A4), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00” after “decoration 7” stops at the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and reaches the reach state. The countdown is completed, and it is shown that the word "attention" is displayed to prompt attention to the advance notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (A5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF 302 is displayed so as to surround the stock button image 136aST, indicating that button digest animation is being performed. There is. The button digest animation informs that the button effect is started. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that stock button image 136aST as a notice item is digested as a result of timer advance presentation being performed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A6), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 197 (A7), the stock button image displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen An animation is shown in which the 136aST moves to the center while expanding.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the button effect is started. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (A9), it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 197 (A10), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced, and then the effect is displayed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (A11). When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 197 (A12), cut-in display is performed, which includes the character of the lord and the character display of "CONTINUED". In this example of the effect, it is notified that the pseudo continuous effect is executed as a result of the successful button effect. In addition, there may be a case where the button effect may fail, and in this case, the pseudo continuous effect is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss may be stopped and displayed as it is, and the reach condition is reached. May be started. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is shown that the button effect is started by performing the timer advance effect, and that the pseudo connected effect is started by the success of the button effect. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 197 (B1) to FIG. 197 (B10) is an effect example following FIG. 20 (4).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B1), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (B1), the display in the timer notice display TM1 is "00 : 01 "is shown. In the first decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are all being displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, in this example, after the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 stops at "00:01", as shown in FIG. 197 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 displays "00:01". In addition to the so-called "pause button", "pause display" with the characters "pause" is displayed, and it is notified that the timer display countdown has been interrupted. Note that "pause display" may be displayed separately from timer notice display TM1 in which the remaining time ("00: 01") is displayed. In this case, the “temporary display” may be disposed above the timer advance notice display TM 1 or may be displayed overlapping a part of the timer advance notice display TM 1. In this effect example, thereafter, the first pseudo connected effect is performed, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In the meantime, "pause display" is continuously displayed. While the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted, the display of the remaining time and the "pause display" may be displayed alternately.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B3), the cut-in display including the character of the royal character and the "continuation" character display is performed, and the start of the second pseudo continuous effect is notified. Also at this time, the "pause display" is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B4), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “× 3” is displayed below the second decorative symbol, indicating that the third variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B5), a state is shown in which “decoration 7” is stopped at the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to reach a reach state. Also at this time, “pause display” is continuously displayed.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 197 (B6), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved to the upper left and right, and the UI unit UI leaves the fluctuation icon h0 and displays the display area Frame out below. The start of movement display of the left and right designs of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing as the start of frame-out display of the UI unit UI, or the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol may be After the movement display starts, the frame-out display of the UI unit UI may start, or after the frame-out display of the UI unit UI starts, the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol May start.

  Thereafter, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the “temporary stop display” is switched to the timer display indicating the remaining time, and the countdown of the timer display is restarted. Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (B7), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 197 (B8), on the timer notice display TM1, the notice is changed to the timer display. The word "Attention!" Is displayed to encourage attention.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (B9), the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Furthermore, in this example of rendering, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 displayed as "attention!" Is overlapped by the second large-screen behavior character article 224Gb and the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd, and is considered to be difficult to view There is. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be a case where the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character objects 224Gd do not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 197 (B10), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

  In this example of rendering, an example is shown in which “temporary display” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 197 (C1) to FIG. When being interrupted, the pause display PAUSE may be displayed separately from the timer advance notice display TM1. The effects shown in FIG. 197 (C1) to (C2) are another example of effects to be performed subsequently to (B1), and for the effects performed in (B2) to (B6) It corresponds. A pause display PAUSE shown in FIG. 197 (C1) is a display of a horizontal rectangular shape with four corners chamfered, and an aspect in which the mark of “pause button” and the character of “pause” are displayed in the frame And it is displayed large at the center of the display screen. At this time, the pause display PAUSE overlaps the timer notice display TM1 so as to hide at least a part of the timer notice display TM1, making the timer notice display TM1 difficult to view. When the pause display PAUSE is displayed, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be moved and displayed so as not to overlap with the pause display PAUSE. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 197 (D1) to FIG. (D2), when the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, after displaying the pause display PAUSE, the timer notice is displayed while the pause display PAUSE is reduced. The animation display for moving to the position where the display TM1 is displayed may be performed, and then the “temporary display” may be performed on the timer advance notice display TM1. The effects shown in FIG. 197 (D1) to (D2) are another example of effects performed subsequently to (B1). After the effect shown in FIG. 197 (D2) is performed, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 197 (B3) and thereafter are performed. Note that, when it is time to restart the countdown of the timer display, the pause display PAUSE may be enlarged and displayed again, and then the countdown may be restarted.

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing an example of effects performed in the present embodiment in stages.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 198 (A1) to FIG. 1 (A10), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the household object of It is supposed to be arranged in the The sub display device 208S is disposed such that the upper end thereof is below the lower end of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S. It is not supposed to. Further, the illustration of the first large-screen behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character objects 224Gd and the one-hundred box character article 224H is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 198 (A1) to (A10) show an example of timer preview effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (A1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. In this presentation example, these may be referred to as a UI unit. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (A2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice effect is started. “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the countdown is started when frame in of timer notice display TM1 is started, but after frame in of timer notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 198 (A3) After that, the countdown may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 198 (A3) to FIG. 1 (A4), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 198 (A4), “decoration 7” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol before the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, and the reach state is formed. ing.

  Then, in FIG. 198 (A5), the sub display device 208S displays the face image YMF of the character of the lord like a balloon saying “I'm done !!” in place of the display on the UI unit. Further, in FIG. 198 (A5), the sub display device 208S moves upward with displaying the face image YMF and balloon of the character from the initial position, and the upper half is decorated at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A5). The front side of the symbol display device 208 is in an overlapping state. In addition, the raising operation by the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

  Thereafter, the sub-display device 208S continues the raising operation, and as shown in FIG. 198 (A6), the sub-display device 208S stops in an overlapping manner substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the main body of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is considered to be difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed to a position not overlapping the sub display device 208S. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 has difficulty in visual recognition because there are more regions hidden by the sub display device 208S after completion of the rising operation of the sub display device 208S than during the rising operation. Note that the area of the timer notice display TM1 hidden by the sub display device 208S may be larger when the sub display device 208S is moving upward than when the sub display device 208S is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 198 (A7), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. The timer notice display TM1 may be erased when the sub display device 208S is at the maximum movement position, or the timer notice display TM1 may be erased while the sub display device 208S is moving up or down. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may not be erased while the sub display device 208S is moving up or down.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 198 (A8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display in which the pseudo-connected symbol moves at low speed from the upper side to the lower side in the middle symbol is started. However, as shown in FIG. 198 (A8), since the main body of the sub display device 208S is disposed on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device, in the area where the pseudo run symbol overlaps the sub display device 208S, It is hidden by the sub display device 208S and is considered to be difficult to view. Thereafter, when the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub display device 208S starts the lowering operation, and at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A9), the area where the pseudo run symbol and the sub display device 208S overlap is small, and the pseudo run symbol May be easy to see. Also, when the sub-display device 208S starts the lowering operation, the face image YMF and balloon of the character are switched to the display of the UI unit, but the sub-display is performed after the sub-display device 208S starts the lowering operation. The display on the device 208S may be switched to the UI unit from the face image YMF of the character of the domino character and the balloon. Further, after the lowering operation of the sub display device 208S is completed, the face image YMF and the balloon of the character of the lord may be switched to the UI unit.

  FIG. 198 (A10) shows that the lowering operation of the sub display device 208S is completed and the initial position is obtained. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 is not overlapped with the sub display device 208S, it may be easy to view. After that, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effects shown in FIG.

  As described above, this example shows an example in which the effect display (display of the face image YMF of the character of the lady and the balloon) for notifying that the pseudo continuous effect is performed in the sub display device 208S is shown. The display device for displaying the image is not limited to the above-described decorative symbol display device 208 (the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N) and the sub display device 208S, and may be displayed on other types of display devices For example, the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 15 (C4) may be used, or light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the display device is constituted by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and It may be moved to a position where the third decorative symbol display device 208N approaches and the above-mentioned effect display may be performed across these display devices.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 198 (B1) to FIG. 1 (B13) is an effect example following FIG. 162 (A2). In this example of presentation, it is shown that the advance notice by the chance up meter CMT is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 198 (B1), in this effect example, when the flame effect EF 101 is erased, the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM in-provision display MTY, unlike FIG. 162 (A3). Is shown. That is, in this presentation example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is not displayed during reach presentation, but is displayed during fluctuation display of a normal decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 198 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached while the character SBH of Sabohani moves, a specific advance notice may occur. In other words, the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 can be said to be a display of a chance up point indicating a chance up occurrence place, and the chance up meter CMT is a place where the chance up occurs in the symbol variation display It can also be said that it is a display of a meter that suggests. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and when the sabothan character SBH reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived, or some hot effects are produced Suggests to be done. In addition, the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohan may be displayed before the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started.

  FIG. 198 (B2) shows that the Sabohan character SBH functioning as a cursor has started to move. Here, the progressing speed of the character SAH of the sabothani is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. Note that the balloon of "START !!" may not be displayed. In addition, by displaying a balloon of “START !!”, it may be notified that a chance-up advance notice is likely to occur at the check points CP1 to CP3.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B3), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving from the start point SP.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 198 (B4), when the sabo-hani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, as shown in FIG. 198 (B5), the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are simultaneously stopped and displayed. Temporarily stop with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decor 1-decor 1". That is, the chance eye as the advance notice is displayed. In addition, in this example of presentation, a plurality of types of chance eyes are prepared, and in particular, the combination of the decorative patterns of "decorative 7-decorative 1-decorative 1" is a highly reliable strong chance eye. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a notice (prereading notice) of the chance up by the appearance of the chance eye is performed. In addition, the weak chance eyes may be stopped and displayed in addition to the strong chance eyes. In this case, chances may be raised or may not be raised.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B5), a balloon with the word “chance up strong chance eye !!” is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohani character SBH, and a chance up chance is displayed. It warns that a warning has been made by eye. In addition, the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani may be started at the timing when the chance eye is stopped and displayed, or the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed after the display of the chance eye is stopped, After the display of the balloon of the character SBH is started, the chance eye may be stopped and displayed. In addition, while the character SBH of Sabohani is animated to stand by at the first check point CP1 while the chance is displayed, an animation that progresses without stopping may be performed. In addition, the temporary stop state is maintained by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 198 (B6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit is increased by the appearance of the advance notice. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. In addition, the temporary stop state is maintained by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B7), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased, and the temporary stop state is maintained by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decor 1-decor 1". . In addition, the waiting animation of Sabo Hani character SBH is continuing.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B8), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1”. In response to this, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination with the same decorative symbol. In this presentation example, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is interrupted during the final display of the symbol, and it may be easily recognized that the symbol is in the stop display state. In addition, when the waiting animation which produces that the character SBH of Sabo Hani is in the waiting state is performed, the waiting animation may be performed continuously or may be interrupted. At this time, on the placard, a stop mark is displayed in a state where a question mark is attached, and it is suggested that the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP to perform some hot effects. The animation in which the placard rotates at the final point GP may be continuously performed or may be interrupted. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 198 (B9), the fluctuation icon h0 is erased. In this presentation example, the animation in the chance up meter CMT may be continuously performed without interruption even during the final display of symbols.

  In FIG. 198 (B10), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the reserve icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the first reserve icon h11 (the reserve icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) arranged in the first stage hs1 is the base of the variation icon display area CIS. It moves over hs0 and is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. In this example of presentation, since the chance up meter CMT is displayed overlapping the holding icon display area, a part of the moving animation of the holding icon h11 can not be viewed. In addition, when the movement animation of the holding icon h11 is performed, the holding icon h11 may be displayed on the front side of the chance up meter CMT so that the movement animation can be visually recognized. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Also, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is resumed, and the character SBH of Sabohani also resumes its progression.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B11), the No. 1 symbol shown in FIG. The icon "IHI" of "gold bomber" appears at the right end of the screen, and it is shown that the pending change animation is started. That is, the icon IHI of "gold bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the on-hold change animation in this presentation example, while flying from the right to the left, the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" fires (bombards) a bullet with a fluctuating icon h0. In addition, the icon IHI of "gold bomber" may be paused in front of the target fluctuation icon h0. In addition, this pause may be pause of the cassette that disguises the target icon. Further, in this example of presentation, when the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed by the hold change animation performed by the icon IHI of the "gold bomber", the display mode of the change icon is "vertical line". It is suggested that it becomes a display mode of the pattern of. In addition, when the holding change animation by the icon IHI of "gold bomber" is performed, the bombing on the fluctuation icon h0 may succeed and the display mode of the holding icon may always change, or the bombing on the fluctuation icon h0 In some cases, the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not change. Moreover, the display mode of the hold icon after the change may be a display mode other than the pattern of the “vertical line”.

  After that, FIG. 198 (B12) shows that the bullet icon with the pattern of “vertical line” is fired from the icon IHI of “gold bomber”. That is, the icon IHI of "gold bomber" is composed of a bomber icon of "vertical line" pattern and a bullet icon of "vertical line" pattern. The goal here is the fluctuation icon h0. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 198 (B13), the bullet icon hits the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the “vertical line” pattern. Further, at this time, the character SBH of Sabohani travels on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT, and the second check point CP2 arrives at the timing when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes. In addition, the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2 before the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes, or the character SBH of the Sabohani second check point after the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. May reach CP2. It is to be noted that Sabohan's character SBH is stopped at the second check point CP2 and stands by. After that, for example, effects shown in FIG. 190 (B11) and thereafter are performed.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing an example of effects performed in the present embodiment in stages.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 199 (A1) to FIG. 1 (A4) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 162 (A2). In this example of presentation, it is shown that the advance notice by the chance up meter CMT is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (A1), in this effect example, when the flame effect EF 101 is erased, the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM in-provision display MTY, unlike FIG. 162 (A3). Is shown. That is, in this presentation example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is not displayed during reach presentation, but is displayed during fluctuation display of a normal decorative symbol. Here, the progressing speed of the character SAH of the sabothani is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard to which the question mark is attached is displayed in a stopped state, which suggests that the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP to perform some hot effects. As described above, in this example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display on which the chance up meter CMT is performed. In this chance up meter CMT, the chance up notice is displayed. It is shown that the points (check points CP1 to CP3) indicating the timing to be performed are also displayed. In addition, the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohan may be displayed before the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (A2), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as a result, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" The stop display is shown by the combination of the symbols, and it is shown that the swing fluctuation is performed. At this time, the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is not started but is in a standby state.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 199 (A3), a state in which the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “Holis 4-1-1-7” is displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is erased. Note that, in this presentation example, the animation by the chance up meter CMT is interrupted while the symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is resumed as shown in FIG. 199 (A4). Specifically, it is shown that the animation in which the placard rotates at the final point GP is resumed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 190 (B3) and later are performed.

  FIGS. 199 (B1) to (B2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 198 (B8) to (B9).

  FIG. 199 (B1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 198 (B8), and shows a state where the finalized display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 7-decor 1-decor 1". In response to this, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination with the same decorative symbol. In this demonstration example, during the final display of the symbol, different from the demonstration shown in FIG. 198 (B8), the situation in which the animation in the chance up meter CMT is continuously performed without interruption is shown. There is. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 199 (B2), the fluctuation icon h0 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 198 (B11) and thereafter are performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 199 (C1) to FIG. 1 (C5) shows another effect pattern continued from FIG. 20 (2). In this effect example, it is shown that a pre-reading notice is given by the timer notice display TM1 being displayed.

  FIG. 199 (C1) shows that the frame in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the display is arranged at the center right end of the display screen. However, in this example of effect, unlike in FIG. 20 (3), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “10:00” and the countdown is not started. That is, in this production example, during execution of the symbol fluctuation display next to the symbol fluctuation display in which timer notice display TM1 is displayed, a notice concerning the timer announcement effect is performed, that is, the timer notice is displayed by the display of timer notice display TM1. It can be said that pre-reading advance notice of the production is performed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (C2), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as a result, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" The stop display is shown by the combination of the symbols, and it is shown that the swing fluctuation is performed. At this time, with the timer notice display TM1, the start of the countdown is still reserved, and the timer display remains "10:00".

  Thereafter, in FIG. 199 (C3), a state in which the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “Holis 4-1-1-7” is displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is erased. Further, in this effect example, during symbol stop display, the layer of the timer notice display TM1 and the layer of the decoration symbol are changed, and the decoration symbol is displayed in priority to the timer notice display TM1. That is, during the symbol stop display, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the decoration symbol, and at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is hidden by the decoration symbol. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped as it is even when the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Also, in this effect example, while the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the decorative symbol, but the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the decorative symbol even during the temporary stop display. You may

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the reserved icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 199 (C4), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the near side of the decorative symbol. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (C4), the countdown of the timer display has not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (C5), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain notice effect is started after 10 seconds. It is suggested. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 199 (D1) to (D7) show other effect patterns following FIG. 20 (1). In this effect example, it is shown that a pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is performed by the timer notice display TM1 being displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (D1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice effect is started. “30:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, unlike in FIG. 20 (2), the countdown does not start at the time when the frame advance of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the timer display is maintained at "30:00". .

  Thereafter, when frame in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D2), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “29:99”. It has become.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (D3), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as a result, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" The stop display is shown by the combination of the symbols, and it is shown that the swing fluctuation is performed. At this time, the timer display continues counting down on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "18:57" at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D3).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D4), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a state in which the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is shown. In response to this, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination with the same decorative symbol. Further, in this effect example, during symbol stop display, the layer of the timer notice display TM1 and the layer of the decoration symbol are changed, and the decoration symbol is displayed in priority to the timer notice display TM1. That is, during the symbol stop display, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the decoration symbol, and at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is hidden by the decoration symbol. Further, in this effect example, when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted, and this is continued until the next symbol fluctuation is started. That is, while the symbol stop display is in progress, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is stopped and displayed in the state of "18:00". The countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 may be continued even during the symbol stop display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 199 (D5), the fluctuation icon h0 is erased.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is also resumed. Then, as shown in FIG. 199 (D6), the timer notice display TM1 comes to be displayed on the near side of the decorative symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D6), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 indicates "17:53".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 199 (D6) to FIG. 1D (D7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 199 (D7), “decoration 7” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol before the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, and the reach state is formed. ing. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 199 (E1) to (E3) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. (D4) to (D6).

  FIGS. 199 (E1) to (E2) correspond to the effects shown in FIGS. (D4) to (D5), respectively, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” It is shown that the finalized display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In response to this, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination with the same decorative symbol. Further, in this example of effect, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 199 (D4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed even during the symbol stop display. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E1), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 indicates "17:52". Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 199 (E2), the fluctuation icon h0 is erased. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E2), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "16:92". As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed even during the symbol stop display, but the symbol variation display which is the target of the advance notice It may not be executed when the symbol fluctuation display executed before that changes according to the number of reservations, and it is not executed, and the symbol fluctuation display which is the object of the advance notice and the symbol fluctuation display executed before that May be executed even if the fluctuation time changes according to the number of reservations. In addition, it is possible to execute only when the fluctuation time is determined regardless of the number of reservations according to the number of reservations, and the symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the advance notice and the symbol fluctuation display executed before that.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the reserved icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 199 (E3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the near side of the decorative symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E3), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E3), the timer display indicates "15:33". After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 199 (D7) and thereafter are performed.

  FIG. 200 is a diagram showing an example of effects performed in the present embodiment in stages.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 200 (A1) to FIG. 200 (A5) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 162 (A2). In this example of presentation, it is shown that the advance notice of the presentation by the chance up meter by the display of the chance up meter CMT is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 200 (A1), in this effect example, when the flame effect EF 101 is erased, the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM in-provision display MTY, unlike FIG. 162 (A3). Is shown. That is, in this presentation example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is not displayed during reach presentation, but is displayed during fluctuation display of a normal decorative symbol. In addition, not the chance up meter CMT but the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed. In addition, after the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed, it may not be switched to the chance up meter CMT from when the movement display of the character SBH of the sabo hani is started. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 200 (A1), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP in this production example, the placard indicates a question mark and displays a stop, suggesting that the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP to perform some hot effects. There is. In addition, the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohan may be displayed before the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (A2), it is shown that a balloon with the characters “Start from next change !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the sabothani character SBH. There is. That is, it is predicted that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is to be started in the symbol variation display to be started next.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (A3), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as a result, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" The stop display is shown by the combination of the symbols, and it is shown that the swing fluctuation is performed. At this time, the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is not started but is in a standby state.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 200 (A4), a state is shown in which the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “Holis 4—Mod 1—Mod 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon is erased. Note that, in this presentation example, the animation by the chance up meter CMT is interrupted while the symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is resumed as shown in FIG. 200 (A5). Specifically, it is shown that an animation in which the placard rotates at the final point GP is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 190 (B3) and later are performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 200 (B1) to FIG. 200 (B3) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 200 (A1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (B1), the balloon including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in the vicinity of the sabothani character SBH, and it is shown that the button effect is started. ing. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (B2), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the state in which the player operates the effect button 136 is received. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (B3), for example, the effects shown in FIG. 200 (A2) and thereafter are performed. When the effect button 136 is operated, the chance up meter CMT may be erased as a failure in the button effect. In addition, even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, effects shown in FIG. 200 (A2) or later may be performed, or effects shown in FIG. 200 (A2) or later are not performed, For example, the chance up meter CMT may be erased. Further, in the example of the effect, the balloon is displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed after the chance up meter CMT is displayed, but the effect button is displayed when the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. When the 136 is operated, it may be changed to the chance up meter CMT.

  In addition, while the movement display of the character SBH of Sabo Hani performs the above-mentioned button rendition by the character SBH of Sabo Hani, it notifies that there is a possibility that a chance up notice may occur, or notifies that a chance up notice occurs Alternatively, other notices (for example, the change notice, a pre-reading notice, etc.) and effects (eg, conversational effects, tutorial display, etc.) may be performed separately from the chance-up notice.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 200 (C1) to FIG. 200 (C9), it is shown that the execution of the effect by the chance up meter is notified by the notice of conversation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1), the UI unit UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The UI unit UI has a reserved icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the reserve icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. This is the default display mode described in 1. Although the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1) is all white, this all white color indicates that the background screen is not shown.

  In FIG. 200 (C2), it is shown that the speech advance has been started. When the conversation announcement is started, the conversation image CI1 of the statue with the character display of "SP reach!" Is displayed together with the character of the statue, and the transition to the super reach is notified. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 200 (C3), the conversation announcement is updated. Specifically, the tous-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size and is displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and a short conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the short characters. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation effective period It is composed of In addition, at the timing shown to FIG. 200 (C3), the operation effective period is not started and even if the production button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 200 (C3), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the other's conversation image CI2, and the Tonosama's conversation is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In this example of presentation, the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is more easily started when the conversation announcement is given than when the conversation announcement is not given. Also, the conversational image CI1 of the Tonosama may not be displayed in a reduced size when the speech advance notice is updated (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 200 (C2) is displayed). It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A. The effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is then started.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 200 (C4) is shown in the display mode when the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the operation valid period, and then the player presses the effect button 136. As shown in FIG. 200 (C5), in the introductory conversation image CI2, in place of the operation prompting notification image, there may be a case where the characters “It is attention to the meter during SP reach!” Are displayed. Thereby, it is predicted that the chance up meter CMT is displayed during super reach. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "I pay attention to the meter during SP reach!" May be displayed on the condition that the production button 136 is operated, or the production button 136 is operated. When the operation effective period has passed, the words “I watch the meter during SP reach” may not be displayed by the conversation image CI2 of the user, and in this case, the chance up meter CMT will not be displayed either. You may Alternatively, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed. In addition, even if the effect button 136 is not operated, even if the operation effective period has elapsed, the letters “It looks at the meter during SP reach!” Are displayed, and the chance up meter CMT is also displayed. Good. In addition, when the effect button 136 is operated, there may be a case where a character display or a notice other than “It pays attention to the meter during SP reach!” May be performed. It should be noted that only when the characters “It pays attention to the meter during SP reach!” Is displayed by the conversation image CI 2 of the eyebrows, “during the SP reach, even if the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated. The word “It pays attention to the meter!” Is displayed, and when the character display or notice other than “It pays attention to the meter during SP reach!” Is displayed by the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows, the operation of the production button 136 within the operation effective period It may be displayed only when there is a. Further, the character display and notice of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows may be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated, not based on the character display and the notice of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows. Alternatively, the character display or the notice of the conversation image CI2 may be displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated. Thus, in this example of presentation, transition to SP reach is predicted by conversation notice such as "SP reach!", And if chance display meter CMT is always displayed during SP reach, it is indirect It is shown that the chance up meter CMT is predicted to be displayed. In addition, even if the display of "SP reach!" Is performed, it is not necessary to necessarily predict that the presentation by the chance up meter CMT will be performed (for example, the SP reach where the chance up meter CMT is always displayed and the chance up) There may be cases where there is an SP reach that does not display the meter CMT).

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C6), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the spear are erased and the conversation notice is ended, and the first decorative symbol is made easy to see The situation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C7), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed, and a state in which fluctuation variation display is performed is shown. ing. After that, for example, effects shown in FIG. 16 (20) to FIG. 16 (21) are performed.

  In FIG. 200 (C8), a state of being developed into a super reach (a sword reach) is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (C8), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed large, and in the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (C9), an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the sword player of the enemy character. Is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C9), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 200 (C9), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is stop-displayed with the display of “x”, and it is shown that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is in a standby state. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A10) and thereafter are performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 200 (D1) to FIG. 200 (D8) shows another effect pattern continued from FIG. 20 (2). In this effect example, it is shown that a timer advance effect is being performed.

  In FIG. 200 (D1), it is shown that the frame in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and it is arranged at the center left end of the display screen. However, in this example of effect, unlike in FIG. 20 (3), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “10:00” and the countdown is not started. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D1), it is shown that the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is reserved (that is, in the standby state). Further, in this effect example, when the timer notice display TM1 is set to the above-described predetermined position, as shown in FIG. 200 (D1) to FIG. (D2), the display of "10:00" and "STANDBY" Alternate display with the display of. This alternate display is performed in a period in which the start of the countdown of the timer display in timer notice display TM1 is in the standby state. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D3), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (D4), it is shown that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is being counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "09: 99", and it is shown that 0.01 second has elapsed since the timer display countdown starts. There is. The countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes "00:00". After that, for example, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed on the left and right, respectively. Leave the icon h0 and frame out below the display screen.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 200 (D5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 200 (D6), on the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is changed to notice. The word "Attention!" Is displayed to encourage attention.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 200 (D7), the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Furthermore, in this example of rendering, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 displayed as "attention!" Is overlapped by the second large-screen behavior character article 224Gb and the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd, and is considered to be difficult to view There is. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be a case where the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character objects 224Gd do not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 200 (D8), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

  In this effect example, the time from when the countdown is started to when a certain notice effect is performed is displayed until the timer display countdown is started after the timer advance display TM1 is displayed. When the display TM1 is displayed, the timer display countdown may be started, and the time from when the countdown starts before the countdown starts may not be displayed until a certain advance notice effect is performed.

  FIG. 201 is a diagram showing another effect pattern of the timer advance effect in stages. The effect example shown in FIG. 201 (A1) to FIG. 201 (A28) indicates, for example, another effect pattern following FIG. 20 (1).

  FIG. 201 (A1) shows that the frame in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the display is arranged approximately at the center of the display screen. Furthermore, in this effect example, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is in the state of "00:00". That is, in this production example, it is notified that the timer advance presentation is performed by displaying the timer advance display TM1, but the remaining time when the countdown starts when the display of the timer advance display TM1 is started. Can not be identified.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A2), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a on the right side of the timer notice display TM1 to show that the button effect is started ing. Thereafter, the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (A3), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced, and then the effect is displayed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A4). When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 201 (A5), high-speed scroll of timer display is started on the timer advance notice display TM1. Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A6), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "10:00", and when at least 10 seconds have passed since the timer display countdown starts, a certain notice effect is displayed. It is suggested to be started. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is not started but may be started. In FIG. 201 (A4), although the effect button 136 is pressed and operated, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may not change. In this case, the timer notice that the timer notice effect is false notice. The preliminary production ends.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A7), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed again with the button image 136a on the right side of the timer notice display TM1, and the second button effect is started The situation is shown. Thereafter, the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (A8), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. Thereafter, the player performs the effect at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A9). When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 201 (A10), high-speed scrolling of the timer display is started in the timer advance notice display TM1. Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A11), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is increased from "10:00" to "20:00", and at least 20 seconds or more after the timer display countdown starts. When it is over, it is suggested that a certain advance presentation is started. That is, it is shown that the timer advance effect is ranked up. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is not started but may be started. In FIG. 201 (A9), although the effect button 136 is pressed and operated, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may not change, and in this case, the rank increase of the timer notice effect is not performed, and the timer notice is not performed. The timer display on the display TM1 may start counting down from "10:00".

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A12), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed again together with the button image 136a on the right side of the timer notice display TM1 and the third button effect is started The situation is shown. Thereafter, the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (A13), the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced, and then the effect is displayed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A14). When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 201 (A15), high-speed scroll of timer display is started on the timer advance notice display TM1. Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A16), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is increased from "20:00" to "30:00", and at least 30 seconds or more after the timer display countdown starts. When it is over, it is suggested that a certain advance presentation is started. That is, it is shown that the timer advance presentation effect is further ranked up. In FIG. 201 (A14), although the effect button 136 is pressed and operated, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may not change, and in this case, no rank up of the timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice is not performed. The timer display on the display TM1 may start counting down from "20:00".

  In this example of rendering, it is shown that the three stages of timer advance rendering are performed, and the three stages of rank up are performed as described above, as shown in FIG. 201 (A17). In the 1 decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF 303 is displayed so as to surround the periphery of the timer advance notice display TM1, and notifies that the rank up effect of the timer advance notice is completed. After that, the effect EF 303 is erased, and an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the center right end of the display screen is started. Thereafter, FIG. 201 (A18) shows a state in which the moving animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the movement to the central right end of the display screen is completed.

  Thereafter, after “decoration 7” stops at the left and right symbols and reaches the reach state, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center right end of the display screen moves to the approximate center of the display screen again An animation takes place. FIG. 201 (A19) shows that the moving animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the movement of the display screen to the approximate center is completed. The timer advance notice display TM1 may not move even during execution of the countdown of the timer display as shown in the other effect examples. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may or may not be moved. For example, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be moved and displayed to function as a chance-up advance notice. When the moving animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and after 30 seconds, a certain notice effect is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A20), it is shown that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is being counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A20), the timer notice display The timer display in TM1 is "29:99".

  When "Decoration 7" stops in the left and right designs and reaches the reach state and reach effect is started, the left and right designs of the first decorative pattern are moved and displayed upward and downward respectively in the UI unit UI. , Out of the display screen with the change icon h0 left. After that, when it is developed into super reach (Kenou reach), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A21) displays a large image of the hostile swordsman, and then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A22) An animation display of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is started. Also during this time, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A22), the timer display in the timer notice advance display TM1 is “17:63”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A23), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 201 (A24), on the timer notice display TM1, the notice is changed to the timer display. The word "Attention!" Is displayed to encourage attention. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A25), the cut-in image of the panda character is displayed on the entire display screen, and the effect that the panda character appears as a helper in the sword reach is started Ru. After that, for example, an effect of developing into the SP swordsman reach is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 30 (30 b) to FIG. That is, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer advance presentation being performed, it is shown that the presentation that is developed as an SP Kengo reach is performed as a certain advance presentation effect.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A26), the lever image 136Va is displayed together with the display of “one blow”, and it is notified that the advance notice by the lever effect is started. At this time, the button image 136a or the deca-button image 136aL may be displayed to notify the start of the notice by the button effect. Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A27), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and it is informed that the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V has started. At this time, the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V is also started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A28), a state in which the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (22) and later are performed.

  FIG. 202 is a diagram showing an example of effects performed in the present embodiment in stages.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 202 (A1) to FIG. 202 (A4) shows another effect pattern continued from FIG. 162 (A7). In this example of presentation, it is shown that the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is notified in advance. That is, it can also be said that a situation in which it is predicted that the effect of changing the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is started is shown. Note that the start of the effect by the chance up meter CM may always be notified in advance, and may or may not be notified in advance.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (A1), it is shown that an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the host of the sword is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the UI unit UI is all hidden (disappears) except the top board of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is also hidden (disappears). However, the fluctuation icon h0 does not disappear but continues to be displayed on the top board that has remained. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol and the second number-on-hold display continue to be displayed. Note that the entire UI unit UI may be erased or, conversely, the entire UI unit UI may be continuously displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed, and in the vicinity of the safari character SBH, a balloon with the character "STANDBY" is displayed.

  FIG. 202 (A2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. Alternatively, it may indicate that the production of intense heat may be performed. In this example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A9), when the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH together with the character “Sometimes START”. The displayed balloon is displayed, and the player is informed that the sabotany character SBH in the chance up meter CMT will start moving. That is, the start of the change of the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is notified. As a result, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation that the chance up meter CMT will start rendering. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the balloon of "Sometimes START" is displayed, the balloon is erased as shown in FIG. 202 (A3). The state in which the balloon is displayed may be maintained until the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started.

  FIG. 202 (A4) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani, which functions as a cursor, has started moving. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. Note that the balloon “START !!” may not be displayed, or may be displayed or not displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A11) and thereafter are performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 202 (B1) to FIG. 202 (B9) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 20 (2), but in this effect example, the animation of the frame in of the timer notice display TM1 is a line While being shot, the countdown has not started. In this example of effect, it is shown that in the timer advance notice effect, it is notified in advance that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started. That is, it can also be said that a situation in which it is notified that the effect of changing the display mode of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is started is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (B1), it is shown that the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the display is arranged at the center right end of the display screen. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “10:00” and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 202 (B2), a state of being developed into a super reach (a sword reach) is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 202 (B2), the image of the swordsman of the enemy character is displayed large, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 202 (B3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the main character An animation display of the battle scene with the hostile swordsman is started. On the other hand, the countdown in timer advance notice display TM1 has not yet started.

  Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 202 (B4) to FIG. (B6), a swing animation in which the timer notice display TM1 swings up and down is performed, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is displayed to the player. It has been predicted that the countdown will begin soon. That is, the start of the change of the display mode of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is notified. As a result, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation for the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance presentation effect. It should be noted that even if swing animation is performed, a false timer advance notice effect may be performed in which the countdown of timer display is not performed, or when the swing animation is performed, the countdown of timer display is always performed. You may do so.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (B7), it is shown that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is being counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 202 (B7), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "09: 99", and it is shown that 0.01 second has elapsed since the timer display countdown starts. There is. The countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 202 (B7) to FIG. 202 (B8). Note that the countdown may be interrupted on the way.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 202 (B8), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 202 (B9), on the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is changed to notice The word "Attention!" Is displayed to encourage attention. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 201 (A25) and thereafter are performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 202 (C1) to FIG. 202 (C6) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 48 (A2). In this presentation example, it is notified that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started by enlarging the timer notice display TM1 while displaying "STANDBY" indicating that preparation for the timer notice effect is in progress. It shows how you are doing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (C1), it is shown that the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, “STANDBY” indicating that the preparation for the timer advance notice effect is in progress is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and this is notified. In this example of effect, unlike the example of effect shown in FIG. 48 (A3), the display of "STANDBY" (display in preparation) is not a prefetching advance notice, but a notice (relevant notice of the change) regarding symbol fluctuation display being executed Is shown. In addition, it may be carried out as a pre-reading notice instead of the change notice.

  After that, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left and right designs, and a reach state is formed, and then, as shown in FIG. 202 (C2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, super reach ( It is shown that it has developed into a Ken-O-Kai reach). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (C3), an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the host of the sword is displayed. During this time, the display of "STANDBY" is continued on the timer advance notice display TM1.

  Thereafter, in this effect example, after the animation for moving to the approximate center of the display screen while the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged is performed, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 202 (C4), and then As shown in FIG. 202 (C5), in the timer announcement display TM1, the display of "STANDBY" is switched to the display of "10:00" as the timer display.

  Then, after the animation for moving the timer notice display TM1 to the center right end of the display screen while reducing is performed, as shown in FIG. 202 (C6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced at the center right end of the display screen Is displayed. After that, for example, effects similar to the effects shown in FIG. 202 (B7) and the like are performed.

  In this demonstration example, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed is enlarged and displayed in a reduced size after being switched to "10:00" as the timer display. As shown in 202 (C4), after the timer preview display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed is enlarged and displayed, as shown in FIG. 202 (C5 '), "STANDBY" is displayed without switching to the timer display. It may be displayed in reduced size and then switched to timer display. In this case, after the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and reduced only once, the timer notice display TM1 may be switched from "STANDBY" to the timer indication to start counting down the timer display, or "STANDBY" In the displayed state, after the enlargement / reduction display of the timer notice display TM1 is performed a plurality of times, the timer notice display TM1 may be switched from "STANDBY" to the timer display to start the countdown of the timer display. In addition, although the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged or reduced, the switching display from "STANDBY" to the timer display is not performed, and there may be a case where a false timer notice effect is produced in which the timer notice display TM1 is erased as it is. It is also good. Further, enlargement / reduction display of the timer notice display TM1 is performed and the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the display of "STANDBY" is maintained until the symbol change display to be performed next is started, and then the timer notice display TM1 May be switched from "STANDBY" to timer display to start counting down the timer display. In addition, even if timer preview display TM1 displaying "STANDBY" is expanded, the countdown of the timer display may not be started as it is. If timer preview display TM1 displaying "STANDBY" is expanded, the timer must be displayed. A display countdown may be initiated. Also, the timer display may be started after the timer advance notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed is always expanded. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed may or may not be enlarged. For example, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged to function as a chance-up advance notice. Here, it is configured that the symbol variation display in which the chance-up notice has occurred is more likely to stop being displayed as the big-hit symbol display mode when the chance-up notice has occurred than when the chance-up notice has not occurred. It may be done. This can be applied to the example of effects described above and the example of effects described below.

  FIG. 203 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a chance up meter in stages. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 203 (A1) to FIG. 203 (A27) indicate other effect patterns following FIG. 162 (A3).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A1), the flame effect EF 101 is displayed in the center on the left side of the display screen, and a state is shown in which a display appearance animation during CUM preparation is started. Thereby, in addition to the first CUM in-provision display MTY1 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “first CUM in-provision display MTY1”) displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, the second CUM in preparation It has been notified that there is a possibility that the display MTY2 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the second CUM preparation display MTY2") may be displayed. In this case, the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 may be displayed without displaying the flame effect EF101. In addition, the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 may be displayed whenever the flame effect EF101 is displayed. Also, the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 203 (A2), when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 appears at the position where the flame effect EF101 is displayed. As described above, in this presentation example, a plurality of CUM in-provision displays are displayed. In this example, the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 is displayed after the first CUM in-provision display MTY1 is displayed, but the first CUM in-provision display MTY1 and the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 are simultaneously displayed. It may be displayed.

  In FIG. 203 (A3), it is shown that “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol to form a reach state, and a fluctuation variation display is performed. After that, for example, effects are performed in the manner shown in FIG. 162 (A5) to FIG. 162 (A6). At this time, the two CUM in-provision displays MTY1 and MTY2 are displayed overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbols are not overlapped by these CUM in-provision displays MTY1 and MTY2 Also the decorative pattern is considered difficult to see. The CUM in-provision displays MTY1 and MTY2 may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. In addition, the display may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 203 (A4), it is shown that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is started. Also at this time, the CUM preparation indication MTY1 and MTY2 are continuously displayed. Here, when both of the two CUM preparation displays MTY1 and MTY2 are not displayed, the chance up meter effect may not be performed, or when at least one of them is displayed, the chance An up meter effect may be performed. In this case, it may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol in the final display in the case where two CUM preparation displays are displayed rather than when only one is displayed. Further, even when neither of the two CUM preparation displays MTY1 and MTY2 is displayed, the chance up meter effect may be performed. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 6A (A4) displays a large image of an enemy swordsman, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The animation of the battle scene with the hostile swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the UI unit UI is all hidden (disappears) except the top board of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is also hidden (disappears). However, the fluctuation icon h0 does not disappear but continues to be displayed on the top board that has remained. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol and the second number-on-hold display continue to be displayed. Note that the entire UI unit UI may be erased or, conversely, the entire UI unit UI may be continuously displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

  FIG. 203 (A6) shows that the display during the first CUM preparation display MTY1 and the second CUM preparation display MTY2 are switched to the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, respectively. In this case, after the first CUM preparing display MTY1 is switched to the first chance up meter CMT1, the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2, or the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is The first CUM in-provision display MTY1 may be switched to the first chance up meter CMT1 after switching to the second chance up meter CMT2, or the timing at which the first CUM in-provision display MTY1 is switched to the first chance up meter CMT1 And the second CUM in-progress display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2 at the same timing. In this demonstration example, unlike the case of FIG. 162 (A9), the first check point CP1 and the third check point CP3 are arranged in the first chance up meter CMT1, and the second check point CP2 is arranged in the second chance up meter CMT2. Are arranged. That is, the position which alert | reports the timing which a chance up alert generate | occur | produces with 1st chance up meter CMT1 and 2nd chance up meter CMT2 differs. In addition, which check point is arranged on which chance up meter can be set as appropriate. Moreover, a check point may be arrange | positioned only to either one chance up meter, and a check point may not be arrange | positioned at the other. Also, for example, the same checkpoint may be placed on both chance up meters, for example, the third check point CP3 may be placed on both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2. In this rendering example, when either one of the SABOHANI character SBH in the first chance up meter CMT1 and the SABOHANI character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2 reaches any check point, a specific advance notice may occur. It is supposed to be. In addition, the placard is rotating at any of the final point GP of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the final point GP of the second chance up meter CMT2, and the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It suggests that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. Or, it may be suggested to develop to the production of intense heat.

  FIG. 203 (A7) shows that the character SBH of Sabohan, which functions as a cursor, has started moving. In this rendering example, both of the character SAH of the sabothan in the first chance up meter CMT1 and the character SBH of the sabothan in the second chance up meter CMT 2 simultaneously start moving. Further, when the Sabo-Hani character SBH starts moving, a balloon is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabo-Hani character SBH in which “START !!” is written. Thereby, the start of movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is notified. Note that the “START !!” balloon may be displayed only when the chance up meter is displayed after the CUM preparation display is displayed, and whether or not the CUM preparation display is displayed. In addition, when the chance up meter is displayed, it may be displayed or may not be displayed. In addition, by displaying a balloon of “START !!”, it may be notified that a chance-up advance notice is likely to occur at the check points CP1 to CP3. Furthermore, in this rendering example, the balloon of "START !!" is displayed for both the character SAH of Sabohan in the first chance up meter CMT1 and the character SBH of Sabohan in the second chance up meter CMT2. However, only one of them may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A8), the movement from the start point SP is performed for both the sabothani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the sabo hani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2. It is shown that it has started.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A9), the character BOY of the boy is on the left side of the display screen at the timing when the SABOHANI character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 reaches the first check point CP1. It shows that it emerges from and moves to the right. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. On the other hand, the SABOHANI character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 is also moving while the chance up notice is being made, but while the chance up notice is being made, the SABOHANI's of the second chance up meter CMT2 is up The character SBH may also be stopped.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A10), a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY PASS” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH of the first chance UP meter CMT1. It is notified that the advance notice has been made by the up character display. A balloon may be displayed for the character SBH of the second chance-up meter CMT2 in addition to the character SBH of the first chance-up meter CMT1, and the character of the first part of the first chance-up meter CMT1 may be a balloon. The balloon may be displayed only for the character SBH of the sabothani of the second chance up meter CMT2 instead of the character SBH. Further, there may be a case where no balloon is displayed for any of the character SBH of the Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the character SBH of the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2. In this case, the larger the number of the balloon displayed, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be. Note that, while the advance notice by the display of the character BOY of the Boy is given, the character SBH of Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 may stop at the first check point CP1, but may not stop.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 203 (A11), the first check point CP1 in the first chance up meter CMT1 is marked in red, and “UP” indicates that the reliability of the big hit is improved by the appearance of the advance notice. The letter "" is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of the notice. In addition, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 resumes movement. At this time, the moving speed of the character SBH of the sabothani of the first chance up meter CMT1 is the same as that of the second chance up meter CMT2 of the second chance up meter CMT2 so that the position is aligned with the character SBH of the sabothani of the second chance up meter CMT2. It is faster than the moving speed of the character SBH. That is, the movement speed is adjusted. Here, the adjustment of the moving speed may not be performed, and the moving may be performed at a constant moving speed. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of the sabothani of the first chance up meter CMT1, and is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the contents of the generated notice may be displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A12), when the safari character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 reaches the second check point CP2, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A13), The image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. At this time, although the second chance up meter CMT2 is overlapped with the button image 136a, the second chance up meter CMT2 may be displayed so as to overlap the button image 136a. Thereafter, the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started, and the player can enter the state where the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. Here, the character SBH of the safohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 may be stopped at the second check point CP2 until the button operation by the player is performed or the operation valid period has elapsed, but it may be stopped. . On the other hand, the character SBH of Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 continues moving while the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 is stopped, but the character of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 continues. It may be stopped according to the movement stop of the character SBH.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 203 (A14), the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced, and then the effect is displayed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A15). When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 203 (A16), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect of notifying that the reliability of the big hit is high is performed. A weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203 (A16). The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203 (A16) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 has been operated within the operation valid period, and the effect button 136 may be displayed within the operation valid period. It may be displayed whenever it is operated at. Further, the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203 (A16) may be displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, and the effect button 136 may be displayed. It may be displayed when the operation effective period has elapsed without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A17), a balloon with the word “chance up gold cut-in” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2. It is notified that the chance up notice by the display of the gold cut-in image CI3 is performed. In addition to the character SBH of the second chance-up meter CMT2, a balloon may be displayed for the character SBH of the first chance-up meter CMT1, and the second character of the second chance-up meter CMT2. A balloon may be displayed only for the character SBH of the sabothani of the first chance up meter CMT1 instead of the character SBH. Further, there may be a case where no balloon is displayed for any of the character SBH of the Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the character SBH of the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2. In this case, the larger the number of the balloon displayed, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be. In addition, the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 may stop at the second check point CP2 while the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, but may not stop. Further, even when the effect button 136 is not operated when the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed when the effect button 136 is not operated and the operation effective period has elapsed, the effect button 136 is also operated. In the same way as when the is operated, it may be notified that the notice of chance up has occurred, or it may not be notified that the notice of chance up has occurred, and the notice of chance up will occur. The notification may be issued only partially (for example, the balloon may not be displayed, and only the letters “UP” may be displayed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 203 (A18), after the second check point CP2 in the second chance up meter CMT2 is marked in red, the gold cut-in image CI3 is erased and further, a chance up notice appears The letter “UP” indicating that the jackpot's reliability has been raised is displayed above it, and a history of occurrence of the chance-up notice is shown. In addition, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 resumes movement. At this time, the movement speed of the character SBH of the second chance-up meter CMT2 is the same as that of the first chance-up meter CMT1 so that the position is aligned with the character SBH of the first chance-up meter CMT1 in the vertical direction. It is faster than the moving speed of the character SBH. That is, the movement speed is adjusted. Here, the adjustment of the moving speed may not be performed, and the moving may be performed at a constant moving speed. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT1, and is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the contents of the generated notice may be displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A19), when the SABOHANI character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 reaches the third check point CP3, the lever in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A20) While the image 136Va is displayed, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 to notify that the advance notice by the lever effect is started. ing. At this time, the SABOHANI character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 stops moving, but the SABOHANI character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 continues moving without stopping. In addition, while the character SBH of the sabothani of the first chance up meter CMT1 stops moving, the character SBH of the sabotary of the second chance up meter CMT2 may also stop moving. Further, in this presentation example, at least a part of the balloon is overlapped with the lever image 136Va, and the display mode of the balloon is considered to be more difficult to recognize than when not overlapped by the lever image 136Va. In addition, the balloon may overlap and display the lever image 136Va.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A21), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third check point CP3 in the first chance up meter CMT1 is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it, indicating that the jackpot's reliability has increased due to the appearance of the advance notice. A history of the occurrence of a warning is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of the sabothani of the first chance up meter CMT1, and is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state. Thereafter, the effective period of operation of the effect lever 136V is started, and the player can receive the operation of the effect lever 136V. Here, the character SBH of Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 resumes movement when the operation valid period of the production lever 136V is started, but the lever operation by the player is performed or the operation valid period elapses. It may be stopped at the third check point CP3.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 203 (A22), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. On the other hand, in each of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, the character SBH of the sabo hani is positioned before the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A23) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 203 (A24), the first large-screen behavior and role objects 224Ga to There is a case in which the four large-scale behavior character objects 224Gd and the one thousand box character object 224H are activated to emit light from the light guide plate IL, and an effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is informed that it will be a big hit. At this time, although the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 both become non-displayed, they may be displayed. Only one of the chance up meters may be hidden. After that, for example, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is ended in the manner shown in FIG. 29 (24), and the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior article 224Gd and the one-hundred box article 224H return to their initial positions, respectively. The effect image fades out in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. In addition, although the chance up meters CMT1 and CMT2 fade in as the fade in of the animation display of the duel scene, the chance up meters CMT1 and CMT2 are re-displayed after the fade in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. You may

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A25) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the hostile swordsman has an appearance of dying out, and appears to be defeated even now. Further, both of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 indicate the letter "V" indicating that the sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP and the placard becomes a big hit. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that "V" is displayed at a plurality of places.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 203 (A26), the main character of the main character wins over the sword player of the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 17 (48) and thereafter are performed.

  In this demonstration example, the check points placed on the two chance up meters are made different, but the check placed on the two chance up meters (first chance up meter CMT1, second chance up meter CMT2) The points may be the same, and effects may be produced in the same display mode by the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2.

  FIG. 204 is a diagram showing an example of effects performed in the present embodiment in stages.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 204 (A1) to FIG. 204 (A16) show another effect pattern following FIG. 203 (A5).

  In FIG. 204 (A1), unlike in FIG. 203 (A5), the display during the first CUM preparation display MTY1 is switched to the first chance up meter CMT1, but the display during the second CUM preparation display MTY2 is switched. Not being displayed, it is still being displayed in preparation, and the display of the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohani continues. The second CUM in-provision display MTY2 is continuously displayed until the timing shown in FIG. 204 (A12) is reached. In this presentation example, as in FIG. 162 (A9), a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are disposed in the first chance up meter CMT1. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the first chance up meter CMT1 first notifies the timing when the advance notice of the chance up occurs. In this case, the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance-up meter CMT2, and the first CUM in-provision display MTY1 may be kept in the preparation display without being switched. In addition, at the final point GP of the first chance up meter CMT1, placards are rotated and it is suggested that the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, thereby developing into the production of intense heat. . Alternatively, it may indicate that a big hit or a loss is derived.

  FIG. 204 (A2) shows that, in the first chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani, which functions as a cursor, starts moving. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. On the other hand, in the 2nd CUM in-provision display MTY2, the character Sabohan character SBH has not moved from the start point SP and remains on standby, and the balloon of "STANDBY" is still displayed. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is shown that notification of the timing at which a certain advance rendering is performed is started by the chance up meter, which is previously switched among the two CUM in-provision displays MTY1 and MTY2. ing. After that, for example, the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (16) are performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (A3), when the safari character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 reaches the third check point CP3, the lever in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A4) The button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the image 136Va, and it is shown that the lever effect as the advance notice of the chance up is not started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 204 (A4), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed in the first chance up meter CMT1, and as shown in FIG. 204 (A4) to FIG. The character SBH passes the third check point CP3 as it is, and the marking at the third check point CP3 and the display of the character "UP" are not performed. Note that FIG. 204 (A4) shows that the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 has started, and the player is now ready to accept the operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A4), the button image 136a is displayed overlapping the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 but the button image 136a is displayed in the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 It may be displayed overlapping.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 204 (A5), it is shown that the operation effective period is reduced. On the other hand, in the first chance up meter CMT1, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (A6) within the operation valid period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A7) A message is displayed as to whether the defeat and defeat will not be decided, along with the message that the character and the enemy swordsman of the enemy have "removed ...". Note that this display is overlapped with the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 and is considered to be more difficult to see than when the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 is not displayed. In addition, in the first chance up meter CMT1, the placard at the final point GP is displayed with a character of "Development", and it is informed that the reach effect is developed.

  After that, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 204 (A8) and it is informed that the reach effect is developed, as shown in FIG. 204 (A9), An effect that the character appears as a helper is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (A10), the first chance up meter CMT1 is erased by the erasure animation (erasing animation), and then the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 moves downward to start the animation (falling animation) Ru. Note that the descending animation of the 2nd CUM in preparation display MTY2 is started, and the erasure animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 may be started while the downward animation is displayed, or the erasure animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 is started And the falling animation of the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 may be started while the deletion animation is being displayed. Also, the deletion animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the falling animation of the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 may be started at the same time.

  As shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to (A12), the second CUM in preparation display MTY2 moves to the lower left corner of the display screen (that is, the position where the first chance up meter CMT1 was displayed) by the descending animation Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A13), the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 is switched to the second chance up meter CMT2. As with the effect shown in FIG. 30 (29 b), the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 are arranged in the second chance up meter CMT2, and the placard indicates "V" at the final point GP The stop display is provided, and it is reported that a big hit will be made when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP. The display position of the second CUM in-progress display TMY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2, and then the display position may be changed by the descending animation. This can also be applied if only one chance up meter is displayed. Further, the display position may not be changed without performing the falling animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 204 (A14), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second chance up meter CMT2 shows that the character SBH of Sabohani, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. As described above, in this presentation example, one of the two CUM in-provision displays MTY1 and MTY2 (the first CUM in-provision display MTY1) is first switched to the chance up meter (the first chance up meter CMT1). After the production of the chance up meter by the switched chance up meter (1st chance up meter CMT1) is completed, the other in-provision display (the 2nd CUM in-provision display MTY2) is the chance up meter (2nd chance up meter CMT2 It is shown that the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the chance up meter (the second chance up meter CMT2). In the second chance up meter CMT2, the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 are arranged, and announcing a timing at which a certain advance presentation effect is performed at a timing when the sabothani character SBH reaches each check point There is. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 204 (A15), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A16) shows a state where it has been developed into the above-described SP swordsman reach shown in FIG. In addition, since the effect shown to FIG. 204 (A16) is the same as the effect shown to FIG. 185 (A19), description is abbreviate | omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 30 (31 b) and thereafter are performed.

  In this production example, after the first chance up meter CMT1 is erased, the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 is switched to the second chance up meter CMT2, but in the case of Sabohani in the first chance up meter CMT1 The second CUM in-provision display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2 while the movement of the character SBH is displayed. In this case, the movement of the sabothan character SBH may be started in the second chance up meter CMT2 during the movement display of the sabotany character SBH in the first chance up meter CMT1.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 204 (B1) to FIG. 204 (B11) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 48 (A2). This effect example is 2 in a state where "STANDBY" indicating that preparation for timer advance effect is being made is displayed on timer advance notice display TM1 (referred to as "first timer advance notice display TM1" in this effect example). The second timer notice display (the second timer notice display TM2) is displayed, and the second timer notice display TM2 also displays “STANDBY” indicating that preparation for the timer notice effect is in progress. It shows that the timer advance presentation is suggested to be started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B1), it is shown that the frame-in of the first timer preview display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, “STANDBY” is displayed on the first timer notice advance display TM1 indicating that preparation for the timer advance notice effect is in progress, and this is notified. In this presentation example, as in the presentation example shown in FIG. 48 (A3), it is shown that "STANDBY" display (during preparation display) is being performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, you may be performed as the said fluctuation | variation advance.

  In FIG. 204 (B2), the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, so that they are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Losing 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that it is being done. At this time, at least a part of the first decorative symbol is overlapped by the first timer notice display TM1, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than the state where it is not overlapped by the first timer notice display TM1.

  After that, FIG. 204 (B3) shows a state in which the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “Holis 4-Decorative 1-Decorative 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon is erased. While the decorative symbol is displayed for confirmation, at least a portion of the first timer notice display TM1 overlaps the decorative symbol. The decorative symbol may be overlapped with the first timer notice display TM1 while the decorative symbol is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the reserved icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 204 (B4), the first timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the near side of the first decorative symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 204 (B4), the display on the first timer advance notice display TM1 remains "STANDBY".

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B5), a movement animation in which the first timer notice display TM1 moves downward is started, and the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the position where it was displayed. An animation in which the second timer advance notice display TM2 is framed in is started. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM2 is at least partially overlapped by the first timer notice advance display TM1 and is framed in. That is, the in-provision display (“STANDBY”) in which the in-provision display (the first timer announcement display TM1 in which “STANDBY” is displayed) of the timer announcement display displayed later is displayed first is displayed A state of being displayed behind the second timer announcement display TM2) is shown. Note that the preparation display of the timer announcement display displayed earlier may be displayed behind the preparation display of the timer announcement display displayed later. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be displayed so as not to overlap each other. Further, in this example, the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 and the animation of the frame in of the second timer notice display TM2 are simultaneously started, but the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 starts After that, the animation of the frame in of the second timer notice display TM2 may start, or after the frame in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 starts, the moving animation of the first timer notice display TM1 starts. It is also good. In addition, after the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 is completed, the animation of the frame in of the second timer notice display TM2 may start, or after the frame in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 is completed. The movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 may be started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B6), the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 and the animation of the frame in of the second timer notice display TM2 are shown completed. That is, the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed below the second timer notice display TM2. In this example, although the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed so as not to overlap, the second timer notice may be displayed so as to overlap behind the first timer notice display TM1. The display TM2 may be displayed. In this case, the display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be matched with the display position of the first timer notice advance display TM1, or may be displayed shifted in the vertical direction or in the horizontal direction.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B7), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 is started, and after 10 seconds, a certain notice effect is started Is suggested. On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM2, the display in progress is continued, and the display of "STANDBY" is continued. After that, for example, effects are performed in the manner shown in FIG. 20 (3) to FIG. 20 (8). In the meantime, in the second timer advance notice display TM2, the indication of being prepared is continued. Note that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 may be started after the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 is completed, or started during the movement of the first timer notice display TM1 by the movement animation. It may be done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B8), display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol with the character of Tonosama in the middle symbol is moved at low speed from the upper side to the lower side. In the second timer advance notice display TM2, the display of "STANDBY" is continued. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 204 (B9), the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. A cut-in display comprising display is performed. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM2 displays "STANDBY" without changing the display position. The display position of the second timer notice display TM2 may be changed after the first timer notice display TM1 is erased. In this case, for example, the display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be moved to the position where the first timer advance notice display TM1 was displayed. In this effect example, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed in this way to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. In addition, there may be a frame out in the lower part without displaying the pseudo run symbol, and the pseudo run will not be started when the pseudo run symbol is in the lower frame, the decoration symbol of the loss is just as it is The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach effect may be started in the reach state. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is notified that the pseudo link will be started after the countdown is completed by the timer advance notice. After that, for example, effects are performed in the manner shown in FIG. 20 (13) to FIG. After that, one or more pseudo series effects may be further performed.

  After that, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, and reaches the reach state, and as shown in FIG. 204 (B11), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is developed into super reach The situation is shown. Also at this time, the second timer advance notice display TM2 continues the display of "STANDBY". After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 202 (C3) and thereafter are performed.

  In this example, the second timer notice display TM2 is displayed after the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are simultaneously displayed. It may be done. Further, in this example, after the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 displayed earlier is completed, the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM2 displayed later is started. However, the countdown may be started at the same time by the timer display on the first timer preview display TM1 and the timer display on the second timer preview display TM2. In this case, both times indicated by the timer display may be the same (for example, “10:00”), and the countdown may be completed simultaneously. Further, although the time indicated by the timer display at the start of the countdown is different between the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2, the countdown may be simultaneously started, but the timing at which the countdown is completed may be different. The second timer notice display TM2 displayed later than the first timer notice display TM1 displayed earlier may start the timer display countdown earlier. Also, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 displayed earlier starts first, and the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM2 displayed later during the countdown is started, and then, The countdowns of both timer announcements TM1 and TM2 may be completed simultaneously. Specifically, the timer display at the start of the countdown in the first timer notice display TM1 is "30:00", and the timer display at the start of the countdown in the second timer notice display TM2 is "10:00". When the timer display counts down to "10:00" in the first timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM2 may be started.

  FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  The effects shown in FIG. 205 (A1) to FIG. 205 (A14) indicate other effect patterns following FIG. 20 (1). This effect example is 2 in a state where "STANDBY" indicating that preparation for timer advance effect is being made is displayed on timer advance notice display TM1 (referred to as "first timer advance notice display TM1" in this effect example). The second timer notice display (the second timer notice display TM2) is displayed, and the second timer notice display TM2 also displays “STANDBY” indicating that preparation for the timer notice effect is in progress. It shows that the timer advance presentation is suggested to be started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, when the first timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice effect is started. In this example of effect, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 204 (B1), the display position when frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is started is different. That is, it is shown that the frame-in is performed at a position lower than the position of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 204 (B1). In this example, the display position of the first timer notice display TM1 is different from the display position of the timer notice display TM1 in the timer notice effect described above, but the effects shown in this example show other effects It is needless to say that the example is also applicable.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A2), it is shown that the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, “STANDBY” is displayed on the first timer notice advance display TM1 indicating that preparation for the timer advance notice effect is in progress, and this is notified. In this presentation example, as in the presentation example shown in FIG. 48 (A3), it is shown that "STANDBY" display (during preparation display) is being performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, you may be performed as the said fluctuation | variation advance.

  In Fig. 205 (A3), the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, so that they are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Losing 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that it is being done.

  After that, FIG. 205 (A4) shows a state where the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “Holis 4—Mod 1—Mod 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon is erased.

  Thereafter, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A5), the second timer notice display TM2 is framed in above the first timer notice display TM1. An animation is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A6), it is shown that the animation of the frame-in of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is completed. That is, the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed below the second timer notice display TM2. In this example, although the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed so as not to overlap, the second timer notice may be displayed so as to overlap behind the first timer notice display TM1. The display TM2 may be displayed. In this case, the display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be matched with the display position of the first timer notice advance display TM1, or may be displayed shifted in the vertical direction or in the horizontal direction.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 205 (A7), the first timer preview display TM1 is shown to be switched from the display of "STANDBY" to the display of "10:00" as a timer display. Thereby, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect has been started. Thereafter, the timer display countdown is started. On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM2, the display in progress is continued, and the display of "STANDBY" is continued. After that, for example, effects are performed in the manner shown in FIG. 20 (3) to FIG. 20 (8). In the meantime, in the second timer advance notice display TM2, the indication of being prepared is continued.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A8), display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol with the character of Tonosama in the middle symbol is moved at low speed from the upper side to the lower side. In the second timer advance notice display TM2, the display of "STANDBY" is continued. After that, the first timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 205 (A9), the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A10), a moving animation in which the second timer notice display TM2 moves downward starts, and moves to the display position of the first timer notice display TM1. After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (A11), cut-in display is performed, which includes the character of the character of “tendon” and the character display of “continue”. At this time, the moving animation of the second timer advance notice display TM2 continues. The cut-in display may be performed after the movement animation of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 205 (A12), when the second timer announcement display TM2 moves to the position where the first timer announcement display TM1 is displayed, the movement animation is completed. In the second timer advance notice display TM2, "STANDBY" is continuously displayed. After that, for example, effects are performed in the manner shown in FIG. 20 (13) to FIG. After that, one or more pseudo series effects may be further performed. Further, in the example of the effect, it is shown that the second timer notice display TM2 moves after the first timer notice display TM1 is erased, but the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are also displayed. You may not move after being done. Also, the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be displayed so as not to overlap.

  After that, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, and reaches the reach state, and as shown in FIG. 205 (A13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is developed into super reach The situation is shown. Also at this time, the second timer advance notice display TM2 continues the display of "STANDBY". In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A14) that follows, animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the host of the sword is displayed. During this time, the display of "STANDBY" is continued on the second timer advance notice display TM2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 202 (C4) and thereafter are performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 205 (B1) to FIG. 205 (B8) show that another effect pattern of the timer advance effect is performed, and it is not the countdown of the timer display but of the squib in the display of the bomb. It is shown that the display mode informs the user of the timing at which a certain advance presentation effect is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (B1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 205 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (B2), it is shown that a timer advance notice effect has been started. In this rendering example, a timer display BOMB of a bomb is displayed with a squib added, and a character BYM of the Tonosama appears, and an animation (extension animation) for extending the squib is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 205 (B3), after the squib of the timer display BOMB of the bomb is extended by the extension animation, the extension animation is completed, and as shown in FIG. 205 (B4), the tip of the squib is ignited. The timer announcement effect is started. In the timer announcement production in this production example, a countdown presentation is performed in a manner in which the squib is shortened with the passage of time, and a start timing of a certain announcement presentation performed as a result of the timer announcement production is convective It is made to notify by the length of. As shown in FIG. 205 (B4) to FIG. (B6), the effect of the countdown is performed until the extinguishing line disappears.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 205 (B6), when the squib disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the main body of the timer display BOMB of the bomb, as shown in FIG. 205 (B7), the first decorative symbol display device 208L Then, after the explosion effect EF 304 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern at the approximate center of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 205 (B8), “super heat !!” at the approximate center of the display screen. The characters are displayed large. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that as the result of the timer advance presentation being performed, the notice display by the characters of "super heat !!" is performed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 16 (16) and later are performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 205 (C1) to FIG. 205 (C3) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B5), in the case where the timer advance notice effect by the timer display BOMB of the bomb is false effect. The situation is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 205 (B5), after the effect of counting down by the timer display BOMB of the bomb is started, when the convective wire is shortened to a certain length, sparks at the tip of the squib are digested as shown in FIG. 205 (C1). It is shown that the tip of the squib is crawling. That is, although the timer advance presentation by the timer display BOMB of the bomb is started, the false timer in which the presentation is finished before the announcement of the countdown is completed and the timer display BOMB of the bomb explodes and a certain advance presentation starts. It is suggested that it was a preliminary production. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 205 (C2), the timer display BOMB of the bomb is erased.

  After that, as a result of the decoration symbols being stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, the right pattern and the middle pattern, it is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" As shown in FIG. 205 (C3), the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon is erased.

  In this example, it is shown that the effect of the countdown is ended while the countdown by the timer display BOMB of the bomb is being performed. However, for example, a false timer notice in the form shown in FIG. An effect may be performed. Here, the effect example shown in FIG. 205 (D) indicates another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B6). In this rendering example, as shown in FIG. 205D, the spark displayed at the tip of the squib is digested at the timing when the squib disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the main body of the timer display BOMB of the bomb. It is shown that the preliminary production has ended with a failure. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 205 (C2) to FIG. 205 (C3) are performed.

  FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  The effects shown in FIG. 206 (A1) to FIG. 206 (A3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B5), and although the timer announcement effect is interrupted on the way, the resumption effect is performed to be resumed It is shown how to do it.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (A1), it is shown that the spark at the tip of the squib has been digested and the tip of the squib is covered. In addition, since the example of an effect shown to FIG. 206 (A1) is the same as the example of an effect shown to FIG. 205 (C1), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (A2), the torch character TC appears from the right end of the display screen and shows flying toward the tip of the squib of the timer display BOMB of the bomb. It is done. Thereafter, when the torch character TC overlaps the leading end of the squib of the timer display BOMB of the bomb, the squib is ignited again as shown in FIG. 206 (A3). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 205 (B6) and thereafter are performed. As described above, in this example of rendering, the squib of the timer display BOMB of the bomb is digested, and it is thought that it is a false timer precautionary effect, and the torch TC character appears and the squib is ignited again and the timer precaution production is It is shown that it revives. In other words, it can be said that even if the effect of the countdown by the timer display BOMB of the bomb has stopped halfway, it may be shown that it may be restored again. It should be noted that after the countdown is interrupted, a revival effect is performed, and when a certain advance effect is performed, the big hit symbol aspect is determined than when a certain advance effect is performed without an interruption of the countdown. It may be easy to be displayed, and when the advance notice is performed without interrupting the countdown, after the countdown is interrupted, a revival effect is performed and a notice effect is performed. The big hit symbol aspect may be displayed more easily than in the case, or after the countdown is interrupted, a resurrection effect is performed and a certain advance effect is performed, and the countdown is not interrupted. The probability that the jackpot symbol aspect is determined and displayed may be the same as when the preview effect is performed. In addition, even if a torch TC character appears, it may not be ignited to the squib, and a false timer trailer effect of an effect pattern in which a timer preview effect is not resumed may be performed, or a case where a torch TC character appears In such a case, the convective wire may be ignited to restart the timer announcement effect.

  The effects shown in FIG. 206 (B1) to FIG. (B3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B5), and it is shown that the countdown period in the timer advance notice effect is extended and extended. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 205 (B5), when the connecting wire of the timer display BOMB of the bomb reaches a certain length, as shown in FIG. 206 (B1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character BYM appears again It is shown that the lead wire is further extended to extend the timing at which a certain advance presentation is started. That is, in this production example, the timing at which a certain advance production is started is extended by the extension of the convective line while the countdown of the timer advance production is being performed, thereby adding an extra time until a certain advance production is started. It is shown how to do it. This may indicate that the jackpot reliability has improved. In addition, before the effect of extending the convective line (overlaying) is performed, it may be notified that the convective line may be extended. Also, this notice may be a false notice.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (B2), the squib becomes longer as the character BYM runs from the left side to the right of the display screen, and the squid is extended to a certain length. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (B3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tip of the squib is ignited again and the countdown restarts. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 205 (B5) and thereafter are performed.

  The effects shown in FIG. 206 (C1) to FIG. 206 (C5) show another effect pattern of the timer advance notification effect by the timer display BOMB of the bomb continued to FIG. 205 (B1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (C1), although the timer display BOMB of the bomb is displayed, the convective wire is not ignited, and the preparation display is made to announce that the timer preview effect is started. The situation is shown. In this effect example, it is shown that the display under preparation by the timer display BOMB of the bomb functions as a prefetch notice. In addition, it may function as the said change advance notice, may function only as a pre-reading advance notice, and may be constituted so as to function only as the change advance notice.

  In FIG. 206 (C2), the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, so that they are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Losing 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that it is being done.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 206 (C3), a state is shown in which the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “Holis 4—Mod 1—Mod 7”. At this time, although the fluctuation icon is erased, the bomb timer display BOMB is continuously displayed. During stop display of the decorative symbol, the timer display BOMB of the bomb may be temporarily erased.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (C4), a state where symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started is shown. At this time, the bomb timer display BOMB is still displayed.

  Thereafter, an effect shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 206 (C5) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 205 (B2), the description will be omitted. After that, for example, the success pattern of the timer preview effect as shown in FIG. 205 (B3) to the same figure (B8) or the failure pattern of the timer preview effect as shown in FIG. 205 (C1) to the same figure (C3) False timer announcement effect) is performed.

  In addition, in this demonstration example, SP reach is performed in the symbol variation display being displayed in preparation by the timer display BOMB of the bomb, and when it becomes a big hit in the SP reach, the timer display BOMB of the bomb is redisplayed. It may not be done, or may be re-displayed when the SP reach is finished and returned to the normal background. In addition, SP reach is performed in the symbol variation display which is being displayed in preparation by the timer display BOMB of the bomb, and when the SP reach is lost, the timer display BOMB of the bomb is displayed again. You may or may not do this. It goes without saying that this can also be applied to the display during preparation of the timer advance presentation described above and the display during preparation of the chance up meter.

  Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect of the countdown is started due to the appearance of the character BYM of the lord while the display of the under preparation display by the timer display BOMB of the bomb is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. After the rendition is performed, the rendition shown in FIG. 206 (D) is performed before the rendition shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is started, and there is a possibility that the squib is ignited and the rendition is started. A certain thing may be performed by the timer display BOMB itself of a bomb. Specifically, after the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C4) is performed, as shown in FIG. 206 (D), the timer display BOMB of the bomb vibrates, so that the effect of the countdown may start. It has been foretold. In addition, the timer display BOMB of the bomb vibrates, but the effect of the countdown is not started, and there may be a case where a false timer notification effect of ending the timer advance effect may be performed, or the timer display BOMB of the bomb vibrates. In addition, the effect of the countdown may always be started. In addition, after the preparation display by the timer display BOMB of the bomb is displayed, when the effect of the countdown is started, the timer display BOMB of the bomb may always be vibrated.

  Also, for example, after the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C4) is performed, the effect as shown in FIG. 206 (E) is performed before the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is started, and the squib is ignited Then, it may be notified that there is a possibility that the effect of the countdown will start. Specifically, after the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C4) is performed, as shown in FIG. 206 (E), a balloon of characters “bomb ignition !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been foreseen that there is a possibility that the production of the countdown may start. It should be noted that the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed but the effect of the countdown is not started, and there may be a case where a false timer notification effect of ending the timer notification effect may be performed, or the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed If it does, the effect of the countdown may always be started. In addition, after the preparation display by the timer display BOMB of the bomb is displayed, when the effect of the countdown is started, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail.

  The effects shown in FIG. 206 (F1) to FIG. (F12) show another effect pattern of the timer announcement effect based on the timer display BOMB of the bomb continued to FIG. 206 (C4). In this example of the effect, the timer display of the second bomb (second example) is displayed while the preparation display by the timer display BOMB of the bomb (referred to as "first bomb timer display BOMB" in this effect example) is displayed. The bomb timer display BOMB2) is displayed, and the second bomb timer display BOMB2 also indicates that preparation is made to indicate that two timer preview effects are started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F1), a balloon including a display of a bomb is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is displayed. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that another type of notice gives a notice that the indication under preparation is increased. Even if the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, the second bomb timer display BOMB2 may not be displayed. If the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is always displayed. It may be done.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F2), the appearance of the second bomb timer display BOMB2 appearing above the first bomb timer display BOMB is shown.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F3), it is shown that the timer preview effect relating to the first bomb timer display BOMB displayed earlier is started. In this rendering example, the character BYM of the lord appears and an extension animation for extending the squib of the first bomb timer display BOMB is performed. That is, it is shown that the timer display of the bomb (the first bomb timer display BOMB) displayed earlier is digested first. In addition, the timer display (second bomb timer display BOMB2) of the bomb displayed later may be stored first, or the timer display of the bomb displayed first is displayed first and later. There may be cases where the timer display of the bomb being bombarded first.

  Thereafter, the extension animation is performed as shown in FIG. 205 (B3) to FIG. 205 (B4), and when the extension animation is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F4) displays the first bomb timer The tip of the fuse wire of the BOMB is ignited, and a timer announcement effect relating to the first bomb timer display BOMB is started.

  FIG. 206 (F5) shows that the effect of the countdown of the timer announcement effect relating to the first bomb timer display BOMB is continued.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 206 (F6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, with the effect of the countdown of the timer announcement effect relating to the first bomb timer display BOMB being performed, the character BYM of the lord is again It is shown that an extension animation is being performed which appears and extends the squib of the second bomb timer display BOMB2. That is, it is shown that the timer display of the bomb displayed later is digested during the digestion of the timer display of the bomb displayed earlier.

  Thereafter, the extension animation is performed as shown in FIG. 205 (B3) to FIG. 205 (B4), and when the extension animation is completed, the second decorative timer display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F7). The tip of the squib of BOMB 2 is ignited, and a timer announcement effect relating to the second bomb timer display BOMB 2 is started. In the first bomb timer display BOMB, the effect of the countdown is continuously performed, and the display is performed in such a manner that the squib becomes short as time passes.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F8), it is shown that the squib of the first bomb timer display BOMB disappears and that the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the main body of the first bomb timer display BOMB There is. On the other hand, in the second bomb timer display BOMB2, the effect of the countdown in a mode in which the squib becomes short with the passage of time is continuously performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (F9), the first bomb timer display BOMB is erased, and the explosion effect EF 304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol substantially at the center of the display screen. The second bomb timer display BOMB2 is displayed overlapping the effect EF 304 of the explosion related to the first bomb timer display BOMB, and the effect of the countdown continues.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 206 (F10), the characters “super heat !!” are displayed in a large size at the approximate center of the display screen, and it is shown that a preliminary display is being performed. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a preliminary announcement display with the characters “excellent !!” is being performed as a result of the timer preliminary announcement effect relating to the first bomb timer display BOMB digested earlier. There is. The letters "super heat !!" are then deleted. Although the second bomb timer display BOMB2 displayed later does not change the display position after the first bomb timer display BOMB digested earlier is deleted, the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is displayed after the first bomb timer display BOMB is deleted. The position may be changed. In this case, for example, the first bomb timer display BOMB may be moved to the displayed position.

  After that, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols to form a reach state, and the fluctuation variation display is performed, and the squib of the second bomb timer display BOMB2 disappears at the timing shown in FIG. 206 (F11) It is shown that the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the body of the second bomb timer display BOMB2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (F9), the second bomb timer display BOMB is erased, and the explosion effect EF 304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol substantially at the center of the display screen.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 206 (F12), the characters “Otatsu!” Are displayed large at the approximate center of the display screen, and it is shown that the advance notice is being displayed. That is, it is shown that the notice display by the character of "onatsu!" Is performed as a result of performing the timer notice effect concerning the 2nd bomb timer display BOMB2 digested later. The characters "Otatsu!" Are then deleted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. In addition, the character of "super heat !!" shown in FIG. 206 (F10) is continuously displayed until the second bomb timer display BOMB2 explodes, and the explosion effect EF 304 displayed when the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is displayed. They may be overlapped by one another.

  In this production example, the first bomb timer display BOMB whose countdown production has been started earlier explodes first, but the second bomb timer display BOMB whose countdown production has started later is exploded first. May be

In the above description,
[Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc. ], And the game console is equipped with
The display unit is a unit that may display a first display [eg, a chance up meter, a timer advance display, etc.],
The first display is a display for notifying of a timing at which execution of a certain effect is started,
The display means displays a second display as the certain effect [for example, a display of a gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13) or FIG. 195 (A4), a display of a lever image 136 Va shown in FIG. (9) to (12) and (196) (B1) to (B4) shown in FIG.
The second display is displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display [For example, as shown in FIG. 195 (A4), the gold cut-in image CI3 overlaps the chance up meter CMT, As shown in FIG. 196 (B2), the pseudo run symbol displayed in the pseudo run effect overlaps the timer notice display TM1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, when the line of sight of the player who was looking at the first display can be induced as it is to the second display so that the second display can not be overlooked There is.

  Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display other displays than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display or may not display the first display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good.

  In addition, the display means may display only the second display as a certain effect, or may display other display than the second display as a certain effect. Too. In addition, the display means may always display the second display as a certain effect, or may not display the second display as a certain effect.

  Note that a certain effect may be a second display, and, for example, a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-series effect) is always displayed when the timer display in the timer advance display indicates “0”. It may be performed, and a specific effect (for example, gold) should always be made when a specific timing (for example, the timing when the character of Sabohani as a cursor reaches the second check point) is reached in the production of the chance up meter. Display of the cut-in image may be performed.

  In addition, a display other than the second display may be displayed as a certain effect, for example, a specific effect (for example, when the timer display in the timer advance display is a display indicating “0”) And other effects (eg, effects such as a large board behavior character object) may be performed, or a certain effect may have a plurality of patterns, or a specific timing in the effect of the chance up meter (For example, timing when a character of Sabohani as a cursor reaches the second check point) A line (for example, display of a deca-button image) other than a specific effect (for example, display of a gold cut-in image) There may be a plurality of patterns of certain effects such as being subject to a certain case.

Also, “the first display is a period display [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1), etc.]”
In the period display, the display of the second display is started in a certain period [for example, a period in which effects by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (See, for example, FIG. 195 (A1) to FIG. 195 (A4)). As the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Reporting the timing that may be displayed, etc.],
A display in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the character SBH of Sabohan in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1) changes] (hereinafter referred to as "change display") is performed. Is configured as
The change display is a display that changes in accordance with the time since the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (27), the character SBH of Sabohani is the start point The display position of the character SBH of Sabohani changes according to the time from the start of movement from SP, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohan shown in FIG. 195 (A1) reaches the second check point CP2] It is informed that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display start timing of the second display is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, the expectation for the display start timing of the second display is given. There are times when you can.

  Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include displays other than the period display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when the display of the second display is started in a certain period, or the display of the display other than the second display may start in a certain period. The timing at which it is performed may also be notified. In addition, the first display may always notify the timing when the display of the second display is started in a certain period, or the timing when the display of the second display is started in a certain period May not be notified.

  In addition, the first display may notify the timing at which the display of the second display is started only in a certain period, or the display of the second display may be in a period other than a certain period. The start timing may be notified.

  In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started by performing the change display and the first display becoming a certain display aspect, or the change display is performed. It may also be informed that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started by the display of the first display being in a certain display mode. In addition, it may be always notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may not be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started by the first display becoming a certain display mode.

  In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started also by something other than the first display becoming a certain display mode.

In addition, “the first display may be displayed including the third display [for example, the display of“ UP ”above the second check point CP2 shown in FIG. 195 (A7), etc.”] Is a display,
When the second display is displayed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (A1) to FIG. (A7), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, [2] “UP” is displayed above the checkpoint CP2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be easy to recognize that the second display has been displayed by looking at the third display.

  Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including the display other than the third display. It may be In addition, the first display may be displayed by always including the third display, or may be displayed without the third display.

  Also, when the second display is displayed, only the third display may be displayed, and when the second display is displayed, displays other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when the second display is displayed, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when the second display is displayed, the third display may not be displayed.

Also, “the first display is a timer display [for example, a timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2) or 196 (B1), a timer display BOMB of a bomb shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.]”
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the display of the second display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. (9), in the timer notice display TM 1 When the timer display reaches "00:00", etc., it is notified that the pseudo connected effect is started, etc.]
A display (hereinafter referred to as "change display") in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the timer display on the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2)] changes according to the passage of time [For example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. 20 (7), the timer display count-down is performed according to the time after the timer display count-down on the timer notice display TM 1 starts. Etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) becomes "00:00"] The display of the second display is started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the display start timing of the second display is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, and therefore, a sense of expectation for the display start timing of the second display is given. There are times when you can.

  Here, the first display may include only the timer display or may include displays other than the timer display.

  Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the display of the second display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the display other than the second display is started. It may be. In addition, the first display may always notify the timing when the display of the second display is started, and may not notify the timing when the display of the second display is started. It may be.

  Moreover, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, only the display of the second display may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display may be When the display mode is selected, display of displays other than the second display may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, the display of the second display may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is When the display mode is selected, the display of the second display may not be started.

  Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is The display of the second display may be started even when the display mode is not selected.

In addition, the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. CUM in preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. 168 (A10) or FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. The position changes, and as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. (A10) and FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. And the display position changes, etc.]
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the change display by the first display is started in a state in which the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started is missed In some cases, it is possible to prevent the reduction of the rendering effect due to the timing at which the second display is performed. That is, there is a case where it is possible to give the mind preparation for the second effect to be performed and to focus on the first display for preventing the second display from being overlooked.

  Here, in the first display, only the movement display may be performed, or the display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  When the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may change, and when the movement display is performed, the display positions of displays other than the first display may also change. In addition, when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display also changes when the display other than the movement display is performed. May be

  In addition, after the display of the first display is started, only the movement display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started That is, there may be a case where display other than the movement display is also performed before the change display is started. In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the movement display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

  Also, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the start of the change display, or after the display of the first display is started That is, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. CUM in preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. 168 (A10) or FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. The position changes, and as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. (A10) and FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. And the display position changes, etc.]
The movement display may be performed during execution of the change display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by causing the line of sight to focus on the first display in the movement display of the first display during the execution of the change display by the first display, it becomes the timing at which the second display is performed any time. In some cases, it can be prevented that the rendering effect is reduced. That is, there is a case where it is possible to give the mind preparation for the second effect to be performed and to focus on the first display for preventing the second display from being overlooked.

  Here, in the first display, only the movement display may be performed, or the display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  When the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may change, and when the movement display is performed, the display positions of displays other than the first display may also change. In addition, when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display also changes when the display other than the movement display is performed. May be

  In addition, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed during the execution of the change display, and a display other than the movement display may also be performed during the execution of the change display. In addition, movement display may be performed necessarily during the execution of change display, and movement display may not be performed during the execution of change display.

  In addition, the movement display may be performed only during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may be performed during the execution of the display other than the change display.

Also, when it is time to start the display of the second display, the display of the second display may be started [eg, in FIG. 20 (7) to FIG. As shown, when the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the pseudo-series effect may be started, and as shown in FIG. 29 (8) to FIG. (13), the character SBH of Sabohani May reach the second check point CP2 and gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed, etc.]
Even when it is time to start the display of the second display, the display of the second display may not be started [for example, the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 becomes “00:00”. Also, as shown in FIG. 170 (A11) to FIG. 170 (A16), even if the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2, the gold cut-in CI3 is not displayed as shown in FIG. , Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the second display is not necessarily started even when the display of the second display is started, whether or not the display of the second display is started There are cases where it can be expected to have a sense of expectation.

  Here, when it is time to start the display of the second display, only the display of the second display may be started, or when the display of the second display is started When it becomes, the display of displays other than the second display may also be started. In addition, the display of the second display may be always started when the display of the second display is started, or the timing of the display of the second display is started, the second The display of the second display may not be started.

  Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the display of the second display is started, and the timing of the display of the second display is started The display of the second display may be started even in the case other than the case where

  In addition, even when it is time to start the display of the second display, there may be cases where only the display of the second display is not started, or it is the time to start the display of the second display. Even in this case, the display other than the second display may not be started. Moreover, even when it is time to start displaying the second display, it is not necessary to always start displaying the second display, or when it is time to start displaying the second display. However, the display of the second display may be started.

  Moreover, the display of the second display may not be started only when the display of the second display is started, or the timing of the display of the second display is started. Even in the case other than the case, the display of the second display may not be started.

Also, when it is time to start displaying the second display, the display of the second display is always started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the sense of expectation for the display of the second display.

  Here, the display of the second display may be always started only when the display of the second display is started, or the display of the second display is started. Besides the case, the display of the second display may always be started.

In addition, the display unit may display a fourth display [for example, a CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 202 (A1), a timer notice display TM1 in which “STANDBY” shown in FIG. 202 (C1) is displayed, Timer preview stock display area TMst indicating that the timer preview shown in B3) is in stock, and a display in which the number of meters of the meter is shown in the information display area of the CUM in-provision display MTYa shown in FIG. 185 (A1) Etc.] may be displayed,
The fourth display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the first display is displayed by the fourth display.

  Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display other displays than the fourth display. In addition, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

  In addition, the fourth display may give notice that only the first display is displayed, or may give notice that a display other than the first display is displayed. . In addition, the fourth display may always notify that the first display will be displayed, or may not give notice of the first display being displayed. .

Also, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the second display [eg, as shown in FIG. 195 (A4) or FIG. (B1) Thus, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is partially or entirely overlapped by the gold cut-in image CI3, as shown in FIG. 196 (C2) or FIG. 196 (D1). A part or all of the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped, etc., by a balloon attached to the display YMF of the face-up of the majesty face in the pseudo-series effect and the cut-in image CI7, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player who paid attention to the first display can continue to pay attention to the second display.

  Here, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, or when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed. May also be overlapped by other than at least part of the first display. In addition, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be always overlapped by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed. At least a portion of the first indication may not be overlapped.

  In addition, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped only by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, other than the second display Also, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the display of.

  In addition, when only the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, and even if a display other than the second display is displayed, the second The at least part of the first display may be overlapped by the display of.

  In addition, when the second display is displayed, only a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, or when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed. The entire one display may be overlapped.

In addition, when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area overlapping the area where the first display is displayed, and the first display is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 195 (A4), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed at the display position of the chance up meter CMT, whereby the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, as shown in FIG. As shown in), when the cut-in image CI7 is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display TM1, the timer notice display TM1 is not displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the second display may be able to draw attention.

  Here, when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area overlapping the area where the first display was displayed, so that only the first display is not displayed. If the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area overlapping the area where the first display was displayed, so that displays other than the first display are also hidden. May be In addition, when the second display is displayed, the first display may be always hidden by the second display being displayed in the area overlapping the area where the first display was displayed. When the second display is displayed, the second display may be displayed in the area overlapping the area where the first display was displayed, so the first display may not be hidden. It is also good.

"The display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means among the plurality of image display means is a first image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One image display unit among the plurality of image display units is a second image display unit [for example, the sub display device 208S, etc.],
The second image display means is a means provided on the front side of the first image display means,
The first display is displayed by the first image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 196 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. 198 (A2) As shown in, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
The second display is displayed by the second image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 196 (A4), a gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, FIG. 198 (A5) The pseudo display effect is displayed on the sub display device 208S as shown in
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, effects with a three-dimensional effect may be possible by a plurality of image display devices.

  Here, the display means may be configured of only a plurality of image display means, or may be configured to include means other than the plurality of image display means. Further, the display means may be necessarily configured to include a plurality of image display means, or may be configured to not include a plurality of image display means.

  Further, the display means may be constituted only by the first image display means and the second image display means, or an image display means other than the first image display means and the second image display means May also be configured. In addition, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first image display means and the second image display means, and does not include the first image display means and the second image display means. It may be composed of

  The second image display means may be provided only on the front side of the first image display means, or may be provided other than the front side of the first image display means. May be Also, the second image display means may always be provided on the front side of the first image display means, or may not be provided on the front side of the first image display means. It may be.

  Further, only the first display may be displayed by the first image display means, and displays other than the first display may be displayed by the first image display means. In addition, the first display may always be displayed by the first image display means, or the first display may not be displayed by the first image display means.

  Further, only the second display may be displayed by the second image display means, and displays other than the second display may be displayed by the second image display means. In addition, the second display may always be displayed by the second image display means, or the second display may not be displayed by the second image display means.

[The second image display means is a means capable of changing the position by moving [for example, as shown in FIG. 196 (A2) to FIG. (A5), the sub display device 208S It is possible to change the position by moving up and down, etc.],
When it is time to start the display of the second display while the first display is displayed on the first image display means, the second image display means moves, and the second image display means moves. The display of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display [for example, as shown in FIG. 196 (A2) to FIG. (A5), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed in the state where the chance up meter CMT is displayed. When the display start timing comes, the sub display unit 208S moves upward, and the gold cut-in image CI3 overlaps with a part of the chance up meter CMT, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by dynamically performing the second rendering.

  Here, the second image display means may be capable of changing the position only by moving, or may be capable of changing the position by other than moving. It may be. Further, the second image display means may always change the position by moving, or may not change the position by moving.

  In addition, when it is time to start the display of the second display while the first display is displayed on the first image display means, the second image display means moves, and the second display is displayed. The second display may be overlapped with at least a part of the first display, or when the display of the second display is started in a state where the first display is displayed on the first image display means, the second The second display may overlap other than at least a part of the first display. In addition, when it is time to start the display of the second display while the first display is displayed on the first image display means, the second image display means moves, and the second display is displayed. The second display may be overlapped with at least a part of the first display, or when the display of the second display is started in a state where the first display is displayed on the first image display means, the second The second image display means may move so that the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display.

  In addition, the second image display means moves only when it is time to start the display of the second display while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, The second display may overlap with at least a part of the first display, or at a timing other than the timing at which the display of the second display is started in a state where the first display is displayed on the first image display means. Also in the timing, the second image display means may move so that the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

  When the timing at which the display of the second display is started in the state where the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second image display means moves, and the second display Only a part of the first display may overlap, or when it is time to start the display of the second display while the first display is displayed on the first image display means, the second The image display means may be moved so that the second display overlaps with the entire first display.

In addition, “operation means [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.]” is provided,
The second display is a display related to the operation means [for example, a deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 195 (C2), a lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 195 (D5), etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation due to the possibility that physical operations can be performed by the operation means.

  Here, the second display may relate only to the operating means or may be related to things other than the operating means. Further, the second display may be always related to the operating means or may be a case not related to the operating means.

  The second display may be a display of the operation means, or may be a display prompting an operation of the operation means.

[The display means displays the fifth display [eg, the character BOY of Booy shown in FIG. 29 (4), the cut-in image of the character of the panda shown in FIG. 201 (A 25), etc.] as the certain effect. Is a means that may
The fifth display is a display different from the second display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, there are cases where it is possible to give variations to the effects in the first display.

  Here, the display means may display only the fifth display as a certain effect, or may display a display other than the fifth display as a certain effect. May be The display means may always display the fifth display as a certain effect, or may not display the fifth display as a certain effect.

  The fifth display may be different from only the second display or may be different from the displays other than the second display. The fifth display may be different from the second display or may not be different from the second display.

  The fifth display may be partially different from the second display, or may be entirely different.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
[Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc. ], And the game console is equipped with
The display unit is a unit that may display a first display [eg, a chance up meter, a timer advance display, etc.],
The first display is a certain effect [for example, the display of the character BOY of Boi shown in FIG. 29 (4), the display of the gold cut-in image CI 3 shown in FIG. 29 (13), the lever shown in FIG. This is a display for informing the timing when the display of the image 136Va and the execution of the pseudo-series effect etc. shown in (9) to (11) in FIG.
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [eg, as shown in FIG. 199 (A1) to FIG. 1 (A4), the chance up meter CMT has a plurality of symbol variations. As shown in FIG. 199 (C1) to FIG. (C4) which are displayed over the display, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game console, it may be possible to focus attention on the first display over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display other displays than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display or may not display the first display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good.

  Also, the first display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed other than over a plurality of symbol variation displays. . In addition, the first display may be necessarily displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Also, “the first display is a period display [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199 (A1), etc.],
The period display refers to a certain effect [for example, FIG. 29 (for example, FIG. 29 (for example, a period during which effects are produced by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. 27)). 29. Notification is given of the timing when execution of the display of the character BOY of Boyy shown in 4), the display of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13), the display of the lever image 136 Va shown in FIG. It is a display [For example, as shown in FIG. 29 (8) to FIG. 13 (13), the gold cut-in image CI3 can be displayed when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2 Reporting the timing when there is a sex, etc.],
A display in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the character SBH of the sabothani in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199 (A1) changes] (hereinafter referred to as "change display") is performed. Is configured as
The change display is a display that changes in accordance with the time since the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (27), the character SBH of Sabohani is the start point The display position of the character SBH of Sabohani changes according to the time from the start of movement from SP, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display form [for example, a display form in which the character SBH of the safari shown in FIG. 29 (8) reaches the second check point CP2] To be notified that it is time to start the performance of the
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the display start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to have an expectation for the start timing of the certain effect to be executed. There is a possibility.

  Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include displays other than the period display.

  Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of effects other than a certain effect is started in a certain period The timing may also be notified. In addition, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or may notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period It may not be possible.

  In addition, the first display may notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than a certain period. Timing may be notified.

  In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display becoming a certain display aspect, or the change display is performed. It may also be informed that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by one display becoming a certain display mode. In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display becoming a certain display aspect, or the change display is performed It may not be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain production is started by one display becoming a certain display mode.

  In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may be informed that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started also by things other than one display becoming a certain display mode.

In addition, “the first display may be displayed including the third display [for example, the display of“ UP ”above the second check point CP2 shown in FIG. 29 (16), etc.”] Is a display,
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (13) to FIG. (16), when the gold cut-in image CI 3 is displayed, the second display is performed. "UP" is displayed above the check point CP2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be easy to recognize that a certain effect has been performed by looking at the third display.

  Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including the display other than the third display. It may be In addition, the first display may be displayed by always including the third display, or may be displayed without the third display.

  Also, when a certain effect is performed, only the third display may be displayed, and when a certain effect is performed, displays other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the third display may be displayed, or when the certain effect is performed, the third display may not be displayed.

Also, “the first display is a timer display [for example, a timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2) or 196 (B1), a timer display BOMB of a bomb shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.]”
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. (9), the timer in timer notification display TM 1 When the display becomes "00:00", etc., it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect is started, etc.]
A display (hereinafter referred to as "change display") in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the timer display on the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2)] changes according to the passage of time [For example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. 20 (7), the timer display count-down is performed according to the time after the timer display count-down on the timer notice display TM 1 starts. Etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) becomes "00:00"] The execution of the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the display start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that it is possible to have an expectation for the start timing of the certain effect to be executed. There is a possibility.

  Here, the first display may include only the timer display or may include displays other than the timer display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing when the execution of an effect other than a certain effect is started. It is also good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good.

  Also, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When it becomes a display mode, execution of productions other than a certain production may be started. Also, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may always be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When it becomes a display mode, execution of a certain presentation may not be started.

  In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. The execution of a certain effect may be started also in cases other than the display mode.

In addition, the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. CUM in preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. 168 (A10) or FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. The position changes, and as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. (A10) and FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. And the display position changes, etc.]
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the change display by the first display is started in a state in which the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started is missed In some cases, it is possible to prevent the reduction of the rendering effect because it is the timing when a certain rendering is performed. That is, there is a case where it is possible to give a mind preparation for a certain effect to be performed and to focus on a first display for preventing a certain effect from missing.

  Here, in the first display, only the movement display may be performed, or the display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  When the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may change, and when the movement display is performed, the display positions of displays other than the first display may also change. In addition, when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display also changes when the display other than the movement display is performed. May be

  In addition, after the display of the first display is started, only the movement display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started That is, there may be a case where display other than the movement display is also performed before the change display is started. In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the movement display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

  Also, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the start of the change display, or after the display of the first display is started That is, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. CUM in preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. 168 (A10) or FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. The position changes, and as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. (A10) and FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. And the display position changes, etc.]
The movement display may be performed during execution of the change display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by causing the line of sight to focus on the first display in the movement display of the first display during the execution of the change display by the first display, it becomes the timing when a certain effect is performed in the meantime In some cases, it is possible to prevent the effect of the rendering from being reduced. That is, there is a case where it is possible to give a mind preparation for a certain effect to be performed and to focus on a first display for preventing a certain effect from missing.

  Here, in the first display, only the movement display may be performed, or the display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  When the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may change, and when the movement display is performed, the display positions of displays other than the first display may also change. In addition, when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display also changes when the display other than the movement display is performed. May be

  In addition, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed during the execution of the change display, and a display other than the movement display may also be performed during the execution of the change display. In addition, movement display may be performed necessarily during the execution of change display, and movement display may not be performed during the execution of change display.

  In addition, the movement display may be performed only during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may be performed during the execution of the display other than the change display.

In addition, the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 199 (A1) to FIG. 1 (A2), FIG. 199 (C1) to FIG. 1 (C2) Display of the first display is started.
In the second symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 199 (A4), the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 199 (C4) to the figure (C5), etc. among the plurality of symbol fluctuation displays] The timing when the execution of a certain effect is started is informed [for example, as shown in FIG. 190 (B3) to FIG. (B14), when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT It is reported that the spirit character CLA may be displayed as a notice of chance up, as shown in FIG. 20 (3) to FIG. 20 (12), the timer display on the timer notice display TM 1 is “00 When it becomes “00:00, it is informed that a pseudo chain effect may be performed as a certain advance effect etc.],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the second symbol variation display can be enhanced.

  Here, in the first symbol variation display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display of displays other than the first display may also be started. Further, in the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may be always started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may not be started.

  In addition, the display of the first display may be started only in the first symbol fluctuation display, and the display of the first display may be started also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the first symbol fluctuation display. Good.

  In addition, in the second symbol fluctuation display, only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or in the second symbol fluctuation display, the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started may be always notified, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started is not notified There may be cases.

  Further, only in the second symbol variation display, the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, and in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display, the execution of a certain effect is started The timing to be performed may be notified.

  In addition, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. Good. Also, the first symbol variation display may be necessarily performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. May be

In addition, the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 199 (A1) to FIG. 1 (A2), FIG. 199 (C1) to FIG. 1 (C2) Display of the first display is started.
In the second symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 199 (A4), the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 199 (C4) to the figure (C5), etc. among the plurality of symbol fluctuation displays] The timing to start the execution of a certain effect is informed,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed prior to the second symbol variation display,
Execution of the change display is started in the second symbol change display [for example, as shown in FIG. 199 (A1) to FIG. 190 (B4), in the next symbol change display in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed As shown in FIG. 199 (C1) to FIG. (C5), the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move, and the timer display countdown is started in the next symbol fluctuation display in which the timer advance presentation effect TM1 is displayed. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the expectation for the change display to be executed in the second symbol change display can be enhanced.

  Here, in the first symbol variation display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display of displays other than the first display may also be started. Further, in the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may be always started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may not be started.

  In addition, the display of the first display may be started only in the first symbol fluctuation display, and the display of the first display may be started also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the first symbol fluctuation display. Good.

  In addition, in the second symbol fluctuation display, only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or in the second symbol fluctuation display, the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started may be always notified, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started is not notified There may be cases.

  Further, only in the second symbol variation display, the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, and in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display, the execution of a certain effect is started The timing to be performed may be notified.

  In addition, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. Good. Also, the first symbol variation display may be necessarily performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. May be

  Further, only the execution of the change display may be started in the second symbol variation display, or the execution of the display or effect other than the change display may be started in the second symbol variation display. Further, the execution of the change display may always be started in the second symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may not be started in the second symbol variation display.

  Also, the execution of the change display may be started only in the second symbol change display, or the execution of the change display may be started also in the symbol change display other than the second symbol change display.

In addition, the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 198 (B1) to FIG. 1 (B7), FIG. 199 (D1) to FIG. 1 (D3) Display of the first display is started.
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 198 (B10) or later, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 199 (D6) or later, etc.] You will be notified when the execution will start.
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed prior to the second symbol variation display,
Execution of the change display is started in the first symbol change display [for example, as shown in FIG. 198 (B2), in the symbol change display in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed, the SABOHANI character SBH starts moving As shown in FIG. 199 (D1) to FIG. 1 (D2), the timer display countdown is started in the symbol variation display in which the timer advance presentation effect TM1 is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to enjoy the effect not only on the second symbol variation display but also on the first symbol variation display.

  Here, in the first symbol variation display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display of displays other than the first display may also be started. Further, in the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may be always started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may not be started.

  In addition, the display of the first display may be started only in the first symbol fluctuation display, and the display of the first display may be started also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the first symbol fluctuation display. Good.

  In addition, in the second symbol fluctuation display, only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or in the second symbol fluctuation display, the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started may be always notified, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started is not notified There may be cases.

  Further, only in the second symbol variation display, the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, and in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display, the execution of a certain effect is started The timing to be performed may be notified.

  In addition, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. Good. Also, the first symbol variation display may be necessarily performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. May be

  Further, only the execution of the change display may be started in the first symbol variation display, or the execution of the display or effect other than the change display may be started in the first symbol variation display. Further, the execution of the change display may always be started in the first symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may not be started in the first symbol variation display.

  In addition, the execution of the change display may be started only in the first symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display.

In addition, the change display is interrupted between the end of the first symbol change display and the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display [e.g. B8)-(B9) as shown in the figure (B9), movement of the character SBH of Sabohani in the chance up meter CMT is interrupted while symbol variation is stopped, as shown in Figure 199 (D4)-(D5) While the symbol change is stopped, the timer display of timer notice effect TM1 is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to understand that the symbol variation display is stopped.

  Here, only the change display may be interrupted between the end of the first symbol change display and the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display, or the first symbol The display other than the change display may be interrupted between the end of the change display and the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display. Also, the change display may be interrupted between the end of the first symbol change display and the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display, or the first symbol change The change display may not be interrupted between the end of the display and the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display.

  In addition, the change display may be interrupted only between the end of the first symbol change display and the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display, or the first symbol change The change display may be interrupted in a period other than when the display ends and the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display is started.

Also, the change display is continuously performed between the end of the first symbol change display and the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display [eg, As shown in Fig. 199 (E1) to (E2), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 continues even during symbol fluctuation stop, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a feeling of continuity between symbol variation displays.

  Here, only after the first symbol variation display is ended and the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display is started, only the change indication may be continuously performed, The display or effect other than the change display may be continuously performed also from the end of the first symbol change display to the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display. Also, the change display may always be continued even after the end of the first symbol change display until the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display, or the first The change display may not be continuously performed even between the end of one symbol change display and the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display.

  In addition, the change display may be continuously performed only between the end of the first symbol change display and the start of the next symbol change display of the first symbol change display, or the first The change display may be continuously performed other than after the end of the symbol change display of the first symbol change display after the end of the first symbol change display.

Also, when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (7) to FIG. If the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the pseudo-series effect may be started, and as shown in FIG. 29 (8) to FIG. (2) A gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed when the check point CP2 is reached, etc.]
Even at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 becomes "00:00" As shown in FIG. 170 (A11) to FIG. 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the sabothani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2. etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even when it is time to start execution of a certain effect, a certain effect is not necessarily started. Therefore, a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of a certain effect is started May be able to

  Here, when it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, there may be a case where only the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started The execution of effects other than a certain effect may also be started. Moreover, when it becomes the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may always be started, or when the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, a certain effect Execution may not start.

  In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect starts, or when the execution of a certain effect starts In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

  Moreover, even when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, there may be a case where only the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or even if it is a time when the execution of a certain effect is started There may be a case where the execution of effects other than a certain effect is not started. In addition, even when the execution of a certain effect starts, the execution of a certain effect may not necessarily start, or even when the execution of a certain effect starts, In some cases, the execution of the effect may be started.

  Also, there may be cases where the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and cases other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started In some cases, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Also, when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the first display, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the execution of a certain effect can be further improved.

  Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect starts, or when the timing of an execution of a certain effect starts. Also, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

In addition, the display unit may display a fourth display [for example, a CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 202 (A1), a timer notice display TM1 in which “STANDBY” shown in FIG. 202 (C1) is displayed, Timer preview stock display area TMst indicating that the timer preview shown in B3) is in stock, and a display in which the number of meters of the meter is shown in the information display area of the CUM in-provision display MTYa shown in FIG. 185 (A1) Etc.] may be displayed,
The fourth display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the first display is displayed by the fourth display.

  Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display other displays than the fourth display. In addition, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

  In addition, the fourth display may give notice that only the first display is displayed, or may give notice that a display other than the first display is displayed. . In addition, the fourth display may always notify that the first display will be displayed, or may not give notice of the first display being displayed. .

[The fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (D3), a symbol by which a chance up meter CMT produces an effect] In the symbol fluctuation display before the fluctuation display, the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed, as shown in FIG. 204 (B1), the symbol display in front of the symbol fluctuation display in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started Etc. in variable display],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where expectation for the display of the first display can be improved.

  Here, the fourth display may be displayed only in the first symbol variation display, or may be displayed in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. It may be one. In addition, the fourth display may be necessarily displayed in the first symbol variation display, or may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  The fourth display may be displayed in the second symbol variation display, or may be always displayed in the first symbol variation display.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
[Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc. ], And the game console is equipped with
The display unit is a unit that may display a first display [eg, a chance up meter, a timer advance display, etc.],
The first display is a display for notifying of a timing at which execution of a certain effect is started,
At least a portion of the first display [for example, the display position of the character SBH of Sabohan in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1), the timer display etc. in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. To be displayed (hereinafter referred to as "change display") may be performed,
The change display is a display that changes in accordance with the time until the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (27), the character SBH of Sabohani is As shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. 20 (7), the display position of the character SBH of Sabohani changes according to the time after the start of the movement from the start point SP, as shown in FIG. Timer display countdown is being performed according to the time after the timer display countdown starts, etc.]
After the display of the first display is started, before the change display is started, the period from the start of the change display to the start of the execution of the certain effect is notified A display (hereinafter referred to as "preliminary display") may be displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 200 (A2), from when the chance up meter CMT is displayed to when the SABOHANI character SBH starts moving The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are shown between them, and the period from the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani to the advance of the chance-up notice is notified, FIG. 201 (A17) As shown in, the timer display countdown starts between the time the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer display countdown starts. Etc. a certain announcement attraction is notice period of up to be carried out from],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to entertain until the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is started, and the player who was watching the advance notice displays the first display. In some cases, it may be possible not to miss the start of the change of the display mode.

  Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display other displays than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display or may not display the first display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good.

  Further, only change display may be performed, or display other than change display may be performed. Further, the change display may be necessarily performed, or the change display may not be performed.

  In addition, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the preliminary display may be displayed, or the display of the first display is started. After the change display is started, the display other than the advance notice may be displayed. In addition, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the advance notice may be displayed without fail, or after the display of the first display is started. In some cases, the advance notice may not be displayed before the change display is started.

  In addition, the advance notice may be displayed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or the display of the first display is started. The notice display may be displayed other than after the change display is started.

Also, “the first display is a period display [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1), etc.]”
In the period display, the execution of the certain effect is started in a certain period [for example, a period in which the effect by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. This is a display for informing the timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (A1) to FIG. Informing the timing that may be displayed, etc.],
When the certain period is started, the change display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (3), when rendering by the chance up meter CMT is started, the character SBH of the sabo hani from the start point SP Start moving etc],
When the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohan shown in FIG. 195 (A1) reaches the second check point CP2] To be notified that it is time to start the performance of the
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the display start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to have an expectation for the start timing of the certain effect to be executed. There is a possibility.

  Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include displays other than the period display.

  Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of effects other than a certain effect is started in a certain period The timing may also be notified. In addition, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or may notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period It may not be possible.

  In addition, the first display may notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than a certain period. Timing may be notified.

  Also, only the change display may be started when a certain period is started, and displays other than the change display may be started when a certain period is started. Also, the change display may always be started when a certain period is started, and the change display may not be started when a certain period is started.

  In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display becoming a certain display aspect, or the change display is performed. It may also be informed that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by one display becoming a certain display mode. In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display becoming a certain display aspect, or the change display is performed It may not be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain production is started by one display becoming a certain display mode.

  In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may be informed that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started also by things other than one display becoming a certain display mode.

In addition, “the first display may be displayed including the third display [for example, the display of“ UP ”above the second check point CP2 shown in FIG. 195 (A7), etc.”] Is a display,
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [e.g., when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed as shown in FIG. 195 (A1) to FIG. "UP" is displayed above the check point CP2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be easy to recognize that a certain effect has been performed by looking at the third display.

  Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including the display other than the third display. It may be In addition, the first display may be displayed by always including the third display, or may be displayed without the third display.

  Also, when a certain effect is performed, only the third display may be displayed, and when a certain effect is performed, displays other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the third display may be displayed, or when the certain effect is performed, the third display may not be displayed.

Also, “the first display is a timer display [for example, a timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2) or 196 (B1), a timer display BOMB of a bomb shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.]”
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. (9), the timer in timer notification display TM 1 When the display becomes "00:00", etc., it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect is started, etc.]
When the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) becomes "00:00"] The execution of the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the display start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that it is possible to have an expectation for the start timing of the certain effect to be executed. There is a possibility.

  Here, the first display may include only the timer display or may include displays other than the timer display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing when the execution of an effect other than a certain effect is started. It is also good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good.

  Also, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When it becomes a display mode, execution of productions other than a certain production may be started. Also, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may always be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When it becomes a display mode, execution of a certain presentation may not be started.

  In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. The execution of a certain effect may be started also in cases other than the display mode.

In addition, when the display of the first display is started, a display for informing the time from when the change display is started to when the first display becomes the certain display mode is used as the advance notice display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 199 (C1), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, a period from when the countdown of the timer display is started until a given advance effect is performed (“10: 00 ") etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, when the display of the first display is started, it may be possible to recognize the time until the first display is in a certain display mode, and to have an expectation.

  Here, when the display of the first display is started, only the display for notifying the time until the first display becomes a certain display mode after the start of the change display is displayed as the advance notice display. Good, when the display of the first display is started, the display other than the display for notifying the time until the first display becomes a certain display mode after the start of the change display is also displayed as the notice display May be Moreover, when the display of the first display is started, a display for notifying the time until the first display becomes a certain display mode after the start of the change display may be displayed as the advance notice display When the display of the first display is started, there may be a case in which the display for notifying the time until the first display becomes a certain display mode after the start of the change display is not displayed as the notice display It is also good.

  In addition, when the display of the first display is started, a display for notifying only the time from when the change display is started to when the first display is in a certain display mode may be displayed as a notice display And when the display of the first display is started, the display that notifies also the time other than the time from when the change display is started until the first display becomes a certain display mode is displayed as the notice display It is also good.

  Further, only when the display of the first display is started, a display for notifying the time until the first display becomes a certain display mode after the start of the change display may be displayed as the notice display. And also when the display of the first display is started, the display for notifying the time until the first display becomes a certain display mode after the start of the change display is displayed as the notice display May be

Also, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the first display becomes the display mode after the change display is started. A display for informing the time until is displayed as the above-mentioned advance notice display [For example, as shown in FIG. 201 (A17), the timer is displayed between the time the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed and the start of the timer display countdown. The period ("30:00") from the start of the display countdown to the start of a certain advance effect is announced, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the display of the first display is started, there is a sense of expectation as to what time it takes from the start of the change display to the time when a certain effect is performed. It may be possible to

  Here, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the time from when the change display is started to when the first display becomes a certain display mode is notified Only the display to be displayed may be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the first display is started after the change display is started. A display other than the display for informing the time until a certain display mode is given may be displayed as the advance notice. In addition, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the time from when the change display is started to when the first display becomes a certain display mode is notified The display may always be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the first display may be started after the change display is started. The display for informing the time until the display mode is selected may not be displayed as the advance notice.

  Moreover, only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the time from when the change display is started to when the first display becomes a certain display mode is notified Display may be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the first display may be started after the change display is started. A display for notifying also a time other than the time until the display mode is set may be displayed as a notice display. A display that always notifies the time from when the change display is started to when the first display becomes a certain display mode before the change display is started after the display of the first display is started May be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the display of the first display may be after the change display is started. The display which may not alert | report the time until it becomes an aspect may be displayed as a notice display.

  In addition, only after the display of the first display is started and only before the start of the change display, notification of the time from when the change display is started to when the first display becomes a certain display mode The display to be displayed may be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the start of the change display, the first display after the change display is started The display which alert | reports time until it becomes a certain display aspect may be displayed as a notice display.

In addition, the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. CUM in preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. 168 (A10) or FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. The position changes, and as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. (A10) and FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. And the display position changes, etc.]
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the change display by the first display is started in a state in which the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started is missed In some cases, it is possible to prevent the reduction of the rendering effect because it is the timing when a certain rendering is performed. That is, there is a case where it is possible to give a mind preparation for a certain effect to be performed and to focus on a first display for preventing a certain effect from missing.

  Here, in the first display, only the movement display may be performed, or the display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  When the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may change, and when the movement display is performed, the display positions of displays other than the first display may also change. In addition, when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display also changes when the display other than the movement display is performed. May be

  In addition, after the display of the first display is started, only the movement display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started That is, there may be a case where display other than the movement display is also performed before the change display is started. In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the movement display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

  Also, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the start of the change display, or after the display of the first display is started That is, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. CUM in preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. 168 (A10) or FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. The position changes, and as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. (A10) and FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. And the display position changes, etc.]
The movement display may be performed during execution of the change display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by causing the line of sight to focus on the first display in the movement display of the first display during the execution of the change display by the first display, it becomes the timing when a certain effect is performed in the meantime In some cases, it is possible to prevent the effect of the rendering from being reduced. That is, there is a case where it is possible to give a mind preparation for a certain effect to be performed and to focus on a first display for preventing a certain effect from missing.

  Here, in the first display, only the movement display may be performed, or the display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  When the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may change, and when the movement display is performed, the display positions of displays other than the first display may also change. In addition, when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display also changes when the display other than the movement display is performed. May be

  In addition, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed during the execution of the change display, and a display other than the movement display may also be performed during the execution of the change display. In addition, movement display may be performed necessarily during the execution of change display, and movement display may not be performed during the execution of change display.

  In addition, the movement display may be performed only during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may be performed during the execution of the display other than the change display.

Also, when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (7) to FIG. If the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the pseudo-series effect may be started, and as shown in FIG. 29 (8) to FIG. (2) A gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed when the check point CP2 is reached, etc.]
Even at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 becomes "00:00" As shown in FIG. 170 (A11) to FIG. 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the sabothani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2. etc],
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, even when it is time to start execution of a certain effect, a certain effect is not necessarily started. Therefore, a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of a certain effect is started May be able to

  Here, when it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, there may be a case where only the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started The execution of effects other than a certain effect may also be started. Moreover, when it becomes the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may always be started, or when the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, a certain effect Execution may not start.

  In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect starts, or when the execution of a certain effect starts In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

  Moreover, even when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, there may be a case where only the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or even if it is a time when the execution of a certain effect is started There may be a case where the execution of effects other than a certain effect is not started. In addition, even when the execution of a certain effect starts, the execution of a certain effect may not necessarily start, or even when the execution of a certain effect starts, In some cases, the execution of the effect may be started.

  Also, there may be cases where the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and cases other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started In some cases, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Also, when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the sense of expectation for the execution of a certain effect.

  Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect starts, or when the timing of an execution of a certain effect starts. Also, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

In addition, “operation means [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.]” is provided,
When there is an operation of the operation means, the advance notice may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 201 (A14), when the effect button 136 is operated, the timer indication of the timer advance notice TM1 is displayed. It becomes "30:00" etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the advance notice may be recognized by the operation of the operation means, and the operation of the operation means may be promoted.

  Here, there may be a case where only the advance notice display may be displayed when the operation means is operated, or a display other than the advance notice display may be displayed when the operation means is operated. Good. Further, the advance notice may be displayed when the operation means is operated, or the advance notice may not be displayed when the operation means is operated.

  Further, the advance notice may be displayed only when the operation means is operated, or the advance notice may be displayed even when the operation means is not operated. Good.

Also, the notice display is always displayed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by starting the display of the first display, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the display of the advance notice may be further improved.

  Here, the advance notice may be displayed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started That is, the advance notice may be displayed other than before the change display is started.

Also, in some cases, the notice display may not be displayed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have the unexpectedness of the display of the first display.

  Here, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, there may be a case where only the advance notice display is not displayed, or the display of the first display is started. After the change display is started, the display other than the advance notice may not be displayed. In addition, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the advance notice display may not necessarily be displayed, or after the display of the first display is started The notice display may be displayed before the change display is started.

  Also, there may be a case where the advance notice display may not be displayed only after the display of the first display is started and before the start of the change display, or the display of the first display is started The notice display may not be displayed other than after the change display is started.

Also, the notice display is performed by the first display [for example, as shown in FIG. 200 (A2), between the time when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and the SABOHANI character SBH starts to move) As shown in FIG. 201 (A17), the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are shown, and the period from the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani to the time when the advance notice is given is notified. In the period from when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed to when the countdown of the timer display starts, the time from when the countdown of the timer display starts to when a certain advance notice effect is performed, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to recognize in advance the period from the start of the change display to the start of the execution of a certain effect by looking at the first display.

  Here, the notice display may be performed only by the first display, or the notice display may be performed by the display other than the first display. Further, the advance notice may be displayed by the first display, or the advance notice may not be displayed by the first display.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
[Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc. ], And the game console is equipped with
The display unit is a unit that may display a first display [eg, a chance up meter, a timer advance display, etc.],
The first display is a display for notifying of a timing at which execution of a certain effect is started,
The display means displays a fourth display [for example, the first CUM in-provision display MTY1 shown in FIG. 203 (A2), the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 and the first timer with “STANDUP” shown in FIG. 204 (B6) It is a means which may display the notice display TM1 or the second timer notice display TM2 etc.],
The fourth display is a display for previewing that the first display is displayed [for example, the first CUM in-provision display MTY1 and the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 shown in FIG. 203 (A2) are the first). The first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 with “STANDUP” shown in FIG. 204 (B6) giving notice of the display of the chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 are the first It indicates that the timer display is displayed on the timer advance display TM1 and the second timer advance display TM2, etc.],
A plurality of the fourth displays may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (A2), a plurality of chance-up preparation displays are displayed (a first CUM in-provision display MTY1, a second CUM in-provision display MTY2) Multiple (for example, the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2) are displayed on the timer notice display with “STANDUP” shown in FIG. 204 (B6).
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to the game console, by displaying a plurality of fourth displays, it is possible to emphasize that there is a possibility that the first display may be displayed, and to draw attention to the first display. There are times when you can.

  Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display other displays than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display or may not display the first display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good.

  Further, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display other displays than the fourth display. In addition, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

  In addition, the fourth display may give notice that only the first display is displayed, and may give notice of things other than the display of the first display. . In addition, the fourth display may always notify that the first display will be displayed, or may not give notice of the first display being displayed. .

  Note that a plurality of fourth displays may be necessarily displayed, or a plurality of fourth displays may not be displayed.

Also, “the first display is a period display [for example, a first chance up meter CMT1 and a second chance up meter CMT2 shown in FIG. 203 (A6), etc.],
The display of the period is the period during which the effect is being performed by a first period [for example, the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 shown in FIG. 203 (A7) to FIG. 203 (A26)]. This is a display for informing the timing when execution of a certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (A12) to FIG. (A16), the character SBH of the sabothani of the second chance up meter CMT2 [2] reaching the check point CP2 informs of the timing at which the gold cut-in image CI3 may be displayed, etc.],
At least a part of the first display [For example, the display position of the character SBH of the sabothani in the first chance up meter CMT1 shown in FIG. ] Is configured to be displayed (hereinafter referred to as "change display"),
The change display is a display that changes in accordance with the time since the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (A7) to FIG. (A25), in the first chance up meter CMT1. The display position of each SBOH character SBH changes according to the time since the SBOH character SBH starts moving from the start point SP in the SBOH character SBH and the second chance up meter CMT2, etc.],
A display mode in which the change display is performed and the first display is displayed [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of the sabothani in the second chance up meter CMT2 shown in FIG. 203 (A12) reaches the second check point CP2 ] Is notified that it is the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the display start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to have an expectation for the start timing of the certain effect to be executed. There is a possibility.

  Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include displays other than the period display.

  Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of effects other than a certain effect is started in a certain period The timing may also be notified. In addition, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or may notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period It may not be possible.

  In addition, the first display may notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than a certain period. Timing may be notified.

  In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display becoming a certain display aspect, or the change display is performed. It may also be informed that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by one display becoming a certain display mode. In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display becoming a certain display aspect, or the change display is performed It may not be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain production is started by one display becoming a certain display mode.

  In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may be informed that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started also by things other than one display becoming a certain display mode.

In addition, “the first display may be displayed including the third display [for example, the display of“ UP ”above the second check point CP2 shown in FIG. 203 (A18), etc.]”. Is a display,
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (A16) to FIG. (A18), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the second display is performed. "UP" is displayed above the check point CP2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be easy to recognize that the second display has been displayed by looking at the third display.

  Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including the display other than the third display. It may be In addition, the first display may be displayed by always including the third display, or may be displayed without the third display.

  Also, when a certain effect is performed, only the third display may be displayed, and when a certain effect is performed, displays other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the third display may be displayed, or when the certain effect is performed, the third display may not be displayed.

Also, “the first display is a timer display [for example, a first timer announcement display TM1 and a second timer announcement display TM2 shown in FIG. 204 (B6), etc.],
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. (9), the timer in timer notification display TM 1 When the display becomes "00:00", etc., it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect is started, etc.]
A display in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the timer display etc. in the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 204 (B7)] changes according to the passage of time (hereinafter referred to as "change display"). Is configured to be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. 20 (7), according to the time after the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 starts, Countdown is taking place, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) becomes "00:00"] The execution of the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the display start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that it is possible to have an expectation for the start timing of the certain effect to be executed. There is a possibility.

  Here, the first display may include only the timer display or may include displays other than the timer display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing when the execution of an effect other than a certain effect is started. It is also good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good.

  Also, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When it becomes a display mode, execution of productions other than a certain production may be started. Also, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may always be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When it becomes a display mode, execution of a certain presentation may not be started.

  In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. The execution of a certain effect may be started also in cases other than the display mode.

In addition, the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 204 (B4) to FIG. (B6), the first timer notification display TM1 displays the movement display. The second CUM in-provision display MTY2 (the second chance up meter CMT2) may move and display as shown in FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. 204 (A12).
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display is changed [for example, the movement display of the first timer notification display TM1 is performed as shown in FIG. 204 (B4) to FIG. (B6). The display position changes, and as shown in FIG. 204 (A10) to (A12), when the movement display of the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) is performed, the display position changes, etc. ],
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the change display by the first display is started in a state in which the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started is missed In some cases, it is possible to prevent the reduction of the rendering effect because it is the timing when a certain rendering is performed. That is, there is a case where it is possible to give a mind preparation for a certain effect to be performed and to focus on a first display for preventing a certain effect from missing.

  Here, in the first display, only the movement display may be performed, or the display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  When the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may change, and when the movement display is performed, the display positions of displays other than the first display may also change. In addition, when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display also changes when the display other than the movement display is performed. May be

  In addition, after the display of the first display is started, only the movement display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started That is, there may be a case where display other than the movement display is also performed before the change display is started. In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the movement display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

  Also, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the start of the change display, or after the display of the first display is started That is, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 204 (B4) to FIG. (B6), the first timer notification display TM1 displays the movement display. The second CUM in-provision display MTY2 (the second chance up meter CMT2) may move and display as shown in FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. 204 (A12).
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display is changed [for example, the movement display of the first timer notification display TM1 is performed as shown in FIG. 204 (B4) to FIG. (B6). The display position changes, and as shown in FIG. 204 (A10) to (A12), when the movement display of the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) is performed, the display position changes, etc. ],
The movement display may be performed during execution of the change display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by causing the line of sight to focus on the first display in the movement display of the first display during the execution of the change display by the first display, it becomes the timing when a certain effect is performed for some time In some cases, it can be prevented that the rendering effect is reduced. That is, there is a case where it is possible to give a mind preparation for a certain effect to be performed and to focus on a first display for preventing a certain effect from missing.

  Here, in the first display, only the movement display may be performed, or the display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  When the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may change, and when the movement display is performed, the display positions of displays other than the first display may also change. In addition, when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display also changes when the display other than the movement display is performed. May be

  In addition, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed during the execution of the change display, and a display other than the movement display may also be performed during the execution of the change display. In addition, movement display may be performed necessarily during the execution of change display, and movement display may not be performed during the execution of change display.

  In addition, the movement display may be performed only during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may be performed during the execution of the display other than the change display.

Also, when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 204 (B8), the first timer notice When the timer display on display TM1 becomes "00:00", a pseudo-series effect may be started, and as shown in FIG. 203 (A12) to FIG. The gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed when SBH reaches the second check point CP2, etc.],
Even at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 becomes "00:00" As shown in FIG. 170 (A11) to FIG. 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the sabothani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2. etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even when it is time to start execution of a certain effect, a certain effect is not necessarily started. Therefore, a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of a certain effect is started May be able to

  Here, when it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, there may be a case where only the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started The execution of effects other than a certain effect may also be started. Moreover, when it becomes the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may always be started, or when the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, a certain effect Execution may not start.

  In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect starts, or when the execution of a certain effect starts In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

  Moreover, even when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, there may be a case where only the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or even if it is a time when the execution of a certain effect is started There may be a case where the execution of effects other than a certain effect is not started. In addition, even when the execution of a certain effect starts, the execution of a certain effect may not necessarily start, or even when the execution of a certain effect starts, In some cases, the execution of the effect may be started.

  Also, there may be cases where the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and cases other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started In some cases, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Also, when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the first display, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the execution of a certain effect can be further improved.

  Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect starts, or when the timing of an execution of a certain effect starts. Also, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

Also, when the fourth display is displayed, the first display is always displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the first display is displayed by the fourth display.

  Here, when the fourth display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed, or when the fourth display is displayed, displays other than the first display may also be displayed. Good. In addition, when only the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be always displayed, or when the display other than the fourth display is displayed, the first display is always displayed. It is also good.

In addition, when the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the first display is displayed by the fourth display.

  Here, when the fourth display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, displays other than the first display are also displayed. May be Also, when the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed without fail, and when the fourth display is displayed, the first display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when only the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed, or when the display other than the fourth display is displayed, the first display is displayed. It may be displayed.

In addition, the first in-provision display as the fourth display [for example, the first CUM in-provision display MTY1 shown in FIG. 203 (A2), the first timer notification with “STANDUP” shown in FIG. 204 (B6) Display TM1 etc. may be displayed,
The second preparation in progress display as the fourth display [For example, the second CUM in preparation display MTY2 shown in FIG. 203 (A2), the second timer announcement display TM 2 etc. on which "STANDUP" shown in FIG. 204 (B6) is displayed ] May be displayed,
The display of the second in-progress display may be started while the first in-provision display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (A1) to FIG. 203 (A2), the first CUM is being prepared. The display of the second CUM in-provision display MTY2 is being started while the display MTY1 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 204 (B4) to FIG. 204 (B5), of the first timer notification display TM1 in which "STANDUP" is displayed. The display of the second timer notification display TM2 is started, etc. when "STANDUP" is displayed during display],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for the display of the second in-progress display by the display of the first in-provision display.

  Here, only the first preparation display may be displayed as the fourth display, or display other than the first preparation display may also be displayed as the fourth display. Good. In addition, the first preparation display may be displayed as the fourth display, or the first preparation display may not be displayed as the fourth display.

  In addition, only the second in-provision display may be displayed as the fourth display, and displays other than the second in-provision display may also be displayed as the fourth display. . Further, the second in-provision display may be displayed as the fourth display or the second in-provision display may not be displayed as the fourth display.

  In addition, only the display of the second preparation display may start while the first preparation display is displayed, or the second preparation display may be displayed while the first preparation display is displayed. Display other than display may also be started. Also, the display of the second preparation display may always start while the first preparation display is displayed, or the display of the second preparation display does not start while the first preparation display is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, the display of the second preparation display may be started only during the display of the first preparation display, and the second preparation is in progress other than the display of the first preparation display. The display of the display may be started.

In addition, after “the first preparation display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter,“ first correspondence display [for example, the first display shown in FIG. 204 (A1) 1) A chance increase meter CMT1, a first timer notice display TM1 etc. on which the timer display shown in FIG. 204 (B7) is displayed] is displayed.
After the second in-provision display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the second in-provision display (hereinafter referred to as “second correspondence display [for example, second chance up shown in FIG. 204 (A13) The meter CMT2 and the second timer notice display TM2 etc. when the timer display is displayed] is displayed.
The first correspondence indication is displayed prior to the second correspondence indication [For example, as shown in FIG. 204 (A1) to FIG. (A13), the first chance up meter CMT1 raises the second chance As shown in FIG. 204 (B7), which is displayed earlier than the meter CMT2, the timer display is displayed before the first timer notification display TM1 is displayed before the second timer notification display TM2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give expectation to the display of the second correspondence display by the display of the first correspondence display.

  Here, after the first preparation display is displayed, only the first correspondence display may be displayed, or after the first preparation display is displayed, displays other than the first correspondence display It may be displayed. In addition, after the first preparation display is displayed, the first correspondence display may always be displayed, or after the first preparation display is displayed, the first correspondence display may not be displayed. It may be.

  Also, the first correspondence display may be displayed only after the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display is displayed other than after the first preparation display is displayed. It may be done. In addition, after only the first preparation indication is displayed, the first correspondence indication may be displayed, or even after the indication other than the first preparation indication is displayed, the first correspondence indication is displayed. It may be displayed.

  In addition, after the second preparation display is displayed, only the second correspondence display may be displayed, or after the second preparation display is displayed, displays other than the second correspondence display are also displayed. It may be done. In addition, after the second preparation display is displayed, the second correspondence display may always be displayed, or after the second preparation display is displayed, the second correspondence display may not be displayed. It may be.

  In addition, the second correspondence display may be displayed only after the second preparation display is displayed, and the second correspondence display is displayed other than after the second preparation display is displayed. It may be done. In addition, after only the second preparation indication is displayed, the second correspondence indication may be displayed, or even after the indication other than the second preparation indication is displayed, the second correspondence indication is displayed. It may be displayed.

  Also, only the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display, and displays other than the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display. In addition, the first correspondence display may always be displayed before the second correspondence display, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed before the second correspondence display.

  In addition, one correspondence display (a chance up meter, a timer advance notice display, etc.) may be displayed with respect to a plurality of preparation display. According to this, it may be possible to display a hot correspondence display when a lot of preparation display is displayed.

In addition, after “the first preparation display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter,“ first correspondence display [for example, the first display shown in FIG. 204 (A1) 1) A chance increase meter CMT1, a first timer notice display TM1 etc. on which the timer display shown in FIG. 204 (B7) is displayed] is displayed.
After the second in-provision display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the second in-provision display (hereinafter referred to as “second correspondence display [for example, second chance up shown in FIG. 204 (A13) The meter CMT2 and the second timer notice display TM2 etc. when the timer display is displayed] is displayed.
The first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display [eg, as shown in FIG. 204 (A1) to FIG. (A13), the first chance up meter CMT1 may 2 As shown in FIG. 204 (B7), which is displayed before the chance increase meter CMT2, the timer display is displayed before the first timer notification display TM1 is displayed before the second timer notification display TM2, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the display of the second correspondence display can be expected by the display of the first correspondence display, and the display of the correspondence display may be unexpected.

  Here, after the first preparation display is displayed, only the first correspondence display may be displayed, or after the first preparation display is displayed, displays other than the first correspondence display It may be displayed. In addition, after the first preparation display is displayed, the first correspondence display may always be displayed, or after the first preparation display is displayed, the first correspondence display may not be displayed. It may be.

  Also, the first correspondence display may be displayed only after the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display is displayed other than after the first preparation display is displayed. It may be done. In addition, after only the first preparation indication is displayed, the first correspondence indication may be displayed, or even after the indication other than the first preparation indication is displayed, the first correspondence indication is displayed. It may be displayed.

  In addition, after the second preparation display is displayed, only the second correspondence display may be displayed, or after the second preparation display is displayed, displays other than the second correspondence display are also displayed. It may be done. In addition, after the second preparation display is displayed, the second correspondence display may always be displayed, or after the second preparation display is displayed, the second correspondence display may not be displayed. It may be.

  In addition, the second correspondence display may be displayed only after the second preparation display is displayed, and the second correspondence display is displayed other than after the second preparation display is displayed. It may be done. In addition, after only the second preparation indication is displayed, the second correspondence indication may be displayed, or even after the indication other than the second preparation indication is displayed, the second correspondence indication is displayed. It may be displayed.

  Moreover, only the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display, and displays other than the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display. There may be cases. In addition, the first correspondence display may always be displayed before the second correspondence display, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed before the second correspondence display.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
Also, in the above description,
[Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc. ], And the game console is equipped with
The display unit is a unit that may display a first display [eg, a chance up meter, a timer advance display, etc.],
The first display is a display for notifying of a timing at which execution of a certain effect is started,
At least a portion of the first display [for example, the display position of the character SBH of the sabothani in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A4), the timer display etc. in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 202 (B6) changes Display (hereinafter referred to as "change display") may be performed.
The change display is a display that changes in accordance with the time until the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (27), the character SBH of Sabohani is As shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. 20 (7), the display position of the character SBH of Sabohani changes according to the time after the start of the movement from the start point SP, as shown in FIG. Timer display countdown is being performed according to the time after the timer display countdown starts, etc.]
A notice that the change display is started after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started (hereinafter, “change notice [for example, FIG. 202 (A2) In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202, a balloon of “Around START” displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, a display in which the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 202 (B4) to FIG. (C4) to (C5) (the display etc. which the timer notice display TM1 shown in (C5) expands)]) may be performed [eg, as shown in FIG. 202 (A1) to FIG. (A4), After the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed, before the character SBH of Sabohani in the chance-up meter CMT starts to move, “Somewhere in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani As shown in FIG. 202 (B1) to FIG. 202 (B6) in which the balloon of “START” is displayed, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the timer display countdown starts after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. Rocking etc],
A game stand characterized by

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to prevent the start of the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display from being missed.

  Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display other displays than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display or may not display the first display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good.

  Also, only the change display may be performed, or the display other than the change display may be performed. Further, the change display may be always performed or the change display may not be performed.

  Moreover, only after the display of the first display is started and before the start of the change display, there may be a case where only the change notice is given, and the display of the first display is started Later, before the change display is started, effects other than the change advance notice (pre notice) may be performed. Moreover, it is after the display of the first display is started, and before the start of the change display, the change notice may be always performed, or after the display of the first display is started. There may be a case where no change notice is given before the change display is started.

  Also, the change notice may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the start of the change display, or the display of the first display is started There may be a case where a change notice is made later than before the change display is started.

Also, “the first display is a period display [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A2), etc.],
In the period display, the execution of the certain effect is started in a certain period [for example, a period in which the effect by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. This is a display for informing the timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (8) to FIG. (13), the gold cut-in image CI3 is obtained by the sabothani character SBH reaching the second check point CP2. Informing the timing that may be displayed, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display form [for example, a display form in which the character SBH of the safari shown in FIG. 29 (8) reaches the second check point CP2] To be notified that it is time to start the performance of the
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the display start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to have an expectation for the start timing of the certain effect to be executed. There is a possibility.

  Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include displays other than the period display.

  Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of effects other than a certain effect is started in a certain period The timing may also be notified. In addition, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or may notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period It may not be possible.

  In addition, the first display may notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than a certain period. Timing may be notified.

  In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display becoming a certain display aspect, or the change display is performed. It may also be informed that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by one display becoming a certain display mode. In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display becoming a certain display aspect, or the change display is performed It may not be notified that it is the timing when execution of a certain production is started by one display becoming a certain display mode.

  In addition, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may be informed that it is the timing when execution of a certain effect is started also by things other than one display becoming a certain display mode.

In addition, “the first display may be displayed including the third display [for example, the display of“ UP ”above the second check point CP2 shown in FIG. 29 (16), etc.”] Is a display,
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (13) to FIG. (16), when the gold cut-in image CI 3 is displayed, the second display is performed. "UP" is displayed above the check point CP2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be easy to recognize that the second display has been displayed by looking at the third display.

  Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including the display other than the third display. It may be In addition, the first display may be displayed by always including the third display, or may be displayed without the third display.

  Also, when a certain effect is performed, only the third display may be displayed, and when a certain effect is performed, displays other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the third display may be displayed, or when the certain effect is performed, the third display may not be displayed.

In addition, “the first display is a timer display [for example, timer preview display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2) or FIG. 202 (B1), timer display BOMB of bomb shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.]
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. (9), the timer in timer notification display TM 1 When the display becomes "00:00", etc., it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect is started, etc.]
When the change display is performed and the first display shows a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer announcement display TM1 shown in FIG. 202 (B8) becomes "00:00"] The execution of the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, the display start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that it is possible to have an expectation for the start timing of the certain effect to be executed. There is a possibility.

  Here, the first display may include only the timer display or may include displays other than the timer display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing when the execution of an effect other than a certain effect is started. It is also good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. It is also good.

  Also, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When it becomes a display mode, execution of productions other than a certain production may be started. Also, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may always be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When it becomes a display mode, execution of a certain presentation may not be started.

  In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. The execution of a certain effect may be started also in cases other than the display mode.

In addition, the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. CUM in preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. 168 (A10) or FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. The position changes, and as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. (A10) and FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. And the display position changes, etc.]
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the change display by the first display is started in a state in which the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started is missed In some cases, it is possible to prevent the reduction of the rendering effect because it is the timing when a certain rendering is performed. That is, there is a case where it is possible to give a mind preparation for a certain effect to be performed and to focus on a first display for preventing a certain effect from missing.

  Here, in the first display, only the movement display may be performed, or the display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  When the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may change, and when the movement display is performed, the display positions of displays other than the first display may also change. In addition, when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display also changes when the display other than the movement display is performed. May be

  In addition, after the display of the first display is started, only the movement display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started That is, there may be a case where display other than the movement display is also performed before the change display is started. In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the movement display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

  Also, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the start of the change display, or after the display of the first display is started That is, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. CUM in preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. 168 (A10) or FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to FIG. The position changes, and as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. (A10) and FIG. 204 (A10) to FIG. And the display position changes, etc.]
The movement display may be performed during execution of the change display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by causing the line of sight to focus on the first display in the movement display of the first display during the execution of the change display by the first display, it becomes the timing when a certain effect is performed for some time In some cases, it can be prevented that the rendering effect is reduced. That is, there is a case where it is possible to give a mind preparation for a certain effect to be performed and to focus on a first display for preventing a certain effect from missing.

  Here, in the first display, only the movement display may be performed, or the display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  When the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may change, and when the movement display is performed, the display positions of displays other than the first display may also change. In addition, when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display also changes when the display other than the movement display is performed. May be

  In addition, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed during the execution of the change display, and a display other than the movement display may also be performed during the execution of the change display. In addition, movement display may be performed necessarily during the execution of change display, and movement display may not be performed during the execution of change display.

  In addition, the movement display may be performed only during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may be performed during the execution of the display other than the change display.

Also, when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (7) to FIG. If the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the pseudo-series effect may be started, and as shown in FIG. 29 (8) to FIG. (2) A gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed when the check point CP2 is reached, etc.]
Even at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 becomes "00:00" As shown in FIG. 170 (A11) to FIG. 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the sabothani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2. etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, a certain effect is not necessarily started even when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect. Therefore, a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of a certain effect is started It may be possible to have it.

  Here, when it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, there may be a case where only the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started The execution of effects other than a certain effect may also be started. Moreover, when it becomes the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may always be started, or when the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, a certain effect Execution may not start.

  In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect starts, or when the execution of a certain effect starts In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

  Moreover, even when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, there may be a case where only the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or even if it is a time when the execution of a certain effect is started There may be a case where the execution of effects other than a certain effect is not started. In addition, even when the execution of a certain effect starts, the execution of a certain effect may not necessarily start, or even when the execution of a certain effect starts, In some cases, the execution of the effect may be started.

  Also, there may be cases where the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and cases other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started In some cases, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Also, when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the first display, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the execution of a certain effect can be further improved.

  Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect starts, or when the timing of an execution of a certain effect starts. Also, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

In addition, the display unit may display a fourth display [for example, a CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 202 (A1), a timer notice display TM1 in which “STANDBY” shown in FIG. 202 (C1) is displayed, Timer preview stock display area TMst indicating that the timer preview shown in B3) is in stock, and a display in which the number of meters of the meter is shown in the information display area of the CUM in-provision display MTYa shown in FIG. 185 (A1) Etc.] may be displayed,
The fourth display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the first display is displayed by the fourth display.

  Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display other displays than the fourth display. In addition, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

  In addition, the fourth display may give notice that only the first display is displayed, or may give notice that a display other than the first display is displayed. . In addition, the fourth display may always notify that the first display will be displayed, or may not give notice of the first display being displayed. .

Also, “the notice display can be displayed as the change notice,
The notice display is performed by the first display [For example, a notice display is made by the balloon of “Sorry, START” displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A2) The timer notice shown in FIG. 202 (B4) to FIG. 202 (B5) is displayed by swinging the timer notice display TM1 itself shown in FIG. 202 (C4) to FIG. 202 (C5). Notice display is performed by expanding notice display TM1 itself, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easily recognized that the change display is performed by the first display.

  Here, only the notice display may be displayed as the change notice, or a display other than the notice display may be displayed as the change notice. Further, the notice display may be displayed as the change notice or may not be displayed as the change notice.

  Further, the advance notice may be displayed only as the change notice, or may be displayed as an effect (notice) other than the change notice.

  Further, the advance notice may be displayed only by the first display, or may be displayed by any display other than the first display. Further, the advance notice may be displayed by the first display, or the advance notice may not be displayed by the first display.

Also, "a false change notice may be executed,
If the false change notification is executed after the display of the first display is started, the change display is not started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation that the change display may be started when the change notice is made.

  Here, only the false change notice may be executed, or an effect (notice) other than the false change notice may be executed. Also, the false change announcement may be performed or the false change announcement may not be performed.

  In addition, when a false change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, only the change display may not be started, or after the display of the first display is started, false When the change notice of is executed, the display other than the change display may not be started. Also, if a false change notice is performed after the display of the first display is started, the change display may not necessarily start, or after the display of the first display is started The change display may be started when the change notice of is performed.

  Also, the change display may not be started only when the false change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, and after the display of the first display is started, the false The change display may not be started except when the change notice of is performed.

In addition, the change notification is performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started [eg, FIG. 202 (A1) to FIG. 202 (A4) As shown, after the CUM in-provision display MTY (chance-up meter CMT) is displayed, a balloon of “Somewhere START” is displayed before the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving, as shown in FIG. 202 (B1). As shown in FIG. 6 (B6), after the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, the timer advance notice display TM1 swings, etc. before the countdown of the timer display is started],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be easily recognized that the change display is started.

  Here, only after the display of the first display is started and before the start of the change display, only the change notice may be given, or after the display of the first display is started An effect (notice) other than the change notice may be performed before the change display is started. Moreover, it is after the display of the first display is started, and before the start of the change display, the change notice may be always performed, or after the display of the first display is started. There may be a case where no change notice is given before the change display is started.

  Also, the change notice may be made only after the display of the first display is started and before the start of the change display, or after the display of the first display is started In addition to the start of the change display, the change notice may be made.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Subsequently, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 215.

  FIG. 207 to FIG. 215 are diagrams showing in stages the modified example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 207 to 215, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIG. 207-FIG. 215, the pachinko machine 100 comprised comprising one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In addition, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. In addition, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 207 is a view showing the steps of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a view showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (a), "decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative 3", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost, is stopped and displayed. In addition, although the reserve icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the reserve of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode, the reserve icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani That is, it is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. In addition, in this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these may be displayed .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (b), the hold (first hold) of the special view 1 is digested, and the hold icon h12 of the second special view 1 is set as the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 It is displayed, and also, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, after the suspension is digested and the symbol variation display is started, one variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the variation icon may be, for example, the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold icon h11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (c), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (d), the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (e), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, “decoration 2” -Finalized by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of decoration 5-decoration 7 ".

  Subsequently, in FIG. 207 (f), the suspension of the special view 1 is digested and the suspension display disappears, and the first special view display device 212 (not shown) starts symbol variation display, and even in the decorative symbol display device 208 Variable display has been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (g), a step-up notice is started. The step-up notice is a notice that sequentially switches and displays a plurality of display modes in a predetermined display order, and in the step-up notice in the present embodiment, each display mode has a number representing the number of steps of the display mode. It is displayed. The magnitude of the number of steps is a display showing the level of the big hit reliability. For example, when displayed up to step 5, the development to super reach is determined and the possibility of a big hit is high. However, even if displayed up to step 5, there is a possibility of deviation, and the reliability is not 100%. In addition, when it is displayed to step 5, you may make it a final display of a big hit symbol finally. As the number of steps increases, the size of the display also increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 207B (g), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (h), the step-up notice is updated in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also here, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 207 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and the “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (k), the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 in which a mini game is displayed is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini game display area MN1 is displayed overlapping at least a part of the super reach effect display, and the super reach effect display is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the mini game display area MN1 is not displayed. There is. In the mini game in this example of presentation, the mission is to continuously hit the effect button 136 in the operation effective period and finally derive "Daikichi". That is, the mini game in this presentation example requires a plurality of manipulations of the presentation button 136 to derive the result. FIG. 207 (m) shows that the mini game is started, and an explanation of the game in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the user to continuously hit the effect button 136. In addition, the wording "Daikichi at Super Hot Warning" may be displayed below it, and it is foretold that a high reliability warning may occur due to the fact that "Daikichi" is derived. The contents of the mission and the results of the mission achievement are explained. The mini game display area MN1 may not be divided by a frame.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 207 (n), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, display of "Daikichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207 (o), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Nakakichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. The display of "Nakakichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Daikichi".

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207 (p), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “Okichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is performed. The display of "Okichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Nakakichi".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (q), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Koyoshi". It is notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by has been started.

  FIG. 207 (r) shows that the player performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136.

  In FIG. 208 (a) continued from FIG. 207 (r), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, an effect image of a star is displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the number also increases as the number of operations increases due to continuous hitting. In this example of the effect, when the player interrupts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the number of effect images of stars gradually decreases, but may not decrease. At the timing shown in FIG. 208A, four effect images of stars are displayed in the mini game display area MN1.

  In FIG. 208 (b), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (b), five star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the display of "Koyoshi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. It is reported that the possibility of deriving "Nakakichi" or "Daikichi" is increased as a result of the mini game. In this effect example, when the player interrupts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the display of "Okichi" that has been erased may be displayed again, but if it is erased once, it is not displayed again. It is also good.

  In FIG. 208 (c), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (c), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the display of "Daiyoshi" and "Nakakichi" is continued. In place of the button image 136 and the display of the characters "Continuous stroke", the characters "2 more seconds" are displayed, and it is informed that the operation effective period is remaining 2 seconds.

  In FIG. 208 (d), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (d), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is not changed, and the display of "Daikichi" and "Nakakichi" is continued. The display for informing the operation valid period is "one more second", and it is informed that the operation valid period is one second remaining.

  In FIG. 208 (e), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (e), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and there is no change in the display for notifying the operation effective period, but a predetermined number of effect buttons By performing the operation 136, the display of "Nakakichi" is erased, and it is reported that the possibility of "Daikichi" being derived as a result of the mini game is increased. In this effect example, when the player interrupts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the display of "Nakakichi" that has been erased may be displayed again, but if it is erased once, it is not displayed again. It is also good.

  FIG. 208 (f) shows that "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 after the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. That is, it is informed that the mini game mission has been achieved. As a result, the player is informed that there is a possibility that the intense advance notice will appear. Note that when the display of "Daikichi" is derived, it may be notified that advance notice of intense hot is always performed.

  Subsequently, when the mini game display area MN1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 208 (g), the super reach effect is resumed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 208 (g), the button preview effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and "Push" along with the button image 136a. The character of is displayed, and a state of promoting one operation of the effect button 136 is shown. At this time, for example, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. Note that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only vibration occurs, may be displayed in a mode in which only rotation occurs, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither vibration nor rotation is performed. There may be cases. In this presentation example, when the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, it is more final than when the button image 136a is displayed in a manner in which at least one of vibration and rotating is not performed. The jackpot symbol is designed to be easy to stop. The button image 136a may be displayed only in a mode in which neither vibration nor rotation is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 is different between the mini game and the main effect (effect regarding the variable display of the decorative symbol). Further, in this example, although the effect by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game and the effect by one operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, the effect button is performed in both the mini game and the main effect. An effect may be performed by the 136 consecutive hitting operations.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 208 (h), super reach effect is continuously performed, and a state in which display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed is shown. Here, when the operation effective period is started, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed instead of the character display of “Push”, and the gauge is displayed to decrease in accordance with the elapse of the operation effective period.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 208 (h), when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which is arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of (for example, nine) face faces of a bancho are arranged around the character of "match" in the balloon. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed in response to the result of achieving the mission.

  On the other hand, in the mini game, when the display of "Daikichi" is not derived and the mission is not achieved, a weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 208 (i ') is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image smaller in size than the strong cut-in image CI1a, and is an image in which the face of the bancho is not arranged around the character of "match" in the balloon. Even if the mission is not achieved in the mini game, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. Note that both the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap with the super reach effect, and when these cut-in images are displayed, the super reach is more than when these cut-in images are not displayed. The presentation is considered to be difficult to see. Also, the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b are overlapped with the decorative pattern.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 208 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" .

  After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 208 (k), in the decoration symbol display device 208, the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  In this demonstration example, in the mini game, a continuous hit operation of the presentation button 136 is required to achieve a mission, while in the main presentation, one operation of the presentation button 136 is required to cause a notice to appear. In the mini game, a single operation of the effect button 136 may be requested, and in the main effect, a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 may be requested.

  In addition, as in this example of the effect, when the result of the mini game relates to a notice relating to the symbol variation display, the mini game execution time is an execution time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display. .

  FIG. 209 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 209 (a) shows the effect following FIG. 207 (j), in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, showing that the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 209 (b) shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini game in this effect example is also performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. FIG. 209 (c) shows that the mini game is started, and an explanation of the game in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the user to continuously hit the effect button 136. In addition, the wording "Daikichi at Super Hot Warning" may be displayed below it, and it is foretold that a high reliability warning may occur due to the fact that "Daikichi" is derived. The contents of the mission and the results of the mission achievement are explained. On the other hand, even in the main effect, a button operation effect for requesting the operation of the effect button has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 209 (c), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, the character "Push" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is displayed once. It is shown that the operation is promoted. At this time, for example, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. Note that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only vibration occurs, may be displayed in a mode in which only rotation occurs, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither vibration nor rotation is performed. There may be cases.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Daikichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period in the main effect is not started, and the button acceptance time meter is displayed, but the gauge does not decrease. This suggests that there is some relevance between the mini game and the main effect in the mini game display area MN1.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 209 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "Nakakichi" which is a display which may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. The display of "Nakakichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Daikichi". On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 209 (f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, display of "Okichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is performed. The display of "Okichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Nakakichi". On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period still has not started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (g), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Koyoshi". It is notified that the reception of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 has been started. Then, the player sees this notification and starts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed. As described above, in this effect example, the button image 136a as the operation prompting display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation prompting display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Furthermore, in this effect example, the button operation on the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 overlapping the main effect is preferentially received. The button operation to the main effect overlapping in the mini game display area MN1 may be received with priority.

  In FIG. 209 (h), it is shown that the player performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. In the mini game display area MN1, it is shown that the number of star effect images increases according to the number of times of operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209 (h), four star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 209 (i) shows that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209 (i), the display of "Okichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times, and "Nakakichi" or "Okichi" is derived as a result of the mini game. It is informed that the possibility has increased. The number of displayed star effect images in the mini game display area MN1 remains four. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 209 (j) shows that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209 (j), five star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. Further, in place of the button image 136 and the display of the characters of "continuous hit", the characters of "two more seconds" are displayed, and it is informed that the operation effective period is remaining two seconds. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period still has not started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 209 (k) shows that the player has interrupted the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. Then, the star effect image displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is gradually erased, and at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (k), the number of star effect images in the mini game display area MN1 is 0. It is shown that it has become. Moreover, although the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Nakakichi" are continued, the display notifying the operation effective period is "one more second", and the operation effective period is one second remaining. It has been informed.

  FIG. 209 (l) shows a state in which the operation effective period in the mini game has passed and "Nakakichi" has been derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. That is, it is informed that the mini game mission has not been achieved. This was originally supposed to lead to "Daikichi" when continuous hitting operation was continuously performed, but the mission was not achieved because the number of times of operation of the presentation button 136 was insufficient It is due to.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 209 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game ends, the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and the super reach effect is resumed, and the gauge of the button reception time meter MT Decrease display is started. Thereby, it is notified that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect has been started. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (n), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 209 (o). This is displayed based on the fact that the mini game derivation result is not "Daikichi". At this time, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. In the case where it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, when it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is to be displayed, FIG. As shown in o ′), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as determined regardless of the participation state (operation state) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Further, when it is determined in advance that the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, the display of "Daikichi" is not derived regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 209 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 209 (q), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends. Thus, the result of the success or failure is determined in advance, and the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the result of the success or failure is derived. Therefore, the effect on the way may be changed as appropriate. The notice that appears can be changed according to the operation status of the effect button 136).

  FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 210 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 210 (b), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state where a mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1 is shown. . Specifically, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the wording "Daikichi put out Daikichi and a fierce appearance at Daikichi" is displayed below that, and it is announced that a highly reliable advance notice will occur by the derivation of "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the results of the mission achievement are explained.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 210 (c), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Daikichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 210 (d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Nakakichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. The display of "Nakakichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Daikichi".

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 210 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, display of "Okichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is performed. The display of "Okichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Nakakichi".

  Thereafter, in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakakichi" and "Kokichi" is started at the timing shown in FIG. 210 (f). Then, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a under the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, and it is informed that the reception of the operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has been started. ing. On the other hand, in the main effect, a button operation effect for requesting a continuous hitting operation of the effect button is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 210 (f), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Are shown to promote At this time, for example, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. Note that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only vibration occurs, may be displayed in a mode in which only rotation occurs, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither vibration nor rotation is performed. There may be cases. As described above, in the example of the effect, an effect of requesting continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, and an effect of requesting one operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game. That is, it can be said that an example is shown in which the number of times for requesting the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is smaller than the number of times for requesting the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. Further, in this effect example, effects including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and effects including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. In addition, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 210 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, reduction display of the gauge by the button acceptance time meter MT is started, and a state in which the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 is started is shown. In this effect example, acceptance of operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect and acceptance of operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game are simultaneously performed. The acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game may be started after the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started, or the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started After that, the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect may be started. Then, the player sees this and starts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136. In this production example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the button production in the main production corresponds to the state of the production button 136, but the button image displayed in the mini game display area MN1 The display mode 136a and the state of the effect button 136 are different. As described above, in this effect example, both effects of the main effect and the mini game can be operated by the same operation means (effect button 136). Therefore, for example, when the effect for which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is the effect requiring the continuous hitting operation, and the effect for which the acceptance of the operation is non-priority is the one requiring the operation, the momentum of the continuous hitting of the operation means Results may be derived for effects that are not prioritized, and effects for which acceptance of an operation is prioritized are effects that require an operation once, and effects for which acceptance of an operation is not prioritized are consecutive hit operations. In the case of the required effect, since the continuous hitting operation is performed from the beginning, the result may be able to be reliably derived even for the priority effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 210 (h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game in response to the first operation by the effect button 136 Is shown. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mini game mission has been achieved is also displayed, and that effect is notified. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect of the mini game is received prior to the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. On the other hand, the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is being performed continuously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 210 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b in response to the continuous hitting operation of the effect button in the main effect. In this effect example, it is shown that the cut-in image is displayed during the operation effective period in the continuous hitting operation effect in the main effect. Then, the button reception time meter MT is overlapped by the cut-in image, and it is in a state of being difficult to be recognized as compared with the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "in progress" is displayed from the right end to the left end, informing that the mission in the mini game is achieved. Thus, on condition that the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continued, it is informed that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Note that the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is still continued.

  Thereafter, as a result of the player continuously hitting the effect button 136 continuously, as shown in FIG. 210 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, instead of the weak cut-in image CI1b, the strong cut-in image CI1a It is shown that is displayed. This is displayed as a result of mission accomplishment in the mini game as described above. In this production example, a continuous hit gauge whose display mode changes according to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated may be displayed. For example, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed when the continuous hit gauge reaches the first amount. The strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed when displayed and full. At this time, when it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed, the continuous hitting gauge may not be full even if the continuous hitting operation is performed.

  When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as described above, then, in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. The display of the "super advance advance announcement" is carried out, and it is informed that the strong cut-in image CI1a which is the advance advance hot alert is displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 210 (h), the mission of the mini game is achieved, and then, as shown in FIG. 210 (i '), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. However, if the number of times the effect button 136 has been operated is insufficient due to the player stopping the continuous hitting operation thereafter, as shown in FIG. 210 (j '), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. It may remain the same. That is, as in this production example, although the mission is achieved, depending on the operation status of the production button 136, a rule collapse may occur in which the advance advance notice does not appear. Note that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed regardless of the operation status of the effect button 136 to match the achievement of the mission of the mini game, or may be changed to the strong cut-in image CI1a. You may make it display a hot at-the-minute notice. Further, when the continuous hitting operation is not performed in the main effect, neither the strong cut-in image CI1a nor the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 210 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" .

  After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 210 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, achieving the mission is one of the display conditions of the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the strong cut-in is performed when the number of times of operation of the rendering button 136 is smaller than a predetermined number. The image CI1a is not displayed but the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Note that, in this example, it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b can be displayed, and it is determined that the strong cut-in image CI1a can be displayed. It is configured to be able to derive a display of "Daikichi" in the game. When it is determined that only the weak cut-in CI 1 b can be displayed, the display of “Daikichi” is not derived in the mini game. Further, in this example, the cut-in image is not displayed if the effect button 136 has not performed the necessary number of operations at least for displaying the weak cut-in CI1b in the button continuous hitting operation production in the main effect. You may Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the cut-in image may not be displayed even if the effect button 136 is continuously hit in the button continuous hitting operation effect in the main effect, or the weak cut-in image The CI 1 b may be displayed but the strong cut-in image CI 1 a may not be displayed.

  FIG. 211 is a view illustrating the steps of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 211 (a) shows the effect following FIG. 207 (j), in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, showing that the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (b) shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 211 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. FIG. 211 (c) shows that the mini game is started, and a description of the game in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters "Put on the screen with Daikichi by continuous hitting" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. The button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 211 (c) has a size larger than that of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 207 (m). However, they may be the same size. In addition, the button image 136a of a small size and the button image 136a of a large size may be selectively displayed, and the reliability of mission achievement may be made different depending on the size of the button image 136a displayed. . That is, when the large size button image 136a is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the small size button image 136a is displayed. In addition, the wording of "Daiyoshi and strong cut-in occurrence" is performed below that, and it is predicted that the strong cut-in notice with high reliability of the big hit will occur when "Daiyoshi" is derived. The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained.

  Thereafter, the description of the mini game displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 211 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 may be derived as a result of the mini game. Each display of "Daiyoshi", "Nakakichi", and "Okichi", which is a display, is displayed in this order, the display of "Daikichi" is overlapped with the display of "Nakakichi", and the display of "Nakakichi" is "Kokichi" It is displayed as being overlapped on the display of.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 211 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Koyoshi". It is notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by has been started. In addition, a button acceptance time meter MT is displayed on the left side of the mini game display area MN1, and is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases as the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 elapses. In this effect example, it is shown that the display regarding the mini game is also performed in an area other than the mini game display area MN1.

  FIGS. 211 (f) to (g) show that the effect button 136 is continuously hit during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini game display area MN <b> 1, the number of star effect images increases in accordance with the number of consecutive hits of the effect button 136.

  After that, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has passed, a result according to the number of consecutive hits of the effect button 136 is derived. In the example shown in FIG. 211 (h), "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game, and the letters "Mission achieved" are displayed below it, and it is informed that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (i), a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a cut-in notice. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is high. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the mini game being derived and the mission being achieved as a result of the mini game described above.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 211 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time passes, as shown in FIG. 211 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  On the other hand, after acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 211 (e), as shown in FIG. 211 (f ') to FIG. 211 (g'), the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 However, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has elapsed while the number of times determined in advance has not been reached, as shown in FIG. 211 (h '), in the mini game display area MN1, as a mini game result. "Okichi" is derived, and the word "Mission failure" is displayed below the message to notify that the mini game mission has not been achieved. Note that the result of the mini game may be determined in advance based on the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (i '), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as the cut-in notice. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is lower than the case where the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is a result of the result of the mini-game described above that "Okichi" is derived and the mission is not achieved.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 211 (j '), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero is defeated by the swordsman of the enemy role, and the defeated screen is displayed. "Decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" Ru.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time passes, as shown in FIG. 211 (k ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7” is stopped (fixed display) , And one of the special game variation game ends.

  FIG. 212 is a view showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 212 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (d). In the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2-decorative 5-decorative 7", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost, is stopped and displayed. In addition, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in the display mode of the sabohani, that is, in the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 212 (b), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested and the reserve display disappears, and the first special view display device 212 not shown starts the symbol variation display, and even in the decorative symbol display device 208 Variable display has been started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (c) shows that the mission as the main effect has been started. Specifically, the letters "mission activated" are displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the mission has been started. Also, at the lower end edge of the display area, "Please put out a cut-in" and "If hit, a big hit" is displayed together with the image of the face of the bancho, and the contents of the mission are informed. That is, it is reported that the mission will be achieved if the image of the face of the Bancho appears during the mission, and the big hit will be decided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 212 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "in mission" indicating that the mission is continuing is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (e), the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. In addition, the display of "in mission" is continued.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 212 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display that develops into super reach (punching reach) is performed. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed. In addition, even after developing into Super Reach, the display of "In Mission" is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 212 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area and the mini game is started. In this presentation example, it is shown that a mission as a main presentation and a mission in a mini game are being performed simultaneously. In other words, it is shown that the mission of the mini game is being repeated on the mission as the main effect. Here, in this presentation example, the mini game is started after the mission is started, but the mission may be started after the mini game is started. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 212 (g) to FIG. 212 (l) are the same as FIG. 211 (c) to FIG. Since it is the same as h), it omits about detailed explanation. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (j) to FIG. 212 (k), a part of the display of “in mission” is overlapped with the button acceptance time meter MT, and the button acceptance time meter MT The display of "in mission" is considered to be less visible than in the case of no overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (l), after “Okichi” is derived as a result of the mini game and the mission is achieved, the cut-in notice is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIG. 212 (m). The strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the mini game being derived and the mission being achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues even while the strong cut-in image CI1a is being displayed, and the display of "in mission" is continued, but the strong cut-in image CI1a is overlapped and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It is considered to be more difficult to see than when not overlapped to CI1a.

  As described above, the strong cut-in image CI1a is an image including a balloon in which a number of faces of the game leader are arranged around the character of "match". Therefore, with the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (n), the character display of "mission accomplished" is over the strong cut-in image CI1a by achieving the appearance of the face of the Bancho who is the mission in the main effect It is displayed by wrapping. That is, it is notified that the big hit is decided by the mission in the main effect being achieved. In other words, in this presentation example, it can be said that the mission in the main presentation is achieved by the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 212 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 212 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  FIG. 213 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. Since Fig. 213 (a) to Fig. 213 (k) are the same as Fig. 212 (a) to Fig. 212 (k), the description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 213 (l), when "Koyoshi" is derived as a result of the mini game, the word "Mission failure" is displayed below it, and the mini game mission is not achieved Is notified. In this production example, the result of the success or failure judgment is a loss, and therefore, when the mini game mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a has to be displayed, so in this production example, in the mini game Regardless of the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, it is determined in advance so that the items other than "Daikichi" are always derived.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 213 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as the cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission is not achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues even during the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the display of "in mission" is continued, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped, and the weak cut-in image is displayed. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a although it is considered to be more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by CI1b, the display of “in mission” is a strong cut-in image The case of being overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b is easier to view than the case of being overlapped by CI1a.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the leader. Therefore, since the appearance of the face of the Bancho who is a mission in the main effect is not achieved, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (n), the character display of "mission failure" is a weak cut-in image CI1b. It is displayed overlapping. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the mission in the main presentation was not achieved by the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and the defeated screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by a combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 213 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  FIG. 214 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 214 (a)-the same figure (i) are the same as that of FIG. 212 (a)-the same figure (i), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After the reception of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (i), as shown in FIG. 214 (j) to FIG. 214 (k), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is If the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has elapsed while the number of times determined in advance has not been reached, as shown in FIG. 214 (l), in the mini game display area MN1, as a result of the mini game Is derived, and the word "Mission failure" is displayed below it, informing that the mini game mission has not been achieved. In the example of the effect, the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, and based on this result, it is determined to be able to derive "Daiyoshi" as the result of the mini game. However, since the operation effective period has elapsed since the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 has not reached the number determined in advance, “Okichi” is not derived and “Okichi” is derived. It should be noted that when the mini game is started but there is no operation of the effect button 136, the result of the mini game may not be derived even if it is determined to be able to derive "Daikichi". . Also, if it is determined that "Daiyoshi" can be derived, "Daikichi" may be derived even if the number of times the effect button 136 has been operated is insufficient or the effect button 136 has not been operated. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as the cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission is not achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues even during the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the display of "in mission" is continued, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped, and the weak cut-in image is displayed. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a although it is considered to be more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by CI1b, the display of “in mission” is a strong cut-in image The case of being overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b is easier to view than the case of being overlapped by CI1a. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed also when the result of the mission is not derived.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the leader. Therefore, since the appearance of the face of the Bancho who is a mission in the main effect is not achieved, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 214 (n), the character display of “mission failure” is a weak cut-in image CI1b. It is displayed overlapping. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the mission in the main presentation was not achieved by the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  However, in this demonstration example, since the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 214 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the swordman of the enemy character and the victorious screen is displayed. In addition, “decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed at approximately the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol of “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 214 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7” is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends. That is, in this production example, the number of times of operation of the production button 136 is insufficient in the mini game, and the mission of the mini game is a failure. Therefore, although the mission of the main production related to this is not achieved either It is shown that the jackpot symbol is displayed in a definite manner according to the result of the determination.

  FIG. 215 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 215, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown.

  FIG. 215 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (b), a button operation effect that requests a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 as a main effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (b), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Are shown to promote At this time, for example, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decrease display of the gauge by the button acceptance time meter MT is started, and the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 in the main effect is shown. It is done. Then, the player sees this and starts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (d), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state where a mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1 is shown. ing. Specifically, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the wording "Daikichi at Super Hot Warning" may be displayed below it, and it is foretold that a high reliability warning may occur due to the fact that "Daikichi" is derived. The contents of the mission in the mini-game and the explanation of the result of the mission achievement are given. As described above, in this effect example, the mission effect in the main effect is started before the mini game is started. The display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT changes in accordance with the time from the start of the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the main effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "Daikichi" which is a display which may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. In addition, the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is being performed continuously.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Nakakichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. The display of "Nakakichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Daikichi". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (f), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is movable and overlaps the mini game display area MN1. In the example of the effect, the effect movable body 224 operates, for example, as a big hit advance notice, but for example, by operating the effect movable body 224, it predicts that the possibility of achieving the mission in the mini game is high. You may do so, and it may be foretold that there is a high possibility of mission achievement in the main presentation. In addition, the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is being performed continuously.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (g), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, display of "Okichi", which is a display possibly derived as a result of the mini game, is performed. The display of "Okichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Nakakichi". Further, the display of “Okichi” is overlapped with the forearm portion 224 b of the effect movable body 224 and is considered to be difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the effect of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is continuously performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (g) responds to the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. , Weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. In this effect example, it is shown that the cut-in image is displayed during the operation effective period in the continuous hitting operation effect in the main effect. In this presentation example, the weak cut image CI1 is displayed in a small size on the left side thereof so as not to overlap the button image 136a and the button acceptance time meter MT. Note that the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is still continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakakichi" and "Kokichi" is started. Then, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a under the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, and it is informed that the reception of the operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has been started. ing. Note that the display of this mini game is overlapped with the upper arm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, and it is difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, in the main effect, a button operation effect requiring continuous hitting operation of the effect button continues. Further, in this effect example, effects including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and effects including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Also here, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continuing, but when the acceptance of the operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, the effect button in the main effect is the operation of the effect button 136 Since it is accepted as the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game prior to the operation of 136, for example, the result of the mini game is derived in response to the effect button 136 operated at the timing surrounded by the one-dot chain line. Is configured. In addition, one operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, and may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 215 (i), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game in response to one operation by the effect button 136 Is shown. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mini game mission has been achieved is also displayed, and that effect is notified. However, since the mini game display area MN1 is overlapped with the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, the character of "achievement" is considered to be difficult to visually recognize. At the timing shown in FIG. 215 (i), the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect has passed, and the player has finished the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (j), when the mission in the main effect is completed, the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area. That is, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is derived as a result of the mission in the main effect. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (j), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is moved to the initial position. Therefore, the overlap to the mini game display area MN1 is eliminated, and the word "achievement" to the effect that the mini game mission has been achieved is considered to be easy to see. The timing at which the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area after the mission in the main effect is completed may be the same as the timing at which the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 moves to the initial position. After the mission in the main effect is finished and the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 may move to the initial position, or the effect movable body 224 After the forearm portion 224b of has moved to the initial position, the mission in the main effect may end, and the weak cut-in image CI1b may move to the center of the display area.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (k), it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed in place of the weak cut-in image CI1b. This is displayed as a result of mission accomplishment in the mini game as described above. Here, the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a is larger than the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b. The strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps a part of the mini game display area MN1. Even when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is insufficient, even if the mission in the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a Although the display is not performed, when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, when the mission in the mini game is achieved regardless of the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. You may do so.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" . After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the fluctuation game of one special figure ends.

  Subsequently, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 220.

  FIG. 216 to FIG. 220 are diagrams showing in stages the modified example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 216 to 220, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the general drawing The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIGS. 216 to 220, a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In addition, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 216 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 216, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown.

  FIG. 216 (a) shows that the mini game is started while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. In this effect example, the mini game is played without being divided by the area. When the mini game is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower right and left of the display area. ing. In addition, in the approximate center of the display area, “SP reach if Yoshimune comes out” is displayed, and it is reported that transition to super reach (SP reach) is made when the main character of the hero appears from the treasure box. In addition, “Select with cross key” and “Select with button” are displayed above the display area, and select a treasure box with operation key unit 137 and decide as a treasure box to open the treasure box selected with effect button 136 It is informed that can do. That is, in this presentation example, a situation is shown in which a mini game using a plurality of operation means is performed. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is being performed using a wider area than the effect regarding the decorative symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (b), it is shown that the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 has been started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL, and it is shown that the treasure box enclosed by the cursor CSL is the treasure box being selected. Further, at the center right of the display area, the remaining time of the operation effective period is shown, and at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (b), “3” indicating that the operation effective period is remaining 3 seconds is displayed It is done. Further, FIG. 216 (b) also shows the player operating the right button of the operation key unit 137.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (c), it is shown that the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR and surrounds the right treasure chest image BXR. . The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is remaining 2 seconds.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (d), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as a treasure box to be opened as shown in FIG. 216 (e). While the treasure chest image BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is reduced and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 216 (d), the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “1”, indicating that the operation valid period is one second remaining. Further, after the player performs the determination operation of the treasure box to be opened by operating the effect button 136, the display may be made such that the treasure box to be opened is decided when the operation effective period has elapsed. In addition, when the operation effective period passes without the operation by the effect button 136 being performed, it may be determined as a treasure box for opening the treasure box selected by the cursor CSL, or the operation by the effect button 136 is performed. When the operation effective period has elapsed, neither treasure box is selected and the treasure box may not be opened. According to this, there are cases where it is possible to improve the desire to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 with respect to the player.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (f), it is shown that the character YSM of the hero of the main character appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the mission of the mini game is achieved. Thereby, it is predicted that it will shift to SP reach. It should be noted that the advance notice may be given by the appearance of the character YSM of the main character of the main character.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 216 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c respectively, and the reach state is formed. . At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (h) shows a state of development to SP reach. As described above, in this example of the effect, in the case where the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined based on the result of the pass / fail determination shifts to the SP reach, in the mini game performed before the shift to the SP reach, It is configured to be able to display the character YSM of the main character of the main character who predicts to shift to the SP reach. Thereby, there may be a case where it is possible to give notice of the transition to the SP reach by causing the character of the lord YSM to appear in the mini game.

  In this example, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, the character YSM of the lord appears even if either the right treasure box image BXR or the left treasure box image BXL is selected, and it does not shift to the SP reach. If it is determined in advance, the character YSM may not appear even if either the right treasure box image BXR or the left treasure box image BXL is selected. In addition, on the condition that the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit is randomly determined, and the treasure chest image determined to be hit is selected. If you do, you may be configured so that your character YSM will appear. In addition, when the variation time that can execute the SP reach is selected, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be hit is selected. If the character YSM of Tonosama appears to appear and then the character YSM of Tonosama appears, then it develops into SP reach but if the character YSM of Tonosama does not appear, then SP reach It may be configured to perform a jackpot less reliable reach than the SP reach such as the normal reach until the fluctuation time passes. Further, it may be randomly selected whether or not the character of the character YSM should be made to appear at the timing when the treasure box image is selected. In addition, even if the character YSM of the lord appears, it may not shift to the SP reach in this case, and in this case, the jackpot symbol may be finally determined and displayed as a broken law.

  FIG. 217 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 217, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown.

  FIG. 217 (a) shows that the mini game is started while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. When the mini game is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower right and left of the display area. ing. In addition, in the approximate center of the display area, “SP reach if Yoshimune comes out” is displayed, and it is reported that transition to super reach (SP reach) is made when the main character of the hero appears from the treasure box. In addition, “Select with cross key” and “Select with button” are displayed above the display area, and select a treasure box with operation key unit 137 and decide as a treasure box to open the treasure box selected with effect button 136 It is informed that can do. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 217 (a), the cursor CSL is displayed between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL, and no treasure box image is displayed in a mode not selected. It is done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 217 (b), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, and the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed on the center right of the display area. Ru. At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is 3 seconds remaining is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (c), after the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started and no operation is performed, the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is The display shows "2", and it is shown that the operation effective period remains for 2 seconds. Therefore, the cursor CSL has not yet been selected with any treasure chest image, and is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (d), in the state where no operation is performed after the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 The display changes to "1", and it is shown that the operation effective period is left for one second. Therefore, the cursor CSL is still not selected with any treasure chest image, and is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (e), after the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, no operation is performed, and the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is The display changes to "0", indicating that the operation effective period has elapsed. Therefore, the cursor CSL is still not selected with any treasure chest image, and is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL. As a result, no treasure box is selected, and no treasure box can be opened, that is, the result of the mini game is not derived, and as shown in FIG. Transition to

  In this example, if the transition to the SP reach is determined in advance, the SP reach is executed even if none of the treasure boxes are selected, but the result of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the fluctuation time are Since no treasure chest is selected because it is determined in advance based on the result of the pass / fail judgment, SP reach is not performed, and for example, a reach with a big hit reliability lower than SP reach such as normal reach is performed You may According to this, there are cases where it is possible to improve the desire to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 with respect to the player.

  FIG. 218 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 218, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown. In addition, since FIG. 218 (a)-the same figure (d) are the same as that of FIG. 216 (a)-the same figure (d), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 218 (d), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as a treasure box to be opened as shown in FIG. 218 (e), and the right treasure box image is determined. While the BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, the left treasure box image BXL not selected is reduced and displayed. Also, in this example of the effect, as shown in FIG. 218 (e), the error display of “The game ball is clogged” and “Please call a person in charge” below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (error Informing is performed, and it is informed that the ball clogging error which is a state in which the game ball is clogged in the payout path is occurring. Specifically, for example, the payout condition of the winning ball or the lending ball is satisfied, and the payout device 152 (see FIG. 2 etc.) is driven, but the payout of the gaming ball is not detected, and the retry operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, In the case where the payout of the game ball is not detected despite repeating three times, the ball jam error notification is performed. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error notification is performed. Note that the error notification is erased when it is detected that the error notification has been targeted for error (for example, when the payout of the game ball by the payout device 152 is normally performed). Here, the timing when the error display is started may be the same as the timing when the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlargement display, or the timing after the timing when the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlargement display Alternatively, the timing may be earlier than the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlargement display.

  Since (f) to (h) of FIG. 218 are the same as (f) to (h) of FIG. 216 except that an error display is performed, the description will be omitted.

  Thus, in this example of the effect, it is shown that the mini game is continued if the error is not interrupted.

  FIG. 219 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 219, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are also shown. In this effect example, a magnetic detection sensor for detecting the magnetic force is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko machine 100. When the magnetic detection sensor detects the magnetic force, a detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, the main control unit 300 determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, transmits a magnetic detection command to the first sub-control unit 400, and then stops the game and deactivates it. Control to After the inactivation, it is configured not to return until the initialization process of step S113 of the main control unit main process (see FIG. 6) is performed. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 having received the magnetic detection command outputs an error sound from the speaker 120, for example, or according to a predetermined error mode by the various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532 and the game stand frame lamp 542. The lamp can be blinked, or a predetermined error display can be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, FIGS. 218 (a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 216 (a) to (c), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 219 (c), it is shown that the right treasure box image BXR is enclosed. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is remaining 2 seconds.

  After that, for example, if the player uses the magnet for fraudulent detection and the magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects this, as shown in FIG. 219 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 A magnetic error display ERR including a character of “sensor error” is displayed overlapping the display shown in FIG. 216 (d), for example, and the game is stopped. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 219 (d), the display of the magnetic error display ERR is not erased even if the effect button 136 is operated, and the display shown in FIGS. 216 (d) to (h) is also performed. However, the magnetic error display ERR will continue to be displayed until the power is shut off without these effect displays being viewed (Fig. 219 (d)-(h)). )). The magnetic error display ERR shown in FIG. 219 can be said to have a different area overlapping with the effect of the mini game, as compared with the error display shown in FIG. In other words, the effect display of the mini game can be said that the area overlapped with the error display is different depending on the type of the error that has occurred.

  FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 220 (a) shows the effect following FIG. 207 (j), in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 220 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a bowling reach which is one of super reach. Bowling reach is a reach effect performed as a main effect. When transitioning to bowling reach, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed respectively in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and ten bowlings arranged in a pyramid shape The effect display that the ball rolls on the lane toward the pin is performed, and the character "Shit by big hit" is displayed in the upper right part of the display area, and if the mission of strike is achieved, it will be a big hit. It has been informed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (c), it is shown that the ball reaches a position close to the ten boring pins, and it is attempted to knock down the boring pins even now. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 220 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area and overlaps at least a part of the bowling reach effect display. . In the mini game display area MN1, a description display of the mini game is performed. In the explanation display of the mini game shown in FIG. 220 (c), the display of “1” of the dice is shown below the display of “mini game” and the display of “put out” is performed, and the mini game is displayed. It is described that a mission is performed to operate the effect button 136 after the start of the command to stop and display the appearance of the "1" of the dice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (d), a state in which nine boring pins are fallen is shown. That is, it is shown that one boring pin remains without falling. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, the button image 136a is displayed together with the display of "Push", and it is notified that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has been started. At this time, for example, the symbol of the dice may be variably displayed.

  FIG. 220E shows that the result of the mini game is derived in the mini game display area MN1 when the effect button 136 is operated. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, since a strike does not occur in the bowling reach, the character of "sorry" is displayed, and a mission in the bowling reach is not achieved, and it is informed that it will be a loss. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, as the effect button 136 is operated, the output of the dice “1” is stopped as a result of the mini game, and the mission is achieved. The display of "+1" is performed to predict that the book will fall.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (f), the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and a reward for achieving the mission is displayed together with the outcome of the "1" of the dice derived as a result of the mini game. After the display of “+1” is performed, as shown in FIG. 220 (g), it is shown that one boring pin remaining without falling falls and strikes. That is, it is shown that a resurrection big hit from a loss is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 220 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the mini game influences the result of reach effect as the main effect.

  Subsequently, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 221 to 228 are diagrams showing in stages the modified examples of the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 221 to 228, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the common view The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIGS. 221 to 228, a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In addition, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. In addition, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 221 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (a), "decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative 3" which is a combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1, the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, and the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 are all in the default display mode. It is displayed. Further, in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multi-functional display area MF1 divided into a substantially square shape is formed. The multi-function display area MF1 can perform the above-described tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like. In addition, in this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these may be displayed .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (b), the hold (first hold) of the special view 1 is digested, and the hold icon h12 of the second special view 1 is set as the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 The third special figure 1 holding icon h13 is displayed as the second special figure 1 holding icon h12, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, as described above, the change icon may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (c), a state in which tutorial display is performed in the multi-function display area MF1 is shown. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of "You will start a mini game at various timings" is performed, and a suggestion is made as to when the mini game starts.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and after temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed, as shown in FIG. -Finalized by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of decoration 5-decoration 7 ".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (e), the hold (first hold) of Special Figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second special figure 1 special icon 1 of the special icon 1 is the first special figure 1 Is displayed as the hold icon h11, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (f), a state in which tutorial display is performed in the multi-function display area MF1 is shown. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Yoshimune is 8th General” is displayed, and information on the main character of the main character is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (g), the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is interrupted, and the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, a "dice game" is displayed on the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is informed that the dice game as a mini game is to be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (h), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of “Withhold 1UP” is performed along with a display showing the appearance of the “1” of the dice on the right side of the face image BCH After the mini game is started, when the effect button 136 is operated and the output of “1” of the dice is stopped and displayed, it is described that the display mode of the holding icon is upgraded by one stage. That is, as a result of the mini game, when the result of "1" of the dice as a mission is derived, it is notified that the default display mode hold icon changes to the pre-read notice display mode hold icon It becomes.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 221 (i), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of “press” is performed with the button image 136a, and it is informed that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (j), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed, and is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (j), as shown in FIG. 221 (k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the symbol of the dice is the outcome of the mission achievement It is derived and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of “1”, and “1UP confirmed” is displayed to indicate that it is a reward for mission accomplishment. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of a face of a bancho is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 221 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. In addition, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the mini game After the result of is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (l), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". Also, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage from the default display mode. As a circular and blue display mode has been changed. Also in this presentation example, the hold icon has a high hit reliability in the order of red> green> blue. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  Also, in place of the dice game as the mini game described above in FIGS. 221 (g) to 221 (k), the fortune game may be started. Here, FIG. 221 (g ') is another example of the effect following FIG. 221 (f). Specifically, the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221 (f) is interrupted, and as shown in FIG. 221 (g '), the mini game is performed in the multi-function display area MF1. It is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the "fortune game" is displayed on the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is informed that the fortune game as the mini game is started. Be done. In this example of effect, even when mini-games of different types are started, the image BCH of the same face of the face is displayed. In other words, in this effect example, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of mini games by causing the same character (bancho's face image BCH) to appear.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (h '), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of "Nakakichi" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho face, and "Hold 1UP" is displayed. It is described that when the Nakayoshi is derived and displayed, the display mode of the holding icon is upgraded by one stage. That is, as a result of the mini game, the fortune of “Nakakichi” as the mission is derived, and it is notified that the hold icon of the default display mode is changed to the hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 221 (i '), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. In the mini game of this effect example, no operation is performed by the operation means such as the effect button 136 or the like.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (j '), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to the open state, and the fortune of “Nakakichi” is derived and displayed, and it is shown that the mission is achieved. In addition, the stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or after the left symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed, or of the mini game After the result is derived and displayed, the left symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 221 (k ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased and a display of “1 UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement is performed. There is. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho continues to be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (k ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing when the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started may be the same, or the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be displayed stopped after the display of mission completion is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (l '), the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed, It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the "los 2-7-7". Also, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage from the default display mode. As a circular and blue display mode has been changed. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  As described above, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 221, an example configured to be able to play mini games of different types when mini game start conditions are satisfied is shown, and one of them ( The mini game of the dice game) requires the operation of the effect button 136, and the mini game of the other (the fortune game) does not require any operation by the operation means, and the display mode in any of the mini games Are the same (all are changing the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1). That is, in FIG. 221, in any mini game, an effect example in which the target to be influenced in the main effect is consequently the same is shown. In this example of the effect, which of the dice game and the fortune game is to be executed may be determined randomly, or may be determined based on the result of the determination of success or failure. For example, the dice game is executed In the case where the fortune game is executed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more clearly than in the case where the fortune game is executed.

  In addition, as in this demonstration example, in a mini game, a character smaller than the character appearing during execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol (sometimes referred to as "small character") or, for example, in the demonstration such as tutorial display Characters that appear (sometimes referred to as "navi characters") may appear. Note that these characters may be configured to be displayed on a tutorial display, another notice, or the like when the mini game is not played, or may be configured to appear only in the mini game. Also, these characters may be displayed at all times. In addition, it is preferable that there is an apparent difference between the character appearing in the mini game and the character appearing during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol. For example, the size may be different, or the 3D character may be deformed. There may be differences in expression such as the character of.

  In this example of effect, the fortune game (second mini game) may use a wider area than the dice game (first mini game). That is, the second mini game uses at least a display area (multifunction display area MF1 in which the first mini game is played), and another display area (display area of a portion where the multifunctional display area MF1 is enlarged) ) May also be configured to use.

  FIG. 222 is a view gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 222 (a)-the same figure (e) are the same as that of FIG. 221 (a)-the same figure (e), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (f), it is shown that the display of the mini game start notice is being performed in the multi-function display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of "focus" is performed together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is predicted that the mini game is to be started from this.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (g), the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, a "dice game" is displayed on the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is informed that the dice game as a mini game is to be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (h), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display showing “3HOLD ON 3UP” is performed along with a display showing the appearance of “3” of the dice on the right side of the face image BCH After the mini game is started, when the effect button 136 is operated and the output of "3" of the dice is stopped and displayed, it is described that the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. In other words, as a result of the mini game, by deriving the outcome of "3" of the dice as a mission, it is notified that the default display mode hold icon changes to the pre-read notice display mode hold icon It becomes. Moreover, in this presentation example, the contents of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission are contents more advantageous than the dice game shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 222 (i), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of “press” is performed together with the button image 136a, and it is informed that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (j), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stop displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed, and is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (j), as shown in FIG. 222 (k), the symbol of the dice is the outcome of the mission achievement in the multi-function display area MF1. It is derived and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of "3", and the display of "3 UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for mission accomplishment is performed. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of a face of a bancho is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 222 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. In addition, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the mini game After the result of is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (l), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special drawing 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the advance notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  When the fortune game is started instead of the dice game, as shown in FIG. 222 (g ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 The display of the "fortune game" is performed together with the face image BCH, and it is informed that the fortune game as a mini game is to be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (h '), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of "Hold on 3UP" is performed along with the display of "Daikichi" on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho face. It is described that the display mode of the holding icon is upgraded by three stages when the "Daikichi" is derived and displayed. That is, as a result of the mini game, the fortune of “Daikichi” as the mission is derived, and it is notified that the hold icon of the default display mode is changed to the hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice. Moreover, in this presentation example, the contents of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission are contents more advantageous than the fortune game shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 222 (i '), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (j ′), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to the display of the opened mode, and the fortune of “Daikichi” is derived and displayed, and a state where the mission is achieved is shown. In addition, the stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or after the left symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed, or of the mini game After the result is derived and displayed, the left symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (k '), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased and the display of "3 UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement is performed. There is. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho continues to be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 222 (k '), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing when the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started may be the same, or the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be displayed stopped after the display of mission completion is started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (l '), the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the "los 2-7-7". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special drawing 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the advance notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  As described above, the effect example shown in FIG. 222 shows an example configured to be able to make the contents of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission different even in the same kind of mini game. In addition, the contents of the mission may be the same, and the reward for achieving the mission may be made different, or the contents of the mission may be made different, and the reward for achieving the mission may be made the same.

  FIG. 223 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  Fig. 223 (A1) to Fig. (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the eyebrow mode, and Fig. 223 (B1) to Fig. (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode There is. Note that the habit mode and the princess mode are names of effect modes, and are configured such that effects specific to the mode are performed in each mode. Note that, for example, at least one of the decoy mode and the princess mode may be the prefetch mode. Further, which one of the habit mode and the princess mode is to be shifted may be determined randomly, or may be determined based on the gaming state. For example, if it is a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general view low probability state), it is easy to shift to a habit mode, and if it is a hidden probability change state (a special figure high probability regular view low probability state), it shifts to a princess mode The player may be made to be able to estimate the current gaming state by facilitating the process.

  FIG. 223 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the eyebrow mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (A1), "表示 mode" is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and a 婆 character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current effect mode is the eyebrow mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 223 (A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the display of the "dice game" is performed together with the image BCH of the face of the head of the game, and it is informed that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this effect example, in the bowling mode, the dice game is configured to be more easily started than the fortune game. Here, in the case of executing the mini game in the decoy mode, the dice game may always be started and the fortune game may not be started. Note that FIGS. 223 (A2) to (A6) are the same as FIGS. 222 (h) to (l) except that the display of the bird's-eye view mode and the display of the bird's-eye character BA are performed. , I omit the explanation.

  FIG. 223 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (B1), the "hime mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current effect mode is the princess mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 223 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, and the "fortune game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the head of the game, and it is informed that the fortune game as the mini game is started. In this effect example, in the princess mode, the fortune game is more easily started than the dice game. Here, in the case of executing the mini game in the princess mode, the fortune game may always be started and the dice game may not be started. FIGS. 223 (B2) to (B6) are the same as FIGS. 222 (h ') to (l') except that the display of the princess mode and the display of the princess character HM1 are performed. Description is omitted because there is.

  FIG. 224 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 224 (A1) to (A6) show an example of effects performed in the eyebrow mode, and FIGS. 224 (B1) to (B6) show an example of effects performed in the princess mode There is.

  FIG. 224 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the eyebrow mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (A1), "婆 mode" is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and a dark blue character BA is displayed at the upper left portion of the display area It is informed that the current effect mode is the eyebrow mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 224 (A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the display of the "dice game" is performed together with the image BCH of the face of the head of the game, and it is informed that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this effect example, the type of mini game to be executed is determined based on the content of the notice executed in the main effect. For example, when it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is easier to be started than the fortune game as the mini game in the symbol variation display, and it is decided to execute the pseudo run In the case where the symbol change display is present, the fortune game is configured to be more easily started than the dice game as the mini game in the symbol variation display. In addition, when it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is always started as a mini game in the symbol variation display, and when it is decided to execute the pseudo-link, it is said that In the symbol variation display, the fortune game may be always started as a mini game. Further, in this example of rendering, the type of mini game to be executed is determined without depending on the current rendering mode, but the type of mini game to be executed may be determined depending on the rendering mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (A2), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display indicating “Hold 3 UP” is displayed along with a display showing the appearance of the dice “3” on the right side of the face image BCH After the mini game is started, when the effect button 136 is operated and the output of "3" of the dice is stopped and displayed, it is described that the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. Moreover, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 224 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Note that even if the display of the outcome of the "3" of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the timing when the display of "Hold 3 UP" is started are the same as the timing when the step-up notice SU1 is started. The step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the result of "3" of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of "Hold 3 UP" are started, or the step-up notice may be started. After SU1 is started to be displayed, the display of the outcome of “3” of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of “HOLD 3UP” may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is informed that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. ing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Note that the timing when the display of the button image 136a and the "press" in the multifunction display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing when the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, or in the multifunction display area MF1. After the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF1 And the display of "press" may be started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (A4), the first stop is performed, and the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also here, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed, and is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (A4), as shown in FIG. 224 (A5), the symbol of the dice is the outcome of the mission achievement in the multi-function display area MF1. It is derived and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of "3", and the display of "3 UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for mission accomplishment is performed. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of a face of a bancho is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 224 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or mini After the game result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 224 (A5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, the step-up notice After the completion of, the right symbol may stop displaying.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (A6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special drawing 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the advance notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 224 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (B1), the "hime mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current effect mode is the princess mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 224 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, and the "fortune game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the head of the game, and it is informed that the fortune game as the mini game is started.

  Then, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown to FIG. 224 (B2), a mode that temporary stop is shown by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3" is shown. In this effect example, for example, it is informed that there is a case where the pseudo-link may be performed by temporarily stopping with a combination of only “decoration 7” and “decoration 3”. That is, there is a case where the combination of the decoration patterns of only "decoration 7" and "decoration 3" is a chance eye. The pseudo run symbol may be displayed to notify the start of the pseudo run. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, when "Daijin 3 UP" is displayed along with the display of "Daikichi" on the right side of the face image BCH of the Bancho, when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed in the mini game, the hold icon It has been described that the display mode of is up-graded by three stages. In addition, the timing when the display of "Daikichi" in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of "Hold 3 UP" is started may be the same as the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or the multi-function display area MF1 After the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Hold 3 UP" are started, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped, or after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, "Daikichi" in multi-function display area MF1 The display of “” and the display of “Hold 3 UP” may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and it is shown that the pseudo continuous first variable display is performed. Here, the number of times the pseudo link is performed may be displayed. In addition, the start of the variation display (pseudo series) of the decoration pattern and the display start of the treasure box BXS may be the same timing, or after the variation display (pseudo series) of the decoration pattern is started, the display of the treasure box BXS May start, or after the display of the treasure box BXS starts, the variable display (simulation run) of the decorative symbol may start.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (B4), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box changes to the display of the opened mode, and the fortune of “Daikichi” is derived and displayed, and the mission is achieved It is shown. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3", and it is notified that the pseudo link may be further performed. In addition, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. After the result is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 224 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF1, while the treasure box image BXS is erased, a display of "3 UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement is performed. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho continues to be displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and it is shown that the pseudo continuous second variable display is performed. In addition, the start of the change display (pseudo series) of the decorative symbol and the timing when the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started may be the same, or after the variable display (pseudo run) of the decorative pattern is started The display of the reward for mission accomplishment may be started, and the display of the reward for mission completion may be started after the display of the reward for mission completion is started (simulation link) may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (B6), the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is displayed. Is changed from the default display mode to the circular and red display mode as the display mode of the third stage of the advance notice. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decorative 7-decorative 3", and it is informed that it is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost. Here, after temporarily stopping the decorative symbol, a pseudo chain may be further performed. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  In this example, although the result of the mini game has been described as affecting the display mode of the hold icon, it is also possible to give notice that as a result of the mini game, a pseudo link will be made as a reward for achieving the mission. Alternatively, the number of times the pseudo link is started may be notified, or the increase of the number of pseudo links may be notified.

  In addition, as a reward for achieving the mission, the mini game may give notice that a step-up notice will be made, or it may give notice of the number of steps displayed in the step-up notice, or It may be possible to predict that the number will increase.

  FIG. 225 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 225 (A1) to (A6) show an example of effects performed in the eyebrow mode, and FIGS. 225 (B1) to (B6) show examples of effects performed in the princess mode. There is.

  FIG. 225 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the eyebrow mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (A1), the display of “婆 mode” is performed at the upper center of the display area, and the dark blue character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current effect mode is the eyebrow mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this example of rendering, a sabotary character image SBH is displayed in place of the face image BCH of the face of a bancho, and a "dice game" is displayed together with the sabotary character image SBH. It is shown that it is notified that the dice game is to be started. The character image SBH of Sabohani is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the dice game and is not displayed in the fortune game, but may be displayed in the fortune game as well. In this effect example, the reward for achieving the mission in the dice game is more likely to be more advantageous when the Sabohan character image SBH is displayed than when the face image BCH of the bankmaster is displayed. That is, in this example of the effect, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the display mode of the holding icon is the default display mode as a reward for achieving the mission than in the case where the face image BCH of the bancho is displayed. It is easy to be notified that the display mode (red display mode) of the 3rd step of the advance notice is displayed, and when the face image BCH of the head of the bancho is displayed, it is more mission than in the case where the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the advance notice. More specifically, when the Sabo-Hani character image SBH is displayed, the outcome of the mini game is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the face image BCH of the head of the game is displayed. When the face image BCH is displayed, the outcome of the mini game is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the Sabohan character image SBH is displayed. Furthermore, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the image BCH of the face of the master is displayed. In FIGS. 225 (A2) to 225 (A6), the image of the face with the numbered face BCH displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is replaced with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and FIG. The description is omitted because it is similar to (A6).

  FIG. 225 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (B1), the "hime mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current effect mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this effect example, the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed in place of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho, and the "fortune game" is displayed together with the character image HM2 of the princess. It is shown that the start of the fortune game is notified. The princess character image HM2 is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the fortune game and is not displayed in the dice game, but may be displayed in the dice game. In this effect example, the reward for achieving the mission in the fortune game is more likely to be more advantageous when the princess character image HM2 is displayed than when the face image BCH of the Bancho is displayed. That is, in this example of the effect, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the display mode of the holding icon is the default display mode as a reward for achieving the mission than in the case where the face image BCH of the bancho is displayed. It is easy to give notice that the display mode (red display mode) of the 3rd step of the advance notice is displayed, and when the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is displayed, the mission is better than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the advance notice. More specifically, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, "Daikichi" is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the Bancho face image BCH is displayed, and the Bancho face image When BCH is displayed, “Nakakichi” is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. As in this effect example, the character displayed in the mini game may be the same as the character displayed corresponding to the effect mode. That is, in this effect example, the character displayed in the princess mode (princess character HM1) and the character displayed in the mini game (hime character image HM2) are the same. Furthermore, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the face image BCH of the head of the game is displayed. In addition, FIG. 225 (B2) to FIG. (B6) are the same as FIG. 224 (B2) except that the face image BCH of the face with a bancho being displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 The description is omitted because it is similar to (B6).

  FIG. 226 is a view gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 226 (A1) to (A6) show an example of effects to be performed in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability general drawing low probability state), and FIGS. 226 (B1) to FIG. It shows about an example of the rendition performed in a definite change state (special drawing high probability common drawing high probability state). In this presentation example, it is shown that the types of mini games to be started are different depending on the current gaming state. More specifically, in the normal game state, the dice game is easily started as a mini game, and in the positive variation state, the fortune game is easily started as a mini game. In the normal game state, a dice game may always be started as a mini game, and in a definite change state, a fortune game may always be started as a mini game. In addition, the appearance frequency of the mini game may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the definite change state, since the player basically feels like waiting for a big hit, the player is idle until the big hit. Because there are cases, the mini game occurrence probability may be higher than the normal gaming state. Further, the probability of occurrence of the mini game may be higher in the normal game state than in the definite change state. Also, the mini game may be executable only in the definite variation state, or may be executable only in the normal gaming state. In addition, for a certain mini game, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the definite changing state, or the appearance rate may be higher in the positive changing state than the normal gaming state, and appearance only in the positive changing state There may be cases where it may occur, or it may appear only in the normal gaming state. In addition, for certain notices, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the definite change state, or the positive change state may be higher in the definite change state than the normal gaming state, and appears only in the positive change state There may be cases, and it may appear only in the normal gaming state.

  FIG. 226 (A1) shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (special figure low probability common view low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (A1), a display of "normal mode" is performed at the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is done. 226 (A1) to (A6) are the same as FIG. 225 (except that the display of the 婆 mode and the display of the 婆 character BA are in the normal game state). Since it is the same as that of A1)-the figure (A6), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 226 (B1), it is shown that the gaming state is a definite change state (a special figure high probability flat view high probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (B1), the display of the “probability change mode” is performed at the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current gaming state is the probability change state ing. In the upper right portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "right-handed" is performed, and a strike indication is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 226 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, the first reserved icon h21 of the special figure 2 and the reserved icon h22 of the second special figure 2 and the reserved icon h23 of the third special figure 2 both represent the suspension of the special figure 2 in the default display mode. It is displayed and displayed on the lower right side of the display area. Moreover, in this example of presentation, the multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the left half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, the display position of the multi-function display area MF1 is changed depending on the game state. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, and the "fortune game" is displayed together with the princess character image HM2, and it is informed that the fortune game as the mini game is started. 226 (B1) to (B5) show that the game mode is the effect mode in the princess mode, and the hold display of the special view 1 is the hold display of the special view 2 It is the same as FIG. 225 (B1) to FIG. 225 (B5) except that the number of pending displays is different, and the location of the pending display and the display position of the multifunctional display area MF1 are switched. Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (B5), after the display of “3 UP determined” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement is performed in the multi-function display area MF1, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 226 (B6) In the device 208, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is deleted, and in this example of presentation, the display mode of the hold icon h22 of the second special view 2 is the default display mode and the preview notice It is changed to the circular and red display mode as a display mode of 3rd step. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decorative 7-decorative 3", and it is informed that it is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost. Thus, the result of the mini game may affect any hold icon.

  FIG. 227 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 227 (A1) to (A6) show examples where the display area of the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded, and FIGS. 227 (B1) to (B6) show the multifunctional display area MF1. An example is also shown in which the hold display area for displaying the hold icon is also used. Note that FIG. 227 has been described taking a dice game as a mini game as an example, but it is also possible to apply to the fortune game described above.

  FIG. 227 (A1) shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (special figure low probability common view low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (A1), a display of "normal mode" is performed at the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is done. In addition, as shown in FIG. 227 (A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started, and a "dice game" is displayed together with the Sabo Hani character image SBH, and it is informed that a dice game as a mini game is to be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 227 (A2), the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and it is shown that the area is enlarged. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and the visibility is improved. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, along with the display showing the outcome of the dice “3” on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, “Hold 3 UP” is displayed, and after the mini game is started, the effect button It is described that the display mode of the holding icon is upgraded by three stages when the operation of 136 is performed and the output of "3" of the dice is stopped and displayed. Here, the display showing the character image SBH of Sabohani and the appearance of "3" of the dice is enlarged and displayed. Moreover, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 227 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. Since this step-up notice SU1 is not displayed overlapping with the multi-function display area MF1, it does not affect the visibility of both. Note that the timing when the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed may be the same as the timing when the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed, or after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, step-up The display of the notice SU1 may be started, or the multifunction display area MF1 may be expanded after the step-up notice SU1 is started. In addition, even if the display of the outcome of "3" of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the timing when the display of "Hold 3 UP" is started are the same as the timing when the step-up notice SU1 is started. The step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the result of "3" of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of "Hold 3 UP" are started, or the step-up notice may be started. After SU1 is started to be displayed, the display of the outcome of “3” of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of “HOLD 3UP” may be started. Further, the timing at which the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and the timing at which the display of the outcome of "3" of the dice in the multifunction display area MF1 is the same as the timing at which the display of "hold 3UP" is started are the same. Alternatively, after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the display of the outcome of "3" and the display of "Hold 3 UP" may be started in the multi-function display area MF1, or many The multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the display of the outcome of "3" of the dice in the function display area MF1 and the display of "Hold 3 UP" are started. Further, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded or may not be expanded. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded according to the gaming state. For example, when the mini game is started in the positive change state, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and the mini game is normally operated. When it is started, multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded, or when the mini game is started in the normal gaming state, multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and the mini game is started in the definite change state In this case, the multifunction display area MF1 may not be expanded. Further, in this example of rendering, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 is not overlapped with the decorative symbol, but the expanded multi-function display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative symbol, and the multi-functional display area MF1 is expanded It may be overlapped with the function display area MF1. Also, the multi-functional display area MF1 which is not expanded may be overlapped with the decorative symbol, or the multi-functional display area MF1 which is not expanded of the decorative symbol may be overlapped.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, “press” is displayed superimposed on the button image 136aL together with the button image 136aL displayed large, and the effect button 136 in the mini game is displayed. It is informed that the operation effective period of has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. The step-up notice SU2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU2 is overlapped with the multifunction display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU2 is not overlapped with the multifunction display area MF1. Note that the step-up notice may be overlapped only when the multi-function display area MF1 is displayed in an expanded manner, or the step-up notice may be overlapped even when not displayed in an expanded manner. Further, the timing when the display of the button image 136aL and the "press" in the multifunction display area MF1 may be started may be the same as the timing when the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, or in the multifunction display area MF1. After the display of the button image 136aL and "press" is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136aL in the multi-function display area MF1 And the display of "press" may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (A4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also here, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. This step-up notice SU3 is also displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU3 is overlapped with the multifunction display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU3 is not overlapped with the multifunction display area MF1. Further, in multi-function display area MF1, button reception time meter MT is displayed below button image 136aL, and display is performed in a mode in which the gauge decreases according to the time after the effective period of operation of effect button 136 is started. It is done. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the decrease rate of the gauge is faster than when the button reception time meter MT is not enlarged. Here, the decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster than the decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect. The decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be faster than the decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game, or mini The decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the game and the decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be the same speed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (A4), as shown in FIG. 227 (A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the symbol of the enlarged dice shows the achievement of the mission achievement It is derived and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of “3”, which is “3”, and “3UP confirmed” is displayed, which indicates that it is a reward for achieving the mission. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also enlarged and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 227 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or mini After the game result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 227 (A5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, the step-up notice After the completion of, the right symbol may stop displaying.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (A6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, “ It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". Also, the expanded multifunction display area MF1 is shrunk and returned to the default size. In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special drawing 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the advance notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed. Also, the timing at which the multifunctional display area MF1 returns to the default size and the timing at which the mini game result is erased may be the same, or after the multifunctional display area MF1 returns to the default size, the mini game The result of may be erased, or after the result of the mini game is erased, the multifunctional display area MF1 may return to the default size.

  FIG. 227 (B1) shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (B1), "normal mode" is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is done. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in this rendering example, a multi-function display area MF2 is formed across the left and right ends of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the multi-function display area MF2, in addition to the above-described tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like, display of a holding icon is also performed. The hold icon of the special view 1 can be displayed on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, and the hold icon of the special view 2 can be displayed on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2. As shown in FIG. 227 (B1), on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the hold of the special view 1 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition, on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2, a mini game is started using the display area of the reserved icon of Toku 2 and "Dice game" is displayed together with the Sabo Hani character image SBH, and the mini game It is informed that the dice game is to be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (B2), in the multi-function display area MF2, a display of “Withhold 3UP” is performed along with a display showing the appearance of the “3” of the dice on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the output of "3" of the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the holding icon is upgraded by three stages. Moreover, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 227 (B2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. It should be noted that even if the timing at which the display of the outcome of "3" and the display of "Hold 3 UP" are started in the multi-function display area MF2 is the same as the timing when the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. The step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of "3" of the dice and the display of "hold 3 UP" in the multi-function display area MF2 are started, or the step-up notice may be started. After SU1 is started to be displayed, the display of the outcome of the “3” of the dice in the multi-function display area MF2 and the display of “Withhold 3UP” may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 227 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF2, the display of “press” is performed together with the button image 136a, and it is informed that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. ing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Note that the timing at which the display of the button image 136a and "press" in the multifunction display area MF2 may be started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is displayed, or in the multifunction display area MF2. After the display of the button image 136a and "press" is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF2 And the display of "press" may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (B4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also here, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed, and is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (B4), as shown in FIG. 227 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF2, the symbol of the dice is the outcome of the mission achievement. It is derived and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of "3", and the display of "3 UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for mission accomplishment is performed. In the multi-function display area MF2, a character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 227 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or mini After the game result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 227 (B5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, the step-up notice After the completion of, the right symbol may stop displaying.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (B6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed, “ It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". Also, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF2 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special drawing 1 is the display mode of the third stage of previewing advance notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 228 is a view gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 228A shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), "normal mode" is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is done. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in the display mode of the default t. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), a step-up notice as a main effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 228 (a), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (b), the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU 2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. A mini game display area MN2 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the mini game display area MN2, a mini game is started, and a "dice game" is displayed together with the Sabo Hani character image SBH, and it is informed that a dice game as a mini game is to be started. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that a dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) appears when the mini game is started. Here, the timing at which the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the mini game is started, or the mini-game may be started after the step-up notice SU2 has been displayed. The step-up notice SU2 may be displayed after the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (c), the decorative symbol in the variable display is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display region, the mini game display region MN2 is erased, and the mini game effect is displayed. It is shown that the display is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, along with a display showing the outcome of the dice “3” on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, the “Hold 3 UP” display is greatly enlarged and displayed, and the effect is produced after the mini game is started. When the button 136 is operated and the output of "3" of the dice is stopped and displayed, it is described that the display mode of the holding icon is increased by three stages. As described above, this effect example shows that the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) is erased in at least a part of the period in which the mini game is being performed. Also, the step-up notice is scheduled to be displayed until the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 when the mini game is not started, but along with the enlarged display of the effect display of the mini game, Has been discontinued. Even when the mini game is started, the step-up notice may be displayed continuously without ending it. In this case, for example, the display area may be moved so as not to overlap with the effect display of the mini game, or the step-up notice may be reduced and displayed. In addition, the step-up notice may be displayed overlapping the effect display of the mini game, or the effect display of the mini game may be displayed overlapping on the step-up notice.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (d), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed below the enlarged button image 136aL, and the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136. It is displayed in the form of The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Here, the timing when the button image 136aL and the button acceptance time meter MT are displayed may be the same as the timing when the left symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the button image 136aL and the button acceptance time meter MT are displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the button image 136aL and the button acceptance time meter MT may be displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (e), the symbol of the enlarged dice is the outcome of the mission achievement “3 It is derived and displayed in a manner that indicates the outcome of Further, at this time, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again on the right side of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this mini game display area MN2, the symbol of the dice is derived at the appearance of "3" In addition to announcing that it has been displayed, "3UP confirmed" is displayed to indicate that it is a reward for achieving the mission. In the mini game display area MN2, a character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 228 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or mini After the game result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed. The timing for deriving and displaying the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing for redisplaying the mini game display area MN2, or after the result for the mini game is derived and displayed, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed. It may be redisplayed, or after the mini game display area MN2 is redisplayed, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (f), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, “ It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". At this time, the size of the decorative symbol is returned from the reduced size to the default size, and the display position is also returned to the default display position. In addition, with the end of the mini game, the mini game display area MN2 is also erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is circular and red as the display mode of the third stage of previewing advance from the default display mode. The display mode of has been changed. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Also, the timing of erasing the mini game display area MN2 may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the mini game display region MN2 is erased. The mini game display area MN2 may be erased after the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, the timing at which the mini game display area MN2 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon changes, or after the mini game display area MN2 is erased, the display mode of the hold icon changes. Alternatively, the mini game display area MN2 may be erased after the display mode of the hold icon changes.

  Although the dice game has been described as an example of the mini game in the effect example shown in FIG. 228, the present invention is also applicable to the above-mentioned fortune game.

  Further, although the dice game and the fortune game are executed as the mini game described above in the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed, the configuration is made such that it is executed in a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be done.

  Subsequently, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 236.

  FIGS. 229 to 236 are diagrams showing in stages the modified examples of the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 229 to 236, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the general drawing The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIG. 229-FIG. 236, the pachinko machine 100 provided with the one decorative symbol display apparatus 208 is shown. In addition, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Moreover, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 229 is a view gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (a), a customer waiting demonstration display is displayed. The customer waiting demonstration display is a display that may be displayed in a standby state in which the variable display of the special view is not performed, and is a presentation for promoting the player's willingness to play the game. In the lower part of the display area, a display of "display menu with push button" is performed so as to overlap with the customer waiting demo display, and each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is displayed in the standby state. When is operated, it is informed that the menu screen is displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (b), a menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 229 (c). On the menu screen, items of member registration, two-dimensional code issuance, game history, mini game, and end are displayed side by side in a row, and below that, the character display of "select" is displayed along with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. In addition, the character display of “decision” is performed together with the OK button operation prompting image 137 q and the button image 136 a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the upper button 137 a or the lower button 137 b of the operation key unit 137, OK Operating the button 137e or the effect button 136 indicates that the item designated by the cursor CSL is to be executed.

  Here, when the item "member registration" is executed, the screen shifts to a member registration screen. On the member registration screen, for example, a two-dimensional code for password acquisition is displayed. This two-dimensional code includes the URL of the registration page for initial registration on the operation server side. In the present embodiment, by performing member registration, it is possible to set an original mode such as recording a game history or customizing effects. The player reads the two-dimensional code and obtains the URL of the initial registration page, for example, with a portable terminal having a camera function and a bar code reader function. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the portable terminal. The operation server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to the portable terminal, or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes initial values of personal identification information (ID) and history information. The history information is stored in the management server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When a password is issued from the operation server, the password is displayed on the display screen of the portable terminal.

In addition, when the item "two-dimensional code issuance" is executed, a two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed. In the two-dimensional code issuance screen, the two-dimensional code generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The issuance of the two-dimensional code is prepared on the assumption that the player has made a selection when ending the game with the original mode set.
The two-dimensional code mentioned here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and changes the size on the display in units of 4 cells in the range of 21 × 21 cells to 177 × 177 cells. Can. QR Code (registered trademark) is known as a representative of two-dimensional codes. The two-dimensional code may be replaced by a one-dimensional barcode or an encrypted character string. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is overwhelmingly larger than a simple character string. In the case of a character string, as the amount of information to be included increases, the character string increases, and can not be remembered or recorded by human beings, so that the burden can be reduced by notifying with a two-dimensional code.
In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code includes, for example, personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, information indicating the mission achievement status, and the accumulated value of the original mode points. In addition, the number of winnings to the special figure starting port (230, 232), the number of big hits, the number of small hits, information for shop identification, information specific to the game console, operation status, the number of errors, etc. may be included. Information representing the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the accumulated value of the original mode points, the number of winnings, etc. correspond to history information. Furthermore, the two-dimensional code also includes the URL of the update acceptance page prepared in the operation server.
In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a two-dimensional code is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code is erased from the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when issuing a two-dimensional code, a warning screen is displayed to warn the player that information such as the result of the current game is to be erased.
When the player shoots the issued two-dimensional code using the camera function of the portable terminal, the bar code reader function is activated. Then, on the display screen of the portable terminal, the personal identification information (ID) or the like contained in the two-dimensional code in “http: //www.~/jp” representing the address of the update acceptance page prepared in the operation server The URL to which the argument representing the history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the barcode reader function from the read two-dimensional code, the history information stored so far in the management server in association with the personal identification information included in the argument portion is It is updated to the history information included in the argument part.
In the present embodiment, since there is a risk that the player who has finished reading the two-dimensional code may leave the game stand as it is, history information stored in the game stand at the time of issuing the two-dimensional code is erased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history information may be erased based on the operation of the player after the two-dimensional code is issued. If the player does not erase the history information, the game can be returned to the game reflecting the history information. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, when the item of “game history” is executed, for example, information indicating the result of the current game and the achievement status of the mission, the accumulated value of the original mode points, and the like are displayed. Also, the number of winnings to the special figure starting port (230, 232), the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. may be displayed.

  In addition, when the item of "mini game" is executed, the mini game is executed. Details of the mini game will be described later.

  In addition, when the item of “end” is executed, the display of the menu screen is ended, and the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 229 (c), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL designates "member registration", as shown in FIG. 229 (d), the cursor CSL is " When "two-dimensional code issuance" is instructed and the lower button 137b is operated one more time, as shown in FIG. 229 (e), the cursor CSL indicates "game history" and the lower button 137b is operated one more time. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (f), the cursor CSL indicates a "mini game".

  Then, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (f), as shown in FIG. 229 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game is started. Specifically, the title "Today's fortune telling" is displayed at the top of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, four treasure boxes are arranged from the center to the left of the display area, and the direction is on the right of the display area. A character of "select" is displayed together with the key operation prompting image 137p, and a character of "set" is displayed together with the button image 136a below it, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the direction key of the operation key unit 137 Then, one of the four treasure boxes (BX1, BX2, BX3, BX4) is instructed, and by operating the effect button 136, it is informed that the treasure box instructed by the cursor CSL can be opened. At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (g), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure box BX1 at the upper left. In this mini game, the player selects from four treasure chests and notifies the contents of the selected treasure chests. The contents of the treasure box are the result of a fortune-telling (for example, Daikichi, Nakakichi, Kokichi, bad luck, etc.) that suggest a fortune, and a plurality of types are prepared. Furthermore, in this presentation example, along with the result of fortune telling, a word of advice is also added. In addition, the result of these fortunetelling and a word advice have contents irrelevant to the result of the pass / fail judgment. That is, it does not at least suggest a decision on success or failure. In addition, it is determined at random as to which result is to be associated with each treasure box. Therefore, for example, even if the same treasure box is selected, the contents change every time the mini game is executed. That is, the contents of the treasure box (the result of the mini game) can be changed according to the operation status of the operation means such as the operation key unit 137 and the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (h), when the lower button 137 b is operated, the cursor CSL points to the lower left treasure box BX 2 as shown in FIG. 229 (i).

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (i), as shown in FIG. 229 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The upper left treasure chest BX1, the upper right treasure chest BX3 and the lower right treasure chest BX4 are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right portion. Thus, it is informed that the lower left treasure box BX2 has been determined as the open treasure chest.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 229 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is opened, and as a result of the mini game, a fortune character BA appears from the treasure box and the result of fortune telling As "Okichi" is displayed, "a moderate amount of ..." is displayed as a word of advice, and it is shown that it warns not to be too crowded with the game. That is, in this example of the effect, the character BA of "Koyoshi" is associated with the character of the rabbit, and it may be understood that the result of the fortune-telling is "Koyoshi" by looking at the character BA of the rabbit.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (l), the character display of “other results are this” is displayed, and it is predicted that the contents of the treasure box which has not been opened are notified. Note that the content of the character display shown in FIG. 229 (l) differs depending on the character that has appeared, and for example, when the princess character HM3 described later appears, the character display such as "other results are this" Is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (m), the princess character HM3 appears from the upper left treasure box BX1, the image of the head of the bancho BCH from the upper right treasure box BX3 appears, and from the lower right treasure box BX4. The appearance of the image PND of the face of the panda is shown. The princess character HM3 is a character corresponding to Daikichi, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is a character corresponding to Nakakichi, and the image PND of the panda's face is a character corresponding to the evil. The combination of the fortune-telling result and the character can be appropriately set, and the combination of the fortune-telling result and the character may be changed each time the mini game is played.

  As another example of the contents of the treasure box displayed as a result of the mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 229 (k1), the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box, and as a result of the fortune telling, “Daikichi "" Is displayed as a word of advice, and there is a display of "prediction of big fishing today", and there is a thing that gives the feeling of expectation that a large amount of balls may be obtained.

  In addition, as shown in Fig. 229 (k2), the image of BCH's face appears from the treasure box, "Nakakichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, and it is a day when something is sticky as advice. There is also a display of "", and there is a thing that gives an expectation that there may be something that it may be necessary to play slowly and slowly over time.

  In addition, as shown in Fig. 229 (k3), the image PND of the face of the panda appears from the treasure box, and "bad" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, and as a word advice "" Is displayed, and it is also shown that the player is reminded not to get too stuck in the game.

  In addition, for example, the result of a mini game that may appear may be prepared according to the setting contents by the DIP switch connected to the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100. For example, by appearing by the DIP switch If the setting is made to increase the appearance rate of the premier notice that is promised to be, as shown in Fig. 229 (k4), the display of the word advice "Today is a foresight of large fishing", "Today is It may be changed to a display that "premium advance notice is easy to come out". That is, it may be an explanation of the effect related to the result of the pass / fail determination, such as the suggestion of the appearance rate of the advance notice, and may display the result regardless of the result of the pass / fail determination. According to this, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to seem to be indirectly involved in the influence of the pass / fail judgment. In addition, even when the appearance rate of the advance notice is not changed, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 229 (k4) may be displayed. Thus, even when the same character appears, the display added to the character, such as a word advice, may be changed.

  Further, in this effect example, in place of the word advice, a tutorial display such as a game explanation or an explanation of the character of the model may be performed.

  FIG. 230 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 230 (A1) to FIG. 230 (A6) are effects following FIG. 229 (f) and show an example of effects of another mini game. That is, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (f), the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (A1) displays “Today's fortune telling – close to the top of the display area – The title is displayed, and a mini game with a mission of selecting a treasure box with contents of "Daikichi" is started. In addition, since FIG. 230 (A1)-the same figure (A 4) are the same as that of FIG. 229 (g)-the same figure (j) except the display of a title differing, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 230 (A5) shows that the lower left treasure box BX2 is opened. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (A5), the treasure box at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box, and as a result of fortune telling "Daikichi" is displayed. Since the mission of the mini game has been achieved by the display of "Daikichi", the display of "Mission achievement" to that effect is performed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (A6), instead of the display of “mission accomplished”, a display of “prediction of today's best condition” is displayed as a word advice, I try to give a sense of expectation. This word advice can also be said to be a display that is not related to the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  FIGS. 230 (B1) to (B6) are also effects following FIG. 229 (f) and show that the mission can not be achieved. Note that FIG. 230 (B1) has the same display as FIG. 230 (A1).

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (B2), when the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 230 (B3), the cursor CSL points to the treasure box BX3 at the upper right.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (B3), as shown in FIG. 230 (B4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX3 at the upper right is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The upper left treasure chest BX1, the lower left treasure chest BX2, and the lower right treasure chest BX4 are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right portion. Thus, it is informed that the upper right treasure box BX3 has been determined as the open treasure chest.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 230 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX3 at the upper right is opened, and as a result of the mini game, a fortune character BA appears from the treasure box and the result of fortune telling As "Okichi" is displayed. Since the mission of the mini game was not achieved because "Daikichi" was not displayed, "not achieved ..." is displayed accordingly.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (B6), instead of the display of "not achieved ...", a display of "moderate ..." is performed as a word advice, It is shown that it warns you not to get stuck too much.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (a), the above-mentioned customer waiting demonstration display is displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (b), a menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 231 (c). In the menu screen shown in FIG. 231 (c), the items of member registration, customization, mini game, personal data clear, and end are displayed side by side in a row, and "Select" The character display of “OK” is performed with the OK button operation prompting image 137 q and the button image 136 a, and the cursor is operated by operating the upper button 137 a or the lower button 137 b of the operation key unit 137. By moving the CSL and operating the OK button 137e or the effect button 137, it is shown that the item designated by the cursor CSL is executed.

  Here, when the item "customization" is executed, customization of various settings can be performed. Details of customizable settings will be described later.

  In addition, when the item of “personal data clear” is executed, the pachinko machine 100 deletes the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the information indicating the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like. At this time, a warning screen may be displayed in order to prevent data being cleared by mistake.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (c), when the lower button 137b is operated once with the cursor CSL instructing "member registration", as shown in FIG. 231 (d), the cursor CSL is displayed. Directs "customize". Then, when the OK button 137 e is operated in a state where the cursor CSL instructs “customize”, as shown in FIG. 231 (e), the screen shifts to a customize menu screen.

  In the customize menu screen, various settings such as auto button mode on / off, eco mode on / off, setting of premier notice appearance rate, tutorial display on / off are displayed in a row in a row, and the direction below The character display of "selection" is performed with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character display of "decision" is performed with the OK button operation promotion image 137q, and the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137 are displayed. By operating the cursor CSL in the vertical direction and operating the left button 137c and the right button 137b, the setting designated by the cursor CSL can be changed.

  Here, the “automatic button mode” is an effect mode in which the effect button 136 and each button of the operation key unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set to on, the auto button mode flag is turned on to automatically determine the timing of button operation and perform the operation. For example, when the continuous hitting operation effect requiring the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is executed, control is performed so that the button operation is automatically performed at appropriate timings (for example, every 200 ms). In this example, when “Auto button mode” is set to on, the various buttons are set to full auto, which is automatically operated, without operating the various buttons. It may be possible to set to long press auto in which automatic operation of the button is performed by long press. Here, in long-press auto, when a long-press operation is performed by the operating means in an effect (including a mini game) requiring the operation of the operating means a plurality of times, the operation is performed plural times continuously. It is a pseudo-operation to be done. In this case, when the operation means is operated to press and hold, it is handled as if the first manual operation was performed. For example, when the continuous hitting operation effect described above is executed, by long-pressing the effect button 136, it is controlled to perform the continuous hitting operation in a pseudo manner. Further, full auto is an operation in which the operation of the operation means is performed in a certain effect requiring the operation of the operation means even when the operation means is not operated.

  In the "eco mode", for example, when the standby state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), the drive of one or more drive devices is limited such as turning off various lamps 418 for the purpose of suppressing power consumption. Or it is a mode to stop. In the present embodiment, when the eco mode start condition is satisfied after the eco mode is turned on, the various lamps 418 are turned off, and the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced. The target device whose drive is to be restricted or stopped can be set as appropriate.

  "Premier notice appearance rate" indicates the appearance rate of notices promised to finally display the jackpot symbol by appearance, and when it is set to "normal", the first notice The normal probability table where the premier notice appears by probability is used to draw the appearance of the premier notice, and when it is set to "high", the premier notice appears with a second probability higher than the first probability. The high probability table to be used is controlled so that the lottery of the appearance of the premier notice is performed.

  Also, the “tutorial” is controlled so that the above-mentioned tutorial display is not performed when it is set to off.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (f), when the left button 137c is operated once in a state where the cursor CSL designates the "auto button mode", as shown in FIG. 231 (g), "off" The setting of "Auto button mode" which has been instructed is changed to "On".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (g), when the OK button 137e is operated once in a state where the setting of the "auto button mode" is "on", the setting of the "auto button mode" is "on" Finalized. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once, as shown in FIG. 231 (h), the screen shifts to a menu screen. When the effect button 136 is operated without the OK button 137e being operated in a state where the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the result of the "auto button mode" setting is not reflected. It is possible to shift to the menu screen, or to shift to the menu screen after reflecting (determining) the result of the setting of the “automatic button mode”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (h), when the lower button 137b is operated once with the cursor CSL instructing “customize”, as shown in FIG. 231 (i), the cursor CSL Instruct "mini-game".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (i), when the OK button 137e is operated in a state where the cursor CSL designates the "mini game", as shown in FIG. 231 (j), the mini game is started. Ru. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a Bancho character is displayed, and the name of the mini game "Bancho awakening game" is displayed, and a mission of "Breaking clothes with a continuous hit of a button" is displayed below that. Is displayed. That is, in this mini game, when the mission is achieved on the condition that the presentation button 136 is continuously hit during the operation reception period of the presentation button 136 and the presentation button 136 has been operated a predetermined number of times, the dress of the Bancho is broken. Display to notify the mission completion.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a and the button acceptance time meter MT together with the character of the bancho, and the character display of "START" is performed thereon. It is shown that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. In this effect example, as described above, although the setting of the "auto button mode" is set to "on" and set to full auto, in the mini game, the full auto setting is not effective, and the effect button It is configured such that 136 automatic operations are not performed. In addition, when the setting of "auto button mode" is set to "on" and is set to long press auto, even if the effect button 136 is pressed long, the setting of long press auto is not effective, and at first Only one manually operated part of is made effective, and automatic operation of the presentation button 136 is not performed after that. In this effect example, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT is made different from the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during execution of the symbol variation display. Also, for example, as in this example of effect, it is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display rather than the change speed of the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT displayed in the mini game which can be started during the customer waiting demo display. The change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster or slower. In addition, the rate of change of the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the button acceptance time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during execution of the symbol variation display The change speed of the display mode of may be the same. Also, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during execution of the symbol variation display than the number of display modes of the button image 136a (for example, one type of default display mode) The number of (for example, the default display mode, the vibrating display mode, the rotating display mode, and the vibrating and rotating display modes) may be larger or smaller. The number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during execution of the symbol variation display May be the same.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 231 (l) to FIG. 231 (n), when the operation effective period elapses while the pressing operation of the effect button 136 has not been performed once, as shown in FIG. 231 (o), The display does not change, which indicates that the mission to break the costume of the character of the captain has not been achieved. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (o), the display of "bancho awakening game" and "end" is performed, and it is notified that the mission has ended.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to a menu screen.

  In this effect example, the player may select the execution of the mini game. For example, in the customization menu screen transitioning from the menu screen, whether or not the mini game can be executed is set. It may be possible to select the type of mini game that can be performed.

  In addition, the customized game may be configured to be easily performed as a result of the mini game. For example, if the game is configured such that a game with a very low appearance rate is usually executed, the will to participate in the mini game May be able to improve.

  FIG. 232 and FIG. 233 are diagrams showing gradually another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 232 (A1) to (A6) show the effects following FIG. 231 (i), in which the player achieved the mission as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. FIG. In addition, since FIG. 232 (A1)-the same figure (A 2) are the same as that of FIG. 231 (j)-the figure (k), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (A2), the effect button 136 is continuously hit by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 are displayed. As shown in FIG. 232 (A3) to FIG. (A5), the effect image of the star increases in the number of effect images of the star displayed as the number of operations increases, and approaches the number of operations in which the mission is achieved As shown in FIG. 232 (A5), an effect image of a large-sized star is displayed. After that, when the effect button 136 is continuously hit and the number of operations for which a mission is achieved is reached by the elapse of the operation reception period, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It shows that the clothes are being broken, and displays "Bancho Awakening" and "Today's best" is displayed to notify that the mission has been achieved.

  FIG. 232 (B1) to FIG. (B6) show an effect following FIG. 231 (i) in which the long press auto is enabled in the mini game, and the effect of the long press auto on the play button 136 is shown. It is shown that the mission has been achieved as a result of the pseudo-double-stroke operation. Note that FIG. 232 (B1) to FIG. (B2) are the same as FIG. 231 (j) to FIG.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (B2), the effect button 136 is long pressed by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (B3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one effect image of a star is displayed according to the pressing operation of the effect button 136. However, the simulated continuous hitting operation has not been started yet. In the present embodiment, when long press auto is enabled, one press operation is desired, but in order to prevent an erroneous operation due to the start of the pseudo continuous hit, the long press of the effect button 136 After a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed since the start of the pseudo-striking operation is started. In this case, one operation at the time when the long press is started is accepted. Therefore, compared with the operation state of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (A3), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is smaller, and the effect image of the star is also displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is less than the display. That is, the method of changing the display mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different between when the player performs the normal double-stroke operation and when the pseudo-double-stroke operation by the long press auto is performed. .

  When the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the long press of the effect button 136 is started, the operation by the pseudo operation as shown in FIG. 232 (B4) to FIG. (B5) As the number of times increases, the displayed effect image of the star also increases, and as the number of operations for which the mission is achieved approaches, the large-sized effect image of the star is displayed as shown in FIG. 232 (B5). Thereafter, a pseudo-continuous hitting operation is further performed by the effect button 136, and when the number of operations for which a mission is achieved is reached by the elapse of the operation reception period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that the clothes worn by the character of the character are broken, and the message "bancho awakening" and "today's best" is displayed to notify that the mission has been achieved.

  Fig. 233 (C1) to Fig. (C7) show the effects following Fig. 231 (i) and show an example in which the long press auto is invalidated in the mini game. It shows that the operation was not performed and as a result, the mission was not achieved. Note that FIG. 232 (B1) to FIG. (B2) are the same as FIG. 231 (j) to FIG.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 233 (C2), the effect button 136 is long pressed by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 233 (C3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one effect image of a star is displayed according to the pressing operation of the effect button 136.

  However, in this effect example, since the long press auto is invalidated, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the long press of the effect button 136 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 233 (C4), since the number of times the effect button 136 is operated does not increase, not only the effect image of the star does not increase but also a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the effect button 136 is finally operated. When the) has elapsed, the number of displayed star effect images gradually decreases, and at the timing shown in FIG. 233 (C5), the star effect images are completely erased. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 233 (C6), when the operation acceptance period elapses, as shown in FIG. 233 (C7), the display mode of the Bancho character does not change, and the mission of breaking the clothes of the Bancho character is It is shown that it was not achieved. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 233 (C7), the display of "bancho awakening game" and "end" is performed, and it is notified that the mission has ended.

  FIG. 234 is a view gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In FIG. 234, the full auto (or long press auto) function is enabled for effects (including mini games) that require single button operation or multiple button operations, but the operation key unit 137 With regard to the effects (including mini games) that require selection using, there is shown an example in which the function of full auto (or long press auto) is disabled.

  FIGS. 234 (A1) to (A6) show effects following FIG. 231 (i), showing an example in which full auto is enabled in a mini game in which the output button 136 is continuously hit. It is shown that the mission has been achieved as a result of the pseudo-continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 being performed. In addition, since FIG. 234 (A1)-the same figure (A 2) are the same as that of FIG. 231 (j)-the same figure (k), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 234 (A2), the full auto functions and a pseudo continuous hitting operation is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 234 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of times of pseudo operation of the effect button 136 are displayed. As shown in FIG. 234 (A3) to FIG. (A5), the effect image of the star is displayed more as the number of operations by the pseudo operation increases, and as the number of operations for which the mission is achieved approaches As shown in FIG. 234 (A5), an effect image of a large-sized star is displayed. Thereafter, the pseudo operation of the effect button 136 is further continued, and when the number of operations for which the mission is achieved is reached by the elapse of the operation reception period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (A6) It is shown that the clothes worn by the Bancho character are broken, and the message "bancho awakening" and "Today's best" is displayed to notify that the mission has been accomplished.

  FIG. 234 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 229 (f) and shows an example of an effect of another mini game. That is, when the mini game is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (B1), a title of "Today's fortune telling-closing Daikichi-" is displayed in the upper part of the display area A mini game is launched, whose mission is to select the content treasure box. In this mini game, each button of the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL, and a treasure box to be opened is determined by operating the effect button 136. A mini game is operated by operating a plurality of buttons. Because the function is performed, the function of the fully automatic function is disabled. Therefore, after the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (B1) is displayed, no change occurs in the display state unless one of the buttons is operated.

  On the other hand, the full auto function may be made to function also in such a mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 234 (B1 '), when the mini game is started, the full auto function is activated immediately and the effect button 136 Is simulated and, as shown in FIG. 234 (B2 ′), the upper left treasure box is automatically selected. That is, in the mini game where the treasure box is selected by each button of the operation key unit 137 and the treasure box to be opened by the effect button 136 is determined as described above, the treasure box to which the cursor CSL points first when fully automatic is made to function. May be determined as an open treasure chest and may not reflect the player's operation intention at all.

  In the present embodiment, the mini game is performed to derive the result which is not related to the result of the pass / fail judgment in the standby state, but for example, in the effect started when the predetermined time comes by the RTC (Real Time Clock) The game may be executed in a mini game to be executed in at least one of the symbol variation display, and may be executed at any time regardless of the gaming state in order to kill the player's time. .

  FIG. 235 and FIG. 236 are diagrams showing steps of another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 235 and FIG. 236, it is shown that the mini game is started while the big hit game is being performed. In addition, a mini game may be always started during execution of a big hit game, and may not be started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (a), stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", and it is shown that a big hit has been achieved. Also, the first special icon 2 reserved icon h21, the second special icon 2 reserved icon h22, the third special icon 2 reserved icon h23, and the fourth special icon 2 The hold icons h24 are all displayed in the default display mode. In addition, in this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these may be displayed .

  FIG. 235 (b) shows that the big hit game has been started and it has been shifted to the first round. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "big hit start" is performed to notify that the big hit game has been started, and at the upper right of the display area, it is the first round of the big hit game. The display of "1R" to show, and the display of "0 GET" showing the current number of winning balls in the present big hit are also performed. In addition, the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit to the end of the rowing may be displayed. In addition, the number of winning balls to the variable winning opening 234 in one round is a predetermined number (for example, 10) in the winning prize number of balls, and the variable winning opening 234 is closed during the closing state (over winning) The number of winning balls based on the game balls may or may not be included. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (b), a character of a child panda may appear, and it may be possible to make a comical action to entertain the player. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine, a right-handed notification to instruct a right-handed may be performed.

  FIG. 235 (c) shows that the fifth round of the big hit game is being played. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "5R" indicating the fifth round of the big hit game and "735 GET" indicating the number of winning balls on the upper right of the display area. ing. This winning prize number of balls is due to the fact that 49 game balls have won in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (c), the display "Mini game will start in the next round" is displayed, and the mini game is started in the next round (sixth round) It has been foretold.

  FIG. 235 (d) shows that the sixth round has been started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "6R" indicating the sixth round of the big hit game and "750 GET" indicating the number of winning balls on the upper right of the display area. ing. This winning prize ball number is due to the fact that 50 game balls have been won in the variable winning hole 234 since the big hit started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (d), the display "Mini game will start" is displayed, and it is predicted that the mini game is to be started from this.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (e), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a Bancho character appears, a display showing the appearance of the dice “1”, and a display “A character action UP if there is a display,” the mini game is displayed. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the output of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the possibility that the effect movable body 224 operates is high. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "765 GET", and a display based on the winning of 51 gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234 is performed. There is. In addition, when the effect movable body 224 operates during the execution of the big hit game, it is ensured that a holding group will occur. That is, the operation of the effect movable body 224 in the big hit game can be said to be an example of the advance notice.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 235 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the symbol of the dice and the button image 136a and the button acceptance time meter MT are displayed, and "press" above it. The character display is performed, and it is shown that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "780 GET", and a display based on the winning of 52 gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234 is performed. There is.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 235 (g), as shown in FIG. 235 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the dice with the symbol “3” is displayed. The stop display is shown in the manner shown, and it is shown that the mission achievement was not achieved. The number of winning balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 235 (h) The winning prize ball number displayed at the upper right of the display area 208 indicates "825 GET".

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (i), the display showing the outcome of the "3" derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and the mini game mission is not achieved. Display of "sorry" to notify is performed. Therefore, in the example of the effect, the effect movable body 224 is not operated, and the notification as to whether or not the hold sequence is performed will not be performed. In this production example, in the case where the result of pre-reading is that the game is on hold, the mission may always be achieved in the mini game, and the presentation movable body 224 may be operated, or the mission is not achieved, and the presentation The movable body 224 may not operate. In addition, when the mission is achieved, the effect movable body 224 may always operate or may not operate. The number of winning prize balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (i) indicates “840 GET”, and the 56 winning balls of the gaming ball to the variable winning hole 234 are won. The display based on is done.

  After that, when the big hit game is over, as shown in FIG. 235 (j), the display of “big hit” is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player is informed that the big hit game is over. In the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "16R" indicating that it is the 16th round and "2400 GET" indicating that the number of award winning balls is 2400 are displayed. There is.

  In the mini game of this effect example, although the game is performed by one operation of the effect button 136, for example, the "bancho awakening game" shown in FIG. 231 is started, and a bonus is awarded when the mission is achieved. (For example, the operation preview of the effect movable body 224) may be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 236, a situation in which a mission is achieved in a mini game performed during a big hit game will be described. In addition, since FIG. 236 (a)-the same figure (d) are the same as that of FIG. 235 (a)-the same figure (d), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (e) shows that the mini game has been started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a Bancho character appears, a display showing the appearance of the dice “1”, and a display “A character action UP if there is a display,” the mini game is displayed. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the output of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the possibility that the effect movable body 224 operates is high. Here, the Bancho character is displayed in the form of a broken clothes, suggesting that the mission is likely to be achieved. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "765 GET", and a display based on the winning of 51 gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234 is performed. There is.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol of the dice starts fluctuating display, and the button image 136a and the button acceptance time meter MT are displayed. The character display is performed, and it is shown that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. Note that, in this effect example, the button image 136a is displayed in a rotating and vibrating manner, and the effect button 136 also vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. This implies that the mission is likely to be achieved. Further, the number of winning balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "780 GET", and a display based on the winning of 52 gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234 is performed. There is.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (g), as shown in FIG. 236 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the dice of the dice is “1”. The stop display is shown in the manner shown, indicating that the mission has been achieved. The number of winning balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (g) indicates "810 GET", and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 236 (h). The winning prize ball number displayed at the upper right of the display area 208 indicates "825 GET".

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (i), the display showing the outcome of the “1” derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the notification that the mission of the mini game is achieved is given. The display of "I'm done" is done. In addition, the display of “focus on the arm” is performed below the display, and it is predicted that the effect movable body 224 may operate. The number of winning prize balls displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (i) indicates “840 GET”, and the 56 winning balls of the gaming ball to the variable winning hole 234 are won. The display based on is done.

  FIG. 236 (j) shows that the seventh round has been started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "7R" indicating the seventh round of the big hit game and "900 GET" indicating the winning prize ball number at the upper right of the display area. The display is based on the fact that the game ball of 60 balls has won the variable winning opening 234 since the jackpot started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (k), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates, and this forearm portion 224b overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, effect images of a large number of stars are displayed, and a display is performed as if the operation of the effect movable body 224 affects the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "915 GET", and a display based on the winning of 61 gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234 is performed. There is.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 236 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "pending on continuous reservation" is performed, and it is informed that the symbol variation display to be a big hit is being suspended. That is, the advance notice is given by the operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of “pending group confirmation” in FIG. 236 (l).

  In addition, in this example of presentation, it may be made to inform that it is a reservation continuation decision by achievement of a mission.

  In the present embodiment, one or more of the plurality of types of mini games described above are combined and configured to be executable.

  In the embodiment described above, the button (operation means) used in the mission in the main effect and the button (operation means) used in the mission in the mini game may be different.

  In addition, the result of the main effect or the result of the mini game may be displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed using another display means (for example, a display device dedicated to a mission, etc.) , Other effect means (eg, movable means such as the effect movable body 224 or the shielding device 246, sound output means such as the speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamps 532 May be notified by another device of

  In addition, the mini game described above may be performed during execution of one symbol variation display from the start to the end, and may be executed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Further, as in the case of the mini game described above, it is preferable that the result be notified whenever the mini game is started, but it may function as a false advance notice. For example, in the case of the symbol variation display in which the number of suspension of the special display variation display is four, the variation time may generally be short, and in such a case, the result is displayed as if the mini game was started. You may make it interrupt, without alerting | reporting. According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make the presentation of the game lively.

  In addition, the mini game described above may be configured to be interrupted or discontinued when a predetermined condition is established. For example, a big hit (for example, a combination of big hit decorative symbols is displayed without passing through a reach effect) When a variable display pattern etc. occurs, an RTC effect starts, a current effect display switches to a display such as wipe, or an error such as a door open error or a magnetic detection error occurs. May be interrupted. For example, if a big hit occurs suddenly while the mini game is being executed and the mini game is interrupted, the player suddenly becomes a big hit during a period looking forward to the result of the mini game, and the player is surprised and delighted There are times when it can be given. When the mini game is interrupted when the RTC effect starts, it may be possible to enjoy a link on the effect with another game table by the RTC effect.

  Further, the display area in which the mini game is executed may be changed in position or size depending on the game state, the effect mode or the stage.

  Further, as an operation mode required in the mini game described above, an appropriate operation mode such as a single operation, a continuous hitting operation, a long press operation, a timing operation, and the like can be adopted. As a result, there are cases where it is possible to change the result of the mini game depending on the skill of the player and the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, when the mini game is executed during the symbol variation display, the mini game may be started before reaching the reach. When reaching the reach, there is a tendency to pay attention to the effects of the symbol variation display, so there are cases where it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect before the reach by starting the mini game before the reach.

  Further, although the reward for achieving the mission in the mini game described above is to predict that a notice is to be made, the reward for achieving the mission in the mini game may be a notice or an advance notice. For example, the fluctuation advance notice or the advance notice may be given as a result of the mini game performed during execution of the symbol change display, and the advance notice may be provided as a result of the mini game performed during the execution of the big hit game.

In the above description,
“Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display [eg, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
One of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of effect displays is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display [for example, a button advance notification effect shown in FIG. 208 (g) to FIG.
The second effect display is an effect display of a mini game [for example, a button preview effect etc. shown in FIG. 207 (m) to FIG. 208 (f)],
The first effect display includes a first operation prompt display [for example, display of vibration and rotating button image 136a and "Push" shown in FIG. 208 (g) to FIG. (H)]. It is an effect display,
The second effect display is effect display including a second operation prompting display [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 207 (r) to FIG. 208 (b) and a display of “continuous hit”, etc.]
The first operation prompting display is a display prompting an operation of the operation means,
The second operation prompting display is a display prompting an operation of the operation means,
The first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display are different operation prompting displays,
The first effect display is a big hit notice (hereinafter, “first notice [for example, strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 208 (i) or weak cut-in image CI 1 b shown in FIG. 208 (i ′) It is an effect display that may be executed)).
The second effect display is a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, “second notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 208 (f), a heavy advance notice appears by the display of“ Daikichi ” Notice notice that there is a possibility of taking action, etc.] is an effect display that may be derived,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Also, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game console for playing mini games has been conventionally provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by a mini game.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw attention to the second notice that affects the first notice.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to actively perform the operation of the operation means in order to reach the first notice.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at the position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  In addition, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Also, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the plurality of types of effect display may be only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may include effect displays other than the first effect display and the second effect display.

  Further, the first effect display may be related to only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the first effect display may be always related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may include only the first operation promotion display, and may also include displays other than the first operation promotion display. In addition, the first effect display may include the first operation promotion display or may not include the first operation promotion display.

  In addition, the second effect display may include only the second operation promotion display, and may also include displays other than the second operation promotion display. In addition, the second effect display may include the second operation prompting without fail, and may not include the second operation prompting.

  Further, the first effect display may be executed only in the first notice or may be executed other than the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be one in which the first notice is always performed, or there may be a case in which the first notice is not performed.

  In addition, the second effect display may be that only the notice associated with the first notice may be derived, or may be derived other than the notice associated with the first notice. It may be a certain one. Further, the second effect display may be one in which a notice related to the first notice is always derived, or a notice related to the first notice may not be derived.

In addition, “a state in which both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as“ first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 209 (c) to FIG. (O) , And a state where both the button preview effect and the mini game are displayed], etc.)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible for the player to hold that the first notice and the second notice are related.

  Here, there may be only the first state, or there may be other than the first state, or it may be the first state or in the first state. May not be.

Also, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [eg, As shown in FIGS. 209 (g) to (l), when the effect button 136 is continuously hit and operated while both the button advance effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, etc. ],
When the operation unit is operated after the second preliminary notification is started, the first preliminary notification corresponding to the second preliminary notification is executed [for example, FIG. 209 (n As shown in), when the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed according to the result of the mini game as shown in FIG. etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the second notice that affects the first notice. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to actively operate the operation means with respect to the mini game.

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When there is an operation of the operation means in the state of (1), a notice other than the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail. When the operation means is operated in the state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  Also, the configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state, or the first state The second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed even when the operation means is not operated.

  Further, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed, or the second notice may be made. In the case where the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, a notice other than the first advance notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed. In addition, when the operation means is operated after the second advance notice is started, the first advance notice according to the second advance notice may be executed without fail. If the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, the first notice may not be executed in response to the second notice.

  In addition, the configuration may be such that the first notice according to the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, or the second notice The configuration may be such that only the first notice according to the second notice is executed except when there is an operation of the operation means after the start of.

"If the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed,"
After the second announcement is executed, the first announcement executed in response to the second announcement may change.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When there is an operation of the operating means in the state of (1), only the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When there is an operation of the operation means in the state of 1, the notice other than the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or in the first state In the case where the operation means is operated, the first notice of the first notice and the second notice and the notice other than the second notice may be executed.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail. When there is an operation of the operation means in the state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  In addition, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state. At least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed even when the operation means is not operated in the state.

  Also, after the second notice is executed, only the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change, or after the second notice is executed, Notices other than the first notice performed in response to the second notice may also change. Also, after the second notice is executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may always change, or after the second notice is executed, the second notice The first notice executed in response to the notice may not change.

  Also, only after the second notice is executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change, or even after the second notice is executed. The first notice performed in response to the second notice may change.

In the first state, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, in some cases, attention may be paid to the effect display on the mini game side, which is the notice of the first notice, and the expectation to the first notice may be increased.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to give priority to the mini game side in chronological order.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there may be cases where it is easy to understand even if the operation means overlaps, by giving priority to the notices that affect notices that may occur in the future.

  Here, in the first state, the first effect display may overlap only with the second effect display, or in the first state, the first effect display may be effects other than the second effect display. The display may also be overlapped. Also, in the first state, the first effect display may overlap with the second effect display without fail, or in the first state, the first effect display does not overlap with the second effect display There may be cases.

  Also, only in the first state, the first effect display may overlap with the second effect display, and in states other than the first state, the first effect display may be the second effect display May be overlapped.

In addition, when the operation means is operated in “the second effective period [for example, the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIG. 211 (e) to FIG. The configuration is such that the second notice is started,
The second effect display is effect display including a second effective period display [for example, a button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 211 (e) to FIG. (G) etc.],
The second effective period display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the elapse of the second effective period [eg, as shown in FIG. 211 (e) to FIG. The display mode of the time meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time after the start of the operation reception time, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by performing the second effective period display, it is possible to cause the player to quickly derive the result of the mini game, so it may be possible to draw attention to the first notice. .

  Here, when the operating means is operated in the second effective period, only the second notice may be started, or when the operating means is operated in the second effective period, Notices other than the second notice may be started. Also, the configuration may be such that the second advance notice is always started when the operation means is operated in the second effective period, or the second advance notice is operated in the second effective period. The configuration may be such that the second advance notice may not be started.

  Further, the second advance notice may be started only when the operating means is operated in the second effective period, or in the case other than when the operating means is operated in the second effective period. Alternatively, the second notice may be started.

  In addition, the second effect display may include only the second effective period display, or may include displays other than the second effective period display. Further, the second effect display may include the second effective period display without fail or may not include the second effective period display.

Also, "the first notice is a notice that can be performed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is the first mode [eg, the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 209 (o), etc.]
One of the plurality of modes is the second mode [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 208 (i)],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
In the case where the first notice is performed in the second mode than in the case where the first notice is performed in the first mode, it is likely that the big hit symbol is finally clearly displayed. Is configured and
When the second effect display is started, the first notice is easier to be executed in the second mode than when the second effect display is not started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to give expectation to the first notice by starting the mini game.

  Here, the first advance notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in modes other than the plurality of modes. In addition, the first advance notice may be always performed in a plurality of modes, or may not be performed in a plurality of modes.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be executable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be implemented in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect, It is also good. In addition, the first advance notice may be always performed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be performed in the first aspect and the second aspect.

  In addition, when the first notice is executed in the first mode, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is not finally displayed in a final manner, or the first notice is executed in the second mode. In the case, the jackpot symbol may eventually be configured to be definitely displayed.

  In addition, when the second effect display is not started, the first notice may not be executed in the second mode, and when the second effect display is started, the second mode The first notice may be configured to be always performed.

In addition, “the second notice is a notice that can be performed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of embodiments is the third embodiment [eg, display of "Okichi" shown in FIG. 213 (l), etc.]
One of the plurality of modes is the fourth mode [eg, display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 212 (l), etc.]
If the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a final display,
When the first notice is executed in the second aspect [for example, the display of "mission accomplished" shown in FIG. 212 (n)], the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect Configured to be
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by becoming the second mode in the first notice, the big hit symbol will be finally displayed in a final display, thereby further improving the expectation of the derivation result for the second notice There are times when you can.

  Here, the second advance notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable also in modes other than the plurality of modes. In addition, the second advance notice may be always performed in a plurality of modes, or may not be performed in a plurality of modes.

  In addition, the second notice may be executable only in the third aspect and the fourth aspect, or may be implemented in an aspect other than the third aspect and the fourth aspect, It is also good. In addition, the second advance notice may be always performed in the third aspect and the fourth aspect, or may not be performed in the third aspect and the fourth aspect.

Also, "the first notice is a prefetch notice,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “The number of pending icons corresponding to the number of pending symbol variation display is configured to be displayed,
The first notice is a notice performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with “display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
It is configured to be able to run multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game [for example, a dice game shown in FIG. 221 (g) to FIG.
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game [for example, a lottery game etc. shown in FIG. 221 (g ') to FIG. (L')],
The first mini game is a mini game displayed using a certain display area [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221 (a)],
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini game and the second mini game are different mini games,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Also, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game console for playing mini games has been conventionally provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by a mini game.

  Further, according to this game stand, since the display area of the mini game is fixed to the "predetermined display area", the player may easily understand.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the display means may be configured by one display means, or may be configured by two or more display means. In addition, in the configuration constituted by two or more display means, the decorative symbol change display may be performed only in a part of the display means, or the decorative symbol change display is performed in all the display means. It may be known.

  Moreover, only a plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable, and games other than the plurality of types of mini games may also be configured to be executable. In addition, multiple types of mini games may be always executed, or multiple types of mini games may not be executed.

  Also, only the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable, or mini games other than the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute the first mini game and the second mini game, or may be configured such that the first mini game and the second mini game may not be executed. .

  The first mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. In addition, the first mini game may be displayed by using a certain display area without fail, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

  In addition, the second mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. In addition, the second mini game may be displayed by using a certain display area without fail, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

Also, "notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, a notice of pre-reading with a blue display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 221 (l) or the same figure (l ')],
The first mini game is a result suggesting that the first preliminary notice is to be made (hereinafter referred to as “first result [for example, display of“ 1 UP determined ”shown in FIG. 221 (k), etc.]”. ) Is a mini game that can be derived
The second mini game is a mini game capable of deriving the first result [for example, the display of “1 UP determined” shown in FIG. 221 (k ′) and the like ”.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to make the relationship such as advance notice easy to understand while entertaining variations of the mini game.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices or may not execute a plurality of notices.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice or may not execute the first notice.

  Also, the first mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Also, the first mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

  In addition, the second mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. In addition, the second mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

In addition, “one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, a notice of pre-reading with a red display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 222 (l) or FIG. ,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given,
The first mini game is a result suggesting that the second notice is to be made (hereinafter, referred to as “second result [for example, display of“ 3 UP determined ”shown in FIG. 222 (k), etc.]”. ) Is also a mini game that can be derived
The second mini game is a mini game which can also derive the second result [for example, the display of “3 UP determined” shown in FIG. 222 (k ′) and the like].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to improve the expectation for the result that suggests that the second notice is to be made by the mini game is derived.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the second notice, or may not execute the second notice.

  Also, the first mini game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. Also, the first mini game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

  Also, the second mini game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. In addition, the second mini game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, an image BCH of a face of a watchman shown in FIG.
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character [for example, an image BCH of the face of a watchman shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the same advance notice may be given even if the type of mini game is different, so it may be possible for the player to have various expectations.

  Here, in the first mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. . In the first mini game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

  Further, in the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, an image BCH of a face of a watchman shown in FIG.
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character [for example, an image BCH of the face of a watchman shown in FIG. 221 (g ′), etc.] may be displayed,
The first mini game is a mini game in which a second character [for example, the SABOHANI character SBH shown in FIG. 225 (A1), etc.] may be displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which a third character [eg, the princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 225 (B1), etc.] may be displayed,
The first character and the second character are different characters,
The first character and the third character are different characters,
The second character and the third character are different characters,
The first mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, depending on the type of character appearing in each mini game, it may be possible to have an expectation for the second result.

  Here, in the first mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. . In the first mini game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

  Further, in the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

  Further, in the first mini game, only the second character may be displayed, or characters other than the second character may be displayed. In the first mini game, the second character may always be displayed, or the second character may not be displayed.

  Further, in the second mini game, only the third character may be displayed, or characters other than the third character may be displayed. In the second mini game, the third character may be displayed without fail, or the third character may not be displayed.

  Note that the third character and the fourth character may be the same character or different characters.

  In addition, in the first mini game, when the first character is displayed, the second result may not be derived, and when the second character is displayed, the second mini game is performed. The result of may be derived by all means.

  In the second mini game, the second result may not be derived when the first character is displayed, or the second game may be displayed when the third character is displayed. The result of may be derived by all means.

"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display [for example, the eyebrow mode etc. shown in FIG. 223 (A1) to FIG. (A6)],
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display [for example, the princess mode shown in FIG. 223 (B1) to FIG. (B6), etc.]
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 223 (A1) to FIG. It is displayed while executing the symbol variation display],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [eg, as shown in FIG. 223 (B1) to FIG. It is displayed while executing the symbol variation display],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game etc.] is a mini game in which the display of the first effect display is easier to be executed than the display of the second effect display,
The second mini game [for example, a fortune-telling game, etc.] is a mini game in which the second effect display is more easily displayed than the first effect display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to associate the main effects and the mini game.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display and the second effect display, or capable of displaying the effect display other than the first effect display and the second effect display. It may be Further, the display means may display the first effect display and the second effect display without fail, and may not display the first effect display and the second effect display.

  Also, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be. In addition, the first effect display may be necessarily displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be. In addition, the second effect display may be necessarily displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first mini game may not be executed while the second effect display is being displayed, or may be always executed while the first effect display is being displayed.

  In addition, the second mini game may not be executed while the first effect display is being displayed, or may be always executed while the second effect display is being displayed.

In addition, it is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [e.g., a normal gaming state (special figure low probability, common figure low probability state), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability change state (special figure high probability spread figure high probability state), etc.],
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first game state and the second game state have different probabilities of executing the plurality of types of mini games,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the mini game execution probability varies depending on the gaming state, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the mini game to be executed can be changed depending on the gaming state.

  Here, transition may be made to only a plurality of types of gaming states, or transition to states other than a plurality of gaming states may be made. Moreover, it may be comprised so that it may transfer to a plurality of types of gaming states by all means, and may not shift to several gaming states.

  Also, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be shiftable to gaming states other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state . Further, it may be configured to shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state without fail, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  Also, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games, and the second gaming state is more The probability of executing multiple types of mini games may be high.

  Also, while the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability spread figure low probability state (including the latent probability change, the same below), the special figure low probability spread figure low probability At least one of the state, the special figure high probability common drawing high probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special drawing high probability state common drawing low probability state is the first gaming state The special figure high probability state general drawing high probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special drawing low probability general drawing high probability state is the first gaming state, the special drawing high probability generalization The figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Also, regardless of the probability state of the special view, the common drawing low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the common drawing high probability state may be the second gaming state. In addition, the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state while the special figure low probability state is the first gaming state regardless of the probability state of the common drawing.

  In addition, multiple types of mini games may not be executed in the first gaming state, and multiple types of mini games may not be executed in the second gaming state.

Also, the probability of executing the plurality of types of notices is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the probability of executing the first mini game is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the probability of executing the second mini game is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

In addition, it is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [e.g., a normal gaming state (special figure low probability, common figure low probability state), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability change state (special figure high probability spread figure high probability state), etc.],
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game etc.] is a mini game that is easier to be executed in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state [eg, FIG. As shown in (A1) to (A6), the dice game is more likely to be executed in the normal gaming state than in the probability changing state, etc.],
The second mini game [for example, a lottery game and the like] is a mini game in which the second gaming state is more easily executed than in the first gaming state [eg, FIG. As shown in (B1) to (B6), in the definite change state, the fortune game is more likely to be executed than the normal gaming state, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to associate the gaming state with the type of mini game.

  Here, transition may be made to only a plurality of types of gaming states, or transition to states other than a plurality of gaming states may be made. Moreover, it may be comprised so that it may transfer to a plurality of types of gaming states by all means, and may not shift to several gaming states.

  Also, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be shiftable to gaming states other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state . Further, it may be configured to shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state without fail, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  In addition, while the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state is the first game state, the special figure high probability spread figure low probability state, the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state, the special figure high probability spread figure height At least any one of the probability states may be the second gaming state, and the special figure high probability state popular figure height while the special figure high probability state regular figure low probability state is the first gaming state The probability state may be the second game state, and the special figure low probability spread figure high probability state is the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability spread figure high probability state is the second game It may be in the state. Also, regardless of the probability state of the special view, the common drawing low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the common drawing high probability state may be the second gaming state. In addition, the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state while the special figure low probability state is the first gaming state regardless of the probability state of the common drawing.

  In addition, the first mini game may not be executed in the second gaming state, or may be executed in the first gaming state. Good.

  In addition, the second mini game may not be executed in the first gaming state, or may be executed in the first gaming state. Good.

"The first gaming state [for example, the normal gaming state (special figure low probability general view low probability state) etc.]" and the second gaming state [for example, the probability change state (special figure high probability generality figure high probability state) etc. ], The probability of executing the multiple types of mini games is different,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the mini game execution probability varies depending on the gaming state, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the mini game to be executed can be changed depending on the gaming state.

  Here, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games, or the second gaming state The probability of executing multiple types of mini games may be high.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-power support state [for example, a general drawing low probability state, etc.],
The second gaming state is a power support state [e.g.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the non-power support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

  Further, the power support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

In addition, when none of the plurality of mini games is displayed in the certain display area [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221 (a)], the non-mini game effect is displayed in the certain display area Display [for example, the tutorial display “The mini game starts at various timings shown in FIG. 221 (c)”, the tutorial display “Yoshimune is the 8th generation general” shown in FIG. May be
The non-mini game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini games,
When any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in the certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed is erased [eg, in FIG. 221 (f) to FIG. (G) As shown, when the mini game is started when "Yoshimune is 8th General" is displayed, "Yoshimune is 8th General" is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since a non-mini game effect display can be performed using a display area from a normal time, the player may be easily noticed.

  Here, the non-mini game effect display may be displayed only in a certain display area when none of a plurality of types of mini games are displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types in a certain display area may be displayed. A non-mini-game effect display may be displayed also in an area other than the display area when none of the mini-games are displayed. In addition, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a display area without displaying any of a plurality of mini games in a display area, or any of a plurality of mini games may be displayed in a display area. The non-mini-game effect display may not be displayed in a certain display area when it is not displayed.

  In addition, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a display area only when none of a plurality of types of mini games are displayed in a display area, or a plurality of mini types may be displayed in a display area. A non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in a display area that is also present when none of the games are displayed.

  In addition, when any one of a plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, only the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be erased, or any of a plurality of types of mini games may be deleted in a certain display area. The display other than the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted when one of the display starts. In addition, when any one of a plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be necessarily erased, or any of a plurality of types of mini games may be deleted in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display that is being displayed may not be deleted when one of the display starts.

  In addition, the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be erased only when any one of a plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, or any of a plurality of types of mini games may be deleted in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted even when the display is not started.

  Here, as a display applicable to the non-mini game effect display, an appropriate display such as a tutorial display, a display of parameters in the original mode (LV display etc.), and a display of the remaining time until the start of RTC is adopted. It is possible.

In addition, “the certain display area is a frame [for example, the outer frame of the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 207 (m), the outer frame of the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. An area that is partitioned,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain display area may be divided by only a frame, or may be divided by something other than a frame.

In addition, the certain display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the multifunctional display area MF1 is a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is formed in the right half of the lower end, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only at a predetermined position, or may be formed at a position other than the predetermined position.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area which is expanded in relation to the start of the first mini game [for example, as shown in FIG. 227 (A2), the multifunctional display area MF1 is the start of the dice game Is displayed in relation to, etc.],
The certain display area is an area which expands in relation to the start of the second mini game.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be made to pay attention to the mini game by the display expansion of a certain display area.

  Here, a display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the first mini game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the first mini game. Good. Also, a certain display area may necessarily expand in relation to the start of the first mini game, or may not expand in relation to the start of the first mini game.

  Also, a certain display area may expand only in relation to the start of the second mini game, or may expand in relation to other than the start of the second mini game . Also, a certain display area may necessarily expand in relation to the start of the second mini game, or may not expand in relation to the start of the second mini game.

  Also, a display area may expand only in connection with the start of the first mini game, and may be configured not to expand in connection with the start of the second mini game. It may expand only in connection with the start of the mini game, and may be configured not to expand in connection with the start of the first mini game.

Also, the certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221 (a) is on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the mini game is executed on the display means on which the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the mini game may be able to pay more attention.

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the display means.

In addition, “display means (hereinafter,“ second display means [for example, second decorative symbol display device 208M, etc.] ”other than the aforementioned display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] is referred to as“. Equipped
The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the second display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the second display means.

Also, in the above description,
"Notice means capable of executing plural notices [e.g., decoration symbol display device 208 etc.]"
Display means capable of displaying a mini game display [eg, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [eg, display of weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 211 (i ′), etc.]
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 211 (i), etc.]
In the case where the second notice is given rather than the first notice, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed.
The mini game is a game that can derive multiple results,
One of the plurality of results is the first result [eg, display of "Okichi" shown in FIG. 211 (h '), etc.]
One of the plurality of results is the second result [eg, display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 211 (h), etc.]
When the second result is derived, the second notice is more easily performed than when the first result is derived,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the notice means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by the notice means.

  Also, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game console for playing mini games has been conventionally provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by a mini game.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the player may participate (focus) on the mini game to derive the second result.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices or may not execute a plurality of notices.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini game or may be capable of displaying other display than the display of the mini game. Also, the display means may always display the mini game display or may not display the mini game display.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. . The notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  In addition, when the first notice is given, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is not displayed finally in the final notice, and when the second notice is given, the big hit symbol is always confirmed finally May be configured to

Also, “at least it is suggested that the second notice is likely to be made by the result of the mini game becoming the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. [For example, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), when the mini game is started, the display of "Otakuji and strong cut-in occurrence" is displayed in the mini game display area MN1, etc. ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the trend of the mini game toward the generation of an advantageous advance notice.

  In addition, by incorporating so-called mission effects into the mini game, there are cases where it is possible to increase a scene where the player can get a sense of achievement.

  Here, before the result of the mini game is derived, it is configured to at least suggest that only the second notice is likely to be made by the result of the derived mini game being the second result. The good news is that it is at least suggested that other than the second notice is likely to be given by the result of the mini game becoming the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. It may be configured. In addition, before the result of the mini game is derived, the result of the derived mini game may be a second result, which may at least indicate that the second notice is necessarily performed. And the mini game outcome may be at least suggested that the second outcome will not occur by the second outcome being the second outcome before the mini game outcome is derived. May be

  In addition, before the result of the mini game is derived, it may be configured to be notified in advance that the second preliminary announcement is likely to be performed by the result of the derived mini game being the second result. .

  In addition, modes of suggestion are modes that at least an effect of mission achievement is suggested, such as "Please give ...", "If ... has stopped", etc. As long as it is, any aspect is applicable.

"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIG. 212 (c) to FIG. 212 (n), etc.],
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIG. 212 (c) to FIG. Being performed during the display of fluctuation etc.],
The first effect display is an effect display that can derive a plurality of effect results,
One of the plurality of effect results is a first effect result [eg, display of “Mission failure” shown in FIG. 213 (n), etc.]
One of the plurality of rendering results is a second rendering result [for example, display of "mission accomplished" shown in FIG. 212 (n), etc.]
It is suggested that the jackpot result is likely to be a big hit by the lead effect of the first lead display being the second lead result before the lead result of the first lead display is derived. [For example, as shown in FIG. 212 (c), when the mission effect is started, the contents of the mission of "put out a cut-in" and "big hit if it appears" will be displayed, etc.,
The second effect result [e.g., in the first effect display than in the case where the second result [e.g., the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 211 (h)] is derived in the mini game. If the display etc. of "mission achievement" shown in FIG. 212 (n) is derived, it is configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed finally in the case where it is derived.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where it is possible to increase a scene where a sense of achievement of the player can be obtained by adopting a so-called mission effect other than the mini game.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there may be a case where the variation of the mission effect can be increased by providing a difference to the result of the mission.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it may be possible to clarify the difference between the mission of the main effect and the mission of the mini game.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of effect displays or may not display a plurality of effect displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying the effect display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display or may not display the first effect display.

  Also, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be. In addition, the first effect display may be necessarily displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may be capable of deriving only a plurality of effect results, or may be capable of deriving results other than the plurality of effect results. Further, the first effect display may always derive a plurality of effect results or may not derive a plurality of effect results.

  In addition, the first effect display may be capable of deriving only the first effect result and the second effect result, and also derives effect results other than the first effect result and the second effect result It may be possible. In addition, the first effect display may always derive the first effect result and the second effect result, or there may be cases where the first effect result and the second effect result are not derived. It is also good.

  In addition, before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is configured to be notified in advance that the effect result of the first effect display is likely to be a big hit by becoming the second effect result May be

  In addition, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is not finally displayed in the final display, or when the second effect result is derived in the first effect display Finally, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be definitely displayed. In addition, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be finally displayed in a final display, or the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. When it is done, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may not be displayed in the end.

Also, when the second effect result is derived, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a final display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to clarify the division of mission effects.

  Here, only when the second effect result is derived, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally determined and displayed, and also in the case other than the case where the second effect result is derived. Finally, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finalized.

In addition, “a state in which both the mini game and the first effect display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as“ first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (g) to FIG. In the state where both the effect and the mini game are displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible for the player to feel that there is a relationship between the result of the mini game and the result of the first effect display.

  Here, there may be only the first state, or there may be other than the first state, or it may be the first state or in the first state. May not be.

Also, the mini game is started earlier than the first effect display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to easily recognize that there is a relationship between the mini game and the first effect display.

In addition, “operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position that can be operated by the player is provided,
When the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived [for example, FIG. 212 (g) to FIG. (L) or FIG. 213 (g) ~ As shown in the same figure (l), “Okichi” and “Okichi” are derived, etc., when the production button 136 is continuously hit and operated in the mini game, etc.]
When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived.
If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice [eg, FIG. 213 (m) rather than the second notice [eg, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 212 (m)]. Weak cut-in image CI1b etc.] shown in
When the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is easier to be performed than the first notice,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the result of the mini game may affect the notice, the player may be able to actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. .

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at the position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  In addition, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Also, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  In addition, the result of the mini game may be derived only when the operation means is operated in the mini game, and the mini game is performed except when the operation means is operated in the mini game. The result of may be configured to be derived. In addition, when the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game may be always derived, or when the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived. It may not be done.

  In addition, the result of the mini game may not be derived only when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the mini game is performed except when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured such that the outcome of the game is not derived. In addition, when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game may not necessarily be derived, or when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is It may be configured to be derived.

  Also, the first notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the second notice only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or when the result of the mini game is not derived. In other cases as well, the first notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the second notice. In addition, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may always be more easily performed than the second notice, or the result of the mini game is not derived. In some cases, it may be configured that the first notice may not be easier to perform than the second notice.

  In addition, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the second notice may be configured not to be given. If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is always made. It may be configured to be

  Also, the second notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the first notice only when the result of the mini game is derived, or it may be other than the case where the result of the mini game is derived. Also in the case, the second notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the first notice. In addition, when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may always be more easily performed than the first notice, or when the result of the mini game is derived, The second notice may be configured to be less likely to be made than the first notice.

  In addition, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first notice may be configured not to be performed, and when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may be performed necessarily. May be configured.

Also, even if the second advance notice is scheduled to be made (hereinafter referred to as the “first case”), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first advance notice If, for example, the result of the mini game is determined as derivable as a result of the mini game but the result of the mini game is not derived, a strong cut is performed as shown in FIG. 214 (m). The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed instead of the in-image CI1a, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the result of the mini game may affect the notice, the player may be able to actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. .

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, since the advance notice does not affect the judgment of success or failure, even when a notice different from the scheduled time occurs, the result of the success or failure judgment is not affected, and the notice which is forcibly scheduled is There is no need to do it. Therefore, it may be possible to participate in the mini game in order to make a better notice appear.

  Here, even in the first case, the first notice may be provided only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or even in the first case, the mini The first advance notice may be configured to be performed also when the game result is not derived. Further, even in the first case, the first advance notice may be provided whenever the result of the mini game is not derived, or even in the first case, the mini game It may be configured that the first notice may not be given if the result of is not derived.

In addition, “held icon display means capable of displaying plural types of held icons [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] is provided,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is the first hold icon [eg, a blue display mode hold icon, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [eg, a green display mode hold icon, etc.],
The first notice is a notice performed by displaying the first hold icon [for example, a prefetch notice is given by the display of a hold icon in blue display mode, etc.]
The second notice is a notice performed by displaying the second hold icon [for example, a prefetch notice is given by the display of a hold icon in a green display mode],
The mini game may be started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed, with the first hold icon displayed.
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon.
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to expect change in the display mode of the hold icon while enjoying the mini game. For example, although it was monotonous with only conventional effects in which the button hold icon is displayed and the effect of changing the display mode is performed by the operation of the operation means, the display mode of the hold icon has been changed according to this game stand After that, since there may be further changes, it may be possible to further increase the sense of expectation in the change display of the hold icon.

  Here, the holding icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of holding icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of holding icons. Further, the holding icon display means may always display a plurality of types of holding icons, or may not display a plurality of types of holding icons.

  Also, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may display the hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be Also, the hold icon display means may display the first hold icon and the second hold icon without fail, or even if the first hold icon and the second hold icon may not be displayed. Good.

  Also, the first notice may be made only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be made by something other than the first hold icon being displayed. May be In addition, the first notice may be given by displaying the first hold icon or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. .

  In addition, the second notice may be given only by the display of the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than the display of the second hold icon. May be In addition, the second notice may be made by displaying the second holding icon or may not be performed by displaying the second holding icon. .

  In addition, the mini game may be configured such that it may be started only while a certain symbol variation display is being performed when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state being, it may be configured so that it may be started other than during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start while a certain symbol variation display is being performed in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, and the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured such that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display even in a state other than the state being.

  In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change only to the second hold icon, or in the first case, If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or in the first case, The first hold icon may be configured to change to a second hold icon if the result of the mini game is not derived.

  Also, in the first case, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon only when the result of the mini game is not derived. In the first case, The first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon except when the mini game result is not derived. Also, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or the case other than the first case. Also in the case where the mini game result is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon.

  In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change only to the second hold icon, or in the first case In the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to always change to the second hold icon, or in the first case In the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon may be configured not to change to the second holding icon.

  Also, in the first case, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon only when the second result is derived in the mini game, or in the first case The first holding icon may be configured to change to the second holding icon also in the case where the second result is derived in the mini game. Also, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon, or in the first case In other cases, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon when the second result is derived in the mini game.

In addition, “held icon display means capable of displaying plural types of held icons [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] is provided,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is the first hold icon [eg, a blue display mode hold icon, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [eg, a green display mode hold icon, etc.],
The first notice is a notice performed by displaying the first hold icon [for example, a prefetch notice is given by the display of a hold icon in blue display mode, etc.]
The second notice is a notice performed by displaying the second hold icon [for example, a prefetch notice is given by the display of a hold icon in a green display mode],
The mini game may be started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed, with the first hold icon displayed.
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol The first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol change display started later than the change display
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, there are cases where it is possible to change the timing of the change in the display mode of the hold icon depending on the participation status of the mini game.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, even if it does not participate in the mini game in the end, the relationship between the advance notice and the reliability may be maintained in some cases.

  Here, the holding icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of holding icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of holding icons. Further, the holding icon display means may always display a plurality of types of holding icons, or may not display a plurality of types of holding icons.

  Also, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may display the hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be Also, the hold icon display means may display the first hold icon and the second hold icon without fail, or even if the first hold icon and the second hold icon may not be displayed. Good.

  Also, the first notice may be made only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be made by something other than the first hold icon being displayed. May be In addition, the first notice may be given by displaying the first hold icon or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. .

  In addition, the second notice may be given only by the display of the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than the display of the second hold icon. May be In addition, the second notice may be made by displaying the second holding icon or may not be performed by displaying the second holding icon. .

  In addition, the mini game may be configured such that it may be started only while a certain symbol variation display is being performed when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state being, it may be configured so that it may be started other than during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start while a certain symbol variation display is being performed in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, and the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured such that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display even in a state other than the state being.

  In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to only the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to a hold icon other than the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is always changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured.

  Also, in the first case, only when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Also, in the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display except when the second result is derived in the mini game. It may be configured as follows. Also, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Even if the second result is derived in the mini game in any case other than the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display It may be configured as follows.

  Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change only from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of symbol variation display started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived In this case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold during the execution of a symbol variation display started later than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from an icon to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to always change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of symbol variation display started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived In this case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold during the execution of a symbol variation display started later than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured such that the icon may not change from the second hold icon.

  Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon only during the execution of the symbol variation display to be started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived In this case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first pending icon is not executed during the execution of a symbol variation display that is started later than a certain symbol variation display May be configured to change from the second hold icon to the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to always change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of the symbol variation display started later.

  Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and from the certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of the symbol variation display to be started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived In this case, the first holding icon does not change to the second holding icon other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first pending icon during the execution of the symbol variation display which is started later than a certain symbol variation display May be configured to change from the second hold icon to the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not necessarily change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and from the certain symbol variation display The first hold icon may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variation display that is also started later.

  Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and from the certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of the symbol variation display to be started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived Also in the case other than the case where the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, during the execution of the symbol variation display which is started later than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon. Also, only in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and from the certain symbol variation display The result of the mini game may be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of the symbol variation display to be started later. If is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during the execution of a symbol variation display that is started later than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon.

In addition, “operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate are provided,
Depending on the operation situation of the operation means, the derived result of the mini game may be different. [For example, as shown in FIG. 212 (i) to FIG. If the condition is satisfied, “Daikichi” is derived, but as shown in FIG. 214 (i) to FIG. "Okichi" is derived, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the operation of the operation means.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at the position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  In addition, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Also, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  Moreover, only the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation situation of the operation means, and other than the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation situation of the operation means . Further, the derivation result of the mini game may always be different according to the operation situation of the operation means, or the derivation result of the mini game may not be different according to the operation situation of the operation means.

In addition, “operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate are provided,
In the mini game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operation means is operated or not (for example, as shown in FIGS. 213 (i) to (l). As described above, when "Nakakichi" is determined in advance so as to be derived, "Okyoshi" can be derived even if the production button 136 is continuously hit and operated, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at the position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  In addition, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Also, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  In the mini game, only the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not. In the mini game, the operating means is operated Results other than the same result may be derived depending on the case where the operation means is not operated. In the mini game, the same result may always be derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated, or in the mini game, the operating means is operated when the operating means is operated The same result may not be derived in some cases.

  In addition, in the mini game only, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, and the operating means may be operated other than the mini game. The same result may be derived depending on the case where the operation means is not operated.

In addition, “the display means is a first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L etc.] and the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N etc. And means], and
The first display means and the second display means are different display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. It may be composed of In addition, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It may be one.

Also, in the above description,
“Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means [eg, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
The display means displays a display of mini games [for example, mini games shown in FIG. 229 (g) to FIG. 2 (m), mini games shown in FIG. 231 (j) to FIG. It is a possible means,
The mini game is a game that can derive multiple types of results,
The result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 229 (g) to FIG. When the treasure box selected and selected with the effect button 136 is determined, a fortune character BA appears from the treasure box, and “Okichi” is displayed as a result of fortune telling, or FIG. 232 (A1) to FIG. As shown in (A6), when the production button 136 is hit and operated, the appearance of the clothes worn by the Bancho character is shown, and a display of "bancho awakening" and "I am in great shape today" is performed, etc.] ,
One of the plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation situation of the operation means [eg, as shown in FIG. 230 (A1) to FIG. (A6), the operation When the treasure box BX2 at the lower left is selected by the key unit 137 and determined by the effect button 136, the princess character HM3 appears and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of fortune telling, but FIG. 230 (B1) As shown in FIG. 6 (B6), when the treasure box BX3 at the upper right is selected by the operation key unit 137 and determined by the presentation button 136, while the brow character BA appears, as a result of the fortune-telling, “Koyoshi Is displayed, or as shown in FIG. 232 (A1) to FIG. (A6), when the effect button 136 is continuously hit and operated and the condition of the number of operations is satisfied, It is shown that the clothes worn by the long character are broken, and the message "bancho awakening" and "Today's best" is displayed, and the production button 136 has been repeatedly hit, but the conditions for the number of operations have not been met. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 233 (C7), the clothes worn by the Bancho character can not be broken and the “bancho awakening game” ends, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of results is the third result [for example, the display of the eyebrow character BA and “Okichi” shown in FIG. 229 (k), or the Bancho shown in FIG. 233 (C7) The indication that the clothes worn by the character can not be broken, etc.]
The third result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the success / failure determination [for example, the success / failure determination of at least one of the success / failure determination of the special drawing, the success / failure determination of the spread map, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Also, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game console for playing mini games has been conventionally provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by a mini game.

  Moreover, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to entertain the player other than pure gaming.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at the position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  In addition, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Also, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini game or may be capable of displaying other display than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

  In addition, the mini game may be capable of deriving only a plurality of types of results, or may be capable of deriving other types of results. In addition, the mini game may always derive a plurality of types of results, or may not have a plurality of types of results.

  In addition, only the result of the mini game may be derived by operating the operating means, or other than the result of the mini game may be derived by operating the operating means. It may be done. Further, the result of the mini game may be always derived by operating the operating means, or the result of the mini game may not be derived by operating the operating means. May be

  In addition, only one of the plurality of results may be derived according to the operation situation of the operation means, or among the plurality of results according to the operation situation of the operation means Other than any one may be configured to be derived. In addition, any one of the plurality of results may be derived according to the operation situation of the operation means, or any of the plurality of results according to the operation situation of the operation means It may be configured that one or more may not be derived.

  Further, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the third result, or may be capable of deriving other results than the third result. In addition, the mini game may always derive the third result or may not derive the third result.

  Also, the third result does not indicate the result of the success or failure determination, and is not a notification.

In addition, “the mini game is a game for deriving a certain result among the plurality of types of results [for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 230 (A1) to FIG. (A6) is“ Daikichi ” Mission and so on to select the treasure box of the contents of
Depending on the operation status of the operation means, the certain result can be derived [for example, in the case shown in FIG. 230 (A1) to FIG. (A6), the lower left treasure box BX2 is selected by the operation key unit 137, When it is determined by the effect button 136, the princess character HM3 appears, and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune telling etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation means for the mini game.

  Here, a certain result may be only one, or two or more.

  Further, only a certain result may be configured to be derivable according to the operating condition of the operating means, or a result other than a certain result may be derivable according to the operating condition of the operating means. Further, a result may be always derived depending on the operating condition of the operating means, or may be configured such that a result may not be derived depending on the operating condition of the operating means.

In addition, “decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] Equipped
When the mini game is started in a first period [for example, a period of a standby state in which the variable display of the special view is not performed (including a state in which a customer waiting demo display is displayed)] (hereinafter referred to as It is a game where there is a "first case."
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended [e.g., a period in which the suspension of both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 0, etc.]
The first period is a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, a period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it can be enjoyed in the mini game during the first period.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the operation of the operation means can be positively performed even during the original game by prompting the operation of the operation means in the mini game.

  Here, the decorative symbol display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing display other than the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, the decorative symbol display means may always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the mini game may be started only in the first period, or may be started in a period other than the first period. In addition, the mini game may be always started in the first period, or may not be started in the first period.

  In addition, the first period may be a period in which only the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended, or a period in which there is one in which the start is not suspended other than the start of the decorative symbol variation display. It is also good.

  In addition, the first period may be a period in which only the decorative symbol variation display is not performed, or other than the decorative symbol variation display (for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214) may also be a period of time that has not been performed.

In addition, “automatic operation of the operation means [for example, long press automatic, full automatic, etc.]” is configured to be executable,
The mini game is configured such that the auto operation can not be performed in the first case [for example, as shown in FIG. 231 (g) and FIG. (J) to FIG. (O). , Even if the auto button mode is set to ON, the automatic operation of the effect button 136 is not performed, etc. in the Bancho awakening game, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, in the first case, since it is a mini game which is not related to the judgment of success or failure, the auto operation can not be performed and the player can positively operate the operation means. There is.

  Here, only automatic operation of the operation means may be configured to be executable, or operations other than the automatic operation of the operation means may be configured to be executable. In addition, the automatic operation of the operation means may be always performed, or the automatic operation of the operation means may not be performed.

  Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that only the automatic operation can not be performed, or can be configured such that operations other than the automatic operation can not be performed. Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that the auto operation can not always be executed, or may be configured such that the auto operation may not be disabled.

  In addition, the mini game may be configured such that the auto operation can not be performed only in the first case, and is configured such that the auto operation can not be performed except in the first case. It is also good.

In addition, “the mini game is a game that is started in the second period (hereinafter referred to as“ the second case ”), and it is shown in, for example, FIG. Mini games shown in FIGS. 207 (m) to 208 (f) and mini games shown in FIG. 221 (g) to FIG. 221 (k) are started during the variation display of the decorative symbol. The mini game shown in FIG. 236 (e) to FIG. 236 (i) is started during the execution of the big hit game, etc.],
The second period is a period which does not overlap with the first period,
The second period is a period including at least one of execution of the decorative symbol variation display and execution of a big hit game,
The third result is more easily derived in the mini game in the first case than in the second case.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to enjoy the mini game even during the game.

  Here, the mini game may be started only in the second period, or may be started in a period other than the second period. In addition, the mini game may be always started in the second period, or may not be started in the second period.

  In the first case, the third result may be derived in the mini game without fail, and in the second case, the third result may not be derived in the mini game. It is also good.

In addition, the type of the mini game started in the first case and the second case is configured to be different [for example, today's fortune shown in FIGS. 229 (g) to (m) The fortune telling game shown in FIG. 231 (j) to FIG. 231 (o) is a mini game started in the standby state, and the dice game or the diagram shown in FIG. 221 (g) to FIG. The fortune game shown in 221 (g ') to the figure (l') is a mini game that is started while the decorative symbol is variably displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to identify whether it is a notice or a mere game depending on the type of mini game.

  Here, only the types of mini games started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different, or in the mini games started in the first case and the second case. Other types may be configured to be different. Also, the type of mini game started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be always different, or the type of mini game started in the first case and the second case May not be different.

In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, a first effective period display [for example, a button acceptance time meter MT displayed in a game of the acronym game shown in FIG. 231 (k), etc.] is displayed. Configured to be
In the mini game started in the second case, a second effective period display [for example, a button acceptance time meter MT displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 212 (i), etc.] is displayed. Is configured and
The first effective period display is a meter display in which the display mode changes according to the elapse of a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective [for example, shown in FIG. 231 (k) to FIG. (N) As such, the button reception time meter MT changes the display mode according to the time after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started, etc.],
The second effective period display is a meter display in which the display mode changes according to the elapse of a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective [eg, shown in FIG. 212 (i) to FIG. 212 (k) As such, the button reception time meter MT changes the display mode according to the time after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started, etc.],
The changing speed of the display mode is different between the first valid period display and the second valid period display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the types of mini games can be distinguished by looking at the effective period display.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first effective period display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first Validity displays other than the valid display may also be displayed. In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, the first effective period display may be displayed without fail, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first effective The period display may not be displayed.

  Further, the first effective period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the first case. , And the first validity period indication may be displayed.

  Also, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second effective period display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective. The effective period display other than the period display may be configured to be displayed. Also, in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective period display may be displayed without fail, and in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective The period display may not be displayed.

  Also, the second effective period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the second case. , And a second validity period indication may be displayed.

  In addition, the first effective period display may change the display mode only in accordance with the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, and other than the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective. The display mode may change depending on the situation. Further, the first effective period display may be such that the display mode necessarily changes in accordance with the passage of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, or in the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective. Depending on the situation, the display mode may not change.

  In addition, the second effective period display may change the display mode only in accordance with the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, and other than the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective. The display mode may change depending on the situation. In addition, the second effective period display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the passage of the period during which the operation of the operation means is effective, or when the period during which the operation of the operation means is effective Depending on the situation, the display mode may not change.

  Also, either one of the first validity period display and the second validity period display may not be displayed.

  In the first and second effective period displays, the speed at which the display mode changes may be faster in the first effective period display, and the second effective period display is the display mode. The changing speed of may be fast.

  Further, different display modes may be used for the first and second valid period displays, or the same display mode may be used. In the first and second effective period displays, the first effective period display may be larger in size, and the second effective period display may be larger in size. The size may be the same between the first and second validity period displays.

In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation prompting display [for example, the button image 136a displayed in the acronym game shown in FIG. Etc are displayed, and
In the mini game started in the second case, a second operation prompting display [for example, a button image 136a displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 212 (i) and a display of "continuous hit" etc.] is displayed Configured to be
The first operation prompting display is a display prompting an operation of the operation means,
The second operation prompting display is a display prompting an operation of the operation means,
The first operation prompting display is a display that can be displayed with a first number [for example, one or the like] display patterns [for example, a default display mode or the like],
The second operation prompting display is a display that can be displayed with a second number [for example, two etc.] display patterns [for example, a default display mode and a display mode etc. that is vibrating and rotating].
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, in the mini game started in the second case, the variation in the display pattern of the operation promotion display may be able to enhance the expectation to the big hit.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first An operation prompting display other than the operation prompting display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation prompt may be displayed without fail, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation It may be configured that the prompting may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first operation prompt may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the first case. The first operation prompt may be displayed.

  Also, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second operation prompt may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation Operation prompting other than prompting may be displayed. In the mini game started in the second case, the second operation prompt may be displayed without fail, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation It may be configured that the prompting may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second operation prompt may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the second case. , And a second operation prompt may be displayed.

  In addition, the first operation prompting display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operation means, or may be a display prompting other than the operation of the operation means. In addition, the first operation prompting display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operation unit, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, the second operation prompting display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operation means, or may be a display prompting other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the second operation prompting display may be a display for always prompting the operation of the operating means, or may be a display not for prompting the operation of the operating means.

  Further, the first operation prompting display may be displayable only with the first number of display patterns, or may be displayable with display patterns other than the first number of display patterns. Good. In addition, the first operation prompting display may be always displayed in the first number of display patterns, or may not be displayed in the first number of display patterns.

  In addition, the second operation prompting display may be displayable only with the second number of display patterns, or may be displayable with display patterns other than the second number of display patterns. Good. In addition, the second operation prompting display may be necessarily displayed by the second number of display patterns, or may not be displayed by the second number of display patterns.

  Also, the first number may be one or two or more.

  Further, in the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display, the first operation prompting display may be larger in size, and the second operation prompting display is larger in size. The size may be the same between the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display.

  Further, the display mode may be different between the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display, or at least a part of the display modes may be the same.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is the first result [for example, display of“ Okichi ”shown in FIG. 213 (l), etc.”]
The first result is a result at least suggesting the result of the pass / fail judgment [for example, the display of “Okichi” shown in FIG. 213 (l) is the weak cut-in image CI 1 b shown in FIG. At least suggest indication etc],
The first result is more easily derived in the mini game in the second case than in the first case.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. In addition, the mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

  The first result may at least suggest only the result of the pass / fail determination, or may at least suggest other than the result of the pass / fail determination. In addition, the first result may necessarily at least suggest the result of the pass / fail determination, or may not at least suggest the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Further, the first result may indicate the result of the success or failure determination, or may notify the result of the success or failure determination.

  In the first case, the first result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the first result may be derived in the mini game.

In addition, the first result derived when the mini game is started while the decorative symbol variation display is being executed is a notice or a pre-reading notice [eg, FIG. 216 (a) to FIG. 216 (f As shown in), in a mini game played during the variable display of the decorative symbol, a preliminary announcement or a preliminary announcement is given when the character YSM of the main character of the main character appears from the treasure box, etc.],
The first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the big hit game is a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the mini game can be functioned as a notice.

"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, a button operation effect shown in FIG. 209 (c) to FIG. (O), etc.]
In the first effect display, there is a case where a big hit notice (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice [for example, display of weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 209 (o)]" may be executed). And
As a first result derived when the mini game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display, a notice associated with the first notice may be executed [eg, FIG. c) As shown in the same figure (l), the display of "Nakakichi" derived in the mini game started during the variable display of the decorative symbol gives notice of the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to draw attention to the first result that affects the first notice.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the first effect display may be related to only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the first effect display may be always related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may be executed only in the first notice or may be executed other than the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be one in which the first notice is always performed, or there may be a case in which the first notice is not performed.

  In addition, as a first result derived in the case where the mini game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display, only the notice related to the first preliminary notice may be executed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. As a first result derived when the mini game is started while the variable display is being performed, a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be performed. In addition, as a first result derived when the mini game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display, a notice related to the first notice may be necessarily executed, or the execution of the decorative symbol variation display As a first result derived in the case where the mini game is started, a notice related to the first notice may not be executed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is the second result [for example, the display of“ Daikichi ”shown in FIG. 212 (l), etc.]”,
The second result is a result at least suggesting the result of the pass / fail judgment [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 212 (l) is the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 212 (m). At least suggest indication etc],
The second result is more easily derived in the mini game in the second case than in the first case,
If the second result is derived rather than the first result is derived as a result of the mini game, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the plurality of types of results may be only the first result and the second result, or may include results other than the first result and the second result.

  Further, the second result may be a result indicating the result of the success or failure determination, or may be a result of informing the result of the success or failure determination in advance.

  In the first case, the second result may not be derived in the mini game, or in the second case, the second result may be derived in the mini game without fail. Good.

  In addition, when the first result is derived, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is not displayed finally in the final display, and when the second result is derived, the big hit symbol is always finally determined. It may be configured to be displayed.

In addition, in the first case, “the mini game has only the third result [for example, the mini game result shown in FIG. 229 (k), FIG. 2 (k1) to FIG. It is a game to derive,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is displayed as the fourth result [for example, the display of the princess characters HM3 and“ Daikichi ”shown in FIG. 229 (k1), and FIG. 232 (A6) Display of the manner in which the clothes worn by the Bancho character are broken, etc.
The fourth result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the success / failure determination [for example, the success / failure determination of at least one of the success / failure determination of the special drawing, the success / failure determination of the spread map, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give variations to the result of the mini game.

  In addition, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the third result and the fourth result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result and the fourth result. . Moreover, the mini game may always derive the third result and the fourth result, or may not derive the third result and the fourth result.

  Also, the fourth result does not indicate the result of the success or failure determination, and is not a notification.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 237 to 290. In addition, the effect display described below may be performed by animation. Further, it goes without saying that the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

  FIGS. 237 to 290 are diagrams showing in stages the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 237 to 290, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In FIGS. 237 to 290, although the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided. It may be Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 237 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 238 shows in steps the continuation of an example of the effects shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 237 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 237 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  In the holding icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 237 (1), two reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserve icon display area, and both of the reserve icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 have default display modes. It is displayed in (Round-shaped non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 237 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult to open the power chute and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start opening 232 This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 237 (1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. It will be displayed as Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (3), it is shown that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice starts, the question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character of "chance", which suggests that the possibility of becoming a big hit is high.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (5), the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (6), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. A character of "CONTINUED" is displayed in the vicinity of the character YM, and it is informed that a pseudo-link will be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (8), after the character “I get” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by pseudo ream is started ing. After that, as shown in FIG. 237 (9), “× 2” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which indicates the number of times variable display of the second decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (11), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 237 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, there is shown a state in which a sabothani group advance notice in which a large amount of sabohani characters SBHN cross is performed. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a big expectation of big hit. That is, it can be said that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed when the Sabohani group advance notice is performed than when the Sabohani group advance notice is not performed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of SaboHani group notices are provided according to the reliability of the big hit, and a strong SaboHani group notice with the second number of SaboHani characters SBHN, and a first number of SaboHani characters SBHN. Weak Sabohani group announcements may be performed which is (a number less than the second number). The Sabo-Hani group notice shown in FIG. 237 (13) is a strong Sabo-Hani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (14), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of "SP development" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it may be developed into super reach. It has been informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 237 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (16), the button preview effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button advance presentation effect, the button acceptance time meter may be displayed to notify the operation effective period.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 237 (17), as shown in FIG. 237 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 A cut-in image is displayed that includes a balloon image in which the characters are arranged. The cut-in image displayed here is the weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the bancho is not decorated around the character of "match" in the balloon, and the big hit is more than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. It is suggested that the reliability of

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 238 (19) continued from FIG. 237 (18), the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy player, and the defeated screen is displayed. The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed on the middle pattern is displayed, and it is informed that the stop display is to be performed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5."

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 238 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed is shown in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 238 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 239 is a view showing stepwise an example of timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 240 is a view showing steps of an example of the effect shown in FIG. is there. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. 239 (1) to 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 237 (1) to FIG. 2 (2), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM1 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform display below the decimal point less than one second.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and "04: 25" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (4). . That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the characters "Make pseudo run" are displayed, and as a result of the timer display being counted down on the timer notice display TM, it is suggested that pseudo run may be performed. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01: 73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (7), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "00: 52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (7). After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (8), the characters “continuation” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is to be performed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (8).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (9), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and “goes” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM at the timing when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. The character of is displayed, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-link is displayed. "2" is displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 239 (11) to (18) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 239 (11) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 237 (10) to (17), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (18), as shown in FIG. 240 (19) following FIG. 239 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, along with the close-up image of the character A cut-in image is displayed that includes a balloon image in which the characters "match" are arranged in the balloon. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, nine pieces) of face-to-face are placed around the character of "match" in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is It suggests that the jackpot reliability is higher than that displayed. In addition, when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be determined to be a big hit (finally, a big hit symbol is determined and displayed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 240 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5."

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 240 (21), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 240 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is started, the symbol fluctuation display (the pattern change is made than when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is not started. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed. In this example of effect, even if the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is started, it may be lost.

  FIG. 241: is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 241 (1)-the same figure (4) are the same as that of FIG. 239 (1)-the same figure (4), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (5), it is shown that the disappearing animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1, it is informed that the advance notice that the pseudo-link will be performed is a false (Gasse) advance notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes "00:00", indicating that a certain effect (pseudo chain) is not performed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the true timer announcement effect is performed than when the false timer announcement effect is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, even when a false timer announcement effect is performed, it may be a big hit.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (6) shows that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the character "Sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo-link as a result of the timer advance presentation effect is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, the character "Sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is deleted.

  After that, a second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 241 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is The display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity, and it is notified that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In addition, in this example of a production, although notice of false ream by timer notice production was false notice, it may be able to be said that it has functioned as notice of reach by having shifted to reach.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 241 (9), it is shown that in the decorative symbol display device 208, the weak sabothani group preliminary notice is performed in which the number of sabothani sBHNs is smaller than the above-mentioned strong sabothani group preliminary notice. Although the weak sabothani group warning is more reliable than the case where the sabohani group warning is not given, it is less reliable than the strong sabothani group warning is given.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (10), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, display of “SP development” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and development to super reach is possible. It has been informed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 241 (11) to FIG. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 241 (11)-the same figure (17) is the same as that of FIG. 237 (15)-FIG. 238 (21), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 242 is a view stepwise showing another display example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 242 (1)-the same figure (6) are the same as that of FIG. 239 (1)-the same figure (6), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 242 (6), after “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 242 (7), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00: The third stop is performed at the timing when it becomes "00", and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. As described above, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 may be completed at the timing when the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, after the timer display in timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed, or after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, the timer display in timer notice display TM1 is "00:00 The symbol may be displayed at the same time as the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (8), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, and the character of "CONTINUE" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is to be performed. It should be noted that the character of "continue" may be displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is erased, or the timer notice display TM1 may be erased after the letter of "continue" is displayed, or the timer notice The timing at which the display TM1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the character "continuation" is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (9), the character "Gute" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 242 (7a) to FIG. (9a), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series starts The display may be maintained without erasing the timer advance notice display TM1 until it is done.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 242 (9b), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the timer notice display is made at the timing when the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link starts. The character "done" may be displayed on the TM1, and the timer advance notice effect may be successful to notify that the pseudo ream as a certain effect has been started.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 242 (9c), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the timer notice display is made at the timing when the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link starts. The characters “pseudo chain” may be displayed on the TM1, and the timer advance notice effect may be successful to notify that the pseudo chain as a certain effect has been started. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 242 (9 c), by displaying the face icon BCHO of the face of the bancho on the timer notice display TM 1, it is possible to produce an indication that a pseudo-run as a certain effect is started. It is also good.

  FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 243 (1)-the same figure (3) are the same as that of FIG. 239 (1)-the same figure (3), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (4), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed, and it is shown that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "04: 25". Moreover, in this example of presentation, the character of "reach is" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that a reach may occur.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "03: 96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "01: 73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (6).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 243 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "00: 52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (7).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 243 (8), when the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (9) A notice is given. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that strong sabochani group announcement is performed as a result of timer announcement presentation. In other words, the strong sabothani group announcement can be regarded as an example of a certain effect. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 243 (10) to (17) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 243 (10)-the same figure (17) is the same as that of FIG. 239 (15)-FIG. 240 (22), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong advance notice is started, the symbol variation display is performed than when the timer advance effect is performed and the advance advance notice is not started. In (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed. In this example of effect, even when the advance notice of the timer is performed and the advance notice of the strong group is started, it may be lost.

  FIG. 244 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 244 (1)-the same figure (8) are the same as that of FIG. 243 (1)-the same figure (8), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 244 (8), even if the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 244 (9), An example is also shown where no advance notice is given. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the notice that the strong Sabohani group notice is to be made is a false (Gase) notice as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM. . In other words, it can be said that it is shown that a certain effect (strong Sabohani group advance notice) is not performed even when the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 244 (10), the display of "SP evolution" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the vehicle will develop into a super reach.

  Subsequently, the effects shown in FIGS. 244 (11) to (17) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 244 (11)-the same figure (17) is the same as that of FIG. 243 (11)-the same figure (17), description is abbreviate | omitted. Although this effect example shows an example in which a big hit may be made even if a timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1 is false and a certain effect is not started, there may be a loss.

  FIG. 245 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 245 (1)-the same figure (8) are the same as that of FIG. 243 (1)-the same figure (8), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 245 (8), when the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. Is done. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a notice (weak sabochani group announcement) different from a certain presentation is performed as a result of timer announcement production. In other words, it can be said that when the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is shown that an effect (weak Sabohani group advance notice) different from a certain effect (strong Sabohani group advance notice) is performed, This timer advance notice effect can also be referred to as a fake timer notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (10), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, display of "SP development" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and development to super reach is possible. It has been informed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 245 (11) to FIG. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 245 (11)-the same figure (17) is the same as that of FIG. 243 (11)-the same figure (17), description is abbreviate | omitted. Even in this example of the effect, there is shown an example in which there is a case that a big hit may occur even if an effect different from a certain effect is started because the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1 is false, but it is also a loss is there.

  FIG. 246 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 247 shows a step by step an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 246 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 237 (1)-the figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1A is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of this timer advance notice display TM1A is a high reliability degree display manner, which indicates that the possibility of being a false timer notice is lower than the default display manner. When timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown may be performed without fail. Also, when the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode is displayed (the big hit symbol is determined display To make it easy to “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1A, which indicates that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (4), “00:24” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. . That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In addition, a question mark is displayed near the navigation character YM together with the characters "hold change", and as a result of the timer display being counted down in the timer notice display TM1A, the display mode of the hold icon may change. It is suggested that. That is, it is shown that this timer advance notice effect may be a pre-reading advance notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (5), it is shown that the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A is completed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A becomes “00:00”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (6), the character of “attention” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the panda, and becomes a prefetch display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1A. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "previous" are displayed, and it is notified that it is highly likely that the symbol variation display to be started next is a big hit. It should be noted that the character display of "destination" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the character display of "destination" is performed. The character display of "the first at" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 246 (11), temporary stop due to fluctuation After that, as shown in FIG. 246 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, the character of "previous" displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (14), it is shown that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character preview is started, the character "Hot me" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that the jackpot reliability is high.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (15), the timer notice display TM1A is displayed, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1A is a high reliability display mode. “20:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Moreover, in this production example, the time of the timer display displayed when the countdown is started is as long as "20:00", and the reliability of the big hit jumps more than the case where the short time is displayed. It is also suggested that it is rising. The countdown in timer advance notice display TM1A is then started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (16).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (17), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “16:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (17).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 246 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown is continued, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (18).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 247 (19) following FIG. 246 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong sagohani group advance notice is performed. Also, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues and “15:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (19). Further, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1A is overlapped by the character Sabon of Sabohani constituting the advance notice of the strong Sabohani group. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (19), in addition to the timer notice display TM1A, the second timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a plurality of timer notices are displayed in the timer notice effect is shown. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode, and "5:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. Then, it suggests that a certain production is started. Further, in this example, the timer notice display TM1 displayed later has a shorter time than the timer notice display TM1A displayed first, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 displayed later. Is completed earlier than the countdown on the timer notice display TM1A started earlier. That is, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 whose display has been started later is digested earlier. The countdown in timer notice display TM1 is then started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (20), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of “SP development” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it may be developed into a super reach. It has been informed. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues and “14:95” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (20). In addition, the timer notice display TM1 whose display is started later continues counting down, and "4:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (20).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 247 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown is continued, and "10:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (21). In addition, the timer notice display TM1 whose display has been started later continues counting down, and “1:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (20).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (22), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 started later becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed, the button notice effect is started, and the button image is displayed. It is shown that 136a is displayed in a default manner. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later is digested earlier than the timer notice display TM1A which is first started to be displayed. In this effect example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect countdown by the timer advance operation display TM1 which has been started to display later is not the start of the button advance operation effect itself, but the operation of the effect button 136 in the button advance operation effect It is considered as a notice effect started as a result of being performed, and in this example of the effect, it is to notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, but it is to notice the occurrence itself of the button advance effect. May be

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (23), as shown in FIG. 247 (24), the weak cut-in image CI1 b is displayed. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1 whose countdown has been completed continues to display "0:00" until the effect button 136 is operated and the cut-in image is displayed. In addition, when the countdown is completed and “0:00” is displayed and the button preview effect is started, it may be deleted. In this example of presentation, the notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is to be displayed is false (Gase) as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 started to be displayed later. It can be said that a certain situation is shown. Alternatively, in this example of rendering, it is shown that rendering (displaying the weak cut-in image CI1 b) different from a certain rendering (display of the strong cut-in image CI1 a) is performed as a result of the timer advance rendering. In other words, when the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", it is shown that an effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) is performed. This timer advance notice can also be referred to as a fake timer advance notice.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (25) shows that the timer notice display TM1 whose display has been started later is erased. In the timer advance notice display TM1A whose display has been started earlier, the countdown continues and “5:10” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (26), a screen is displayed in which the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy player, and defeated, and a stop symbol is displayed in the middle symbol at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues and “3: 77” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (26).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (27), it is shown that the display position of the timer notice display TM1A moves from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. In timer notice display TM 1 A, the countdown is still continued, and “2: 50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (27).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (28), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continued, and “1:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (28).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (29), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed while the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative symbol continues. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1A is erased, and the character BC3 of the bancho character whose clothes are torn along with the characters "is back" appears. In the vicinity, an exclamation mark is displayed, showing that the appearance of the Bancho character suddenly is surprising. Then, three decoration symbols of "decoration 5" are displayed, and it is informed that three "decorations 5" are aligned to be a big hit. That is, in this example of presentation, an example is shown in which a resurrection presentation is performed informing that a big hit will be made as a certain presentation performed as a result of the timer announcement presentation by timer announcement display TM 1A.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (31), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 247 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 and the characters of "Yatteze" is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance effect is performed and the resurrection effect is started, the symbol fluctuation display (the symbol fluctuation is displayed than when the timer advance effect is performed and the resurrection effect is not started. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed.

  In this example, when displaying the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode, the time to be displayed first on the timer display is "3:00" or "20:00", for example. When the advance notice display is displayed in the high reliability display mode or in the special display mode, the first time displayed on the timer display or the first time displayed on the timer display when the timer advance display is displayed in the default display mode The time (second time) may be longer than the time (first time) displayed on the screen. As a result, depending on the display mode of the timer advance notice display, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to a certain advance notice display to be executed.

  FIG. 248 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 248 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 237 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (3), it is shown that a timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (4), a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "change on hold", and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is counted down. It is suggested that the display mode of the icon may change. That is, it is shown that this timer advance notice effect may be a pre-reading advance notice. On the other hand, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains "03:00".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 248 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an appearance that the disappearing animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started and the timer notice display TM1 is erased is shown. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes is false (useless) notice. In other words, in this effect example, before the countdown of the timer display in timer notice display TM1 is started, timer notice display TM1 is erased, and a certain effect (change effect of the display mode of the hold icon) is not performed. It can be said that the situation is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (6), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the character "Sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that change presentation of the display mode of the hold icon as a result of the timer advance presentation is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Also, at this time, the character of "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (8), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (9), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 248 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 249 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 250 shows in a stepwise manner the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure, and FIG. 251 is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of an effect shown in FIG. 250 in steps. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 249 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 237 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this effect example, two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. In addition, three or more timer announcement effects may be started simultaneously. These two timer announcements TM1L and TM1R are both default display modes. “10:00” is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, suggesting that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. In addition, “45:00” is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, suggesting that a certain notice effect is started 45 seconds after the countdown is started. doing. In this example, since two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R simultaneously start to count down, some notice effects are provided both when 10 seconds and 45 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. It is suggested that be started. Here, the certain advance notice that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and the certain show effect that may be started when 45 seconds have elapsed may be the same. It may be different. In addition, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has a face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, suggesting that a strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect. . It should be noted that the addition of the face icon BCHO of the head of the game may notify that the reliability of the big hit is increased. It should be noted that multiple types of icons to be added to the timer advance notice display are prepared, and the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the type of the added icon, and the type of certain advance notice effect that may be performed May be different.

  After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (4), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is “9: "25" is displayed, and "44: 25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. In addition, in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (5), “9:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "44:00" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (6), “8:75” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "43:75" is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, the character “open right” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (7), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side displays "4:00", In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "39:00" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (8), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (8), “3:67” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "38:67" is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (9), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of “effect activation” is displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. It is done. As a result, in the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1L displayed on the left side, it is informed that it is ensured that a certain effect will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this effect example, the appearance of the princess character HME makes it possible to predict that a pseudo-link will be performed as a certain effect. That is, in this effect example, the princess character HME can be said to be a pseudo-announced notice item (sometimes referred to as a "notice icon"). At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is added, “41:67” is displayed, and the countdown continues. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "1:67" is displayed, and the countdown continues also here. The addition of the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right may not be performed. In this embodiment, there may be a case where it is possible to boost the effect by the mini game during the countdown by the timer advance presentation effect until the countdown is completed (until "0:00" is reached).

  After that, the mini game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (10), the characters “in preparation for presentation” are displayed above the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, and pseudo-run is performed It is informed that it is a priori. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo run" are displayed, and a notice of anticipation that pseudo run is to be performed is also made here. In the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (10), “1: 33” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:33" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (11), it is shown that the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is continuing. Further, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed in a mode in which the princess character HME is added, that is, displaying of the notice item of the pseudo run is a visual indication that the pseudo run is performed. It may be easy to understand. Thus, in this presentation example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. In the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (11), “1:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:00" is displayed.

  After that, the countdown in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is continuously performed, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left becomes “0:00” at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (12). When the countdown is completed, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-replay symbol RP-decorative 6". In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "40:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (12).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (13), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is erased, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Here, after the timer advance notice display TM1L is erased, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series may be started, or after the variation display of the second decoration symbol by the pseudo-series is started, the timer The advance notice display TM1L may be erased, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by pseudo-run may be started at the timing when the timer notice display TM1L is erased. Also, in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed, and it is notified by the display of the icon that the pseudo link has been performed. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown is continued, and “39:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (13).

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is started, the symbol fluctuation display (the pattern change is made than when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is not started. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (14), a new timer notice display TM1N is started on the upper left side of the display screen, and a new timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N is a default display mode. For example, the frame is in-framed from the left side of the display screen. “10:00” is displayed as a timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1N, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this example, the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N starts counting down later than the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right where the countdown has already been started, but the timer notice display displayed on the right The countdown will be completed earlier than TM1R. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and “38:15” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (14).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (15), it is shown that the timer display is being counted down in each of the timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 249 (15), “9: 25” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is “37: "40" is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side starts.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (16) shows that the second mini game has been started. When the mini game is started, as described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center, and the left and right chest image BXL and the right chest image are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. The BXR and the BXR are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “select with cross key” are displayed. In addition, in the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (16), “9:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "37:15" is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. The two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R respectively continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (17), “8:75” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "36:90" is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, the character “open right” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (18), the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side displays "4:00", In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "32:15" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (19) continued to FIG. 249 (18), effects are started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center and is selected. The left treasure chest image BXL which is not present is erased. And the character of "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (19), “3:67” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "31: 82" is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (20), the character BBA of the nephew appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of "Uhihi" is displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game is failed. ing. As a result, it is notified that the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1N displayed on the left side is a false timer announcement effect. In the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (20), “1:67” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "29: 82" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (21), it is shown that the disappearing animation is started in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, it is informed that the notice that a certain notice effect is performed is a false (case) notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes "00:00", indicating that a certain effect is not performed. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues and “29:49” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (21). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed, and it is informed that the number of times of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series is two. When the princess character HME is displayed, the display of “× 2” may not be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (22), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is completely erased. In response to this, the character "Sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo-link as a result of the timer advance presentation effect is not performed. Further, the countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, and "27:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (22).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (23), “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol to form a reach state, and “reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Is notified that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 250 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R is moved from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. Then, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1R is overlapped with the character Sabon of Sabohani constituting the strong Sabohani group notice. It should be noted that a strong advance notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R is completed, or a strong advance notice of the strong breakout group is started before the movement of the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R is completed. Alternatively, the strong advance notice may be started when movement of the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R is completed. Alternatively, the strong advance notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started, or the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R may be started after the strong advance notice of the strong group is started. Alternatively, the strong advance notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “25:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (24).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (25), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, display of "SP development" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it may be developed into a super reach. It has been informed. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is continued, and "24:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (26), it is shown that the display screen is darkened and a blackout effect where lightning crosses is performed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is continued, and “21:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (26).

  When the blackout effect ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (27) shows that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the word "strong cut-in chance" is displayed together with the face icon of the Bancho, and it is shown that a mini-game based on the lottery is being started. Then, it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the face of the bancho added to the timer notice display TM1R moves to the field of the middle and is positioned at the middle of the three options. That is, the display of the face icon BCHO of the face of the bankmaster added to the timer notice display can be said to be a notice display that the mini game is started by the lottery. In addition, the character of "Select" is displayed below the field, and it is prompted to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the face icon BCHO of the Bancho. . In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is continued, and “21:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (27).

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The face icon BCHO moves to the right of the three options. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is continued, and “18:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (28).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three options in the field is selected, if the operation effective period elapses, the timing shown in FIG. The production is started. At this time, one of “o” indicating success and “x” indicating failure is displayed at the three end points of the field, respectively. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the middle end, and "o" is displayed at the right end. ing. In addition, the display number of "(circle)" may be 2 or more, and "(circle)" may be displayed on all the end points. Also at this time, the countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1R, and “18:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (29).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 250 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho moves on the line along the rule of the lottery. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “17:55” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (30).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (31), it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the head of the team has reached the end point on the right side among the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by the lottery is derived. In this rendering example, while the face icon BCHO of the Bancho reaches the end point on the right side where "o" is displayed, the characters "strong cut-in confirmed" are displayed, and the mission is successful, and the strong cut-in image It has been notified that it has been determined that the CI 1 a is to be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (31).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 250 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword adversary of the enemy face is displayed. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are not displayed. Then, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters "Ken-Au reach" are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. Also, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit is improved. There is. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the countdown is continued, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (32).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (33), it is shown that the button preview effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in a default mode. At this time, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the timer display becomes “0:00” and it is shown that the countdown is completed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect relating to the timer notice display TM1RA is the timer notice effect relating to the button effect and is the timer notice effect that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the button effect. . The timer advance notice display TM1RA which becomes “0:00” is maintained until the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated, but after the countdown is completed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. May be erased before it is displayed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (34), as shown in FIG. 250 (35), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a strong cut-in image CI1a. Thereafter, the timer advance notice display TM1RA is erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 250 (36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the middle. "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (37) continued to FIG. 250 (36), a state in which temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5" It is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. The display of the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 can be visually recognized. After that, as shown in FIG. 251 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the "big five" of "decor 5-decor 5-decor 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  In this production example, the timer announcement production is performed and the pseudo run is started, and further, the timer announcement production is performed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the big hit design is determined and displayed. However, they are configured to be lost.

  FIG. 252 is a view illustrating the steps of another example of the effect following FIG. 250 (24). In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, although FIG. 252 (25a)-the same figure (28a) are the same as FIG. 250 (25)-the same figure (28), in this example of a production, in the blackout effect in FIG. 252 (26a), countdown display The difference is that the internal timer notice display TM1R is temporarily hidden.

  When the operation effective period elapses while the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three options in the field is selected, the effect shown in FIG. 252 (29a) is displayed. It is started. In this rendering example, three icons are displayed at the three end points of the field at this time. Specifically, a panda icon indicating that the mini game has failed is displayed at the end point on the left side of the three end points, and a center icon indicating that the mini game is successful is displayed at the center end point. Is displayed, and at the end point on the right side, an icon of Sabohani indicating that the mini game has been very successful is displayed. Note that there may be no panda icon, two panda icons, or all panda icons. In addition, there may be no bancho icon, there may be two, or all of them may be bancho icons. In addition, there may be no Sabohani icon, there may be two, or all of them may be Sabohani icons. Also at this time, the countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1R, and “18:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (29a).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 252 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho moves on the line along the rule of the lottery. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (30a).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (31a), it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the head of the team has reached the end point on the right side among the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by the lottery is derived. In this production example, the icon of Bach's face BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where the SaboHani's icon is displayed, and the characters "strongest cut-in confirmed" are displayed, and the mission is a great success, as will be described later. It is notified that it is decided that the cut-in image CI1v is to be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (31a).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 252 (32a), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the enemy character face each other is displayed. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are not displayed. Then, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters "Ken-Au reach" are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. Also, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit is improved. There is. Furthermore, in this example of a production, the character of "in preparation for the strongest cut-in" is displayed with the character of Sabo Hani below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and notice that the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed It is informing. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the countdown is continued, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (32a).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (33a), it is shown that the button preview effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. At this time, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the timer display becomes “0:00” and it is shown that the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (34a), as shown in FIG. 252 (35a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strongest cut-in image CI1v. At this time, the display of the character of "Sabo Hani" and the character "in preparation for the strongest cut-in" is erased. The strongest cut-in image CI1v includes a balloon image in which the character of "match" is arranged in the balloon together with the image of the character of the character of the lord, and a display mode surrounded by a large number of characters of Sabothani. It is a cut-in image. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, it may be determined that the big hit. In this effect example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1RA, the display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v which is a advance notice effect more advantageous than the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance effect is performed. The situation is shown. Here, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed as a certain advance notice effect, or may be displayed as a different notice effect than the certain advance notice effect. After the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (36a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (37a), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. The display of the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 can be visually recognized. After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (38a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “happiness 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 253 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 253 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 237 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this example of effect, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the left side of the display screen by the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains “10:00”. Note that the timer advance notice effect in this production example is a timer advance notice effect indicating that there is a possibility that a pseudo-link is performed as a certain advance notice effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (6). The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  After that, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, the character “open right” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (8), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (9), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “pseudo run stock” are displayed, and the mission of the mini game is achieved. It is informed that it will take place. As a result, in the timer advance notice relating to the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that when the countdown of the timer display is completed, it is ensured that the pseudo-link as a certain advance notice effect is performed. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started. In this effect example, it is shown that the result of the mini game is derived and displayed before the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is started.

  Thereafter, the mini game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (10), the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1A) It is shown that the jackpot reliability has improved. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 is stepped up by the success of the mini game. Further, at the lower left of the display screen, the princess character HME as a notice item is displayed, and a notice of anticipation that the pseudo ream is to be performed is made. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the notice item is displayed when the mini game is successful. Note that the timer display in timer advance notice display TM1A is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 253 (11), a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" causes temporary fluctuation due to swing fluctuation. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Note that, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1A is continuously displayed even during the finalized display of the symbol, and it is also shown that the princess character HME as the advance notice item is also displayed. That is, these displays will be displayed across the next symbol fluctuation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer advance notice display TM1A and the princess character HME is displayed as the advance notice of the pseudo continuous effect. Note that the timer display in timer advance notice display TM1A is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Note that the timer display in timer advance notice display TM1A is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (14), “06:44” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "03: 96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (15).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01: 73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (16).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (17), the third stop is performed at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A becomes "0:00", and the middle symbol is a replay symbol as a pseudo run symbol. It is shown that the symbol RP is stopped and displayed. After that, the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started as described above.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is started, the symbol fluctuation display (the pattern change is made than when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is not started. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 253. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 254 (1)-the same figure (8) are the same as that of FIG. 253 (1)-the same figure (8), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (9), a character of “婆” appears on the right treasure box image BXR and a character of “ひ” is displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. . As a result, it is informed that the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1 is a false timer announcement effect. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (10), it is shown that the disappearance animation is started in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the advance notice that a certain advance notice effect is performed is a false (Gasse) advance notice. In other words, it can be said that although the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it is erased before the countdown is started, and it is shown that a certain effect has not been performed.

  Thereafter, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, the decoration symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol as described above, as shown in FIG. 254 (11). -Temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decor 6". After that, as shown in FIG. 254 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. As described above, in this example of the effect, since the mini game has failed, the prefetch notice by the timer notice display TM1 ends in the middle because it is a fake notice, and as a result, the prefetch notice is not performed. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (16), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 254 (17) Is performed, and then the finalized display is made with the combination of the decorative designs of the "deals 5-dec. 6-dec. 6".

  In this example of presentation, even if the mini game fails and the advance notice by the advance notice by the timer advance effect is a false notice, it may be a big hit in the symbol variation display which is the target of the advance notice.

  FIG. 255 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 256 shows the step of an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 255 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 237 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (3), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (4), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the period when the mini game is started and the selection operation by the player is received. In this example of effect, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the left side of the display screen by the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains "10:00".

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, the character “open right” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (7), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (8), the face icon BCF of the head of the bancho appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “strong cut-in determined” are displayed, and the mini game mission is achieved. It is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. A stop is made. At this time, the Bancho face icon BCF is reduced in size and displayed (stocked) in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. By the stock of the face icon BCF of the head of the bank, the advance notice of the strong cut-in image CI1a is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Note that, in this demonstration example, the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol, and it is also shown that the icon BCF of the face of the bancho as a notice item is also displayed. . That is, these displays will be displayed across the next symbol fluctuation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer notice display TM1 and the display of the face icon BCF of the master's face are displayed as a prefetch notice. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (11), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (12), the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the panda, and becomes the display mode of the advance notice. Although the change of the display mode of the change icon h0 is performed by, for example, the hold change animation, the display mode may be changed by the switching display without the hold change animation being performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 255 (13), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (14), “9: 95” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (15), it is shown that the disappearing animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the advance notice that a certain advance notice effect is performed is a false (Gasse) advance notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes "00:00", indicating that a certain effect is not performed. Further, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a timer notice display TM1 which is a false notice is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The timer advance notice by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this production example is a timer advance notice relating to the fact that the pseudo run is performed as a certain advance play, that is, the timer advance display TM1 is erased, so that the pseudo run is realized. It may be recognized that it does not occur. In addition, before the disappearance animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, it is also possible to perform a garbled effect to produce that effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (16) shows that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (19) following FIG. 255 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed below the center of the display screen, and it is informed that the reach state has been reached. Ru. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (21), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. It has been informed. Here, since the Bancho face icon BCF is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display of "SP Evolution" is overlapped with the Bancho face icon BCF, and the Bancho face icon BCF is displayed. It is considered more difficult to see than if not.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 256 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword superior of the enemy character face each other is displayed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (23), the button preview effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (24), as shown in FIG. 256 (25), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a corresponds to the fact that the notice has been made by the face icon BCF of the screen leader displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, it can be said that a state is shown in which the result of the mini game is regarded as a prefetch notice of the notice effect performed in the symbol variation display performed later. Further, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is related to the result of the mini game, and is irrelevant to the timer advance presentation started at the same time. That is, it is shown that only the mini game of the strong cut-in image CI1a is a true preview effect, while the mini game and the timer preview effect are shown to be related.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (27), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Note that, in this example, when the face icon BCF of the Bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mini game, the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a Big hit symbol is configured to be displayed more clearly than when no is displayed, but it may be lost even if the face icon BCF of the face of the ban appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed It is also good.

  FIG. 257 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 257 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 237 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen due to the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this example of effect, the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is added to the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a certain advance notice effect is displayed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 257 (4), “0: 24” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. . That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of the characters "hold change", and as a result of the timer display being counted down in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It is suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is shown that this timer advance notice effect may be a pre-reading advance notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (5), it is shown that the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “0:00”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (6), the character of "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the panda, and becomes a read-ahead display mode. That is, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "previous" are displayed, and it is notified that it is highly likely that the symbol variation display to be started next is a big hit.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 257 (11) After that, as shown in FIG. 257 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, the character of "previous" displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  FIG. 258 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer advance presentation effect shown in FIG. 257 in a stepwise manner. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 258 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 257 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen due to the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 257 (3) in that the face icon BCHO of the game title is not added to the timer advance notice display TM1. This suggests that the possibility of displaying a certain advance notice effect is lower than when the face icon BCHO of the head of the game is added.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (4), “0:24” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. . That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of the characters "hold change", and as a result of the timer display being counted down in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It is suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is shown that this timer advance notice effect may be a pre-reading advance notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (5), it is shown that the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (6), the character of "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  However, as shown in FIG. 258 (7), in this effect example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed from the default display mode. That is, in this effect example, it is indicated that it is a false timer notice effect that a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by timer notice display TM1 is not performed. ing. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is false effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. At this time, the character "Sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 258 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, the character of "previous" displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  FIG. 259 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. 259 (1) to 6 (6) are the same as FIGS. 241 (1) to 6 (6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased in FIG. 259 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (7), the erased timer notice display TM1 is recovered and redisplayed. It is shown. Also, at this time, the face icon BCHO of the Bancho has been added, which suggests that the possibility of displaying a pseudo-train as a certain advance notice effect is high. That is, it is shown that the lost timer notice display TM1 is not the timer notice display TM1 relating to the false timer notice effect but the true timer notice display TM1. It is also shown that the timer notice display TM1 is stepped up when the redisplay of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. Also, from another point of view, it can be said that a plurality of timer advance notice effects directed to the same certain effect are performed. Here, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is redisplayed, the execution of a certain advance notice effect (pseudo series) performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect may be decided. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo-ha” are displayed again. At the timing shown in FIG. 259 (7), “03:00” is displayed as the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, and it is informed that there is a possibility that pseudo-linkage will occur in 3 seconds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “02:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (8).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "01:23" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (9).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (10), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "00: 35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (10). After that, as shown in FIG. 259 (11), the character of “continuation” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is to be performed. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (11).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 259 (12), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and “goes” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM at the timing when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. The character of is displayed, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 259 (13), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-link is displayed. "2" is displayed.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is started, the symbol fluctuation display (the pattern change is made than when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is not started. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 261 shows the step example of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 260 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 237 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “25:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 25 seconds after the countdown is started. This effect example shows a timer advance effect that may cause the strong cut-in image CI1a to be displayed as a certain advance effect. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the letters “SP development by chance” are displayed, and mission effects are started to show that the development of the super reach dramatically increases the expectation of the big hit. Are also shown. In this rendering example, when the mission is achieved, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain preview rendering performed as a result of the timer preview rendering is performed. Therefore, there are cases where it can be expected that the strong cut-in image CI1a appears by shifting to the super reach.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (4), “23:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. . That is, it is shown that two seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 260 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed below the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “18:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (7).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 260 (8) to FIG. 10 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (10).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (11), it is shown that the strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. Strong Sabohanni group notice is the notice with high reliability of the big hit, and it shifts to super reach with high probability. Therefore, the occurrence of strong Sabohani group announcements may dramatically increase expectations for achieving the mission. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Also, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 260 (11), the character Saboh of the Sabohani constituting the advance notice of the strong Sabohani group overlaps with the timer announcement display TM1, but the timer announcement display TM1 is overlapped with the character SAHN of Savoy May be Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (12), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, display of “SP development” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and development to super reach is possible. It has been informed. This may recognize that a mission is achieved. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "12: 90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (12).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 260 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer attention” are displayed to urge attention to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (14), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes is performed. As a result, it is informed that the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes to a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit and the execution probability of a certain advance effect are improved. Note that the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 may change (demotion) in the display mode in which the reliability of the big hit or the execution probability of a certain advance effect decreases.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 260 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display It is shown changing to TM1B) and stepping up, and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit has dramatically improved. The timer notice display TM1B of this special display mode is a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit is higher than that of the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode, that is, high when the timer notice display of the special display mode is displayed. The jackpot symbol is more easily determined and displayed than when the timer advance notice display of the reliability display mode is displayed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display of a special display mode is displayed, it may be considered as a big hit decision. Furthermore, the timer preview display TM1B in which the display mode has been changed is added with the face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, and it is predicted that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "4: 32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (15).

  Then, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (16). That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mission being achieved. Furthermore, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display. Therefore, it can be said that, in this effect example, the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 260 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (18), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 261 (19) following FIG. 260 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 262 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 262 (1)-the same figure (9) are the same as that of FIG. 260 (1)-the same figure (9), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6” during normal reach, and the transition to the super reach is not performed, and the decoration of the lost “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” It is informed that it is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that transition to the super reach is not made. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “15:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (10).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (11), since the transition to the super reach is not made, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. Be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the notice that the advance notice effect is to be performed is false (gasse). In other words, because the mission was not achieved before the timer announcement display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is erased in the middle of the countdown and it is shown that a certain effect is not performed. it can. The timer advance notice by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this production example is a timer advance notice concerning that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect, that is, the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. It may be recognized that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is not performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 262 (13), in the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5 The temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative design of "", and then, as shown in FIG. 262 (14), in the decorative design display device 208, the decorative design of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" It is displayed by the combination of. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this example of presentation, even if the timer advance presentation is finished without developing into a super reach, there may be a case where a big hit occurs.

  FIG. 263 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer advance presentation effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. FIG. 264 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 263 in a stepwise manner. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 263 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 260 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “5:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which indicates that a certain advance notice effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, this point is different from the effect shown in FIG. 260 (3). This effect example shows a timer advance effect that may cause the strong cut-in image CI1a to be displayed as a certain advance effect. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the letters “SP development by chance” are displayed, and mission effects are started to show that the development of the super reach dramatically increases the expectation of the big hit. Are also shown. In this rendering example, when the mission is achieved, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain preview rendering performed as a result of the timer preview rendering is performed. Therefore, there are cases where it can be expected that the strong cut-in image CI1a appears by shifting to the super reach. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 263 (4) to FIG. 26 (13) are performed. Note that the effect examples shown in FIG. 263 (4) to FIG. 26 (14) are the same as FIG. 260 (4) to FIG. 260 except that the timer display on the timer notice display TM 1 remains unchanged at “5:00”. The description is omitted because it is similar to that of FIG.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B). It is shown that it has been changed and stepped up, and that the reliability of the big hit has been dramatically improved. Furthermore, the timer preview display TM1B in which the display mode has been changed is added with the face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, and it is predicted that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is not yet started, and remains at "5:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (15).

  After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1B is started, and “4:11” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1B at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (16). . As described above, the timer advance notice in this presentation example does not start the countdown of the timer display when it is started, but starts the countdown of the timer display when the mission is achieved.

  Then, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1B is "0:00", the strong symbol image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (17). That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mission being achieved. Furthermore, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display. Therefore, it can be said that, in this effect example, the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 263 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (19) continued to FIG. 263 (18), a state in which temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5” It is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 264 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer advance presentation effect shown in FIGS. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 265 (1)-the same figure (9) are the same as that of FIG. 263 (1)-the same figure (9), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the transition to the super reach is not performed, and the decoration of the "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" It is informed that it is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that transition to the super reach is not made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (11), since the transition to the super reach is not made, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearing animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. Be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the notice that the advance notice effect is to be performed is false (gasse). In other words, it appears that the timer announcement display TM1 is started but the mission is not achieved before the countdown is started, and it is erased before the countdown is started and a certain effect is not performed. It can be said that it is shown. The timer advance notice by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this production example is a timer advance notice concerning that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect, that is, the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. It may be recognized that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is not performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 265 (12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 265 (13), in the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5 The temporary stop by swinging movement is performed by the combination of the decorative designs of "", and then, as shown in FIG. 265 (14), in the decorative design display device 208, the decorative design of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" It is displayed by the combination of. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 266 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 260 to FIG. 261, and FIG. 267 is a diagram showing the example of the effects shown in FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 266 (1) to (14) are the same as FIGS. 260 (1) to (14), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B) Step up is shown, and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit has dramatically improved. Furthermore, the timer preview display TM1B in which the display mode has been changed is added with the face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, and it is predicted that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. Further, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 260 (15) in that the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1B is reset to "5:00". At this time, the countdown of the timer display is not started, and the display of "5:00" is maintained. As described above, in this presentation example, the change in the display mode of the timer advance notice is made easy to understand by resetting the time in the timer display at the timing when the mission is achieved and the display manner of the timer advance notice is changed. ing. In addition, after the mission has been achieved, while the display to step up the display mode of the timer advance notice display to the display mode with high reliability is performed, it is shown that the timer display on the timer advance notice display is reset to the appropriate time again. It can also be said that

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1B is started, and “4: 32” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1B at the timing shown in FIG. 266 (16). . Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 266 (17) to FIG. 267 (20) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 266 (17) to FIG. 267 (20) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 260 (16) to FIG. 261 (19), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 268 is a view showing in steps the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 269 shows in a step the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 268 (1)-the same figure (9) are the same as that of FIG. 239 (1)-the same figure (9), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (10), for example, as shown in FIG. 241 (5) and described above, in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed. It is shown that the disappearance animation is being performed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 268 (11), not only is the timer advance notice display TM1 not deleted, but the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and “22: 35” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is revealed that the animation performed in FIG. 268 (10) is not a lost animation but is a timer preview addition animation which is an animation similar to the lost animation. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer notice effect is started using the same timer notice display TM1. Further, in this presentation example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer advance notice display is the same as a part of the animation for deleting the timer advance notice display. Note that the animation may be completely different between the timer advance announcement animation and the disappearance animation.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (12), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed by the pseudo-link. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (13), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed below the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “18:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (14).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 268 (15) to (17), normal reach is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (17).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (18), it is shown that the strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (19) following FIG. 268 (18), while the advance notice of the sabo hani group is continuously performed, the display of “SP evolution” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, It has been reported that it will develop into super reach. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "12: 90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (19).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 269 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer attention” are displayed to urge attention to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (20).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (21), the timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is performed. The effect of this timer display step-up animation is similar to that of the lost animation described above. That is, it can be said that a part of the animation changing the display mode of the timer advance notice display is the same as a part of the animation canceling the timer advance notice display. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

  After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 269 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is default display. A mode is changed from the mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B), and a state of stepping up is shown, and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved. In addition, the timer preview display TM1B in which the display mode has been changed is added with the face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, a countdown is performed, and "4: 32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (22).

  Then, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (23). That is, it can be said that the timer announcement effect related to the timer announcement display TM1B in this presentation example is a timer announcement effect about the strong cut-in image CI1a being displayed as a certain announcement effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 269 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (25), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 269 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In addition, in this production example, the timer announcement production is performed and the pseudo run is started, furthermore, the timer announcement production is performed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. The timer advance presentation effect is performed to start the pseudo-link, and further, the timer advance presentation effect may be performed to display the strong cut-in image CI1a or may be lost.

  FIG. 270 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 268 to 269, and FIG. 271 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effects shown in FIG. 270 step by step. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 270 (1)-the same figure (9) are the same as that of FIG. 268 (1)-the same figure (9), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (10), it is shown that the disappearance animation described above is being performed to erase the timer announcement display TM1 when the countdown in the timer announcement display TM1 is completed. There is. This lost animation is at least partially the same display mode as the lost animation shown in FIG. 268 (10) and described above. As a result, it may be possible to have an expectation as to whether the timer advance notice display is continuously displayed or deleted.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (11), in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (12), the first stop is performed, and the "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed by the pseudo-link.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (13), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 270 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed below the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 270 (15) to (17), normal reach is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that the middle symbol is fluctuating at a low speed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (18), it is shown that the weak sabothani group advance notice is performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (19) following FIG. 270 (18), while advance notice of the sabo hani group is continuously performed, “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, It has been reported that it will develop into super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 271 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified, which is different from the effect shown in FIG. 269 (20).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (21), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (22), a screen is displayed in which the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy player, and defeated, and the stop symbol is displayed in the middle symbol in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 271 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 272 is a diagram illustrating the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 241. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 272 (1)-the same figure (4) are the same as that of FIG. 241 (1)-the same figure (4), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (5), while the countdown is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, the timer notice addition animation which is the same effect as the disappearing animation is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is similar to the lost animation. It shows that the effect is displayed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, the possibility that the advance notice that the pseudo-link will be performed is a false (notice) advance notice. As a result, the player may be able to cause the timer notice display TM1 to be erased and to be considered as a false notice.

  However, as shown in FIG. 272 (6), not only is the timer advance notice display TM1 not deleted, but the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and “20:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is revealed that the animation performed in FIG. 272 (5) is not actually a lost animation but a timer preview addition animation which is an animation similar to the lost animation. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is possible to recognize that another certain effect is performed by performing addition of the timer display while predicting that the pseudo-link is performed as a certain effect. is there. Further, in this presentation example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer advance notice display is the same as a part of the animation for deleting the timer advance notice display. Note that the animation may be completely different between the timer advance announcement animation and the disappearance animation.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (7), the first stop is performed, and the “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "Hot me" is displayed to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (8), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed below the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (9).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 272 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that a weak sabothani group advance notice is performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "13:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (10).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (11), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of “SP development” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it may be developed into a super reach. It has been informed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "10:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (11).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 272 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "4:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (12).

  Then, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (13). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice relating to the timer advance notice display TM1 in this production example is a timer advance notice concerning that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a given advance notice.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  In addition, in this production example, the timer display addition is performed, the timer advance presentation effect related to the timer display after the addition is performed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed and there is a case where there is a big hit May be

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (14), the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy player, and the defeated screen is displayed, and the central symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped in the middle symbol "Decoration 6" scheduled to be displayed is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". As described above, even when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect as a result of the timer advance notice effect, there may be a display result of the lost.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 272 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 273 is a view showing in steps the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 274 shows the step of an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 273 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 273 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing hold of the special view 1 is displayed, and three hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. The three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special drawing 1 are displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 The second holding icon h12 and the third holding icon h13 move to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and the display position of the second holding icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. Of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is a default display mode, but the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is a special display mode. The timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side also display "03:00" as a timer display, and a notice is given 3 seconds after the countdown is started. It indicates that the production will be started. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has a face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a certain notice effect will be performed. Further, in each of the timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the countdown of the timer display is not started, and both of the timer displays are maintained at "03:00".

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. Then, in the approximate center of the display screen, the characters “Hime appearance and strong timer activation” are displayed, and the appearance of the princess character from the treasure box causes an advantageous timer notice of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. It is notified that the timer announcement effect by the timer announcement display TM1RB displayed on the right side which is the display is performed. Note that the timer displays in the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (5). The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. Further, the timer displays in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (6), the characters “open right” are displayed near the navigation character YM. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer displays in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (7), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer displays in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (8), the character BBA of a nephew appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of “bad nephew” is displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. ing. Further, near the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and the navigation character YM also reports that the mission of the mini game has failed. Note that the timer displays in the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (9), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “here” are displayed, and the right of the two timer notices TM1L and TM1RB, which is an advantageous timer notice. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the screen is erased is started and the timer notice display TM1RB is deleted. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer announcement of the two timer announcement displays TM1L and TM1RB, is not performed at least. . Note that both of the two timer announcements TM1L and TM1RB may be erased, and the timer announcement effect relating to any timer announcement may not be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right is completely erased and only the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left is displayed. ing. In addition, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 273 (11), temporary combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 273 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1L is continuously displayed even while the symbol is displayed. That is, the timer notice display TM1L is displayed across the next symbol fluctuation display. Note that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1L is kept at "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Note that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1L is kept at "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (14), it is shown that the disappearing animation for the timer notice display TM1L is started and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that it is a false (gasse) advance notice in which no advance notice effect is performed for any of the two timer advance notice displays due to a failure in the mini game.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (15), a state is shown in which the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (17), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (18), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 274 (19) following FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 274 (20), a finalized display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 5”. Be done. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this production example, although the mini game has failed and any timer announcement rendering is terminated halfway and finally the lost symbol is displayed, it may be a big hit.

  FIG. 275 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 273 through FIG. 274 in a step-by-step manner, and FIG. 276 is a diagram showing the example of the effect shown in FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 275 (1)-the same figure (7) are the same as that of FIG. 273 (1)-the same figure (7), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “I look forward to it” are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. This is different from the effect shown in FIG. 273 (8) in that Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "is a chance" are displayed, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game is successful. Note that the timer displays in the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (9), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "here" are displayed, and a timer notice that is not the advantageous timer notice among the two timer notices TM1L and TM1RB. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side as the display is erased is started and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer announcement of the two timer announcement displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed. Therefore, in comparison with the effect shown in FIG. 273 (9), the timer preview effect having a high possibility that a certain effect will be performed is performed, thereby improving the expectation for the certain effect to be performed. There are times when you can. It should be noted that both of the two timer announcements TM1L and TM1RB may not be erased, and the timer announcement effect relating to any timer announcement may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is completely erased and only the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is displayed. ing. Also, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 275 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" causes temporary change due to swing fluctuation A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 275 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Note that, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, timer notice display TM1RB will be displayed across the next symbol fluctuation display. Note that the timer display in timer notification display TM1RB remains "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Note that the timer display in timer notification display TM1RB remains "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (14), the timer notice display TM1RB is not erased, and the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 275 (14), "02: 76" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “focus on hold” are displayed, and there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the timer advance notice display TM1RB, the countdown is continued, and "01:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 275 (15).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "00:00". It changes, and it becomes a display mode of prefetching. That is, in this example of presentation, an example is shown in which the presentation of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain presentation performed as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the timer announcement display TM1RB. Note that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of the Sabo Hani after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1RB becomes "00:00", or the first After the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB is " The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when 00:00 is reached. In addition, the hold icon of the display mode of this Sabo Hani has a higher jackpot reliability than the hold icon of the above-mentioned panda. In addition, when the holding icon of the display mode of the safari is displayed, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the holding icon. That is, it may be an advance notice of jackpot determination.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (17), the timer notice display TM1RB is erased when the countdown is completed, and thereafter, the first stop is performed, and the "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left pattern. . In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (19) following FIG. 275 (18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 276 (20) In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 276 (21), the finalized display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 5". Be done. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 277 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 275 to 276 in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 278 is a diagram showing the example of the effect shown in FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. 277 (1) to 2 (2) are the same as FIG. 275 (1) to FIG. 2 (2), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this effect example, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB differs in that “18:00” is displayed, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the effect shown in). As described above, by differentiating the time indicated by the timer display between the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, it is difficult to understand which notice effect corresponds to a certain notice effect, and the game is made monotonous. In some cases. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 277 (4) to FIG. 7 (7) are performed. In addition, the effects shown in FIG. 277 (4) to FIG. 7 (7) are the time shown by the timer display of the timer notice display TM 1 RB displayed on the right with the effects shown in FIG. 275 (4) to FIG. Are the same except that the

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “I look forward to super” are displayed, and the mini game mission is achieved It is shown. Moreover, this presentation example is different from the presentation shown in FIG. 275 (8) in that it is suggested that a special benefit is given by the character display of "Be super expecting". Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "is a chance" are displayed, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game is successful. Of the timer displays in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left remains "03:00", and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right is It is assumed that "18:00" remains, and neither countdown has been started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (9), the characters “two are present” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which is not an advantageous timer notice of the two timer notices TM1L and TM1RB. A timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, which is the timer notice display, is erased is started and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer announcement of the two timer announcement displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is not deleted, and as a result of the timer display selection animation being performed, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. The display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the high-reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1LA), showing that stepping up is shown, and showing that the possibility that a certain effect is performed is improved It is done. Further, in the vicinity of the navi character, the characters “both expected” are displayed, and it is suggested that expectation is given to both of the timer announcements of the two timer announcements TM1LA and TM1RB. It is to be noted that none of the timer displays in the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB have started to count down.

  After that, the decoration symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, and as shown in FIG. 277 (11), temporary combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 277 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 and the character display displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are also erased. Note that, in this effect example, two timer announcements TM1LA and TM1RB are continuously displayed even while the symbol is displayed. That is, these timer announcements TM1LA and TM1RB will be displayed across the next symbol fluctuation display. Of the timer displays in the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left remains "03:00", and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right is It is assumed that "18:00" remains, and neither countdown has been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Furthermore, in this effect example, the word “focus on the left” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB. It indicates that the countdown will start. The timer display in the two timer advance notices TM1LA and TM1RB has not yet started to count down.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (14), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is displayed on the timer notification display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notification displays TM1LA and TM1RB. It is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 277 (14), "02: 76" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “focus on hold” are displayed, and there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the countdown continues and “01:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 277 (15). There is. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 277 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 starts from the default display mode at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side becomes "00:00". It changes to the display mode of Sabohani, and becomes the display mode of prefetching. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1LA displayed on the left side. Note that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of the Sabo Hani after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1LA becomes “00:00”, or the first After the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA is " The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when 00:00 is reached. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (17), the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is erased as the countdown is completed. After that, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left pattern. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (19) following FIG. 277 (18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 278 (20) In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 278 (21), the finalized display is made by combining the decorative symbols of the "Holiday 6-Decorative 5-Decorative 5" Be done. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Note that, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, the timer advance notice display TM1RB is displayed over three times of symbol variation display. The timer notice display TM1RB is kept at "18:00", and the countdown is not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (22), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Here, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, that is, the display mode of the safohani. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The timer notice display TM1RB has not yet started counting down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (23), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is not yet started, and "18:00" is maintained.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (26), normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is not yet started, and "18:00" is maintained.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1RB is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (27), “17:75” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1RB. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (28), it is shown that the strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1RB, the countdown is continued, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (28).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (29), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, display of “SP development” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and development to super reach is possible. It has been informed. In the timer advance notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continued, and "12: 90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (29).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 278 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword superior of the enemy character face each other is displayed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of “timer attention” are displayed to urge attention to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1RB. In timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continued, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (30).

  Then, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1RB becomes "0:00", a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (31). That is, in this example of rendering, a certain preview rendering performed as a result of the timer preview rendering relating to the timer preview display TM1RB is the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". The timer advance notice display TM1RB is erased when the countdown is completed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (33), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (34), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  In this effect example, a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed, and an example corresponding to another different effect is shown.

  FIG. 279 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 280 shows the steps of an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 279 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 273 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (3), it is shown that a timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen due to the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (6), the characters “open right” are displayed near the navigation character YM. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (7), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “production activation” are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. It is done. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and thereby, it is notified that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (9), a countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started on the timer notice display TM1. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (9), “02:75” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (10), the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12, and it is informed that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “focus on hold” are displayed to urge attention to a change in display mode of the hold icon. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (10).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (11), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is from the default display mode to the display mode of the button hold at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00". And the display mode of prefetching. That is, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode after the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", or the second After the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the button hold, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of the button hold at the timing when “00:00” becomes “00:00”. As described above, in this effect example, the display of the timer notice display TM1 is first started, and then the mini game is started in a state where the countdown is not started. Then, if the result of the mini game is a success, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and thereafter, the countdown is completed (that is, at "00:00") at a certain timing. It can be said that a pending change presentation as a presentation is being performed. In addition, the start order of each effect is not limited to the above-described one. For example, after the mini game is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 is started and the timer advance notice in the timer advance notice display TM1 starts to count down. The result of the mini game may be derived, and if the result of the mini game is success, a certain effect may be performed at the timing when the countdown is completed.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased as the countdown is completed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "button hold" are displayed, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has been changed to the button hold display mode.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 279 (13), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 7-decorative 7" causes temporary fluctuation due to fluctuation. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 279 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. The display mode of the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the button hold, does not change, and the display mode of the button hold is kept.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (15), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (16), it is shown that a mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the word "hold change chance" is displayed together with the face icon of the Bancho, and it is shown that the mini game by the lottery is started. And, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho appears in the field of Amida and is positioned in the middle of the three options. In addition, the character of "Select" is displayed below the field, and it is prompted to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the face icon BCHO of the Bancho. . Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "Do your best" are displayed, showing that the player is encouraged.

  Thereafter, after the mini game based on the lottery is started, it is shown in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (17) that a new timer preview effect is started. In this example of effect, the timer informing effect is started by the frame in animation causing a new timer informing display TM1N to be framed in from the right side of the display screen. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1N is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1N, which indicates that a certain advance notice effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1N is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (18), “04: 77” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N. .

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (19) following FIG. 279 (18) displays the middle of three options in the field. The Bancho face icon BCHO, which was located at, moves to the right of the three options. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown continues and “04:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (19).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the right side of the three options in the field is selected, if the operation effective period elapses, the timing shown in FIG. 280 (20) The production is started. At this time, at the three end points of the field, one of “push” for which the button hold operation effect is started and “x” indicating failure are respectively displayed. Specifically, "Push" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "Press" is displayed at the right end point. ing. Note that the number of "push" displayed may be one, or "push" may be displayed at all the end points. Also at this time, the countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1N, and "03: 88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (20).

  Thereafter, the bancho face icon BCHO moves on the line along the rules of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 280 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the bancho face icon BCHO is among the three end points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of has been reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by the lottery is derived. In this production example, it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side where "Press" is displayed, and the mission is successful, and the operation presentation of button hold is started It is informed that the thing was decided. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continued, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (21).

  As shown in FIG. 280 (22), at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00" in response to the result of the mini game, the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the button hold is " It is notified that the character "press" is added and the operation effect of the button hold is started. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yoshaa" are displayed to congratulate the player. It should be noted that after the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, the character “push” may be added to the first hold icon h11, or “press” to the first hold icon h11. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1N may be "00:00" after the letter "" is added, or the first hold at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00" The character “push” may be added to the icon h11. Thus, in this example of rendering, it is shown that a plurality of timer preview effects are performed, and as a result, certain preview effects to be performed are performed on the same holding icon.

  In FIG. 280 (23), a state is shown in which the operation effective period relating to the operation effect of the button hold is started when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, and the decorative symbol display is displayed. In the device 208, the timer advance notice display TM1N is not erased, and when the button is pressed, the characters “hold change” are displayed, and the game is described.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 280 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the button hold to the display mode of the Sabohani In addition, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the characters "super heat hold" are displayed, and it is informed that the first hold icon h11 has become the display mode of high reliability. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “next hot ze” are displayed, which suggests that the expectation for becoming a big hit in the next symbol variation display is high.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance effect is performed and the operation effect of the button on hold is started, the symbol is more than the case where the timer advance effect is performed and the operation effect on the button on hold is not started. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon for button hold), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 280 (25), temporary combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 7-decorative 7" A stop is made. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1N is erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 280 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 281 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another effect following FIG. 279 (18). In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (19a) subsequent to FIG. 279 (18), it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the face of the bancho is positioned on the right side of the three options in the field. There is. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown continues and “04:11” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (19a).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the right side of the three options in the field is selected, if the operation effective period elapses, the timing shown in FIG. 281 (20a) The production is started. At this time, “x” is displayed at the left end of the three end points, “x” is displayed at the center end, and “push” is displayed at the right end. . Also at this time, the countdown continues in the timer notice display TM1N, and "03: 88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (20a).

  Thereafter, the bancho face icon BCHO moves on the line along the rules of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 281 (21a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the bancho face icon BCHO is among the three end points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of has been reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by the lottery is derived. In this production example, it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side where "x" is displayed, and the mission fails, and the button hold operation presentation is not started Is notified. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continued, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (21a).

  As shown in FIG. 281 (22a), in response to the result of the mini game, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the disappearing animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N, and the timer notice display TM1N is erased. It is shown. In response to this, the character "Sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the operation presentation of the button hold as a result of the timer advance presentation is not performed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in timer notice display TM1N, it is informed that the notice that the operation effect of the button hold is performed is a notice of false (Gasse). In other words, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes "00:00", and that a certain effect (a button hold operation effect) is not performed. it can.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (23a), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N is completely erased.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (24a), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (25a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of the button hold to the default display mode. That is, in this presentation example, since the mini game has failed, it is shown that the button presentation operation presentation is not performed, and the non-delivery has ended. In addition, when the operation effect of the button hold is not performed and is ended without failure, it is likely to be lost in the symbol variation display based on the hold of the target of the button hold, but it may be a big hit.

  After that, the decoration symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern, and as shown in FIG. 281 (26a), the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 281 (27a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 282 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 282 (1)-the same figure (7) are the same as that of FIG. 279 (1)-the same figure (7), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (8), a character of “婆” appears on the right treasure box image BXR and a character “Uhihi” is displayed, showing that the mini game mission has failed. . In addition, the character "Sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and thereby, it is informed that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 is false timer advance notice effect. Note that the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (9), it is shown that the disappearing animation is started in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the advance notice that a certain advance notice effect is performed is a false (Gasse) advance notice. In other words, it can be said that although the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it is erased before the countdown is started, and it is shown that a certain effect has not been performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (10) shows that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 282 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 7-decorative 7" causes temporary fluctuation A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 282 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5—decoration 7—decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (14), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 282 (15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and becomes a prefetch display mode. In this effect example, the result of the mini game is a failure, and the display mode of the hold icon as a notice effect is not changed by the timer advance effect, but the display mode of the hold icon is not caused by the timer advance effect. Even if the result of the mini game is a failure, the result of the presentation (the hold icon changes to a hold icon of Sabohani) may be the same. In this case, as described above with reference to FIGS. 279 to 280, the display mode of the hold icon changes as a result of the success of the mini game, as described above with reference to FIG. 282. Although it has been made to be more likely to be a big hit than in the case where the display mode of the pending icon has failed but changed, it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 282 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 7-decorative 7" causes temporary fluctuation due to fluctuation. A stop is made. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “next hot ze” is displayed, which suggests that the possibility of becoming a big hit in the symbol variation display performed next is high. After that, as shown in FIG. 282 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 283 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 283 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 273 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen due to the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this example of the effect, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character showing a bancho character and a display showing the appearance of the "1" on the dice are displayed. An indication “hold change if out” is displayed, and it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon changes when the number “1” of the dice is stopped after the mini game is started. In this mini game, the result is derived without the operation of the effect button 136 being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (5), it is shown that the symbol of the dice starts variable display.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 283 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the outcome of “3”, indicating that it did not become the outcome of the mission achievement. ing. Further, near the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed to notify that the mini game has failed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the advance notice that a certain advance notice effect is performed is a false (Gasse) advance notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased before starting the countdown, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 283 (7), receiving the result of the mini game, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the disappearing animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is erased. ing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (8), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N has been completely erased.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 283 (9), temporary combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 7-decorative 7" A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 283 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this example, although the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game, the result may be derived by the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game, in this case When a result is derived by the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game, a certain advance effect may be performed rather than the case where the result is derived without the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game. May be high, or the jackpot may be highly reliable.

  FIG. 284 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 284 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 284 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing hold of the special view 1 is displayed, and three hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. The three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special drawing 1 are displayed in the default display mode. Further, in this presentation example, a 7-segment display device SEG consisting of 4 segments of 7 segments is shown. The 7-segment display device SEG is provided with a full color LED for each segment, and is configured to emit light in full color for each segment. Also, although the 7-segment display device SEG is provided, for example, on the front frame door 106, it may be provided on the door 108 with a ball storage tray or the game board 200. At the timing shown in FIG. 284 (1), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 The second holding icon h12 and the third holding icon h13 move to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and the display position of the second holding icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen due to the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. The timer advance notice display is also started on the 7-segment display device SEG, and "0300" is displayed in the white light emission mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (4), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (6), the characters “open right” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (7), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of “effect activation” is displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. It is done. In addition, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and thereby, it is notified that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (9), a countdown (subtraction display) of timer display (time display) is started on the timer advance display TM1. Also, the countdown of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is simultaneously started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 284 (9), “02:75” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and “0275” is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is shown that timer preview rendering is performed by a plurality of devices. Here, when the timer advance presentation by a plurality of devices is simultaneously performed, a certain effect may be more easily started than when the timer advance presentation by one timer advance display is performed, and a big hit is relied upon. The degree may be high.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (10), the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12, and it is informed that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “focus on hold” are displayed to urge attention to a change in display mode of the hold icon. In timer notification display TM1 and 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (10), “01:75” is displayed in timer notification display TM1, 7 “0175” is displayed on the segment display device SEG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 284 (11), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is default display mode when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00" The display mode is changed from the button display mode to the button display mode, and becomes a read-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG. . The display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode after the timer display on the timer preliminary display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00". The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00" after the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 is from the default display mode to the display mode of the button hold at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”. It may change. In this example, two timer notices are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. However, the timer notification is displayed only on one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. There may be cases where In this case, when the timer advance notice is displayed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain advance notice effect is always provided, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG When the timer advance notice display is performed only in any one of the above, a case may be made that a certain advance notice effect is not performed. In addition, the timer advance notice display may be displayed by three or more effect display devices, and the reliability of the big hit may be increased as the number of the timer advance notice display is displayed. For example, if there is one timer advance notice display, the weak cut-in image CI1b is easily displayed as a certain advance notice effect, and if there are two timer notice indications, the strong cut-in image CI1a is given as a certain advance notice effect. If the timer advance notice display is three or more, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be easily displayed as a certain advance notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed, and is turned off when the countdown in the 7-segment display device SEG is completed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "button hold" are displayed, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has been changed to the button hold display mode.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  FIG. 285 is a view showing in steps the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 286 shows in succession the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285. FIG. 287 is a diagram step by step illustrating an example of the effect shown in FIG. 286. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 285 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 284 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (3), a state after the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation and the timer notice effect is started is shown. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode, and at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (3), "09: 75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. In this effect example, the time set in the timer advance notice display TM1 is, for example, "10:00". Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer advance notice display has not been started, and is turned off.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed with the countdown continuing, and "09:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (4).

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (5). The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed with the countdown continuing, and "06:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (5). At this time, the timer advance notice display is started on the 7-segment display device SEG, and "3000" is displayed in the red light emission mode. Here, when the light emission mode of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed as compared to the white case, a certain advance notice effect is more easily started. In this example of rendering, the timer advance notice by the 7-segment display device SEG functions as a prefetch notice, and the target of the notice effect is different from that of the timer advance notice by the timer notice display TM1.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (6), the characters “open right” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed with the countdown continuing, and "04: 03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (6). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (7), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is such that the countdown is continued, and "03:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (7). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of “effect activation” is displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. It is done. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character "Yatteze" is displayed, which notifies that a certain advance notice effect to be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is started. . In the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "03:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (8). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (9), it is shown that the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (9), "02: 75" is displayed. On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (10), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “focus on hold” are displayed to urge attention to a change in display mode of the hold icon. In the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued and “01:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (10). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 285 (11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00". It changes, and it becomes a display mode of prefetching. That is, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased as the countdown is completed. In addition, it is suggested that the character of "Hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit in the symbol variation display performed next.

  After that, the decoration symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, and as shown in FIG. 286 (13) following FIG. A temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of After that, as shown in FIG. 286 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the display of characters displayed near the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are also erased. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not yet started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (15), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not yet started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  Thereafter, the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) on the 7-segment display device SEG is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (16), “2978” is displayed on the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG. ing.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (17) shows that the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center. Specifically, the word "strong cut-in chance" is displayed together with the face icon of the Bancho, and it is shown that a mini-game based on the lottery is being started. Then, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho appears in the field of Amida and is positioned on the right side of the three options. In addition, the character of "Select" is displayed below the field, and it is prompted to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the face icon BCHO of the Bancho. . In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2833" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (17).

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (18), of the bancho's length located on the right side among the three options in the field. The face icon BCHO moves to the left of the three options. In the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2580" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (18).

  After that, when the player operates the operation key unit 137 and the left side of the three options in the field is selected, when the operation effective period elapses, the effect of the lottery is started. At this time, one of “o” indicating success and “x” indicating failure is displayed at the three end points of the field, respectively. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the middle end, and "o" is displayed at the right end. ing. In addition, the display number of "(circle)" may be 2 or more, and "(circle)" may be displayed on all the end points. After that, as shown in FIG. 286 (19), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho moves on the line along the rule of the lottery. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2411" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (19).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (20), it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the master's face has reached the end point on the right side among the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by the lottery is derived. In this rendering example, the icon of Bach's face BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where "o" is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "I did it" is displayed, and the mission is successful. It is informed that it is decided that the strong cut-in image CI1a is to be displayed. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continued, and "2236" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (20).

  Thereafter, the mini game is ended, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (21), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of “super-rapid standby” are displayed, and it is reported that the strong cut-in image CI1a with high reliability of the big hit appears. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continued, and "2185" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (21).

  Thereafter, when "decoration 5" is sequentially stopped and displayed in order of the left pattern and the right pattern, and the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 286 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the center lower part of the display screen "Reach" is displayed on the screen, and it is informed that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and “2005” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (22).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 286 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and “1927” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (23).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (24), the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is changed from the red display mode to the rainbow display mode which changes from multiple colors. In the timer display of the rainbow display mode, the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than the timer display of the red display mode, and a certain effect is easily started. Here, when the timer display is displayed in the rainbow display mode, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed, or a certain effect may always be started. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continued, and "1737" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (24).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 287 (25) following FIG. 286 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword adversary of the enemy face is displayed Be done. In the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continued, and “1010” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (26), it is shown that the button continuous hit effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and “0500” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (26). Thereafter, the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (27), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed during execution of the button continuous hitting effect. Although this strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed corresponding to success as a result of the mini-game by Amidakuji, the strongest cut-in image CI1v that is more advantageous than the strong cut-in image CI1a is shown in this presentation example. It is displayed, and it is reported that the expectation of the big hit is rising dramatically. Also at this time, the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. Further, the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is performed with the countdown continuing, and "0200" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (27).

  After that, at the timing when the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "0000", in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (28), the character of the leader who broke the clothes appears with the character of "premier" It is shown that the premier notice is being made. Thus, the player is informed that the big hit has been decided. As described above, in this effect example, certain notice effects targeted for the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG differ from each other. Is shown. Further, in this example, although the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is performed in one symbol fluctuation display from the start to the end, the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG is the symbol fluctuation twice. It is shown that it is carried out across the display. The target symbol fluctuation display may be different between the timer announcement effect by the timer announcement display TM1 and the timer announcement effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. Also, the timer advance notice effect may be performed across the big hit game and the symbol variation display performed after the end of the big hit game. Further, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer advance announcement by the 7-segment display device SEG being performed, a premier announcement as an advance announcement is made, but an announcement with low reliability of the jackpot which is not an advance announcement is made A false timer announcement effect to be performed may be performed. Also, a false timer announcement effect may be performed in which a certain advance announcement effect is not performed.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the timer advance notice is performed and the premier notice is performed, the symbol fluctuation display (the pattern change is made than when the timer advance effect is performed and the premier notice is not performed. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 287 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the 7-segment display device SEG, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments in order to congratulate the player from becoming a big hit. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "premier appearance" are displayed to notify that a premier notice has been made.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (30), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 287 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased, and the 7-segment display device SEG is also turned off.

  FIG. 288 is a diagram showing in stages an example of effects in a big hit game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 288 (1) is, for example, an effect example following FIG. 287 (31), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5" continues. It is shown that the display is finalized by.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (2), it is shown that the big hit game is started and the big hit start effect is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the "decorative 5" which is a big hit symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a copanda character with a fan is celebrating the big hit at the center of the display screen The situation is shown. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, multi-color display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments in order to improve the decorative effect in the big hit game. At this time, a special effect display may be performed by the 7-segment display device SEG. For example, “7777” may be displayed, or a number string of matching words may be displayed. Such a display may be performed, for example, to give notice of a holding unit where a big hit occurs in the hold, or giving notice that it will be a definite change state after the big hit game is over.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (3) shows that the third round has been started. Then, on the right side of the copanda character, the characters “LED attention” are displayed, suggesting that a notice effect is performed.

  Then, in FIG. 288 (4), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off, and then, as shown in FIG. 288 (5), a character of a bancho appears with the display of the character "Torn clothes with button strikes". , Mini game is started. In this mini game, it is possible to display the result according to the gaming state after the big hit game, and when the gaming state after the big hit game becomes the definite change state (special figure high probability common figure high probability state), As a result of continuously hitting the button 136, there may be an effect that the mini game succeeds by breaking the clothes of the Bancho. In addition, when the mini game is started, a timer is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and an operation valid period for accepting button continuous hit effects is displayed. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, “1000” is displayed, and it is informed that continuous hitting of the effect button 136 for 10 seconds can be received after the countdown (operation effective period) starts. This timer display starts counting down when the operation valid period starts in the fourth round. In addition, although the display mode of the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is a mode in which light is emitted in white, it may be a mode in which light is emitted in another color, for example It may be different. Also, for example, a timer display (for example, display of a combination of specific numbers such as "9999" and "7777") is performed instead of "1000" indicating 10 seconds corresponding to the operation valid period. In this case, there may be a premier notice that always succeeds in the mini game.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (6), a state of shifting to the fourth round is shown. In the fourth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "continuous hit" along with the button image 136a, and urges continuous hit of the effect button 136. In addition, an operation effective period for receiving the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 288 (6), “0800” is displayed, and it is shown that two seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. As described above, in this effect example, the timer display may function as a timer advance effect, and it is shown that the timer advance effect and the mini game are started at the same time. The timer advance notice effect and the mini game may not be started at the same time.

  FIG. 288 (7) shows that the player continuously executes the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is "0500", and it is informed that the remaining time of the operation valid period is 5 seconds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (8), the characters “Sorry” and “Next time short” are displayed, showing that the mini game has failed. Thereby, it is notified that it does not shift to a definite change state, but shifts to a time saving state (special figure low probability spread figure high probability state) after the end of the said big hit game.

  FIGS. 288 (5a) to 8 (8a) show another example of effect following FIG. 288 (4). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (5a) shows that the mini game described above is started. In this effect example, the princess character HME is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is informed that the possibility of success in the mini game is high. In addition, when the mini game is started, a timer ("1000") is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and an operation valid period for receiving a button continuous hit effect is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 288 (6a) to FIG. (7a) are performed. In addition, since FIG. 288 (6a)-the same figure (7a) are the same as that of FIG. 288 (6)-the same figure (7), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (8a), the clothes of the character of the bancho are torn, and the letters of “bancho awakening” and “next definite change” are displayed, showing that the mini game is successful. Thereby, it is notified that it shifts to a definite change state after the end of the said big hit game.

  FIG. 289 is a view showing the display example when the error display is displayed in the timer advance presentation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 289 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 289 is a special figure low probability general view low probability state, and the reserve icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 The hold icon representing is displayed. Two reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserve icon display area, and the reserve icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both in the default display mode (round pattern And a white display mode). On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, in this example of the effect, an error display of "Please remove the ball" (lower tray full error indicator ERR1) is performed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lower tray full error occurs. It is informed that it is doing. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error notification is performed. When it is detected that the error notification is targeted for the error (for example, when the lower plate full detection switch is turned off and the lower plate full error disappears), the lower plate full error display ERR1 Is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special diagram display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. It will be displayed as Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (2), the lower plate full error is not resolved, and the lower plate full error display ERR1 is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (3), the bottom plate error has not been resolved yet, and the bottom plate error display ERR1 is still displayed. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped by the lower right error display ERR1, and the visibility of the timer advance notice display TM1 is lowered. Therefore, the player may hurry to remove the ball of the lower plate by viewing this display state.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (4), “04: 25” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. . In addition, near the navigation character YM, the characters "Make pseudo run" are displayed, and as a result of the timer display being counted down on the timer notice display TM, it is suggested that pseudo run may be performed. There is. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (4), the lower plate full error has not been resolved yet, the lower plate full error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the lower plate full error display ERR1. It is done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (5). Also, even at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (5), the bottom plate error has not been resolved yet, the bottom plate error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the bottom plate error display ERR1. It is done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (6), the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01: 73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (6). At the timing shown in FIG. 289 (6), since the player has removed the ball of the lower plate, the lower plate full error is eliminated and the lower plate full error display ERR1 is erased. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 289 (7) to (12) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 289 (7) to FIG. 12 (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 239 (7) to FIG.

  In the timer announcement effect described above, although the time until a certain effect is displayed is displayed by the countdown of the timer display, for example, when performing the timer announcement effect, the timer display in the timer announcement display is Start from 00:00 ", for example, display such as" may change on hold at "03:00" "or" strong cut-in occurs at "25:00" "and count up timer display A certain effect may be configured to be performed when the designated time is reached.

  Also, in the timer advance presentation described above, although there has been described as an example the pending change presentation, the pseudo continuous presentation, the display of the cut-in image, and the big hit decision notification as a certain presentation, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be an effect of entering into a specific zone of, an insertion of a movie, an announcement effect of next time, or the like.

  Further, in the timer announcement effect described above, the expectation of the big hit is changed by changing the color of the timer announcement display, and in this case, for example, red> green> yellow> blue> white in order If the degree of expectation is high and the color of the timer advance notice is yellow or more, the start of a certain effect may be determined. In addition, when it is executed by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 208 such as the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain advance notice effect may be performed without fail. In this case, for example, when the color of the timer notice displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is blue and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is white, it has an expectation of a big hit because of blue <white. If the color of the timer advance notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is red and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is a big hit. You may increase the reliability of

  Also, for example, when the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow, the big hit design is more than the case where the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red. There may be a case where the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved by the combination of the color of the timer advance notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG. In addition, the color of the timer advance notice display in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the luminous color of the 7-segment display device SEG may be ranked, and the sum of the ranks may be compared to determine the big hit reliability, for example When the rank of white is 1, the rank of yellow is 3, and the rank of red is 5, the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white, and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer advance notice is not displayed and the timer display is performed only on the 7-segment display device SEG than in the case (the former), and in the case where the light emission color is red (the latter), the latter Of the jackpot may be made more reliable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 290, an example of a display mode of the timer notice display displayed when the timer notice effect is started will be described. Here, FIG. 290 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the timer advance notice display.

  FIG. 290 (a) shows an example in which “7: 77” is displayed as the timer display of the timer preview display TM1 when the timer preview effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" which is a combination of a big hit decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. When it is displayed, it can be used as a premier timer display, as a notice that will be a big hit. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (a) is displayed, a combination of the decoration symbols of the “hits of“ decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ”may be displayed as a notice that is derived. Also, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that the hold sequence will occur.

  FIG. 290 (b) shows an example in which “99:99” is displayed as the timer display of the timer notification display TM 1 when the timer notification effect is started. In the embodiment described above, the time initially displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is set to a time shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol, but the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (b) is at least The time is longer than the time from the start of display to the stop display of the symbol, and it is a time during which it is recognized that the countdown is not completed while it is fluctuating. When the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (b) is displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started, it can be used as a premier timer display as a notice of becoming a big hit. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice of deciding to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice of occurrence of a hold sequence.

  Also, the timer display shown in FIG. 290 (b) is the largest numerical value that can be represented in decimal, but as shown in FIG. 290 (c), it displays the largest numerical value that can be represented in hexadecimal. You may do so. Also in this case, the same effect as the timer display shown in FIG. 290 (b) may be expected.

  FIG. 290 (d) shows an example in which “7: 58” is displayed as the timer display of the timer preview display TM1 when the timer preview effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of "Nagoya", which is the prefectural office location in Aichi prefecture, and is displayed when timer notification display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (d) is started. Can be used as a premier timer display, as a big hit finalization announcement. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice of deciding to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice of occurrence of a hold sequence.

  Further, FIG. 290 (e) is a timer display (“2:23”) that reminds of the word alignment of “Mt. Fuji”, which is the highest mountain in Japan, and this also causes the timer shown in FIG. 290 (d) to be displayed. In some cases, the same effect as the display can be expected. In the present embodiment, in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed when the timer notice effect is started, “0” is displayed for all the digits less than one second, but the above-mentioned premiere The timer display is characterized in that a digit of less than one second is also displayed. Note that the timer display displayed as the premier timer display is not limited to the above, and various ones can be adopted as appropriate.

  FIG. 290 (f) shows an example in which "Circle" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. When this timer display is displayed, the player may be able to easily recognize that a big hit has been confirmed. When the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (f) is displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started, it can be used as a premier timer display, as a notice for becoming a big hit. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice of deciding to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice of occurrence of a hold sequence.

  FIG. 290 (g) shows a timer announcement display TM1 of a display mode that may be changed when the timer announcement effect is started or may be changed during the timer announcement effect. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (g) is a rainbow display mode which is displayed while changing to multiple colors, and when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in this rainbow display mode, the premier timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that becomes a big hit decision. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice of deciding to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice of occurrence of a hold sequence. In addition, the display mode employable as a premier timer display is not limited to this, It can set to an appropriate color.

  FIG. 290 (h) shows a timer announcement display TM1 of a display mode that may be displayed when the timer announcement effect is started or may be displayed during the timer announcement effect. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (h) is a display mode in which the character SAHN of Sabohani is added to the four corners, and when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in this display mode, the premier timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that becomes a big hit decision. In addition, the character to add is not limited to this, It can set arbitrarily. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice of deciding to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice of occurrence of a hold sequence.

  In addition, although the timer notice display TM1 described above is configured to display the timer display within the rectangular frame, it is also possible to display the timer notice display TM1 of display modes having different frame shapes as the premier timer display. For example, the timer notice display TM1 in a mode in which the timer display is displayed within a circular frame may be set as the premier timer display.

  In addition, although the timer advance notice display TM1 of the premier timer display listed above may start counting down after starting the display, the timer advance notice effect may be ended without performing the count down. In the middle of the countdown, the jackpot symbol may be determined and displayed, and the timer announcement effect may be ended. In addition, when the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 of the premier timer display is started, even if the countdown of the timer display is completed, a certain advance notice effect such as a pseudo continuous effect may not be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the mini game in which the timer announcement effect is true or false is described according to the derivation result, but the mini game applies to any timer announcement effect described above. Can.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the effect display described below may be performed by animation. Further, it goes without saying that the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

  FIG. 291 to FIG. 324 are diagrams showing in stages the modified example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 291 to 324, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Moreover, in FIG.291-FIG.324, the example which has arrange | positioned and arranged three decorative symbol display apparatuses in a row is shown. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. In the present embodiment, an example in which various images are displayed on each of a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is shown, but all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. . In addition, a transparent light guide plate is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIG. 291 to FIG. 324, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut of a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is smaller than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, in FIGS. 291 to 324, the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2 are shown, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special view 1 has a square shape, In the variable display of FIG. 1, it blinks, and in the stop display of the special view 1, it lights in the lighting mode of the lost or the lighting mode of the big hit. Also, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the variation display of the special figure 2, and the lighting mode of the lost during the stop display of the special figure 2 Or it lights in the lighting mode of the big hit. Also, in FIG. 291 to FIG. 324, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z is shown.

  FIG. 291 is a view showing in stages an example of the preparation-in-progress advance notice effect that is applicable to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 291 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a fluctuation icon is provided at the center The h0 is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 291 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all default display modes (white circular display modes). In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanatory display unit is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and various information related to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents thereof are updated at appropriate timings. Be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 291 (a), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the lord character is described. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, and may be a notice display or a demonstration effect display, or may be hidden. Here, as the tutorial display, a description on the appearing character, a description on a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. In addition, you may be comprised so that alerting | reporting of a big hit expectation degree is possible by the display mode (For example, displaying in blue character, displaying in red, etc.) of tutorial display. In this case, this tutorial display may be used as a notice display of the position of the notice display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the display being described will be described as a tutorial display. That is, the tutorial display unit TT1 in this presentation example can be said to be an area for displaying something. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit UI3 is displayed in priority during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is provided in a region not overlapping the display region of the decorative symbol, but may overlap the display region of the decorative symbol. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that constitutes the hold icon display area, the variation icon display area, and the tutorial display section TT1. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen to display the stage name and reach name currently being used. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 291 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, an acceptance number display 850 indicating the number of acceptances of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed at the central portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 291 (a), the acceptance count display 850 of the "0 times after" character string image is displayed, and the acceptance count of the operation of the effect button 136 is 0 times. Further, below the acceptance number display 850, a stock button image 852 imitating the effect button 136 is displayed. The stock button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 291 (a), all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. The character of this lord is sometimes called a navigation character. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In addition, the character of the lord may be always displayed or may not be always displayed. Also, the stage name display unit ST1 or the character may be a display included in the Ui unit UI3, or may be configured such that at least a part thereof is displayed overlapping the front side of the UI unit UI3.

  In addition, a family crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may move and rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 291 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. That is, the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (display of “under preparation”) is performed in place of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1) It can be said. Note that at least a part of the character display displayed before the shutter image is displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (c), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be an in-provision image preview display to be displayed before the display of the in-preparation image RDY described later is started. In addition, the shutter image may be displayed also when the preliminary display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, and the big hit expectation may be configured to be different depending on the display mode of the shutter image. It may be configured such that it does not show the jackpot expectation by itself.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (d), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the in-provision image RDY in which the characters “in preparation” are displayed. In other words, the in-provision image RDY is displayed superimposed on the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1 and can be said to overlap the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 291 (d), the background color of the image under preparation RDY is green, that is, the display mode of the image under preparation RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d) is the default display mode. . Note that the in-preparation image RDY can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) when the display of the in-provision image RDY starts. After the display is started in the default display mode, the display mode may be changed to another display mode. Further, in the case of the configuration in which the above-described shutter image can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, the display mode of the image under preparation RDY may be associated with the display mode. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red in-provision image RDY may be displayed (probable). In this example of presentation, by displaying the image RDY being prepared, there is a case where a certain presentation (for example, a timer advance notice, a mini game, etc.) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (e), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 changes from the blue display mode to the gold display mode. In this rendering example, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 is set to a gold display mode, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. That is, the UI unit UI3 of this gold-colored display mode functions as a prefetch notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than in the blue display mode. In addition, the UI unit UI3 of this gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, and not as a notice of a change of the display mode of the hold icon, but as a direct prefetch notice display. You may have to. In addition, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to become the default mode before the hold icon (the hold icon to be prefetched) whose display mode has changed is digested, or the result of success or failure of the prefetch change May be configured to be the default mode after the display indicating (for example, the display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right portion of the tutorial display section TT1. The ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1 with the preparing image RDY displayed, so that the preparing image RDY and the ninja character NJ4 can be noticed There is.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (g), the pending change animation is started, the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first pending icon h11, and the first one It is shown that the hold icon h11 of has been hit. At this time, due to the effect EF4, the entire first reserved icon h11 is covered, and it is considered to be in a more difficult visual condition than in a state where it is not covered by the effect EF4. Note that this effect EF 4 is also displayed on the hold icon next to the target hold icon, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 291 (g), the effect EF 4 is placed next to the first hold icon h 11 A part of the first hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the on-hold change animation performed before the on-hold icon changes functions as the on-hold change advance effect display. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 may be included in the hold change advance effect display, that is, a series of animation from the start of the display of the ninja character NJ4 to the change of the display mode of the hold icon. May be used as a pending change advance presentation display. In addition, the pending change advance effect display may be performed only by displaying the ninja character NJ4. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change advance effect display. In addition, even if the hold change animation is performed, the display mode of the hold icon may not change. In addition, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be started after the effect display on the ninja character NJ4. Conversely, the ninja character NJ4 may not be displayed to cause the image RDY to appear. Also, the arrangement may be such that the ready image RDY appears more easily when there is a pending icon displayed in the pre-reading mode than when there is no pending icon. According to this configuration, a state in which the holding icon changes after the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is expected to appear in the preparation of the image RDY, so that the ninja character NJ4 displays a different type of advance notice (hold It may function as advance notification of an icon change and an object such as an image under preparation RDY, or an object change such as an advance notice and an advance notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (h), a state is shown in which the effect EF4 is deleted and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state where the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 291 (h) is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Note that the family crest 224E may emit light in red after the first reserved icon h11 starts to be displayed in the red display mode, or after the crest 224E emits light in red, the first one The hold icon h11 may start to display in the red display mode, or the family crest 224E may emit light in red at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts to display in the red display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 291 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the change-on-hold animation ends and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Further, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". Although the combination of the decoration patterns of this "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is a combination of losing, it is also a combination of chance eyes. That is, the advance notice is given by the derivation display of the combination of chances. Although the chance eye is easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the read-ahead display mode, the chance eye is displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be In addition, when the chance eye is displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the chance eye is not displayed. After the ninja character NJ4 is erased, stop display of the decorative symbol may be sequentially performed, or after the sequential stop display of the decorative symbol is started, the ninja character NJ4 may be deleted. In addition, sequential stop display of the decorative symbol may be started at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is erased. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown to FIG. 291 (i), you may make it erase | eliminate the fluctuation icon h0 at the timing when the symbol was decidedly displayed.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 291 (j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the display of the first hold icon h11 The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11, respectively. , Move on the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (j), variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. . On the other hand, it can be said that the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (k), it is shown that “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right is considered to be a swing fluctuation, and the middle symbol is displayed at a high speed. The display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before reaching the reach state, and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden, but basically, the UI unit UI3 performs the process until the super reach is started. It is designed not to be hidden.

  Thereafter, FIG. 291 (l) shows transition to super reach (swords reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the image RDY being prepared. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Note that the movement of the household object 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, or the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the household crest 224E is started, The movement of the household object 224E may be started at the timing when the reach transition display is started. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. Thus, in this presentation example, when transitioning to a specific super reach, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden and at least the hold icon is hidden. Further, the reach name (title) of the SP reach may be displayed, and the UI unit UI3 may be hidden when at least the reach name of the SP reach is displayed. In addition, in the configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image RDY being prepared, the display of the frame may be part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. Further, since the peripheral frame is not displayed when the image under preparation RDY is not displayed, it can be said that all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden in this case. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI unit UI3 after the transition to the super reach is different depending on whether or not the image in preparation RDY is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY during preparation is not configured to make it possible to identify an aspect of a certain advance notice or an effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 does not have to be hidden even if the game is shifted to the sword reach.

  In FIG. 291 (m), it is shown that the swordsman reach has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of only the image RDY being prepared is maintained, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out with the UI unit UI3. That is, the image under preparation RDY has the same display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after the non-display. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position. Here, the family crest 224E may return to the initial position after the start of the sword strike, or the kana reach may begin after the family crest 224E returns to the initial position, or the family crest 224E. Swordsman reach may be started at the timing when it returns to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (n), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than in the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, it can be said that notification is given that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, and also that display before the start of a certain advance notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that the display of the effect EF5 has started a certain preliminary display itself. Furthermore, in this example of presentation, the image under preparation RDY can be said to end (become non-displayed) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (o), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. Although this mini game is an example of the notice display started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is started, the mini game may be started without passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the display of the image RDY is being made than when the display of the image RDY is not being made. In this example of rendering, the display of the image in preparation RDY is ended and the mini game is started, but the display of the image in preparation RDY is ended and the timer advance notice effect may be started. In addition, for example, the characters “iron plate” may be displayed without the mini game or the timer advance notice effect being displayed, or the result of the success or failure judgment may be displayed suddenly. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The target TGT is composed of four divided areas, and at least one of the four areas (the upper area in the example shown in FIG. 291 (o)) is the area of the hit. By hitting an arrow in the area of the hit, it is possible to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions. Further, in a configuration in which there are multiple types of mini games and timer announcements, a type of mini game or timer announcement may be configured to always go through the display of the image RDY being prepared (Configuration 1). Conversely, another type of mini-game or timer advance notice may be configured (configuration 2) not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both configuration 1 and configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (p), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice. The display indicating the result of the mini game may be displayed as a cut different from the cut shown in FIG. 291 (p). Note that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain advance notice display is a mini game, a result display portion of the mini game may be a certain effect. The display of "iron plate" in the case where a certain advance notice display is a mini game may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after a certain effect.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (q), the letters "iron plate" are displayed on a square background, and an iron plate image TP inclined approximately 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction is displayed . This iron plate image TP is a notice display to notify that the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this presentation example, it is possible to say that the advance notice display corresponding to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, the other advance notice display corresponding to the result of the advance notice display is performed. Further, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the advance notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0. Also, when the timer advance notice effect is performed, another advance notice may be displayed in the one cushion after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 (for example, the countdown is completed). (Including the start of another notice display immediately before the

  FIG. 292 is a diagram showing by way of another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that at least one of the plurality of other examples may be provided, and conversely, at least one example may not be provided. The same applies to the following figures.

  FIG. 292 (a1) shows an effect following FIG. 291 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, although it is illustrated as a continuation of the presentation example of FIG. 291, a presentation may be performed on another scene, or a presentation may be performed only as a continuation of the presentation example of FIG. It is also good. The same applies to the following figures. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 292 (a1) to FIG. 29 (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 291 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (a4), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini-character MC1 from the Tonosama has left the target TGT and has flew to a region different from the target TGT. That is, the situation in which the mini game as the advance notice has failed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 292 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is not displayed, and it is shown that the sword strike is being performed continuously. In this effect example, in the case of only the difference between the failure of the mini game and the success, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the mini game is successful. In addition, instead of the mini game, a timer advance notice may be performed. For example, it may be a fake timer advance notice that nothing is displayed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0, or the timer display When the countdown of is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, the characters "chance" are displayed small somewhere, etc.) may be performed.

  FIG. 292 (b1) is also a presentation following FIG. 291 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 292 (b1) to FIG. 29 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 291 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (b4), the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the tombstone hits the target TGT, but a state of being stuck in the non-hit area is shown. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the mini game is successful but not very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 292 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the cut-in image HCI of the princess in which the character of "chance" and the princess character are displayed on the background of horizontal stripes. ing. In this demonstration example, in the comparison of whether the mini game was a success or a great success, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally displayed finally in the case of a great success than in the case of a success. .

  FIG. 292 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 291 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 292 (c1) to FIG. 29 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 291 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (c3), there is a state where a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 291 (o) is started in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 292 (c3) is also an example of the advance notice display which is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished. When the mini game is started, the laterally extending cylindrical drum DRM starts to rotate about the lateral direction as an axis of rotation. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this effect example, the mini game shown in FIG. 292 (c3) is configured to be more successful when it is started than the mini game shown in FIG. 291 (o) is started. The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be easier to succeed. In addition, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the mini game shown in FIG. 292 (c3) is started than when the mini game shown in FIG. 291 (o) is started. However, the mini game shown in FIG. 291 (o) may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol with the character of "iron plate" is derived, and it is shown that the mini game has been successfully performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 292 (c5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is displayed, and it is shown that the notice effect of the big hit determination is performed.

  In addition, although the mini game was performed in the effect shown in FIG. 291 compared with the example of effects shown in FIG. 291, the timer notice effect may be performed in the example of effect shown in FIG. . In addition, both timer announcement effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the time for counting down may be different.

  FIG. 293 is a view sequentially showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 293 (a1) shows that the sword strike is started. In this presentation example, unlike in FIG. 291 (m), the image RDY being prepared is not displayed. In addition, in FIG. 293 (a1), the fluctuation icon h0 is in a display mode of red, and accordingly, the family crest 224E is also in a light emission mode of red.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (a2), a state where a mini game is started is shown. In this presentation example, it is shown that the mini game is started without passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the display of the image RDY is being made than when the display of the image RDY is not being made.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (a3), it is shown that an arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (a4), the iron plate image TP as the advance notice is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, an example is shown where the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared, but this may be executed only during super reach, It may be performed not only during the super reach, but also may be configured to be executable during the super reach or not. In addition, after the third display ends in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain advance display (a certain effect) is performed across the first state to the second state. It is also good. In addition, a certain advance notice (a certain effect) to be performed after the third display ends in the first state may cross the next change. Then, after the third display ends in the second state, a certain advance notice (particularly, a certain effect) may at least start and end in the second state.

  FIG. 293 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 291 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 293 (b1) to FIG. 29 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 291 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (b3), it is shown that not the mini game but the timer preview effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This timer advance notice effect is also an example of the advance notice display which is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 293 (b3), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, and thereafter, the countdown is started. It is to be noted that after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a false timer advance notice effect in which the timer advance notice effect ends is started before reaching "0:00". Here, the effect examples listed in FIG. 237 to FIG. 290 can be combined as appropriate as other examples of the timer advance presentation effect. It should be noted that the big hit symbol may eventually be displayed more clearly when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, and the mini game may be easier than when the timer advance notice effect is started. If the game is started, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally displayed. Note that the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is an effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after the timer becomes “0:00” indicating 0 seconds as a result of counting down) , And is configured to perform an iron plate image TP), but after “0:00” indicating 0 seconds, another effect display (for example, “iron plate”) is displayed in the display area in which the timer display is performed. Such as a display that can identify a certain effect display, or a display related to a certain effect display such as a “chance”, and then in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed. You may comprise so that presentation of effects (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed. Also, although the timer advance notice effect in this embodiment is configured to be displayed until "0:00" indicating 0 seconds as a result of counting down, it is displayed up to "1" indicating 1 second, or , "00: 01" may be displayed. Specifically, “10” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after “1” is displayed, another effect display (for example, a display capable of specifying a certain effect display such as “iron plate”, or “chance”) in the display area where the timer display was performed. After performing a display related to a certain effect display), an effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed (for example, Here, the countdown display may be up to the display of “1”, may be up to immediately before another effect display is displayed, or may be up to the display of another effect display. ). The time from when the "1" is displayed to when the display of another effect display is started is the same as the time from when the "2" is displayed to when the display of "1" is started (almost the same) It may be different (that is, displayed at the timing of “0” in “2” → “1” → “0”). When a pseudo run symbol is displayed as a certain effect display, a display representing “NEXT” or “continue” may be displayed as another effect display. Also, although the timer display (for example, "10:00") is displayed immediately after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished, other displays are displayed after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished. The timer display is displayed after the display (for example, a display showing that the timer display is counting up from 0 or a display related to the timer display like “after next chance up”) is displayed. It may be configured such that no other display is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (b4), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (b5), the iron plate image TP as the advance notice is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, the timer advance notice effect can be said to be a notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In each of the effect examples shown in the present embodiment, effects other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

  FIG. 293 (c1) to FIG. (C3) are effects following FIG. 293 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (c1), it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 293 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area different from the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. The display mode changes in such a manner that the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes gradually shorter corresponding to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed by the display by the numbers in the timer display and the display in other display modes other than the numbers. First, only the decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is performed, and for example, the countdown by the timer display may be started when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds. In this case, the decrease speed of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. Also, two or more remaining time display meters with different remaining times may be provided, and each may be displayed with a length corresponding to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters with the same remaining time but different lengths. You may display it. In this case, for example, the decreasing speed of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decreasing speed of the shorter remaining time display meter. In addition, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different advance notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Also, two or more remaining time display meters of the same length may be provided, and their reduction rates may be different.

  Further, in this presentation example, presentation may be performed in which the execution time of the timer advance presentation presentation is extended. For example, in the case of extension, the number of 0 may be deleted and the meter may be restored again. Also, the length of the meter may differ depending on the time of timer advance notice. In addition, the rate of decrease of the meter may not be constant, for example, may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Also, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and although the length of a certain meter may be long, for example, as a result of the decrease speed becoming faster from the middle, it may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Further, the rate of decrease of the meter does not have to be equal. For example, the decrease rate may be faster or slower in the state in which the numbers are also displayed.

  FIG. 294 is a view showing in stages an example of the preparation-in-progress advance notice effect that is applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 294 (a1) shows that the sword strike is started. In this presentation example, unlike in FIG. 291 (m), the image RDY being prepared is not displayed. Thereafter, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 294 (a2) to (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (a4), the united animation is performed and the display is performed A pair of translucent button images 136 q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of a button effect or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent button image 136 q informs that the button image 136 a is materialized and a button advance notice effect is started by uniting. Here, the introduction animation may also be included in the button preview effect. The pair of translucent button images 136 q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example of rendering, an example in which two translucent button images 136q are merged has been described, for example, a rendering in which four translucent button images 136q are merged may be performed. In this case, two translucent buttons are used. The button image 136a is materialized and button preview effect is more easily started when the effect of combining the four translucent button images 136q is performed than when the effect of combining the image 136q is performed You may Note that while the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 has not been received yet. In addition, even when a deceased button image 136aL to be described later is displayed and a button preview effect is started, united animation may be performed using the same translucent button image 136q, or a translucent button image corresponding to the deceased button image 136aL Coalescing animation may be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (a5), a state in which the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity is shown.

  Then, when the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 294 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and a button advance notice effect is started. When the button preview effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is received, and an animation showing that the button image 136a is pressed is displayed with a character of "Press", and further, the remaining button image 136a The time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation reception period. In addition, the effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation effective period. Note that the button preview effect may be started after the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button preview effect is started.

  FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6) show modifications of the effects shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b5). The effects shown in FIG. 294 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 293 (b1) to (b3), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 294 (b4) shows that the above-mentioned combined animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer advance presentation effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that a notice advance display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button preview effect is notified by the timer and the timer advance effect. In addition, even if the timer announcement effect is started and the timer display is displayed, the countdown may not be started immediately, and the countdown of the timer display may be started according to the start of the combined animation. According to this, there are cases where it is possible to easily specify the notice effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed. In addition, the timer announcement effect may be started by ending the display of the image RDY being prepared while the combined animation is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (b5), the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer advance display is "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed. Note that the timer display may be set to "0:00" after the united animation is completed, or the timer display may be set to "0:00" at the timing when the united animation is completed.

  FIG. 294 (b6) shows a state in which the combined animation is successful, the decal button image 136aL is materialized, a button advance notice effect is started, and an operation acceptance state is started. In this effect example, the deca-button image 136aL is more likely to be displayed when both the timer preview effect and the combined animation are performed than when only one of the timer preview effect and the combined animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the deca-button image 136aL is displayed, for example, an iron plate image TP is displayed.

  FIG. 294 (c1) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 294 (b3) to FIG. The effects shown in FIG. 294 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 294 (b3) to (b4), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (c3), a state immediately before the pairing of the translucent button images 136q is close and the merging is completed is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 294 (c3), when the pair of translucent button images 136q approaches, at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q overlaps due to the effect EF6, and this is more than the state where they do not overlap The translucent button image 136 q is difficult to view. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

  Then, when the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 294 (c4), a button advance notice effect by the deca-button image 136aL is started. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 294 (c4) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 294 (b6), the detailed description will be omitted.

  Thus, the presentation example shown in FIG. 294 is also shown for the example in which the image RDY being prepared ends during execution of the super reach. Note that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the image RDY being prepared is ended and the timer advance notice is started while the introduced animation is displayed.

  FIG. 295 is a diagram showing the step by step another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 295 (a), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 295A, one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 295 (a). The image under preparation RDY has a red background color and is more likely to finally display the jackpot symbol than in the case of the green background color which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 295 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 295 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest product 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is set to a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 295 (b), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than in the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, the end effect of the display of the image RDY being prepared is started. As described above, it can be said that this presentation example shows that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished except for super reach.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 295 (c), it is shown that the timer preview effect is started on the tutorial display section TT1 (that is, the area where the image RDY is being displayed) ing. When the timer advance presentation is started, the timer display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 295 (c), “90:00” is displayed as the timer display, and thereafter, the countdown is started. Further, the background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this example of presentation, it is shown that timer advance presentation is started before developing into super reach. Then, the timer display displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started is a long time as "90:00", and it can be inferred that the symbol variation display time is long, and a sense of expectation for a big hit may be improved. As described above, in this effect example, a relatively short time such as "10:00" is displayed when the displayed time of the timer display is displayed in a long time (long time) such as "90:00". Finally, the big hit symbol is configured to be more easily displayed than when displayed in (short time). Further, in this rendering example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is easily started to be long time in the timer preview rendering. Further, in this example of presentation, since the timer display is long time and the background is red, the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved.

  FIG. 295 (d) shows transition to super reach (swords reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered that the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to be recognized by the family crest 224E being overlapped. In addition, the family crest item 224E also overlaps with a part of the timer notice display in the countdown display of the timer display. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. At the timing shown in FIG. 295 (d), the timer display is "30:00".

  FIG. 295 (e) shows a state in which the above-described combined animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer advance presentation effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that a notice advance display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Also here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button preview effect is notified by the timer and the timer advance effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 295 (f), the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer advance display is "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed. In this example of effect, the background color of the timer advance notice display is red, and the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but it may be the same. In addition, the reliability of the big hit may be the same in the case where the timer advance notice display is the default background color and the case where it is the red background color.

  In FIG. 295 (g), the combined animation is successful, the deka button image 136aL is materialized, and the button advance notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed, showing that the operation reception state is started. There is. In this effect example, the longer the time for which the timer counts down in the timer display, the easier it will be for a big hit.

  FIG. 296 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the preliminary announcement effect that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 296 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 296 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Note that the family crest 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the image in preparation RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 296 (a1). The image under preparation RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 296 (a1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 296 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a2), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The dynamic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hitting area, and hitting the hitting area with an arrow hits the big hit reliability. High notices are to be made. In this presentation example, it is shown that a mini game is being played prior to transition to super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a4), it is shown that the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a5), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the fluctuation icon h0. It is shown that the preliminary announcement by is ranked up. In addition, the family crest 224E emits light in gold in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. It should be noted that after the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, the family character 224E may change from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode, and the family crest 224E emits red light After changing to the aspect or the golden light emission mode, the change icon h0 may change from the red display mode to the gold display mode, or the timing when the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode The family crest item 224E may be changed from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode. Then, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation by the shutter image is started, and the displayed display of the mini game is shifted to the state in which the shutter image can not be visually recognized. Note that the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change after the closing operation by the shutter image starts. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. Moreover, although the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game in this presentation example, the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a6), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. Thereby, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a7), a state in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image is shown. At this time, the tutorial display section TT1 is in a non-display state where no display is performed. The tutorial display may be started when the shutter image is released, or another preview display, a timer preview display, or a mini game may be started. In addition, display may be performed to gray out after the shutter image is released.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 296 (b1) to FIG. 2 (b8), an example showing a state where the mini game is started without displaying the image under preparation RDY will be described.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in red, and is displayed in advance. In addition, the hold icon h11 is a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the temple”, and the relationship between the panda character and the temple character is described. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 296 (b1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b2), it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. As a result, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is made non-display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b3), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a mini game preview display to be displayed before the display of the mini game described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In this effect example, when the shutter image is released, the mini game is started on the tutorial display unit TT1. That is, in this effect example, the mini game is shown to be started instead of the explanation display which has been performed until now. It can also be said that a mini game is shown starting without displaying the image RDY being prepared. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 296 (b4) to FIG. 2 (b8) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 296 (b4) to FIG. 2 (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 296 (a3) to FIG. 2 (a7), the description will be omitted. In addition, after the mini game is over, the explanation display may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, or the gray out display may be performed.

  FIG. 297 is a view gradually showing a display example in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 297 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 297 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Note that the family crest 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 297 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 297 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 297 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 297 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. That is, it can be said that the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (preliminary display) is performed instead of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1) . Note that at least a part of the character display displayed before the shutter image is displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (a3), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed. This shutter image can be said to be a display before notice display displayed before a notice display to be described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (a4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, not the image RDY under preparation nor the mini game or the timer advance notice effect, but the notice display consisting of the letters “excessive heat” is displayed. The notice display of the "super heat" may be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect being performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed when displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer announcement effect being performed than when displayed without the mini game or the timer announcement effect. Good. Further, the notice display of the "super heat" may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect being performed. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform the effect of closing the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image before performing the advance display such as “superheat”.

  FIG. 297 (b1) to FIG. 2 (b8) show an example of effect showing how the advance notice icon appears in the tutorial display section TT1. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 297 (b1) to FIG. 2 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 297 (a1) to FIG. 2 (a3), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, it is shown that a timer notice icon I81 for timer notice appears for notifying that timer notice effect will be performed when the shutter image is released. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect will be performed. Note that other notice icons may appear.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b5), the timer advance notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 pops out from the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b6), the closing operation by the shutter image is started in the tutorial display section TT1.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b7), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, the display state in the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. In this example, until the shutter image is completely closed, the timer preview icon I81 is kept displayed, and it is notified that the timer preview icon I81 is stocked. Alternatively, they may be erased when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b8), a state is shown in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the image RDY being prepared. At the timing shown in FIG. 297 (b8), the image under preparation RDY is set as the default display mode. The preparation image RDY is displayed by the timer notice icon I81 being stocked. That is, the start of the timer advance presentation is notified by the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, the display mode of the image RDY in preparation for notifying of the start of the timer preview effect and the display mode of the image in preparation for notifying the start of the mini game are the same, but are different You may In addition, the mini game or the timer advance notice effect may be started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

  FIG. 298 is a diagram showing the step by step another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start and end timings of a certain advance notice display, and the start and end timings of a certain effect are different states among the states into which the second state is subdivided. It may be good or in the same state.

  FIG. 298 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 291 (l). In addition, since the effect shown to FIG. 292 (a1) is the same as the effect shown to FIG. 291 (m), description is abbreviate | omitted. In the effect shown in FIG. 298 (a1), the display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has developed into a super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a2), animation of the duel scene continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 298 (a3), the main character of the main character wins over the swordsman of the enemy character, The combination of the decoration patterns of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "is derived and the fluctuation is started. At this time, the preparing image RDY is still displayed. That is, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a state where the display indicating that a big hit is made is made. In order to congratulate the player from becoming a big hit, the family crest 224E, the eight generations character 224Fa and the generals character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display mode in which light is emitted in multiple colors.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 298 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 298 (a5), “3:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. It is to be noted that after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a false timer advance notice effect in which the timer advance notice effect ends is started before reaching "0:00".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a6), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a7), the character “Go” is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed, and it is informed that a certain advance notice effect is started. There is. Note that the display of the characters "Go" may be performed or may not be performed.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a8) shows that the jackpot symbol promotion effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 298 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca-button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and it is informed that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has been started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain advance notice effect, that is, corresponds to the notice effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the promotion effect of the big hit symbol does not have to be started, and when the promotion effect of the big hit symbol is started, the default display is displayed instead of the deca button image 136aL. A button image 136a of an aspect may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played instead of the timer advance notice effect. In addition, even when the timer advance notice effect or the mini game is not performed, the deca-button image 136aL may be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 298 (a9), the jackpot of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" from the combination of the decorative designs of the jackpots of "decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 4". It is changed to the combination of the decoration design of, and it is informed that the definite variation big hit is decided. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

  FIGS. 298 (b1) to 298 (b4) show that the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice is started while the animation of the duel scene in the super reach is continued.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (b1) shows that animation of a duel scene continues. At this time, the timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 298 (b1), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer advance display, and thereafter, the countdown is started. In addition, the time when countdown is started may be before developing into super reach, may be after developing into super reach, or may be the timing when developed into super reach, reach It may be before the transition to the state, or may be after the transition to the reach state and before the development to the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (b2), the button preview effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. . That is, it is shown that the final judge effect is started. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 298 (b2), the timer display indicates "9:00". That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down due to the timer advance production during the operation acceptance period of the production button 136. Here, the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 is longer between the length of the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length at which the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is performed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 298 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. -A combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived to start swing fluctuation. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display still continues, that is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol promotion effect will be performed thereafter. In this example of effect, even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the timer display is configured not to be "0:00". This is because, for example, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the resurrection effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Also, conversely, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the count may be zero.

  FIG. 299 shows, in a step-by-step manner, an example of the timer announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 299 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 297 (a1), so the description will be omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (b) shows a state where the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the image RDY being prepared. In this preparation example, only one type of display mode is prepared for the image under preparation RDY, and change display to other display modes is not performed. As described above, in this presentation example, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of a certain advance notice and a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain advance notice and a certain effect are to be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (c), it is shown that the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. . In this rendering example, one of a plurality of background colors in the timer advance notice display is selected, and the background color indicates the reliability of the big hit. In the effect example shown in FIG. 299 (c), the background color of the timer advance notice is blue, which is an aspect with low reliability. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is “10:00”, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a given advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Before or after the timer countdown starts, the background color of the timer advance notice may change, and an effect may be performed such that the reliability is improved halfway.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (d), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns, respectively, and the reach state is reached. In addition, after the timer display becomes "0:00", it may be in the reach state, or after reaching the reach state, the timer display may become "0:00", or the timer display is " It may be in the reach state at the timing when it becomes 0:00 ". In this example of presentation, when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, there is a correspondence relationship with the display showing that it will be developed into the super reach, and it will always be developed into the super reach.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (e), instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, the character "Go" is displayed, and a certain advance notice is displayed. It is reported that it will be started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and is not displayed. In this production example, the start of the button preview production itself is not the preview display that is started as a result of the timer preview production being performed, but the preview displayed when the rendering button 136 is operated as a result of operating the button preview production. The display corresponds to the notice display started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Note that the tutorial display unit TT1 may be in the non-display state after the button preview effect is started, or the button preview effect may be started after the tutorial display unit TT1 is in the non-display state. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button preview effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, an effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be exhibited.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 299 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has succeeded, and the process shifts to super reach (sword reach) as shown in FIG. 299 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide. That is, in this rendering example, it can be said that a certain preview display performed as a result of the timer preview rendering corresponds to the development to the super reach.

  FIG. 299 (j) shows that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, since the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out with the UI unit UI3. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (k), it is shown that a cut-in image HCI of a princess is displayed. The princess's cut-in image HCI is suddenly displayed without passing through the button announcement effect, the timer announcement effect, or the mini game, and the reliability is low. However, the button announcement effect or the timer announcement effect or It may be displayed as a result of the mini game being played. Moreover, it may change to the cut-in image HCI of a princess, for example, the iron plate image TP may be displayed.

  FIG. 300 is a view gradually showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 300 (a)-the same figure (c) is the same as FIG. 299 (a)-the same figure (c), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 300 (d), it is shown that an animation is being performed in which a character of a lord as a navy character is throwing a bomb. Specifically, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while shouting "It's still." This bomb is displayed on the first decorative symbol display from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Move across device 208L. Then, the bomb travels to the tutorial display section TT1 in which the timer display is being counted down and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display section TT1.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (e), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted and the image RDY being prepared is displayed again. When this timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is "10:00", and the timing at which the button advance notice effect is started is notified, but that timer notice effect is interrupted. It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button preview effect. It should be noted that the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed when the interruption presentation of the timer advance announcement production by the navigation character is performed than when the interruption presentation of the timer announcement production by the navigation character is not performed. It should be noted that if the effect of interrupting the countdown of the timer display is performed, instead of the display of the image RDY being prepared, the time of the timer display is increased and the time until the countup is extended is extended. Good, and the countdown speed may be slower. Also, for example, the timer advance notice has the advantage that it is easy to predict the timing of 0 because the countdown speed does not change, and that is why it is possible to know the future by the end timing of the image RDY under preparation There is a case.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. The tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the image RDY being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 300 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has succeeded, and the process shifts to super reach (sword reach) as shown in FIG. 300 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide.

  In FIG. 300 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the image under preparation RDY continues to be maintained. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (k), the image in preparation RDY is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is resumed. Specifically, the timer notice display after resumption is changed to a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved. Further, in FIG. 300 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "10:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is resumed. It is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display due to the timer advance presentation is being performed during the super reach (sword reach). In addition, start timing of timer notice production is taken as appropriate timing, for example, before start of super reach, after start of super reach, before reach state, after reach state, after super reach start Also, the timing may be started before. Further, the timer display when the timer advance presentation effect is resumed can be appropriately set to time, and for example, may be started from "9:00" indicating the time of interruption.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (m), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect corresponds to the advance notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 299, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not the development to the super reach but the cut-in image displayed during the super reach as a result of the timer notice effect being extended. As a result, the cut-in image has high reliability. As described above, in this example of the effect, the countdown is “0:00” at a good place in the super reach, and an example in which a good effect is performed is shown. In addition, as the end timing (the start timing of a certain advance notice display) of the image RDY being prepared is later in a certain fluctuation, the expectation of the big hit is higher.

  FIG. 301 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 301 (a) is the same as that in FIG. 299 (a), so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (b), a state is shown in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the image RDY being prepared. At this time, “TIMER × 2” is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in which the image under preparation RDY is displayed, and it is shown that the timer announcement effect is performed twice. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be displayed simultaneously with the display of the image RDY being prepared, or may be displayed after the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It may be assumed that it will be performed once, but actually it will be performed twice. Here, instead of the display of “TIMER × 2”, for example, two in-provision images RDY may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (c), it is shown that the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. . The background color of the timer preview is blue, which is an aspect of low reliability. Here, the default display mode of the timer advance notice may be green. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is “10:00”, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a given advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (d), it is shown that the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns, respectively, and the reach state is reached. In addition, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER × 2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is informed that the first timer announcement effect has been digested and ended. ing. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be difficult to visually recognize by the display of the effect when the timer display becomes “0:00”. In addition, the display of "TIMER × 2" may be displayed without being erased. In addition, when a plurality of under-provisioning displays are displayed, a state may be provided in which the display regarding the under-provisioning display is once hidden after the first under-provisioning display ends.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character display "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (e). It is reported that it will be started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and is not displayed. Therefore, it may seem that there is no stock of the timer advance notice effect. In this production example, the start of the button preview production itself is not the preview display that is started as a result of the timer preview production being performed, but the preview displayed when the rendering button 136 is operated as a result of operating the button preview production. The display corresponds to the notice display started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY is displayed again in the tutorial display section TT1 to notify that the second timer announcement effect is started, but when the in-provision image RDY is displayed again, the first in-provision image RDY is displayed. Is displayed larger than when it is displayed. Therefore, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 or the decorative symbol may be overlapped by the image RDY during preparation. As described above, there may be an effect of causing more attention by temporarily non-displaying the image RDY during preparation and further overlapping.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has succeeded, and as shown in FIG. 301 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, super reach shift Display takes place and develops into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). In addition, the family crest 224E is raised and rotated to overlap the front side of the lower central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the enlarged preparation image RDY, and is considered to be less visible than the state where it is not overlapped by the family crest 224E. Note that the image under preparation RDY may be overlapped with the family crest 224E only when enlarged and displayed, and may not be overlapped when not enlarged. In addition, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed. That is, in this rendering example, it can be said that a certain preview display performed as a result of the timer preview rendering corresponds to the development to the super reach.

  In FIG. 301 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the image under preparation RDY continues to be maintained. In addition, since the image RDY being prepared is enlarged, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is overlapped, and the character of swordsman in the reach effect display is also overlapped. In this way, the prepared image RDY enlarged and displayed may also be displayed during execution of the super reach. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (k), it is shown that the in-provision image RDY is switched to the timer notice display, and the second timer notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability is improved. Also, in FIG. 301 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "3:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. It is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display due to the timer advance presentation is being performed during the super reach (sword reach). Further, in this example of the effect, the size of the timer advance notice display is the same size as the size of the ready image RDY displayed in the enlarged view, and when the timer advance notice display is displayed in the enlarged view, the big hit The symbol is easily displayed. In addition, when the background color of the timer advance notice display is gold, the display may be always enlarged. In addition, even if the background color of the timer advance notice display is a color other than gold, the display may be enlarged. Further, in this rendering example, the background color of the second timer preview rendering is higher in reliability than the first timer preview rendering, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the time displayed on the timer may be longer in the second timer announcement effect than in the first timer announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (m), instead of the timer display, the character "Go" is displayed and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the second timer advance notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, it may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the big hit by being notified in advance that the timer advance effect is performed twice.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the number of clothes under preparation RDY is displayed, when one under preparation picture RDY is digested, all the preparation under image RDY is displayed on the same symbol variation display. It has been shown to be digested.

  FIG. 302 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 302 (a1) to FIG. 302 (a2) are the same as those in FIG. 298 (a1) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a3), it is shown that the long press effect by the long press effect display is started to be displayed. In the long-press effect display, an area in which a character of Tonosama is drawn is arranged at the upper side, an area in which a character of swordsman is drawn is arranged at the lower side. The size of both areas is displayed so as to relatively fluctuate. The image RDY is being displayed even when the long-press effect is started. In addition, at the timing shown to FIG. 302 (a3), the operation effective period of the production button 136 is not started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a4), it is shown that reception of a long press operation by a long press effect is started. That is, it is shown that the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 has been started. In this long press effect, although the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer advance notice display, and the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display has been changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Further, in FIG. 302 (a4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "5:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. It is done. That is, in this example of presentation, the operation valid period and the time of the countdown of the timer display coincide with each other. Note that they do not have to match completely. Note that the timer advance notice may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation valid period of the play button 136 may be started after the timer advance effect is started, The timer announcement effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  FIG. 302 (a5) shows that the player performs a long press operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a5), the timer display in the timer advance display is "4:00".

  FIG. 302 (a6) shows that the player continues to perform the long press operation of the effect button 136. At this time, in the long-press effect display, the area in which the character of the lord placed above is drawn is expanded, and the area in which the character of the sword superior placed below is drawn is reduced by that amount. Is shown to be dominant. It is suggested that this is likely to be an advantageous result. At the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a6), the timer display in the timer advance display is “3:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a7), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is finished, and the character “Go” is displayed. Further, the long press effect is continuously performed, and the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is still continuing. That is, it can be said that the character display of "Go" is displayed in the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Moreover, in the long-press effect display, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn further expands, and the area where the character of the sword master placed below is drawn smaller accordingly. It is shown that your character is by far the dominant. Note that the long press effect may be ended after the “Go” character is displayed, or the “Go” character may be displayed after the long press effect is ended, “Go The long press effect may be ended at the timing when the character of “is displayed. Also, the operation effective period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, or the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation effective period ends, “Go The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character of “is displayed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a8), the character "one blow" is displayed, and the deca-button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the button advance effect is started, and the operation is effective. It is shown that the period has been set again. That is, this button advance presentation effect can be said to be an example of button operation presentation performed subsequently to the long press presentation. In other words, it can be said that an example in which a plurality of (types) button effects are continuously performed is shown. Here, the operation effective period to be set may be set again after the operation effective period in the long press effect is once ended, or may be set continuously to the operation effective period in the long press effect May be

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a10), the main character of the hero wins over the swordsman of the enemy character. -A combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived to start swing fluctuation. At this time, the family crest item 224E, the eight generation character item 224Fa and the general character item 224Fb emit light in the light emission mode of the rainbow so as to congratulate being a big hit.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, the preparation display ends with the long press part and the countdown of the timer display is started, and the countdown is completed between the long press part and the next part or at the end of the long press part “0:00” is given, and an example is shown in which the button effect to be performed in the next part is good.

  In FIG. 302 (b1) to FIG. (B5), it is shown that the long press effect is performed in the sword strike, but the timer advance effect is not performed.

  Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (b1), after the long press effect by the long press effect display is started, reception of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is also started. It is shown that a long press operation is being performed. In this example of presentation, timer advance presentation is not performed.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 302 (b2), the long-press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the effect display for long-press, a character in the upper position is drawn The area is reduced, and the area where the sword character placed below is drawn is enlarged, and it is shown that the Tonosama character is inferior (the character of the enemy character is dominated by the sword sword). . It is suggested that this is unlikely to be an advantageous result.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (b3), the character of “one blow” is displayed, and the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. It is shown that the operation has been started and the operation effective period has been set again. As described above, when the timer announcement effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca-button image 136aL is difficult to be displayed, and the button image 136a of the default display mode is easily displayed. When the long-press effect is performed and the timer advance effect is not performed, the deca-button image 136aL may not be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (b5), the main character of the main character loses to the hostess swordsman. The combination of the decorative patterns of the lost 5-decoration "4" is derived to start the fluctuation. In addition, it may be a flow which may be a case where it does not go through a mini game or a timer advance notice effect, and may be a big hit.

  FIG. 303 is a diagram showing in stages an example of button continuous hitting effect that is applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. In addition, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 303 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (a), the button continuous hitting effect is started, and the explanation of "Let's set the meter to MAX in time by the button continuous hitting" is performed. The button image 136a is displayed together with the characters "prepared", and the operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged vertically is displayed on the left side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (a), it is before the start of reception of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation effective period, and the effect button lamp 138 is also lit in white. In this effect example, it can be said that the display of "prepare" displayed above the button image 136a corresponds to the image RDY being prepared (preparation effect display of button continuous hit effects). It should be noted that, when the button continuous hit effect is started, the decorative symbol which has been variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 303 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 303 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (b), it is shown that the reception of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 has been started. Specifically, the character "ready" displayed above the button image 136a switches to the character "start", and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the operation valid period is started. And the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can be said that the button continuous hit effect (main effect) is started at the timing when the operation effective period is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed to decrease in accordance with the passage of time from the operation valid period, and on the right side of the button image 136a A countdown display with numbers is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (c), "5" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the end of the operation valid period is 5 seconds. Since a certain advance notice effect may be performed when the countdown in the countdown display is completed, it is possible to say that the effect of the countdown display by the countdown display corresponds to the timer advance notice effect.

  FIG. 303 (d) shows that the player has started the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (d), "4" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that it is four seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 303 (e), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, one memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is red in accordance with the number of times of the continuous hitting operation. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (e), "3" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that it will be three seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 303 (f), the player continuously executes the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. It is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (f), "1" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that one second is left until the operation valid period ends.

  In (g) of FIG. 303, the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “0”, and the operation valid period is ended, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is ended. The memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in red in three modes, that is, it indicates that the button continuous hit effect has failed. Although the effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, it may be switched from red to white at the end of the operation effective period, or before the operation effective period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

  If the button continuous hit production fails, "Sorry ..." is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (h), and it is notified that the button continuous hit production has failed. In addition, in this demonstration example, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a countdown indication effect other than the timer advance notice, a certain advance notice display may not include this countdown indication display.

  FIG. 304 is a view gradually showing another example of the preparation-in-progress advance notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 304 (a), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 304 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the variation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 304 (a). The function of the first preparing image RDY is similar to that of the preparing image RDY described above. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 304 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in this rendering example, the second preparing image RDY is displayed above the first preparing image RDY1, and a plurality of preparing images are simultaneously displayed. For the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2, corresponding effects (timer announcement effect, mini game, etc.) are performed. Note that these in-provision images (the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2) all function as pre-reading notices. In addition, the background color of all the images in preparation is green, which is the default display mode. In addition, these images in preparation may be simultaneously started to be displayed, or one may be started to be displayed after the other is started to be displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 304 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 304 (b) shows that the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 304 (a) is ended and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is It is placed on the pedestal on which the fluctuation icon is displayed and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon that was at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal Do. In addition, the fluctuation display of the decoration design is started. It should be noted that the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, it can be said that these preparing images are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (c), the first preparing image RDY1 being displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started being displayed. ing. The background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "5:00", and it is informed that there is a possibility that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this rendering example, when one of the plurality of in-provision images is activated (digested) to start rendering, all the other in-provision images are also digested. In addition, although the image in preparation is completely digested in one symbol fluctuation display, the advance notice icon may be carried over and displayed until the next and subsequent symbol fluctuation display.

  In (d) of FIG. 304, the timer display in the timer preview display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is “0:00”, and the countdown is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 304 (e), the word "Go" is displayed in the area where the timer advance notice corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 was displayed, and the timer notice effect relating to this timer notice is displayed. It is informed that a corresponding advance notice display is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (f), the characters "Go" are erased along with the display area, and the second ready image RDY2 slides downward and moves to the position of the tutorial display section TT1. An image movement animation is being performed during preparation. In addition, the notice effect (precedence start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is started, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is shown. It is done. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 which may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 291 (f) is changed. It may be a character. In this effect, the image moving animation in preparation may be started after the leading start previewing effect is started, or the leading start previewing effect may be started after the image moving animation in preparation is started, The in-provision image moving animation may start at the timing when the preceding start preview effect starts. Also, the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 304 (f) overlaps the second preparing image RDY2, but may overlap the second preparing image RDY2.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a thuriken toward the fluctuating icon h0 and shows how it hit the fluctuating icon h0. It is done. At this time, the whole of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, and the visual recognition state is set as compared with the state where the fluctuation icon h0 is not covered by the effect EF4.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (h), as a result of the pending change animation being performed, the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change advance notice is started.

  In FIG. 304 (i), after “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and it is in the reach state, transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the second ready image RDY2. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of presentation, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  In FIG. 304 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is maintained. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (k), it is shown that the second under-provisioning image RDY2 is switched to the timer advance notice display, and the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer notice is displayed as a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved. Also, in FIG. 304 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "10:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is resumed. It is done. It should be noted that the timer advance notice display is a default display mode at the start of display and may be promoted display such as changing to a golden background color after start of display (for example, after the countdown is started). It is also good.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (m), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the timer preview effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the preview display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain preview display. In this example of presentation, after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new image in preparation is not displayed, but after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, new preparation is performed. A middle image may be displayed.

  FIG. 305 is a view showing in stages an example of effects according to the explanation display applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 305 (a1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 291 (a), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 305 (a2), the instruction display in the tutorial display section TT1 shows that “Panda is the master of the lord” is changed to “the lord is the Yatsushiro general”. . In this effect example, when switching the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1, the above-described opening and closing display by the shutter image is not performed, and the switching display between the explanation displays is performed. In this effect example, it is shown that, in the symbol variation display of one, when switching the explanation display, the switching display between the explanation display is performed without performing the open / close display by the shutter image.

  FIG. 305 (b 1) to FIG. 305 (b 3) show how opening and closing display is performed by a shutter image when switching the explanation display. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 305 (b1) to FIG. 305 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 291 (a) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 305 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display section TT1 by the shutter image is completely closed, and the explanation display of "donately is Yatsushiro general" is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. That is, it is shown that the open / close display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which a preliminary display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. By performing such an effect, it was expected that the advance notice display would be started, but by making the player disappointing that the advance notice display was not started and the explanation display was carried out, the shutter image was opened and closed. There are times when it can be made to have expectations.

  FIG. 306 is a view gradually showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIGS. 306 (a1) to 306 (a3) show another example of the effect following FIG. 291 (e). Note that the effects shown in FIG. 306 (a1) to FIG. 306 (a2) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIG. 291 (f) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 306 (a3), it is shown that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed from the default display mode although the effect EF4 is erased. . As described above, even when the on-hold change animation described above with reference to FIG. 291 is performed, a failure effect may be performed in which the display mode does not change. A plurality of types of characters appearing in the hold change animation may be prepared, and the rate at which the display mode of the hold icon changes may differ depending on the characters appearing in the hold change animation.

  Although the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the UI unit UI3 in the above-mentioned change-on-hold animation, for example, as shown in FIG. 306 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI unit UI3 to display the UI. It may be made not to overlap the part UI3. In this case, in the on-hold change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI unit UI3.

  FIG. 307 is a view gradually showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 307 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. In addition, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 307 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 307 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 307 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a2), it is shown that the roulette effect as a mini game is started. In this roulette effect, the roulette board RR formed in a circular shape is divided into three equal parts. An area of a rose is arranged above the three sections, an area of a princess is arranged at the lower left, and an area of a small princess is arranged at the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, the variable display is performed by blinking each of the areas in red, and a notice display corresponding to the area which is finally lit in red is prepared. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display in which the in-provision display and the like end may be the same or different. In addition, in the configuration in which the display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol fluctuation display in which the symbol display is performed may be the same as the symbol fluctuation display in which the UW display etc. is finished. It may be. According to the combination described above, the display can be referred to as a pre-reading notice display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a3), it is shown that all areas are lit in red as a result of the fluctuation display of the roulette effect. That is, it has been notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the wolf character, the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the advance notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character are respectively prepared.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a4), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed on the upper left of the display screen Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the black character GII, and the tiny baby character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character is caused to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when the display of the image in preparation is accompanied, the character is displayed at the position corresponding to the character. It can be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a5), it is shown that the character CHM of Little Princess moves upward and overlaps the lower left corner portion of the third preparation image RDY3. That is, it can be said that one notice display overlaps another notice display. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a6), it is shown that an animation in which the character CHM of Little princess is throwing an object toward the variation icon h0 is being performed. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, the notice display corresponding to the character CMH of Princess Chibi is the notice display due to the change of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a7), the effect EF7 is erased, and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state in which it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a8), display in a mode in which the eyelid character GII vibrates is started. As a result, it is informed that the advance notice display corresponding to the decoy character GII is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a9), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third in-provision image RDY3 disposed adjacent to the beard character GII is displayed. It is done. When the mini game is started, the laterally extending cylindrical drum DRM starts to rotate about the lateral direction as an axis of rotation. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a10), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the character of "superheat" is derived, suggesting that the possibility of becoming a big hit is high There is. That is, the fluctuation notice is performed by deriving the character of "super heat" to the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not the effect of changing the display mode of something, but the effect of giving a big hit advance notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a11), display in a mode in which the princess character HME vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is started. Since the princess character HME is displayed so as to be overlapped on the UI unit UI3, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a12), it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and then the countdown is started. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 307 (a12), "30:00" is displayed as the timer display, and thereafter, the countdown is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a13), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown. Then, the princess character HME ascends and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1 and notifies that the advance notice display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that the same effect as the display of “Go” described above and shown in FIG. 304 (m) is performed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a14), super reach transition display is performed, and a state of developing into super reach (sword reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the character HME of the princess corresponds to the development to the swordsman reach. Also, although not shown, the family crest 224E is raised and rotated to overlap the front side of the lower central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moreover, in this example of presentation, the background color of the super reach transition display is set to gold, and it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is high. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed because the countdown by the timer display is completed. In addition, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  In this example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of super reach, but at least one may be digested after the development of super reach, for example, iron plate image TP is displayed A mini game to be played or timer announcement effect may be performed.

  FIG. 307 (b1) shows that, in the roulette effect described above in FIG. 307 (a2), only the region of the eyebrows of the three regions is lit in red. That is, of the notice display corresponding to the wolf character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character, only the notice display corresponding to the whale character is prepared. It has been informed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (b2), the third in-provision image RDY3 is displayed in such a manner that the dark blue character GII is adjacent. That is, while the whale character GII appears at a position corresponding to the whale character GII, the image under preparation that appears along with the whale character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the whale character GII. Therefore, in this effect example, only the mini game by the drum DRM is played.

  FIG. 308 is a diagram showing the step by step another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  The effect shown in FIG. 308 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307 (a3), but "x 2" is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a2), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed on the upper left of the display screen The third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the black character GII is adjacent, and two tiny princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. In the case where a plurality of effects are prepared by the insult character GII and the princess character HME, for example, two same characters can be displayed on one in-progress image. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, one first in-provision image RDY1 is displayed, and two princess characters HME can be displayed. Conversely, a single character may display a plurality of images being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a3), the character CHM1 of the little princess of the two little princess characters moves upward and moves to the lower left corner of the third preparation image RDY3. An overlap is shown. As a result, it is notified that the first notice display among the two notice displays corresponding to the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a4), it is shown that an animation is being performed in which the character CHM1 of Princess Little is throwing an object toward the fluctuation icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is notified that the advance notice display by the change of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of Little Princess is started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a5), the effect EF7 is erased, and the variation icon h0 is in a state in which it is easy to view. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is started.

  Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a6), the character CHM2 of the other Little Princess of the two Little Princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparation image RDY3 It is shown that parts overlap. As a result, it is notified that the second advance notice display corresponding to the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a7), it is shown that an animation is being performed in which the character CHM2 of Princess Little is throwing an object toward the fluctuation icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH2 of Princess Chibi is notified that the preliminary display by the fluctuation icon is ranked up.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a8), the effect EF7 is erased and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state in which it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red advance notice to the display mode of the gold advance notice, and it is shown that the change notice by the change icon h0 is ranked up.

  FIGS. 308 (b1) to (b4) show another example of effect following FIG. 308 (a3). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 308 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 308 (a4), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (b2), after the object thrown by the character CHM1 of the princess reaches the change icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the entire display screen is turned dark. Is performed, and the portion where the effect EF 7 is displayed glows white, and a display in which light is extended in the horizontal direction from there is performed. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. In addition, when another mini game is started while the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed, the mini game is also temporarily made non-displayed due to the darkening of the display screen. You may In addition, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only a part of images in preparation is temporarily hidden. You may Thus, the state in which the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as a fourth state. Then, in this presentation example, the first state in which the hold icon is displayed with the UI unit UI3 and the second state in which the hold icon is not displayed with the UI unit UI3 is the first state. The state may be changed to the fourth state, and the first state may be changed to the second state, or the first state may be changed to the second state. The first state may be changed to the fourth state, and then the second state may be set.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (b3), it is shown that the light of the portion where the effect EF7 was displayed is enlarged and displayed.

  Thereafter, when the dark display is finished, as shown in FIG. 308 (b4), the variation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is resumed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 308 (b4) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 308 (a5), the description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 308 (c1) to (c3) show another example of effect following FIG. 307 (a6). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 308 (c1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 307 (a7), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (c2), the display in a mode in which the indigo character GII vibrates is started, and in the area where the third preparation image RDY3 is displayed, “Go” is displayed. The characters are displayed to notify that the mini game is to be started. Note that the display of “Go” may be started after the キ ャ ラ ク タ character GII starts to vibrate, or the G character GII may start to vibrate after the display of “Go” is started, The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the scarlet character GII starts to vibrate. As a result, it is informed that the advance notice display corresponding to the decoy character GII is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (c3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third in-provision image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the beard character GII is displayed. It is done. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed is enlarged and moved to approximately the center of the display screen, and the effect by the rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this example of effect, it is shown that the area in which the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area in which the image under preparation is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after the "Go" display is made may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without the "Go" display. . In addition, the case where the mini game is enlarged may be more likely to be a big hit if the mini game is not enlarged and displayed. It should be noted that the display from the display of the image under preparation to the start of the mini game, timer advance notice effect, etc. may also be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain advance display (a certain effect) are performed in the same area, the places where the first display and the second display are performed are different, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand There is a case to play the effect.

  FIG. 309 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the effect display on the left side is performed and the display device (display device 2) on which the effect display on the right side is performed may be different display devices. In that case, a third display (some notice display) may be made on the display device 2 in some cases.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 309 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the in-provision image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 309 (a). In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 309 (a) is in the default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits light in red in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (b), a multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into two on the left and right, and the left notice display area CUL and the right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-hand notice display area CUL, the display of “Chibi princess is participating in SP reach participation in annihilation” is performed, and the Chibi princess has a mission of having Chibi princess to annihilate a large number of minions performed, and the right notice In the display area CUR, a display of "To win the victory in SP reach participation" is performed, and drinking comparison is performed between the coffin and the coffin, and the comparision of drinking is performed with a mission that the cowards win the drinking comparison. In this production example, the construction is such that transition to super reach is achieved when at least one of the mission in the Chibi Princess Musou rendering and the mission in the drinking and the rendering is achieved, and the reliability increases when both missions are achieved. It is done. It should be noted that after the Chibi princess musou rendition is started, the drinking and comparing performance may be started, or after the drinking comparison rendition is started, the Chibi princess and musk reversion may be started, and both of the renditions are started at the same time It may be done. Further, in this example of production, if at least one of the mission in the Chibi-Himeka Musou effect and the mission in the performance compared to the drink is achieved, it may be made a big hit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (c), it is shown that the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 during execution of both the Chibi princess insane effect and the drink comparison effect. There is. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The strategic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hit area, and an arrow hitting the hit area gives a chance to announce a chance up It is supposed to be The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (d), it is shown that the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, it is shown that the mini game as the advance notice has succeeded.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI in which the character of “chance” is displayed in the left notice display area CUL in which Chibi Princess Musou rendition is performed is displayed Thus, it is reported that the mission in the little princess princess musou rendition corresponding to the area where the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed is facilitated to be achieved. As described above, in this effect example, the area where the image RDY being displayed is displayed does not match the area where the advance display is performed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable and improve interest. . The chance-up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right notice display area CUR in which the effects are compared compared to drinking, or the chance is raised in both the left notice display area CUL and the right notice display area CUR. The cut-in image WUI may be displayed. The tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed because the mini game has ended.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (f), it is shown that a child is completely eliminated and a mission is achieved in the Chibi princess musou rendition displayed in the left notice display area CUL.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (g), the letter “Annihilation” is displayed together with the indication of Princess Chibi up in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission in the Chibi Princess incomparable effect is achieved Is reported. In the right advance notice display area CUR, effects are continued compared to drinking.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (h), it is shown that the lord has won the eyebrows and the mission has been achieved in comparison with the drink displayed in the right advance notice display area CUR.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (i), the character of “winning” is displayed together with the display of the close-up in the right-hand notice display area CUR, and it is informed that the mission in the drinking comparison effect is achieved. It is done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (j), it is shown that the sword reach is started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this example, since the mission in the drink comparison production is achieved, the swordsman reach is started, and since the mission in the Chibi princess musou rendition is achieved, the Chibi princess has appeared as a friend of the lord. In addition, if the mission in the comparition to drink is achieved and the mission in Chibi princess musou rendition fails, it will shift to swordsman reach, but the chibi princess will not appear, the mission in chibi princess musou rendition will be achieved and the comparition will be compared If you fail in the mission in, transition to Super reach for Chibi princess. That is, in this rendition, the contents of rendition to be developed thereafter differ depending on the success or failure of each of the two missions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (k), the cut-in image HCI of the princess in which the character of "chance" and the character of the princess are displayed is displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. As a result, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is improved, but it is not the high reliability, not the notice display started from the mini game started from the image RDY under preparation or the timer notice effect. ing.

  FIG. 310 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step an example of another effect shown in FIG. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 310 (a)-the same figure (b) is the same as the rendition shown to FIG. 309 (a)-the same figure (b), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (c), a state is shown in which both the Chibi Princess Musou rendition and the drink compared to the rendition are performed. In this presentation example, the display of the image RDY being prepared continues, and the mini game has not been started yet. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the advance notice display corresponding to the image in preparation RDY is not started before the transition to the super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 310 (c) to FIG. (E). In FIG. 310 (e), the chance up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 310 (f) to FIG. 310 (j) are performed. It is to be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 310 (f) to (j) are that the image RDY in preparation is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 for the effects shown in FIGS. 309 (f) to (j). The description is omitted because it is the same except for the above.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (k), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, and the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is It is notified that it is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (l), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY was displayed. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The strategic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hit area, and an arrow hitting the hit area gives a chance to announce a chance up It is supposed to be The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (m), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, it is shown that the mini game as the advance notice has succeeded.

  Then, an iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (n). This iron plate image TP is a notice display to notify that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this example, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high advance notice.

  FIG. 311 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 311 (a1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 307 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a2), the message "reach when caught" is displayed, and it is shown that chasing rendition, which has a mission of catching the Echigoya, has been started. There is. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311 (a1) (main display) Is displayed. As described above, in this rendering example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain rendering is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a3), a state is shown in which the lord is closing the distance to Echigoya. On the other hand, in the subwindow WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a4), it is shown that the lord has caught Echigoya and the mission has been achieved. Thereby, it is notified that it will be reach. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to indicate that preparation for the reach occurrence is in progress. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize that the reach as the advance notice is generated by stocking the advance notice corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a5), the chase effect is finished, and the main display displayed in the subwindow WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and then it becomes reach with "decoration 4". The situation is shown. In this presentation example, it is shown that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase presentation. When the main display is displayed on the full screen, the sub window WP3 may be enlarged (wipe display) or switched. Further, when the main display is full screen display, the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  FIGS. 311 (b1) to (b2) show another example of effects relating to the display of the sub-window during execution of the chase effect shown in FIGS. 311 (a1) to (a5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 311 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 311 (b1). In the upper left portion of the display screen, a third preparing image RDY3 is displayed. In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 311 (b1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits light in red in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (b2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311 (b1) (main display) Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two ready images RDY1 and RDY3 in the sub window WP3, only the first ready image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed in the sub window WP3 and the third ready image RDY3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect (chase effect) is performed. Although the subwindow WP3 and the image being prepared are displayed at positions not overlapping in this example, the image being prepared may overlap the subwindow WP3 and the image being prepared may overlap the subwindow WP3. It may be made to overlap.

  FIGS. 311 (c1) to (c2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 311 (b1) to (b2). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 311 (c1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 311 (b1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (c2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display (main display) related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311 (c1) Is displayed. In this example, the third preparing image RDY3 of the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed only in the sub window WP3 as the main display is displayed in the sub window WP3, and the first in-provision image RDY1 displayed in the position displayed so far is erased.

  FIG. 311 (d1) to FIG. 311 (d2) show the display mode of the image in preparation when the background display is displayed inclined. In addition, since the example of an effect shown to FIG. 311 (d1) is the same as the example of an effect shown to FIG. 309 (a), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (d2), a shake vision effect is performed in which the background display is reduced to about 3⁄4 and the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is not inclined along with the background display.

  FIG. 312 is a diagram showing in stages an example of step-up notice effects applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 312 (a1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 307 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a2), the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted from below the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted up is shown. There is. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "A" indicating that it is the first step of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. , A mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. That is, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take strikes in the bowling game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a4), it is shown that the character of the tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a5), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a6), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started . Note that the in-provision image RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  FIGS. 312 (b 1) to (b 8) describe another example of effect of the step-up notice. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 312 (b1) to FIG. 312 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 312 (a1) to (a2), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB is lifted from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and lifts the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA. It is shown that it is displayed in the same way. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB also has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "B" indicating that it is the second step of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. , A mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed. In this presentation example, the mission is more likely to be successful if the mini game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than on the mini game played on the first step-up display unit SUA. In addition, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed in the case where the mini game is successful in the second step up display unit SUB than when the mini game is successful in the first step up display unit SUA.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b4), it is shown that a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, in the mini game display area, a message of "CUP IN" is displayed, and a display showing how the character of the lord is putting is performed. That is, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a putt.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b5), a state is shown in which the character of the lord put on and the golf ball moves toward the cup.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b6), it is shown that the golf ball is cupped in and the mission is achieved.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b7), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started . It should be noted that the image under preparation RDY has a red background color and is notified that the jackpot reliability is high.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward and frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  In this example, although the bowling chance game and the golf game have been described as being successful, for example, in the bowling chance game, a message indicating that the pins did not fall down is displayed to notify of a mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a message indicating that the player did not cup in may be displayed to notify of a mission failure. Also, in this example, the character of the lord appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but another character may appear. For example, when the character of the princess appears, the character of the lord appeared It may indicate that the jackpot reliability is higher than in the case.

  FIG. 313 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. In addition, since the effect shown to FIG. 313 (a1) is the same as the effect shown to FIG. 312 (a1), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed by lifting the UI unit UI3. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, something in the UI unit UI3 is not displayed. The explanation display may be deleted after the display of the first step-up display unit SUA starts, or the display of the first step-up display unit SUA may be started after the explanation display is deleted. The explanation display may be erased at the timing when the one-step up display unit SUA starts display. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 313 (a3) to FIG. 313 (a5) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 313 (a3) to (a5) are the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a5) and the instruction display is not performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and The same is true except that the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed, so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a6), the situation where the mission is achieved is continuously shown.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. The explanation display and the change icon h0 remain non-display.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a8), it is shown that the fluctuation icon h0 is redisplayed in a red display mode. That is, it is shown that the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the fluctuation advance notice and is redisplayed. Alternatively, the in-preparation image RDY may be displayed before the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes and is redisplayed, and a mini game, timer advance notice effect, or the like may be made.

  FIGS. 313 (b 1) to (b 3) show another display mode of the step-up notice effect. Although the effect shown in FIG. 313 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 313 (a1), it differs in that four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (b2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed by lifting the UI unit UI3. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position is not changed despite the movement of the hold icon h11 to the upper side of the UI unit UI3, and therefore, it overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display unit SUA. Is shown. That is, it can be said that when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which a certain display (pending icon h11) is not moved is shown even if the UI unit UI3 is moved.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L of FIG. 313 (b3), it is shown that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of "strike" is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

  FIG. 314 is a diagram showing another example of step-up notice effects applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (a), one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 314 (a). The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 314 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (a), a state of transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 314 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 314 (b) shows that the family crest 224E has returned to its initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (c), it is shown that an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI unit FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 314 (d) to (f), the UI unit UI3 performs a frame out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is not framed out together with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered as shown in FIG. 314 (f).

  FIG. 314 (g) shows that the sword strike has been started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (h), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted and displayed so as to lift the fluctuation icon h0. That is, in this presentation example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the change icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the change icon h0 is moved. Can.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (i) shows that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (j), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels to ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (k), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (l), the in-preparation image RDY appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started Be done. Note that the in-provision image RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode. Further, FIG. 314 (l) shows that the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out. At this time, the image under preparation RDY is overlapped with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 314 (m), at least one of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed until the frame out is completed. It is considered that the department is difficult to see

  FIG. 315 is a view showing in stages the other example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 315 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 315 (a1). In the first preparation image RDY1, the background color is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 315 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a1), a state of transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. In this rendering example, an example is shown in which the first preparing image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to the super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 315 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 315 (a2) shows that the family crest 224E has returned to the initial position.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a3) shows that an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI unit FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 315 (a4) to FIG. 315 (a6), the UI unit UI3 performs frame out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the first preparation image RDY1 are not framed out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 315 (a6), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed with its display position lowered. As for the first preparing image RDY 1, the display state is maintained without changing the display position.

  In FIG. 315 (a7), it is shown that the sword strike has been started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a8), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted and displayed so as to lift the fluctuation icon h0. That is, in this presentation example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the change icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the change icon h0 is moved. Can. Further, the first preparation image RDY1 is displayed overlapping the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. The first preparation image RDY1 may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be moved up, and the first preparation image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a9) shows that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini game display area of the first step-up display SUA is overlapped with the first preparing image RDY 1 and is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state. The same applies to the following effects.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a10), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a11), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice is started. Is notified. That is, when a new in-progress image is displayed when a certain number of in-provision images are displayed in a certain area, the new in-progress image is displayed in another area. Can. The third in-provision image RDY3 has a green background color, which is a default display mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 315 (a12) to FIG. (A13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and goes out of the frame.

  FIG. 315 (b 1) to FIG. 315 (b 2) are diagrams showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. FIG. 315 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 315 (a3). Moreover, since the effects shown in FIG. 311 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 315 (a4), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (b2), it is shown that the sword strike is started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. In this presentation example, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that only the pedestal on which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed is maintained in a mode in which the display position is lowered. That is, it is shown that even when the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.

  FIG. 316 is a diagram showing in stages an example of a pseudo-series effect that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 316 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the in-provision image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 316 (a1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 316 (a1) is in the default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, “decoration 6” in the left symbol and “decoration 7” in the right symbol. It is shown that the display is stopped. In addition, the middle symbol is in the display of variation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a3), the variation speed of the middle symbol is low, and it is shown that the pseudo-connected symbol composed of the pattern of Tonosama scrolls in from above the display screen. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a4), a state is shown in which the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a5), a pseudo run symbol stop animation for producing whether or not to start a pseudo run is started. When the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, leaving the variation icon h0 and the image RDY being prepared. Here, the UI unit FO animation may be started after the pseudo run symbol stop animation is started, or the pseudo run symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is started, or the pseudo run symbol The UI unit FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation starts. In addition, the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. As described above, in this example of rendering, the UI unit UI3 is shown as non-displayed in a certain state such as when performing pseudo rendering rendition or when pseudo rendering is established. When the pseudo run symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo run symbol expands in the lateral direction as shown in FIG. 316 (a5) to FIG. 316 (a7).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a6), the pseudo run symbol is further expanded and overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to see. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a7), the pseudo run symbol is further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed over. At this time, the pseudo run pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part of the dummy run pattern is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. In addition, the pseudo run pattern is overlapped also with stage name indicator ST1 which is indicated in 2nd decoration symbol display device 208M, acceptance frequency indication 850 and stock button picture 852, furthermore, 3rd decoration symbol display device It is also overlapped with the character of the lady displayed on 208N and the second number of reservations display. Also, at this time, the family crest 224E starts to rise, and overlaps a part of the pseudo-series symbols.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 316 (a8), the family crest 224E rotates, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Don", and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is to be performed.

  FIG. 316 (a9) shows that the pseudo run symbol stop animation is finished and the pseudo run symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and that the UI unit UI3 is frame-in with frame in animation (UI unit FI animation). It is done. Note that the UI unit FI animation may be started after the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends, or the UI unit FI animation may be started before the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends, or the pseudo run symbol stop The UI unit FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. In addition, as for the decorative design, it is temporary stop state due to shaking fluctuation with the combination of the decorative design of “decoration 6-pseudo consecutive design-decoration 7”, after that, fluctuation indication of the decoration design of the second time by the pseudo ream is started Ru.

  FIGS. 316 (b 1) to (b 3) show an example of display before and after the stage change effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 316 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 316 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 316 (b2), the stage effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N perform dark display respectively, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. It is shown that the approximate center glows and the light rays extend from there in the left and right direction. At this time, the light beam is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this rendering example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is not displayed at the time of dark display by the stage rendering. Further, in this example of rendering, it is also shown that the image RDY being prepared is not displayed at the time of dark display by the stage rendering. In addition, during the dark display, the image RDY being prepared may be ended, and a mini game or timer announcement effect may be started.

  FIG. 316 (b3) shows that the stage change effect has ended. In this effect example, after the completion of the stephen effect, the same display as that before the start of the stephen effect is performed. That is, it is shown that it is a false stephen effect that neither mode transition nor stage change is performed.

  FIG. 317 is a view showing in stages an example of button preview effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 317 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 317 (a). Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 317 (a) is in a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a), it is shown that the sword strike is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In this rendering example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed even during execution of a sword strike.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display section ST1, the acceptance count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are erased, and the background display is also the background display of the sword reach.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also considered to be the background display of Ken-Age reach.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (b), the united animation is started, and a pair of translucent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, Are moving. Note that while the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 has not been received yet.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (c), a state immediately before the pairing of the translucent button images 136q is close and the merging is completed is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 317 (c), when the pair of translucent button images 136q approaches, at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q is overlapped by the effect EF6, and this is more than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136 q is difficult to view. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. Further, FIG. 317 (c) shows that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. Note that the effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is framed out, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is framed out, or the effect is performed at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is framed out. EF6 may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (d), the combined animation is successful, the deca-button image 136aL is materialized, and the button announcement effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed and the operation acceptance state is It is shown that it was started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed at least during a period in which a button advance notice effect by the button image 136a (decay button image 136aL) is being performed.

  FIG. 318 is a diagram showing in stages an example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 318 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 318 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 318 (a1), the first special view display device 212 stops displaying with a lost symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L causes the loss of “deterior 3-decoration 5-decoration 6”. The stop display is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols. Also, the special figure 1 fourth pattern 284a1 is also lit in the display mode of losing. Note that the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 316 (a1) is in the advance notice display mode displayed in red.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In FIG. 318 (a2), the situation during stop display of the symbol is continuously shown. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is deleted in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (a3) displays the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 covering the entire UI portion UI3. The character of the lord who got on the motorcycle is framed in from the left side of the UI wipe display portion WP4, and as shown in FIG. 318 (a3) to FIG. . That is, in this effect example, in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the advance notice display mode to the default display mode, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed, and effect display is performed by the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. There are cases where it is possible to naturally change the display mode in the UI unit UI3. Note that, for example, when returning to the original display due to a super reach effect, the entire display screen may be covered by the wipe display unit, and the effect display may be performed by the wipe display unit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (a6), it is shown that the effect by the character of the lady in the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is finished, and the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is erased. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and the change icon is displayed. The hold icon that has been h0 and the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, a display of "Tomonashi is a general Yatsushiro" is performed, and the explanation display changes before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

  In the example of the effect, the display of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 may not be performed or may be performed in the state where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. If the display of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is performed while the preparing image RDY is displayed, the preparing image RDY is not displayed during that time, and as a result, the displaying of the preparing image RDY is performed. The game may be ended and a mini game or timer announcement effect may be started.

  Fig. 318 (b1) to (b4) show an example of display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 318 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in gold and is the display mode of the fluctuation advance notice, but the hold icon h11 is the default display mode. The family crest 224E also emits light in gold in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 318 (b1) is not displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 318 (b1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 318 (b1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 318 (b2) to (b4), in the tutorial display section TT1, a character of the swordsman scrolls in from below and moves the line of sight continuously from the top of the head to the foot It is shown that the character of the swordsman is scrolled by. Also, as shown in FIG. 318 (b4), after the foot of the sword character is displayed, the sword character is scrolled in such a manner that the line of sight moves continuously from the foot to the top of the head. That is, the continuous scroll display between the top and the foot of the sword character is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, an example of displaying the entire character by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling on the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown.

  In this effect example, for example, in a state in which the explanation display is not resumed or in a state in which only the hold icon is hidden (a state in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display is performed using a certain portion of the UI unit UI3. It can be said that an example to do is shown.

  FIG. 319 is a view showing the example of another effect that can be applied to this embodiment in a step-by-step manner. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 to which the effect example shown in FIG. 319 can be applied can be divided into, for example, the first special view starting opening and the second special view starting opening per one starting opening, and the symbol in the normal gaming state There is a so-called MAX8 machine (sometimes referred to as an eight-in-one machine) that can hold eight variable displays. Here, the MAX8 machine will be described as an example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and on the left side of the variation icon h0, a reserve icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged in a staggered arrangement and four pedestals are formed in a staggered arrangement so that eight reserve icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 319 (a1), a total of seven variable displays of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 are held, so seven holding icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the holding icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. In addition, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 319 (a1), "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the explanation display line is displayed. It is In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 319 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 319 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. According to the second number-of-holds display, at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (a1), four special figures 1 are reserved, and it is reported that three special figures 2 are reserved.

  Further, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In FIG. 319 (a2), it is shown that the game ball has won the second special view starting opening and the holding of special views 1 and 2 is eight in total. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to 7th hold icon h7 and the fluctuation icon h0 which are already displayed are displayed. It is shown that the display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyelid that imitates the face of the eyelid. The UI unit UI3 also changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "pong" to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, the UI unit UI3 and the effect example in which the change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are simultaneously changed are shown when the hold is full. In this presentation example, the number of symbol variation displays corresponding to the hold icon in which the display mode of the eyebrows is displayed may be notified.

  FIG. 319 (b1) shows that the sword strike is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 319 (b1), the second holding number display is displayed, and according to the second holding number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (b1) Four are reserved, and it is notified that three special figures 2 are reserved.

  In FIG. 319 (b2), it is shown that the game ball has won the second special view starting opening and the holding of the special view 1 and the special view 2 has become eight in total. Specifically, in the second number-of-holds display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special views 1 are suspended and four special views 2 are suspended, and the speaker 120 Then, a voice "pong" is output to notify that the hold is full.

  FIG. 319 (b3) shows a state in which the super reach has become a loss, and the production of the sword strike has ended and the display of the castle town stage has returned. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the reach by the sword is finished and the stage is returned to the castle town stage, a combination of the decorative symbols of the "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shaken. Display of temporary stop by change is performed. In addition, since the display is full during execution of the sword strike, the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 Changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyebrows. In this rendering example, when the display is full while the UI unit UI3 is hidden due to the super reach, when the UI unit UI3 is redisplayed, the UI unit UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed. It is shown about the example of presentation which changes a display mode.

  FIGS. 319 (c1) to (c4) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIGS. 319 (b1) to (b3). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 319 (c1) to FIG. 3 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 319 (b1) to FIG. 3 (b2), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 319 (c3) shows a state in which the super reach has become a loss, and the production of the sword strike has ended and the display of the castle town stage has returned. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the reach by the sword is finished and the stage is returned to the castle town stage, a combination of the decorative symbols of the "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shaken. Display of temporary stop by change is performed. Also, in this example of rendering, the game was full during execution of the Swordsman reach effect, but the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the variation icon h0 and the suspension icons h1 to h8 is not changed, and the full suspension is achieved. The letter "MAX" indicating that the change is made is displayed at the top of the variation icon h0. Thereafter, the symbol is fixedly displayed in a state where the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 does not change.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 319 (c 4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, All of the icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 change from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyebrows. Thereafter, the hold icons h1 to h8 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move onto the corresponding pedestals. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (c4), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and an explanatory display is performed.

  FIG. 320 is a view showing in stages the other example of the effects applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 320 (a1) to (a3) and 320 (b1) to (b2), the UI unit UI4 has a variable icon display area, a reserved icon display area, a tutorial display area TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is displayed integrally with the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, also in this demonstration example, when it becomes super reach, the UI unit is configured to frame out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, display is performed without frame out. You may leave it alone. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Further, in this presentation example, the image in preparation can be displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit UI4 surrounded by a rectangular frame is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. A reserved icon display area is formed at the center of the UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 320 (a1). The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and variation icons are displayed in a mode of being placed on a frame configured by the UI unit UI4. At the timing shown in FIG. 320 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is disposed on the left side of the hold icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 320 (a1), "Preliminary icon digestion ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Jojo town stage" is displayed, It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Toku 1 and Toku 2 is also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224F and a general role item 224Fb is arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (a2), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is switched to the first preparation image RDY1 is shown. The first preparation image RDY1 has a green background color and is a default display mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (a3), a state in which the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth preparation image RDY4 is shown. The fourth preparation image RDY 4 has a green background color and is a default display mode. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the image under preparation is displayed in each of the plurality of explanatory display parts.

  FIGS. 320 (b1) to (b2) are diagrams showing another rendering example following FIG. 320 (a1). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 320 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 320 (a2), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (b2), while continuing to display the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, the fourth preparation image RDY4 is displayed on the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2. It is shown that the image is displayed at a position shifted upward more than that. That is, it is shown that the image in preparation overlaps with a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed. It is also possible to apply such a display mode in the tutorial display unit TT4.

  FIGS. 320 (c1) to (c7) are diagrams showing another aspect of the effect that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT3 as a third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed together with the eyelid character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. . The whistle character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or speech effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, and the like are performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 320 (c1), in response to the speech display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech display "here" is made on the balloon part TT3, and the conversational announcement continues. Here, the brow character GY1 and the blowout portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative pattern, but the brow character GY1 and the blowout portion TT3 may overlap with the first decorative pattern. In addition, the brow character GY1 and the blowout part TT3 may be arranged at a position not overlapping the first decorative pattern. Also, the spider character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed after the spider character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The brow character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation notice by the character CH1 of the princess of the little princess and the character GY1 of the beard may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 becomes non-display may be the timing after the crow character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the crow character GY1 is displayed It is also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased may be the same timing as the timing at which the decoy character GY1 is displayed. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. Also, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (c2), it is shown that the family crest 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, after moving, the family crest 224E completely covers the holding display frame FL1 and moves a part of the first holding icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one part of the balloon part TT2. It covers each part.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the expansion animation (expansion animation) of the holding display frame FL1 is performed, and the holding display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the family crest product 224E It is shown that it has appeared above than. That is, it can be said that a portion where the pending display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest 224E appears. Further, although the suspension display frame FL1 after expansion overlaps with the blowout part TT2 and overlaps with the blowout part TT2, it does not overlap with the blowout part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this example of presentation, there may be cases where the speech display preview (the blowout part TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the holding display frame FL1 is expanded. Thus, the display mode of the hold display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an expansion display mode. In this example of presentation, although the figure of reservation display frame FL1 before expansion and reservation display frame FL1 after expansion is expressed, that by which expansion display frame FL1 expands in a step-by-step manner is included in extended animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the character NJ1 of the ninja appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest 224E, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the part c is not overlapped with the family crest 224E.

  FIG. 320 (c5) shows that the family crest 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the part of the ninja character NJ1 which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and is easy to view. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, FIG. 320 (c6) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1, and the display of the effect EF2 in which a part of the tutorial display area TT1 explodes is performed. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to have an expectation that the tutorial display section TT1 performs preliminary display and the reliability to the big hit may become high.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (c7), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer preview effect is started . The image under preparation RDY has a green background color and is considered to be the default display mode. In this effect, in place of the image RDY being prepared, the timer advance notice may be displayed and the timer advance notice may be started, the mini game may be started, or the advance notice may be displayed. .

  FIG. 321 is a diagram for explaining an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by displaying the hold display frame in which the hold icon is accommodated in an expanded manner.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this effect example, a reserved icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, which respectively constitute a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a1), four pending icons are accommodated in each frame in the pending icon display area, and the second of the first pending icon h11 to the fourth pending icon h14 is displayed. The hold icon h12 is a display mode (for example, a display mode lit in blue) of the prefetch notice, and the other hold icons are set as the default display mode. Further, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and during the symbol variation display, the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area. Here, the area where the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed may be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, a tutorial display unit TT7 is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT7. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen. In this example of presentation, none of the stage name display section ST1, the acceptance count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also considered to be the background display of Ken-Age reach.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the family crest accessory 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. The enlargement display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually enlarged. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a2), the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is stored, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded mode. Further, in the example of the effect, the tutorial display unit TT7 is out of the display screen due to the enlarged display of the holding display frame, but the image under preparation RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. The tutorial display unit TT7 is separated and displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen. At this time, the image under preparation RDY may overlap a part of the holding display frame and the holding icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a3), the luminescent color of the household object 224E emitting blue changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is predicted to change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 321 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the second hold icon h12 displayed in an enlarged manner is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation to the jackpot for the symbol variation display required for the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 321 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced and the display mode is returned to the default display mode. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually reduced. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this manner, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this presentation example, the tutorial display unit TT7 that appears due to the reduced display of the reserved icon display area is displayed in such a manner that the image RDY being prepared is accommodated.

  FIGS. 321 (b1) to (b2) show another form of the effect example shown in FIGS. 321 (a1) to (a5). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 321 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (b2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 321 (a2) is shown. At this time, the holding icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared together with the holding icon enlarged and displayed. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 321 (b2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. Display (main display) is displayed. Although the UI unit UI2 is not displayed in the display in the sub-window WP3, it may be displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged display icon display area. As described above, in this rendering example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain rendering is performed.

  Subsequently, a display example of a warning display in the case where a ball removal error has occurred will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 322 is a view showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 323 is a view showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 324 is a view showing a display example of the ball removal error display. FIG. In addition, although the display position of the warning display of the ball extraction error (hereinafter referred to as “ball extraction error display”) is taken as a fixed place, it can be appropriately set which position is used as the display position. is there. In the following description, a display example including variations of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. The ball removal error display is to be erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated to cancel the bottom plate full tank condition and the ball removal error is removed. Further, in the example of effect shown below, although the display example of the ball removal error display is shown, it is also applicable to, for example, a door opening error or the like that occurs when the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, when the ball removal error display is performed, an error sound may be output together or may not be output.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 322 (a1) to FIG. 322 (a2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display in the case where a ball extraction error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 291 (c) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (a1), a state is shown in which an extraction error display ERR1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, the message "Please remove the ball" is displayed to urge the player to produce the game balls stored in the lower tray and cancel the lower tray full-tank state.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (a2), a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1 in which the shutter image is released and the image RDY is displayed. It is shown that it is displayed. As a result, it may be possible to notice the image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY in preparation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to withdraw the ball when the display of the image under preparation RDY is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the image under preparation RDY.

  Examples of effects shown in FIG. 322 (b1) to FIG. (B2) show, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 293 (c1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (b1), a state is shown in which a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the remaining time display meter MT4. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball pullout error display ERR1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 322 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display decreases, the overlap state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter The MT4 is in an easy-to-see state. As a result, it may be possible to notice the remaining time display meter MT4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the remaining time meter MT4 is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 322 (c1) to FIG. 322 (c2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 294 (b4) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (c1), the ball pullout error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the sword sword of the hostile, but overlaps with the translucent button image 136q related to the united animation. It is shown that there is no such thing. At this time, it is also possible for the ball removal error display ERR1 to overlap with the translucent button image 136q in the merging animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 322 (c2), when the translucent button image 139q approaches, a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps. As a result, it may be possible to notice the united animation by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the combined animation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the combined animation is finished by simultaneously viewing the removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 322 (d1) to FIG. 322 (d2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 301 (f) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. The UI unit UI3 including TT1 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 322 (d2), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display section TT1 to notify that the second timer announcement effect is started, but the in-preparation image RDY is redisplayed. Sometimes, the first preparing image RDY is displayed enlarged compared to when it is displayed. Therefore, the image RDY being prepared is overlapped by a part of the ball extraction error display ERR1 which has not been overlapped in the tutorial display part TT1 until now. As a result, it may be possible to notice the magnified image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY in preparation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to open the ball when the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball extraction error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 322 (e1) to FIG. 322 (e2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 302 (a5) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (e1), a part of the ball pullout error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area where the sword character is drawn, but the tombstone character is drawn. Areas do not overlap.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 322 (e2), as a result of the player performing a long press operation on the effect button 136, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is expanded, and when A part of the ball out error display ERR1 is overlapped with the area where the character is drawn. As a result, it may be possible to notice the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman character of the enemy role by looking at the display without the ball. In addition, it may be possible to notice an error indication ERR1 of the open ball error by looking at the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman of the enemy character. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. At the same time, give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the character between the character of the lord and the character of the sword sword of the enemy is finished by simultaneously viewing the merits of the error ERR1 of the ball and the character of the sword sword of the character of the enemy. There are times when you can.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 322 (f1) to FIG. 322 (f2) shows, for example, the display example of the warning display in the case where the ball extraction error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 304 (e) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (f1), a state is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the second preparing image RDY2. On the other hand, it does not overlap with the display area where the character "Go" is displayed (the display area where the first preparing image RDY was displayed).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (f2), the character "Go" is erased together with its display area, and the second ready image RDY2 slides downward, and the position of the tutorial display portion TT1 An image movement animation is being performed during preparation to move up. In addition, the notice effect (precedence start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is started, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is shown. It is done. At this time, the overlap state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. In addition, it is not necessary for the ball extraction error display ERR1 to overlap the ninja character NJ4. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the second ready image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it is possible to give an opportunity to pull out the ball when the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is finished by simultaneously looking at the ball removing error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. There is a case.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 323 (a1) to FIG. 323 (a2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 307 (a3) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (a1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (a2), the first character under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the black character GII, and the tiny baby character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the character CHM of Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that at least a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 is overlapped for a part of the plurality of images in preparation. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of at least one of the plurality of in-provision images (including characters) by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by viewing a plurality of images being prepared. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the image under preparation is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the plurality of images being prepared.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 323 (b1) to FIG. 323 (b2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 307 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (b1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the dark blue character GII is adjacent. That is, while the whale character GII appears at a position corresponding to the whale character GII, the image under preparation that appears along with the whale character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the whale character GII. In this case, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 323 (a2), since the image under preparation (Chibi princess character CHM) corresponding to a certain effect is not displayed, any error display ERR1 for the ball extraction error is It is not overlapped even against.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 323 (c1) to FIG. 323 (c2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 309 (b) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 309 (b), a state is shown in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed substantially at the center of the left advance notice display area CUL. There is. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 309 (e), the mini game is executed based on the image RDY in preparation displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. As a result of success, it is shown that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left advance notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut in image WCI. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the chance up cut-in image WCI. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to drop the ball when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 323 (d1) to FIG. 323 (d2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display in the case where a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 311 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (d1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 311 (b1), it is shown that the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (d2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 323 (d2) (main display) Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two ready images RDY1 and RDY3 in the sub window WP3, only the first ready image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed in the sub window WP3 and the third ready image RDY3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 323 (e1) to FIG. 323 (e2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 311 (d1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (e1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 311 (d1), it is shown that the ball extraction error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. It is shown that it is being done. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is not inclined along with the background display. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not change the display position even when the shake vision effect is performed, and does not tilt, and the display state is maintained. At this time, when the background image is inclined, the margin is black. Then, when a part of the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps with the margin, for example, when the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the margin and a part is It may be difficult to view.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 323 (f1) to FIG. 323 (f2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 312 (a1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (f1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 312 (a1), a state is shown in which the ball extraction error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (f2), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted from the lower side of the UI unit UI3 and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted up is shown. It is done. At this time, the at-a-glance error display ERR1 at least partially overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the UI unit UI3 rising. That is, as the display area of the UI unit UI3 is expanded, the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps the UI unit UI3. As a result, it may be possible to notice occurrence of effects in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by seeing that the UI unit UI3 lifts. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the effect in the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 314 (d) to (e). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (a1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 314 (d), a state in which a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 is overlapped on the upper part of the tutorial display TT1 is It is shown. That is, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps the UI unit UI3 before the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (a2), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. In this presentation example, it is shown that the overlap state of the unballoon error display ERR1 with the UI unit UI3 is canceled while the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward by the UI unit FO animation.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 324 (b1) to FIG. 324 (b2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 318 (a3) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (b1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 318 (a3), a state in which a part of the ball extraction error display ERR1 overlaps the UI wipe display part WP4 It is shown. At this time, the character on the motorcycle displayed on the UI wipe display unit WP4 does not overlap with the character of the lady.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (b2), it is shown that the character of the lady on the bike is moved to the right end of the UI wipe display WP5. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character on the motorcycle with the UI wipe display WP3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the effect display in the UI unit wipe display unit WP3. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3 is finished by simultaneously viewing the effect display on the ball removal error display ERR1 and the UI wipe display unit WP3.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 324 (c1) to FIG. 324 (c2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 321 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 321 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part is over the decorative symbol. It is shown how to wrap. In addition, it does not overlap to other displays.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (c2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. At this time, the holding icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared together with the holding icon enlarged and displayed. Further, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 324 (c2), the subwindow WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. Display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the subwindow WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged display icon display area. At this time, a part of the extraction error display ERR1 overlaps the subwindow WP3 and another part overlaps the reserved icon display area. The pop-up error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and the display position is maintained. As a result, it may be possible to notice a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area enlarged and displayed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. Also, at the same time as watching the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the ball withdrawal error display ERR1 and the hold icon display area, give a trigger to open the ball when the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area is finished. There are times when you can.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 324 (d1) to FIG. 324 (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

  In the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d1), the display of "Please remove the ball" is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There is a case.

  Although the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d2) has the same mode as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d1), the background is made opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be considered to be difficult to view.

  The pop-up error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d3) is another display mode of the pop-up error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d2), and the display of “Please pull out the sphere” is displayed on a black background. It is considered as the aspect represented by.

  In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been described, but the decorative symbol display device It goes without saying that the invention is applicable even to a pachinko machine 100 provided with only one. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, or a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

  FIGS. 325 to 371 are diagrams showing in stages the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 325 to 371, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In FIGS. 325 to 371, although the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided. It may be Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 325 is a view showing stepwise an example of timer notice effect executed in a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 326 is a view showing steps of an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 327 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 326 step by step. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 325 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 325 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  In the holding icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 325 (1), three reserved icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the reserved icons h11, h12 and h13 of these three special figures 1 are all It is displayed in the default display mode (round no pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 325 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult for the power chute to open and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non power saving state, as shown in FIG. 325 (1), the holding icon of the special view 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the holding icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 is moved to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, a timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, in the first timer advance notice display TM11 in the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to perform display of a decimal point less than one second.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (4), “09:75” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "timer activation" is displayed to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (5), it is shown that the second timer preview effect is started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement effect is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in-animation. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started three seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform display of a decimal point less than one second. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "09:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (5). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed, and a warning for the timer advance notice effect is made.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer announcement display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (6), “01:25” is displayed in the second timer announcement display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 starts. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display continues also in the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "07: 25" is displayed in the first timer notice advance TM11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (7), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , The word “focus on hold” is displayed, and a warning for a change in hold is made, and the change on hold animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change It is informed that there is sex. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, or the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation starts. May be "00:00", or the hold change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00". The countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is continued, and "06:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (7).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 325 (8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the panda, and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the second timer advance display TM12. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “hold change” are displayed, and it is notified that the advance notice by the hold change has been made. Note that the character display of "hold change" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes, or after the character display of "hold change" is performed, the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. The character display of "hold change" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is still continuing, and "05: 47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (8). The second timer advance notice display TM12 is deleted. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes after the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. The display mode of the hold icon h11 may be changed at the timing when the second timer notification display TM12 is erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (9), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (9) 11 "is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "pending change" indicating that the pending change has been performed is performed together with the panda icon PND. As described above, in the example of the effect, it is shown that an icon indicates the effect (notice effect) performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed. Furthermore, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "there are still" are displayed, which suggests that there may be further displayed a notice by the timer notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "03: 29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (10). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is displayed together with the characters "What is it", and there is a feeling of expectation as to which notice display is performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (11), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "01: 66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (12), the third stop occurs at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". It is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo chain!” Are displayed, and it is reported that the pseudo chain is to be performed. In this embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" The stop display may be performed, or the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is displayed and stopped.

  As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of a plurality of timer advance notice effects overlap, and it is shown that one timer advance notice display (second timer advance notice display TM12) functions as the advance notice. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timings at which the timer advance notice display starts to be displayed for the plurality of timer advance notice effects are different.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 325 (13), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased. Here, after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series may be started, or after the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series is started The first timer notice display TM11 may be erased, or the second variable symbol display of the decorative symbol may be started by the pseudo-link at the timing when the first timer notice display TM11 is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (14), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is performed. Then, the replay icon RPL is displayed below the panda icon PND displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (16), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 325 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 325 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol changes at a low speed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "SP advance timer notice" are displayed, and a mission effect is started indicating that timer advance effect is started by progressing to super reach. Is also shown. In this rendering example, by achieving the mission, the timer announcement rendering is started and the reliability of the big hit is enhanced. Therefore, by shifting to the super reach, it may be possible to have an expectation that the timer advance notice effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (19) following FIG. 325 (18), it is shown that normal reach is being performed continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (20), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6” during normal reach, and does not shift to the super reach, and the decoration of the “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is lost It is informed that it is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that transition to the super reach is not made.

  And as shown to FIG. 326 (21), in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop by shake fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decoration symbol of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5." At this time, the icon PND of the panda and the icon RPL of the replay are erased, and the character of "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is also erased. Note that the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted after the sway fluctuation of the decorative pattern starts, or the sway fluctuation of the decorative pattern occurs after the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are deleted. The start may be performed, or the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the timing when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol starts. Also, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted simultaneously or one by one.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (23), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (24), it is shown that two timer announcement effects are started at the same time. In this example of rendering, the third timer preview display TM13 and the fourth timer preview display TM14 are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer preview effects are simultaneously started. The third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 are both default display modes. “30:00” is displayed as a timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests. In addition, “10:00” is displayed as a timer display on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Suggest that In this example, two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 simultaneously start counting down, so after the countdown is started, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have elapsed and when 30 seconds have elapsed. It is suggested that be started. Here, the certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds has elapsed and the certain effect that may have been started when 30 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. It is also good.

  After that, the timer display in the third timer preview display TM13 and the timer display in the fourth timer preview display each start to count down (subtract display), and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (25), the third timer preview display TM13 “29:45” is displayed, and “09:45” is displayed on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14. That is, it is shown that 0.55 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “focus on the timer” are displayed, and a warning for the timer advance notice effect is made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (26), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and "28:02" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13 at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (26). In the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, "08:02" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (27), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (27), "27: 75" is displayed in the third timer advance notice display TM13. In the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, "06: 75" is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 326 (28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and "25:23" is displayed in the third timer advance notice display TM13 at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (28). In the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, "05:23" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (29), normal reach is started, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the characters "I'm coming soon" are displayed, suggesting that the timer display on the fourth timer advance notice display TM 14 may be counted up and the advance notice effect will start soon. It is done. In the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (29), “23:16” is displayed in the third timer advance notice display TM13. In the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, "03:16" is displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (30) shows that normal reach is being performed continuously. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown is still continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (30), “21:80” is given in the third timer notice display TM13. As it is displayed, "01:80" is displayed in the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (31), when the countdown in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character SBHN of Sabohani crosses a large amount Sabohani group notice is given. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a big expectation of big hit. That is, it can be said that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed when the Sabohani group advance notice is performed than when the Sabohani group advance notice is not performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (31), a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a strong sabochani group announcement is performed as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the fourth timer announcement display TM14. In other words, the strong sabothani group announcement can be regarded as an example of a certain effect. It should be noted that the Sabohani group advance notice may be started after the timer display on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabo-Hani group notification may be started at the timing when the timer display on the fourth timer notification display TM14 becomes "00:00". On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (31).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (32), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of “SP development!” Is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. Is reported. At this time, the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is erased. On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and “18:31” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (32).

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (33), it is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which a main character of the hero and a sword adversary of the enemy character are displayed. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, an icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed, and it is informed that the advance notice of the Sabohani group has been performed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and "12:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (33).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (34), a state in which the sword reach is continued is shown. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer attention” are displayed, and the third timer advance notice display TM 13 is alerted. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is continued, and "11:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (34).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (35), during the display of the countdown in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the timer advance notice shortening animation is started, and a state in which the effect is displayed in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is shown. It is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 326 (36), the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is decreased, and “03:00” is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13. As described above, in this effect example, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect to be executed by the timer advance effect by changing the timer display during the countdown display.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (37) following FIG. 326 (36). . Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters of "strong cut-in" are displayed to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of a plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and both of the timer notice displays (the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14) are all under execution. It is shown that it functions as a notice about the display (the change notice).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 327 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In this example of presentation, an example is shown in which there is a case that the presentation (precedence presentation) executed as a result of the timer advance presentation being performed is not notified by an icon. Here, an icon may be used to notify that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a has been performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (39), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 327 (40), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 328 is a view showing stepwise an example of timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 329 is a view showing steps of an example of the effect shown in FIG. is there. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 328 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 325 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. Be done. In addition, three or more timer announcement effects may be started simultaneously. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. On the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right, “16:00” is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 16 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In addition, "03:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and it is known that a certain effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Suggest. In this example, since two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 simultaneously start counting down, there is a certain effect both when 3 seconds have passed and when 16 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. It is suggested to be started. Here, the certain effect that may be started when 3 seconds have elapsed and the certain effect that may have been started when 16 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. It is also good.

  After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM11, TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (4), “14:75” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed, and "01:75" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 1.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 328 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timing when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00" In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pre-reading mode entry” are displayed, and it is shown that the pre-reading mode is started. That is, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer announcement presentation concerning the second timer announcement display TM12 being performed, it is shown that the prefetch mode is executed as a certain presentation. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 328 (6), the second timer notice display TM 12 is erased, and “preread mode” is displayed on the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the preread mode is displayed. It is informed that it has rushed to Further, at this time, the characters “prefetch mode entry” displayed near the navigation character YM are deleted. On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “12:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “08: 25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (8), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "07:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (8).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 328 (10) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "description 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "05: 25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (10).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (11), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "03: 25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (11). In addition, the pre-reading mode continues even after this design fluctuation indication starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (12), the character “focus on hold” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11. It is informed that there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (12).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 328 (13), when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the panda from the default display mode. It changes to an aspect and becomes a display mode of prefetching. That is, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the first timer advance display TM11. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “hold change” are displayed, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed. As described above, in this presentation example, in addition to the pre-reading notice in the pre-reading mode performed as a result of a certain timer pre-notice production, the pre-reading pre-notice is given as a result of another icon Examples are shown. Furthermore, in this production example, the target symbol of the prefetch notice by the change of the display mode of the reserved icon performed as a result of another timer notice and the prefetch notice in the prefetch mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect is the same symbol An example in which the display is performed is shown. In this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", but the timer on the first timer notice display TM11 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display changes to "00:00", or after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, the first timer notice display TM11 The timer display in may be "00:00". Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 328 (14), the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. In addition, the characters "hold change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (17), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 328 (18) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "description 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (19) following FIG. 328 (18), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the first special view The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, the pre-reading mode continues even after this symbol fluctuation indication starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (21), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 329 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (23), it is shown that a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. Further, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that the sabohani group advance notice has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (24), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. Is reported.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 329 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the hostile face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (26), a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "match" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the image of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which no face of a leader is arranged around the character of "match" in the balloon, and is a big hit than when the cut-in image is not displayed. Although the reliability is high, it suggests that the jackpot reliability is lower than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, a question mark is added along with the "chance" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which indicates that the expectation of the big hit is increased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 329 (27), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At the timing shown in FIG. 329 (27), the winning of the game ball is performed in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one, and the suspension of special figure 1 in the second number of reservations display The display of the number is "1".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (28), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 329 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this production example, the timer announcements of a plurality of timer announcements are simultaneously started, and both timer announcements (first timer announcement TM11 and second timer announcement TM12) function as prefetch announcements. It is shown that it is doing. Furthermore, it is also shown that both timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) function as prefetch notices for the same symbol variation display.

  Moreover, in this example of presentation, the start timing of the hold change animation does not start at the timing when the timer notice display becomes “00:00”, but at “00:00” when the display mode of the hold icon changes. Because the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect itself is consistent with the completion of the countdown of the timer notice display, the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect and the timer notice effect It may be possible to clarify the relationship with

  In this production example, although the countdown in the timer notice display of two timer notice effects is started simultaneously, the timing of the start of the countdown of the first timer notice display TM11 is the symbol variation display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes. It may start after the start of. That is, although the timing of the display start of the timer notice display of a plurality of timer notice effects is the same, the timing to start the countdown may be different. In this case, the countdown may be started in different symbol variation displays.

  Moreover, in this example of rendering, pre-reading notice (pre-reading mode, display of the suspension icon by the pre-reading display mode) as a certain effect is started in each of the different symbol fluctuation display, but each pre-reading in the same symbol fluctuation display A notice may be started.

  FIG. 330 is a view showing in stages the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 331 shows in a step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 330 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 325 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. Be done. In addition, three or more timer announcement effects may be started simultaneously. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. “06:00” is displayed as the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 6 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. ing. In addition, “10:00” is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this example, since two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 simultaneously start counting down, there is a certain effect both when 6 seconds have passed and when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It is suggested to be started. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 6 seconds have elapsed and a certain effect that may have been started when 10 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. It is also good.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (4), the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. , “05:75” are displayed, and “09:75” is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left and right treasure chest images BXL and BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display screen. Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In the center of the display screen, the characters "get item by princess appearance" are displayed, and when a princess character appears from the treasure box, a notice item (sometimes referred to as a "notice icon") may be acquired. It is suggested that it can be done. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (5), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "05:60" and the second timer. In the advance notice display TM12, "09: 60" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (6). The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM11 each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (6), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "04:37" and the second timer. In the advance notice display TM12, "08: 37" is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (7), the character “decide right” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is notified that the treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest to be opened. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (7), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "03:00" and the second timer In the notice display TM12, "07:00" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (8), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I will open" are displayed to draw attention to the contents of the treasure box. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (8), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "02:50" and the second timer. In the advance notice display TM12, "06: 50" is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (9), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of “Item get” is displayed. The word "That" is displayed, and it is informed that the mini game has succeeded and the notice item has been acquired. This suggests that in the timer announcement effect relating to the first timer announcement display TM11, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, it is ensured that a certain effect will be performed. In this effect example, the appearance of the princess character HME makes it possible to obtain an advance notice of acquisition of a notice item as a certain effect. At this time, the countdown continues in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 respectively, and "01:50" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (9). In the second timer advance notice display TM12, "05: 50" is displayed. In this embodiment, there may be a case where it is possible to boost the effect by the mini game during the countdown by the timer advance presentation effect until the countdown is completed (until "00:00") in this manner.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (10), at the timing when the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the first timer notice display TM11 is a notice item of super reach. The character KNG of the swordsman is added to the first timer notice display TM11. Thus, the display of the notice item of the super reach may make it visually easy to understand that the super reach is performed. Further, in this presentation example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. Further, in this example of effect, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed, an example is shown in which a notice item is displayed as a certain effect. It should be noted that the character KNG of the swordsman may be displayed after the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or after the character KNG of the swordsman is displayed, the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. The timer display may be "00:00". In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues and “04:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (10).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (11), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is changed from "00:00" to "SP waiting", and this display starts super reach. Continue until In other words, whether at this point in time, super reach corresponding to the display of “SP in standby” and the display of the character KNG of swordsman as the preview item in the first timer preview display TM11 occurs in the symbol variation display, It is considered difficult to determine whether it will occur in the symbol variation display after the next time. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "03:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (12), the character “focus on hold” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11 It is informed that there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown is continued, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (12).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (13), when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the panda from the default display mode It changes to an aspect and becomes a display mode of prefetching. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “hold change” are displayed, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (14), the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "hold change", and the panda character PND is added, and the hold icon is displayed. A state of notifying that the display mode has changed is shown. That is, in the example of the effect, it is shown that the content of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect is notified in the timer advance display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. In addition, the characters "hold change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (17), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 330 (18) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "description 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (19) following FIG. 330 (18), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the first special view The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Although the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted when the symbol variation display is started, the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed with the character of “SP standby” being added with the character KNG of the sword master Is being continued. That is, it can be said that the timer announcement effect relating to the first timer announcement display TM11 is the pre-reading announcement that super reach is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. At this time, the word "Hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically increased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (21), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. Further, at this time, in the first timer notice display TM11, the digest animation is started, and it is informed that the character KNG of the swordsman as the notice item is digested and transferred to the super reach. In addition, after the reach state is formed, the digest animation of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started, or after the digest animation of the first timer notice display TM11 is started, the reach state may be formed. The digest animation of the first timer preview display TM11 may be started at the timing when the reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (23), it is shown that the strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. Further, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that the sabohani group advance notice has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (24), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of “SP development!” Is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. Is reported.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 331 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the hostile face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (26), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of “strong cut-in” are displayed. It is informed that CI1a is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 331 (27), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (28), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of rendering, a plurality of timer preview effects are shown as being executed as prefetch previews, and at least one of the timer preview effects is executed as a result of being performed. An example is shown in which it is difficult to determine whether the effect is a notice in the symbol variation display or a pre-reading notice. Moreover, in this effect example, it becomes clear that any timer notice effect is a prefetch notice targeting the same symbol variation display when the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is performed, so the same symbol variation display In some cases, it is possible to dramatically increase the sense of expectation of the big hit by combining the targeted advance notices.

  FIG. 332 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 333 shows the step of an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 332 (1)-the same figure (15) are the same as that of FIG. 330 (1)-the same figure (15), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After the first stop of the decorative symbol is performed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (16), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Ru. Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (18), in the first timer notice display TM11, the digest animation is started, and it is informed that the sword master character KNG as a notice item is digested and transferred to super reach. Be done. That is, it can be said that the swordsman character KNG in this example of presentation functions as a notice that super reach is to be executed in the symbol variation display. Further, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which at least one of the two timer advance effects is functioning as the advance notice. Further, in this example of rendering, it is shown about an example in which it is difficult to determine whether a certain rendering performed as a result of the plurality of timer preview renderings being performed is a prefetch preview or a preview in the symbol variation display, respectively. ing.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (19) following FIG. 332 (18), “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notification of development into super reach is reported. There is. In the example of this effect, no advance notice is made for the sabohani group.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 333 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword hero of the enemy character face each other is displayed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. In addition, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is silently erased while shifting to the super reach.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (21), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and a question mark is added with "chance" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Suggests that it is up.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (22), a screen is displayed in which the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy player, and the defeated image is displayed. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5."

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 333 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 333 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, one of the plurality of timer notice effects is executed as advance notice, and the other is made advance notice in the symbol change display, and the symbol change display to be the target of the timer notice effect is different. Therefore, there is a case where it can be possible to increase the sense of expectation to the big hit about any of the symbol variation display targeted for the timer advance presentation effect.

  FIG. 334 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 334 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 325 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. Be done. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. “06:00” is displayed as the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 6 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. ing. In addition, “02:00” is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and that a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. Suggest. In this example, since two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 simultaneously start counting down, there is a certain effect both when two seconds pass and when six seconds pass after the countdown is started. It is suggested to be started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM11, TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (4), “05:75” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed, and "01:75" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (5), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (5), "05:20" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "01:20" is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (6), when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the panda from the default display mode It changes to an aspect and becomes a display mode of prefetching. That is, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the second timer advance display TM12. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 334 (7), in the second timer notice display TM12, instead of the display of “00:00”, the display of “pending + 1 UP” is performed, and the display mode of the first pending icon h11 is It is notified that the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice has changed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (8), it is informed that the hold change animation is further started at the first hold icon h11 and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be further changed. Ru. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (8).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (9), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display of the length from the display mode of the panda It changes to an aspect, and it becomes the display aspect of prefetching which stepped up from the display aspect of a panda. That is, in this example, as an effect performed as a result of the timer announcement by the first timer announcement display TM11, an example is shown in which an effect of further changing the display mode of the holding icon whose display mode is changed is performed. It is done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that certain effects performed as a result of the two timer advance effects being performed are all performed on the same symbol variation display. In this presentation example, the display mode of the hold icon changed from the default display mode is further changed as a result of the timer advance presentation concerning the first timer advance display TM11 being performed, but there is a case where it does not change It may be. Further, the hold icon for changing the display mode as a result of the timer preview effect concerning the first timer notice display TM11 and the display mode being changed as a result of the timer preview effect concerning the second timer notice display TM12 The hold icon may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 334 (10), in the first timer notice display TM11, instead of the display of "00:00", the display of "pending + 1 UP" is performed, and the notification and phase in the second timer notice display TM12 Thus, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed to two stages.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (11), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (12), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (13), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "description 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this effect example, a change effect of the display mode of the holding icon for the same symbol variation display has been performed, but, for example, as shown in the same figure (8 ') following FIG. 334 (7), The hold change animation is started for the second hold icon h12 in addition to the first hold icon h11, and the display modes of both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may change. May be notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (9 '), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is from the display mode of the panda, While changing to the display mode, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of the panda. That is, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an effect of further changing the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode is changed is performed, and further, the display mode of another hold icon An example is shown in which an effect of changing is performed.

  In this demonstration example, the change icon of the display mode of the hold icon is performed in two steps as the result of the two timer announcement effects in the same symbol change display, but in each of the different symbol change displays, for the same hold icon A change effect of the display mode may be performed.

  FIG. 335 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the timer advance presentation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 336 shows a sequence of an example of the presentation shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 335 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 325 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this example of the effect, the timer informing effect is started when the first timer informing display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this example of the effect, the icon RPL of replay is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that the possibility of the pseudo-series effect being started as a certain effect is high. As described above, in this effect example, the contents of a certain effect to be performed as a result of the timer advance effect are suggested by adding identification information such as an icon to the timer advance display.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (4), “09:75” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "timer activation" is displayed to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (5), it is shown that the second timer announcement effect is started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement effect is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in-animation. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “04:00” is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. Further, in the example of the effect, the icon PND of the panda is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "09:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (5). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed, and a warning for timer advance notice effect is performed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer announcement display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (6), “03:75” is displayed in the second timer announcement display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 starts. On the other hand, also in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "08:75" is displayed on the first timer notice advance TM11.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (7) shows that the mini game is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display showing the appearance of the "1" on the dice and a display of "change on hold" After the mini game is started, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon changes when the output of "1" of the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (7), “08:60” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "03: 60" is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (8), the variable display of the symbol of the dice is started, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT, and the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 is started. To notify the player of the operation of the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes short in accordance with the time from the start of the mini game. The button acceptance time meter MT may not be displayed. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown is still continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (8), "08:12" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (9), as shown in FIG. 335 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 335 (10), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode that indicates the appearance of “1” and the characters “Success” are displayed, and it is the outcome of the mission achievement in the mini game Is reported. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "Yatteze" are displayed to notify that the mini game has succeeded. That is, based on the result of the mini game, it is determined that a change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance presentation concerning the second timer announcement display TM12 is performed. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown is still continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (10), "06:00" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "02:00" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (11), the character “focus on hold” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11. It is informed that the display mode of the hold icon h11 of is changed. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown is still continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (11), "05: 88" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "01: 88" is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is displayed from the default display mode to the display of the program length It changes to an aspect and becomes a display mode of prefetching. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Hot Zee" is displayed, which suggests that the first hold icon h11 has been changed to a display mode with high reliability. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (13), the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is changed from “00:00” to “super-hold on hold”, and the display mode of the hold icon is the jackpot reliability A state of notifying that the display mode has changed to a high display mode is shown. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "04: 75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and “04:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (14) . At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “right timer attention” are displayed, and a warning is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (15), it is shown that the mini game is started. In this staging example, when the mini game is started, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. ing. In the upper center of the display screen, the characters “select with cross key” are displayed, and navigation display is performed to move the cursor CSL to operate the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. In addition, it is suggested that the character of "Put out princess" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and if the princess character appears from the treasure box, a preliminary display may be performed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "04:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (15).

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. In addition, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “02:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (16).

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, the character “Select right” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is notified that the image BXR has been selected as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is deleted. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is temporarily stopped and remains at “02:50”, but the countdown may be continued.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (18), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters of “pseudo series” are displayed, and “also near the navigation character YM The word "Success" is displayed, indicating that the mini game has succeeded. That is, based on the result of the mini game, it is determined that the pseudo-series effect as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect concerning the first timer advance indication display TM11 is performed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is resumed, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (19) following FIG. 335 (18), the character of “pseudo run” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to give notice that pseudo run is started . At this time, the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved and displayed in the center of the display screen. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “00: 78” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (19).

  Then, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (20), and when "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol stop simultaneously, and "decoration 5" -A combination of decorative symbols of "replay symbol RP-decoration 6" is displayed. Note that the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer notification display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer on the first timer notification display TM11 after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". As described above, in this example of the effect, for example, when it is determined that the pseudo-link is to be performed, the game is smoothly performed by stopping and displaying three symbols simultaneously without stopping and displaying the decoration symbols one by one. In some cases it can be advanced. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 336 (21), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, instead of the display of "00:00", the display of "x 2" indicating the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started is performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (22), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (23), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 336 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 336 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol changes at a low speed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (26) shows that normal reach is being performed continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (27), the middle symbol is stopped at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is due to fluctuation A temporary stop has been made. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the user is lost.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 336 (28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, the first timer notice display TM11 which has been notified that the pseudo link has been performed is also erased. In addition, since the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is still the display mode of the program leader, the display of "super heat hold" is maintained in the second timer advance notice display TM12.

  Thus, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a timer advance notice is given according to the result (success) of the mini game.

  FIG. 337 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 338 shows in a step sequence an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 337 (1)-the same figure (9) are the same as that of FIG. 335 (1)-the same figure (9), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (9), as shown in FIG. 337 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 337 (10), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode that indicates the appearance of "3", and the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it does not become the outcome of the mission achievement in the mini game. Is reported. That is, it is reported that the mission has failed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed. That is, although the result of this mini game changes the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer preview effect applied to the second timer preview display TM12, the case where the mini game succeeds Have different consequences. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown is still continued, and "06:00" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (10), and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "02:00" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (11), the character “focus on hold” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11. It is informed that the display mode of the hold icon h11 of is changed. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown is still continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (11), "05: 88" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "01: 88" is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 337 (12), when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the panda from the default display mode It changes to an aspect and becomes a display mode of prefetching. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Choi Fever" are displayed, which suggests that the first hold icon h11 has been changed to a display mode with a slightly higher reliability. That is, it can be said that it has been suggested that the reliability is lower than that of the display mode of the Bancho, but higher than that of the default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (13), the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "chance hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is slightly higher in reliability. A state of notifying that the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice has been changed is shown. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "04: 75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and "04:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (14) . At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “right timer attention” are displayed, and a warning is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (15) shows that the mini game is started. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 337 (15) to (17) differ from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 335 (15) to (17) from the display modes of the first hold icon h11. The description is the same as that of the second timer advance notice display TM12 except that the display contents are different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (18), the character BBA of the nephew appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of "Uhihi" is displayed, and "Sorry" is also displayed near the navigation character YM. The characters are displayed to notify that the mini game has failed. That is, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 335, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect applied to the first timer advance notice display TM11 is a false notice effect due to the failure of the mini game, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. It is suggested that the pseudo-series production as a stage production is not performed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is resumed, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (18). If the mini game fails, the reach effect may be performed by reaching the reach state instead of performing the pseudo series effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 338 (19) following FIG. 337 (18), the decorative symbol is enlarged and is shown moved and displayed at the center of the display screen. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "00: 78" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 338 (19).

  After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and “00:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 338 (20), the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol stop simultaneously, and “decoration 5” -A combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 4-decorative 4" is displayed, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and then, as shown in FIG. 338 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 5-decorative 4" -The finalized display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holiday 4". Note that the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer notification display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer on the first timer notification display TM11 after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". As described above, in this example of the effect, for example, in the case where it is determined that no false connection is performed and it is determined to be lost, the decorative symbols are not displayed one by one at a time, but three symbols are displayed simultaneously. , You may be able to progress the game smoothly. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

  FIG. 339 is a view showing in stages the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 340 shows the steps of an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 339 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 325 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this example of the effect, the timer informing effect is started when the first timer informing display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “08:00” is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 8 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this example of the effect, the icon RPL of replay is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that the possibility of the pseudo link being started as a certain effect is high.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (4), “07:75” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "timer activation" is displayed to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (5), it is shown that the second timer announcement effect is started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement effect is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in-animation. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “04:00” is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. Further, in the example of the effect, the icon PND of the panda is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change as a certain effect. In addition, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "07:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (5). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed, and a warning for the timer advance notice effect is made.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer announcement display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (6), “03:75” is displayed in the second timer announcement display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 starts. On the other hand, also in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues and “06:75” is displayed on the first timer notice advance TM11.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (7) shows that a dice mini game is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display showing the appearance of the "1" on the dice and a display of "change on hold" After the mini game is started, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon changes when the output of "1" of the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (7), “06:60” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "03: 60" is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (8), the variable display of the symbol of the dice is started, and the button image 136a is displayed to notify that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 is started. Promoting the operation of the effect button 136 to the person. In addition, although the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed in this presentation example, it may be displayed. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (8), “06:12” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer notice is displayed. In the display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

  FIGS. 339 (9) to (10) show that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game of dice is continuing. That is, it is shown that the dice mini game has been started but the operation of the effect button 136 has not been performed yet. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (10), “04:35” is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer notice is displayed. In the display TM12, "01:35" is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (11), it is shown that the symbol of the dice in the variable display and the button image 136a move to the lower left of the display screen. This suggests that another effect is performed overlapping with the mini-game of the dice being executed. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown is still continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (11), "04:22" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "01:22" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (12), another mini game (mini game of a treasure box) starts while the mini game of dice is being executed. When the treasure chest mini game is started, the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In the upper center of the display screen, the characters “select with cross key” are displayed, and navigation display is performed to move the cursor CSL to operate the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. In addition, it is suggested that the character of "Put out princess" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and if the princess character appears from the treasure box, a preliminary display may be performed. In addition, the mini game of the dice is continuously performed, and the operation of the effect button 136 is also effective. Further, the countdown is still continued in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and "04:00" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (12), and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "01:00" is displayed.

  As described above, in this effect example, one mini game relating to another timer preview effect is performed while one mini game relating to one timer preview effect of the two timer preview effects is being performed. It has been shown that, as a result, there are periods in which multiple mini games are being played simultaneously. That is, at least a period in which one mini game related to one timer preview effect among a plurality of timer preview effects is performed, and a period in which one mini game related to another timer preview effect is performed It is shown that some overlap.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (13), as shown in FIG. 339 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 339 (14), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of “1”, and it is informed that it is the outcome of the mission achievement in the mini game of the dice. That is, based on the result of the mini game, it is determined that a change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance presentation concerning the second timer announcement display TM12 is performed. In this production example, the result of mission achievement is notified only by the stop display of the symbol of the dice, but the character display of "Success" and the "Done" by the navigation character YM as described above in Fig. 335 The character display of "" may be performed. On the other hand, in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown is still continued, and "03:75" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (14). In the advance notice display TM12, "00:75" is displayed. At this time, the mini-game of the treasure box is continuously performed, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown is interrupted, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (15), the first timer notice display TM11 remains "03:75" and the second timer In the advance notice display TM12, "00:75" is maintained. Also at this time, the mini game of the treasure box continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also valid.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 is resumed, and as shown in FIG. 339 (16), when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the first The display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the length indicator, and becomes a display mode of prefetching with high reliability. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continuously performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (16), it is “03:00”. Also at this time, the mini game of the treasure box continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also valid.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (17), the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is changed from “00:00” to “super-hold on hold”, and the display mode of the hold icon is the jackpot reliability A state of notifying that the display mode has changed to a high display mode is shown. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "02:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (17). Further, at this time, it is shown that the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are moved to the left side with the end of the dice mini game. In addition, the mini game of the treasure chest is continued, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 339 (18) to FIG. 340 (26) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 339 (18) to FIG. 340 (26) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 335 (16) to FIG. 336 (24), the description will be omitted.

  After the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 340 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (27), a strong sagohani group advance notice is performed. Further, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that the sabohani group advance notice has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (28), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of “SP development!” Is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. Is reported.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 340 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword superior of the enemy character face each other is displayed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (30), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, near the navigation character YM, a character of "strong cut-in" is displayed, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 340 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (32), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 340 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 341 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 342 shows a step by step an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 341 (1)-the same figure (9) are the same as that of FIG. 325 (1)-the same figure (9), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "04: 29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (10). Further, a question mark is displayed near the navigation character YM together with the characters of "pseudo chain?", And there is an expectation that pseudo run effect will be performed when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (11), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. In addition, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "02: 66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (11). In addition, the characters "No!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, denying that the pseudo-link is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notification effect relating to the first timer notification display TM11. Is suggested.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (12), the timer notice change animation (timer notice addition animation) is started during the display of the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11, and the first timer notice display TM11 is an effect. It is shown that is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters "group notice?", And as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the first timer notice display TM11 being performed, It is suggested that there may be a Sabohani group announcement instead of a pseudo ream. As described above, in this example of rendering, the possibility that a certain rendering performed as a result of the timer preview rendering applied to the first timer preview display TM11 is not pseudo ream but other rendering is notified. As a result, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to have an expectation that the effect to be performed by completing the countdown of the first timer advance notice display TM11 will be an effect having a higher jackpot reliability than the pseudo ream.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341 (13), the timer display on the first timer preview display TM11 is added, and “15:03” is displayed on the first timer preview display TM11. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added to the characters of "group advance notice", which suggests that the Sabohani group advance notice may be performed. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is possible to recognize that another certain effect is performed by performing addition of the timer display while predicting that the pseudo-link is performed as a certain effect. is there. It should be noted that even if the timer advance notice changing animation is performed, the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice may not be changed, and as a result, there may be a case where a pseudo-run is performed as a certain effect. Further, in this example of presentation, an example is described in which the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is added, but the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be added. Also, not only the timer indication may be added but also it may be subtracted.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (14), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. The pseudo-series effect started when the pseudo-series symbol is stopped and displayed is, in this example, an effect different from a certain effect executed as a result of the timer announcement effect applied to the first timer announcement display TM11 being performed. It is assumed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yes!" Are displayed so as to respond to the display of "group notice" in FIG. 341 (13), and the timer notice effect depending on the first timer notice display TM11. It is informed that a certain effect performed as a result of being performed is a Sabohani group notice. In this example, although a pseudo-rendering effect is performed although a certain effect is not a pseudo-rendering effect, a pseudo-rendering effect may not be performed (may be a garbled ), And it is also possible to make sure that a pseudo-series effect is performed. In addition, a certain effect is a pseudo-series effect, and by adding a timer display, another effect (Sabohani group advance notice) may be a certain effect, corresponding to one timer notice effect There may be a plurality of effects. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "14:60" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (14).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341 (15), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-run is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "14:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (15).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "06:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (16).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (17), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 341 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "01:13" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (18).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (19) following FIG. 341 (18), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the strong symbol Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that strong sabochani group announcement is performed instead of pseudo ream as a result of timer announcement presentation by the first timer announcement display TM11. It should be noted that the Sabohani group notice may be started after the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer notice display TM11 after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabo-Hani group notification may be started at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notification display TM11 becomes "00:00". In addition, as shown in FIG. 342 (19), when the advance notice of the sabothani group is started, the display of the panda icon PND is ended.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (20), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of “SP development!” Is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. Is reported.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 342 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the hostile face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. In the upper left corner of the display screen, an icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed, and it is notified that the advance notice of the Sabohani group has occurred.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (22), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of “strong cut-in” are displayed, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It is informed that CI1a is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (24), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “Blank 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 343 is a view gradually showing another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 343 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 325 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. Be done. These two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are both default display modes. On the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right, "60:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this effect example, “60:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 to indicate the occurrence of super reach, and for example, a certain effect to be performed as a result of the timer notice effect is a display of a cut-in image Suggests that. That is, the timer announcement effect relating to the first timer announcement display TM11 appears as if it is functioning as an announcement regarding the symbol fluctuation display being executed in external appearance. In addition, “02:00” is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and that a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. Suggest. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 343 (4) to FIG. 7 (7) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 343 (4) to FIG. 7 (7) are different from the effects shown in FIG. 334 (4) to FIG. 7 (7) and the timer display on the first timer notice display TM 11 by 54 seconds. The description is omitted because they are the same except for.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (8), the characters “timer attention” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a warning is issued to the first timer announcement display TM11. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "56: 85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (8).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (9), the timer preview animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the first timer preview display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer preview display TM11. It is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 343 (10), the timer display on the first timer preview display TM11 is decreased, and “02:00” is displayed on the first timer preview display TM11. At this time, the icon PND of the panda is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is highly likely to change as a certain effect. As described above, in this effect example, by changing the timer display during the display of the countdown, the timer preview effect is displayed as being pre-read preview, and in fact, the symbol variation display being executed is There is an effect that makes it clear that it has been executed as a notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (11), it is informed that the hold change animation is further started at the first hold icon h11 and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be further changed. Ru. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “01:20” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (11).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 343 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display of the length from the display mode of the panda It changes to an aspect, and it becomes the display aspect of the prefetching which stepped up from the display aspect of a panda. That is, in this example, as an effect performed as a result of the timer announcement by the first timer announcement display TM11, an example is shown in which an effect of further changing the display mode of the holding icon whose display mode is changed is performed. It is done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that certain effects performed as a result of the two timer advance effects being performed are all performed on the same symbol variation display. Further, in this example, the timer notice effect for the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect for the second timer notice display TM12 are executed at the beginning of the effect as notice effects for different symbol variation displays. It is assumed that it is a thing, and then, a certain effect corresponding to the second timer notice display TM12 performed first and a certain effect corresponding to the first timer notice display TM11 targeted the same symbol variation display Since it is revealed that it is a thing, it may be able to give a game unexpectedness. In other words, from the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started, the generation of the notice performed during the super reach is suggested at the beginning of the display, but the timer display is shortened. In addition, by performing the advance notice for the same symbol variation display as the second timer advance notice display TM12 by the change effect of the display mode of the reserved icon, the advance notice for the same symbol variation display is performed in combination. In some cases, the expectation for the big hit can be dramatically improved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 343 (13), in the first timer notice display TM11, instead of the display of "00:00", a display of "pending + 1 UP" is performed, and notification and phase in the second timer notice display TM12 are performed. Thus, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed to two stages. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 343 (14) to FIG. 17 (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 343 (14) to FIG. 17 (17) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 334 (11) to FIG.

  In this effect example, although the timer announcement effect applied to the first timer announcement display TM11 and the timer announcement effect applied to the second timer announcement display TM12 both function as a preview announcement for the same symbol variation display, Any of them may function as a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed. In any case, since the combined notice for the same symbol variation display is performed, the reliability of the big hit may be able to be further enhanced.

  In addition, there may be a case where the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 execute timer notice effects different in symbol design differently, for example, one timer notice effect is It functions as a pre-reading notice, and the other timer notice effect may function as a notice about the symbol change display under execution. In this case, the expectation for the big hit is better than the case where the same symbol change display is performed in combination. May be dispersed. Also, there may be a case where either one of the timer announcement effect applied to the first timer announcement display TM11 and the timer announcement effect applied to the second timer announcement display TM12 is false timer announcement effect.

  FIG. 344 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 344 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 325 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (3), it is shown that the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (4), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the first timer preview display TM11 is frame-in from the right of the display screen by frame-in-animation, and is displayed at the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, "60:00" is displayed as a timer indication, which suggests that a certain effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 344 (5), “58:12” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.88 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) on the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, and it is shown that the bomb effect is started It is done. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is considered to be more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by the bomb image BOM. When the bomb effect is started, a display for igniting the convective line extended from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed, and a display in which the convective line is shortened according to the elapsed time since the bomb effect is started is displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 344 (7), a state immediately before the squib reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the text "What is it", which suggests that some effect is started as a result of the bomb effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (8), it is shown that the bomb image BOM is exploded and the effect image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the first timer notice display TM11. . Also in this case, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is considered to be difficult to visually recognize due to the overlapping by the effect image.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (9), in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed, and it is shown that two timer notice effects are started . Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer increase” are displayed, and it is notified that two timer advance notice effects have been started. Here, in the timer display in the first timer preview display TM11, the timer display is reset to “60:00”, and in the second timer preview display TM12, “02:00” is displayed as the timer display. The first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 are both default display modes. That is, in this production example, the timer preview display is divided and displayed during the execution of the timer preview rendering, and a new timer preview rendering is started. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 344 (10) to (12) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 344 (10)-the same figure (12) is the same as the rendition shown in FIG. 343 (4)-the same figure (6), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Thereafter, for example, in the manner as shown in FIG. 325 (9) to FIG. 326 (36), the symbol variation display is ended, the next symbol variation display is started, and then after super reach is performed, the diagram In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 344 (13), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters of "strong cut-in" are displayed to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain advance effect. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 344 (14) to FIG. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 344 (14) to the same figure (16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 327 (38) to the same figure (40), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 345 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the timer advance presentation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 346 shows a sequence of an example of the presentation shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 345 (1)-the same figure (3) are the same as that of FIG. 344 (1)-the same figure (3), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (4), it is shown that a timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the first timer preview display TM11 is frame-in from the right of the display screen by frame-in-animation, and is displayed at the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed as the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started three seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 345 (5), “02:12” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.88 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) on the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, and it is shown that the bomb effect is started It is done. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is considered to be more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by the bomb image BOM. When the bomb effect is started, a display for igniting the convective line extended from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed, and a display in which the convective line is shortened according to the elapsed time since the bomb effect is started is displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (7) shows that the bomb effect continues. At the timing shown in FIG. 345 (7), a state immediately before the squib reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the text "What is it", which suggests that some effect is started as a result of the bomb effect. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, although it is considered that visual recognition is difficult due to the bomb image BOM, the timer display is “00:00”.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (8) shows that the bomb image BOM explodes.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (9), in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed, and it is shown that two timer notice effects are started . Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer increase” are displayed, and it is notified that two timer advance notice effects have been started. Here, in the timer display in the first timer preview display TM11, the timer display is reset to “60:00”, and in the second timer preview display TM12, “02:00” is displayed as the timer display. The first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 are both default display modes. That is, in this production example, as a result of the timer preview production concerning the first timer preview display TM11 being performed, it is shown that the bomb image BOM explodes as a certain production and two timer preview production starts anew There is.

  In this demonstration example, after the bomb image BOM has exploded, as shown in FIG. 345 (9 '), the letters "SP waiting" are displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and a notice of super reach is displayed. An effect in which a sword character KNG as an item is added and an effect in which a new timer announcement effect is started in the second timer announcement display TM12 may be performed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “item get” are displayed to notify that the advance item has been acquired. That is, as a result of the timer preview effect according to the first timer preview display TM11 being performed, two preview effects are performed as a certain effect, one of which is an effect in which a preview item is displayed, and the other is a new timer preview effect. May be started.

  In addition, as described above, when the lower image fill-up error occurs after the bomb image BOM explodes and the two timer advance notice effects are started, it is newly displayed as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ′ ′). Even if it displays “Blow the ball” error display so as to overlap the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 started (overlap). Good. According to this, in order to make the timer advance notice display easily visible, it may be possible to hurry to eliminate the ball pulling error. In addition, the ball removal error display may overlap with the first timer advance notice display TM11 or the second timer advance notice display TM12.

  In addition, it may be configured to be in a relationship of overlapping with the timer advance notice display by another error display such as, for example, a door open display other than the ball removal error display. Since the error display is an important notification content for the player, it may be possible to pay attention to the occurrence of the error by deteriorating the visibility of the timer advance notice display.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer announcement display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (10) following FIG. 345 (9), the second timer announcement display TM12 , "01:50" is displayed. On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display is not started, and the display of "60:00" remains. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown is started only for one of the two timer preview effects. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "attention" is displayed, and a warning for the second timer advance notice display TM12 is made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (11), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown is continued, and "01:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (11). On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (12), when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the panda from the default display mode It changes to an aspect and becomes a display mode of prefetching. That is, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the second timer advance display TM12. In addition, near the navi character YM, the character “Hot” is displayed, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, and the reliability of the big hit for the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is It suggests that it has improved. In this effect example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, but the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display changes to "00:00", or after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, the second timer notice display TM12 The timer display in may be "00:00". Thereafter, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (13), the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, respectively, and then temporarily stopped with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2”. The state of being displayed finalized is shown. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (14), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (15), “59:75” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts.

  That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  FIG. 347 is a drawing showing gradually step-by-step about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 348 is a drawing showing steps following an example of giving the effect shown in FIG. It is. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 347 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 347 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 347 (1), the hold icon h11 of one special view 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and is displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the reserve icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the reserve icon (the reserve icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first reserve icon h11 It moves to the variation icon display area formed in the lower center and is displayed as a variation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In FIG. 347 (3), it is shown that the special game 1 start port 230 is awarded a game ball and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special view 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special view 1 in the second holding number display becomes “1”. Here, the reserved icon h11 of the special view 1 is a display mode consisting of one bomb, and the character "TIMER" is added to the upper side. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "Timer is pending" are displayed. In this example of presentation, it is shown that the preliminary display of the timer advance presentation is being performed by displaying the holding icon of the display mode of the bomb.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 6-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (8), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and changes icon h0, which is a notice display mode of the timer advance notice relating to the symbol change Become.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, a timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “07:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started seven seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb, the display of "TIMER" is erased and the head of the convective line is ignited, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, The word “...” Is displayed, and it is suggested that a certain effect to be performed may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed after 7 seconds. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. The display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (10), “06: 36” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "attention" is displayed, and a warning to the first timer advance notice display TM11 is made. In addition, the length of the squib of the fluctuation icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (11), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "03: 29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (11). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is displayed together with the characters "What is it", and there is a feeling of expectation as to which notice display is performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (12), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "01: 66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (12). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters "pseudo run", suggesting that a pseudo run effect may be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (13), the third stop occurs at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". It is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In addition, the variation icon h0, which is a display mode of the bomb, explodes and an effect is displayed. Furthermore, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo run" are displayed, and it is reported that pseudo run is to be performed. In this embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" The stop display may be performed, or the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is displayed and stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 347 (14), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started. At this time, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed, and the display mode is the default display mode. Furthermore, the fluctuation icon h0 indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo link. The letter "is displayed. As described above, in this example of the effect, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed, when the pseudo connected effect as a certain effect is performed, it is informed that the pseudo connected effect is performed by the fluctuation icon h0 The situation is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (16), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 347 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (18), a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (19) continued to FIG. 347 (18), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been reported that it will develop into super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 348 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword superior of the enemy character are displayed is displayed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (21), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It is informed that CI1a is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 348 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (23), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 348 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this production example, the timer announcement effect is executed only once for one display of a bomb, but even if it is a display of one bomb, a plurality of timer announcement effects may be executed several times. It is also good. Also, a plurality of display modes (for example, color, shape, etc.) of the bomb may be prepared, and the number of timer announcement effects to be executed may be varied depending on the display mode. In this case, the timer announcement effect may not be performed the number of times corresponding to the display mode. For example, the configuration may be such that it may be performed only once while being performed up to three times.

  FIG. 349 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the timer advance presentation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 350 shows a sequence of an example of the presentation shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 349 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 349 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 349 (1), two suspension icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are displayed in the suspension icon display area, and are displayed in a default display mode. On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. It will be displayed as Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, a timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (3), a mini game is also started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, a display showing the outcome of the "1" of the dice and a display of "change on hold" are displayed, and the mini game is displayed. After the start, the effect button 136 is operated. As a result, it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon changes when the output of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. The mini game may be started after the timer advance effect starts, or the timer advance effect may start after the mini game is started, and the timing at which the timer advance effect starts and the mini game start It may be the same as the timing to do.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (4), the variation display of the symbol of the dice is started, the decabutton image 136aL is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT, and the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 is started. In addition, the character of "press" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to promote the player to operate the effect button 136. Here, when the big button image 136aL is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the button image 136a of the normal size is displayed, that is, the big hit symbol is easily determined and displayed. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer indication (time indication) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (4), “04: "37" is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.63 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (5), as shown in FIG. 349 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 349 (6), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode that indicates the appearance of "1", and the characters "Yoshi" are displayed, and it is the outcome of the mission achievement in the mini game. Is reported. That is, based on the result of the mini game, it is determined that a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect concerning the first timer advance display TM11 is performed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "02:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (7), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (7).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 349 (8), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the bomb from the default display mode It changes to a mode, the character of "TIMER" is added above that, and the character of "it is timer hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first hold icon h11 is a display mode of the bomb. It is informed that it has changed. That is, in this production example, as a result of the timer preview production concerning the first timer preview display TM11 being performed, the display of the hold icon changing to the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb for previewing the execution of the timer preview production as a certain production. It is shown that the change effect of the aspect is being performed. Moreover, in this example of effect, unlike the example of effect shown in FIG. 347, instead of displaying the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb at the start winning, the display mode of the bomb is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display after winning. An example of changing the display mode to the hold icon is shown. A replay icon is displayed on the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the bomb, and as a result of the timer announcement effect executed in relation to the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the bomb It is suggested that there is a possibility that a pseudo-series effect may be performed as a certain effect. That is, it can be said that a notice (pre-reading notice) of pseudo-series effect is performed. In this demonstration example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to the display corresponding to the bomb at the timing when the timer display becomes "00:00", but the timer display becomes "00:00" The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the display mode of the bomb later, or the timer display “00:00 after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of the bomb It may be

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (10), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  After that, the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost 5-decoration 5-decoration 2 ". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (12), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and changes icon h0, which is a notice display mode of the timer advance notice relating to the symbol change Become. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 349 (13) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 349 (13) to (17) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 347 (9) to (13), except that the replay icon is displayed on the fluctuation icon h0. The description is omitted because it is similar. Here, the timer announcement effect executed in FIGS. 349 (13) to (17) is the timer announcement effect applied to the second timer announcement display TM12.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (18), it is shown that the display mode is changed to the display mode of replay after the variation icon h0 which is the bomb display mode is exploded. As described above, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer advance presentation being performed, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is displayed in a specific display mode (replay display mode) when a pseudo-series effect as a certain effect is performed. It is shown that it is notified that the pseudo-series effect was performed by making it into.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (19) following FIG. 349 (18), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (21), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 350 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (23), a strong sagohani group advance notice is given. At this time, although the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner and the reserved icon display area is erased, the fluctuation icon display area remains displayed along with the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed. Further, in the example of the effect, a character of the Sabohani character constituting the advance notice of the strong SaboHani group goes to the fluctuation icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the change icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Sabohani group.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (24), the advance notice of the sabotany group is continuously performed, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the display mode of the replay to the display mode of the large displayed bomb. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "New timer!" Are displayed. That is, by the change icon h0, the notice display that the timer notice effect concerning the third timer notice display TM13 is started is performed. Moreover, the character of "Atsuatsu" is displayed above the change icon h0 after this change, and it is suggested that a high-reliability of the jackpot may be executed as a certain rendition. . Then, a cut-in icon is displayed on the fluctuation icon h0, and as a result of performing a timer advance notice for which execution is notified, a cut-in image may be displayed as a certain effect. Is suggested. And in this example of production, since the character of "Atsuatsu" is displayed, it can be said that it is notified that there is a high possibility that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 350 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (26), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, for example, when the third timer advance notice display TM13 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13, which indicates that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the third timer preview display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (27), “01:25” is displayed in the third timer preview display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (28). That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain advance effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 350 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (30), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. Further, in the example of the effect, when the variation icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer advance presentation concerning the third timer advance display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 350 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 351 is a view showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 351 (1)-the same figure (12) are the same as that of FIG. 347 (1)-the same figure (12), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 351 (13), the third stop occurs at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". It is performed, and not the replay symbol RP but "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "non-explosion" are displayed, and the timer for the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. It is shown that the preliminary production is a fake timer preliminary production. In addition, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, the timer display may be "00:00", or after the timer display is "00:00", the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed, The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display becomes "00:00".

  And as shown to FIG. 351 (14), in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop by shake fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decoration symbol of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6." At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the bomb to the default display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 351 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this effect example, although the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the bomb, an example in which a false timer announcement effect is performed is shown, but a false timer announcement effect may not be performed, That is, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the bomb, the timer advance notice effect may be performed.

  FIG. 352 is a view showing in stages the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 353 is a view showing in sequence the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 352 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 347 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 352 (3), it is shown that the special game 1 start port 230 is awarded a game ball and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special view 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special view 1 in the second holding number display becomes “1”. Here, the reserved icon h11 of the special view 1 is a display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one mass, and the character “TIMER × 3” is added to the upper side. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "Timer is pending" are displayed. In this effect example, it is shown that a preliminary display indicating that three timer preliminary effects are to be performed is displayed by displaying the hold icon of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped. . The display mode of bombs is not limited to one or three, and may be displayed in a display mode in which two bombs are grouped together, or a display mode in which four or more bombs are grouped together May be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 6-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (8), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first reserved icon h11 of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and three timer notice effects relating to the symbol change are executed. It becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode of the event.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, a timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “07:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started seven seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this example of the effect, the icon RPL of replay is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that the possibility of the pseudo link being started as a certain effect is high. In addition, with the fluctuation icon h0 of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped, the display of "TIMER × 3" is erased and the tip of the squib of the bomb disposed on the right side of the three bombs is ignited The situation is shown, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “something ... after 7 seconds” are displayed, and as a result of the timer announcement effect being performed 7 seconds later, a certain effect can be performed It is suggested that there is sex. Moreover, in this presentation example, it is shown that the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. The display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. Moreover, after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started, or after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started, the display position of the decoration symbol is changed Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (10), “06: 36” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "attention" is displayed, and a warning to the first timer advance notice display TM11 is made. Further, the length of the connecting wire of the bomb disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (11), it is shown that the second timer announcement effect is started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement effect is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in-animation. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “20:00” is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in the example of the effect, the icon SAH of the sabothani is added to the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the advance of the sabohani group advance will be started as a certain effect. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 in the display mode in which three bombs are grouped, it is shown that the tip of the squib of the bomb disposed on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the squib of the bomb placed on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time after the countdown of the timer display starts. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and “05:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (11). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are continuously displayed, and a warning for the timer advance notice effect is made.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer announcement display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (12), “19:20” is displayed in the second timer announcement display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 starts. On the other hand, also in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "04: 95" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (12), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character of "group notice confirmed when appearing" is displayed together with the Sabohani character on the right side of the treasure box image BOX. It is reported that when the character Saboh of the Sabohani appears from the treasure box, the Sabohani group advance notice is performed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "also watch mini games" are displayed, and a warning for the mini games is made in conjunction with the timer advance notice effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (13) shows that the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened, and the character SAHN of Sabohani appears from the inside, and the character of "success!" Is displayed in the vicinity thereof. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, showing that the mini game has succeeded. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (13), "03: 51" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "17: 76" is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 352 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer preview display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer preview display TM12 is displayed. The Sabo Hani icon SBH that has been added is displayed in an increasing manner to four, and it is informed that a Sabo Hani group advance notice will be performed. In addition, when it changes to a high reliability display mode, strong Sabo Hani group advance notice may be performed by all means, but weak Sabo Hani group advance notice may be executed, but in this effect example , Strong Sabohani group notice is always carried out. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the "pseudo run", and as a result of the timer preview effect applied to the first timer preview display TM11, the pseudo link effect can be performed as a certain effect. It is suggested that there is sex. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (14), "01:37" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (15) and “00:00” is displayed, the right side of the variation icon h0 in the display mode in which three bombs are grouped Bombs explode and the effects are displayed. And a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern stop simultaneously, and the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 5-replay pattern RP-decoration 6" is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo series!” Are displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo series effect is performed. Note that the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer notification display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer on the first timer notification display TM11 after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown is continued, and "14:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (15).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 352 (16), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the icon RPL of replay is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. In addition, the display of the replay icon RPL may be started after the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started, or the second decoration by the pseudo-link may be started after the display of the replay icon RPL is started The variable display of the symbol may be started, or the display of the replay icon RPL may be started at the timing when the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. At this time, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side is erased. As described above, in this effect example, the bombs are displayed one by one each time the timer advance effect is performed once. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown is continued, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (16).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues and “05:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (17).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 353 (19) following FIG. 352 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the reach state has been reached. Ru. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (19).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (20), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the change icon h0 in the display mode in which the two bombs are grouped together A bomb on the left side explodes, an effect is displayed, and in the decoration symbol display device 208, a strong sabothani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this example of effect, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variation icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a strong sabochani group announcement is performed as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the second timer announcement display TM12. In addition, the Sabohani group notice may be started after the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", or the timer in the second timer notice display TM12 after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notification may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notification display TM12 becomes "00:00".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (21), it is shown that the sabothani group advance notice is being continued. At this time, an icon SBH of the sabo hani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL, and it is notified that the sabo hani group advance notice has been performed. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. Furthermore, in the example of the effect, since the effect display is subsequently switched to the display of the super reach, the fluctuation icon h0 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area is erased. The variation icon h0 may be erased after the second timer announcement display TM12 is erased, or the second timer announcement display TM12 may be erased after the fluctuation icon h0 is erased. The timing at which the timer advance notice display TM12 is erased and the timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 is erased may be the same.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 353 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword hero of the enemy character face each other is displayed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. At this time, the variation icon display area is erased. Also, in this example of the effect, in response to the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the remaining one of the three bombs, "stand by" with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 The character of is displayed, and it is informed that the third timer announcement effect is scheduled to be started. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the display that the timer advance effect is on standby is performed during the change display of the decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (23), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the third timer advance notice display TM13 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13, which indicates that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. Also, at this time, the icon of the bomb displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen is deleted. The icon RPL for replay is overlapped on the front side of the third timer advance notice display TM 13 and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (24), “01:25” is displayed in the third timer advance notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is "00:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (25). That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (27), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. Further, in the example of the effect, when the variation icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer advance presentation concerning the third timer advance display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this effect example, the timer announcement effect is performed the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon, but the number is not the same as the number corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon The displayed number of bombs may be the minimum guaranteed number of times that the timer announcement effect is executed, or may be the maximum executable number.

  In addition, when a timer announcement effect of the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon is executed as a mission (that is, when a mission is achieved), the jackpot symbol is definitely displayed May be configured.

  FIG. 354 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 354 (1)-the same figure (10) are the same as that of FIG. 347 (1)-the same figure (10), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  At the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “06:36”, the second symbol notice generation effect of the second timer is shown in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (11). It is done. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement effect is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in-animation. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “02:00” is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started two seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer announcement display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (12), “01:00” is displayed in the second timer announcement display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that one second has elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 starts. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display continues also in the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "05: 36" is displayed in the first timer notice advance TM11. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (12), an effect of explosion starts even though the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb does not indicate “00:00” in the timer display in any timer advance display. It is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 354 (13), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the panda at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00". And the display mode of read ahead. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "icon change" are displayed, and it is notified that the display mode of the variation icon h0 has changed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 354 (14), the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. In addition, the characters "hold change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are also deleted. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (14).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "03: 29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (15). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is displayed together with the characters "What is it", and there is a feeling of expectation as to which notice display is performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "01: 66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (16). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters "pseudo run", suggesting that a pseudo run effect may be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (17), the third stop occurs at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". It is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo chain!” Are displayed, and it is reported that the pseudo chain is to be performed. In this embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" The stop display may be performed, or the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is displayed and stopped.

  As described above, in this example of rendering, it is shown that a plurality of timer preview effects are performed with the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb that suggests one timer preview effect.

  FIG. 355 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. It is. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 355 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 347 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 355 (3), it is shown that the winning of the game ball is performed in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decoration symbol display device 208, the holding icon (first holding icon) h11 of the special view 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special view 1 in the second holding number display is It will be "1". Here, the first holding icon h11 is a display mode of a bomb, but is a display mode of a large bomb whose size is larger than that shown in FIG. 347 (3). In addition, the first holding icon h11 of the display mode of the large bomb is displayed with a replay icon, an icon of a sabohani, and an icon of a guard, and the first storage icon h11 of the display mode of the large bomb is displayed. As a result of performing the timer preview effect performed in connection with the above, it is suggested that there may be display of a pseudo-series effect, a Sabohani group alert, and a cut-in image as a certain effect. That is, it can be said that the pseudo-series effect, the Sabohani group advance notice and the advance notice of the cut-in image (pre-reading advance notice) are performed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "It is a large timer hold" are displayed. In this effect example, three icons indicating effects to be executed as a certain effect are displayed on the hold icon of the display mode of one bomb, thereby displaying a notice that three timer advance effects are executed. It is shown that is being done. In addition, the number of icons shown in the holding icon (the fluctuating icon) of the display form of the large bomb may not be limited to one or three, and two icons may be displayed. The above icons may be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Furthermore, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Onhi" are displayed, suggesting that the big hit reliability for the symbol variation display applied to the first reserved icon h11, which is the display mode of the large bomb, is extremely high. doing.

  In FIG. 355 (5), it is shown that the winning of the game ball is performed at the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decoration symbol display device 208, the holding icon (second holding icon) h12 of the special view 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special view 1 in the second holding number display is It will be "2". Here, the second holding icon h12 is partially overlapped with the first holding icon h11, which is a display mode of the large bomb, and is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state. There is. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “during standby for demon heat” are displayed, and the start of the symbol variation display relating to the first holding icon h11 suggested that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high is It reports that it is waiting.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (7), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 6-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (9), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 of the large bomb display mode is a notice display that three timer advance notices related to the symbol fluctuation are executed by moving to the fluctuation icon display area without changing the display mode. It becomes the fluctuation icon h0 of the display aspect of the large bomb which is the aspect. In addition, in response to the start of the symbol variation display concerning the first reserved icon h11 of the display mode of the large bomb, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters of "on heat variation" are displayed, and the big hit notice is It is done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (10), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, a timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “07:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started seven seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this example of the effect, the icon RPL of replay is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that the possibility of the pseudo-series effect being started as a certain effect is high. In addition, the variation icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb shows that the tip of the squib is ignited, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "something ... after 7 seconds" are displayed, It is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed seven seconds later. Moreover, in this presentation example, it is shown that the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decoration pattern is changed, or the display position of the decoration pattern is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. The display may be started or the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (11), “06: 36” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "attention" is displayed, and a warning to the first timer advance notice display TM11 is made. In addition, the length of the squib in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11. At this time, for example, the display mode may be changed by blinking the replay icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 to notify that the timer preview effect corresponding to the replay icon is started. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (12), it is shown that the second timer announcement effect is started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement effect is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in-animation. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “20:00” is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in the example of the effect, the icon SAH of the sabothani is added to the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the advance of the sabohani group advance will be started as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and “05:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (12). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are continuously displayed, and a warning for the timer advance notice effect is made. At this time, for example, the display mode may be changed by blinking the Sabohani icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 or the like to notify that the timer preview effect corresponding to the Sabohani icon has started. .

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer announcement display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (13), “19:20” is displayed in the second timer announcement display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 starts. On the other hand, also in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "04: 95" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (13), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character of "group notice confirmed when appearing" is displayed together with the Sabohani character on the right side of the treasure box image BOX. It is reported that when the character of the Sabohani appears from the treasure box, the advance notice of the SaboHani group is performed. Here, although the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is partially overlapped with the character display of "when the group comes out, the group advance notice confirmation", the character display may be overlapped with the variation icon h0. . Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "also watch mini games" are displayed, and a warning for the mini games is made in conjunction with the timer advance notice effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (14) shows that the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image box displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened, a character of Sabohani appears from the inside, and a character of "success!" Is displayed in the vicinity, Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "Yatteze" are displayed, showing that the mini game has succeeded. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (14), "03: 51" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "17: 76" is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 355 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer preview display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer preview display TM12 is displayed. The Sabo Hani icon SBH that has been added is displayed in an increasing manner to four, and it is informed that a Sabo Hani group advance notice will be performed. In addition, when it changes to a high reliability display mode, strong Sabo Hani group advance notice may be performed by all means, but weak Sabo Hani group advance notice may be executed, but in this effect example , Strong Sabohani group notice is always carried out. Further, in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, since the mini game has succeeded and the execution of the Sabo Hani group notice has been decided, the mark of "Done" is displayed so as to overlap the Sabo Hani icon. It should be noted that the "Done" mark may be displayed after the advance notice of the sabochani group is executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the "pseudo run", and as a result of the timer preview effect applied to the first timer preview display TM11, the pseudo link effect can be performed as a certain effect. It is suggested that there is sex. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (15), "01:37" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

  After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and “00:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (16), the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol stop simultaneously, -A combination of decorative symbols of "replay symbol RP-decoration 6" is displayed. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is partially overlapped with the replay symbol RP, the replay symbol RP may be overlapped with the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo series!” Are displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo series effect is performed. Note that the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer notification display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer on the first timer notification display TM11 after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues and “14:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (16).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 355 (17), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-run is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the icon RPL of replay is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. Furthermore, in this example of rendering, since the pseudo-series rendering is executed as a result of the timer preview rendering being performed, it is made to overlap with the icon of the replay displayed on the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb. The mark of is displayed. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown is continued, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (17).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (18), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown is continued, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (19) following FIG. 355 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 356 (20).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (21), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", in the decorative symbol display device 208, a strong sagohani group notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this example of effect, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variation icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a strong sabochani group announcement is performed as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the second timer announcement display TM12.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (22), it is shown that the sabothani group advance notice is being continued. At this time, an icon SBH of the sabo hani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL, and it is notified that the sabo hani group advance notice has been performed. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. Furthermore, in this example of the effect, the effect display is subsequently switched to the display of the super reach, but when the change icon h0 is the display mode of the large bomb, the change icon h0 is not deleted, and even if it shifts to the super reach The displayed state is maintained, but the fluctuation icon may be deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 356 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the swordsman of an enemy character face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (24), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the third timer advance notice display TM13 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13, which indicates that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. The icon RPL for replay is overlapped on the front side of the third timer advance notice display TM 13 and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 356 (25), “01:25” is displayed in the third timer advance notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, when the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (26), and then FIG. 356 (27) As shown in, the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased. Further, in this example of rendering, since the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the timer advance rendering being performed, the icon is displayed so as to overlap the icon of the bankmaster displayed in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb. And the mark "done" is displayed. Thus, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (28), effects corresponding to each of all the icons shown in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb are performed, so the effect of exploding the variation icon h0 starts It is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (29), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the display mode of the large bomb to the display mode of the panda, and the advance display by the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. Here, the variation icon h0 may change to a display mode other than the display mode of the panda. For example, when changing to the display mode of the bancho, the big hit symbol than when changing to the display mode of the panda May be displayed easily. Also, the display mode may be changed to the default display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is erased together with the fluctuation icon display area, but may not be erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (31), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. At this time, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also displayed again. After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 357 is a view showing in stages an example of an on-hold notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 357 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 347 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 357 (3), it is shown that the special game 1 start opening 230 has been awarded a game ball and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 has been increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special view 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special view 1 in the second holding number display becomes “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special view 1 is a display mode of Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of a prefetch notice. When the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of this Yoshimune hold, it is easier to finally stop the big hit symbol than in the case where the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. Further, the characters “I-sama appeared!” Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon according to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is displayed. In addition, after the display of the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of Yoshimune hold is started, the display of the characters “I like it!” May be started, and the display of the characters “I like it!” After being started, the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of Yoshimune hold may be started to be displayed, or "I like the appearance at the timing when the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of Yoshimune hold is started to be displayed! The display of the letter "" may be started. In addition to the display mode of Yoshimune hold representing the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in a display mode of a hold on display representing a character of 爺 or a display mode of a hold on display キ ャ ラ ク タ a character of 婆The reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the character.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "next change expectation" are displayed, and the expectation of the big hit in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is a display mode of Yoshimune hold, is high. It is suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Also, the characters displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 357 (7) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 2-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (8), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0 which is the advance notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “SP fixed!” Are displayed, and it is notified that the transition to the super reach is made. Thus, it can be said that the holding icon of the display mode of Yoshimune holding is a pre-reading notice of a big hit and also functions as a pre-reading notice of super reach. Note that the display of the characters “SP fixed!” May be started after the start of the symbol change display, or the display of the characters “SP fixed!” May be started at the timing when the symbol change display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (10), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 357 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 357 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the weak sabothani group preliminary notice is performed in which the number of savoy hani SBHN is smaller than the above-mentioned strong sabothani group preliminary notice. Although the weak sabothani group warning is more reliable than the case where the sabohani group warning is not given, it is less reliable than the strong sabothani group warning is given.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (13), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of “SP development” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. It has been informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 357 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (15), it is shown that the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (16), a screen in which the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy player, the defeated player, is displayed, and the central symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 357 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. In addition, the variation icon display area and the suspension icon display area are redisplayed, and the variation icon h0 of the display mode of Yoshimune retention is also redisplayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 357 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 358 is a view showing in stages the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 359 is a view showing in sequence the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. It is. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 358 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 347 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 358 (3), it is shown that the special game 1 start opening 230 is subjected to a winning of the game ball and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special view 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special view 1 in the second holding number display becomes “1”. Here, the holding icon (first holding icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode common to the display mode of Yoshimune holding representing the above-mentioned character of the lord, but the character of the lady holding the bomb is It is a display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown, and is a display mode of pre-reading notice of timer notice effect. In addition, the character "group" is displayed on the bomb possessed by the character of the lord, and there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice may be given as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect being given. It suggests. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I like it!" Are displayed, and it is informed that the holding icon according to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb holding is displayed. In addition, after the display of the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is started, the display of the characters “I like it!” May be started, and the characters “I like it!” Are displayed After the start of the first holding icon h11 of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold may be started, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb is started to be displayed The display of the characters such as "Learning!" May be started. In addition to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold representing the character of the lord, for example, the display mode of the bomb hold representing the 爺 character and the display mode of the bomb display representing the 婆 character May be displayed, and the possibility of being a true timer announcement effect may be different depending on the type of the character.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Moreover, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "next change expectation" are displayed, and the expectation of the big hit in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is a display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold is high. Is suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (5), the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "something" are displayed, and it is shown that the display of a certain message is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 2-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Moreover, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of "something" is switched to the character display of "I have it", that is, the message "I have something" is displayed from these character displays. It can be said that This message is a message corresponding to the display of the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, and suggests that timer preview effect may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (8), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first holding icon h11, which is a display mode of Yoshimune bomb holding, becomes a fluctuation icon h0 which is a notice display mode regarding the symbol fluctuation by moving to the fluctuation icon display area without changing the display manner. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Onhi" are displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability for the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is extremely high. ing. It should be noted that the display of the characters "onhi" may be started after the start of the symbol variation display, or the display of the characters "onheat" may be started at the timing when the symbol variation display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the first timer preview display TM11 is frame-in from the right of the display screen by frame-in-animation, and is displayed at the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “12:00” is displayed as the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 12 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed, and a warning for the timer advance notice effect is made.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (10), “11: 86” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.14 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (11), it is shown that the first timer notice display TM11 is switched from the timer display to the character display of "group generation standby". At this time, an icon of "Sabohani" is added on the left side of the character display of "during group generation standby", and as a result of the timer advance presentation being performed, it is informed that the advance notice of "Sabohani group" is executed. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the instruction display (tutorial display) is performed in the timer advance display during execution (during subtraction) of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 358 (12), the character display of "group generation standby" is switched to the timer display again. In this effect example, the timer display of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 and the character display of "group generation standby" is alternately switched and displayed every predetermined time (for example, every 0.5 seconds). After the countdown is started, the process is performed until the reach state described later is reached. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "10:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (13), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and the above-mentioned alternate display also continues, and "04: 35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (14), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 358 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (16), the alternate display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 ends, and the timer display is continuously displayed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "01:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (16).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 358 (17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the strong symbol execution notice is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, although the hold icon display area is erased, the fluctuation icon display area remains displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also continuously displayed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed. That is, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the first timer announcement display TM11 being performed, it is shown that the sabohani group announcement is performed as a certain presentation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (18), it is shown that the sabothani group advance notice is being continued. And the change icon h0 which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold of the mode in which the bomb has been erased. That is, in this production example, the fluctuation icon (pending icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb pending, in which the notice of the acceptance judgment (pre-reading notice) and the notice of the timer notice effect (pre-reading notice) are combined, the timer notice effect is executed. It is shown about the example changed into the display mode of Yoshimune retention which has only the function of the notice (pre-reading advance notice) of success / failure determination after being done and performing the function. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (18), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is also deleted. Note that the first timer notice display TM11 may be erased after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or even if the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. The timing at which the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes may be the same as the timing at which the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 359 (19) following FIG. 358 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword lord of an enemy character confront is displayed Be done. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. At this time, the variation icon h0 is erased together with the variation icon display area. The transition icon h0 may be erased after transition to the super reach, or transition to the super reach may be performed after the transition icon h0 is erased, or the transition icon h0 is changed at the timing of transition to the super reach. It may be erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of “strong cut-in” are displayed. It is informed that CI1a is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (22), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. The variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also displayed again, and the change icon h0 is also displayed again in the display mode of Yoshimune hold. After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 360 is a view showing gradually step-by-step about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 361 is a view showing step by step an example of the effect shown in FIG. It is. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 360 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 360 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 360 (1), two suspension icons h 11 and h 12 of the special view 1 are displayed in the suspension icon display area, and are displayed in a default display mode. On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. It will be displayed as Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In FIG. 360 (3), it is shown that the winning of the game ball is performed at the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special view 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special view 1 in the second hold number display becomes "2". . Here, the reserved icon h12 of the special view 1 is a display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one mass, and the character “TIMER × 3” is added to the upper side. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "Timer is pending" are displayed. In this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 352, by displaying the hold icon of the display mode in which the three bombs are grouped, the notice display that three timer advance notice effects are to be performed is performed. Is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (5), the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 360 (7) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 6-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (8), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this example of presentation, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the first timer announcement display TM11, and in this example of presentation, as will be described later, the result of the timer announcement effect applied to the first timer announcement display TM11 It is suggested that Sabo Hani characters may appear from the treasure box image box in the mini game. In addition, the first holding icon h11 of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together shows that the tip of the squib of the bomb disposed at the center of the three bombs is ignited, and the navigation character YM In the vicinity of, it is suggested that the character "something ... after 5 seconds" is displayed, and that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed after 5 seconds. Moreover, in this presentation example, it is shown that the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, or the first hold icon may be displayed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. The display mode of h11 may change, or the display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Moreover, after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started, or after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started, the display position of the decoration symbol is changed Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed. Note that, in this effect example, the character display of “TIMER × 3”, which has been additionally displayed above the first hold icon h11, is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (10), “04:06” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.94 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In addition, the length of the connecting wire of the bomb disposed at the center of the first holding icon h11 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (11), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character of "Sorry when the letter comes out" is displayed with the Sabohani character on the right of the treasure box image BOX. It has been reported that when the character of Sabohani appears from the treasure box, a notice that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high is executed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "mini game" are displayed to draw attention to the mini game.

  After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and “00:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the result of the mini game. Specifically, after the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the center and then opens, the character Sabon of Sabohani appears in a large size from the inside, and The characters "group notice confirmed" are displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "yet" are displayed, and it is reported that the mini game is successful and the Sabohani group notice is executed. As described above, in this example of effects, as a result of performing the timer advance notice concerning the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is shown that the result of the mini game is derived as a certain effect. In addition, as a result of the timer preview effect relating to the first timer preview display TM11, it can be shown that the preview preview notification that the Sabohani group preview is performed as a certain effect is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (13), the characters "under preparation" are displayed together with the icon SAH of Sabo Hani near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that Sabo Hani group advance notice will be performed There is. Further, at this time, the display mode of the first holding icon h11 is changed to a mode in which the bomb disposed at the center is erased and the two bombs are represented as one mass. Here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display of the sabothani icon SBH and the character display of "in preparation" is started, or the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes After that, the Sabo Hani icon SBH and the "In preparation" character display may be started, or the Sabo Hani icon SBH and the "In preparation" character display may be displayed at the first hold icon h11 The display mode may change. It should be noted that if the mini game is successful, the strong Sabo Hani group advance notice may be executed at all times, or the weak Sabo Hani group advance notice may be executed. The group notice is always carried out.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (14), temporary stopping due to a fluctuation is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 5” after being sequentially performed from the first stop to the third stop. It is shown that it is being done. After that, as shown in FIG. 360 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (16), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first reserved icon h11 after the display mode has changed as described above is moved to the variation icon display area in the state of the display mode after the change, and the remaining two timer notices regarding the symbol variation are made It becomes a fluctuation icon h0 which is a preliminary display mode of the effect being executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (17), it is shown that two timer announcement effects are started at the same time. In this rendering example, the second timer preview display TM12 and the third timer preview display TM13 are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer preview effects are simultaneously started. The second timer advance notice display TM12 and the third timer advance notice display TM13 are all default display modes. In addition, the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the right side of the display screen has a replay icon RPL added thereto, and the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the left side of the display screen has a question mark icon QST is added. Then, "07:00" is displayed as the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12, and it is suggested that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. That is, it is suggested that the pseudo-series effect may be started when 7 seconds have elapsed after the timer display countdown is started. In addition, “08:00” is displayed as the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13, which suggests that a certain effect is started 8 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, it is not clear which effect is a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect according to the third timer advance notice display TM13 being performed. In this example of rendering, two timer notice displays TM12 and TM13 simultaneously start counting down, so a certain rendering is started both when 7 seconds have passed and when 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. It is suggested to be done. The variation icon h0 in the display mode in which two bombs are grouped together shows that the heads of both squibs of the two bombs are respectively ignited in response to the start of the two timer announcement effects.

  Thereafter, the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 and the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 respectively start to count down (subtract display), and at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (18), the second timer notice display TM12 , "04:27" is displayed, and "05:27" is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13. That is, it is shown that 0.73 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, when the countdown on the second timer notice display TM12 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 361 (19) following FIG. 360 (18) and “00:00” is displayed, the display in which two bombs are grouped Both bombs in the variation icon h0 of the mode explode and the effect is displayed. And a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern stop simultaneously, and the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 5-replay pattern RP-decoration 6" is displayed. On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues and “01:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 361 (19).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 361 (20), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the icon RPL of replay is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues and “00:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 361 (20).

  After that, at the timing when the countdown in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is completed and it becomes “00:00”, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (21), the display form of the fluctuation icon h0 It changes from the display mode which became to the display mode of a panda, and becomes the display mode of the notice about the said pattern change display. That is, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the third timer advance notice display TM13. Also, in this example, although the content of a certain effect is not clear by the question mark icon QST, the content of a certain effect is apparent for the first time since the countdown is completed and a certain effect is performed. It is shown that Further, in this effect example, when the hold icon started to be displayed in the display mode in which three bombs are grouped is displayed as the hold icon, the timer advance notice is performed as the advance notice, and is displayed as the fluctuation icon. After that, it is shown that a timer notice effect is also performed as a notice regarding the symbol change display. That is, it is shown that timer preview effects are respectively executed in a plurality of symbol variation displays when a display icon of a display mode notifying that the timer preview effects are performed a plurality of times is displayed. Specifically, a state is shown in which the symbol advance display of the sabochani group performed as a result of execution of the timer advance notification effect, the pseudo continuous effect and the change effect of the change icon h0 are performed in different symbol change displays. Furthermore, in this production example, the target of the preview notice made as a result of a certain timer notice production and the notice about the corresponding figure fluctuation display made as a result of another timer notice production are performed for the same symbol fluctuation display Examples are shown. Further, in this example of rendering, although two timer preview effects are simultaneously started, it is shown that the contents of the effects performed as a result of execution of each timer preview effect are different.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (22), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the panda icon PND is displayed below the replay icon RPL, and notice using the fluctuation icon h0 It is reported that the notification has been made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (23), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (24), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 361 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed at the upper center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state is reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In addition, the display of the icon SBH of "Sabohani" and "in preparation" displayed near the navigation character YM is erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (26), a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed to correspond to the display of the sabohani icon SBH and "in preparation" displayed near the navigation character YM. . At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this example of effect, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variation icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed. Further, in the example of the effect, the character SBHN of one SaboHani constituting the advance notice of the strong SaboHani group goes to the fluctuation icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the change icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Sabohani group.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (27), the advance notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the display mode of the panda to the display mode of the displayed banch Also, it is shown that the mode of the advance notice display by the fluctuation icon h0 is stepped up to the one with higher reliability.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 361 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword superior of the enemy character face each other is displayed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. At this time, the variation icon display area is erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (29), it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 361 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (31), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. In addition, it is also shown that the variation icon h0 is also redisplayed in the display mode of the large size of the long size. After that, as shown in FIG. 361 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 362 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. 362 (1) to FIG. 36 (2) are the same as FIG. 349 (1) to FIG.

  FIG. 362 (3) shows that the special game 1 start port 230 is awarded a game ball and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special view 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special view 1 in the second hold number display becomes "2". . Here, the hold icon h12 of the special view 1 is a display mode of the button hold, and the effect that the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (4), the characters “PUSH OUT” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notification to promote the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (5), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the display mode of the button hold in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (6). It changes to the display mode of a bomb, and a mode that a timer display is displayed above the 2nd reservation icon h12 to which the display mode changed is shown. That is, in this presentation example, a state is shown in which the timer advance notice display is displayed on the hold icon. In the effect example shown in FIG. 362 (6), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. That is, in this example of presentation, a state is shown in which the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display can be specified and specified by the hold icon. In this production example, the start of the countdown is reserved until the symbol change display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 starts, but the symbol change display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is The countdown may be started in a held state, that is, displayed as a held icon. In this case, for example, when the timing at which a certain effect starts is specified, such as the timing after the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12, the timer display is reset and the countdown is started again You may do it. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters “pseudo chain”, and as a result of the timer announcement effect being performed, there is a possibility that the pseudo chain effect may be executed as a certain effect. Is suggested. In the timing shown in FIG. 362 (6), the lower plate full error has occurred, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the second reserved icon h12 is overlapped (overlapping ), “Blow the ball” error display is displayed. According to this, in order to make the timer advance notice display easily visible, it may be possible to hurry to eliminate the ball pulling error.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (7), the game proceeds from the timing shown in FIG. 36 (6), and the hold on the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that is being digested and the variable display of the symbol is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (7), the timer display countdown is started in the timer advance notice displayed on the fluctuation icon h0, and at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (7) : 32 "is displayed. That is, it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed after 7.32 seconds. Thus, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the timer display is performed by the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, it can be said that the variation icon display area in which the variation icon h0 is displayed also functions as a display area for displaying the timer advance notice display. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed, and a warning is given to the timer advance notice effect.

  After that, when the countdown in the timer advance notice displayed in the fluctuation icon h0 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (8) and “00:00” is displayed, “decorative 5-replay symbol RP-decorative 6” The combination of the decorative symbols of is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo connected effect is to be performed.

  Also, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (5), as shown in FIG. 362 (6 '), it may be shown that "30:00" may be displayed as a timer display. It is done. That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 362 (6 '), it suggests that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "group notice", and as a result of the timer notice effect being performed, there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice may be executed as a certain effect. Is suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (7 '), the game proceeds from the timing shown in FIG. 36 (6'), and the second holding icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that the pending of the mark is digested and the variable display of the symbol is started. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 362 (7 '), "30:00" which is the timer display at the time of the start of the countdown is continuously displayed on the timer display in the timer advance display displayed on the fluctuation icon h0. When the timer display countdown is started, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame in animation, and then the timer display countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is performed. It will be. That is, in this presentation example, the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display can be specified in a distinguishable manner by the hold icon (variation icon), and the timer notice display is separately displayed. It is shown that the timer display is counting down in the timer advance display. Note that "27: 32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (7 '), which suggests that a certain effect may be performed after 27.32 seconds. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed, and a warning is given to the timer advance notice effect.

  After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and “00:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (8 ′), the strong symbol execution notice is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is shown. In this effect example, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are displayed without being deleted. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed.

  As described above, the hold icon may be displayed first in a button hold display mode, and may be changed to a bomb display mode by operating the effect button 136.

  In the effects described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 48 and 65 to 362, the type of a certain effect to be performed as a result of executing the timer advance effect, the contents of the effect of the timer advance effect, and the contents of the mini game It goes without saying that various effects described with reference to the drawings prior to FIG. 325 and various effects described with reference to FIGS. 363 to 371 described later can be applied.

  FIG. 363 to FIG. 371 are diagrams for explaining an example of the effect of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 363 (A1) to FIG. 36 (A18) show that the on-hold notice effect is being performed by the display mode of on-line Yoshimune.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 363 (A1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 363 (A1) to FIG. 36 (A18) is a special figure low probability common drawing low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  In the holding icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 36A (A1), the hold icon h11 of one special view 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 has a default display mode (round no pattern and white) Is displayed in the display mode of That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round, white hold icon.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 363 (A1) is the non-power support state (non-short time state), it is difficult to open the power chute and special prize 2 start opening 232 It is because it is a difficult state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non power saving state, as shown in FIG. 363 (A1), the holding icon of the special view 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the holding icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the reserve icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the reserve icon (the reserve icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first reserve icon h11 It moves to the variation icon display area formed in the lower center and is displayed as a variation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  FIG. 363 (A3) shows that the special game 1 starting hole 230 is awarded a game ball and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special view 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special view 1 in the second holding number display becomes “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special view 1 is a display mode of Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of a prefetch notice. When the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. Further, the characters “I-sama appeared!” Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon according to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is displayed. In addition, after the display of the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of Yoshimune hold is started, the display of the characters “I like it!” May be started, and the display of the characters “I like it!” After being started, the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of Yoshimune hold may be started to be displayed, or "I like the appearance at the timing when the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of Yoshimune hold is started to be displayed! The display of the letter "" may be started. In addition to the display mode of Yoshimune hold representing the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in a display mode of a hold on display representing a character of 爺 or a display mode of a hold on display キ ャ ラ ク タ a character of 婆The reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the character.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "next change expectation" are displayed, and the expectation of the big hit in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is a display mode of Yoshimune hold, is high. It is suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Also, the characters displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 363 (A7) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 2-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A8), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0 which is the advance notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “SP fixed!” Are displayed, and it is notified that the transition to the super reach is made. Thus, it can be said that the holding icon of the display mode of Yoshimune holding is a pre-reading notice of a big hit and also functions as a pre-reading notice of super reach. Note that the display of the characters “SP fixed!” May be started after the start of the symbol change display, or the display of the characters “SP fixed!” May be started at the timing when the symbol change display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A10), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 363 (A11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 363 (A12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the weak sabothani group preliminary notice is performed, in which the number of sabothani sBHNs is smaller than the above-mentioned strong sabothani group notice. Although the weak sabothani group warning is more reliable than the case where the sabohani group warning is not given, it is less reliable than the strong sabothani group warning is given.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A13), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of “SP development” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. It has been informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 363 (A14), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A15), it is shown that the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A16), a screen in which the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy player, the defeated player, is displayed, and the central symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 363 (A17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed is shown by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. In addition, the variation icon display area and the suspension icon display area are redisplayed, and the variation icon h0 of the display mode of Yoshimune retention is also redisplayed. The variation icon h0 may be redisplayed in the default display mode instead of the display mode of Yoshimune retention. After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (A18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In this example of presentation, although the example which becomes a display result of loss is shown, it may become a big hit.

  FIG. 363 (B1) to FIG. 36 (B12) show an example of an effect in which the hold display displayed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold changes to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 363 (B1) to FIG. 36 (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 363 (A1) to FIG. 36 (A3), the description will be omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B4) shows that the mini game is started. At this time, the decorative design is displayed small at the upper center. In this example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image box is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the bomb icon BOMB appears on the right side of the treasure box image box. Is displayed, and it is notified that the execution of the timer advance notice effect will be stocked when the bomb icon BOMB appears from the treasure box. In addition, the mini game may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed after the mini game is started, or the display position of the decorative symbol is The mini game may be started at the timing of the change.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B5), the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image box displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened, and the icon BOMB of the bomb appears from inside in a large size, and the character of "stock decision" is displayed near it. Is displayed, and it is notified that the execution of the timer advance notice effect is stocked.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B6), the bomb icon BOMB collides with the first hold icon h11 displayed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold, and the hold change animation is displayed at the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 363 (B7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of Yoshimune hold to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, and is the display mode of the pre-reading notice of timer notice effect. . That is, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is a display mode in which the icon BD of the bomb is integrally added to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the characters "Timer hold" are displayed, and the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, and execution of the timer advance notice effect is stocked. It has been informed. Note that the display of the characters “timer hold” may be started after changing to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, or after the display of the characters “timer hold” is started, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It may be changed to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, and the display of the character of "timer hold" may be started at the timing when the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold. In addition, when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, the character of the spider bomb may be changed to another character from the character of the lord. It may be changed to the display mode of the displayed bomb hold. In addition, the display color in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold consisting of the character of the lord or the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is changed from the default color to another color (for example, red), and the jackpot reliability increases (ranks up). You may do so.

  In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 363 (B8), it is shown that the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved and displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the characters "timer hold" displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Moreover, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "next change expectation" are displayed, and the expectation of the big hit in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is a display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold is high. Is suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B10), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Also, the characters displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B11), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 363 (B12) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 2-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Hereinafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 358 (8) to FIG. 359 (23) are performed. In this case, the result of losing may be displayed.

  As described above, in this effect example, the hold icon of the display mode of the advance notice is changed to the display mode of the advance notice of the timer advance effect in the result of the mini game, and the timer advance effect is performed in addition to the advance notice regarding the big hit. It is shown that pre-reading notice of is performed.

  In this example of presentation, an example is shown in which the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, in which the icon BD of the bomb is integrally added to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold, is shown, for example, in FIG. 363 (B7 '). As described above, the icon BD 'of the bomb may be disposed above the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold, and may be displayed separately from the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold. In this case, since the bomb icon BD 'is displayed at a position corresponding to the display position of the first hold icon h11, it is easily recognized which hold icon the bomb icon BD' corresponds to. There is a possibility.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 363 (B7 ′ ′), a bomb icon BD ′ may be arranged and displayed above the fluctuation icon h0. In this case, in some cases, it may be difficult to identify which icon BD 'of the bomb corresponds to which reserved icon or variation icon.

  Also, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed as shown in FIG. 363 (B7 ′ ′ ′). Specifically, the display BD 'of the bomb is displayed to be displayed as a function of pre-reading notice of timer notice effect, and as a pre-reading notice regarding a big hit, an icon of a character (for example, an icon of a panda different from the character of the main character The hold icon may be displayed in a mode in which PD) is displayed in addition to the display of the bomb.

  FIG. 364 (B3a) and FIG. 3B (B7a) respectively show another effect pattern of FIG. 363 (B3) and FIG. 3B (B7). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), when the winning of the game ball is performed in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by 1, It is shown that the display icon is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode. Note that the display mode different from the default display mode may be a display mode different in color, and for example, in the example shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), the display mode is blue and circular. As a result, advance notice regarding jackpot has been made. In the case of giving a preview notice by changing the color of the reserved icon, the reliability may be different depending on the color. For example, in this example of the effect, the reliability is in the order of rainbow color> golden> red> green> blue> blue In this case, in the case of the rainbow color, it may be to notify the jackpot confirmation. Thereafter, a mini game is performed as shown in FIG. 363 (B4) to FIG. 36 (B6), and as a result of the mini game, when the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX, FIG. As shown in Fig. 3B, a connecting wire may be added to the display mode of the reserve icon shown in FIG. 364 (B3a) to change to the display mode of the timer notice which is the display mode of the bomb. In this case, the form of the holding icon may also be changed, for example, it may be changed from a round display mode of blue to a round display mode of red. That is, the reliability of the advance notice regarding the big hit may be increased (two steps up). In this case, the reliability may increase by one stage, or the reliability may increase by two or more stages, or the reliability may increase only in one stage, or twice It may be up only with the above specific number of stages. In this manner, the display mode of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon may be ranked up.

  FIG. 364 (B3 b) and FIG. 3 (B 7 b) respectively show another effect pattern of FIG. 363 (B 3) and FIG. 3 (B 7). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), when the winning of the game ball is performed in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by 1, It is shown that the display icon is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), it is displayed in a red display mode in a round shape, and it is shown that the advance notice regarding the big hit is performed. Thereafter, the mini game is performed as shown in FIG. 363 (B4) to FIG. 36 (B6), and as a result of the mini game, when the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX, FIG. As shown in Fig. 3B, a pacifier may be added to the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 364 (B3b) to change to the display mode of timer hold. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), the form of the hold icon does not change, and the reliability of the advance notice regarding the big hit is considered to be maintained as it is. In this effect example, in addition to the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit, the pre-reading notice of the timer pre-notice effect is added, and it can be said that the display mode of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon is ranked up.

  FIG. 364 (B3 c), FIG. 3 (B 7 c) and FIG. 3 (B 8 c) respectively show another effect pattern of FIG. 363 (B 3), FIG. 3 (B 7) and FIG. 3 (B 8). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 364 (B3c) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), the description will be omitted. Thereafter, a mini game is performed as shown in FIG. 363 (B4) to FIG. 36 (B6), and as a result of the mini game, when the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX, FIG. As shown in), the display mode of the hold icon does not change, the first timer notice display TM11 may be displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the timer notice effect may be started. At this time, “30:00” is displayed as a timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and it is suggested that a certain effect may be started when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. There is. In this example, the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is not started, and the word "standby" is displayed below the first timer notice display TM11, and the timer display countdown starts. Is reserved. As described above, the present invention can be realized by displaying the timer advance notice display in a mode in which the countdown is not performed in an area different from the reserved icon display area. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (B8c), the decorative symbol is enlarged and it is shown moving and displayed at the center of the display screen. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is still in the standby state. The countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the target of the advance notice.

  In this production example, as a result of the mini game being played, the display including the notice display of the timer notice effect from the display mode (such as the display mode of the hold of Yoshimune or the display mode of blue hold) not including the notice display of the timer notice effect. Although the situation of changing to the mode (display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, display mode of red timer hold, etc.) is shown, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by performing the above-described hold change animation. .

  FIG. 364 (C1) to FIG. 365 (C23) are diagrams showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 364 (C1) to FIG. 3 (C2) are the same as FIG. 363 (A1) to FIG.

  In FIG. 364 (C3), it is shown that the special game 1 start opening 230 is subjected to a winning of the gaming ball and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special view 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special view 1 in the second holding number display becomes “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special view 1 is a display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, and is a display mode of pre-reading notice of timer notice effect. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I like it!" Are displayed, and it is informed that the holding icon according to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb holding is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Moreover, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "next change expectation" are displayed, and the expectation of the big hit in the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is a display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold is high. Is suggested.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "something" are displayed, and it is shown that the display of a certain message is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 364 (C7) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 2-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Moreover, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of "something" is switched to the character display of "I have it", that is, the message "I have something" is displayed from these character displays. It can be said that This message is a message corresponding to the display of the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, and suggests that timer preview effect may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C8), the hold (first hold) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first holding icon h11, which is a display mode of Yoshimune bomb holding, becomes a fluctuation icon h0 which is a notice display mode regarding the symbol fluctuation by moving to the fluctuation icon display area without changing the display manner. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Onhi" are displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability for the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is extremely high. ing. It should be noted that the display of the characters "onhi" may be started after the start of the symbol variation display, or the display of the characters "onheat" may be started at the timing when the symbol variation display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the first timer preview display TM11 is frame-in from the right of the display screen by frame-in-animation, and is displayed at the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “12:00” is displayed as the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 12 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed, and a warning for the timer advance notice effect is made.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C10), “11:86” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.14 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C11), it is shown that the first timer notice display TM11 is switched and displayed from the timer display to the character display of “group generation standby”. At this time, an icon of "Sabohani" is added on the left side of the character display of "during group generation standby", and as a result of the timer advance presentation being performed, it is informed that the advance notice of "Sabohani group" is executed. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the instruction display (tutorial display) is performed in the timer advance display during execution (during subtraction) of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display. After that, as shown in FIG. 364 (C12), the character display of “group generation standby” is switched to the timer display again. In this effect example, the timer display of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 and the character display of "group generation standby" is alternately switched and displayed every predetermined time (for example, every 0.5 seconds). After the countdown is started, the process is performed until the reach state described later is reached. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and “10:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C13), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and the above-mentioned alternate display also continues, and "04: 35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C14), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 364 (C15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C16), the alternate display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 ends, and the timer display is continuously displayed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “01:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C16).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 364 (C17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the strong symbol execution notice is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, although the hold icon display area is erased, the fluctuation icon display area remains displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also continuously displayed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed. That is, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the first timer announcement display TM11 being performed, it is shown that the sabohani group announcement is performed as a certain presentation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C18), it is shown that the Sabo-Hani group advance notice is being continued. And the change icon h0 which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold of the mode in which the bomb has been erased. That is, in this production example, the fluctuation icon (pending icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb pending, in which the notice of the acceptance judgment (pre-reading notice) and the notice of the timer notice effect (pre-reading notice) are combined, the timer notice effect is executed. It is shown about the example changed into the display mode of Yoshimune retention which has only the function of the notice (pre-reading advance notice) of success / failure determination after being done and performing the function. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C18), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is also deleted. Note that the first timer notice display TM11 may be erased after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or even if the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. The timing at which the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes may be the same as the timing at which the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 365 (C19) following FIG. 364 (C18), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (Kenou reach), and a screen in which the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the enemy are confronted is displayed Be done. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. At this time, the variation icon h0 is erased together with the variation icon display area. The transition icon h0 may be erased after transition to the super reach, or transition to the super reach may be performed after the transition icon h0 is erased, or the transition icon h0 is changed at the timing of transition to the super reach. It may be erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (C20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of “strong cut-in” are displayed. It is informed that CI1a is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 365 (C21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (C22), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. The variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also displayed again, and the change icon h0 is also displayed again in the display mode of Yoshimune hold. After that, as shown in FIG. 365 (C23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “happiness 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this example, it was shown that the character of the lord displayed the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is the display mode holding the bomb, but the character of the lord is other than the bomb (for example, the icon of replay, the icon of Sabohani, etc. ) May be displayed in a display manner holding the preview effect to be carried out.

  FIG. 365 (D1) to FIG. 365 (D18) are diagrams showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the on-hold notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Since FIG. 365 (D1) to FIG. 365 (D7) are the same as FIG. 363 (A1) to FIG. 36 (A7), the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D8), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0 which is the advance notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Onhi" are displayed, suggesting that the big hit reliability for the symbol variation display concerning the variation icon h0 which is the display mode of Yoshimune retention is extremely high. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D10), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 365 (D11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 365 (D12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the weak sabothani group advance notice is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D13), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of "SP reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. Is reported. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 365 (D14) to FIG. 365 (D18) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 365 (D14) to FIG. 365 (D18) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 363 (A14) to FIG. In this case, it may be a big hit.

  As described above, in this example, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold, a display mode to which a bomb is added (display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a display mode of pre-reading advance notice of timer announcement effect) When it is displayed in, it is easier for the timer announcement effect to be performed, and when the display mode of Yoshimune hold is displayed, the display mode with the bomb added (display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold) An example is shown in which the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed in the case where is displayed in the display form in which no bomb is added (display form of Yoshimune retention).

  FIG. 365 (E1) to FIG. 366 (E19) are diagrams showing in stages an example of the pending change presentation performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 365 (E1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 365 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 365 (E1), two suspension icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are displayed in the suspension icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. It will be displayed as Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In FIG. 365 (E3), it is shown that the special game 1 starting hole 230 is awarded a game ball and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special view 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special view 1 in the second hold number display becomes "2". . Here, the hold icon h12 of the special view 1 is in a round and blue display mode, that is, in a display mode of a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 365 (E7) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 2-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E8), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E9), it is shown that the roulette effect is started and the start effect is performed. In this example, when the roulette effect is started and the start effect is started, three icons (for example, an icon of timer notice, an icon of replay, an icon of Sabohani) are triangle-shaped above the first hold icon h11. , And one of the three icons is displayed in a manner surrounded by an elliptical cursor. At the timing shown in FIG. 365 (E9), the cursor encloses the timer notice icon, and correspondingly, the word “timer” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is performed. As a result, it is suggested that the timer notice icon may be stopped and the timer notice effect may be performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E10) shows that the start effect is continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 366 (E10), the cursor moves to surround the safohani icon, and correspondingly, the character of “icon” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is As a result, it is suggested that the Sabohani icon may be stopped, and a preview effect corresponding to the stopped icon may be performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E11) shows that the start effect is being continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 366 (E11), the cursor moves to surround the replay icon, and in response to this, characters of “pseudo chain” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is displayed. As a result, it is suggested that the icon of replay is stopped, and a pseudo-sequence effect may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E12), it is shown that the start effect is finished and the cursor starts high-speed movement (high-speed fluctuation). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters such as "What will come out" are displayed, and an expectation is given to which one of the three icons is to be stopped.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13), the character "This is" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the timer notice icon. As a result, it is notified that the icon of the timer notice is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the result of roulette effect may be derived and displayed after the character “is it” is displayed, or the character “this” may be displayed after the result of the roulette effect is derived and displayed. Also, the result of the roulette effect may be derived and displayed at the timing when the characters “this” are displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Ru.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15), from the display mode of the first reserved icon h11 being round and the display mode of blue (that is, the display mode of the advance notice), the conviction wire is added to the display mode of the advance notice. Is changed to the display mode of the bomb. That is, it changes to the display mode of blue timer hold which is the display mode of the bomb in blue. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "timer hold" are displayed, and it is notified that the advance notice of the timer advance effect has been performed. Note that the character display of "timer hold" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes, or after the character display of "timer hold" is performed, the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. The character display of "timer hold" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E17), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 366 (E19) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 2-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. After that, for example, effects shown in FIG. 347 (8) or later, effects shown in FIG. 349 (12) or later, effects shown in FIG. 351 (8) or later, effects shown in FIG. The effects shown in 355 (9) and thereafter are performed.

  FIGS. 366 (E13a) to (E15a) show other patterns of effects shown in FIGS. 366 (E13) to (E15). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13a), the character "is" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed surrounding the icon of Sabohani. As a result, it is notified that the icon of the sabothani has been derived and displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14a), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Ru.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15a), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from a round display mode of blue (display mode of previewing advance notice) to a display mode of Sabohani character. That is, it is shown that the advance notice of the advance notice of the Sabohani group is performed. After that, it is informed that there is a possibility that the strong sabothani group advance notice will be made in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the sabothani character. It should be noted that in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first reserved icon h11 which is the display mode of the Sabo Hani character, as a result of the timer advance notice being performed, the Sabo Hani group advance notice may be given (for example, FIG. 239-FIG. Savo-Hani group notice may be performed without performing timer notice effect (for example, effects shown in FIG. 237 to FIG. 238). Also, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first reserved icon h11, which is the display mode of the character of Sabohani, there may be cases where weak Sabohani group advance notice may be made, or there may be cases in which the Sabohani group advance notice itself is not made. May be Then, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first reserved icon h11, which is the display mode of the Sabo Hani character, there is a possibility that the Sabo Hani group notice may be given, so that it is possible to have an expectation for the transition to super reach. There is a possibility.

  FIGS. 366 (E13 b) to (E15 b) show other patterns of effects shown in FIGS. 366 (E13) to (E15). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13 b), the character "is" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the replay icon. As a result, it is informed that the icon of replay is derived and displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14 b), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Ru.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15 b), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains circular and does not change with the blue display mode, but the replay icon appears above the fluctuation icon h0. That is, the situation where the pseudo-prediction pre-reading notice is performed is shown, and there is a possibility that the pseudo-co-representation is performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display form of pre-reading pre-notice. It is informed. In the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the advance notice, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed, a pseudo continuous effect may be performed (for example, FIG. 239 to FIG. 240) And the like may be performed without the timer advance notice being performed (for example, the effects shown in FIG. 237 to FIG. 238). In addition, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, there may be a case where the pseudo continuous effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 366 (E8 c) to (E12 c) show other effect patterns following FIG. 365 (E7). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 366 (E8 c) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 365 (E8), the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E9c), a state is shown in which a gift holding effect is started. In the present holding effect, a small treasure box, the petit treasure box TRG, is displayed above the holding icon (or the fluctuation icon), and one of a plurality of results (contents or options) is derived, and the holding icon (the fluctuation is displayed It is an effect that the display mode of the icon may change.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E10 c), a situation is shown in which the result of the present holding effect is derived. Specifically, the petit treasure box TRG is opened, an icon of the timer notice appears from the inside, and it is informed that there is a possibility that the timer notice effect will be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E11 c), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Ru.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E12 c), a convective wire is added to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice shown in FIG. 366 (E8 c) to change to the timer hold display mode. It is shown that it is changing. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "timer hold" are displayed, and it is notified that the advance notice of the timer advance effect has been performed. That is, it is shown that addition of pre-reading advance notice of timer advance notice and rank-up of pre-reading advance notice are performed by the same effect. Furthermore, in this effect example, an icon of a timer display in which “10:00” is displayed as an initial display time is added above the bomb, and after 10 seconds have passed since the timer display countdown is started, a certain effect It is suggested that be done. In addition, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12 c '), although the convective line is added to the display mode of the advance notice, and the display mode of the timer notice is changed, the color of the hold icon may remain blue. . Also, the time for counting down the timer may be different, for example, in FIG. 366 (E12c ′ ′), an icon of a timer notice displayed as “60:00” as the time for initial display is added, It has been suggested that an effect will be performed 60 seconds after the timer display countdown is started. In this case, for example, the higher the rank of the hold icon, the easier it may be to display the timer display icon indicating a long time, and more specifically, the red hold than the blue hold icon is displayed. When the icon is displayed, "60:00" may be more easily appeared than "10:00" as the initial display of the time indicated by the timer display. At this time, in the open scene of the petit treasure box TRG shown in FIG. 366 (E10c), it may be different from the initial display time indicated by the appearing timer notice icon (for example, “10:00” from the petit treasure box TRG The icon of the timer notice appears, but after the change of the display mode of the hold icon, the icon of the timer display showing "60:00" may be added), and may be made the same (for example, Petit Treasure Box An icon of a timer display indicating "60:00" may appear from the TRG).

  In this production example, the appearance of the timer advance notice icon from the Petit Treasure Box TRG shows that the pre-read advance notice function of the timer advance notice effect is added to the pre-read advance notice regarding the big hit, but the Petit Treasure Box TRG For example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E10c '), there is a case where a replay icon appears from the petit treasure box TRG, and a pseudo-prediction notice of pseudo ream is given. May be

  Thus, in this example of the effect, if one of the contents (one of the options) appearing from the petit treasure box TRG includes the one relating to the timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 366 (E9 c), the hold icon is displayed. It can be said that the state in which the petit treasure box TRG is displayed incidentally to is also an example of the timer hold which functions as a prefetch notice of the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 367 (F1) to FIG. 367 (F22) are diagrams showing an example of a pending change presentation performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner. 367 (F1) to (F8) are the same as FIG. 365 (E1) to FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” which is one of the mini games is started. When the "Yoshimune Kankan game" is started, the symbol DC of the dice is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM as a symbol of "1", and the decorative symbol is displayed by being reduced at the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, on the upper center of the display screen, an explanatory display of "Notice Yoshimune!" And "Attack with a series of hits" is displayed, and the production button 136 is continuously hit within the operation effective period to make the dice (pattern) more advantageous It is shown that it is a mission to set a high score (large score) and the display mode of the hold icon may change to a more advantageous mode according to the degree of achievement of the mission. Specifically, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 367 (F9), when there is no change with the result of the dice being “1”, the display mode of the hold icon is the advance notice regarding the big hit and the display mode of blue remains If there is no change (no change) and the outcome of the dice is raised by one rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon does not change in the display mode of the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit, but When the color ranks up from blue to red (changes from blue hold to red hold) and the result of the dice rises 2 ranks to "5", the display mode of the hold icon is a preview notice regarding a big hit In addition to this, the advance notice of the timer notice is added, and it is also notified that the color of the hold icon is also ranked up from blue to red (change from blue hold to red timer hold).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F10), the display showing the outcome of the dice and the corresponding result (that is, the display mode of the hold icon after change) moves to the left of the display screen While being displayed, in the center of the display screen, the character "READY" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is informed that the continuous hitting operation acceptance is started. Also, it is shown that the navigation character YM is also preparing to pull out the sword.

  FIG. 367 (F11) shows that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has been started. When the operation effective period starts, the letter "READY" displayed accompanying the button image 136a changes to "GO!", And the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a. It has been shown that they are promoting repeated strikes.

  FIG. 367 (F12) shows that the player has continuously hit the effect button 136 during the effective period of operation of the effect button 136. A state is shown in which the navigation character YM cuts a die symbol with a can handle in response to the player's continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. The remaining time meter MT is displayed in a manner in which the gauge decreases according to the time after the start of the operation effective period.

  FIG. 367 (F13) shows that the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F13), since the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 has become a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the outcome of the dice is ranked up from “1” to “3”. That is, it is shown that it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from blue hold to red hold.

  FIG. 367 (F14) shows that the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM moves to the right of the symbol of the dice, and the effect by the player is shown. It is shown that the dice pattern is cut with a knife in response to the continuous hitting operation of the button 136.

  FIG. 367 (F15) shows that the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is moved to the left side of the symbol of the dice, and the player It is shown that the dice pattern is pokes with a whistle in response to the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the character of "GO!" Displayed along with the button image 136a is switched to "double hit!", Prompting a further double hit operation of the effect button 136.

  FIG. 367 (F16) shows that the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16), the character of "bump!" Displayed along with the button image 136a changes to "one more breath!" It is suggested that

  Thereafter, after the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F17), the outcome of the dice ranks up from "3" to "5" and is displayed accompanying the button image 136a The character of "One more breath!" Has been switched to "Done!", And the button operation animation ends. That is, it is shown that the desired result is achieved by raising the output of the dice to the highest rank "5" by the continuous hitting operation in the "Yoshimune Kankan game". At this time, the navigation character YM is erased but may be displayed.

  And in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F18), the dice of "5" finally derived is displayed at the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof The letters "GET!" Are displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Ru.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of blue hold to the display mode of red timer hold. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is ranked up and the pre-reading notice of the timer pre-notice effect is added.

  After that, after being stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 367 (F21), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop by swing fluctuation After that, as shown in FIG. 367 (F22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “deterior 5-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. After that, for example, effects shown in FIG. 347 (8) or later, effects shown in FIG. 349 (12) or later, effects shown in FIG. 351 (8) or later, effects shown in FIG. The effects shown in 355 (9) and thereafter are performed.

  In this production example, the predetermined result (the result of the dice) is derived by performing a predetermined number of operations of the production button 136, but, for example, within the operation valid period Even if the predetermined number of operations of the effect button 136 is not performed and the predetermined result is not derived, the predetermined result (the result of the dice) is finally derived (rewritten) Alternatively, a result different from the predetermined result (result according to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated) may be derived. For example, as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, when the outcome of the dice is "1" without being ranked up, but the outcome determined in advance is the outcome of "5" which is 2 rank up (Good luck (When there is a possibility that the outcome of the dice will be "5") when the repeat button 136 is operated continuously), the timer corresponding to the red timer hold, the timer corresponding to the hold icon corresponding to the hold icon A preview effect may be performed, or in response to the result of the derivation, for example, when the die roll is “1”, the timer preview effect is performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. You may not want to

  In this example of presentation, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by performing the "Yoshimune Kankan game", but any mini game shown so far in this specification The rank of the display mode of the hold icon may be performed according to.

  Moreover, in this example of the effect, when the result is derived without changing the output of the dice with "1", the display mode of the holding icon remains blue holding, and the example of not ranking up is shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 367 (F9 '), regardless of which result is derived, the display mode of the hold icon is always ranked up (that is, the display of the hold icon is performed when the "Yoshimune Kankan game" is executed). The promotion of the aspect may be finalized). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 367 (F9 '), when there is no change with the result of the dice being "1", the display mode of the pre-reading notice regarding the default display mode is a big hit (blue display mode) If the advance notice of the timer notice is added (the default changes to the blue timer hold) and the die roll up results in one rank and becomes “3”, the display mode of the hold icon is The default display mode changes to the display mode of the pre-reading notice related to the big hit, and the color of the holding icon also becomes red, and the pre-reading notice of the timer notice is added (default changes to red timer hold) When 2 ranks up and becomes “5”, the display mode of the hold icon changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the preview notice regarding the jackpot. Moreover with the color becomes red pending icon, a timer notice prefetch notice is added, further, that the magnitude of the held icon is changed to the large size (changed from the default to Dekataima hold) are informed.

  FIG. 367 (F8a) to FIG. 3F (F20a) show another effect pattern following FIG. 367 (F7). However, in this presentation example, it is assumed that the first hold icon h11 is displayed not in the blue hold display mode but in the blue timer hold display mode when the hold is increased in FIG. 367 (F3). The effect shown in FIG. 367 (F8a) is the same as FIG. 367 (F8) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the blue timer hold, so the description is omitted. Do.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9a) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” has been started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 367 (F9a), when there is no change with the result of the dice being "1", the display mode of the hold icon is not changed with the display mode of the blue timer hold, When the rank is raised by 1 and becomes “3”, the display mode of the hold icon ranks up from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the red timer hold, and the die roll up by 2 ranks When the result is “5”, it is reported that the display mode of the hold icon is to rank up from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the deca timer hold. In addition, the display mode of deca timer hold is a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit is higher than the display mode of red timer hold. After that, the effects are performed as shown in FIG. 367 (F10) to FIG. 3F (F15).

  FIG. 367 (F16a) shows that the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16a), the character of "Continuous strike!" Displayed along with the button image 136a changes to "One more breath!" It is suggested that

  However, thereafter, when the operation effective period elapses without the dice being raised from “3” to “5”, as shown in FIG. 367 (F17a), it is displayed accompanying the button image 136a. The letter "Take another breath!" Changes to "chance!" And the button operation animation ends. In other words, it is shown that the output of the dice is upgraded by one rank from “1” to “3” by the continuous hitting operation in the “Yoshimune Kankan game”. At this time, the navigation character YM is displayed but may be deleted.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F18a), the dice of the dice indicating the finally derived "3" are displayed in the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof The letters "GET!" Are displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19a), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Ru.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20a), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the red timer hold. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is ranked up while the pre-reading notice of the timer pre-notice effect by the hold icon is performed. In other words, it can also be shown that the pre-reading notice of the timer pre-notice effect by the hold icon changes to another pre-reading notice of the timer pre-notice effect. After that, for example, effects are performed in the manner shown in FIG. 367 (F21) to FIG. 3F (F22).

  In this example of presentation, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by performing the "Yoshimune Kankan game", but any mini game shown so far in this specification The rank of the display mode of the hold icon may be performed according to.

  FIGS. 368 (F 8 b) to (F 20 b) show other effect patterns following FIG. 367 (F 7). However, in this presentation example, it is assumed that the first hold icon h11 is displayed not in the blue hold display mode but in the blue timer hold display mode when the hold is increased in FIG. 367 (F3). The effect shown in FIG. 367 (F8 b) is the same as FIG. 367 (F8) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the blue timer hold, so the description will be omitted. Do.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9 b) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” has been started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 367 (F9b), when the outcome of the dice remains “1”, the display mode of the hold icon does not change with the display mode of the blue timer reserve, and the appearance of the dice appears When the rank is raised by 1 and becomes “3”, the display mode of the hold icon ranks up from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the red timer hold, and the die roll up by 2 ranks In the case of “5”, the display mode of the hold icon is a display mode in which two bombs are represented as one mass from the display mode of the blue timer hold, and the bomb arranged on the left side is blue It is reported that the bomb placed on the right side is a red display mode, and the bomb is ranked up to the double timer hold display mode. When the hold icon is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, it is suggested that at least two timer announcement effects may be performed. After that, the effects are performed as shown in FIG. 367 (F10) to FIG. 3F (F15).

  FIG. 367 (F16b) shows that the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16b), the character of “continuous hit!” Displayed along with the button image 136a is switched to “another breath!” It is suggested that

  Thereafter, after the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F17 b), the outcome of the dice ranks up from "3" to "5" and is displayed accompanying the button image 136a The character of "One more breath!" Has been switched to "Done!", And the button operation animation ends. That is, it is shown that the desired result is achieved by raising the output of the dice to the highest rank "5" by the continuous hitting operation in the "Yoshimune Kankan game". At this time, the navigation character YM is erased but may be displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F 18 b), the dice of the dice indicating the finally derived “5” are displayed at the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof The letters "GET!" Are displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19 b), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Ru.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20b), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the double timer hold. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is ranked up, and the pre-reading notice about that at least two times of the timer pre-notice effects are performed is performed. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is also ranked up. After that, for example, effects are performed in the manner shown in FIG. 367 (F21) to FIG. 3F (F22). After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first holding icon h11 is started, for example, 2 in one symbol variation display such as the effect shown in FIG. 325 to FIG. 327 or the effect shown in FIG. More than one timer announcement effect is performed. It should be noted that which effect is executed as a certain effect to be executed by the timer effect can be appropriately set, that is, any of the embodiments disclosed in this specification can be applied. Needless to say. Even when the hold icon (or the fluctuation icon) is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, the timer advance notice effect may be executed only once.

  In this production example, for example, as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the production button 136, the result of the dice did not rank up but was "1", but "5" of which the predetermined result is 2 rank up In the case where it is an appearance (when there is a possibility that the outcome of the dice will be "5" when the effort button 136 is repeatedly hit and operated), corresponding to the double timer suspension, the suspension icon The timer announcement effect may be performed at least twice in the corresponding symbol variation display, and for example, when the outcome of the dice is “1”, corresponding to the hold icon corresponding to the derivation result The timer advance notice effect may be performed only once in the symbol change display to be performed.

  In this example of presentation, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by performing the "Yoshimune Kankan game", but any mini game shown so far in this specification The rank of the display mode of the hold icon may be performed according to.

  FIGS. 368 (F 8 c) to (F 20 c) show other effect patterns following FIG. 367 (F 7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (F8c), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 It is shown that is starting. At this time, the move animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variation icon display area The second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and displayed as the first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (F8 c), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the first timer preview display TM11 is frame-in from the right of the display screen by frame-in-animation, and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “30:00” is displayed as the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. The countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started thereafter.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9c), it is shown that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” has started. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is moved and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. Note that the first timer notice display TM11 may be moved and displayed before the "Yoshimune Kankan game" starts, or may be moved and displayed after the "Yoshimune Kankan game" starts, or "Yoshimune Kankan game" It may be moved and displayed at the timing when "" starts. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F9 c), “27: 60” is displayed on the first timer announcement display TM11. That is, it is shown that 2.4 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. The other effects are the same as the effects shown in FIG. When the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the first timer preview display TM11 moves and displays the display position from the upper left corner to the upper right corner again, but may not display the movement. After that, after rendering is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 367 (F10) to FIG. 3 (F15), the rendering shown in FIG. 368 (F16 c) to FIG. 3 (F19 c) is performed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 368 (F16c) to FIG. (F19c) are continuously performed with the timer advance notice, and the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is performed, The same as FIG. 368 (F16 b) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F20c), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is blue timer hold at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. , The display mode of the double timer hold is changed, and a state in which the hold icon is ranked up is shown. That is, while the advance notice for the big hit is ranked up, the advance notice is made that the timer advance effect is performed at least twice, and it is shown that the advance notice for timer advance effect is also ranked up. . The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the timer display on the timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display on the timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00", and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" You may After that, for example, effects are performed in the manner shown in FIG. 367 (F21) to FIG. 3F (F22). After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first holding icon h11 is started, for example, 2 in one symbol variation display such as the effect shown in FIG. 325 to FIG. 327 or the effect shown in FIG. More than one timer announcement effect is performed. It should be noted that which effect is executed as a certain effect to be executed by the timer effect can be appropriately set, that is, any of the embodiments disclosed in this specification can be applied. Needless to say. Even when the hold icon (or the fluctuation icon) is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, the timer advance notice effect may be executed only once.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, an example is shown in which the timer advance notice display is moved and displayed, and as a result of the timer advance notice being performed, an example in which the start notice of the new timer advance notice effect is performed as a certain effect is shown. It is shown.

  In this example, the effect is that the timer hold of the display mode of the bomb is increased from one to a plurality, but for example, the display of the bomb included in the Yoshimune bomb hold is the result of the Yoshimune Kankan game being played An effect of increasing from one to three may be performed.

  FIG. 368 (G1) to FIG. 369 (G22) are diagrams showing another effect pattern of the on-hold change effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 367 (G1) to (G2) are the same as FIG. 365 (E1) to (E2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 368 (G3), it is shown that the special game 1 starting hole 230 is awarded a game ball and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special view 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special view 1 in the second hold number display becomes "2". . Here, the hold icon h12 of the special view 1 is a display mode in which the icon PD of the panda is added together with the display BD ′ ′ of the bomb, and the advance notice of the timer advance effect is performed and the advance notice of the big hit It is functioning. The rank of the big hit reliability when the panda icon PD is displayed is, for example, “2”, and the big hit reliability is considered to be a little high. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 368 (G4) to the same figure (G8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 368 (G4) to (G8) are the effects shown in FIGS. 365 (E4) to (E8) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. The description is omitted because it is the same.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (G9) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” has been started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 368 (G9), when there is no change with the result of the dice being “1”, the display mode of the hold icon is the panda icon PD with the big hit reliability of “2”. If there is no change, and the outcome of the dice is raised by one rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up from the panda icon PD to the icon TS of the lady and the dice appearance is When the rank is increased by 2 and becomes “5”, it is reported that the display mode of the hold icon is to rank up from the panda icon PD to the SaboHani icon SH. In addition, the rank of the big hit reliability when the icon TS of the lord is displayed is, for example, “4”, and the big hit reliability is higher than that of the panda icon PD. Further, the rank of the jackpot reliability when the SaboHani icon SH is displayed is, for example, "infinite", and the jackpot reliability is extremely high. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 368 (G10) to FIG. 369 (G19) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 368 (G10) to FIG. 369 (G19) are the same as FIG. 367 (F10) to FIG. 367 (G19) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. So I will omit the explanation. At this time, as shown in FIG. 368 (G11), although the icon PD of the panda is displayed overlapping with the remaining time meter MT, it is displayed being overlapped by the remaining time meter MT It is also good. In addition, as shown in FIG. 368 (G18), the panda icon PD is displayed so as to overlap the output of the derived dice displayed, but is displayed overlapping the output of the dice It may be done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (G20), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode in which the icon PD of the panda is added to the display BD ′ ′ of the bomb, to the display mode of Sabohani Is shown. That is, although the display mode of the advance notice of the timer advance effect is not used, it is shown that the advance notice regarding the big hit is ranked up.

  After that, after being stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 369 (G21), the third stop is performed and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop by swing fluctuation After that, as shown in FIG. 369 (G22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “deterior 5-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 237 to FIG. 238 etc., symbol variation display may be performed in which a sabo hani group advance notice is performed without the timer advance presentation effect, or as shown in FIG. A symbol variation display may be performed in which an effect is performed and a Sabohani group advance notice is performed as a certain effect. In addition, the Sabohani group notice to be performed may be a strong Sabohani group advance notice or a weak Sabohani group advance notice may be performed.

  In this production example, the display mode in which the icon PD of the panda is added to the display BD ′ ′ of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the Sabohani, so that the pre-reading of the timer advance notice is made Although the display mode has not changed to the display mode of the notice, for example, the hold icon, which is the display mode of the blue timer hold, changes to red hold as a result of the Yoshimune Kankan game being played, the timer advance effect preview The display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the display mode of the advance notice of the timer advance effect, and may be ranked up as the advance notice regarding the jackpot.

  FIG. 369 (H1) to FIG. 370 (H38) are diagrams showing an example of a timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment step by step. Note that FIG. 369 (H1) to FIG. 3 (H2) are the same as FIG. 363 (A1) to FIG. 3 (A2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 369 (H3) shows that the special figure 1 start port 230 is awarded a game ball and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of the special view 1 is added and displayed in the hold icon display area, and the number of holds of the special view 1 in the second hold number display Is displayed as "2." Here, the second reserved icon h12 is a display mode consisting of one bomb, and the letters "TIMER" are added to the upper side. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "Timer is pending" are displayed. In this example of presentation, a state is shown in which a notice display (prereading notice) of the timer notice effect is performed by displaying the hold icon of the display mode of the timer hold which is the display mode of the bomb.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle design and the right design, the fluctuation display of the decoration design continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the shaking fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 369 (H7) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 6-Decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H8), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, the word "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb in the first hold icon h11 is switched to timer display, and timer announcement effect is started. "03:00" is displayed on the timer display displayed on the first hold icon h11, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. There is. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer start” are displayed, and it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed after 3 seconds. It should be noted that “timer start” may be displayed after the character “TIMER” in the first hold icon h11 is switched to “03:00”, or “timer start” is displayed, and then the first The character of "TIMER" in the hold icon h11 may be switched to "03:00", and the character of "TIMER" in the first hold icon h11 is "03:00" at the timing when the "timer start" is displayed. You may switch to

  After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started, and the timer display indicates “02:75” at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H10). That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In addition, the display of "timer start" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is switched to "focus on hold", and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H11), it is shown that the character YMN of the lord appears and shoots a bow toward the first hold icon h11. In addition, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and “00: 55” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H12), when the countdown of the timer display is completed and the timer display is "00:00", the arrow released by the character YMN is the first hold icon h11. A hit, a hold change animation is started, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Note that the hold change animation may be started after the timer display becomes "00:00", or the timer display may become "00:00" after the start of the hold change animation, or the timer The hold change animation may be started at the timing when the display becomes “00:00”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (H13), the display mode of the first holding icon h11 changes from the display mode of one bomb to the display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one mass, and above it The character of "TIMER × 3" is added. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer increase” are displayed, and it is shown that a notice display (pre-reading notice) that three times of timer notice effects are executed is performed. That is, in this example of rendering, as a result of the timer preview rendering being performed, it is shown that the number of times of execution of the timer preview rendering displayed as a preview and displayed by the hold icon increases as a certain rendering.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H16), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 369 (H17) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holiday 2-Decorative 6-Decorative 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H18), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first reserved icon h11 in the display mode in which three bombs are grouped is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and at least three timer announcements regarding the pattern change are executed. It becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode of being done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H19), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, a timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “07:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started seven seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this example of the effect, the icon RPL of replay is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that the possibility of the pseudo link being started as a certain effect is high. In addition, with the fluctuation icon h0 of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped, the display of "TIMER × 3" is erased and the tip of the squib of the bomb disposed on the right side of the three bombs is ignited The situation is shown, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “something ... after 7 seconds” are displayed, and as a result of the timer announcement effect being performed 7 seconds later, a certain effect can be performed It is suggested that there is sex. Moreover, in this presentation example, it is shown that the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. The display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. Moreover, after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started, or after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started, the display position of the decoration symbol is changed Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H20), “06: 36” is displayed in the first timer announcement display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "attention" is displayed, and a warning to the first timer advance notice display TM11 is made. Further, the length of the connecting wire of the bomb disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H21), it is shown that the second timer announcement effect is started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement effect is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in-animation. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “20:00” is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in the example of the effect, the icon SAH of the sabothani is added to the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the advance of the sabohani group advance will be started as a certain effect. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 in the display mode in which three bombs are grouped, it is shown that the tip of the squib of the bomb disposed on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the squib of the bomb placed on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time after the countdown of the timer display starts. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H21). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are continuously displayed, and a warning for the timer advance notice effect is made.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer announcement display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H22), “19:20” is displayed in the second timer announcement display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 starts. On the other hand, also in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "04: 95" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H22), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character of "group notice confirmed when appearing" is displayed together with the Sabohani character on the right side of the treasure box image BOX. It is reported that when the character Saboh of Sabohani appears from the treasure box, a strong Sabohani group advance notice is performed. In addition, you may make it alert | report that advance notice of Sabo Hani group is performed also including weak Sabo Hani group advance notice. In addition, when the character SAHN of Sabohani does not appear from the treasure box, the weak Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer notice effect concerning the second timer notice display TM12 being performed. It is also possible that the Sabohani group advance notice is not performed (a certain effect is not executed, that is, the timer advance notice effect of Gasse is executed). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "also watch mini games" are displayed, and a warning for the mini games is made in conjunction with the timer advance notice effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H23) shows that the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is opened, and the character SAHN of Sabohani appears from the inside, and the character of "success!" Is displayed in the vicinity thereof. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, showing that the mini game has succeeded. In the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H23), "03:51" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the advance notice display TM12, "17: 76" is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (H24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer preview display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer preview display TM12 is displayed. The icon SAH of the added SaboHani is displayed in an increasing manner to four, and it is informed that the strong SaboHani group advance notice is to be executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the "pseudo run", and as a result of the timer preview effect applied to the first timer preview display TM11, the pseudo link effect can be performed as a certain effect. It is suggested that there is sex. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H24), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "01:37" and the second timer. In the advance notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

  After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and “00:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H25), the right side in the variation icon h0 of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped Bombs explode and the effects are displayed. And a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern stop simultaneously, and the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 5-replay pattern RP-decoration 6" is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo series!” Are displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo series effect is performed. Note that the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer notification display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer on the first timer notification display TM11 after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown is continued, and “14:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H25).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 369 (H26), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the icon RPL of replay is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. In addition, the display of the replay icon RPL may be started after the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started, or the second decoration by the pseudo-link may be started after the display of the replay icon RPL is started The variable display of the symbol may be started, or the display of the replay icon RPL may be started at the timing when the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. At this time, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side is erased. As described above, in this effect example, the bombs are displayed one by one each time the timer advance effect is performed once. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown is continued, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H26).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H27), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown is continued, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H27).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H28) subsequent to FIG. 369 (H27), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H29), the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown is continued, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 370 (H29).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 370 (H30), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the change icon h0 in the display mode in which the two bombs are grouped A bomb on the left side explodes, an effect is displayed, and in the decoration symbol display device 208, a strong sabothani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this example of effect, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variation icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a strong sabochani group announcement is performed as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the second timer announcement display TM12. In addition, the Sabohani group notice may be started after the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", or the timer in the second timer notice display TM12 after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notification may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notification display TM12 becomes "00:00".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H31), a state is shown in which the Sabo-Hani group advance notice is being continued. At this time, an icon SBH of the sabo hani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL, and it is notified that the sabo hani group advance notice has been performed. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 370 (H32), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy character face each other is displayed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. At this time, the variation icon display area is erased. Also, in this example of the effect, in response to the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the remaining one of the three bombs, "stand by" with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 The character of is displayed, and it is informed that the third timer announcement effect is scheduled to be started. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the display that the timer advance effect is on standby is performed during the change display of the decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H33), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, for example, when the third timer advance notice display TM13 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13, which indicates that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. Also, at this time, the icon of the bomb displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen is deleted. The icon RPL for replay is overlapped on the front side of the third timer advance notice display TM 13 and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the third timer announcement display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 370 (H34), “01:25” is displayed in the third timer announcement display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  Thereafter, when the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H35). That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 370 (H36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H37), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. Further, in the example of the effect, when the variation icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer advance presentation concerning the third timer advance display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 370 (H38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “happiness 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this effect example, the timer announcement effect is performed the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon, but the number is not the same as the number corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon The displayed number of bombs may be the minimum guaranteed number of times that the timer announcement effect is executed, or may be the maximum executable number.

  In this effect example, in FIG. 369 (H13), the display mode of the second reserved icon h12 is changed from the display mode of one bomb to the display mode in which three bombs are grouped. As shown in FIG. 370 (H13 '), the display may be displayed in a display mode (display mode of Yoshimune triple bomb hold) to which a character of the lord is further added, that is, the display mode of Yoshimune triple bomb hold is the above-mentioned It is informed that the number of times of execution of the timer advance notice effect is larger than the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and it can be said that the display mode is ranked higher than the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. In other words, it can be said that execution of the timer advance notice effect a plurality of times is suggested by the hold icon (variation icon) of the display mode of the character.

  Also, in this example of the effect, the display mode of one bomb changes from the display mode of one bomb to a display mode in which three bombs are grouped as a certain effect performed and executed by the timer advance effect, but the display mode of each bomb is , The same as before and after the change, but the display mode of each bomb may be different before and after the change. For example, a round display portion (a portion excluding the squib portion) included in the display mode of one bomb The display mode (triple red timer hold display mode) including the display mode of red hold mode from the default display mode (round white display mode: normal timer hold display mode) before and after a certain effect is performed Or may be changed to a display mode of blue timer hold including a display mode of blue hold and a display mode of triple red timer hold including a display mode of red hold before and after a certain effect is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 370 (H7a) to FIG. 371 (H34a) show another effect pattern continued from FIG. 369 (H6). However, in this example of the effect, in FIG. 369 (H3), when there is a hold increase, the second hold icon h12 is not a display mode consisting of one bomb but a display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one mass. It shall be displayed. In the effects shown in FIG. 370 (H7a) to FIG. (H12a), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one block. Since the effect is the same as that shown in 369 (H7) to (H12), the description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H13a), as a result of the pending change animation being performed, a display mode in which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is represented by three bombs as one mass is displayed. The display mode is changed, and the word "TIMER" is added above it. On the other hand, although it changed to the display mode of one bomb, the color is changing from the default color (white) to red, and it also has the function of pre-reading notice about the big hit. That is, the fact that the notice display (prereading notice) that the three times of the timer notice effect is executed is performed is changed to the notice display that the timer notice effect of one time is executed (preread notice). Although the number of executions of the timer advance announcement effect suggested by the hold icon decreases, the reliability of the big hit is improved, and it is shown that the rank is substantially increased. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 370 (H14a) to FIG. 370 (H18a) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 370 (H14a) to (H18a) are the effects shown in FIG. 369 (H14) to (H18) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. The description is omitted because it is the same.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H19a) shows that the mini game is started. In this example of the effect, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, three treasure boxes BX1 to BX3 are arranged in a triangle, and the contents are displayed in each treasure box. That is, the icon of the timer notice which is the display mode of the bomb is displayed in the treasure box BX1, the icon of the bancho is displayed in the treasure box BX2, and the icon of the sabothani is displayed in the treasure box BX3. . Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H20a), an animation in which the treasure chest is shuffled is started, and a state in which a display in which three treasure chests move at high speed in a ring shape is displayed is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Select" are displayed, and it is urged to select one of the three treasure boxes moving at high speed by operating the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H21a), the button image 136a is displayed on the upper left of the display screen together with the remaining time meter MT to notify that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has been started. Promote the operation of the effect button 136 to the person. The display mode of the remaining time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes short in accordance with the time after the start of the operation reception period.

  FIG. 370 (H22a) shows that the effect button 136 has been operated at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the operation reception period. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H23a), a state is shown in which the treasure box BX3 is selected from the three treasure boxes and the treasure box BX3 is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed, prompting attention to the result of the mini game.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H24a), it is shown that the treasure box BX3 is opened, and the icon SAHN of Sabohani appears from the inside. That is, it is predicted that a strong Sabohani group notice will be made. In the vicinity of the character YM, the characters "group notice" are displayed, and it is predicted that a Sabohani group notice is to be made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H25a) subsequent to FIG. 370 (H24a), it is shown that the timer advance effect is started. Specifically, the characters "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb in the fluctuation icon h0 are switched to the timer display, and the timer announcement effect is started. “05:00” is displayed on the timer display displayed on the fluctuation icon h0, which indicates that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer activation” are displayed, and it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed after 5 seconds. In addition, after the character of "TIMER" in the fluctuation icon h0 is switched to "05:00", "timer activation" may be displayed, or after "timer activation" is displayed, "TIMER in the fluctuation icon h0 The character of "" may be switched to "05:00", and the character of "TIMER" in the fluctuation icon h0 may be switched to "05:00" at the timing when "timer activation" is displayed. After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H26a), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "03:41" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 371 (H26a). That is, it is shown that 1.59 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H27a), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (H28a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In addition, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "01:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 371 (H28a).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H29a), when the countdown of the timer display is completed and the timer display is "00:00", the strong symbol execution notice is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this example of effect, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variation icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed. That is, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer advance presentation, it is shown that a strong sabochani group announcement is performed as a certain presentation.

  After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H30a) shows a state of developing into a super reach. When the game reaches the Ken-O-Kai reach, a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the host of the Kage are confronted. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H31a), it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H32a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H33a), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H34a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “happily 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed, it is shown that an effect is performed in which the number of times the timer advance effect of the advance notice is performed decreases. . Further, in this example of the effect, there is shown an example in which an option to perform timer advance notice effect is included in a mini game in which any one of a plurality of options is selected. Further, in this example of the effect, although the number of times of execution of the timer advance notice effect notified is reduced, the reliability of the big hit is improved, and it is shown that the contents of the notice are actually ranked up.

  FIGS. 371 (H24a ') to (H27a') show other effect patterns following FIG. 370 (H23a). However, in this rendering example, it is assumed that the treasure chest BX2 of the three treasure chests is selected in FIG. 370 (H23a).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H24a '), the treasure box BX2 is opened, and the appearance of the icon BCHO with a bancho from the inside is shown. That is, it is predicted that the display mode of the change icon (or the hold icon) is changed. In the vicinity of the character YM, the characters "icon change" are displayed, and the change of the display mode of the fluctuation icon (pending icon) is notified of.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H25a '), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the characters "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb in the fluctuation icon h0 are switched to the timer display, and the timer announcement effect is started. In this example of the effect, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 371 (H 25a) (that is, unlike the case where the icon SAHN of SaboHani appears from the treasure box), the timer display displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 displays “02: “00” is displayed, which indicates that a certain effect is started two seconds after the countdown is started. That is, in this example of rendering, a certain rendering performed as a result of the timer preview rendering is not the Sabohani group preview, but the variation rendering of the fluctuation icon (pending icon). Moreover, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer activation” are displayed, and it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed after 2 seconds. After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 371 (H26a '), when the countdown of the timer display is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold change animation is started and the first hold is It is informed that the display mode of the icon h11 may change.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H27a ′), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the Bancho, and becomes a high-reliability notice display mode.

  As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the initial value of the timer display displayed in the timer advance effect is different according to the result selected in the mini game.

  In this example, for example, when the treasure box BX1 is selected in FIG. 370 (H23a) and the timer advance icon appears, the variation icon displayed in the display mode of the bomb is ranked up and the big hit It changes to the display mode which reliability rises.

  Further, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer advance presentation being performed, a change from the display mode including increase / decrease of the display of the bomb in the hold icon (variation icon) and the display of the bomb to the display mode of the Bancho Although the situation is shown, for example, the display mode may change along with the increase or decrease of the display of the bomb in the hold icon (the change icon). Further, in this presentation example, it is shown that increase / decrease of icons and change of the display mode of icons are performed in the hold icon (variation icon) as a result of the timer advance presentation being performed. The increase / decrease of the notice icon (notice item) and the display mode of the notice icon may be changed.

  In the present embodiment, when the hold icon (variation icon) is displayed in the timer hold display mode, the timer advance presentation effect is performed, but the hold icon (change icon) is not displayed in the timer hold display mode (for example, Even when the hold icon (variation icon) is displayed depending on the display mode of the length leader, the display mode of the Sabo Hani, or the display mode of the replay, the timer advance notice effect may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where a notice effect is performed as a effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed, and a chance up effect may be performed. Here, the "preliminary effect" is an effect that suggests that there may be a big hit, or that a reach effect (a specific reach effect) may be performed, for example, a cut-in. There is a notice etc. In addition, the "chance up effect" is (1) a specific effect that improves the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display by being executed, and includes, for example, a pseudo-series effect and the like. Or (2) It is an announcement effect which is the announcement effect which improves the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display more by being executed in a specific mode, for example, an announcement effect of cut-in, While the normal mode is displayed in a blue frame, there is a case in which a red frame is displayed (displayed in a chance-up display mode). That is, the chance-up effect is an effect in which the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be determined and displayed when it is performed than when it is not performed.

In the above description,
A game console provided with “display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, a timer advance display TM1 or the like shown in FIG. 239 (3)],
The timer display is a display including a display of time [for example, a timer display on the timer advance display TM1, etc.],
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a pseudo ream, a strong sabohanni group notice shown in FIG. In some cases, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG.
Even when the display of the timer display is started, the certain effect may not be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 241 (5) to FIG. Although the advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it is erased before the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, and some effect is not performed, etc.],
The certain effect is started in response to the display of the timer display being started and the display of the time being for a certain time [for example, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 becomes "00:00" etc.] If the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” as shown in FIG. 239 (9), for example, as shown in FIG. Etc.],
If the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed than the case where the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed, the big hit symbol is determined display in the symbol variation display Easy to be
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Conventionally, display effects on display means tend to be colorful. However, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game console, a game console characterized by display means can be realized.

  Moreover, according to this game console, it may be possible to have an expectation for the start of a certain effect by the start of the timer display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display or may not display the timer display.

  Further, the timer display may include only the display of time, or may include the display other than the display of time. In addition, the timer display may include the display of time or may not include the display of time.

  Also, it may be configured that only a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started, or effects other than a certain effect also start after the display of the timer display is started It may be configured as it may be. In addition, it may be configured that a certain effect is always started after the display of the timer display is started, or there is a case that a certain effect is not started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured.

  Also, it may be configured that a certain effect may be started only after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started other than after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured to be the case.

  Moreover, even after the display of the timer display is started, only a certain effect may not be started, or even after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect Other effects may not be started either. Moreover, even after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, or even after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect is started. May be configured to be

  In addition, it may be configured that only a certain effect may be started in response to the display of the timer display being started and the display of the time becoming a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started It may be configured such that effects other than certain effects may be started in response to the display of time being at a certain time. Also, it may be configured that a certain effect is always started in response to the display of the timer display being started and the display of the time becoming a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started It may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started at some time after the display of.

  In addition, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started only when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time has come to a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started It may be configured such that a certain effect may be started in response to the display of time being performed other than that the certain time has come.

  Also, when the display of the timer display is started and a certain effect is executed, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol change display, or the big hit symbol may not be displayed. May be configured.

Also, there may be a case where the certain effect is started when the display of the time reaches the certain time after the display of the timer display is started [eg, FIG. 239 (3)- As shown in FIG. 9 (9), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" after the timer advance notice effect is started, the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started etc],
If the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time reaches the certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the certain effect is not started [for example, FIG. 242 As shown in (3) to (6), after the false timer announcement effect is started, if the timer display on the timer announcement display TM1 is erased before "00:00", the pseudo-train Variation display of the second decoration pattern is not started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to notice that the timer display reaches a certain time.

  Here, after the display of the timer display is started, when the display of the time reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may be started, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, when the display of time reaches a certain time, there may be a case where a production other than a certain production is also started. In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, when the display of time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may always be started, or after the display of the timer display is started. When the display of time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not be started.

  Moreover, after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started only when the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. A certain effect may be started also later than when the time display has reached a certain time.

  In addition, when the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, it is not necessary to start only a certain effect, or the timer If the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time reaches a certain time after the display of the display is started, the effects other than the certain effect may not be started. In addition, when the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, If the display of the timer display ends before the display of the time has reached a certain time after the start of the display of the display, a certain effect may be started.

  In addition, it is not necessary for a certain effect to be started only when the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, and the timer display The effect may not be started except in the case where the display of the timer display is finished before the display of time reaches a certain time after the start of the display of.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a mini game [for example, a mini game shown in FIG. 253 (3) to FIG.
If the first result [for example, the result of the appearance of the princess character HME from the treasure box image, etc. shown in FIG. 253 (9)] is derived as a result of the display of the mini game, the display of the time is When the time is reached and the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 253 (9), when the princess character HME appears from the treasure box image, it is shown in FIG. 253 (17). As such, the replay symbol RP is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second variable display of the decoration symbol by the pseudo-link is started, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to enliven the trend of the timer advance notice by the mini game.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini game, or may be capable of displaying other display than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

  In addition, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the display of the time may reach a certain time and only a certain effect may be started, or the display of the mini game As a result, when the first result is derived, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time and to start an effect other than a certain effect. In addition, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the display of the time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may always be started, or the display of the mini game As a result, when the first result is derived, it may be configured such that the display of time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may not be started.

  In addition, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started only when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, or the display of the mini game may be performed. As a result, the display of time may be configured to arrive at a certain time and start a certain effect even when the first result is derived.

[The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice item [for example, a princess character HME or the like displayed at the lower left of the display screen shown in FIG. 253 (10)].
According to the result of the display of the mini game, the notice item may be displayed [for example, in the mini game shown in FIG. 253 (5) to FIG. When the character HME appears, as shown in FIG. 253 (10), the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item at the lower left of the display screen, etc.],
The notice item includes a display indicating that the certain effect is to be performed [for example, by displaying the princess character HME as a notice item, a notice is notified that a pseudo-link will be performed, etc.] ,
After the display of the advance notice item is started, the display of the time is configured to reach the certain time and start the certain effect [eg, as shown in FIG. 253 (10). After the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-run is started when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A becomes “0:00”, etc.] ,
When the preview item is not displayed, the display of the time is configured not to reach the certain time and start the certain effect [eg, in FIG. 254 (5) to FIG. (9) When a whale character BBA (10) appears from the treasure box image in the mini game shown, the notice item is not displayed as shown in FIG. 254 (10), and the pseudo link is not performed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to draw attention to the display of a notice item.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to recognize that a certain effect by the timer display is started by the notice icon as the result display while making the mini game pay attention to the mini game.

  Moreover, according to this game console, there are cases where it is possible to build up effects during a period until the timer display reaches (or does not reach) a certain time.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the preview item, or may be capable of displaying items other than the preview item. Further, the display means may display the notice item without fail or may not display the notice item.

  In addition, depending on the result of the display of the mini game, only the preview item may be displayed, or the items other than the notification item may be displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game. It may be configured as it is. In addition, the notice item may be always displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game, or the notice item may not be displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game. Good.

  In addition, the advance notice item may include only a display indicating that a certain effect is to be performed, or may include a display other than a display indicating that a certain effect is to be performed. In addition, the advance notice item may include an indication indicating that a certain effect is to be performed, or may not include an indication indicating that a certain effect is to be performed.

  Also, the display of the time may be configured to arrive at a certain time after the display of the preview item is started, and only a certain effect may be started, or after the display of the preview item is started, The display of time may be configured to arrive at a certain time and to start an effect other than a certain effect. Also, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time so that a certain effect is always started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed. It may be configured such that the display of time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may not be started.

  Also, the display of the time may be configured to arrive at a certain time and start a certain effect only after the display of the preview item is started, or after the display of the preview item is started. Also, the display of time may be configured to arrive at a certain time to start a certain effect.

  In addition, when the advance notice item is not displayed, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time and only a certain effect is not started, and when the advance notice item is not displayed, the display of the time may be It may be configured such that a certain time is not reached and any effect other than a certain effect is also started. In addition, when the advance notice item is not displayed, the display of time may be configured to arrive at a certain time so that a certain effect is not necessarily started, and when the advance notice item is not displayed, the display of time may be It may be configured such that a certain effect may be started upon reaching a certain time.

In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the display of the display of the time starts to change [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 253 (14), after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 253 (9) before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 starts. , The result of the mini game display is derived, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate attention on the result of the mini game display.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to impress the relevance of the timer display and the mini game.

  Here, after the display of the timer display is started, only the result of the display of the mini game may be derived before the display of the display of the time starts to change, or the display of the timer display may start After being displayed, the display of the display of the time may be configured to derive other than the result of the display of the mini game before the display of the display changes. In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game may be always derived before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, it may be configured that the result of the mini game display may not be derived before the display of the time display starts changing.

  In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only before the display of the display of the time starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. Thereafter, the result of the mini game display may be derived other than before the display of the time display starts changing.

  Alternatively, the result of the mini game display may be derived before the display of the time display starts changing only after the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, the result of the mini game display may be derived before the display of the time display starts changing.

In addition, after the display of the display of the time starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, FIG. As shown in 249 (4), after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L is started, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1L becomes "0:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (12). Before completion, as shown in FIG. 249 (9), the result of the display of the mini game is derived, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate attention on the result of the mini game at the time of voting.

  Here, after the display of the display of the time starts to change, only the result of the display of the mini game may be derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time. After the display starts to change, it may be configured to derive other than the result of the mini game display before the display of time reaches a certain time. In addition, after the display of the display of the time starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game may be necessarily derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the display of the time After the start of the change, it may be configured that the result of the mini game display may not be derived before the time display reaches a certain time.

  In addition, after the display of the display of the time starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the display of the time After the start of the change, the result of the mini game display may be derived other than before the time display reaches a certain time.

  Also, the display of the time display may be configured such that the result of the mini game display is derived before the time display reaches a certain time only after the display of the time display starts to change. The result of the mini game display may be derived before the display of time reaches a certain time other than after the change start has started.

Also, the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 255 (3) to FIG. Mini games have been started etc before
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the display of the mini game is started, it is not possible to know whether the timer display is started or not, so it may be possible to pay attention to the trend of the mini game.

  Here, there may be a case where only the display of the mini game is started before the display of the timer display is started, or the display other than the display of the mini game is started before the display of the timer display is started. The display may also be started. Also, the display of the mini game may always be started before the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game may not be started before the display of the timer display is started. It is also good.

  In addition, the display of the mini game may be started only before the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game is displayed before the start of the display of the timer display. It may be started.

  Moreover, the display of the mini game may be started before the display of only the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game is displayed before the display of other than the display of the timer display is started. May be started.

Also, in some cases, a second result [for example, as a result of the appearance of the icon BCF of the face of the bancho from the treasure box image shown in FIG.
The second result is a result not related to the certain effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 255 (8), when a result in which the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears is derived from the treasure box image, The strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 256 (25) is displayed, etc., which is not related to the timer announcement effect shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to notice whether or not the result of the mini game display relates to a certain effect.

  Here, only the second result may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game, or even a result other than the second result may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game. Good. In addition, the second result may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game, or the second result may not be derived as a result of the display of the mini game.

  In addition, the second result may not be related to only a certain effect, or may be not related to any effect other than a certain effect. Also, the second result may not necessarily be related to a certain effect, or may be related to a certain effect.

Also, in some cases, a first notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 246 (6) to FIG. (7), etc.] may be executed as the certain effect.
The first notice is a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to expect that the timer display is displayed and the advance notice is made.

  Here, only the first notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the first notice may be performed as a certain effect. In addition, the first notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the first notice may not be performed as a certain effect.

In addition, a second notice [for example, a pseudo reunion, etc.] may be executed as the certain effect.
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for a big hit by displaying the timer display and extending the execution time of the symbol variation display.

  Here, only the second notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the second notice may be performed as a certain effect. In addition, the second notice may be performed as a certain effect, or the second notice may not be performed as a certain effect.

  Also, the second notice may be such that only the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed or when it is executed rather than when it is not executed. The time other than the execution time of the symbol variation display may be long. Also, the second notice may be that the execution time of the symbol variation display is necessarily longer when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed rather than when it is not executed. The execution time of the symbol variation display may not be long.

Also, in some cases, a third notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250 (35), etc.] may be executed as the certain effect,
The third notice is a notice that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display when executed than when it is not executed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation that the timer display is displayed and the big hit notice is made.

  Here, only the third notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the third notice may be performed as a certain effect. In addition, the third advance notice may be performed as a certain effect, or the third advance notice may not be performed as a certain effect.

  In addition, the third advance notice may be one in which only the big hit symbol is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than in the case where it is executed than when it is not executed, or is executed rather than the case where it is not executed. In the case of symbol variation display, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be easily determined and displayed. In addition, the third notice may be that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed rather than when it is not executed, or when it is executed rather than when it is not executed. In the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third notice may be that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display when executed, or the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display when executed. It may be.

Also, in some cases, the fourth notice [for example, the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 247 (30), etc.] may be executed as the certain effect,
The fourth notice is a notice notifying that a big hit will be made,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation that the timer display is displayed to be a big hit.

  Here, only the fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the fourth notice may be performed as a certain effect. In addition, the fourth notice may be performed as a certain effect, or the fourth notice may not be performed as a certain effect.

  In addition, the fourth advance notice may notify only that a big hit will be made, or may notify other than being a big hit. In addition, the fourth advance notice may always notify that it will be a big hit, or may not notify you that it will be a big hit.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, a bottom plate full error display ERR1 or the like shown in FIG. 289 (1)],
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in the pan full error state [eg, the bottom pan full error state, etc.],
The timer display may be overlapped with the ball removal error display [for example, as shown in FIG. 289 (3), the timer notification display TM1 overlaps with the lower-plate full error display ERR1. Being done etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where it is possible to motivate the player to quickly release the error condition in order to see the effect by the timer display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the ball out error display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the ball out error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball removal error display or may not display the ball removal error display.

  In addition, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the pan full error state or may be displayed in a state other than the pan full error state. In addition, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the bowl full error state or may not be displayed in the bowl full error state.

  In addition, the timer display may be configured to overlap only with the ball pullout error display, or the timer display may be configured to overlap with the display other than the ball pullout error display. May be Also, the timer display may be configured to always overlap with the ball pullout error display, or may be configured so that the timer display may not overlap with the ball pullout error display.

In addition, “the timer display is a display displayed in any of a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types is the first aspect [for example, the default display aspect shown in FIG. 248 (3), etc.]
One of the plural types of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the high reliability display aspect shown in FIG. 246 (3)],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The certain effect is more easily started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to have an expectation that a certain effect is started by the mode of timer display.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when a mini game is played, the possibility of success of the mini game may be expected by the mode of timer display. That is, first, the player expects the player to expect the success of the mini game to expect a certain effect to be executed, but the mode of the timer display being started halfway is indirectly started earlier. In some cases, it is possible to give expectation to the result of the game display. That is, there are cases where it is possible to cause the player to have an interest by acting as an advance notice (timer display) of the effect started later, as a notice of the effect (mini game etc.) started earlier.

  Here, the timer display may be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. Good. Further, the timer display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect.

  In addition, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects, or may be entirely different aspects.

  In addition, it may be configured that only a certain effect is more easily started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. In the case where the timer display is displayed in the second mode, the effect other than a certain effect may be more easily started than in the case where the display is displayed in the first mode. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode, a certain effect may be always started, or the timer may be configured. In the case where the timer display is displayed in the second mode rather than the case where the display is displayed in the first mode, a certain effect may not be started.

  Moreover, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, a certain effect may be always started, or when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, the certain effect May be configured so that they may not start.

  The timer display may be changed to the second mode after being displayed in the first mode, or may be changed to the first mode after the timer display is started to be displayed in the second mode. Good. Further, when the timer display is started in the first mode, it may be configured not to change to the second mode, and when the timer display is started in the second mode, It may be configured not to change to the first aspect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types is the third aspect [for example, the timer display of“ 7:77 shown in FIG. 290 (a) ”,“ 99: 99 shown in FIG. 290 (b) Timer display and the rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 290 (g), etc.],
The third aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the big hit symbol is configured to be displayed in symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to give the player expectations at the start of the display of the timer display.

  Moreover, according to this game console, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for being displayed in the third mode.

  Here, the third aspect may be partially different from the first aspect, or may be entirely different from the first aspect.

  Also, the third aspect may be partially different from the second aspect, or may be entirely different from the second aspect.

  Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, only the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, The symbols other than the jackpot symbols may be displayed in a fixed manner in the symbol variation display. Moreover, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode The symbol variation display may be configured such that the big hit symbol may not be displayed.

  In addition, the big hit symbol may be configured to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, except when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. Also in the case of the symbol variation display may be configured to be determined display of the jackpot symbol.

In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, a state different from the jackpot game played in response to the display of the jackpot symbol being finalized and advantageous for the player The “first state” is configured to be given)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the timer display may be able to further enhance the sense of expectation for the third aspect.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, only the first state may be provided, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, A state other than the one state may be configured to be given. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be provided without fail, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be added. It may be configured that the state of may not be given.

  Further, the first state may be provided only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, or in the case other than the case where the timer display is displayed in the third mode. Also, the first state may be configured to be given.

Also, “the first state is a positive change state,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that the power variation state may be provided as the positive change state, or the power assistance state may not be provided. The definite change state may be a definite change state in which the state is maintained until the next big hit, or even if it is a definite change state (ST) in which the state ends when a certain number of symbol variation displays are performed. Good.

  Moreover, it may change to a definite change state and may be a power support state (special figure low probability spread figure high probability state).

In addition, “the first state is a holding unit”,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, the reserve runso may be a reserve runso that a definite change big hit is determined, or may be a reserve run so that a big hit not a definite change big hit is decided.

Also, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the display of the time in the symbol variation display. Is configured as
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where the player can be expected even if the timer display does not reach a certain time.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, only the timer display is configured to be erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. When the timer display is displayed in the third display, the display of time is not changed in the symbol variation display, and the display other than the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is always erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the display of time in the symbol variation display. If the timer display is displayed in the third display, it is possible that the timer display may not be erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the display of time in the symbol change display. It may be configured.

  In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be erased only before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the display of time in the symbol variation display. If the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display may be erased except before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

  Further, only when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the display of time in the symbol variation display. Even if the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

  Alternatively, the timer display may be configured to be erased before the time display changes to reach a certain time.

Also, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is determined without the start being performed even if the display of the time reaches the certain time. Configured to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, advantageous development can be expected even when a certain effect is not started.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started but only a big hit symbol is determined and displayed. When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started, and a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is also displayed. It may be configured to be finalized. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started but the jackpot symbol is definitely displayed. If the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of time reaches a certain time, if a certain effect is not started but the big hit symbol is not displayed May be configured to

  In addition, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started but the jackpot symbol is determined and displayed. It may be done. Also, even when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display has reached a certain time, a certain effect is not started but the big hit symbol is displayed. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, the display of time may arrive at a certain time, a certain effect may be started, and it may be comprised so that a big hit symbol may be determined and displayed.

In addition, “the first aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the first time [for example, a timer display of“ 5:00 ”, etc.]”
The second aspect is an aspect [for example, timer display of "20:00", etc.] in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the second time,
The third aspect is an aspect [for example, timer display of "7: 77", etc.] in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the third time,
The second time is longer than the first time and the second time,
The third time is different from the first time,
The third time is different from the second time,
The third time is a time displayed only when the first state is given,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to notice the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started.

  Here, the first mode may be a mode in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is only the first time, or the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the first The aspect which becomes time other than time may be sufficient. Also, the first aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is necessarily the first time, or the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the first It may be an aspect that may not be time.

  The second aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is only the second time, and the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the second The aspect which becomes time other than time may be sufficient. The second aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is necessarily the second time, or the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the second It may be an aspect that may not take time.

  Also, the third aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is only the third time, or the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the third The aspect which becomes time other than time may be sufficient. The third aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is necessarily the third time, and the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the third It may be an aspect that may not take time.

  In addition, in the first time and the second time, the second time may be always longer, or the second time may not be longer.

  Further, the third time may be a time different from only the first time, or may be a time different from other times than the first time. Also, the third time may be a time that is necessarily different from the first time, or may be the same time as the first time.

  In addition, the third time may be a time different from only the second time, or may be a time different from the time other than the second time. Also, the third time may be a time that is necessarily different from the second time, or may be the same time as the second time.

  Further, the third time may be a time displayed also in cases other than the case where the first state is given, or a time always given when the first state is given It may be time which may not be given when the first state is given.

Also, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds, and a display following the decimal point can also be displayed [for example, the timer advance display shown in FIG. 239 (3) In the timer display in TM1, it is also possible to display the decimal part etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to recognize that the player is the premier timer at a glance.

  Here, the display of the time first displayed in the timer display may be a display of the number of seconds, and may be configured to be able to display only the display after the decimal point. The display may be a display of the number of seconds, and may be configured to be able to be displayed other than the display after the decimal point. In addition, the display of the time first displayed in the timer display may be configured to be the display of the number of seconds and be sure to display the display after the decimal point, or the time displayed first in the timer display The display of may be configured to be a display of a number of seconds and may not display a display following a decimal point.

In addition, the display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display makes a notice,
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives notice.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to recognize that the player is the premier timer at a glance.

Here, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds, and a display following the decimal point can also be displayed [for example, the timer notice shown in FIG. 239 (3) In the timer display on the display TM1, the decimal part can also be displayed, etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0,
The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives notice.
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives notice.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, “effect display means capable of executing effect display [eg, 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284 etc.]” is provided,
The effect display means is a means provided separately from the display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display,
When the timer display is displayed on any one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as “first case [for example, any one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG If the timer advance notice is being displayed only at
In the case where the timer display is displayed on both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as “second case [for example, as shown in FIG. 284 (3) to FIG. If both of the timer announcement effect according to and the timer announcement display on the 7-segment display device SEG are performed, etc.] are configured.
In the case of the first case, the certain effect may not be started.
In the second case, the certain effect is configured to be started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the start of a certain effect may be expected depending on the number of timer display being performed for one certain effect.

  Here, the effect display means may be capable of executing only effect display or may be capable of executing display other than effect display. Further, the effect display means may always execute the effect display or may not execute the effect display.

  Further, the effect display means may be capable of displaying only timer display, or may be capable of displaying other display than timer display. Further, the effect display means may always display the timer display or may not display the timer display.

  Further, in the first case, only a certain effect may not be started, or in the first case, any effect other than a certain effect may not be started. It is also good. In the first case, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, or a certain effect may be started.

  In the second case, only a certain effect may be started, and in the second case, a effect other than a certain effect may also be started. In the second case, a certain effect may be always started, or a certain effect may not be started.

  In the case where the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means among the effect display means and the display means than when the timer display is displayed only by the display means among the effect display means and the display means, Finally, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be easily displayed. In addition, the case where the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means is finally a big hit when the timer display is displayed by only the effect display means of the effect display means and the display means. The symbols may be configured to be easily displayed.

  In addition, when timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means, the timer display of either one of the effect display means and the display means may end halfway.

  In addition, the effect display means and the display means display different times, and when one timer display of the effect display means and the display means reaches a certain time, a certain effect is started. It may be done.

“The timer display is a display in which the display of the time is counted down. [For example, as shown in FIG. 239 (3) to FIG. Being etc],
The certain time is 0 [for example, the timer display of "00:00" shown in FIG. 239 (9), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be easily recognized that a certain time has been reached.

  Note that a certain time may include 0 including decimal places, and may be, for example, a display of “0.00” or “00.00”, “0:00”, or the like. "00:00" may be displayed.

In the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display of one of the plurality of types of display may be a first display [for example, a change effect display (display change of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 291 (f) to FIG. Advance effect display etc.]
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a second display [eg, a red display mode holding icon shown in FIG. 291 (h), etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 291 (d), etc.]
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display showing that the display start of a certain advance display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 291 (o) to FIG. 29 (p), etc.] is awaited,
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 291 (f) to FIG. (H), the ninja character NJ 4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc., after the hold change prior presentation display due to
In the first state, the third display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d), under preparation in a state where the UI unit UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed] Display of image RDY is started, etc.],
In the second state, the display may be ended in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d) to FIG. (N), the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be terminated. The image under preparation RDY whose display is started when the unit UI3 is displayed is such that display is ended when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state [eg, FIG. 291 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished, the display of the mini game is started with the UI unit UI3 being in a non-display state, etc.]
After the certain advance notice is displayed, a certain effect [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q), etc.] may be started [eg, FIG. 291 (o) to the same figure As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is a great success, an iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice about a symbol variation display being executed [for example, an iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q) is a notice display notifying that a big hit is confirmed, etc.]
The second state may occur after the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (l) to FIG. UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in the sword reach].
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance before the advance notice, is the advance notice other than the hold icon, and concentrate on the change. May be entertaining.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible for the beginners to enjoy the notice or the pre-reading notice by the indication during preparation, and it is possible to enjoy it, and the indication during preparation is for the experienced person to a certain extent. In some cases, it may be easy to understand and make it possible to clarify expectations.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be made depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be a display of a character associated with only the second display, or may be a display of a character associated with a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is necessarily associated with the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

  In addition, only the third display may be started in the first state, and displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  In addition, the third display may be started only in the first state, and the third display may be started in states other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display in which the display is started in the first state However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be the second The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be performed. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of displays other than a certain advance notice may be started in the second state. Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state In the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may not be started after the end of.

  In addition, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, or the third state in the second state may be started. The display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state other than after the end of the display of.

  Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started only in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be started. After completion of the display of the display of, the display of a certain advance notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Moreover, after a certain advance notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain advance notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started There may be cases. Also, a certain effect may always be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed.

  Also, a certain effect may be started only after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started except after a certain advance notice display is displayed. It may be.

  Also, a certain effect may be a notice about only the symbol change display being executed, or a notice regarding a display other than the symbol change display being performed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to a symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to a symbol change display that is being executed.

  In addition, the second state may occur only after the first state, or the second state may occur after the states other than the first state. In addition, after the first state, the second state may always be obtained, or after the first state, the second state may not be obtained.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed or one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not necessarily displayed or one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navi-character) constantly displayed. .

  In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the default display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, may be a display of a character, may be a display of a notice item, or may be a countdown of a timer display in a timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

  In addition, a certain advance notice may be a display during execution of the countdown of the timer indication in the timer advance notice, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display [eg, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (a), etc.],”
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
While the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable [for example, the hold icon can be displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is in the non-display state, the hold is not displayed. Icon is not displayed etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold icon may be made noticeable.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or a display of an image displayed on the back of the display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be display of an image that is not displayed on the back of at least the hold icon.

  Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable when the sixth display is displayed, and a display other than the hold icon may be displayable when the sixth display is displayed. It may be Also, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, only the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured so as not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. May be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display [e.g. As shown in d), the image RDY being prepared is displayed superimposed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the ready image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d) And the display position of the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 291 (m), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the third display is displayed around the hold icon which is often seen normally, and it is strongly emphasized that the third display is not the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent missed notice by making it notice that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped only with the third display, or in the first state, It may be configured that at least a part of the six displays may be overlapped and displayed on displays other than the third display. In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display without fail. In the first state, the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that at least a portion of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

  In addition, in the first state, only at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, or in the first state, the sixth state may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display of may be displayed so as to be overlapped and displayed on the third display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, the display mode of gold shown in FIG. 291 (e), etc.],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect When the UI unit UI3 is displayed in a gold display mode as shown in FIG. 291 (e), for example, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to be changed. , Big hit symbol is easy to be decidedly displayed etc. in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of pre-reading, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be easily determined in the display, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second rather than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to an aspect, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be definitely displayed on the screen, or the sixth display may show the first to second aspects rather than the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Also, only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display may be the first aspect. Also in the case of changing to the second aspect from the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, the display mode of gold shown in FIG. 291 (e), etc.],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The display of the second display is easily started [For example, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in a gold display mode as shown in FIG. etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the indication of the indication may be easily started, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the case of changing to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The indication of the indication may always start, or the sixth indication may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of a change, the display of the second display may not start.

  Also, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second The display of the second display may be easily started even when the mode is changed.

Also, at least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [eg, as shown in FIG. Overlapping etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and it may be possible to make the game easy to understand.

  Here, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may also overlap with displays other than the sixth display. It may be configured to Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Also, only a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or all of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. .

Also, “the first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap. For example, as shown in FIG. 306 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI unit UI3. Not etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if focusing on the sixth display, the third display may seem like the display relating to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

  Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap, or even if the displays other than the first display and the sixth display are not configured to overlap. Good. Also, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to always overlap, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap each other. .

In addition, “a certain reach effect [for example, super reach (sword reach) shown in FIG. 291 (m) to the same figure (q) etc.] can be executed,
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started, and for example, the super reach shown in FIG. 291 (m) to FIG. And so on), etc.],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed [for example, a state in which a super reach (sword reach) shown in FIG. 291 (m) to the same figure (q) is being performed] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

  Here, only certain reach effects may be configured to be executable, and reach effects other than certain reach effects may also be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or it may be configured such that a certain reach effect may not be performed.

  Also, the first state may be one of the states before execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before execution of reach effects other than a certain reach effect is started It may be one of the states of In addition, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being performed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being performed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always performed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 291 (o) to FIG. 29 (p), etc.],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the fifth display [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q), etc.]
The certain advance notice display is a notice for giving notice that the certain effect is to be started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIG. 291 (o) to FIG. Notices the display of the steel plate image TP by sticking to the area around the target TGT, etc.],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain advance display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain advance notice may give notice only that a certain effect is started, or may give notice of something other than the fact that a certain effect is started. In addition, a certain advance notice may always give notice that a certain effect will be started, or may not give notice of a certain effect being started.

  In addition, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice display, and a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice display. Also, the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain advance notice.

  Further, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or displays other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol change display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol change display to be started next is started [eg, FIG. 291 (eg, i) As shown in (j) of the figure, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the third display can give expectation over a plurality of changes, and the goal can be easily understood, so the period for giving an expectation may be clear.

  Here, the third display in which the display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or The third display whose display has been started in the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or in a certain symbol variation display The third display whose display has been started may not be displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started [for example, FIG. 291 (f) to FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased only before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or the display in a certain symbol variation display may be The started first display may be erased other than before the start of the symbol variation display to be started next. In addition, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or the display may be started in a certain symbol fluctuation display. The first displayed display may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 297 (a 4), the character of “superheat” in the tutorial display unit TT1 Notice display consisting of may be displayed etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, effects other than the certain effect are also performed. May be Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may not be performed.

  In addition, a certain effect may be performed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed also in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 and the like] is provided,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the seventh display [for example, the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 294 (b1) to FIG. (B6), the deca-button image 136aL is prepared The display is started after the display of the image RDY is started, etc.],
When the operation means is operated during display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during display of the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6), an iron plate Image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 294 (b1) to FIG. Is displayed before the display of the decal button image 136aL starts, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable by only the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. The seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Also, the seventh display may start being displayed only after the third display is started, or may be started other than after the third display is started. It may be. In addition, the seventh display may always start after the third display starts, or may not start after the third display starts. It is also good.

  Moreover, a certain effect may be started whenever the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect is not started when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect may be obtained when the operation means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. In addition, when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, a certain effect may be started, or when the operation means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed, the certain effect May be started.

  In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may end other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts There may be

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 294 (b4) to FIG.
The eighth display is a display for giving notice that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 294 (b 4) to FIG. Of the start of, that is, the display of the Deca button image 136aL etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eighth display may give notice that only the display of the seventh display is started, or may give notice of other than the display of the seventh display. It may be In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, and may not give notice of the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be.

  The third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of displays other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 301 (a)],”
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the third displays may be displayed [for example, two images in preparation RDY1 and RDY2 may be displayed as shown in FIG. 304 (a)],
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is completed [for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g), the image RDY being prepared is displayed enlarged. etc],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g), the in-provision image RDY enlarged and displayed overlaps the fluctuation icon h0. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two of the third displays may be displayed, or three or more of the third displays may be displayed, and only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, only one display mode of the two third displays may change after the display of one of the two third displays ends, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays ends. Display modes other than the display mode may be changed. Also, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays has ended, or the other of the two third displays may be changed The display mode of may not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may be changed only after the display of one of the two third displays is ended, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is ended. The other display mode may change.

  Also, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or even if the third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the third display in which the display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. .

  Further, only the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and displays other than the third display in which the display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. .

Also, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display [eg, in FIG. 301 (b) to FIG. (K) As shown, the two ready images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or two third displays are displayed. The display of displays other than all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display. Moreover, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may always be ended in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may not end in one of the symbol variation displays.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may be ended also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the one symbol fluctuation display. Moreover, only when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed as“ the panda is the master of the hall ”displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in the tenth display [for example, FIG. 291 (a) Description display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (a), the instruction display is on the tutorial display unit TT1 Etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d), the image under preparation RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or when the display is displayed, the first display area of the display means It may be displayed other than. Moreover, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be

  The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. It is also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a character relating to the first display [the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (the hold change advance effect display), for example, FIG. 291 (f) to FIG. Character of ninja shown in), etc.],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a second display [the hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice, for example, the hold icon of the red display mode shown in FIG. 291 (h), etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [in preparation display, for example, an preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d), etc.]
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display may be a notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 291 (o) to FIG. 29 (p) or FIG. 293 (b 3) to FIG. It is a display showing that it is waiting for the display start of the timer announcement effect etc. shown in
It is configured that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started, and then the hold icon is displayed after the hold change advance effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in the display mode of the advance notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (f) to (h), the first hold icon after the hold change prior effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 is changing from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.],
In the first state, the third display may be started, and the display of the in-provision display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (d). As shown in, when the UI unit UI3 displaying the suspension icons h11 and h12 is displayed, the display of the image RDY being prepared is started, etc.],
The third display whose display has been started in the first state is configured such that the display may end in the second state, and the display is started when the hold icon is displayed. In the preparation display, the display ends when the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d) to FIG. (N), the display is started when the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The display of the image under preparation RDY is terminated when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state. After the display of the preparation display is finished in the display state, the mini game or the timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (n) to the figure (o), the display of the preparation image RDY is After the completion, the display of the mini game is started with the UI unit UI3 being in the non-display state, or as shown in FIG. 293 (b1) to (b4), the image RDY being prepared. After the display is completed, the timer announcement effect is started in the state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the certain advance notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, a display of an iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q) or a button advance notice etc. by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (c 4)] Is configured to be started [The notification is started when the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notification, for example, in FIG. 291 (o) to FIG. (Q) As shown, when the display result of the mini game is a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIG. 294 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice is completed. Button preview effect is started by Deca button 136aL, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
It is configured to be in the second state after the first state, and may shift to the state in which the hold icon can not be displayed from the state in which the hold icon can be displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (l) to (m), when transitioning to swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is made non-display, and transition from the state where the hold icon can be displayed to the non-display state Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [e.g., the state in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc., before the transition to the sword reach ”,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [eg, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is made non-displayed in the sword reach, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance before the advance notice, is the advance notice other than the hold icon, and concentrate on the change. May be entertaining.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible for the beginners to enjoy the notice or the pre-reading notice by the indication during preparation, and it is possible to enjoy it, and the indication during preparation is for the experienced person to a certain extent. In some cases, it may be easy to understand and make it possible to clarify expectations.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be made depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be a display of a character associated with only the second display, or may be a display of a character associated with a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is necessarily associated with the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

  In addition, only the third display may be started in the first state, and displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  In addition, the third display may be started only in the first state, and the third display may be started in states other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display in which the display is started in the first state However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be the second The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be performed. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of displays other than a certain advance notice may be started in the second state. Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state In the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may not be started after the end of.

  In addition, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, or the third state in the second state may be started. The display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state other than after the end of the display of.

  Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started only in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be started. After completion of the display of the display of, the display of a certain advance notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Moreover, after a certain advance notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain advance notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started There may be cases. Also, a certain effect may always be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed.

  Also, a certain effect may be started only after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started except after a certain advance notice display is displayed. It may be.

  Also, a certain effect may be a notice about only the symbol change display being executed, or a notice regarding a display other than the symbol change display being performed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to a symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to a symbol change display that is being executed.

  In addition, the second state may occur only after the first state, or the second state may occur after the states other than the first state. In addition, after the first state, the second state may always be obtained, or after the first state, the second state may not be obtained.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed or one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not necessarily displayed or one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navi-character) constantly displayed. .

  In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the default display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, may be a display of a character, may be a display of a notice item, or may be a countdown of a timer display in a timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

  In addition, a certain advance notice may be a display during execution of the countdown of the timer indication in the timer advance notice, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

Note that the third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the third display whose display has been started in the first state may end display in the first state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

In addition, the third display whose display is started in the first state may end the display in the third state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the third display whose display has been started in the first state may end display in the fourth state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, the first state may be a state including that the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

Also, it is configured that a certain effect may be started after the certain advance notice is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, a certain preliminary announcement display may not be a true preliminary announcement display, but may be a false preliminary announcement display in which a certain effect is not started.

  Also, when a certain advance notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display indicating the result of the mini game.

  In addition, the character is not limited to a person, but may be a display of a mini item system such as a notice item.

  Also, "the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started", "the second display after the display of the first display is started. The display to start the display of may be made ". Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. In addition, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

  Moreover, "it is comprised so that it may become the said 2nd state after the said 1st state" may be "the said 2nd state following the said 1st state." It may be configured as ".

  In addition, after the first state, there may be a transition to the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, after passing through the other state (for example, the 3rd state or the 3rd state) after the 1st state, it may shift to the 2nd state. In addition, in a state where one symbol variation display is made, there may be a case where the first state shifts to the second state.

  Alternatively, a certain effect may fade in while a certain advance notice fades out.

Further, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [display of an image including a reserved icon display area, for example, a UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (a), etc.]”
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
In the state where the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable, and the hold icon may be displayed in a state where an image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example, The hold icon can be displayed when the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (m As shown in), when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, the hold icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold icon may be made noticeable.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or a display of an image displayed on the back of the display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be display of an image that is not displayed on the back of at least the hold icon.

  Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable when the sixth display is displayed, and a display other than the hold icon may be displayable when the sixth display is displayed. It may be Also, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, only the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured so as not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. May be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Note that the sixth display may be a display that is not overlapped with the decorative symbol in change.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a part of the display of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the display of the third display, a display of a part different from the part of the third display is overlapped with the decorative symbol May be

  The sixth display may also include the display of the pedestal of the hold icon.

  Also, the sixth display may include the display of the base of the variation icon.

  The sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, and the hold icon is displayed. In the above state, a part of the image including the reserved icon display area is overlapped with the display in preparation and displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d), the image in preparation RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. It is displayed overlapping on the display unit TT1, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [Display of the display under preparation in the state where the hold icon is displayed The display position of the display under preparation in the position and the non-display state of the hold icon is the same, for example, the display position of the image under preparation RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d) and the image under preparation shown in FIG. The display position of RDY is the same, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the third display is displayed around the hold icon which is often seen normally, and it is strongly emphasized that the third display is not the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent missed notice by making it notice that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped only with the third display, or in the first state, It may be configured that at least a part of the six displays may be overlapped and displayed on displays other than the third display. In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display without fail. In the first state, the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that at least a portion of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

  In addition, in the first state, only at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, or in the first state, the sixth state may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display of may be displayed so as to be overlapped and displayed on the third display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [default display mode, for example, default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 291 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The display of the second display is configured to be easier to be started [The display of the hold icon is more than the case where the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice. When the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the preview preview, the hold icon of the display mode of the preview preview is likely to be displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (e) When displayed in the golden display mode, the red display mode hold icon is likely to be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the indication of the indication may be easily started, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the case of changing to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The indication of the indication may always start, or the sixth indication may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of a change, the display of the second display may not start.

  Also, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second The display of the second display may be easily started even when the mode is changed.

  “When the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Is configured such that the display of the second display is more likely to start, "in a certain state, the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is configured to be more easily started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when no change occurs. "" May be.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [default display mode, for example, default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 291 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed display [The hold icon display is displayed than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the advance notice. When the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, it is likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. , The display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, so that the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the pre-reading There, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be easily determined in the display, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second rather than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to an aspect, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be definitely displayed on the screen, or the sixth display may show the first to second aspects rather than the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Also, only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display may be the first aspect. Also in the case of changing to the second aspect from the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display.

  “When the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Is configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display, “in a certain state, the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the sixth display does not change. "" May be.

Also, “at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display. [At least a part of the image including the reserved icon display area is For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (f), a part of the UI unit UI3 is over the ninja character NJ4 as shown in FIG. 291 (f). Being wrapped etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and it may be possible to make the game easy to understand.

  Here, the display may be configured such that at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping only the first display, or the display of at least a portion of the sixth display is It may be configured such that displays other than the first display may be displayed overlapping. In addition, the display may be configured such that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that it may be overlapped and not displayed on one display.

  In addition, only at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or the display other than at least a part of the display of the sixth display The display may also be configured to be displayed overlapping with the first display.

  In addition, the display of a part of the sixth display may be configured to be displayed overlapping the first display, or all the displays of the sixth display may be displayed on the first display. It may be configured to be displayed overlapping.

  Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may overlap with displays other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Also, only a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or all of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. .

In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. The image including the pending icon display area is displayed in a state in which both the image relating to the image including the pending icon display area and the character relating to the change effect display (the pending change advance presentation display) of the pending icon display area is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 306 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is overlapped with the character NJ4 of the ninja, as shown in FIG. 306 (b1). Not etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if focusing on the sixth display, the third display may seem like the display relating to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

  Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped only with the first display. In the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with any display other than the first display. May be configured. In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. When both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without being overlapped with the first display.

  Also, even if only the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, In the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. It may be done. Also, even if only the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In a state other than the state in which both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. It may be configured.

  Further, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. . Also, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to always overlap, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap each other. .

In addition, “a certain reach effect [specific super reach effect, for example, super reach (swords reach) shown in FIG. 291 (m) to the same figure (q) etc.] can be executed.
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started [the state before a specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIG. 291 (m) to the same It is a state etc. before the super reach shown in Figure (q) is started.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being performed, for example, the super reach shown in FIG. 291 (m) to FIG. Reach is being executed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

  Here, only certain reach effects may be configured to be executable, and reach effects other than certain reach effects may also be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or it may be configured such that a certain reach effect may not be performed.

  Also, the first state may be one of the states before execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before execution of reach effects other than a certain reach effect is started It may be one of the states of In addition, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being performed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being performed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always performed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed.

  The first state may be a reach state before developing into an SP reach in a certain change, and the second state may be a state in which the SP reach is in progress in the certain change.

  Also, the first state is a state before developing into an SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and is a certain state before reaching a reaching state, and the second state is an SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in a state of reach execution.

  That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

In addition, “the certain advance notice display is a timer advance notice display [for example, a display of a timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 294 (b3) to FIG.
A game stand that features. "
I also explained about

  The timer advance notice may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of types of timer advance notices, it may be a certain kind of timer advance notice.

In addition, “the certain advance notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 291 (o) to FIG. 29 (q)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Also, when there are multiple types of mini games, it may be a type of mini game.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fourth display [one of the notices, for example, a display of a button advance effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6), etc.],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be In addition, the fourth display may be necessarily displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the fifth display may be displayed as an effect, or an indication other than the fifth display may be displayed as an effect. May be Further, the fifth display may be necessarily displayed as a certain effect, or may be configured so that the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

  The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, or when the fifth display is displayed. If the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed.

  Also, in the case where the fifth display appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display aspect and a certain advance display aspect is displayed only in a certain aspect There may be.

In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol change display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol change display to be started next is started. [The display under preparation whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, as shown in, for example, FIG. In preparation, the image RDY is being displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game console, the third display can give expectation over a plurality of changes, and the goal can be easily understood, so the period for giving an expectation may be clear.

  Here, the third display in which the display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or The third display whose display has been started in the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or in a certain symbol variation display The third display whose display has been started may not be displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started [a certain symbol The character related to the change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display has been started in the variable display is erased before the next symbol change display is started, for example, FIG. As shown in (h) through (h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be configured to be erased only before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, It may be configured that the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be erased other than before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started. In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or a certain symbol variation The first display whose display is started in the display may be configured so that it may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

  Note that a certain advance notice and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. In addition, a certain advance notice and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state).

In addition, in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be performed [the notice is performed in the area where the preparation display is displayed, For example, as shown in FIG. 297 (a4), a preliminary display may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in which the image RDY is being prepared, and the warning display consisting of the letters of "superheat",
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, effects other than the certain effect are also performed. May be Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may not be performed.

  In addition, a certain effect may be performed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed also in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [a button or a lever, for example, effect button 136 etc.]" is provided,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the seventh display [display of an image of a button or a lever, for example, a deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that starts to be displayed after the third display is started, and the display of images of buttons and levers is started to be displayed after the display in progress is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 294 (b1) to (b6), the Deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the preparation of the image RDY being started, etc.],
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started, and when the button (or the lever is operated during the display of the image of the button or the lever, the notice is given) The iron plate image TP is displayed, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during display of the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6) and the like to be started],
The third display is a display which is ended before the display of the seventh display is started. [In preparation display is ended before the display of the button or the lever is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 294 (b1) to (b6), the image under preparation RDY is such that the display is ended before the display of the Deca button image 136aL is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable by only the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. The seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Also, the seventh display may start being displayed only after the third display is started, or may be started other than after the third display is started. It may be. In addition, the seventh display may always start after the third display starts, or may not start after the third display starts. It is also good.

  Moreover, a certain effect may be started whenever the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect is not started when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect may be obtained when the operation means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. In addition, when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, a certain effect may be started, or when the operation means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed, the certain effect May be started.

  In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may end other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts There may be

  The seventh display may be a big button image among the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the deca-button image is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the deca-button image is displayed.

  The seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the button image of the normal color is displayed and when the button image of the special color is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more easily determined when the button image of the special color is displayed. Good.

  Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means among images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and in the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the big hit symbol is displayed when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. It may be easy to be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 294 (b4) to FIG.
The eighth display is a display for giving notice that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 294 (b 4) to FIG. Of the start of, that is, the display of the Deca button image 136aL etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eighth display may give notice that only the display of the seventh display is started, or may give notice of other than the display of the seventh display. It may be In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, and may not give notice of the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be.

  The third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of displays other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 301 (a)],”
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the above-mentioned third displays may be displayed. [The two in-provision displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), two in-provision images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. May be done etc],
After the display of one of the two third displays ends, the display mode of the other changes [the display of the display in progress of one of the two displays in progress The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g), the image RDY being prepared is displayed enlarged, etc.],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [In preparation display in which the display mode has changed overlap with the fluctuating icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g), The displayed preparation image RDY overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two of the third displays may be displayed, or three or more of the third displays may be displayed, and only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, only one display mode of the two third displays may change after the display of one of the two third displays ends, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays ends. Display modes other than the display mode may be changed. Also, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays has ended, or the other of the two third displays may be changed The display mode of may not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may be changed only after the display of one of the two third displays is ended, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is ended. The other display mode may change.

  Also, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or even if the third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the third display in which the display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. .

  Further, only the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and displays other than the third display in which the display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display [two in preparation displays are displayed. In this case, all are digested in the same symbol variation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 301 (b) to FIG. 301 (k), the two ready images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or two third displays are displayed. The display of displays other than all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display. Moreover, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may always be ended in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may not end in one of the symbol variation displays.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may be ended also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the one symbol fluctuation display. Moreover, only when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is the tenth display [explanatory display, for example,“ the panda is the master of the hall ”displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 291 (a). It is the displayed explanation etc.],
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed, and [an explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, , As shown in FIG. 291 (a), the instruction display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [In preparation display is displayed in a specific display area where an explanatory display is displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (d As shown in), the in-provisioning image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc. where the explanation display is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or when the display is displayed, the first display area of the display means It may be displayed other than. Moreover, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be

  The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. It is also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “display indicating that the display start of a certain advance notice display is waiting” means “character display in preparation [for example,“ in preparation ”in preparation image RDY shown in FIG. Display of letters etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the eleventh display [ball drop display, for example, ball drop error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 322 (a1), etc.]”
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to eject the game ball [for example, in the ball extraction error display ERR1, the character display of "Please pull the ball" is prompted to open the ball, etc.,
In a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of at least a part of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display At least a part of the in-provision display is overlapped with the in-progress display in a state where both the in-provision display and the out-of-ball display are displayed, as shown in, for example, FIG. In preparation, the image RDY is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to eject the game ball, or a display prompting other than the game ball to be ejected. Further, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts ejection of the game ball, or may be a display that may not prompt the ejection of the game ball.

  Further, the eleventh display may be a display prompting to discharge only the game balls, or a display prompting to discharge other than the game balls.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping only with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display without fail May be displayed, and in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, displays other than at least a part of the third display are overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. And in a state other than the state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of a part of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the whole display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. May be

In addition, in a state in which both the certain advance notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain advance notice display is overlapped and displayed on the eleventh display. When at least a part of the mini game and the timer notice is overlapped with the ball withdrawal display in a state where both the mini game and the timer notice and the ball withdrawal display are displayed, for example, As shown in 322 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped only with the eleventh display. The display may be configured, and in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display overlaps the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display is configured to be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the eleventh by all means. Or at least a part of the notice may be displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh in a state where both the notice and the eleventh display are displayed. It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, in a state in which both of the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state other than the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the notice display is configured to be displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. It is preferable that all the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the eleventh when both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed. May be

[The above-mentioned gaming machine is a pachinko machine [ball-and-ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[The above-mentioned gaming machine is a slot machine [rolling-type game machine],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Although the hold icon may be used as a display indicating that the start of a certain effect in the slot machine is held, this can be realized according to this game console.

Also, in the above description,
[A production means capable of executing a timer effect [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons [eg, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.];
A game console equipped with
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 347 (9) to FIG. Is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of holding icons is a second holding icon [for example, the holding icon of the display mode of the bomb shown in FIG. 347 (3)],
The second hold icon is a pre-read notice hold icon,
The second hold icon is a hold icon indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display [eg, in FIG. 347 (3) to FIG. 9 (9) As shown, the suspension icon of the display mode of the bomb indicates that the timer announcement effect is started in the symbol variation display to be started next, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game console, it is possible to provide a game console having a feature in the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to know the contents of the effect (that the timer effect is performed) by the hold icon.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may always execute the timer effect or may not execute the timer effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of holding icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of holding icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of holding icons, and may not display a plurality of types of holding icons.

  Also, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, when the timer display reaches a certain time, a certain effect other than a certain effect may be started. In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, or the timer It may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the start of the display of the display.

  Also, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time only after the display of the timer display is started. Also, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time other than after the display of the timer display is started.

  Also, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect may be started only when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Also, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started also in cases other than when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  In addition, the second reserved icon may only indicate that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer during execution of a certain symbol variation display It may also be suggested that something other than the effect may be started. In addition, the second reserved icon may always indicate that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer during execution of a certain symbol variation display It may not indicate that the effect may be started.

  Hereinafter, in the case of "at least suggestion", in addition to those implicitly suggested, those that are explicitly notified are also included.

  In addition, when the second hold icon is displayed, the timer effect may always start, or for example, the timer effect may not be started even though the second hold icon is displayed. For example, there may be a case where a false second hold icon for which timer effect is not started may be displayed, or after the second hold icon is displayed, it becomes a big hit before timer effect is started, and the big hit After the big hit game pertaining to is terminated, it may become a default display mode holding icon and the timer effect may not be performed.

In addition, the second hold icon is a hold icon indicating the content of the certain effect [For example, as shown in FIG. 349 (8), the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb is a certain effect) It indicates that there is a possibility that a pseudo reunion will be performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give an interest to the contents of the effect executed in the symbol variation display which is the target of the advance notice.

  Here, the second reserved icon may be capable of suggesting only the content of a certain effect, or may be suggestable other than the content of a certain effect. Also, the second hold icon may always indicate the content of a certain effect, or may not indicate the content of a certain effect.

In addition, “the second holding icon is a holding icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which three bombs are grouped as shown in FIG. 352 (3), etc.]” ,
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is performed a plurality of times during execution of the certain symbol variation display [eg, FIG. 352 (3) to 353 (23) As shown in the figure, the suspension icon of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together suggests that three timer announcement effects are started in the symbol variation display to be started next, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the display of one hold icon can give an expectation for the plurality of timer effects to be performed.

  Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May be In addition, the second hold icon may be displayed in the second display mode or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  In addition, the second display mode may only indicate that a plurality of timer effects are started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or plural symbols may be displayed during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be suggested that something other than the start of the timer effect of the times is started. In addition, the second display mode may always indicate that a plurality of timer effects are started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and a plurality may be displayed during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where it does not indicate that the timer effect of the time is started.

  In addition, the second display mode may indicate that only a plurality of timer effects are started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality may be displayed during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be suggested that an effect other than the timer effect of the time may also be started.

  In addition, the second display mode may indicate that a plurality of timer effects are started only while a certain symbol variation display is being executed, or in a state other than during a certain symbol variation display. Also, it may indicate that a plurality of timer effects are started.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a display mode including one bomb shown in FIG. 347 (3)].
The first display mode is a display mode that suggests that at least one of the timer effects is started until the certain symbol variation display is ended [eg, FIG. 347 (3) to As shown in Fig. 9 (9), the hold icon in the display mode consisting of one bomb suggests that one timer announcement effect is started in the symbol variation display to be started next, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be cases where expectation can be given to the number of timer effects by the hold icon.

  Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the first display mode. May be Further, the second hold icon may be displayed in the first display mode without fail or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first display mode may only indicate that one timer effect is started before a certain symbol variation display is ended, or a certain symbol variation display It may also indicate that one timer effect is started before the end. In addition, the first display mode may always indicate that one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variation display is ended, or a certain symbol variation display It may not indicate that one timer effect is to be started before it is ended.

  In addition, the first display mode may indicate that only one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variation display is ended, or a certain symbol variation display It may be suggested that an effect other than one timer effect may be started before it is ended.

  The second display mode may be configured to have a greater number of timer effects performed than the first display mode.

  In addition, there are a plurality of display patterns (for example, pattern 1, pattern 2, etc.) suggesting a timer effect for one time as the display of the second reserved icon (pattern 2, etc.) It may be configured to be easy. Here, the pattern may be a color pattern, a size pattern, a shape pattern, or the like.

  In addition, even in the first display mode, a plurality of timer effects may be started.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of holding icons is a third holding icon [eg, a holding icon of a display mode of Yoshimune holding shown in FIG. 357 (3), etc.],
The third hold icon is a pre-read notice hold icon,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
The third hold icon is a hold icon on which a character [for example, a character of the lord, etc.] is displayed,
The third hold icon is a hold icon not including a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of the certain symbol variation display [eg, shown in FIG. 357 (3) As such, the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is a pre-reading notice of a big hit (super reach), and does not indicate that timer notice effect is started, etc.],
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3), etc.],
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started during execution of the certain symbol variation display including the certain character [eg, FIG. 358 (3) to the same As shown in Fig. (9), the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold configured to include the character of the lord suggests that the timer announcement effect is started in the symbol variation display to be started next Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where it is possible to have an expectation of the reliability of the advance notice.

  Here, the third hold icon may be that only a certain character may be displayed, or something other than a certain character may be displayed. Also, the third hold icon may be that a certain character is always displayed or may not be a certain character.

  In addition, the third hold icon may not include only the indication that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the third suspension icon of a certain symbol variation display A display other than a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution may not be included. In addition, the third hold icon may not necessarily include a display that suggests that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a certain symbol variation display It may be that which may include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution.

  In addition, the third hold icon may not include a display that only suggests that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a certain symbol variation display The display may not include any indication other than that the timer effect may be started during execution.

  In addition, the third hold icon may not include a display that suggests that the timer effect may be started only during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a certain symbol variation display The display may not include the indication that the timer effect may be started other than during execution.

  Further, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the third display mode. It is also good. Further, the second hold icon may be displayed in the third display mode or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  Also, the third display mode may include only a certain character and may only indicate that the timer effect is started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed, or may include a certain character. In addition to the fact that the timer effect is started during execution of the symbol variation display, it may be suggested. Also, the third display mode may include a certain character and always imply that the timer effect is started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed, or may include a certain character. It may not be suggested that the timer effect is started during execution of the symbol variation display.

  Also, the third display mode may include a certain character and suggest that only the timer effect is started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed, or may include a certain character. It may be suggested that an effect other than the timer effect is also started during execution of the symbol variation display.

  Also, the third display mode may indicate that the timer effect is started only while a certain symbol variation display is being performed including a certain character, or may include a certain character. In addition to the execution of the symbol variation display, it may be suggested that the timer effect is started.

  In addition, a timer effect may be started in symbol fluctuation display before a certain symbol fluctuation display is started. For example, a timer effect in which the second hold icon suggests execution may be performed in another symbol variation display prior to a certain symbol variation display. According to this, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the game while expecting that the timer effect is collectively performed in one symbol variation display.

Also, the notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect is configured to be executable [eg, as shown in FIG. Are notified by the display of, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the player can grasp the type of a certain effect, and after that, it may be possible to watch the timer effect while imagining the content of the certain effect.

  Here, only notification about a certain effect performed by the timer effect may be executable, or notification other than notification about a certain effect performed by the timer effect may also be performed. It may be In addition, it may be configured to always execute a notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect, or may be configured not to execute a notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect. It may be done.

In addition, “the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a fluctuation icon [for example, the fluctuation icon h0 etc.],
The second hold icon, which has been displayed as a hold icon, may be started to be displayed as a change icon (hereinafter referred to as a "first change icon") in relation to the start of the certain symbol change display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 352 (7) to FIG. 8 (8), the first reserved icon h 11 of the display mode in which the three bombs are grouped is the next symbol variation display When it is started, it is displayed as the variation icon h0 in the same display mode, etc.],
A display in which the display mode of the first fluctuation icon changes in association with the execution of the timer effect one time during the execution of the certain symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, As shown in 352 (9) to (16), the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes from a display mode in which three bombs are grouped into a display mode in which two bombs are grouped together.]) Is displayed so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 352 (8) to FIG. 16 (16), a display mode in which three bombs are grouped when one timer announcement effect is executed. Change icon h0 changes to a display form in which two bombs are grouped, etc.],
The first change icon after the display mode is changed by the first display is a change icon capable of suggesting the remaining number of times of the timer effect that can be started during execution of the certain symbol change display [e.g. As shown in FIG. 352 (16), the change icon h0 changed to the display mode in which two bombs are grouped together suggests that the timer announcement effect will be performed twice more, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to cause the fluctuation icon to function as the time notification means of the timer effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the variation icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the variation icon. Further, the display means may always display the fluctuation icon, or may not display the fluctuation icon.

  In addition, the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to start being displayed only as the first change icon, or the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon. The icon may be configured to be started to be displayed as something other than the first variation icon. Also, the second hold icon, which has been displayed as the hold icon, may be configured to be always started as the first change icon, or the second hold icon, which has been displayed as the hold icon, It may be configured such that the display may not be started as the first variation icon.

  Also, only the second hold icon, which has been displayed as the hold icon, may be configured to start being displayed as the first change icon, or the second hold icon may be displayed as the hold icon. It may be configured that something other than the icon may be started to be displayed as the first variation icon.

  In addition, only the first display may be displayed in association with execution of one timer effect during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or execution of a certain symbol variation display In addition to the first display, displays other than the first display may be displayed in association with one timer effect being executed. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in association with execution of one timer effect during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or execution of a certain symbol variation display It may be configured that the first display may not be displayed in association with execution of one timer effect during that time.

  Also, the first display may be displayed in relation to only one timer effect being executed during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or execution of a certain symbol variation display The first display may be displayed in relation to things other than that one timer effect has been executed.

  Also, the first variation icon after the display mode has been changed by the first display may be able to indicate only the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Other than the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display may be suggested. In addition, the first change icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may always indicate the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol change display, It may not show the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Also, the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a mode that can indicate the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started [eg, FIG. 362 (6) The timer display is displayed above the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb shown in, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to imagine the contents of a certain effect to be executed by the suggestion of the initial value display of the time in the timer display.

  Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in a mode in which the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be displayed, or the display of the timer display is displayed. It may be displayed also in an aspect other than the aspect which can be suggested when the time is started. In addition, the second hold icon may be displayed in a mode that can indicate the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started, or when the display of the timer display is started The time displayed in may not be displayed in a suggestable manner.

  In addition, the second hold icon may be displayed in a mode in which only the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be displayed, or the display of the timer display is started. A time other than the time displayed when being displayed may also be displayed in a suggestable manner.

In addition, "a plurality of the timer effects (hereinafter referred to as" a plurality of timer effects ") may be started simultaneously during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [eg, as shown in FIG. 360 (17) ,, two timer announcements are started at the same time, etc.],
One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect applied to the second timer notification display TM12 shown in FIG. 360 (17)],
One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect [eg timer notification effect applied to the third timer notification display TM13 shown in FIG. 360 (17)],
Display when the display of the timer display in the first timer effect (hereinafter referred to as "the first timer display [for example, the second timer announcement display TM12 shown in FIG. 360 (17)]" is started.) Time (eg, 7 seconds (“07:00”) etc. ”) and the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter,“ second timer display [eg, a third timer shown in FIG. 360 (17) The time [for example, 8 seconds ("08:00") etc.] displayed when the display of the timer advance notice display TM13 etc.] is started is a different time,
When the first timer display reaches the certain time, there may be a case where the first effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 361 (19), etc.] is performed as the certain effect,
When the second effect [for example, the change effect of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 361 (21), etc.] is performed as the certain effect when the second timer display reaches the certain time There is
The first effect and the second effect are different effects.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, it may be expected that a plurality of certain effects (preliminaries) will be performed by combining timer effects.

  Here, a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time only while a certain symbol variation display is being executed, or a plurality of timer effects may be simultaneously started other than during a certain symbol variation display There may be cases. In addition, a plurality of timer effects may always be started simultaneously during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may not be started simultaneously during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  Also, only a plurality of timer effects may be started simultaneously during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and effects other than a plurality of timer effects are also simultaneously initiated during execution of a certain symbol variation display There may be cases.

  The start timings of the plurality of timer effects may be shifted, and at least a part of the execution periods of the respective timer effects may overlap.

  Also, the time displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time displayed when the display of the second timer display is started, It may be the same time.

  In addition, when the first timer display reaches a certain time, only the first effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the first timer display reaches a certain time. As a certain effect, effects other than the first effect may be performed. In addition, when the first timer display reaches a certain time, the first effect may always be performed as a certain effect, or when the first timer display has a certain time, a certain effect As the first effect may not be performed.

  In addition, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the first timer display reaches a certain time, or except when the first timer display reaches a certain time. The first effect may be performed as a certain effect.

  In addition, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, only the second effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the second timer display has a certain time. As a certain effect, effects other than the second effect may be performed. Also, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, the second effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the second timer display has a certain time, a certain effect As the second effect may not be performed.

  In addition, the second effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the second timer display has reached a certain time, and the second timer display may have a certain time except for a certain time. A second effect may be performed as a certain effect.

  In addition, the first effect and the second effect may be always different or may be the same.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, a ball removal error display shown in FIG. 345 (9 ′ ′) and the like],
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a state of fullness error [for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ′ ′), when a bottom full error occurs, a ball removal error occurs. Display etc.],
It is configured such that one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may overlap with the other display [for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ′ ′), the ball removal The error display is overlapped on the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to hurry the ball pulling operation by the timer display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the ball out error display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the ball out error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball removal error display or may not display the ball removal error display.

  In addition, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the pan full error state or may be displayed in a state other than the pan full error state. In addition, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the pan full error state or may not be displayed in the pan full error state.

  Also, one display of the timer display and the ball extraction error display may be configured to overlap only with the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball extraction error display. May be configured to overlap with displays other than the other display. Also, one of the timer display and the ball extraction error display may be configured to be overlapped with the other display without fail, or one of the timer display and the ball extraction error display may be the other. It may be configured such that there may be no overlap in the display.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A game console provided with rendering means capable of executing a plurality of types of timer effects [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect for the first timer notification display TM11 shown in FIG. 325 (3) to FIG. ,
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect for the second timer notification display TM12 shown in FIG. 325 (5) to FIG. 7 (7)]. ,
The first timer effect is displayed after the display of the first timer display [for example, the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIG. 325 (3) etc.] is started. As the first effect [for example, pseudo-series effect etc. shown in FIG. 325 (13)] may be started in response to the display [for example, "00:00" etc.] indicating time. It is a composed effect,
The second timer effect is displayed after the second timer display [for example, the second timer advance display TM12 and the like shown in FIG. 325 (5)] is started. A second effect [for example, a change effect for the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 325 (8), etc. is started in response to the display [for example, "00:00" etc.] indicating time It is an effect configured to be a case,
During the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a period during which the first timer display is displayed [for example, a period shown in FIG. 325 (3) to FIG. (12) etc.] and the second timer display A period during which displayed periods [for example, the periods shown in FIG. 325 (5) to FIG. 7 (7)] overlap (hereinafter referred to as “first period [for example, FIG. Period, etc.]] is configured so that it may occur.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  The conventional gaming machine has room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the rendering means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the effect of a certain decorative symbol variation display may be able to be boosted by the timer effect being overlapped and performed.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of timer effects, or may be capable of executing effects other than the plurality of types of timer effects. In addition, the effect means may always execute a plurality of types of timer effects or may not execute a plurality of types of timer effects.

  In addition, the first timer effect may be that only the first effect is started in response to the first timer display reaching the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as it is, or after the display of the first timer display is started, the first timer display becomes the first time in response to the first time being displayed. The presentation may also be configured to be started. Also, in the first timer effect, the first effect is always started in response to the first timer display reaching the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. The first effect may not be started in response to the first timer display becoming the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as a certain.

  Also, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started only in response to the first timer display reaching the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. The first timer display may be configured as the first timer display after the display of the first timer display is started. The effect may be configured to be started.

  Also, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started in response to the first timer display reaching the first time only after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as it is, or even after the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect is displayed in response to the first timer display becoming the first time. It may be configured to be started.

  Also, in the second timer effect, only the second effect may be started in response to the second timer display reaching a second time after the display of the second timer display is started. The second timer display may be configured as described above, or in response to the second timer display reaching a second time after the display of the second timer display is started. The presentation may also be configured to be started. Also, for the second timer effect, the second effect is always started in response to the second timer display reaching the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. The second effect may not be started in response to the second timer display reaching the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured as a certain.

  In addition, the second timer effect may be started only in response to the second timer display reaching the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. The second timer display may be configured as described above, or in response to other than the second timer display reaching the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. The effect may be configured to be started.

  In addition, the second timer effect may be started in response to the second timer display reaching the second time only after the display of the second timer display is started. The second effect may be configured according to the fact that the second timer display has reached the second time except after the display of the second timer display has been started. It may be configured to be started.

  Also, it may be configured that only the first period may occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or a period other than the first period during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. May also be configured to occur. In addition, the first period may necessarily be generated during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first period may not occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

  Also, the first period may occur only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first period may not occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured as it may occur.

In addition, at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed as a preview notice. For example, as shown in FIGS. 325 (5) to (8), the second timer notice display TM 12 among the timer notice effect concerning the first timer notice display TM 11 and the timer notice effect concerning the second timer notice display TM 12. The timer notice effect pertaining to is an effect to be executed as a preview notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the advance notice, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to boost up the effect of a certain decorative symbol variation display by using the timer effect as the advance notice.

  Here, at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be configured to be executed only as the advance notice. And the timer effect of at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as other than the advance notice. It is also good. In addition, at least one timer effect of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be configured to be always executed as the advance notice. The timer effect of at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the period may not be executed as the advance notice.

  In addition, only one timer effect of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be configured to be executed as the advance notice. It may be configured such that effects other than at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may also be executed as the advance notice. .

  In addition, any one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect which are being executed in the first period may be configured to be executed as the advance notice. It may be configured such that both timer effects of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in a period may be executed as the advance notice.

In addition, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed as a prefetch notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 325 (3) to FIG. 13 (13), among the timer announcement effect concerning the first timer announcement display TM 11 and the timer announcement effect concerning the second timer announcement display TM 12, 1Timer notice effect concerning timer notice display TM11 is the effect for executing the pseudo continuous effect which is notice of the symbol fluctuation display, timer notice effect concerning the second timer notice display TM12 is display mode of holding icon It is the production to execute the change production of
Both of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display [eg, FIG. As shown in FIG. 327 (37), of the timer announcement effect applied to the third timer announcement display TM13 and the timer announcement effect applied to the fourth timer announcement display TM14, the timer announcement effect applied to the third timer announcement display TM13 is , It is an effect for executing the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as the advance effect, and the timer advance effect concerning the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is an effect for executing the Sabohani group advance notice as the advance effect etc. ],
There may be a case where both of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period are executed as a prefetch notice (hereinafter, referred to as "first case") [e.g. As shown in FIGS. 328 (3) to (13), the first timer notice display TM11 of the timer notice effect concerning the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect concerning the second timer notice display TM12. The timer advance notice effect is an effect for executing the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, and the timer advance notice effect applied to the second timer advance notice display TM12 is an effect executed to start the prefetch mode, etc. ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it can be expected to target the same decorative symbol variation display as the target of the effect whose effect started later is started earlier.

  Here, in the case where one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed only as a prefetch notice. In the first period, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed is also executed as something other than a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is read ahead It may be implemented as something other than a notice. In addition, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may always be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may be always executed as a prefetch notice. In some cases, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may not be executed as a notice for a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may not be executed as a prefetch notice. It is also good.

  In addition, there may be a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first Both of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in a period may be executed as something other than a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display. In addition, both of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may always be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or being executed in the first period. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect may not be executed as a notice regarding a certain decoration symbol variation display.

  In addition, there may be a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a pre-reading advance notice, and the first and second timer effects may be executed in the first period. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as things other than the advance notice. In addition, both of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be always performed as the advance notice, or the first timer effect being executed in the first period. And both of the second timer effect may not be executed as a prefetch notice.

In addition, in the first case, the first effect [for example, the pre-reading mode shown in FIG. 328 (6) and the like] may be started while the certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed. Has been
In the first case, a decorative symbol started later than the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display etc. executed in the period shown in FIG. 328 (2) to FIG. The variable display (hereinafter referred to as “the first decorative symbol fluctuation display [for example, the decorative symbol fluctuation display etc. executed in the period shown in FIG. 328 (11) to FIG. The second effect [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 328 (13), etc.] may be started,
In the first case, the first timer effect [for example, the timer notification effect for the second timer notification display TM12 shown in FIG. 328 (3) to FIG. 5 (5)] and the second timer effect [ For example, the timer announcement effect etc. applied to the first timer announcement display TM11 shown in FIG. 328 (3) to FIG. 13 (13)] is the same decoration symbol fluctuation display started after the first decoration symbol fluctuation display For example, it is an effect to be executed as a pre-reading advance notice for the decorative symbol variation display etc. executed in the period shown in FIGS. 329 (19) to (29).
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where it is possible to expect the first decorative symbol fluctuation display as a preview advance notice, while boosting a certain decorative symbol fluctuation display by timer effect.

  Here, in the first case, only the first effect may be started during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, a certain decorative symbol It may be configured such that effects other than the first effect may be started while the variable display is displayed. Also, in the first case, the first effect may be always started during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, display of a certain decorative symbol variation display It may be configured such that the first effect may not be started during that time.

  In the first case, the first effect may be started only during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, there is a certain decorative symbol variation The first effect may be started other than during display of the display. Also, in the first case only, the first effect may be started during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or even in the cases other than the first case, or The first effect may be started during display of the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, in the first case, only the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, the first decoration It may be configured such that effects other than the second effect may be started while the symbol variation display is displayed. Further, in the first case, the second effect may be necessarily started during display of the first decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, the first decorative symbol variation display The second effect may not be started during the display of.

  In the first case, the second effect may be started only during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, the first decoration The second effect may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Further, only in the first case, the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in any case other than the first case, The second effect may be started during display of the first decorative symbol variation display.

  Also, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are executed only as a preview for the same decoration symbol variation display started later than the first decoration symbol variation display It may be executed, or it may be executed as something other than the advance notice for the same decorative symbol variation display started later than the first decorative symbol variation display. In the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are always executed as a preview for the same decorative symbol fluctuation display started later than the first decorative symbol fluctuation display It may be that it may not be executed as a pre-reading advance notice for the same decorative symbol variation display started later than the first decorative symbol variation display.

Also, in the first case, at least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes [eg, FIG. 328 (3) A certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect relating to the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in (13) of the figure is an effect that the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the panda etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to expect that the other effect is performed for the decorative symbol variation display to be the object of the hold change because one effect is the hold change.

  Here, in the first case, any one effect of the first effect and the second effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, or in the first case, the first effect The effects of both the effect of the second and the effect of the second may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.

  Note that pre-reading notice other than the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon may be performed.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 334 (9), etc.],
The second effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes [eg, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 334 (6), etc.]
The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first and second effects may be further changed by the other effect [eg, as shown in FIG. 334 (9), [1] As a result of the timer announcement effect applied to the timer announcement display TM11, an effect such as changing the hold icon of the display mode of the panda to the display mode of the bank note is performed as a certain effect, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to boost up a plurality of ranks of the hold icon by timer effect.

  Here, the held icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first and second effects may be further changed only by the other effect, or the first and second effects The pending icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the effects may be further changed by effects other than the other effect. In addition, the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first and second effects may always be changed by the other effect, or one of the first and second effects. The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one effect may not be changed by the other effect.

  Moreover, only the holding icon in which the display mode has been changed by one of the first and second effects may be further changed by the other effect, or among the first and second effects Things other than the holding icon in which the display mode has been changed by one of the effects may be further changed by the other effect. In addition, the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by only one of the first and second effects may be further changed by the other effect, and among the first and second effects The hold icon in which the display mode has been changed by an effect other than one effect may be further changed by the other effect.

In addition, “a timing at which the first effect according to the first timer effect in progress is started in the first period is started, and a timing in which the second timer effect is being performed in the first period is The timing at which the second effect is started may be different. [For example, as shown in FIG. 325 (5) to FIG. 13 (13), the timer notification effect applied to the first timer notification display TM 11 The timing at which the pseudo-series effect performed by is started is different from the timing at which the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon performed by the timer advance effect applied to the second timer advance display TM12 is different,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, variation may be given to the start timing of the effect concerning the timer effect.

  Here, the timing at which the first effect on the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the second effect on the second timer effect being executed in the first period is started It may be configured such that only the timing at which it is performed may differ, or the timing at which the first effect relating to the first timer effect in progress is started in the first period, and the timing at which it is performed in the first period The timing other than the timing when the second effect according to the second timer effect in the middle is started may be configured to be different. In addition, the timing at which the first effect on the first timer effect in progress is started in the first period, and the second effect on the second timer effect in progress in the first period is started Timing may be configured to be necessarily different, or a timing at which a first effect relating to a first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and a second effect being executed in the first period. The timing at which the second effect according to the timer effect of the present invention is started may be configured to be the same.

In addition, as the first effect, a first notice icon [for example, the character KNG of swordsman, etc. shown in FIG. 330 (10)] may be displayed. ) As shown in FIG. 10 (FIG. 332 (3) to FIG. 10 (10)), as a result of the timer advance notice concerning the first timer advance notice display TM 11 being performed, the character KNG of the swordsman as a certain effect Is displayed, etc.],
In the case where the first timer effect [for example, the timer announcement effect concerning the first timer announcement display TM11 shown in FIG. 332 (3) to FIG. 10 (10), etc.] is executed as the announcement regarding the certain decoration symbol fluctuation display Is displayed after the first notice icon is displayed while displaying the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed in the period shown in FIG. 332 (2) to FIG. 333 (24)]. Then, during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, effects according to the first notice icon [for example, the effect of super reach (Kenou reach) shown in FIG. 333 (20) to FIG. Configured to be started,
If the first timer effect [for example, the timer advance effect for the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIG. 330 (3) to FIG. 10 (10), etc.] is executed as the advance notice, the above-mentioned certain decorative symbol After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display [for example, the decorative symbol change display etc. performed in the period shown in FIG. 330 (2) to FIG. According to the first notice icon while displaying the decorative symbol fluctuation display [for example, the decorative symbol fluctuation display etc. performed in the period shown in FIG. 331 (19) to the same figure (29)] started after the fluctuation display It is configured such that an effect [for example, an effect of super reach (word reach) shown in FIG. 331 (25) to FIG. 27 (27)] is started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to notice whether the notice icon displayed as the first effect is given as a notice or a pre-reading notice.

  In addition, when the second effect is started first, the notice effect corresponding to the first notice icon is the same target as the second effect according to whether the second effect is the advance notice or the advance notice. In some cases, it can be expected to start with the decorative symbol variation display.

  Here, only the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect, or a thing other than the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect. It may be configured as follows. Further, the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect, or the first notice icon may not be displayed as the first effect.

  In addition, the first notice icon may be displayed only as the first effect, or the first notice icon may be displayed as effects other than the first effect. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice for a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation is displayed after the first preliminary announcement icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. Only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started while the display is displayed, or if the first timer effect is executed as a notice for a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed while displaying the decorative symbol variation display, the effect other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is also started while the certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed. It may be done. In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice for a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation is displayed after the first preliminary announcement icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The presentation according to the first notice icon may always be started while the display is displayed, or in the case where the first timer presentation is executed as a notice relating to a certain decorative symbol variation display, or And the first notice icon is displayed during display of the decoration symbol variation display, and the effect corresponding to the first notice icon may not be started during display of a certain decoration symbol variation display. May be

  In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice for a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation is displayed after the first preliminary announcement icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only while the display is displayed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice for a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed while displaying the decorative symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started other than during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display May be In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice for a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol is displayed only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started during the display of the change display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decoration symbol change display, or Is configured to start rendering according to the first notice icon during display of a certain decoration symbol change display other than after the first notice icon is displayed during display of the decoration symbol change display. May be

  In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as the advance notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, it is started later than the certain decorative symbol variation display. While the display of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started. When the first timer effect is executed as the advance notice, a certain decoration may be made. After the first notice icon is displayed during display of the symbol variation display, other than the effect according to the first notice icon during display of the decoration symbol variation display which is started later than a certain decoration symbol variation display The presentation may also be configured to be started. In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as the advance notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, it is started later than the certain decorative symbol variation display. The display corresponding to the first notice icon may always be started while the display of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or, if the first timer effect is executed as a prefetch notice, a certain decoration After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the decoration symbol variation display which is started after a certain decoration symbol variation display It may be configured such that it may not.

  In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as the advance notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, it is started later than the certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only during display of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a prefetch notice, a certain decoration After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, the effect according to the first notice icon other than during the display of the decoration symbol variation display which is started later than a certain decoration symbol variation display May be configured to be initiated. In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as pre-reading notice, it starts after the decoration symbol fluctuation display only after the first notice icon is displayed while displaying the decoration symbol fluctuation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started during display of the decorative symbol variation display to be performed, or if the first timer effect is executed as a prefetch notice, a certain decoration Other than after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, the effect according to the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decoration symbol variation display which is started later than a certain decoration symbol variation display May be configured to be initiated.

Note that “the second notice icon may be displayed as the second effect,
In the case where the second timer effect is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, the second notice effect is displayed after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the second notice icon is configured to be started,
When the second timer effect is executed as a preview notice, after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, it is later than the certain decorative symbol variation display. The presentation according to the second notice icon is configured to be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display to be started.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, when one of the first effect and the second effect is a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is a advance notice, the notice icon displayed as the first effect and the second effect are displayed. The notice icons displayed as effects may be the same notice icon.

In addition, “It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game [for example, a mini game of a treasure box shown in FIG. 335 (15) to FIG.
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game [for example, a mini game of dice shown in FIG. 335 (7) to FIG.
In the first mini game, the first timer display [for example, the first timer announcement display TM11 or the like shown in FIG. 335 (3)] becomes the first time [for example, “00:00” or the like] In the mini game in which the result is derived before [for example, the mini game of the treasure box shown in FIG. 335 (15) to FIG. (18), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00" Before the result is derived etc.],
In the second mini game, the second timer display [for example, the second timer announcement display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 335 (5)] becomes the second time [for example, “00:00” or the like] For example, in the mini game of the dice shown in FIG. 335 (7) to FIG. (10), the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM 12 is “00:00”. Before the result is derived etc.],
The first effect is configured to be an effect according to the result of the first mini game [for example, the result of the mini game of the treasure box shown in FIG. 335 (15) to FIG. If the result is that the pseudo connected effect shown in FIG. 336 (21) is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notification effect applied to the first timer notification display TM11, etc.],
The second effect is configured to be an effect according to the result of the second mini game [For example, the result of the mini game of the dice shown in FIG. 335 (7) to FIG. If the result of is displayed, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. 335 (12) to the display mode of the Bancho is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notification effect applied to the second timer notification display TM12. Ru, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, in addition to merely waiting for the time of the timer display, it may be possible to draw attention to the result of the mini game during that time.

  Here, only a plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable, and those other than the plurality of types of mini games may also be configured to be executable. In addition, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini games, or may be configured so as not to execute a plurality of types of mini games.

  Also, in the first mini game, only the result may be derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. Other than the result may be derived. Also, in the first mini game, the result may always be derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time The result may not be derived.

  Also, in the first mini game, the result may be derived only before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. Besides, the result may be derived.

  Also, in the second mini game, only the result may be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time Other than the result may be derived. Also, in the second mini game, the result may always be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time The result may not be derived.

  Also, in the second mini game, the result may be derived only before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time Besides, the result may be derived.

  In addition, the first effect may be configured to be effect corresponding only to the result of the first mini game, or the effect corresponding to the result other than the result of the first effect may be the first effect. May be configured to Also, the first effect may be configured to be an effect according to the result of the first mini game, or the first effect may not be an effect according to the result of the first mini game. It may be configured as it is.

  In addition, the second effect may be configured to be an effect according to only the result of the second mini game, and the second effect may be an effect according to the result other than the result of the second mini game May be configured to Also, the second effect may be configured to be an effect according to the result of the second mini game without fail, or the second effect may not be an effect according to the result of the second mini game. It may be configured as it is.

  The types of mini games may be the same or different for the first timer effect and the second timer effect. In addition, the start order and the type of the mini game may be associated with each other.

  In addition, the indication of the first effect or the second effect may be performed during the mini game, and for example, when the mini game is successful, the change effect of the display mode of the holding icon is performed. You may be made to perform such an effect that is suggested.

In addition, when the result of the first mini game is the first result, the first effect is performed in the first mode [for example, FIG. 335 (15) to FIG. When the result of the mini game of the treasure box shown in (18) results in success, the pseudo-series effect shown in FIG. 336 (21) is performed as a result of the timer notification effect applied to the first timer notification display TM11. To be executed as
When the result of the first mini game is the third result, the first effect is performed in the third mode [for example, FIG. 337 (15) to FIG. 18 (18). If the result of the mini-game of the treasure box shown in the result of the failure is a result of the failure, as an effect to be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect applied to the first timer notice display TM11 as a loss effect shown in FIG. 338 (20) Etc.],
When the result of the second mini game is the second result, the second effect is performed in the second mode [for example, FIG. 335 (7) to FIG. If the result of the mini game of the dice shown in the results in success, the effect that the hold icon shown in FIG. 335 (12) changes to the display mode of the Bancho is that of the timer notice effect of the second timer notice display TM12. Etc. to be performed as a certain effect to be performed as a result],
When the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, the second effect is performed in the fourth mode [for example, FIG. 337 (7) to FIG. If the result of the mini game of dice shown in the results in failure, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. 337 (12) to the display mode of the panda is the timer notice effect of the second timer notice display TM12 Etc. to be performed as a certain effect to be performed as a result],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variety of effects by the combination of the mini game and the timer effect and to increase the interest.

  Here, when the result of the first mini game is the first result, the first effect may be performed only in the first mode, or the result of the first mini game is the first. In the case where one result is obtained, the first effect may be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the first aspect. In addition, the first effect may be necessarily performed in the first mode when the result of the first mini game is the first result, or the result of the first mini game is the first. It may be configured such that the first effect may not be performed in the first mode when it results in.

  In addition, when the result of the first mini game is the first result, only the first effect may be performed in the first mode, or the result of the first mini game is the first. When it comes to the result of, the effects other than the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode. Alternatively, the first effect may be performed in the first mode only when the result of the first mini game is the first result, or the result of the first mini game is the first. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode also in cases other than the case where the result of

  In addition, when the result of the first mini game is the third result, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the third mode, or the result of the first mini game is the third. The first effect may be configured to be performed also in an aspect other than the third aspect when it results in. In addition, when the result of the first mini game is the third result, the first effect may be necessarily performed in the third mode, or the result of the first mini game is the third. It may be configured such that the first effect may not be performed in the third mode when it results in.

  In addition, when the result of the first mini game is the third result, only the first effect may be performed in the third aspect, or the result of the first mini game is the third. When it comes to the result of, the effects other than the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode. Further, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode only when the result of the first mini game is the third result, or the result of the first mini game is the third. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode also in the case other than the case of the result of.

  In addition, the second effect may be performed only in the second mode when the result of the second mini game is the second result, and the result of the second mini game is the second The second effect may be configured to be performed also in an aspect other than the second aspect when it results in. In addition, the second effect may be necessarily performed in the second mode when the result of the second mini game is the second result, or the result of the second mini game is the second It may be configured such that the second effect may not be performed in the second mode when it results in.

  In addition, when the result of the second mini game is the second result, only the second effect may be performed in the second mode, or the result of the second mini game is the second In the case of the result of, the effects other than the second effect may be performed in the second mode. In addition, the second effect may be performed in the second mode only when the result of the second mini game is the second result, or the result of the second mini game is the second The second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode also in cases other than the case where the result of

  In addition, the second effect may be performed only in the fourth mode when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, and the result of the second mini game is the fourth. The second effect may be configured to be performed also in an aspect other than the fourth aspect when it results in. In addition, when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, the second effect may be necessarily performed in the fourth mode, and the result of the second mini game is the fourth. It may be configured such that the second effect may not be performed in the fourth mode when it results in.

  In addition, when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, only the second effect may be performed in the fourth mode, and the result of the second mini game is the fourth. In the case of the result of, the effects other than the second effect may be performed in the fourth mode. In addition, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth mode only when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, and the result of the second mini game is the fourth. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth mode also in the case other than the case of the result of.

Note that “one of the multiple types of mini games is a third mini game,
When the result of the third mini game is the fifth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in the fifth mode,
The third effect is configured to be performed in a sixth mode when the result of the third mini game is a sixth result.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

In addition, the time display [for example, "10:00" or the like] of "the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 or the like shown in FIG. 341 (3)]" is the first time. It is a display showing the time until [eg, 10 seconds etc.],
It is configured that the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time is reached [e.g., the display of "10:00" in FIG. 341 (3) (1) As shown in FIG. 341 (12) to (13) in FIG. 341 (12) to (13) in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to cause the player to have an expectation by causing it to function as an effect of changing the aspect of the first timer effect.

  Here, the time display of the first timer display may indicate only the time until the first time is reached, or it may indicate a time other than the time until the first time is reached. May be In addition, the time display of the first timer display may always indicate the time until the first time is reached, or may not indicate the time until the first time is reached. May be

  In addition, the time display of the first timer display may be configured to be changed only before the first time comes, or the time display of the first timer display becomes the first time. It may be configured such that it may be changed other than before. In addition, the time display of the first timer display may be configured to be changed before the first time, or the time display of the first timer display is changed before the first time. It may be configured such that it may not.

  In addition, only the time display of the first timer display may be configured to be changed before the first time is reached, or the time display other than the time display of the first timer display may be first It may be configured such that it may be changed before it becomes time for.

In addition, “the time display of the second timer display is a display indicating the time until the second time is reached,
The time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time is reached,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to make the player have expectation by functioning as an effect of changing the mode of the second timer effect.

  Here, the time display of the second timer display may indicate only the time until the second time is reached, or it may indicate a time other than the time until the second time is reached. May be In addition, the time display of the second timer display may always indicate the time until the second time is reached, or may not indicate the time until the second time is reached. May be

  Also, the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed only before the second time comes, or the time display of the second timer display becomes the second time. It may be configured such that it may be changed other than before. Also, the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed before the second time, or the time display of the second timer display is changed before the second time. It may be configured such that it may not.

  Also, only the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed before the second time is reached, or the time display other than the time display of the second timer display may be second It may be configured such that it may be changed before it becomes time for.

In addition, the first timer display [e.g., a figure shown during the display of [a certain decoration symbol variation display [e.g., a decoration symbol variation display etc. performed in the period shown in FIG. 325 (2) to FIG. The first timer notice display TM11 etc. shown in 325 (3) may be configured to be the first time [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 325 (3) is "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in Figure (12), etc.],
The second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 325 (5) etc.] may be the second time while the certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed. [For example, the second timer notification display TM12 shown in FIG. 325 (5) displays “00:00” at the timing shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, it may be configured that only the first timer display may become the first time while displaying a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer may be displayed while displaying a certain decorative symbol variation display. The display other than the timer display may be configured to be the first time. Also, the first timer display may always be configured to be the first time during display of a certain decorative symbol change display, or the first timer display may be displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol change display. It may be configured such that the first time may not be reached.

  In addition, the first timer display may be configured to be the first time only while a certain decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the first timer display may not be during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. One timer indication may be configured to be the first time.

  In addition, it may be configured that only the second timer display may be the second time during display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the second timer may be displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The display other than the timer display may be configured to be the second time. In addition, the second timer display may be configured to be always the second time while a certain decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the second timer display may be configured while a certain decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. It may be configured such that the second time may not be reached.

  In addition, the second timer display may be configured to be the second time only while a certain decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the second timer display may not be being displayed other than during a certain decorative symbol variation display. The second timer indication may be configured to be at a second time.

Also, the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started [eg, the first timer announcement display TM11 is shown in FIG. The display is started at the timing shown in), and the display of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (5), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, since the start timing of the timer display is diversified, it may be possible to enhance interest.

  Here, there may be a case where only the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may differ, or the display of the first timer display is started The timing other than the timing when the display of the second timer display is started may also be different. Also, the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started, or the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the second The timing at which the display of the timer display of may be started may be the same.

Also, the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may differ from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started [eg, As shown in FIG. 325 (3), when the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started, “10:00” is displayed, and the second timer notice display TM12 is shown in FIG. 325 (5). As shown, "03:00" is displayed when the display starts, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the time displayed when the timer display is started is diversified, it may be possible to enhance interest.

  Here, only the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may differ from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started. The time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display other than the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started. . In addition, the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started. The time display displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be the same as the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started.

In addition, “the first time and the second time are the same time [for example,“ 00:00 ”and the like],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the start timing of the effect may be easily recognized.

  Note that the first time and the second time may be different times.

Also, "the first time is 0,
The second time is 0,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the start timing of the effect can be grasped more easily.

  The first time may be other than zero. Also, the second time may be other than zero.

In addition, it is configured to be able to display “ball removal error display [for example, ball removal error display shown in FIG. 345 (9 ′ ′), etc.],
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a state of fullness error [for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ′ ′), when a bottom full error occurs, a ball removal error occurs. Display etc.],
It is configured such that at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap with the ball pullout error display [eg, FIG. 345 (9 ′ ′) As shown in the figure, the ball removal error display is overlapped on the front side of the first timer notification display TM11 and the second timer notification display TM12, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to hurry the ball pulling operation by the timer display.

  Here, only the ball removal error display may be configured to be displayed, or a display other than the ball removal error display may be configured to be displayed. Further, it may be configured to always display the ball removal error display, or may be configured so as not to display the ball removal error display.

  In addition, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the pan full error state or may be displayed in a state other than the pan full error state. In addition, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the pan full error state or may not be displayed in the pan full error state.

  In addition, the display may be configured such that the display of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap only with the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the first timer display may be combined. It may be configured such that at least one of the two timer displays may overlap with displays other than the ball pullout error display. In addition, the display of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to always overlap the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer may be configured. It may be configured such that at least one of the indications may not be overlapped with the ball out error indication.

  Also, only one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to overlap the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be used. It may be configured such that both displays of the timer display of may be overlapped to the ball out error display.

Also, “the effect means is a display means,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A rendering means capable of executing“ timer effect [for example, timer announcement effect etc. shown in FIG. 358 (9) to FIG. 17 (17)] ”[for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]”
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notices [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.];
A game console equipped with
In the timer effect, when the timer display is a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a strong sabothani group advance notice shown in FIG. 358 (17)] It is an effect configured to be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (9) to FIG. (17), after the display of the first timer notification display TM11 is started, the timer display is “00:00 When it becomes "", strong Sabohani group notice is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays may be a first preview display [for example, a preview notice by the suspension icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension shown in FIG. Pre-reading notice (the corresponding change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in F20)
One of the plurality of types of preview displays may be a second preview display [for example, a preview notice by the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune reserve shown in FIG. 357 (3) (the variation preview) or Preview notice (the corresponding change notice) by the hold icon of the red hold display mode shown in)
The first preview display may be a display of a certain type of preview [for example, a display of a preview by the display of a character of the lord, or a display of a preview by the change of the color of the holding icon displayed in a circle. It is a notice display displayed as a notice by including [], etc. [For example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), a holding icon (a change icon of a display mode of a Yoshimune bomb holding composed of ) Predicts that there may be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a display of red timer hold configured to include a round and red display The reserved icon (variation icon) of the mode predicts that there may be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, etc.],
The second notice display is a notice display that is displayed as a notice by including the display of the certain kind of notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 357 (3), it includes a character of the lord. The reserve icon (variation icon) of the display mode of the selected Yoshimune reserve announces that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red Of the red-hold display mode configured to include the display of (predicted that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit in the corresponding symbol change display, etc.)
The first preview display indicates that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, suspension of display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3) This is a notice display including the display of the bomb included in the icon and the display of the fuse wire included in the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)
The second preliminary display is a preliminary display not including the first display.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, with the execution of the timer effect, it may be possible to anticipate and enjoy the effect to be performed.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may always execute timer effect, or may not execute timer effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, and may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

  In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, when the timer display turns into a display indicating a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. The timer display may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  Also, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started other than when the timer display is a display indicating a certain time.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display or may not display the first notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display or may not display the second notice display.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, or by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, it may be other than a notice. It may also be displayed as a thing. Also, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice. It may not be possible.

  In addition, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than a certain kind of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Also, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice or may be displayed as a notice without containing a certain kind of notice of a notice. It may be done.

  Also, the second notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, or by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, it may be other than a notice. It may also be displayed as a thing. Also, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice. It may not be possible.

  In addition, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than a certain kind of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Also, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, or it may be displayed as a notice without any indication of a certain kind of notice. It may be done.

  Here, the "notice of notice" is a concept including both "the notice of the change" and the "prediction of the read ahead".

  Also, the first display may only indicate that the timer effect may be started, or it may also indicate that the timer effect may be other than when it is started. It is also good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect may be started, or may not indicate that the timer effect may be started. It is also good.

  Note that the first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate other than that the timer effect is (always) started. Good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, and may not indicate that the timer effect is (always) started. It is also good.

  In addition, the first preview display may include only the first display, or may include displays other than the first display. Further, the first advance notice may include the first indication or may not include the first indication.

  Further, the second advance notice may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. In addition, the second notice display may not necessarily include the first display, or may include the first display.

  Note that the display mode of the first display included in the first notice display and the display mode of the first display included in the second notice display may be the same or different. That is, if the function as the first display is common, it is included in the present invention. In addition, the functions may be different between the first display included in the first preview display and the first display included in the second preview display.

Also, “the display of the certain type of notice is the display of the notice by the icon,
The icon is a hold icon or a change icon,
The first notice display is a notice display configured to include the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon [eg, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), Yoshimune The holding icon (the fluctuation icon) of the display mode of the bomb holding is configured by adding a display of the bomb to the character of the lord, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is easy for the player to easily identify the symbol change display which is the target of the advance notice, as the hold icon or the change icon.

  Here, the first notice display may be configured to include only the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or the icon and the icon corresponding to the icon. The display may also be configured to include displays other than the first display to be displayed. In addition, the first advance notice display may be configured to include the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or the icon and the display corresponding to the icon It may be configured without including the first indication to be done.

  The icon may be a notice icon other than the hold icon or the change icon.

  In addition, there may be a case where the advance notice is given by the change icon. That is, even if the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in any of the hold icon and the change icon, whether or not there is a hold of the symbol change display when display is started (whether hold is 1 or more or 0) It is also possible to consider that the display of a certain type of notice by the fluctuating icon is a read ahead notice, as it is only different from. For example, in general, when the display of a certain type of notice in the first notice display is a hold icon, it is a prefetch notice, and in the case of a change icon, it is often the change notice. In the case where the hold is 0, in the case of the start winning, there is a case where a certain type of advance notice is displayed by the fluctuation icon as a result of pre-reading before the acceptance judgment is made, in such a case In some cases, it may be possible to say that it functions as a pre-reading notice, not the change notice.

In addition, “the first preview display is a preview display in which the icon and the first display are displayed integrally. [For example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3) The hold icon (the change icon) is a display mode in which the display of the bomb is integrally added to the character of the lord, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to understand whether it is a display for performing a timer effect.

  Moreover, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is easy to understand the symbol fluctuation display which is the target fluctuation of the advance notice.

  Here, the first preview display may be an integrated display of only the icon and the first display, or an integrated display of the icon, the first display, and other displays. It may be done. In addition, the first notice display may be one in which the icon and the first display are always displayed integrally, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed integrally. It is also good.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are displayed separately. [For example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 363 (B7 ′) is above the character of the lord. And so on, which is configured by arranging the icon BD 'of the bomb on the
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, there may be cases where the notice by the icon and the added notice are respectively easy to understand.

  Here, the first advance notice may be displayed separately as only the icon and the first display, or separately displayed including the icon, the first display, and the other displays. It may be done. In addition, the first preview display may be one in which the icon and the first display are always displayed separately, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed separately. It is also good.

Also, “the icon is configured to be displayed in the default display mode [For example, as shown in FIG. 358 (1), the first hold icon h11 is the default display mode (round and white display Displayed in the form
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the display mode of the advance notice may be easy to understand.

  Here, the icon may be configured to be displayable only in the default display mode, or the icon may be configured to be displayable in a display mode other than the default display mode. Also, the icon may be configured to be displayed in the default display mode, or may be configured so that the icon may not be displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, the display of the display of the certain type of advance notice is performed by the change of the color of the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 365 (E3), the second reserved icon h12 is a round display of blue The advance notice is given by displaying in, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the display mode of the advance notice may be easy to understand.

  Here, the display of the display of a certain type of notice may be performed only by the change of the color of the icon, or the display of the display of a certain type of notice may be performed by a change other than the change of the color of the icon It may be. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may always be displayed due to the change in the color of the icon, or the display of a certain type of notice may not be displayed due to the change in the color of the icon Good.

Also, “the second notice display is a notice display that may include a notice display of a type different from the display of the notice of the certain type [for example, a lady in the holding icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold The character may have a pseudo link icon or a Sabo Hani icon to be given a preview link of a pseudo link or a Sabo Huni group notice, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even when the second advance notice display is displayed, it may be possible to have expectations other than the timer effect.

  Here, the second notice may include only the indication of the notice different from the indication of the certain kind of notice, or may be different from the indication of the certain kind of notice. In addition to the display of the notice of the type of, the display may be included. Also, the second notice may necessarily include a notice of a different kind of notice from that of a certain kind of notice, or a notice of a different kind from that of a certain kind of notice. May not include the display of.

In addition, “the display of the certain type of preview is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of embodiments is the first embodiment [for example, the display mode of round and blue shown in FIG. 367 (F9), etc.],
One of the plurality of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, the display mode and the like of round and red shown in FIG. 367 (F9)],
In the case where the display of the certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed in a certain symbol variation display than in the case where the display of the certain type of advance notice is displayed in the first mode. Is configured to
In the case where the mode of the display of the certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of the display of the certain notice in the second notice display are the same mode (hereinafter referred to as “first case For example, the red timer hold display mode and the red hold display mode both have a circular and red display, etc.]).
In the first case, the timer effect is more easily started when the first preliminary display is displayed than when the second preliminary display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by the display mode of the display of the notice of a certain kind, while being able to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit, it may also be able to give a feeling of expectation for timer production to be started. .

  Here, the display of a certain type of preview may be configured to be displayable only in one of a plurality of modes, or in any mode other than one of a plurality of modes. It may be configured to be displayable. In addition, the display of a certain type of preview may be configured to be necessarily displayed in one of a plurality of modes, or is not displayed in one of a plurality of modes. It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the first mode, or may be configured to be displayable in modes other than the first mode. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be necessarily displayed in the first mode, or may be configured such that it may not be displayed in the first mode. It may be.

  Moreover, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second mode, or may be configured to be displayable in modes other than the second mode. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be necessarily displayed in the second mode, or may be configured such that it may not be displayed in the second mode. It may be.

  In addition, it is more likely that only the big hit symbol form is clearly displayed in a certain symbol variation display when a certain type of preliminary display is displayed in the second form than when displayed in the first form. If a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than when it is displayed in the first mode, it may be configured other than the jackpot symbol aspect in a certain symbol variation display. The symbol form of may also be configured to be easily displayed. In addition, in the case where the display of a certain type of advance notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case where the display of the preliminary notice is displayed in the first mode, the jackpot symbol aspect is surely displayed more easily in a certain symbol variation display The jackpot symbol aspect is displayed in a certain symbol variation display when the second type is displayed rather than the first type in which the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the first type. It may be configured so that it may not be easy to confirm display.

  In addition, in the case where the display of a certain type of advance notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case where the display of the preliminary notice is displayed in the first mode, the jackpot symbol aspect is easily determined and displayed in a certain symbol variation display. The symbol variation display other than a certain symbol variation display may be configured in a case where the second type is displayed rather than the case where the display of a certain type of advance notice is displayed in the first embodiment. Also in the case, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed.

  In addition, it is more likely that the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed in a certain symbol variation display only when the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second form than in the case where the first type is displayed. The jackpot symbol aspect in a certain symbol variation display may be configured except when the display of a certain type of advance notice is displayed in the second mode than when it is displayed in the first aspect. May be configured to be easily displayed.

  In addition, when the display of a certain type of advance notice is displayed in the second mode, the jackpot symbol aspect may be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display. In addition, when the display of a certain type of advance notice is displayed in the first mode, it may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is not necessarily determined and displayed in a certain symbol variation display.

  In addition, it may be configured such that there is only a case where the mode of display of a certain type of preview in the first preview display and the mode of display of a certain type of preview in the second preview display are the same. The present invention may be configured to be in some cases other than the case where the first warning display mode of the first warning display and the second warning display mode of the second warning display are the same mode. . In addition, it may be configured such that the form of the display of a certain type of advance notice in the first notice display and the form of the display of a certain advance notice in the second notice display may be the same mode. The present invention may be configured such that the form of the display of a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the form of the display of a certain type of notice in the second notice display may not be the same form. .

  Further, in the first case, only the timer effect may be started more easily when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. In the first case, presentation other than the timer presentation may be more easily started when the first announcement display is displayed than when the second announcement display is displayed. Also, in the first case, the timer effect may be more easily started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. In the first case, the timer effect may be more difficult to be started when the first preliminary announcement is displayed than when the second preliminary announcement is displayed.

  Only in the first case, the timer presentation may be configured to be more easily started when the first preliminary announcement is displayed than when the second preliminary announcement is displayed. Even in the case other than the above case, the timer effect may be more easily started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed.

  Further, in the first case, when the first notice display is displayed, the timer effect may be always started. In the first case, when the second advance notice is displayed, the timer effect may not necessarily be started.

In addition, after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display [eg, in FIG. 363 (B3) to FIG. (B7) As shown, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of Yoshimune hold to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, even when the second advance notice display is displayed, there may be a case where an expectation for changing to the first notice display can be given.

  Here, after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change only to the first notice display, or after the second notice display is displayed. The second preliminary display may change to a display other than the first preliminary display. In addition, after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may always change to the first notice display, or after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice The display may not change to the first preview display.

  Also, only after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display, or even after the second notice display is displayed, The second preliminary announcement may change to the first preliminary announcement.

In addition, the display means may display a change effect display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 363 (B4) to FIG. 36 (B5) or a display of a roulette effect shown in FIG. 365 (E9) to FIG. And 367 (F9) to the same figure (F18) as a means capable of displaying the display of the Yoshimune Kankan game, a pending change animation, etc.],
If the change effect display is displayed after the second preliminary display is displayed, the second preliminary display may change to the first preliminary display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give an expectation that the second notice display changes to the first notice display by the change presentation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the change effect display or may be capable of displaying other display than the change effect display. Further, the display means may always display the change effect display or may not display the change effect display.

  In addition, when the change presentation is displayed after the second preview is displayed, the second preview may change to only the first preview, or the second preview may be displayed. When the change effect display is displayed after the is displayed, the second notice display may change to a display other than the first notice display. In addition, when the change presentation is displayed after the second preview is displayed, the second preview may be changed to the first preview, or the second preview is displayed. When the change presentation is displayed after that, the second notice may not be changed to the first notice.

  In addition, the second notice may be changed to the first notice only when the change effect indication is displayed after the second notice is displayed, or the second notice may be displayed. The second notice display may be changed to the first notice display also in cases other than the case where the change presentation is displayed after the display is displayed.

  Note that the display mode of the target hold icon may be changed by, for example, a change effect display in the hold icon different from the target hold.

In addition, “the change effect display is a display including a mini game [for example, a display of a Yoshimune Kankan game shown in FIG. 367 (F9) to the same figure (F18), etc.],
As a result of the mini-game being played, when the first result [for example, the display result etc. when the dice result is "5"] is derived, the second advance notice is displayed on the first advance notice. Configured to change,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the mini game is played, it may be possible to have an expectation for changing to the first notice display.

  Here, the change effect display may include only the mini game or may include displays other than the mini game. In addition, the change effect display may include a mini game or may not include a mini game.

  Also, as a result of the mini game being played, when the first result is derived, the second preview may be changed to only the first preview, or the mini game is played. As a result, when the first result is derived, the second notice may be changed to a display other than the first notice. In addition, when the first result is derived as a result of the mini game being played, the second preview may be changed to the first preview without fail, or the mini game is played. As a result, when the first result is derived, the second notice may not be changed to the first notice.

  In addition, the second notice may be changed to the first notice only when the first result is derived as a result of the mini game being played, or the mini game is not As a result, the second notice may be changed to the first notice except when the first result is derived.

In addition, “the display unit is a unit capable of displaying selection effect display [for example, display of roulette effect shown in FIG. 365 (E9) to FIG. 366 (E13), etc.]”,
The selection effect display is a display of effects for selecting any one of a plurality of options,
The first option [for example, an icon of a timer notice shown in FIG. 365 (E9), etc.] may be included in one of the plurality of options.
While the selection effect display may be displayed while the second advance notice display is being displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 365 (E9), the first hold icon h11 is being displayed in the blue hold display mode. The display of the roulette effect has been started, etc.],
As a result of the display of the selection effect display, when the first option is selected, the second preliminary display is changed to the first preliminary display [eg, FIG. As shown in E13) to (E14), as a result of the roulette effect being performed, when the timer advance notice icon is derived and displayed, the first hold icon h11 is displayed from the blue hold display mode to the blue timer hold display Change to aspect etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for selection of the first option in the selection effect display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the selected effect display or may be capable of displaying other display than the selected effect display. Further, the display means may always display the selected effect display or may not display the selected effect display.

  Moreover, there may be a case where only the first option is included in one of the plurality of options, or a case in which one of the multiple options includes options other than the first option It is also good. In addition, the first option may be necessarily included in one of the plurality of options, or the first option may not be included in one of the plurality of options.

  In addition, only the selection effect display may be displayed while the second advance display is displayed, and a display other than the selection effect display may also be displayed during the second advance display. It is also good. In addition, the selection effect display may be always displayed while the second advance notice display is displayed, or the selection effect display may not be displayed while the second notice display is displayed.

  In addition, the selected effect display may be displayed only while the second advance display is displayed, or the selected effect display may be displayed while the display other than the second advance display is displayed. May be

In addition, “one of the plurality of options may include the second option [for example, the icon of the sabothani shown in FIG. 365 (E9), etc.],
As a result of the selection effect display being displayed, when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second advance notice display is changed to another display mode [e.g. As shown in E13a) to (E14a), as a result of the roulette effect being performed, when the Sabo Hani icon is derived and displayed, the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of blue hold to the display mode of Sabo Hani Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the second advance notice itself can be improved.

  Here, one of the plurality of options may include only the second option, or one of the plurality of options may include other options than the second option. May be In addition, the second option may be necessarily included in one of the plurality of options, or the second option may not be included in one of the plurality of options.

  Moreover, as a result of the selection effect display being displayed, when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second advance notice display may be configured to change only to another display mode, or the selection effect display As a result of being displayed, when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second preview may be changed to a display mode other than another display mode. Further, as a result of the selection effect display being displayed, when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second notice display may be changed to another display mode without fail, or the selection effect display As a result of being displayed, when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second advance notice may not be changed to another display mode.

  Moreover, as a result of the selection effect display being displayed, when only the second option is selected, the display mode of the second notice display may be changed to another display mode, or the selection effect display As a result of being displayed, even if an option other than the second option is selected, the display mode of the second advance notice may be changed to another display mode.

Also, “the display of the certain type of advance notice is a display by a character [for example, a display by a character of a lord shown in FIG. 357 (3), etc.”
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the decoration effect may be able to be improved.

  Here, the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display based on only a character, or the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display including a display other than a character. In addition, the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display that always includes a character, or the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display that does not include a character.

“The first display is a display that suggests that the timer effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3) to FIG. The hold icon indicates that the timer announcement effect is started, etc., because the display of the bomb is included, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the first display may further enhance the sense of expectation for the timer effect to be started.

  Here, the first display may indicate that only the timer effect is started, or may indicate other than the start of the timer effect. Further, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect is to be started, or may not indicate that the timer effect is to be started.

Also, in the above description,
“A rendering means capable of executing“ timer effect [for example, timer announcement effect etc. shown in FIG. 358 (9) to FIG. 17 (17)] ”[for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]”
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notices [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.];
A game console equipped with
In the timer effect, when the timer display is a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a strong sabothani group advance notice shown in FIG. 358 (17)] It is an effect configured to be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (9) to FIG. (17), after the display of the first timer notification display TM11 is started, the timer display is “00:00 When it becomes "", strong Sabohani group notice is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a first preview display [for example, preview notice (the change preview) of the display mode of the blue timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c '), etc.] ,
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a second preview display [for example, a preview notice (the corresponding change preview) of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ′ ′)]. Yes,
The first preview display includes a display of a certain type of preview [for example, a display of a preview due to a change in the color of the hold icon displayed in a round shape, etc.] It is a display [For example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c '), the hold icon (variation icon) of the display mode of the blue timer hold that is configured to include a round and blue display is the corresponding symbol change display. It has been announced that there is a possibility of a big hit etc.],
The second preliminary display is a preliminary display which is displayed as a preliminary read preview by including the display of the certain type of preliminary warning [eg, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ′ ′), it is round and red. Of the red timer hold display mode configured to include the display of (predicted that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit in the corresponding symbol change display, etc.)
The first advance notice display includes a display indicating that the timer effect is started [for example, display of a squib included in the hold icon of the display mode of the blue timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ')]. It is a notice display,
The second preliminary display is a display indicating that the timer effect is to be started [for example, display of a squib included in the hold icon of the display mode of red timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ′ ′)] It is a notice display including
The aspect of the display of the certain type of advance notice in the first advance notice display and the aspect of the display of the certain advance notice in the second advance notice display are different.
The initial display of the timer display when the first preliminary display is displayed and the timer effect is started is the first time [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c '), the hold icon is displayed. When displayed in the blue timer hold display mode, “10:00” is displayed as an initial display of the timer display, etc.],
The initial display of the timer display when the second preliminary display is displayed and the timer effect is started is the second time [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ′ ′), the hold icon Is displayed in the red timer hold display mode, "60:00" is displayed as an initial display of the timer display, etc.],
The first time is configured to be easy to be selected longer than the second time,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, with the execution of the timer effect, it may be possible to anticipate and enjoy the contents of the effect to be performed.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may always execute timer effect, or may not execute timer effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, and may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

  In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, when the timer display turns into a display indicating a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. The timer display may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  Also, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started other than when the timer display is a display indicating a certain time.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display or may not display the first notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display or may not display the second notice display.

  In addition, the first notice may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a certain notice. It may be displayed as something other than the above. In addition, the first preview may include a display of a certain type of preview and may always be displayed as a prefetch preview, or may include a display of a certain type of preview. It may not be displayed as.

  In addition, the first notice may be displayed as a pre-reading notice by including only a certain kind of notice, and may include a display other than a certain kind of notice. May be displayed as a pre-reading notice. Also, the first notice may be displayed as a pre-reading notice by including the notice of a certain kind of notice, or the indication of a certain kind of notice may not be included. It may be displayed as.

  Further, the second notice may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a certain notice. It may be displayed as something other than the above. In addition, the second preview may include a display of a certain type of preview and may always be displayed as a preview preview, or may include a display of a certain type of preview. It may not be displayed as.

  In addition, the second notice may be displayed as a pre-reading notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may include a display other than a certain kind of notice. May be displayed as a pre-reading notice. Also, the second notice may be displayed as a pre-reading notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, or a pre-reading notice without a certain kind of notice of indication. It may be displayed as.

  In addition, the first notice display may include only a display indicating that a timer effect is to be started, or may include a display other than a display indicating that a timer effect is to be started. May be In addition, the first advance notice display may always include a display that suggests that the timer effect is to be started, and may not include a display that indicates that the timer effect is to be started. It may be.

  Note that the first preliminary display may include a display that suggests that the timer effect is (always) started.

  In addition, the second advance notice display may include only a display indicating that the timer effect is to be started, or may include a display other than a display indicating that the timer effect is to be started. May be In addition, the second advance notice display may always include a display that suggests that the timer effect is to be started, and may not include a display that indicates that the timer effect is to be started. It may be.

  Note that the second preliminary display may include a display that suggests that the timer effect is (always) started.

  Also, only the aspect of the display of a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the form of the display of a certain type of notice in the second notice display may be different, or in the first notice display The aspect other than the aspect of the display of a certain type of notice in the second type of notice may be different. Also, the form of the display of a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the form of the display of a certain type of notice in the second notice display may be different, or in the first notice display There may be cases where the form of the display of one type of notice and the form of the display of a certain type of notice in the second notice display do not differ.

  The initial display of the timer display when the first preliminary display is displayed and the timer effect is started may be only the first time or may be a time other than the first time. Further, the initial display of the timer display when the first advance notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may be always the first time or may not be the first time.

  The initial display of the timer display when the second preliminary display is displayed and the timer effect is started may be only the second time or may be a time other than the second time. In addition, the initial display of the timer display when the second advance notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may be always the second time or may not be the second time.

  Also, it may be configured such that only the first time is easier to be selected than the second time, or a time other than the first time is longer than the second time. It may be configured to be easy to select. Also, the first time may be configured to be always selected longer than the second time, or the first time may not be selected longer than the second time. May be configured to

In addition, “the certain effect is a notice effect [eg, a notice of a strong cut-in shown in FIG. 370 (H35), etc.]”,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to improve an expectation for a certain effect to be performed.

  Here, a certain effect may include only the advance effect or may include effects other than the advance effect. In addition, a certain effect may always include the advance effect or may not include the advance effect.

In addition, “the certain effect is a chance-up effect [eg, a pseudo-series effect shown in FIG. 369 (H25) to FIG.
The chance-up effect is an effect in which the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be determined and displayed when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the expectation for the big hit can be improved by performing a certain effect.

  Here, a certain effect may include only a chance up effect or may include effects other than the chance up effect. In addition, a certain effect may always include a chance up effect or may not include a chance up effect.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A rendering means capable of executing“ timer effect [for example, timer announcement effect etc. shown in FIG. 358 (9) to FIG. 17 (17)] ”[for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]”
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notices [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.];
A game console equipped with
The timer effect is an effect when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started (hereinafter, “a certain Group notice, etc.]) is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (9) to FIG. (17), the display of the first timer notice display TM 11 is started. Later, when the timer display becomes "00:00", a strong sabothani group announcement is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays may be a first preview display [for example, a preview notice by the suspension icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension shown in FIG. Pre-reading notice (the corresponding change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in F20)
The first preview display may be a display of a certain type of preview [for example, a display of a preview by the display of a character of the lord, or a display of a preview by the change of the color of the holding icon displayed in a circle. It is a notice display displayed as a notice by including [], etc. [For example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), a holding icon (a change icon of a display mode of a Yoshimune bomb holding composed of ) Predicts that there may be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a display of red timer hold configured to include a round and red display The reserved icon (variation icon) of the mode predicts that there may be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, etc.],
The first preview display indicates that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, suspension of display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3) This is a notice display including the display of the bomb included in the icon and the display of the fuse wire included in the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)
An effect using a certain character [for example, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 367 (F9)] (hereinafter referred to as a “first effect [eg. ] Is executed to display one of the notices of the plurality of notices displayed (hereinafter referred to as “previous notice [for example, blue pending shown in FIG. 367 (F9) “The first hold icon h11 etc. of the display mode” is displayed as the first notice display [eg the first hold icon h11 etc. of the display mode of red timer hold shown in FIG. Are configured to be
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, with the execution of the timer effect, it may be possible to anticipate and enjoy the effect to be performed.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may always execute timer effect, or may not execute timer effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, and may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

  In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, when the timer display turns into a display indicating a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. The timer display may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  Also, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started other than when the timer display is a display indicating a certain time.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display or may not display the first notice display.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, or by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, it may be other than a notice. It may also be displayed as a thing. Also, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice. It may not be possible.

  In addition, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than a certain kind of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Also, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice or may be displayed as a notice without containing a certain kind of notice of a notice. It may be done.

  Here, the "notice of notice" is a concept including both "the notice of the change" and the "prediction of the read ahead".

  Also, the first display may only indicate that the timer effect may be started, or it may also indicate that the timer effect may be other than when it is started. It is also good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect may be started, or may not indicate that the timer effect may be started. It is also good.

  Note that the first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate other than that the timer effect is (always) started. Good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, and may not indicate that the timer effect is (always) started. It is also good.

  In addition, the first preview display may include only the first display, or may include displays other than the first display. Further, the first advance notice may include the first indication or may not include the first indication.

  In addition, by performing the first effect, it may be configured such that a certain advance notice displayed may be displayed only as the first advance notice, or the first effect By performing, the display may be configured such that a certain preliminary announcement display that has been displayed may be displayed also as a preliminary announcement display other than the first preliminary announcement display. In addition, by performing the first effect, a certain advance notice displayed may be necessarily displayed as the first notice, or the first effect is executed. As a result, it may be configured such that a certain advance notice displayed may not be displayed as the first notice.

  In addition, by performing the first effect, only a certain advance notice displayed may be displayed as the first notice, or the first effect may be generated. By performing, the notice display other than the certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display.

  Moreover, only when the first effect is executed, a certain advance notice displayed may be displayed as the first notice, or the first effect may be displayed. It may also be configured such that a certain advance notice displayed may be displayed as a first advance notice even when other effects are executed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of preview displays may be a second preview display [for example, a preview preview with the reserve icon of the display mode of Yoshimune reserve shown in FIG. 357 (3) Pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the red hold display mode shown in 367 (F9), etc.]
The second notice display is a notice display that is displayed as a notice by including the display of the certain kind of notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 357 (3), it includes a character of the lord. The reserve icon (variation icon) of the display mode of the selected Yoshimune reserve announces that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red Of the red-hold display mode configured to include the display of (predicted that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit in the corresponding symbol change display, etc.)
The second notice display is a notice display not including the first display,
By the execution of the first effect, the displayed second preliminary announcement may be changed to the first preliminary announcement [e.g., FIG. 367 (F9)- As shown in the figure (F20), when the Yoshimune Kankan game is executed, the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the blue hold displayed changes to the display mode of the red timer hold, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if it is a pre-reading notice that does not suggest the start of the timer effect, it may change to the first notice display when the first effect is executed. There is.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display or may not display the second notice display.

  Also, the second notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, or by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, it may be other than a notice. It may also be displayed as a thing. Also, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice. It may not be possible.

  In addition, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than a certain kind of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Also, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, or it may be displayed as a notice without any indication of a certain kind of notice. It may be done.

  Here, the "notice of notice" is a concept including both "the notice of the change" and the "prediction of the read ahead".

  Further, the second advance notice may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. In addition, the second notice display may not necessarily include the first display, or may include the first display.

  In addition, by the execution of the first effect, the displayed second notice may be changed to only the first notice, or the first effect may be displayed. By being executed, the displayed second notice display may be changed to a notice display other than the first notice display. In addition, by the execution of the first effect, the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display without fail, or the first effect is executed. In this case, the displayed second notice may not be changed to the first notice.

  In addition, by performing the first effect, only the displayed second notice may be changed to the first notice, or the first effect may be displayed. The preview display other than the displayed second preview display may be changed to the first preview display by being executed.

  In addition, the second notice display which has been displayed may be changed to the first notice display only by the execution of the first effect, and may be other than the first effect The second notice display which has been displayed may be changed to the first notice display even when the effect of is performed.

Also, “the second notice display is a notice display that may include a notice of a different kind of notice from the indication of the certain kind of notice [e.g. The hold icon (the fluctuation icon) of the display mode may be displayed with the Sabo Hani icon or the Replay icon added, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even when the second advance notice display is displayed, it may be possible to have expectations other than the timer effect.

  Here, the second notice may include only the indication of the notice different from the indication of the certain kind of notice, or may be different from the indication of the certain kind of notice. In addition to the display of the notice of the type of, the display may be included. Also, the second notice may necessarily include a notice of a different kind of notice from that of a certain kind of notice, or a notice of a different kind from that of a certain kind of notice. May not include the display of.

In addition, by the execution of the first effect, the display mode of the displayed first preliminary announcement may be changed to the display mode of another first preliminary announcement. [For example, as shown in FIG. 367 (F8a) to FIG. 3F (F20a), when the Yoshimune Kankan game is executed, the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the blue timer hold being displayed is red. Change to display mode of timer hold etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, there may be cases where it can be expected to upgrade the first notice display.

  Here, when the first effect is executed, the display mode of the displayed first notice display may be changed only to the display mode of another first notice display. The display mode of the first notice display being displayed may be changed to a display mode other than the display mode of another first notice display by executing the first effect. It may be configured as follows. In addition, by the execution of the first effect, the display mode of the displayed first preliminary announcement may be changed to the display mode of another first preliminary announcement. The display mode of the first notice display being displayed may not be changed to the display mode of another first notice display by the execution of the first effect. .

  In addition, only the display mode of the first notice display being displayed may be changed to the display mode of another first notice display by executing the first effect. When the display mode of the notice display other than the display mode of the displayed first notice display is changed to the display mode of another first notice display due to the first effect being executed. May be configured to

  In addition, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed to the display mode of another first notice display only by the execution of the first effect. It is also good that the display mode of the first notice display displayed may be changed to the display mode of another first notice display even when the effects other than the first effect are executed. May be configured.

  In addition, the display mode of the display of a certain kind of advance notice among the displayed first advance notices may be changed by the execution of the first effect, and the display manner of the first display May change, and both the display mode of the display of a certain type of notice and the display mode of the first display may change.

In addition, “the display of the certain type of preview is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of embodiments is the first embodiment [eg, a round and blue embodiment etc.],
One of the plurality of embodiments is the second embodiment [eg, a round, red embodiment, etc.],
From the case where the first notice display [for example, the hold icon of the display mode of the blue timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F8a), etc.] including the display of the certain kind of notice of the first aspect is displayed Also in the case where the first notice display [for example, the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20a), etc.] including the display of the certain kind of notice of the second aspect is displayed. Is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect can be easily displayed in a certain symbol variation display,
As a result of the first effect being executed, the display of the certain type of advance notice in the displayed first advance notice may change from the first mode to the second mode. [For example, as shown in FIG. 367 (F8a) to FIG. 3F (F20a), the first hold icon of the display mode of the blue timer hold being displayed by executing the Yoshimune Kankan game. h11 changes to display mode of red timer hold, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to understand that it has been upgraded.

  Here, the display of a certain type of preview may be configured to be displayable only in one of a plurality of modes, or in any mode other than one of a plurality of modes. It may be configured to be displayable. In addition, the display of a certain type of preview may be configured to be necessarily displayed in one of a plurality of modes, or is not displayed in one of a plurality of modes. It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the first mode, or may be configured to be displayable in modes other than the first mode. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be necessarily displayed in the first mode, or may be configured such that it may not be displayed in the first mode. It may be.

  Moreover, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second mode, or may be configured to be displayable in modes other than the second mode. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be necessarily displayed in the second mode, or may be configured such that it may not be displayed in the second mode. It may be.

  In addition, the first notice display including the indication of the certain type of notice of the second aspect is more than the case where the first notice indication including the display of the certain form of the first aspect is displayed. The first display may be configured such that only the jackpot symbol aspect is easily determined in a certain symbol variation display, or the display of a certain type of notice of the first aspect is included. In the case of the first preview display including the display of a certain type of preview of the second aspect being displayed rather than the display of the preview display, a symbol other than the jackpot symbol aspect in a certain symbol variation display The aspect may also be configured to be easily displayed. In addition, the first notice display including the indication of the certain type of notice of the second aspect is more than the case where the first notice indication including the display of the certain form of the first aspect is displayed. The first hit may be configured such that the big hit symbol form can be surely and easily displayed in a certain symbol variation display if it is displayed, or the display of a certain type of notice of the first aspect is included. The jackpot symbol mode is finalized in a certain symbol variation display when the first preview display including the display of a certain type of preview of the second aspect is displayed rather than the display of the preview display. It may be configured that it may not be easy to do.

  In addition, the first notice display including the indication of the certain type of notice of the second aspect is more than the case where the first notice indication including the display of the certain form of the first aspect is displayed. The first display may be configured so that the jackpot symbol aspect is more easily determined in a certain symbol variation display if the display is made, or the display of a certain type of notice of the first aspect is included. The first preview display including the display of a certain type of preview in the second mode is displayed more than the display of the preview display, even in the symbol variation display other than a certain symbol variation display. The jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily determined and displayed.

  In addition, even when the first notice display including the display of a certain notice of the second aspect is displayed, the jackpot symbol aspect is definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display. Good. In addition, when the first notice display including the display of a certain notice of the first aspect is displayed, the big hit symbol aspect may not necessarily be displayed in a certain symbol variation display. .

  In addition, by performing the first effect, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may be changed from the first aspect to the aspect other than the second aspect by executing the first effect. It may be configured to be. Also, even if the first presentation is executed, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display is always changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured that the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect by executing the first effect. It may be done.

  In addition, only the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect by the execution of the first effect. The display may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect other than the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display by executing the first effect. It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, only when the first effect is executed, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of a certain type of notice in the first notice display being displayed may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect by performing an effect other than the first effect. It may be configured to be.

  Note that “the display of the certain type of notice of the second aspect is included rather than the case where the first notice display that includes the display of the certain type of the first form of the first aspect is displayed” If the first notice display is displayed, it is configured that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily determined and displayed in a certain symbol variation display. The second preview display including the display of the certain type of the second aspect of the second aspect is displayed more than the second preview display including the display of the preview is displayed. In a certain symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed. Also, “a plurality of display of the notice of the certain type of the second aspect is included rather than a case where a plurality of notice displays including the display of the notice of the certain form of the first aspect is displayed In the case where the advance notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol aspect may be more easily determined and displayed in a certain symbol variation display.

[The first display is a display indicating that the timer effect may be started one or more times [for example, as shown in FIG. 363 (B7) or FIG. 370 (H13 ') The number of bombs included in the holding icon of the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold indicates the number of times the timer announcement effect is started, etc.
By executing the first effect, the number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first preliminary announcement displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first The number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the effect is performed may be different [for example, by performing a Yoshimune Kankan game, The display of bombs included in the bomb hold increased from one to three, suggesting that the execution of one timer preview effect is to be suggested to perform the three timer preview effects, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to expect an increase in timer effect.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it may be possible to notify the number of remaining guaranteed number of timer effects in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Here, the first display may be a display that only suggests that one or more timer effects may be started, or when one or more timer effects are started It may be an indication that suggests something other than that. In addition, the first display may be a display that always suggests that one or more times of timer effects may be started, or one or more times of timer effects may be started. It may be a display that may not indicate a certain thing.

  In addition, by executing the first effect, the number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first effect are performed. There may be cases where only the number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after being displayed may differ, or by the first effect being executed, the first The first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first notice display in the first notice display is the number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display Things other than the number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested may be different. In addition, by executing the first effect, the number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first effect are performed. The number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after being displayed may be different, or by the first effect being executed, before the execution of the first effect The number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed on the timer and the timer suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect is executed The number of times the effect is performed may not be different.

  In addition, only when the first effect is executed, the number of times the timer effect is executed and the first effect are suggested by the first display in the first notice display that was displayed before the execution of the first effect. The number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the execution may be different, or even by the effect other than the first effect being executed, The number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect and the number in the first notice display displayed after the first effect is performed The number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by one display may be different.

Also, the first effect may be started during the execution of the timer effect [eg, as shown in FIG. 368 (F 8 c) to FIG. The game has started, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the first effect is started by executing the timer effect.

  Here, only the first effect may be started during execution of the timer effect, or effects other than the first effect may also be started during the execution of the timer effect. In addition, the first effect may always be started while the timer effect is being performed, or the first effect may not be started while the timer effect is being performed.

  In addition, the first effect may be started only while the timer effect is being performed, or the first effect may be started when the timer effect is not being performed.

Also, “the display of the certain type of notice is the display of the notice by the icon,
The icon is a hold icon or a change icon,
The first notice display is a notice display configured to include the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon [eg, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), Yoshimune The holding icon (the fluctuation icon) of the display mode of the bomb holding is configured by adding the display of the bomb to the holding icon (the fluctuation icon), etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is easy for the player to easily identify the symbol change display which is the target of the advance notice, as the hold icon or the change icon.

  Here, the first notice display may be configured to include only the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or the icon and the icon corresponding to the icon. The display may also be configured to include displays other than the first display to be displayed. In addition, the first advance notice display may be configured to include the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or the icon and the display corresponding to the icon It may be configured without including the first indication to be done.

  The icon may be a notice icon other than the hold icon or the change icon.

  In addition, there may be a case where the advance notice is given by the change icon. That is, even if the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in any of the hold icon and the change icon, whether or not there is a hold of the symbol change display when display is started (whether hold is 1 or more or 0) It is also possible to consider that the display of a certain type of notice by the fluctuating icon is a read ahead notice, as it is only different from. For example, in general, when the display of a certain type of notice in the first notice display is a hold icon, it is a prefetch notice, and in the case of a change icon, it is often the change notice. In the case where the hold is 0, in the case of the start winning, there is a case where a certain type of advance notice is displayed by the fluctuation icon as a result of pre-reading before the acceptance judgment is made, in such a case In some cases, it may be possible to say that it functions as a pre-reading notice, not the change notice.

In addition, “the first preview display is a preview display in which the icon and the first display are displayed integrally. [For example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3) The hold icon (the change icon) is such that the display of the bomb is integrally added to the hold icon (the change icon) of the display mode of the character of the lord.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to understand whether it is a display for performing a timer effect.

  Moreover, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is easy to understand the symbol fluctuation display which is the target fluctuation of the advance notice.

  Here, the first preview display may be an integrated display of only the icon and the first display, or an integrated display of the icon, the first display, and other displays. It may be done. In addition, the first notice display may be one in which the icon and the first display are always displayed integrally, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed integrally. It is also good.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are displayed separately. [For example, the holding icon shown in FIG. And so on, and the bomb icon BD 'is arranged above the holding icon (the variation icon), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, there may be cases where the notice by the icon and the added notice are respectively easy to understand.

  Here, the first advance notice may be displayed separately as only the icon and the first display, or separately displayed including the icon, the first display, and the other displays. It may be done. In addition, the first preview display may be one in which the icon and the first display are always displayed separately, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed separately. It is also good.

Also, “the icon is configured to be displayed in the default display mode [For example, as shown in FIG. 358 (1), the first hold icon h11 is the default display mode (round and white display Displayed in the form
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the display mode of the advance notice may be easy to understand.

  Here, the icon may be configured to be displayable only in the default display mode, or the icon may be configured to be displayable in a display mode other than the default display mode. Also, the icon may be configured to be displayed in the default display mode, or may be configured so that the icon may not be displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, the display of the display of the certain type of advance notice is performed by the change of the color of the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 365 (E3), the second reserved icon h12 is a round display of blue The advance notice is given by displaying in, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the display mode of the advance notice may be easy to understand.

  Here, the display of the display of a certain type of notice may be performed only by the change of the color of the icon, or the display of the display of a certain type of notice may be performed by a change other than the change of the color of the icon It may be. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may always be displayed due to the change in the color of the icon, or the display of a certain type of notice may not be displayed due to the change in the color of the icon Good.

Also, “the first effect is an effect from which one of a plurality of results is derived [eg, as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), in the Yoshimune Kankan game, the appearance of“ 1 ”of the dice One of the appearances of the eyes and dice "3" and the dice "5" is derived, etc.],
One of the plurality of results is the first result [for example, the outcome of "5" of the dice shown in FIG. 367 (F18), etc.]
As a result of the first effect being performed, when the first result is derived, the certain preliminary announcement display being displayed is configured to be displayed as the first preliminary announcement [for example, As shown in FIG. 367 (F18) to FIG. 3F (F20), when the result of the dice becomes “5” in the Yoshimune Kankan game, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of blue hold to the red timer Change to display mode of hold etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give an expectation for the first result to be derived.

  Here, the first effect may be that only one result of the plurality of results may be derived, or a result other than one of the plurality of results may also be derived. May be Also, in the first effect, one of the plurality of results may be necessarily derived, or even one of the plurality of results may not be derived. Good.

  Also, the first effect may be that only the first result is derived, or results other than the first result may be derived. In addition, the first effect may be one in which the first result is always derived, or may be one in which the first result is not derived.

  In addition, when a first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain preliminary announcement displayed may be displayed only as a first preliminary announcement. When a first result is derived as a result of performing the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed is configured to be displayed also as a notice display other than the first notice display It is also good. In addition, when a first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain advance notice displayed may be displayed as the first notice. As a result of the first effect being performed, when the first result is derived, there may be a case where a certain preliminary announcement displayed may not be displayed as the first preliminary announcement.

  In addition, as a result of the first effect being performed, when the first result is derived, only a certain advance notice displayed may be displayed as the first notice display. If, as a result of the first effect, the first result is derived, a notice display other than the given notice display may be displayed as the first notice display. Good.

  Moreover, as a result of the first effect being performed, only when the first result is derived, a certain preliminary announcement displayed may be displayed as the first preliminary announcement. As a result of the first effect being performed, even when the first result is derived, even if the certain preliminary announcement displayed is displayed as the first preliminary announcement even when the first result is derived Good.

Also, “the display of the certain type of advance notice is a display by a character [for example, a display by a character of a lord shown in FIG. 357 (3), etc.”
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the decoration effect may be able to be improved.

  Here, the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display based on only a character, or the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display including a display other than a character. In addition, the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display that always includes a character, or the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display that does not include a character.

“The first display is a display that suggests that the timer effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3) to FIG. The hold icon indicates that the timer announcement effect is started, etc., because the display of the bomb is included, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the first display may further enhance the sense of expectation for the timer effect to be started.

  Here, the first display may indicate that only the timer effect is started, or may indicate other than the start of the timer effect. Further, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect is to be started, or may not indicate that the timer effect is to be started.

Also, in the above description,
“A rendering means capable of executing“ timer effect [for example, timer announcement effect etc. shown in FIG. 358 (9) to FIG. 17 (17)] ”[for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]”
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notices [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.];
A game console equipped with
The timer effect is an effect when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started (hereinafter, “a certain Group notice, etc.]) is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (9) to FIG. (17), the display of the first timer notice display TM 11 is started. Later, when the timer display becomes "00:00", a strong sabothani group announcement is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays may be a first preview display [for example, a preview notice by the suspension icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension shown in FIG. Pre-reading notice (the corresponding change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in F20)
One of the plurality of types of preview displays may be a second preview display [for example, a preview notice by the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune reserve shown in FIG. 357 (3) (the variation preview) or Preview notice (the corresponding change notice) by the hold icon of the red hold display mode shown in)
The first preview display may be a display of a certain type of preview [for example, a display of a preview by the display of a character of the lord, or a display of a preview by the change of the color of the holding icon displayed in a circle. It is a notice display displayed as a notice by including [], etc. [For example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), a holding icon (a change icon of a display mode of a Yoshimune bomb holding composed of ) Predicts that there may be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a display of red timer hold configured to include a round and red display The reserved icon (variation icon) of the mode predicts that there may be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, etc.],
The second notice display is a notice display that is displayed as a notice by including the display of the certain kind of notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 357 (3), it includes a character of the lord. The reserve icon (variation icon) of the display mode of the selected Yoshimune reserve announces that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red Of the red-hold display mode configured to include the display of (predicted that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit in the corresponding symbol change display, etc.)
The first preview display indicates that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, suspension of display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3) This is a notice display including the display of the bomb included in the icon and the display of the fuse wire included in the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)
The second notice display is a notice display not including the first display,
The certain effect is configured to be started in a state where the first advance notice display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 371 (H 28 a) to FIG. In the state where the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the mode, the strong sabothani group announcement is started, etc.
By performing an effect using a certain character, the displayed first preliminary announcement may be displayed as the second preliminary announcement [e.g. As shown in G9) to FIG. 369 (G20), the first hold icon h11 of the timer hold display mode to which the panda icon PD is added changes to the display mode of the Sabohani as a result of the Yoshimune Kankan game being played Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, with the execution of the timer effect, it may be possible to anticipate and enjoy the effect to be performed.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may always execute timer effect, or may not execute timer effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, when the timer display turns into a display indicating a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. The timer display may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  Also, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started other than when the timer display is a display indicating a certain time.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display or may not display the first notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display or may not display the second notice display.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, or by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, it may be other than a notice. It may also be displayed as a thing. Also, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice. It may not be possible.

  In addition, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than a certain kind of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Also, the first notice may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice or may be displayed as a notice without containing a certain kind of notice of a notice. It may be done.

  Also, the second notice may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, or by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, it may be other than a notice. It may also be displayed as a thing. Also, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain kind of notice. It may not be possible.

  In addition, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed other than a certain kind of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Also, the second notice may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain kind of notice, or it may be displayed as a notice without any indication of a certain kind of notice. It may be done.

  Here, the "notice of notice" is a concept including both "the notice of the change" and the "prediction of the read ahead".

  Also, the first display may only indicate that the timer effect may be started, or it may also indicate that the timer effect may be other than when it is started. It is also good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect may be started, or may not indicate that the timer effect may be started. It is also good.

  Note that the first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate other than that the timer effect is (always) started. Good. In addition, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, and may not indicate that the timer effect is (always) started. It is also good.

  In addition, the first preview display may include only the first display, or may include displays other than the first display. Further, the first advance notice may include the first indication or may not include the first indication.

  Further, the second advance notice may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. In addition, the second notice display may not necessarily include the first display, or may include the first display.

  Note that the display mode of the first display included in the first notice display and the display mode of the first display included in the second notice display may be the same or different. That is, if the function as the first display is common, it is included in the present invention. In addition, the functions may be different between the first display included in the first preview display and the first display included in the second preview display.

  In addition, only a certain effect may be started in the state in which the first advance notice display is displayed, and effects other than a certain effect are also displayed in the state in which the first notice display is displayed. It may be configured to be initiated. In addition, a certain effect may be configured to be always started while the first advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect is not started when the first notice display is displayed. May be configured to

  In addition, a certain effect may be configured to be started only in a state in which the first preliminary announcement display is displayed, or in a state other than the state in which the first preliminary announcement display is displayed. It may be configured to be initiated.

  In addition, by performing an effect using a certain character, the displayed first preliminary announcement may be displayed only as the second preliminary announcement, or By performing the effect using the character, the displayed first notice may be displayed as a notice other than the second notice. In addition, by performing an effect using a certain character, the displayed first notice may always be displayed as a second notice, or a certain character may be used. By performing the effect, the displayed first preliminary announcement may not be displayed as the second preliminary announcement.

  In addition, by performing an effect using a certain character, only the displayed first preliminary announcement may be displayed as the second preliminary announcement, or By performing the effect using the character, the notice display other than the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display.

  In addition, the first preliminary announcement displayed may be displayed as a second preliminary announcement only when an effect using a certain character is executed. The first preliminary announcement displayed may also be displayed as a second preliminary announcement even when a presentation other than the presentation using the character is executed.

In addition, “the certain effect is a notice effect [eg, a notice of a strong cut-in shown in FIG. 370 (H35), etc.]”,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to improve an expectation for a certain effect to be performed.

  Here, a certain effect may include only the advance effect or may include effects other than the advance effect. In addition, a certain effect may always include the advance effect or may not include the advance effect.

In addition, “the certain effect is a chance-up effect [eg, a pseudo-series effect shown in FIG. 369 (H25) to FIG.
The chance-up effect is an effect in which the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be determined and displayed when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the expectation for the big hit can be improved by performing a certain effect.

  Here, a certain effect may include only a chance up effect or may include effects other than the chance up effect. In addition, a certain effect may always include a chance up effect or may not include a chance up effect.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A rendering means capable of executing“ timer effect [for example, timer announcement effect etc. shown in FIG. 358 (9) to FIG. 17 (17)] ”[for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]”
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notices [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.];
A game console equipped with
The timer effect is an effect when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started (hereinafter referred to as “a certain effect [for example, strong sabothani shown in FIG. 358 (17) It is an effect configured to start a group notice, a pending change animation etc. shown in FIG. 369 (H12) or FIG. 370 (H12a)]], for example, see FIG. 358 (9) to FIG. As shown in 17), when the timer display becomes “00:00” after the display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, the strong sagohani group notice is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays may be a second preview display [for example, a preview notice by the suspension icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension shown in FIG. H3) is a preview notice (the corresponding change notice) etc. of the display mode of one bomb shown in H3).
One of the plurality of types of preview displays may be a third preview display [for example, a preview notice with the reserve icon of the display mode of Yoshimune reserve shown in FIG. 358 (18) (the variation preview) or FIG. 369 (H13 The preview notice (the corresponding change notice) etc. by the holding icon of the display mode in which the three bombs shown in) are displayed as one mass.
The second preliminary display is a preliminary display including a display that suggests that at least one time of the timer effect may be started [eg, display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3) At least one timer preview effect is started for the pre-reading notice by the hold icon (the change notice) and the pre-read notice by the hold icon of the display mode of one bomb shown in FIG. 369 (H3). Suggest that etc],
The third notice display is a notice display that may be changed and displayed from the second notice display in relation to the execution of the timer effect [eg, as shown in FIG. 358 (18) Pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold, and pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display form in which three bombs shown in FIG. 369 (H13) , Etc. It is displayed changing in connection with the fact that the timer advance presentation has been performed],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it may be possible to pay attention to a change in advance notice while expecting a certain effect.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may always execute timer effect, or may not execute timer effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, and may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

  In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, when the timer display turns into a display indicating a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. The timer display may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  Also, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started other than when the timer display is a display indicating a certain time.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display or may not display the second notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the third notice display. Further, the display means may always display the third notice display or may not display the third notice display.

  In addition, the second notice display may include only a display indicating that at least one timer effect may be started, or at least one timer effect may be started. The indication other than the indication which suggests that there is also may be included. In addition, the second preliminary announcement display may always include an indication indicating that at least one timer effect may be started, or at least one timer effect may be started. It may not include the indication which suggests that there is a certain thing.

  In addition, the second notice display may include a display indicating that at least one timer effect may be started, or at least one timer effect may be started. It may also include indications that suggest something other than something. In addition, the second notice display may include a display that always suggests that at least one timer effect may be started, or at least one timer effect may be started. It may be the one which may include the indication which does not suggest that there is a certain thing.

  In addition, the second preliminary announcement display may include a display that suggests that only at least one timer effect may be started, and effects other than at least one timer effect are also started. May contain indications suggesting that they may occur. In addition, the second preliminary announcement may include an indication that suggests that at least one timer presentation is necessarily started, or suggests that at least one timer presentation may not be initiated. May be included.

  In addition, the third preliminary announcement display may be displayed changing from only the second preliminary announcement display in relation to the execution of the timer presentation, or the timer presentation is executed. In particular, it may be displayed changing from the notice display other than the second notice display. In addition, the third preliminary announcement display may be displayed by being always changed from the second preliminary announcement display in relation to the execution of the timer presentation, or related to the execution of the timer presentation The second notice may be displayed without changing.

  In addition, the third preliminary announcement may be displayed changing from the second preliminary announcement only in connection with the execution of the timer presentation, or the timer presentation may be executed. It may be changed and displayed from the 2nd notice display in relation to other things.

  In addition, the third preliminary announcement display may be displayed by being changed from the second preliminary announcement display in relation to the execution of only the timer presentation, and the presentation other than the timer presentation may be displayed. It may be displayed changing from the second notice display in relation to what has been performed.

In addition, “the second preliminary display is a preliminary display including a display that suggests that the timer effect of the second number of times [for example, one time etc.] may be started [for example, FIG. 3) (3) (H3), and (3) (H3), at least at the pre-reading notice by the holding icon for the display mode of one bomb shown in FIG. 369 (H3), It is suggested that one timer notice production is started, etc.],
The third preliminary display is a preliminary display including a display that suggests that the timer effect of the third number of times [for example, 0 times or 3 times etc.] may be started [for example, FIG. The pre-reading notice (the said change notice) by the holding icon of the display mode of Yoshimune shown in 18) does not have the display of the bomb and does not function as a notice giving the timer notice effect (ie, 0 times It is suggested that the timer advance notice effect may be started), and the advance notice (the change advance notice) by the hold icon of the display mode in which the three bombs shown in FIG. , Etc. suggesting that at least 3 timer announcements will be started, etc.]
The second number and the third number are different numbers,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, attention may be paid to changes in the number of times the timer effect is started.

  Here, the second preliminary display may include only a display indicating that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects may be started. May include indications other than indications suggesting that the information may be displayed. In addition, the second preliminary announcement display may always include an indication that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects may be started. In some cases, the display may not include indications indicating that there is a case.

  In addition, the second preliminary announcement display may include a display that only suggests that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects may be started. Indications may be included that also suggest something other than the case. In addition, the second notice display may include a display that always suggests that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects is started It may include an indication that may not indicate that there is a case.

  In addition, the second preliminary announcement display may include a display that suggests that only the second number of timer effects may be started, and effects other than the second number of timer effects may be included. It may include an indication that it may start. In addition, the second notice display may include a display indicating that the second number of timer effects are necessarily started, or the second number of timer effects may not be started. May be included.

  Here, the third preliminary announcement display may include only a display indicating that the third number of timer effects may be started, or the third number of timer effects is started. May include indications other than indications suggesting that the information may be displayed. In addition, the third preliminary announcement display may include a display that implies that the third number of timer effects may be started, or the third number of timer effects may be started. In some cases, the display may not include indications indicating that there is a case.

  In addition, the third preliminary announcement display may include a display that only suggests that the third number of timer effects may be started, or the third number of timer effects may be started. Indications may be included that also suggest something other than the case. In addition, the third preliminary announcement display may include a display that always suggests that the third number of timer effects may be started, or the third number of timer effects is started It may include an indication that may not indicate that there is a case.

  In addition, the third preliminary announcement display may include a display indicating that only the third number of timer effects may be started, and effects other than the third number of timer effects may also be provided. It may include an indication that it may start. In addition, the third preliminary announcement may include an indication indicating that the third number of timer effects must be started, or the third number of timer effects may not be started. May be included.

  In addition, the second number and the third number may always be different numbers or may be the same number.

In addition, “The above-mentioned certain effect [for example, strong Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 358 (17), pending change animation shown in FIG. It is an effect that changes to
The second number of times [eg, once or three times etc.] is greater than the third number of times [eg, 0 times or once etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to pay attention to the remaining number of timer effects while expecting a certain effect.

  Here, a certain effect may change only from the second notice to the third notice, or from the second notice to the notice other than the third notice. It may be one. In addition, a certain effect may always change from the second notice to the third notice, or may not change from the second notice to the third notice. May be

  Also, the second number may always be greater than the third number, or may be the same number, or the second number may be smaller than the third number. There may be cases.

[Some effects [for example, the pending change animation shown in FIG. 369 (H12), etc.]] are effects that change from the second preliminary display to the third preliminary display,
The third number of times [eg, 3 times etc.] is more than the second number of times [eg, 1 time etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, as a result of a certain effect, it may be expected also to increase the number of times of the timer effect.

  Moreover, although it is general for a timer effect to show a certain time at a predetermined timing such as a pseudo run or a cut-in, when a certain effect is used for changing the number of times of the timer effect itself, there are few timing restrictions. Therefore, in this gaming machine, since it is possible to give variations to the timing at which the timer display indicates a certain time (that is, the timing at which a certain effect can be started), the interest to the timer effect may be improved.

  Here, a certain effect may change only from the second notice to the third notice, or from the second notice to the notice other than the third notice. It may be one. In addition, a certain effect may always change from the second notice to the third notice, or may not change from the second notice to the third notice. May be

  Also, the third number may always be greater than the second number, or the third number may be less than the second number. In addition, the second number of times and the third number of times may be the same. For example, the timer effect is executed and the number is digested once, and as a certain effect, the timer effect is started once. You may perform what is called what is called HOLD production | presentation which performs an indication to suggest.

In addition, “the second advance notice display is a notice display including a notice of a certain kind of notice [for example, a display of a bomb, etc.]”, for example, as shown in FIG. 370 (H7a), The hold icon (variation icon) of the display mode configured to include the display of the three bombs of the default color is displaying a notice in the corresponding symbol fluctuation display, etc.],
The third preview display is a preview display that is displayed including the certain type of preview display [for example, a display configured to include a red bomb display as shown in FIG. 370 (H13a) The reserved icon (variation icon) of the mode is displaying a notice in the corresponding symbol variation display, etc.],
The display of the certain type of notice is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is the second mode [for example, display of bomb of default color shown in FIG. 370 (H7a), etc.]
One of the plurality of modes is the third mode [eg, display of red bomb shown in FIG. 370 (H13a), etc.]
The second aspect and the third aspect are different aspects,
Indication of the notice of a certain kind according to the third aspect from the second notice indication including the indication of the certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in relation to the timer rendition being executed And the third notice display including the above may be changed and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 370 (H8a) to FIG. (H13a), the timer notice effect is performed. The display changes from a holding icon that includes the display of the three default color bombs to a holding icon that includes the display of red bombs, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a case where it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the rank up when changing from the second notice display to the third notice display.

  Also, the second notice may be displayed including only a certain type of notice, or may be displayed including a display other than a certain kind of notice. It may be Also, the second notice may be displayed without necessarily including a certain kind of notice, or may be displayed without any kind of notice. It may be one.

  Also, the third notice may be displayed including only a certain type of notice, or may be displayed including a display other than a certain kind of notice. It may be Also, the third notice may be displayed without necessarily including a certain kind of notice, and may be displayed without any kind of notice. It may be one.

  In addition, the display of a certain type of preview may be configured to be displayable only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be displayed in an aspect other than one of a plurality of modes. It may be configured as possible. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be necessarily displayed in one of a plurality of modes, or when not displayed in one of a plurality of modes It may be configured to have

  Moreover, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second mode, or may be configured to be displayable in modes other than the second mode. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be necessarily displayed in the second mode, or may be configured such that it may not be displayed in the second mode. It may be.

  Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the third aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in aspects other than the third aspect. Good. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be necessarily displayed in the third mode, or may be configured such that it may not be displayed in the third mode. It may be.

  Also, in connection with the timer rendition being executed, a second preview display including a display of a certain type of preview according to a second aspect to a third display including a display of a certain type preview according to a third aspect It may be configured such that it may be displayed changing only to the notice display of the second, and the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in relation to the timer effect being executed. It may be configured such that it may be changed and displayed to a notice display other than the third notice display including the display of the second notice and the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. Also, in connection with the timer rendition being executed, a second preview display including a display of a certain type of preview according to a second aspect to a third display including a display of a certain type preview according to a third aspect The second notice may include a display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect, which may be configured to be displayed by being changed to the notice display of the second notice according to the second aspect of the present invention. It may be configured such that it may be displayed unchanged from the display to a third preview display including a display of a certain type of preview according to the third aspect.

  In addition, in relation to the timer rendition being executed, the second preview display including the display of the certain type of preview according to the second aspect to the display including only the display of the certain type of preview according to the third aspect It may be configured such that it may be displayed in a state of being changed to the third notice display, or the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in relation to the timer effect being executed. It may be configured to be changed and displayed from the second notice display to the third notice display including a display other than the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. In addition, in relation to the timer rendition being performed, the second preview display including the display of the certain type of preview according to the second aspect to the display of the certain type of preview according to the third aspect It may be configured such that it may be displayed in a state of being changed to the third notice display, or the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in relation to the timer effect being executed. It may be configured to be changed and displayed from the second notice display to the third notice display not including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect.

  In addition, in relation to the timer rendition being executed, only the second preview display including the display of the certain type of preview according to the second aspect to the display of the certain type of preview according to the third aspect It may be configured such that it may be displayed in a state of being changed to the third notice display, or the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in relation to the timer effect being executed. It may be configured to be changed and displayed to a third notice display including a notice of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect from a notice display other than the second notice display.

  In addition, in relation to the timer rendition being executed, the second preview display including only the display of the certain type of preview according to the second aspect to the display of the certain type of preview according to the third aspect It may be configured to be changed to three notice displays and may be displayed, and displays other than a certain kind of notice display according to the second aspect in relation to the timer effect being executed. Also, it may be configured to be changed and displayed from the second notice display including the second notice display to the third notice display including the display of the certain notice according to the third aspect. In addition, in relation to the timer rendition being performed, the second preview display including the second preview display according to the second aspect to the second preview display including the second preview display according to the third aspect It may be configured to be changed to three notice displays and may be displayed, and does not include the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in relation to the timer effect being executed. It may be configured to be changed and displayed from the second preview display to the third preview display including the display of a certain type of preview according to the third aspect.

  Also, only in connection with execution of the timer rendition, the second preview display including the display of the certain type of preview according to the second aspect to the display of the certain type of preview according to the third aspect It may be configured such that it may be changed and displayed to three advance notice displays, and in relation to things other than that the timer effect has been executed, a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect It may be configured to be changed and displayed from the second preview display including the display to the third preview display including the display of the certain type of preview according to the third aspect.

In addition, “the third notice display is a notice display including notice display by an icon [for example, a hold icon, a change icon, a notice icon, etc.],
As shown in FIG. 371 (H25a ') to FIG. (H27a'), the third preliminary announcement changes from the second preliminary announcement in relation to the execution of the timer effect. In the timer announcement display mode, the display mode of the timer announcement changes to the display mode of the screen shot etc. and the increase / decrease [for example, as shown in FIG. 369 (H9) to FIG. (H13), The number of bombs is increased due to the announcement effect, or as shown in FIG. 370 (H9a) to FIG. (H13a), the number of bombs is decreased due to the timer announcement effect. At least one of which is displayed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give expectation to the change of the icon by the timer effect.

  Here, the third preview display may include only the display of the preview by the icon, or may include the display other than the display of the preview by the icon. In addition, the third advance notice may include the notice of the notice by the icon without fail, or may not include the notice of the notice by the icon.

  In addition, the third preliminary announcement may be displayed by performing at least one of change and increase or decrease of the icon from the second preliminary announcement in relation to the execution of the timer effect. In addition, in relation to the timer effect being executed, at least one of change and increase / decrease of the icon may be performed and displayed from the second notice display. In addition, the third preliminary announcement may be always displayed at least one of change and increase / decrease of the icon from the second preliminary announcement in relation to the execution of the timer effect. In addition, in relation to the timer effect being executed, at least one of change and increase / decrease of the icon may be displayed from the second notice display.

  Further, the third preliminary announcement may be displayed by performing at least one of change and increase or decrease of the icon from the second preliminary announcement only in connection with execution of the timer effect. Further, at least one of change and increase / decrease of the icon may be performed and displayed from the second notice display in relation to other than that the timer effect is performed.

  The third preliminary announcement may be displayed by changing only the icon from the second preliminary announcement in relation to the execution of the timer effect. In addition, the third preliminary announcement may be displayed by only increasing the icon from the second preliminary announcement in relation to the execution of the timer effect. In addition, the third preliminary announcement may be displayed such that only the reduction of the icon from the second preliminary announcement is performed in association with the execution of the timer effect.

In addition, the above-mentioned icon is an icon displayed corresponding to a certain symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where an expectation for a certain symbol variation display can be improved.

  Here, the icons may be displayed corresponding to only a certain symbol variation display, or may be displayed corresponding to something other than a certain symbol variation display. Also, the icon may be displayed always in correspondence with a certain symbol variation display, or may be displayed without corresponding to a certain symbol variation display.

Also, “the icon is a hold icon, a change icon, or a notice icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, it is possible to execute the timer effect a plurality of times during execution of one pattern variation display [eg, as shown in FIG. 369 (H8) to FIG. 370 (H38), one pattern While the variable display is being performed, three timer announcement effects are being executed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for the timer effect being performed a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol change display.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to execute only a plurality of timer effects during the execution of one symbol change display, or effects other than a plurality of timer effects during the execution of one symbol change display. It may be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of timer effects during the execution of one symbol variation display, or when not performing a plurality of timer effects during the execution of one symbol variation display May be configured to

  In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a plurality of timer effects only during the execution of one symbol variation display, or may be possible to execute a plurality of timer effects other than during the execution of one symbol variation display May be configured.

In addition, the second preview display is a preview display including a display that suggests that at least one of the timer effects is started [eg, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3) At least one timer preview effect is started for the pre-reading notice by the hold icon (the change notice) and the pre-read notice by the hold icon of the display mode of one bomb shown in FIG. 369 (H3). Suggest that etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the second preview display can further increase the sense of expectation for the timer effect to be started.

  Here, the second preliminary announcement may only indicate that at least one timer effect is started, or it may also indicate that other than at least one timer effect is started. It may be one. In addition, the second advance notice may always indicate that at least one timer effect is started, and may not indicate that at least one timer effect is started. It may be

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  372 to 383 are diagrams showing in stages the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 372 to FIG. 383, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, although the pachinko machine 100 comprised comprising one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in FIG. 372-FIG. 383, as in the embodiment described above, one provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices It may be Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 372 is a diagram showing an example of a timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment step by step.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 372 (A1) to FIG. 37 (A18) show that button effects are started as a result of the timer advance effect being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” in the central region is stopped and displayed. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the holding icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display mode of the reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (A1), since the symbol is stopped, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. Although the background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1) is all white, this all white color means that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of only white, as in FIG. 372 (A1), the background screen is not shown.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 372 (A1) is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. It is also good.

  FIG. 372 (A2) shows that the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started. Then, the reserve digest animation is started, the variation icon movement animation in which the first reserve icon h11 moves toward the center of the upper surface of the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS is performed, and the first reserve icon h11 is displayed as the variation icon h0 Be done. At this time, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change, and is the default display mode. The second hold icon h12 also moves to the first stage hs1 and is displayed as a first hold icon h11. At the timing shown in FIG. 372 (A2), the second decorative symbol starts variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started variable display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A3), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A4), the flash effect EF 401 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and it is shown that the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 372 (A5), after the flash effect EF 401 is erased, a button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed. In the button timer notice display BTM 1, a timer icon “10:00” indicating time is displayed above with a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the timer notice effect (button timer notice effect) is started. It is informing. That is, in this presentation example, it is suggested that the button presentation is started when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In this example, although the appearance animation of the timer button is always performed when the button timer announcement effect is performed, the appearance animation of the timer button is not performed when the button timer announcement effect is performed. It may or may not be performed. In addition, although the appearance animation of the timer button is performed, another preview effect may be started without the button timer advance effect being started. Also, in this example of the effect, the timer display is temporarily displayed as "10:00" and then the countdown is started after the display is started. However, the timer display is not displayed temporarily but the button timer announcement effect is displayed. The start may be configured to also start the countdown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A6), it is shown that the timer display countdown is started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "09: 99".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A7), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed, and a state in which fluctuation display is performed is shown. . Further, the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 indicates "00:01".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 372 (A8), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 372 (A9), the timer display is erased and the button icon emits light. The effect EF 402 is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 372 (A10), after the effect EF 402 is deleted, as shown in FIG. 372 (A11) to FIG. 37 (A12), the button icon is in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move towards

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A13), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this effect example, it is notified that the button effect is started in this way. In this production example, when the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", after performing the IN animation of the operation display, the button presentation is started, but the IN animation is not performed. The button effect may be started. Further, in this effect example, IN animation of the operation display is started from the state shown in FIG. 372 (A9), but the effects shown in FIG. 372 (A9) to FIG. (A10) are the start of IN animation. It may be an advance notification for attention, and the actual IN animation may start from FIG. 372 (A11). Further, the start timing of the IN animation of the operation display is not limited to that described above, and can be set at an appropriate timing. In addition, the aspect of the IN animation is not limited to that shown in this presentation example, and other types of IN animation described above or IN animation shown in the following example may be adopted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A14), the button icon enlarged and displayed is reduced and changed to the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a. It announces that the notice by by was started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. In this example, when the button effect is performed for the button timer advance effect, if the mode of the effect button 136 is, for example, the default mode (emitting in blue), the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode. In the case of the red button mode (light emission in red), the button image 136a is displayed in the red display mode. In this case, when the button image 136a is displayed in the red display mode, the big hit symbol mode may be more easily finalized and displayed. In addition, the light emission mode of the effect button 136 and the display mode of the button image 136a may not coincide with each other. For example, the effect button 136 may emit light in red while the button image on which the symbol of the character is drawn may be displayed, whereas the effect button 136 emits light in white. The button image 136a may be displayed in red (a red button image 136aR described later may be displayed). Further, for example, while the effect button 136 emits light in red, the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed, and the effect button 136 emits light in white, whereas the red button image 136aR A highly reliable advance notice effect may be performed by being displayed and not matching the effects. In addition, the light emission mode of the effect button 136 and the display mode of the button image 136a to be displayed may always correspond to each other, and the effect may be produced. For example, red is emitted when the effect button 136 emits red light. When the button image 136aR is displayed and the effect button 136 emits light in red, the button image may be displayed in a character pattern.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A15) shows that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, indicating that it is the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (A16), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A17) The character of the lord with the placard with the word "chance" appeared and it is shown that a notice is being made. As described above, in this example, as a result of the timer announcement effect being performed and the countdown of the timer display becoming "00:00", the button effect is started, and the result of operation of the effect button 136 in this button effect It is shown that a certain effect (in this example, a notice effect in which a character of the lord appears) is being performed. The notice by the display of the character of the lady holding this placard is lower in reliability than the notice by the background image including the character CLA of the genie shown in FIG. 373 (A14) described later. For example, the reliability of the big hit may change depending on the character of the placard, and in addition to the "chance", the "super heat" or the "iron plate" may be displayed, and the character of the lord with the same placard Even with the notice by the display, the reliability of the big hit may be different. Further, in the example of the effect, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, the advance effect is performed, but when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, The preview effect may not be performed, may be performed, and may or may not be performed. In addition, a notice other than the notice by the display of the character of the lady holding the placard may be made, for example, even if a notice etc. is made by the background image including the character CLA of the spirit being displayed. Good. In addition, even if the effect button 136 is operated, there may be a case where the advance effect is not generated. In this case, for example, only the button deletion animation in which the button image 136a is deleted may be performed, or the display manner in which the button deletion animation is not performed may be performed in one frame.

  In FIG. 372 (A18), the image of the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the super reach (SP reach) production of the VS sword player reach is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

  In this production example, when the timer display in the button timer advance production in FIG. 372 (A8) is “00:00”, the button production is started after performing the IN animation, but the IN animation is omitted. After the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A8) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A14) may start suddenly, or after the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A9) is performed. Even if the effect shown in 372 (A14) starts.

  FIG. 373 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect pattern of the button timer advance effect.

  FIGS. 373 (A1) to (A14) show how the initial value of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is longer than the initial value of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. FIG. 373 (A1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 372 (A4).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A1) shows that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. Unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 372, in the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 373 (A1), the initial value of the timer display is “60:00” and 60 seconds have elapsed since the start of the countdown. Then, it is suggested that button rendition is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A2), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "59:99". Thereafter, in this example of rendering, one pseudo-series rendering is performed, and variation display of two decorative patterns is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A3), it is shown that the second pseudo connected effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 373 (A4), the variation display of the third decorative symbol based on the second pseudo-series effect is started. Therefore, “× 3” is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen to indicate that. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 continues while the above-described effect is performed, and the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is “21: at the timing shown in FIG. 373 (A4). 28 ”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed, and a state in which fluctuation display is performed is shown. . Further, the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 indicates "00:01".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 373 (A6), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the effect EF 402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 373 (A7), after the effect EF 402 is erased, as shown in FIG. 373 (A8) to FIG. (A9), the button icon is in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move towards

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A10), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A11), the button icon enlarged and displayed is reduced and changed to a button image, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image. It notifies that the advance notice by the production has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the timer advance effect is started. Here, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image is not the default button image 136a, but the red button image 136aR is displayed. That is, in this effect example, in the IN animation of the operation display, the display mode of the button icon is the default display mode, but it is changed to the button image 136a which is the default display mode when the button image is displayed. It is shown that the red button image 136aR of the ranked up mode is displayed. In the IN animation of the operation display, the display mode of the button icon may be changed to the display mode of the red button. Further, in the IN animation of the operation display, the display mode of the button icon may be displayed in the default display mode, and may not be changed to the display mode of the red button. Further, in this effect example, when the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM 1 becomes “00:00”, the display of the button icon may be changed to the display mode of the red button. The timing at which the display mode of the button icon changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button is not limited to that described above, and may be appropriate timing. Alternatively, the button icon may be displayed in the red button display mode at the start of the display of the button timer advance notice display BTM 1. In addition, the appearance of the display mode of the red button is lower than that of the default display mode, and the button icon and the button image (red button image 136aR) are displayed in the display mode of the red button. Finally, it may be easier to stop and display in the big hit symbol form than when no button icon or button image is displayed in the display mode of. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. In this effect example, the red button image 136aR is always displayed when the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer preview effect is a predetermined time or more (for example, "60:00" or more). Although the button image 136a which is a default display mode may be displayed in some cases, the red button image 136aR may be more easily displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A12) shows that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, indicating that it is the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 373 (A13), a background image including the character CLA of the spirit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A highly reliable advance notice is displayed. As described above, in this example of effect, the button effect is started as a result of the timer advance effect being performed and the timer display countdown becoming "00:00", and as a result of operation of the effect button 136 in this button effect, It is shown that a certain effect (in this effect example, display of a background image including the character CLA of the spirits) is being performed. In the example of the effect, when the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period, the advance effect effect is performed, but when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, The preview effect may not be performed, may be performed, and may or may not be performed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 372 (A18) and thereafter are performed. Note that, in this effect example, even if the length of the initial value of the timer display is different, a certain effect to be executed may be the same effect. For example, the initial value of the timer display is "30:00", When the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect started when the timer display countdown is completed, a background image including the character CLA of the spirit may be displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is "60:00". The background image including the character CLA of the spirit may be displayed also when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect started with the completion of the timer display countdown. Further, when the length of the initial value of the timer display is different, there may be a case where the same effect is performed as a certain effect or a case where the same effect is not performed.

  In this presentation example, the button timer notice display BTM1 whose initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 372 (A5) is “10:00” is the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 373 (A1). Although it is configured to start the countdown earlier than the button timer notice display BTM 1 whose “6:00” is the symbol timer display, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the initial timer display The button timer notice display whose value is "10:00" and the button timer notice display whose initial value of the timer display is "60:00" may simultaneously start the countdown, or the initial value of the timer display may be "60" After the countdown of the button timer notice display which is “00:00” is started, the count down time of the button timer notice display whose timer display initial value is “10:00” The initial value of the timer display may be “10:00”, and the timer display initial value may be “10:00”. The countdown of the button timer notice display which is “00:00” may be completed and it may become “00:00” (for example, the timer display of the button timer notice display “the initial value of the timer display is“ 60:00 ” When 02:00 ", the initial value of the timer display may be" 10:00 ", or the countdown of the button timer advance display may start, or the button timer notification whose initial value of the timer display is" 60:00 " Even if the countdown of the button timer notice display whose initial value of the timer display is "10:00" after the display countdown is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00" After the countdown of the button timer notice display whose timer display initial value is "60:00" is started, the countdown of the button timer notice display whose timer display initial value is "10:00" starts. And both countdowns may be completed simultaneously to be "00:00".

  FIGS. 373 (B1) to (B5) show other effect patterns of the button timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 373 (A1) to (A14). FIG. 373 (B1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 372 (A4).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (B1) shows that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. In the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 373 (B1), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 373 (A1), the display mode of the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 is not the default display mode but the display mode of the red button It has become. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the button icon is displayed in the display mode of the red button on the button timer announcement display BTM 1 when the button timer announcement presentation is started. In addition, the initial value of the timer display is "60:00", which indicates that the button effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown starts. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 373 (B2) to FIG. (B5) are performed. The effects performed in the period of FIG. 373 (B2) to FIG. (B5) are the same as the effects performed in the period shown in FIG. 373 (A2) to FIG. (A10). The display mode of the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is the display mode of the red button. After the effect shown in FIG. 373 (B5) is performed, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 373 (A11) and thereafter are performed.

  In this effect example, the display mode of the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is left as the display mode of the red button, and then the red button image 136aR is displayed in the button effect. The display mode of the button icon may change from the display mode of the red button to the default display mode (rank down), or the display mode of the button icon at the start of the button timer announcement effect is the display mode of the red button Although it is assumed that the button effect is performed, the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed and an effect of rank down may be performed. In addition, when the button icon is the default display mode or the display mode of the red button, it may be changed to a lever icon imitating the shape of the lever 136V to rank up.

  FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3) show other effect patterns of the IN animation of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (A8) to (A10). FIG. 373 (C1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 373 (A7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (C1), it is shown that another effect pattern (merged IN animation) of the IN animation of the operation display is started. When this combined IN animation is started, a button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed in a semitransparent manner appears from the left end of the display screen, and a button icon 136qR of the default display mode similarly displayed in the semitransparent state. Appear from the right end of the display screen, and are directed toward the center of the display screen so as to approach each other. In this rendering example, by displaying both the display mode of the red button and the default display mode as the semi-transparent button icons, either the red button image 136aR or the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed. It suggests that it may be possible. In addition, even during display of the combined IN animation shown in this example of production, the button timer preliminary display BTM1 is displayed as it is in the effect icon display area DIS, and the button timer preliminary display BTM1 is erased after the end of the combined IN animation. It is also good. In addition, it is suggested that the red button image 136aR is confirmed to be displayed by displaying both the display mode of the red button and the button image 136a of the default display mode as the button icons displayed in a semi-transparent manner. It may be determined that the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (C2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed in the semitransparent state and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed in the semitransparent state are at the center of the display screen. It is shown that they overlap at. Then, as shown in FIG. 373 (C3), the effect EF 403 to be ruptured is displayed, and thereafter, for example, effects shown in FIG. 372 (A14) or later and effects shown in FIG. 373 (A11) or later are performed.

  FIG. 374 is a view showing step by step another effect pattern of the button timer advance effect.

  FIGS. 374 (A1) to (A15) show that the button timer preview effect is performed during the execution of the SP reach. FIG. 374 (A1) is an effect that follows, for example, FIG. 17 (26).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A1), an animation of a duel scene of the main character of the main character and the enemy player of the sword is displayed. The button timer notice effect described in the present embodiment may be an example of an effect showing an aspect being executed only during the decorative symbol variation display or an effect example showing an aspect being executed only during an SP reach. There is, of course, that it may be executed in scenes other than during decorative symbol variation display or during SP reach, for example, even during normal reach effect execution or even during a big hit game It may be carried out, or it may be carried out between a big hit game and a symbol variation display performed before and after the big hit game.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A2), the flash effect EF 401 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is shown that the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (A3), it is shown that the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. The button timer notice display BTM 1 displays a timer display of “10:00” indicating a time together with the button icon at the upper side thereof, and notifies that the button timer notice effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A4), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started, and the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 indicates "09: 99".

  Thereafter, the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously counted down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A5), the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is "00:01". It shows.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (A6), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the effect EF 402 for emitting light from the button icon is displayed around the button icon. , IN animation of the operation display is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 374 (A7), after the effect EF 402 is deleted, as shown in FIG. 374 (A8) to FIG. (A10), the button icon is in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move towards

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A11), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this effect example, it is notified that the button effect is started in this way.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A12), the button icon enlarged and displayed is reduced and changed to the button image 136a which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT below the button image 136a Is displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A13), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is shown, and it is shown that it is an operation effective period of the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 374 (A14), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A15), the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI3b) Is displayed. In this effect example, since the initial value of the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM 1 is a short time as "10:00", it is shown that an effect with a low degree of reliability is likely to be produced. Here, the cut-in image CI3b in this production example is a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image (not shown) (a cut-in image having a display mode different from the weak cut-in image and the gold cut-in image), a gold cut-in image CI3. There are three types, and the reliability of the big hit becomes high in order of weak cut-in image, red cut-in image, and gold cut-in image. In addition, the cut-in image which suggests big hit confirmation may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 17 (33) and thereafter are performed.

  FIGS. 374 (B1) to (B11) show another effect pattern of the button timer notification effect performed during execution of the SP reach. Note that FIG. 374 (B1) is an effect that continues from, for example, FIG. 374 (A2).

  As shown in FIG. 374 (B1), it is shown that the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. The button timer notice display BTM 1 displays a timer display of “60:00” indicating the time together with the button icon at the upper side thereof, and notifies that the button timer notice effect is started. That is, in this effect example, a time longer than the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 372 (A3) is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B2), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started, and the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 indicates "59: 99".

  Thereafter, the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously counted down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B3), the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is "00:01". It shows.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (B4), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased. After that, the effect EF 402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon, and IN animation of the operation display is started. Thereafter, after the effect EF 402 is erased, the button icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 374 (B5) to FIG. (B6).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B7), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this effect example, it is notified that the button effect is started in this way.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B8), the button icon enlarged and displayed is reduced and changed to a button image, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image. It notifies that the advance notice by the production has started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance effect is started. Here, in this effect example, a red button image 136aR is displayed instead of the default button image 136a as the display mode of the button image, and a state in which the rank is increased is shown. In this effect example, since the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00", it is shown that the red button image 136aR is easily displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B9), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is shown, and it is shown that it is an operation effective period of the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 374 (B10), as shown in FIG. 374 (B11), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-pattern behavior character 224Gd and The one-hundred box character product 224H is activated to emit light from the light guide plate IL, and an effect image may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is ended in the manner shown in FIG. 29 (24), and the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior article 224Gd and the one-hundred box article 224H return to their initial positions, respectively. The effect image fades out in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. Thus, in this example of production, as a result of the button timer advance production being performed and the countdown of the timer display becoming "00:00", the button production is started, and the production button 136 is operated in this button production As a result, it is shown that a certain rendering (in this rendering example, rendering by the character and character operation) is being performed. In the example of the effect, when the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period, the advance effect effect is performed, but when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, The preview effect may not be performed, may be performed, and may or may not be performed. It is needless to say that this is also applicable to the example of effect described above, and is also applicable to the example of effect described below. In addition, when the red button image 136aR is displayed after the button timer advance notice display is displayed, it may be a big hit by all means or may be a lose by all means, or from a big hit when it is a big hit There may be In addition, it is possible to indicate the big hit decision with the button timer announcement indication itself. In such an effect, the contents of the effect are determined by an effect lottery according to the result of the determination of success or failure.

  FIGS. 374 (C1) to (C2) show other effect patterns of the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B8) to (B9). FIG. 374 (C1) is an effect that follows, for example, FIG. 374 (B7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (C1), the button icon enlarged and displayed is reduced and changed to the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a. It announces that the notice by by was started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance effect is started. Here, in this effect example, a mode of displaying the button image is displayed as the default button image 136a, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 374 (B8). In this effect example, although the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00", there may be a case where the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed instead of the red button image 136aR. It is shown. As described above, even if the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance presentation effect is "60:00", the button image 136a which is the default display mode may be displayed. Further, when the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is “60:00”, the red button image 136aR may be displayed without fail. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (C2) shows that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, indicating that it is the operation valid period of the effect button 136. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B10) and thereafter are performed.

  FIG. 375 shows stages of another effect pattern of the button timer advance effect.

  Unlike the effects shown in FIG. 375 (A1) to (A8) in FIG. 375 (A1) to (A14), the display mode of the button timer advance display in the button timer advance effect is not a button icon but a lever icon. It is shown that it is FIG. 375 (A1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 372 (A4).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A1) shows that the lever timer announcement LTM1 is displayed instead of the button timer announcement BTM1 after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. In the lever timer advance notice display LTM1, a timer display of “60:00” showing time with a lever icon imitating the shape of the effect lever 136V is displayed above it, and the timer notice effect (lever timer advance notice effect) is started It is informing. That is, in this effect example, it is suggested that the lever effect is started when 60 seconds have passed since the start of the countdown. The lever timer notice effect by the lever timer notice display LTM1 is an effect in which the button timer notice effect is ranked up, and the direction when the lever timer notice effect is executed is a big hit when the button timer notice effect is executed. The symbol form is designed to be easily displayed. Thereafter, the same effects as those of FIG. 373 (A2) to FIG. (A5) are performed except that the button timer preliminary display BTM1 is changed to the lever timer preliminary display LTM1. It should be noted that even if the effect lever 136V is operated while the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is displayed, a certain effect is not started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A2), it is shown that the timer display on the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 has become "00:00". Then, an effect EF 402 in which the lever icon emits light is displayed, and IN animation of the operation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 375 (A3), after the effect EF 402 is erased, as shown in FIG. 375 (A4), the lever icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A5), the lever icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A6), the enlarged lever icon is displayed in a reduced size and changed to the lever image 136Va, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the lever image 136Va. , It has been notified that the advance notice by the lever effect has been started. That is, it is notified that the lever effect by the timer advance effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. In the example of effect, when the countdown of the timer display on the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is completed, the lever image 136Va is always displayed, but it may not be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A7), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is shown, and it is shown that it is an operation effective period of the effect lever 136V. Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 375 (A8), for example, the effects shown in FIG. 373 (A14) and thereafter are performed.

  In this effect example, the jackpot symbol form is eventually more easily stopped and displayed when the lever image 136Va is displayed in the button effect than when the button image 136a is displayed. . In addition, when the lever image 136Va is displayed, it may be a big hit by all means, may always be a gap, or may be a big hit or a gap.

  FIGS. 375 (B1) to (B4) show other effect patterns of the button timer notification effect shown in FIGS. 372 (A4) to (A12). FIG. 375 (B1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 372 (A3).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (B1), the large-size flash effect EF 404 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and a state in which the appearance animation of the timer button is started is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (B2), it is shown that the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed in the center of the display screen after the flash effect EF 404 is erased. This button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed in a size larger than that shown in FIG. 372 (A5). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed in a position where the button effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed, and has substantially the same size as the button image 136a. Here, the size of the button image 136a and the image of the button in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may have the same size or different sizes. Further, the display position of the button image 136a and the display position of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be the same, substantially the same, or different. Also in this effect example, the button timer notice display BTM 1 has a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136 and a timer display of "10:00" indicating time is displayed above it, and the button timer notice effect starts. Is notified. That is, in this presentation example, it is suggested that the button presentation is started when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Thereafter, in the button timer advance notice display BTM1, the countdown of the timer display starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (B3), it is shown that the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 indicates "00: 01".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (B4), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 372 (A13) or later or FIG. The effects shown in are performed. In the example of the effect, for example, “PUSH!” Or the like is displayed after the timer display becomes “00:00”, indicating that the operation of the effect button 136 is in a valid state. You may do it. At that time, the remaining time display meter MT may or may not be displayed. In addition, the button image 136a may not be displayed, and a display such as “PUSH!” Or “Press!” And the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed.

  FIGS. 375 (C1) to (C4) show that the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 372 (A4) to (A12) is temporarily interrupted. FIG. 375 (C1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 372 (A7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (C1), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is switched from “00:01” to the display of “pause”, and the timer display countdown is paused (temporarily suspended) It is shown that it is doing. And, at this time, it is shown that the display in which the pseudo-connected symbol moves at low speed from the upper side to the lower side is performed in the middle symbol. The low-speed movement of the pseudo run symbol is continuously performed until the same figure (C3), but the button timer notice display BTM1 is not erased during this time, and the button timer notice display BTM1 continues with the timer display showing "pause". Is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 375 (C3), after the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 375 (C4), a cut-in display consisting of a character of Tonosama and "continuation" is displayed. , It is informed that the first pseudo connected effect is started. Thereafter, for example, after the pseudo-series effect is performed one more time, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 373 (A5) and thereafter are performed. In this production example, when the display showing that there is a remaining time until the button production is started, such as "00: 01", the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM 1 temporarily displays a countdown It showed a state of stopping, but it changes to the display of "pause" when the display showing that there is no time remaining until the button effect starts, such as "00:00", is displayed. The effect of delaying the start of the button effect may be performed.

  FIGS. 375 (D1) to (D2) show that another effect pattern of the button effects shown in FIGS. 373 (A11) to (A12) is being performed. FIG. 375 (D1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 373 (A10).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (D1), when the enlarged button icon is displayed in a reduced size, the decabutton image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time display meter MT instead of the red button image 136aR. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that a button image (deca-button image 136aL) having a display mode different from that of the button icon displayed on the timer button advance notice display BTM1 is displayed. Note that the display of the big button image 136aL may be suggested by IN animation of display with a button icon and / or operation display. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. In this production example, the big hit symbol form is finally more likely to be stopped and displayed when the big button image 136aL is displayed than when the red button image 136aR is displayed. If 136aR is displayed, the big hit symbol form may be more likely to be finally displayed in a stopped state, or there is no difference in the ease of the stop sign of the big hit symbol form even if either of the two is displayed. It is also good. When the large button image 136aL is displayed, for example, characters may be displayed to promote operations such as "PUSH!" And "press!", And the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (D2), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is shown, and it is shown that it is an operation effective period of the effect button 136. After that, for example, effects shown in FIG. 373 (A13) and thereafter are performed.

  In FIG. 375 (E1) to FIG. (E3), the effect pattern in which the timer is added is performed in the countdown of the timer display in the button timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 372 (A5) to FIG. It is shown. FIG. 375 (E1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 372 (A8).

  In this effect example, when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display displayed above the button icon on the button timer notice display BTM1 as shown in FIG. 375 (E1) It is changed to "No!", And the end of the countdown of the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is denied. That is, it indicates that the timer display timer is added to continue the countdown. In addition, the effect which suggests the addition of the timer of the timer display in button timer notice display BTM1 by another notice production may be performed. Moreover, in this example of presentation, after the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display changes to the display of “No !!”, but in the button timer notice display BTM1 The timer display changes to the display of "No !!" when the display shows that there is a remaining time until the button effect starts, such as "00: 01". It is also good.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (E2), the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed at high speed and then a new timer is displayed as shown in FIG. 375 (E3). That is, in this effect example, 45 seconds are added, and as a result, it is shown that "45:00" is displayed as the timer display. The additional effect may be performed only once or may be performed multiple times. In addition to the addition of the timer, reduction of the timer due to the same effect may be performed in the middle of the countdown of the timer display, and when the timer display is "00:00", the addition effect is performed and the timer display In the middle of the countdown, additional effects may be performed. In that case, the additional effect may be different or the same depending on the timing at which the additional effect is performed. Also, in that case, the reliability to the big hit may be different or the same depending on the timing when the additional effect is performed. After that, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, and then, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 373 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

  FIG. 376 shows stages of another effect pattern of the button timer advance effect.

  FIGS. 376 (A1) to (A5) show another effect pattern following FIG. 372 (A12), showing that the lever effect is performed by replacing the lever icon when the button icon is enlarged. . FIG. 376 (A1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 372 (A12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A1), when the button icon is enlarged and displayed in the IN animation of the operation display, it is shown that it is replaced by the lever icon. That is, it is shown that the button timer advance notice effect is ranked up to the lever timer advance notice effect. As described above, animation may be performed such that it changes to another type of operation display in the middle of IN animation of the operation display. In this example, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at a position overlapping the lever image 136Va or the remaining time display meter MT, but the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed so as to overlap the lever image 136Va or the remaining time display meter MT It may be displayed or displayed as overlapping. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 may be displayed at a position not overlapping the lever image 136Va or the remaining time display meter MT, or may be displayed at the overlapping position ch. It goes without saying that this is applicable to the example of effects described above and the example of effects described below.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A2), the enlarged lever icon is displayed in a reduced size and changed to the lever image 136Va, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the lever image 136Va. , It has been notified that the advance notice by the lever effect has been started. That is, it is informed that the lever effect by the lever timer advance effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A3) shows that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, indicating that it is the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V. Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 376 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A5) displays a background image including the character CLA of the spirit. It is shown that the high-reliability notice display of the big hit is performed. Although the background image including the character CLA of the genie is not displayed even if the effect button 136 is operated in the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V, it may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 372 (A18) and thereafter are performed.

  FIG. 376 (B) shows another mode for ranking up from the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 376 (A1) to FIG. 3 (A3) to the lever timer advance notice effect. FIG. 376 (B) shows an effect following FIG. 372 (A13), and after the button icon is enlarged and the IN animation of the operation display is finished, the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed in the button image 136a. It is shown that the button image 136a is replaced with the lever image 136Va at the changing timing. As described above, the lever image 136Va may be displayed as the operation display after the IN animation of the operation display is finished. Note that after the effect shown in FIG. 376 (B) is performed, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 376 (A3) and thereafter are performed.

  FIGS. 376 (C1) to (C3) show another effect pattern of the IN animation (merged IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3). FIG. 376 (C1) is an effect that follows, for example, FIG. 372 (A9).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (C1) shows that another effect pattern of the combined IN animation is started. When the combined IN animation in this rendering example is started, button icon 136qL of the display mode of the rendering lever displayed in a semitransparent manner appears from the left end of the display screen, and the default display mode similarly displayed in a semitransparent form A button icon 136 qR appears from the right end of the display screen, and is shown approaching the center of the display screen so as to approach each other. In this effect example, either of the display mode of the effect lever and the display mode of the default effect button is displayed as a semi-transparent button icon, so that either the lever image 136Va or the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed. Suggests that it may be displayed. In addition, it is determined that the lever image 136Va is displayed by displaying both the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the effect lever and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode as the semitransparent button icons. It may be suggested that the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (C2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the effect lever displayed in semi-transparent and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed in semi-transparent are at the center of the display screen It is shown that they overlap at. Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (C3), the effect EF 403 to be ruptured is displayed, and thereafter, for example, effects shown in FIG. 372 (A14) or later and effects shown in FIG. 376 (A2) or later are performed.

  FIGS. 376 (D1) to (D6) show another effect pattern of the IN animation (merged IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3). In addition, FIG. 376 (D1) is an effect following, for example, FIG. 372 (A9).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D1) shows that another effect pattern of the combined IN animation is started. When the combined IN animation in this rendering example is started, a button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed in a semitransparent manner appears from the left end of the display screen, and the default display mode similarly displayed in a semitransparent manner. A button icon 136qR appears from the right end of the display screen, and a button icon 136qC of the display mode of the effect lever, which is also displayed in a semitransparent manner, appears from the upper end of the display screen and approaches each other. It is shown that it is going to the center. In this effect example, the lever image 136Va and the red button image 136aR are displayed by displaying three display modes of the effect lever, the red button, and the default effect button as semitransparent translucent button icons. And the default display mode button image 136a may be displayed. As described above, in the combined IN animation, three or more lever images and button images may be displayed to indicate that an operation display of any of these display modes is displayed. In addition, in this example of production, although an operation device is two types of production button 136 and production lever 136V, it is applicable also when there are three or more types. In addition, it is determined that the lever image 136Va is displayed by displaying the display mode of the effect lever, the display mode of the red button, and the display mode of the default effect button as the button icons displayed in a semitransparent manner. May indicate that the red button image 136aR is to be displayed, or may indicate that the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed. It may be decided. Further, it may be determined that two images of the lever image 136Va, the red button image 136aR, and the button image 136a of the default display mode are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed in the semitransparent state, the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed in the semitransparent state, and the semitransparent state A state is shown in which the button icon 136qC of the display mode of the effect lever displayed is overlapped at the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (D3), a burst effect EF 403 is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D4), the red button image 136aR is displayed. Note that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 372 (A14) or later and the effects shown in FIG. 376 (A2) or later may be performed. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D5) shows that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, indicating that it is the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 376 (D6), for example, effects shown in FIG. 376 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

  FIGS. 376 (E1) to (E4) show another effect pattern of the IN animation (merged IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3). FIG. 376 (E1) is an effect that follows, for example, FIG. 372 (A9).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E1) shows that the combined IN animation is started. When this combined IN animation is started, a button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed in a semitransparent manner appears from the left end of the display screen, and a button icon 136qR of the default display mode similarly displayed in the semitransparent state. Appear from the right end of the display screen, and are directed toward the center of the display screen so as to approach each other. In this rendering example, by displaying both the display mode of the red button and the default display mode as the semi-transparent button icons, either the red button image 136aR or the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed. It suggests that it may be possible.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed in the semitransparent state and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed in the semitransparent state are at the center of the display screen. It is shown that they overlap at. Then, a burst effect EF 403 is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (E3), in this effect example, the display of the button image corresponding to the button icon of any display mode displayed semi-transparently, the Deca button image 136aL along with the remaining time display meter MT It is shown that it is displayed. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that an operation display (deca-button image 136aL) not suggested in the combined IN animation is displayed. In this case, a lever image 137Va different from the button icon of any display mode displayed in a semitransparent manner may be displayed. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E4) shows that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, indicating that it is the operation effective period of the effect button 136. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 376 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

The combination of button icons displayed in the combined IN animation executed in this presentation example is not limited to the one described above, for example,
(1) In the combination of the button icon of the default display mode + the button icon of the default display mode, the button image 136a or the deca-button image 136aL of the default display mode may be displayed, even if the button image 136a is always displayed Alternatively, the button image 136a may be displayed or the large button image 136aL may be displayed.
(2) In the combination of the button icon of the default display mode + the button icon of the display mode of the red button, the button image 136a or the red button image 136aR of the default display mode may be displayed, and the red button image 136aR is always displayed May be displayed, the button image 136a may be displayed, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, the button image 136a may be displayed, and the deca button image 136aL may be displayed. Alternatively, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, and the big button image 136aL may be displayed, or the button image 136a may be displayed and the big button image 136aL may be displayed, and the red button may be displayed. The image 136aR may be displayed.
(3) In the combination of the button icon of the default display mode and the button icon of the display mode of the deca button, the deca button image 136aL may be displayed without fail, or the deca button image 136aL is displayed when the button image 136a is displayed There may be cases.
(4) In the combination of the button icon of the default display mode + the button icon of the display mode of the effect lever, the lever image 136Va may always be displayed, or the lever image 136Va is displayed when the button image 136a is displayed. May be
(5) In the combination of the button icon of the red button display mode and the button icon of the display mode of the red button, the red button image 136aR or the big button image 136aL may be displayed, or the red button image 136aR may be displayed without fail , The red button image 136aR may be displayed, and the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, or the red button image 136aR may be displayed and the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, and the lever image 136Va may be displayed. It may be displayed.
(6) In the combination of the button icon of the red button display mode and the button icon of the display mode of the deca button, the red button image 136aR or the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, or the red button image 136aR may be displayed without fail The deca-button image 136aL may always be displayed, or the deca-button image 136aL may be displayed when the red button image 136aR is displayed.
(7) In the combination of the button icon of the display mode of the red button + the button icon of the display mode of the effect lever, the red button image 136aR or the lever image 136Va may be displayed or the red button image 136aR may be displayed The lever image 136Va may always be displayed, or the red button image 136aR may be displayed or the lever image 136Va may be displayed.
(8) In the combination of the button icon of the display mode of the deca-button and the button icon of the display mode of the deca-button, the deca-button image 136aL may always be displayed, or the lever image 136 Va is displayed when the deca-button image 136aL is displayed There may be cases.
(9) In the combination of the button icon of the display mode of the deca button + the button icon of the display mode of the effect lever, the deca button image 136aL may always be displayed, or the lever image 136Va may be displayed or the deca button image 136aL May be displayed or the lever image 136Va may be displayed.
(10) In the combination of the button icon of the display mode of the effect lever + the button icon of the display mode of the effect lever, the lever image 136Va may be displayed without fail, and when the lever image 136Va is displayed and the decabutton image 136aL is displayed It may be done.
(99) Further, it is also possible to display a de-lever image larger in size than the lever image 136 Va.
(100) The above describes the combination of two semitransparent button icons, but when three or more semitransparent button icons appear, the display mode of the displayed button image or lever image is appropriately set. be able to.
(101) Furthermore, when the type of button icon appearing from the left end and the type of button icon appearing from the right end are interchanged, the appearance or appearance ratio of the appearing button image or lever image may be different.
Further, in the present embodiment, the reliability of the big hit is higher in the order of lever image 136 Va> decay button image 136 aL> red button image 136 a> button image 136 a (default), but the invention is not limited thereto.

  FIG. 377 is a diagram showing the step effect of another effect pattern of the button timer advance effect.

  FIGS. 377 (A1) to (A6) show the contents of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated while the timer display countdown on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is being performed. FIG. 377 (A1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 374 (A2).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (A1) shows that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. The button timer advance notice display BTM 1 displays a timer display of “30:00” indicating the time together with the button icon on the upper side thereof, and notifies that the button timer advance notice effect starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (A2), it is shown that the timer display countdown is started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "29: 99".

  Thereafter, the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously counted down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (A3), the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is "19:57". It shows.

  Then, at this timing, as shown in FIG. 377 (A4), when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 377 (A5), the area around the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 emits white light. A light emission effect EF 405 which is a display of an aspect is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and notifies that the effect button 136 has been operated. At this time, the display color of the light emission effect EF 405 may be different. In this case, for example, it may function as a big hit advance notice for the symbol variation display being executed. Specifically, for example, the expectation of the jackpot may be increased in the order of red> green> blue> white light emission color. In addition, the light emission effect EF 405 may have only one light emission color (for example, only white), and the light emission color may not change even when the effect button 136 is operated. In addition, the first operation of the effect button 136 may be displayed in a color other than white (for example, starting from blue). In addition, in the first operation of the effect button 136, it may be displayed from white (default color) without fail. In addition, the light emission color may be skipped on the way. For example, light may be emitted in white and then red. In addition, the light emission color may be changed in the order of white> blue> green> red. In addition, there may be a case where light emission is performed in a big hit confirmation color (for example, rainbow color etc.), for example, light may be emitted in red after being emitted in red, or may be emitted in white It may be made to emit light in rainbow color later. In addition, the chance button lamp 138 may be made to emit light in a color matched to the light emission color of the light emission effect EF405, or a game board lamp 442 or a game stand lamp 452 in a color matched to the light emission color of the light emission effect EF405. You may make it emit light. In this case, the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 and the light emission color of various lamps may be different, may be the same, or may be the same or different. In the case where the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 and the light emission color of various lamps are the same or different from each other, the jackpot reliability may be higher in the same case than in the different case, or different. The jackpot may be more reliable than in the case of the same. Further, sound effects corresponding to the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 may be output from the speaker 120. Further, the effect movable body 224 may be operated by an operation corresponding to the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405. In addition, when the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 is a color of a certain rank or more (for example, red or more (red or rainbow)), other effect means (for example, the speaker 120, effect movable body 224, various lamps 442 , 452, etc. In this case, the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 and the light emission color of the various lamps may be different, may be the same, or different from the case of the same. In the case where the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 and the light emission color of various lamps are the same or different from each other, the big hit reliability is higher than in the case where they are the same. It may be higher, or the big hit may be more reliable in the different cases than in the same case. When the light is emitted, the effect (for example, the output of the big hit finalized sound) may be performed by another effect means (for example, the speaker 120), which is also described later in the example of the effect described above. It is needless to say that the present invention is also applicable to the effects described.

  Thereafter, when the display time of the light emission effect EF 405 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 377 (A6), the light emission effect EF 405 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

  FIGS. 377 (B1) to (B7) show the contents of the effect to be performed when the effect button 136 is continuously hit during the execution of the countdown of the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1. FIG. 377 (B1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 377 (A6).

  FIG. 377 (B1) shows that the effect button 136 is continuously hit during the execution of the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1. FIG. 377 (B1) shows that the effect button 136 has been operated 10 times by continuous hitting.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B2), it is shown that the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 changes from white to blue. Even when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 may not change from white to blue. That is, whether the color of light emitted by the light emission effect EF 405 changes is determined by the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed, and the case where it can be said that the reliability of the big hit is higher as the color of light changes. is there.

  FIG. 377 (B3) shows that the effect button 136 is further continuously hit. FIG. 377 (B3) shows that the effect button 136 has been operated 10 more times by continuous hitting.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B4), it is shown that the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 changes from blue to green. Also in this case, the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 may not change from blue to green.

  FIG. 377 (B5) shows that the effect button 136 is further continuously hit. FIG. 377 (B5) shows that the effect button 136 has been operated 10 more times by continuous hitting.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B6), it is shown that the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 changes from green to red. Also in this case, the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 may not change from green to red.

  Thereafter, when the display time of the light emission effect EF 405 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 377 (B7), the light emission effect EF 405 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

  As described above, in this effect example, the big hit is made by changing the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 in accordance with the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. In this production example, while the countdown operation of the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is being performed, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed, and the display color of the light emission effect EF 405 is changed according to the number of operations. Instead of this, long press operation may be performed to change the display color of the light emission effect EF 405 according to the long press time. Further, the light emission color of the effect button 136 may be changed along with the change of the display color of the light emission effect EF 405 depending on the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. In addition, the number of times the effect button 136 is operated until the luminescent color changes may be determined by the effect lottery, for example, when emitting white light, the effect button 136 changes to blue with only one operation. There may be cases, and it may change to blue after 10 operations. Further, the number of operations of the effect button 136 until the luminescent color changes may be constant at all times. In addition, the number of operations serving as a trigger for changing the color of the light emission effect EF 405 may be changed between when it finally changes to red and when it changes to blue. In addition, according to the operation of the effect button 136, the light emission mode of another lamp (for example, part or all of the frame lamp, the chance button lamp 138, part or all of the lamps on the game board) may be changed. In addition, the light emission effect EF 405 may match the light emission color of the lamp. Also, the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 may be different from the light emission color of the lamp.

  Further, in this example, a big hit notice is given by changing the color of light emitted by the light emission effect EF 405. For example, in the button effect executed as a result of performing the button timer advance effect, it is executed by the button operation It may be suggested by the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 that the rendition of the rendition with a big hit is performed. For example, when the light emission color of the light emission effect EF 405 changes to red, a notice by a bonus may be made by a button operation in the button effect.

  FIGS. 377 (C1) to (C8) show another pattern of effects performed when the effect button 136 is operated while the timer display countdown on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is being performed. FIG. 377 (C1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 377 (A4).

  When the effect button 136 is operated during execution of the timer display countdown in the button timer notice display BTM1, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (C1), the entire button timer notice display BTM1 is covered. It is shown that the promotion animation in which the effect EF 406 is displayed is started. The promotion animation may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (C2), when the flame effect EF 406 is erased, the display form of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM 1 changes from the default display form to the display form of the red button. It is shown. That is, this effect can be said to be a back button effect that ranks up the button timer notice display BTM 1. It should be noted that in this effect example, a period for receiving the back button operation is set, and the display mode of the button icon does not change if the effect button 136 is not operated within the back button operation reception period. The display mode of the button icon may change when the back button operation acceptance period ends, or the display mode of the button icon may change at the IN animation of the operation display, or the IN animation ends. The red button image 136aR may be replaced at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously counted down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (C3), the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is "00:01". It shows.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (C4), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased. After that, the effect EF 402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon, and IN animation of the operation display is started. Thereafter, after the effect EF 402 is erased, the button icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 377 (C5) to FIG. 3 (C7).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (C8), the button icon of the display mode of the red button is enlarged, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this effect example, it is notified that the button effect is started in this way. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B8) and thereafter are performed. When the effect EF 402 turns to red, the display color of the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM 1 may also be ranked up to red. In addition, when the effect button 136 is further operated after the display mode of the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes the display mode of the red button, the display mode of the button icon may be further changed, for example, The display mode of the red button may be changed to the display mode of the gold button or the display mode of the rainbow button. Here, the display correspondence of the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 displayed in the present embodiment is, besides the default display mode and the display mode of the red button, for example, the display mode of the gold button and the display mode of the rainbow button It may be displayed.

  In FIG. 377 (D1) to (D3), the button effect is started during execution of the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance display BTM1, and the button timer advance display is performed by operating the effect button 136 in this button effect. The example of an effect which BTM1 ranks up is shown. FIG. 377 (D1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 377 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 377 (D1), the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D1), the button timer notice display The timer display in BTM1 indicates "20:24".

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D2), it is shown that the button image 136a of a small size is displayed on the left side of the button timer notice display BTM1 and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below it. . That is, it is notified that the button effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D3) shows that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, indicating that it is the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated in the mode shown in FIG. 377 (A4), for example, the effects shown in FIG. 377 (C1) and thereafter are performed (the button timer notice display BTM 1 ranks up). is there. It should be noted that if the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button timer advance notice display BTM 1 may not be ranked up, and the rank up will be performed when the operation valid period has elapsed. In some cases, the rank increase may be performed whenever the operation valid period has elapsed.

  In addition, when the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 377 (E) instead of FIG. 377 (D 2) to FIG. The character of “” may be displayed to promote the operation of the effect button 136. That is, the operation of the effect button 136 may be prompted by the button timer advance notice display BTM 1 itself. In this case, the operation mode of the effect button 136 may be prompted by changing the light emission mode of the effect button 136 (for example, emitting light in the light emission mode of white blinking).

  FIG. 378 is a diagram showing in stages the effect pattern in which the mini game is executed in the button timer advance effect.

  FIGS. 378 (A1) to (A18) show how the type of the button image (or lever image) to be finally displayed during execution of the button timer announcement effect is selected by the mini game. . FIG. 378 (A1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 374 (A2).

  When the flash effect EF 401 is erased, as shown in FIG. 378 (A1), the mini game button timer advance notice display MTM1 is displayed to produce the start of the mini game. That is, when the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 is displayed and the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 378 (A1), at the lower right corner of the display screen, a lever icon imitating the effect lever 136V first Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 378 (A2), a button icon of the display mode of the red button is displayed so as to overlap the lever icon. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 378 (A3), a button icon of a default display mode is displayed so as to overlap the button icon of the display mode of the red button. As described above, the button image (lever image) displayed as a result of the button timer advance notice display BMT1 is selected from among a plurality of types according to the result of the mini game. Note that a button timer advance notice such as roulette hold or selection hold may be displayed. In this case, for example, it may be determined by the operation of the player or may be determined at a certain timing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A4), a timer display of "30:00" indicating a time is displayed at the upper part of the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, and further, the mini game button timer notice display MTM1. "PUSH !!" is displayed on the screen to indicate that the user is urged to hit the effect button 136 continuously. The operation effective period is then started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A5), a countdown of the timer display is started, and it is shown that the timer display in the mini game button timer notice display MTM 1 indicates “29: 99”. . The start timing of the operation valid period may be the same as the countdown timing of the timer display in the mini game button timer notice display MTM 1 or the start timing of the operation valid period may be earlier. The countdown start timing may be earlier.

  After the effective period of operation starts, continuous hitting of the effect button 136 is started in the mode shown in FIG. 378 (A6), and when the effect button 136 is operated a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times), FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, a character of the lord appears and among the three button icons (lever icon, button icon of red button display mode, button icon of default display mode), As a result of cutting the button icon of the default display mode and performing the button timer advance presentation effect, an effect of denying the appearance of the button image 136a which is the default display mode may be performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A8), in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, the button icon of the default display mode is erased, and the button icon of the display mode of the red button appears on the foreground. Note that the timer display countdown continues, and the timer display indicates "24: 55" at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (A8).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 378 (A9), when the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed and the effect button 136 of the prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times) is further operated, FIG. 378 (A10) As shown, in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, the character of the lord appears again, and this time, the display mode of the red button of the two button icons (the button icon of the display mode of the lever icon and the red button) In some cases, an effect of negating the appearance of the red button image 136aR may be performed as a result of cutting the button icon of as a result of the button timer preliminary effect being performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A11), in the mini game button timer advance notice display MTM1, the button icon of the display mode of the red button is erased, and the lever icon appears on the front side. Note that the timer display countdown continues, and the timer display indicates “12:31” at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (A11). When only the lever icon remains as the final form of the mini game, the character “PUSH !!” is not displayed as a success of the mini game, but may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the timer display in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 is continuously counted down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A12), the timer display in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 is “00 : 01 "is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A13), when the timer display on the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display is erased and the effect EF 402 in which the lever icon emits light is around the button icon. It is displayed and IN animation of the operation display is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 378 (A14), after the effect EF 402 is erased, as shown in FIG. 378 (A15), the lever icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A16), the lever icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A17), the enlarged lever icon is displayed in a reduced size and changed to the lever image 136Va, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the lever image 136Va. , It has been notified that the advance notice by the lever effect has been started. That is, it is notified that the lever effect by the button timer advance effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. Even when the effect button 136 is not operated or when the number of operations is too short to reach the lever icon, the lever image 136Va may be displayed when the timer display is "00:00". For example, when the timer display is "00:00" with the button icon displayed, the IN animation of the operation display is not the IN animation by the lever image shown in FIG. 378 (A14) to the figure (A15). Alternatively, the lever image 136Va may be displayed after the display shown in FIG. 378 (B2) to the same animation (B4) shown in FIG. 378 (B4). In addition, when the effect button 136 is not operated or when the number of operations is too short to reach the lever icon, the lever image 136Va is not displayed, and a display corresponding to the displayed button icon is displayed. You may

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A18) shows that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, indicating that it is an operation effective period of the effect lever 136V. After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B11) and thereafter are performed.

  FIGS. 378 (B1) to (B5) show another effect pattern in which the type of the button image (or lever image) to be finally displayed during execution of the button timer advance effect is selected by the mini game. It shows how it is. FIG. 378 (B1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 378 (A6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (B1), the timer display “00: While the button icon of the default display mode can not be cut even though the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed. It is shown that it became "00". Thereby, three button icons (lever icon, button icon of display mode of red button, button icon of default display mode) remain in the mini game button timer notice display MTM 1 and any one of them is a button timer notice effect It is informed that it becomes an operation display to be displayed as a result of the operation. Actually, when it is determined that the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed as the operation display by the effect lottery, the button icon of the default display mode no matter how many times the effect button 136 is operated Is not erased. When it is determined that the red button image 136aR is displayed as the operation display by the effect lottery, the button icon of the default display mode may be deleted, but the button icon of the display mode of the red button is It will not be erased. Even when the lever image 136Va or the red button image 136aR is displayed as an operation display by effect lottery, the button icon of the default display mode may not be deleted.

  Then, when the timer display on the mini game button timer advance notice display MTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased, the effect EF 402 emitting the button icon is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display starts Be done. After that, as shown in FIG. 378 (B2), after the effect EF 402 is erased, as shown in FIG. 378 (B3) to FIG. 3 (B4), a button icon of the default display mode among the three button icons Moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (B5), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display is finished. In this effect example, it is notified that the button effect is started in this way. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A12) and thereafter are performed.

  FIG. 379 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect pattern of the button timer advance effect effect.

  FIGS. 379 (A1) to (A5) show how the button timer notice display BTM1 is ranked up while the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is being executed. FIG. 379 (A1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 374 (A2). Further, the effects shown in FIG. 379 (A1) to FIG. 3 (A3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 377 (A1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (A4), it is shown that the promotion animation in which the flame effect EF 406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM 1 is started. It should be noted that there may be a case in which a promotion animation is performed but a rank promotion of button timer notice display BMT1 is not performed and a promotion animation is performed. In addition, depending on the display mode of the promotion animation, it may be suggested that the button timer notice display BTM 1 may be easily upgraded. For example, when the red promotion animation in which the flame effect EF406 is red is performed The button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be always ranked up. In addition, a stumbling effect may be performed asking whether or not to step up when a promotion animation is performed. In addition, the button timer notice display BTM1 may be ranked up due to another notice effect. It goes without saying that this is also applicable to the timer announcement effect described above and the timer announcement effect described below.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 379 (A5), when the flame effect EF 406 is erased, the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM 1 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button. It is shown. The display mode of the lever icon may be stepped up in addition to the display mode of the red button. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 377 (C3) and thereafter are performed. In addition, after the display mode of the button icon changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button, it may be ranked up to the lever timer notice display, or the button timer notice display of the default display mode is the lever timer notice display You may rank up to

  In this presentation example, the display mode of the button icon changes from the default display mode when the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM 1 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button. The jackpot symbol form is configured to be more easily stopped and displayed finally than when it was not.

  FIGS. 379 (B1) to (B3) show how the button timer notice display BTM1 is further ranked up while the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is being executed. FIG. 379 (B1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 379 (A5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (B1), the timer display is continuously counted down in the button timer notice display BTM1, and the timer display is “11:57 at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (B1). "Is shown. In addition, the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is a display mode of the red button.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (B2), the flame effect EF 406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM 1 and it is shown that the second promotion animation is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 379 (B3), when the flame effect EF 406 is erased, the button icon display mode on the button timer notice display BTM 1 changes from the red button display mode to the lever icon. It is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 378 (A12) and thereafter are performed.

  FIGS. 379 (C1) to (C4) show that the button timer notice display BTM 1 is started and then the preparation for the button display is started before the countdown of the timer display starts, and the button timer notice effect is started. It shows a state of giving notice. FIG. 379 (C1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 374 (A2).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (C1) shows that the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. In this effect example, the timer display of “10:00” indicating time is not displayed together with the button icon, and “in preparation” is displayed, which suggests that the button timer advance presentation effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (C2), it is shown that a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since “Under preparation” is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1. Also in this case, the button timer preliminary display BTM1 continues to display "under preparation".

  After that, when the start timing of the button timer announcement effect comes, as shown in FIG. 379 (C3), the timer display changes from the display of “Preparing” to the display of “30:00” indicating the time, and then the countdown It is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (C4), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "29:99". After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

  In this production example, in order to suggest that the timer advance presentation production is started, the display of the time is displayed on the timer display instead of the display of “under preparation”, but, for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 379 (D1) to FIG. 3D (D2), the characters “STANDBY” may be displayed instead of the effects shown in FIG. Also, needless to say, in the embodiments described above and the embodiments to be described thereafter, the present invention is also applicable to those for performing a preliminary display (in preparation) for suggesting that timer preliminary effects are to be started. can do.

  FIGS. 379 (E1) to (E4) show how the button timer notice display BTM1 is ranked up while the button timer notice display BTM1 is being displayed. FIG. 379 (E1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 379 (C2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (E1), the promotion animation is started in which the flame effect EF 406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1 in which the display of "under preparation" is made. The situation is shown. It should be noted that there may be a case in which a promotion animation is performed but a rank promotion of button timer advance notice display BTM 1 is not performed. In addition, depending on the display mode of the promotion animation, it may be suggested that the button timer notice display BTM 1 may be easily upgraded. For example, when the red promotion animation in which the flame effect EF406 is red is performed The button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be always ranked up. In addition, a stumbling effect may be performed asking whether or not to step up when a promotion animation is performed. In addition, the button timer notice display BTM1 may be ranked up due to another notice effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 379 (E2), it is shown that the display mode of the button control on the button timer notice display BTM1 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button and ranks up.

  Thereafter, when the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect comes, as shown in FIG. 379 (E3), the timer display changes from the display of “Preparing” to the display of “30:00” indicating time, and thereafter, the countdown It is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (E4), it is shown that the timer display countdown is started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "29: 99". After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 377 (C3) and thereafter are performed.

  In this production example, the display of "under preparation" is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1 to indicate the start of the button timer notice effect. For example, FIG. 379 (F1) to FIG. 3F (F2) As shown in), the button timer notice display BTM1 may perform swinging animation in which the button timer notice display BTM1 swings up and down, and may notify the player that the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 will start soon. As a result, the player may be able to have a sense of anticipation that the timer display countdown in the button timer advance presentation effect is started. It should be noted that even if a swing animation is performed, a false button timer announcement effect may not be performed if the timer display countdown is not performed. If a swing animation is performed, the timer display countdown always follows It may be made to be known. After the effect shown in FIG. 379 (F2) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 379 (C3) or later is performed. Moreover, needless to say, it is also possible to apply to the swing animation of the aspect described in the embodiment described so far and the effect example described later.

  FIG. 380 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect pattern of the button timer notification effect.

  FIGS. 380 (A1) to (A3) show that the effect of switching to the timer display is performed while the display that is being prepared on the button timer notice display BTM1 is being performed. FIG. 380 (A1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 379 (C2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (A1), a button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed, and in the button timer notice display BMT1, "in preparation" is displayed above the button icon. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (A1), a state in which a character CHM of Princess Chibi with a 10 t iron hammer appears and a button timer notice display BTM1 is about to be caught.

  FIG. 380 (A2) shows a state after the character CHM of Little Princess is approaching the button timer notice display BTM1. The number of times that the character CHM of Little Princess hits the button timer notice display BTM 1 may be one or more times, or may be hit rarely.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (A3), an effect EF 407 that bursts is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 379 (C3) and later are performed. Alternatively, if the effect EF 407 disappears, there may be a case in which the button timer notice display BTM 1 also disappears.

  FIGS. 380 (B1) to (B5) show how the display position of the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed before the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 starts. FIG. 380 (B1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 379 (C2).

  In this effect example, when changing from the display of "in preparation" to the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1, a moving animation in which the button timer advance notice display BTM1 moves to the center of the display screen is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 380 (B1), when the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 moves to the center of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 380 (B2), the button icon is enlarged and displayed above A timer display of "30:00" indicating a time is displayed, and then the countdown is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is moved and displayed before the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 starts. Further, in this effect example, although displayed in substantially the same size as the button image 136a as the operation display, the timer display may be counted down in the size shown in FIG. 380 (B1) without enlargement. Alternatively, the button icon may be displayed in a size different from that of the button image 136a to count down the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (B3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "29: 99".

  Thereafter, the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously counted down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (B4), the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is "00:01". It shows.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (B5), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A11) or later, or FIG. The effects shown in are performed.

  Also, in FIG. 380 (B1), when the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is moved and displayed at the center of the display screen, the display of “under preparation” is erased, but as shown in FIG. 380 (C1) The button timer notice display BTM1 is moved to the center of the display screen while the “under preparation” display is displayed, and then the button timer notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 380 (C2), and then FIG. The effects shown below may be performed. In this case, the display of "under preparation" may be erased while the button timer notice display BTM1 is moved and displayed. Further, the display position of the button timer notice display BTM1 may be changed without moving and displaying the button timer notice display BTM1.

  FIGS. 380 (D1) to (D16) show how a plurality of button timer announcements are displayed, and the display of “under preparation” is performed in each of them. FIG. 380 (D1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 379 (C1). It is needless to say that this effect example is also applicable to the effect example in which the under-provisioning display is performed in each of the plurality of timer notices described above.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D1), the flash effect EF 401 is displayed above the button timer notice display BTM1 in which the display of "under preparation" displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen is performed. It is suggested that the button timer notice display is further displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (D2), it is shown that the button timer advance notice display BTM2 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. The newly displayed button timer notice display BTM2 is also a notice that "in preparation" is displayed instead of the timer display, and that the button timer notice effect is started.

  After that, when the start timing of the first button timer announcement effect comes, as shown in FIG. 380 (D3), in the button timer announcement display BTM1 displayed below among the two button timer announcements displayed up and down. The timer display changes from the display of "in preparation" to the display of "10:00" indicating the time, and then the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D4), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "00: 99".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (D5), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 380 (D6), the timer display is erased and the IN animation of the operation display Is started. At this time, an effect EF 402 in which the button icon emits light before the start of IN animation may be displayed around the button icon. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 380 (D7) to (D9), the button icon related to the button timer advance notice display BTM1 moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at this time, the button timer notice display BTM2 moves downward during the IN animation of the button timer notice display BTM1, and moves to the position where the button timer notice display BTM1 was displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D10), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and it is notified that the IN animation of the operation display is ended and the button effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D11), the button icon enlarged and displayed is reduced and changed to the button image 136a which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT below the button image 136a Is displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D12) shows that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, indicating that it is the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (D13), the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D14). As shown at 380 (D15), the weak cut-in image CI3b is erased. At this time, the second button timer advance notice display BTM2 remains the indication of "under preparation".

  After that, when the start timing of the second button timer announcement effect comes, as shown in FIG. 380 (D16), the timer display on the button timer announcement display BTM 2 shows “Time in preparation” to “30:00” The display is switched to and then the countdown is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B3) and later are performed. In addition, while the countdown of the timer display in one button timer notice display is being performed, the countdown of the timer display of the other button timer notice display may be started, or the countdown of the timer display in the one button timer notice display. When the countdown of the timer display in the other button timer notice display is completed while the other button timer notice display is being performed, an animation is performed to move downward while counting down the timer display in the one button timer notice display. You may move it downward by interrupting the countdown. Also, regardless of the interruption / movement of the countdown of the timer display, the remaining time displayed on the timer display may be aligned after the movement. It goes without saying that this is also applicable to the embodiments described below as well as to the example of effect described above. In addition, the symbol variation display may end without starting the countdown display during preparation, and the next symbol variation display may be straddled.

  FIG. 381 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect pattern of the button timer advance effect effect.

  FIGS. 381 (A1) to (A15) show other patterns of effects shown in FIGS. 380 (D1) to (D16), and a second button corresponding to a second button timer notification effect It shows that the lever timer announcement LTM 2 appears in place of the timer announcement BTM 2. In the first button timer notice display BTM1 and / or the second button timer notice display BTM2, the button icon of the display mode of the red button is displayed instead of the button icon of the default display mode and the button icon of the display mode of the red button It may be done. Here, FIG. 381 (A1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 380 (D1). Incidentally, the effects shown in FIG. 381 (A1) to FIG. 38 (A15) are the same as FIG. 380 (D2) to FIG. 380 (D2) except that the second button timer notice display BTM2 is changed to the lever timer notice display LTM2. Since it is the same as D16), the description is omitted. Further, after the effect shown in FIG. 381 (A15) is performed, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 378 (A12) and the subsequent steps are performed. In this case, the first button timer notice display BTM1 may always be taken first, and the lever timer notice display LMT2 may be taken first. Also, the first button timer notice display BTM1 may be taken first, or the lever timer notice display LMT2 may be taken first. It goes without saying that this is also applicable to the example of effect described above and the example of effect to be described later. Further, the symbol variation display may be ended without starting the countdown of the timer display while the preparation indication is being performed, and the preparation indication may be carried over until the symbol variation display to be performed next. It is needless to say that this is also applicable to the example of effect described above and the example of effect to be described later.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 381 (B1) to (B10), it is shown that another effect pattern of the button timer advance effect is performed, and the squib in the display of the bomb, not the countdown of the timer display. It is shown that the display mode of is to notify the timing when the button effect is started. FIG. 381 (B1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 205 (B1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (B1), it is shown that a button timer advance notice effect is started. In this rendering example, a timer display BOMB of a bomb is displayed with a squib added, and a character BYM of the Tonosama appears, and an animation (extension animation) for extending the squib is performed. In the example of effect, a button icon is also displayed on the timer display BOMB of the bomb, and it is suggested that the button effect is started when the timer display BOMB of the bomb explodes. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 381 (B2), after the squib of the timer display BOMB of the bomb is extended by the extension animation, the extension animation is completed, and as shown in FIG. 381 (B3), the tip of the squib is ignited. The button timer announcement effect is started. In the button timer notification effect in this effect example, the effect of the countdown is performed in such a manner that the squib becomes short as time passes, and the start timing of the button effect executed as a result of the button timer notification effect is It is made to notify by the length of the fuse wire. As shown in FIG. 381 (B3) to FIG. (B5), the effect of the countdown is performed until the extinguishing line disappears.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 381 (B5), when the squib disappears and sparks at the tip of the squib reach the main body of the timer display BOMB of the bomb, as shown in FIG. 381 (B6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, After the explosion effect EF 304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol substantially at the center of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 381 (B7), the remaining time display meter MT with the button image 136a which is the default display mode. Is displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (B8) shows that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, indicating that it is the operation valid period of the effect button 136. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (B9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (B10) "is super hot !!" The character of is displayed large. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that as a result of the button presentation according to the button timer announcement presentation being performed, the preliminary announcement display by the characters of "super heat !!" is performed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 16 (16) and later are performed.

  It is needless to say that this effect example can be applied to any of the timer advance notice effects using the bomb timer display BOMB described above. In addition, similarly to the example of the timer announcement effect different from the button timer announcement effect described later, the same applies to the case where the timer display BOMB of the bomb not suggesting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. . Moreover, it can carry out suitably also about the combination with the presentation demonstrated so far.

  FIG. 382 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect pattern of the button timer advance effect effect.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 382 (A1) to FIG. 38 (A9), it is shown that a new button timer preview effect is started as a result of the button timer preview effect being performed and the button effect being performed. FIG. 382 (A1) is an effect that follows, for example, FIG. 374 (A2). In addition, the effects in the period of FIG. 382 (A1) to FIG. 38 (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A3) to FIG.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 382 (A6) in the operation valid period of the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (A7) is changed to the button image 136a. It is shown that the new button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed at the center of the display screen. The button timer advance notice display BTM2 is displayed in a size larger than that shown in FIG. 382 (A1). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button timer advance notice display BTM 2 is displayed in the same size as the button image 136 a at the position where the button effect was performed and the button image 136 a was displayed. . Also in this effect example, the button timer notice display BTM 2 has a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136 and a timer display of "30:00" indicating time is displayed above it, and the button timer notice effect starts. Is notified. In this production example, as a result of the button timer announcement production being performed and the button presentation being performed, a new button timer announcement display BTM2 is displayed, and a new button timer announcement presentation is performed. In place of the button timer notice display BTM2, for example, a timer notice display TM as shown in FIG. 201 may be displayed. In addition, as a result of the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 being counted down in the above-mentioned timer notice effect, not after the button timer notice effect (after the display of “attention!”), The timer notice effect (or A button timer notice effect may be performed.

  Thereafter, the button timer notice display BTM2 displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is once erased, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (A8) The effect EF 401 is displayed, and it is shown that the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 382 (A9), it is shown that the erased button timer notice display BTM2 is reduced and displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. The button timer notice display BTM 2 displays a timer display of “30:00” indicating a time along with the button icon at the upper side thereof, and notifies that the button timer notice effect is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B3) and thereafter are performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 382 (B1) to (B5) show that button effects are started as a certain advance effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed. FIG. 382 (B1) is an effect that follows, for example, FIG. 374 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display area, the timer advance notice effect is started. In the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1, “10:00” is displayed, which indicates that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B2), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "09: 99".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 382 (B3), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B4), the effect EF 407 of explosion is displayed on the display screen. Displayed approximately in the center. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B5), the enlarged button icon is displayed, and it is notified that the button effect is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A12) and thereafter are performed.

  In this production example, as a result of the timer preview production being performed, an example in which the button production was performed as a certain preview production is shown, but other previews (for example, display of "Go! "Etc." may be displayed. Further, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer advance presentation being performed, button presentation may be performed necessarily.

  Further, in this example of the effect, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, the explosion effect EF 407 is displayed, and then the button icon is displayed. As shown in (B3), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", instead of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 382 (C), attention to notice is given. The word "attention!" May be displayed to prompt the user. After the character of "attention!" Is displayed, the button icon may be displayed and the button effect may always start, or after the character of "attention!" Is displayed, the button effect is displayed. It may or may not be started. In addition, after the effects shown in FIG. 382 (C) are performed, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 201 (A25) or later, the effects shown in FIG. 382 (B4) or later, the effects shown in FIG. 382 (B5) or later Etc. In this case, a button effect may be displayed without fail, and another effect may be displayed when the button effect is displayed and the button effect.

  Moreover, it may change to the display of "attention!" Shown to FIG. 382 (C), and the effect shown to FIG. 382 (D1)-the figure (D2) may be performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 382 (B3), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. A balloon with the characters "!!" is displayed. At this time, although "00:00" is continuously displayed on the timer notice display TM1, at least a part is hidden by the balloon and it is considered as difficult to view. The timer advance notice display TM1 may overlap the balloon to make the timer notice display TM1 visible. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be erased at the timing when the display YMF of the face of the lord and the balloon are displayed, or the display YMF of the face up of the lord after the timer notice display TM1 is erased and the balloon. May be displayed. Further, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 382 (D1), a part of the timer notice display TM1 is covered by the balloon, but the whole timer notice display TM1 may be covered by the balloon. Also, the timer announcement display TM1 may be hidden by the display YMF of the face-up of the lord. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (D2), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 201 (A25) or later, the effects shown in FIG. 382 (B4) or later, the effects shown in FIG. 392 (B5) or later, and the like are performed. In the case where two or more effect displays are performed, one of the effect displays being overlapped with the other effect display is appropriately performed in the example of the effect described above and the example of the effect shown after this There is.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 382 (E1) to FIG. 38 (E4) show another display mode of the button timer notice display. FIG. 382 (E1) is an effect that follows, for example, FIG. 374 (A2).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (E1) shows that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. The button timer notice display BTM 1 in this example of presentation has a button icon and a timer display of “10:00” indicating a time superimposed on the button icon to indicate that the button timer notice effect is to be started. The display mode of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 382 (E1) is also applicable to an example of effect that performs another button timer advance notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (E2), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "09: 99".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 382 (E3), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the IN animation of the operation display is started. Note that IN animation may be performed while the timer display is displayed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 382 (F1) to FIG. 38 (F2) shows another display mode of the button timer notice display. FIG. 382 (F1) is an effect that follows, for example, FIG. 374 (A3).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (F1), a state in which the button timer notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed is shown. Thereafter, the timer display countdown is started. In the case where the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is enlargedly displayed, it may be configured that the big hit symbol form may be more easily stopped and displayed finally than when not enlargedly displayed. Moreover, the timing which button timer alerting | reporting display BTM1 carries out expansion display is not limited to what was shown in this presentation example, and can be performed at an appropriate timing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 382 (F2), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the IN display of the operation display is performed, and then defaulted as the operation display. The button image 136a, the red button image 136aR, the lever image 136Va, or the large button image 136aL, which are the display modes, are displayed, and the button effect is started.

  FIG. 383 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect pattern of the button timer advance effect.

  FIGS. 383 (A1) to 383 (A3) show another display mode of the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIGS. 379 (C1) to 3 (C3). FIG. 383 (A1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 374 (A2).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (A1) shows that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. In this effect example, the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is not displayed together with the button icon, and "in preparation" indicating that the button timer advance presentation effect is started is displayed. "Is displayed superimposed on the button icon. Incidentally, the effects shown in FIGS. 383 (A1) to (A3) are the same as those in FIG. 379 except that the display of “under preparation” and the timer display are superimposed on the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1. (C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. After the effect shown in FIG. 379 (C3) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 382 (E2) or later is performed.

  FIGS. 383 (B1) to (B3) show another display mode of the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIGS. 379 (C1) to (C3). FIG. 383 (B1) is an effect that follows from FIG. 374 (A2).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (B1) shows that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. In this effect example, the display of "under preparation" is performed above the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1, and the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is displayed superimposed on the button icon. According to this effect example, it may be possible to easily grasp how many seconds the timer is while displaying the "under preparation" display. Further, in this case, an effect may be performed such that the number of seconds of the timer displayed on the button icon is added or decreased while displaying "under preparation", or the button timer advance notice display BTM 1 is ranked up. . Needless to say, such an effect is applicable to other effect examples.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (B2), it is shown that a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since “under preparation” is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1. Also in this case, in the button timer advance notice display BTM 1, the display of “under preparation” is continuously performed, and the timer display on the button icon also remains “10:00”.

  Thereafter, when the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect comes, as shown in FIG. 383 (B3), the display of "under preparation" is erased, and thereafter, the countdown is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 382 (E2) and thereafter are performed.

  FIGS. 383 (C1) to 383 (C3) show that the timer display is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1 and the countdown does not start immediately, and that preparation is being performed. FIG. 383 (C1) is an effect that follows, for example, FIG. 374 (A2).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (C1) shows that the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. In this effect example, “10:00” is displayed as a timer display above the button icon on the button timer advance notice display BTM1. Note that, in this effect example, the countdown is not started for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the timer display is displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (C2) shows that a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since “10:00” is displayed on the button timer advance notice display BTM1. Also at this time, the timer display remains "10:00". Note that, for example, the various effects described above may be performed in a period in which the display is continued with the timer display “10:00”, and for example, the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed in a rocking manner. May be Thereafter, the timer display countdown starts.

  FIG. 383 (C3) shows that 10 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 has started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B5) and thereafter are performed. As in this production example, counting down the timer display after a predetermined time has elapsed since the button timer notice display BTM 1 is displayed applies to the production examples described above and also for the production example described above It goes without saying that it is possible.

  In FIG. 383 (D1) to (D8), the button timer notice effect is started during the variation display of the decorative symbol, and continues until the transition to SP reach, and the button effect related to the button timer notice effect during SP reach is It shows how it is being done. FIG. 383 (D1) is an effect that follows, for example, FIG. 372 (A4).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D1) shows that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. In the button timer notice display BTM1, a timer icon of “90:00” indicating time is displayed above with a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the timer notice effect (button timer notice effect) is started. It is informing. That is, in this example of presentation, it is suggested that button presentation is started 90 seconds after the countdown starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D2), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "89:99".

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D3) shows transition to SP reach via reach effect. At this time, the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 indicates "31:48". Note that, in this effect example, the display color of the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 changes at the timing shown in FIG. 383 (D3), but it may be a constant color without changing. Further, the display color of the timer display may be changed in accordance with the background color, or may be changed in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, when the display color of the timer display changes, the timer preview effect by the button timer preview display BTM 1 may increase the chance. In the case of changing the display color of the timer display in a certain period to produce a chance advance of the timer advance presentation effect, only the player who knows the timing at which the chance up effect is performed can enjoy the effect. is there.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D4) shows that an animation of SP reach is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 383 (D4), when the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the IN animation of the operation display is started in the manner described above.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D5), the button icon enlarged and displayed is reduced and changed to the button image 136a which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT below the button image 136a Is displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D6) shows that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, indicating that it is the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 383 (D7), a gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D8). In this effect example, since the initial value of the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is as long as "90:00", it is shown that a highly reliable effect is likely to be produced. Here, a weak cut-in image or a red cut-in image may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 17 (33) and thereafter are performed. In addition, there may be cases where the effect example other than FIG. 17 (33) follows.

  FIGS. 383 (E1) to (E7) show how button timer notice effects are performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. FIG. 383 (E1) is an effect that follows, for example, FIG. 372 (A3).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E1), it is shown that the game ball enters the first special view starting port 230 and the suspension is increased by one while the decorative symbol is fluctuatingly displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E2), the flash effect EF 401 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and it is shown that the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 383 (E3), it is shown that the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF 401 is erased. In the button timer advance notice display BTM 1, a “in preparation” display showing that preparation is underway is displayed together with a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and notices the start of the button timer advance notice effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E4), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The stop display is shown in combination, and it is shown that the swing fluctuation is performed. At this time, in the button timer notice display BTM1, the display of "under preparation" is still continued.

  After that, FIG. 383 (E5) shows a state in which the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “Holis 4-Decorative 1-Decorative 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E6), it is shown that the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started. After that, when the start timing of the button timer announcement effect comes, as shown in FIG. 383 (E7), the timer display changes from the display of “Preparing” to the display of “10:00” indicating the time, and then the countdown It is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 372 (A6) and thereafter are performed.

  In this production example, an example is shown in which the symbol variation display is straddled while the "in preparation" display is being performed on the button timer notice display BTM1, but the symbol is displayed while the timer display is counting down. The variable display may be crossed. In addition, there are also cases where it follows the other presentation examples.

According to the above description,
“Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]”
Operation means [eg, effect button 136 etc.]
A game console equipped with
The display unit is a unit that may display an operation display [for example, display of a button image 136a shown in FIG. 374 (A12)].
The operation display is a display indicating that the operation by the operation means is effective,
The display unit is a unit that may display a timer display [for example, a button timer notice display BTM1 or the like shown in FIG. 374 (A3)].
The timer display is a display for giving a notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed [for example, in the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 374 (A3), 10 seconds after the countdown of the timer display starts. It has been announced that the button production will start later, etc.]
The timer display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 374 (A3) to FIG. (A6), a button The timer announcement display BTM1 counts down the timer display until "00:00" indicating the timing when the button effect starts after the countdown starts, etc.],
When the timer display becomes a display mode after the timer display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first case [for example, as shown in FIG. 374 (A3) to FIG. (A6), a button timer When the timer display on the button timer preliminary display BTM1 becomes “00:00” after the preliminary display BTM1 is displayed, etc.], the operation display may be displayed,
When the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 374 (A12) to FIG. (A15), When the effect button 136 is operated after the image 136a is displayed, the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, etc.],
Even if the operation means is operated while the timer display is displayed, execution of the certain effect is not started [eg, as shown in FIG. 377 (A1) to FIG. (A6), in the button timer advance display BTM1 Even if the effect button 136 is operated during the timer display countdown, the weak cut-in image CI3b is not displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible not to miss the timing at which the operation display is displayed, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Here, the display means may be a case in which only the operation display may be displayed, or a display other than the operation display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be one in which the operation display is always displayed or may be one in which the operation display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the operation display may indicate only that the operation by the operation means is effective, or may indicate other than that the operation by the operation means is effective. The operation display may always indicate that the operation by the operation means is effective, or may not indicate that the operation by the operation means is effective. In addition, the operation display is displayed before the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective starts, and the period in which the operation of the operation means is activated is started after the operation display is displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, when there is an operation during the period of the operation valid period, the operation valid period may be configured to end (for example, one timer announcement is displayed for one push / one button). If it is, etc.). This is also applicable to the embodiments described above and the embodiments described hereinafter.

  In addition, even if there is an operation during the operation valid period, the valid period may not be finished until the valid period ends until the preset operation valid period ends (for example, plural ones). Press repeatedly, hit continuously, etc.). This is also applicable to the embodiments described above and the embodiments described hereinafter.

  Further, the display may be displayed according to the operation even when the operation means is not operated until the period of the operation valid period ends. This is also applicable to the embodiments described above and the embodiments described hereinafter.

  In addition, when the decorative pattern is stopped (or only the symbol is stopped) and the hold display area, (if it is displayed) the resident display character etc. is displayed and the animation (for example, a movie including the model title) Or the like may be displayed, and the stop display or the hold display area or the like of the decorative symbol may not be displayed in the display sky of the animation demo.

  In addition, the display means may be one in which only the timer display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the timer display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be one in which the timer display is always displayed or may be one in which the timer display may not be displayed.

  Further, the timer display may give notice of only the timing when the operation display is displayed, or may give notice of timings other than the timing when the operation display is displayed. In addition, the timer display may always give notice of the timing when the operation display is displayed, or may not give notice of the timing when the operation display is displayed.

  Further, the timer display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started, or other than the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started Depending on the situation, the display mode may be changed. Further, the timer display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started, or the passage of the time until the display of the operation display is started Depending on the situation, the display mode may not change.

  In addition, the operation display may be displayed only in the first case, and the operation display may be displayed in cases other than the first case. In the first case, the operation display may be displayed without fail, or in the first case, the operation display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, only a certain effect may be performed, or the operation means may operate after the display of the operation display is started. When done, effects other than certain effects may also be executed. Also, when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be performed without fail, or when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, Some effects may not be performed.

  In addition, only when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be performed, or the operation means may be operated after the display of the operation display is started. Certain effects may be performed even in cases other than the case of being operated.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated only after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed, and the operation means may be performed other than after the display of the operation display is started. When operated, a certain effect may be performed.

  In addition, even if the operation means is operated while displaying the timer display, only execution of a certain effect may not be started, and even if the operation means is operated while the timer display is displayed, other than the certain effect The presentation may not be started. Moreover, even if the operation means is operated during the display of the timer display, the execution of a certain effect may not necessarily be started, and even when the operation means is operated during the display of the timer display, the execution of the certain effect May be started.

  In addition, it is not necessary to start execution of a certain effect only when the operation means is operated while displaying the timer display, or even when the operation means is operated while displaying the timer display. There is no need to start the execution of a certain effect.

  Moreover, even if the operation means is operated only while displaying the timer display, the execution of a certain effect may not be started, and even if the operation means is operated other than while the timer display is displayed, a certain effect Execution does not have to be started.

  The timer display may be a display including an image of the appearance of the operation means.

  The operation display may be a display including an image of the appearance of the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation display is displayed and the operation means is operated during a period (operation effective period) in which the operation of the operation means is valid, a certain effect may be performed.

  In addition, the operation display may be displayed after the timer display is displayed.

  In addition, after the timer display is displayed, the operation display may or may not be displayed.

  Further, the operation display may be a display prompting the operation of the operation means. According to this, there is a case where it is possible to improve the operation desire of the operation means by preventing the timing of displaying the operation display from being missed.

  Also, in relation to the start of the display of the operation display, the timer display may be in a certain display mode.

  Also, "if the operation means is operated while the timer display is displayed, execution of the certain effect is not started" is "when the timer display is displayed and then the timer display indicates the certain display mode". Even if the said operation means is operated until it becomes, execution of said certain presentation may not be started.

  The timing at which the operation display is displayed may include the IN animation portion of the operation display.

In addition, there may be a case where a first timer display [for example, a button timer notice display BTM1 or the like whose initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 372 (A5) is "10:00" etc.] is displayed as the timer display. ,
The operation display may be displayed in the first display mode when the first time [for example, 10 seconds etc.] elapses after the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started. , As shown in FIG. 372 (A14), the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode, etc.],
As the timer display, a second timer display [for example, a button timer notice display BTM1 or the like whose initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 373 (A1) is “60:00”] may be displayed.
The operation display may be displayed in a second display mode when a second time [e.g., 60 seconds etc.] elapses after the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started. As illustrated in FIG. 373 (A11), the red button image 136aR in the display mode of the red button is displayed, etc.]
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the display mode of the operation display may differ depending on the length of the timer, the player may be able to pay attention to both the timer display and the operation display.

  Here, only the first timer display may be displayed as the timer display, or a display other than the first timer display may be displayed as the timer display. In addition, the first timer display may be displayed as the timer display, or the first timer display may not be displayed as the timer display.

  In addition, after the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started, when the first time passes, the operation display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or the first After the change of the display mode of the timer display is started, when the first time elapses, the operation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, after the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started, when the first time passes, the operation display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or the display of the first timer display The operation display may not be displayed in the first display mode when the first time has elapsed since the start of the change of the mode.

  In addition, the operation display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the first time has elapsed since the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started. The operation display may be displayed in the first display mode also in cases other than when the first time has elapsed since the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started.

  Also, only the second timer display may be displayed as the timer display, or a display other than the second timer display may be displayed as the timer display. In addition, the second timer display may be displayed as the timer display or the second timer display may not be displayed as the timer display.

  In addition, after the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started, when the second time elapses, the operation display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or the second After the change of the display mode of the timer display is started, when the second time elapses, the operation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, after the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started, when the second time elapses, the operation display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or the display of the second timer display The operation display may not be displayed in the second display mode when the second time has elapsed since the start of the change of the mode.

  In addition, the operation display may be displayed in the second display mode only when the second time has elapsed since the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started. The operation display may be displayed in the second display mode also in cases other than when the second time has elapsed since the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started.

  Also, the second time may always be longer than the first time, or the second time may be shorter than the first time, or the first time and the first time may be shorter than the first time. The second time may be the same.

  In addition, when 1st time passes, the operation display of a 2nd display mode may be displayed.

  Further, when the first time has elapsed, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed without fail.

  In addition, the operation display may not be displayed even after the first time has elapsed.

  In addition, when the second time has elapsed, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed.

  In addition, when the second time has elapsed, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed without fail.

  Also, the operation display may not be displayed even after the second time has elapsed.

In addition, in the case where the operation display is displayed in the second display mode than in the case where the operation display is displayed in the first display mode, the big hit symbol form is likely to be finally determined and displayed ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for the operation display of the second display mode to be displayed.

  Here, when the operation display is displayed in the second display mode, the big hit symbol mode may be finally definitely displayed in the end, and when the operation display is displayed in the second display mode, the final There may be a case in which the form of the disappointing symbol is finalized and displayed. In addition, when the operation display is displayed in the first display mode, the disappointing symbol form may eventually be finally confirmed and displayed, or when the operation display is displayed in the first display mode, the final There may be a case in which the big hit design is displayed.

Also, after the first symbol display starts a certain symbol variation display than the second timer display, a change in the display mode starts earlier [for example, FIG. 372 (A5) The button timer notice display BTM1 whose initial value of the timer display shown is "10:00" is better than the button timer notice display BTM1 whose initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 373 (A1) is "60:00". Countdown starts early after symbol variation display starts, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, there are cases where it is possible to give variation to the timing of the start of change of the timer display.

  Here, after a certain symbol variation display is started in the first timer display rather than the second timer display, only a change in the display mode may be started earlier than in the second timer display. The first timer display may start earlier than changing the display mode after a certain symbol variation display is started. Moreover, after a certain symbol variation display is started, the change of the display mode may always be started earlier than the second timer display, or the second timer display may be started. In the first timer display, after a certain symbol variation display is started, the change of the display mode may not be started earlier.

  In addition, the change of the display mode may be started earlier only after a certain symbol variation display is started in the first timer display than in the second timer display, or in the second timer display. Also in the first timer display, the change of the display mode may be started earlier than after a certain symbol variation display is started.

  The second timer display may start changing a part of the display mode earlier than the first timer display.

Also, “a second operation means [for example, effect lever 136V etc.] is provided,
The operation means is a first operation means [for example, effect button 136 etc.],
The operation display is a first operation display [for example, display of a button image 136a shown in FIG. 374 (A12), etc.]
The display unit is a unit that may display a second operation display [for example, display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 378 (A17)].
The second operation display is a display indicating that the operation by the second operation means is effective,
In the first case, the second operation display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 375 (A1) to FIG. (A6), after the lever timer notification display LTM 1 is displayed. When the timer display on the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 becomes "00:00", the lever image 136Va is displayed, etc.],
When the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, the certain effect may be executed [for example, FIG. 375 (A6) to FIG. And as shown in FIG. 373 (A14), when the rendering lever 136V is operated after the lever image 136Va is displayed, a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to surprise the player who has focused on the timer display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it is possible to make the player feel tense until the operation display is displayed, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, the display means may be one in which only the second operation display may be displayed, or one in which displays other than the second operation display may be displayed. In addition, the display means may be one in which the second operation display is always displayed or may be one in which the second operation display is not displayed.

  In addition, the second operation display may indicate only that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or may indicate other than that the operation by the second operation means is effective. It may be In addition, the second operation display may always indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or may not indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective. It may be a certain one.

  In the first case, only the second operation display may be displayed, and in the first case, displays other than the second operation display may also be displayed. . In the first case, the second operation display may be displayed without fail, and in the first case, the second operation display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, only a certain effect may be performed, and the display of the second operation display may be When the second operation means is operated after being started, something other than a certain effect may be performed. Also, when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be performed without fail, or after the display of the second operation display is started When the second operation means is operated, a certain effect may not be performed.

  Moreover, only when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be performed, and the display of the second operation display may be performed. In the case other than the case where the second operation means is operated after the start of the event, a certain effect may be performed.

  The first operation display may always be displayed when a certain time until the operation display is displayed has elapsed while the timer display is being displayed.

  The second operation display may be a display configured to include an image of the appearance of the second operation means.

  Further, the second operation display may be a display prompting the operation of the second operation means. According to this, there is a possibility that the player is prompted to operate the second operation means, so it may be possible to make the timer advance notice with a sense of tension until the operation display is displayed.

In addition, “big hit symbol form is finally obtained when the second operation display is displayed in the first case than in the case where the first operation display is displayed in the first case. Is easy to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for the second operation display to be displayed in the first case.

  Here, when the second operation display is displayed in the first case, the jackpot symbol lending may be finally confirmed finally, and the second operation display may be displayed in the first case. In this case, the off symbol pattern may be finally displayed. Further, when the first operation display is displayed in the first case, finally the off-set symbol form may be definitely displayed in the final case, or the first operation display is displayed in the first case Finally, the jackpot symbol form may be finalized and displayed.

Also, in the first case, after the display of the second operation display is started, a period during which the operation of the second operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “second operation valid period” ) Is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 375 (A1) to FIG. (A6), after the lever timer advance notice display LTM 1 is displayed, the timer indication on the lever timer advance notice LTM 1 is “00:00” When the display of the lever image 136Va is started, the effective period of operation of the effect lever 136V is started, etc.],
In the second operation effective period, even when the first operation means is operated, the certain effect is not started [eg, as shown in FIG. 376 (A2) to FIG. (A5), the effect lever 136 V In the operation effective period of, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the background image including the character CLA of the spirit is not displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, confusion may be prevented in some cases by the player not being given an effect by an erroneous operation.

  Here, in the first case, only the second operation valid period may be started after the display of the second operation display is started, or in the first case, the display of the second operation display A period other than the second operation effective period may also be started after the start of. In the first case, the second operation effective period may be always started after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the first case, the display of the second operation display is The second operation validity period may not start after being started.

  In the first case, the second operation effective period may be started only after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the first case, the display of the second operation display is The second operation validity period may be started other than after being started.

  Also, only in the first case, the second operation effective period may be started after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the cases other than the first case, the second operation The second operation effective period may be started after the display of the display is started.

  Moreover, in the second operation valid period, there may be an operation of the first operation means or only a certain effect may not be started, and in the second operation valid period, the operation of the first operation means is Even if there is a certain effect, the effect may not be started. Moreover, in the second operation valid period, even if there is an operation of the first operation means or a certain effect may not necessarily be started, in the second operation valid period, the operation of the first operation means is Even if there is a certain effect may be started.

  Further, only in the second operation valid period, there is no need to start the operation of the first operation means or a certain effect may not be started, and also in the period other than the second operation valid period, the first operation Even if there is an operation of the means, a certain effect may not be started.

  The second operation effective period may be a period in which only the operation of the second operation means is effective. According to this, it may be possible to prevent the player who has prepared for the operation of the first operation means in advance from distracting until the operation display is displayed.

  In addition, in a period in which the operation of the second operation means is valid (second operation effective period), when the operation of the first operation means is performed, the operation may be effective.

In addition, in response to the operation of the operation unit being performed while the timer display is being displayed, a response display [for example, the light emission effect EF 405 or the like shown in FIG. 377 (A5)] may be displayed [for example, FIG. As shown in 377 (A3) to (A5), when the effect button 136 is operated while the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed, the light emission effect EF 405 is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have a space until the operation display is displayed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to improve the desire to operate the operation means.

  Here, in response to the operation of the operation means during the display of the timer display, only the reaction display may be displayed, or the operation of the operation means is performed during the display of the timer display. Depending on the situation, displays other than the response display may be displayed. In addition, the reaction display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the operation means during the display of the timer display, or the reaction in response to the operation of the operation means during the display of the timer display. The display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the reaction display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the operation means during the display of the timer display, and other than the operation of the operation means during the display of the timer display. Depending on the situation, a response display may be displayed.

  In addition, the reaction display may be displayed in response to the operation of the operation means only while the timer display is displayed, or the operation means may be operated while the display other than the timer display is displayed. Depending on what has been done, the reaction indication may be displayed.

  Here, with the reaction display, the display mode of the timer display itself may be changed, or the display mode of any display other than the timer display may be changed.

  Note that the timer display may be configured to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the operation display may be displayed separately from the timer display.

  Also, the reaction indication may be by the back button.

“The reaction display is a display performed by a change in the display mode of the timer display. For example, as shown in FIG. 377 (A5), the light emission effect EF 405 displays the display mode of the button timer notice display BTM 1 Displayed in a changing manner, etc.],
The reaction display is a display different from the display in the display mode according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed [For example, the light emission effect EF 405 shown in FIG. 377 (A5) is a button timer notice It is a display different from the display of the countdown of the timer display in the display BTM1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to give variations to the display of the timer display.

In addition, “the timer display may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Display mode of button timer notice display BTM1 including button icon of default display mode to fourth display mode [eg, button timer notice display BTM1 including button icon of display mode of red button shown in FIG. 379 (A5) Display mode, etc.] [for example, as shown in FIG. 379 (A2) to FIG. Is changing from the default display mode to the red button display mode, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the display mode may change during display of the timer display, the timer display may be able to draw attention even in a period until the operation display is displayed.

  Here, the timer display may change only from the third display mode to the fourth display mode during a period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. It may be a certain type, or a display mode other than the third display mode to the fourth display mode in a period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. May also change. In addition, the timer display always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode during a period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. In the period when the change of the display mode is performed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed, the third display mode may not change to the fourth display mode. It may be.

  In addition, the timer display may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode only in a period in which a change in the display mode is performed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. In the third display mode to the fourth display mode, the display mode may be changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. It may be changed.

  The timer display may be displayed in the fourth display mode from the beginning.

Also, the case where the third display mode changes to the fourth display mode is more than the case where the timer display does not change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, Finally the jackpot design aspect is easy to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to have an expectation for the timer display to change to the fourth display mode.

  Here, when the timer display changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may finally be definitely displayed finally, or the timer display may be displayed from the third display mode to the fourth When the display mode is changed, the off-set pattern mode may be finally displayed. In addition, when the timer display does not change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, finally the off-set pattern mode may be definitely displayed and the timer display may be displayed from the third display mode. If the display mode does not change to the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed.

In addition, “the display unit may display a notice display [for example,“ in preparation ”display or the like displayed above the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 379 (C1)]. And
The notice display is a display for giving a notice that the timer display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for the timer display to be displayed.

  Here, as the display means, only the notice display may be displayed, or a display other than the notice display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be one in which the advance notice display is always displayed, or may be one in which the advance notice display is not displayed.

  In addition, the advance notice may notify only that the timer display is displayed, or may notify other than the timer display. Further, the advance notice display may always give notice that the timer display is displayed, or may not give notice that the timer display is displayed.

  The timer display may always be displayed after the advance display is displayed.

  Also, the timer display may or may not be displayed after the advance notice display is displayed.

  Moreover, the advance notice may be a display including an image of the appearance of the operation means.

  In addition, the advance notice may be a notice (the change advance notice) regarding the symbol change display being executed.

  Also, the advance notice may be a prefetch notice.

In addition, it is configured to be determined by the jackpot determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, whether the final display of the big hit design or the final display of the lost design is displayed. ,
The result of the big hit determination does not change depending on the display mode of the timer display,
The big hit determination is configured to be determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using a random number acquired when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board,
The probability (hereinafter referred to as "big hit probability") determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is predetermined.
The big hit probability does not change depending on the display mode of the timer display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display positions of the timer display and the operation display may be different or may be the same.

  Also, a plurality of timer displays may be displayed. In this case, the timer display may be arranged in the order in which the timer displays start being displayed, or even if the timer displays are not in the order in which the display is started. Good.

  In addition, when a plurality of button effects are performed redundantly and the operation valid period is overlapped, priority may be given to the operation valid period in the button effect relating to the button timer advance effect, or the button timer advance effect may be applied. The operation effective period in the button effect may be given priority. When the button hold is included, the operation valid period in the button hold may be prioritized. In addition, when the button effect relating to the change notice and the button effect relating to the advance notice are performed redundantly and the operation effective period overlaps, the operation effective period in the button effect relating to the change notice is given priority. Alternatively, priority may be given to the operation effective period in the button effect relating to the advance notice.

  Also, after the timer display moves, the timer display countdown may be started.

  Also, the countdown of the timer display may be paused.

  In addition, there may be a case where a button timer notice effect is performed across a plurality of symbol change displays, or a button timer notification effect may not be performed across a plurality of symbol change displays.

Also, “a second operation means [for example, effect lever 136V etc.] is provided,
The operation means is a first operation means [for example, effect button 136 etc.],
The operation display is a first operation display [eg, button image 136a etc.],
The timer display is a third timer display [for example, a button timer advance display BTM1 etc.],
The display means is a means by which a second operation display [for example, lever image 136Va etc.] may be displayed,
The second operation display is a display indicating that the operation by the second operation means is effective,
The display means may be a means for displaying a fourth timer display [for example, a lever timer announcement display LTM1 or the like shown in FIG. 375 (A1)].
The fourth timer display is a display for giving notice of the timing at which the second operation display is displayed [for example, in the lever timer notification display LTM1 shown in FIG. 375 (A1), the countdown of the timer display is 60 seconds after the start, it has been announced that the lever effect will start, etc.],
The fourth timer display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time until the display of the second operation display is started [eg, FIG. 375 (A1) to FIG. (A2) As shown in, the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 counts down the timer display until “00:00” indicating the timing when the button effect starts after the countdown starts, etc.],
When the fourth timer display becomes a display mode after the fourth timer display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “second case [for example, FIG. 375 (A1) to FIG. (A2) As shown, when the timer display on the lever timer advance notice LTM1 becomes “00:00” after the lever timer advance notice LTM1 is displayed, etc.], the second operation indication is displayed. May be
When the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, the certain effect may be executed [for example, FIG. 375 (A6) to FIG. And as shown in FIG. 373 (A14), when the rendering lever 136V is operated after the lever image 136Va is displayed, a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed, etc.
Even when the second operation means is operated while the fourth timer display is displayed, the execution of the certain effect is not started [eg, as shown in FIG. 375 (A1) to FIG. (A2), Even if the effect lever 136V is operated during the countdown of the timer display in the lever timer advance notice display LTM1, the background image including the spirit character CLA is not displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to prevent the user from overlooking the timing at which the second operation display is displayed, and to enhance the rendering effect.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to surprise the player who has focused on the timer display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it is possible to make the player feel tense until the operation display is displayed, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, the display means may be one in which only the second operation display may be displayed, or one in which displays other than the second operation display may be displayed. In addition, the display means may be one in which the second operation display is always displayed or may be one in which the second operation display is not displayed.

  In addition, the second operation display may indicate only that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or may indicate other than that the operation by the second operation means is effective. It may be In addition, the second operation display may always indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or may not indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective. It may be a certain one.

  In addition, the display means may be a case where only the fourth timer display may be displayed, or a display other than the fourth timer display may also be displayed. In addition, the display means may display the fourth timer display without fail. Also, the fourth timer display may not be displayed.

  Further, the fourth timer display may give notice of only the timing at which the second operation display is displayed, or give notice of timings other than the timing at which the second operation display is displayed. May be In addition, the fourth timer display may always give notice of the timing at which the second operation display is displayed, or may not give notice of the timing at which the second operation display is displayed. May be

  In addition, the fourth timer display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the elapse of time until the display of the second operation display is started, and the display of the second operation display is The display mode may change according to things other than the passage of time until the start. In addition, the fourth timer display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the passage of time until the display of the second operation display is started, and the display of the second operation display is The display mode may not change according to the passage of time until the start.

  In addition, the second operation display may be displayed only in the second case, and the second operation display may be displayed in other cases than the second case. Good. In the second case, the second operation display may be displayed without fail, and in the second case, the second operation display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, only a certain effect may be performed, and the display of the second operation display may be When the second operation means is operated after being started, effects other than a certain effect may be performed. Also, when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be performed without fail, or after the display of the second operation display is started When the second operation means is operated, a certain effect may not be performed.

  Moreover, only when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be performed, and the display of the second operation display may be performed. In the case other than the case where the second operation means is operated after the start of the event, a certain effect may be performed.

  In addition, when the second operation means is operated only after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be performed, and the display of the second operation display may be performed. When the second operation means is operated even after the start, a certain effect may be performed.

  Moreover, even if the second operation means is operated during the display of the fourth timer display, only the execution of a certain effect may not be started, and the second operation may be performed while the fourth timer display is displayed. Even when the means is operated, the rendering other than a certain rendering may not be started. Moreover, even if the second operation means is operated during the display of the fourth timer display, the execution of a certain effect may not necessarily be started, and the second operation may be performed while the fourth timer display is displayed. Even if the means is operated, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

  In addition, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the second operation means is operated during the display of the fourth timer display, and the second display may be performed while the fourth timer display is displayed. The execution of a certain effect may not be started except when the operation means is operated.

  In addition, even if the second operation means is operated only while the fourth timer display is displayed, the execution of a certain effect may not be started, and the second timer may not be displayed. Even when the operation means is operated, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

"In the second case, the second operation display is always displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  FIG. 384 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 384 (a) is a flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol which becomes out without reaching the reach state. FIG. 7B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol which is a big hit or a loss after reaching the reach state.

  In FIG. 384 (a), after the start (the start of the change) of the variation display of the decoration pattern, the decoration pattern stops being decided after the first stop of the decoration pattern, the second stop of the decoration pattern, and the third stop of the decoration pattern. It shows the flow. In addition, in the following description, although the stop order of a decorative symbol is made in order of a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol in principle, it is not limited to this. In addition, there may be cases where the first stop and the second stop may be performed simultaneously according to the notice (the change notice and the advance notice), the mini game and the effect of the dummy game, etc., or the first stop. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed simultaneously. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the finalized stop 11) can be expressed in some cases. In the following description, with regard to the effects to be performed in an example of rendering without becoming a reach state, as a branch number in the drawing, “Figure XX (A (11) -1)”, “Figure XX (A (11) − 2) "... etc. may be used. Further, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 384 (a), effects that can be combined as various effects may be able to be performed in a period indicated by "(11)" (for example, a Gasse notice, etc.). In addition, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, or from the third stop to the decision stop, perform false eye announcement (preceeding notice) by pseudo-gaze effect, same color (same kind) symbol stop, etc. There are also cases where you can do it. This is a concept that is also applicable to each effect example of the embodiments described above.

  Figure 384 (b), after the start of variation display of the decorative symbol (variation start), through the formation of reach state, transition to the super reach (SP reach), derived results of the reach production, the decorative symbol is removed or big hit It shows the flow until it is decided and stopped in the aspect of, and then the big hit game is over. Here, a period from the start of fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by a period of “(1)”, and a period from the formation of the reach state to the transition to the SP reach is the period of “(2)” The period from the transition to SP reach to the derivation of the result of reach production is represented by the period of "(3)", and the period from the result of the reach production to derivation is from "(4) In some cases, it may be possible to represent the period from the decision stop to the end of the big hit game by the period "(5)". In the following description, with regard to the effects to be performed in the example of an effect that becomes a big hit or loses after reaching the reach state, “Figure XX (A (2) -1)”, “Figure XX (A (2 2), "figure XX (A (3)-1)", "figure XX (A (3)-2)", etc. may be used. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, various notices including mini games and advance notices may be performed in the period of “(1)”, and effects such as pseudo-links may be performed in the period of “(2)”. If a notice or group notice may be made by the display of a normal reach or a cut-in image, or if there is a chance up notice during SP reach or a notice by a cut-in image displayed in the period of (3). In the period of "(4)", there may be swing fluctuation, revival big hit effect, wipe display, etc. In the period of "(5)", the effect during the big hit game is performed, and the big hit There may be a case in which a probability change notification or a hold sequence notification etc. is performed during the game. In the embodiment described above and the embodiments described below, each executed notice or effect may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is performed. In addition, these notices and effects may be combined and performed, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) is overlapped with the other notice (effect). Good. Further, in the embodiments described above and the embodiments described below, portions described with the same branch numbers can be replaced as appropriate.

  FIGS. 385 to 407 are diagrams showing in stages the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 385 to 407, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In FIGS. 385 to 407, although the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, as in the embodiment described above, a device provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices It may be Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIGS. 385 to 407 are views showing one example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment in stages.

  Fig. 385 (A (1)-1) to Fig. 386 (A (4)-66) show that the timer notice effect is being executed during the big hit game in addition to the change display of the decorative symbol. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. That is, the situation before the start of fluctuation is shown. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), the symbol is stopped and displayed, so the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 385 is a special figure low probability general drawing low probability state (non-power support state). On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  In the holding icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the suspension icon display area, and these three suspension icons h11, h12 and h12, h12, h12 Each h13 is displayed in the default display mode (round no pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 385 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult for the power chute to open and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the special view 2 is held. The icon is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. It is also good. The same applies to the following description.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the first special view display device The symbol variation display at 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 is moved to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, a timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, in the first timer advance notice display TM11 in the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to perform display of a decimal point less than one second.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer announcement display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -4), the first timer announcement display TM11 09:75 "is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "timer activation" is displayed to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -5), it is shown that the second timer announcement effect is started. Specifically, for example, the second timer announcement effect is started when the second timer announcement display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by frame-in-animation. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started three seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform display of a decimal point less than one second. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "09:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -5). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed, and a warning for the timer advance notice effect is made.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer announcement display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -6), the second timer announcement display TM12 01: 25 "is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 starts. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display continues also in the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "07: 25" is displayed in the first timer notice advance TM11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -7), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the navigation is performed. In the vicinity of the character YM, the characters “focus on hold” are displayed, and a warning for the hold change is made, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the display of the first hold icon h11 It is informed that the aspect may change. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, or the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation starts. May be "00:00", or the hold change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00". Note that the timer display countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is continued, and "06:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -7).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the bomb, and the character "TIMER" is displayed above it. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "change on hold" are displayed, and it is notified that a prefetch notice has been given in which the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of the bomb. That is, in this production example, as a result of the timer preview production concerning the second timer preview display TM12 being performed, the display of the hold icon changes to the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb for previewing the execution of the timer preview production as a certain production. It is shown that the change effect of the aspect is being performed. Note that the character display of "hold change" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes, or after the character display of "hold change" is performed, the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. The character display of "hold change" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is still continued, and "05: 75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -8). The second timer advance notice display TM12 is deleted. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes after the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. The display mode of the hold icon h11 may be changed at the timing when the second timer notification display TM12 is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -9), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is continued, and FIG. 385 (A (1)- At the timing shown in 9), "05:11" is displayed. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the word "stock" is displayed together with the bomb icon BOM to notify that a timer advance notice effect may be started. As described above, in the example of the effect, it is shown that an icon indicates the effect (notice effect) performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed. Furthermore, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "there are still" are displayed, which suggests that there may be further displayed a notice by the timer notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "03: 29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1)-10). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is displayed together with the characters "What is it", and there is a feeling of expectation as to which notice display is performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -11), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and “01: 66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -12), the timing when the countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" The third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo chain!” Are displayed, and it is reported that the pseudo chain is to be performed. In this embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" The stop display may be performed, or the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is displayed and stopped.

  As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of a plurality of timer advance notice effects overlap, and it is shown that one timer advance notice display (second timer advance notice display TM12) functions as the advance notice. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timings at which the timer advance notice display starts to be displayed for the plurality of timer advance notice effects are different.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -13), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased. Here, after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series may be started, or after the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series is started The first timer notice display TM11 may be erased, or the second variable symbol display of the decorative symbol may be started by the pseudo-link at the timing when the first timer notice display TM11 is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -14), it is shown that the second variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo run. Then, the icon RPL of replay is displayed below the icon BOM of the bomb displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -16), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "SP advance timer notice" are displayed, and a mission effect is started indicating that timer advance effect is started by progressing to super reach. Is also shown. In this rendering example, by achieving the mission, the timer announcement rendering is started and the reliability of the big hit is enhanced. Therefore, by shifting to the super reach, it may be possible to have an expectation that the timer advance notice effect is started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -19) shows that normal reach is being performed continuously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -20), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6” during normal reach, and does not shift to super reach, “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5 It is informed that the stop display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that transition to the super reach is not made.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". . At this time, the replay icon RPL is erased. Meanwhile, the bomb icon BOM is still displayed. It should be noted that the replay icon RPL may be deleted after the fluctuation of the decorative symbol starts, or the fluctuation of the decorative symbol may start after the replay icon RPL is deleted. The replay icon RPL may be erased at the timing when the swing fluctuation starts.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (4) -22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “Holis 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -23), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the first special view The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and thereby becomes the change icon h0 which is the advance notice display mode related to the symbol change. That is, the change icon h0 gives notice that the timer advance effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -24), in response to the display of the fluctuation icon h0, the characters “stock activation” are displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and two timer notice effects are displayed. Are shown starting simultaneously. At this time, the bomb icon BOM has been deleted. That is, in the example of the effect, it is shown that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are started by the display of the icon BOM of one bomb or the change icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb. Note that two timer announcement effects may be started after the word "stock activation" is displayed, or the word "stock activation" may be displayed after the two timer announcement effects start. Two timer announcement effects may be started at the timing when the word "stock activation" is displayed. In this example of rendering, the third timer preview display TM13 and the fourth timer preview display TM14 are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer preview effects are simultaneously started. The third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 are both default display modes. “30:00” is displayed as a timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests. In addition, “10:00” is displayed as a timer display on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Suggest that In this example, two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 simultaneously start counting down, so after the countdown is started, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have elapsed and when 30 seconds have elapsed. It is suggested that be started. Here, the certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds has elapsed and the certain effect that may have been started when 30 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. It is also good.

  Thereafter, the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the timer display on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 each start to count down (subtraction display), and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -25), the third timer “29: 45” is displayed on the advance notice display TM 13, and “09: 45” is displayed on the fourth timer advance notice display TM 14. That is, it is shown that 0.55 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "timer attention" are displayed, and a warning for timer advance notice effect is made. Further, in this presentation example, the change animation is started at the change icon h0, and it is informed that the display mode of the change icon h0 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1)-26), the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the panda, and becomes the display mode of the advance notice. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is still continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -26), 09: 10 "is displayed, and" 29: 15 "is displayed on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -27), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. In the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -27), the third timer advance notice display TM13 : 02 "is displayed, and" 08: 02 "is displayed in the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -28), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -28), the third timer advance notice display TM13 : 75 "is displayed, and" 06:75 "is displayed in the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -29), the third timer advance notice display TM13 : 23 "is displayed, and" 05: 23 "is displayed in the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -30), normal reach is started, and it is shown that the middle symbol changes at a low speed. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the characters "I'm coming soon" are displayed, and it is possible that the timer display on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 will be "00:00" and the advance notice effect will start soon. It is suggested that there is. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -30), the third timer notice display TM13 displays “23. : 16 "is displayed, and" 03: 16 "is displayed in the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -31), it is shown that normal reach is being performed continuously. In the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, the countdown is still continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -31), 21:80 "is displayed, and" 01:80 "is displayed in the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -32), when the countdown in the fourth timer advance notice display TM 14 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of Sabothani. Sabohan group notices that a large amount of SBHN traverses are given. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a big expectation of big hit. That is, it can be said that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed when the Sabohani group advance notice is performed than when the Sabohani group advance notice is not performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -32), a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed, and it is notified that a sabohani group advance notice is being performed. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a strong sabochani group announcement is performed as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the fourth timer announcement display TM14. In other words, the strong sabothani group announcement can be regarded as an example of a certain effect. It should be noted that the Sabohani group advance notice may be started after the timer display on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabo-Hani group notification may be started at the timing when the timer display on the fourth timer notification display TM14 becomes "00:00". On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -32).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -33), while the advance notice of the sabotany group is being continued, “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and super It is reported that it develops to reach. At this time, the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is erased. On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and “18:31” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -33).

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -34), it is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which a hero of the hero and a sword strike of an enemy character are displayed is displayed. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, an icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed, and it is informed that the advance notice of the Sabohani group has been performed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continued, and “12:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -34).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -35), a state in which the sword reach is continued is shown. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer attention” are displayed, and the third timer advance notice display TM 13 is alerted. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is continued, and “11:03” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -35).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -36), during the display of the countdown on the third timer notice display TM13, the timer notice shortening animation is started, and the effect is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (3) -37) following FIG. 385 (A (3) -36), the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is decreased, and the third timer advance notice display TM13 "03:00" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect to be executed by the timer advance effect by changing the timer display during the countdown display.

  Thereafter, when the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (3) -38). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters of "strong cut-in" are displayed to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of a plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and both of the timer notice displays (the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14) are all under execution. It is shown that it functions as a notice about the display (the change notice).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (3) -39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed. "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern is displayed at the center, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -40), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". It is done. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “happily 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -42), it is shown that a big hit start effect is performed. When the jackpot start rendition is started, a character MCK of a wedding dress dressed as a machiko teacher (wedding machiko teacher) is staged to congratulate the big hit with four copandas. In addition, when the jackpot start effect starts, a right-handed display that promotes the player to hit the right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 386 (A (5) -43) shows that the big hit game has been started and it has been shifted to the first round. In this effect example, an effect of introducing an effect during a big hit game is performed, and in the first round, the characters "Introduction to effect from the next round" are displayed together with the copanda character, and that effect is notified.

  FIG. 386 (A (5) -44) shows transition to the second round. In the second round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "with and without ..." along with the Sabo Hani icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5)-45), The word "Expected to group notice!" Is displayed on top of this along with a demonstration display of strong group Sabohani group notice, and a description of the Sabohani group notice is given.

  FIG. 386 (A (5) -46) shows a state of proceeding to the third round. At the third round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "when it comes out ..." along with the icon of the bomb, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5)-47), Along with the demonstration display of the timer advance presentation effect, the characters "The timer advance announcement is activated" are displayed, and the timer advance presentation is explained.

  FIG. 386 (A (5) -48) shows a state of proceeding to the fourth round. In this example of the effect, when moving to the fourth round, the character of "attention!" Is displayed together with the copanda character, suggesting that the timer advance notice effect is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed during the big hit game.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and above that “timer activation!” A character is displayed to notify that the timer advance presentation effect has been started. Here, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is a default display mode. “03:00”, which indicates 3 seconds shorter than 29 seconds, which is the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 234 in one round, is displayed on the first jackpot timer notice display TM21 as a timer display. It suggests that an effect is started 3 seconds after it is started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -50), the characters "timer activation!" Are erased together with the copanda character, and the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is substantially at the center of the display screen. Move to and zoom in. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -51), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -51). In the timing, "02: 66" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -52), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 is continuously performed, and in FIG. 386 (A (5) -52). At the timing shown, "00: 35" is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -53), when the timer display countdown on the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM 21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5)-54), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -55), the character of "pending continuation determined" is displayed together with the family crest character, and the symbol variation is pending (pending) It is notified that the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit in the display is included. As described above, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the first big hit middle timer announcement display TM21 being performed, it is shown that the on-hold continuous channel announcement presentation is performed as a certain presentation. It is to be noted that the pending line may be notified by the movement of the family crest 224E instead of the appearance of the family crest character CMON.

  In this manner, when the hold-on-chance announcement effect is finished, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -56), the copanda character appears again and the character of “next land effect introduction continued” is displayed. The notification is displayed, and it is informed that the continuation of the effect description that has been interrupted due to the timer advance effect being started is started. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN is displayed, which indicates that a family crest character CMON has appeared and notification of a pending continuous channel determination has been made. Thus, in this example of the effect, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in one round of the big hit game, and a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed.

  FIG. 386 (A (5) -57) shows a state of proceeding to the fifth round. In the fifth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "when the word comes out ..." along with the icon of replay, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5)-58), The characters of "pseudo run" are displayed together with the replay icon to which the letters "NEXT" are attached to explain the pseudo run effect.

  FIG. 386 (A (5) -59) shows the state of proceeding to the 16th round. When moving to the 16th round, the copanda character reappears and the character of "final round" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round.

  In FIG. 386 (A (5) -60), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -61), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest character CMON reappears from the upper side of the display screen, and in this case as well, notification of the holding continuation is performed It is

  FIG. 386 (A (1) -62) shows that the jackpot game is over, and the state is shifted to the positive change state (power support state). At this time, the reserve is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (1) -63), the hold (first hold) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the first special view display device The symbol variation display at 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (1) -64), the family crest character CMON descends from above the display screen, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (1) -65), temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -66), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “happiness 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thus, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the timer advance presentation effect is executed during the big hit game.

  Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during one round of the big hit game, and a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect is performed. And in this example of a production, it is shown that a reservation continuation continuation notice production is performed as a certain production.

  In addition, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is performed and it becomes "00:00", a new timer advance notice effect may be started.

  In addition, it may indicate that one timer preview effect is started, by displaying the icon BOM of the bomb indicating that the timer preview effect starts, or displaying the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb, or twice In some cases, it may indicate the start of the above timer announcement effect.

  Moreover, in this production example, when the symbol fluctuation display which becomes a big hit is included in the symbol fluctuation display whose start is being suspended, the above-mentioned pending continuous chan announcement effect is performed, but furthermore, the symbol fluctuation display However, for example, it may be possible to perform a pending continuous chan announcement effect on the condition that it is determined by prefetching that super shortening fluctuation (for example, no reach fluctuation or all symbol simultaneous stop fluctuation etc.) is executed, or It may be possible to perform a limited number of pending continuous channel notification depending on the fluctuation time, the type of reach, etc., or it may be a wide-range pending channel warning of a big hit.

  Further, in the example of the effect, the hold-on continuous notice is performed as the advance notice in the special view 1, but the special view 2 can be performed in the same manner.

  Moreover, the effect content introduced by the effect description performed during the big hit game is not limited to those described above, and may be other effect content.

  In addition, the round in which the timer advance notice effect is started is not limited to the one described above, and can be started in an appropriate round. Also, a plurality of timer announcement effects may be performed in one big hit.

  FIGS. 387 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -36) show other effect patterns of the timer advance effect executed during the big hit game.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. That is, the situation before the start of fluctuation is shown. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 387 is a special figure high probability general drawing high probability state (a probability variation state with power support). On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this power-assisted fixed variable state, the reserved icon of the special view 2 is displayed. In the holding icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 2 is displayed. Further, since the gaming state in FIG. 387 is the power support state, a right-handed promotion display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 387 (B (1) -1), three reserved icons h21, h22, and h23 of the special view 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the reserved icons h21, h22, and h23 of the three special views 2 are displayed. Each is displayed in the default display mode (round no pattern and white display mode). That is, the default holding icon of Special Figure 2 is also a circular holding icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special view 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started, and the second special view display device The symbol variation display at 214 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 , And the second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is displayed as the third hold icon h21. It moves to the display position of the second holding icon h22 and is displayed as a second holding icon h22. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h21, but may be different.

  In FIG. 387 (B (1) -3), it is shown that a winning of the game ball is performed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decoration symbol display device 208, the hold icon h23 of the special view 2 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the special view 2 hold number in the second hold number display becomes "3". . Here, the hold icon h23 of the special view 2 is displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -4), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol stop simultaneously, and the fluctuation is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 2". A temporary stop is being conducted. After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the "los 6-dec 6-dec 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -6), the suspension (first suspension) of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure The symbol variation display on the display device 214 is started. In addition, the move animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is moved to the variation icon display area The second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is displayed as the second hold icon h0. It moves to the display position of the icon h22 and is displayed as a second hold icon h22. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -7), the family crest character CMON descends from the upper side of the display screen, and it is informed that the big hit is decided. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -8), temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Thereafter, a big hit occurs, and the effects shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -10) to FIG. 387 (B (5) -15) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 387 (B (5)-10) to FIG. (B (5)-15) are as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5)-42) to FIG. (A (5)-47). The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown.

  In FIG. 387 (B (5) -16), a state of proceeding to the fourth round is shown. In this example of the effect, when moving to the fourth round, the character of "attention!" Is displayed together with the copanda character, suggesting that the timer advance notice effect is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5)-17), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and "timer activation!" A character is displayed to notify that the timer advance presentation effect has been started. Here, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is a default display mode. Unlike the timer display shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49), “10:00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer display on the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, and the countdown is started. It suggests that an effect is started 30 seconds after it has passed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -18), the characters "timer activation!" Are erased together with the copanda character, and the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is substantially at the center of the display screen. Move to and zoom in. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5)-19), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 387 (B (5)-19). In the timing, "29:66" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5)-20), the timer display countdown in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 is continuously performed, and in FIG. 387 (B (5)-20). At the timing shown, “13:75” is displayed.

  In FIG. 387 (B (5)-21), a situation in which the fifth round is shifted is shown. In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance effect is continuously performed across multiple rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM 21 is continued even if it is shifted from the fourth round to the fifth round. In the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, "12: 96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (B (5)-21).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5)-22), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 is continuously performed, and in FIG. 387 (B (5)-22). At the timing shown, "00: 35" is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -23), when the timer display countdown in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM 21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5) -24, the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5)-25), the character of "pending continuation determined" is displayed together with the family crest character, and symbol variation is pending (pending) It is notified that the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit in the display is included.

  In this manner, when the hold-on-chance announcement effect ends, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5)-26), the copanda character appears again and the character of "next round presentation introduction continued" The notification is displayed, and it is informed that the continuation of the effect description that has been interrupted due to the timer advance effect being started is started. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN is displayed, which indicates that a family crest character CMON has appeared and notification of a pending continuous channel determination has been made. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed over a plurality of rounds of the big hit game.

  In FIG. 387 (B (5) -27), a state of proceeding to the sixth round is shown. At the sixth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "when the word comes out ..." along with the icon of replay, and then, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (5)-28), The characters of "pseudo run" are displayed together with the replay icon to which the letters "NEXT" are attached to explain the pseudo run effect. As described above, in this effect example, since the timer advance notice effect is performed across a plurality of rounds, the round in which the continuation of the effect description is started is different from the effect example shown in FIG. That is, it is shown that the correspondence between the content of the effect description and the round for performing the effect description may differ depending on the period in which the timer advance effect is performed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -29) to FIG. (B (4) -36) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -29) to FIG. (B (4) -36) are the same as those in FIG. 386 (A (5) -59) to FIG. Since this is the same as the effect shown in FIG. (A (4) -66), the description is omitted.

  FIGS. 388 (C (5) -1) to (C (4) -28) show other effect patterns of the timer advance effect executed during the big hit game. FIG. 388 (C (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), showing that a big hit has occurred and a big hit start effect has been performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -1) to the same figure (C (5) -10) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -1) to FIG. (C (5) -10) are the same as FIG. 387 (B (5) -10) to FIG. (B (5) -19). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -11), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 is continuously performed, and in FIG. 388 (C (5) -11) At the timing shown, “19:75” is displayed.

  FIG. 388 (C (5) -12) shows a state of proceeding to the fifth round. In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance effect is continuously performed across multiple rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM 21 is continued even if it is shifted from the fourth round to the fifth round. In the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, "18: 86" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 388 (C (5)-12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -13), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 is continuously performed, and in FIG. 388 (C (5) -13) At the timing shown, "07:21" is displayed.

  FIG. 388 (C (5) -14) shows a state of proceeding to the sixth round. In this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM 21 is continued even if it is shifted from the fifth round to the sixth round. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 may be performed from the fourth round to the sixth round. This is due to the difference in the time taken for the round game, depending on the skill of the player and the like. In the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, "04: 21" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 388 (C (5)-14).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -15), when the timer display countdown in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM 21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5)-16), the appearance of a family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5)-17), the character of "pending continuation determined" is displayed together with the family crest character, and the symbol variation is pending (pending) It is notified that the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit in the display is included.

  In this manner, when the hold-on-ch chan announcement effect ends, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5)-18), the copanda character appears again and the character of "next round presentation introduction continued" The notification is displayed, and it is informed that the continuation of the effect description that has been interrupted due to the timer advance effect being started is started. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN is displayed, which indicates that a family crest character CMON has appeared and notification of a pending continuous channel determination has been made. As described above, in this effect example, even if the initial value of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is the same, there may be a difference that the round being executed may differ when the countdown of the timer display ends. It is shown. Note that the timing at which the timer display countdown ends and a certain effect starts is not limited to during a round, and may be, for example, an inter-round interval. In this case, a certain effect is performed in the inter-round interval However, an effect may start after the next round starts.

  FIG. 388 (C (5) -19) shows that the 7th round is started. In the seventh round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "when the word comes out ..." along with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -20), The characters of "pseudo run" are displayed together with the replay icon to which the letters "NEXT" are attached to explain the pseudo run effect. As described above, in this example of the effect, since the timer preview effect is performed for three rounds, the round in which the continuation of the effect description is started is different from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 386 or 387. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -21) to the same figure (C (4) -28) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -21) to FIG. (C (4) -28) are the same as those in FIG. 387 (B (5) -29) to FIG. (B (4) -36). The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown.

  FIGS. 389 (D (5) -1) to (D (4) -17) show effect patterns in which the timer advance notice is not executed during the big hit game. Note that FIG. 389 (D (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4)-9), showing that a big hit has occurred and a big hit start effect has been performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -1) to FIG. (C (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -1) to FIG. (D (5) -6) are the same as FIG. 387 (B (5) -10) to FIG. (B (5) -15) Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 389 (D (5) -7) shows that the process has shifted to the fourth round. In this effect example, even when the game proceeds to the fourth round, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is not started, and the effect explanation continues to be performed. That is, in this example of the effect, when moving to the fourth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of “when it comes out ...” along with the icon of replay, and thereafter, FIG. 389 (D (5) − As shown in 8), together with the replay icon to which the character "NEXT" is attached, the characters "pseudo sequence" are displayed to explain the pseudo sequence effect. As described above, in this example of effect, since the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the round in which the explanation of the pseudo continuous effect is performed is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 386 to FIG. 388.

  In FIG. 389 (D (5)-9), it is shown that the 16th round is started. When moving to the 16th round, the copanda character reappears and the character of "final round" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round.

  In FIG. 389 (D (5)-10), the 16th round is over and the big hit end production is started. Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an 爺 V formation display is displayed in a mode in which four 爺 characters form a V formation. GYV is displayed, and a notification that a holding continuation is performed is performed. In other words, it is shown that a pending continuous channel announcement is performed in a mode different from the appearance of the family crest character CMON. As shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11 '), there may be a case where a family crest character CMON appears. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (D (5)-12), the character of "one more time" is displayed in response to the display of the 爺 V formation display GYV, and a pending continuous chan occurs. Is notified. Thereafter, when the big hit game is over, the effects shown in FIG. 389 (D (1)-13) to FIG. (D (4)-17) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 389 (D (1)-13) to FIG. (D (4)-17) are as shown in FIG. 387 (B (1)-32) to FIG. (B (4)-36). The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown.

  As described above, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer advance announcement being performed, the hold continuation continuous announcement (display of the character CMON of the family crest) performed as an effect and the hold progression as a separate effect from the timer advance announcement are It is shown that the mode is different in Chan notification (display by 爺 V formation display GYV).

  Further, in this example of rendering, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of pending continuous channel notices, but at least one of these types of pending continuous channel notices is shown, for example, in FIG. 14 (a) or FIG. 14 (b). In the case of the game board configuration, notification by movable effect by the effect movable body may be used, notification by voice may be used, notification by light emitter may be used, or some or all of them. The notification may be a combination of

  FIG. 389 (E (5) -1) to FIG. 390 (E (1) -18) show another effect pattern of the timer advance effect executed during the big hit game. In addition, FIG. 389 (E (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4)-41), showing that the big hit occurs and the big hit start effect is performed. There is. However, in this example of rendering, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" are aligned and become a big hit. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 389 (E (5) -1) to FIG. 390 (E (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 389 (E (5) -1) to FIG. 390 (E (5) -12) are the same as FIG. 386 (A (5) -42) to FIG. (A (5) -53). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 390 (E (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in -13), it is shown that a character TDR of a bancho character who wears a school run (clothes) instead of the family crest character CMON appears. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (E (5) -14), the display changes in such a manner that the clothes of the character TDR of the Bancho break and become naked, and the characters of “probably odd” are displayed. It is informed that the game state after the big hit end shifts to a special figure high probability spread figure high probability (that is, a power variation with probability change state). As described above, in the example of the effect, as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 being performed, it is shown that the probability change notification effect is performed as a certain effect. After that, the continuation of the presentation is performed in the above-described manner until the final round, the sixteenth round.

  In FIG. 390 (E (5) -15), a state of proceeding to the 16th round is shown. When moving to the 16th round, the copanda character reappears and the character of "final round" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a banner icon TDRK is displayed, which indicates that a banner-length character TDR has appeared and notification of definite variation determination has been performed.

  In FIG. 390 (E (5) -16), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (E (5) -17), the character TDR of the program leader reappears with the character display of “next definite change”, and also notification of transition to the positive change state is performed here. ing.

  FIG. 390 (E (1) -18) shows that the jackpot game is over, and the state is shifted to the positive change state (power support state). At this time, the reserve is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed at the combination of the "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  In this example of presentation, as a result of the timer advance presentation being performed, the definite variation confirmation notification is performed as a certain presentation, but there may be a case where the definite variation confirmation notification is performed without the timer announcement presentation being performed.

  FIG. 390 (F (5) -1) to FIG. 391 (F (1) -29) show other effect patterns of the timer advance effect executed during the big hit game. FIG. 390 (F (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4)-41), showing that a big hit has occurred and a big hit start effect has been performed. There is. However, in this example of rendering, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" are aligned and become a big hit. Note that the jackpot in this example of presentation is a rank-up bonus, and in the jackpot, it is a jackpot informing which one of the 4 rounds, 8 rounds, 12 rounds and 16 rounds of jackpots is difficult to recognize. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -1) to FIG. 390 (F (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -1) to FIG. 390 (F (5) -12) are the same as FIG. 386 (A (5) -42) to FIG. (A (5) -53). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer announcement display TM 21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. 390 (F (5) In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in -13), it is shown that the hallmark character HSG has appeared, and the jackpot effect is started whether the big hit game will continue in the fifth round or later or will end in the fourth round. It is done. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -14), the character HSG of Tonosama clearly shows a striking expression, and the character "I will continue" is displayed, and the jackpot game is the fifth round It is informed that it will continue afterward. That is, it is shown that the round continuation effect is being performed. Thus, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the round continuation presentation is performed as a certain presentation as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the first jackpot timer announcement display TM21 being performed.

  FIG. 390 (F (5) -15) shows the state in which the fifth round is started. In the fifth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of “when it comes out ...” along with the icon of replay, and then, as shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -16), The characters of "pseudo run" are displayed together with the replay icon to which the letters "NEXT" are attached to explain the pseudo run effect.

  In FIG. 390 (F (5)-17), a state in which the eighth round is started is shown. In this effect example, when moving to the eighth round, the character of "attention!" Is displayed together with the copanda character, and then, as shown in FIG. 390 (F (5)-18), the character of "round continuation chance" Is displayed. That is, in the example of the effect, in the eighth round, it is notified that the round judge effect will be started to ask whether to continue in the ninth round or later or to finish in the eighth round. Then, when the round judge effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -19), the character HSG of the lord appears and the big hit game continues in the ninth round or later, It is shown that the tumbling production of whether it ends in the eighth round is started. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -20), the character HSG of Tonosama shows a striking expression, and the characters "I will continue" are displayed, and the jackpot game is the ninth round It is informed that it will continue afterward. That is, it is shown that the round continuation effect is being performed. As described above, it is shown that, in this effect example, the round continuation effect may be performed without passing through the timer advance effect.

  FIG. 390 (F (5)-21) shows a state of proceeding to the ninth round. In the ninth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the timer notice as an explanatory display and the character display of "Time of timer display ...", and then, FIG. 390 (F (5)-22) As shown in), the letters "77: 77" as the initial value of the timer advance notice are displayed, and the characters "at super heat" are displayed, and an explanation of the timer advance effect with extremely high reliability is performed.

  FIG. 390F (F (5) -23) shows the state of proceeding to the 12th round. In this effect example, when moving to the 12th round, the character of "attention!" Is displayed together with the copanda character, and then, as shown in FIG. 390 (F (5)-24), the character of "round continuation chance" Is displayed. That is, in the example of the effect, in the 12th round, it is informed that the round judge effect will be started to ask whether to continue after the 13th round or to finish in the 12th round. Then, when the round judge effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -25), the character HSG of the lord appears and the big hit game continues after the 13th round, It is shown that the tumbling production of whether it ends in the 12th round is started. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5)-26), the character HGS of Tonosama is displayed in a collapsing manner, and the character "Sorry!" Is displayed, and the big hit game is 12 rounds. It is informed that it ends with eyes. In addition, resurrection production may be performed and it may alert | report that continuing after the 13th round.

  In FIG. 390 (F (5) -27), the twelfth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 391 (F (5)-28) following FIG. 390 (F (5)-27), the character of "next right hit" is displayed, and after the end of the jackpot game The notification of transitioning to the special figure low probability general drawing high probability state (that is, the short time state) is performed.

  FIG. 391 (F (1) -29) shows that the jackpot game is over and the time shift state (power support state) is entered. At this time, the reserve is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed at the combination of the "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is performed during the big hit game, and as a result, the confirmation notice (such as the positive change notice and the round continuation notice) which is advantageous to the player other than the hold continuous notice is performed. It is shown that it is being done.

  In addition, in the example of an effect demonstrated above, a plurality of timer announcement effects different in the kind of an effect may be performed in one big hit game. For example, in one big hit game, the first timer announcement effect is performed, and as a result, a hold channel announcement is performed as a certain effect, and then a second timer announcement effect is performed, as a result, The definite variation confirmation notification may be performed as the effect.

  Figures 391 (G (5) -1) to 393 (G (5)-64) show examples of effects in the case where a plurality of symbol variation displays that become a big hit are included in symbol variation displays for which execution has been suspended. ing. In addition, FIG. 391 (G (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4)-9), showing a situation that a big hit occurs and a big hit start production is performed. There is. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 391 (G (5) -1) to FIG. 391 (G (5) -21) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 391 (G (5) -1) to FIG. 391 (G (5) -21) are the same as FIG. 387 (B (5) -10) to FIG. (B (5) -30). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  In FIG. 391 (G (5) -21), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. Then, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 391 (G (5)-22), it is shown that a family crest character CMON does not appear, and a wrinkle V formation display GYV is displayed. The display of this 爺 V formation display GYV is a display different from the display corresponding to the family crest character CMON that appeared in the big hit game, that is, the event of the holding chain announced by the appearance of the family crest character CMON Separately announces that an event of pending connection will occur. In other words, it reports that the big hit of triple Chan has been decided including this big hit. In this case, the family crest character CMON may be made to appear instead of the 爺 V formation display GYV. Thereafter, when the big hit game is over, the effects shown in FIG. 391 (G (1) -23) to FIG. 39 (G (4) -27) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 391 (G (1) -23) to FIG. 39 (G (4) -27) are as shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -32) to FIG. The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (5)-28) following FIG. 391 (G (4)-27), it is shown that the big hit start rendition concerning the big hit of the second channel is performed It is done. When the jackpot start effect is started, a character will be produced in which character MCK of the wedding machiko teacher will bless the jackpot with four copandas. Also, in this example, when the big hit start effect starts, the 爺 V icon GV is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the symbol change display that becomes a big hit in the symbol change display whose start is suspended is already It is informed that one is included. The present jackpot corresponds to the appearance of the family crest character CMON executed as a certain effect as a result of the timer announcement effect executed in the previous jackpot game being performed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 392 (G (5) -29) to FIG. 39 (G (5) -37) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 392 (G (5) -29) to FIG. 39 (G (5) -37) are different in that the 爺 V icon GV is displayed and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is different. The effects are the same as those shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -2) to (D (5) -10) except for FIG.

  In FIG. 392 (G (5) -37), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. Then, in the example of the effect, since the hold continuous notice is already performed by the display of the 爺 V icon GV, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (5)-38), the character of "one more time" is It is displayed to notify that a pending call is generated.

  FIG. 392 (G (1) -39) shows that the jackpot game is over, and the state is shifted to the positive change state (power support state). At this time, the reserve is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -40), the hold (first hold) of the special view 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started, and the second special view display device The symbol variation display at 214 is started. In addition, the move animation of the reserve icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the reserve icon (the reserve icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first reserve icon h21 moves to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -41), a state is shown in which the timer preview effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM11, which indicates that a certain advance notice effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -42), "04: 25" is displayed in the timer notice display TM11. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the characters "Make pseudo run" are displayed, and as a result of counting down the timer display on the timer notice display TM11, it is suggested that pseudo run may be performed. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -43), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -43).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -44), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and “01: 73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -44).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -45), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo consecutive symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "00: 52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1)-45). After that, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -46), the characters “continue!” Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed. In timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -46).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -47), the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM11 is completed, and the vicinity of the navigation character YM at the timing when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". The character "Guze" is displayed on the screen, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -48), the disappearance of the timer notice display is performed to erase the timer notice display TM11 when the countdown in the timer notice display TM11 is completed. Is shown.

  However, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -49), not only is the timer advance notice display TM11 not deleted, but the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 is added, and the timer notice display TM11 22:35 "is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the outer frame of the timer advance notice display TM11 changes to red to notify that the timer display has been added. The timer notice display TM11 then returns to the default display mode, but the display mode may remain changed. Thus, it is revealed that the animation performed in FIG. 392 (G (1) -48) is not a lost animation, but a timer preview addition animation which is an animation similar to the lost animation. . As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer notice effect is started using the same timer notice display TM11. Further, in this presentation example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer advance notice display is the same as a part of the animation for deleting the timer advance notice display. Note that the animation may be completely different between the timer advance announcement animation and the disappearance animation.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -50), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed by the pseudo-link. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1)-50).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -51), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed below the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continued, and “18:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -52).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -53) to FIG. 39 (G (1) -54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. It is shown. In timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and “16: 55” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -54).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -55), the 爺 V formation display GYV is displayed during execution of the normal reach, and it is shown that the big hit finalization notice is performed. At this time, the timer notice display TM11 still continues the countdown, and “15:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -55). A part is overlapped, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than when the 爺 V formation display GYV is not displayed. Note that the 爺 V formation display GYV may be overlapped with the timer advance display TM11.

  Then, in this demonstration example, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (2)-56), Echigoya group which is a preliminary announcement effect of a mode in which many Echigo character ECG's are to be run around by a domino character instead of Sabohani group advance notice. It is shown that a notice is being made. The Echigo ya group notice is an example of the premier notice, and the big hit confirmation is notified by the appearance of the Echigo ya group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -56).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -57), it is shown that a captive cut-in image HBK is displayed, which shows that the Echigoya character ECG is captured by a royal character. There is. A part of the timer notice display TM11 is overlapped by the capture cut-in image HBK, which is considered to be more difficult to see than when the capture cut-in image HBK is not displayed. The capture cut-in image HBK may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM11. In addition, “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is reported that it will develop into a super reach. In timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "12: 90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -57).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -58), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into SP reach (Kengo reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the enemy character face each other. . At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer attention” are displayed to urge attention to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM11. In timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continued, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -58).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -59), a timer display step-up animation is performed in which the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM11 changes. The effect of the timer display step-up animation is also displayed in the same manner as the lost animation described above. That is, it can be said that a part of the animation changing the display mode of the timer advance notice display is the same as a part of the animation canceling the timer advance notice display. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

  After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (3)-60), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the timer advance display TM11 is displayed. A mode is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM11B), and a state of stepping up is shown, and a state where the reliability of the big hit has been dramatically improved is shown. In addition, the timer advance display TM11B in which the display mode has been changed is added with the face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In timer notice display TM11B, a countdown is performed, and "4: 32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (3)-60).

  Then, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM11B becomes "0:00", a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -61). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice relating to the timer advance notice display TM11B in this production example is a timer advance notice concerning that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -62), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed. "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern is displayed at the center, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (4) -63), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". It is done. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (G (5)-64) following FIG. 392 (G (4)-63), in the decoration symbol display device 208, the decoration of the jackpot of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" It is displayed by the combination of symbols. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of rendering, both of the on-hold continuous channel notice performed in the timer advance presentation effect and the on-off continuous channel announcement performed without the timer advance presentation effect are performed, and the occurrence of the on-hold continuation chan occurs twice. A state of informing is shown.

  Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice display is overlapped with other notice notices and the visibility of at least a part of the timer notice display is lowered. The timer advance notice may be overlapped by the effect movable body.

  Further, in the example of the effect, it is shown that Echigo-ya-ya group advance notice for notifying of a big hit confirmation is performed in place of the Sabohani group advance notice.

  Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed not only during the symbol variation display of the special view 1 but also during the symbol variation display of the special view 2.

  In FIG. 393 (H (5) -1) to FIG. 394 (H (1) -40), button stock is performed in the timer announcement effect executed during the big hit game, and the number of button stocks is calculated during the big hit game. It shows how the corresponding mini game is played. In addition, FIG. 393 (H (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4)-41), showing that the big hit occurs and the big hit start effect is performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -1) to FIG. 393 (H (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -1) to FIG. 393 (H (5) -12) are the same as FIG. 386 (A (5) -42) to FIG. (A (5) -53). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit timer announcement display TM 21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. 393 (H (5) In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in -13), the button image 136a appears instead of the family crest character CMON, and the character "x1 stock" is displayed, and the button effect is performed at least once during the big hit game. It is announced. As described above, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the first jackpot timer announcement display TM21 being performed, it is shown that the button stock announcement presentation is performed to announce that the button presentation is performed as a certain presentation. It is done. The button image 136a is set as the default display mode, and the degree of reliability in the button effect is low. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -14), the letter “× 1” is displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen together with the button icon, and the button effect is performed at least once. It is informing.

  In FIG. 393 (H (5)-15), it is shown that it has moved to the eighth round. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -16), the character of "attention!" Is displayed together with the copanda character, suggesting that the timer preview effect is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that a plurality of timer notice effects are performed during the big hit game.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5)-17), the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and above that "timer activation!" A character is displayed to notify that the second timer announcement effect has been started. Here, the second jackpot middle timer advance notice display TM22 is a special display mode that is more reliable than the default display mode. "05: 55" is displayed as the timer display on the second big hit medium timer advance notice display TM22, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 5.55 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. There is. In this effect example, the initial value of the timer display of the second big hit medium timer advance notice display TM22 is an aspect in which three “5” are aligned, and the reliability with respect to the addition of the benefit can be further increased. There is a case.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -18), the second big hit medium timer advance notice display TM22 is enlarged and displayed while being moved to the approximate center of the display screen. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the second big hit medium timer advance notice display TM22.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5)-19), the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit middle timer notice display TM 22 continues, and is shown in FIG. 393 (H (5)-19). In the timing, "04: 85" is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (H (5)-20), when the timer display countdown in the second big hit medium timer advance notice display TM22 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5)-21), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV which is an aspect in which the button image vibrates / rotates appears and the character of "x 1 stock" is displayed, and during the big hit game It is notified that the button effect is additionally performed at least once. As described above, in this example, as a result of the timer announcement by the second jackpot timer announcement display TM22, the button stock announcement effect is performed to announce that the button effect is performed as a certain effect. It is done. The vibration / rotation button image 136aV is considered to be more reliable than the default display mode. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5)-22), the vibration / rotation button icon is displayed below the button icon of the default display mode together with the character "x1". The button icon informs that the button effect is performed at least twice.

  FIG. 393 (H (5) -23) shows that the 12th round has been progressed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -24), it is shown that a mini game of button effect is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed at the center of the display screen, and when the button PUSH appears with the icon of the face of the bancho above the treasure box image BOX The character “is displayed”, and it is reported that the game state after the big hit game will be a definite change state when the face of the bank leader appears from the treasure box.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5)-25), a line of digested animation showing how the button icon of the default display mode appearing first of the two button icons is digested After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (H (5)-26), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a of the default display mode, and the characters "Press!" Encourages the operation of The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation effective period. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -26), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. The operation validity period is then started.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 393 (H (5)-27), the state shown in FIG. 393 (H (5)-27) In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5)-28), the face of the panda's face PND appears from the treasure box image box and the word "chance" is displayed, showing that the mini game has failed. ing. However, since the appearance of the panda's face PND does not deny that the benefit is given, it may still be possible to maintain an expectation for the giving of the benefit although the reliability is low. Thereafter, when the button effect mini game ends, as shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -29), the effect in the big hit game is resumed.

  In FIG. 394 (H (5)-30), it is shown that it is shifted to the 14th round. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -31), it is shown that the second button effect mini game is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed at the center of the display screen and the upper side of the treasure box image BOX as shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -24). In addition to the icon of the face of the Bancho, the characters "If you push out the button" and "If it comes out, it is definite change" is displayed, and it is informed that when the face of the Bancho appears from the treasure box, the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes the definite state It is done. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5)-31), the letter "last chance" is also displayed corresponding to the remaining one button icon being stocked. There is.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -32), a digestive animation is performed showing that the button icon remaining at the end is digested, and thereafter, FIG. 394 (H (5)- As shown in 33), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, and the characters "Press!" Are displayed, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the effect button 136 is also performing vibration and rotation operations, but may not be performed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation effective period. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -33), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. The operation validity period is then started.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -34), FIG. 394 (H (5) -35) is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the face of the team leader TRF appears from the treasure box image BOX and the characters “probable change!” Are displayed, and it is informed that transition to the positive change state is made after the end of the big hit game. Thereafter, when the button effect mini game ends, as shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -36), the effect in the big hit game is resumed. At this time, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the face icon TDRF of the face of the bancho is displayed together with the characters of “next definite change”, and it is informed that transition to the positive change state is made after the big hit game is over.

  FIG. 394 (H (5) -37) shows a state of proceeding to the 16th round. When moving to the 16th round, the copanda character reappears and the character of "final round" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round.

  In FIG. 394 (H (5) -38), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. In this effect example, when the jackpot end effect is started, an animation is performed in which the copanda character and the face icon TDRF of the screen leader displayed at the lower left of the display screen are erased, as shown in FIG. 394 (H (5 (H (5 As shown in Fig. 39), a character TDR of a program leader appears together with the character display of "next definite change", and a notification of transition to the positive change state is also performed here.

  FIG. 394 (H (1) -40) shows that the jackpot game has ended and it has been shifted to a probability change state. At this time, the reserve is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  As described above, in this example of rendering, as a result of the timer advance rendering being performed, it is shown that rendering is performed in which the execution of a certain rendering (a mini game of button rendering) is performed as a certain rendering.

  Also, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer advance presentation being performed, it is shown that a chance-based presentation is performed that suggests that some kind of benefit may be given as a certain presentation. .

  In this effect example, as a result of the timer preview effect being performed, button stock is performed as a certain effect, and during this big hit game, a mini game of button effects is performed according to the number of times. During the symbol variation display after the end of the big hit game, a mini game of button effect corresponding to the button stock may be performed.

  Also, in this effect example, the timer announcement effect is performed during the big hit game, and the button stock effect is performed as a certain effect executed as a result, but the timer notification is displayed during the symbol fluctuation display before the start of the big hit game The effect may be started, and the button stock effect relating to the timer notice effect may be performed during the big hit game, or the timer notice effect may be started during the big hit game, and the symbol change display executed after the big hit game is concerned. A button stock effect relating to the timer advance effect may be performed. In addition, the timer advance notice is started during the symbol change display before the start of the big hit game, and the timer notice effect is continuously performed even during the big hit game, and then the symbol change display executed after the end of the big hit game is concerned. A button stock effect relating to the timer advance effect may be performed.

  In FIG. 394 (I (5) -1) to FIG. 395 (I (1) -31), button stock is performed in the timer announcement effect executed during the big hit game, and the number of button stocks during the big hit game is It shows another effect pattern in which a mini game according to the game is performed. Note that FIG. 394 (I (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), showing that a big hit has occurred and a big hit start effect has been performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 394 (I (5) -1) to FIG. 394 (I (5) -16) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 394 (I (5) -1) to FIG. 394 (H (5) -16) are the same as FIG. 383 (H (5) -1) to FIG. 3 (H (5) -16). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (I (5) -17), the second big hit medium timer advance notice display TM22 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and the character of "timer activation!" It is displayed to notify that the second timer announcement effect has been started. Here, the second jackpot middle timer advance notice display TM22 is a default display mode. "03:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second big hit medium timer notice display TM22, and it is suggested that a certain effect may be started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (I (5) -18), the second big hit medium timer advance notice display TM22 is enlarged and displayed while being moved to the approximate center of the display screen. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the second big hit medium timer advance notice display TM22.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5)-19) following FIG. 394 (I (5)-18), the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit medium timer notice display TM 22 continues, At the timing shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -19), “02:77” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -20), the disappearance animation is started during the display of the countdown in the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22, and the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 is erased. Is shown. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit middle timer advance notice display TM22, it is informed that the advance notice that a certain effect is performed is a false (Gasse) advance notice. In other words, it is shown that the second big hit medium timer notice display TM22 is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes "00:00", and that a certain effect (button stock) is not performed. Can.

  When the disappearing animation is completed, with the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) −21), while the brow character BBA appears, the characters “baboon disappointing” are displayed, and the timer notice effect is a representation of the caste And it is informed that button stock has not been performed.

  FIG. 395 (I (5) -22) shows a state of proceeding to the 14th round. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -23) to FIG. (I (5) -27), it is shown that a mini game of button effect is started. The effects shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -23) to FIG. 3 (I (5) -27) are as shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -24) to FIG. 394 (H (5) -28). Description is omitted because it is performed in the same manner as the effect shown.

  FIG. 395 (I (5) -28) shows a state of proceeding to the 16th round. When moving to the 16th round, the copanda character reappears and the character of "final round" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round.

  In FIG. 395 (I (5) -29), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. In this example of presentation, it is shown that a character TDR of a bandmaster who wears a school run (clothes) appears in place of the big hit end presentation by the copanda. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -30), the display changes in such a manner that the clothes of the character TDR of the Bancho break and become naked, and the character of “next definite change” is displayed. It is informed that the gaming state after the big hit ends will be a definite change state. In this effect example, when the game character TDR appears, it is notified that the transition to the definite change state is made after the big hit game, but when the game character TDR appears, the state changes to the definite change state. It may be decided to shift to a definite change state when the clothes are broken and changed to a naked state.

  FIG. 395 (I (1) -31) shows that the jackpot game has ended and the state has shifted to a positive change state. At this time, the reserve is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  As described above, in this example of the effect, as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed, an effect that indicates the possibility that the benefit is provided is performed, while a benefit advantageous to the player is provided. It is shown that the effect (probable variation confirmed effect) for notifying that it is being performed is being performed without the timer advance effect being performed.

  Further, in this example, even when the timer advance effect is performed in one big hit game, it is definitely notified that the advantage advantageous to the player is given without the timer advance effect being performed. It is shown that the effect to be performed is being performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where the on-hold continuous channel notification or the positive variation confirmation effect is performed without the timer advance presentation effect being performed, but if the timer preview effect is not performed, the positive variation confirmation is determined rather than the on-off continuous travel notification. Although it is comprised so that the direction of production | presentation may be performed easily, it may be comprised so that the direction of holding | maintenance series may be performed easily.

  Also, in this example, although a button stock effect is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed, an example is shown in which a mini game of button effects is performed as many as the number of buttons stored. For example, when a multi-ball winning mission is performed to the second special view starting opening 232, if one ball or a predetermined number (for example, three balls) is won, a mini game of button effect may be performed .

  Figures 395 (J (1)-1) to 397 (J (1)-67) continue after the timer announcement effect started during the change display of the decorative symbol shifts to a big hit game, and the big hit game It shows how a certain effect is performed during execution. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 395 (J (1) -1) to FIG. 396 (J (4) -22) are the same as FIG. 385 (A (1) -1) to FIG. (A (4) -22). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (1) -23), the hold (first hold) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the first special view display device The symbol variation display at 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and thereby becomes the change icon h0 which is the advance notice display mode related to the symbol change. That is, the change icon h0 gives notice that the timer advance effect is started. In addition, the symbol fluctuation display of this time is a symbol fluctuation display which becomes a big hit, and the fluctuation time is 30 seconds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (1)-24), the word "stock activation" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen in response to the display of the fluctuation icon h0, and two timer notice effects are displayed. Are shown starting simultaneously. At this time, the bomb icon BOM has been deleted. In this example of rendering, the third timer preview display TM13 and the fourth timer preview display TM14 are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer preview effects are simultaneously started. The third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 are both default display modes. On the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, "90:00" is displayed as a timer display, and a certain effect is started 90 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests. That is, it is shown that the time longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display this time is set as the initial value of the timer display. In addition, “10:00” is displayed as a timer display on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Suggest that In this example, two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 simultaneously start counting down, so after the countdown is started, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have passed and when 90 seconds have passed. It is suggested that be started. Here, the certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds has elapsed and the certain effect that may have been started when 90 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. It is also good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1)-25) to FIG. (A (3)-34) and described above, FIG. 396 (J (1)-25) to FIG. The effect shown in -34) is performed. The effects shown in FIG. 396 (J (1)-25) to FIG. (J (3)-34) are the same as in FIG. 385 except that the time indicated by the timer display of the third timer advance notice display TM 13 is different. Since it is the same as that of (A (1) -25) to the same figure (A (3) -34), the description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (3) -35), a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The strong cut-in image CI1a displayed in FIG. 386 (A (3) -38) is displayed as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance effect being performed. However, in this effect example, the timer advance effect is displayed. It is shown that it is displayed as an effect different from a certain effect performed as a result of performing. That is, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed without performing the timer advance presentation effect. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, and "68: 88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (3)-35).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (3) -36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed. "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern is displayed at the center, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continued, and "66: 21" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (3)-36).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (4) -37), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". It is done. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. At this time, the display position of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is moved from the upper right corner to the upper left corner. The movement of the third timer advance notice display TM13 may be performed by moving animation or may be performed by switching display. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, and “64:30” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (4) -37).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (4)-38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continued, and "62:30" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (4)-38). Note that the countdown of the timer display may be temporarily interrupted while the decorative symbol is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -39), it is shown that a big hit start effect is performed. When the jackpot start effect is started, a character will be produced in which character MCK of the wedding machiko teacher will bless the jackpot with four copandas. In addition, when the jackpot start effect starts, a right-handed display that promotes the player to hit the right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. Also, in this effect example, the timer notice effect relating to the third timer notice display TM 13 which has been performed before the start of the current big hit game is continuously performed even after the big hit game starts, At the timing shown in J (5) -39), "62:11" is displayed. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect started during the symbol variation display continues even after shifting to the big hit game. In the example of the effect, the third timer advance notice display TM13 moves slightly downward at the timing when the big hit start effect is started.

  In FIG. 396 (J (5)-40), it is shown that the big hit game has been started and it has been shifted to the first round. In this effect example, an effect of introducing an effect during a big hit game is performed, and in the first round, the characters "Introduction to effect from the next round" are displayed together with the copanda character, and that effect is notified. At this time, the third timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the copanda character appearing in the big hit game, and a part of the third timer notice display TM13 is considered to be difficult to see, but the copanda character is the third timer notice. The display TM 13 may be overlapped. Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "60: 37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (5)-40).

  In FIG. 396 (J (5) -41), a state of shifting to the second round is shown. In the second round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "when it comes out ..." along with the Sabo Hani icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (5)-42), The word "Expected to group notice!" Is displayed on top of this along with a demonstration display of strong group Sabohani group notice, and a description of the Sabohani group notice is given. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continued, and "44: 24" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (5)-42). Further, in FIG. 396 (J (5)-41) and FIG. (J (5)-42), the third timer notice display TM 13 is overlapped by the character of Sabohani appearing in the presentation explanation, and A part of the timer notice display TM13 is considered to be difficult to view. Here, a character of Sabohani appearing in the effect description may be overlapped with the third timer advance notice display TM13.

  FIG. 396 (J (5) -43) shows that the process has shifted to the fourth round. In the fourth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "when the word comes out ..." along with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (5)-44), The characters of "pseudo run" are displayed together with the replay icon to which the letters "NEXT" are attached to explain the pseudo run effect. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continued, and "06:33" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (5)-44). At least a part of the timer notice display TM 13 is overlapped by the replay icon, and a part of the third timer notice display TM 13 is considered to be difficult to view. Here, the icon of replay may be overlapped with the third timer notice display TM13.

  After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "01:00", the display position of the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -45). While moving to the lower center of the screen, the screen is displayed on the front side of the replay icon, and it is shown that the remaining time in the timer display can be easily viewed.

  Thereafter, when the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J (5)-46) following FIG. 396 (J (5)-45). , A cut-in image (a drama image) 565 G of a drama-like agate character making a cigarette is displayed. At this time, the dramatism image 565G is displayed on the back side of the third timer advance notice display TM13. Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -47), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, instead of the timer display, the character display of "probably strange" is performed. That is, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed using the area of the timer display.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -48), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the display is switched to the character display of "Yes!" That is, after the end of the big hit game, it is informed that it shifts to a definite change state. Note that FIG. 397 (J (5) -48) shows transition from the fourth round to the fifth round during the execution of the effect by the dramatized image 565G.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5)-49), the third timer advance notice display TM13 switches to the character display of "it is it alone" and benefits other than the probability change state are advantageous to the player. Suggests that it may be granted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -50), the third timer advance notice display TM13 switches to the character display of "No!". That is, it is informed that it is decided that the player is given some advantageous benefit in addition to the definite change state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -51), the third timer advance notice display TM13 switches to the character display of "Pending super hard", and in addition to the definite change state, the execution is suspended. In the variable display, it is informed that the symbol fluctuation display which becomes a big hit is included (that is, a holding continuation chan occurs). That is, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer advance presentation being performed, it is shown that the effect display by the dramatism image 565G is performed as a certain effect.

  It should be noted that the effect by the drama image 565G is executed when the gaming state after the big hit is a definite change state and a pending run is generated, but furthermore, if the big hit by the running run is a definite change big hit It may be performed only on

  As described above, when the effect by the dramatism image 565G is ended, the character BCMN of the extramarital crest appears in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -52). By the appearance of the extra large family crest character BCMN, the transition to a definite change state and the occurrence of a pending link are notified.

  FIG. 397 (J (5) -53) shows the state of proceeding to the sixth round. When transitioning to the sixth round, the character TDR of the Bancho who broke the clothes appears, and it is informed that it shifts to a definite change state after the end of the big hit game. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN is displayed, which indicates that the extra-large family crest character BCMN has appeared and a notification of the hold continuation channel determination has been made. This effect is continuously performed until the end of the 16th round, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5)-53) to FIG. 3 (J (5)-54).

  In FIG. 397 (J (5) -55), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. In this effect example, even if the jackpot end effect is started, the game character TDR continues to be displayed, and furthermore, the characters “next definite change” are displayed, and notification of transition to a positive change state is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest character CMON appears again from the upper side of the display screen, and notification that holding continuation is performed is also performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -57) in this example of rendering, it is shown that the character of "next definite change" displayed with the character TDR of the master has been switched to "next big hit". There is. Thereafter, when the big hit game is over, the effects shown in FIG. 397 (J (1) -58) to FIG. 3 (J (4) -62) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 397 (J (1) -58) to FIG. 3 (J (4) -62) are as shown in FIG. 386 (A (1) -62) to FIG. 3 (A (4) -66). The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -63), it is shown that a big hit start rendition relating to the second big hit by the holding group is performed. When the jackpot start effect is started, a character will be produced in which character MCK of the wedding machiko teacher will bless the jackpot with four copandas.

  FIG. 397 (J (5) -64) shows that the big hit game has been started and it has been shifted to the first round. In this effect example, it is informed that the character TDR of the Bancho who broke the clothes appears from the first round, and the current big hit is a definite variation big hit. This effect is continued until the 16th round starts. In addition, as mentioned above, presentation of effects may be performed during the round game.

  FIG. 397 (J (5) -65) shows the state of proceeding to the 16th round. When going to the 16th round, the characters of "probably odd hit" are added and displayed to the character TDR of the leader, and it is informed that it is a positive odd.

  In FIG. 397 (J (5) -66), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. In this effect example, even if the jackpot end effect is started, the game character TDR continues to be displayed, and furthermore, the characters “next definite change” are displayed, and notification of transition to a positive change state is performed.

  FIG. 397 (J (1) -67) shows that the jackpot game is over and the system is shifted to the positive change state (power support state). At this time, the reserve is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed across the symbol variation display and the big hit game.

  Further, in this example of the effect, it is shown that the timer advance notice may be overlapped with another effect display, and at least a part may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Further, in the example of the effect, it is shown that in a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed, it is suggested that a plurality of advantageous benefits are provided.

  Further, in this presentation example, it is shown that a time longer than the fluctuation time which is a time for executing the symbol fluctuation display may be displayed as an initial value of the timer display.

  Also, in this effect example, it is shown that the initial value of the timer display is set so that the timer display becomes "00:00" reliably during the big hit game by physically calculating, for example, The time indicated by the initial value of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is longer than the fluctuation time, and the shortest time in the big hit game (for example, in a pachinko machine with 16 rounds and 10 counts, when all the fired balls win the attacker It is shown that it is set to the time until the lapse of about 1 minute and 30 seconds at the shortest.

  In FIG. 397 (K (5) -1) to FIG. 398 (K (4) -30), the timer advance notice is started during the big hit, but the timer advance is not ended during the big hit, and then It shows that a certain effect relating to the timer advance notice effect is performed in the symbol variation display started to. In addition, FIG. 397 (K (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4)-9), showing that the big hit occurs and the big hit start effect is performed. There is. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 397 (K (5) -1) to FIG. 3K (K (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 397 (K (5) -1) to FIG. (K (5) -6) are the same as FIG. 387 (B (5) -10) to FIG. (B (5) -15) Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 397 (K (5) -7) shows transition to the 15th round. In this example of the effect, when moving to the 15th round, the character of "attention!" Is displayed together with the copanda character, suggesting that the timer advance notice effect is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (K (5)-8), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and "timer activation!" A character is displayed to notify that the timer advance presentation effect has been started. Here, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21, which suggests that a certain effect is started 40 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. That is, in this effect example, there is a possibility that the big hit game may end within 40 seconds after the timer display countdown starts, and a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed is a line during the big hit game. It indicates that there is a possibility that That is, when the big hit game is digested quickly, a certain effect may not be performed during the big hit game.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (K (5) -9), the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is enlarged and displayed while being moved substantially to the center of the display screen. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (5)-10) following FIG. 397 (K (5)-9), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer announcement display TM 21 continues and At the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -10), "39:52" is displayed.

  FIG. 398 (K (5) -11) shows a state of proceeding to the 16th round. In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance effect is continuously performed across multiple rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is continuously performed even if it is shifted from the 15th round to the 16th round. In the timer display of the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, "24:33" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -11).

  In FIG. 398 (K (5) -12), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. However, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 continues, and “10:03” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -12). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed even after the 16th round is finished and the big hit game is finished. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (5)-13), the characters of "next electric support" are displayed, and after the end of the big hit game, the special figure low probability common figure high probability state (ie, The notification of transition to the time saving state) is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -13), “08:77” is displayed as the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21.

  FIG. 398 (K (1) -14) shows that the jackpot game is over and the system is shifted to the power support state. At this time, the reserve is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In FIG. 398 (K (1) -14), there are two reservations of Special Figure 2, and the first reservation icon h21 and the second reservation icon h22 are displayed. Further, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues even after the big hit game is over and the gaming state shifts to the power support state, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) At the timing shown in -14), the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is "06:10". Further, in this effect example, when the big hit game is over and the gaming state shifts, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is moved and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen while being reduced.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -15), the hold (first hold) of the special view 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started, and the second special view display device The symbol variation display at 214 is started. In addition, the move animation of the reserve icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the reserve icon (the reserve icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first reserve icon h21 moves to the variation icon display area The second holding icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h21 and displayed as the first holding icon h21. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Further, in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, the countdown of the timer display continues and “05:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -15).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -16), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer advance notice display TM21 continues, and FIG. At the timing shown in) -16), "03:00" is displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer attention” are displayed, and as a result of the timer announcement effect being performed, it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the countdown continues in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, and "01:06" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -17).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (1)-18), when the timer display countdown in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM 21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 1) -19, the family crest character CMON appears so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and the word "family crest" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the big hit is confirmed. It is shown that the notification is being performed. That is, it is notified that the symbol variation display being executed is a symbol variation display in which a big hit occurs. Further, at this time, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is erased. At this time, it is shown that the right symbol fluctuates at a low speed, and the display is stopped and displayed by "decoration 5". As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice effect started during the big hit game continues even after the end of the big hit game, and is executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed in the symbol variation display performed thereafter As a certain effect, it is shown that a big hit confirmation notification is being displayed by the display of the family crest character CMON.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -20), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the character of "big hit" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a big hit confirmation notification is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (2) -21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. Thereafter, the family crest character CMON is erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (2)-22) to FIG. (K (1)-23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (2) -24), it is shown that the Echigo shop group advance notice is performed. At this time, the characters "premier appearance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a premier notice has been made. Further, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (2) -25), it is shown that the capture cut-in image HBK is displayed. In addition, “SP development!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is reported that it will develop into a super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (3)-26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it develops into SP reach (sword reach), and a screen where the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character confront is displayed .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (3) -27), a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, the character of "strong cut-in" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the content of the executed notice is notified. The display of the today's cut-in image CI1a in this presentation example is executed as a presentation different from a certain presentation performed as a result of the timer announcement presentation being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (3)-28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed. "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern is displayed at the center, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (4) -29), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". It is done. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (4) -30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed across the big hit game and the display of the symbol variation display after the end of the big hit game.

  FIGS. 398 (L (5) -1) to 399 (L (4) -30) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -1) to 398 (K (4) -30). It shows a pattern. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 398 (L (5) -1) to FIG. 399 (L (5) -10) are the same as FIG. 397 (K (5) -1) to FIG. 398 (K (5) -10). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 399 (L (5) -11) shows a state of proceeding to the 16th round. In the timer display of the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, "12: 52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 399 (L (5) -11).

  FIG. 399 (L (5) -12) shows that the 16th round continues. At this time, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer advance notice display TM 21 is completed and it becomes “00:00”. In this effect example, the big hit game digestion in the 15th to 16th rounds takes longer than the effect example shown in FIG. 397 (K (5) -8) to FIG. 398 (K (5) -11). It is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM 21 is completed before the big hit game is over.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L (5) -13), a family crest character CMON appears. That is, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit timer advance notice display TM 21 is completed before the big hit game is ended, and a pending continuous channel announcement by the display of the family crest character CMON is performed as a certain effect. Is shown. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L (5) -14), the letters “In-pending super intense heat” are displayed together with the family crest icon CMN, suggesting that a pending run is performed. ing.

  In FIG. 399 (L (5) -15), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L (5)-16), in response to the holding continuation notice being performed during the big hit game, the character of "next time continuation chan" is displayed, Also here, notification of the execution of the hold sequence is performed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 399 (L (1) -17) to the same figure (L (4) -30) are performed. In the effects shown in FIG. 399 (L (1)-17) to (L (4)-30), the timer announcement effect is completed during the big hit game, and the hold continuous chan announcement has already been performed, so As shown in 388 (K (1)-14) to (K (4)-30) in the figure, the timer advance notice effect is not performed during the symbol variation display. In other words, the effects shown in FIG. 399 (L (1)-17) to (L (4)-30) in FIG. 388 (K (1)- 14) The same effects as those shown in (K (4) -30) are performed. Therefore, description of the effects shown in FIG. 399 (L (1)-17) to FIG. (L (4)-30) will be omitted.

  As described above, in this example, even if the contents of the timer notice effect are the same, the case where the timer notice effect is completed during the big hit game due to the difference in the progress of the game (the big hit game digest speed) It is shown that there is a case where it is completed during the symbol variation display performed after the game is over.

  In the illustration 400 (M (1) -1) to FIG. 401 (M (11) -68), the timer advance notice is started during the symbol variation display which is a big hit, but is started during and after the symbol variation display. The figure also shows that a certain effect relating to the timer advance effect is performed in the symbol variation display started thereafter, without ending the timer advance effect even during the big hit game. The effects shown in FIG. 400 (M (1) -1) to FIG. 401 (M (5) -42) are as shown in FIG. 395 (J (1) -1) to FIG. 396 (J (5) -42). The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown.

  FIG. 401 (M (5) -43) shows a state of proceeding to the fourth round. In the fourth round, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "when the word comes out ..." is displayed together with the icon of replay, and the explanation of the pseudo-series effect is started. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -44), the explanation of the pseudo-series effect is interrupted, and the character HSG of the lord who has made a thumb-up pose appears, and the "emergency notification!" Characters are displayed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "09: 31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (5)-44).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5)-45), the characters "TIMER EXTENSION" are displayed and the timer notice is displayed while the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed. It is shown that addition animation is started. As a result, the player may be able to expect that the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is added.

  Upon completion of the timer preview addition animation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -46) shows that the timer display in the third timer preview display TM13 is updated to "99:99". It is done.

  FIG. 401 (M (5) -47) shows a state of proceeding to the fifth round. At the fifth round, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the explanation of the interrupted pseudo-series effect is resumed, and the character of "when it is released ..." is displayed together with the icon of replay, and then, FIG. As shown in M (5) -48), the characters of "pseudo run" are displayed together with the icon of the replay attached with the letter "NEXT" to explain the pseudo run effect. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "90:26" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (5)-48). However, at least a part of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is overlapped with the pseudo run icon related to the explanation of the pseudo run effect, and the third timer advance notice display TM13 is considered to be difficult to view.

  FIG. 401 (M (5) -49) shows a state of proceeding to the ninth round. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -50), the character HSG of the lord who has made the thumb-up pose appears again, and the characters "Emergency Notice!" Are displayed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "13: 58" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (5)-50). In FIG. 401 (M (5) -48) to FIG. (M (5) -49), two game balls are winning in the special figure 2 starting opening 232 between the fifth round and the ninth round. The number of reservations in Special Figure 2 has increased by two.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -51), the characters "TIMER EXTENSION" are displayed, and the timer notice is displayed during the display of the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13. It is shown that addition animation is started. As a result, the player may be able to expect that the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is further added.

  Upon completion of the timer advance notice animation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -52) shows that the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is updated to a display showing infinity. It is done. That is, it is shown that the timer announcement effect is extended by updating the timer display to a display indicating infinity. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is temporarily suspended.

  FIG. 401 (M (5) -53) shows a state of proceeding to the tenth round. The timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 remains unchanged as the display showing infinity. This state is continued until the end of the 16th round, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -54).

  In FIG. 401 (M (5) -55), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. Here too, the character HSG of the lord is displayed, and the third timer advance notice display TM13 is also a display indicating infinity. Then, when the jackpot end effect is started, the characters "timer ..." are displayed, and it is notified that the display of the third timer advance notice display TM13 changes.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -56), the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM 13 changes to “10:00”, and the timer display countdown resumes 10 minutes. It suggests that a certain effect is started when the second passes. Further, at this time, the characters "next power support" are displayed, and it is informed that the gaming state after the big hit game is the special figure low probability spread figure high probability state (time saving state). In fact, as will be described later, the gaming state after the big hit game is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state (certain change state), but here notification of becoming a positive change state is not performed, It notifies that it is a time saving state, and shifts to a so-called latent state.

  FIG. 401 (M (11) -57) shows that the jackpot game is over and the system is shifted to the power support state (latency state). At this time, the reserve is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is not resumed, and the display of "10:00" remains.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -58), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started, and the second special view display device The symbol variation display at 214 is started. In addition, moving animation of holding icon h21, h22 of special figure 2 is done, the holding icon which is the display position of the first holding icon h21 (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time), fluctuation icon indicatory territory , And the second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and displayed as the first hold icon h21. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display has not yet started, and remains at "10:00", but thereafter, the countdown starts.

  FIG. 401 (M (11) -59) shows that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 continues, and the third shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -59). "09: 77" is displayed on the timer notice display TM13. That is, it is shown that 0.23 seconds have elapsed since the countdown restarts.

  In Fig. 401 (M (11)-59) to (M (11)-60), two game balls win the special figure 2 start opening 232, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 increases by two. It is shown. Here, the hold icons h22 and h23 of the special view 2 are both in the default display mode. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "07:44" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (11)-60).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -61), the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol stop simultaneously, and the fluctuation is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5". A temporary stop is being conducted. After that, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -62), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Also at this time, the countdown of the timer display continues in the third timer advance notice display TM13, and "02: 75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (11)-62).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -63), the suspension (first suspension) of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure The symbol variation display on the display device 214 is started. In addition, the move animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is moved to the variation icon display area The second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is displayed as the second hold icon h0. It moves to the display position of the icon h22 and is displayed as a second hold icon h22. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Also at this time, the countdown of the timer display continues in the third timer advance notice display TM13, and "02: 54" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (11)-63).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -64), the countdown on the third timer notice display TM13 is completed, and the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”. It is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -65), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the characters “certainly positive change confirmed” are displayed in the area where the timer display was displayed. That is, it is informed that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the definite changing state. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the probability variation notification is being performed as a certain rendering that is executed as a result of the timer preliminary rendering being performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11)-66), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased, and the characters "in the process of being changed" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen. It is informed that the state is a definite change state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -67), the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol stop simultaneously, and the fluctuation is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5". A temporary stop is being conducted. After that, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -68), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “Holiday 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed including the symbol variation display performed before and after the big hit game.

  Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer countdown is paused by performing predetermined display (for example, display of infinity) during execution of the timer advance notice effect, and then resumed.

  Further, in the example of the effect, it is shown that the time shown on the timer display is added while the timer advance effect is being executed.

  Further, in this effect example, in the pachinko machine having a game feature where there is a case where the game state after the big hit game end is not a definite change state or not (when it becomes so-called "latency confirmation") It is shown that a certain variation state is notified as a certain effect to be performed as a result of being performed.

  Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the display position of the timer advance notice is easily changed (it is easy to be moved and displayed) when the timer advance notice straddles the big hit game and the symbol variation display performed before and after it.

  Also, in this effect example, for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -55), displaying a long timer display (infinity display) gives expectation to the content of a certain effect It has been shown that there may be This may allow the player to be expected to perform a long timer display.

  In the present embodiment, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a small hit game, such timer announcement effect is not performed in the symbol change display in which the small hit occurs but is configured in the symbol change display in which the big hit occurs. It is also good.

  FIG. 402 (N (5) -1) to FIG. (N (11) -11) show the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 400 (M (1) -1) to FIG. 401 (M (11)-68). It shows another effect pattern. Note that FIG. 402 (N (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -54), showing that the big hit end effect is started after the 16th round is over. It shows. In the effect example shown in FIG. 402 (N (5) -1), the number of reservations is different from that in the effect example shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -55). In the effect shown in 1), the special figure 1 is 0 and the special figure 2 is 1.

  FIG. 402 (N (5) -1) shows that the sixteenth round is over and the big hit end effect is started. Here too, the character HSG of the lord is displayed, and the third timer advance notice display TM13 is also a display indicating infinity. Then, when the jackpot end effect is started, the characters "timer ..." are displayed, and it is notified that the display of the third timer advance notice display TM13 changes.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (5) -2), the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 changes to "30:00", and 30 starts after the countdown of the timer display restarts. It suggests that a certain effect is started when the second passes. Further, at this time, the characters "next power support" are displayed, and it is informed that the gaming state after the big hit game is the special figure low probability spread figure high probability state (time saving state).

  FIG. 402 (N (11) -3) shows that the jackpot game is over and the system is shifted to the power support state (latency state). At this time, the reserve is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is not resumed, and the display of "10:00" remains.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -4), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started, and the second special view display device The symbol variation display at 214 is started. In addition, the move animation of the reserve icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the reserve icon (the reserve icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first reserve icon h21 moves to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display has not yet started and remains at "30:00", but thereafter, the countdown starts.

  FIG. 402 (N (11) -5) shows that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 continues, and the third timing is shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -5). In the timer advance notice display TM13, "29: 77" is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.23 seconds have elapsed since the countdown restarts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -6), the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol stop simultaneously, and the fluctuation is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5". A temporary stop is being conducted. After that, as shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Also at this time, the third timer notice display TM13 continues the countdown of the timer display, and “21:45” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -7). In this example of effect, at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -7), both the special view 1 and the special view 2 are on hold, so the standby state is established.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -8), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is being performed in the standby state. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -8), "20:19" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -9), the countdown in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is completed in the standby state, and the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is "00:00" It is shown that it became Then, as shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -10), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the characters “certainly positive change confirmed” are displayed in the area where the timer display was displayed. That is, it is informed that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the definite changing state. As described above, in this example of effect, even when symbol variation display is not performed and the hold is also 0, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is completed, a certain change notification as a certain effect It is shown that is being done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -11), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased, and the characters "in the middle of a definite change" are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. It is informed that the state is a definite change state.

  402 (O (5) -1) to FIG. 402 (O (99) -13) are timer announcement effects shown in FIG. 402 (N (5) -1) to FIG. 402 (N (11) -11). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 402 (O (5) -1) to FIG. 402 (O (11) -8) are the same as FIG. 402 (N (5) -1) to FIG. 402 (N (11) -8). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses after entering the standby state, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -9) shows that a customer waiting demo display is displayed. There is. Also at this time, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM 13 continues, and “14: 19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -9). At this time, although the customer waiting demonstration display is overlapped with the timer notice display TM13, the timer notice display TM13 may be overlapped with the customer waiting demonstration display. Further, the time from the standby state to the start of the customer waiting demo display is not limited to the above-described one, and can be set to an appropriate time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -10), the countdown in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is completed in a state where the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed, and the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 It is shown that “00:00” became. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -11), the display returns to the display showing the state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed from the customer waiting demo display, and in the third timer notice display TM13, In the area where the timer display has been displayed, the characters "certainly determined" are displayed. That is, it is informed that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the definite changing state. As described above, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is completed during the guest waiting demo display, the display returns to the display showing the stopped decoration display from the customer waiting demo display, It is shown that a definite change notification is being performed as a certain effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -12), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased, and the characters "in the middle of a definite change" are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. It is informed that the state is a definite change state.

  After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses, the display of the customer waiting demo is shown again on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -13).

  Fig. 403 (P (5)-1) to Fig. (P (99)-12) show the timer notice effect shown in Fig. 402 (O (5)-1) to Fig. 402 (O (99)-13). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 403 (P (5) -1) to FIG. (P (99) -10) are the same as FIG. 402 (O (5) -1) to FIG. (O (99) -10). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 403 (P (99) -10), the countdown in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is completed with the wait for customer demonstration display being displayed, and the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is “00: In the case of 00 ", in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 403 (P (99) -11), the third timer advance notice display TM13 displays the characters" probable change confirmed "in a state where the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed. Ru. That is, it is informed that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the definite changing state. As described above, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is completed while the customer wait demo is displayed, the definite change notification is performed as a certain effect while the customer wait demo display is displayed. Is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (P (99) -12), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased while the customer waiting demonstration display is continuously displayed, and the central upper portion of the display screen is erased. The characters "in the middle of a definite change" are displayed on the screen, and it is informed that the gaming state is the definite change state.

  Fig. 403 (Q (5)-1) to Fig. (Q (11)-16) show the timer notice effect shown in Fig. 402 (O (5)-1) to Fig. 402 (O (99)-13). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 403 (Q (5) -1) to FIG. (Q (99) -10) are the same as FIG. 402 (O (5) -1) to FIG. (O (99) -10). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 403 (Q (99) -10), the countdown on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is completed with the wait for customer demonstration display being displayed, and the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is “00: In the case of “00”, as shown in FIG. 403 (Q (99) -11), in this effect example, the start of execution of a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed is reserved, and the timer display It waits in the state of "00:00". That is, in this effect example, in the standby state, even if the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the start of execution of a certain effect is reserved. Is shown.

  Thereafter, when the customer waiting demonstration display is finished, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q (11) -12) shows that the display returns to the display showing the state in which the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. However, even in this case, the start of the execution of a certain effect is reserved, and the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 remains "00:00".

  After that, when the game ball wins the special figure 2 starting opening 232, as shown in Figure 403 (Q (11)-13), the symbol fluctuation indication of the special figure 2 is started, the symbol in the 2nd special figure display 214 The variable display is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q (11) -14), a change animation is suggested that indicates that the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM 13 changes, and the change animation is completed. As shown in 403 (Q (11)-15), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, instead of the timer display, the characters "probable change confirmation" are displayed, and the current gaming state is not a time saving state but a definite change state It is informed that it was. As described above, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is completed in the standby state in which the symbol change display is not performed, the definite change notification is performed as a certain effect waiting for the start of the symbol change display. Is shown to be performed. In other words, when the timer display in the timer advance notice effect becomes "00:00", while the waiting for customer demonstration display is being displayed or the standby state in which the decorative symbol is being stopped is being displayed, symbol variation It can be said that it is shown that a certain effect is delayed and executed until the display starts.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q (11)-16), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased, and the word "incorrect" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. It is informed that the state is a definite change state.

  In Figure 404 (R (5)-1) to Figure (R (4)-25), a mission is started during the big hit game, and when the mission is achieved, an effect pattern is performed in which the timer advance presentation is started. It shows how it is. In addition, FIG. 404 (R (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4)-9), showing that the big hit occurs and the big hit start effect is performed. There is. However, in this example of rendering, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" are aligned to become a big hit, and the number of reservations when a big hit occurs is that special figure 1 is 0 and special figure 2 is four. . Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -1) to FIG. 404 (R (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -1) to FIG. (R (5) -6) are the same as FIG. 389 (E (5) -1) to FIG. (E (5) -6) Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 404 (R (5) -7) shows a state of proceeding to the fourth round. In this example, when moving to the fourth round, the character KGG with a cane appears, and the characters "Emergency Mission" and "Let's get 3 ball wins on electric chew" are displayed, and mission effect is started It is reported that. In this mission effect, the purpose of the mission is to make three game balls win the special figure 2 starting hole 232 during the big hit game, and when the mission is achieved, the timer announcement effect is configured to be started . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -8), the mission effect is started. When the mission effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "Please let 3 balls win in electric chow" at the upper center of the display screen, and the characters "3 more balls" appear below it. And the remaining quota until the mission is completed is displayed.

  FIG. 404 (R (5) -9) shows that the sixth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R (5)-9), one game ball is won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission is achieved is updated to "2 more balls" .

  FIG. 404 (R (5) -10) shows that the seventh round is being performed. At the timing shown in Fig. 404 (R (5)-10), one more game ball is won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, so the display of the remaining quota until mission completion is updated to "1 ball" There is.

  FIG. 404 (R (5) -11) shows that the tenth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -11), one more game ball is won in the special view 2 start opening 232, so that the mission is achieved and the characters "mission complete" are displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -12), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the center of the display screen, and "Please expect after 30 seconds" below it. The character of is displayed to notify that the timer announcement effect by the achievement of the mission has been started. Here, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the countdown. ing. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -13), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -13) In the timing, "29: 76" is displayed.

  FIG. 404 (R (5) -14) shows a state of proceeding to the eleventh round. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the 1st big hit middle timer preliminary announcement display TM21 is still continuing, and "12: 92" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -14).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -15), when the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5)-16), the appearance of a family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R (5)-17), the character of "pending continuation determined" is displayed together with the family crest character, and the symbol variation is pending (pending) It is notified that the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit in the display is included. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -18) to FIG. 404 (R (4) -25) are performed. In addition, the effects shown in FIG. 404 (R (5)-18) to FIG. (R (4)-25) are the same as those in FIG. 404 (B (5)- Since it is the same as the effect shown in 29) to the figure (B (4)-36), the explanation is omitted.

  In this demonstration example, mission presentation is performed in which a mission is achieved by winning a predetermined number of special figure 2 starting ports 242 during a big hit game, but the conditions for mission achievement are not limited to those described above, for example The mission may be achieved when there is a game ball winning (over winning) to the variable winning opening 234 exceeding a prescribed number (for example, 10) in one round. In this case, the mission may be achieved when the number of over winnings is a predetermined number (for example, three). In addition, the mission may be achieved when the rounding speed in one round is within a predetermined time (for example, within 10 seconds). In addition, the success of the button continuous hitting effect, the button long pressing effect, or the one button pressing effect may be set as the condition of the mission achievement. Also, the mini game may be played, and the mini game result may have a certain result (for example, a success result) as a condition for mission achievement.

  Figure 404 (S (5)-1) ~ Figure 405 (S (4)-24), another mission pattern is started during the big hit game, the mission is started, and when the mission is achieved timer announcement effect is started It shows how it is being done. In addition, the effects shown in FIG. 404 (S (5) -1) to FIG. (S (5) -9) are the same as FIG. 404 (R (5) -1) to FIG. (R (5) -9). The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown.

  FIG. 405 (S (5) -10) following FIG. 404 (S (5) -9) shows that the eleventh round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5)-10), one more game ball is won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, so the display of the remaining quota until mission completion is updated to "one more ball" There is.

  FIG. 405 (S (5) -11) shows that the 15th round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -11), one more game ball is won in the special view 2 start opening 232, so that the mission is achieved and the characters "mission complete" are displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -12), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the center of the display screen, and "Please expect after 30 seconds" below it. The character of is displayed to notify that the timer announcement effect by the achievement of the mission has been started. Here, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the countdown. ing. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -13), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -13) In the timing, "29: 76" is displayed.

  FIG. 405 (S (5) -14) shows that the sixteenth round is being performed. That is, it is shown that the final round is being performed. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM 21 is still continued, and “15: 31” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -14).

  In FIG. 405 (S (5) -15), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. However, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 continues, and “12:09” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -15). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed even after the 16th round is finished and the big hit game is finished. In this example, when the jackpot end presentation is started, the display position of the first jackpot timer advance notice display TM21 is moved to the lower left corner of the display screen. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -16), the characters "next time electric support" are displayed, and after the big hit game is over, the special figure low probability common drawing high probability state (ie, The notification of transition to the time saving state) is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -16), “10: 88” is displayed as the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21.

  FIG. 405 (S (1) -17) shows that the jackpot game has ended and the state has shifted to the power support state. At this time, the reserve is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In FIG. 405 (S (1) -17), there are four reservations of the special view 2, and the first reservation icon h21 to the fourth reservation icon h24 are displayed. Further, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues even after the big hit game is over and the gaming state is shifted to the power support state, and FIG. 405 (S (1) At the timing shown in -17), the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is "09:10". Further, in this effect example, when the big hit game is over and the gaming state shifts, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is moved and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -18), the hold (first hold) of the special view 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started, and the second special view display device The symbol variation display at 214 is started. In addition, the move animation of the reserve icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the reserve icon (the reserve icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first reserve icon h21 moves to the variation icon display area The second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is displayed as the second hold icon h21. It moves to the display position of the hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22, and the fourth hold icon h24 moves to the display position of the third hold icon h23 and displays it as the third hold icon h23. Be done. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Further, in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, the countdown of the timer display continues and “08:85” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -19), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, the countdown continues in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, and "01: 85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (1)-19).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -20), it is shown that the right symbol fluctuates at a low speed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM 21 is completed, and the timer display becomes “00:00”. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -21), the appearance of the whistle V formation display GYV appears to overlap with the decorative symbol, and the big hit confirmation notification is performed. It is done. That is, it is notified that the symbol variation display being executed is a symbol variation display in which a big hit occurs. Further, at this time, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is erased. At this time, the right symbol is still fluctuating slowly. As described above, in this effect example, the timer announcement effect started during the big hit game due to the mission continues even after the end of the big hit game, and the result of the timer announcement effect in the symbol variation display executed thereafter As a certain effect to be executed, it is shown that a big hit finalization notification is performed by the display of the eyelid V formation display GYV. After that, as shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -22), the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is reached. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (4) -23), the third stop is performed without the reach effect being performed, and the “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, “decoration 5-decoration It is shown that temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decoration pattern of 5-decoration 5 ". After that, as shown in FIG. 405 (S (4) -24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “concerning 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thus, in this production example, depending on the timing at which the mission is achieved in the mission production in the big hit game, the timer notice production started during the big hit game is performed across the symbol variation display started after the end of the big hit game. Is shown.

  Moreover, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the aspect of a certain presentation is different according to the time when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance presentation started after the mission is achieved and started. Specifically, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display started after the mission is completed and completed during the big hit game, the family crest character CMON appears and is not completed during the big hit game, but after the big hit game If it is completed during the symbol variation display of, 爺 V formation display GYV is displayed.

  FIGS. 405 (T (5) -1) to (T (4) -18) show that the mission is started during the big hit game, and the mission fails and the timer advance notice is not started. The effects shown in FIG. 405 (T (5) -1) to FIG. (T (5) -9) are the same as those in FIG. 404 (R (5) -1) to FIG. (R (5) -9). The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown.

  FIG. 405 (T (5) -10) shows that the fourteenth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (T (5)-10), one more game ball is won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, so the display of the remaining quota until mission completion is updated to "one more ball" There is.

  FIG. 405 (T (5) -11) shows that the 16th round (final round) is being performed. In addition, the achievement degree of the mission still leaves a winning of one ball to the special figure 2 starting opening 242, and the display of the remaining quota until the mission is achieved is still "one ball".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (T (5) -12), an appearance when the sixteenth round is finished is shown. However, because the mission of winning 3 game balls to the special figure 2 starting opening 242 could not be achieved by the end of the 16th round, the characters of "do not achieve mission" and "sorry" are displayed, and timer notice effect Is shown not to start.

  In FIG. 405 (T (5) -13), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (T (5) -14), the character of “next electric support” is displayed, and after the end of the big hit game, the special figure low probability common drawing high probability state (ie, The notification of transition to the time saving state) is performed.

  In this production example, the timer announcement production is not started because the mission has not been achieved, and as a result, no hold continuation chan announcement is performed, but in fact, FIG. 404 (R (5) -1)-same As in the example of the effect shown in FIG. (R (4) -25) and described above, the symbol variation display is such that the first hold of the special view 2 is a big hit. Therefore, when the big hit game is over, effects shown in FIG. 405 (T (1) -15) to FIG. 405 (T (4) -18) are performed. That is, except for the fact that the family crest character CMON does not appear during the symbol variation display, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 404 (R (1) -21) to FIG. 404 (R (4) -25) and described above. It will be done in the same way as you did. Therefore, description of the effects shown in FIG. 405 (T (1) -15) to FIG. 405 (T (4) -18) will be omitted.

  Figures 406 (U (5)-1) to (U (5)-6) show that, as a result of the timer announcement effect in the big hit game being performed, an event in which music selectable as a certain effect increases The situation is shown. Note that FIG. 406 (U (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), for example, in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. It shows. However, in this example of rendering, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" are aligned and become a big hit.

  FIG. 406 (U (5) -2) shows that the big hit game has been started and it has been shifted to the first round. In this example of the effect, the explanation of the effect is not started, and while the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, the character of "timer activation" is displayed below it, and the timer notice effect starts It is reported that it was done. Here, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed as a timer display on the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM 21, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Thereafter, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (U (5) -3), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 406 (U (5) -3) In the timing, "09: 77" is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 406 (U (5) -4), when the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5) -5), the princess character appears, and the character of "new song get" is displayed instead of the timer display on the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21, for example, a big hit It is reported that the lineup of songs flowing during the game increases. That is, it is reported that the lineup of songs that the player wants to play during the big hit game is increased.

  FIG. 406 (U (5) -6) shows a state of proceeding to the second round. In the second round, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 displays the title of the tune to be added to the lineup. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is shown that an increase in music is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed, such as notification of the occurrence of the pending continuous chan or notification of the probability change big hit, etc. In addition to the effect of giving notice or notifying of the content directly related to the profit, it is shown that the effect of giving a privilege for enriching the effect is performed although it has nothing to do with the player's profit.

  In this example, the effect of increasing the tune is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed. For example, the effect of increasing the premier effect of which the restriction of appearance is released is performed. An effect of increasing the number of characters whose appearance is released may be performed.

  Figures 406 (V (5) -1) to (V (5) -14) indicate that a mission is started during the big hit game, and that a certain benefit is notified when the mission is achieved within the time limit. It shows. FIG. 406 (V (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), showing that a big hit has occurred and a big hit start effect has been performed. There is. However, in this example of rendering, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" are aligned to become a big hit, and the number of reservations when a big hit occurs is that special figure 1 is 0 and special figure 2 is four. . Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -1) to FIG. 406 (V (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -1) to FIG. (V (5) -6) are the same as FIG. 404 (R (5) -1) to FIG. (R (5) -6) Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 406 (V (5) -7) shows a state of proceeding to the fourth round. In this example, when moving to the fourth round, the character KGG with a cane appears, and the characters "Emergency Mission" and "Let's win a game in 30 seconds" are displayed, and mission effects start It is reported that it is done. In this mission effect, the goal of the mission is to have one gaming ball win the special figure 2 starting opening 232 within a predetermined time (30 seconds) after the start of the mission, and when the mission is achieved, a certain effect Is configured to be started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -8), the mission effect is started. When the mission effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the letters "Please get a chance to win the electric chew within 30 seconds" in the upper center of the display screen, and below that the first big hit timer notice display TM21 Is displayed, and the character "30:00" is displayed on the first big hit timer notice display TM21 as an initial display of the timer display, and then the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -9), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -9) In the timing, "29: 76" is displayed.

  FIG. 406 (V (5) -10) shows that the fifth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -10), since one gaming ball has won in the special view 2 start opening 232, the mission is achieved, and the word "achievement!" Is displayed to indicate that effect. Note that “13:44” is displayed for the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -11), in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, instead of the timer display, the character of “focus” is displayed, and thereafter, FIG. 406 (V (5) In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in -13), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V (5)-14), the character of "pending continuation determined" is displayed together with the family crest character, and symbol variation is pending (pending) It is notified that the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit in the display is included.

  As described above, it is shown that, in this effect example, the timer notice display used in the timer notice effect may be used as a display indicating the remaining time of the mission.

  In this example of rendering, when the mission is achieved, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is stopped and the family crest character CMON is displayed, but, for example, the family crest immediately after the mission is achieved. For example, as shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -11 ') to FIG. 406 (V (5) -14'), the crest character is not displayed after the timer countdown is completed. CMON may be displayed.

  Specifically, FIG. 406 (V (5) -11 ′) is an effect following FIG. 406 (V (5) −10), and in this effect example, the timer display in the first big hit timer notification display TM21 In the timing shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -11 ′), “13:11” is displayed. Then, above the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, the characters "with timer 0 ..." are displayed, suggesting that some effect (a certain effect) will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -12 ′), when the timer display countdown in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in (5) -13 ', the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -14 '), the character of "pending continuation determined" is displayed together with the family crest character, and the execution is pending (pending) It is notified that the symbol fluctuation display which becomes a big hit in the fluctuation display is included.

  As described above, in this example of rendering, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is continued as it is after the mission is completed, and when the countdown is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00" It is shown that the character CMON is displayed, and a notification of the occurrence of a pending call is made.

  Fig. 407 (X (5)-1) to Figure (X (5)-11) that the mission is started during the big hit game, the mission is not achieved within the time limit, and no benefit is obtained Is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 407 (X (5) -1) to FIG. 407 (X (5) -9) are the same as FIG. 406 (V (5) -1) to FIG. (V (5) -9). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 407 (X (5) -10) shows that the fifth round is being performed. In this effect example, during the execution of the fifth round game, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 of the timer display in the first big hit without any gaming ball winning in the special view 2 start opening 232 after the mission is started It is shown that the countdown is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00". Therefore, the character of "sorry" is displayed above the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 to notify that the mission has failed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 407 (X (5) -11), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM 21 is erased, and the characters “Introduction to effect from the next round” are displayed for the copanda character, and the mission effect is displayed. It is informed that the continuation of the effect description that has been interrupted due to being started is started.

  As described above, in this production example, when the mission is not achieved before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed in the mission in the mission production, the timer notice display is erased without performing a certain effect. It is shown that the mission production is finished.

  FIGS. 407 (Y (5) -1) to (Y (5) -3) show variations of effects following FIG. 406 (V (5) -10). In the effect example shown in FIG. 407 (Y (5) -1) to (Y (5) -3), the sub display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game progresses It is configured to be able to change the display state or move and change the position according to. Such a configuration is also applicable to the other embodiments described above.

  FIG. 407 (Y (5) -1) shows that the fifth round is being performed. In the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 407 (Y (5) -1), the mission has been achieved, so it is shown that the character of "focus" is displayed instead of the timer display. . In addition, the character of "achievement!" Is displayed above the 1st big hit middle timer notice display TM21, and it is alerting | reporting achievement of a mission.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 407 (Y (5) -2), the sub display device 208S arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 ascends and overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is shown moving to the position. That is, at least a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is considered to be more difficult to visually recognize than in the non-overlapping state. Then, on the sub-display device 208S, the character "Holding super on hold" is displayed together with the character of the lady who got on the motorbike, which suggests that there is a high possibility of occurrence of holding on line.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 407 (Y (5) -3), the sub display device 208S starts to descend and return to the reference position. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is erased, and the character of "from the next round onward effect introduction" is displayed for the copanda character, which is interrupted by the mission effect. It is informed that the continuation of the effect description will be started.

  As described above, in this example of rendering, when a mission is achieved, it is shown that a movable body such as the sub display device 208S operates as a certain rendering.

  Although the sub display device 208S has been described as an example of the movable body in this example of effect, for example, one or more of the various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 14 may be operated. Good.

  In this production example, although the mission has a goal to achieve a predetermined number of winnings on the second special drawing starting port 232, the contents of the mini game and the mission described so far are applied to this production example It is also possible. In addition to this, for example, the purpose of the mission may be to pass through the effect gate where the game ball can pass, which is disposed on the game board, or the purpose of the mission may be achieved by continuous hitting or long pressing of the effect button 136. It may be configured as achievable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one or two or more of the effect movable bodies (for example, various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 14) are operated as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed. It is also good. In this case, for example, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display is “00:00” and a certain effect movable body (first effect movable body) is operated, another certain effect movable body (second If the effect movable body is operating, the operation of the second effect movable body is completed in order to avoid interference between the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body. One of the effect movable bodies may be operated to delay the start of a certain effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the timer display in the timer advance notice becomes “00:00” in the timer advance effect, a predetermined effect is performed as a certain effect. There may be provided a plurality of effects, and the timer display may be alternatively selected and executed when the timer display becomes "00:00". For example, the timer display may be "00:00" When it becomes "", it is possible to select which of the on-hold continuous channel notification effect and the definite variation notification to be performed, and the selected effect may be configured to be executed. When configured in this way, it is difficult to identify which benefit is to be notified even if the timer display is "00:00", so it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the effect.

  In addition, the contents of a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect may be randomly selected from among a plurality of types according to the conditions, such as an increase notification of a song among them, etc. You may make it include the thing which is not directly related to the privilege of a game, and it may be able to expand the range of timer production by doing in this way. Further, there are cases where it is possible to improve the frequency of appearance of the timer advance notice effect and alleviate the value of the benefit.

  In addition, for example, when a lower right error occurs while displaying the timer advance notice display, the ball removal display may be displayed so as to overlap the timer notice display. By doing this, it may be possible for the player to accelerate the ball pulling operation because the timer advance notice indicates or indicates a certain time. The display example of the ball removal display is applicable to any of the display modes described above.

  Further, in the example of the effect in which the timer advance notice is overlapped with another effect display in the embodiment described above, the other effect display may be configured to be overlapped with the timer notice. Further, in an effect example in which another effect display is overlapped with the timer advance display in the embodiment described above, the timer advance display may be configured to be overlapped with the other effect display.

Or, although an effect example is shown where other effect displays overlap with the timer notice display as appropriate,
In the above description,
“The timer effect [for example, the first big hit in the first big hit timer notification display TM21 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5)-49) to the figure (A (5)-55), etc.) [For example, a game console provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]
The timer effect is a display that shows a certain time after the timer display [for example, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 etc shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49)] is started. [For example, when it becomes "00:00" etc.], a certain effect [for example, a pending continuous channel announcement effect etc. by the appearance of the family crest character CMON shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -54)] is started It is an effect configured to
It is configured that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5)-49) to FIG. (A (5)-55) Timer notice effect related to the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 shown is being performed during the big hit game etc],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming platform, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the rendering means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to have an expectation for the timer effect even during the big hit game.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may always execute timer effect, or may not execute timer effect.

  In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, when the timer display turns into a display indicating a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. The timer display may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  Also, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started other than when the timer display is a display indicating a certain time.

  It may be configured that only at least a portion of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, and effects such as at least a portion of the timer effect may also be performed during the execution of the big hit game May be configured. In addition, at least a part of the timer effect may be always performed during the big hit game, or at least a part of the timer effect may not be performed during the big hit game. May be

  In addition, it may be configured such that only a part of the timer effect may be performed during the big hit game, or all of the timer effect may be performed during the big hit game. It is also good.

  In addition, only a certain effect of the timer effects may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, or may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed after the end of the big hit game.

Also, the timer display may be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display showing the certain time while the big hit game is being performed. As shown in FIG. 396 (J (1) -24) to FIG. 397 (J (5) -52), for example, the third timer notice display TM13 during the symbol variation display that is a big hit Such timer preview effect is started, and the effect display by the dramatism image 565G as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer preview effect being performed is performed during the big hit game, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to notice that the timer display indicates a certain time.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible to give surprise by generating a big hit before the timer display reaches a certain time, and another big hit during the big win by the timer effect started during the execution of the symbol variation display. There are cases where it is possible to give an expectation to the score.

  Here, the timer display is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display showing a certain time only during the execution of the big hit game. The timer display may be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display showing a certain time even while the game other than the big hit game is being executed. It may be configured as it is. In addition, the timer display may be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be configured to be a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. The timer display may be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may not be a display showing a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. .

  In addition, only the timer display is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display showing a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. It is also good that the display other than the timer display may be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display showing a certain time during the execution of the big hit game May be configured.

  In addition, the timer display may be displayed only during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. The timer display may be displayed other than during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display showing a certain time while the big hit game is being executed. It may be configured.

  The gaming machine may be characterized in that the timer effect is executed over the big hit game and a symbol variation display that is executed before the start of the big hit game and / or after the end of the big hit game.

In addition, the timer display may be displayed during execution of the big hit game, and may be displayed to indicate the certain time during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over. As shown in FIG. 397 (K (5) -8) to FIG. 398 (K (1) -19), for example, the timer notice effect relating to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 during the big hit game is A presentation of a big hit confirmation notification by the appearance of a character CMON of a crest as a certain effect started and performed as a result of the timer announcement production being performed is performed during a symbol variation display performed after the end of the big hit game, etc. ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the timer display may be able to be displayed as a pre-reading notice during the big hit.

  Here, even if the timer display is displayed during the execution of the big hit game, it may be configured to be a display showing a certain time only during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the end of the big hit game. The timer display is displayed during execution of the big hit game, and it may be configured to be a display showing a certain time other than during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over. It is also good. In addition, the timer display may be displayed during execution of the big hit game, and it may be configured to be always a display showing a certain time during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over, or the big hit It may be configured that the timer display is displayed during the execution of the game, and the display may not show a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over.

  In addition, the timer display may be displayed only while the big hit game is being executed, and it may be configured to show a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the big hit game is over. The timer display is displayed also during the execution of games other than the big hit game, and it may be configured to display a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over. May be

  In addition, only the timer indication may be displayed during execution of the big hit game, and it may be configured to be a display showing a certain time during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over. And, during the execution of the big hit game is also configured to be displayed other than the timer display, it may become a display showing a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display to be executed after the end of the big hit game It is also good.

In addition, “the timer effect is an effect that may start execution when a certain condition regarding the game is achieved [eg, FIG. 404 (R (5)-7) to FIG. (R (5) As shown in -12), when the mission to achieve three game balls to special figure 2 start opening 232 is achieved during the big hit game, the timer notice effect concerning the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is started etc ],
According to the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, it may be configured to display the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display which is executed after the big hit game is over [for example, As shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -12) to FIG. (S (5) -21), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is a big hit game at the timing when the mission is achieved. It is completed during the symbol variation display after the end, and the timer display becomes "00:00", and the big hit finalization notification by the display of the 爺 V formation display GYV is performed during the symbol variation display, etc.],
Depending on the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, it may be displayed during the execution of the big hit game, the display may show the certain time [eg, FIG. 404 (R (5) -12) ~ As shown in the figure (R (5)-16), at the timing when the mission is achieved, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed during the big hit game and the timer display is "00 : 00 ", and a pending continuous channel notification is performed by the display of the character CMON of the family crest during the big hit game, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to give an intention to start the timer effect.

  Here, the timer effect may start execution only when a certain condition regarding the game is achieved, or starts execution other than when the certain condition regarding the game is achieved. It may be possible to Also, the timer effect may always start when certain conditions regarding the game are achieved, or may not start when certain conditions regarding the game are achieved. It may be.

  In addition, it may be configured to be a display showing a certain time only during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is finished according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, Depending on the timing at which a certain condition is achieved, it may be configured to be a display showing a certain time other than during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over. Also, depending on the timing at which a certain condition is achieved, it may be configured to be always a display showing a certain time during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over, or a certain condition It may be configured such that there may not be a display showing a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the big hit game is finished according to the timing when the is achieved.

  In addition, it may be configured to be a display showing a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the big hit game is finished only according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, It may be configured to be a display showing a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is finished according to the timing other than the timing when a certain condition is achieved.

  In addition, depending on the timing when a certain condition is achieved, it may be configured to be a display showing a certain time only during the execution of the big hit game, or according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured such that it may be a display showing a certain time even during the execution of games other than the big hit game. In addition, depending on the timing when a certain condition is achieved, it may be configured to be always an indication showing a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, or according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, a big hit game It may be configured such that it may not be a display showing a certain time during execution of.

  In addition, it may be configured such that it may be an indication showing a certain time during the execution of the big hit game only in response to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, and other than the timing when a certain condition is achieved. Depending on the timing, it may be configured to be a display showing a certain time during the execution of the big hit game.

In addition, as a certain effect, an effect (hereinafter referred to as “the eleventh effect [eg, FIG. 390 (E (5) -13) to FIG. E (E) indicating the gaming state after the end of the big hit game. (5) -14) may be executed [for example, shown in FIG. 389 (E (5) -8) to FIG. 390 (E (5) -14)]. In this way, it is suggested that it will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit by the appearance of the Bancho character TDR as a certain effect executed as a result performed when the timer notice effect relating to the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is performed Are doing etc],
An effect (hereinafter referred to as “the 12 nd effect [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5 (A) (5 (5) ) (FIG. 386 (A (5)-49)-same as in FIG. 386 (A (5)-49)) As shown in FIG. (A (5) -55), the family crest character CMON appears as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer preliminary announcement effect relating to the first big hit middle timer preliminary announcement display TM 21 being performed. Reporting that the occurrence of chan etc.],
The certain effect is a effect configured to be executed even when the timer display does not become a display indicating the certain time [for example, FIG. 389 (D (5) -11) As shown in FIG. 395 and FIG. 395 (I (5) -29) to FIG. 3 (I (5) -30), the pending continuous channel notification or the bancho by the appearance of the family crest character CMON without the timer advance presentation effect being performed. There may be a notification that the transition to the probability variation gaming state will be performed by the appearance of the character TDR, etc.],
The eleventh effect is configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect when the timer display does not become a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the big hit game.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, so-called holding units actually make a big hit without notification, but since so-called probability change notification is important as notification of the gaming state, it is easier to understand when notification during the big hit game is running There is.

  Here, there may be a case where only the eleventh effect is performed as a certain effect, or a certain effect other than the eleventh effect may also be performed as a certain effect. In addition, the eleventh effect may be performed as a certain effect, or the eleventh effect may not be performed as a certain effect.

  Further, only the twelfth effect may be executed as a certain effect, or effects other than the twelfth effect may be performed as a certain effect. Also, the twelfth effect may be performed as a certain effect, or the twelfth effect may not be performed as a certain effect.

  Also, an effect may be configured such that it may be executed even if the timer display does not indicate a certain time, or the timer display may have a certain time It may be configured such that it may be executed even when the display does not indicate the display. Also, a certain effect may be configured to be always executed even when the timer display does not become a display showing a certain time, and a display showing the timer display a certain time It may be configured such that it may not be executed even if it is not.

  In addition, only when the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be more easily executed than the twelfth effect, The 11th effect may be more easily executed than the 12th effect other than when the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. In addition, when the timer display does not become a display showing a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the 11th effect may be configured to be more easily executed than the 12th effect. When the timer display does not show a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be more difficult to be executed than the twelfth effect.

  In addition, when the timer display does not become a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be always executed, or the timer display may be performed while the big hit game is being performed. The twelfth rendition may be configured not to be performed when the display does not indicate a certain time.

Also, “when the timer display is a display indicating the certain time and the certain effect is started (hereinafter,“ first case [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5) -49) ̃FIG. As shown in (A (5)-55), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00" and the hold-on-ch chan notification effect is performed Etc.])),
In the case where the certain effect is started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter referred to as “second case [for example, as shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11), the timer advance effect is performed When there is no hold on-the-fly notification effect, etc.]]
The certain effect in the first case is an effect to be executed in the first mode (hereinafter referred to as “first effect [eg, FIG. 386 (A (5) -54) to FIG. A (5) -55), etc.])))),
The certain effect in the second case may be performed in the second mode (hereinafter, “the second effect [for example, the eyebrow V formation shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11) It is said ").) And,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The type suggested by performing the first effect and the type suggested by performing the second effect are the same types [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5) -54) to Identical The display of the family crest character CMON shown in FIG. (A (5) -55) and the display of the 連 V formation display GYV shown in FIG. ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, there are cases where it is possible to increase variations of a certain effect.

  Here, the certain effect in the first case may be only the first effect or may be effects other than the first effect. Also, a certain effect in the first case may be the first effect or may not be the first effect.

  Also, a certain effect in the second case may be only the second effect or may be effects other than the second effect. Also, a certain effect in the second case may be necessarily the second effect or may not be the second effect.

  Note that a certain effect in the first case and a certain effect in the second case may be the same effect (first effect or second effect).

  In addition, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects, or may be entirely different aspects.

  Also, the type suggested by the first effect and the type suggested by the second effect may be the same type or may be different types. Good.

Also, the timing at which the first effect can be started is likely to be earlier than the timing at which the second effect can be started [eg, FIG. 389 (D (5) -11) While the hold-on-ch notification effect by the display of 爺 V formation display GYV shown in is started during the big hit end production, it is shown in FIG. 386 (A (5)-54) to FIG. (A (5)-55). Hold-on announcement by the display of the family crest character CMON is likely to be started during the round of a big hit game, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where it is possible to expect that a certain effect is executed without the timer effect being rescued while making the timer effect appear.

  Moreover, according to this game console, it may be possible to hold the time display for a long time.

  Here, the timing at which the first effect can be started may always be earlier than the timing at which the second effect can be started, or the timing at which the first effect can be started may be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started. It may be configured such that the timing at which the second effect can be started is always later.

  In addition, when the first effect is started, the second effect may not be started. When the second effect is started, the first effect is not started. It may be done.

  In addition, the timing at which the second effect can start and the timing at which the first effect can start may be configured to be the same in some cases, or the first effect is more than the timing at which the second effect can be started. It may be configured that there are cases where it is possible to start later.

Also, in the second case, the certain effect may be executed in the first mode as the second effect [eg, as shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11 ′) In some cases, there may be a pending continuous channel announcement effect by the display of the character CMON of the family crest without the timer advance presentation effect being performed, etc.]
The timing at which the certain effect is executed in the first mode as the first effect in the first case, and the timing in the second case as the second effect in the second case As shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49) to FIG. (A (5) -54), the timing at which the rendition is executed is different. The hold-on-the-chance announcement effect by the display of the character CMON of the crest as the effect is started during the round of the big hit game, but as shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11 '), it does not go through the timer notice effect. Hold-on-Chan announcement effect by the display of the character CMON of the family crest to be executed is started during the jackpot end effect, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give expectation to the first effect even if the timer effect is not started.

  Here, in the second case, only a certain effect may be executed in the first mode as the second effect, or in the second case, the first mode as the second effect There may be cases where effects other than certain effects are also performed. Also, in the second case, a certain effect may always be executed in the first mode as the second effect, or in the second case, a certain effect may be performed in the first mode as the second effect. It may not be executed.

  Moreover, in the second case, a certain effect may be executed only in the first mode as the second effect, and in the second case, other than the first mode as the second effect A certain effect may be performed in the aspect of.

  Moreover, in the second case, a certain effect may be executed in the first mode only as the second effect, or in the second case, the first effect as the effect other than the second effect A certain effect may be performed in the aspect of.

  In addition, only in the second case, a certain effect may be executed in the first mode as the second effect, and in any case other than the second case, the second effect may be performed as the second effect. A certain effect may be performed in one aspect.

  In addition, the timing when a certain effect is executed in the first mode as the first effect in the first case, and the timing when the certain effect is executed in the first mode as the second effect in the second case Only in the first case, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first mode as the first effect, and in the second case as the second effect in the first mode. The timing other than the timing at which the effect is performed may be different. In addition, the timing when a certain effect is executed in the first mode as the first effect in the first case, and the timing when the certain effect is executed in the first mode as the second effect in the second case May be different, or in a first case, at a timing when a certain effect is executed in a first mode as a first effect, and in a second case, in a first mode as a second effect The timing at which the effect is performed may be the same.

Also, the above-mentioned certain effect is a confirmed effect notifying that the player is given an advantageous benefit [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5)-54) to FIG. (A (5)-55 As shown in), the display of the family crest character CMON informs that the generation of the hold continuation chan occurs, or from FIG. 390 (E (5)-13) to FIG. (E (5)-14). As shown in, the appearance of a character TDR of a program leader is notifying a definite variation confirmation, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by performing a certain effect, it may be possible to easily recognize what kind of benefit is provided and to play the game with ease.

  Here, a certain effect may notify only that the player is given an advantageous benefit, or may notify other than giving the player an advantageous benefit. It may be. Also, a certain effect may always notify that the player is given an advantageous benefit, or may not notify the player that an advantageous benefit is given. May be

  In addition, as a benefit advantageous to the player, for example, one including one or two or more of a notification of probability variation confirmation, notification of time reduction, notification of round number increase in a big hit game can be mentioned, It is not limited to these.

In addition, “the above-mentioned certain effect informs the player that the advantageous benefit is given to the player. [For example, FIG. 386 (A (5) -54) to FIG. (A (5) -55) It is a series of pending call announcements by the display of the family crest character CMON, etc.],
The finalized effect is an effect of notifying that the symbol fluctuation display which is a big hit is included in the symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "held symbol fluctuation display") whose execution is suspended,
When the number of symbol variation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol variation display is one, it may be configured to execute one of the first effect and the second effect. [For example, in the case of notifying that one holding chain occurs, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5)-49) to FIG. (A (5)-55), As a result, as shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11), the timer notice effect relating to the timer notice display TM21 is performed, and as a result, the hold chain notice effect by the display of the family crest character CMON is performed. And, in the big hit end production is held continuous chan announcement effect by the display of 爺 V formation display GYV, etc.],
When the number of symbol variation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol variation display is two or more, it may be configured to execute both the first effect and the second effect [For example, in the case of reporting that two holding chains occur, as shown in FIG. 391 (G (5) -6) to FIG. 39 (G (5) -16), first, As shown in FIG. 391 (G (5)-22), the first timer notice display TM 21 is subjected to a timer notice effect, and as a certain effect, a hold continuation notice operation by the display of the family crest character CMON is performed. And, in the big hit end production to perform a pending continuous chan announcement effect by the display of 爺 V formation display GYV, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where the sense of expectation when both the first effect and the second effect are executed can be largely provided while eliminating the confusingness of the effect.

  Here, a certain effect may notify only that the player is given an advantageous benefit, or may notify other than giving the player an advantageous benefit. It may be. Also, a certain effect may always notify that the player is given an advantageous benefit, or may not notify the player that an advantageous benefit is given. May be

  In addition, the finalization effect may be to inform only that the symbol fluctuation display which is a big hit is included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display, or the symbol fluctuation display which is a big hit is included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display Information other than being present may also be notified. In addition, the confirmation effect may be to always notify that the symbol fluctuation display which is a big hit is included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display, or the symbol fluctuation display which is a big hit is included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display It may be that there is a case where it does not notify that there is.

  In addition, when the number of symbol fluctuation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display is one, it may be configured such that only one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. May be done, if the number of symbol variation display that will be a big hit included in the suspension symbol variation display is one, perform the production other than one of the first production and the second production It may be configured to be the case. In addition, even if the number of symbol variation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol variation display is one, even if it is configured to always execute one of the first effect and the second effect If the number of the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, it is configured such that one of the first and second effects may not be executed. It may be done.

  In addition, when the number of symbol fluctuation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display is one, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be executed, or in the suspension symbol fluctuation display In the case where the number of the symbol variation display to be a big hit included is one, it may be configured to execute the first effect without fail. In addition, when the number of symbol fluctuation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display is one, it may be configured such that only the second effect may be executed, or in the suspension symbol fluctuation display When the number of the symbol variation display to be a big hit included is one, it may be configured to execute the second effect without fail.

  In addition, when the number of symbol fluctuation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display is one, it may be configured not to execute the first effect, it is included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display When the number of symbol variation displays to be a big hit is one, the second effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when the number of the symbol fluctuation indication which becomes the big hit which is included in the reservation symbol fluctuation indication is 2 or more, it is constituted so that only the production of both the 1st production and the 2nd production may be executed May be, when the number of symbol variation display that will be a big hit included in the suspension symbol variation display is two or more, there is a case to perform effects other than the effects of both the first effect and the second effect It may be configured as it is. In addition, when the number of symbol fluctuation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display is two or more, it may be configured to always execute the first effect and the second effect If the number of big-hit symbol variation displays included in the hold symbol variation display is two or more, it may be configured not to execute both the first and second effects. It is also good.

  In addition, when the number of symbol fluctuation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display is two or more, it may be configured to execute only the first effect, or the suspension symbol fluctuation display When the number of the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit included in the is two or more, it may be configured to always execute the first effect. In addition, when the number of symbol fluctuation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display is two or more, it may be configured such that only the second effect may be executed, or the suspension symbol fluctuation display When the number of the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit included in the is two or more, it may be configured to execute the second effect without fail.

  In addition, when the number of symbol fluctuation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display is two or more, it may be configured not to execute the first effect, it is included in the suspension symbol fluctuation display When the number of the symbol variation display which is a big hit is two or more, the second effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when the number of the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit included in the suspension symbol variation display is one, only the first effect may be executed, and the first effect and the second effect are also performed. It may not be executed.

  In addition, when the number of symbol variation displays to be a big hit included in the suspension symbol variation display is two or more, the second effect may be easier to be executed than the first effect, or the first The first effect may be more easily executed than the second effect, or only the second effect may be executed, or only the first effect is executed. There may be cases, and there may be cases where neither the first effect nor the second effect is performed.

  In addition, two or more suspension units may be generated when the first effect is performed, and only one suspension unit may be generated when the second effect is performed.

  Also, in the case where the first effect is started after the timer effect is performed, it is more likely that two or more holding units are generated more easily than in the case where the first effect is started without the timer effect being performed. The timer effect may be two or more holdings may occur in the case where the first effect is started without the timer effect being performed than in the case where the timer effect is performed and the first effect is started. You may make it easy.

  In addition, in the case where the second effect is started after the timer effect is performed, it is easier for two or more holding units to occur more easily than when the second effect is started without the timer effect being performed. The second effect may be started without the timer effect being performed, but two or more pending calls may occur more than when the second effect is started when the timer effect is performed. You may make it easy.

In addition, “the big hit game is constituted by“ multiple round games [for example, 16 round games etc] ”,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one of the plurality of round games [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5)-49) to FIG. (A (5)-55]. As shown in), the timer announcement effect concerning the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 may be started after the fourth round starts and may be ended during the fourth round etc, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to show the timer effect reliably during the big hit.

  Here, it may be constituted only by the big hit game by a plurality of round games, or may be constituted including the big hit game by one round game.

  Also, the timer effect may be executed only in one of the plurality of round games, or may be executed in other than one of the plurality of round games. There may be cases. Also, the timer effect may be necessarily performed in one of the plurality of round games, or may not be performed in one of the plurality of round games. May be

In addition, “the big hit game is constituted by plural round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed across two or more round games among the plurality of round games [eg, FIG. 387 (B (5)-17) to FIG. As shown in) -25), the timer announcement effect concerning the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 may be performed over the fourth round to the fifth round, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained differently about.

  According to this game console, it may be possible to enjoy the timer effect for a long time.

  Here, it may be constituted only by the big hit game by a plurality of round games, or may be constituted including the big hit game by one round game.

  Also, the timer effect may be executed only across two or more round games among a plurality of round games, or may be performed other than two or more round games among a plurality of round games It may be executed across the same time. In addition, it may be executed across two or more round games among a plurality of round games, or may not be executed across two or more round games among a plurality of round games. It may be

In addition, “the timer display is a display configured to be displayed by subtracting an initial value after displaying the initial value and displaying a certain time [for example, FIG. 5) -17) to (B (5)-23), after displaying "30:00" as the initial value of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, "00:00 Count down until
The display showing the certain time is a display showing the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, "00:00" in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -23) Timer display etc.],
A certain timer effect (hereinafter, “first timer effect [for example, FIG. 387 (B (5) -17) to FIG. B (5) -25) or FIG. 388 (C (5) -8) to FIG. The timer display displayed during the execution of the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 shown in FIG. (B (5) -17)]) is executed as the initial value for the first time [Eg, 30 seconds etc.] [eg, timer display of “30:00” in first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -17), etc.]
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed across the first number of round games [for example, “2” etc.] among the plurality of round games [for example, FIG. 387 (B In the case shown in (5)-17) to (B (5)-25) in the figure, the timer announcement effect relating to the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 started in the fourth round is performed over the fifth round. Etc.],
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed across the second number of round games [for example, "3 etc."] among the plurality of round games [for example, FIG. 388 (C In the case shown in (5)-8) to (C (5)-17) in the figure, the timer announcement effect relating to the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 started in the fourth round is performed over the sixth round. Etc.],
The second number of times is a number of times greater than the first number of times,
The first number of times is one or more times,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the same timer effect is produced, the number of rounds to be spanned is different depending on the situation of the game (the game ball's winning in the variable winning hole, the type of big hit, etc.).

  Also, in conventional gaming machines, the main effects of the big hit game are mainly related to round games, but according to this game table, timer effects are performed according to the elapsed time. The excitement of the big hit game may be improved by the event.

  Here, the timer display may be configured such that only the display indicating a certain time is displayed after being displayed after subtracting the initial value after displaying the initial value, or the initial value is displayed. The display may be configured to be displayed later than the display indicating a certain time after being subtracted from the initial value. Also, the timer display may be configured to be displayed by subtracting the initial value after displaying the initial value and displaying a display indicating a certain time without fail, or after displaying the initial value It may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time may not be displayed by being subtracted from the initial value.

  Also, the timer display may be configured to be displayed by subtracting the initial value and displaying a certain time only after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. In addition to the initial value, it may be configured to be displayed by subtracting from the initial value and indicating a certain time.

  In addition, the indication indicating a certain time may indicate only the time when the timer indication is zero, and the indication indicating a certain time may indicate other than the time when the timer indication is zero. It may be. In addition, the indication indicating a certain time may always indicate the time when the timer indication is zero, and the indication indicating a certain time may not indicate the time when the timer indication is zero It may be

  In addition, the timer display displayed during execution of the first timer effect may indicate only the first time as an initial value, or indicate time other than the first time as an initial value. It may be. In addition, the timer display displayed during execution of the first timer effect may always indicate the first time as an initial value, or may not indicate the first time as an initial value. It may be

  Also, the first timer effect may be executed across only the first number of round games of the plurality of round games, or the first of the plurality of round games may be executed. The game may be executed across a number of round games. In addition, the first timer effect may be performed across the first round of round games among the plurality of round games without fail, or the first number of round games among the plurality of round games. It may not be executed across round games.

  Also, the first timer effect may be executed across only the second number of rounds of the plurality of rounds, or the second of the plurality of rounds may be executed. The game may be executed across a number of round games. In addition, the first timer effect may be performed across the second round game of the plurality of round games without fail, or the second round of the plurality of round games may be performed. It may not be executed across round games.

  Also, the second number may be a number that is necessarily greater than the first number, may be the same as the first number, or may be less than the first number. It may be.

  Also, the first number of times may be always one or more than one.

  In the round game, one of the conditions (e.g., 29 seconds elapsed) and / or a certain number (e.g., 10) of the game balls on the variable winning opening is fulfilled. It is an end.

In addition, “one round game is configured to end when the second time [for example, 29 seconds etc.] has elapsed,
The timer display is a display configured to be displayed by subtracting an initial value and displaying a display indicating the certain time after displaying the initial value [eg, FIG. 386 (A (5)- 49) to the figure (A (5)-53), after "03:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, it becomes "00:00" Count down, etc.],
The display showing the certain time is a display showing the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, “00: in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -53) "00" timer display etc],
A display showing a third time [for example, 3 seconds etc.] as the initial value [for example, a timer of “03:00” in the first big hit middle timer announcement display TM21 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49) Display etc. may be displayed,
The third time is shorter than the second time,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to execute timer effects during one round game.

  Here, one round game may be configured to end only when the second time has elapsed, and is configured to end also when the second time has not elapsed. It is also good. In addition, one round game may be configured to always end when the second time has elapsed, or may be configured so as not to end when the second time has elapsed. .

  Also, the timer display may be configured such that only the display indicating a certain time is displayed after being displayed after subtracting the initial value after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value The display may be configured to be displayed by subtracting from the initial value and displaying a certain time. Also, the timer display may be configured to be displayed by subtracting the initial value after displaying the initial value and displaying a display indicating a certain time without fail, or after displaying the initial value It may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time may not be displayed by being subtracted from the initial value.

  Also, the timer display may be configured to be displayed by subtracting the initial value and displaying a certain time only after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. In addition to the initial value, it may be configured to be displayed by subtracting from the initial value and indicating a certain time.

  In addition, the indication indicating a certain time may indicate only the time when the timer indication is zero, and the indication indicating a certain time may indicate other than the time when the timer indication is zero. It may be. In addition, the indication indicating a certain time may always indicate the time when the timer indication is zero, and the indication indicating a certain time may not indicate the time when the timer indication is zero It may be

  In addition, only the third time may be displayed as the initial value, or a time other than the third time may be displayed as the initial value. Further, the third time may be displayed as the initial value without fail, and the third time may not be displayed as the initial value.

  The third time may be necessarily shorter than the second time, may be the same as the second time, or may be longer than the second time. .

In addition, “when the timer effect is executed in one pattern fluctuation display (hereinafter, in the third case [for example, FIG. 385 (A (1)-24) to FIG. (A (2)-33) As shown in, when the timer notice effect by the fourth timer notice display TM14 to be started and ended in the symbol variation display of one is performed etc.]].
The certain effect in the third case is an advance notice effect relating to a symbol variation display being executed [for example, a strong sabothani group shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -32) to FIG. (A (2) -33) Notice, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the variation of the timer effect increases, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, it may be configured such that there is only the third case, or it may be configured to be other than the third case. In addition, the third case may be configured to be always present, or the third case may not be configured. Also, it may be configured such that there is no third case.

  In addition, a certain effect in the third case may be an advance notice effect relating only to the symbol change display being executed, or may be an advance notice effect relating to other than the symbol change display being executed. In addition, a certain effect in the third case may be an advance notice effect relating to the symbol change display being executed or a notice effect that may not be related to the symbol change display being executed.

  Note that a certain effect in the third case may be a prefetch notice.

Also, “Timer effect [for example, timer notice effect according to first big hit timer notification display TM21 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -8) to FIG. (H (5) -13) shown in FIG. A game console provided with rendering means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
The timer effect is a display that indicates a certain time after the timer display [for example, the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 and the like shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -8) is started]. [For example, in an effect configured to start a certain effect [for example, a button stock notification effect shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -13), etc.] when it becomes “00:00” Yes,
It is configured that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during execution of the big hit game [for example, in FIG. 393 (H (5)-8) to FIG. (H (5)-13) Timer notice effect related to the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 shown is being performed during the big hit game etc],
An effect (hereinafter referred to as “third effect [for example, FIG. 393 (H (5) -24) to FIG. 394 (H (5)) indicates that the player is given an advantageous benefit during execution of the big hit game. The mini-game etc. of the button effect shown in)) −28)] is configured so that it may be executed,
The third effect is an effect that may be performed when the certain effect is performed at least once or more [for example, FIG. 393 (H (5)-24) to FIG. 394 (H (5 The mini game of the button effect shown in) -28) is executed when a button stock notification effect as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming platform, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the rendering means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to have an expectation for the timer effect even during the big hit game.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may always execute timer effect, or may not execute timer effect.

  In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, when the timer display turns into a display indicating a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. In addition, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. The timer display may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

  Also, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started other than when the timer display is a display indicating a certain time.

  It may be configured that only at least a portion of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, and effects such as at least a portion of the timer effect may also be performed during the execution of the big hit game May be configured. In addition, at least a part of the timer effect may be always performed during the big hit game, or at least a part of the timer effect may not be performed during the big hit game. May be

  In addition, it may be configured such that only a part of the timer effect may be performed during the big hit game, or all of the timer effect may be performed during the big hit game. It is also good.

  In addition, it may be configured such that only the third effect may be executed during execution of the big hit game, or effects other than the third effect may be executed during the execution of the big hit game. May be configured. In addition, the third effect may be always executed during the execution of the big hit game, or the third effect may not be executed during the execution of the big hit game.

  In addition, the third effect may be executed only while the big hit game is being executed, or the third effect may be executed while a game other than the big hit game is being executed. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, the third effect may be performed only when a certain effect is performed at least once, or may not be performed when a certain effect is performed at least once. In some cases, it may be performed. In addition, the third effect may be performed when a certain effect is performed at least once or more, or may be performed when a certain effect is performed at least one time or more. It may not be possible.

  The third effect may be performed when a certain effect is performed once, or may be performed when a certain effect is performed a plurality of times. It may be one.

  In addition, only a certain effect of the timer effects may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, or may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed after the end of the big hit game.

In addition, “the rendering means is display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to improve visual effects.

  Here, the effect means may be made up of only the display means, or means other than the display means may be included. Also, the rendering means may always include the display means, or may not include the display means.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, rendering means capable of executing “Timer presentation [for example, timer announcement presentation relating to the third timer announcement display TM13 shown in FIG. 400 (M (1) -24) to FIG. 401 (M (11) -65)]”. [For example, a game console provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]
The timer effect may be a display [for example, the timer display indicates a certain time after the display of the timer display [for example, the third timer advance display TM13 and the like shown in FIG. 400 (M (1)-24)] is started. , "00:00", etc.] so that a rendition (hereinafter referred to as "a certain rendition [for example, a probability change notification shown in FIG. 401 (M (11)-65)]") is started. It is a composed effect,
At least some symbol variation display (hereinafter, “first symbol variation display [eg, FIG. 402 (N (11)-4) to FIG. (N (11)-7) symbol variation display etc. Period during which a new symbol variation display is not being performed after the first symbol variation display is completed [eg, FIG. 402 (N (11) − 8)-In the period of the standby state shown in the figure (N (11)-11), etc.] there is a case where the certain effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also, in the above description,
"It is a game console equipped with presentation means,
The first notification effect may be started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started [eg, FIG. 391 (G (5) -8) ~ As shown in the figure (G (5)-16), after the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is displayed, the timer display countdown is started in the first big hit medium time timer notice display TM21, the first big hit When the timer display in the middle timer advance notice display TM21 becomes "00:00", the hold-on continuous channel notice effect in which the family crest character CMON appears is started, etc.],
During the execution of the big hit game [the first notification effect [for example, shown in Figure 391 (G (5)-15) ~ Figure (G (5)-16), pending continuous chan announcement by the appearance of the character CMON of the family crest Effects etc. may be executed,
While the big hit game is being performed, a second notification effect [for example, the effect of displaying the 爺 V formation display GYV shown in FIG. 391 (G (5)-22), etc.] may be executed,
The 大 V formation display GYV is displayed in the big hit end effect shown in the time when the second notification effect is executed [for example, shown in FIG. 391 (G (5)-21) to FIG. (G (5)-22) The time when the effect is performed] is the time when the first notification effect started during the execution of the big hit game is over [eg, FIG. 391 (G (5)-16) to FIG. 5)-17), etc., the time after the end of the pending reunion notice effect in the fifth round, etc.]
The second notification effect is not the notification effect to be executed subsequent to the first notification effect [eg, shown in FIG. 391 (G (5)-15) to FIG. (G (5)-22) As such, the effect that the 爺 V formation display GYV to be executed in the big hit end effect is displayed is not performed subsequent to the pending continuous channel notification effect, etc.],
The first informing effect is an effect informing that it is determined that the player is given a certain benefit [for example, a holding chain, etc.],
The second notification effect is an effect notifying that the player is determined to be granted the certain benefit,
The aspect of the first informing effect and the aspect of the second informing effect are different aspects,
A mini game [for example, mission effects shown in FIG. 406 (V (5)-7) to FIG. (V (5)-13) may be executed during execution of the big hit game,
A display showing the remaining limited time in the mini game [for example, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -8), etc.] is displayed,
Wherein the first notification effect is Ru is initiated when a certain mission time limit has elapsed was achieved after the mini game is started [e.g., FIG. 406 (V (5) -7) ~ As shown in the figure (V (5)-14), within 30 seconds from the start of the mission in the mission production, the game is achieved by winning one game ball to the electric chew (special figure 2 start port 232) When it is done, a pending continuous chan announcement effect is performed by the appearance of the family crest character CMON, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.
In addition, the first informing effect started during execution of the big hit game is an effect that is finished before the big hit end effect is started [for example, FIG. 391 (G (5) -15 )-As shown in the figure (G (5)-16), the pending call announcement effect started in the fifth round is ended in the fifth round, and before the jackpot end effect is started Finished, etc.],
The second notification effect is Ru effect der initiated during execution of the jackpot end effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (G (5) -22) , the grandfather V formation displayed GVY displayed The production is started during the big hit end production etc.] ,
Gaming table, wherein a call. "
I also explained about
Also, while the big hit game is being executed, the second notification effect may be executed without the first notification effect being executed [eg, FIG. 389 (D (5) -1)- As shown in the figure (D (5)-11), there may be a case where an effect of displaying a 爺 V formation display GVY is not performed, etc., without performing a hold-on-ch notice by the appearance of a family crest character CMON, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
For it was also described.
Also, after the display "of the timer display is started, the timer display before subtraction display of the timer display starts to move display [for example, FIG. 391 (G (5) -8) ~ FIG As shown in (G (5)-10), after the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is displayed, the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is started before the countdown of the timer display is started. The display position of timer notice display TM21 is moving, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also, after the display of the timer display is started, the timer display is enlarged before the subtraction display of the timer display is started [eg, FIG. 391 (G (5)-8) to FIG. As shown in G (5)-10), after the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is displayed, the first big hit middle timer before the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is started Notice display TM21 is enlarged, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, "" The effect that notifies that a certain privilege is given "is the effect that" It is notified that the symbol fluctuation display on which the execution is suspended includes the symbol fluctuation display that will be a big hit. " Is
A game stand characterized by "
For it was also described.
Also, "and in which a plurality of rounds game [e.g., 16 round game of the like] is the jackpot gaming by the configuration,
In one round game among the plurality of round games, after the display of the timer display is started, the timer display becomes a display indicating the certain time, and the first notification effect may be executed. As shown in, for example, FIG. 386 (A (5) -49) to FIG. (A (5) -55), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the fourth round, and the fourth round The timer display of the first big hit middle timer advance notice display TM21 becomes “00:00”, and there may be a case where a hold-on continuous channel notice effect is performed due to the appearance of the family crest character CMON, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, “the big hit game is constituted by“ multiple round games [for example, 16 round games etc] ”,
The first notification effect is executed as the timer display indicates the certain time after the display of the timer display is started across two or more round games of the plurality of round games. After the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the fourth round as shown in, for example, FIG. 391 (G (5)-8) to the same figure (G (5)-16). In the next 5th round, the timer display of the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21 becomes “00:00”, and there may be a case where a pending continuous change notice effect is performed by the appearance of the family crest character CMON, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, “the timer display is a display configured to be displayed by subtracting an initial value after displaying the initial value and displaying a certain time [for example, FIG. 391 (G (eg 5)-8) to (G (5)-14), after displaying "30:00" as the initial value of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, "00:00 Count down until
The display showing the certain time is a display showing the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, “00: in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 shown in FIG. 391 (G (5) -14). "00" timer display etc],
The timer display may display a display indicating the first time [for example, 30 seconds etc.] as the initial value (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display [for example, FIG. 391 (G (5) − Timer display etc. of "30:00" in the first big hit middle timer advance notice display TM 21 shown in 8).
The first timer display is a first number of rounds of the plurality of round games [for example, "2" etc.] from the start of the subtraction display until the display showing the certain time is displayed. In the case where there is a case where the game spans [for example, in the case shown in FIG. 391 (G (5) -8) to the same figure (G (5) -14), in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 started in the fourth round The countdown of the timer display is performed over the 5th round, etc.],
The first timer display is a second number of times [for example, “3”, etc.] of the plurality of round games from the start of the subtraction display until the display showing the certain time is displayed. There may be a case where the game spans [for example, in the case shown in FIG. 388 (C (5)-8) to FIG. (C (5)-15), in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 started in the fourth round The timer display countdown is performed across the fifth and sixth rounds, etc.],
The second number of times is a number of times greater than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, “one round game is configured to end when the second time [for example, 29 seconds etc.] has elapsed,
The timer display is a display configured to be displayed by subtracting an initial value and displaying a display indicating the certain time after displaying the initial value [eg, FIG. 386 (A (5)- 49) to the figure (A (5)-53), after "03:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display in the first big hit medium timer advance notice display TM21, it becomes "00:00" Count down, etc.],
The display showing the certain time is a display showing the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, “00: in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM 21 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -53) "00" timer display etc],
A display showing a third time [for example, 3 seconds etc.] as the initial value [for example, a timer of “03:00” in the first big hit middle timer announcement display TM21 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49) Display etc. may be displayed,
The third time is shorter than the second time,
A game stand characterized by "
For it was also described.
Also, "the presentation means, the display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is, amusement machine, characterized in that. "
I also explained about
Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Supplementary Note 1)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display for notifying a time until a certain effect is performed,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display that may give notice that the time until the certain effect is started changes.
The second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, "a certain effect" may be an effect by display or effect moving means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa lighter, a light guide plate, etc.).

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Also, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note 1 or 2,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,
The first image display means may be overlapped by the second image display means displaying the second display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
Even when the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 5,
After the timer reaches 0, a different display than the second one is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
If the second display is displayed, it is easier to hit a jackpot than if it is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
The display of one of the multiple displays is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The display of the above-mentioned substitute sign is the effect display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
Equipped with presentation movable means,
The effect moving means is a means capable of performing a plurality of types of operations,
One of the plurality of types of motion is a rendering motion,
The certain effect is the effect operation by the effect movable means.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, operations other than the rendering operation may be executed, and there are, for example, an operation at the time of power on, an initial position returning operation, or a retraction operation as an operation other than the rendering operation. Also, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be one provided on the frame (front door), for example.

(Supplementary Note 10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
It is easier to make a big hit if the above-mentioned certain effect occurs than if it does not occur,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10, wherein
A hot effect display may be displayed between the display of the first display and the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 14)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display displayed for a certain period during reach,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 1st presentation display may be displayed,
The period display may be erased before the first timing is reached,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the displayed period of the period display is not limited to reach, but may be during fluctuation or jackpot. Also, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Supplementary Note 15)
It is the gaming machine described in the supplementary note 14,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a third effect display,
There may be cases where the timing at which the third effect display is displayed is not notified by the period display,
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a discharge position, a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing withdrawal of a prepaid card, light emission by an LED, a rendering operation by a character May be performed. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by a period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Supplementary Note 16)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 15,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit symbol variation") in which the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 17)
It is a game console described in Appendix 16,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol change (hereinafter referred to as "a lost symbol change") in which the result of the pass / fail judgment is an off-state,
The big hit symbol variation is configured to have a higher frequency at which the third effect display is displayed than the lost symbol variation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
Equipped with presentation movable means,
The effect movable means is a means which may perform an effect operation,
The game stand characterized in that the turn-out movable means may perform the effect operation while the third effect display is displayed.

(Appendix 19)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 18,
After the period display is not displayed, the period display is in an easily visible state,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 19, wherein
The period display is hidden until the end of a certain period during the reach,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 19, wherein
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 21,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "2nd timing") which displays a 2nd effect display.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location where the chance up is notified in response to the reach may be fixed, such as always reporting the chance up three times when a certain reach occurs and two times whenever another reach occurs, the same reach When it is, the part which reports a chance up may be made to fluctuate so that it may notify three times and may notify only once once. In that case, the case of "informing a lot of timing" may be more likely to be a big hit than in the case of "not giving much notification", or may be easy to lose. Also, the probability of a big hit may not change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit, and the smaller the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit.

(Supplementary Note 23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 22,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The first image display means is an image display means which may display the period display,
The second image display means is an image display means which may perform a rendering operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 23,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 25)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The period display is a display displayed for a certain period during reach,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 1st presentation display may be displayed,
Before the first timing, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 26)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display changes at a second speed,
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 27)
It is a game console described in Appendix 26,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a time display,
The time display is a display in which the display mode of at least a part of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One of the time displays is the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 28)
It is a game console described in Appendix 26 or 27,
The second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 28,
The first display is a display in which the display mode changes until a first time elapses,
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until a second time elapses,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
When the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Also, the third display may have a higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have a higher reliability than the third display.

(Supplementary note 30)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 29, wherein
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a display of a first type,
The first type of display includes the first display and the second display,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Supplementary Note 31)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
The first type of display is a timer advance display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The timer advance notice display is a notice for notifying a time until the first effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 32)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
Equipped with operating means,
The display of the first type is the display of the operation effective period,
The said operation effective period display is a display which shows the period which makes operation of the said operation means effective,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 33)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
The first type of display is a period display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The said period display is a display which may alert | report the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 2nd effect display may be displayed in a 1st period,
The first timing is reported from the start to the end of the first period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 33, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 35)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a countdown display,
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of a time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter referred to as “time notification”) may be performed,
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in a first display mode,
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 36)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 35,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger than the first display size;
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 37)
It is a game console described in Appendix 35 or 36,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in a first display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 38)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 37, wherein
When the countdown display is displayed, the display mode always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 39)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 37, wherein
When the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed than when the first display mode is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 40)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 35 to 39, wherein
The start and end of the countdown display is performed within a period of one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 41)
40. A game console according to any one of appendices 35 to 40, wherein
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 42)
It is a game stand described in appendix 41,
Even during the movement of the countdown display, the notification of the time by the countdown display is continued.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 43)
It is a game stand described in appendix 41,
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 44)
Supplementary note 35 to 43, wherein the gaming machine is any one of the following.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a notification is given indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 is performed by the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 45)
It is a game console described in Appendix 44,
When the time until the certain effect is performed is 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 46)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 45, wherein
There is also a case where it does not change to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 47)
Supplementary note 35 to 46, wherein the gaming machine according to any one of
The display means comprises a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
In some cases, the countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 48)
It is a game console described in Appendix 47,
The second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 49)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 48, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 50)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 48, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 51)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display for notifying a first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed.
The first display may be erased before the first timing after the display of the first display starts.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 52)
It is a game stand described in Appendix 51,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing.
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the third display starts.
During display of the third display, the first display is erased,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 53)
It is a game console described in Appendix 52,
The third display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 54)
It is a game console described in Appendix 53,
In the case where the third display is displayed, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when the third display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 55)
Appendices 52 to 54, wherein the game console according to any one of
It is equipped with effect moving means capable of performing multiple types of motions,
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The first operation is a rendering operation,
The first operation may be performed while the third display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 56)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 51 to 55,
The first display is configured to be displayed again after the first display is erased,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 57)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 51 to 55, wherein
After the first display is erased, the first display is not displayed until the certain period of time elapses.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 58)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 51 to 55,
The first display is configured to be redisplayed before the certain period of time elapses after the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 59)
It is a game console as described in any one of supplementary notes 51 to 58,
The certain period is the period during which the super reach is in progress.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 60)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 51 to 59,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,
The second timing is timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 61)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 60, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 62)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,
The timing notification is a notification in which the timing at which a certain effect is performed is performed by updating the display of the countdown display.
The display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode while the countdown display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 63)
It is a game console described in Appendix 62,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 64)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 63,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger between the first display size and the second display size.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 65)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 64, wherein
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 66)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 65, wherein
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 67)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 65, wherein
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode It is easier for the final display of the big hit design,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 68)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 67, wherein
The display of the first display is started and ended during execution of one pattern variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 69)
Appendices 62 to 68, wherein the game console according to any one of
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 70)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 69,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a game console.

(Appendix 71)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 69 or 70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed.
The display position of the first display is changed by the movement display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 72)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 71,
Even during the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is continued,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 73)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 71,
While the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 74)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 73, wherein
The countdown display is a display of a countdown of time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 75)
It is a game console described in Appendix 74,
The timing notification is a notification that indicates that the timing at which the certain effect is performed is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 76)
It is a game console described in Appendix 74 or 75,
After the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is configured to be erased.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 77)
It is a game console described in Appendix 76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is configured to be erased after the second indication is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 78)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 62 to 77, wherein
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 79)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 78,
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 80)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 79, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 81)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 79, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a first state,
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a third state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , High expectations of the jackpot,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, it is more than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state , High expectations of the jackpot,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2)
In the game console described in Appendix A1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is more than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state high,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note A1 or A2, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol, and
The game console characterized in that the first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped.

(Appendix A4)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A3,
The fourth meter display is a display started to be displayed in the fourth state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A5)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A4,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may start being displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may start being displayed in the second state,
The expectation of the jackpot is higher in the case where the display is started in the second state than in the case where the display of the first meter is started in the first state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, wherein
Among the plurality of types of display, one display is a first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by the first icon being displayed a first number of times,
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state by the first icon being displayed a second number of times,
The second number is a number less than the first number.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A6, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a big hit display,
The third state in the first meter display is a state of display indicating that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state of display showing that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the sixth state is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A8)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A7,
The second state of the first meter display is a state of display indicating that the big hit display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a state of display showing that the big hit display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the fifth state is displayed,
The big hit display is easier to be displayed when the fifth state is displayed than the second state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A8, wherein
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a pseudo-sequence effect,
The pseudo-series advance notice is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A9, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an operation prompting display of the operation means,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A10, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects, and
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a certain effect,
The certain effect is a effect in which the big hit display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative pattern in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A12)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the start of a certain period in the period when a reach production display is performed,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports a 1st timing during display of the said reach production display,
The first timing is a timing at which the first effect display may be started while the reach effect display is displayed,
The preliminary display is a display for notifying that the first timing is notified by the period display,
The notice display may be displayed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A13)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A12,
The period display is a display including a cursor display,
By moving the cursor display from the second position (start position) to the third position (end position) from the first position to the third position (end position), from the start to the end of the first period is notified. Is configured and
The second position is a position before the first position,
The first position is a position before the third position,
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A14)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13,
The period display is a display in which a chance up display (first chance up display) may be displayed,
The chance-up display is a display for notifying that the first effect display has been started at the first timing,
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A14, wherein
The said period display is a display which may perform movement display.
A game console that is long.

(Appendix A16)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A15,
The movement display is performed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A17)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A15 or A16,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the period display changes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A17,
The notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
When the advance notice is displayed in the second display mode, the final hit (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) is larger than when the advance display is displayed in the first display mode It is easy to confirm the symbol form,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A19)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18,
The first effect display when the first timing is reached when the preliminary display is displayed in the second display mode than when the first display mode is displayed. Is easy to get started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A20)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A18 or A19,
The notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A20, wherein
The period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (e.g., a default),
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter),
In the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A22)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A21,
Depending on the display mode of the advance notice display, it is not understood whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or displayed in the fourth display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A23)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A21 or A22,
The period display is easier to be displayed in the fourth display mode when the advance display is displayed in the second display mode than when the advance display is displayed in the first display mode. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A24)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes A21 to A23,
The period display is easier to be displayed in the third display mode when the advance display is displayed in the first display mode than when the advance display is displayed in the second display mode. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A24, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a second preview display,
The above-mentioned notice display is the first notice display,
In some cases, it may be notified that the first notice display is displayed by the second notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A26)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A25,
The symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed is more likely to be a big hit than when the first preliminary display is not notified by the second preliminary display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A26,
If the advance notice is displayed before the period display is displayed, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the advance notice is not displayed before the period display is displayed. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A28)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A27,
The preliminary display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A27,
The notice display is a display different from the period display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A30)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A29, wherein
By notifying that the reach effect display is displayed by the advance display, it is notified that the period display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A31)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A30, wherein
The preliminary display may be performed with the same symbol variation display as the period display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A32)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A31, wherein
The preliminary display may be performed in a symbol change display prior to the symbol change display in which the period display is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A33)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A32, wherein
The advance notice is also displayed during a period in which symbol stop display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A32, wherein
The advance notice is not displayed during the period in which the symbol stop display is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A35)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A34, wherein
The preliminary display is a display that may be displayed while the reach effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A36)
The preliminary display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A37)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display;
The first display is a display for notifying of a timing when a certain effect may be started,
The display means is a means by which an Ath display may be displayed as a certain effect,
The display A may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display at timing when the display A starts (hereinafter referred to as "the timing A").
A game stand characterized by

  Here, a certain effect may be the A-th display. Moreover, the display of the Pth display may be started as a certain effect.

(Appendix A38)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A37,
The first indication is a period indication,
The period display is a display for notifying of a timing at which the A-th display may be displayed in a certain period,
According to the passage of time of a certain period, the display mode of at least a part of the period display changes,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display, the timing at which the A-th display is started is notified.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 39)
The game console described in Appendix A38,
The period display is a display in which the B display may be displayed,
When the A display is displayed at the A timing, the B display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A40)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A37,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the A-th display is displayed,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display is completed, the A-th display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A41)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A40,
When the Ath timing comes, the Ath display may be displayed,
When the A timing is reached, the A display may not be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A42)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A40,
When the Ath timing comes, the Ath display is always displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A43)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A42, wherein
The display means is a means that may display a second display;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A44)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A43, wherein
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A45)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A44,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A46)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A44,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed while the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A47)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A46,
When the Ath display is made at the Ath timing, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the Ath display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A48)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A47, wherein
When the Ath display is displayed at the Ath timing, the first display is not displayed, and the first display is not displayed, and the first display is overlapped with at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed. The display of A is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 49)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A48,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means among the plurality of types of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of types of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is a means provided on the front side of the first image display means,
The first display is displayed by the first image display means,
The second display is displayed by the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A50)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A49,
The second image display unit is a unit that may perform a rendering operation.
When the first display is displayed by the first image display unit, the second image display unit may be configured to perform the rendering operation in the previous period when the A timing is reached. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A51)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A50,
Equipped with operating means,
The said A-th display is a display regarding the said operation means,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A52)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A51,
The display means is a means by which the Cth display may be displayed as a certain effect,
The Cth display may be displayed at a timing when the Cth display starts (hereinafter referred to as "the Cth timing").
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A53)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A52, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 54)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A52, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A55)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display;
The first display is a display for notifying the timing when a certain effect is started,
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A56)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A55,
The first indication is a period indication,
The period display is a display for notifying of a timing (hereinafter referred to as “a timing”) at which a certain effect may be started in a certain period.
According to the passage of time of a certain period, the display mode of at least a part of the period display changes,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display, a timing at which the certain effect is started is notified.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 57)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A56,
The period display is a display in which the B display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A58)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A55,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A59)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A58,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
At the certain timing, the certain effect may not be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A60)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A58,
The certain effect is always started when the certain timing comes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A61)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A60, wherein
The display means is a means that may display a second display;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A62)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A61, wherein
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A 63)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A64)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed while the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A65)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A64, wherein
In the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays, the display of the first display is started,
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A66)
The game console described in Appendix A65,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display is configured to change according to the passage of time in a certain period,
In the second symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
In the first symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display is configured not to change.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A67)
The game console described in Appendix A65,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display is configured to change according to the passage of time in a certain period,
In the first symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 68)
It is a game console described in Appendix A67,
Between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display is not changed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 68)
It is a game console described in Appendix A67,
Between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display, at least a part of the display modes of the first display may be changed is there,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 69)
The game console described in Appendix A65,
The display means is a means that may display a second display;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the second display may be displayed in the second symbol variation display. In addition, the second display may be always displayed in the first symbol variation display.

(Appendix A70)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A69, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A71)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A69, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A72)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display;
The first display is a display for notifying of a timing at which a certain effect may be started (hereinafter referred to as “a timing”),
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may change according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
Before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, the first display may perform the advance notice display. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 73)
The game console described in Appendix A 72,
The first indication is a period indication,
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
According to the passage of time of a certain period, the display mode of at least a part of the period display changes,
The certain timing is informed during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A74)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A 73,
The period display is a display in which the B display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 75)
The game console described in Appendix A 72,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 76)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A75, wherein
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
At the certain timing, the certain effect may not be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 77)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A75, wherein
The certain effect is always started when the certain timing comes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 78)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A77, wherein
The display means is a means that may display a second display;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 79)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A78,
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A80)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A 79,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A81)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A 79,
The movement display may be performed while the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 82)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A81, wherein
The notice display is a display for giving notice of a time until the certain effect displayed by the first display is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 83)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A82, wherein
Equipped with operating means,
The preliminary display is a display regarding the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 84)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A83, wherein
After the preliminary display is performed, a time until the certain effect is started is notified by the first display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A85)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A84, wherein
Before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, the first display necessarily performs the advance display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 86)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A85, wherein
When the first display is displayed, the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is started according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 87)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A86, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 88)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A86, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 89)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means by which a first display may be displayed;
The first display is a display for notifying of a timing at which a certain effect may be started (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain timing"),
The display means is a means by which a second display may be displayed;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A plurality of the second displays (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of second displays") may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A90)
The game console described in Appendix A 89,
The first indication is a period indication,
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing in a certain period,
According to the passage of time of a certain period, the display mode of at least a part of the period display changes,
The certain timing is informed during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 91)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A90,
The period display is a display in which the B display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 91)
The game console described in Appendix A 89,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 92)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A91, wherein
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
When it comes to the certain timing, the certain effect may not be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 93)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A91, wherein
The certain effect is always started when the certain timing comes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A94)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A93, wherein
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A 95)
The game console described in Appendix A94,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 96)
The game console described in Appendix A94,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed while the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 97)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A96, wherein
The first display is always displayed when the second display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 98)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A96, wherein
When the second display is displayed, the first display may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 99)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A98, wherein
The second display is a display in preparation.
The display of the plurality of brothers is a plurality of display in preparation
The display of one of the plurality of preparation displays is a first preparation display,
One of the plurality of preparation indications is a second preparation indication,
The first in-progress display is a display displayed before the second in-provision display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A100)
The game console described in Appendix A 99,
After the first preparation indication is displayed, a timer indication (hereinafter referred to as "first timer indication") corresponding to the first preparation indication is displayed.
After the second in-provision display is displayed, a timer display (hereinafter referred to as "second timer display") corresponding to the second in-provision display is displayed.
The first timer display is configured to be displayed prior to the second timer display;
A game stand characterized by

  Here, one timer notice may be displayed for a plurality of preparation display.

(Appendix A 101)
The game console described in Appendix A 99,
After the first preparation indication is displayed, a timer indication (hereinafter referred to as "first timer indication") corresponding to the first preparation indication is displayed.
After the second in-provision display is displayed, a timer display (hereinafter referred to as "second timer display") corresponding to the second in-provision display is displayed.
The first timer display may be displayed prior to the second timer display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 102)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A101, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 103)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A101, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A104)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display;
The first display is a display for notifying the timing when a certain effect is started,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may change according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
Prior to the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the lapse of time until the certain effect is started, a notice may be given,
The notice is a notice for giving notice that the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A105)
The game console described in Appendix A104,
The first indication is a period indication,
The period display is a display for notifying of a timing at which the certain effect may be started in a certain period (hereinafter referred to as “a certain timing”),
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display, a timing at which the certain effect is started is notified.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A106)
The game console described in Appendix A105,
The period display is a display in which the B display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A107)
The game console described in Appendix A104,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying of a timing at which the certain effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “a certain timing”),
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A108)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A107, wherein
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
At the certain timing, the certain effect may not be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 109)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A107, wherein
The certain effect is always started when the certain timing comes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A110)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A109,
The display means is a means that may display a second display;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 111)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A110, wherein
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A112)
The game console described in Appendix A 111,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 113)
The game console described in Appendix A 111,
The movement display may be performed while the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A114)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A113, wherein
The notice is the notice by the first display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A115)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 104 to A114, wherein
Before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, a false notice may be given,
Even if the false notice is given, the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is not started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A116)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 104 to A115,
The notification is configured to be performed before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A117)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A116, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A118)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A116, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A119)
It is a game console provided with presentation means capable of executing timer presentation,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. And the
At least a part of the timer effect is configured to be performed during execution of the big hit game,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A120)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A119,
The big hit game is constituted by a plurality of round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A121)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A119,
The big hit game is constituted by a plurality of round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed across two or more round games,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A122)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A120 or A121,
The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and to be subtracted from the initial value to indicate the certain time,
The indication indicating the certain time is an indication indicating the time when the timer indication is 0,
The timer display in a certain timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “first timer effect”) indicates a first time as the initial value,
The first timer effect may be executed across a first number of round games,
The first timer effect may be executed across a second number of round games,
The second number of times is a number of times greater than the first number of times,
The first number of times is one or more times,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A123)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A120 or A121,
One round game is configured to end when the first time has elapsed,
The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and to be subtracted from the initial value to indicate the certain time,
The indication indicating the certain time is an indication indicating the time when the timer indication is 0,
The second time may be displayed as the initial value,
The second time is shorter than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 124)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A123, wherein
The certain effect is an effect that is started when the display of the timer display is not performed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
The certain effect is a certain effect when the timer display is started as a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"),
The certain effect in the first case is a effect performed in the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect"),
The certain effect in the second case is an effect that may be executed in the second mode (hereinafter referred to as "second effect"),
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A125)
The game console described in Appendix A 124,
The timing at which the second effect can be started is likely to be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 126)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note A124 or A125,
The first effect may be executed as the certain effect in the second case,
In the second case, the timing at which the first effect is performed and the timing at which the second effect is performed are different.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 127)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A119 to A126, wherein
The certain effect is a fixed effect notifying that the player is given an advantageous benefit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 128)
Appendix A 127, which refers to any one of Appendices A 124 to A 126;
The determined effect is an effect notifying that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the hold,
In the case where the number of big-hit symbol variation displays included in the hold is one, it may be configured to execute one of the first effect and the second effect. ,
When there are two or more number of symbol variation display which becomes a big hit included in the hold, it is configured such that both of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 129)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A124 to A126, wherein
The certain effect is an effect that suggests that the player may be given an advantageous benefit.
There is a high possibility that the player is provided with an advantage that is more advantageous to the player in the second effect than in the first effect.
There is a case where the first effect is performed as a final effect notifying that the player is given an advantageous benefit (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
There are cases where the first effect is not the final effect (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"),
The second effect is a finalized effect notifying that the player is given an advantageous benefit,
The second case is configured to be more easily performed in the second case than in the first case.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A130)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A129, wherein
The timer display is configured to be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display showing the certain time while the big hit game is being performed. Being
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 131)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A130,
The timer effect is configured such that there is a case (hereinafter referred to as the "third case") that is executed in one symbol variation display,
The certain effect in the third case is a notice effect relating to the symbol variation display being executed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 132)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A119,
The timer display is configured to be displayed during execution of the big hit game and to be a display indicating the certain time during execution of symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over Yes,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A133)
The game console described in Appendix A 132,
The timer display is configured to initiate a display change to indicate the certain time if certain conditions regarding gaming are achieved,
According to the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, it may be configured to be a display showing the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over, according to the timing when the certain condition is achieved.
According to the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, the big hit game may be displayed during the execution of the big hit game.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 134)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A119, A132 or A133, wherein
As the certain effect, there may be a case where an effect (hereinafter referred to as "the eleventh effect") indicating the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is executed,
In some cases, an effect (hereinafter referred to as “the twelfth effect”) may be executed to notify that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the hold as the certain effect.
The certain effect may be configured to be executed even if the timer display does not indicate the certain time,
When the timer display does not indicate the certain time during execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect is configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A135)
It is a game console provided with presentation means capable of executing timer presentation,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. And the
At least a part of the timer effect may be performed during execution of the big hit game,
An effect (hereinafter referred to as a "fourth effect") may be executed to indicate that the player is given an advantageous benefit while the big hit game is being executed.
The fourth effect is an effect that may be performed when the certain effect is performed at least once.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A136)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A135, wherein
The presentation means is display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 137)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A136, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A138)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A137,
The predetermined time is a time when the remaining time of the timer indicates 0.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A139)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A138, wherein
The certain effect is an effect that can also be performed at intervals during the execution of the big hit game,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A140)
It is a game console provided with presentation means capable of executing timer presentation,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. And the
A timer effect is performed at least while symbol fluctuation display is being performed, and after the symbol fluctuation display is finished, a certain effect may be performed in a period in which a new symbol fluctuation display is not performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 141)
Display means,
Operation means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means by which an operation display may be displayed;
The said operation display is a display regarding the said operation means,
The display means may be means for displaying a timer display.
The timer display is a display for giving notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed,
The timer display is a display in which at least a part of the display of the timer display changes according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed,
The operation display may be displayed after the timer display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 142)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A 141,
A first timer display may be displayed as the timer display,
When a change of display of at least a part of the first timer display is started and the first time elapses as a certain time, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed.
A second timer display may be displayed as the timer display,
The display of the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed when a second time has passed as a certain time after a change of display of at least a part of the second timer display is started
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A143)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A141 or A142,
Equipped with a second operating means,
The operation means is a first operation means,
The operation display is a first operation display.
The display means is a display on which a second operation display may be displayed;
The second operation display is a display related to the second operation means,
The second operation display may be displayed when a certain time until the operation display is displayed has elapsed while the timer display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 144)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes A141 to A143,
When the operation means is operated during display of the timer display, the display mode of the timer display may change.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A145)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A141 to A144, wherein
The display mode of the timer display may change in a case where the display mode is changed according to the passage of a certain time until the operation display by the timer display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A146)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A141 to A145,
The display means is a means by which a notice display may be displayed;
The notice display is a display for giving notice that the timer notice is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 147)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes A141 to 146,
Whether the jackpot symbol aspect is finally displayed or the lost symbol aspect is finally displayed is determined by the jackpot determination performed at the start of symbol fluctuation,
The result of the big hit determination does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display,
The big hit determination is configured to be determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using a random number acquired when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board,
The probability (hereinafter referred to as "big hit probability") determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is predetermined.
The big hit probability does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display.
A game stand characterized by

  It should be noted that what is described as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the above may be the variation display of the symbol (more specifically, the special figure), and the description that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is described is the symbol (more Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

  In addition, "may be" may be replaced with "always", "always be", or "always become", etc., and "○ possible" in the above is It may be replaced by "must be xxx".

  FIG. 408 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 408, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  It should be noted that an embodiment may be adopted in which the display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and described above, and the display means 903 is further provided with a touch panel. May be That is, the touch panel provided in the display unit 903 can function as the operation unit. Then, the effect relating to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation or long press operation with the touch panel, or in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is being continuously touched. In addition, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous hitting function. In addition, in a part of the effects, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have many effects to be activated, or may be configured to be less . Further, when there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel and the effect is performed by the touch panel, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured to be ineffective in many cases, or may be configured to be less. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 408 is used by enclosing a sphere and circulating the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, wherein the enclosed sphere is used as a launch sphere and the balls are dispensed May be implemented by credit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 409, a slot machine (rotary gaming machine) as a game console applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 409 is an appearance perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 409 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 409) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000 in the present embodiment, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel back light (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded by each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitter and a light receiver is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitter and the light receiver of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line. Hereinafter, a pay line to be valid may be called a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the present embodiment, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed 3 It is supposed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal input buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted from the medal insertion port 1041 (insertion operation). It is. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the number-of-payouts display 1027 are formed of seven-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 whose rotation has been started by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to a first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to a second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to a third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop button 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 as an example of the operation means is provided. The chance button 1100 can perform an operation related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or can perform an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting gaming history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to operation means.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of vouchers is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout port 1055 and a medal receiver 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063 a and a left shutter 1063 b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , The effect image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) It has a structure that appears on the

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole can be viewed by the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 410 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008 At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiment, the examples, the modifications, the various examples, the supplementary notes, and the like described above, the configuration requirements may be changed to another embodiment, an example, and The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes. That is, as long as there is no factor that hinders application, the constituent features included only in the description of the embodiment, the examples, the modification, the various examples, the supplementary notes, etc. are other embodiments, examples, or modifications. Even if applied to examples and various examples and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 120 speaker 136 production button 208 decoration symbol display device 212 1st special view display device 214 2nd special view display device 224 production movable body 246 shielding device 300 main control part 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 2nd sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 game board lamp 542 game stand lamp

Claims (12)

It is a game stand provided with a presentation means,
When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the first notification effect may be started,
The first notification effect may be executed during the execution of the big hit game,
While the big hit game is being performed, a second notification effect may be executed,
The time when the second notification effect is executed is a time later than the time when the first notification effect started during the execution of the big hit game is completed,
The second informing effect is not an informing effect performed subsequent to the first informing effect, but
The first informing effect is an effect notifying that the player is determined to be given a certain benefit,
The second notification effect is an effect notifying that the player is determined to be granted the certain benefit,
The aspect of the first informing effect and the aspect of the second informing effect are different aspects,
A mini game may be executed while the big hit game is being performed,
A display showing the remaining time limit in the mini game is displayed,
The mini-game is the first of notification effect even in the case where a certain mission until the time limit after it has been initiated has elapsed has been achieved Ru is started,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
The first informing effect started during the execution of the big hit game is an effect that is finished before the big hit end effect is started,
The second notification effect is Ru effect der initiated during execution of the jackpot end effect,
Gaming table, wherein a call. It is a game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
During execution of the big hit game, the second notification effect may be performed without the first notification effect being performed.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
  After the display of the timer display is started, the timer display moves and displays before the subtraction display of the timer display is started,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
  After the display of the timer display is started, the timer display is enlarged before the subtraction display of the timer display is started,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
  The “effect of notifying that it is decided that a certain privilege is given” according to claim 1 includes “pattern fluctuation display that becomes a big hit in symbol fluctuation display for which execution is suspended. It is an effect to notify that it is determined that
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
  The big hit game is constituted by a plurality of round games,
  In one round game among the plurality of round games, after the display of the timer display is started, the timer display becomes a display indicating the certain time, and the first notification effect may be executed. is there,
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
  The big hit game is constituted by a plurality of round games,
  The first notification effect is executed as the timer display indicates the certain time after the display of the timer display is started across two or more round games of the plurality of round games. May be
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein
  The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and then to display a display indicating the certain time which is subtracted from the initial value.
  The indication indicating the certain time is an indication indicating the time when the timer indication is 0,
  The timer display is a display which may display a display indicating a first time as the initial value (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display”).
  The first timer display may span the first round of round games among the plurality of round games from the start of the subtraction display until the display indicating the certain time is displayed,
  The first timer display may span a second number of round games of the plurality of round games from the start of the subtraction display until the display indicating the certain time is displayed,
  The second number of times is a number of times greater than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by It is a game console according to claim 8 or 9,
  One round game is configured to end when the second time has elapsed,
  The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and then to display a display indicating the certain time which is subtracted from the initial value.
  The indication indicating the certain time is an indication indicating the time when the timer indication is 0,
  A display indicating a third time may be displayed as the initial value,
  The third time is shorter than the second time,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein
  The effect means is a display means.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
  The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by